JP6145801B2 - Amusement stand - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), a spinning cylinder game machine (slot machine), a sealed game machine, or a medalless slot machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming table provided with a production means has been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-200302 A

However, the conventional game stand has room for improvement in production means.
An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having a feature in the production means.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine provided with production means and production control means capable of controlling the production means, and the production means is means having a first structure. the presentation means is a means having a second structure, the presentation means is a means having a third structure, the presentation means is a means having a fourth structure, the first The fourth structure is a structure having light-emitting means, the fourth structure is a structure that can be moved in the vertical direction by driving the effect control means, and the first structure is It is a structure that can be rotated from the first position to the fourth position with the fourth structure as a fulcrum by driving the effect control means , and the first position is the first structure Is a position located forward of the second structure, and the fourth position is the position A position in which one of the structures is located behind the said second structure, said second structure, by the rotation of the first structure, the fifth position from the second position The second position is a position where the second structure is located behind the first structure, and the fifth position is the second structure. A body is located in front of the first structure, and the third structure is movable from a third position to a sixth position by rotation of the first structure. The third position is a position where the third structure is located behind the first structure, and the sixth position is the position where the third structure is The sixth position is a position that is positioned forward of the first structure, and the third structure is configured such that the third structure moves a part of the light emitting means from the front. A power sale location, the presentation means, gaming table, wherein the vertical direction, which is a movable means, that without changing the relative position of the second structure relative to the first structural member It is.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game machine having a feature in the production means.

It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 as viewed from the front. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the state which attached the back surface cover from the back surface (back surface). It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the state which removed the back surface cover from the back surface (back surface). (A) It is the schematic front view which extracted and showed the sub control board case 245 and the liquid crystal control board case 246. (B) It is side sectional drawing which follows the AA line in (a). The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. (A) An example of the stop symbol form of the special figure is shown. (B) An example of a decorative design is shown. (C) An example of a usual stop display symbol is shown. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU404 of the 1st sub control part 400 performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU504 of the 2nd sub control part 500 performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of a game board 200. FIG. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged view showing the vicinity of a general drawing start port (gate) 228 in the game board 200 in an enlarged manner. It is the outline rear view which looked at the rear unit 200a from the back side in the state where the accessory unit 950 was removed. It is the perspective view which looked at the rear unit 200a in the state which removed the accessory unit 950 from the back side. It is the elements on larger scale which expand and show the game ball storage part periphery. It is a disassembled perspective view of the accessory unit 950. It is a disassembled perspective view of the fall expansion | deployment combination object unit 700. FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view of the fall expansion | deployment combination object unit 700. FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view of the fall expansion | deployment combination object unit 700. FIG. (A) It is the disassembled perspective view which extracted and showed the peripheral member of the 1st structure 712b. (B) It is the disassembled perspective view which extracted and showed the peripheral member of the 4th structure 712a. It is the schematic front view which showed the light emission board | substrate 714 of the 1st structure 712b, and the light emission board | substrate 714 of the 4th structure 712a. It is a disassembled perspective view of the rising accessory unit 750. 5 is an exploded perspective view of a launching accessory unit 800. FIG. It is an expansion perspective view of the relay board | substrate 806 with which the launching accessory unit 800 is provided. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of a V forming accessory unit 850. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the right light-guide plate 854h of V formation actor right unit 854 from the back side. FIG. 6 is a front view of a center accessory unit 900. It is a rear view of the center accessory unit 900. It is the figure which extracted only the fall expansion | deployment combination unit 700, and showed the up-and-down operation | movement of the drop expansion combination 712. It is the figure which showed the up-and-down operation | movement of the fall expansion | deployment combination 712 in the fall expansion | deployment combination unit 700 of the state installed in the game board 200. FIG. It is the figure which extracted only the fall expansion | deployment combination object unit 700, and showed the rotation operation | movement of the fall expansion | deployment combination 712. It is the figure which showed the rotation operation of the drop deployment combination 712 in the drop deployment combination unit 700 of the state where it is installed in the game board 200. It is the figure which showed the rotation operation of the drop deployment combination 712 in the drop deployment combination unit 700 of the state where it is installed in the game board 200. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the operations of the rising accessory unit 750 and the launching accessory unit 800 by extracting only the ascending accessory unit 750 and the launching accessory unit 800. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the operations of the rising accessory unit 750 and the launching accessory unit 800 in a state where they are installed on the game board 200. (A) It is a sectional side view of the game board 200 in a state where the ascending accessory unit 750 is located at the initial position. (B) It is a sectional side view of the game board 200 in a state where the ascending accessory unit 750 is operating. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the operation of the V forming accessory unit 850 by extracting only the V forming accessory unit 850; It is the figure which showed the operation | movement of the V formation combination unit 850 in the state installed in the game board 200. FIG. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board from the front. The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. (A) An example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1 is shown. (B) An example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2 is shown. (C) An example of a stop symbol form of a decorative symbol is shown. (D) An example of a usual stop display symbol is shown. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a special figure prefetch process. The prefetch result information etc. are illustrated in the state where the prefetch result memory | storage part was memorize | stored. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure 1 related lottery process. (A) It is an example of the table used for the decision | availability determination of special figure 1 when a special figure probability is a special figure low probability state. (B) It is an example of the table used for the success / failure determination of the special figure 1 when the special figure probability is in the special figure high probability state. (C) It is an example of the table used for the success / failure determination of special figure 2 when the special figure probability is in a special figure low probability state. (D) It is an example of the table used for the decision | availability determination of special figure 2 when a special figure probability is a special figure low probability state. (A) Special figure 1 It is an example of a special figure determination table in the variable game. (B) Special figure 2 It is an example of a special figure determination table in the variable game. It is an example of the special figure 1 fluctuation | variation display time determination table used in order to determine the fluctuation | variation time of special figure 1. FIG. It is an example of the special figure 2 fluctuation display time determination table used in order to determine the fluctuation time of special figure 2. FIG. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU of a 1st sub control part performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of a 1st sub control part. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of a 1st sub control part. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU of a 2nd sub control part performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of a 2nd sub control part. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of a 2nd sub control part. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of an operation means image display process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a notice lottery process. It is an example of a notice lottery table. (A)-(d) It is an example of a notice table. (A)-(b) It is an example of a notice table. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 1 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 2 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 3 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 4 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 5 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 6 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 7 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 8 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 9 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 10 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 11 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 12 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of the modification of Example 12 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 13 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 13 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of the modification of Example 13 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 14 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 15 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 16 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 17 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 18 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 19 in time series. It is the figure which showed the modification of the operation means image, the elapsed time alert image, and the remaining time alert image. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention from the back side. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board according to an embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the symbol aspect which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention, Comprising: (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of a special figure, (b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of a decoration symbol, (c) Shows an example of a stop symbol form of a normal symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of the main control part which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of the main control part which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process of the 1st sub control part which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention, Comprising: (a) is a flowchart of a main process, (b) is a flowchart of a command reception interruption process, (c) is a timer interruption The flowchart of a process and (d) are the flowcharts of an image control process. It is a flowchart which shows the process of the 2nd sub control part which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention, Comprising: (a) is a flowchart of a main process, (b) is a flowchart of a command reception interruption process, (c) is a timer interruption It is a flowchart of a process. It is a change time determination table used by the special figure related lottery process of the main control part concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the notice lottery process of the 1st sub control part which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is an alerting | reporting mode determination table used by the notice lottery process which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a time chart which shows the button reception period of Example 1 of the notification mode of the remaining time of this invention, the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period, and the time change of a notice. FIG. 97 is a schematic diagram showing effect images displayed on the decorative symbol display device at each point in FIG. 96. It is a time chart which shows the button reception period of Example 2 of the notification aspect of the remaining time of this invention, the notification aspect of the remaining time of the button reception period, and the time change of a notice. FIG. 99 is a schematic diagram showing effect images displayed on the decorative symbol display device at each point in FIG. 98. It is a time chart which shows the time change of the button reception period of Example 3 of the notification aspect of the remaining time of this invention, and the notification aspect of the remaining time of the button reception period. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of effect image displayed on a decoration symbol display apparatus at each time of FIG. It is a time chart which shows the time change of the button reception period of Example 4 of the notification aspect of the remaining time of this invention, and the notification aspect of the remaining time of the button reception period. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of effect image displayed on a decoration symbol display apparatus at each time of FIG. It is a time chart which shows the time change of the button reception period of Example 5 of the notification aspect of the remaining time of this invention, and the notification aspect of the remaining time of the button reception period. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of effect image displayed on a decoration symbol display apparatus at each time of FIG. It is a time chart which shows the time change of the button reception period of Example 6 of the notification aspect of the remaining time of this invention, and the notification aspect of the remaining time of the button reception period. FIG. 107 is a schematic diagram showing effect images displayed on the decorative symbol display device at each point in FIG. 106. It is a time chart which shows the time change of the button reception period of Example 7 of the notification aspect of the remaining time of this invention, and the notification aspect of the remaining time of the button reception period. FIG. 109 is a schematic diagram showing effect images displayed on the decorative symbol display device at each point in FIG. 108. It is a table which determines the content of the production | presentation which concerns on the notification aspect of the remaining time of a button reception period, and the notification performed before and behind a button reception period used in Example 7 of the notification aspect of the remaining time of this invention. It is a time chart which shows the time change of the button reception period of Example 8 of the notification aspect of the remaining time of this invention, and the notification aspect of the remaining time of the button reception period. FIG. 112 is a schematic diagram showing an effect image displayed on the decorative symbol display device when the chance button is not operated at each time point in FIG. 111. It is a schematic diagram which shows the effect image after the time of (j) of FIG. 111 displayed on a decoration symbol display apparatus, when a chance button is operated at the time of (j) and (k) of FIG. It is a table which determines the alerting | reporting aspect of the remaining time of each button reception period used in Example 8 of the alerting | reporting aspect of the remaining time of this invention. It is a figure which concerns on Example 9 of the alerting | reporting aspect of the remaining time of this invention, Comprising: It is a schematic diagram which shows the detail of the alerting | reporting aspect of the remaining time of the button reception period displayed on a decoration symbol display apparatus at each time. FIG. 10 is a schematic front view showing an example in which the gaming machine of the present invention is a slot machine. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 from the front side (player side). The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. (A) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect (second symbol aspect) of the special figure, and (b) is a table summarizing the characteristics of the special figure shown in (a). (A) shows an example of the stop symbol mode (first symbol mode) of the usual figure, and (b) shows an example of the usual figure decoration symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. (A) is a figure which shows the table | surface which put together the operation | movement aspect of the common figure electric accessory 252, (b) is a figure which shows the low probability table for a common figure decision | availability determination, (c) is a figure for a common figure decision decision. It is a figure which shows a high probability table. (A) is a figure which shows the low probability per unit table for usual figure change period determination, (b) is a figure which shows the low probability lose table for usual figure change period determination, (c) is for figure change period decision. It is a figure which shows the losing table per high probability, (d) is a figure which shows the high probability losing table for usual figure change period determination. (A) is a figure which shows the low probability table for special figure success / failure determination, (b) is a figure which shows the high probability table for special figure success / failure determination, (c) is a figure which shows the special figure determination table for big hits It is. (A) is a figure which shows the jackpot table for determining the special figure fluctuation period at the time of normal figure high probability, (b) is a figure which shows the jackpot table for determining the special figure fluctuation period at the time of low figure probability, (c) It is a figure which shows the special figure fluctuation | variation period determination loss table at the time of a usual high probability, (d) is a figure which shows the special figure fluctuation | variation period determination loss table at the time of a usual low probability. (A) is a flowchart of the main process which CPU404 of the 1st sub control part 400 performs, (b) is a flowchart which shows the flow of the presentation control process shown to the same figure (a), (c). 4 is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400, and (d) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400. It is a flowchart which shows a part of flow of the game in the pachinko machine 100. It is a figure which shows the screen of the decoration symbol display apparatus in the flow of the game shown in FIG. 130 in steps. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the game flow shown in FIG. 130. FIG. It is a figure which shows the screen of the decoration symbol display apparatus in case a first hit is a big hit without a probability change in steps. It is a figure which shows the modification of the addition chance shown in FIG.133 (c). It is a time chart of regular symbol variation production and award ball appearance. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a usual symbol change production and a prize ball payment appearance. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a common figure reservation increase production | presentation and a prize ball paying appearance in the state in which the regular symbol fluctuation production | generation is performed. It is a time chart in which the usual symbol variation effect changes to a prize ball appearance. It is a figure which shows the specific example which changes from a usual symbol change effect to a prize ball payment appearance. It is a figure which shows the specific example in which a general figure holding | maintenance increase production changes in the state in which the general symbol change production is performed. It is a figure which shows the example which returns to a usual figure hold increase production after a production change from a usual figure hold increase production to a prize ball payment appearance. It is a figure which shows the example in which a prize ball payout appearance is started a little behind from the timing when the game ball passed the central general winning opening 226. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of 2nd Embodiment from the front. (A) shows an example of a special symbol stop symbol (second symbol), (b) shows an example of a special symbol decorative symbol, and (c) shows an ordinary symbol. An example of the stop symbol pattern (first symbol pattern) is shown, and (d) shows an example of the usual decorative pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interruption process in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart which shows the flow of the special figure prefetching process which CPU304 of the main-control part 300 performs, (b) is a figure which shows the table for special figure appropriateness prior determination, (c) is a special figure. It is a figure which shows the table for figure prior determination. (A) is a figure which shows the table set selection table memorize | stored in ROM306 of the main control part 300, (b) is a figure which shows the timer number determination table memorize | stored in ROM306 of the main control part 300. (C) is a diagram showing the relationship between the timer number and the symbol variation display time. (A) is a figure which shows the table for normality determination determination memorize | stored in ROM306 of the main control part 300, (b) is a figure which shows the table for common figure determination memorize | stored in ROM306 of the main control part 300 It is. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a normal symbol change effect, a special symbol change effect, and a prefetch notice effect. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a general symbol change effect and a prefetch notice effect. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a general symbol fluctuation production and a special figure reservation increase production. It is a figure which shows the specific example in which a normal symbol change effect itself changes. It is the simplified front view which looked at the game board 200 of 3rd Embodiment from the front. (A) shows an example of a stop symbol mode (second symbol mode) of a special symbol that is stopped and displayed after the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214. (B) is a diagram showing an example of a decorative figure of a special figure, and (c) is a figure of a common figure that is stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display of the symbol in the common figure display device 210. It is the figure which showed an example of the stop symbol aspect (1st symbol aspect), (d) is the figure which showed the stop symbol aspect of the usual decoration pattern. (A) is a figure which shows the low probability table for a normal figure determination, (b) is a figure which shows the high probability table for a normal figure determination, (c) shows the low probability table for a common figure determination. It is a figure and (d) is a figure which shows the high probability table for common figure determination. (A) is a figure for demonstrating the opening / closing pattern of the electric chew in the pachinko machine of 3rd Embodiment, (b) is the usual drawing effect in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating a few examples. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a usual drawing effect determination process. (A) is a figure which shows the high probability table for the success / failure determination of the special figure, (b) is a figure which shows the low probability table for the success / failure judgment of the special figure, and (c) is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. It is a figure which shows the table for the small hits determination memorize | stored, (d) is a figure which shows the special figure determination table memorize | stored in ROM306 of the main-control part 300. FIG. It is a figure showing the 1/5 part of the specific example of the effect in this embodiment. It is a figure showing 2/5 part of the specific example of the effect in this embodiment. It is a figure showing the 3/5 part of the specific example of the effect in this embodiment. It is a figure showing the 4/5 part of the specific example of the effect in this embodiment. It is a figure showing 5/5 part of the specific example of the effect in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which mixed the prefetch effect in this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the production | presentation in which the jackpot notice was mixed in the common drawing production | presentation in this embodiment in steps. FIG. 157 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an example in which the usual display effect of the variable display pattern shown in (f) of FIG. 156 (b) is performed. It is a figure showing an example of other productions. (A) is a figure which shows the success / failure determination table of the special figure 1 in 4th Embodiment, The same figure (b) is a figure which shows the success / failure determination table of the special figure 2. FIG. (A) is a figure which shows the special figure 1 non-presence judgment table used when pre-determining by pre-reading the starting information of special figure 1, (b) is a figure which shows the starting information of special figure 2 It is a figure which shows the special figure 2 non-presence judgment table used when pre-reading and making a prior judgment, (c) is a figure which shows the special figure prior judgment table. (A) is a figure which shows the table for determining whether or not a common figure is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, (b) is a figure showing a table for determining a common figure, and (c) is a figure showing a universal figure determination table. It is a figure which shows a figure timer table. (A) is a figure which shows the table for a common figure pre-judgment prior judgment used when pre-determining by pre-reading the starting information of a common figure, (b) is a figure which shows the table for a common figure advance judgment It is. (A) is a flowchart which shows the flow of the general-purpose effect determination process in 4th Embodiment, (b) is a flowchart which shows the flow of the predetermined area | region notice effect determination process in 4th Embodiment. It is a time chart showing a flow of an example of production in a 4th embodiment. FIG. 174 is a diagram showing a state of a decorative symbol display device and the like for each important point in the time chart shown in FIG. 173; 174 is a time chart illustrating a continued flow of the example illustrated in FIG. 173. 175 is a diagram showing a state of a decorative symbol display device or the like for each important point in the time chart shown in FIG. 175. FIG. It is a time chart which shows the modification of a 2nd general drawing effect. It is a time chart which shows the example when a predetermined condition turns into a non-established state from an established state. It is a figure which shows an example of a common figure prefetch notice. It is a figure which shows the example which performs the jackpot notice effect of a special figure in the common figure effect area | region 283 of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example which performs the advance notice effect to the specific effect of a special figure in the general drawing effect area | region 283 of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example in which the common figure production | presentation area | region 283 of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 functions as a display area | region of a reserved digest production | presentation. 1 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable. It is a figure which shows the symbol aspect which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention, Comprising: (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2, ( c) shows an example of a stop symbol form of a decorative symbol, and (d) shows an example of a stop symbol form of a normal symbol. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 20 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 21 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 22 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 23 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 24 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 24 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 24 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 24 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 24 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 25 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 26 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 27 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 28 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 29 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 30 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 31 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 31 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 32 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 33 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 34 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 35 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 36 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 37 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 37 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 38 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 39 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 40 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 41 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of 5th Embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of 5th Embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of 5th Embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of 5th Embodiment in time series. It is a schematic diagram explaining the example of a display of the 2nd display of 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram explaining the example of a display of the 2nd display of 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram explaining the 1st state of 5th Embodiment, and a 2nd state. It is a figure which shows the modification of the meter display of 5th Embodiment. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front. The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. (A) An example of the stop symbol form of the special figure is shown. (B) An example of a decorative design is shown. (C) An example of a usual stop display symbol is shown. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU404 of the 1st sub control part 400 performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU504 of the 2nd sub control part 500 performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a movable body control process. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a movable body interruption process. (A) is a sectional side view of the whole chance button 700 in the initial position. (B) It is side sectional drawing of the whole chance button 700 in an operation completion position. (C) It is side sectional drawing of the whole chance button 700 when a player depresses the chance button 700 in the operation completion position. (D)-(f) It is the figure which extracted and showed only the lower case 704b and the rotation member 708b in each state of (a)-(c). (A) It is an external appearance perspective view around the door 108 with a ball storage tray in case the chance button 700 exists in an initial position. (B) It is an external appearance perspective view of the periphery of the door 108 with a ball storage tray in the state (in operation) where the chance button 700 has moved from the initial position to the operation completion position. (C) It is an external appearance perspective view around the door 108 with a ball storage tray in case the chance button 700 exists in an operation completion position. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of a correspondence relationship between an operation state of a chance button 700, whether a detection result of a pressing operation of the chance button 700 is accepted, and whether an operation reception effect is executable. (A) It is an external appearance perspective view around the door 108 with a ball storage tray in case the chance button 700 exists in an initial position. (B) It is an external appearance perspective view around the door 108 with a ball storage tray in case the chance button 700 exists in an operation completion position. (C) It is an external appearance perspective view around the door 108 with a ball storage tray when the chance button 700 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position (for example, when it fails). (D) It is the figure which showed an example of the operation reception effect performed when the chance button 700 exists in an initial position. (E) It is the figure which showed an example of the operation reception effect performed when the chance button 700 exists in an operation completion position. (F) It is the figure which showed an example of the operation reception effect performed when the chance button 700 stops between an initial position and an operation completion position (for example, when it fails). (A) It is an external appearance perspective view which shows the periphery of the chance button 750 before operation | movement. (B) It is an external appearance perspective view which shows the periphery of the chance button 750 after completion | finish of operation | movement. FIG. 10 is a front view of a chance button 750 as viewed from the direction of a second operation unit 758. (A) It is a sectional side view of the chance button 750 when the chance button 750 is in the initial position. (B) It is side sectional drawing of the chance button 750 in case the chance button 750 exists in an operation completion position. (C) It is a sectional side view of the chance button 750 when the chance button 700 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position (for example, when it breaks down). (D) It is the figure which showed an example of the operation reception effect performed when the chance button 750 exists in an initial position. (E) It is the figure which showed an example of the operation reception effect performed when the chance button 750 exists in an operation completion position. (F) It is the figure which showed an example of the operation reception effect performed when the chance button 750 stops between an initial position and an operation completion position (for example, when it fails). FIG. 3 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. 3 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 opened. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU404 of the 1st sub control part 400 performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU504 of the 2nd sub control part 500 performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. (A) It is an external appearance perspective view around the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is in the initial position. (B) It is an external perspective view of the periphery of the bet button 132 in a state where the bet button 132 is moved from the initial position to the operation completion position (in operation). (C) It is an external appearance perspective view around the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is in the operation completion position. (A) It is a figure for demonstrating the state which can use the bet button 132 as a medal insertion button. (B) It is a figure for demonstrating the state which cannot use the bet button 132 as a medal insertion button. (C) It is an external perspective view of the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is in the initial position. (D) It is the figure which showed an example of the operation reception effect performed when the bet button 132 exists in an initial position. (A) It is an external perspective view of the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 has moved from the initial position to the operation completion position (during operation). FIG. 6B is an external perspective view of the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is in the operation completion position. (C) It is an external perspective view of the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position (for example, when it fails). (D) It is the figure which showed an example of the normal production. (E) It is the figure which showed an example of the operation reception effect performed when the bet button 132 exists in an operation completion position. (G) It is the figure which showed an example of the operation reception effect performed when the bet button 132 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position (for example, when it fails). It is the figure which showed an example of various productions. (A) When a special figure probability is a special figure high probability state, it is an example of the high probability table for the success / failure determination used for the success / failure determination of special figure 1 (or special figure 2). (B) It is an example of the low probability table for the success / failure determination used for the success / failure determination of Special Figure 1 (or Special Figure 2) when the special figure probability is in the special figure low probability state. (C) It is an example of the special figure determination table for determining the stop symbol of special figure 1 (or special figure 2). (A) It is an example of the special figure 1 fluctuation display time determination table used in order to determine the fluctuation time of special figure 1. FIG. (B) It is an example of the special figure 2 fluctuation display time determination table used in order to determine the fluctuation time of special figure 2. FIG. (A) It is an example of the hold change notice lottery table used for determining the mode of hold change. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the aspect of a pending | holding change. (A) It is an example of the reach A time effect character lottery table used in order to determine the character image used for an effect. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the character image. (C) It is an example of the state lottery table used in order to determine a state. (A) An example of a usual stop display symbol is shown. (B) An example of a decorative pattern for ordinary symbols is shown. (C) It is the figure which showed the relationship between the kind of common figure, the kind of common figure decoration symbol, and an electric chew release pattern. (D) It is the figure which showed the pattern of the fluctuation | variation display of the decoration design for normal designs. (A) It is an example of the general drawing production system 1 execution availability lottery table used in order to determine whether or not the advance notice production system 1 is notified. (B) It is an example of the general drawing production system 1 lottery table used in order to determine the production pattern of the general drawing production system 1. FIG. (C) It is an example of the general drawing production system 2 execution availability lottery table used in order to determine whether or not to perform the advance notice of the general drawing production system 2. (D) It is an example of the general drawing production system 2 lottery table used in order to determine the production pattern of the general drawing production system 2. It is the flowchart which showed an example of the flow of a special figure prefetch process. It is the flowchart which showed an example of the flow of a special figure prefetch process. It is the flowchart which showed an example of the flow of the sub side prefetch notice execution process at the time of start winning. It is the flowchart which showed an example of the flow of execution processing, such as a sub side notice at the time of a change start. It is the flowchart which showed an example of the flow of the production | presentation lottery process 1 in execution processing, such as a sub side notice at the time of a change start. (A) It is the flowchart which showed an example of the flow of the production | presentation lottery process 2 in execution processing, such as a sub side notice at the time of a change start. (B) It is the flowchart which showed an example of the flow of the sub side notice execution process at the time of a common figure change start. It is the figure which showed an example of the effect when reach A loss is selected as a fluctuation pattern of a special figure in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the effect when reach A loss is selected as a fluctuation pattern of a special figure in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the production when per reach A is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the production when per reach A is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the production | presentation when the drive mechanism of the chance button 700 fails during the effective period of pressing operation of the chance button 700. FIG. It is the figure which showed an example of the production when per reach B was selected as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the production when per reach B was selected as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the production | presentation when the drive mechanism of the chance button 700 fails during the effective period of pressing operation of the chance button 700. FIG. It is the figure which showed the modification of the operation reception effect (per reach B) in time series. It is the figure which showed the modification of the operation reception effect (per reach B) in time series. (A) It is an example of the step-up notice lottery table used in order to determine a notice effect aspect. (B) It is an example of the state lottery table used in order to determine a state. (C) It is an example of the reach B big hit state lottery table used to determine the state at the time of reach B big hit. (D) It is an example of the effect lottery table used in order to determine the effect mode. (A) It is a disassembled perspective view of the chance button unit 750. FIG. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the 1st-3rd state. (B) It is the flowchart which showed an example of the flow of a notice lottery process (reach B sub). (A) It is the flowchart which showed an example of the flow of a notice lottery process (step-up). (B) It is the flowchart which showed an example of the flow of a notice lottery process (reach B sub). It is the figure which showed an example of the effect when normal reach lose is selected as the fluctuation pattern of special figure 1 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the effect when per reach B is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the effect when per reach B is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the production | presentation in time series when the per revival after a loss (2nd production) is selected by production lottery. It is the figure which showed the modification 1 of the operation reception effect and the step-up notice effect. It is the figure which showed the modification 2 of the operation reception effect and the step-up notice effect. It is an example of a lottery table such as the number of consecutive hits used to determine the state of the chance button 700 and the number of consecutive hits. It is the figure which showed in a time series an example of the production | presentation when reach C loss is selected as a fluctuation pattern of a special figure. It is the figure which showed an example of the production when per reach C is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the production when per reach C is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure in time series. It is the figure which showed the modification 1 of the operation reception effect (per reach C). It is the figure which showed the modification 2 of the operation reception effect (per reach C). It is the figure which showed the modification 3 of the operation reception effect (per reach C). It is the figure which showed the modification 4 of the operation reception effect (per reach C). It is a figure for demonstrating the display mode of the display which concerns on other embodiment (effective time is paused). It is a figure for demonstrating the display mode of the display which concerns on other embodiment (effective time is paused). (A) An example of button effects when the chance button 136 is not operated during the effective time of the chance button 136 is shown in time series. (B) An example of button effects on a gaming machine that can accept the operation of the chance button 136 only once during the effective time of the chance button 136 is shown in time series. (C) A button effect example 1 when the sub-control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 is shown in time series. (A) The button effect example 2 in the case where the sub-control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 is shown in time series. (B) A button effect example 3 when the sub-control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 is shown in time series. (C) The button effect example 4 in the case where the sub-control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 is shown in time series. (A) The button effect example 5 in the case where the sub-control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 is shown in time series. (B) Example 6 of button effects when the sub-control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 is shown in time series. (A) The example 7 of button productions when a sub control part manages the effective time of the chance button 136 is shown in time series. (B) A button effect example 8 when the sub-control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 is shown in time series. (A) A button effect example 1 when the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 is shown in time series. (B) A button effect example 2 when the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 is shown in time series. (C) A button effect example 3 when the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 is shown in time series. (A) Button effect example 4 in the case where the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 is shown in time series. (B) A button effect example 5 when the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 is shown in time series. (C) The button effect example 6 in the case where the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 is shown in time series. (A) A button effect example 7 in the case where the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 is shown in time series. (B) A button effect example 8 when the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 is shown in time series. (A-1)-(a-6) It is the figure which showed the specific example 1 of the button production in time series. (B-1)-(b-6) It is the figure which showed the specific example 2 of the button production in time series. (C-1)-(c-6) It is the figure which showed the specific example 3 of the button production in time series. (A-1)-(a-6) It is the figure which showed the specific example 4 of the button production in time series. (B)-(e) It is a figure for demonstrating the other example of a button production. (A-1)-(a-6) It is the figure which showed the specific example 5 of the button production in time series. It is the figure which showed the other specific example of button production. It is the figure which showed the specific example 6 of the button production in time series. It is a figure for demonstrating the basic concept of the game machine which concerns on other embodiment (a normal button and a deca button). It is a figure for demonstrating the specific example of a normal button and a decabutton. It is a figure for demonstrating the other example of a normal button and a big button. It is a figure for demonstrating the other example of a normal button and a big button. It is a figure for demonstrating the other example of a normal button and a big button. It is the figure which showed the specific example 1 of the button production which hides various displays in time series. It is the figure which showed the specific example 2 of the button production which hides various displays in time series. It is the figure which showed the specific example 3 of the button production which hides various displays in time series. (A-1) It is the time chart which showed an example of the flow of the production | presentation when there exists operation of an operation means in the state in which an auto button function is non-operation (invalid). (A-2) It is the time chart which showed an example of the flow of the production | presentation when the auto button function is act | operating (when it is effective). (B-1) In the example shown to (a-1), it is the time chart which showed an example of the flow of the effect when there exists operation of an operation means in the middle of animation. (B-2) In the example shown to (a-2), it is the time chart which showed an example of the flow of the effect when the predetermined condition in an auto button function is satisfied in the middle of animation. (A-1)-(a-6) It is the figure which showed an example of the button production in the state which the auto button function has not act | operated in time series. (B-1)-(b-6) It is the figure which showed the specific example 1 of the button effect in the state in which the auto button function is act | operating in time series. (A-1)-(a-6) It is the figure which showed the specific example 2 of the button production in the state in which the auto button function is act | operating in time series. (B-1)-(ab6) It is the figure which showed the specific example 3 of the button effect in the state in which the auto button function is act | operating in time series. (A-1)-(a-7) It is the figure which showed the example 4 of the button production in the state in which the auto button function is act | operating in time series. (B-1)-(b-7) It is the figure which showed the specific example 5 of the button effect in the state in which the auto button function is act | operating in time series. It is a figure for demonstrating the other example of an auto button function. It is a figure for demonstrating a character selection function. It is a figure for demonstrating a character selection function. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the back side. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of the display symbol in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, Comprising: (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 2 (C) shows an example of a decorative design, and (d) shows an example of a normal stop display design. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part main process of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interruption process of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. (A) is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of the special figure prefetch process in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. (B)-(d) is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch result memory | storage part for special figures 1 and the special figure 2 with which the main control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention was equipped. It is a figure which shows the determination table for common use in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, and the example of symbol distribution and the operation at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the example of the determination table for the special figure in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the symbol distribution table for the special figure 1 in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, and operation | movement at the time of big hit. It is a figure which shows the example of the symbol distribution table for the special figure 2 in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, and operation | movement at the time of big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of the 1st sub control part main process, (b) is the 1st. 1 shows a flow of 1 sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing, (c) shows a flow of first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, and (d) shows a flow of image control processing. It is a figure explaining the electric long opening effect performed by the effect control process of the main process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. (A) shows the flow of the electric long opening effect, and (b) shows an example of the electric long opening effect on the decorative symbol display device 208. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of the 2nd sub control part main process, (b) is the 2nd. 2 shows the flow of the second sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, and (c) shows the flow of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process. It is a figure which shows the flow of the button effect control process performed by the effect control process of the main process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. (A) shows the flow of the button effect control process, and (b) shows the flow of the auto button mode setting process executed in the button effect control process. It is a figure which shows the flow of the chance button control process of the main process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. The various setting of the auto button mode of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention is shown. 2 shows a setting method of mode 1 of an auto button mode of a pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention. The setting method of the mode 4 of the auto button mode of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention is shown. It is a figure which shows the example of the production in Example 1 of one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the production in Example 2 of one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the production in Example 3 of one embodiment of this invention. The chance button 700 with which the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4 of one embodiment of this invention is provided is shown. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect in Example 5 of one embodiment of this invention. The timing button which shows the state of the chance button sensor 426 in Example 5 of one embodiment of this invention, the automatic button process determination result, and a button reception flag is shown. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect in Example 6 of one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect in Example 7 of one embodiment of this invention. It is the schematic front view which looked at the slot machine as a game stand by the modification of one embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a figure which shows the game machine by the modification of one embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the casino machine 2000, (b) is a portable provided with the memory | storage part which memorize | stores the electronic data which implement | achieves this invention. A telephone 3000 is shown, (c) shows a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and (d) has a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. A home video game machine 5000 is shown, and (e) shows a data server 6000 storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of other embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example A-1 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example A-2 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example A-3 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example A-4 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example A-5 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of other embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example B-1 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example B-2 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example B-3 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of other embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example C-1 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example C-2 in time series. It is a figure explaining the game production | presentation with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production | presentation with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production | presentation with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a game production | presentation with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure explaining the display of a button operation animation. It is a game production | presentation with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure explaining the display of a button operation animation. It is a game production | presentation with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure explaining the display of a button operation animation. It is a figure explaining the example of an animation at the time of the appearance of a button image among the button images used by the special figure variable game by the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the animation example of the button image used by the special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a game presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure explaining the display of a button operation animation. It is a game presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure explaining the display of a button operation animation. It is a game presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure explaining the display of a button operation animation. It is a game presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure explaining the display of a button operation animation. It is a game production | presentation with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure explaining the display of a button operation animation. It is a game production | presentation with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure explaining the display of a button operation animation. It is a game presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 7 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure explaining the display of a button operation animation. It is a game presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 8 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure explaining the display of a button operation animation. It is a game presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 8 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure explaining the display of a button operation animation. It is a game presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 8 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure explaining the display of a button operation animation. It is a game presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 9 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure explaining the display of a button operation animation. It is a game presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 9 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure explaining the display of a button operation animation. It is a figure which shows the timing chart about the display regarding the chance button operation reception in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 9 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention, chance button sensor detection, and operation reception period. It is an external appearance perspective view in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a game presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure explaining the display of a touch operation animation. It is a game presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure explaining the display of a touch operation animation. It is a game presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure explaining the display of a touch operation animation. It is a game presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure explaining the display of a touch operation animation. It is a game presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure explaining the display of a touch operation animation. It is a game presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure explaining the display of a touch operation animation. It is a game presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure explaining the display of a touch operation animation. It is a figure which shows the chance button 136 in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 11 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a game presentation in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 11 of the sixth embodiment of the present invention and is a diagram for explaining the display of the button operation animation. It is a figure which compares the rotational speed of the operation means in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 11 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention, and a rotation means. It is a figure which compares the rotational speed of the operation means in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 11 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention, and a rotation means. It is a figure which compares the rotational speed of the operation means in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 11 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention, and a rotation means. It is the screen transition diagram of the original mode and user mode in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the demonstration effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the user menu in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the actual machine customization in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of the 6th embodiment of the present invention, and is a figure explaining the effect of a button image, and the sound effect. It is a game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of the 6th embodiment of the present invention, and is a figure explaining the effect of a button image, and the sound effect. It is a game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of the 6th embodiment of the present invention, and is a figure explaining the effect of a button image, and the sound effect. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of chance button operation reception in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention, and button operation sound output. It is a game presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of the 6th embodiment of the present invention, and is a figure explaining display of a button operation animation. It is a game presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of the 6th embodiment of the present invention, and is a figure explaining display of a button operation animation. It is a game presentation in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 13 of the sixth embodiment of the present invention and is a diagram for explaining display of button operation animation. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is an example of the display symbol in the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th embodiment of the present invention, (a) shows an example of a stop display symbol of a special figure, (b) shows an example of a decoration symbol, (c) is a figure which shows an example of the usual stop display symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main process of the main control part of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interruption process of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of the 1st sub control part main process, (b) is. The flow of the 1st sub control part command reception interruption processing is shown, (c) shows the flow of the 1st sub control part timer interruption processing, and (d) shows the flow of the 1st sub control part image processing. . It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of the 2nd sub control part main process, (b) The flow of the second sub control unit command reception interrupt process is shown, and (c) shows the flow of the second sub control unit timer interrupt process. It is a figure which shows the determination table for the success / failure memorize | stored in ROM306 of the main control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention, (a) is an example of the table for the validity determination used at the time of high probability. (B) shows an example of the success / failure determination table used at the low probability. It is a figure which shows the special figure determination table memorize | stored in ROM306 of the main control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows an example of the special figure 1 determination table, (B) shows an example of the special figure 2 determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure 1 fluctuation | variation display time determination table memorize | stored in ROM306 of the main-control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure 2 fluctuation | variation display time determination table memorize | stored in ROM306 of the main-control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pending | holding change lottery table memorize | stored in ROM406 of the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the hold display of the special figure variable game of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the hold display mode without a change, (b) is the hold A The hold display mode is shown, and (c) shows the hold display mode of the hold B. It is a figure which shows an example of the board surface pre-read lottery table memorize | stored in ROM406 of the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the notice lottery table 1 memorize | stored in ROM406 of the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the notice lottery table 2 memorize | stored in ROM406 of the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the notice lottery table 3 memorize | stored in ROM406 of the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the character image of the alerting | reporting notification of the success / failure determination result before the reach of the special figure variable game currently performed in the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention, (a) is "Character A". A character image of “Panda” as “Character B”, a character image of “Sabohani” as “Character B”, and a character image of “Princess” as “Character C”. Is shown. It is a figure which shows an example of the notice lottery table 4 memorize | stored in ROM406 of the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the image of the chance button of the alerting | reporting alert | report displayed on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 in the special figure variable game in execution in the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the button aspect of the chance button 136 in the special figure variable game in execution in the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the notice lottery table 5 memorize | stored in ROM406 of the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the character image of the alerting | reporting notification of the success / failure determination result after the reach of the special figure variable game currently performed in the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention, (a) is "Character D". A character image of “爺” as “Character E”, a character image of “Boxer” as “Character E”, and a character image of “Bancho” as “Character F”. Is shown. It is an example of the flowchart (the 1) which shows the flow of the special figure prefetch process in the main control part main process of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is an example of the flowchart (the 2) which shows the flow of the special figure prefetch process in the main-control part main process of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the flow of the 1st sub control part prefetch notice execution process at the time of starting information acquisition in the 1st sub control part of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the flow of the 1st sub control part prefetch notice execution process at the time of the start of the special figure variable game in the 1st sub control part of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the flow of the normal notice lottery process in the 1st sub control part at the time of the special figure variable game in the 1st sub control part of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of the 7th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of the 7th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of the 7th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of the 7th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of the 7th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3 of the 7th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4 of the 7th embodiment of the present invention. It is FIG. (1) explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by the modification of the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (2) explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by the modification of the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (3) explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by the modification of the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (4) explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by the modification of the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (5) explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by the modification of the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (6) explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by the modification of the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is the schematic front view which looked at the slot machine as a game stand by the modification of the 7th Embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a figure which shows the game machine by the modification of the 7th Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the casino machine 2000, (b) is provided with the memory | storage part which memorize | stores the electronic data which implement | achieves this invention. (C) shows a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and (d) shows a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. And (e) shows a data server 6000 storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of the 8th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of the 8th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of the 8th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of the 8th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 7 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 8 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 9 of the 8th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 9 of the 8th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 11 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 13 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 13 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 13 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 13 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the specific example of the button image by Example 14 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the specific example of the gauge image (effective period image) by Example 15 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 16 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 16 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 16 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 17 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is an example of the display symbol in the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th embodiment of the present invention, (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 1, (b) shows the stop display symbol of special figure 2 (C) is an example of a decorative symbol, and (d) is a diagram illustrating an example of a normal stop display symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part main process of the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interruption process of the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention. (A) is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of the special figure prefetch process in the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention. (B)-(d) is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch result memory | storage part for special figures 1 and the special figure 2 with which the main control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention was equipped. is there. It is a figure which shows the determination table for common use in the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention, and the example of symbol distribution and the operation at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the example of the determination table for special drawings in the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the symbol distribution table for the special figure 1 in the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention, and operation | movement at the time of big hit. It is a figure which shows the example of the symbol distribution table for the special figure 2 in the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention, and the operation | movement at the time of big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of the 1st sub control part main process, (b) Shows the flow of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, (c) shows the flow of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) shows the flow of the image control process. It is a figure explaining the electric long opening effect performed by the effect control process of the main process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention. (A) shows the flow of the electric long opening effect, and (b) shows an example of the electric long opening effect on the decorative symbol display device 208. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of the 2nd sub control part main process, (b) Shows the flow of the second sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, and (c) shows the flow of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process. It is a figure which shows the flow of the button effect control process performed by the effect control process of the main process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention. (A) shows the flow of the button effect control process, and (b) shows the flow of the auto button mode setting process executed in the button effect control process. It is a figure which shows the flow of the chance button control process of the main process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention. The various setting of the auto button mode of the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention is shown. The setting method of the mode 1 of the auto button mode of the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention is shown. The setting method of the mode 4 of the auto button mode of the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention is shown. It is a figure which shows the example of the production in Example 1 of the 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the production in Example 2 of the 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the production in Example 3 of the 9th Embodiment of this invention. The chance button 700 with which the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4 of the 9th Embodiment of this invention is provided is shown. It is a figure which shows the example of the production in Example 5 of the 9th Embodiment of this invention. The timing button sensor 426 in Example 5 of the 9th Embodiment of this invention, the auto button process determination result, and the timing chart which shows the state of a button reception flag are shown. It is a figure which shows the example of the production in Example 6 of the 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the production in Example 7 of the 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is the schematic front view which looked at the slot machine as a game stand by the modification of the 9th Embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a figure which shows the game machine by the modification of the 9th Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the casino machine 2000, (b) is provided with the memory | storage part which memorize | stores the electronic data which implement | achieves this invention. (C) shows a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and (d) shows a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. And (e) shows a data server 6000 storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of the decorative design display device 208, the decorative portion 810, the light guide plate 812, and the decorative portion 814 provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention. It is the schematic diagram which looked at the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 with which the pachinko machine 100 by the Example of the 10th Embodiment of this invention is equipped, the decoration part 810, the light-guide plate 812, and the decoration part 814 from the player side. It is a figure which shows the concrete effect in the pachinko machine 100 by the Example of the 10th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the concrete effect in the pachinko machine 100 by the Example of the 10th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the example in which the visibility of the display in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 changes in the pachinko machine 100 by the 11th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the example in which the visibility of the display in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 changes in the pachinko machine 100 by the 11th Embodiment of this invention. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the same pachinko machine from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board from the front. The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. (A) An example of the stop symbol form of the special figure is shown. (B) An example of a stop symbol form of a decorative symbol is shown. (C) An example of a usual stop display symbol is shown. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main process of a main control part. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the success / failure prefetch table. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the special figure success / failure prefetch result table. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the determination table for success / failure. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the special figure determination table. (C) It is the figure which showed an example of the table set selection table. It is the figure which showed an example of the special figure timer number selection table. It is the figure which showed an example of the change time table. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU of a 1st sub control part performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of a 1st sub control part. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of a 1st sub control part. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control process of a 1st sub control part. It is the figure which showed an example of the character selection effect. It is a time chart of a character selection production. It is the figure which showed in detail the example of the temporarily selected moving image (character movement display) of the 2nd character (爺). It is the figure which showed the example which interrupts character movement display, when a chance button is pressed down during character movement display. It is the figure which showed the example which does not interrupt character movement display, when a chance button is pressed down during character movement display. It is the figure which showed the 2nd example of the character selection effect. It is a time chart of the 2nd example of character selection production. It is the figure which showed the 3rd example of the character selection effect. It is a time chart of the 3rd example of character selection production. It is the figure which showed the modification of the production | presentation period of a character selection production. (A)-(d) It is the figure which showed the other example of the character selection production. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the same pachinko machine from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board from the front. The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. (A) An example of the stop symbol form of the special figure is shown. (B) An example of a stop symbol form of a decorative symbol is shown. (C) An example of a usual stop display symbol is shown. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main process of a main control part. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the success / failure prefetch table. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the special figure success / failure prefetch result table. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the determination table for success / failure. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the special figure determination table. (C) It is the figure which showed an example of the table set selection table. It is the figure which showed an example of the special figure timer number selection table. It is the figure which showed an example of the change time table. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU of a 1st sub control part performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of a 1st sub control part. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of a 1st sub control part. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control process of a 1st sub control part. It is the figure which showed an example of the character selection effect. It is a time chart of a character selection production. It is the figure which showed in detail the example of the temporarily selected moving image (character movement display) of the 2nd character (爺). It is the figure which showed the example which interrupts character movement display, when a chance button is pressed down during character movement display. It is the figure which showed the example which does not interrupt character movement display, when a chance button is pressed down during character movement display. It is the figure which showed the 2nd example of the character selection effect. It is a time chart of the 2nd example of character selection production. It is the figure which showed the 3rd example of the character selection effect. It is a time chart of the 3rd example of character selection production. It is the figure which showed the modification of the production | presentation period of a character selection production. (A)-(d) It is the figure which showed the other example of the character selection production. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline | summary of other embodiment. It is a circuit block diagram of other embodiments. (A) It is the schematic which shows the structure of the data of other embodiment. (B) It is a schematic diagram of the command of other embodiment. (C) It is a timing chart explaining the mode of transmission / reception of the command of other embodiment. It is an example of the timing chart of command transmission / reception of other embodiment. It is an example of the timing chart of command transmission / reception of other embodiment. It is an example of the timing chart of command transmission / reception of other embodiment. It is an example of the timing chart of command transmission / reception of other embodiment. It is an example of the timing chart of command transmission / reception of other embodiment. It is an example of the timing chart of command transmission / reception of other embodiment. It is the figure which showed the button effect and effect display of other embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the button effect and effect display of other embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the button effect and effect display of other embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the button effect and effect display of other embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the button effect and effect display of other embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the button effect and effect display of other embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the button effect and effect display of other embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the button effect and effect display of other embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the button effect and effect display of other embodiment in time series. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline | summary of other embodiment. It is an example of the timing chart of button production of other embodiments. It is an example of the timing chart of button production of other embodiments. It is an example of the timing chart of button production of other embodiments. It is the figure which showed the button effect and effect display of other embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the button effect and effect display of other embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the button effect and effect display of other embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the button effect and effect display of other embodiment in time series. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline | summary of other embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline | summary of other embodiment. It is an example of the timing chart of the character change effect of other embodiment. It is an example of the timing chart of the character change effect of other embodiment. It is an example of the timing chart of the character change effect of other embodiment. It is the figure which showed the character change effect display of other embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the character change effect display of other embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the character change effect display of other embodiment in time series. It is an example of the setting screen of other embodiment.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as the pachinko machine 100 or a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
<Overall configuration>

  First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as seen from the front side (player side).

  As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface. The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so that the inner side of the front frame door 106 can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player 200 ball launching handles 134 for launching into the game area 124, chance buttons 136 for changing the effects of the various effects devices 206 by the player's operation, and the chance button 136 to emit light. Sub button lamp 138, ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and return operation button for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance 142, and a ball rental display unit 144 for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit. In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. .

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.
<Game board>

  Next, the game board 200 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. A decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area 124, and a plurality of types of accessory units 950 (see FIG. 17) are disposed around the decorative symbol display device 208. Details of the accessory unit 950 will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In this embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In this example, a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, but it is not necessary to be a liquid crystal display device as long as it is configured to display various effects and various game information. Other display devices including a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  In addition, a stage 244 is disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in an area where the game ball can roll. The stage 244 can temporarily roll a game ball or the like outside the game area 124. Further, a wall 200a3 described later is erected on the rear side of the stage 244, and a game ball that rolls on the stage 244 falls from the stage 244 by colliding with the wall 200a3, and the front side. Guided to the game area 124.

  Although not shown, the game board 200 includes a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol hold lamp 216, and a first special symbol. A holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  The general map display device 210 (not shown) is a display device for displaying a general map, and is constituted by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. A first special figure display device 212 and a second special figure display device 214 (not shown) are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7 segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The not-shown universal chart hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of pending custom figure variable games (details will be described later). In this embodiment, the normal figure variable game has a predetermined number (for example, 2). It is possible to hold up to 2). The first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 (not shown) are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are being held. It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of the figure variation game. The high-probability medium lamp 222 (not shown) is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or a high-probability state. Turns on when changing from a probabilistic state to a high probability state, and turns off when changing from a high probability state to a low probability state.

  In addition, the game board 200 has a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a general start port 228, a first special view start port 230, a second special view start port 232, and a first variable. A winning opening 234 and a second variable winning opening 235 are provided.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detecting sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). When a prize is won), the payout device is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning is sometimes referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player is sometimes referred to as “rental ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the front of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged on the right side of the view. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the lower center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure changing game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric Chu). In the present embodiment, only one second special figure starting port 232 is disposed directly below the first special figure starting port 230. The second special figure starting port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the wing member 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls as prize balls to the upper plate 126. Then, the special figure variable game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are called a large winning opening or an attacker, and are arranged at the lower right of the game board 200 as viewed from the front in this embodiment. The first variable winning award port 234 and the second variable winning award port 235 include a door member that can be freely opened and closed, and a ball cannot be entered while the door member is closed. When the display device stops displaying the jackpot symbol, the door member opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds) at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first variable winning port 234 or the second variable winning port 235, the payout device is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls is raised as a winning ball. Drain to dish 126. Note that the balls that have entered the first variable prize winning opening 234 and the second variable prize winning opening 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting ball direction changing members 236 called windmills and a plurality of game nails (not shown) are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204 An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any prize opening or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  This pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches 146 Further, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 148 and driven into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail, and the like, and the winning opening (the general winning opening 226, the first variable winning opening 234, the second The variable prize opening 235) or the start opening (the first special figure start opening 230, the second special figure start opening 232) is won, or any prize opening or start opening is not won, or the ordinary start opening 228 It reaches the out port 240 only by passing.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the gaming board 200 with the back cover attached as seen from the back (back), and FIG. 4 shows the gaming board 200 with the back cover removed from the back (back). FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a back cover 241 made of a transparent plate member is disposed on the back of the game board 200. The back cover 241 is rotatably mounted on the game board 200 via hinges 242 provided at two places on the left side when viewed from the back. In addition, lock portions 243 for fixing the back cover 241 to the back surface of the game board 200 are arranged at two positions on the top and bottom of the back cover 241 opposite to the hinge portion 242.

  A main control board case 244 that can accommodate a control board (hereinafter also referred to as a main control board or a main control board) that constitutes a main control unit 300 described later is disposed below the back cover 241. As shown in FIG. 4, a control board (hereinafter referred to as a sub-control board or a sub-control board) that constitutes a first sub-control unit 400 described later is located above the main control board case 244 and at a position covered by the back cover 241. A sub control board case 245 that can accommodate a control board), and a liquid crystal control board case 246 that can accommodate a control board (hereinafter also referred to as a liquid crystal control board) constituting a second sub control unit 500 described later. It is arranged.

  The sub control board case 245 and the liquid crystal control board case 246 are covered with the back cover 241. However, since the back cover 241 of this example is a transparent plate member, the sub control board case 245 and the liquid crystal control board case 246 are covered. In addition, the state of various electronic components and the like housed in the board cases 245 and 246 can be visually recognized from the back surface (back surface) side through the back surface cover 241.

  FIG. 5A is a front view schematically showing the sub control board case 245 and the liquid crystal control board case 246, and FIG. 5B is a side along the line AA in FIG. It is sectional drawing.

  The liquid crystal control board case 246 accommodates the above-described liquid crystal control board 246a and a relay board 246b for electrically relaying the liquid crystal control board 246a and another control board. The sub control board case 245 accommodates the above-described sub control board 245a.

As shown in FIG. 5B, when the right side surface of the sub control board case 245 and the liquid crystal control board case 246 is used as a reference plane, the liquid crystal control board 246a and the sub control board are arranged in order from the reference plane. 245a and the relay board 246b are arranged in this order. In other words, the sub control board 245a is arranged at a position farther from the reference plane than the liquid crystal control board 246a, and is arranged at a position closer to the reference plane than the relay board 246b. It is located between 246a and the relay substrate 246b.
<Control unit>

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and the power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 are configured. Yes.
<Main control unit>

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing are mounted. . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 includes a random value generation circuit 318 for deriving a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes two random value generation circuits). And a predetermined ball detection sensor such as a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, front frame door opening sensor, inner frame opening sensor, lower plate full sensor, etc. A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a tongue sensor and outputting a comparison result with an amplification result or a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302; and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, The display control of the drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the common figure display device 210 is performed. Drive control 326 and various state display units 328 (for example, general map hold lamp 216, first special figure hold lamp 218, second special figure hold lamp 220, high accuracy medium lamp 222, etc.) are controlled. And a driving circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 for opening and closing a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232, a door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and the like. doing.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value used in the basic circuit 302. Random number generation in the random value generation circuit 318 can be broadly divided into two types of methods: counter mode and random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that is counted up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods in the random number mode. The first method in the random number mode performs an operation using a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) using a seed of random numbers, and derives the operation result as a random number. In the second method, a numerical value is read from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and the read numerical value is derived as a random number. The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value using white noise superimposed on a signal input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random value generation circuit 318 uses the acquired value as an initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, uses it as a seed of random numbers, or determines a read start position of the random number table. .

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. The random value generation circuit 318 that has received this signal latches the value at that timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230, and the latched value is incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318. It is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won the second special figure starting port 232, the timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 is also the same. Is latched, and the latched value is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.
<Sub control unit>

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock, and controls programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, various effect data, etc. Is connected to the ROM 406.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a shielding device sensor 430 that detects the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button detection sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136, a shielding device sensor 430, and a chance button detection sensor The sensor circuit 428 that outputs the detection signal from the 426 to the basic circuit 402, and the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the CPU 404 are read, and the display image is generated using the work area of the VRAM 436 to decorate A VDP 434 (image) that displays an image on the symbol display device 208. Are connected Oh and display processor), the.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and frequency 512 is installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, and an image display A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the driving of the accessory unit 950, various sensors 424 for detecting the current position of the accessory unit 950, and detection signals from the various sensors 424 as basic circuits. A sensor circuit 518 for outputting to 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table frame lamp drive circuit 540 for controlling the game table frame lamp 542; The game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540 are connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication. In this example, the accessory unit 950 is driven and controlled by the second sub-control unit 500. However, the driving unit 950 is configured to be driven and controlled by another control unit (for example, the first sub-control unit 400). Also good.
<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.
<Type of design>

  Next, using FIGS. 7A to 7C, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described. Fig.7 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of a special figure.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor has detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” by repeating all lighting of seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 displays “fluctuation display of special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Do.

  These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display according to the present invention. Then, when the variation time determined before the variation start of the special figure 1 (corresponding to the variation time referred to in the present invention) elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the special symbol form of the special figure 1. When the variation time determined before the start of variation 2 (this also corresponds to the variation time according to the present invention) has elapsed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special diagram 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display referred to in the present invention, hereinafter, after the “variable display of special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. The series of displays up to is referred to as symbol variation stop display.

  As will be described later, the symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. FIG. 10A shows ten types of special drawings from “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure J” as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation stop display. In FIG. 5A, the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is extinguished, and the black portions indicate the location where the segments are illuminated.

  “Special Figure A” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, the determination as to whether or not the big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the decision as to whether or not it is a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state.

  Moreover, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time-saving state. Although the time reduction will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal high probability state, and the state that does not shift to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal low probability state. “Special figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that give a relatively large profit amount to the player.

  “Special figure C” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure C” is 2R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 15R. "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time reduction, and is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure D” is 2R compared to “Special Figure B” which is 15R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol suddenly called normal, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. These “special drawing E” and “special drawing F” are both 2R and are in a state in which they do not shift to the time-saving state.

  "Special figure G" is a first small hit symbol, and "Special figure H" is a second small hit symbol, both of which are in a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit here is equivalent to the same short hit big hit with 2R. That is, “Special Figure G” and “Special Figure H” are in the same state as “Special Figure F”, but the effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 are different in both cases. By providing “G”, “Special Figure H”, and “Special Figure F”, the interest of the game is enhanced.

  In addition, “Special Figure I” is a first off symbol, and “Special Figure J” is a second off symbol, and the profit amount given to the player is a relatively small profit amount.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, symbols other than “Special Figure A” are prepared as 15R special jackpot symbols, and the same applies to other symbols such as 15R jackpot symbols.

  FIG. 7B shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Displayed in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →... “Decoration display of decorative pattern” is performed. When the 15R jackpot of “Special Figure B” is notified, a symbol combination (for example, “decoration 1—decoration 1—decoration”) corresponding to the 15R jackpot corresponding to the 15R jackpot is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. 1 ”or“ decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2 ”). When the 15R special jackpot of “special drawing A” is notified, a combination of three symbols of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” or “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7”). Etc.) is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the 2R jackpot called “hidden probability change” of “Special Figure E”, the 2R jackpot called “Special Figure F” suddenly, or the first small hit of “Special Figure G”, “Special Figure H” When notifying the second small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in order to notify the 2R jackpot called “sudden change” of “special drawing C” or the 2R jackpot called “sudden time reduction” of “special drawing D”, “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5” is displayed. Stop display.

  On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of “Special Figure I” and the second deviation of “Special Figure J”, the symbol combination other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 5B is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

FIG. 2C shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes for ordinary maps: “general diagram A” which is a winning symbol and “general symbol B” which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that a sphere has passed through the general-purpose start opening 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the usual figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 6C, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.
<Main control unit main processing>

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the flow of the main process of the main control unit.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal is input executes a main control unit main process according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306 after resetting by a reset interrupt.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value. In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 9v), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312 and a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not the state before the power interruption (before power interruption) is restored, and the state before the power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of an amusement store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicates that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal).

  When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. The RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the ordinary figure winning random number counter and the special figure random value counter, the ordinary figure timer random number value, and the special figure timer, respectively. Two random number counters for generating each random value are updated. For example, assuming that the range of values that can be taken as normal timer random number values is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal timer random value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. Note that the initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later.

The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.
<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed. In step S203, the WDT is periodically updated (so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal.

  In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal) is stored. In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the first variable winning port 234, the second variable winning port 235, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232. It is determined that there has been a ball entry or a normal start port 228 has passed.

  In other words, it is determined that there has been a winning at these winning ports 226, 234, 235 and the starting ports 230, 232, 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, Two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area.

  If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the random number value of FIG. 1 and the counter for acquiring the random value of FIG. 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when the winning openings 226, 234, 235 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228 have been won, the number of winning balls stored in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or for each starting opening is stored. The value of the area is read and 1 is added to set the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, and the variable winning port 234. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S203. If there is a winning at the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the random number value storage circuit 318 stores the random value corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. The value is acquired from the register for use, and the processed value (for example, the acquired value + the value of the R register + 1) is acquired as the special figure 1 winning random number value and the value is acquired from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random number value, The processed value (for example, acquired value + R register value + 1) is acquired as a special figure 1 random number value and stored in the corresponding random value storage area.

  When a winning is made to the second special figure starting port 232 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the random value counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 of the random number generation circuit 318 The value is acquired from the value storage register, and the processed value (for example, the acquired value + the value of the R register + 1) is acquired as the special figure 2 winning random value and the value is acquired from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random value. Then, the processed value (for example, acquired value + R register value + 1) is acquired as a special figure 2 random value and stored in the corresponding random value storage area.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the win symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in the off symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either the winning symbol (general symbol A shown in FIG. 7C) or the off symbol (general symbol B shown in FIG. 7C). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 232a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out, the usual figure out flag is turned on as will be described later. When the off-normal flag is on, the normal state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing at which the normal stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag.

  Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed in accordance with the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game).

  In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 includes a 15R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first off flag, a second off flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a normal figure. A flag for each probability variation flag is prepared. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), the 15R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation When the flag is also on and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure A, 15R jackpot flag shown in FIG. 7A is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on. When the special figure B, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and the general figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, When the probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and when the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure E, 2R jackpot flag is on, special chart Probability flag is off, normal When the rate fluctuation flag is also off, the special figure F, when the first small hit flag is on, the special figure G, when the second small hit flag is on, the special figure H, and the first off flag are on. In such a case, the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the special figure I and the second off flag are turned on, respectively, so that the special figure I is in the respective mode. A setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress is made in the setting area of the RAM 308.

  By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a sudden probability variation symbol (special symbol C), and a sudden time-short symbol symbol (special symbol). D), hidden probability variation (special E), suddenly normal (special F), first small hit (special G), second small hit (special H), first off symbol (special) Any one of the symbols I) and the second off-set symbol (special symbol J) is confirmed and displayed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not (details will be described later), the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state).

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or a solenoid for driving to open / close the door member of the first variable winning port 234 or the second variable winning port 235 (until a game ball with a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning port 234). 332), a signal for holding the door member in the opened state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to the first variable prize winning opening 234 or the solenoid (332) for opening / closing the door member of the second variable prize winning opening 235, and the door closing time provided in the RAM 308 Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the management timer. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment) and finished, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) In other words, the effect standby period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Set the information indicating. Also, if the normal probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the jackpot game, the time reduction number 100 is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the time reduction number is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned ON.

  The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is a normal high probability state. There is a higher probability of hitting a general-purpose variable game in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal figure variable game and the fluctuation time of the special figure variable game are shorter in the normal figure high probability state than in the normal figure low probability state. Further, in the normal high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special start port 232 tends to be longer than in the normal low probability state. In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the jackpot game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a jackpot game, a large number of games will be placed in the second special figure start port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls are entered during the jackpot game. There is a problem that a ball enters and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the jackpot increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. This is to solve this problem.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of the way, the off flag is turned on as will be described later. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. Further, the notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the second special figure starting port 232 is notified. However, it is performed in preference to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the first special figure starting port 230.

  In step S233, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (In this embodiment, command types such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command are specified. Possible information), bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag or 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, etc. is included in the command data. In the case of the symbol variation stop command, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. are included. In the case of a jackpot round number designation command, the value of the special variation probability flag, the number of jackpot rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the device information in the command data, the presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, the first variable winning port 234, , Whether or not there is a winning in the second variable winning opening 235.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the 15R jackpot flag or 2R jackpot flag value, the special figure probability variation flag value, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure 2 relation stored in the RAM 308 as command data. Information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described large winning opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In the above-mentioned big winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a full tray error is monitored. When the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening / closing of the second special figure starting port 232, the first variable winning port 234, or the second variable winning port 235, or via the display circuits 324, 326, 330. Display data to be output to the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241.

In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the process returns to the main process of the main control unit. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. Then, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit.
<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is substituted into the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading effect data corresponding to the command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when update of the effect data is necessary, effect data update processing is performed.

  If it is detected in step S311 that the chance button has been pressed, the effect data updated in step S309 is changed to effect data corresponding to the press of the chance button. In step S313, if there is a command to VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S315, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416. In step S317, if there is a command to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S319, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 432. In step S321, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S303.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). Execute in the cycle.

  In step S501 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S503 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S319, an effect random number update process, and the like are performed.

  Next, the image control process in step S313 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605. If not, a transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S605, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets parameters according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

In step S609, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611. If not, the generation end interrupt signal is determined. Wait for input. In step S611, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.
<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>

  Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step S701 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S701. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed. In step S703, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. In step S709, an effect control process is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S707, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 506, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  In step S <b> 711, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520. In step S713, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the accessory unit 950, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step S703.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and a timer interrupt process is performed in response to this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle.

In step S901 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S903 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process is performed.
<Director>

  Next, the rendering device provided in the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail. FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 200.

  The game board 200 of this example is a rear unit 200a in which the effect device is disposed, a front unit 200c that forms the above-described game area 124, and a plate-like member that partitions the rear unit 200a and the front unit 200c. It consists of three units of plate 200b. Then, the game board 200b is attached to the front surface of the rear unit 200a, and the front unit 200c is further attached to the front surface of the game board 200b, so that the rear unit 200a, the game board 200b, and the front unit 200c are three units. Constitute a game board 200 together. In addition, the material of the game board 200b is not specifically limited, Transparent resin may be sufficient and it may be wooden.

  On the right side of the game board 200b as viewed from the front, a gate through hole 200b1 formed of a long hole through which a part of a general-purpose start opening (gate) 228 disposed in the front unit 200c can penetrate, and the gate through hole 200b1 A notch 200b2 is formed as a mark for specifying the position of. Further, on the right side of the rear unit 200a as viewed from the front, there is formed a gate notch 200a1 that can touch (access) a part of a general opening (gate) 228 provided in the front unit 200c. Has been.

  FIGS. 13A and 13B are partially enlarged views showing the vicinity of the universal drawing start (gate) 228 in the game board 200 in an enlarged manner. In a state where the three units of the rear unit 200a, the game board 200b, and the front unit 200c are integrated, the rear end portion of the normal start port (gate) 228 disposed in the front unit 200c is connected to the game board 200b. It is configured to pass through the gate through hole 200b1 and reach the inner space of the gate notch 200a1 of the rear unit 200a.

A store clerk or the like of the game store can easily and quickly specify the location of the usual start opening (gate) 228 by using the notch 200b2 of the game board 200b as a mark, and configures the game board 200. Without disassembling the unit, it is possible to replace the normal start port (gate) 228 or visually check the general start port (gate) 228 through the gate notch 200a1 of the rear unit 200a. it can. For this reason, maintenance work such as replacement and repair of the general-purpose start opening (gate) 228 becomes easier than before, and it is possible to easily confirm whether or not there is any illegal act on the general-purpose start opening (gate) 228. There are cases where it can be prevented.
<Game Ball Storage Department>

  Next, the game ball storage section provided in the rear unit 200a will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 is a schematic rear view of the rear unit 200a with the accessory unit 950 removed, as viewed from the rear side. FIG. 15 shows the rear unit 200a with the accessory unit 950 removed in the rear side. FIG. 16 is a partially enlarged view showing the vicinity of the game ball storage unit in an enlarged manner.

  As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, a rear unit opening 200a2 is formed in the center of the rear unit 200a so that the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 disposed behind the rear unit 200a can be visually recognized. . Further, above the rear unit opening 200a2, a center accessory 900 is disposed in the horizontal direction of the rear unit 200a, and at the center thereof, a center accessory opening 900a shaped like the outline of the character's face is formed. ing. Although the details will be described later, the face of the character applied to the cover means 718 of the dropping and unfolding accessory 712 disposed behind the center accessory 900 is visible from the center accessory opening 900a.

  Below the rear unit opening portion 200a2, a wall portion 200a3 made of a transparent plate-like member and a decorative portion 200a4 shaped in an uneven shape are disposed. Further, below the decoration portion 200a4, a horizontally long dish-shaped game ball storage portion 200a5 is arranged from the vicinity of the left end of the rear unit opening 200a2 in the rear view to the vicinity of the right end. As shown in FIG. 15, the game ball storage unit 200a5 is a part capable of temporarily storing the game ball EB1.

  As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 16, the game ball storage unit 200a5 of the present example is a second storage unit 200a8 having a width capable of storing a maximum of two game balls in the front-rear direction (thickness direction) of the rear unit 200a. A first reservoir 200a7 that communicates with the second reservoir 200a8 and has a width capable of accommodating a maximum of one game ball in the front-rear direction (thickness direction) of the rear unit 200a, and a second reservoir And a guide part 200a6 having an inclined surface inclined downward toward 200a8. Since the guide part 200a6 has an inclined surface, it is possible to guide the game ball that has fallen behind the rear unit 200a over the wall part 200a3 and the like to the second storage part 200a8.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14, below this game ball storage section 200a5, a plurality of connectors 200a9 to which harnesses for electrically connecting the accessory unit 950 and the rear unit 200a can be attached, A plurality of game ball passages 200a11 are provided for guiding game balls that are out of the region 124 to a lower plate or the like. The game ball storage part 200a5 of this example also functions as a part for preventing a game ball that has fallen behind the rear unit 200a from over the wall part 200a3 from coming into contact with the connector 200a9.

  By providing such a game ball storage unit 200a5, it is possible to prevent a situation such as a short circuit of the electrical system or damage to the connector 200a9 due to the game ball coming into contact with the connector 200a9, and stable game control is possible. There are cases where it can be done.

Further, in this example, a gap having a width equal to or more than one game ball is formed between the wall portion 200a3 and the decorative portion 200a4. As shown in FIG. It functions as a second game ball storage unit 200a10 that can temporarily store the game ball EB2 that has fallen behind the rear unit 200a.
<Household unit>

  Next, the accessory unit 950 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is an exploded perspective view of the accessory unit 950.

The accessory unit 950 is a unit that is attached to the rear surface of the rear unit 200a. In this example, the dropped and unfolded accessory unit 700, the ascending accessory unit 750, the launching accessory unit 800, and the V forming accessory unit 850 are used. Consists of. In this example, the ascending accessory unit 750 and the launching accessory unit 800 are configured as one unit.
<Functional unit / Fall-deployed functional unit>
18 to 20 are exploded perspective views of the falling and unfolding accessory unit 700. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 18, the dropping and unfolding accessory unit 700 mainly includes a U-shaped base 702 in front view, and a pair of left upper and lower drive units disposed on the left side and the front right side of the base 702. 704, a right up / down drive unit 706, a lock release unit 708 disposed on the back side of the base 702, a relay substrate 710 for electrically connecting the dropping and unfolding accessory unit 700 and another substrate, and a pair And a left and right driving unit 704 and a right vertical driving unit 706, and a falling and unfolding accessory 712 (see FIG. 20) that can be slid in the vertical direction.
<Corporate unit / Falling unit / Left (right) vertical drive>

  As shown in FIG. 18, the left vertical drive unit 704 includes a cylindrical drive base 704a fixed to the base 702 with screws, a left drive motor 704b attached to the upper portion of the drive base 704a, and the drive motor 704b. A drive gear 704c fixed to the drive shaft and a plurality of gears 704d for transmitting the power of the drive gear 704c are configured.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 19, the left vertical drive unit 704 is fitted into the base 702 and is slidable in the vertical direction along the base 702. The left vertical drive unit 704 is fixed to the slider 704 e and is dropped and expanded. Of the left rotation motor base 712e1 and a gear portion 704g fixed to the slider 704e.

  The gear portion 704g is arranged to mesh with one of the plurality of gears 704d, and the gear portion 704g, the accessory support portion 704f, and the slider 704e are integrated by operating the left drive motor 704b to rotationally drive the gear 704d. And is configured to slide up and down. The right up / down driving unit 706 has the same structure as the left up / down driving unit 704, as shown in FIGS.

A falling and unfolding combination 712, which will be described later, is supported at both ends by a combination support section 704f of the left vertical drive section 704 and a combination support section 706f of the right vertical drive section 706, and is driven by the left drive motor 704b and the right drive. By operating the motor 706b, it is possible to slide in the vertical direction. Hereinafter, the operation of sliding the dropping and developing agent 712 in the vertical direction may be referred to as “up and down operation of the dropping and developing agent 712”.
<Corporate unit / drop deploying unit / unlocking unit>

  As shown in FIG. 18, the unlocking portion 708 is engaged with a solenoid 708a driven by a drive circuit 516 shown in FIG. 6, a shaft portion 708b slid longitudinally by the solenoid 708a, and the shaft portion 708b. The movable portion 708c that is slid in the vertical direction together with the shaft portion 708b, the rotating portion 708d that is rotated in conjunction with the vertical movement of the movable portion 708c, and the direction indicated by the symbol A by the rotating portion 708d. And a slidable claw portion 708e.

  The claw portion 708e of the unlocking portion 708 is slidably disposed inside and outside a through hole 702a formed in the base 702. When the solenoid 708a is actuated to cause the claw portion 708e to enter the through hole 702a, the base 702 is prevented from sliding downward (locked), and the falling and unfolding accessory 712 is stopped.

On the other hand, when the solenoid 708a is actuated to retract the claw portion 708e out of the through hole 702a, the base 702 is allowed to slide downward (unlocked), and the fall deploying accessory 712 slides downward under its own weight. To do. In addition, in the above-described “up and down movement of the falling and unfolding combination 712”, in addition to the downward sliding due to the operation of the left driving motor 704b and the right driving motor 706b, the downward sliding due to the weight of the falling unfolding combination 712 is also performed. included.
<Corporate unit / Fall unfolding accessory unit / Fall unfolding accessory>

  As shown in FIG. 20, the drop-deployed accessory 712 includes a long plate-like fourth structure 712a supported at both ends by the accessory support portions 704f and 706f shown in FIG. 19, and the fourth structure 712a. A first plate-like first structure 712b that is rotatably attached to the front side of the first structure, a pair of left and right third structures 712c that are rotatably arranged on the fourth structure 712a, A pair of left and right second structures 712d rotatably disposed on the structure 712b, a left rotation drive unit 712e for rotating the left side of the first structure 712b in front view, A right rotation drive unit 712f for rotationally driving the right side of the structure 712b when viewed from the front, and plate-like cover means 718 (see FIG. 21) disposed on the front side of the first structure 712b. Configured.

  The left rotation drive unit 712e decorates the left rotation motor base 712e1 fixed to the accessory support unit 704f shown in FIG. 19, the left rotation motor 712e2 attached to the left rotation motor base 712e1, and the left motor base 712e1. Left rotation motor base decoration portion 712e3, a gear 712e4 for transmitting the power of the left rotation motor 712e2, and the gear 712e4 are rotatable and fixed to the left side surface of the first structure 712b in front view. Rotating arm 712e5.

  The right rotation drive unit 712f has substantially the same structure as the left rotation drive unit 712e, as shown in FIG. 20, but includes a plate-shaped detection piece 712f51 on the rotation arm 712f5 and the position of the detection piece 712f51. The point provided with the sensor 712f6 which can be detected is different from the left rotation drive part 712e. The right rotation drive unit 712f includes the detection piece 712f51 and the sensor 712f6, thereby detecting whether or not the first structure 712b is located at the initial position (position shown in FIG. 30A). Is possible.

  In the falling and unfolding accessory 712, by operating the left rotation motor 712e2, the rotation arm 712e5 is rotated via the gear 712e4, and the left side of the first structure 712b to which the rotation arm 712e5 is fixed is the front side. It is configured to rotate (tilt) to the side. Further, by operating the right rotation motor 712f2, the rotation arm 712f5 is rotated via the gear 712f4, and the right side of the first structure 712b to which the rotation arm 712f5 is fixed is rotated (inclined) to the front side. ) Is configured to.

  Therefore, by operating the left rotation motor 712e2 and the right rotation motor 712f2 at the same time, the first structure 712b can be rotated (tilted) to the front side (direction away from the fourth structure 712a). Hereinafter, the operation of rotating (inclining) the first structure 712b of the dropping and developing agent 712 to the front side may be referred to as “the rotating operation of the dropping and developing agent 712”.

  A base portion 712g is fixed to the back surface of the first structure 712b, and a gear 712h and an arm portion 712k having external teeth meshing with the gear 712h are rotatably disposed on the base portion 712g. Is done. On the other hand, an engagement portion 712m that can engage with the arm portion 712k is fixed to the fourth structure 712a.

  When the first structure 712b is returned to the initial position shown in FIG. 30A, the arm portion 712k on the first structure 712b side is engaged with the engaging portion 712m on the fourth structure 712a side. By engaging, the first structure 712b is held at the initial position. On the other hand, when the first structure 712b starts to rotate from the initial position to the front side, the engagement between the arm portion 712k on the first structure 712b side and the engagement portion 712m on the fourth structure 712a side is performed. Canceled.

  As shown in FIG. 21, the cover means 718 is fixed to a slider 721 that can slide up and down with respect to the first structure 712b. The slider 721 is engaged with the arm portion 712k on the first structure 712b side and is urged downward by a spring 722. When the first structure 712b starts to rotate from the initial position to the front side and the arm portion 712k on the first structure 712b side is disengaged from the slider 721, the slider urged by the spring 722 721 is configured to push the cover means 718 downward. The cover means 718 in this example has a character face, but other characters, characters, identification information (for example, model name) and the like may be applied.

  Returning to FIG. 20, the base portion 712 g is provided with a magnet 712 n for attracting the iron metal piece 712 c 7 provided in the pair of third structures 712 c by a magnetic force. When 712b is inclined about 180 ° toward the front, the pair of third structures 712c are held by the base portion 712g by the magnetic force.

  In addition, a pair of magnets 712b1 are disposed at both ends of the first structure 712b, and the left rotation motor base decoration portion 712e3 and the right rotation motor base decoration portion 712f3 correspond to the pair of magnets 712b1. The metal pieces 712e7 and 712f7 made of iron are disposed at the positions where they are placed. As a result, the first structure 712b that has returned to the initial position is configured to be attracted to the left rotation motor base decoration portion 712e3 and the right rotation motor base decoration portion 712f3 by the magnetic force, and the initial position is maintained.

  In addition, the third structure 712c on the left side in front view has a support portion 712c1 fixed to the surface on the left side in front view of the fourth structure body 712a, and is rotatable to the support portion 712c1 via a support shaft 712c2. The arm portion 712c3 is disposed, the upper left body portion 712c4 is fixed to the arm portion 712c3, and the cap portion 712c5 and the school badge portion 712c6 are fixed to the upper left body portion 712c4.

  In addition, the third structure 712c on the right side when viewed from the front is supported by a support portion 712c1 fixed to the surface of the fourth structure 712a on the right side when viewed from the front, and is rotatable with respect to the support portion 712c1 via a support shaft 712c2. The arm portion 712c3 to be disposed, the upper right body portion 712c4 fixed to the arm portion 712c3, the hat portion 712c5 and the school badge portion 712c6 fixed to the upper right body portion 712c4 are configured.

  In addition, the second structure 712d on the left side when viewed from the front is supported by a support portion 712d1 fixed to the back surface of the first structure 712b on the left side when viewed from the front, and is rotatable with respect to the support portion 712d1 via a support shaft 712d2. The arm portion 712d3 is provided, the lower left half body portion 712d4 fixed to the arm portion 712d3, and a connecting portion 712d5 for connecting the arm portion 712d3 and the third structure 712c. The

  As shown in FIG. 21, the second structure 712d on the right side in the front view includes a support portion 712d1 fixed to the back surface on the right side in the front view of the first structure 712b, and a support shaft 712d2 interposed between the support portion 712d1. An arm portion 712d3 that is rotatably arranged, a lower right body portion 712b4 fixed to the arm portion 712d3, and a connecting portion 712d5 for connecting the arm portion 712d3 and the third structure 712c. It is configured.

In the falling and unfolding accessory 712, the upper left half 712c4, the hat 712c5, and the school emblem 712c6 included in the third structure 712c on the left side when viewed from the front, and the upper right half 712c4 included in the third structure 712c on the right side when viewed from the front. , The hat portion 712c5, the school badge portion 712c6, the left lower body portion 712d4 included in the second structure 712d on the left side when viewed from the front, and the lower right body portion 712d4 included in the second structure 712d on the right side when viewed from the front. A character is formed.
<Light-emitting means of an accessory unit / falling-deployment accessory unit / falling-expansion accessory>

  FIG. 21A is an exploded perspective view in which the peripheral members of the first structure 712b are extracted, and FIG. 21B is an exploded perspective view in which the peripheral members of the fourth structure 712a are extracted. FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic front view showing the light emitting substrate 714 of the first structure 712b and the light emitting substrate 714 of the fourth structure 712a.

  A light emitting substrate 714 provided with a plurality of second light emitting units 714a (LEDs in this example) is attached to the front side of the first structure 712b, and by the plurality of second light emitting units 714a, It is possible to output light to the front side of the first structure 712b through cover means 718 disposed in front. A light emitting substrate 716 provided with a plurality of first light emitting means 716a (in this example, LEDs) is attached to the back side of the fourth structure 712a, and the plurality of first light emitting means 716a. Thus, it is possible to output light to the front side of the fourth structure 712a through the fourth structure 712a disposed in front.

As shown in FIG. 22, a first harness capable of electrically connecting the fourth structure 712a and the first sub-control unit 400 to the light emitting substrate 716 of the fourth structure 712a is connectable. The connector CN1, the second connector CN2 to which a harness for electrically connecting the light emitting board 714 of the fourth structure 712a and the first structure 712b can be connected, the fourth structure 712a and the left A third connector CN3 to which a harness for electrically connecting the rotation motor 712e2 can be connected, and a harness for electrically connecting the fourth structure 712a to the right rotation motor 712f2 and the sensor 712f6 can be connected. A fourth connector CN4 is provided.
<Household unit / Climbing unit>

  FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the rising accessory unit 750. As shown in FIG. 23, the ascending combination unit 750 mainly includes a base 752, a drive unit 754 disposed on the left side of the base 752, as viewed from the front, a first ascending combination 756, and a second ascent. And an accessory 758.

  The drive unit 754 includes a drive base 754a fixed to the base 752 with screws, a drive motor 754b attached to the drive base 754a, a drive gear 754c fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 754b, and the drive gear 754c. A plurality of gears 754d for transmitting the motive power, a sensor 754e capable of detecting the position of the detection piece 754d1 provided on one of the plurality of gears 754d, and one gear of the plurality of gears 754d. And a cam 754f meshing with each other.

  The first ascending combination 756 includes a first ascending combination base 756a and an arm portion 756b that can be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise around the left side of the first rising combination base 756a as viewed from the front. The first ascending feature slider 756c that can slide in the vertical direction in conjunction with the rotation of the arm portion 756b, and the first ascent that represents the appearance of the rock attached to the first ascending feature slider 756c An accessory decoration portion 756d.

  The arm portion 756b is engaged with the front-side convex portion 754f1 of the cam 754d of the drive portion 754, and rotates clockwise or counterclockwise by rotating the cam 754d. The first ascending combination slider 756c and the first ascending combination decoration 756d are raised when the arm 756b is rotated counterclockwise, and are lowered when the arm 756b is rotated clockwise.

  The second ascending combination 758 includes a second ascending combination base 758a, a second ascending combination slider 758b slidable in the vertical direction with respect to the second ascending combination base 758a, A second ascending accessory decorative portion 758c representing the appearance of the rock, attached to the ascending accessory slider 758b, an unlocking portion 758d capable of preventing the second ascending accessory slider 758b from descending, and a cover Part 758e.

  The second ascending agent slider 758b is disposed at a position where it can be engaged with the first ascending agent slider 756c, and the first ascending agent slider 756c is raised by a predetermined amount, so It is configured to rise in conjunction with the accessory slider 756c (details will be described later).

  The unlocking portion 758d has a solenoid 758d1, a shaft portion 758d2 that is slid in the longitudinal direction by the solenoid 758d1, and a claw portion 758d3 that is engaged with the shaft portion 758d2 and is slidable in the direction indicated by symbol B. Configured.

Although details will be described later, when the claw portion 758d3 is extended by operating the solenoid 758d1, the lowering of the second ascending accessory slider 758b is prevented (locked) and fixed to the second ascending accessory slider 758b. The second raised accessory decoration portion 758c thus made is held at the raised position. On the other hand, when the solenoid 758d1 is operated to retract the claw portion 758d3, the second ascending combination slider 758b is allowed to descend (unlocked), and the second ascending combination slider 758b is fixed to the second ascending combination slider 758b. The second rising accessory decoration portion 758c slides downward due to its own weight.
<Functional unit / Launched functional unit>

  FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the launching accessory unit 800, and FIG. 25 is an enlarged perspective view of the relay board 806 provided in the launching accessory unit 800.

  As shown in FIG. 24, the launching accessory unit 800 is mainly provided on a plate-like rear unit 802, a launching mechanism portion 804 disposed below the rear unit 802, and the right side of the rear unit 802 when viewed from the front. A relay board 806 disposed in the vicinity of the game ball passage 802a, a protective film 808 attached to the surface of the relay board 806, and a spacer for forming a movable space of a small piece accessory 804d composed of a plurality of small pieces 810 and a plate-like front unit 812 that covers the front surface of the spacer 810.

  The launch mechanism portion 804 includes a slider 804a provided at a position engageable with the convex portion on the back side of the cam 754f of the ascending accessory unit 750, a spring 804b that urges the slider 804a upward, and a slider 804a that moves up and down. A guide portion 804c that guides in the direction, a small piece accessory 804d that is disposed in a free state above the slider 804a, and a pair of guide rails 804e that guide the small piece role 804d in the direction of the slider 804a. Configured.

As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 25, a protective film 808 is affixed to the front surface of the relay substrate 806 except for connectors and the like. The relay board 806 is disposed in the game ball path 802a of the rear unit 802. In this example, the game passing through the game ball path 802a is performed by attaching a protective film 808 to the front surface of the relay board 806. The ball is configured not to contact the relay board 806 (so that the game ball passing through the game ball passage 802a and the relay board 806 are insulated). For this reason, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the electrical system is short-circuited or the relay board 806 is damaged in the relay board 806, and stable game control may be performed.
<Functional unit / V forming functional unit>

  FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the V forming accessory unit 850. As shown in FIG. 26, the V forming combination unit 850 includes a V forming combination left unit 852 disposed on the left side of the pachinko machine 100 in front view and a V formation disposed on the right side of the pachinko machine 100 in front view. And an accessory right unit 854. In addition, since the V forming agent left unit 852 and the V forming agent right unit 854 have a symmetrical structure, detailed description of the V forming agent right unit 854 will be omitted below.

  The V forming accessory left unit 852 includes a V forming accessory left base 852a, a driving portion 852b disposed at a lower end of the V forming accessory left base 852a, and a left link portion rotatable by the driving portion 852b. 852c, a decorative portion 852d fixed to the V forming accessory left base 852a, a left light emitting substrate 852e disposed on the V forming accessory left base 852a, and a V forming left movable attached to the left link portion 852c A portion 852f, a V-shaped left decorative portion 852g attached to the V-shaped left movable portion 852f, and a left light guide slope 852h attached to the left light-emitting substrate 852e.

  The drive unit 852b includes a drive motor 852b1 attached to the V-forming accessory left base 852a, a drive gear 852b2 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 852b1, and a cam 852b3 rotated by the drive gear 852b2. It is configured.

  The V forming left movable portion 852f of the V forming accessory left unit 852 can be rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle about the upper end portion by driving the driving portion 852b. The V-shaped right movable portion 854f can be rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle with the upper end portion as a fulcrum by driving the drive portion 854b. Therefore, by driving the drive unit 852b and the drive 854d at the same time, the V-shaped left movable unit 852f and the V-formed right movable unit 854f form a V-shape in front view.

  FIG. 27 is an external perspective view of the right light guide plate 854h of the V forming accessory right unit 854 as seen from the back side. Ejector pin marks 854h1 formed at the time of molding remain in two places above the right light guide plate 854h. The ejector pin mark 854h1 is a recess that is inevitably formed when the right light guide plate 854h is molded, and the thickness of the portion including the ejector pin mark 854h1 is smaller than the thickness of the portion without the ejector pin mark 854h1. .

In this example, as shown in FIG. 26, the light emitting means (LED in this example) mounted on the right light emitting substrate 854e of the V forming accessory right unit 854 is arranged so as to face the ejector pin mark 854h1. With such a structure, there are cases where the amount of light emitted from the light emitting means (LED) can be increased to enhance the effect.
<Functional unit / Center functional unit>

  FIG. 28 is a front view of the center accessory unit 900, and FIG. 29 is a rear view of the center accessory unit 900.

  The center accessory 900 includes a decoration portion 902 disposed on the upper part of the game board 200 and a light emitting substrate 904 disposed on the back side of the decoration portion 902. The decorative portion 902 of the present example includes a plurality of first portions 902a (see FIG. 29) arranged radially around the center accessory opening 900a at predetermined intervals, and an inner side of the first portion 902a. And a second portion 902b (see FIG. 28) that forms the outer edge of the center accessory opening 900a.

The first part 902a is a part made of a transparent or translucent member capable of transmitting light. In this example, a part of the plurality of first parts 902a is a light emitting substrate 904 of the center accessory 900. The light output from the light emitting means (LED in this example) mounted on the light and the light output from the light emitting means (LED in this example) mounted on the light emitting substrate 714 of the first structure 712b described above. Both of them can be transmitted. On the other hand, the second portion 902b is a portion made of an opaque member that cannot transmit light.
<Operation of falling unfolding agent>

Next, operation | movement of the fall expansion | deployment combination 712 is demonstrated using FIGS. 30-34. As described above, the falling and unfolding accessory 712 can be moved up and down to slide in the up-and-down direction and rotate to rotate the first structure 712b forward.
<Dropping and unfolding action / vertical movement>

  FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating the up and down movement of the falling and unfolding accessory 712 by extracting only the falling and unfolding accessory unit 700. FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating the dropping in the unfolding and unloading accessory unit 700 in a state of being installed on the game board 200. It is the figure which showed the up-and-down operation | movement of the expansion | deployment combination 712.

  FIG. 30A and FIG. 31A show a front view and a cross-sectional view in the case where the dropping and unfolding accessory 712 is located at the initial position in the up-and-down operation. The initial position in the up-and-down operation is a position where the whole of the falling and unfolding combination 712 overlaps (overlaps) the center combination 900 above the game board 200.

  In this initial position, a part of the decoration (in this example, the character's face) applied to the front surface of the cover means 718 of the falling and unfolding accessory 712 is visible from the front through the center accessory opening 900a of the center accessory 900. The center effect 900 and the falling and unfolding feature 712 provide an integrated performance. The initial position is a position where the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 disposed behind the rear unit opening 200a2 does not overlap (does not overlap) the falling and unfolding accessory 712, and the decorative symbol display device from the front. All 208 display areas are visible.

  FIG. 30B and FIG. 31B show a front view and a cross-sectional view when the dropping and unfolding accessory 712 is located at an intermediate position in the up-and-down operation. In the case where the dropping and unfolding accessory 712 is located at the initial position in the up-and-down operation, when the solenoid 708a (see FIG. 18) is operated to retract the claw portion 708e out of the through hole 702a, the base 702 slides downward. Is allowed (unlocked), and the falling and unfolding accessory 712 slides downward due to its own weight and reaches the intermediate position.

  The intermediate position in the up-and-down operation is a position where the dropping and unfolding combination 712 at the initial position descends and a part of the dropping and unfolding combination 712 overlaps (overlaps) the center combination 900. In this intermediate position, a part of the decoration applied to the front surface of the cover means 718 of the drop-deployment accessory 712 is visible through the center accessory opening 900a of the center accessory 900. Further, the intermediate position is a position where the upper part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 disposed behind the rear unit opening 200a2 overlaps (overlaps) with the falling and unfolding accessory 712, and the decorative symbol display is displayed from the front. Although the upper part of the display area of the device 208 becomes invisible, most of the display area is visible.

FIG. 30C and FIG. 31B show a front view and a cross-sectional view when the dropping and unfolding accessory 712 is located at the maximum movement position in the up-and-down operation. The maximum movement position in the up-and-down operation is a position where the dropping and developing agent 712 at the intermediate position further descends, and a part of the dropping and developing agent 712 does not overlap the center agent 900 (do not overlap). Further, the maximum movement position is a position where the central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 disposed behind the rear unit opening 200a2 overlaps (overlaps) with the falling and unfolding accessory 712, and is decorative from the front. Most of the display area of the symbol display device 208 becomes invisible.
<Operation / Rotation operation of falling unfolding agent>

  FIG. 32 is a view showing the rotation operation of the falling and unfolding combination 712 by extracting only the dropping and unfolding combination unit 700, and FIGS. 33 and 34 show the dropping and unfolding combination unit in a state of being installed on the game board 200. FIG. 7 is a view showing a rotation operation of a drop unfolding accessory 712 in 700.

  FIG. 32A and FIG. 33A are front views showing a case where the first structure 712b of the dropping and unfolding accessory 712 is rotated 45 ° toward the front side in the rotation operation. In the process in which the first structure 712b rotates from 0 ° to 45 ° toward the front side, the two left and right second structures 712d interlocked with the rotation of the first structure 712b Two left and right third structures 712c that rotate in directions close to each other as fulcrums and interlock with the rotation of the two left and right second structures 712d approach each other using the fourth structure 712a as a fulcrum. Rotate in the direction.

  When the first structure 712b starts to rotate from the initial position to the front side and the engagement between the arm portion 712k on the first structure 712b side and the slider 721 (see FIG. 21) is released, the slider 721 pushes the cover means 718 downward. For this reason, the cover means 718 slides downward by a predetermined amount and is inclined about 45 ° toward the front, but the decoration applied to the cover means 718 is visible from the front.

  32 (b) and 33 (b) show a front view and a cross-sectional view when the first structure 712b of the dropping and unfolding accessory 712 is rotated 90 ° toward the front side in the rotating operation. In the process in which the first structure 712b is rotated from 45 ° to 90 ° toward the front side, the two left and right second structures 712d interlocked with the rotation of the first structure 712b are converted into the first structure 712b. The left and right two third structures 712c that rotate in the direction closer to each other than the state rotated by 45 ° toward the near side and interlock with the rotation of the two right and left second structures 712d are the first The structure 712b rotates in a direction closer to the direction than the state where the structure 712b is rotated 45 ° toward the front side.

  Further, the cover means 718 is inclined by about 90 ° toward the front, and the decoration applied to the cover means 718 is not visible from the front, but the light emitting means 716a ( In this example, the LED) is visible from the front.

  Since the cover means 718 is structured to slide downward by a predetermined amount in conjunction with the rotation of the first structure 712b, the cover means 718 is in a state where the cover means 718 is inclined about 90 ° toward the front. Even if it exists, the protrusion amount to the front side of the cover means 718 can be suppressed to the minimum. As a result, it is possible to avoid the gaming board 200 from becoming unnecessarily thick, and to avoid the situation where the cover means 718 comes into contact with other members.

  FIGS. 32 (c) and 34 (a) are front views showing a case where the first structure 712b of the dropping and unfolding accessory 712 is rotated 135 ° toward the front side in the rotation operation. In the process in which the first structure 712b is rotated from 90 ° to 135 ° toward the front side, the two left and right second structures 712d interlocked with the rotation of the first structure 712b are replaced with the first structure 712b. The left and right two third structures 712c that rotate in the directions closer to each other than the state rotated by 90 ° toward the near side and interlock with the rotation of the two left and right second structures 712d are The structure 712b rotates in a direction closer to the direction than the state where the structure 712b is rotated 90 ° toward the front side.

  Further, the cover means 718 is inclined by about 135 ° toward the front, and the decoration applied to the cover means 718 is invisible from the front, but the light emitting means 716a ( In this example, the LED) is visible from the front.

  FIGS. 32 (d) and 34 (b) show a front view and a cross-sectional view when the first structure 712b of the dropping and unfolding accessory 712 is rotated 180 ° toward the front side in the rotation operation. In the process in which the first structure 712b is rotated from 135 ° to 180 ° toward the front side, the two left and right second structures 712d interlocked with the rotation of the first structure 712b are replaced by the first structure 712b. The two third left and right third interlocked with the rotation of the two second structures 712d on the left and right sides are brought into contact with each other by rotating in directions closer to each other than the state rotated 135 ° toward the front side. The structures 712c are brought into contact with each other by rotating in a direction closer to the first structure 712b than in a state in which the first structure 712b is rotated 90 ° toward the near side.

In addition, the two left and right second structures 712d and the two left and right third structures 712c are also in contact with each other, and the character is formed by the two left and right second structures 712d and the two right and left third structures 712c. Is done. Note that the cover means 718 is inclined by about 180 ° toward the front, and the decoration applied to the bar means 718 is not visible from the front, and the light emitting means 716a (the book) disposed on the fourth structure 712a. In the example, part of the LED) is also covered by the two left and right second structures 712d and the two left and right third structures 712c, and thus cannot be viewed from the front.
<Operation of the rising and launching unit>

  FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the operation of the ascending accessory unit 750 and the launching accessory unit 800 by extracting only the ascending accessory unit 750 and the launching accessory unit 800, and FIG. 36 is installed on the game board 200. It is the figure which showed the operation | movement of the rising bonus unit 750 and the launching bonus unit 800 in the state.

  FIGS. 35 (a) and 36 (a) are front views showing a state in which the ascending accessory unit 750 and the launching accessory unit 800 are located at the initial positions, and FIGS. 35 (b) and 36 (a). b) shows a front view of the process in which the ascending combination unit 750 is operated and the first ascending combination decoration 756d and the second ascending combination decoration 758c are rising.

  When the cam 754f is rotated clockwise by the operation of the drive motor 754b, the arm 756b is rotated counterclockwise by being pushed up by the front-side convex portion 754f1 of the cam 754f. When the arm portion 756b rotates counterclockwise, the first ascending combination slider 756c engaged with the arm portion 756b slides upward, and the first ascending combination slider 756c is fixed to the first ascending combination slider 756c. The rising accessory decoration portion 756d rises.

  When the first ascending combination slider 756c is slid upward by a predetermined amount, the engaging portion 756c1 of the first ascending combination slider 756c is moved to the engaging portion 758b1 of the second ascending combination slider 758b. Engage. Accordingly, the second ascending accessory slider 758b slides upward together with the first ascending accessory slider 756c, and the second ascending accessory decoration portion 758c fixed to the second ascending accessory slider 758b is moved. To rise.

  FIG. 35 (c) and FIG. 36 (c) are front views showing a state in which the first rising accessory decoration portion 756d and the second rising accessory decoration portion 758c are raised to the maximum height. When the sensor 754e (see FIG. 23) detects that the cam 754f has further rotated clockwise from the position shown in FIG. 35 (b) to the position shown in FIG. 35 (c), the solenoid 758d1 is activated. The claw portion 758d3 extends in the direction of the second rising accessory slider 758b. When the claw portion 758d3 extends, the second ascending combination slider 758b cannot slide downward, and the second ascending combination slider 758b is prevented from being lowered (locked). The second rising accessory decoration portion 758c fixed to the object slider 758b is held at the maximum height shown in FIG.

  FIGS. 35 (d) and 36 (d) are front views showing a state in which the launching accessory unit 800 is activated. The cam 754f further rotates counterclockwise from the position shown in FIG. 35C, and the engagement between the front-side convex portion 754f1 of the cam 754f and the arm portion 756b is released. As a result, the first rising combination slider 756c that engages with the arm portion 756b slides downward, and the first rising combination decoration 756d fixed to the first rising combination slider 756c moves downward. The effect of slid to (i.e., the effect of expressing that a part of the ascending accessory unit 750 showing the appearance of the rock has been destroyed and sunk downward) is executed.

  On the other hand, since the lowering of the second ascending combination slider 758b remains blocked (locked) by the extended claw portion 758d3, the second ascending combination fixed to the second ascending combination slider 758b. The object decoration portion 758c remains held at the raised position.

  When the cam 754f rotates to release the engagement between the rear-side convex portion of the cam 754f and the slider 804a (see FIG. 24) of the launching accessory unit 800, the slider 804a biased by the spring 804b moves upward. An effect that slides in the direction and the small piece role 804d is launched vigorously upward (an effect that expresses that a part of the ascending feature unit 750 showing the appearance of the rock is scattered) is executed.

In addition, at the timing shown in FIGS. 35 (d) and 36 (d), in addition to the effects by the ascending accessory unit 750 and the launching accessory unit 800, the falling unfolded accessory 712 is shown in FIGS. 30 (a) and 31. After the effect of sliding downward from the initial position shown in FIG. 30 (c) to the maximum movement position shown in FIG. 30 (c) or FIG. The effect by the rotation operation) is executed.
<Game ball passage>

In this example, as shown in FIG. 35 (c), the ascending accessory unit 750 is provided with a first game ball passage 750a and a second game ball passage 750b through which a game ball can pass, Below one game ball passage 750a, an inclined surface 750c that is inclined downward in the front direction is formed. The inclined surface 750 c serves to guide the game ball that has passed through the first game ball passage 750 a to the lower side of the game board 200. In the case of an enclosed game machine, the game balls that have passed through the first game ball passage 750a and the second game ball passage 750b may be guided to the circulation route.
<Game Ball Reservoir and Climbing Unit>

  FIG. 37A is a side sectional view of the game board 200 in a state where the ascending combination unit 750 is located at the initial position, and FIG. 37B shows a state where the ascending combination unit 750 is operating. It is side sectional drawing of the game board 200 of.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present example includes two game ball storage units, a game ball storage unit 200a5 and a second game ball storage unit 200a10. However, as shown in FIG. 37 (a), game balls that have fallen behind the pachinko machine 100 over the wall 200a3 and the like of the game board 200 are stored in any of the game ball storage units 200a5 and 200a10. In some cases, it reaches above the ascending accessory unit 750 located at the initial position and is in contact with the second ascending accessory decoration portion 758c.

In such a case, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present example moves the game ball that is in contact with the second ascending accessory decoration unit 758c as the ascending accessory unit 750 moves in accordance with the operation of the ascending accessory unit 750. From the area, it can be guided to the front game ball storage unit 200a5. For this reason, the operation of the ascending accessory unit 750 is not hindered by the game ball, and a failure of the ascending accessory unit 750 may be prevented in advance.
<Operation of the V forming accessory unit>

  FIG. 38 is a diagram showing the operation of the V forming combination unit 850 with only the V forming combination unit 850 extracted, and FIG. 39 is the operation of the V forming combination unit 850 in the state of being installed on the game board 200. FIG.

  FIGS. 38 (a) and 39 (a) show front views when the V forming accessory unit 850 is located at the initial position. FIGS. 38 (b) and 39 (b) The front view in case the forming combination unit 850 operates and is located in the intermediate position is shown.

  When the drive motor 852b1 of the V forming accessory left unit 852 is driven, the V forming left movable portion 852f rotates counterclockwise via the left link portion 852c, and drives the drive motor 854b1 of the V forming accessory right unit 854. Then, the V forming right movable portion 854f rotates clockwise via the right link portion 854c. As a result, the V formation left movable portion 852f and the V formation right movable portion 854f are in a state of being closer to each other than the initial position.

  FIGS. 38 (c) and 39 (c) show a front view when the V forming accessory unit 850 is operated and is located at the maximum movement position. When the V-formation left movable part 852f and the V-formation right movable part 854f rotate to the maximum movement position, they are in a state closer to each other than the intermediate position, and are viewed from the front by the V-formation left movable part 852f and the V-formation right movable part 854f. A V-shape is formed.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of this example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a big hit is confirmed), the V forming accessory unit 850 is operated, and the V forming left movable portion 852f and the V forming right movable portion 854f are operated. By forming a V-shape in front view, the player is configured to suggest that a predetermined condition has been established.

  As described above, the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 or the slot machine (not shown)) according to the present example is provided with the production means (for example, the drop unfolding accessory 712 shown in FIG. 20). The effect means is a means having a first structure (for example, a first structure 712b shown in FIG. 20), and the effect means is a second structure (for example, FIG. 20). And the first structure is a structure capable of unfolding effect operation, and the second structure moves in accordance with the unfolding effect operation. The first structure is moved from the first position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 30 (a)) to the fourth position (for example, FIG. 32 (d)) by the development effect operation. To the position rotated 180 ° from the initial position to the front side). It is a possible structure, and the second structure is moved from the second position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 30A) to the fifth position (for example, FIG. 32D by the development effect operation). ), The first structure at the first position (for example, the first structure 712b) is the second structure at the second position. (For example, the first structure 712b) is a structure located in front of the first structure (eg, the first structure) at the fourth position as shown in FIG. 32 (d). The body 712b) is a structure located behind the second structure (eg, the second structure 712d) at the fifth position, and the first structure is the fourth position. The foremost part of the effect means located at the position is the effect means where the first structure is located at the first position. It is located in front of the foremost part of the game table.

  According to the game stand according to the present example, it is possible to provide various effects while having a simple structure, and to improve the interest of the player in some cases. In addition, there may be a novel effect in which the effect means approaches the player side by the unfolding effect operation.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 30, the first structure (for example, the first structure 712b) at the first position is the second structure (for example, the second structure) at the second position. The structure 712d) may cover at least a part from the front. As shown in FIG. 32D, the second structure (for example, the second structure 712d) at the fifth position is the first structure (for example, the second structure 712d) at the fourth position. A structure that covers at least a part of the first structure 712b) from the front may be used.

  In addition, the effect means is means having first light emitting means (for example, first light emitting means 716a shown in FIG. 21B), and as shown in FIG. The first structure may be a structure that covers at least a part of the first light emitting unit from the front. Further, as shown in FIGS. 32A to 32D, the first light emitting means (for example, the first light emitting means 716a) includes the first structure (for example, the first structure). 712b) becomes visible by the player during the movement from the first position (for example, the position shown in FIG. 32 (a)) to the fourth position (for example, the position shown in FIG. 32 (d)). It may be a means.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 32 (d), the first structure (for example, the first structure 712b) at the fourth position is the first light emitting means (for example, the first light emitting means). 716a) may be a structure that does not cover from the front. Further, the effect means is a means having a third structure (for example, a third structure 712c shown in FIG. 20), and the third structure is the first structure (for example, the first structure 712c). It may be a structure that moves in accordance with the movement of one structure 712b). The third structure is movable from a third position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 30A) to a sixth position (for example, the position shown in FIG. 32D). It may be.

  In addition, at least a part of a second end (for example, an upper end) of the second structure (for example, the second structure 712d illustrated in FIG. 32D) at the fifth position is It is possible to contact at least a part of the third end (for example, the lower end) of the third structure (for example, the third structure 712c shown in FIG. 32 (d)) at the sixth position. Also good.

In addition, the third structure (for example, the third structure 712c shown in FIG. 32D) at the sixth position is the same as the first light emitting unit (for example, the first light emitting unit 716a). It may be a structure that covers at least a portion from the front. That is, the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 or a slot machine (not shown)) according to the present example has the effecting means (for example, the drop unfolding accessory 712 shown in FIG. 20) and the control of the effecting means. A game table provided with possible presentation control means (for example, left drive motor 704b and right drive motor 706b shown in FIG. 19, left rotation motor 712e2 and right rotation motor 712f2 shown in FIG. 20, FIG. 32, etc.) The production means is a means having a first structure (for example, the first structure 712b shown in FIG . 20 or FIG. 32 (b) to FIG. 32 (d)). Means (for example, the second structure 712d shown in FIG. 20), and the effect means is means having a third structure (for example, the third structure 712c shown in FIG. 20). , and the the presentation means A fourth structure (e.g., the fourth structure 712a shown in FIG. 20 and FIG. 32, etc.) is a means having the fourth structure, the light emitting means (e.g., FIG. 21 (b) and FIG. 32 (b) ~ a structure having a first light emitting means 716a) shown in FIG. 2 (d), the fourth structure, the driving of the performance control unit, vertically movable structures and the said first structure, said by driving the performance control unit is the fourth structure first fourth structure capable rotated to the position from the position as a fulcrum, the first One position is a position where the first structure is positioned forward of the second structure (for example, an initial position shown in FIG. 30A) , and the fourth position is the first position. position in which one of the structures is located behind the said second structure (e.g., shown in FIG. 32 (d), first A rotated 180 ° to the front side from the position location), said second structure, by the rotation of the first structure, be a second movable structures from the position to the fifth position The second position is a position where the second structure is located behind the first structure (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 30A) , and the fifth position is The second structure is a position (for example, the position shown in FIG. 32 (d)) located forward of the first structure , and the third structure is the first structure. by the rotation, a third movable structures from the position to the sixth position, the third position is a position where the third structure is positioned behind the first structure (e.g., the initial position shown in FIG. 30 (a)) is, the sixth position, the third structure is the first structure Position (e.g., the position shown in FIG. 32 (d)) also located in front is, the sixth position, the third structure is positioned to cover the part from the front of said light emitting means, said The effect means is a game machine characterized in that it can move in the vertical direction without changing the relative position of the second structure relative to the first structure.
According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, in addition to the second than the first structure with the rotation of the first structure, the third structure may be positioned in front, the It can cover a portion of the light emitting means from the front by the three structures, further, directing means, can be vertically moved without changing the relative position of the second structure relative to the first structure Therefore, there are cases where a variety of innovative effects can be provided and the player's interest can be improved.
The effect means may be a means capable of changing the number of the light emitting means covered by the third structure. Further, the first position is a position covering from the front at least a portion of said first structure prior Symbol second structure, the fifth position, the second structure before The position which covers at least one part of the 1st structure from the front may be sufficient.

  Further, the effect means is means having second light emitting means (for example, second light emitting means 714a shown in FIG. 21A), and the second light emitting means includes the first structure. It may be a means capable of emitting light when located at the first position. In addition, as shown in FIG. 21, the second light emitting means (for example, the second light emitting means 714a) is a means provided in the first structure (for example, the first structure 712b). May be.

  Further, the effect means is means having cover means (for example, cover means 718 shown in FIG. 21A). For example, as shown in FIG. 21, the cover means is the second light emitting means ( For example, it is means for covering the second light emitting means 714a). For example, as shown in FIGS. 32 (a) to (d), the cover means is the first structure of the first structure. It may be a means capable of changing a relative position with the second light emitting means during the movement from the position to the fourth position.

  Further, the effect means is means having third light emitting means (for example, light emitting means (LED) provided on the back side of the light emitting substrate 714 shown in FIG. 21A), and the third light emitting means. May be means capable of emitting light when the first structure is located at the fourth position. The third light emitting unit may be a unit provided in the first structure. The rendering means is a means having a light emitting substrate (for example, the light emitting substrate 714 shown in FIG. 21A), and the second light emitting means (for example, the second light emitting means 714a) is the light emitting substrate. The third light emitting means may be a means provided on the second surface of the light emitting substrate.

  In addition, the foremost part (the part that protrudes the most forward) of the effect means (for example, the drop deployment accessory 712 shown in FIG. 32D) in which the first structure is located at the fourth position is The first structure may be located in front of the foremost part of the effect means (for example, the drop deploying accessory 712 shown in FIG. 30) located at the first position.

  The first structure may be a rotatable structure. Moreover, a display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 2) may be provided, and the effect means may be a means that can move in front of the display means. The first structure may be a structure that can rotate around an axis parallel to the display means (for example, an axis parallel to the longitudinal direction of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 2). .

  Further, the effect means may be a means having a second light emitting substrate, and the first light emitting means may be a means provided on the second light emitting substrate. The second light emitting board may be a board that relays the presentation control means and the light emitting board. Further, the effect means may be means having drive means, and the drive means may be means for moving the first structure.

  Further, the second light emitting substrate may be a substrate that relays the effect control means and the driving means. Further, the effect means may be means having detection means, and the detection means may be means for detecting the first structure located at the first position. Further, the second light emitting substrate may be a substrate that relays the effect control means and the detection means.

  The second light emitting board is a board having a first connector, the first connector is connected to a first harness, and the first harness is connected to the driving means and the detection. The first harness connected to the means may be a bifurcated harness.

  Further, the effect means may be a means having a fourth structure, and the fourth structure may be a structure having the second light emitting substrate. One of the first structure and the fourth structure is a structure having a first magnet, and the other of the first structure and the fourth structure is The first magnetic body or the second magnet is a structural body, and the first magnetic body or the second magnet is attracted to the first magnet, whereby the first structural body is The first position may be maintained.

  Further, the first magnetic body or the second magnet may be adsorbed to the first magnet via non-magnetism. One of the first structure and the third structure is a structure having a third magnet, and the other of the first structure and the third structure is , A second magnetic body or a structure having a fourth magnet, and the second magnetic body or the fourth magnet is attracted to the third magnet, whereby the third structure is The sixth position may be maintained.

  Further, the second magnetic body or the fourth magnet may be attracted to the third magnet via a non-magnetic body. Further, the effect means may be a means having two or more driving means. Further, the effect means may be a means having two or more detection means. Further, the effect means may be a means having two or more of the second structures. Further, the effect means may be a means having two or three or more third structures. The first structure may have a first image display unit capable of displaying an image at the first position. The first structure may include second image display means capable of displaying an image at the fourth position.

  Further, the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 or a slot machine (not shown)) according to the present example includes a first driving unit (for example, a driving motor 754b shown in FIG. 23) and a second driving unit. (For example, the solenoid 758d1 shown in FIG. 23), the first effect means (for example, the second ascending accessory decoration portion 758c of the ascending accessory unit 750 shown in FIG. 23), and the second effect means (for example, 23. A gaming machine equipped with a first ascending accessory decoration portion 756d) of the ascending accessory unit 750 shown in FIG. 23, wherein the first rendering means is driven by the first driving means. (For example, the operation of raising the second rising accessory decoration portion 758c shown in FIGS. 35 (a) to (c)). Second operation by driving the first driving means 35 (a) to FIG. 35 (c), for example, is a means capable of executing the first ascending accessory decoration portion 756d ascending), and the second action by the second rendering means. In the meantime, the first operation by the first effect means is executed, and the first effect means is operated by driving the second drive means to activate a third action (for example, actuating a solenoid 758d1). The game machine is characterized in that it is a means capable of executing the action of lowering the second rising accessory decoration portion 758c).

  According to the game stand according to the present example, it is possible to provide various effects while having a simple structure, and to improve the interest of the player in some cases.

  The first operation may be an operation different from the third operation. Also, for example, as shown in FIGS. 35 (a) to (c), the first operation is performed when the first rendering means is in the first position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 35 (a)). ) To a second position (for example, the maximum height position shown in FIG. 35C). In the third operation, the first effect means (for example, the second ascending accessory decoration portion 758c) moves to the first position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 35A). It may be an action.

  In the second operation, the second rendering means moves from the third position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 35A) to the fourth position (for example, the maximum height shown in FIG. 35C). It may be an operation to move to the next position. In addition, the first effect means (for example, the second ascending accessory decoration portion 758c) contacts (engages) the second effect means (eg, the first ascending accessory decoration portion 756d). By this, it may be a means capable of executing the first operation.

  Further, the first effect means (for example, the second ascending accessory decoration portion 758c) is prevented from being lowered (locked) by the fifth position (for example, the claw portion 758d3 shown in FIG. 35 (d)). The fifth position is the first position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 35A) and the second position (for example, FIG. 35). It may be a position between (the position of the maximum height shown in (c)).

  Further, the second position (for example, the position of the maximum height shown in FIG. 35 (c)) is a position higher than the first position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 35 (a)), The first rendering means is configured so that, by its own weight, the nail shown in the fifth position (for example, FIG. 35 (d)) from the second position (for example, the position of the maximum height illustrated in FIG. 35 (c)). It may be a means capable of moving to a position where the lowering is prevented (locked) by the portion 758d3. Further, the first effect means is driven by the second drive means so that the lowering is prevented (locked) by the claw portion 758d3 shown in FIG. 35 (d). ) To a first position (for example, an initial position shown in FIG. 35A).

  The first driving means may be a motor or a solenoid. The second driving means may be a motor or a solenoid. Moreover, a 3rd effect means may be provided and the said 3rd effect means may be a means which can perform a 4th operation | movement by the drive of a said 1st drive means. Moreover, a 4th presentation means is provided, The said 4th presentation means may be a means which can perform a 5th operation | movement by the drive of a said 1st drive means. The first rendering means may include at least one of a light emitting means, a display means, and another driving means. The second rendering means may include at least one of light emitting means, display means, and other driving means.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 or a slot machine (not shown)) according to this example discharges the game ball that has entered the stage (for example, the stage 244 shown in FIG. 2) to the outside of the gaming table. Ball passage portions (for example, an arm portion 756b shown in FIG. 35 (b), a first game ball passage 750a shown in FIG. 35 (c), and a second game ball passage 750b shown in FIG. 35 (c)). The game machine is characterized in that it includes a movable body for production (for example, an ascending accessory unit 750 shown in FIG. 35).

  According to the gaming machine according to the present example, there may be a case where unnecessary game balls can be discharged out of the gaming machine at the same time as providing an effect.

  The effect movable body may be a movable body located behind the stage. The effect movable body is a movable body having an arm portion (for example, an arm portion 756b shown in FIG. 37). For example, as shown in FIGS. May be an arm portion whose angle can be changed by the operation of the effect movable body, and the arm portion may be an arm portion capable of discharging a game ball by changing the angle. Further, it may be provided with first ball passage means (for example, first game ball passage 750a shown in FIG. 35C) through which the game ball discharged by the operation of the effect movable body can pass.

  Further, the first ball passage means (for example, the first game ball passage 750a shown in FIG. 35C) is one side in the left-right direction of the effect movable body (for example, the front of the ascending accessory unit 750). It may be a means provided on the left side). In addition, second ball passage means (for example, second game ball passage 750b shown in FIG. 35C) through which a game ball discharged by the operation of the effect movable body can pass is provided. Also good. Further, the second ball passage means may be a means provided on the other side of the movable body in the left-right direction (for example, the right side of the ascending accessory unit 750 when viewed from the front). The second ball passage means may be a means provided with a substrate (for example, the relay substrate 806 shown in FIGS. 24 and 25), and the substrate may be an insulating means (for example, FIG. It may be a means provided with a protective film 808) shown in FIG.

  Further, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 or a slot machine (not shown)) according to the present example can receive the game ball that has entered the back of the stage (for example, the stage 244 shown in FIG. 2). It is a gaming machine characterized by comprising a large receiving part (for example, the game ball storage part 200a5 shown in FIGS. 14 to 16).

  According to the game stand according to the present example, an unnecessary game ball can be easily removed by a store clerk or the like of the game store, and the maintainability may be improved.

  Further, the receiving part may be a receiving part capable of storing game balls. The receiving part may be a receiving part capable of discharging a game ball. The receiving portion is a receiving portion capable of storing a game ball when in the first state, and the receiving portion discharges the game ball when in the second state. The first state is a state capable of storing game balls that have entered the back of the stage, and the second state has entered the back of the stage. The game ball may not be stored.

  Moreover, the said receiving part has a storage part which can store a game ball, and the said receiving part has a guide part (for example, guide part 200a6 shown in FIG. 16) which guides a game ball to the said storage part. You may have. Moreover, the said guidance | induction part may incline toward the said storage part. Further, a wall portion (for example, a wall portion 200a3 shown in FIGS. 14 to 16) is provided between the stage and the receiving portion. For example, as shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the stage includes the wall portion. The receiving portion may be provided at a position lower than the upper end portion of the wall portion.

  Further, a movable body (for example, a second ascending accessory decorative portion 758d of the ascending accessory unit 750 shown in FIG. 37) may be provided, and the receiving portion may be a receiving portion provided in front of the movable body. . For example, as shown in FIG. 37, the receiving part may be a receiving part capable of receiving a game ball that has been in contact with the movable body by the operation of the movable body. For example, as shown in FIG. 37, the receiving part may be provided in a region different from the operation region of the movable body. Further, a ball passage (for example, a game ball passage 200a11 shown in FIG. 14) may be provided below the receiving portion.

  Further, the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 or a slot machine (not shown)) according to the present example has a structure (for example, a center accessory opening 900a shown in FIG. 28) (for example, 28, and a movable body (for example, a falling and unfolding role 712 shown in FIG. 28), wherein a part of the movable body is removed from the window. Is a game stand characterized by being visible.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present example, the movable body can be displayed in various ways, and the effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, when the movable body (for example, the dropping and unfolding accessory 712 shown in FIG. 28) is located at the first position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 31 (a)), When a part can be visually recognized by the player and the movable body is located at the second position (for example, the maximum movement position shown in FIG. 31 (c)), the player can remove the movable body from the window. It may be invisible.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 31A, the movable body positioned at the first position may be a movable body overlapped with the structure. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 31C, the movable body positioned at the second position may be a movable body that does not overlap the structure. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 31C, the movable body positioned at the second position may be visible to the player.

  Further, the movable body is provided with display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 31A and 31B), and the movable body located at the second position is a movable body that overlaps the display means. There may be. Further, the movable body may be a movable body having light emitting means (for example, second light emitting means 714a shown in FIG. 21A).

  Further, at least a part of the structure (for example, the first portion 902a of the center accessory opening 900a shown in FIG. 29) may be transparent or translucent. Moreover, the site | part which has the 1st display (for example, character) may be sufficient as the site | part overlapped with the said structure of the said movable body located in said 1st position. The first display may be a character or a character. Further, a part of the movable body visible to the player from the window portion may have a second display (for example, the character's face shown in FIG. 28). Further, the second display may be a display having an outline corresponding to the outline of the window portion. Further, the window part may have a transmissive part having transparency, and the window part may be an opening part.

  Further, the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 or a slot machine (not shown)) according to this example has a decorative cover (for example, a decorative cover of the center accessory 900 shown in FIG. 28) and light emission that can emit light. Means (for example, a drop unfolding accessory 712 shown in FIG. 28), and a transmission portion (for example, a first portion 902a of the center accessory opening 900a shown in FIG. 29) of the decorative cover. ), The player can visually recognize the light from the light emitting means, and the light emitting means is a movable means.

  According to the game stand according to the present example, there are cases where the effects by the light emitting means can be varied and the effects can be enhanced.

  Further, the decorative cover may be a non-movable decorative cover (for example, a decorative cover of the center accessory 900 shown in FIG. 28). In addition, as shown in FIG. 31 (c), the light emitting means (for example, the drop and unfolding accessory 712 shown in FIG. 28) is not passed through the decorative cover (for example, the decorative cover of the center accessory 900 shown in FIG. 318). The player may be able to see the light from the player. Further, as shown in FIG. 31 (a), the light emitting means (for example, the dropping and unfolding accessory 712 shown in FIG. 28) located at the first position is connected to the decorative cover (eg, the center accessory shown in FIG. 318). 900, a decorative cover). Further, as shown in FIG. 31 (c), the light emitting means (for example, the dropping and unfolding accessory 712 shown in FIG. 28) located at the second position is connected to the decorative cover (eg, the center accessory shown in FIG. 318). 900 non-overlapping means).

  Further, the light emitting means (for example, the drop unfolding accessory 712 shown in FIG. 28) is a means having a second decorative cover (for example, the cover means 718 of the drop unfolding combination 712), and the second decorative cover. May be transparent or translucent, and the second decorative cover may be a decorative cover movable in accordance with movement of the light emitting means.

  The light emitted from the light emitting means is light that can be visually recognized by the player through the second decorative cover (for example, the cover means 718 of the drop unfolding accessory 712) and the decorative cover (for example, the center accessory 900). There may be. In addition, a second light emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, the light emitting substrate 904 shown in FIG. 28 or FIG. 29) is provided, and the player can visually recognize the light from the second light emitting means through the decorative cover. The second light emitting means may be a non-movable means.

  In addition, a first part of the decorative cover (for example, a first part 902a shown in FIG. 29) is a part through which light from the light emitting means can pass, and a first part of the decorative cover (for example, The first part 902a) shown in FIG. 29 may be a part through which light from the second light emitting means can pass. The first part may be colorless or colored.

In addition, a second part (for example, second part 902b shown in FIG. 28) of the decorative cover is a part that does not transmit light of the light emitting means, and a second part (for example, FIG. 28) of the decorative cover. The second portion 902b) shown in FIG. 5 may be a portion that does not transmit light from the second light emitting means. The decorative cover may be configured to be movable. The light emitting means may be capable of emitting light in the first mode at the first position, and the light emitting means may be capable of emitting light in the second mode at the second position, The first aspect and the second aspect may be different or the same.
<Embodiment>

Next, a gaming table (for example, a ball game machine such as pachinko machine 100 or a spinning machine such as a slot machine) according to another embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail. Note that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 40 to 82 are used only in the description of the present embodiment in principle. The reference numerals 40 to 82 are given priority. In addition, the number of the example of this embodiment is used only for the description of this embodiment in principle, but each example of this embodiment and each example of other embodiments are applied in combination with each other. Can do. In addition, when there are drawings showing the same timing in a plurality of drawings, overlapping description may be omitted.
<Overall configuration>

  First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 includes, as an external structure, an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface. The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is attached to the front side of the main body 104 via a hinge portion 112 so that the inside Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor 109 that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage tray is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and is provided with a door-side ball passage unit that guides the game balls to the launching device. An upper plate 126, a lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, and a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by a player's operation. , A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 by the player's operation to a game ball collecting container (common name, dollar box), and a game guided to the launching device 110 by the player's operation The ball launching handle 134 that launches the ball to the game area 124 of the game board 200, the chance button 136 that changes the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 by the player's operation, and the chance button 136 are illuminated. Provided that the chance button lamp 138, a. In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The setting operation unit 137 is a push button type switch that can be pressed by a setting person (for example, a player or the like), a confirmation (OK) button, an upper button located above the confirmation button, and a lower part of the confirmation button. , A right button located to the right of the confirm button, a left button located to the left of the confirm button, and a cancel (C) button located further to the right of the right button. Yes. In addition, the setting operation unit 137 includes an operation unit sensor 427 (see FIG. 43) that detects the pressing operation of each button. The setting operation unit 137 of the present embodiment has a unit structure in which buttons and operation unit sensors are integrated. It should be noted that at least one of the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 may be configured to have the same function as the chance button 136 described above.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. . The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.
<Back of pachinko machine>

  41 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 40 viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is located below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-board that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error release switch that constitutes a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and that releases an error by the operation of a game clerk Discharge board case 172 storing the payout board 170 having 168, launch base constituting the launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of the game ball A launch board case 176 that houses 174, a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines, and a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game store clerk and an RWM clear by being operated when the power is turned on A power board case 184 that houses a power board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs a signal to the main controller 300, and a CR interface 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided. ing.
<Front of game board>

  FIG. 42 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the ordinary device. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”. The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In this embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7 segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The multi-purpose hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general-purpose variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. In this embodiment, the general-purpose variable games are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are being held. In this embodiment, the special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general prize opening 226, a general start port 228, a first special view start port 230, a second special view start port 232, around the effect device 206. A variable winning opening 234 is provided.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detecting sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning is sometimes referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player is sometimes referred to as “rental ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is constituted by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball for the upper plate 126. The special figure changing game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric Chu). In the present embodiment, only one second special figure starting port 232 is disposed directly below the first special figure starting port 230. The second special figure starting port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the wing member 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a large winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is disposed below the center of the game board 200. This variable winning opening 234 includes a door member 234a that can be opened and closed. When the door member 234a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and the special figure display device stops the big hit symbol when the special figure variable game is won. When displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds) and at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable prize opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, After guiding a ball that has not won any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening is provided for discharging to the game island side.

The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with the strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and Further, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 148 and driven into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc. (Outside the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.
<Directing device 206>

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball carried on by a nail of the game board 200, or the like, and the passed ball is a first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the golf course.

  In this embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b imitating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b at a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding means shields the inner end portions thereof so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.
<Control unit>

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and the power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. Yes.
<Main control unit>

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing are mounted. . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a counter circuit 318 used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes two circuits). And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, front frame door opening sensor, and inner frame opening sensor. And a sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a lower plate full sensor and outputting a comparison result with an amplification result or a reference voltage to the counter circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device For example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, a predetermined symbol display device, A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the general-purpose display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, a general-purpose reservation lamp 216, a first special figure reservation lamp 218, a second special figure reservation lamp 220, a high-probability medium) A drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the lamp 222 and the like, and various solenoids 332 for opening and closing a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232, a door member 234a of the variable winning port 234, and the like. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the above is connected.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the counter circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the counter circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the counter circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the second special figure starting port 232 has won a ball, the counter circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.
<Sub control unit>

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effects data, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and for measuring time, frequency, etc. The counter timer 412 is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button detection sensor 426 for detecting depression of the chance button 136, and pressing of each button of the setting operation unit 137 An operation unit sensor 427 that detects an operation, a sensor circuit 428 that outputs detection signals from the shielding device sensor 430, chance button detection sensor 426, and operation unit sensor 427 to the basic circuit 402, and a ROM 406 based on a signal from the CPU 404. Read stored image data, etc. It is connected to generate a display image using the rear for displaying an image on the decorative pattern display apparatus 208 VDP434 a (video display processor), a.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and frequency 512 is installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, and an image display A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. Is output to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table frame lamp drive for controlling the game table frame lamp 542 The circuit 540 is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.
<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the dispensing device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.
<Type of design>

  Next, using FIGS. 44A to 44C, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described. FIG. 4A shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special figure.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor has detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” by repeating all lighting of seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 displays “fluctuation display of special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Do. These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display according to the present invention.

  Then, when the variation time determined before the variation start of the special figure 1 (corresponding to the variation time referred to in the present invention) elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the special symbol form of the special figure 1. When the variation time determined before the start of variation 2 (this also corresponds to the variation time according to the present invention) has elapsed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special diagram 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display referred to in the present invention, hereinafter, after the “variable display of special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. The series of displays up to is referred to as symbol variation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. In FIG. 10A, 10 types of special figures from “Special figure A” to “Special figure F” and “Special figure a” to “Special figure d” are shown as the stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display. In the figure, the white portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  “Special figure A” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, the determination as to whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the decision as to whether or not a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time-saving state. Although the time reduction will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal high probability state, and the state that does not shift to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal low probability state. “Special figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that give a relatively large profit amount to the player.

  “Special figure a” is a 16R special jackpot symbol, and “Special figure b” is an 8R special jackpot symbol, both of which are in a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. “Special figure c” is a 8R jackpot symbol, which is a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. "Special figure C" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state. “Special figure D” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time reduction, and is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure D” is 2R compared to “Special Figure B” which is 15R. "Special figure E" is a small hit symbol, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. In addition, “special drawing F” and “special drawing d” are out-of-order symbols, and are the symbols in which the profit amount given to the player is relatively small.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, symbols other than “Special Illustration A” are prepared as 15R special jackpot symbols, and the same applies to other symbols such as 15R jackpot symbols.

  FIG. 44 (b) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Displayed in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →... “Decoration display of decorative pattern” is performed.

  For example, when the 15R jackpot of “Special Figure B” is notified, a symbol combination in which three same decorative symbols corresponding to the 15R jackpot are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, “decoration 1—decoration 1—decoration”). 1 ”or“ decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2 ”). When notifying the 15R special jackpot of “special drawing A”, a combination of three symbols of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” or “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7”). Etc.) is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when notifying of the difference between “special drawing F” and “special drawing d”, symbol combinations other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 5B are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

FIG. 44 (c) shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes for ordinary maps, “general diagram A” which is a winning symbol and “general symbol B” which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that a sphere has passed through the general-purpose start opening 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the usual figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 6C, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.
<Main control unit main processing>

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal is input executes a main control unit main process according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306 after resetting by a reset interrupt.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value. In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 9v), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312 and a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not the state before the power interruption (before power interruption) is restored, and the state before the power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of an amusement store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicates that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the power-off state. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. Further, a RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 43 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

In step S115, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the ordinary figure winning random number counter and the special figure random value counter, the ordinary figure timer random number value, and the special figure timer, respectively. Two random number counters for generating each random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a normal timer random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal timer random value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. Note that the initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.
<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle. In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT is periodically updated (so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 43 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. Is determined to have passed.

  In other words, it is determined that a prize has been awarded to the winning ports 226 and 234 and the starting ports 230, 232, and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, Two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the random number value of FIG. 1 and the counter for acquiring the random value of FIG. 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when winning holes 226, 234 and starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, the RAM 308 stores the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, and the variable winning port 234. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S203. When a winning is made at the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is stored in the special counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. And a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random value as a special figure 1 random value and storing it in the corresponding random value storage area. When a winning is made to the second special figure starting port 232 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is sent from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 to the special figure 2 winning random number value. And a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random value as a special figure 2 random value and storing it in the corresponding random value storage area. If there is a win at the general figure starting port 228 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is obtained as a normal figure winning random value from the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number value. Store in the corresponding random value storage area. When there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in the off symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines one of the winning symbols (the common symbol A shown in FIG. 44 (c)) and the off symbol (the universal symbol B shown in FIG. 44 (c)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 232a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out, the usual figure out flag is turned on as will be described later. When the off-normal flag is on, the normal state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing at which the normal stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In step S224, special figure prefetch processing is performed for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 (details will be described later). Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed in accordance with the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game).

  In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 controls the turning on / off of the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214, and then confirms the special diagram 2 using the second special symbol display device 214. Display. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not (details will be described later), the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state).

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Alternatively, the door member 234a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234 until a winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable prize opening 234. In addition to outputting a signal to be held at the same time, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and a closing period is stored in a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment) and finished, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) In other words, the effect standby period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Set the information indicating. Also, if the normal probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the time reduction number 100 is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the time reduction number is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned ON. The time saving here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is a normal high probability state. There is a higher probability of hitting a general-purpose variable game in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal figure variable game and the fluctuation time of the special figure variable game are shorter in the normal figure high probability state than in the normal figure low probability state. Further, in the normal high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special start port 232 tends to be longer than in the normal low probability state. In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a large number of games will be placed in the second special figure starting port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls are entered during the big win game. There is a problem that a ball enters and the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. This is to solve this problem. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of the way, the off flag is turned on as will be described later. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. Further, the notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the second special figure starting port 232 is notified. However, it is performed in preference to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the first special figure starting port 230.

  In step S233, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (In this embodiment, command types such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command are specified. Possible information), bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol change start command, the command data includes the big hit flag and small hit flag values, the special figure probability fluctuation flag value, the special figure stop symbol selected in the special drawing related lottery process, and the timer number. In the case of a symbol variation stop command, including a value for a special symbol variation time, including a value of a big hit flag, a small hit flag, a value of a special symbol probability variation flag, etc., a winning effect command and an end effect start In the case of a command, the value of a special figure probability variation flag is included, and in the case of a jackpot round number designation command, the value of a special figure probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, winning of the variable winning port 234 Includes presence or absence.

  In the above rotation start setting transmission process, the big hit flag and the small hit flag value, the special figure probability variation flag value, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure 2 related lottery stored in the RAM 308 as command data. Information indicating the timer number selected in the process, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the big hit flag, the small hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described large winning opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In the above-mentioned big winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a full tray error is monitored. When the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the normal symbol display device 210 and the first special symbol display via the display circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241.

  In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to.

On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. Then, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit.
<Special figure look-ahead processing>

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of special figure prefetching processing (step S224) of the main control unit timer interrupt processing. In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 prefetches the start information increased in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol before the success / failure judgment process, and obtains a predetermination result (special The figure prefetching result) is stored in the prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308 (see FIGS. 48A to 48C).

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 prefetch result and the number of special figure 1 prefetch results stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit are specially displayed. A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area for storing as one pre-reading number is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 prefetching result with the highest rank (first) is erased and the remaining special figure 1 prefetching result Are processed so that the rank of the data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 1 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 1 prefetch result data of the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 prefetch result and the number of special figure 2 prefetch results stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit are shown in FIG. A special figure 2 prefetch number storage area for storing the prefetch number is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 prefetching result having the highest rank is deleted and the order of the remaining special figure 2 prefetching result data Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 2 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 2 prefetch data having the lowest rank.

  In the special figure prefetching process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the starting information of the special figure 2 has increased (step S251). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased is stored in, for example, the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. Special figure 2 Compared with the number of pre-reads. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 has increased when the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, and the special figure 2 hold number is the special figure 2 prefetch number. If they are equal, it is determined that the starting information in FIG. 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the starting information of FIG. 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S252. If it is determined that the starting information of FIG. 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S254.

  In step S252, the increased special figure 2 starting information (a special figure 2 winning random value and a pair of special figure 2 random value) is obtained before the success / failure determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). FIG. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information and the determination table for special determination 2 and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 2 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S229). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S253 following step S252, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S254.

  In step S254, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information in FIG. 1 has increased. Whether or not the starting information of the special figure 1 has increased is determined by, for example, the special figure 1 holding number stored in the special figure 1 holding number storage area and the special figure 1 pre-reading number storage as in the special figure 2. The comparison is made with the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the area. If it is determined that the starting information of FIG. 1 is increasing, the process proceeds to step S255, and if it is determined that the starting information of FIG. Return to timer interrupt processing.

  In step S255, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-electric support is being performed. If it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S256, and if it is determined that the non-electric support is not being performed (the electric support is being performed (ordinary high probability state)), the process proceeds to step S258. In this example, it is determined whether or not non-electric support is being performed, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 prefetch notice is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-electric support.

  In step S256, the increased special figure 1 starting information (special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random value pair) is processed before the success determination process in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231). FIG. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information and the determination table for special determination and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 1 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected as the special figure 1 related lottery. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S231). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S257 following step S256, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In step S258, the pre-read result for pre-Fig. 1 is stored in the RAM 308 in place of the stop symbol information instead of pre-reading the start-up information without pre-reading the increased special-Fig. 1 start information. Stored in the earliest free area in the copy Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined. However, all start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the starting information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-read result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 All the prefetching results in the section may be transmitted to the first sub-control section 400.

In addition, pre-reading is always executed for the starting information of the increased special figure 2, and pre-reading is always executed for the increased starting information of the special figure 1 except during the electric support. It may be determined by lottery whether or not to pre-read the starting information in FIG. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the prefetch result from the main control unit 300, for example, it may be determined by lottery whether to perform prefetch notification for each hold. Regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the start information increases, prefetching is always executed and the prefetching result is stored in the prefetching result storage unit. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether or not to perform lottery and presentation using the pre-read result. Further, the start information and the prefetch result of each special figure may be stored in one start information and the prefetch result storage unit without providing an area for storing the start information and the prefetch result for each special figure. good.
<Prefetch result information>

  FIG. 48 illustrates a state in which prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 6A shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 6A, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 1 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of Special Figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 5A, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special drawing E” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage area “hold 2” stores “special drawing E” as stop symbol information. ”(Out of line) is stored,“ Special Figure D ”(small hit) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area“ Hold 3 ”, and“ Special Figure A ”is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area“ Hold 4 ”. (15R special jackpot) is stored.

  FIG. 5B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 6B, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (4 in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 2 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 5B, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special drawing d” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4” have stop symbols. Information is not stored. In FIG. 5B, the state where the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

  FIG. 6C shows an example of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 during the electric support. As shown in FIG. 5C, “undecided” information is stored in the storage area “hold 1” instead of the stopped symbol information. In the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”, neither stop symbol information nor “undecided” information is stored.

In the above description, an example is given in which only stop symbols are pre-determined and only stop symbol information is stored in the pre-read result storage unit. However, the determination result, variable timer number (variable time), timer group to be described later, etc. The information may be determined and stored in the prefetch result storage unit, and may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 as prefetch result information.
<Special drawing 1 related lottery processing>

  Next, the special figure 1 lottery process in the main control unit timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure 1 related lottery process.

  In step S281, it is determined whether or not the special symbol or special electric accessory is in operation, that is, whether or not the special figure 1 variable game or big hit game is in progress, and if applicable, the process is terminated. If not, the process proceeds to step S282. In step S282, it is determined whether or not there is a special figure 1 variable game on hold. If there is no special figure 1 variable game on hold, the process ends. If there is a hold, the process proceeds to step S283.

  In step S283, it is determined whether the above-mentioned special figure probability variation flag is ON or OFF. If the special figure probability variation flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S284, and a high probability table for success / failure determination to be described later [see FIG. ] Using the lottery data, the big hit determination (big hit determination) and the small hit determination (small hit determination) are performed, and if the special figure probability variation flag is OFF, the process proceeds to step S285 to determine the success described later. Using the lottery data of the determination low probability table [special figure 1], big hit determination (big hit determination) and small hit determination (small hit determination) are performed.

  In step S286, it is determined whether or not the big hit determination result is a big win. If yes, the process proceeds to step S287, and if not, the process proceeds to step S288. In step S287, a symbol lottery is performed based on the jackpot success / failure determination result and the symbol random number value, and the jackpot symbol (in this embodiment, in the case of Special Figure 1, any one of Special Figure A to Special Figure D, Special Figure 2). In this case, after any of the special drawings a to c is determined, the process proceeds to step S291.

  In step S288, it is determined whether or not the small hitting result is a small hit. If yes, the process proceeds to step S289, and if not, the process proceeds to step S290. In step S 289, a symbol lottery is performed based on the above-described small hit / no-go determination result and the symbol random number value, and the small hit symbol (in this embodiment, in the case of special figure 1, special figure E and special figure 2 are small hits). After determining (none), the process proceeds to step S291.

  In step S290, a symbol lottery is performed based on the random number value of the symbol, and after determining the off symbol (in this embodiment, the special symbol F in the case of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol d in the case of the special symbol 2), Proceed to step S291. In step S291, a variation type lottery is performed on the basis of the type of special figure stop symbol determined in steps S286 to S290 and the number of currently stored memory (at the start of fluctuation of special figure 2) to determine the fluctuation pattern and special figure fluctuation time. To do.

In the above special figure 2 related lottery process, the lottery process related to special figure 2 is performed. Of the special figure 1 related lottery processes shown in FIG. The table [Special Figure 1] is replaced with a high probability table for determination of success / failure [Special Figure 2], and the low probability table for determination of success / failure [Special Figure 1] is replaced with a low probability table for determination of success / failure [Special Figure 2]. Since the process is the same as the process without the determination, the description thereof is omitted.
<Data table of main control unit>

Next, a data table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.
<Win / fail judgment table>

  The low probability table for determination of success / failure [Special Figure 1] shown in FIG. 50A is an example of a table used for determination of the success / failure of Special Figure 1 when the special figure probability is in the special figure low probability state. It is the table which linked | related and memorize | stored the numerical value range and the success / failure result of FIG. Moreover, the high probability table for success / failure determination [Special Figure 1] shown in FIG. 5B is an example of a table used for the success / failure determination of Special Figure 1 when the special figure probability is in the special figure high probability state. It is the table which linked | related and stored the range of the winning random number value, and the success / failure result of FIG.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 refers to the success / failure determination low probability table [Special Figure 1] when the special figure probability is in the special figure low probability state, and based on the acquired special figure winning random number value, Judgment whether special figure 1 variable game is won (big hit), special figure 1 variable game is won (small hit), or wrong (missed) In the case where the special figure 1 is in the special figure high probability state, the special figure winning random number value (details will be described later) is obtained by referring to the high probability table for success / failure determination [special figure 1]. The big hit judgment or the small hit judgment of FIG. 1 is performed.

  For example, when the special figure probability is in the special figure low probability state and the acquired special figure winning random number value is 10001 to 10219, it is determined that the special figure 1 variable game is won (big hit) and the big hit provided in the RAM 308 Information indicating that it is a big hit in the flag storage area is set (hereinafter, setting the big hit information in the big hit flag storage area is referred to as “setting the big hit flag on”).

  Further, when the special figure probability is in the special figure low probability state and the acquired special figure winning random number value is 10220 to 10383, it is determined that the special figure 1 variable game is won (small hit) and is provided in the RAM 308. Information indicating that the small hit flag is stored in the small hit flag storage area is set (hereinafter, the setting of the small hit information in the small hit flag storage area is referred to as “setting the small hit flag ON”).

  In the case where the special figure probability is in the special figure low probability state, if the acquired special figure winning random number value is 0 to 10000 or 10384 to 65535, it is determined that the special figure 1 variable game is lost, and The information indicating that there is a shift in the storage area for the big hit flag and the small hit flag is set (hereinafter referred to as setting the big hit flag to OFF) Setting the deviation information in the small hit flag storage area is referred to as “setting the small hit flag off”).

  The failure determination low probability table [Special Figure 2] shown in FIG. 6C is an example of a table used for the determination of special figure 2 when the special figure probability is in the special figure low probability state. It is the table which linked | related and memorize | stored the numerical value range and the success / failure result of FIG. Further, the high / bad determination probability table [Special Figure 2] shown in FIG. 4D is an example of a table used for the determination of special figure 2 when the special figure probability is in the special figure high probability state. It is the table which linked | related and stored the range of the winning random number value, and the success / failure result of FIG.

When the special figure probability is in the special figure low probability state, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 refers to the low probability table for special determination [Special figure 2], and acquires the special figure winning random number value (details will be described later). ) To determine whether the special figure 2 variable game is won (big hit) or wrong (missed) (special figure 2 big hit judgment). In such a case, the jackpot determination of special figure 2 is performed based on the acquired special figure winning random number value (details will be described later) with reference to the high probability table for determination of success / failure [special figure 2]. Note that the special figure 2 variable game is configured not to win a small hit.
<Special figure determination table>

  The special figure determination table [Special Figure 1] and the special figure determination table [Special Figure 2] shown in FIGS. 51 (a) and 51 (b) include the above-described big hit flag and small hit flag (result of determination of success / failure), and symbols. It is the data table which linked | related and stored the random value and the kind of special figure stop symbol by the 1st, 2nd special figure display apparatuses 212 and 214. FIG.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table, the above jackpot determination result (the value of the big hit flag), the small hit determination result (the value of the small hit flag), and the acquired symbol random number value. Based on this, a special symbol lottery for determining the type of the special symbol stop symbol is performed. When the big hit flag is on, the obtained big hit symbol random number value is used as the symbol random number value, and when the big hit flag is on, the small bonus symbol generated from the above special figure winning random number value is used. Use the random number value as the design random number value, and if the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off (when the big hit judgment result and the small hit judgment result are out of date), use the acquired off-set design random number value as the design random number value. To do.

  In the present embodiment, in the special figure 1 variable game, referring to the special figure determination table [special figure 1] in FIG. 10A, when the big hit flag is on (when the determination result is a big hit), When the acquired symbol random number value is 0-24, the special symbol A has a probability of 25/100, and when the acquired symbol random number value is 25-49, the special symbol B has the probability of 25 /. Is 50 to 54, the special figure C is selected with a probability of 5/100, and when the acquired symbol random number is 55 to 99, the special figure D is selected with a probability of 45/100. In addition, when the small hit flag is on (when the determination result is a small hit), the special figure E (small hit) is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the design random number, and the big hit flag and the small hit flag are set. When it is off (when the determination result is out of date), the special figure F (out) is selected with a probability of 100/100 (100%) regardless of the design random number value.

Also, in the special figure 2 variable game, when the big hit flag is on (when the determination result is a big hit), the special figure a has a probability of 70/100 when the acquired symbol random number is 0 to 69. When the acquired symbol random value is 70 to 74, the special symbol b is selected with a probability of 5/100, and when the acquired symbol random value is 75 to 99, the special symbol c is selected with a probability of 25/100. In the special figure 2 variable game, when the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off (when the result of the determination is wrong), the special figure d (missed) is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the design random number value. To do. In the special figure 2 variable game, unlike the special figure 1 variable game, the probability that the small hit is selected is set to 0%.
<Variable display time determination table>

  FIG. 52 is an example of a special figure 1 fluctuation display time determination table used for determining the fluctuation time of special figure 1. FIG. 53 shows a special figure 2 fluctuation used for determining the fluctuation time of special figure 2. It is an example of a display time determination table.

  The variable display time determination table is a table in which the types of the special figure stop symbols described above, the special figure fluctuation time, the effects performed using the decorative symbol display device 208 when the special figure fluctuates, and the random value are stored in association with each other. It is. The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 performs a variation pattern lottery for determining the variation time of the special figure and the effect of the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the variation display time determination table and the acquired random value.

For example, when determining the fluctuation time of special figure 1, refer to the special figure 1 fluctuation display time determination table shown in FIG. 52, the special figure stop symbol type is special figure A or special figure B, and When the numerical value range is 1001 to 20000, the variation time is 45000 ms, and the decoration design display device 208 is selected as per super reach A. Further, when determining the fluctuation time of the special figure 2, the special figure stop symbol type is special figure a to special figure c with reference to the special figure 2 fluctuation display time determination table shown in FIG. 53. When the numerical value range is 20001 to 65535, the fluctuation time is 65000 ms, and the decoration pattern display device 208 is selected as per super reach B.
<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is substituted into the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading effect data corresponding to the command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when update of the effect data is necessary, effect data update processing is performed. In step S311, when the pressing of the operation means such as the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137 is detected, the effect data updated in step S309 is changed to effect data corresponding to the pressing of the operation means. In step S313, if there is a command to VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S315, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416. In step S317, if there is a command to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420. In step S319, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 432. In step S321, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S303.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). Execute in the cycle.

  In step S501 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S503 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S319, an effect random number update process, and the like are performed.

  Next, the image control process in step S313 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605. If not, a transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S605, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets parameters according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

In step S607, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404. In step S609, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611. If not, the generation end interrupt signal is determined. Wait for input. In step S611, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.
<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>

  Next, the process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step S701 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S701. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed. In step S703, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705.

  In step S705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S709, an effect control process is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S707, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 506, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. In step S <b> 711, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520. In step S713, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step S703.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and a timer interrupt process is performed in response to this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle.

In step S901 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S903 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process is performed.
<Operation means image display processing>

  Next, the operation means image display process executed in the image control process (step S313) of the above-described first sub control unit main process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the operation means image display process.

  In step S1001, it is determined whether the start timing of the reception period of the operation means (for example, the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137) has arrived. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S1002, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1002. The process proceeds to S1004. The operation means according to the present invention is not limited to the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137, and includes, for example, a ball launch handle 134 and the like as long as it can be operated by the player. The “operation means reception period” is a period during which an operation of the operation means is detected and it is determined that the operation is valid and processing corresponding to the operation can be executed.

  In addition, the condition for determining that “the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation means has arrived” is not particularly limited. For example, when winning a big hit or a small win of a special figure variable game in the special figure prefetching process, a predetermined number of games When a ball is paid out, if the gaming state transitions from the first gaming state to the second gaming state advantageous to the player (or the third gaming state disadvantageous to the player), after the big hit game For example, when a special figure variation game is performed a predetermined number of times, or when a predetermined lottery is won.

  In step S1002, in order to display the operation means image (details will be described later, for example, an image imitating the chance button 136) on the decorative symbol display device 208, effect data corresponding to the operation means image is read from the ROM 406. The process proceeds to step S1003. In step S1003, an elapsed time notification image for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation means (including an elapsed time notification image that also serves as an operation means image to be described later, and an elapsed time notification image accompanied by display of the operation means image is included. In the same manner, the effect data corresponding to the elapsed time notification image is read from the ROM 406 and the effect data is updated when the effect data needs to be updated. To finish the process.

  For example, when an elapsed time notification image that also serves as an operation means image (an operation means image that can be understood that some operation is necessary for the operation means. For example, a progress information notification image that simulates the operation means) is displayed. The effect data corresponding to the elapsed time notification image is read from the ROM 406, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. Also, an elapsed time notification image that does not include information related to the operation means (an elapsed time notification image in which it is not possible to grasp that the operation of the operation means is necessary. For example, an elapsed time notification image consisting only of a number representing the elapsed time) is displayed. If there is, the effect data corresponding to the operation means image is read from the ROM 406, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. In this embodiment, an example in which an elapsed time notification image (for example, an image of a meter scale) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in each of the examples to be described later, but the elapsed time notification image is not displayed. May be. If not displayed, the process ends without performing the process of step S1003.

  In step S1004, it is determined whether or not the operation means image is being displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. If not, the process ends. If it is being displayed, the process proceeds to step S1005. In this step S1005, it is determined whether or not the operation of the operation means corresponding to the operation means image (for example, the chance button 136 when the operation means image is an image imitating the chance button 136) is accepted, and the operation is accepted. If YES in step S1007, the process advances to step S1007. If no operation is accepted, the process advances to step S1006.

  In step S1006, it is determined whether the display end timing of the operation means image has arrived. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S1007, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1008. Here, the condition for determining that “the display end timing of the operation means image has arrived” is not particularly limited. For example, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the operation means in step S1002, the gaming state is different. The case where it transfers to a gaming state etc. is mentioned.

  In step S1007, the operation means images displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 (including an operation means image that also serves as an elapsed time notification image and an operation means image that accompanies the display of the elapsed time notification image. The display of the operation means image is terminated. In step S1008, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation means coincides with a predetermined time (T seconds) set in advance, the process proceeds to step S1009 if applicable, and to step S1010 if not applicable. move on.

  In step S1009, in order to switch the operation means image to a specific image when the elapsed time of the operation means reception period coincides with a predetermined time (T seconds) set in advance, the effect data corresponding to the specific image is changed. Processing such as reading from the ROM 406 is performed. On the other hand, in step S1010, in order to continue the display of the operation means image, processing such as reading effect data corresponding to the operation means image is read from the ROM 406. If the effect data needs to be updated, image data update processing is performed. I do.

For example, an operation unit image that also serves as an elapsed time notification image (an operation unit image that can grasp the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation unit. For example, display mode (color, size, shape, font of characters according to the elapsed time) In order to continue the display of the operation means image, processing such as reading effect data corresponding to the operation means image from the ROM 406 is performed. When the data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. In addition, an operation unit image that does not include information related to the elapsed time (an operation unit image in which the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation unit cannot be grasped. For example, an operation unit image including only an image imitating the operation unit, When an operation means image consisting only of character information representing a name (for example, a chance button) is displayed, the effect data corresponding to the operation means image is stored in the ROM 406 in order to continue displaying the operation means image. When the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.
<Notice lottery processing>

  Next, the notice lottery process executed in the image control process (step S313) of the first sub control unit main process described above will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the notice lottery process.

  In step S1101, with reference to the value of the big hit flag included in the command received from the main control unit 300 (for example, symbol variation start command), if the value of the big hit flag is on, it is determined that the big hit is won, step S1102 If the value of the big hit flag is OFF, it is determined that the big hit is not won, and the flow advances to step S1103. In step S1102, after performing a lottery using a lottery value corresponding to “big hit (15R series)”, “big hit (sudden probability change)” or “big hit (latency probability change)” in a later-described notice lottery table, step S1106 is performed. Proceed to

In step S1103, the value of the small hit flag included in the command received from the main control unit 300 (for example, the symbol variation start command) is referred to. In step S1104, if the value of the small hit flag is OFF, it is determined that the small hit is not won, and the flow advances to step S1105. In step S1104, the lottery value corresponding to “small hit” in the notice lottery table, which will be described later, is used, and then the process proceeds to step S1106. In step S1105, the lottery value corresponding to “miss” in the notice lottery table, which will be described later, is used, and then the process proceeds to step S1106. In step S1106, the process is terminated after a command including information on the lottery result of the advance notice lottery is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500.
<Data table of first sub-control unit>

Next, a data table stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS.
<Notice lottery table>

  The notice lottery table shown in FIG. 58 is an example of a table used for the notice lottery performed in the notice lottery process described above. It is a table in which numerical ranges are associated and stored.

  In the basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400, when the big hit flag is on, the item of “symbol type” in the notice lottery table is “big hit (15R system)”, “big hit (sudden probability change)”, With reference to the lottery value corresponding to “latency probability change”, a lottery (preliminary lottery) for selecting any one of the notice tables 1 to 5 is performed based on the acquired random number value for the notice lottery.

  For example, when the jackpot flag is on, the symbol type of special figure 1 is special figure A or special figure B, and the fluctuation time of special figure 1 is 15000 ms, the item of “symbol type” in the notice lottery table is “big hit (15R System) ”and“ variation time ”items refer to the lottery value corresponding to“ 15000 ms ”, and when the obtained random number for preliminary lottery is 0 to 9, the preliminary announcement table 2 is selected and the preliminary lottery randomness acquired When the numerical value is 10 to 29, the advance notice table 3 is selected, when the obtained advance notice lottery random number value is 30 to 94, the advance notice table 4 is selected, and when the obtained advance notice lottery random number value is 95 to 99, The notice table 5 is selected.

In the present embodiment, when the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off (disconnected) and the fluctuation time of the special figure is 1500 ms, 3000 ms, or 8000 ms, the notice table 1 is stored regardless of the random number value for the notice lottery. select. The notice table 5 is selected when the jackpot flag is on and the symbol type of special figure 1 is special figure A or special figure B (or the special symbol type of special figure 2 is special figure a to special figure c). Only if. Further, the lottery value when the big hit flag is on and the symbol type of special figure 1 is special figure D (latency probability change) and the lottery value when the small hit flag is on are set to be the same. In the present embodiment, the lottery is a lottery with a table for small hits, but the lottery may be performed with the same table as the table for big hits.
<Notice table>

  The notice table shown in FIG. 59A is an example of the notice table 4 among the notice tables described above, and is a table that stores the notice mode and the numerical value range of the lottery value in association with each other.

  The basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the notice table 4 when the notice table 4 is selected in the notice lottery described above, and determines the notice mode of the notice table 4 based on the acquired random number value. The notice mode lottery is performed. For example, when the acquired random number value is 0 to 9, “button press (one time) notice” is selected, the acquired mode is determined, and when the acquired random number value is 10 to 24, “button press (two times) ) Select "Notice", select "Conversation notice" when the acquired random number is 25-39, select "Open door" when the acquired random value is 40-59, When the numerical value is 60 to 74, “Treasure box selection notice” is selected. When the obtained random number value is 75 to 89, “Step up notice” is selected. When the obtained random number value is 90 to 99, “Title box notice” is selected. Select "Notice".

  59 (b) to 59 (d) and FIGS. 60 (a) to 60 (b) are subdivided contents of the “open the door notice”, for example, the first notice. When “open door notice” is selected in the lottery, the table corresponding to “open door notice” shown in FIG. 59 (b) is referred to, and the meter color is changed based on the obtained random number value. The lottery for the second notice mode to be decided is performed. Next, in the second notice mode lottery, for example, when “meter color blue → red” is selected, the table corresponding to “meter color blue → red” shown in FIG. 59C is referred to. Based on the acquired random number value, the third notice mode lottery for determining the mode of the character (princess) is performed.

Next, in the third notice mode lottery, for example, when “Princess“ Chance! ”” Is selected, the table corresponding to “Princess“ Chance! ”” Shown in FIG. Based on the random number value, the fourth notice mode lottery for determining the next notice mode is performed. Next, in the fourth notice mode lottery, for example, when “signboard“ reach might ”” is selected, the table corresponding to “signboard“ reach might ”” shown in FIG. Based on the random number value, the fifth notice mode lottery for determining the next notice mode is performed. Next, in the fifth notice mode lottery, for example, when “Princess of a princess (Hanamaru)” is selected, a table corresponding to “Princess of a princess (Hanamaru)” shown in FIG. With reference to the obtained random number value, the sixth notice mode lottery for determining the next notice mode is performed.
<Example 1 of operation means image display>

  Next, Example 1 of the operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 1 in time series.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6A corresponds to the first operation of the chance button 136 when the start timing of the first operation acceptance period (6 seconds in this example) of the chance button 136 has arrived. The first operating means image BG1 (in this example, an image simulating a chance button) is displayed in the left display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, at the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1, the second operation means image BG2 (in this example, an image imitating the chance button) corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136 is displayed as a decoration pattern. It is displayed in the right display area of the display device 208.

  Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 9A, the start timing of the second operation acceptance period of the chance button 136 (6 seconds in this example) has not arrived, but two operations on the chance button 136 are performed. In order to prompt the player, the second operation means image BG2 is displayed at the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1, and the display of the character information “Press the chance button!” Is displayed in the lower center. doing.

  Also, a first elapsed time notification image TG1 (in this example, for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. An image in which the scale of the meter (filled portion) gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136 is displayed below the first operation means image BG1.

  Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 9A, the start timing of the second operation acceptance period of the chance button 136 has not arrived, but the same image TG2 ′ as the initial image of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is displayed. The second operation means image BG2 is displayed below.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5B has passed a predetermined time (2 seconds in this example) from the timing shown in FIG. 5A, and the start timing of the acceptance period for the second operation of the chance button 136 has arrived. Timing is shown. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but a predetermined time (2 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136. As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image for displaying that the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has passed 2 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 4 seconds) is displayed.

  At this timing, since the start timing of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has arrived, the image TG2 ′ displayed below the second operation means image BG2 at the timing shown in FIG. To the second elapsed time notification image TG2 for notifying the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 (in this example, according to the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136) The scale of the meter (filled area) is gradually reduced).

  The timing shown in FIG. 7C shows the timing when a predetermined time (4 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136. As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, a moving image for displaying that the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has passed 4 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 2 seconds) is displayed. . At this timing, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continuously displayed, but a predetermined time (2 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136. Then, as the second elapsed time notification image TG2, an image for notifying that the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has passed 2 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 4 seconds) is displayed. Yes.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D shows the timing when a predetermined time (in this example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but since a predetermined time (5 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136, As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image for displaying that the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 5 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 1 second) is displayed. Further, at this timing, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continuously displayed, but a predetermined time (3 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136. Then, as the second elapsed time notification image TG2, an image for notifying that the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 3 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 3 seconds) is displayed. Yes.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but since a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136, As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image for displaying that the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 6 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 seconds) is displayed. Further, at this timing, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continuously displayed, but a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136. Then, as the second elapsed time notification image TG2, an image for notifying that the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 4 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 2 seconds) is displayed. Yes.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5F shows the timing when a predetermined time (8 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (8 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the first operation acceptance period of the chance button 136, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are displayed. Erasing. Further, at this timing, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continuously displayed, but a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136. Then, as the second elapsed time notification image TG2, an image notifying that the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 6 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 seconds) is displayed. Yes. In this example, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased at the timing shown in FIG. 5F, but the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time are deleted. The display of the notification image TG1 may be continued.

  According to the operation means image display according to the first embodiment, it may be possible to strongly encourage the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from losing the operation timing of the operation means and improve the interest of the game. Further, there are cases where the interest of the game can be improved by increasing the choices of the players.

  In this embodiment, the timing shown in FIG. 5A is the start timing of the first operation acceptance period (6 seconds in this example) of the chance button 136, and the timing shown in FIG. ) Is the start timing of the second operation acceptance period of the chance button 136 (in this example, 6 seconds), but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, FIG. The timing shown in a) is the start timing of the first operation reception period (for example, 6 seconds) of the chance button 136, and the start timing of the second operation reception period (for example, 8 seconds) of the chance button 136. It is good. That is, the start timings of the N-th operation (N is a positive integer) operation reception period of the operation means may be set to the same timing (the same applies to other embodiments).

In addition, when the start timing of the first operation reception period (for example, 6 seconds) of the chance button 136 and the start timing of the second operation reception period (for example, 8 seconds) of the chance button 136 are set to the same timing. Even when each reception time is different, the notification start timing of the elapsed time may be different. In this example, the reception time of the second operation of the chance button 136 after two seconds have elapsed from the start of the operation reception. The elapsed time may be notified.
<Example 2 of operation means image display>

  Next, a second embodiment of the operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 2 in time series. In addition, since the display shown to the same figure (a)-the same figure (f) is the same as the display example shown to the said FIG. 61 (a)-(f), the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 62G shows the state shown in FIGS. 6A to 6D, that is, the state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136. The timing at which the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed is shown. At this timing, since the first operation of the chance button 136 has been performed, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, and instead of the image display, a decorative symbol display device A character image (donor) is displayed in the left display area 208.

  The timing shown in (h) of the figure shows the timing when a predetermined time (8 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in (a) of the figure. At this timing, the display of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continued, but a predetermined time (6 seconds) from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. Has elapsed, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is notified that the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 6 seconds (the remaining time of the acceptance period is 0 seconds). The image to be displayed is displayed.

  The timing shown in (i) of the figure shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in (b) of the figure. At this timing, since the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the second operation acceptance period of the chance button 136, the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2 are displayed. Erasing. When a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the reception period for the second operation of the chance button 136, the second operation means image BG2 and the second operation means image BG2 are displayed as shown in FIG. A character image (時間) may be displayed instead of the display of the elapsed time notification image TG2. In the state where the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed, the operation of the chance button 136 is performed during the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 ((g) in this example). In addition, as shown in FIG. 6J, a character image (爺) may be displayed instead of displaying the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2. The timing shown in FIG. 10 (k) shows the timing when the second operation of the chance button 136 is accepted immediately after a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has passed since the timing shown in FIG. Yes. At this timing, since the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the first operation acceptance period of the chance button 136, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are displayed. Since the second operation of the chance button 136 has been performed, the character image (爺) is displayed instead of the display of the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2. doing. In the state where the first operation of the chance button 136 is not performed, the operation of the chance button 136 is performed during the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 ((g) in this example). In addition, as shown in FIG. 8J, a character image (don and niece) may be displayed instead of displaying the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2.

  The timing shown in (l) of FIG. 4 indicates the timing immediately after a predetermined time (8 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in (a) of FIG. At this timing, a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136, and the first and second operations of the chance button 136 have not been performed. The second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2 are deleted.

According to the operation means image display according to the second embodiment, it may be possible to strongly encourage the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from losing the operation timing of the operation means and improve the interest of the game. Further, there are cases where the interest of the game can be improved by increasing the choices of the players.
<Third embodiment of operation means image display>

  Next, a third embodiment of the operation unit image display performed by the above-described operation unit image display process will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 3 in time series.

  In the third embodiment, a third elapsed time notification image TG3 is applied instead of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 in the first embodiment. The third progress information notification image TG3 is an image for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136, and also an image suggesting the success / failure result of the special figure variation game. . With such a configuration, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the progress information notification image, and thus it may be possible to prompt the operation of the operation means.

  In this example, the result of the success / failure determination is suggested using an elapsed time notification image that notifies the elapsed time of the first operation acceptance period of the chance button 136, but in addition to this (or in addition to this) Instead, the result of the determination of success / failure may be suggested using an elapsed time notification image that notifies the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136, and there may be three or more progress information notification images. In this case, the determination result may be suggested using at least one progress information notification image.

  Further, in addition to suggesting the result of the success / failure determination using the progress information notification image, the result of the determination of the success / failure may be suggested in another display area. Further, in this example, the display of the third elapsed time notification image TG3 is started when the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has come, but the display is performed at other timings. For example, the display of the third elapsed time notification image TG3 may be started after the elapse of a predetermined time after the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has arrived. The display of the third elapsed time notification image TG3 may be started at the timing when the operation of the chance button 136 is performed (for example, the timing when the first or second operation is performed).

According to the operation means image display according to the third embodiment, it may be possible to strongly encourage the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from losing the operation timing of the operation means and improve the interest of the game. Further, there are cases where the interest of the game can be improved by increasing the choices of the players.
<Example 4 of operation means image display>

  Next, a fourth embodiment of the operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 4 in time series.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6A, the first operation corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136 is triggered by the arrival timing of the first and second operation acceptance periods of the chance button 136. The means image BG1 (in this example, an image simulating a chance button) and the second operation means image BG2 (in this example, an image simulating a chance button) corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136 are displayed at the same timing. It is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Also, a first elapsed time notification for notifying the elapsed time (in this example, 6 seconds) of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. An image TG1 (in this example, an image in which the scale of the meter (filled portion) gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the first operation acceptance period of the chance button 136) is displayed on the first operation means image BG1. Shown below.

  Further, a second elapsed time notification for notifying the elapsed time (6 seconds in this example) of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the second operation means image BG2. An image TG2 (in this example, an image in which the scale of the meter (filled portion) gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the second operation means image BG2. Shown below.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5B shows the timing when a predetermined time (4 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136. As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image for displaying that the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 4 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 2 seconds) is displayed.

  Further, at this timing, the display of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is also continued, but a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136. Then, as the second elapsed time notification image TG2, an image for notifying that the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 4 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 2 seconds) is displayed. Yes.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7C shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but since a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136, As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image for displaying that the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 6 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 seconds) is displayed.

  Further, at this timing, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continuously displayed, but a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136. Then, as the second elapsed time notification image TG2, an image notifying that the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 6 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 seconds) is displayed. Yes.

  The timing shown in FIG. 4D shows the timing when a predetermined time (8 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (8 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the first operation reception period of the chance button 136, the predetermined time from the start timing of the first operation reception period of the chance button 136. Immediately after (6 seconds) have elapsed, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, and the state continues.

  At this timing, since a predetermined time (8 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the second operation reception period of the chance button 136, the start timing of the second operation reception period of the chance button 136 is Immediately after the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed, the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2 are deleted, and the state is continued.

  FIG. 8E shows the state shown in FIG. 7B, that is, the state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the first and second operation acceptance periods of the chance button 136. The timing at which the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed is shown. At this timing, since the first operation of the chance button 136 has been performed, after the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, a decorative symbol display is displayed instead of the image display. A character image (donor) is displayed in the left display area of the device 208.

  FIG. 5F shows the state of the chance button 136 in the state shown in FIG. 5E, that is, in a state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the second operation acceptance period of the chance button 136. The timing at which the second operation is performed is shown. At this timing, since the second operation of the chance button 136 has been performed, after the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2 are erased, a decorative symbol display is displayed instead of the image display. In the right display area of the device 208, a character image (爺) different from the character image (donor) is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 5E, the second operation of the chance button 136 is not performed and the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation. The display shown in f) may be performed.

  FIG. 4G shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation without the second operation of the chance button 136 being performed. At this timing, since the second operation of the chance button 136 is not performed and a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation, the second operation means image BG2 and the second operation means image BG2 The elapsed time notification image TG2 is deleted.

According to the operation means image display according to the fourth embodiment, it may be possible to strongly encourage the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from losing the operation timing of the operation means and improve the interest of the game. Further, there are cases where the interest of the game can be improved by increasing the choices of the players.
<Example 5 of operation means image display>

  Next, a fifth embodiment of the operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 5 in time series.

  In the fifth embodiment, a fourth elapsed time notification image TG4 is applied instead of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 in the fourth embodiment. The fourth progress information notification image TG4 is an image for notifying the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136, and also an image suggesting the success / failure result of the special figure variation game. . With such a configuration, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the progress information notification image, and thus it may be possible to prompt the operation of the operation means.

  In this example, the result of the success / failure determination is suggested using an elapsed time notification image that notifies the elapsed time of the first operation acceptance period of the chance button 136, but in addition to this (or in addition to this) Instead, the result of the determination of success / failure may be suggested using an elapsed time notification image that notifies the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136, and there may be three or more progress information notification images. In this case, the determination result may be suggested using at least one progress information notification image.

  Further, in addition to suggesting the result of the success / failure determination using the progress information notification image, the result of the determination of the success / failure may be suggested in another display area. In this example, the display of the fourth elapsed time notification image TG4 is started when the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has arrived. For example, the display of the fourth elapsed time notification image TG4 may be started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has arrived. The display of the fourth elapsed time notification image TG4 may be started at the timing when the operation of the chance button 136 is performed (for example, the timing when the first or second operation is performed).

According to the operation means image display according to the fifth embodiment, it may be possible to strongly encourage the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from losing the operation timing of the operation means and improve the interest of the game. Further, there are cases where the interest of the game can be improved by increasing the choices of the players.
<Operation Means Image Display Example 6>

  Next, a sixth embodiment of the operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 6 in time series.

  In this embodiment, in addition to the operation means image display, a notice effect by the notice lottery process described above is performed. For example, in the case of hitting special figure 1 by big hit determination, special figure stop figure of special figure 1 is decided to special figure A by special figure lottery, and the fluctuation time of special figure is decided to be 45000 ms by fluctuation pattern lottery The first sub-control unit 400 receives the command from the main control unit 300 based on the fact that the jackpot flag value is ON, the special figure stop symbol is special figure A, and the special figure variation time is 45000 ms. The notice lottery is performed using the lottery value corresponding to the fluctuation time of 45000 ms of the “big hit (15R series)” in the notice lottery table shown in 58. In this notice lottery, if it is assumed that the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 30 to 94, the notice table 4 is selected.

  Subsequently, the first sub control unit 400 refers to the notice table 4 shown in FIG. 59 (a), and performs the first notice mode lottery for determining the notice mode of the notice table 4 based on the acquired random number value. For example, if it is assumed that the acquired random number value is in a numerical value range of 40 to 59, “open door notice” is selected. Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the notice table corresponding to the “open door notice” shown in FIG. 59 (b), and determines the color of the meter based on the obtained random number value for the second time. For example, assuming that the obtained random number value is in a numerical value range of 50 to 64, “meter color blue → red” is selected.

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the notice table corresponding to “meter color blue → red” shown in FIG. 59 (c), and based on the acquired random number value, the character (princess) mode For example, if it is assumed that the acquired random number value is in a numerical range of 30 to 59, the princess “chance!” Is selected. In the sixth embodiment, the notice effect is executed according to the notice effect form determined by the notice lottery or the notice form lottery.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 66 (a), the first operation means corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 is triggered by the arrival timing of the operation period for the operation of the chance button 136 (in this example, 6 seconds). An image BG1 (in this example, an image simulating a chance button) is displayed in the right display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 5A, in order to prompt the player to perform an operation on the chance button 136, the display of the character information “Open the door !!” is displayed above the left display area.

  In addition, a first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 (in this example, a chance opportunity) for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 at almost the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. An image in which the scale of the meter (filled portion) gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the operation period for the operation of the button 136) is displayed in the first operation means image BG1 in the first color (blue in this example). It is displayed below.

  In addition, at the same timing as the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1, an image corresponding to the notice effect of the above-mentioned "open the door notice" (in this example, the characters "open the door !!") A display and an image simulating a door) are displayed in the right display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the present embodiment, the first elapsed time notification for notifying the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136 for a part of the image of the notice effect (in this example, an image simulating a door). It also serves as the image TG1-2.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7B shows the timing when a predetermined time (1 second in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (1 second) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is used as the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1. Displays an image for notifying that 1 second has passed (the remaining time of the reception period is 5 seconds). On the other hand, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-2 also serving as a notice effect is not changed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7C shows the timing when a predetermined time (4 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is used as the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1. Displays an image for informing that 1 second has elapsed (that the remaining time of the reception period is 2 seconds). At this timing, the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 is set to the first color (in this example, blue) as the image corresponding to the notice effect of “meter color (blue → red)”. ) To the second color (in this example, red).

  Further, at this timing, the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 is changed, and at the same time, the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-2 is changed from the third color (in this example, white) to the first. The color is changed to 4 (red in this example). With such a configuration, it may be possible to strongly urge the player to perform an operation.

  Here, by changing the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 and the color of the second elapsed time notification image TG1-2, a predetermined time from the start timing of the operation button reception period of the chance button 136 is obtained. Although it is informed that (4 seconds) has elapsed, the change in the color may be configured to suggest, for example, the result of the special figure variation game.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is used as the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1. Displays an image for informing that 6 seconds have elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 seconds). On the other hand, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-2 also serving as a notice effect is not changed.

  FIG. 5E shows the timing when the chance button 136 is operated in a state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136. At this timing, since the chance button 136 is operated, after the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification images TG1-1 and TG-2 are erased, the above-mentioned princess “chance!” The image corresponding to the notice effect (in this example, the character display of “chance!” And the character image (princess)) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. This notice effect may be displayed when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation acceptance period without the operation of the chance button 136 being performed.

  FIG. 5F shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation acceptance period without the operation of the chance button 136 being performed. At this timing, since the operation of the chance button 136 is not performed and a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the first operation reception period, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification After erasing the images TG 1-1 and TG-2, the decorative symbol variation display is performed in the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The display may be performed after the display shown in FIG. FIG. 5G is a diagram showing an example of reach display in the decorative symbol variation display, and the reach display is performed after any of the states shown in FIGS. Is displayed.

According to the operation means image display according to the sixth embodiment, it may be possible to strongly encourage the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from losing the operation timing of the operation means and improve the interest of the game. Further, there are cases where the interest of the game can be improved by increasing the choices of the players. In the present embodiment, the lottery is also performed for the display of the elapsed time notification image (meter color) in the notice table, but the lottery may not be performed in the notice table for the elapsed time notice image. In this case, the elapsed time notification image notifies only the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation means, and changes the display mode after a predetermined time (for example, the color of the meter changes when T seconds elapse). There may be. Further, the elapsed time notification image may be a notification that only notifies the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation means and does not change the display mode (color, size, shape, character font, etc.) with the passage of time. .
<Operating Means Image Display Example 7>

  Next, a seventh embodiment of the operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 7 in time series. In this embodiment, in addition to the operation means image display, a notice effect by the notice lottery process described above is performed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6A, the first operation corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136 is triggered by the arrival timing of the operation period for the operation of the chance button 136 (in this example, 6 seconds). The operation means image BG1 (in this example, an image simulating a chance button) is displayed in the central display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In addition, a first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 (in this example, a chance opportunity) for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 at almost the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. An image in which the scale of the meter (filled portion) gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the operation period for the operation of the button 136) is displayed in the first operation means image BG1 in the first color (blue in this example). It is displayed below.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7B shows the timing when a predetermined time (1 second in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (1 second) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is used as the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1. Displays an image for notifying that 1 second has passed (the remaining time of the reception period is 5 seconds).

  The timing shown in FIG. 5C shows the timing when a predetermined time (3 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (3 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed as the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1. An image for informing that 3 seconds have passed has been displayed. Further, at this timing, the remaining time notification image TG1-2 (not shown) for notifying the remaining time of the operation reception period of the chance button 136 (3 seconds in this example) above the first operation means image BG1. In the example, an image of numerical information) is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D shows the timing when a predetermined time (in this example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (5 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is used as the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1. Is displaying an image notifying that 5 seconds have elapsed. Further, at this timing, an image for notifying that the remaining time of the operation of the chance button 136 is 1 second is displayed as the remaining time notification image TG1-2.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is used as the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1. Is displaying an image notifying that 6 seconds have elapsed. At this timing, as the remaining time notification image TG1-2, the remaining operation time of the chance button 136 is 0 seconds (a predetermined time (6 seconds from the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136). ) Has been displayed.

  FIG. 5F is a diagram showing an example of a failure display when the result of the special figure variable game is out of play, and FIG. 8G is a jackpot display when the result of the special figure variable game is a big hit. It is the figure which showed an example. In these missed display or jackpot display, the operation of the chance button 136 is performed in a state (during the operation reception period) before a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136. Or when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation acceptance period without the operation of the chance button 136 being performed.

According to the operation means image display according to the seventh embodiment, it may be possible to strongly encourage the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from losing the operation timing of the operation means and improve the interest of the game. Further, there are cases where the interest of the game can be improved by increasing the choices of the players.
<Operating Means Image Display Example 8>

  Next, an eighth embodiment of the operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 8 in time series. In this embodiment, in addition to the operation means image display, a notice effect by the notice lottery process described above is performed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6A, the right of the setting operation unit 137 is triggered by the start timing of the right button and left button operation reception period (in this example, 6 seconds). The first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the button operation (in this example, an image imitating a treasure box; white) is used for the right display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and for the left button operation of the setting operation unit 137. The corresponding second operation means image BG2 (in this example, an image imitating a treasure box, white) is displayed in the left display area. At the timing shown in FIG. 6A, the left side of the character information display “Select a treasure chest that can be opened with the direction key!” Is displayed to prompt the player to operate the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137. It is displayed above the area.

  Further, at the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1 and the second operation means image BG2, the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137 is notified. First elapsed time notification image TG1 (in this example, an image in which the scale (filled portion) of the meter gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137) Are displayed in the central display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the first color (blue in this example).

  The timing shown in FIG. 7B shows the timing when a predetermined time (1 second in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (1 second) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation period for the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137, the setting operation unit TG1 is used as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image notifying that the reception period of the operation of the right button and the left button of 137 has passed 1 second (the remaining time of the reception period is 5 seconds) is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7C shows the timing when a predetermined time (4 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the right button and left button operation reception period of the setting operation unit 137, the setting operation unit TG1 is used as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image notifying that the reception period of the operation of the right button and the left button of 137 has elapsed for 1 second (the remaining time of the reception period is 2 seconds) is displayed. At this timing, the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is changed from the first color (blue in this example) to the second as the image corresponding to the notice effect of “treasure box color (blue → red)”. (In this example, it is red).

  At this timing, the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 is changed, and at the same time, the color of the second operation means image BG2 is changed from the third color (white in this example) to the fourth color. (In this example, it is red). Here, by changing the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 and the color of the second operation means image BG2, the start timing of the reception period of the operation of the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137 is changed. Although it is informed that the predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed, for example, it may be configured to suggest a result of the special figure variation game.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation period for the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137, the setting operation unit TG1 is used as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image notifying that the reception period of the operation of the right button and the left button of 137 has elapsed for 6 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 second) is displayed. On the other hand, the display of the second operation means image BG2 that also serves as a notice effect is not changed.

  FIG. 6E shows that the right button of the setting operation unit 137 is operated in a state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation period for the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137. The timing performed is shown. At this timing, since the right button of the setting operation unit 137 has been operated, the first operation unit image BG1, the second operation unit image BG2, and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are deleted. An image corresponding to the next notice effect (in this example, an image showing a book popping out from the treasure chest) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  On the other hand, FIG. 6F shows the left button of the setting operation unit 137 in a state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period for the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137. The timing at which the operation was performed is shown. At this timing, since the left button of the setting operation unit 137 has been operated, the first operation unit image BG1, the second operation unit image BG2, and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are deleted. An image corresponding to the next notice effect (in this example, an image showing a book popping out from the treasure chest) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that the notice effects shown in (e) and (f) of FIG. Further, when the determination result of the special figure variable game is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 6G, a notice effect with higher reliability and expectation is performed than the notice effect shown in FIG. It may be configured.

  FIG. 11H shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period without the operation of the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137 being performed. At this timing, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is erased since a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period without the operation of the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137 being performed. ing. Note that the first operation means image BG1 and the second operation means image BG2 may be deleted in accordance with the deletion of the first elapsed time notification image TG1.

According to the operation means image display according to the seventh embodiment, it may be possible to strongly encourage the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from losing the operation timing of the operation means and improve the interest of the game. Further, there are cases where the interest of the game can be improved by increasing the choices of the players.
<Example 9 of operation means image display>

  Next, a ninth embodiment of the operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 9 in time series. In this embodiment, in addition to the operation means image display, a hold icon and a change icon are displayed.

  Here, the hold icon refers to an animation of a texture image representing the number of hold of the special figure variable game. As an animation related to the hold icon, for example, when the hold increases and a new hold icon is displayed. The animation to be executed (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “pending icon increase animation”), the order of the hold changes due to the digestion of the previous hold, and the hold icon changes to another display position (for example, the position on the left side) ) Animation executed when moving to () (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “pending icon movement animation”), animation executed when the display state of the holding icon changes based on the pre-read result, etc. (hereinafter “ Hold icon change animation ”), the hold is consumed and the hold icon Animation to be executed when left (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “pending icon erasing animation”), non-priority side special icon hold icon when priority side special figure hold increases in priority change aircraft There is an animation (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “pending icon save animation”) executed when the icon is saved. In addition to the above animation, an animation that can be executed independently during a period other than the execution of the animation (for example, a period in which there is no increase / decrease of the hold or change of the hold icon) and that can be executed redundantly with the animation ( Hereinafter, it may be referred to as “standby icon standby animation”. There may be a case where a plurality of animations for increasing, moving, changing, erasing, saving, and waiting for the hold icon are executed in duplicate.

  In addition, after the suspension is digested and the special figure variable game is started, one variable icon corresponding to the special figure variable game may be displayed. The variation icon has a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon, for example, and is displayed as a texture image animation in the same manner as the hold icon. Depending on the display mode, the change icon can be notified about the validity of the change (the change notice), and is basically erased at the timing when the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the change icon can be considered as a kind of hold icon in the sense that the notification of the result of the special figure change game is held.

  For animations related to both the hold icon and the variable icon, the earliest hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area is moved to a different area from the hold icon display area when the hold is consumed. Animation that moves as a fluctuation icon (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “moving animation between hold and change icons”) and animation that changes from the hold icon display form to the change icon display form (hereinafter “between hold and change icons” Sometimes called “change animation”. These animations may be combined and executed at the same time. When the display mode of the hold icon and the display mode of the change icon are the same, the execution of the change animation between the hold / change icon can be omitted.

  Examples of the animation related to the fluctuation icon include an animation executed during execution of the special figure variable game (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “variable icon standby animation”), and a fluctuation icon after the special figure variable game ends. Animation that is executed when the icon is deleted (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “variable icon deletion animation”), animation that is executed when the display mode of the variable icon is changed in the middle (hereinafter referred to as “variable icon change”) There are cases where it is called “animation”). These animations may be executed at the same time in combination with each other. In addition, the variation icon standby animation may be executed at the same time in combination with the movement animation or the change animation between the hold / variation icons.

  FIG. 5A shows the timing when the special figure variable game is finished and the decorative symbols are stopped. At this timing, four hold icons (circular images in this example) PI1 to PI4 are displayed below the decorative symbol display device 208 to indicate that there are four special figure variable games on hold.

  FIG. 4B shows the timing when the reserved special figure variable game is started and the special figure variable game hold is reduced from 4 to 3. At this timing, after the change animation for changing the first (first) hold icon PI1 displayed in the hold icon display area to the change icon CI is performed, the change icon is displayed in the central display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. CI is stopped and displayed. The variation icon CI is a variation icon for suggesting the success / failure result of the special figure variation display corresponding to the earliest hold icon PI1. In this example, the variation icon CI is represented by character information “chance” and a star-shaped figure. It is composed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6C, the first operation means corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 is triggered by the arrival timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136 (in this example, 6 seconds). An image BG1 (in this example, an image simulating a chance button) is displayed behind the variation icon CI. That is, in this example, at least a part of the first operation means image BG1 is covered with the change icon CI, so that at least a part of the first operation means image BG1 is invisible or difficult to see. .

  Also, a first elapsed time notification image TG1 (in this example, the chance button 136 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. The scale of the meter (filled portion) gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the operation reception period of the first operation) in the first color (blue in this example) below the first operation means image BG1. And displayed behind the variation icon CI. That is, in this example, at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the variation icon CI, so that at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible or difficult to view. ing.

  The timing shown in FIG. 4D shows the timing when a predetermined time (3 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (3 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is 3 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image notifying that the second has elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 3 seconds) is displayed. However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the variation icon CI, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible or difficult to view.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is 6 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image notifying that the second has elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 second) is displayed. However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the variation icon CI, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible or difficult to view.

  FIG. 5F shows the state in which the operation of the chance button 136 is performed in the state shown in FIG. 5C, that is, in a state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136. The timing performed is shown. At this timing, since the chance button 136 has been operated, after the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, the information indicating the success / failure result of the special figure change (this In the example, “Leach is!” Is displayed behind the variation icon CI. That is, in this example, a part of the information that suggests whether or not the special figure change is correct is covered with the change icon CI, so that a part of the information is invisible or difficult to see.

  If the operation of the chance button 136 is performed before a predetermined time has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the first operation means image is displayed as shown in FIG. After erasing BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1, information suggesting whether or not the special figure change is correct may be displayed in front of the change icon CI. Although not shown in the figure, after the change icon CI is erased in addition to the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1, information indicating the result of the special figure change is displayed. Good.

  Further, when the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period without the operation of the chance button 136, the display of FIG. FIG. 11H is a diagram showing an example of the variation display of the decorative symbol. The variation display is displayed after any of the states (e), (f), and (g). Also good.

According to the operation means image display of the ninth embodiment, it may be possible to further prompt the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where the display mode hidden by the player can be focused and concentrated on the game.
<Example 10 of operation means image display>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 70, a description will be given of a tenth embodiment of the operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 10 in time series. In this embodiment, in addition to the operation means image display, a hold icon and a notice effect are displayed.

  FIG. 5A shows the timing when the special figure variable game is finished and the decorative symbols are stopped. At this timing, four hold icons (circular images in this example) PI1 to PI4 are displayed below the decorative symbol display device 208 to indicate that there are four special figure variable games on hold.

  FIG. 4B shows the timing when the reserved special figure variable game is started and the special figure variable game hold is reduced from 4 to 3. At this timing, an erase animation for erasing the earliest hold icon PI1 displayed in the hold icon display area is performed, and the first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 (chance in this example) Button).

  Also, a first elapsed time notification image TG1 (in this example, the chance button 136 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. The scale of the meter (filled portion) gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the operation reception period of the first operation) in the first color (blue in this example) below the first operation means image BG1. Is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7C shows the timing when a predetermined time (3 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, based on the result of whether or not the special figure variation game is successful, a notice effect is displayed (in this example, an image in which an upside-down character image (dono) has a signboard with “Leach may”) is displayed). Yes.

  At this timing, since a predetermined time (3 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is used as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. Is displayed on the screen to notify that 3 seconds have elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 3 seconds). However, since all of the first operation means image BG1 and all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are covered with the image of the notice effect, all of the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image are displayed. All of TG1 is invisible. Note that at least a part of the first operation means image BG1 or at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 may be invisible or difficult to view.

  The timing shown in FIG. 4D shows the timing when a predetermined time (4 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is 4 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image notifying that the second has elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 2 seconds) is displayed. However, since all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the image of the notice effect, all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is 6 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image notifying that the second has elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 second) is displayed. However, since all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the image of the notice effect, all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible.

  FIG. 5F shows the timing when the chance button 136 is operated in a state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136. At this timing, since the chance button 136 has been operated, after the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, the information indicating the success / failure result of the special figure change (this In the example, “character information“ It's super hot !! ”) is displayed behind the fluctuation icon CI. In other words, in this example, a part of the information that suggests whether or not the special figure change is correct is covered with the image of the notice effect, so that a part of the information is invisible.

  If the operation of the chance button 136 is performed before a predetermined time has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the first operation means image is displayed as shown in FIG. After erasing BG1, the first elapsed time notification image TG1, and the notice effect, information suggesting whether or not the special figure has changed may be displayed.

  Further, when the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period without the operation of the chance button 136, the display of FIG. FIG. 11H is a diagram showing an example of the variation display of the decorative symbol. The variation display is displayed after any of the states (e), (f), and (g). Also good.

According to the operation means image display of the tenth embodiment, it may be possible to prompt the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where the display mode hidden by the player can be focused and concentrated on the game.
<Example 11 of operation means image display>

  Next, Example 11 of the operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 11 in time series. In the present embodiment, in addition to the operation means image display, it is configured to display the notice change effect based on the normal map change display and the determination of whether or not the normal figure change display is correct.

  FIG. 4A shows the timing when the general map variation display is started during the special map variation display, and the production accompanying the general map variation display is started. At this timing, the base map change display is started in the base map change display area 208s, the notice effect is performed based on the determination of whether or not the base map change display is appropriate, and the first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 is performed. (In this example, an image simulating a chance button) is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, whether or not the common figure variable game is successful is determined using the general figure determination table shown in FIG. 148 described later. The random number value acquired is 90 to 99 with a low probability of the normal figure control state. Therefore, an example in which the symbol 2 per ordinary figure (the ordinary decoration 2 shown in FIG. 144 (d) described later) is selected is shown. Note that details of the determination of whether or not the common figure variation game is successful using the common figure determination table of FIG. 148 will be described in the third embodiment.

  Also, a first elapsed time notification image TG1 (in this example, the chance button 136 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. The scale of the meter (filled portion) gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the operation reception period of the first operation) in the first color (blue in this example) below the first operation means image BG1. Is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7B shows the timing when a predetermined time (1 second in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, a notice effect (in this example, a character image (princess) appears from below) is performed based on the normal map change display and whether or not the normal map change game is successful.

  At this timing, since a predetermined time (1 second) has elapsed since the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is used as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. Displays an image for notifying that 1 second has passed (the remaining time of the reception period is 5 seconds). However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the character image (princess) of the notice effect, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is not visible. In addition to this (or in place of it), at least a part of the first operation means image BG1 may be invisible or difficult to visually recognize (the same applies to the following in this embodiment).

  The timing shown in FIG. 7C shows the timing when a predetermined time (3 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the announcement effect based on the result of the normal-game variable game is continued, and, as the first elapsed time notification image TG1, the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 has passed 3 seconds (the remaining period of the reception period) An image informing that the time is 3 seconds) is displayed. However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the character image (princess) of the notice effect, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is not visible.

  The timing shown in FIG. 4D shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is 6 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image notifying that the second has elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 second) is displayed. However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the character image (princess) of the notice effect, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible.

  FIG. 4E shows the timing when the usual stop display is performed. At this timing, after erasing the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1, information indicating the result of the normal fluctuation (in this example, the character image (princess) has a fan) Image). Further, as described above, since the symbol 2 per universal symbol is selected in the common variable game, the universal symbol decorative symbol corresponding to the “general symbol decoration 2” is displayed in the general symbol variation display area 208s.

  FIG. 5F shows the timing when the chance button 136 is operated in a state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136. At this timing, since the chance button 136 has been operated, after the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, the information indicating the success / failure result of the special figure change (this In the example, the text information “is it a chance?” Is displayed. When a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the operation reception period without the operation of the chance button 136, the display shown in FIG.

According to the operation means image display of the eleventh embodiment, it may be possible to further prompt the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where the display mode hidden by the player can be focused and concentrated on the game.
<Example 12 of operation means image display>

  Next, a twelfth embodiment of the operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 12 in time series. In this embodiment, in addition to the operation means image display, a hold icon and a notice effect are displayed.

  FIG. 5A shows the timing when the special figure variable game is finished and the decorative symbols are stopped. At this timing, three hold icons PI1 to PI3 are displayed below the decorative symbol display device 208 to indicate that there are three special figure variable games on hold. In this example, by displaying a character image (savohani) as the third hold icon PI3, the result of the prefetch of the third special figure variable game is suggested.

  FIG. 4B shows the timing when the reserved special figure variable game is started and the special figure variable game hold is reduced from 3 to 2. At this timing, an erase animation for erasing the first hold icon PI1 displayed in the hold icon display area is performed, and the second hold icon PI2 and the third hold icon PI3 are moved to the positions of the adjacent hold icons. There is a moving animation to move to.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5C shows the timing when the moving animation of the hold icons PI2 and PI3 is completed. At this timing, the first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 (in this example, an image imitating the chance button) is displayed.

  Also, a first elapsed time notification image TG1 (in this example, the chance button 136 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. The scale of the meter (filled portion) gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the operation reception period of the first operation) in the first color (blue in this example) below the first operation means image BG1. Is displayed. However, since the first operation means image BG1 is displayed behind the hold icon PI3, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the hold icon PI3 and cannot be seen. In addition to this (or in place of it), at least a part of the first operation means image BG1 may be invisible or difficult to view with the hold icon PI3 (the same applies in the present embodiment).

  The timing shown in FIG. 4D shows the timing when a predetermined time (3 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (3 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is 3 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image notifying that the second has elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 3 seconds) is displayed. However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the hold icon PI3, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is not visible.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is 6 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image notifying that the second has elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 second) is displayed. However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the hold icon PI3, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is not visible.

  FIG. 5F shows the state in which the operation of the chance button 136 is performed in the state shown in FIG. 5B, that is, in a state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136. The timing performed is shown. At this timing, since the chance button 136 is operated, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, and then the special figure change after the special figure change (in this example, A notice (in this example, the character information “After two revolutions is hot!”) Indicating the success / failure result of the special figure fluctuation after two revolutions is displayed. Note that the advance notice is an example of a “prefetching advance notice” that indicates the result of the special figure change after the special figure change.

  In this example, the display of the hold icons PI2 and PI3 is not erased, but it may be erased simultaneously with the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1. Further, when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period without the operation of the chance button 136, the display of FIG. FIG. 5G is a diagram showing an example of the decorative symbol variation display, and the variation display may be displayed after any of the states shown in FIGS.

  According to the operation means image display of the twelfth embodiment, it may be possible to prompt the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where the display mode hidden by the player can be focused and concentrated on the game.

  FIG. 73 is a diagram showing, in time series, the operation means image display according to the modified example of the twelfth embodiment. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 3C to 3E, the first operation means image BG1 is displayed in front of the hold icon PI3, so that all of the first elapsed time notification images TG1 are held icons PI3. It is in a visible state without being covered with.

According to the operation means image display of the modified example of the twelfth embodiment, the player may be further prompted to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where the display mode hidden by the player can be focused and concentrated on the game.
<Example 13 of operation means image display>

  Next, a thirteenth embodiment of operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 75 are diagrams showing the operation means image display of the thirteenth embodiment in time series. In the present embodiment, a part of one of the two operation means images is configured to be covered with the variation icon.

  FIG. 74 (a) shows the timing when the special figure variable game is finished and the decorative symbols are stopped. At this timing, four hold icons (circular images in this example) PI1 to PI4 are displayed below the decorative symbol display device 208 to indicate that there are four special figure variable games on hold.

  FIG. 4B shows the timing when the reserved special figure variable game is started and the special figure variable game hold is reduced from 4 to 3. At this timing, after performing a change animation for changing the first (first) hold icon PI1 displayed in the hold icon display area to the change icon CI, the change icon is displayed in the left display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. CI is stopped and displayed. The variation icon CI is a variation icon for suggesting the success / failure result of the special figure variation display corresponding to the earliest hold icon PI1. In this example, the variation icon CI is represented by character information “chance” and a star-shaped figure. It is composed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 5C, the first operation corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 is triggered by the arrival timing of the first operation acceptance period (6 seconds in this example) of the chance button 136. The operation means image BG1 (in this example, an image simulating a chance button) is displayed behind the variation icon CI in the left display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, in this example, at least a part of the first operation means image BG1 is covered with the change icon CI, so that at least a part of the first operation means image BG1 is invisible or difficult to see. .

  Further, at the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1, the second operation means image BG2 (in this example, an image imitating the chance button) corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136 is displayed as a decoration pattern. It is displayed in the right display area of the display device 208. In this example, the second operation means image BG2 is not covered with the change icon CI, and all of the second operation means image BG2 is visible.

  Also, a first elapsed time notification image TG1 (in this example, the chance button 136 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. The scale of the meter (filled portion) gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the operation reception period of the first operation) in the first color (blue in this example) below the first operation means image BG1. , And behind the change icon CI. That is, in this example, at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the variation icon CI, so that at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible or difficult to view. ing.

  At this timing, the start timing of the second operation acceptance period of the chance button 136 has not arrived, but the same image TG2 ′ as the initial image of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is displayed as the second operation means. It is displayed below the image BG2.

  The timing shown in FIG. 4D is a predetermined time (2 seconds in this example) from the timing shown in FIG. 4C, and the start timing of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has arrived. Timing is shown. At this timing, since a predetermined time (2 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is 2 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image notifying that the second has elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 4 seconds) is displayed. However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the variation icon CI, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible or difficult to view.

  At this timing, since the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has arrived, the still image TG2 displayed below the second operation means image BG2 at the timing shown in FIG. 'Is a second elapsed time notification image TG2 for notifying the elapsed time of the second operation reception period of the chance button 136 (in this example, the elapsed time of the second operation reception period of the chance button 136 At the same time, the scale of the meter (filled part) is switched to an image that gradually decreases).

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E shows the timing when a predetermined time (4 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136. As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image for displaying that the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 4 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 2 seconds) is displayed. However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the variation icon CI, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible or difficult to view.

  At this timing, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continuously displayed, but a predetermined time (2 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136. Then, as the second elapsed time notification image TG2, an image for notifying that the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has passed 2 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 4 seconds) is displayed. Yes.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5F shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but since a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136, As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image for displaying that the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 6 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 seconds) is displayed. However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the variation icon CI, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible or difficult to view.

  Further, at this timing, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continuously displayed, but a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136. Then, as the second elapsed time notification image TG2, an image for notifying that the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 4 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 2 seconds) is displayed. Yes.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6G shows the timing when a predetermined time (in this example, 8 seconds) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (8 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the first operation acceptance period of the chance button 136, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are displayed. Erasing. Further, at this timing, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continuously displayed, but a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136. Then, as the second elapsed time notification image TG2, an image notifying that the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 6 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 seconds) is displayed. Yes.

  The timing shown in (h) of the figure shows the timing when a predetermined time (in this example, 10 seconds) has elapsed from the timing shown in (c) of the figure. At this timing, since a predetermined time (8 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the second operation acceptance period of the chance button 136, the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG1 are displayed. Erasing.

  FIG. 75 (i) shows the timing at which the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed in a state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136. Show. At this timing, since the first operation of the chance button 136 has been performed, after the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, a decorative symbol display is displayed instead of the image display. A character image (donor) is displayed in the left display area of the device 208. However, since a part of the character image (dono) is covered with the change icon CI, a part of the character image (dono) is invisible or difficult to see. (J) to (k) in FIG. 6 are the chance buttons before the predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 after the display in FIG. A display example when the second operation of 136 is not performed is shown.

  FIG. 11 (l) shows the timing when the second operation of the chance button 136 is performed in a state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136. Show. At this timing, since the second operation of the chance button 136 has been performed, after the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2 are erased, a decorative symbol display is displayed instead of the image display. A character image (爺) is displayed in the right display area of the device 208. Even when the second operation of the chance button 136 is not performed and a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation, the display shown in FIG. Good. FIG. 6 (m) shows a display example after the character image (donor) is deleted after a predetermined time has elapsed after the display of FIG. 1 (l).

  FIG. 76 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the modified example of Example 13 in time series. In this example, similar to the fourth embodiment, the chance button 136 is triggered by the arrival timing of the first and second operation acceptance periods of the chance button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. The first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the first operation and the second operation means image BG2 corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136 are displayed on the decorative design display device 208 at the same timing.

  In addition, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 at the same timing as the first operation means image BG1 and the second operation means image BG2. A second elapsed time notification image TG2 for displaying the elapsed time of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 is displayed. And it comprises so that a part of 1st elapsed time alerting | reporting image TG1 may be covered with the fluctuation | variation icon CI.

  That is, one of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2 that notifies the same elapsed time (in this example, the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is displayed by the variation icon CI. Since it is covered, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible or difficult to view.

  According to the operation means image display of the thirteenth embodiment, it may be possible to prompt the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where the display mode hidden by the player can be focused and concentrated on the game.

  Note that the position at which the variation icon CI is displayed is not limited to the above, and is at least one of the first operation means image, the second operation means image, the first progress notification image, and the second progress notification image. May be displayed at a position covered by the change icon, and only one of the first operation means image, the second operation means image, the first progress notification image, and the second progress notification image is displayed. May be displayed at a position covered by the change icon, and at least two or more of the first operation means image, the second operation means image, the first progress notification image, and the second progress notification image. The image may be displayed at a position covered by the variation icon.

  Further, only two images of the first operation means image, the second operation means image, the first progress notification image, and the second progress notification image are displayed at the positions covered with the change icons. Well, at least one of the first operation means image, the second operation means image, the first progress notification image, and the second progress notification image is displayed at a position not covered by the variation icon. Alternatively, only one of the first operation means image, the second operation means image, the first progress notification image, and the second progress notification image is displayed at a position that is not covered by the variation icon. Alternatively, the first operation means image, the second operation means image, the first progress notification image, and the second progress notification image may be displayed at a position covered by the variation icon.

Further, the image displayed at the position covered by the variation icon may be at least partly covered, only partly covered, or all covered. .
<Embodiment 14 of operation means image display>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 77, a description will be given of a fourteenth embodiment of operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing. In addition, the figure is a figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 14 in time series.

In this embodiment, one of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1-2 in the sixth embodiment (see FIG. 66) (in this example, the first By covering the elapsed time notification image TG1-1) with images of the notice effect shown in FIGS. 11B to 11D, a part of the one image (first elapsed time notification image TG1-1) is obtained. It is configured so as to be invisible or difficult to view. Further, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-2 is covered with the character image (dono) at the timing shown in FIG. 5B, and the character image (princess) is covered with the timing shown in FIG. A part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 is covered. In the present embodiment, the notice lottery process using FIGS. 58 to 21 is performed in the same manner as in the sixth embodiment (see FIG. 66). Since other displays are the same as those in the sixth embodiment (see FIG. 66), description thereof is omitted.
<Embodiment 15 of operation means image display>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 78, a description will be given of a fifteenth embodiment of operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 15 in time series.

In the present embodiment, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 and remaining time notification TG1-2 in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 67) and all of the first operation means image BG1 are shown in FIG. By covering with the image of the notice effect shown in (d), all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 and the remaining time notification image TG1-2 and the first operation means image BG1 are not visible or visible. It is configured to be in a difficult state. Since other displays are the same as those in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 67), description thereof is omitted.
<Example 16 of operation means image display>

  Next, Example 16 of the operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 16 in time series.

In this embodiment, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 in Embodiment 8 (see FIG. 68), as shown in FIGS. The first elapsed time notification image TG1 is partly invisible or difficult to view by covering with an image of a notice effect that suggests. Since other displays are the same as those in the eighth embodiment (see FIG. 68), description thereof is omitted.
<Example 17 of operation means image display>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 80, a description will be given of a seventeenth embodiment of operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 17 in time series.

  In the present embodiment, the first timing corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136 is triggered by the arrival timing of the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. The operation means image BG1 (in this example, an image simulating a chance button) is displayed above the left display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 5B, a second operation means image BG2 (in this example, an image simulating a chance button) corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136, a part of which is the first. Are displayed so as to overlap the operation means image BG1. That is, in this embodiment, a part of the first operation means image BG1 is covered with the second operation means image BG2, so that a part of the first operation means image BG1 becomes invisible or difficult to see. It is configured.

  Further, in the state shown in FIG. 5B, when the first operation and the second operation of the chance button 136 are not performed and a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the operation reception period, When the decorative symbol variation display shown in (c) is performed and the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed, the first operation means image BG1 is used instead of the first operation means image BG1 as shown in FIG. When the character image (dono) is displayed and the second operation of the chance button 136 is performed, the character image (ｅ) is replaced with the second operation means image BG2 as shown in FIG. Is displayed.

In the present embodiment, when two operations are urged, two operation means images that are the same as the number of operations are displayed. However, for example, when three or more operations are urged, the operation is performed. The same number of operation means images as the number of times may be displayed. When prompting one operation, a larger number of operation means images than the number of operations may be displayed. In this case, the player may be strongly urged to perform one operation.
<Example 18 of Operation Means Image Display>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 81, a description will be given of Embodiment 18 of operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 18 in time series.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6D, an increase animation of the hold icon is triggered when a new hold of the special figure variable game occurs, and the second hold icon PI2 after the increase (in this example, the chance icon A part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 and a part of the adjacent first hold icon PI1 are covered with an icon imitating the button 136 and a star-shaped figure). . That is, in the present embodiment, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 and a part of the hold icon PI1 are not visible by covering the first elapsed time notification image TG1 and the hold icon PI1 with the hold icon PI2. It is configured to be in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize.

  With such a configuration, since it is possible to attract the player's attention to the elapsed time notification image or the hold icon that has become invisible or difficult to visually recognize, the player can be prompted to operate the operation means, Since the game will be more concentrated than before, there may be a case where the operating rate of the game table can be increased.

  The hold icon PI2 also serves as an operation means image corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136. When the chance button 136 is operated within a predetermined reception time, as shown in FIG. The display mode of the hold icon PI2 is an image that suggests whether or not the special figure variable game corresponding to the hold icon PI2 is successful from the operation means image (an icon that imitates the chance button 136 and a star-shaped figure). In this example, it is configured to change to a character image (savohani) that suggests that the success / failure result by prefetching the special figure variable game is a big hit.

  With such a configuration, the game information can be obtained by the hold icon that is changed by the operation of the operation means, so that the operation of the operation means can be further promoted and the interest of the game can be enhanced. is there.

  In this example, both the image before the change of the hold icon PI2 (the image imitating the chance button 136 and the icon combining the star-shaped figure) and the image after the change (character image (savohani)) are the first. Although it is configured so as to cover a part of the elapsed time notification image TG1, the image after the change may be configured not to cover a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1.

  With such a configuration, there is a case where the second operation of the operation means can be surely performed after prompting the first operation of the operation means, and a decrease in game motivation can be prevented.

Further, in the first operation of the chance button 136, as shown in (f) of the figure, a notice effect regarding the change is started, and in the second operation of the chance button 136, as shown in (g) of the same figure. By configuring the display mode of the hold icon to be changed, the display related to the change may be given priority over the display related to the hold. In this case, the roles of the first operation and the second operation of the chance button 136 may be reversed. Further, at least one of the first operation and the second operation of the chance button 136 may be changed to an operation by another operation means (for example, the setting operation unit 137). Moreover, you may comprise so that both the notice effect regarding the said change and the display aspect of a hold icon may be changed by operating the chance button 136 once.
<Embodiment 19 of operation means image display>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 82, a nineteenth embodiment of operation means image display performed by the operation means image display process described above will be described. In addition, the figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 19 in time series.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 4A and 4B, a special symbol 1 and a fourth symbol display area 208e and a special symbol 2 and a fourth symbol display area 208f are provided in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. Provided. The special figure 1 4th symbol display area 208e displays the result of special figure 1 variable game, and the special figure 2 4th symbol display area 208f displays the result of special figure 2 variable game. For example, during a special figure change game (during special figure change), a diamond-shaped figure is displayed blinking.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5C shows the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the reception start timing of the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. At this timing, the right door 246b of the shielding device 246 is moved in the closing direction, and the first operation means image BG1, the first elapsed time notification image TG1, and a part of the hold icon are displayed on the right door 246b. By covering all of the decorative designs in the inside, the first operating means image BG1, the first elapsed time notification image TG1, and a part of the hold icon, and all of the changing decorative designs are invisible or difficult to see. It is configured to be in a state.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the operation means image, the elapsed time notification image, the hold icon, and the decorative symbol that are invisible or difficult to see, and thus prompt the operation of the operation means. In addition, since the player is more concentrated on the game than before, the operating rate of the game table may be increased. The shielding device 246 may cover all of the first operation means image BG1, the first elapsed time notification image TG1, and the hold icon, or may cover a part of the decorative pattern that is changing. Also good.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4D, the display position of the decorative symbol may be changed to a visible position in conjunction with the movement of the right door 246b of the shielding device 246, or the shielding device A notch part may be formed in a part of 246, and the special figure 1 4th symbol display area 208e and the special figure 2 4th symbol display area 208f may be visible through the notch part. .

With such a configuration, it is possible to surely grasp game information important to the player as in the decorative symbol and the fourth symbol, and therefore, it may be possible to prevent a decrease in game motivation.
<Modifications of operation means image, elapsed time notification image, and remaining time notification image>

  FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a modification of the operation means image, the elapsed time notification image, and the remaining time notification image. In the figure, as an example of the operation means image, the elapsed time notification image, and the remaining time notification image, the reception start image displayed when the reception start timing of the operation means arrives and the reception time of the operation means are halved. An image for the passage of half of the acceptance period displayed when it has elapsed, and an image for completion of acceptance displayed when the acceptance end timing of the operating means has arrived.

  The figure (a) employs an image imitating the design of the operation means as the operation means image, and displays an elapsed time notification image (or remaining time notification image) according to the elapsed time of the operation reception period. An image is used in which the scale (filled part) gradually decreases. Further, FIG. 5B employs an image obtained by simplifying the operation means as the operation means image, and matches the elapsed time of the operation reception period as the elapsed time notification image (or remaining time notification image). The image that the scale (filled part) of the meter divided into plurals gradually decreases is adopted. Further, FIG. 4C adopts an image obtained by simplifying the operation means as the operation means image, and matches the elapsed time of the operation reception period as the elapsed time notification image (or remaining time notification image). An image representing a state in which lamps (including those by light emitting means such as LEDs and those by display means such as LCD) are gradually turned off is adopted.

  FIG. 4D is configured to count down the remaining time of the operation reception period as the remaining time notification image, and FIG. 4E illustrates the elapsed time notification image (or remaining time notification image). The color of the image is gradually lightened in accordance with the elapsed time (or remaining time) of the operation reception period, and the image is erased immediately before the reception period. FIG. The notification image (or remaining time notification image) is configured to gradually darken the color of the image in accordance with the elapsed time (or remaining time) of the operation reception period. These operation means images, elapsed time notification images, and remaining time notification images may be applied to any of the above embodiments.

  As described above, the gaming table (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the first embodiment has at least operating means (for example, chance button 136, setting operation unit 137) provided at a position where the player can operate. ) And display means capable of executing at least a plurality of displays (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, the first sub-control unit 400), and at least one of the plurality of displays Is a first display (for example, a first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 shown in FIGS. 67A to 67E), and at least one of the plurality of displays is a second display. (For example, the remaining time notification image TG1-2 shown in FIGS. 67 (c) to 67 (e)), and the first display is a display related to the operation of the operation means (for example, an operation reception period of the chance button 136). When The second display is a display related to the operation of the operation means (for example, a remaining time notification image for notifying the remaining time of the operation button reception period of the chance button 136). The display means is capable of displaying at least the second display during display of the first display, and the display means is capable of displaying at least one of the plurality of displays. The display mode can be changed (for example, an image in which the scale of the meter (filled portion) gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the operation reception period of the chance button 136. Display related to the operation means by counting down the remaining time, such as display related to the operation means, announcement effect, normal symbol variation display, hold icon, etc. At least partially hide) ones, it is the amusement machine according to claim.

  According to the gaming machine according to the first embodiment, it may be possible to strongly encourage the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from losing the operation timing of the operation means and improve the interest of the game. Further, there are cases where the interest of the game can be improved by increasing the choices of the players.

  Further, the first display is a notification according to the elapsed time from the start timing of the reception period for accepting the operation of the operation means (for example, a meter scale (e.g., a meter scale corresponding to the elapsed time of the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136) The second display is a notification according to an elapsed time from the start timing of the reception period (for example, an operation of the chance button 136). The remaining time of the reception period may be counted down).

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to strongly encourage the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from losing the operation timing of the operation means and improve the interest of the game. Further, there are cases where the interest of the game can be improved by increasing the choices of the players.

  Also, at least one of the first and second displays changes to a different display mode when a specific time has elapsed since the start of acceptance of the operation of the operation means (for example, FIG. 66). As shown in (c), the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 may be changed from the first color (blue) to the second color (red).

  With such a configuration, various displays can be performed, and the player may be prevented from getting bored. Further, since the player can determine the operation timing by looking at the display, it may be easy for the player to participate in the game.

  The first display (for example, a meter) may be a display mode different from the second display (for example, a number).

  With such a configuration, there are cases where the player can be more strongly urged to operate the operation means by various display notifications. Further, there are cases where the player can be entertained by notification with various displays.

  In addition, the first and second displays may be terminated (for example, the elapsed time notification image or the remaining time notification image is deleted) when at least the reception period ends.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to strongly encourage the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from losing the operation timing of the operation means and improve the interest of the game. Further, there are cases where the interest of the game can be improved by increasing the choices of the players.

  In addition, it is provided with an appropriateness determination means (for example, special drawing related lottery processing, general drawing related lottery processing) capable of executing the determination of the validity when the determination condition is satisfied, and at least one of the first and second displays. One of them may indicate the result of the determination (for example, a third elapsed time notification image TG3 shown in FIG. 63).

  With such a configuration, there are cases where various displays can be performed. In addition, there are cases where the choice of how to play by the player increases and the interest of the game can be further improved.

  Further, a third display (for example, the first operation means image BG1 (chance button shown in FIGS. 67 (a) to 67 (e)) for notifying that the operation reception period of the operation means is displayed on the plurality of displays. The third display does not notify the elapsed time from the start timing of the reception period for accepting the operation of the operating means, and the third display is during the reception period, It may be executable at least during execution of at least one of the first and second displays.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game by encouraging the player to operate more than necessary. In addition, the display may be sharpened to make the player more entertaining.

  Note that a third display for notifying only that it is the operation acceptance period for the operation means may be displayed, or that at least a third display for notifying that the operation means is being accepted for operation is displayed. Good.

  The third display may not notify only the elapsed time from the start timing of the reception period during the reception period, or at least the elapsed time from the start timing of the reception period during the reception period. It may be one that does not notify, may notify at least the elapsed time after a specific time from the start of the reception period, and only notifies the elapsed time after a specific time from the start of the reception period It may be a thing.

  The third display may be at least executable during execution of the first display, may be at least executable only during execution of the first display, It may be at least executable during execution of the second display, or may be at least executable only during execution of the second display. The third display may be at least executable during the execution of both the first and second displays, or only during the execution of both the first and second displays. It may be executable.

  In addition, the third display is displayed on at least one of the first display and the second display when at least part (or only part or all) of the operation reception period overlaps ( Alternatively, the operation reception result may be reflected in only one display or both displays.

  The third display is at least the third display when at least a part (or only a part or all) of the operation acceptance period overlaps at least one of the first and second displays. The operation reception result may be reflected on (or only the third display or all the first to third displays).

  The plurality of displays include a fourth display (for example, a first elapsed time notification image TG1-2 shown in FIG. 66C) displayed when a specific time has elapsed, and the fourth display Is displayed in accordance with the elapsed time from the start timing of the reception period (for example, the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-2 is changed from the third color (white) to the fourth color (red). ) At least. With such a configuration, it may be possible to strongly urge the player to perform an operation.

  Note that the fourth display may be a notification only according to the elapsed time from the start timing of the reception period, or at least a notification (or only a notification) indicating the result of the determination of success / failure. It is also possible that at least (or only the advance notice) is not made to suggest the result of the determination.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the first embodiment includes a plurality of operating means (for example, a chance button 136 and a setting operation unit 137) provided at a position that can be operated by the player. And a display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first sub-control unit 400) capable of displaying at least one of the plurality of displays. At least one of the plurality of displays is a second display, and the first display is a display related to the operation means (first operation means image BG1, second operation means). Image BG2, elapsed time notification images TG1, TG2, TG1-1.TG1-2), and the display means passes through a third display (for example, an operation acceptance period of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 69). At least a part of the elapsed time notification image TG1 for notifying the time), and the display means displays at least a fourth display (for example, a part of the variation icon CI shown in FIG. 69). The display means gives priority to the fourth display over the third display when the display position of the third display matches the display position of the fourth display. The third display is at least part of one of the first display and the second display, and the fourth display. Is a gaming table that is at least a part of the other display of the first display and the second display.

  According to the gaming machine according to the first embodiment, it may be possible to further encourage the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where the display mode hidden by the player can be focused and concentrated on the game.

  Further, the first display is a notification according to the elapsed time from the start timing of the reception period for accepting the operation of the operation means (for example, a meter scale (e.g., a meter scale corresponding to the elapsed time of the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136) It is also possible to display at least an image in which the filled portion) gradually decreases.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to further prompt the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where the display mode hidden by the player can be focused and concentrated on the game.

  In addition, the third display (for example, a part or all of the elapsed time notification image TG1 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 69, the first operation shown in FIG. The means image BG1 (part or all of the image imitating the chance button) is at least a part of the first display, and the fourth display (for example, the change icon CI shown in FIG. 69, FIG. The second operation means image BG2 (a part or the whole of the image imitating the chance button) shown may be at least a part of the second display.

  With such a configuration, it may be difficult to see the notification of the reception period, and the player's operation may be further urged.

  In addition, the display means may display a fifth display (for example, the first operation means image BG1 (chance button shown in FIG. 69) when a specific time has elapsed since the start of acceptance of the operation of the operation means. At least when the display position of the fourth display and the display position of the fifth display coincide with each other. The fourth display is preferentially displayed (for example, displayed in front), and the fifth display is at least a part of one of the first display and the second display. It may be.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to further prompt the player to operate the operation means. In some cases, the player can focus more on the display mode hidden by the player and concentrate on the game.

  Further, the third display (for example, the elapsed time notification image TG1 shown in FIG. 69) may have a display mode different from the fourth display (for example, the change icon CI shown in FIG. 69). Note that different display modes may indicate different shapes, may indicate different transmittances, may indicate different colors, or may indicate different sizes. In addition, at least one of the third displays (shape, color, transparency, size, etc.) may be used as long as they have the same shape or different display modes as long as they have different colors The display mode may be different as long as a part (at least one of shape, color, transparency, size, etc.) of the first display and the fourth display is different.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to focus attention on the display mode hidden by the player and concentrate on the game.

  In addition, a part of the third display (at least one of shape, color, transmissivity, size, etc.) so that the colors may be different or the same shape and the same display mode may be used. And a portion of the fourth display (at least one of shape, color, transparency, size, etc., that matches a portion of the third display) The same display mode may be used.

  Further, the third display (for example, the elapsed time notification image TG1 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 69) is at least a part of the second display. The fourth display (for example, the change icon CI shown in FIG. 69) may be at least a part of the first display.

  With such a configuration, it may be easy to see the notification of the reception period and allow the player to perform the operation reliably. In some cases, the player may be urged to press a button. In some cases, the player can concentrate on the game to prevent the player from getting bored.

  (A) In addition, it is provided with a go / no-go determination means (for example, special drawing related lottery processing, general drawing related lottery processing) capable of executing the go / no-go determination when the pass / fail determination condition is satisfied, and a second display (for example, notice) The display of the effect) may be a notice that suggests the result of the determination.

  With such a configuration, there are cases where various displays can be performed. Further, there are cases where the player can be made to pay more attention to the reception period of the operation means.

  (B) Further, it is provided with a go / no-go determination means (for example, special drawing related lottery processing, ordinary drawing related lottery processing) capable of executing the go / no-go determination when the pass / fail determination condition is satisfied, and the first display (related to the operation means). The display) may be a notice suggesting the result of the determination.

  With such a configuration, there are cases where various displays can be performed. In some cases, the player can be more focused on the notice.

  In the case of (A) and (B) above, at least one of the first display and the second display (or only one display, or both displays) suggests the result of the determination. A notice may be included, and the first display and the second display may be the same (or different) notice showing the result of the determination. For example, both of them may be the determination results of special drawings, or both may be the determination results of ordinary drawings. In addition, one may be a result of whether or not a special figure is determined, and the other may be a result of normal or not, or one may be a result of determining whether or not the change is correct and the other is a result of determining whether or not the next time is correct (Prefetching) may be used, or both may be the determination results of the different fluctuations (special / standard prefetching).

  (C) Further, if at least a part of at least one of the first, second, and third displays is hidden by a plurality of other displays, the hidden display is made more noticeable. May be possible. Note that only a part (or all) of at least one of the first, second, and third displays may be hidden by a plurality of other displays.

  (D) Further, if at least one of the first, second, and third displays hides a plurality of other displays, the hidden display may be more noticed. In some cases, the hidden display can be more noticed. In addition, at least one part (or only part or all) of one of the plurality of other displays is hidden by the one display, and the other display is at least partly ( Alternatively, only a part or all) may be hidden.

In the case of (C) and (D) above, the third display may be a notice that at least suggests the result of the determination (or only a notification that suggests the result of the determination), The third display may be a notification of at least the reception period of the operation means (or only the notification of the reception period of the operation means), a notice that suggests the result of the determination, and the reception period of the operation means. At least one of the notifications (or only one of the two, or at least both, or both) may be performed. The display means may be a notification means, and the display may be a notification.
Second Embodiment

Hereinafter, a gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) according to a second embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. Note that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 83 to 116 are used only in the description of the second embodiment in principle, and even when the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, The reference numerals shown in FIGS. 83 to 116 are given priority. On the other hand, in the following description, the same reference numerals that are not shown in FIGS. 83 to 116 are used as the same constituent elements as those in the above embodiment. In addition, the number of the example of this embodiment is used only for the description of this embodiment in principle, but each example of this embodiment and each example of other embodiments are applied in combination with each other. Can do. In addition, when there are drawings showing the same timing in a plurality of drawings, overlapping description may be omitted.
<Overall configuration>

  First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 includes, as an external structure, an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface. The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a game machine installation business store.

  The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a vertical rectangular gaming base base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is attached to the front side of the main body 104 via a hinge portion 112 so that the inside Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player 200 ball launching handles 134 for launching into the game area 124, chance buttons 136 for changing the effects of the various effects devices 206 by the player's operation, and the chance button 136 to emit light. Sub button lamp 138, ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and return operation button for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance 142, and a ball rental display unit 144 for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit. In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. .

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 85 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 40 viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is located below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-board that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error release switch that constitutes a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and that releases an error by the operation of a game clerk Discharge board case 172 storing the payout board 170 having 168, launch base constituting the launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of the game ball A launch board case 176 that houses 174, a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines, and a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game store clerk and an RWM clear by being operated when the power is turned on A power board case 184 that houses a power board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs a signal to the main controller 300, and a CR interface 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided. ing.

  FIG. 86 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the ordinary device. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”. The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In this embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7 segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The multi-purpose hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general-purpose variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. In this embodiment, the general-purpose variable games are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are being held. In this embodiment, the special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general prize opening 226, a general start port 228, a first special view start port 230, a second special view start port 232, around the effect device 206. A variable winning opening 234 is provided.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detecting sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning is sometimes referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player is sometimes referred to as “rental ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is constituted by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball for the upper plate 126. The special figure changing game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric Chu). In the present embodiment, only one second special figure starting port 232 is disposed directly below the first special figure starting port 230. The second special figure starting port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the wing member 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a large winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is disposed below the center of the game board 200. This variable winning opening 234 includes a door member 234a that can be opened and closed. When the door member 234a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and the special figure display device stops the big hit symbol when the special figure variable game is won. When displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds) and at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable prize opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, After guiding a ball that has not won any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening is provided for discharging to the game island side.

The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with the strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and Further, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 148 and driven into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc. (Outside the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.
<Directing device 206>

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball carried on by a nail of the game board 200, or the like, and the passed ball is a first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the golf course.

  In this embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b imitating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b at a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding means shields the inner end portions thereof so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.
<Control unit>

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and the power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. Yes.
<Main control unit>

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing are mounted. . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a counter circuit 318 used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes two circuits). And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, front frame door opening sensor, and inner frame opening sensor. And a sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a lower plate full sensor and outputting a comparison result with an amplification result or a reference voltage to the counter circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device For example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, a predetermined symbol display device, A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the general-purpose display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, a general-purpose reservation lamp 216, a first special figure reservation lamp 218, a second special figure reservation lamp 220, a high-probability medium) A drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the lamp 222 and the like, and various solenoids 332 for opening and closing a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232, a door member 234a of the variable winning port 234, and the like. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the above is connected.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the counter circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the counter circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the counter circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the second special figure starting port 232 has won a ball, the counter circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.
<First sub-control unit>

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effects data, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and for measuring time, frequency, etc. The counter timer 412 is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a shielding device sensor 430 that detects the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button detection sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136, a shielding device sensor 430, and a chance button detection sensor The sensor circuit 428 that outputs the detection signal from the 426 to the basic circuit 402, and the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the CPU 404 are read, and the display image is generated using the work area of the VRAM 436 to decorate A VDP 434 (image) that displays an image on the symbol display device 208. Are connected Oh and display processor), the.
<Second sub-control unit>

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and frequency 512 is installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, and an image display A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. Is output to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table frame lamp drive for controlling the game table frame lamp 542 The circuit 540 is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.
<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the dispensing device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.
<Type of design>

  Next, using FIGS. 88A to 88C, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described. FIG. 4A shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special figure.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor has detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” by repeating all lighting of seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 displays “fluctuation display of special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Do. These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display according to the present invention. Then, when the variation time determined before the variation start of the special figure 1 (corresponding to the variation time referred to in the present invention) elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the special symbol form of the special figure 1. When the variation time determined before the start of variation 2 (this also corresponds to the variation time according to the present invention) has elapsed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special diagram 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display referred to in the present invention, hereinafter, after the “variable display of special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. The series of displays up to is referred to as symbol variation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. FIG. 10A shows 10 types of special drawings from “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure J” as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation stop display, and the white portions in the figure are turned off. The location of the segment to be displayed is shown, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment to be lit.

  “Special figure A” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, the determination as to whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the decision as to whether or not a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time-saving state. Although the time reduction will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal high probability state, and the state that does not shift to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal low probability state. “Special figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that give a relatively large profit amount to the player.

  “Special figure C” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure C” is 2R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 15R. “Special figure D” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time reduction, and is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure D” is 2R compared to “Special Figure B” which is 15R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol suddenly called normal, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. These “special drawing E” and “special drawing F” are both 2R and are in a state in which they do not shift to the time-saving state.

  “Special figure G” is the first small hit symbol, and “Special figure H” is the second small hit symbol, both of which are in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit here corresponds to the same as the big hit with no short time at 2R. That is, “Special Figure G” and “Special Figure H” are in the same state as “Special Figure F”, but the effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 are different in both cases. By providing “G”, “Special Figure H”, and “Special Figure F”, the interest of the game is enhanced.

  In addition, “Special Figure I” is a first off symbol, and “Special Figure J” is a second off symbol, and the profit amount given to the player is a relatively small profit amount.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, symbols other than “Special Illustration A” are prepared as 15R special jackpot symbols, and the same applies to other symbols such as 15R jackpot symbols.

  FIG. 88 (b) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Displayed in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →... “Decoration display of decorative pattern” is performed. When the 15R jackpot of “special drawing B” is notified, a symbol combination (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration”) corresponding to the 15R jackpot corresponding to the 15R jackpot in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. 1 ”or“ decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2 ”). When notifying the 15R special jackpot of “special drawing A”, a combination of three symbols of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” or “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7”). Etc.) is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the 2R big hit called “hidden probability change” of “special drawing E”, the 2R big hit called “special drawing F” suddenly normal, or the first small hit of “special drawing G”, “special drawing H” When notifying the second small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in order to notify 2R jackpot called “sudden probability change” of “special drawing C” or 2R jackpot called “sudden time reduction of“ special drawing D ”,“ decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5 ”is set. Stop display.

  On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of “Special Figure I” and the second deviation of “Special Figure J”, the symbol combination other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 5B is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

FIG. 88 (c) shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes of “normal map A”, which is a winning symbol, and “general symbol B”, which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that a sphere has passed through the general-purpose start opening 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the deviation of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 6C, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.
<Main control unit main processing>

  Next, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input performs reset start by a reset interrupt and executes main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 89 in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value. In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 9v), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312 and a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not the state before the power interruption (before power interruption) is restored, and the state before the power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of an amusement store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicates that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the power-off state. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 87 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

In step S115, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the ordinary figure winning random number counter and the special figure random value counter, the ordinary figure timer random number value, and the special figure timer, respectively. Two random number counters for generating each random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a normal timer random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal timer random value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. Note that the initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.
<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT is periodically updated (so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 87, winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal) is stored. In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. Is determined to have passed. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been awarded to the winning ports 226 and 234 and the starting ports 230, 232, and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, Two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the random number value of FIG. 1 and the counter for acquiring the random value of FIG. 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated. In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when winning holes 226, 234 and starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, the RAM 308 stores the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, and the variable winning port 234. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S203. When a winning is made at the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is stored in the special counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. And a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random value as a special figure 1 random value and storing it in the corresponding random value storage area. When a winning is made to the second special figure starting port 232 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is sent from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 to the special figure 2 winning random number value. And a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random value as a special figure 2 random value and storing it in the corresponding random value storage area. If there is a win at the general figure starting port 228 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is obtained as a normal figure winning random value from the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number value. Store in the corresponding random value storage area. When there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the hit symbol display mode When the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured so as to display the off symbol when the hit flag is off. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either the winning symbol (general symbol A shown in FIG. 88 (c)) or the off symbol (general symbol B shown in FIG. 88 (c)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 232a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is out of play, the usual figure out flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure off flag is on, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable time is stored as a normal map variable time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Next, in step S225 and step S227, special figure state update processing is performed for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2, but first, special figure state update processing (special figure 2 state update process) for special figure 2 is performed. This is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed in accordance with the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game).

  In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 includes a 15R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first off flag, a second off flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a normal figure. A flag for each probability variation flag is prepared. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), the 15R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag 88, when the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure A, 15R jackpot flag shown in FIG. 88A is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on. Special figure B, 2R jackpot flag is on, special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and special figure probability fluctuation flag is on. Special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, general figure probability When the fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, and when the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure E, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability Fluctuation flag is off When the fluctuation flag is also off, special figure F, when the first small hit flag is on, special figure G, when the second small hit flag is on, special figure H, when the first off flag is on The special segment I and the second off-set flag are turned on, the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on / off so that the respective modes of the special diagram I are turned on. Is set to indicate that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a sudden probability variation symbol (special symbol C), and a sudden time-short symbol symbol (special symbol). D), hidden probability variation (special E), suddenly normal (special F), first small hit (special G), second small hit (special H), first off symbol (special) Any one of the symbols I) and the second off-set symbol (special symbol J) is confirmed and displayed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not (details will be described later), the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state).

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Alternatively, the door member 234a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234 until a winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable prize opening 234. In addition to outputting a signal to be held at the same time, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and a closing period is stored in a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment) and finished, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) In other words, the effect standby period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Set the information indicating. Also, if the normal probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the time reduction number 100 is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the time reduction number is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned ON. The time saving here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is a normal high probability state. There is a higher probability of hitting a general-purpose variable game in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal figure variable game and the fluctuation time of the special figure variable game are shorter in the normal figure high probability state than in the normal figure low probability state. Further, in the normal high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special start port 232 tends to be longer than in the normal low probability state. In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a large number of games will be placed in the second special figure starting port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls are entered during the big win game. There is a problem that a ball enters and the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. This is to solve this problem.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of place, the out-of-game flag is turned on as will be described later. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed as step S229 and step S231. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. Further, the notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the second special figure starting port 232 is notified. However, it is performed in preference to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the first special figure starting port 230. The special drawing related lottery process will be described in detail later.

  In step S233, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (In this embodiment, command types such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command are specified. Possible information), bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information such as the value of the 15R jackpot flag or 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, and the like. In the case of the symbol variation stop command, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, and the like are included. In the case of a jackpot round number designation command, the value of the special variation probability flag, the number of jackpot rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, winning of the variable winning port 234 Includes presence or absence.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the value of the 15R big hit flag or 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure 2 related are stored in the RAM 308 as command data. Information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag, the value of the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described large winning opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In the above-mentioned big winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increasing process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a full tray error is monitored. When the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the normal symbol display device 210 and the first special symbol display via the display circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241.

  In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to.

On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.
<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>

The process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 4C is a flowchart of the timer variable interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.
<First sub-control unit main process>

  First, in step S301 of the main process of the first sub control unit 400, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is substituted into the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading effect data corresponding to the command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when update of the effect data is necessary, effect data update processing is performed.

In step S311, the chance button detection sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136 is monitored, and when pressing of the chance button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S309 is changed to effect data corresponding to the pressing of the chance button 136. Perform the change process. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a button reception period is provided in which the pressing operation of the chance button 136 can be received during the variable display of the special figure and the decorative symbol. In this button reception period, it is assumed that time measurement is started when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation (for example, when t ₀ seconds in FIG. 96B have elapsed).

  In addition, at the start of this button reception period, effect data for notifying the player that the pressing operation of the chance button 136 can be received is prepared, and in the image control process described later, for example, FIG. ) (In this example, display of an image simulating the chance button 136) is performed. In addition, when it is detected that the chance button 136 is pressed during the button reception period, effect data for making a notice is prepared, and, for example, as shown on the right side of FIG. A notice is made (in this example, the text “Gekiatsu!” Is displayed). Then, after the button reception period (for example, 6 seconds) elapses, the time measurement is ended, and a process for deleting the notification of the button reception period and the notice is performed.

  In step S313, if there is a command to VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to VDP 434 (details will be described later). In step S315, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S317, if there is a command to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420. In step S319, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

In step S321, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S303.
<First sub-control unit command reception interrupt process>

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.
<First sub-control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). Execute in the cycle.

In step S501 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In subsequent step S503, transmission of a control command to second sub-control unit 500 set in step S319, update processing of a random number value for production, and the like are performed.
<First Sub-Control Unit Image Control Process>

  Next, the image control process in step S313 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605. If not, a transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it.

  In step S605, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets parameters according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

In step S607, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404. In step S609, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611. If not, the generation end interrupt signal is determined. Wait for input. In step S611, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.
<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>

The process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.
<Second sub-control unit main process>

  First, in step S701 of the main process of the second sub control unit 500, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S701. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S703, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S709, an effect control process is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S707, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 506, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S <b> 711, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520. In step S713, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step S703.
<Second sub-control unit command reception interrupt process>

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.
<Second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and a timer interrupt process is performed in response to this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle.

In step S901 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second sub control unit main process shown in FIG. 91A. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S903 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process is performed.
<Data table of main control unit 300>

  Next, a data table stored in advance in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 and a special drawing related lottery process will be described.

  FIG. 93 is a diagram showing an example of the special figure 1 fluctuation time determination table for determining the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 fluctuation time determination table for determining the fluctuation time of the special figure 2. . These special figure 1 variation time determination table and special figure 2 variation time determination table include a special symbol stop symbol, a special symbol variation time, a random number selection range, an effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208, and a table. It is a data table in which numbers are associated and stored.

  The main control unit 300 refers to the special figure 1 variation time determination table in the special figure 1 related lottery process described above, and selects a table number based on the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game. For example, if the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is a big hit and the special figure A or the special figure B is selected as the stop symbol of the special figure 1, the table 1 is selected as the table number. Subsequently, the main control unit 300 selects a specific variation time by lottery using a random value from one or a plurality of variation times corresponding to the selected table. For example, when the table number is Table 1 and the acquired random number value is 500, the variation time 15000 ms (per normal reach) corresponding to the random number selection range 0 to 1000 is selected.

Further, the main control unit 300 refers to the special figure 2 variation time determination table in the special figure 2 related lottery process described above, and selects a table number based on the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game. For example, when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is successful and the special figure I or special figure J is selected as the stop symbol of the special figure 2, for example, the table 9 is selected as the table number. Subsequently, the main control unit 300 selects a specific variation time by lottery using a random value from one or a plurality of variation times corresponding to the selected table. For example, when the table number is Table 9 and the acquired random number value is 55000, a fluctuation time of 10,000 ms (normal reach deviation) corresponding to the random number selection range 50001 to 60000 is selected.
<Notice production>

  Next, details of the effect (a series of notice effects related to the notice) displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208 in accordance with the determination result of the special figure related lottery process (steps S229 and S231) will be described. This effect includes a predetermined effect (hereinafter also referred to as “notice”) that suggests to the player the result of the determination of success / failure during the display of the decorative symbols. Further, this effect includes a predetermined effect (hereinafter also referred to as “notification”) that prompts the player to operate the chance button 136 in order to make the above notice. That is, in the series of notice effects displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect (notification) that prompts the player to operate the chance button 136 is first performed, and when the chance button 136 is operated by the player, the decorative symbol is displayed. During the fluctuation display, the result is changed to an effect (notice) that suggests the result of the success / failure determination to the player. At this time, an effect (notification) that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 may be set according to the result of the success / failure determination, thereby fulfilling a function (notice function) that suggests the result of the success / failure determination to the player. The chance button 136 is set so that the operation becomes effective when operated within a predetermined reception period. The button reception period is notified to the player in various notification modes.

  Specifically, the main control unit 300 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on in the special drawing related lottery processing (steps S229 and S231). When the big hit flag is ON, one symbol is determined from a plurality of big hit symbols (in the present embodiment, special drawings A to F). If the big hit flag is not on, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on. When the small hit flag is ON, one symbol is determined from a plurality of small hit symbols (in the present embodiment, special drawings G to F). When neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is on, one symbol is determined from a plurality of missed symbols (in this embodiment, special diagrams I to J). When the stop symbol of the special figure is determined, the change time is determined by the above-described special figure change time determination table (see FIG. 93) according to the stop symbol. Further, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), a symbol change start command including at least information on the determination result (stop symbol of the special symbol) and the variation time is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400, in the above-described effect control process (step S309), the determination result (the special symbol stop symbol) included in the symbol variation start command received from the main control unit 300 and the variation time, The notice lottery processing is executed based on the notification mode determination table stored in advance in the ROM 406 for each stop symbol and variation time of the special figure and the random number value obtained from a predetermined random number counter.

  For example, when the 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B) and the fluctuation time for Super Reach A (45000 ms) are received from the main control unit 300, the table number 2 is selected from the plurality of notification mode determination tables shown in FIG. The notification form determination table for Super Reach A is selected, and the notice lottery process is executed. Next, using the selected notification mode determination table, it is determined which effect is to be performed by random number lottery. For example, if the random number value is 29 in the super reach A per notification mode determination table, a notification mode whose mode changes from notification B to D is selected. Also, for example, when the first deviation symbol (special figure I) and the super reach A deviation time (40000 ms) are received from the main control unit 300, a table is selected from a plurality of notification mode determination tables shown in FIG. The super reach A of No. 12 selects the notification mode determination table for deviation, and executes the notice lottery process. Next, using the selected notification mode determination table, it is determined which effect is to be performed by random number lottery. For example, if the random number is 29 in the notification mode determination table for super reach A deviation, the notification mode in which the mode of notification F continues and the mode does not change in the middle is selected.

  Specifically, the first sub-control unit 400 executes a notice lottery process as shown in FIG. 94, for example, at the start of fluctuations in special figures and decorative symbols. First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the determination result obtained from the main control unit 300 is a big hit (whether the stop symbol is a special symbol A to F). If it is a big hit, the process proceeds to step S1003, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1005.

In step S1003, the lottery of the notification mode is performed based on the jackpot table in the notification mode determination table. The notification mode determination table is determined based on the jackpot symbol received from the main control unit 300 and the variation time. For example, the jackpot table with table number 2 in the notification mode determination table shown in FIG. 95 is a notification mode determination table for Super Reach A selected in the special figure 1 variation time determination table in FIG. In the case of reach, details are omitted, but a notification mode determination table is prepared in the same manner. Further, in step S1003, lottery of notification modes for the remaining time of the button reception period for notice is performed based on the notification mode determination table for super reach A in FIG. That is, in the case of a big hit through Super Reach A, when the random number value is 0 to 4, the “mode of continuing the notification F (mode in which the notification does not change)” is selected as the notification mode, and the random value is 5 to 19 Select “mode switching from notification A to notification E”, select “mode switching from notification B to notification D” when the random number is 20 to 49, and select “notification” when the random number is 50 to 99 A mode of switching from C ₁ to notification C ₂ is selected. In this embodiment, since the numerical value range of the random number value is set to 0 to 99, for example, the probability of selecting “mode of continuing notification F” as the notification mode is 1/20 (= 5/100). Yes, when the determination result of the special figure is a big hit, the probability that “the mode in which the notification F is continued” is most selected among all the notification modes is low.

  In step S1005, it is determined whether it is a predetermined fluctuation time. If so, the process proceeds to step S1007, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1009. Here, the predetermined variation time is a lottery using a special figure determination result (stop symbol) and a random number value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the table shown in FIG. It means the variation time of the special figure determined by. In the present embodiment, in the next step S1007, a lottery of the notification mode is limited to a case where an effect relating to a loss, a normal reach failure, a super reach A departure or a super reach B departure is performed. It has come to be. In the present embodiment, when the stop symbol of the special figure is a small hit, the notification mode is determined from the loss table.

In step S1007, the lottery of the notification mode is performed based on the deviation table in the notification mode determination table. For example, the outlier table of table number 12 in the notification mode determination table shown in FIG. 95 is a notification mode determination table for super reach A selected in the special figure 1 variation time determination table in FIG. Similarly to the case of, a notice mode determination table for notice is also prepared in the case of other reach or loss. Further, in step S1007, the lottery of the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period for notice is performed based on the notification mode determination table for super reach A in FIG. That is, in the case of deviation from Super Reach A, when the random number value is 0 to 49, “notification F is continued” is selected as the notification mode, and when the random number value is 50 to 79, “notification from notification A” is selected. "Mode switching to E" is selected. When the random number value is 80 to 94, "Mode switching from notification B to notification D" is selected. When the random number value is 95 to 99, "Notification C ₁ to Notification C ₂ " is selected. “Mode to be switched” is selected. Note that the probability of selecting “mode switching from notification C ₁ to notification C ₂ ” as the notification mode is 1/20 (= 5/100), and if the determination result of the special figure is not a big hit, “notification C ₁ probability aspect switched to notification C ₂ "is the most selective of all the notification manner from is low. In step S1009, a command is transmitted to various devices that execute a notice (for example, VDP 434 that controls the display image of the decorative symbol display device 208), and this control flow ends.

Of the notification modes described above, in the notification mode that switches from notification X to notification Y, the first notification mode is referred to as the first notification mode, and the notification mode that switches thereafter is referred to as the second notification mode. Moreover, at least the notification period is set in each aspect of the above-described notifications A to F. For example, the broadcast A is one second broadcasting period, informing B is broadcast period 2 seconds, the notification C ₁ and C ₂ are broadcasting period is 3 seconds, the notification D is broadcasting period is 4 seconds, the notification E is broadcasting period is 5 seconds The notification F is set such that the notification period is 6 seconds. And when winning the mode switched from the first notification mode to the second notification mode, a notification period according to the first notification mode (hereinafter also referred to as a first notification period) and a notification period according to the second notification mode (hereinafter referred to as the first notification mode). , Which is also referred to as a second notification period) is set to coincide with the button reception period.

Further, although not shown in particular, in the advance notice lottery process, the details of the advance notice are determined based on the determination result received from the main control unit 300, the predetermined advance notice lottery table stored in the ROM 406 in advance, and the random number described above. (For example, if the button is pressed, the character display of “It ’s hot!” Or “...” is displayed).
<Example 1 of notification mode of remaining time>

  Example 1 of the notification mode of the remaining time of the reception period of the chance button 136 notified by the decorative symbol display device 208 as a result of the notice lottery process will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97. FIG. Here, when the determination result is 15R big hit (special figure B) and the fluctuation time is 45000 ms (per super reach A), in the notification form determination table for super reach A of table number 2 shown in FIG. An example will be described in which a notification mode that switches from “B” (first notification mode) to “B” (second notification mode) is won.

  As described above, the chance button 136 is enabled to accept operations only during a preset period (button reception period). The button reception period is displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in a format that shows the remaining time (here, a rectangular meter), and the length of the remaining time of the button reception period is notified by the remaining amount of the meter. The The notification mode can be set in various modes using the notification period, meter color, initial amount of meter at the start of notification, reduction amount per unit time (decrease rate), and the like as parameters.

In the notification B mode in the first embodiment, the meter is displayed in the reference color (for example, blue) during the notification period of T ₂ seconds (for example, 2 seconds). For example, as shown in FIGS. 97 (b) to 97 (d), the meter is displayed in a state where it partially overlaps the front surface of the decorative symbol that is changing. For example, as shown in FIG. 97 (b), the meter is displayed as full when the notification starts in the notification B mode, and gradually decreases as time elapses. The decreasing speed of the meter is set to coincide with the actual decreasing speed during the button reception period (actual decreasing speed of the remaining time).

In the notification D mode, the meter is displayed in a special color (for example, red) during the notification period of T ₄ seconds (for example, 4 seconds). The meter is displayed partially overlapping the front of the changing decorative symbol. At the notification start time point according to the notification D mode, the remaining amount of the meter immediately before (the notification end time point according to the notification B mode) is maintained, and gradually decreases as time passes. The decrease rate of the meter is set to coincide with the actual decrease rate during the button reception period.

  In FIGS. 96 and 97, (a) is the time when the special figure and decoration symbol change start, (b) is the time when the button reception period starts, and (c) is the remaining time during the button reception period. This is the time when the notification mode changes, and (d) is the time when the reception of the button reception period ends.

In this example, as a first notification mode, the meter is displayed in a reference color during a notification period of T ₂ seconds (for example, 2 seconds). The meter is displayed partially overlapping the front of the changing decorative symbol. At the start of reception, the meter is full and gradually decreases with time. The rate of decrease of the meter matches the actual rate of decrease during the button acceptance period. That is, for example, when the button reception period is 6 seconds, the meter decreases to 2/3 when 2 seconds have elapsed since the start of reception.

When the notification period according to the first notification mode ends, the mode is switched to the second notification mode, and the meter is displayed in a special color during the subsequent notification period of T ₄ seconds (for example, 4 seconds). The rate of decrease of the meter is the same as in the first notification mode. Therefore, the decrease rate is constant over the entire button reception period. However, in the notification D mode, the remaining amount of the meter at the time immediately before the switching is continued, so that the remaining time notification starts from a state where the remaining amount of the meter is 2/3.

  When the button reception period ends, the meter display disappears, and the display returns to the state in which the changing decorative symbol is displayed on the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  If the player operates the chance button 136 while notifying the button reception period by the meter, the meter disappears and a notice as shown on the right side of FIG. 97 is displayed. In this case, the letters “It ’s super hot!” Suggesting that the determination result is a big hit. By giving a notice that “It ’s super hot !!”, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the big hit.

  In detail, in the first embodiment, when an operation of the chance button 136 by the player is accepted, any one of “...”, “Super hot?”, Or “Super hot !!” is displayed. Is set to be. For example, when the mode of notification B → D is selected, the case classification based on the random number value is further divided. For example, when the random number value is 20 to 24, “....” Is displayed, and the random value is 25 to 25. In the case of 34, “Gekiatsu ??” is displayed, and in the case where the random number value is 35 to 49, “Gekiatsu !!” is displayed. Note that the same setting is performed when a notification mode other than the notification B → D is selected.

  According to such a notification mode of the first embodiment, the player can grasp the remaining time of the button reception period, and may or may not press the chance button 136 at a desired timing. Is possible. In particular, when the notification mode is changed halfway with time (for example, in the case of a notification mode in which a random value is won at 5 to 99 for 15R big hit, or a random number 50 to 99 at the time of loss As for the timing of pressing the chance button 136, “Press immediately after the reception becomes valid”, “Press when the notification mode changes”, “Press at any timing of the player”, “Press There is an advantage that the range of choices such as “No” is widened and the game becomes diverse. In other words, since the execution of the notice depends on the player's operation of the chance button 136, the range of the game is particularly widened in this respect, and the interest of the game may be further enhanced.

  In addition, it is possible to increase the interest of the game by amplifying the player's sense of expectation for the big hit by switching the notification mode. Further, there are cases where it is possible to reduce the operation of the useless chance button 136 by the player and increase the durability of the chance button 136. Further, if the meter color is changed before and after the notification mode is changed, the range of effects is widened, and an effect of prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 may be expected.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 95, since the probability of winning each notification mode is set differently in the case where the result of the determination of success / failure is different from that in the case of big hit, the expectation given to the player in the case of big hit On the other hand, the probability that the feeling is increased is increased, while the probability that the feeling of expectation given to the player is decreased in the case of a loss is increased, and a difference is produced between the two. In this respect, the interest of the game can be further enhanced.
<Example 2 of notification mode of remaining time>

  Next, Example 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99. FIG. Similarly to the first embodiment, the second embodiment is similar to the first embodiment in the notice table shown in FIG. 95, in which the success / failure determination result is 15R big hit (special figure B) and the fluctuation time is 45000 ms (per super reach A). The case where the notification mode that switches from “1 notification mode)” to “notification D (second notification mode)” is won will be described as an example. However, in the second embodiment, the notifications when the buttons are pressed are displayed separately in the notification period (first notification period) according to the first notification mode and the notification period (second notification period) according to the second notification mode. This is different from the first embodiment in that it is set to.

  In FIGS. 98 and 99, (a) is a decorative symbol change start time, (b) is a button reception period reception start time, and (c) is a notification mode of the button reception period remaining time. (D) is the reception end point of the button reception period.

In this example, as a first notification mode, the meter is displayed in a reference color (for example, blue) during a notification period of T ₂ seconds (for example, 2 seconds). The meter is displayed partially overlapping the front of the changing decorative symbol. At the start of reception, the meter is full and gradually decreases with time. The decrease rate of the meter is set to coincide with the actual decrease rate during the button reception period. That is, for example, when the button reception period is 6 seconds, the meter decreases to 2/3 when 2 seconds have elapsed since the start of reception. When the chance button 136 is operated during the first notification period, a notice (first notice) “...” is displayed. Thereafter, the notice continues until the end of the button acceptance period, and the notice disappears at the end of acceptance.

If the chance button 136 is not operated during the first notification period, the second notification mode is switched when the first notification period ends, and the meter is turned on during the subsequent notification period of T ₄ seconds (for example, 4 seconds). Display in a special color (for example, red). The speed at which the meter decreases is the same as in the first notification mode. When the chance button 136 is operated during the second notification period, a notice “second notice” is displayed. Thereafter, the notice continues until the button reception period ends, and the notice display disappears at the end.

  If the chance button 136 is not operated even during the second notification period, the meter display continues until the button reception period ends, and the meter display disappears when the button reception period ends, and the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The display returns to the state in which all the decorative symbols that are changing are displayed. That is, if the chance button 136 is not operated over the first and second notification periods, the advance notice is not performed.

  It should be noted that the first notice of “...” And the second notice of “Gekiatsu !!!!” are the aforementioned notice lottery based on the determination result and the variation time obtained from the main control unit 300. It is set by processing. The first notice gives the player low expectations, while the second notice gives the player high expectations.

  In detail, in the second embodiment, in the same manner as in the first embodiment, when an operation of the chance button 136 by the player is accepted, “...”, “Super hot?”, “Super hot!” "Is set to be displayed. For example, when the mode of notification B → D is selected, the case classification by the random number values 20 to 49 is further finely divided. For example, when the random number value is 20 to 24, “...” is displayed when an operation is received at the time of notification B, while “Super hot !!” is displayed when the operation is received at the time of notification D. Is set to When the random number is 25 to 34, “Gekiatsu ??” is displayed when an operation is accepted at the time of notification B, while “Gekiatsu!” Is displayed when the operation is accepted at the time of notification D. Has been. When the random number value is 35 to 49, it is set so that “super hot !!” is displayed when an operation is accepted for both the notification B and the notification D. Note that the same setting is made when another notification mode is selected.

  In the second embodiment, the meter is displayed in the reference color in the first notification period, and the set notification has a lower or equivalent expectation than the notification in the second notification period. On the other hand, in the second notification period, the meter is displayed in a special color, and the set notice has a higher or equivalent expectation than the notice in the first notice period. As the display color of the meter, the special color has a greater impact on the player than the reference color. That is, in each notification period, the expectation suggested by the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period is associated with the expectation suggested by the notice. Thereby, the expectation given to the player can be adjusted by a combination of the notification mode and the notice, and there is an advantage that the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

Further, the player may be able to grasp the contents of the notice without operating the chance button 136 by understanding that the remaining time notification mode corresponds to the contents of the notice. That is, the player who is making a big hit may not be able to press the chance button 136 because he / she is conscious of paying out the game ball (moving the game ball to the box). Further, there may be a disadvantage such as spilling a ball paid out when the chance button 136 is operated. However, if the remaining time notification mode also functions as a notice that suggests the result of the success / failure determination, and the content of the notice can be inferred without pressing the chance button 136, the player can pay out the game ball. You may be able to concentrate and increase your expectations for the next game.
<Example 3 of notification mode of remaining time>

  Next, Example 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. The third embodiment is an example of a notification mode in which the meter is temporarily stopped. In the table shown in FIG. 95, the determination result is 15R big hit (special figure B) and the fluctuation time is 45000 ms (per super reach A). An explanation will be given by taking as an example a case where the notification mode that switches from “notification A (first notification mode)” to “notification E (second notification mode)” is won. The button reception period is set to a predetermined number of seconds (here, 6 seconds). 100 and 101, (a) is the reception start time of the button reception period, (b) is the time when the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period is changed, and (g) is the button reception period. This is the end of acceptance.

  In the notification A mode, the notification period is 1 second, a full-fill meter is displayed in a reference color (for example, blue), and the button reception period (apparent reception period) for notifying the player is the actual button reception period. Half of this (here 3 seconds). Here, by making the rate of decrease of the meter twice the rate of decrease in the actual button reception period, it is possible to make the player have the illusion that it is shorter than the normal button reception period. As a premise of this, in normal times, the amount of decrease per unit time (decrease rate) of the meter that is initially filled up is set to match the decrease rate of the actual button reception period, and the game is repeated. It is preferable that the player can recognize that the button reception period is normally set to a fixed length (here, 6 seconds). According to BGM, the player may be able to recognize sensuously that the button reception period is normally about 6 seconds. If there is such a precondition, even if the actual button acceptance period is set to 6 seconds, it is normal to reduce the full meter by 1/6 per second, for example 1 second. If it is decreased by 1/3, the player can be given the illusion that the current button reception period is 3 seconds. Further, if the time is decreased by 1/5 per second, the player can be given an illusion that the current button reception period is 5 seconds.

  In the mode of the notification E, the notification period is 5 seconds, a meter with an arbitrary remaining amount is displayed in a reference color (for example, blue), and the meter is temporarily stopped for a predetermined time (here, 3 seconds) immediately after the notification is started. After that, in order to match the bottom of the book, the decrease speed of the meter is faster than the normal button reception period (speed that decreases by 1/6 per second) (here, speed that decreases by 1/3 per second) Decrease and report remaining time.

  That is, first, when the notification starts in the first notification mode, a full tank meter is displayed in the reference color. Next, during the first notification period, the meter is decreased by 1/3 in 1 second.

  When the first notification period ends, the second notification mode is switched. In the second notification mode, the reduction of the meter for the first 3 seconds is stopped. Therefore, the meter remains in the state of 2/3 remaining until 4 seconds elapse from the reception start time of the button reception period. Next, when 4 seconds elapse, the meter starts decreasing again, and decreases by 1/3 per second. Accordingly, the remaining amount of the meter is reduced to 1/3 when 5 seconds have elapsed, and the remaining amount of the meter becomes 0 when 6 seconds have elapsed, that is, at the end of the button reception period. In the third embodiment, in order to make up for the temporary stoppage of the meter, the decrease rate of the meter is made faster than the decrease rate of the normal button reception period, particularly in the second notification period.

  Thus, in the third embodiment, the actual remaining time length of the button reception period and the remaining time length suggested by the meter are set differently. Accordingly, by switching from the first notification mode to the second notification mode, the decrease in the meter is temporarily stopped, and the player can be illusioned that the remaining time has increased, thereby amplifying the expectation and being surprised. There are cases where there is an effect that the interest of the game can be enhanced by giving.

In addition, even if the remaining time of the button reception period different from the actual one is notified in either one of the first and second notification modes, the book bottom can be adjusted in the other notification mode, so the effects related to various notices Can be done. In the third embodiment, when the chance button 136 is operated during the button reception period, it is preferable that a notice similar to that in the first embodiment is given, for example.
<Example 4 of notification mode of remaining time>

  Next, Example 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the fourth embodiment, as in the first and second embodiments, in the notification mode determination table for notice shown in FIG. 95, the determination result is 15R big hit (special figure B) and the fluctuation time is 45000 ms (per super reach A). An explanation will be given by taking as an example a case where a notification mode switching from “notification B (first notification mode)” to “notification D (second notification mode)” is won. However, the contents of the notifications A to F are different from those of the first and second embodiments, and the fourth embodiment is an example in which the remaining amount of the meter increases when the notification mode is switched. The button reception period is set to a predetermined number of seconds (here, 6 seconds). 102 and 103, (a) is the reception start time of the button reception period, (c) is the time when the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period is changed, and (g) is the button reception period. This is the end of acceptance.

  In the notification B mode of the fourth embodiment, the notification period is 2 seconds, the full tank meter is displayed in a reference color (for example, blue) at the time of notification start, and the button reception period for notification to the player (apparent reception) Period) is half of the actual button reception period (here, 3 seconds). Here, as in the third embodiment, by making the rate of decrease of the meter double the rate of decrease of the actual button reception period, the player is given the illusion that the button reception period is shorter than the actual button reception period. It is like that.

  In the notification D mode, the notification period is 4 seconds, and when the notification starts, a full tank meter is displayed in a reference color (for example, blue), and the player receives the illusion that the meter has recovered after returning to the original button reception period. Let Thereafter, the rate of decrease of the meter is set slower than the rate of decrease in the mode of notification B, and the remaining time is notified.

  That is, first, when the notification starts in the first notification mode, a full tank meter is displayed in the reference color. Next, during the notification period of the first notification mode, the meter is decreased by 1/3 per second. This allows the player to recognize that the current button reception period is 3 seconds. When the first notification period ends, the mode is switched to the second notification mode. At this time, return the meter to full. Then, the full meter is decreased by 1/4 per second. This allows the player to recognize that the remaining time of the button reception period after switching to the second notification mode has increased to 4 seconds. The remaining amount of the meter becomes 0 at the end of the reception of the button reception period.

  According to the notification in the notification mode of the fourth embodiment, the remaining amount of the meter increases at the time of switching from the first notification mode to the second notification mode, and the decrease rate of the meter in the second notification mode is Since it is slower than the rate of decrease in the first notification mode, it is possible to make the player have the illusion that the remaining time of the button reception period has increased, to amplify the expectation, and to give a surprise and enhance the interest of the game There is an effect that can be.

  In addition, since the rate of decrease in the button reception period is different between the first notification mode and the second notification mode, even if the notification of the button reception period different from the actual is performed in either one of the first and second notification modes. In the other notification mode, the bottom of the book can be adjusted and various notices can be made.

In the above example, the meter display is returned to full when the notification mode is switched. However, if the remaining amount of the meter immediately after switching is greater than the remaining amount of the meter immediately before switching, The remaining amount of the meter (in other words, the initial amount of the meter in the second notification mode) is not limited to a full tank. Further, in the fourth embodiment, when the chance button 136 is operated during the button reception period, for example, it is preferable that a notice similar to that in the first embodiment is given.
<Example 5 of notification mode of remaining time>

  Next, Example 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 and 105. FIG. Similarly to Examples 1, 2, and 4, this Example 5 also has a result of determining whether or not the result is a 15R big hit (Special Figure B) and a fluctuation time of 45000 ms (per Super Reach A) in the notification mode determination table shown in FIG. An explanation will be given by taking as an example a case where a notification mode switching from “notification B (first notification mode)” to “notification D (second notification mode)” is won. However, the contents of the notifications A to F are different from those of the above-described embodiment, and the fifth embodiment is an example in which the remaining amount of the meter is increased when the notification mode is switched and the color is changed and displayed. is there. The button reception period is set to a predetermined number of seconds (here, 6 seconds).

  104 and 105, (a) is the reception start time of the button reception period, (c) is the time when the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period is changed, and (g) is the button reception period. This is the end of acceptance.

  The color of the meter is associated with the sense of expectation for the big hit, and the expectation is low for the reference color (for example, blue), and the expectation is high for the special color (for example, red). This is the same as in the second embodiment.

  In the notification B mode of the fifth embodiment, while the notification period is set to 2 seconds, a fully-filled meter is displayed in the reference color at the start of notification, and then the game is performed while gradually reducing the remaining amount of the meter. It is set so as to correctly notify the remaining time of the actual button reception period to the user. Here, by making the rate of decrease of the meter equal to the rate of decrease in the actual button reception period (that is, the rate at which the meter decreases by 1/6 per second), the player can correctly set the actual button reception period. It is supposed to be recognized.

  In the notification D mode, the notification period is set to 4 seconds, the full meter is displayed in a special color at the start of the notification, and then the actual button is displayed to the player while gradually reducing the remaining amount of the meter. It is set so that the remaining time of the reception period is notified correctly. In this case, the remaining time is reported at the same rate as the actual button reception period (that is, the rate at which the meter decreases by 1/4 per second).

  That is, first, when the notification starts in the first notification mode, a full meter is displayed in the reference color. Next, during the notification period of the first notification mode, the meter is reduced by 1/6 per second. When the notification period of the first notification mode ends, the mode is switched to the second notification mode. At this time, the meter is returned to the full state and the color of the meter is changed from the reference color to the special color. Then, the full meter is decreased by 1/4 per second. Accordingly, the remaining amount of the meter becomes 0 at the end of the reception of the button reception period.

  Even with the notification as in the fifth embodiment, the remaining amount of the meter increases when switching from the first notification mode to the second notification mode, so that the player has an illusion that the remaining time of the button reception period has increased. It is possible to amplify a sense of expectation and to give a surprise and enhance the interest of the game.

  In addition, since the rate of decrease in the button reception period is different between the first notification mode and the second notification mode, even if the notification of the button reception period different from the actual is performed in either one of the first and second notification modes. Since the other information mode can be adjusted to the bottom of the book, it is possible to make various notices.

  Further, the meter color is changed from the reference color to the special color, so that the expectation for the big hit is increased.

In the above-described example, the meter display is returned to full when the notification mode is switched. However, as in the fourth embodiment, the remaining amount of the meter immediately after the switching is greater than the remaining amount of the meter immediately before the switching. If so, the remaining amount of the meter immediately after switching (in other words, the initial amount of the meter in the second notification mode) is not limited to full. In the fifth embodiment, when the chance button 136 is operated during the button reception period, for example, it is preferable that the same notice as in the second embodiment is given.
<Embodiment 6 of notification mode of remaining time>

  Next, Example 6 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the notification mode determination table shown in FIG. 95 as well, the result of the determination is that the determination result is 15R big hit (special figure B) and the variation time is 45000 ms (per super reach A). An example in which a notification mode that switches to “notification D (second notification mode)” is won will be described as an example. The sixth embodiment is an example in which the remaining amount of the meter increases when the notification mode is switched, and the operation condition of the chance button 136 for displaying the notice is displayed in the first notification period and the second notification period. Are set differently. In addition, although the content of each alerting | reporting AF is preferable if it is set similarly to the thing of Example 4, it does not restrict to this in particular.

  In FIGS. 106 and 107, (a) is the time when the special symbol and decorative pattern change start, (b) is the time when the button reception period starts, and (c) is the remaining time during the button reception period. This is the time when the notification mode changes, and (d) is the time when the reception of the button reception period ends.

Aspects of the notification B of Example 6, with the notification period is set to T _B seconds (e.g. 2 seconds), the full meter by the broadcast start time is displayed in the reference color (e.g. blue), then meter It is set so that the remaining amount of the actual button reception period is properly notified to the player while gradually decreasing the remaining amount. Here, by making the decrease rate of the meter equal to the decrease rate of the actual button reception period, the player can correctly recognize the actual button reception period.

Aspects of the notification D, together with the notification period is set to T _D s (e.g. 4 seconds), the full meter by the broadcast start time is displayed in the reference color, then, while gradually decreasing the remaining amount of the meter The player is set to correctly notify the remaining time of the actual button reception period. Here, the remaining time is reported at the same speed as the actual remaining time.

First, a full meter is displayed in a reference color at the start of notification in the first notification mode. Next, during the notification period of the first notification mode, the meter is decreased by [1 / (T _B + T _D )] by a predetermined amount per second. When the notification period of the first notification mode ends, the mode is switched to the second notification mode. At this time, return the meter to full. Thereafter, the full meter is decreased by a predetermined amount (by 1 / T _D ) per second, and the remaining amount of the meter is set to 0 at the end of the reception of the button reception period.

  In the first notification period, the operation condition of the chance button 136 is a single operation. If the chance button 136 is not operated once during the first notification period, the second notification mode is switched when the first notification period ends, and the meter is displayed in the reference color during the second notification period. At the same time, the operation condition of the chance button 136 is switched to continuous hitting (a plurality of continuous operations). The decreasing rate of the meter is faster than that in the first notification mode. During the second notification mode, the contents of the effect screen are selected according to the number of operations of the chance button 136 and the random value. When the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted and the production screen is displayed, the production screen is continuously displayed until the end of the button reception period. Then, at the end of the button reception period, the screen returns to the state in which the changing decorative symbol is displayed on all the screens of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The selection of the effect screen during the second notification period will be described in detail. For example, in the notification mode determination table shown in FIG. 95, if the random number is 20 to 49 and the notification B → D mode is won, When the numerical value is 20 to 39, when the chance button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times or more (for example, 10 times or more), an effect screen “success!” Is displayed, while the chance button 136 is displayed once or more. If the operation is performed less than a predetermined number of times, an effect screen “Sorry ...” is displayed. When the random number is 40 to 49, if the chance button 136 is operated one or more times, an effect screen “Sorry ...” is displayed.

  If the chance button 136 is not operated even during the second notification period, the meter display continues until the button reception period ends, and the meter display disappears when the button reception period ends, and the decorative symbol display device The screen returns to the state in which the decorative pattern being changed is displayed on all the screens 208.

  The notification as in the sixth embodiment also has the effect of giving the player the illusion that the button reception period has increased for a moment. In addition, since the operation condition of the chance button 136 changes with time, there is an advantage that the range of games is widened.

In addition, since the operation conditions of the chance button 136 differ with the passage of time, the range of games can be expanded and the interest of the game can be enhanced.
<Seventh Embodiment of Notification Mode of Remaining Time>

  Next, Example 7 will be described with reference to FIGS. The seventh embodiment is an example in which the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period is determined in combination with other notices executed before and after the button reception period.

  In the seventh embodiment, the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period and the content of the notice executed before and after the button reception period are a table stored in advance in the ROM 406 and a random number value obtained by a predetermined random number lottery. To be determined.

  For example, when the determination result is a big hit and the fluctuation time of FIG. 1 is the fluctuation time for Super Reach A, a decorative pattern is stored using a table previously stored in the ROM 406 as shown in FIG. 110 (a). The outline (basic matter) of the contents of the effect relating to the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period displayed on the display device 208 and the advance notice before and after the button reception period is determined. For example, when the random number value 27 is acquired by a predetermined random number lottery in the table, the notice C corresponding to the random number selection range “20 to 49” is selected. The notice C includes information for changing the notification mode of the button reception period from the notification B mode as the first notification mode to the notification D mode as the second notification mode. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range. The same applies to other tables.

  Next, a lottery is performed in more detail for each random number selection range in the above table. For example, based on a table stored in the ROM 406 in advance as shown in FIG. 110 (b) and a random number value obtained by a predetermined random number lottery. Thus, the detailed contents of the notice (hereinafter also referred to as “preceding notice”) to be performed before the button reception period are determined. For example, when the random number 22 included in the random number selection range “10 to 54” in the table is acquired, an effect screen with a balloon “?” On the character image of the princess is selected. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range.

  Next, a lottery is performed in more detail for each random number selection range in the above table. For example, based on a table stored in advance in the ROM 406 as shown in FIG. 110 (c) and a random number value obtained by a predetermined random number lottery. Then, the detailed contents of the first notification mode are determined. For example, when the random number value 73 included in the random number selection range “0 to 89” in the table is acquired, a mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) is selected as the mode of the notification B. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range. Further, the table is set so that the mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) is more easily selected than the mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color).

  Next, a lottery is performed in detail for each random number selection range in the above table. For example, based on a table stored in the ROM 406 in advance as shown in FIG. 110 (d) and a random number value obtained by a predetermined random number lottery. Thus, the detailed content of the second notification mode is determined. For example, when the random number value 61 included in the random number selection range “20 to 99” in the table is acquired, a mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) is selected as the mode of the notification D. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range. Further, the table is set so that the mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) is more easily selected than the mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color).

  Next, a lottery is performed in more detail for each random number selection range in the above table. For example, based on a table stored in advance in the ROM 406 as shown in FIG. 110 (e) and a random number value obtained by a predetermined random number lottery. Thus, the detailed contents of the notice (hereinafter also referred to as “follow-up notice”) to be performed after the button reception period are determined. For example, when a random number value 35 included in the random number selection range “10 to 99” in the table is acquired, an effect screen that displays “Gekiatsu !!” as the reach character display notice after the button reception period is selected. Is done. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range. In addition, the table is set so that the effect screen displayed as “Gekiatsu !!” is more easily selected than the effect screen displayed as “reach”.

  More specifically, for example, if the determination result is a big hit, the fluctuation time of FIG. 1 is the fluctuation time for Super Reach A, and the notice C is won in the table shown in FIG. A series of effects as shown in 108 and FIG. 109 are performed.

In the example shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the period from t _{2 to} t ₄ is set as the button reception period. In the button reception period, the remaining time of the button reception period is notified in the same manner as in the first embodiment.

First, the advance notice is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the period from t ₁ to t ₂ before the button reception period. The content of the preceding notice is such that an effect screen with a balloon “?” On the character image of the princess is displayed as a notice with low expectation for the big hit. Next, the button acceptance period begins. Here, as notification manner of the remaining time of the button acceptance period it has won notification manner of switching from the first notification manner at the time of t ₃ to the second notification manner. And in a 1st alerting | reporting aspect, the meter of a full tank is displayed in blue (reference | standard color) with a low expectation to jackpot at the time of alerting | reporting, and a meter is gradually reduced as time passes. In the second notification mode that follows, the meter is displayed in red (special color) with a high expectation for a big hit, and the meter is gradually reduced as time passes.

  When the button acceptance period ends, the meter display disappears and the decorative symbol is in a reach state, and at this time, a subsequent notice is displayed. Here, the content of the subsequent notice is displayed as “Gekiatsu !!” as a notice with high expectation for the big hit.

  In the first notification mode, since the meter is displayed in a reference color of blue, the expectation of jackpot is low. On the other hand, in the second notification mode, since the meter is displayed in a special color of red, the expectation of big hit is high. That is, in this example, the first notification mode is easily set to a low-expectation notification mode and the second notification mode is a sense of expectation in association with the jackpot expectation feeling before and after the button reception period. It is easy to set to a high notification mode.

  Note that at least the following five patterns are conceivable when the notification mode during the button reception period is associated with the notice before and after the button reception period.

  In the first pattern, setting is made so that the notice before the button reception period (expectation; low) → during the button reception period (expectation; low → low) → the notice after the button reception period (expectation; low) . In the second pattern, setting is made so that the notice before the button reception period (expectation; low) → during the button reception period (expectation; low → low) → the notice after the button reception period (expectation; high) . In the third pattern, setting is made so that the notice before the button reception period (expectation; low) → during the button reception period (expectation; low → high) → the notice after the button reception period (expectation; high) .

  In the fourth pattern, it is set so that the notice before button reception period (expectation; high) → during button reception period (expectation; high → high) → notice after button reception period (expectation; low) . In the fifth pattern, it is set so that the notice before the button reception period (expectation; high) → during the button reception period (expectation; low → low) → the notice after the button reception period (expectation; high) .

  According to the first pattern, the player's expectation for jackpot may be lowered, and the difference from when the expectation for jackpot is high may be made clearer. In addition, when a big hit occurs when the expectation is low, the player may be able to amplify the joy of the player. According to the second and third patterns, the player's sense of expectation for jackpot may be gradually increased. According to the fourth pattern, there is a case where the player's feeling of expectation for the big hit is not raised too much, and the disappointment when the big hit is not made can be reduced. According to the fifth pattern, since the player's expectation for jackpot is lowered and then increased, the player's expectation for jackpot may be raised and lowered, and eventually the expectation can be further increased. is there.

In the example shown in FIGS. 108 and 109 of the seventh embodiment, the notification before and after the button reception period is performed using the decorative symbol display device 208. However, for example, the effect movable body 224 or an arbitrary lamp is used. It is good also as what is performed by other production | presentation apparatuses. In this case, however, the expectation suggested by the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period and the expectation suggested by the notice are set in association with each other.
<Eighth embodiment of notification mode of remaining time>

  Next, Example 8 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the preconditions of Example 8 will be described. When the determination result is a 15R special big hit (probability big hit), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208 with a symbol combination indicating 15R big hit (normal big hit). After that, there is a case where a re-lottery effect is made to change to a combination of decorative symbols indicating a 15R special jackpot (however, since it is determined internally whether it is probabilistic or non-probable, actually re-drawing Not.) At this time, the period from when the decorative symbol starts to change until it stops is divided into, for example, three periods: (1) before the change starts to reach, (2) during reach, and (3) during redraw. It is possible to make a separate notice for each of these three periods. In addition, as shown in FIG. 93, in the re-lottery, the fluctuation time is set to be longer for 5000 ms than the reach of each reach. This is because the winning variation time includes the time for performing the re-lottery regardless of the probability change or non-change probability.

  In Example 8, when notifying the remaining time of a button reception period in any two or more of each said period (1)-(3), the alerting | reporting aspect in each period (1)-(3) or At least two or more expectations given to the player by the notice are related. Further, in the eighth embodiment, the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period and the content of the notice executed before and after the button reception period are a random number obtained by a table stored in advance in the ROM 406 and a predetermined random number lottery. It is determined based on.

  For example, when the determination result is a big hit and the fluctuation time in FIG. 1 is a fluctuation time for Super Reach A (for example, 45000 ms), a table stored in the ROM 406 in advance as shown in FIG. 114 (a) is used. Thus, the outline (basic matters) of the contents of the effects relating to the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the notices performed before and after the button reception period are determined. For example, when the random number value 27 is acquired by a predetermined random number lottery in the table, the notice C corresponding to the random number selection range “20 to 49” is selected. The notice C includes information for changing the notification mode of the button reception period from the notification a mode as the first notification mode to the notification b mode as the second notification mode before reaching the period (1). Information to change from the notification c mode as the first notification mode to the notification d mode as the second notification mode during the reach of (2), as the first notification mode during the re-lottery of the period (3) The information to be changed from the notification e mode to the notification f mode as the second notification mode is included. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range. Although not shown in particular, a table corresponding to each case such as a table in the case where the result of the determination is a big hit and the fluctuation time in FIG. Is remembered.

  Next, a lottery is performed in detail for each random number selection range in the above table. For example, based on a table stored in the ROM 406 in advance as shown in FIG. 114 (b) and a random number value obtained by a predetermined random number lottery. Thus, the detailed contents of the first notification mode before reach in period (1) are determined. For example, when the random number value 22 included in the random number selection range “0 to 49” in the table is acquired, a mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) is selected as the mode of the notification a. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range. In the table, the probability that the mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) is selected and the probability that the mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) are selected are set to be the same.

  Next, a lottery is performed in more detail for each random number selection range in the above table. For example, based on a table stored in advance in the ROM 406 as shown in FIG. 114 (c) and a random number value obtained by a predetermined random number lottery. Then, the detailed content of the 2nd alerting | reporting aspect before reach | attainment of a period (1) is determined. For example, when the random number value 13 included in the random number selection range “10 to 39” in the table is acquired, a mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) and the meter is increased by a predetermined amount as the mode of notification b. Selected. As an aspect of the notification b, the aspect that “the meter increases by a predetermined amount” is set so that the expectation given to the player is slightly higher than the aspect that “the meter does not increase”. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range. Further, the table is set so that the mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) is more easily selected than the mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color).

  Next, a lottery is performed in more detail for each random number selection range in the above table. For example, based on a table stored in the ROM 406 in advance as shown in FIG. 114 (d) and a random number value acquired by a predetermined random number lottery. Thus, the detailed contents of the first notification mode during the reach of period (2) are determined. For example, when the random number value 61 included in the random number selection range “0 to 89” in the table is acquired, a mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) is selected as the mode of the notification c. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range. Further, the table is set so that the mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) is more easily selected than the mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color).

  Next, a lottery is performed in detail for each random number selection range in the above table. For example, based on a table stored in the ROM 406 in advance as shown in FIG. 114 (e) and a random number value obtained by a predetermined random number lottery. Thus, the detailed contents of the second notification mode during the reach of period (2) are determined. For example, when the random number value 35 included in the random number selection range “30 to 99” in the table is acquired, a mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) is selected as the mode of the notification d. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range. Further, the table is set so that the mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) is more easily selected than the mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color).

  Next, a lottery is performed in more detail for each random number selection range in the above table. For example, based on a table stored in advance in the ROM 406 as shown in FIG. 114 (f) and a random number value obtained by a predetermined random number lottery. Thus, the detailed contents of the first notification mode during the re-lottery of period (3) are determined. For example, when the random number value 35 included in the random number selection range “20 to 99” in the table is acquired, a mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) is selected as the mode of the notification e. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range. Further, the table is set so that the mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) is more easily selected than the mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color).

  Next, a lottery is performed in detail for each random number selection range in the above table. For example, based on a table stored in the ROM 406 in advance as shown in FIG. 114 (g) and a random number value obtained by a predetermined random number lottery. Thus, the detailed contents of the second notification mode during the re-lottery of period (3) are determined. For example, when the random number value 35 included in the random number selection range “0 to 49” is acquired in the above table, a mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) is selected as the mode of the notification f. On the other hand, for example, when the random value 70 included in the random number selection range “50 to 99” in the table is acquired, a mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) is selected as the mode of the notification f. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range. In the table, the probability that the mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) is selected and the probability that the mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) are selected are set to be the same.

  More specifically, for example, when the determination result is a big hit, the fluctuation time in FIG. 1 is the fluctuation time for Super Reach A, and the notice C is won in the table shown in FIG. A series of effects as shown in 111 and FIG. 112 is performed.

In the example shown in FIG. 111 and FIG 112, the period before 0 to t ₃ seconds reach _(1), t 3 ~t ₇ seconds duration in reach _{(2), t} 7 _{~t 11} seconds redrawing The middle period (3), t ₁₁ seconds and later is set as the period during the big hit round. In addition, the button reception period is notified in all periods, and the expectation feelings suggested are set in association with each other. Basically, one game is a game from the start of the change until the change is stopped and the symbol is fixed. However, if the game is a big hit, one game is taken until the big hit round ends.

  First, in the first button reception period before the decorative symbol stops, the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) in the first notification mode, and the meter color continues to be blue (reference color in the second notification mode). ) And the remaining amount of the meter is increasing. That is, although the expectation level has increased from a low level to a low level, the expectation of the big hit given to the player is still low. If the chance button 136 is operated during this button reception period, for example, a notice “...” Shown in FIG.

In addition, when the chance button 136 is operated during the first notification period of t _{0 to} t ₁ seconds and when the chance button 136 is operated during the second notification period of t _{1 to} t ₂ seconds. As described in the second embodiment, the content of the notice may be different. For example, when the chance button 136 is operated during the first notification period of t _{0 to} t ₁ second, “...” is displayed, and the chance is displayed during the second notification period of t _{1 to} t ₂ seconds. When the button 136 is operated, “Super hot!” May be displayed.

In the second button reception period during reach, when t ₅ seconds elapses, the first notification mode changes to the second notification mode, and the meter color changes from blue to red (special color). As a result, the expectation for the big hit shifts from a slightly low state to a high state. When the determination result is 15R special big hit (probable big hit) or 15R big hit (usually big hit), a combination of decorative patterns for big hits determined in advance at time t ₇ seconds (for example, “decoration 2-decoration” 2-decoration 2 "combination), and in other cases, it stops at a predetermined combination of decorative symbols for removal (for example, the combination of" decoration 2-decoration 1-decoration 2 "). When the determination result is 15R special jackpot or 15R jackpot, a re-lottery is performed, and the third button reception period starts.

  Note that, during the second button reception period, for example, as in the first embodiment, the content of the notice that is given when the chance button 136 is operated during the first notification period and the chance button during the second notification period. The content of the notice given when 136 is operated may be set to be the same. Alternatively, similar to the second embodiment, different contents may be set. Further, the 15R special jackpot and the 15R jackpot are the determination results of whether or not the profit amount given to the player is a relatively large profit amount.

In the third button reception period, when the time t ₉ seconds elapses, the first notification mode is switched to the second notification mode. At this time, when the mode in which the meter is displayed in blue is selected as the second notification mode in the table shown in FIG. 114 (g), the display shown on the right side in FIG. 112 (k) is performed, while the meter is displayed. Is displayed in red, the display shown on the left side of FIG. 112 (k) is performed.

  After that, regardless of which mode is selected, if the chance button 136 is not operated during the button reception period, the effect image shown in FIG. 111 (l) is displayed, and then the 15R special jackpot is won. If it is, a predetermined symbol combination (for example, a combination of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”) in which the decorative symbol indicates 15R special jackpot, or a predetermined symbol combination (for example, “decoration 2” -Stop at the combination of “decoration 2—decoration 2”. On the other hand, if the 15R jackpot is won, the game stops with a predetermined symbol combination (for example, a combination of “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”) in which the decoration symbol represents 15R jackpot. Even if the 15R special jackpot is won, the decorative symbol may not stop at the symbol combination indicating the 15R special jackpot at this time, but may stop at the symbol combination indicating the 15R jackpot. In that case, a special change promotion effect is made during the big hit round or at the end of the big hit round, or the special figure change game enters the special change state of the special figure high-precision normal figure high-precision after the big hit round without performing the positive change promotion production. It is set to be.

In the period during redrawing (3), if the chances button 136 is operated during a first broadcasting period of t ₈ ~t ₉ seconds, redrawing in from the time of accepting the operation of chance buttons 136 Until the period (3) is completed, any combination of decorative symbols (for example, a combination of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” indicating 15R special jackpot if 15R special jackpot is won, or When the 15R big hit is won, a combination of “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” indicating the 15R big hit) is performed (see the left side of FIG. 113 (k)). On the other hand, when the chance button 136 is not operated, as described above, when t ₉ seconds elapses, the button reception period is switched from the first notification mode to the second notification mode (FIG. 113 ( k) See center or right side).

Chance button 136 is not operated during the first broadcasting period, when the chance button 136 is operated during a second broadcast period t ₉ ~t ₁₀ seconds, from the time of accepting the operation of chance buttons 136 Any combination of decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” indicating 15R special jackpot if 15R special jackpot is won, etc.) If the winning combination is 15R jackpot, a combination of “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” indicating 15R jackpot, etc.) is performed to stop display.

  Since the time for performing the re-lottery is fixed at 5000 ms as described above, the time when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in an arbitrary combination is appropriately adjusted according to the timing of the operation of the chance button 136.

  In this way, when notifying the remaining time of a plurality of times in one game, it is possible to variously change the sense of expectation for the big hit given to the player. In particular, the expectation given to the player can be adjusted in detail by appropriately setting the notification mode of each period or the expectation based on the notice in association with each other.

  In other words, for example, if all the notices are low expectations for the player, the player's expectation for the big hit (especially 15R special big hit) is lowered and the distinction from the case where the expectation is high is clarified. There are cases where it is possible. In addition, when a big hit (especially a 15R special big hit) is achieved with a low expectation, the player's joy may be further amplified.

In addition, when a notice changes from a low expectation to a high notice for a player, the player's expectation for a big hit (especially a 15R special big hit) may be gradually increased. In addition, if the player changes from a high-anticipation notice to a low-anticipation notice, the player's expectation for the big hit may not be raised too much, and the disappointment when the big hit is not possible may be reduced. . Further, if all the notices are highly anticipated for the player, the player's expectation for the big hit (especially the 15R special big hit) may be further increased.
<Others>

  It should be noted that the game table of the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is needless to say that various changes can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention.

  For example, the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period may be a notification mode as shown in FIG. In this example (Embodiment 9), a full-filled meter is initially displayed only in a reference color (for example, blue). For example, when the button reception period is 6 seconds, the meter is decreased by 1/6 per second. Go.

  When one second has elapsed from the start of notification, a partial area of the meter is changed to a special color (for example, red). The position of the special area changed to the special color is also moved as the meter decreases with the passage of time.

  The player presses the chance button 136 at the timing when the base end portion (here, the left end portion) of the meter is the reference color [timing (b), (c), (d) and (f) in FIG. 115]. In such a case, a notice with a low expectation (for example, a notice of “...” Shown in FIG. 97) is displayed. On the other hand, when the player presses the chance button 136 at the timing when the base end of the meter is in a special color (timing (e) in FIG. 115), a notice with high expectation (for example, FIG. 97 "Advance notice!" Is displayed. In this way, there are cases where the range of games can be expanded by setting the notification mode so that a highly anticipated notice cannot be seen unless the chance button 136 is pressed in a timely manner.

  The first mode of displaying a meter with only the reference color is referred to as a first notification mode, and the mode of displaying a meter having a special color special area is referred to as a second notification mode.

  In this example, as shown in (c-1) or (c-2) in FIG. 115, the size of the special area changed to the special color can be arbitrarily set. Further, as shown in (c-3) of FIG. 115, the position of the special area at the time of changing to the special color can be reset to an arbitrary position. As a result, the timing at which the player presses the Chang button 136 can be changed.

  Moreover, Examples 1-9 of the notification mode of the above-mentioned remaining time can be combined appropriately. Further, for example, in the first to ninth embodiments of the notification mode of the remaining time described above, the level of expectation to the big hit given to the player is changed by changing the color of the meter. Thus, the level of expectation to the big hit may be changed by changing the blinking mode and displaying. Further, for example, in the first to ninth embodiments of the above-described remaining time notification mode, the notification is performed by accepting the operation of the chance button 136, but the operation of the operation means other than the chance button 136 is accepted. A notice may also be made. Moreover, you may provide the aspect which switches from the 1st alerting | reporting aspect to the 2nd alerting | reporting aspect, and also the 3rd alerting | reporting aspect as a notification aspect of the remaining time of a button reception period. That is, as a notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period, at least a pattern in which the notification mode does not change with the passage of time and a pattern in which the notification mode is switched in two stages of the first to second notification modes are provided. What is necessary is just to exclude the structure further provided with the pattern which a notification aspect switches in three steps or more.

  Further, in the first to ninth embodiments of the notification mode of the remaining time described above, it is described that the meter is decreased by a predetermined amount per second. However, the unit time may be decreased by a predetermined amount per unit time. It is not limited to 1 second. Furthermore, in Examples 1 to 9 of the notification mode of the remaining time described above, the remaining time of the button reception period is expressed in the form of a rectangular meter. Of course, it may be expressed in other formats.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 116, the gaming table according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels 1002 which are provided with a plurality of types of symbols and are driven to rotate, and a start lever 1004 for instructing rotation of the reels. A stop button 1006 for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, lottery means (lottery prize internal lottery) for determining whether or not a plurality of types of internal winnings are successful, and lottery means The combination of symbols displayed by the reel stop control means (reel stop control processing) for stopping the stop of the rotation of the reel based on the lottery result and the reels stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means Determining means (winning determination process) for determining whether or not the symbol combination is predetermined corresponding to the winning combination, and predetermined if the symbol stopping mode is a predetermined winning mode In addition to payout control means (medal payout process 1008) for performing game medium payout processing for paying out game media corresponding to the winning mode, the effect means 1010 for executing effects based on the lottery result of the lottery means is provided. The means detects a launch device 1014 that launches a ball into a predetermined game area 1012, a winning port 1016 configured to be able to enter a ball launched from the launch device, and a ball that has entered the winning port 1016 A means 1018, a payout means 1020 for paying out a ball when the detecting means 1018 detects a ball, a variable display device 1022 for variably displaying a predetermined symbol (identification information), and a position where the variable display device 1022 is shielded And a movable display 1026 that operates in a predetermined operation mode, and a variable display device triggered by a game ball entering a winning opening 022 is is stopped and displayed after varying the design, it is also suitable in which the slot machine 1000 "a rendering device 1010, such as to produce a game.

That is, the gaming machine of the present invention has at least a result determination result (for example, the main control unit 300) for determining whether or not the game is correct when a predetermined condition for determining whether or not the condition is satisfied, and the result of the determination on whether the result is correct. In the case of a determination result (for example, big hit), the second advantage is higher than the first advantage from the first control state where the advantage for the player is the first advantage. Control state transition means (for example, the main control unit 300) that shifts the control state to the second control state, operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, the chance button 136), and the result of the success / failure determination Notice means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 and the decorative symbol display device 208) for performing an effect including a notice, and the notice means enables the player to accept the operation of the operation means. The remaining time notifying means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 and the decorative symbol display device 208) for notifying the remaining time of the reception period in a predetermined notification mode, and the operation by the player during the reception period Specific notice means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 and the decorative symbol display device 208) for making a predetermined notice suggesting the result of the determination of success or failure when an operation of the means is accepted, The notification mode has a first notification mode and a second notification mode different from the first notification mode, and the remaining time notification means has a predetermined time and the remaining time is predetermined. The remaining time is notified in the first notification mode until the length is reduced, and the predetermined condition is not satisfied after the predetermined time has elapsed (for example, the notification shown in FIG. 95). In the mode determination table When the “notification F” is won), the first notification mode is continued to notify the remaining time, while when the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, in the notification mode determination table shown in FIG. 95, “notification”). “A → E” or “Notification B → D” or “Notification C ₁ → C ₂ ” is selected to notify the remaining time by switching from the first notification mode to the second notification mode. I just need it.

  In the above gaming machine, the first notification mode and the second notification mode are set according to the result of the determination of success or failure and function as a notification similar to the notification performed by the specific notification means. Is preferred.

  Further, in the above gaming machine, the remaining time notification means indicates the remaining time to be notified in each of the first notification mode and the second notification mode according to a result of the determination of success / failure ( For example, when the determination result is determined based on the notification mode determination table and the result of the determination is the specific determination result, the remaining time to be notified by each of the first notification mode and the second notification mode is determined. It is preferable to make a determination based on a specific table (for example, a jackpot table of the notification mode determination table) among the predetermined tables.

  In the above gaming machine, the operation means can accept at least one of a single operation and a plurality of consecutive operations by the player, and the specific notice means is the predetermined notice means. Until the predetermined time elapses, and a notice is given on the condition that the one-time operation is accepted, and after the predetermined time elapses, the notice is given on the condition that the plurality of consecutive operations are accepted. Preferably it is done.

  Further, in the above gaming machine, the remaining time notification means makes the remaining time notified by at least one of the first notification mode and the second notification mode different from the actual length of the remaining time. It is preferable.

  At this time, the remaining time notifying means sets the predetermined length as the first length, and when the remaining time to be notified in the first notification mode is reduced to the first length, When the condition is satisfied, the first notification mode is switched to the second notification mode, and the remaining time to be notified in the second notification mode is longer than the first length. It is preferable to increase it.

  Further, the remaining time notifying means notifies the remaining time by the remaining amount of the meter, and notifies the meter decreasing speed to be notified by the second notification mode by the first notification mode. It is preferable to make it faster than the decrease rate.

  Note that the jackpot referred to in the present invention means that the next special figure variation game is a special figure high-precision ordinary figure high-precision [for example, 15R special big hit (see special figure A in FIG. 88 (a)), 2R big hit (sudden probability change; FIG. 88). (See special figure C in (a))], special figure high-precision normal figure low accuracy [eg 2R big hit (hidden probability change; see special figure E in FIG. 88 (a)]), special figure low-precision normal figure high accuracy [eg 15R big hit (see special figure B in FIG. 88 (a)), 2R big hit (sudden time reduction; see special figure D in FIG. 88 (a))], and special figure low accuracy normal figure low accuracy [eg 2R big hit (sudden normal) ; Refer to the special drawing F in FIG. 88 (a))].

Further, the loss in the present invention is that the next special figure variation game is a special figure low probability normal figure low accuracy and does not apply to the above [for example, small hits (see special figures G and H in FIG. 88 (a)) and Displacement (refer to special figures I and J in FIG. 88 (a))].
<Third Embodiment>

Hereinafter, a gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as the pachinko machine 100 or a spinning machine such as a slot machine) according to the third embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. The reference numerals shown in FIGS. 117 to 167 are used only in the description of the third embodiment in principle, and even when the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, The reference numerals shown in FIGS. 117 to 167 are given priority. On the other hand, in the following description, about the code | symbol which is not shown by FIGS. 117-167, the same code | symbol is used as the same component as said embodiment. In addition, the number of the example of this embodiment is used only for the description of this embodiment in principle, but each example of this embodiment and each example of other embodiments are applied in combination with each other. Can do. In addition, when there are drawings showing the same timing in a plurality of drawings, overlapping description may be omitted.
<Overall configuration>

  First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 to which the present invention can be applied will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface (player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. . The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. A store clerk of the store (amusement store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and a main body opening sensor 1041 for detecting that the main body 104 is opened is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 100 through a hinge portion 112 so as to have a locking function and can be opened and closed, and is configured in a frame shape so that the inside Is a door member having an opening 116. The store clerk of the amusement store can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 1061 for detecting that the front frame door 106 is opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In the description here, a light source that uses an LED is also referred to as a lamp.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be locked and openable. The door 108 with the ball storage tray is opened by pressing an opening lever 1081 that can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. Further, a door sensor with ball storage tray 1082 for detecting that the door with ball storage tray 108 is opened is also provided. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player The ball launching handle 134 for launching into the game area 124, the effect button 136 for changing the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 119) by the player's operation, and the effect button 136, An effect button lamp 138 that causes the effect button 136 to emit light, a ball lending operation button 140 that gives a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and a return of the player's balance to the card unit A return operation button 142 for giving an instruction, and a ball rental display unit 144 for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit are provided. Further, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a lower plate full tank detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is filled with game balls. Furthermore, a cross key 141 is also provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. . While the ball launching handle 134 is continuously being fired by the player, the launching device 110 sends the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every time a predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses. Fire towards.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104. 117, the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

  FIG. 118 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 117 viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is located below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The payout device 152 is detachable, and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when mounted at a predetermined position. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152. In other words, the payout device 152 is a kind of a ball feeding device that applies a driving force to a game ball and conveys the game ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined grant. Based on the establishment of the condition, the player is given (paid out) with an amount of game value (game ball) corresponding to the grant condition.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, the main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 (see FIG. 120) that performs the overall control processing of the game, and the processing information generated by the main control section 300 are displayed. Based on the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 120) that performs control processing related to the effects, and processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 120) that performs control processing related to effects, and the payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to game ball payout ( 120) and a payout board case 172 for storing a payout board 170 having an error release switch 168 for releasing an error by the operation of a game clerk. A launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control section 630 (see FIG. 120) that performs control processing related to the launch of a sphere, and a power management section 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines (see FIG. 120). And a power supply board 182 that includes a power supply switch 178 that turns on and off the power supply by an operation of a game clerk and a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when the power is turned on. The board case 184 and a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit are provided.

  FIG. 119 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. The game board 200 shown in FIG. 119 includes an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204, and defines a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. In the effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center, and a normal symbol display device 210, a special symbol display device 212, a normal symbol hold lamp 216, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided around the decorative symbol display device 208. Is arranged. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is an image display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In the pachinko machine 100, a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) is used. The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, in the pachinko machine 100, as will be described later, the 4th symbol of the usual figure and the 4th symbol of the special figure are displayed in the left corner of the effect display area 208d. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a normal map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the pachinko machine 100. The special figure display device 212 is a display device for displaying a special figure. In the pachinko machine 100, the special figure display device 212 is constituted by a 7-segment LED. These general map display device 210 and special map display device 212 correspond to an example of a notification means.

  In addition, the display area (here, the size of 7 segments is equivalent) of the ordinary figure display device 210 and the special figure display device 212 (notification means) and the display area (here, display) of the decorative symbol display device 208 (symbol display means) The display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is larger. Further, in the pachinko machine 100, the general map display device 210 and the special figure display device 212 cannot display moving images, whereas the decorative symbol display device 208 can display moving images.

  The general figure hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of a predetermined first variable game (a general figure variable game, which will be described later in detail) that is being held. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four).

  The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for performing notification indicating the current symbol control state. This high-probability lamp 222 is configured so as to give a notification indicating the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on until the start of the big hit game, and thereafter does not notify the current symbol control state. Yes. In the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is turned off is restored.

  In addition, a general prize opening 226, two ordinary drawing start gates 251 and 253, an ordinary figure electric accessory 252, a special figure starting opening 230, and a variable winning opening 234 are arranged around the production device 206. doing.

  117. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 117, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are provided on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (general) 118), the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 118 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged as prize balls to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In the pachinko machine 100, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for a prize may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player may be referred to as a “lending ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”. Of the plurality of general winning ports 226, only one general winning port 226 is disposed below the usual start gate 251. That is, the general winning opening 226 is disposed between the normal start gate 251 and the variable winning opening 234 provided at the lower center of the game board. Hereinafter, the general winning award 226 will be referred to as a central general winning award 226 when distinguished from other general award winning holes 226. Further, when the general figure starting gate 251 provided at the lower center of the game board is distinguished from the other general figure starting gate 253, it is referred to as a central common figure starting gate 251. Unlike the ball that entered the general prize opening 226, the ball that has passed the central opening gate 251 is not discharged to the amusement island side, and the ball can enter the central general prize opening 226. It is. However, even if a game ball passes through the central ordinary start gate 251, no prize ball will be paid out. The central normal start gate 251 corresponds to an example of a first entry area, and the central general winning opening 226 below the gate corresponds to an example of a second entry area.

  Here, the game performance of the pachinko machine 100 provided with the game board 200 shown in FIG. 119 will be briefly described. The pachinko machine 100 is a gaming machine that does not make a game ball enter the variable winning opening 234 and earns a ball, but makes a game ball enter the ordinary electric accessory 252 to earn a ball. In a normal state (a special figure low-probability normal figure low-probability state to be described later), first, when a game ball enters the central general figure start gate 251, aiming at the central general figure start gate 251 provided at the lower center of the game board. Then, whether or not the normal map is determined (first determination of correctness) is performed, and the general map display device 210 starts the variable display. In addition to the variable display of the general-purpose display device 210, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a variable display of the normal-pattern decorative symbol. That is, the decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the general symbol display device 210 in a form with enhanced performance.

  When winning is determined by the determination of whether or not the normal symbol is won, the universal symbol display device 210 displays a stop symbol (see FIG. 121 (c)) of a predetermined symbol form corresponding to the winning symbol and also displays the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the hit is stopped and displayed. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen for instructing to make a right strike, and the general-purpose electric accessory 252 disposed in the right area of the game area 124 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 5.8 seconds). To do. In other words, the ordinary electric accessory 252 includes a movable member (here, a door member 2521) that can be freely opened and closed, and when the door member 2521 is opened, it is possible to win a prize at the special drawing start port 230. The door member 2521 is a member that changes the difficulty level of winning a prize to the special figure starting port 230. When the door member 2521 is closed, it is impossible to enter the special drawing starting port 230, and the closed state where the door member 2521 is closed is an open / close state in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, the state in which the door member 2521 is open is an open / close state in which winning is easy. Accordingly, the special figure starting port 230 has either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size) of the entrance (the entrance of the game ball). This is a variable start area in which the ease of entering a game ball changes from one size to the other size. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the usual start gates 251 and 253. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the normal start gates 251 and 253 or smaller than the size of the entrance of them (251 and 253). It should be noted that the closed state of the door member 2521 of the ordinary electric accessory 252 does not necessarily need to be completely closed, and may be in a state where it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball even if it is slightly opened. . The closed state of the door member 2521 of the general electric accessory 252 corresponds to an example of the first state, and the open state corresponds to an example of the second state. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, seven) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that has entered the special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. 119 is a variable starting means, and can be said to be an attacker-type electric tulip (electric chew).

  When a game ball enters the general-purpose electric accessory 252 in a state where the door member 2521 is opened, the ball always enters the special figure starting port 230. Even if a plurality of game balls enter the special figure starting port 230 by opening the door member 2521 once, whether or not the special figure is determined (lottery) is performed only for the first ball that has entered. That is, in this pachinko machine 100, there is no special figure holding storage. Therefore, the game board 200 is not provided with a special figure holding lamp. In addition, a winning lamp 254 is provided in the vicinity (in this example, on the right side) of the ordinary electric accessory 252. The winning lamp 254 emits light (flashes) when there is a winning at the special drawing start port 230. Further, light is emitted (flashing) when the door member 2521 is closed. The winning lamp 254 corresponds to an example of a light emitting unit.

  The door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 opens for a predetermined time (here, 5.8 seconds), and a predetermined number of balls (here, ten balls) enter the general-purpose electric accessory 252 during the predetermined time. In this case, the door member 2521 is closed without waiting for the elapse of a predetermined time when the predetermined number of balls have entered. When the game ball enters the general-purpose electric accessory 252, whether or not the special figure is appropriate (lottery) is determined, and the special figure display device 212 starts the variable display. In addition to the variation display of the special figure display device 212, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an effect display. As described above, in the pachinko machine 100, the one-time opening of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 aims to acquire the right to determine whether or not the special drawing is won once and increase the number of prize balls by winning one or more balls. Is.

  When the big win is won in the special symbol determination, the special symbol display device 212 displays a stop symbol of a predetermined symbol form corresponding to the big hit, and the decorative symbol display device 208 also produces an effect corresponding to the big hit. The variable start port 234 is opened for a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times or twice) for a very short time (for example, 0.1 second). Only one variable winning port 234 is disposed below the center of the game board 200 shown in FIG. The variable winning opening 234 includes a winning opening and a door member 2341 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid. The winning opening may be referred to as a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be referred to as an attacker. The variable winning opening 234 is kept closed until a jackpot game to be described later is started, and when the jackpot game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. That is, the variable winning opening 234 includes a predetermined first opening / closing state (here, the closed state) and a second opening / closing state (here, the opening state) in which the winning of the game ball is easier than the first opening / closing state. The variable winning means is capable of changing the open / closed state from one to the other. It should be noted that the closed state at the variable winning opening 234 does not necessarily need to be completely closed, and may be in a state where it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball even if it is slightly opened. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as a winning ball. However, in the pachinko machine 100 as described above, since the open state at the variable winning opening 234 is extremely short (for example, 0.1 seconds), almost no payout by entering the variable winning opening 234 can be expected. The ball that entered the variable prize opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  In the normal state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), if a big win is won in the special figure success / failure determination, it always shifts to the electric support state (also called short-time state, general figure high probability state). In the electric support state, first, the general-purpose starting gate 253 disposed in the right area of the game area 124 is aimed. A general electric accessory 252 is provided directly below the normal start gate 253. The right-hand general start gate 253 corresponds to an example of the first entry area, and the special-purpose start opening 230 that allows the game ball to enter when the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 immediately below the door is opened. This corresponds to an example of two approach areas.

  Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the normal start gate 253 is not discharged to the amusement island side, and no winning ball is paid out. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed the right-hand general map start gate 253, the normal map determination is made, and the general map display device 210 starts the normal map variable game.

  If the pachinko machine 100 is in the electric support state, it is easy to hit in the normal determination. If it is determined whether or not the normal figure is correct, the door member 2521 of the general purpose electric accessory 252 is opened again, and when the game ball enters the general purpose electric accessory 252, whether or not the special figure is appropriate is determined. In the pachinko machine 100, in the probability variation state (special figure high probability state) and the non-probability variation state (special figure low probability state), the probability of winning a big hit in the special figure judgment is changed, but in any state, the big hit with high probability Is configured to win. If the big win is not won in the special figure determination (if it is a loss), the variable winning opening 234 is not opened. However, since it is in the electric support state, if the game ball passes through the right-hand general start gate 253, the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is opened with a considerable probability. In this way, it is easy to win a special jackpot several times during the electric support state. In the pachinko machine 100, the period between the electric support states corresponds to a special game state, and a bonus game is produced.

  In general, when winning a ball is not reduced, repeatedly winning a special bonus jackpot is called a ream. Therefore, even if it is in the non-electric support state, while it is in a probable variation state, repeatedly winning a special figure jackpot may be referred to as a recreational resort. However, in the game board 200 shown in FIG. 119, there is only one special figure starting port, and the special figure starting port 230 is not won unless the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is opened. Therefore, here, it is referred to as consecutive resort that, during the electric support state, the jackpot with the electric support is repeatedly elected and the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is repeatedly opened. For example, during the electric support state, a consecutive house is also established when a special jackpot with electric support of the special figure is won by one or more times. Special bonus jackpots are available with probability variation jackpots and non-probability variation jackpots. It is easy to win a jackpot with probability variation with a jackpot with probability variation and a jackpot with probability variation, but the number of times that a jackpot with probability variation can be acquired between the transition to the non-power support status after transition to the power support status. There are restrictions. Hereinafter, this probability variation limit is referred to as a limiter, and the above number is referred to as a prescribed number. Here, the specified number of times is 11. When the specified number of times is reached, the electric support state is changed to the non-electric support state and the non-probable change state is changed. That is, a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state which is a normal state is obtained. On the other hand, if the special figure wins a non-probable big hit before the specified number of times is reached, the limiter is reset and the number of wins with a probable big hit becomes zero.

  In the pachinko machine 100 having the above-described configuration, a plurality of types of times are prepared as the time until the determination result of the normal map is obtained, that is, the variation time of the general map display device 210. A plurality of types of times are also prepared for the time until derivation, that is, the variation time of the special figure display device 212. In the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the normal figure is short, and when the game ball passes the right normal figure start gate 253, the determination result is immediately notified. When the special figure is a big hit, the fluctuation time of the special figure is not more than one opening period (here, 5.8 seconds) of the door member 2521 in the general-purpose electric accessory 252; It may become longer with a predetermined probability.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 119, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a game nail 238 are arranged in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening, and the inner rail 204 At the bottom, there is provided an out-port 240 for guiding a ball that has not won any winning opening or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the amusement island side.

The sphere accommodated in the upper plate 126 is supplied to the firing position of the firing rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the player's ball launch handle 134, and the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 146 and launcher 148 into the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (The usual start gates 251 and 253, the special drawing start port 230) are won or reach the out port 240 without winning any winning port or start port.
<Directing device 206>

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll. In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are located behind the warp device 242 and the stage 244.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball naild by the game nail 238 and the like, and the passed ball enters the central universal start gate 251 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate this.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

The decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 119 correspond to the rendering means, and among these, the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponds to an example of the symbol display means. .
<Control unit>

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and the power management unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 are configured. Yes. In the pachinko machine 100, the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 are composed of different circuit boards, but these three control units (300, 400, 500) The first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 may be composed of one common circuit board different from the circuit board of the main control unit 300. It may be a thing. Therefore, each of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 can be regarded as a predetermined control means, or one of these three control units (300, 400, 500) combined. One can be regarded as a predetermined control means, or one combined with the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 can be regarded as a predetermined control means.
<Main control unit>

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing are mounted. . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 includes a random value generation circuit 318 for deriving a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes two random value generation circuits). For detecting that the main body opening sensor 1041, front frame door sensor 1061, door sensor with ball storage tray 1082 and lower tray 128 shown in FIG. 118 are filled with game balls. Receives signals output from various sensors 320 including a full tank detection sensor, a ball detection sensor provided inside each start opening, winning opening and variable winning opening, and disturbs the result of amplification and comparison with reference voltage. A sensor circuit 322 for outputting to the numerical value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the special figure display device 212, and the general diagram display device 2 A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of 0, a drive circuit 330 for performing display control of various status display units 328 (for example, the universal map holding lamp 216, the high-accuracy medium lamp 222, etc.) A drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 for opening and closing the door member 2521 of the object 252 and the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 and the drive circuit 335 for controlling the light emission of the prize lamp 254 are connected. ing. The light emission control of the winning lamp 254 may be performed on the first sub-control unit 400 side.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value used in the basic circuit 302. Random number generation in the random value generation circuit 318 can be broadly divided into two types of methods: counter mode and random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that is counted up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods in the random number mode. The first method in the random number mode performs an operation using a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) using a seed of random numbers, and derives the operation result as a random number. In the second method, a numerical value is read from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and the read numerical value is derived as a random number. The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value using white noise superimposed on a signal input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random value generation circuit 318 uses the acquired value as an initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, uses it as a seed of random numbers, or determines a read start position of the random number table. .

  When the sphere detection sensor among the various sensors 320 detects that the sphere has won the special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Output. The random value generation circuit 318 that has received this signal latches the value at that timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the special figure starting port 230, and the latched value is incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318. This is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the start port 230. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won a prize in the usual figure starting gates 251 and 253 (these two ordinary figure starting gates are collectively referred to as a usual figure starting area). The value at the timing of the random number generation circuit corresponding to the normal start area is latched, and the latched value is stored in the random value storage register corresponding to the normal start area built in the random number generation circuit 318. To do.

  Further, as the ball detection sensor referred to in this specification, specifically, a sensor for detecting a ball that has won a predetermined winning opening or starting opening such as a general winning opening 226, a special drawing starting opening 230, a variable winning opening 234, or the like. There is a sensor for detecting a sphere passing through the normal start gates 251 and 253.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information of the machine 100 (for example, information indicating the control state) is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power management unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this case), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302. The low voltage signal is an electric system abnormality signal indicating that there is an abnormality in the electric system for operating the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 corresponds to an example of an electric system abnormality signal output unit.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started). The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of game control means.

The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.
<Sub control unit>

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 is connected to a ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effects data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 detects a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418, and pressing of the effect button 136 shown in FIG. An effect button detection sensor 426 and a sensor circuit 428 that outputs detection signals from various sensors to the basic circuit 402 are connected.

Furthermore, a second sub-control unit 500 for controlling the decorative symbol display device (liquid crystal display device) 208 and the shielding device 246 is connected to the first sub-control unit 400.
<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply management unit>

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply management unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power management unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and supplies the predetermined voltage to the dispensing control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500. The main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the launch control unit 630 are supplied with a predetermined voltage from the payout control unit 600. The power management unit 660 also stores a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the pachinko machine 100, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power management unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.
<Type of design>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 121 (a), the types of special figures that are stopped and displayed by the special figure display device 212 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  FIG. 121 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol mode (second symbol mode) of the special figure. The special figure variation game is started on the condition that the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is opened and the ball detection sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure starting port 230. When the special figure variable game is started, the special figure display device 212 displays “variable display of special figure” (special figure variable game) which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Do. Then, when the variation time (first variation time) determined before the start of the variation of the special figure elapses, the special diagram display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special diagram. Hereinafter, a series of displays from the start of the “figure display of special figure” to the stop display of the stop symbol form of the special figure may be referred to as a special figure fluctuation stop display. This special figure variable stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 121 (a), 22 types of special drawings from “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure W” are shown as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation stop display. In FIG. 121 (a), the white portions in the drawing indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  In the pachinko machine 100, 20 types of jackpot symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure T") are prepared as the stop pattern modes of the special figure. Any jackpot symbol is a jackpot symbol of a predetermined round (for example, 15 rounds or two rounds).

  The round here means the number of chances that a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) can be obtained. In the pachinko machine 100, the number of operations of the variable prize opening 234 shown in FIG. 119 is represented, and the 15th round is one or more opening / closing operations of the variable prize opening 234 (one operation). This means that this operation continues 15 times. That is, one operation corresponds to an example of a specific change in which the open / close state changes from the first open / close state (here, the closed state) to the second open / close state (here, the open state). During the big hit game, the specific change is performed a plurality of constant times (15 times in the case of 15 rounds). Each round has a predetermined round end condition (for example, the entry of a game ball of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls), acquisition of a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls), elapse of a predetermined time from the start of the round, etc. 1 or more) is completed. A big hit game is in progress for a predetermined round.

  FIG. 121 (b) is a table summarizing the characteristics of the special figure shown in FIG. When the special figure is a big hit in the normal gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability), that is, in a state where the special figure is big hit in the non-electric support state, the door member 2521 of the general figure electric accessory 252 repeatedly opens and closes. The probability of going is extremely low, and in FIG. 121 (b), it is marked as when the general electric accessory is released (initial). This means that the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 for which the determination of whether or not the special drawing is to be performed is performed once. At the time of the normal drawing electric component release (initial stage), the special figure A to the special figure P become a big hit with certainty. If it is with certainty change, it will shift to a state where the probability of winning a big hit is high in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. The pachinko machine 100 shifts to a special figure low probability state during a big hit game, and if a big hit with probability change is won, it shifts to a special figure high probability state after the big hit game ends. On the other hand, special figure Q to special figure T are big hits without certainty.

  Also, at the time of releasing the ordinary electric charge (initial stage), if the special figure is a big hit, the time is given. That is, special figure A to special figure P will be a big hit with a time-saving until the next big hit, and special figure Q to special figure T will be given a short time while the symbol variation stop display of the special figure is performed 100 times. After any big hit game from special figure A to special figure T, the state shifts to a state with electric support (electric support) (hereinafter referred to as an electric support state). The electric support state is one of the control states prepared for the pachinko machine 100, and is sometimes referred to as a time-short state. The electric support state (short-time state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the “electric support state” is a state related to a general plan, and the “short-time state” is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a general figure and a special figure. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a time reduction flag. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, it is in the electric support state and is usually in a high probability state. Note that the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during the big hit game. In the normal figure high probability state, compared to the normal figure low probability state, it becomes easier to win the common figure variable game (general figure certain change). For example, the probability of winning the usual figure variation game is 1/60 in the low figure probability state (non-electric support state), but increases to 1 / 1.0003 in the high figure probability state (electric support state). To do. In addition, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the general figure change game is shorter than that in the non-electric support state (the general figure change short). For example, in the non-electric support state, the variation time of the usual game of 10 seconds is reduced to 1.5 seconds in the electric support state. The probability of entering the special figure starting port 230 increases due to the change of the universal figure and the change of the universal figure. In the pachinko machine 100, the normal figure change and the normal figure change are performed in the electric support state (short-time state), but the electric chew release period may be extended or the electric chew release frequency may be increased. From the above, in the non-electric support state, the game ball is less likely to enter the special figure starting port 230 than in the electric support state. That is, in the non-electric support state, the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is likely to be closed, and the rate of entry of game balls into the special-purpose starting port 230 is low. On the other hand, in the electric support state, the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is easy to open, and the rate of entry of game balls into the special-purpose starting port 230 is increased. Therefore, the non-electric support state corresponds to an example of a non-specific state (which also corresponds to a normal game state), and the electric support state corresponds to an example of a specific state (also corresponds to a special game state). The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a game state transition unit that shifts the game state between the normal game state and the special game state.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 100, there is a limit (limiter) on the number of times that a big hit with certain change can be obtained between the transition to the power support state and the transition to the non-power support state. . The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a probability variation counter that counts the number of times that a big hit with probability variation can be obtained. When the non-electric support state is shifted to the electrical support state, a specified number of times is set in this probability variation counter. Then, every time a jackpot with probability variation is obtained, the probability variation counter is decremented by one. This probability variation counter corresponds to an example of a specified number counter. When the limiter is set and the specified number of times has not been reached (when the limiter has not been reached), that is, until the number of jackpots with probability change after shifting to the electric support state reaches the specified number of times Then, special figure A to special figure P will be a big hit with certainty and with a short time until the next big hit. Further, in the special drawings A to P, the probability variation counter is not reset. On the other hand, when the limiter is not reached, the special figure Q to the special figure T are big hits with no probability change, and the probability variation counter is reset to the specified number of times, and the symbol variation stop display with a special time is 100 times. Granted while done.

  Further, when the probability variation counter reaches the specified number of times (here, the counter value becomes 0), that is, when the limiter is reached, the special figures A to H and the special figures Q and R are big hits without the probability variation, and the time reduction is A special symbol change stop display is given 100 times, and the probability variation counter is reset. On the other hand, when the limiter is reached, the special drawings I to P and the special drawings S and T are big hits with no probability change and no short time, and the limiter setting is completed and the normal game state is entered.

  To summarize the above, special maps A to P are in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state from the first hit (when the electric figure electric component is released (initial)) to when the limiter has not reached (in the Renzhuang). Yes, special figure Q to special figure S are special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. When the limiter is reached, special figure A to special figure H and special figures Q and R are in a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, and special figure I to special figure P and special figures S and T are special figures low. It is a low probability state. As described above, in the pachinko machine 100, the benefit given to the player based on the stop pattern aspect of the special figure is in the gaming state (when the electric figure is released (initial), when the limiter is not reached (during the villa) However, the stop symbol form of the special figure is common in different game states.

  The pachinko machine 100 also has two types of lost symbols. The special figure V shown in FIG. 121 (a) is the first lost symbol, and the special figure W is the second lost symbol. When the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 does not open / close. In addition to the big hit symbol and the lost symbol, a small hit symbol in which the control state (game state) does not change before and after the small hit game may be prepared. The special figure display device 212 corresponds to an example of a first symbol display means for informing a special figure determination result (second determination result).

  FIG. 122 (a) shows an example of a usual stop symbol mode (first symbol mode). There are two types of stoppage display modes of the usual figure of the pachinko machine 100: “common figure A” which is a winning symbol and “common figure B” which is a lost symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, detects that a sphere has entered the normal map start area (the normal map start gates 251 and 253), the general map display device 210 displays that all seven segments are turned on. Then, the “variable display of ordinary figure” (ordinary figure fluctuation game) is performed by repeatedly turning on one central segment. Then, after the fluctuation time elapses, one of the symbols “general symbol A” which is the winning symbol and “general symbol B” which is the lost symbol is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 122 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  In the following, a series of displays from the start of the “variable display of the usual figure” to the stop display of the stop pattern form of the usual figure may be referred to as a usual figure change stop display. The universal symbol display device 210 corresponds to an example of a second symbol display means for notifying the normal decision determination result (first determination result).

  FIG. 122 (b) shows an example of a general-purpose decorative symbol. There are 10 types of decorative patterns for the pachinko machine 100: “decoration 1” to “decoration 10”. Each symbol of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 on condition that a sphere has entered the universal symbol start area (normal figure start gates 251 and 253). In the display area, “decoration pattern” is switched in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. "Change display". That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbols in a variable manner separately from the general symbol display device 210. And the stop symbol mode which is a combination of a decoration symbol is stopped and displayed. When notifying the hit of a normal figure, combinations of decorative symbols in which three same decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, “decoration 1 -decoration 1 -decoration 1” or “decoration 2 -decoration 2”). -Decoration 2 "etc.) is stopped and displayed. When a combination of decorative symbols in which three identical decorative symbols are arranged is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 opens for a predetermined time (here, 5.8 seconds). On the other hand, in the case of notifying the usual figure, the combination of the decorative symbols other than the combination of the decorative symbols in which three of the same decorative symbols are arranged (for example, dissemination) is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. . Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a series of displays from the start of the “decorative symbol variable display” to the stop display of the decorative symbol stop pattern may be referred to as decorative symbol variation stop display.

In addition, the stop symbol mode (see FIG. 122 (a)) of the normal symbol and the stop symbol mode of one decorative symbol displayed in each of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c on the left center right of the decorative symbol display device 208 (same diagram) (See (b)) is larger for decorative designs (see (b) in the figure).
<Main control unit main processing>

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 120 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 120 is provided with a special figure determining random number counter, a special figure changing time determining random number counter, and a normal figure changing period determining random number counter. In addition, the RAM 308 stores special figure determination result, special figure determination result, special figure change time determination result, general figure determination result, general figure change period determination result, and general figure hold number. . Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a general-purpose holding storage section that is divided into a maximum number of areas (four in this example) that can hold the start of the determination of whether or not to determine the normal-use figure (lottery).

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 120 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input resets by a reset interrupt and executes the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG. 123 in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. In the pachinko machine 100, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500 by the power supply control unit 660. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this case), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312 and a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not the state before the power interruption (before power interruption) is restored, and the state before the power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of the game shop operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 41 (indicating that there has been an operation). If the RAM clear signal is ON (RAM clear is necessary), the process goes to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the power-off state. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main controller 300 shown in FIG. 120 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

In step S115, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, an initial value generating random number counter for generating an initial value of the special figure determining random number counter, a special figure changing time determining random value, and a normal figure changing period determining random value respectively The two random number counters for generating are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as the basic random number value is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308, 1 is added to the acquired value, and then stored in the original random number counter storage area. . At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.
<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  120 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (here, about once every 4 ms), and the main control unit timer is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. Interrupt processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically changed (in this case, so as not to detect a processing abnormality) so that the WDT 314 count value exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this case) and no WDT interruption occurs. Restart once about every 2ms, which is the main controller timer interrupt cycle.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the various sensors 320 shown in FIG. The data is stored in a signal state storage area provided for each sensor 320. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the pachinko machine 100, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the sphere detection sensor, it is determined that there has been a prize when the detection signal is continuously stored twice after no detection signal. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 120, winning determination pattern information (here, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal) is stored. In this step S205, information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (here, no detection signal before, detection signal last time, detection signal this time). If it matches the information), it is determined that there has been a ball entry or passage to the general winning opening 226, the ordinary start gates 251 and 253, the special figure starting opening 230, and the variable winning opening 234. In other words, it is determined that there has been a winning at these winning ports 226 and 234, the starting port 230, and the gates 251 and 253. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (here, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the special figure determination random number counter used in the main control unit 300 is used. The special figure variation time determination random number counter and the normal figure variation period determination random number counter are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a certain random number value is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Stored in the random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value obtained from a random number counter that fluctuates in a numerical value range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the obtained value is a previously set initial value stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. When the value is equal to (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter, and is set in the random number counter. In order to determine this, the initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update processing, the time for displaying a symbol on the general symbol display device 210 is displayed, and the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 is counted. Various timers are updated, including a special figure display symbol update timer, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening period, a predetermined closing time, a timer for measuring a predetermined end effect period, and the like.

  In step S215, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning prize counter updating process, when winning prizes 226 and 234 and start opening 230 are awarded, the value of the number-of-scores storage area provided for each winning prize is read into the RAM 308 and 1 is added. The original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, when there is a winning in the usual figure start area (the usual figure start gates 251 and 253) and the number of the pending figure changing games is less than a predetermined number (here, 4), The predetermined start information is acquired. In other words, if the number of holds in the usual figure is less than the predetermined number, the usual prize winning random number value and the usual figure changing period determining random number value are acquired. The normal winning random number and the normal change period determining random number correspond to an example of start information in the present invention. The universal winning random value obtained here is a value obtained by processing a hardware random number (a value of hardware random number + a value of the R register + 1). Software random number value + R register value + 1). The random number value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 120 is combined with a random value storage register corresponding to the normal start area, a general variable period determining random number counter provided in the RAM 308, and a main control unit 300 for performing random number processing. The thing corresponds to an example of start information generating means (first start information generating means). The random number value (starting information) acquired here is stored as a set of starting information in a vacant area corresponding to the winning order (holding order) in the usual figure holding storage unit provided in the RAM 308. This general map hold storage unit can store start information acquired when a game ball enters the general map start area (general map start gates 251 and 253) up to a predetermined upper limit number (four in this case). It corresponds to storage means. At this time, the start information may be temporarily stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the value stored in the temporary area may be stored in the usual storage unit. In this case, the temporary area may be used as the start information storage means. Alternatively, the usual reserved storage unit and temporary area may be used as the starting information storage means. In addition, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 adds 1 to the value of the usual number of reservations stored in the RAM 308, and the usual number of reservations increases by one. Therefore, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a holding unit.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 does not have a special figure hold memory. A special figure winning flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. The special figure winning flag is turned off when the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is closed. Therefore, immediately after the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is opened, the special figure winning flag is off. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 obtains predetermined start information if there is a prize at the special drawing start port 230 and the special figure winning flag is off. That is, as the predetermined starting information, a special figure winning random number value, a special figure determining random value, and a special figure changing time determining random value are acquired. The special figure winning random number value obtained here is a value obtained by processing a hardware random number (hardware random number value + R register value + 1), and the special figure determining random value and the special figure variation time determining random value are: A value obtained by processing the software random number (the value of the software random number + the value of the R register + 1). 120, the random number value storage register corresponding to the special figure starting port 230, the special figure variable time determining random number counter provided in the RAM 308, and the main control unit 300 for performing random number processing are combined. This corresponds to an example of start information deriving means (second start information deriving means). The special figure winning random number value, the special figure determining random number value, and the special figure variation time determining random value acquired here are stored as one set of starting information in the special figure starting information storage area provided in the RAM 308. The

  Further, in the winning acceptance process, when a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a winning (winning) at the normal start gates 251 and 253, the special drawing start opening 230, or the variable winning opening 234, the first sub In the transmission information to be transmitted to the control unit 400, winning acceptance information indicating presence / absence of winning (winning) of the normal figure starting gates 251 and 253, the special drawing starting opening 230, and the variable winning opening 234 is set.

  In addition, when there is a winning at the special figure starting port 230, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 causes the winning lamp 254 shown in FIG. 119 to emit light.

  Note that the normal start information is not acquired if the number of normal hold is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, and the process proceeds to step S219. Further, the special chart starting information is not acquired if the special chart winning flag is on, and the process proceeds to step S219.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 120 are composed of 1 byte, strobe information in bit 7 (indicating that data is set when on), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the general diagram state update process in the middle of the normal map change display (the value of the above-mentioned general map display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the general map display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the general map display device 210 performs normal variable display (normal map variable game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. When the 7-segment LED constituting the general-purpose display device 210 is turned on / off, and the hit flag is off, the general-purpose display device 210 is configured to display a lost pattern. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the universal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either the winning symbol (common symbol A shown in FIG. 122 (a)) or the lost symbol (general symbol B shown in FIG. 122 (b)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game. Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later.

  FIG. 125 (a) is a diagram showing a table summarizing the operation modes of the general-purpose electric accessory 252. When the common figure flag is ON, in the common figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the general figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 is set. While the normal operation is set in the area, information indicating a predetermined opening period is set in the storage area of the door member opening period management timer provided in the RAM 308. In the pachinko machine 100, the storage area of the door member opening period management timer is 5.8 in both the electric support state (normal high probability state) and the non-electric support state (normal low probability state). Set information indicating the release period of seconds. Therefore, the operation of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 in the electric support state and the operation of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 in the non-electric support state are the same, and the player sees the operation mode of the general-purpose electric accessory 252. It is not possible to determine whether or not the power support is in effect. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 is used for opening / closing driving of the door member 2521 until 5.8 seconds set here or until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (here, 10 balls) is detected in the special figure starting port 230. A signal for holding the door member 2521 in an open state is output to the solenoid (332). In the pachinko machine 100, the variable starting means (general electric accessory 252) is opened only once (second state) during one operation period, so this 5.8 seconds is an example of the second period. It corresponds to. In addition, a predetermined value is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command electric utility release setting process in the command setting transmission process (step S233). In addition, a predetermined value is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command normal operation process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Further, in the processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door member opening period management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the normal operation set in the setting area of the RAM 308 is maintained. In addition, information indicating a predetermined opening period is set in the storage area of the door member closing period management timer provided in the RAM 308. In the pachinko machine 100, in the storage area of the door member closing period management timer, information indicating the closing period of 0.5 seconds is set in the electric support state (normal figure high probability state), and the non-electric support state (normal figure low) In the probability state), information indicating a closing period of 60 seconds is set. That is, in the pachinko machine 100, 0.5 seconds corresponds to an example of the first period in the electric support state (general figure high probability state), and 60 seconds in the non-electric support state (general figure low probability state) corresponds to the first period. It corresponds to an example. Therefore, in the first period, the non-electric support state is longer than the electric support state. As described above, the electric support state here is an example of a specific state, and the non-electric support state is an example of a non-specific state. Compared to the non-specific state (non-electric support state), the specific state (electric support state) is more likely to cause the variable starting means (usually the electric accessory 252) to enter the second state (open state). The rate of entry of game balls into the starting opening 230) is high. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 outputs a signal for holding the door member 2521 in the closed state to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 2521 until the closing period set here elapses. In addition, a predetermined value is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command electric utility article closing setting process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Then, in the process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing at which the door member closing period management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. Further, a predetermined value is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command normal operation non-operation processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S233).

  In the pachinko machine 100, the normal operation period is the first operation time (6.3 seconds here) in the electric support state (normal high probability state), and the non-electric support state (low normal probability state). Then, it becomes the 2nd operation period (here 65.8 seconds) longer than the 1st operation period. The RAM 308 is provided with an operation period timer for measuring the lapse of these operation periods (periods during normal operation), the normal operation is set in the setting area of the RAM 308, and the operation period timer is stored in the storage area of the operation period timer. Information indicating a predetermined period may be set. In the pachinko machine 100, the operation period is started based on the fact that a winning condition corresponding to an example of a common figure corresponding to an example of a first predetermined condition is established. Further, in the pachinko machine 100, the variable starting means (general electric accessory 252) is in the second state (open state) only once during one operation period, but there are a plurality of variable start means (open state) in the second state (open state). It may be a mode that turns. For example, the open state is maintained for 1 second simultaneously with the start of the operation period, the closed state is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), and then the open state is maintained for 1.8 seconds, and the closed state is maintained for a predetermined period ( For example, the open state may be maintained for 2 seconds, and the closed state may be maintained for 0.5 seconds in the electric support state and 60 seconds in the non-electric support state. In this case, 2 seconds for maintaining the final second state (open state) corresponds to an example of the second period. Further, in the non-electric support state, 60 seconds for maintaining the closed state at the end of one operation period is the longest period longer than the period for maintaining the closed state (0.5 seconds in this example). It is.

  In this way, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that performs opening / closing control of the door member 2521 corresponds to an example of variable start control means that controls the universal electric accessory 252 that is variable start means.

  Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure variable game is lost, the usual figure lost flag is turned on. When the usual figure loss flag is on, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  Subsequently, in step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is executed. First, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the usual figure variable game is being performed or whether the opening and closing control of the ordinary figure electric accessory 252 is being performed (the state of the usual figure is in operation). If it is also performed on one side, the general drawing related lottery process is terminated. On the other hand, if neither is performed, it is determined whether or not the number of pending custom-variable games is 1 or more. If it is above, the random number value for one set which is the start information stored in the past in the RAM 308 (general winning random number value and random number value for determining the normal variation period) is extracted. The starting information (a set of random values) that is still stored in the holding storage unit is transferred from the currently stored area to the adjacent area. That is, when the start information stored in the past is taken out from the general-purpose hold storage unit and the start-up information is stored in the general-purpose hold storage unit, the Nth oldest start information is stored in the general-purpose hold storage unit as N−1. This is the second oldest starting information. Also, 1 is subtracted from the usual pending number stored in the RAM 308. The main control unit 300, which performs processing for extracting one set of random values (normal winning value and random number for determining the normal variation period) from the normal figure holding storage unit of the RAM 308, starts information acquisition means (first start This corresponds to an example of information acquisition means). Next, a normal / unusual determination process is performed. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores a normal-use determination table.

  FIG. 125 (b) is a diagram showing a low probability table for determining whether or not a normal figure is reached, and FIG. 125 (c) is a diagram showing a high probability table for determining whether or not a normal figure is appropriate.

  In the usual-time determination processing, the time reduction flag is referred to and the determination is made based on whether or not the current control state is the electric support state. If the time reduction flag is off (if it is in the non-electric support state), whether or not the normal time is determined is determined using the low probability table shown in FIG. 125 (b), and if the time reduction flag is on (electric support). If it is in the state), the normal determination is performed using the high probability table shown in FIG. 125 (c). The determination of whether or not a common figure is made is performed based on a random number value for a common figure winning in the starting information extracted from the general figure holding storage unit of the RAM 308 (a possible range is 0 to 65535). The usual Atari probability is 1/60 in the low probability table shown in FIG. 125 (b) and 1 / 1.00003 in the high probability table shown in FIG. 125 (c), which is a considerably high probability. In the general figure winning, the center general figure starting gate 251 becomes main when in the non-electric support state, and when it is in the electric support state, the right-handed driving is promoted and the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is easily opened. The usual starting gate 253 becomes the main. Therefore, the low probability table shown in FIG. 125 (b) is a table used when winning the central universal start gate 251 and the high probability table shown in FIG. 125 (c) is a table used when winning the right general start gate 253. You can say that. Here, deriving “winning” or “losing” is equivalent to the normal-win / no-go determination (lottery), and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the normal-win / no-win determination processing here is the first win / fail determination means. It corresponds to an example. In addition, the success / failure determination result of “win” corresponds to an example of a specific first success / failure determination result.

  When the execution of the normal figure determination process is completed, the normal figure change period in the normal figure change stop display is determined. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a normal change period determination table.

  FIG. 126 (a) is a diagram showing a low probability loss table for determining a normal variable period, and FIG. 126 (b) is a diagram showing a low probability per table for determining a normal variable period. FIG. 126 (c) is a diagram showing a high probability loss table for determining a normal variation period, and FIG. 126 (d) is a diagram showing a high probability per table for determining a normal variation period.

  Even in the determination of the normal fluctuation period, the time reduction flag is referred to, and whether or not the current control state is the electric support state is determined. If the time reduction flag is off (if it is in the non-electric support state), the normal time fluctuation period is determined using the low probability table shown in FIG. 126 (a) and FIG. If is turned on (if it is in the electric support state), the normal fluctuation period is determined using the high probability table shown in FIGS. 126 (c) and (d). Also, based on the result of determining whether or not the figure is normal, if it is a loss, the figure change period is determined by using the table at the time of the loss shown in FIGS. 126 (b) and (d). The normal diagram change period is determined using the table of hits shown in FIG. 126 (a) and FIG. 126 (c). Further, the normal fluctuation period is determined on the basis of a random number value for determining a normal fluctuation period in the start information extracted from the normal figure holding storage unit of the RAM 308 (a possible range is 0 to 65535). In addition, the acquisition timing of the random number value for determining the normal fluctuation period is the timing of acquiring the start information, but may be the timing immediately before the start of the normal fluctuation. In addition, in the non-electric support state, if the result of determining whether or not the normal signal is lost, the normal time fluctuation period is determined based on the number of suspensions at that time. As described above, in the pachinko machine 100, one set of random values (a normal winning random value and a random number for determining a variable changing period) is held at the timing when it is taken out from the common figure holding storage unit provided in the RAM 308. From the relationship of subtracting 1 from the number, the minimum value of the number of reserved balls in the usual case is 0 and the maximum value is 3. As shown in FIG. 126 (b), when the random number value for determining the customary variable period belongs to the range of 0 to 59000, if the number of pending general figures is 3, the normal figure variable period will be 3 seconds. When it is ˜2, it becomes a fluctuation period of 10 seconds. When the random number value for determining the normal change period is equal to or greater than 59001, it becomes a common normal change period regardless of the number of holds in the normal figure. Moreover, in the electric support state, even if the result of determining whether or not the normal figure is correct is lost, the common normal figure change period is set regardless of the number of hold of the normal figure.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 126 (c) and (d), in the electric support state, the normal fluctuation period is 1.5, regardless of whether the normal signal win / fail determination result is win or miss. A very short variation period of seconds. The usual figure change period in this electric support state is shorter than the opening period of the door member 2521 of the later figure electric accessory 252 described later. Moreover, the usual figure change period in the electric support state is shorter than the usual figure change period in the non-electric support state.

  In addition, each table of FIGS. 126 (a) to 126 (d) shows an effect pattern of the general-purpose decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208, which is determined according to the length of the normal-variation period. The information indicating the normal time change time determined here is included in the normal time change start command transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, as will be described later. The sub-control unit 400 specifically determines the effect mode of the general-purpose decorative symbol shown here based on the information indicating the normal time change time. Normal reach and super reach are included in the production form of the usual decorative pattern. In normal reach, generally, two symbol display areas (for example, the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c shown in FIG. 119) are displayed in the same manner, and the remaining one symbol display area (for example, the middle symbol display area 208b) is stopped. If the symbol display area that is variably displayed, that is, if the symbol display area that is variably displayed is a specific symbol (a symbol that is equal to the symbol display area that is stopped), a combination of predetermined jackpot symbols (FIG. 122). This is a state where the decorative combination shown in (b) is stopped and displayed. Super reach is a product obtained by adding special variation display to normal reach to improve the production effect (long reach, normal reverse reach, double line reach, etc.). In addition, there is also an aspect called special variation in the effect form of the decorative design. Special variation includes special multi-line reach, full rotation reach, special full rotation reach, etc. When simply referred to as reach, it means a variation pattern of decorative symbols including normal reach, super reach and special variation. This reach is the result of the success / failure determination that the result of the normal / failure determination in the common-map related process is the specific first success / failure determination result (a predetermined result with a high player's advantage). It is a notice effect that informs the player in advance before notifying the result of the success / failure determination, and whether or not to reach is determined after the determination of the success / failure.

  When the determination of the normal map change period is completed, the general map related lottery process (step S223) ends, and then the special figure state update process is executed (step S225). The special figure state update process performs one of the following eight processes in accordance with the special figure state. For example, in the special figure state update process in the middle of the special figure symbol display to stop the special figure (the value of the special figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure display device 212 is turned on and off. Repeated lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed. By performing this control, the special figure display device 212 performs a special figure fluctuation display (special figure fluctuation game).

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the general command rotation start setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and the process ends.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a big hit flag and a lost flag. In the special figure state update process starting at the timing when the special figure variation display period has elapsed (the timing when the special figure display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), the special figure determination result in the special figure related lottery process (to be described later) ( On / off drive control of the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure display device 212 is performed based on the special figure stop symbol form), and a setting indicating that the special figure stop display is in progress is made in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the special figure display device 212 is any one of the jackpot symbol (special figure A to special figure T), the first lose symbol (special symbol V), and the second lose symbol (special symbol W). Performs a fixed display of two symbols. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a special figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the special figure that has been confirmed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure variable game is notified to the player.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the general command rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in a command setting transmission process (step S233) described later is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Also, if the result of the special figure variation game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the RAM 308 RAM 308 is set to wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for informing the player that a big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. The information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure standby time management timer provided in FIG. Further, 5H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the transmission information storage area described above in order to execute the general command winning effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Further, in the special figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (when the value of the special figure standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 0.1 second) Alternatively, the door member 2341 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 until a winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable prize opening 234. In addition to outputting a signal to be held at the same time, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening period management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, 7H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command big prize opening release setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Further, in the special figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening period management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the variable prize opening for a predetermined closing period (for example, 1 second) A signal for holding the door member 2341 in the closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing driving of the door member 2341 of 234, and information indicating the closing period in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 Set. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure state update process that starts and closes the opening / closing control of the door member a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds or 2 rounds), a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a decorative symbol display Information indicating the effect standby period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image informing the player that the big hit by the device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Set.

  As described above, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of variable winning control means for performing change control of the open / closed state of the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 during the big hit gaming state. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores an opening / closing pattern of the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 responds to the determination of whether or not the special figure variable game is successful from the ROM 306. Get the open / close pattern.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is also provided with a probability variation flag in addition to the time reduction flag, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 obtains the stop symbol form represented by the special figure determination result and the special figure determination result. At the same time as the end of the big hit game, based on the state of the game when the start information used for the game was acquired The probability variation flag and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 are set to ON.

  Furthermore, 6H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command end effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Also, in the special figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the value of the production standby time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the special area is not in operation in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set. Furthermore, if the result of the special figure variation game is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. When this loss flag is on, the special figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0) is also stored in the RAM 308. Set special figure inactive in the setting area. In the special figure state update process when the special figure is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next process.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 is completed, a special figure related lottery process (step S229) is performed. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special figure related lottery process corresponds to an example of a second win / fail determination unit. In the special figure related lottery process (step S229), the lottery (first win / fail determination) is executed, the special figure to be stopped is determined, and the variable period (first variable period) in the special symbol variable stop display is determined. . First, it is determined whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined success / failure determination prohibition condition is not satisfied. Here, it is determined whether or not the special figure display device 212 is in the special figure fluctuation display or in the stop display, and if it is in any display, the special figure related lottery process is terminated. . On the other hand, if neither is displayed, it is determined whether it is set during special figure operation or special figure non-operation, and if it is set during special figure operation, special drawing related lottery processing is If it is set and the special figure is not in operation, the determination result prohibition condition is not satisfied, and this time, it is determined whether or not a predetermined determination result condition is satisfied. In this determination, it is determined whether or not start information is stored in the special figure start information storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the starting information is not stored, the special drawing related lottery process is terminated, and if the starting information is stored, a predetermined success / failure determination condition is established.

  If the predetermined success / failure determination condition is satisfied, the starting information (the special figure winning random value, the special figure determining random value, and the special figure changing time determining random value) stored in the special figure starting information storage area Is acquired, and special figure winning / failing determination (first winning / failing determination) processing is performed. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores a special figure determination table.

  FIG. 127A is a diagram showing a special probability determination low probability table, and FIG. 127B is a special diagram success determination high probability table.

  In the special figure success / failure determination process, the probability change flag prepared in the RAM 308 is referred to, and the determination is made based on whether or not the current control state is the special figure probability change state. If the probability variation flag is off (if the special figure low probability state), the special figure is judged using the low probability table shown in FIG. 127A, and the probability variation flag is on (the special figure high probability). State), whether or not the special figure is determined is determined using the high probability table shown in FIG. The special figure success / failure determination is performed based on the special figure winning random number value (the possible range is 0 to 65535) in the start information acquired from the special figure start information storage area of the RAM 308. Further, in the pachinko machine 100, when the specified number of times is reached (at the time of the limiter), the state shifts to an uncertain change state (a special figure low probability state). In this case, as shown in FIG. 127 (a), the special symbol winning / non-judgment determination is won with a 12.5% probability of winning a bonus without a short time, and with the probability of 12.5%, the symbol variation stop display of the next special symbol is performed. To win a jackpot with a short time until the special symbol change stop display is made 100 times. In the pachinko machine 100, the special figure success / failure determination result is a big hit result with a probability of 25% as shown in the special figure success / failure determination table in FIG. 127 (a) in the uncertain change state. As shown in the special figure success / failure determination table of 127 (b), the result is almost a big hit. This “big hit” special figure determination result corresponds to an example of a specific second determination result.

  When the execution of the special figure success / failure determination process is completed, a special figure determination process for determining a stop symbol form of the special figure is performed. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a special figure determination table.

  FIG. 127 (c) is a diagram showing a big hit special figure determination table. In the big hit special figure determination table shown in FIG. 127 (c), the number of times to reach the limiter is also shown.

  In this special figure determination process, the special figure determination random number value (possible range is 0 to 65535) in the start information acquired from the special figure start information storage area of the RAM 308 is performed. Further, the special figure stop symbol form is determined based on the gaming state when the start information used when obtaining the special figure determination result is obtained. That is, if the special figure win / fail determination result is a big hit at the time of the release of the electric figure of the special figure (at the time of the initial common figure), the special figure A to the special figure with a probability of 96% based on the random number for special figure determination. A special figure of P (with big change and a big hit symbol with a short time until the next big hit) is decided, and a special figure Q to a special figure T (no big change and with a short time of 100 times) with a probability of 4% ). Note that the number of times to reach the limiter is determined to be one of the special figures A to P, so that the jackpot with probability variation is obtained once, and the maximum number of times the jackpot with probability variation is obtained. (11 times) -1 times = 10 times. On the other hand, when the special figure is selected from any of the special figures Q to T, the maximum number of wins per jackpot with probability change is 11 times. Even if the special figure success / failure determination result is a big hit when the limiter has not been reached (during the consecutive day), the special figure A to the special figure P (with certainty and with a probability of 96%) based on the special figure determination random value. Decided to be one of the special charts in the jackpot symbol with a short time until the next jackpot), with a probability of 4%, any of the special charts Q to T (the jackpot symbol with no time change and 100 times the short-term) The special figure is decided. However, if the number of times to reach the limiter is determined as one of the special figures from A to P, it means that the jackpot with probability variation is obtained once, and it is subtracted once. When any of the special drawings in FIGS. Q to T is determined, the number is reset and the prescribed number of times 11 is set again. When the result of the special figure determination is a big hit when the limiter is reached, the special figure A to the special figure H, the special figure Q, and the special figure R have a probability of 53.3% based on the random number value for special figure determination. (Special jackpot design with no time variation and 100 times of time-saving) Decided to one of the special maps, with a probability of 4% Special maps I-P, S, T A special figure is selected from among the jackpot symbols without). In this case, the number of times until the limiter is reached is reset when it is determined as one of the special figures A to H, special figure Q, and special figure R, and the prescribed number of times is reset to 11 times. Is done. If any of the special maps I to P, S, T is determined, the number of times is zero.

  In other words, the number of times that the jackpot with probability change can be acquired between the transition to the non-electric support state and the non-electric support state is 11, and the non-probable change to the non-probable change state (special figure low probability state). When the big hit is pulled, 11 limiter times are set, and when the probable big hit is drawn, the limiter number is 10 times. In addition, when the non-probable big hit is drawn during the retreat, the number of limiters is reset, the prescribed number of times is set again, and a time reduction of 100 times is given. In other words, since the fluctuation of one special figure is allowed in the short time after the uncertain large hit, hitting at this time adds a ranger to resetting the limiter count. Furthermore, when the limiter arrives, even if a probability variation symbol is displayed, it is treated as a non-probability variation big hit, but if a time reduction is given at this time, a real villa will be added as will be described in detail later.

  When the execution of the special figure determining process is completed, the special figure fluctuation period in the special figure symbol symbol change stop display is determined. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a special figure change period determination table.

  FIG. 128 (a) is a diagram showing a jackpot table for determining a special figure fluctuation period during normal high probability, and FIG. 128 (b) is a diagram showing a jackpot table for determining a special chart variable period during low probability. FIG. 6C is a diagram showing a typical high-probability special-figure variation period determination lose table, and FIG. 10D is a diagram showing a general-low-probability special map variation period determination lose table.

  In the determination of the special figure fluctuation period, the table shown in FIG. 128 is used based on the above-mentioned special figure determination result and the electric support state (ordinary figure high probability state) or the non-electric support state (general figure low probability state). To determine the special figure fluctuation period. Further, the special figure change period is determined based on a special figure change period decision random value (the possible range is 0 to 65535) in the start information acquired from the special figure start information storage area of the RAM 308. Note that the acquisition timing of the random number value for determining the special figure variation period is the timing at which the start information is acquired, but may be the timing immediately before the start of the special figure fluctuation. As shown in the table of FIG. 128 (a), in the pachinko machine 100, when the special figure win / fail determination result is a big hit in the electric support state, the special figure variation period has a predetermined short period (here. In 1 second). This predetermined short period is shorter than the opening period (5.8 seconds) of the door member 2521 of the ordinary electric accessory 252 and while the door member 2521 of the ordinary electric accessory 252 is opened once, In the meantime, the result of the special figure success / failure determination based on winning the special figure starting port 230 is often reported in the electric support state. In the electric support state, a fluctuation period of 120 seconds and a fluctuation period of 360 seconds are also prepared. The probability of a predetermined short period is higher than the probability of a long period such as 120 seconds or 360 seconds.

  On the other hand, as shown in the table of FIG. 128 (b), when the special figure determination result is a big hit in the non-electric support state, the special figure fluctuation period is a fluctuation period of a predetermined period (here, 60 seconds). become.

  In addition, as shown in the table of FIG. 128 (c), when the special figure success / failure determination result is lost in the electric support state, the fluctuation period of the special figure is uniformly 10 seconds, as shown in FIG. As shown in the table, when the special figure determination result is lost in the non-electric support state, the fluctuation period of the special figure is uniformly 60 seconds.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 100, in the non-electric support state, the variation time of the special figure is uniformly 60 seconds. In addition, only when the special figure success / failure determination result is a big hit in the electric support state, the special symbol variation stop display period for notifying the special figure success / failure determination result is changed, and the bonus game is produced. During the special game state, the special figure determination is performed at different intervals.

  The information representing the variation period of the special figure is included in the special symbol variation start command transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, and the first sub control unit 400 that has received the command receives the decoration. When the fluctuation period is 120 seconds, the symbol display device 208 displays the premium A jackpot effect during the fluctuation period. When the fluctuation period is 360 seconds, the premium B jackpot effect is displayed during the fluctuation period. Is displayed.

  When the determination of the special figure variation period is finished, the special figure related lottery process (step S229) is finished, and then the command setting transmission process (step S233) shown in FIG. 124 is performed, and various commands are sent to the first sub-control unit. 400. The output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are command Type (here, basic command, special symbol variation start command, special symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, general figure hold increase Bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. In the case of a special symbol variation start command, the command data indicates information indicating the special symbol stop symbol, information indicating the control state (information indicating the setting state of the time reduction flag and the probability variation flag), and the special symbol variation time. In the case of a special symbol variation stop command, the information includes special symbol stop symbol information, control state information, and the like. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, presence / absence of winning at the special figure starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the variable winning port 234, and the like.

  Further, in the above-described general command winning effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the control state Set the information indicating. In the above-described general command end effect setting transmission process, command control data represents effect control information and control state stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period. Set the information. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the commands related to the effects transmits a control command related to the effects to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the received commands.

  Further, in the above-described general command special winning opening release setting transmission process, information indicating the number of winning rounds stored in the RAM 308, the current number of rounds, information indicating the control state, etc. is set in the command data. In the above-described general command big prize opening closing setting transmission process, information indicating the current round number stored in the RAM 308, information indicating the control state, and the like is set in the command data.

  Further, in this step S233, a general command usual figure hold increase process is also performed. In this general command usual figure hold increase process, information indicating a control state is set in the command data of the general figure hold increase command.

  In addition, a main symbol variation start command indicating that the variation display of the normal diagram has been started is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 as a command related to the general diagram. The command data of the normal symbol variation start command includes information indicating the result of determining whether or not the normal symbol has been received, information indicating the control state (information indicating the setting state of the time reduction flag and the probability variation flag), information indicating the common symbol variation time, and the probability variation. Information indicating the value of the counter is included. Further, the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 release the normal figure fluctuation stop command indicating that the usual figure change display is stopped, and the door member 2521 of the usual figure electric accessory 252 is opened. A universal electric accessory opening start command indicating that it has started (doing), a universal electric accessory closing command indicating that the door member 2521 has been closed (doing), and the like are transmitted.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In this command setting transmission process, a command is also transmitted to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when turned on) in bit 7, and power-on information in bit 6. (In the case of ON, it indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), the current processing type (0-3) for encryption in bits 4-5, and the encrypted processing in bits 0-3 The number of payout requests is indicated.

  In step S235, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step 205 are read out to monitor whether there is a glass frame opening error or a lower pan full error, and so on. When a full tank error is detected, device information indicating whether there is a glass frame opening error or a lower pan full error is set in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In addition, the various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. Display data to be output to the display device 212, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port of the I / O 310. Further, when the door member 2521 of the general electric accessory 252 is closed, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 causes the winning lamp 254 shown in FIG. 119 to emit light. By the light emission of the winning lamp 254 when the door member 2521 is closed, there may be a case where a predetermined special effect, which will be described later, is made to appear to the player as an effect based on the electric chew winning.

  In step S239, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on in order to determine whether or not a power supply interruption (power interruption) has been detected. Then, when the low voltage signal is off (when the power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. When the low voltage signal is on (when the power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243.

  In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return.

On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as a return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and processing at power-off such as initialization of an input / output port is performed. Then, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.
<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>

  The process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initial setting in step S301 is executed. In this initial setting, initial setting of the I / O port 410 shown in FIG. 120, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is substituted into the timer variable.

  In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in S307, processing such as reading effect data corresponding to the command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when update of the effect data is necessary, effect data update processing is performed. The effect control process will be described later in detail.

  In step S311, when the press of the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 118 is detected, the effect data updated in step S309 is changed to effect data in response to the press of the effect button 136.

  In step S313, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S315, if there is a command to the drive circuit 420 for the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  The RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400 is provided with a transmission area for setting a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500. If a control command is set in this transmission area, processing for transmitting the control command to the second sub-control unit 500 is performed (step S319), and the process returns to step S303.

  FIG. 129 (b) is a flowchart showing the flow of the effect control process shown in FIG.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, in the command setting transmission process (step S233) shown in FIG. 124, the main control unit 300 sends a general operation start command indicating the start of the normal operation period, and the general operation tool 252. A general-purpose electric accessory closing command indicating the closing of the door member 2521, a symbol variation start command indicating the start of variation of the special figure, and the like are transmitted. The general operation start command includes information indicating the opening / closing pattern of the door member 2521 in the general electrical accessory 252. As shown in FIG. 125 (a), here, the opening / closing pattern of the door member 2521 is a pattern that opens once and closes once. However, the first sub-control unit 400 uses the information as follows. It is possible to recognize the last closing of the door member 2521 in the normal operation period of the rotation. That is, it is possible to recognize the closing immediately before the electric chew release end waiting time (here, 60 seconds) corresponding to an example of the first period. In the effect control process, first sub-control unit 400 first determines whether or not a special effect start condition is satisfied (step S3091). In other words, if no symbol change start command has been received between the reception of the general operation start command and the reception of the general electrical tool closing command representing the final closing, A start condition is satisfied, a special effect command is set in the transmission area provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 (step S3092), and the process proceeds to step S3093. On the other hand, if the special effect start condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3093 without performing the process in step S3092. In step S3093, other effect control processing is performed, and the effect control processing ends. The special effect command set in step S3092 is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the information transmission process of step S319 shown in FIG. 129 (a). When receiving the special effect command, the second sub-control unit 500 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the special effect command, and the decorative symbol display device 208 stores an image of a predetermined special effect described later. Is displayed.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 129 (c). FIG. 129 (c) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S331 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is set as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408, and this command reception interrupt process ends.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 129 (d) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (here, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by the timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle. Run with.

In step S341 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S343 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process or the like is performed, and this timer interrupt process ends.
<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>

  The second sub control unit 500 executes control of the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the control command transmitted from the first sub control unit 400. The second sub-control unit 500 is connected to an image control unit that displays an image on the decorative symbol display device 208. This image control unit has a VRAM (video RAM) and a GPU (graphics processing unit). The GPU reads the picture information and the like stored in the ROM of the second sub-control unit 500 based on the signal from the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500, and uses the display area (work area) of the VRAM to display the display image. The generated image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  More specifically, the CPU of the second sub control unit 500 first issues an image data transfer instruction. Here, first, the designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM is swapped. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU sets ROM coordinates (ROM transfer source address), VRAM coordinates (VRAM transfer destination address) and the like in the GPU attribute register based on the position information table and the like, and then images from the ROM to the VRAM. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The GPU transfers the image data from the ROM to the VRAM based on the instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the GPU outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU.

  Next, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal is input from the GPU. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM based on the image data transferred to the VRAM, the CPU stores information on the image data constituting the display image (VRAM coordinate axes, image size, VRAM coordinates). (Arrangement coordinates, etc.) to the GPU. The GPU sets parameters according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register. On the other hand, when the transfer end interrupt signal from the GPU has not been input, it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

  Subsequently, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU instructs the GPU to start drawing an image. The GPU starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU.

  When a drawing instruction is performed, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the GPU based on the end of image drawing has been input. If the generation end interrupt signal is not input, the generation end interrupt signal is input. When a generation end interrupt signal is input, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1) to finish the process. To do.

  As described above, the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponds to an example of an image display unit. A combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 corresponds to an example of an effect control unit.

Further, the second sub control unit 500 also executes control of the shielding device 246 based on the control command transmitted from the first sub control unit 400.
Next, the game flow in the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail.

  FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing a part of the game flow in the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. 131 is a diagram showing step by step the screen of the decorative symbol display device in the game flow shown in FIG. In FIG. 131, time elapses in alphabetical order from (a) to (f), and the same applies to the following drawings. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 131, the fourth symbol 217 of the usual figure and the fourth symbol 218 of the special figure are displayed at the left corner of the effect display area 208d. In these fourth symbols 217 and 218, the white circle represents the changing display, the black circle represents the stopped display, and the same applies to the subsequent drawings.

  When the game is started, it is a normal game state (a special low-probability figure low probability state). The player makes a left turn aiming at the central normal start gate 251. Eventually, a prize is awarded to the central common figure starting gate 251 (step S501), and the common figure display device 210 starts symbol variation stop display. At the same time, as shown in FIG. 131 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208, which is a liquid crystal display panel, starts changing the symbol of the normal decorative symbol (step S502). In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the special symbol fourth symbol 218 is being stopped, but the regular symbol fourth symbol 217 is being displayed in a variable manner. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a reach effect using the normal decorative symbol may be performed (step S503), but the reach effect is not performed, and the general symbol display device 210 causes the lost symbol (see FIG. 122 (a)). ) Is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of three decorative symbols in which the same decorative symbols are arranged (for example, disparity), and the process returns to step S501 ( Step S504).

  Even if the reach effect (step S503) as shown in FIGS. 131 (b) and (d) is performed, the symbol (see FIG. 122 (a)) is always stopped and displayed on the general-purpose display device 210. The combination of decorative symbols in which the same three decorative symbols are arranged is not necessarily stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the process may proceed to step S504. On the other hand, if the result of determining whether or not the common figure is successful, the symbol (see FIG. 122 (a)) is stopped and displayed on the universal symbol display device 210, and as shown in FIG. 131 (d), the decorative symbol display device is displayed. In 208, a combination of decorative symbols in which three identical decorative symbols are arranged is stopped and displayed (step S505), and the winning of the normal-game variable game is notified. In addition, as shown in FIG. 131 (d), the universal symbol display device 210 stops displaying, and at the same time, the universal symbol fourth symbol 217 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is also stopped. Along with the winning of the common figure variable game, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen for instructing to make a right-handed (step S506), and the general-purpose electric accessory 252 arranged in the right area of the game area 124 is displayed. The door member 2521 is opened for a predetermined time (here, 5.8 seconds) (step S507).

  Opening the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 makes it possible to win a special drawing start port 230, but if there is no win, the process returns to step S501 (step S508). A special figure win / no-go determination (special drawing lottery) is performed for one ball that has won a prize (step S509). When the special figure determination is made, as shown in FIGS. 131 (e) and (f), a bowling chance game is started on the decorative symbol display device 208 (step S510). In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the fourth symbol 217 of the ordinary diagram is being stopped and the fourth symbol 218 of the special symbol is being variably displayed. If the result of determining whether or not the special figure is correct is lost, the special symbol display device 212 stops displaying the lost symbol (see FIG. 121 (a)) and also displays the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 131 (h). The image of the scene where the strike could not be taken is displayed (step S511). Here, the probability that the special figure success / failure determination is lost is 2/65536 (see FIG. 127 (a)). On the other hand, if the special symbol win / fail determination result is a big hit, the special symbol display device 212 stops and displays one of the special symbols A to P, which is a big hit symbol (see FIG. 121 (a)). As shown in FIG. 131 (g), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an image notifying that the strike is taken and the bonus game is started (step S512). The probability that the special figure win / reject determination here is a big hit is 65534/65536, which is a very high probability (see FIG. 127 (a)). When winning the big win of the special figure, it always shifts from the non-electric support state (general figure low probability state) to the electric support state (general figure high probability state). As shown in FIGS. 131 (g) and 131 (h), the special symbol display device 212 stops displaying, and at the same time, the special symbol fourth symbol 218 of the decorative symbol display device 208 also displays stopped.

  FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the flow of the game shown in FIG. 130, and FIG. 133 is a diagram showing step by step the screen of the decorative symbol display device when the initial hit is a big hit without any probability change.

  In the special figure variable game here, the probability of winning a jackpot with probability variation is 96%, and the probability of winning a jackpot without probability variation is 4% (see FIG. 127 (c)). When winning the big hit without the probability change, the value 11 is set in the probability change counter prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and as shown in FIG. 133 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 during the big hit game is displayed. Then, “remaining 11 times” is displayed as the remaining number of times that the jackpot with probability change can be obtained before the transition to the non-electric support state (step S513). In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 at this time also displays “in the middle of one consecutive villa” from the fact that the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 has been opened once (step S507 shown in FIG. 130). The On the other hand, when winning the jackpot with probability variation, a value of 10 is set in the probability variation counter (step S514).

  Since the control state has shifted to the electric support state, it is easy to win the normal determination, and the door member 2521 of the general electric accessory 252 is easy to open. For this reason, it is easy to determine whether or not a special figure is made. In the pachinko machine 100, if the special figure is determined to be in a non-probable change state, the player wins a big hit with a probability of 25%. Win a big hit. In the state where the number of remaining jackpots with probability change before the transition to the non-electric support state is more than 2 times, the probability of winning the jackpot with probability change and short time until next jackpot is 96%, There is a 4% chance of winning a jackpot with no probability change and 100 time savings (see FIG. 127 (c)). For example, when the remaining number of times is 11 and the winning combination with probability variation and the next big hit with time reduction is won, the probability variation counter is set to 10 values obtained by subtracting 1 from the 11 values set so far. As shown in 133 (b), “decided 10 times” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the big hit game. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 at this time also displays “during 2 consecutive villas”.

  On the other hand, if a winning big hit with no probability change and 100 time savings is won, the probability changing counter prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is reset, and a big hit with a probability change is acquired before the transition to the non-electric support state. The remaining number of times that can be increased. Although resetting the probability variation counter is advantageous to the player, it is performed only with a probability of 4% as described above.

  FIG. 133 (c) shows the decorative symbol display device 208 during the big hit game when the remaining number of times is two. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 133 (c), “remaining 2 times” and “during 10 consecutive resorts” are displayed, and “additional bonus when a strike is added” is also displayed. . When the remaining number of times becomes one, a bowling chance game is started on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the big hit game. The result of the special figure variable game that will be the big hit game here is a big hit with no probability change, but with a probability of 53.3%, it is a big hit with 100 time reductions, with a probability of 46.7% It is a big hit without time savings. If the result of the special figure variable game is a big hit without a short time, the bonus is ended (step S519), the state shifts to the non-electric support state, and also shifts to the non-probable change state, thereby entering the normal game state. . In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 133 (g), an image of a scene where the strike could not be taken is displayed. On the other hand, if the result of the special figure variation game is a big hit with a time reduction of 100 times, it shifts to the non-probable change state, but the electric support state is extended until the special figure change stop display is performed 100 times. .

  In the pachinko machine 100, when the special figure win / fail determination result is a big hit in the electric support state, as shown in FIG. The fluctuation period is often a short period of 1 second. However, the probability of 500/65536 is 120 seconds and the probability of 35/65536 is 360 seconds. Therefore, even if the bonus is won without any change during the bonus, the special period may have a long period of 120 seconds or 360 seconds. It should be noted that the special figure may be changed for a long period only when a big win without a certain change is won during the bonus. Since the time is attached even in the non-probable change state, the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is easy to open, and it is easy to determine whether or not a special figure is appropriate. If the fluctuation period of the special figure is a short period (here 1 second), the determination result of the special figure is immediately notified, and for one opening of the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252, In many cases, the special figure variation game is performed only once. In other words, the number of times of opening the door member 2521 of the general electric accessory 252 is synchronized with the number of limiters of the probability change. However, if the fluctuation period of the special figure is long (120 seconds or 360 seconds in this case), the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is opened several times while the special figure fluctuation game is performed once. The payout can be earned by paying out based on the winning at the special chart starting port 230 (here, 7 balls / 1 winning).

  As shown in FIG. 132, when the fluctuation period of the special figure is short-term, the process returns to step S513, and “decided 11 times” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 133 (f). The On the other hand, when the fluctuation period of the special figure is long, information indicating the fluctuation period of the special figure included in the special symbol fluctuation start command sent from the main control unit 300 (here, long-term information) ), The first sub-control unit 400 can open the door member 2521 of the general electric accessory 252 several times during the period from the transition to the electric support state to the transition to the non-electric support state. The prediction calculation is performed. Here, the prediction calculation is performed based on the fact that the one opening period of the door member 2521 of the ordinary electric accessory 252 is 5.8 seconds. When the fluctuation period of the special figure is the first long period (120 seconds in this case), the number of times is uniformly larger than the specified number of times. For example, the door member 2521 of the ordinary electric accessory 252 is predicted to open 5 times in 120 seconds, and the remaining number of times (specific identification) is 16 times obtained by adding 5 times as the predicted number to 11 times as the specified number. It corresponds to an example of information). Further, when the variation period of the special figure is the second long period (360 seconds in this case) longer than the first long period, display with a predetermined symbol or the like (for example, ????) is performed uniformly. You may do it.

Here, the predicted number of times is the number of times that the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 can be opened before shifting to the non-electric support state. In many cases, the fluctuation period of the figure is a short period, and the special figure fluctuation game is often performed only once for one opening of the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252. The first sub-control unit 400 displays the predicted number of times as the number of remaining times on the decorative symbol display device 208 by regarding the number of times that the big change with probability variation can be obtained before the transition to the non-electric support state. (Step S520). As can be seen from this, in the pachinko machine 100, if the extra chance is not taken into account, one special figure variable game and one opening of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 are linked.
FIG. 134 is a diagram showing a modification of the extra chance shown in FIG. 133 (c).

  FIG. 134 (a) shows a decorative symbol display device 208 during a jackpot game in which the number of remaining jackpots with probability change before the transition to the non-electric support state is five. . In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 134 (a), a message such as “Addition of a big bonus when a big bonus chance is cupped” is displayed.

  FIG. 134 (c) shows a screen that is displayed when “Large Bonus Chance” is false, and displays “Sorry”. That is, the “big bonus chance” shown in FIG. 6A is a screen that is displayed when a big win without a certainty is won during the bonus, and the remaining number of times must be reset. However, in FIG. 5C, the remaining number does not change and “5 remaining” is still displayed.

  On the other hand, FIG. 134B shows a screen that is displayed when the “big bonus chance” is true, and displays “congratulations”.

  FIG. 134 (d) shows a screen displayed when the variation period of the special figure is the second long period (for example, 360 seconds). What is the remaining number of times? ? ? It has become times.

  FIG. 134 (e) is a screen that is displayed when the fluctuation period of the special figure is the first long period (for example, 120 seconds). It is 16 times including 5 times that is the predicted number.

  As described above, during a bonus in the special game state, when a long production period (a special figure fluctuation period) is reached, an unusual production is performed. In addition, when the jackpot symbol of the special figure is stopped and displayed in the electric support state, the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is often opened once per special figure variable game. 128 (a), the premiere A production is 12 times, and the premier B production is 36 times. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 described above, the variable prize opening 234 (attacker) is opened, but the number of game balls is increased by opening the door member 2521 of the ordinary electric accessory 252. The number of winning balls is 0 when winning at the normal start gates 251 and 253, 4 when winning at the variable winning opening 234 (Attacker), and 7 when winning at the general drawing electric 252 (special opening). It is good also as 10 balls at the time of winning a prize at the ball, the general winning opening 226. Satisfaction of the predetermined condition referred to in the present invention corresponds to the entry of a game ball into the winning opening and the start opening. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, a predetermined game value is obtained based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied. A game value giving means (game medium payout means (payout device 152) for paying out game media). Furthermore, a variable prize opening 234 (attacker) with a small number of prize balls is arranged downstream of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 (special drawing start port) with many prize balls. Although it is conceivable to reverse the positional relationship between the ordinary electric accessory 252 and the variable winning opening 234, in this case, the variable winning opening 234 having a small number of winning balls is won first. In the present embodiment, during the bonus in the special game state, the game ball leaked to the ball entering the ordinary electric game 252 can be won in the variable winning opening 234 (attacker), contributing to an increase in the number of winning balls. To do.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in the electric support state, the intervals for deriving the big hit with special figure probability change (specific first determination result) are different (intervals based on 1 second, 120 seconds, and 360 seconds, respectively). As a result, the interest of the game is improved. In addition, the game characteristics of the present embodiment are so-called limiter machines (there is an upper limit on the number of probability variation consecutive games), and the number of game balls is increased by a general electric accessory 252 (electric chew). In other words, since the time between jackpots of the special figure is different, the number of times of opening the electric chew during that time is different, so that it is possible to change the amount of game balls to be increased. This game characteristic is advantageous as the player fits. Moreover, by deriving the hit of the normal symbol with high probability and in a short time, the electric chew can be released frequently, and the electric chew contributes to the game characteristics of increasing the game ball. Further, in the electric support state, it is possible to provide a difference in the opening frequency of the electric chew by giving a change (1 second, 120 seconds, 360 seconds) to the fluctuation time of the special figure. In addition, the probability of deriving the special figure jackpot until reaching the limiter is made high, so that the opening frequency of the electric chew and the obtainable game ball based on the opening frequency can be changed by the fluctuation time of the special figure. it can. In addition, by resetting the limiter, it becomes possible to make the result of the special figure more interesting in the game characteristic in which the number of game balls is increased by using the general-purpose electric accessory 252 (electric chew). In addition, the long fluctuation time of the special figure itself is advantageous for the player in the special game state, but by enabling the long fluctuation time to be determined at the time of resetting the limiter, the special figure can be obtained even after the end of the fluctuation. It becomes possible to continue the special gaming state until the derivation for the prescribed number of times. That is, it is possible to simultaneously give two advantageous states for the player, that is, limiter reset and long-term fluctuation. Furthermore, the interest of the game in the special game state may be improved by notifying the current number of consecutive resorts and the remaining number of times until the limiter. In addition, when notification based on the number of times the electric chew is opened, it may be linked to the ball and the interest may be further improved. Furthermore, the long-term fluctuation of the special figure is equivalent to the one-time special figure for the limiter, and is equivalent to the short-term fluctuation. May increase. The game performance in this embodiment is a limiter machine, so at any timing, it is not guaranteed to give a special game state more than the number of limiters. It is possible to notify the player as if a special game state more than the number of limiters is given by using the fact that there are more times than the number of times (limiter subtraction). That is, it is possible to link the outgoing ball and the notification. Furthermore, by setting the notification content to the remaining number of times until the limiter, even if the notification exceeds the specified number of times, it is possible to link the balls, so the interest of the game may be improved.

  It should be noted that the special figure variation period may be long only when the bonus is won without change during the bonus. Alternatively, even in the case of losing, a long-term variation period of a special figure may be used. In this case, a large number of game balls can be obtained without the prescribed number of times of digestion (without subtraction of the limiter). Is possible.

  In addition, in the embodiment, the configuration of the game board 200 is such that the game ball is guided to both the ordinary electric game object 252 and the variable winning opening 234 when the player makes a right turn (during the special game state). However, it is not limited to this. For example, the variable winning opening 234 (attacker) may be arranged at a place where it is difficult to win a prize with the firing strength during the special gaming state. In this case, it is possible to make the attacker not open during the long fluctuation period (large bonus) of the special figure.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the big hit probability at the time of low special figure is 1/4 and the next big hit can be realized because the number of time reductions given after adding (after non-probable big hit) is 100 times. At the same time, it is possible to increase the number of game balls by releasing the general electric accessory 252 during the 3/4 special figure loss.

  Further, the determination of the long-term fluctuation period of the special figure may be made to completely correspond to the stop pattern of the special figure at 1: 1.

In addition, the interval for deriving the big hit with special figure probability change (specific first success / failure determination result) can be varied depending on the period during the big hit game as well as the fluctuation time (effect time) of the special figure. For example, the interval can be made different by changing the time of the start effect or end effect of the big hit game or the effect of the interval between rounds. Also, the interval can be made different by changing the special display stop display period.
Subsequently, characteristic points in the present invention will be described.

  In the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, even if a game ball passes (wins) through the ordinary drawing start gates 251 and 253, the winning ball is not paid out. This corresponds to a non-profit entry area that does not grant the player to the player. In addition, when the game ball passes through the usual figure start gates 251 and 253 (wins), the player is given the benefit of being able to receive a lottery for the usual figure variable game. On the other hand, when a game ball enters (wins), a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of award balls are paid out at the central general winning opening 226 disposed below the central general starting gate 251, and the right side When a game ball enters (wins), a special figure start port 230 that allows a game ball to enter when the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 disposed below the start gate 251 is opened is also a predetermined number. (For example, 7 balls) prize balls are paid out. Therefore, the central general winning opening 226 and the special figure starting opening 230 correspond to a profit grant entry area in which a profit of payout of a prize ball is given to a player when a game ball enters.

  In the present embodiment, a normal symbol variation start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the normal symbol variation start command outputs a control command instructing the second sub-control unit 400 to cause the decorative symbol display device 208 to execute the normal symbol variation effect. The second sub-control unit 500 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the control command, and a predetermined effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as a general symbol variation effect. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the normal symbol variation start command instructs the sound source IC 416 shown in FIG. 120 to output a predetermined sound as a normal symbol variation effect, and the speaker 120 outputs a predetermined sound output. Done. Here, the display of the predetermined effect image executed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the predetermined sound output executed by the speaker 120 correspond to an example of the predetermined effect according to the present invention.

  Further, when a game ball enters the central general winning opening 226 or the special figure starting opening 230, as described above, the main control unit 300 sets winning reception information in the winning receiving process, and the winning reception information is the first sub-control. Transmitted to unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the winning acceptance information outputs a control command instructing the second sub-control unit 400 to cause the decorative symbol display device 208 to perform a prize ball payout appearance, and the second sub-control unit 500 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the control command, and a specific effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as a prize ball payout appearance. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the winning acceptance information instructs the sound source IC 416 shown in FIG. 120 to output a specific sound as a prize ball payout appearance, and the speaker 120 outputs a specific sound. Here, the display of the specific effect image executed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the specific sound output executed by the speaker 120 correspond to an example of the specific effect according to the present invention.

  FIG. 135 is a time chart of a regular symbol variation effect and a prize ball payout appearance. In FIG. 135, time elapses from the left to the right in the figure, and the same applies to the subsequent time charts.

  When the ball detection sensor provided in the non-profit entry area which is the normal start gates 251 and 253 detects the entry of the game ball to the normal start gates 251 and 253, the detection signal is not detected. Changes to detection, and at the timing of (a) shown in the drawing, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the speaker 120 start a normal symbol variation effect (non-profit entry area entry effect).

  When a game ball that has passed through the central normal start gate 251 enters the central general prize opening 226, a ball detection sensor provided in the central general prize opening 226 detects the entry of the game ball and the detection signal is not detected. From the detection to the detection, at the timing of (a) shown in the figure, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the speaker 120 start a prize ball payout appearance (profit grant entry area entry effect), and (c) shown in the figure At the timing, the award-paying performance will end. On the other hand, the regular symbol variation effect started at the timing of (a) shown in the drawing continues even after the appearance of the prize ball payout finishes. That is, the execution period of the regular symbol variation effect is longer than the execution period of the prize ball payout appearance, and the execution period of the prize ball payout appearance is included in the execution period of the regular symbol variation effect.

In addition, if the number of holdings of the usual figure when the game ball passes through the usual figure starting gates 251 and 253 is less than a predetermined number (for example, 4), the main control unit 300 sends the first sub control unit 400 the usual figure. Send a pending increase command. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the universal figure hold increase command outputs a control command that instructs the second sub-control unit 400 to cause the decorative symbol display device 208 to execute the general figure hold increase effect. Also good. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the universal hold increase command may instruct the sound source IC 416 shown in FIG. 120 to output a predetermined sound as a general hold increase effect. By doing so, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as a general figure holding increase effect, and a predetermined sound output is performed on the speaker 120, and the display of these predetermined effect images is performed. Alternatively, the predetermined sound output may be a predetermined effect according to the present invention.
FIG. 136 is a diagram showing a specific example of the regular symbol variation effect and the prize ball payout appearance.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 136 (a), a combination of stop symbols of ordinary decorative symbols is displayed. In other words, this is a state in which the usual game is stopped. In this state, when the game ball passes through the central general diagram starting gate 251 (corresponding to the timing (A) shown in FIG. 135), the symbol variation display is started on the general diagram display device 210, and FIG. ), The decorative symbol display device 208 starts the usual decorative symbol variation display (corresponding to an example of a predetermined effect image). In addition, from the loudspeaker 120 (not shown), a normal variation sound indicating that the symbol variation display is performed on the universal symbol display device 210 is output. The decorative symbol change display and the normal change sound output correspond to an example of the normal symbol change effect. Further, the central universal start gate 251 corresponds to an example of a first entry area.

  Subsequently, when a game ball enters the central general winning award 226 (corresponding to the timing of (A) shown in FIG. 135), as shown in FIG. In the center of the display screen of the symbol display device 208, a scary-faced panda character image 2081 (corresponding to an example of another image) uttering “Jara-Jara” is displayed in large size. That is, a panda character image 2081 with a scary face is displayed so as to cover the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a prize ball payout sound “Jarajara” imitating the payout sound is output from the speaker 120. Is done. The display of the scary-faced panda character image 2081 and the prize ball payout sound output “Jara Jara” correspond to an example of the prize ball payout appearance.

  In this specific example, a scary-faced panda character image 2081 covers a part of the decorative symbol variation display image, and a part of the decorative symbol variation display image (here, the middle symbol display area 208b) cannot be seen. ing. Also, a prize ball payout sound starts to sound from the middle of the usual figure fluctuation sound, and the usual figure fluctuation sound is heard by covering the usual figure fluctuation sound. In this way, the usual symbol variation effect changes depending on the appearance of the prize ball. As a result, the player is likely to notice that the prize ball payout appearance is given priority and the player is paying out the prize ball. In other words, since the player does not notice the generation of the winning ball, there are cases where the player can be made to think that the player has a better pedestal than the player who does not notice it. In addition, since the effect in which the player concentrates is changed, it becomes easier for the player to notice the occurrence of the prize ball. Furthermore, since the game ball that has passed through the central common figure starting gate 251 wins the central general winning opening 226, it is possible to enjoy the effect that the normal symbol variation effect and the normal symbol variation effect have changed with the same game ball. In some cases, the player can enjoy many effects with a small investment and improve the impression of the game table.

  FIG. 137 is a diagram showing a specific example of a general figure hold increase effect and a prize ball payout appearance in a state where a normal symbol variation effect is being performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (a), a symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as the symbol variation display) is performed in the universal symbol display device 210. The decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Further, from the loudspeaker 120 (not shown), a normal diagram fluctuation sound indicating that the symbol variation display is being performed in the general diagram display device 210 is output. That is, the regular symbol variation effect in the symbol variation display is performed.

  In this example, in the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a universal figure hold display corresponding to a set of start information stored in the universal figure hold storage unit of the RAM 308 is displayed in the universal figure hold storage unit. Are displayed side by side from the left in order from the oldest in the order in which the start information is stored (in order of winning). The general map hold display is a display indicating that the start information is stored or stored in the first start information storage means (the general map hold storage section of the RAM 308). In other words, a general map hold display is performed for each normal start information stored in the first start information storage means, and the number of the general map hold display corresponds to the general hold number. The decorative symbol display device 208 corresponds to an example of a first start hold display unit. Each time the first sub-control unit 400 receives a general-purpose hold increase command, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a hold-increase instruction for the general-purpose figure to the second sub-control unit 500, and the second sub-control unit 500 is based on the instruction. Then, the decorative symbol display device 208 is controlled to increase the number of the universal figure hold display by one. On the other hand, each time the first sub-control unit 400 receives a universal symbol variation start command that is a signal for the usual-time reservation, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a universal symbol hold decrease signal to the second sub-control unit 500, and the second sub-control The unit 500 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 on the basis of the ordinary figure reservation decrease signal, and decreases the number of ordinary figure reservation displays by one. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Hereinafter, the general map hold display representing the old general map hold (hereinafter referred to as the general map hold 1) is referred to as the first general map hold display 291 and the new general map hold (hereinafter referred to as the general map hold 2). The general map hold display representing) is referred to as a second general map hold display 292. Here, the usual number of holds is two.

  If the game ball passes through the central common figure start gate 251 while the symbol variation display is being performed, the symbol variation display is being performed here, and the number of holds of the regular symbol is also a predetermined number. Since it is less than 2, the starting information based on the current game ball passing through the central normal figure starting gate 251 is stored in the normal figure holding storage unit of the RAM 308, and the number of holding of the normal figure increases. A third common figure hold display 293 is additionally displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (b). The third general map hold display 293 displayed here continues to be displayed until the general map hold 3 represented by the third general map hold display 293 is consumed. Further, at the same time as the third general map hold display 293 is additionally displayed, a general map hold increasing sound for notifying that the general hold has increased is output from the speaker 120 for a predetermined period. This general figure hold increase sound stops before the symbol variation display ends. The additional display of the third general map hold display 293 and the output of the general map hold increase sound correspond to an example of the general map hold increase effect.

  Subsequently, when a game ball enters the central general winning award 226, as in FIG. 136 (c), the voice “Jara Jara” is displayed in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 on which the decorative symbol variation display is performed. A panda character image 2081 with a scary face that emits a large amount is displayed, and a prize ball payout sound “Jara Jara” that imitates the payout sound is output from the speaker 120 (see FIG. 137 (c)). A scary face portion 2081a of the panda displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and a balloon portion 2081b "Jara Jara" is displayed in the effect display area 208d. Also in the example shown in FIG. 137, the display of the scary face panda character image 2081 and the output of the winning ball paying sound “Jara Jara” correspond to an example of the winning ball paying appearance.

  In this specific example, a scary face portion 2081a of the panda covers a part of the decorative symbol variation display image, and a part of the decorative symbol variation display image (in this case, the middle symbol display area 208b) is not visible. . In addition, a balloon portion 2081b called “Jarajara” covers most of the first general map hold display to the third general map hold display 291 to 293 displayed in the effect display area 208d. 293 is not visible. Also, from the middle of the general fluctuation sound indicating that the symbol fluctuation display is being performed, first, a general figure hold increasing sound that informs that the retention of the general figure has increased starts to sound. I hear overtones. Next, a prize ball payout sound also starts to sound, and a prize ball payout sound is heard over the usual figure fluctuation sound and the usual figure holding increase sound. In this way, the general symbol variation effect changes with the appearance of the prize ball payout, and the general symbol hold increase effect also changes with the appearance of the prize ball payment. As a result, it is possible to inform players who are concentrating on the production that the prize ball has been generated due to the effect of the production change, that is, the appearance of the prize ball payout, and improve the impression of the game stand There are cases where it is possible. That is, by covering a part of the effect image that has been performed so far with the effect image due to the appearance of the prize ball, it is possible to visually report that the prize ball has been generated, and to improve the impression of the game stand There are cases where it is possible. In addition, when the production sound from the speaker 120 is applied, it can be heard audibly that a prize ball has been generated.

In the above description, the prize ball paying appearance is covered with the usual symbol variation effect and / or the usual figure hold increase effect, but the ordinary symbol variation effect and / or the usual figure hold increase effect is included in the prize ball pay appearance. It may be an aspect that changes.
FIG. 138 is a time chart in which the normal symbol variation effect changes to a prize ball payout appearance.

  Also in the time chart shown in FIG. 138, when the ball detection sensor provided in the non-profit entry area which is the normal start gates 251 and 253 detects the entry of the game ball to the normal start gates 251 and 253, The detection signal changes from non-detection to detection, and at the timing of (a) shown in the figure, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the speaker 120 start a normal symbol variation effect (profit non-given entry region entry effect). The

  When a game ball that has passed through the central normal start gate 251 enters the central general prize opening 226, a ball detection sensor provided in the central general prize opening 226 detects the entry of the game ball and the detection signal is not detected. In the decorative symbol display device 208 and the speaker 120, which has changed from detection to detection and performed the normal symbol variation effect at the timing of (a) shown in the figure, the normal symbol variation effect is ended, and a prize is given instead. Start ball paying appearance (profit grant entry area entry effect). Eventually, at the timing of (c) shown in the figure, the appearance of the prize ball payout ends.

  FIG. 139 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of changing from a regular symbol variation effect to a prize ball payout appearance.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 139 (a), a combination of stop symbols of ordinary decorative symbols is displayed. In other words, this is a state in which the usual game is stopped. In this state, when the game ball passes through the central general map starting gate 251 (corresponding to the timing of (a) shown in FIG. 138), as shown in FIG. Is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of decorative symbols. In the variation display of the decorative symbols on the decorative symbol display device 208, the background screen is blank. In addition, the speaker 120 (not shown) outputs the first common figure fluctuation sound indicating that the symbol fluctuation display is performed on the common figure display device 210. The decorative symbol variation display and the first ordinary diagram variation sound output correspond to an example of a typical symbol variation effect.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 139 (c), the symbol “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. The display mode of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed here is the default display mode shown in FIG. 122 (b). On the other hand, in the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is continued. In addition, the output of the 1st usual figure fluctuation sound is continuing from the speaker 120. FIG.

  Subsequently, when a game ball enters the central general winning award 226 (corresponding to the timing of (A) shown in FIG. 138), the decoration on which the decorative symbols are displayed as shown in FIG. 139 (d). The background screen of the symbol display device 208 changes from a non-patterned background screen to a predetermined background screen (here, a cross-hatched pattern background screen), and the decorative symbol (“decoration 6” of the left symbol display area 208a stopped and displayed earlier. The display mode of “)” also changes from the default display mode to a predetermined display mode (here, a black-colored display mode). Also, the display mode of the image indicating that the decorative symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, which is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, is also a predetermined display mode (here, a horizontal striped pattern display mode). ). Also, the normal fluctuation sound output from the speaker 120 is switched from the first normal fluctuation sound output so far to the second normal fluctuation sound. This display of the predetermined background screen and display of the predetermined design of the decorative pattern and the output of the second ordinary figure fluctuation sound are equivalent to an example of the appearance of the prize ball payout, and the effect is changed from the usual figure change effect to the prize ball payout appearance. Has changed. Note that this effect change can be regarded as a change in the usual symbol variation effect itself. In any case, based on the fact that a game ball has entered the central general winning award 226, an effect in which the normal symbol variation effect is changed is performed. Note that the decorative symbol that has changed to the predetermined display mode remains changed to the predetermined display mode until the symbol variation display on the universal symbol display device 210 ends, and the timing at which the symbol variation display ends, that is, the stop symbol is changed. At the timing of display, the display returns to the default display mode or further changes to another display mode. Also, the normal pattern fluctuation sound that has changed to the second general pattern fluctuation sound remains changed to the second general pattern fluctuation sound until the symbol fluctuation display on the general diagram display device 210 ends, and the symbol fluctuation display is When finished, the usual fluctuation sound itself stops ringing.

  As described above, a change in the regular symbol variation effect itself occurs due to the establishment of a prize ball payout condition (predetermined condition) such as winning a prize at the central general prize opening 226, and a game in which a prize ball is paid out. It may be easier for the person to notice, and the ball holding may be better, which may improve the impression of the game stand.

  FIG. 140 is a diagram illustrating a specific example in which the general figure hold increase effect changes in a state where the general symbol variation effect is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 140 (a), the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as the symbol variation display) is performed in the universal symbol display device 210. The decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Further, from the loudspeaker 120 (not shown), a normal diagram fluctuation sound indicating that the symbol variation display is being performed in the general diagram display device 210 is output. That is, also in the specific example shown in FIG. 140, the regular symbol variation effect in the symbol variation display is performed. Furthermore, in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 140 (a), a first general map hold display 291 representing the general map hold 1 and a second general map hold display 292 representing the general map hold 2 are displayed. Is displayed.

  If the game ball passes through the central common figure starting gate 251 while the symbol variation display is being performed, the number of holdings of the common figure increases here, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. A third common map hold display 293 is additionally displayed in the effect display area 208d. In FIG. 140 (b), three general map hold displays, a first general map hold display 291 to a third general map hold display 293, are displayed, and any of the hold displays is a default display mode. In addition, it is displayed in a black display mode. Further, at the same time as the third general map hold display 293 is additionally displayed, the speaker 120 outputs a first general map hold increase sound for notifying that the general hold has increased for a predetermined period. The additional display of the third general map hold display 293 and the output of the first general map hold increase sound correspond to an example of the general map hold increase effect.

  Subsequently, when a game ball enters the central general winning opening 226, the display mode of the third general map hold display 293, which is the default display mode, changes to a predetermined display mode as shown in FIG. . That is, among the three general map hold displays 291 to 293 displayed in the default display mode, the display mode of only the third general map hold display 293 increased this time is a predetermined display mode (here, a horizontal stripe pattern). Change. In addition, the normal figure hold increase sound output from the speaker 120 is switched from the first normal figure hold increase sound output so far to the second general figure hold increase sound. The display according to the predetermined display mode in the third general figure hold display 293 and the output of the second general figure hold increase sound correspond to an example of the prize ball payout appearance, and the normal figure hold increase effect is changed to the prize ball payout appearance. The direction has changed. This effect change can be regarded as a change in the usual figure hold increase effect itself. In any case, based on the fact that a game ball has entered the central general winning award 226, an effect is produced in which the usual figure holding increase effect is changed. It should be noted that the third universal map hold display 293 changed to the predetermined display mode is digested with the hold of the third universal map hold even if the display changes to the predetermined display mode until the symbol variation display ends. The display 293 itself may remain changed to a predetermined display mode until it disappears. Further, the general figure hold increase sound that has changed to the second general figure hold increase sound continues to sound while changing to the second general figure hold increase sound, and stops ringing before the symbol variation display ends.

  As described above, due to the establishment of a prize ball payout condition (predetermined condition) such as winning a prize at the central general prize opening 226, here, a change occurs in the usual figure holding increase effect itself, and the prize ball is paid out. In particular, the player is likely to notice, the ball holding is considered good, and the impression of the game table may be improved.

  Next, in the specific example shown in FIG. 140, the third universal map hold display 293 that has changed to the predetermined display mode has been changed to the predetermined display mode at least until the symbol variation display ends. An example of returning to the default display mode before the symbol variation display ends will be described.

  FIG. 141 is a diagram illustrating an example of returning to the ordinary figure holding increase effect after the effect changes from the usual figure holding increase effect to the prize ball paying appearance.

  In the time chart shown in FIG. 141 (a), the usual figure retention increase effect (profit non-giving approach area entry effect) is started at the timing shown in FIG. The figure hold increase effect is temporarily changed to a prize ball payout appearance (profit grant entry area entry effect). Then, after a prize ball payout appearance is made for a predetermined period, at a timing shown in FIG.

  141 (b) is a diagram showing, by layer, images displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing (a) shown in FIG. 141 (a). The image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing (a) shown in FIG. 141 (a) includes a background image, an image indicating that the decorative symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and three hold-display images. Become. Among these three hold display images, both the first map hold display 291 image and the second map hold display 292 image are images according to the default display mode, that is, a patternless black image. . On the other hand, the image of the third general map hold display 293 has changed to an image with black horizontal stripes on a white background due to the appearance of a prize ball.

  The background image is drawn on the first layer L1 displayed on the farthest side as viewed from the player, and the image indicating that the decorative design is variably displayed is the second layer one before the first layer L1. Draw at L2.

  The three images 291 to 293 displayed on hold in the usual map are drawn on the third layer L3 that is one before the second layer L2. All of the three ordinary-pending display images drawn on the third layer L3 are a patternless and black image (black circle image) 290b. The fourth layer L4, which is one level before the third layer L3, has a black horizontal stripe on a white background at a position overlapping the black circle image of the third map hold display 293 drawn on the third layer L3. An image 290w is displayed. Here, the fourth layer L4 is a layer displayed on the most front side when viewed from the player. The image of the third general map hold display 293 is obtained by overlapping a black circle image 290b drawn on the third layer L3 with an image 290w with black horizontal stripes drawn on the white layer drawn on the fourth layer L4, and a black circle image 290b. Cannot be seen, and an image 290w with black horizontal stripes on the white background drawn on the fourth layer L4 can be seen.

  141 (b) is a diagram showing, by layer, images displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing (c) shown in FIG. 141 (a). The image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing (b) shown in FIG. 141 (b) is also a background image, an image indicating that the decorative symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and three hold-display images. Become. All of the three pending display images here are images (black circle images) in the default display mode. That is, the image of the third general map hold display 293 that has been changed due to the appearance of the prize ball payout is changed to the image (black circle image) in the default display mode by returning to the normal figure hold increase effect. In the drawing process of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing (c) shown in FIG. 141 (a), the first layer L1 to the third layer L3 in the drawing process of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing (b) are used as they are. Only the fourth layer L4 need not be drawn. By doing so, the image 290w with black horizontal stripes on a white background is not displayed, and the image of the third general map hold display 293 also returns to the black circle image, that is, the default display mode. In this aspect, it is possible to reduce the additional processing of drawing.

  Subsequently, in the specific examples so far, the prize ball payout appearance has been started at the timing when the game ball has passed the central general winning opening 226, but an example in which the prize ball payout appearance starts a little later will be described. .

  FIG. 142 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the appearance of a prize ball payout is started with a slight delay from the timing when the game ball passes through the central general winning opening 226.

  In the time chart shown in FIG. 142 (a), the usual figure holding increase effect (profit non-given entry area entry effect) is started at the timing shown in FIG. 142 (a), and the game is shown at the timing shown in FIG. 142 (a). Although it is detected that the ball has passed through the central general winning opening 226, at this timing, the usual figure holding increase effect does not change to the prize ball payout appearance (profit grant entry area entry effect), or the elapse of a predetermined period, or Based on a predetermined opportunity that occurs thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. The predetermined opportunity here may specifically be that a predetermined effect (for example, super reach, etc.) is executed as a regular symbol variation effect. Then, after a prize ball payout appearance is made for a certain period of time, at the timing shown in FIG.

  142 (b) is a diagram showing, by layer, images displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing (c) shown in FIG. 142 (a). The image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing (c) shown in FIG. 142 (a) includes a background image, an image indicating that the decorative symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and three hold-display images. Become. Of these three hold display images, the first map hold display 291 image and the second map hold display 292 image are both images according to the default display mode, that is, a patternless black image (black circle). Image). On the other hand, the image of the third general map hold display 293 is changed from a black circle image to an image in which a white horizontal stripe is added to a black circle due to the appearance of a prize ball.

  Also in this example, the background image is drawn on the first layer L1, and the image indicating that the decorative design is being variably displayed is drawn on the second layer L2.

  In addition, three images 291 to 293 displayed on the hold map are drawn on the third layer L3. Here again, all of the three general-purpose reserved display images drawn on the third layer L3 are a patternless and black image (black circle image) 290b. In the fourth layer L4, an image 290s with only white horizontal stripes is displayed at a position overlapping the black circle image of the third general map hold display 293 drawn on the third layer L3. In the image of the third common map hold display 293, the black circle image 290b drawn on the third layer L3 overlaps the image 290s of only the white horizontal stripe drawn on the fourth layer L4, and the white horizontal stripe is added to the black circle. Looks like an image. That is, a part of the black circle image 290b is covered with the image 290s of only white horizontal stripes, but the remaining part of the black circle image 290b is visible, and the black circle image 290b drawn on the third layer L3 The image 290s with only white horizontal stripes drawn on the fourth layer L4 is a single image.

  142 (b) is a diagram showing, by layer, images displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing (d) shown in FIG. 142 (a). The three on-hold display images here are also images (black circle images) in the default display mode. That is, the image of the third general map hold display 293 that has been changed due to the appearance of the prize ball payout is changed to the image (black circle image) in the default display mode by returning to the normal figure hold increase effect. In the drawing process of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing (d) shown in FIG. 142 (a), the first layer L1 to the third layer L3 in the drawing process of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing (c) are used as they are. Only the fourth layer L4 need not be drawn. By rubbing, the image 290s with only white horizontal stripes is not displayed, and the image of the third general map hold display 293 also returns to the black circle image 290b, that is, the default display mode. Also in this mode, it is possible to reduce the additional processing of drawing.

  In addition, in a state where a prize ball payout appearance is performed, for example, a state in which a scary-faced panda character image 2081 uttered “Jarajara” as shown in FIG. 136 (c) is displayed. When a game ball enters (wins a prize) in the central common figure starting gate 251 and wins a win in the usual figure determination based on the prize, a predetermined effect (for example, an effect instructing to make a right hand) Is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a predetermined effect is cast on the balloon portion 2081b "Jarajara" which is a part of the appearance of the prize ball payout appearance, and the prize ball payout appearance changes.

  Further, even when the effect of instructing to make a right hand is not performed, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the general symbol variation effect and stops displaying the decorative symbol indicating the result of determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct. In some cases, the player can recognize that the door member 2521 of the ordinary electric accessory 252 is opened.

  In the above description, the game ball has entered the central general start gate 251 and the lower central general winning opening 226 as an example, but the right general start gate 251 and the lower right general start gate 251 are arranged below it. The same applies to the special drawing starting port 230 that allows the game ball to enter when the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is opened. The same applies not only to the central general winning opening 226 below the central ordinary starting gate 251 but also to other general winning openings 226 and entry areas where prize balls are paid out.

  Further, in the above description, the production sound (for example, a prize ball payout sound) is output using the speaker 120, but the game ball paid out from the payout device 152 is output to the upper plate 126 or the upper plate 126. A collision sound generated by colliding with a stored game ball may be used as a production sound (for example, a prize ball payout sound). By doing so, since the collision sound is directed to the player from a direction different from that of the speaker 120, the player may be able to recognize the occurrence of profit more.

Then, the pachinko machine of 2nd Embodiment of this invention is demonstrated. In the following description, matters that overlap with the items described so far will be described again. In addition, components having the same names as those of the components described so far are described using the same reference numerals as those used so far.
FIG. 143 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 according to the second embodiment as viewed from the front.

  In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the ordinary device. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLumin S3ence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be employed.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and in the present embodiment, are constituted by 7 segment LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 in an enhanced form. The display device 208 may also be a predetermined symbol display means.

  The universal figure hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of predetermined first variable games (detailed universal figure variable games to be described later) that are held, and in this embodiment, a predetermined number of common figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four).

  The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of predetermined second variable games (a special figure variable game to be described later in detail) that are being held. In the embodiment, it is possible to hold a special figure variable game up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight for the first special figure and the second special figure). The term “hold” as used herein means that the start of various determination processes (such as lottery processes) based on start-up information described later is put on hold.

  The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for performing notification indicating the current symbol control state. This high-probability lamp 222 is configured so as to give a notification indicating the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on until the start of the big hit game, and thereafter does not notify the current symbol control state. Yes. In the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is turned off is restored. This symbol control state will be described later, but the symbol control state here may be any one of a normal state, a short-time state (electric support state), and a probability variation state. It is good also as one state in the state without special figure certain change.

  In the present specification, the term “control state” will be used to describe the state inside the gaming table (pachinko machine 100). The term “control state” includes the concept of a so-called gaming state.

  In addition, a general prize opening 226, a general figure starting opening 228, a first special figure starting opening 230, a second special figure starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are provided around the effect device 206. ing.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). 118), the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 118 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls is discharged as a winning ball onto the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player may be referred to as a “lending ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region where the size of the entrance through which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. At the same time, the special figure changing game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of the first special diagram starting port 230 does not change.

  In the present embodiment, only one second special figure start port 232 is disposed below the general view start port 228. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200. In the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid are provided. A combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure starting port 232 is provided. It corresponds to a variable starting means and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize to the second special figure starting port 232. That is, when the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an open / close mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure change game is won and the universal figure display device 210 stops and displays the symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 are opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the second special figure starting port 232 is opened. The ball can be entered (easy winning state), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are open is an easy winning state. In other words, the second special figure starting port 232 has either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size) of the entrance (game ball entrance). A variable starting area in which the ease of entering a game ball, which changes from one size to the other, is equivalent to an example of a second starting area. The size of the large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are opened, out of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is the variable start area is more than the game ball that has entered the first special figure start opening 230 that is the fixed start area. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232 in the figure. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special diagram starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  In the present embodiment, only one variable winning port 234 is disposed below the center of the game board 200. The variable prize opening 234 includes a variable prize opening and a door member 2341 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid. The variable winning opening may be referred to as a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be referred to as an attacker. The door member 2341 changes its state from any one of a predetermined closed state and an open state in which a game ball can easily enter the variable winning opening more than the closed state. Both the closed state and the open state are stationary states, and the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state. The closed state at the variable winning opening 234 of this embodiment is that the door member 2341 is on the player side of the game board 200. It is in a stationary state that matches the surface. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and the open state in the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment is rotated to the player side until the door member 2341 is substantially perpendicular to the game board 200. It is stationary. The variable winning opening 234 is kept closed until the big hit game is started, and when the big hit of the special figure is won and the big hit game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. The variable winning award 234 corresponds to an example of a winning device according to the present invention, and winning the special figure jackpot corresponds to an example of satisfying the second condition according to the present invention. Note that the closed state may be a state where the game ball is slightly opened to the extent that it is substantially impossible to enter, in addition to a completely closed state. Further, the variable winning opening may be any as long as the game ball can be won by passing or entering the game ball, and is not limited to the one shown in FIG. When the special figure variable game is won and the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable prize opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out-port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any winning opening or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the amusement island side.

The sphere accommodated in the upper plate 126 is supplied to the firing position of the firing rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the player's ball launch handle 134, and the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 146 and launcher 148 into the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc. (Outside the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.
<Directing device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball naild by the game nail 238, etc., and the passed ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate the ball.

  In this embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b imitating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b at a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

  The decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122, the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect movable body 224, and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 143 correspond to effect means. Among these, the decorative symbol display device 208 is an image display means. It corresponds to an example.

In addition, about the circuit structure of the control part of the pachinko machine 100 in 2nd Embodiment, since it is fundamentally the same as the circuit structure of the control part of the pachinko machine of 1st Embodiment, description is abbreviate | omitted.
<Type of design>

  Next, using FIGS. 144A to 144D, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described.

  FIG. 144 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol mode (second symbol mode) of the special figure. The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the second special figure start port 232 has a ball. The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor which is a ball detection sensor detects that the ball has entered. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 1” (special figure). (Floating game). When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 2” ( (Special map variable game). Then, when the variation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 When elapses, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special symbol 2. Hereinafter, a series of displays from the start of the “variable display of the special figure 1 or 2” to the stop display of the special symbol form of the special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as a special figure fluctuation stop display. This special figure variable stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 144 (a), six types of special drawings from “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure F” are shown as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation display. In FIG. 144 (a), the white portions in the drawing indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  In the present embodiment, four types of jackpot symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure D") are prepared as the stop pattern form of the special figure. “Special figure A” is a 15 round (R) special jackpot symbol, and when special figure A is stopped and displayed, the control state thereafter becomes a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. “Special figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol with electric support, and when special figure B is stopped and displayed, the control state thereafter becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. “Special figure C” is a 4R jackpot symbol with probability variation, and when this special figure C is stopped and displayed, the control state thereafter becomes a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. "Special figure D" is a 4R big hit symbol, and when this special figure D is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state.

  The round here means the number of chances that a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) can be obtained. In the present embodiment, the number of operations of the variable prize opening 234 shown in FIG. 143 is represented. The 15th round is defined as one or more opening / closing operations of the variable prize opening 234 (one operation). This means that this operation continues 15 times. That is, one operation corresponds to an example of a specific change in which the open / close state changes from the first open / close state (here, the closed state) to the second open / close state (here, the open state). During the big hit game, the specific change is performed a plurality of constant times (15 times in the case of 15 rounds). Each round has a predetermined round end condition (for example, the entry of a game ball of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls), acquisition of a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls), elapse of a predetermined time from the start of the round, etc. 1 or more) is completed. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, the determination as to whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the decision as to whether or not a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The big hit with special figure A and the special figure big hit with special figure C have a high probability of winning a big hit in the next special figure variation game (special big hit or short-time big hit). Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In this embodiment, during the big hit game, the special figure low probability state is entered, and when the special figure A or special figure C is won, the special figure high probability state is maintained until the next big hit after the big hit game ends. Is done. On the other hand, when the special figure B or the special figure D is won, the special figure remains in a low probability state even after the big hit game ends. The special figure low probability state corresponds to an example of a first probability control state. In addition, a special figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends may be referred to as a special figure probability change, and a state where the probability of winning a big jackpot after the jackpot game ends (a special figure high probability state) is a player. Is an example of a second stochastic control state. This special figure high probability state may be referred to as a probability variation state. In the present specification, the term “control state” will be used to describe the state inside the gaming table (pachinko machine 100). The term “control state” includes the concept of a so-called gaming state. The transition of the probability control state is performed by the main control unit 300, and the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a probability control state transition unit.

  In addition, when the special figure A or the special figure B is won, after the big hit game is over, the state shifts to a state with electric support (electric support) (hereinafter referred to as an electric support state). The electric support state is a predetermined state in which the player's advantage is higher than the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. Say. This power support state is one of the control states prepared in the pachinko machine 100, and is sometimes referred to as a time-short state. That is, the electric support state (time-short state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the “electric support state” is a state related to a general plan, and the “short-time state” is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a general figure and a special figure. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is also provided with a time reduction flag. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, it is in the electric support state and is usually in a high probability state. In the normal figure high probability state, compared to the normal figure low probability state, it becomes easier to win the common figure variable game (general figure certain change). For example, the winning probability of the usual figure floating game is 1/101 in the usual figure low probability state (non-electric support state), but increases to 99/101 in the usual figure high probability state (electric support state). In addition, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the general figure change game is shorter than that in the non-electric support state (the general figure change short). For example, in the non-electric support state, the fluctuation time of the usual game of 10 seconds is reduced to 1.2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, compared to the non-electric support state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 tends to be long (electric chew releasing period extension). For example, in the non-electric support state, the electric chew release period of 0.3 seconds is extended to 1.7 seconds in the electric support state. Furthermore, the pair of blade members 2321 are more likely to open in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (increase the number of times the electric chew is released). For example, a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened only once in the non-electric support state per opening to the normal start port 228 is opened three times in the electric support state (for example, 3 to open for 1.7 seconds) Repeatedly, the closing time between opening is 1.6 seconds). The probability of entering the second special figure starting port 232 increases due to the extension of the electric chew release period and the increase in the number of electric chow releases. Note that the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the power is supported during the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are placed in the second special figure starting port 232 until the predetermined number of game balls are entered during the big hit game. In order to solve this, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be entered during a big hit and the number of game balls that can be acquired increases, resulting in an increase in gambling. In the present embodiment, in the electric support state (short-time state), all of the normal figure change, the universal figure change, the electric chew release period extension, and the electric chew release frequency increase are performed. If any one is performed, a player's advantage will be in a high state and it may be in an electric support state (short time state). Alternatively, if either one of the extension of the electric chew release period or the increase in the number of electric chew release is performed, the electric support state (short-time state) may be set. . In the non-electric support state, the game ball is less likely to enter the second special figure starting port 232 than in the electric support state. As described above, in the second special figure starting port 232, the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters changes from one of the small size and the large size to the other size. The entrance of the second special figure starting port 232 is larger in the electric support state over a longer period than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when the special figure A is stopped and displayed, the electric support state (ordinary figure high probability state) is maintained until the next big hit game is started after the subsequent big hit game is completed, and the special figure B is displayed. Is displayed, the power support state is maintained while the special figure variation game is performed 100 times after the big hit game that is subsequently performed, and the non-electric support state (ordinary figure low probability state) is maintained at the 101st time. Transition. On the other hand, when a big hit without special support (special drawing C, special drawing D) is won, it does not shift to the electric support state after the big hit game ends. In the non-electric support state, the entrance of the second special figure starting port 232 is kept small. On the other hand, as described above, in the electric support state, the entrance of the second special figure starting port 232 is large, and the entry rate of game balls is increased. That is, in the non-electric support state, the game ball enters the second special figure start port 232 that is the variable start area at the first approach rate, whereas in the electric support state, the game ball starts the second special figure start. It enters the mouth 232 at a second approach rate that is higher than the first approach rate. Therefore, the non-electric support state corresponds to an example of the first approach rate control state, and the electric support state corresponds to an example of the second approach rate control state.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the stop symbol of special figure E is prepared as a small hit symbol in addition to the big hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for a maximum of 1.5 seconds per operation. In opening the door member 2341 at the small hit, for example, when a game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (a predetermined number of balls) is acquired. As a result, the second and subsequent releases are not performed. During the small hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit is a role in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and after the small hit game is finished, the control state returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game. In addition, you may prepare the small hit symbol (for example, 2nd small hit symbol etc.) other than "special EI".

  In the big hit game and the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 is opened or closed one or more times, and the player's advantage is relatively high.

  Moreover, the special figure F shown to Fig.144 (a) is a loss symbol. When the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 is not opened and closed, and the player's advantage is relatively low. It should be noted that a missing symbol (for example, a second lost symbol, etc.) other than “Special Illustration F” may be further prepared.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the hit control state (the big hit control state and the small hit control state) of the second advantage that the player's advantage is high is higher than the second advantage. A loss control state having a first advantage with a low advantage is prepared, and the pachinko machine 100 is in one of a hit control state (second control state) and a loss control state (first control state). Take control state. The transition of these control states is also performed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a special game state providing unit. In the small hit control state, although the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 opens and closes, it is almost impossible to expect a ball to enter the variable prize opening 234. It can also be regarded as a control state (first control state).

  In addition, the jackpot includes a jackpot that is relatively advantageous to the player and a jackpot that is relatively disadvantageous. In terms of the number of rounds, the 15R series jackpot (Special Figure A, Special Figure B) corresponds to an advantageous jackpot, and the 4R series jackpot (Special Figure C, Special Figure D) corresponds to an unfavorable jackpot. Further, in terms of whether or not there is a probability variation, the big hit by special figure A and the big hit by special figure C correspond to advantageous big hits, and the big hit by special figure B and big hits by special figure D correspond to disadvantageous big hits. The jackpot success / failure determination result that is relatively advantageous to the player corresponds to an example of a specific success / failure determination result, and the jackpot control state that is relatively advantageous to the player corresponds to an example of a special game state.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, symbols other than “Special Illustration A” are also prepared as jackpot symbol 1, and the same applies to other symbols such as jackpot symbol 2.

  The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are notifying means for informing the determination result (lottery result), and the pattern mode ( This corresponds to an example of symbol display means for performing symbol variation display until the special symbols A to F) are stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 144 (b) shows an example of the decorative pattern of the special figure. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of “special decoration 1” to “decoration 10” as special designs in this embodiment. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Displayed in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →... “Change display of decorative pattern of special figure” is performed. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variably displays the special symbol decorative symbols separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. And the stop symbol mode (effect symbol mode) which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the special symbol is stopped and displayed. In the case of notifying a big hit (special illustrations A to D), “decoration combination 1” (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration” in which three identical ornamental symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. 1 ”or“ decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2 ”). When notifying a promiscuous jackpot (Special Figure A or Special Figure C) in the normal gaming state (Special Figure Low Probability Low Figure) or a jackpot other than the normal gaming state (Special Figure Low Probability Low Figure Probability) In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, three “decorative symbol combinations 2” (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3”, “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7”, etc.) in which three odd odd ornamental symbols are arranged. ) Is stopped. When notifying the small hit (special drawing E), “decorative symbol combination 3” (for example, “decoration 1 -decoration 3 -decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Further, when notifying “special drawing F” that is a loss, symbols other than “decorative symbol combination 1”, “decorative symbol combination 2”, and “decorative symbol combination 3” are displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A combination of decorative symbols (for example, loose eyes) is stopped and displayed. Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, from the start of the “variable display of the decorative symbol of the special symbol” until the stop symbol mode of the special symbol of the special symbol (for example, “decorative symbol combination 2”) is stopped and displayed. This series of displays is sometimes referred to as a special design decoration stop display.

  It should be noted that the stop symbol mode (see FIG. 144 (a)) of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 and the decoration of one special figure displayed in each of the left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. As for the stop symbol mode of the symbol (see FIG. 5B), the decorative symbol of the special symbol (see FIG. 5B) is larger.

  FIG. 144 (c) shows an example of the usual stop symbol mode (first symbol mode). In this embodiment, there are three types of stop display modes for the normal symbol, “general symbol A” that is a winning symbol 1, “general symbol B” that is a winning symbol 2, and “normal symbol C” that is a lost symbol. . “Popular A”, which is a hit symbol 1, is a hit per symbol in which the opening time of the pair of blade members 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 is relatively short. “B” is a common figure in which the opening time of the pair of blade members 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 is relatively long. Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, detects that the sphere has passed through the general start port 228, the general display display device 210 illuminates all seven segments and the central one segment. Repeat the lighting and perform “variable display of ordinary figure” (ordinary figure fluctuation game). Then, after the variation time has elapsed, any one of the three types of symbols is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 144 (c), the white portions in the drawing indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  In the following, a series of displays from the start of the “variable display of the usual figure” to the stop display of the stop pattern form of the usual figure may be referred to as a usual figure change stop display. The universal symbol display device 210 corresponds to an example of auxiliary symbol notification means.

  FIG. 144 (d) shows an example of a usual decorative pattern. There are three types of decorations for ordinary drawings in the present embodiment: ordinary figure decorations 1 to 3. An effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on the condition that the sphere has passed through the general-purpose start opening 228, that is, the general-purpose start-up sensor has detected that a sphere has entered the general-purpose start opening 228. In the predetermined area which is the central portion of the “Drawing decoration pattern change display”, the display is switched in the order of “decoration ○” → “decoration ◎” →. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbols of the general symbols in a variable manner separately from the general symbol display device 210. And the stop symbol mode (effect symbol mode) of the usual decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When notifying the hit symbol 1 (ordinary symbol A) of the ordinary figure, the “decoration ○” that is the ordinary ornament 1 is stopped and displayed in the predetermined area of the ornamental symbol display device 208. When notifying the hit symbol 2 (ordinary symbol B) of the ordinary figure, the “decoration ◎” which is the ordinary figure ornament 2 is stopped and displayed in the predetermined area. On the other hand, in the case of notifying the usual figure losing symbol (ordinary figure C), the “decoration ×” which is the common figure decoration 3 is stopped and displayed in the predetermined area. Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a series of processes from the start of the “variable display of the decorative symbol of the normal figure” to the stop display of the decorative symbol pattern of the normal figure (for example, the common figure decoration 2) is stopped. The display may be referred to as a normal decoration symbol change stop display.

In addition, the stop symbol mode (refer to FIG. 144 (c)) of the general symbol A and the normal symbol B and the stop symbol mode of the decorative symbol of one general symbol displayed in the predetermined area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (the same figure). As for (d), the usual decorative design (see (d) in the figure) is larger.
<Main control section control processing>

  Next, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 in the second embodiment is the same as the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 124 executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 in the first embodiment. The description is omitted because they are the same.

  Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process in the second embodiment.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment has two types of special drawings such as special figure 1 and special figure 2, and a lottery based on winning a prize to the second special figure start opening 232 (whether or not to judge special figure 2), This is prioritized over the lottery based on winning in the first special figure starting port 230 (judgment determination of special figure 1). In other words, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment, when a game ball enters the first special start area, the random number value is stored in the first random number storage area up to the maximum number of reservations, and the second special start A winning storage unit that stores up to the maximum number of reserved random numbers in the second random value storage area when a game ball is won in the area, both the first random value storage area and the second random value storage area When the random number value is stored in the first random number value storage area, the time when the random number value is stored in the first random number value storage area and the time when the random number value is stored in the second random number value storage area. The determination is made based on the random number value stored in the second random value storage area, the random number value is not stored in the first random value storage area, and the second random value storage is performed. If a random value is stored in the area, the second value The determination is made based on the random number value stored in the numerical value storage area, the random number value is not stored in the second random number value storage area, and the random number value is stored in the first random number value storage area. In the case where it is determined, a determination unit is provided for determining whether or not it is correct based on the random number value stored in the first random value storage area. In addition, the main control unit 300 notifies the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, and wins a prize to the second special figure start port 232. Based on the determination result, the start information of FIG. 1 is used as the start information in which the determination result is not performed. In the state where only the start information of the special figure 1 of the start information of the special figure 2 remains, and the start information of the special figure 2 is newly stored, the newly stored start of the special figure 2 The notification of the result of the determination based on the information is performed prior to the notification of the result of the determination based on the already stored start information of FIG. Further, the start information acquisition means for acquiring start information, when start information is stored in both of the first start information storage means and the second start information storage means, the second start information When starting information is acquired from the storage means and the starting information is stored in one of the first starting information storing means and the second starting information storing means, the starting information is stored. The starting information is obtained from the information storage means.

  In the main control unit timer interrupt process in the second embodiment, special figure state update processing is performed for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2, but first, special figure state update process for special figure 2 (special figure 2). State update processing) is performed (step S1225), and then special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S1227). When the special figure state update process in step S1225 and step S1227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes this special drawing related lottery process corresponds to an example of the determination unit. The main control unit 300 first performs the process for the special figure 2 (the special drawing 2 related lottery process) (step S1229), and then performs the process for the special figure 1 (the special figure 1 related lottery process) (step S1231). ). As described above, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the game ball enters the first special figure start port 230 at the same timing. The start information is acquired and the start information is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second special figure start port 232, the special condition 2 variable game start conditions, and the special figure 1 variable game start. Even if the conditions are satisfied at the same time, or if both the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 variable game start condition are satisfied, the special figure 2 variable game is changing first. Figure 1 Floating game does not start to fluctuate.

  Further, after the winning acceptance process S1217 is performed and before the special figure state update process is performed, the special figure prefetching process is performed (step S1224).

  FIG. 146 (a) is a flowchart showing the flow of special figure prefetching processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300.

  First, in step S1224a, whether or not there has been an increase in the start information of special figure 2, that is, in the reserved storage unit of special figure 2 provided in RAM 308, start information about special figure 2 (special figure 2 winning random number value, jackpot It is determined whether or not special figure 2 random number values and special figure 2 variation time determination random number values) have been added. If they have increased (if they have been added), the start information of the increased special figure 2 is prefetched. Then, the stop symbol of the special figure 2 is determined in advance (step S1224b). In this step S1224b, first, the start information of FIG. 2 is prefetched from the holding storage unit of FIG. That is, with the winning of the second special figure starting port 232 as a trigger, the starting information generated based on the winning is prefetched. Therefore, the start information is prefetched before the start information is acquired in the determination of validity (the special drawing 2 related lottery process in step S1229 shown in FIG. 145). The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that performs this prefetching corresponds to an example of start information prefetching means. In the prefetching here, only the winning portion (holding increment) is prefetched, but all may be prefetched. Note that pre-reading here means that the start information is read first before the validity determination (final lottery), but in the following explanation, the word “prefetching” is referred to as the result of the pre-judgment (final lottery). ) May be used to mean read.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a special figure pre-judgment determination table shown in FIG. 146 (b) and a special figure pre-determination table shown in FIG.

  When the start information is prefetched, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 pre-determines whether or not the result is determined in the future special drawing 2 related lottery process and the symbols to be stopped based on the preread start information. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 first refers to the probability variation flag, and uses the special figure success / failure prior determination table shown in FIG. The possible numerical range is 0 to 65535), and it is determined in advance whether the determination result is a big hit determination result, a small hit determination result, or a loss determination result. . That is, whether or not the winning / failing determination result based on the starting information generated based on the winning at the second special figure starting port 232 becomes the big hit determination result (specific determination result or not). It is determined in advance. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that performs this pre-determination corresponds to an example of a pre-determination unit, and the result of the pre-determination here is treated as a special figure 2 determination result.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores a special figure success / failure determination table having the same contents as the special figure success / failure prior determination table shown in FIG. 146 (b). Whether it is the special figure success / failure determination table or the special figure success / failure prior determination table shown in FIG. 146 (b), the jackpot probability is 1/320 in the special figure low probability state (non-electric support state). On the other hand, in the special figure high probability state (electric support state), it rises to 1/32. On the other hand, the small hit probability is 1/100 in both the special figure low probability state (non-electric support state) and the special figure high probability state (electric support state).

  Next, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 uses the special chart pre-judgment table shown in FIG. 146 (c) when the special figure 2 pre-judgment pre-judgment result is a big jackpot, and uses the special chart pre-judgment table shown in FIG. Based on the special figure 2 random number value (possible numerical range is 0 to 99), the jackpot symbol that becomes the stop symbol is determined in advance. The pre-determination of the special figure here is also executed before the success / failure determination (special figure 2 related lottery processing) based on the pre-read start information is performed, and the result of the pre-determination here is treated as the special figure 2 pre-determination result . The pre-determination of the jackpot symbol here corresponds to pre-determining which type of jackpot is out of a plurality of types of jackpots prepared. In the second embodiment, only one type of small hit symbol and lost symbol are prepared. Therefore, if the special figure 2 determination result is a small hit or lost, it is unambiguous. Special figure 2 pre-determination results are obtained.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores a special figure determination table having the same contents as the special figure prior determination table shown in FIG. The special jackpot type of the special chart of the second embodiment will be described in detail with reference to the special chart pre-determination table shown in FIG. 146 (c). The jackpot symbol 1 (special symbol A) or the jackpot symbol 2 (special symbol B) is In the jackpot game that is started with stop display, one round in which the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 is opened for 30 seconds (but closed when 10 balls are won in the variable prize opening 234) is performed 15 times. In the jackpot game that starts with the jackpot symbol 3 (special symbol C) or the jackpot symbol 4 (special symbol D) being stopped and displayed, the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 is opened for 30 seconds (however, the variable prize slot 234 is opened). One round, which is closed when 10 balls are won, will be held four times. The winning probability of jackpot symbol 1 (special symbol A) is the highest at 50%.

  In step S1224c following step S1224b, the stop symbol information (special figure 2 preliminary determination result) of special figure 2 obtained in step S1224b is stored in the special chart 2 preliminary determination result storage area prepared in the RAM 308, and in step S1224d. move on.

  On the other hand, if the start information in FIG. 2 has not increased in the determination in step S1224a, the process proceeds to step S1224d, and the pre-reading and pre-determination of the start information in FIG. 2 are not performed.

  In step S1224d, this time, whether or not there has been an increase in the start information of special figure 1 (special figure 1 winning random number value, jackpot special figure 1 random value, and special figure 1 variation time determining random value), ie, in RAM 308. It is determined whether or not one set of random values has been added to the reserved storage unit of the special figure 1 provided. If it has increased (if it has been added), the current control state is now the electric support state. Is determined with reference to the time reduction flag prepared in the RAM 308 (step S1224e). If the current control state is the non-electric support state (if the time reduction flag is off), step S1224f is determined. Proceed to

  In step S1224f, as in step S1224b described above, first, the start information of FIG. 1 is prefetched from the holding storage unit of FIG. Next, similarly to step S1224b, using the special figure success / failure prior determination table shown in FIG. 146 (b), a special figure 1 success / failure preliminary determination result is obtained based on the pre-read start information (special figure 1 winning random number value). Subsequently, when the result of the special figure 1 pre-judgment pre-judgment is a big hit, similarly to step S1224b, using the special figure pre-judgment table shown in FIG. The special figure 1 pre-determination result is acquired based on the random number value in FIG.

  In step S1224g following step S1224f, the stop symbol information (special figure 1 preliminary determination result) of special figure 1 obtained in step S1224f is stored in the special figure 1 preliminary determination result storage area prepared in the RAM 308, and FIG. Return to the indicated main controller timer interrupt processing.

  Note that in this special figure prefetching process, only the stop determination of the special figure was performed in advance, but based on the random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time in the prefetched start information, the advance time of the special figure fluctuation time was determined. The determination may be performed, and the change time advance determination result (special figure change time advance determination result) may be stored in the advance determination result storage area. Further, instead of the variation time, the effect mode (variation pattern) in the decorative symbol display device 208 may be determined in advance. In the present embodiment, the variation time of the special figure and the effect form of the decorative symbol display device 208 are associated one-to-one, and the fact that the variation time is selected means that the variation pattern is selected. You can also. Further, the production modes may be divided into groups, and for example, only the group of “out of reach / normal reach lose” or the group of “reach A out of reach / reach B lose” may be selected. Or, it belongs to the group of directing “per normal reach, normal reach lose, per reach A, per reach B, per reach A, per reach B”, or “super shortened lose, shortened lose, lose, chance all extinguished” It may be determined in advance whether it belongs to the group without reach.

  The pre-determination information newly stored in the pre-determination result storage area of the RAM 308 (information indicating the special figure pre-determination result) is stored in the command data of the special figure pending increase command as information of the pre-determined special figure 1 or special figure 2. It is included and transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400.

  On the other hand, if the start information in FIG. 1 has not increased in the determination in step S1224d shown in FIG. 146 (a), the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. No prior judgment is performed.

  In addition, even when the current control state is the electric support state (the time reduction flag is on) in step S1224e, the start-up information and the pre-determination are not performed in FIG. “Undetermined” information indicating that the determination of success / failure based on the start information of the special figure 1 or the preliminary determination of the stop symbol has not been performed is stored in the special figure 1 preliminary determination result storage area (step S1224h), and FIG. Return to the main controller timer interrupt processing shown in. Note that, based on the start of the big hit game, the area in which the special figure 1 preliminary determination result is stored in the special figure 1 preliminary determination result storage area is rewritten to “undetermined” information. Further, in the second embodiment, if the undetermined information setting condition (in the power support state here) is satisfied, the start information itself is not prefetched, but prefetching is performed and no predetermination is performed. In addition, although prefetching and preliminary determination are performed, the result may not be sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400.

  In this embodiment, the main control unit 300 obtains the special figure advance determination result, but the main control unit 300 obtains the pre-read start information as a special figure pending increase command command without obtaining the special figure advance determination result. The first sub control unit 400 may be included in the data and transmitted to the first sub control unit 400, and the first sub control unit 400 may obtain a special figure preliminary determination result as necessary. However, since the normal state update is performed by the main control unit 300, if the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not the electric support is being performed, the normal state is also changed to the first sub control unit 400. Must be sent and not efficient. Therefore, it is more efficient to execute the prior determination in the main control unit 300.

  After executing the special figure prefetching process described above, the main control unit 300 executes the special figure related lottery process (steps S1229 and S1231), and the same start information as the prefetched start information targeted by the special figure prefetch process. Based on the above, the special figure success / failure determination result using the above-mentioned special figure success / failure determination table, the special figure determination result using the above-mentioned special figure determination table, and the variation time of the special figure are obtained again.

  Here, a method for determining the fluctuation time of the special figure in the special figure-related lottery process (steps S1229 and S1231) will be described. In the following description, since it is the same for both the fluctuation time of FIG. 1 and the fluctuation time of FIG. 2, the description will be made without distinguishing both.

  In the special drawing related lottery process (steps S1229 and S1231) shown in FIG. 145, when the special figure determination result is obtained using the special figure determination table, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 responds to the special figure determination result. Then, a timer number representing the fluctuation time of the special figure is determined.

  FIG. 147 (a) is a diagram showing a table set selection table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  In this table set selection table, the relationship between the special figure determination result (special figure stop symbol), the special figure fluctuation count, and the timer selection table is defined. In the second embodiment, two types of tables are prepared as timer selection tables. The timer selection table is a table used for determining the fluctuation time of the special figure. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with an area (timer selection table information storage area) for storing information representing a timer selection table. The RAM 308 is also provided with a special figure variable game execution number counter for counting the number of executions of the special figure variable game. If the value of the special figure variable game execution number counter is larger than 0, the special figure display device 212 ends the variable display, and after the confirmed special figure is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, the special figure variable game is executed by the CPU 304. The value of the execution counter is decremented by 1.

  For example, in the special figure state update process (steps S1227 and S1229) at the timing when the special rendering stop symbol is the big hit symbol 2 and 15R big hit is won and the end effect period of the 15R big hit game ends, the special figure variable game execution number counter Is set to 100, and information representing the table 4 is stored in the timer selection table information storage area. Also, in the special figure state update process (steps S1227 and S1229) at the timing when the special figure stop display is finished, if the value of the special figure variable game execution number counter is larger than 0, the value of the counter is decremented by 1. The information representing the table 2 is continuously stored in the timer selection table information storage area until the counter value becomes zero. When the value of the special figure variable game execution number counter changes from 1 to 0, the pointer on the RAM 308 is advanced to set a value of 0 to the special figure variable game execution number counter, and in the timer selection table information storage area. Information representing the table 1 is stored. Then, in the special figure state update process (steps S1227 and S1229) at the timing when the special figure stop display is completed until the special figure determination result is switched, the value of the special figure variable game execution number counter is continuously set to 0, and the timer Information indicating the table 1 is continuously stored in the selection table information storage area. As a result, when the 15R big hit game ends, unless the big win or the small win is won, the variable time of the special figure is determined using the timer selection table 2 in the first 100 special figure variable games, and after the 101th, Using the selection table 1, the variation time of the special figure is determined.

  FIG. 147 (b) is a diagram showing a timer number determination table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 is defined in the timer number determination table shown in FIG. 147 (b) based on the random number value for determining the special figure variation time in the start information (the possible range is 0 to 99). Determine the timer number. That is, the timer number is determined by a special figure determination result, a predetermined random number (for example, a random number for timer number determination), a hold number obtained by adding the hold number of FIG. 1 and the hold number of FIG. 2, and predetermined period information. This is performed based on a table (for example, a timer selection table), and is not based on the result of prefetching by the prefetching process or the result of prior determination.

The timer number is the time from when the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 display device 214 starts changing the symbol until the stop symbol indicating the result of the determination of the success / failure is displayed, that is, the time for displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol. (Design variation display time). The main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a variation time determination unit that determines a variation time of a symbol. Note that the time from when the decorative symbol display device 208 starts to change the decorative symbol of the special symbol until the stop symbol indicating the result of the determination of the success / failure is displayed (decorative symbol variation stop display time) is also displayed in this symbol variable display. Adjusted to time.
FIG. 147 (c) is a diagram showing the relationship between the timer number and the symbol variation display time.

  In the second embodiment, the decorative pattern variation pattern of the special symbol in the decorative symbol display device 208 is determined in accordance with the symbol variation display time. That is, the first sub-control unit 400 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol decoration pattern based on the timer number (design variation display time). In FIG. 147 (c), the relationship between the timer number and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern of the special drawing is also shown for reference.

  The timer 1 represents that the special figure fluctuation time is an extremely shortened fluctuation time of 2 seconds, and the timer 2 represents that the special figure fluctuation time is a shortened fluctuation time of 5 seconds. Note that the determination of the timer 1 or the timer 2 may be referred to as a special figure change. The timer 3 represents that the special figure fluctuation time becomes a normal fluctuation time (reference fluctuation time) of 10 seconds. Further, in the timers 1 to 3, the variation pattern of the special symbol decorative pattern in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 143 is not reached. The timer 4 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time becomes a fluctuation time of 12 seconds. When the timer 4 is determined, normal reach is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure decorative pattern in the decorative symbol display device 208. The timer 5 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 40 seconds, and the timer 6 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 50 seconds. When the timers 5 and 6 are determined, the super-reach is selected as the variation pattern of the decorative pattern of the special graphic in the decorative graphic display device 208.

  This reach is determined to be a success / failure determination that the result of the success / failure determination (main lottery) in the special drawing related lottery process (steps S1229 and S1231) becomes a specific determination result (predetermined result with high player advantage). This is a notice effect that informs the player in advance before the result of the determination of whether or not the game is determined, and whether or not to reach is determined after the determination of the determination. The main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a notice control unit.

  In the second embodiment, the length of the period from the determination of whether or not a special figure is made to the notification of the result of the determination of the special figure (the special figure change time) ) Is long.

  As shown in FIG. 147 (b), when the special figure determination result is an out-of-order symbol ("Special Figure F"), if the number of holds is 0 to 2, the timer 3 without reach has a probability of 90%. If the hold number is 3 to 7, the non-reach timer 2 is determined with a probability of 98%. Further, when the table 1 is selected with the off symbol, the super-reach timer 5 or the timer 6 is determined with a probability of 1% regardless of the number of holdings.

  In addition, if the decision result is a big hit, regardless of the type of special figure (big hit symbols 1 to 4), regardless of the timer selection table, and regardless of the number of holds, the normal reach The timer 4 is determined with a probability of 2%, the super reach 1 timer 5 is determined with a probability of 32%, and the super reach 2 timer 6 is determined with a probability of 66%. The same applies when the special figure determination result is a small hit symbol.

  Next, the common figure related lottery process (step S1223) shown in FIG. 145 will be described. In the second embodiment, the starting information of the usual figure is the ordinary winning random number value and the winning ordinary random number value. In this general drawing related lottery process (step S1223), a general figure determination process is performed.

  FIG. 148 (a) is a diagram showing a normal / unusual determination table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  In the usual-time determination processing, the time reduction flag is referred to and the determination is made based on whether or not the current control state is the electric support state. This determination of whether or not a normal figure is made is performed based on a random number value for a normal figure winning (from 0 to 65535) in the start-up information extracted from the normal figure holding storage unit of the RAM 308. In the second embodiment, the typical attack probability is about 10% in the normal low probability state (non-electric support state), but is 100% in the normal high probability state (electric support state).

  When the execution of the normal-figure success / failure determination process is completed and the normal-figure success / failure determination result is a win, the normal-figure stop symbol determination process is executed. In addition, since there is only one type of misplaced symbol, the stop symbol of the ordinary diagram is unambiguously determined if the result of determining whether or not the usual figure is correct.

  FIG. 148 (b) is a diagram showing a common map determination table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  Here again, referring to the time reduction flag, whether or not the current control state is the electric support state is determined. This usual figure stop symbol determination process is performed based on the common figure random number value (possible range is 0 to 99) in the start information extracted from the ordinary figure holding storage unit of the RAM 308. In the low-probability state (non-electric support state), 90% of the winning symbols are awarded to symbol 1 (common symbol A), and 10% of the probability is winning symbol 2 (common symbol B). . On the other hand, in the normal figure high probability state (electric support state), the symbol 2 per common figure (normal figure B) is won with a probability of 100%.

  Here, referring to the common figure determination table shown in FIG. 148 (b), the common figure hit type of the second embodiment will be described in detail. Is stopped, the pair of blade members 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 is opened for 1.8 seconds (however, when 10 balls are won in the second special figure starting port 232, it is closed). On the other hand, when the symbol 2 per symbol is stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 210, the pair of blade members 2321 of the second special diagram starting port 232 is opened for 6.0 seconds (however, the second special diagram). It will be closed when 10 balls are won in the starting port 232).

In the second embodiment, the normal time fluctuation time is uniquely determined at a predetermined time according to the normal control state. For example, it is 10 seconds in a normal low probability state (non-electric support state), and 5 seconds in a normal high probability state (electric support state).
<Sub-control unit side control processing>

Next, the first sub control unit main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 in the second embodiment is shown in FIG. 129 executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 in the first embodiment. Since it is basically the same as each process of the first sub-control unit, description thereof is omitted. Further, the processing in the second sub-control unit 500 is basically the same as that in the first embodiment, and thus description thereof is omitted.
Next, the prefetch notice in the second embodiment will be described in detail.

  First, in the second embodiment, a special figure 1 hold display area is prepared on the left side of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, that is, on the left side of the predetermined area where the normal decorative pattern is displayed. On the right side, a special figure 2 hold display area is prepared. In the special figure 1 hold display area, a hold display corresponding to one set of start information stored in the hold storage part of the special figure 1 provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is shown in FIG. Are displayed side by side from the left in order from the oldest in the order in which the start information is stored (in order of winning). The hold display is a display indicating that the start information is stored or stored in the start information storage means (the special storage section of the RAM 308). In the special figure 2 hold display area, a hold display corresponding to one set of start information stored in the hold storage part of the special figure 2 provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is displayed in the hold storage part of the special figure 2. Are displayed side by side from the left in order from the oldest in the order in which the start information is stored (in order of winning). That is, a hold display is performed for each start information stored in the start information storage means, and the number of hold displays corresponds to the hold number. The decorative symbol display device 208 corresponds to an example of a start hold display unit. In this embodiment, the default display mode in the hold display is a mode in which a round graphic is displayed without any pattern and in one color, and corresponds to an example of the first mode. Each time the first sub control unit 400 receives the special figure hold increase command, the first sub control unit 400 transmits a hold increase command to the second sub control unit 500, and the second sub control unit 500 performs the decoration based on the hold increase command. The symbol display device 208 is controlled to increase the number of pending displays by one. On the other hand, every time the first sub-control unit 400 receives a symbol variation start command that is a signal for the detention, the second sub-control unit 500 transmits a hold decrease signal to the second sub-control unit 500. Based on the signal, the decorative symbol display device 208 is controlled to decrease the number of the hold display by one.

  The pre-reading notice in the second embodiment is an effect for giving a notice that there is a possibility that the result of the determination as to whether or not the lottery process is performed in the special drawing related lottery process (steps S1229 and S1231) shown in FIG. More specifically, in the present embodiment, a big hit that is relatively advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit in the 15R series: special figure A, special figure B) and a big hit that is relatively disadvantageous ( For example, 4R series big hits: special figure C, special figure D) are prepared, and the pre-reading notice is an effect for giving a notice that there is a possibility of an advantageous big hit. Note that the big hit with certainty (special drawing C) may be an advantageous big hit even in the big hit of the 4R system. The pre-reading notice in the second embodiment is a notice made based on the starting information (pre-reading starting information) acquired before the starting information is acquired in the special drawing related lottery process (steps S1229 and S1231). is there. That is, the pre-reading notice is performed based on a pre-determination result based on the pre-read start information.

  In addition, the prefetching notice here includes a false prefetching notice that falsely notices as if it is an advantageous jackpot even if the pre-determination result is not an advantageous jackpot. In other words, the pre-reading notice indicates that the result of the success / failure determination may be an advantageous jackpot, is a notice that suggests to the player, or that the result of the determination is an advantageous jackpot. It can be said that it is a notice to expect.

  In the second embodiment, it is possible to perform a prefetch notice effect using the hold display by changing the display mode of the hold display. The pre-reading notice effect using the hold display has an execution start timing when winning, and the execution area is within the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, when the special figure hold is 0 and there is a prize at the special figure starting ports 230 and 232, whether or not the special figure is determined based on the prize is determined immediately, and the symbol variation display of the special figure is also immediate. However, it is possible that the special figure hold display based on the winning is not performed, but it may be performed for a few seconds immediately after the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure based on the winning. In this case, the effect of the pre-reading notice is performed during the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display corresponding to the pre-read start information) for notifying the success / failure determination result based on the pre-read start information. The prefetching notice using the hold display corresponds to an example of a predetermined notice form of the prefetching notice, and the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponds to an example of the prefetching notice unit.

  In addition, by driving the effect movable body 224 and the shielding device 246, it is possible to perform a pre-reading notice effect by actuating an accessory. The pre-reading notice effect by the actuating of the accessory may be executed at the time of winning or at the time of stopping the symbol fluctuation, and the execution area is an area covering the decorative symbol display device 208. The symbol variation stop time in the pre-reading notice is when at least one of the symbol variation display corresponding to the pre-read start information and the symbol variation display before the symbol variation display is stopped. More specifically, if there is a winning with a hold of 0, the winning / failing determination based on the winning is immediately performed, and the special symbol variation display is also immediately started. When the symbol variation display corresponding to the information is stopped, the execution of the prefetch notice is started.

  It is also possible to perform a pre-reading notice effect by causing a design such as a specific character or symbol to appear on the decorative design display device 208. The execution start timing of the pre-reading notice effect using this specific symbol may be at the time of winning, or by the symbol variation start command after a predetermined time has elapsed after receiving the first symbol variation starting command after winning. The started symbol variation display may be in progress. Here, if there is a winning in a state where the hold is 0, the winning / failing determination based on the winning is performed immediately and the special symbol variation display is started immediately. The symbol variation display after a predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol variation display (design variation display corresponding to the pre-read start information) for notifying the determination result is started. When there is a winning in a state where the hold is 1 or more, the symbol variation display is performed before the symbol variation display. The execution area may be the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c in the decorative symbol display device 208, or a predetermined area for the effect display area 208d. Also good.

  Furthermore, it is possible to perform a pre-reading notice effect by changing the background image of the decorative symbol display device 208. The execution start timing of the prefetch notice effect using the background image is at the time of winning a prize, and the execution area is the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Note that the pre-reading notice effect is not limited to a notice using an image or an accessory, but may be a notice using sound or light.

  When the first sub control unit 400 receives the special figure hold increase command, the first sub control unit 400 performs a prefetch notice execution process in the effect control process in the first sub control unit main process. In this prefetching notice execution process, a prefetching notice using a hold display, a prefetching notice by actuating an accessory, a prefetching notice using a specific design, and a prefetching notice using a background image are determined in advance. Further, if the pre-reading notice using the hold display is used, the display form after the change according to the pre-reading notice is determined by lottery from a plurality of types of display forms of the hold display prepared in advance. If the pre-reading notice is due to the action of an accessory, one drive pattern is determined by lottery from drive patterns of a plurality of types of effect movable bodies 224 and shielding devices 246 prepared in advance. If it is a pre-reading notice using a specific symbol, a symbol to be made to appear in the pre-reading notice is determined by lottery from a plurality of types of symbols such as characters and symbols prepared in advance. If it is a prefetch notice using a background image, a background image used for the prefetch notice is determined by lottery from a plurality of types of background images prepared in advance.

  Also in the second embodiment, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the common symbol variation start command, the decorative symbol display device 208 executes the regular symbol variation effect. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the special symbol variation start command, the decorative symbol display device 208 also executes a special symbol variation effect.

  FIG. 149 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of the normal symbol variation effect, the special symbol variation effect, and the prefetch notice effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 149 (a), the combination of the stop symbol of the special symbol decorative symbol is displayed, and in the effect display area 208d, the predetermined symbol 208x is displayed in which the normal symbol decorative symbol is displayed. Is displayed as a stop symbol of the usual decorative pattern. That is, the special figure variable game and the general figure variable game are stopped. In this state, when the game ball passes through the universal figure starting port 228, as shown in FIG. 149 (b), the variable symbol display is started on the universal figure display device 210 and the predetermined area 208x of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Then, the variation display of the general-purpose decorative symbols is started. In addition, from the loudspeaker 120 (not shown), a normal variation sound indicating that the symbol variation display is performed on the universal symbol display device 210 is output. The variation display of the general symbol decoration symbol and the output of the common symbol variation sound correspond to an example of the general symbol variation effect, and the universal symbol variation effect corresponds to an example of the predetermined effect according to the present invention.

  Subsequently, when a game ball enters the first special figure starting port 230, a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls are paid out as prize balls. Further, as shown in FIG. 149 (c), the symbol variation display is started on the special symbol 1 display device 212, and the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. In the area 208c, the variation display of the special figure decoration symbol is started. Also, a special figure fluctuation sound indicating that the symbol fluctuation display is being performed on the special figure 1 display device 212 is output from the speaker 120. The variation display of the special symbol decoration symbol and the output of the special symbol variation sound correspond to an example of the special symbol variation effect. In addition, the pre-reading notice effect based on the pre-reading of the starting information stored in the special figure 1 holding storage unit of the RAM 308 is also executed by winning the first special figure starting port 230. Here, a pre-reading notice effect using a specific symbol is executed at the time of winning a prize at the first special figure starting port 230, and the princess character's symbol 2082 is displayed as a specific symbol in the lower area including the effect display area 208d. Move from left to right. Note that a pre-reading notice effect sound may be output from the speaker 120 while the princess character's symbol 2082 is moving.

  In the specific example described above, the special figure fluctuation sound starts to sound from the middle of the normal figure fluctuation sound, and the special figure fluctuation sound is heard over the normal figure fluctuation sound. In addition, the predetermined area 208x where the variation display of the general-purpose decorative symbol is performed is covered with the symbol 2082 of the princess character passing by the pre-reading notice effect for a moment, so that the variation display of the general-purpose decorative symbol is not visible for a moment. In other words, the pattern 2082 of the princess character enters the predetermined area 208x, thereby reducing the predetermined area 208x. Therefore, the general symbol variation effect corresponding to an example of the predetermined effect according to the present invention is changed by the special symbol variation effect or the prefetching notice effect.

  Here, the movement of the princess character's symbol 2082 is executed as a pre-reading notice effect, but it may be executed as a special symbol variation effect.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 149 (c ′), when a game ball enters the first special figure starting port 230, the middle area of the special figure decoration symbol is a predetermined area in which the variation display of the normal figure decoration symbol is performed. It may be a special symbol variation effect that fluctuates over 208x. By doing so, the ordinary symbol variation effect changes according to the special symbol variation effect. It should be noted that the effect that the middle symbol of the special symbol decoration symbol is displayed in a variable manner over the predetermined area 208x is used to pre-read the starting information stored in the special symbol 1 holding storage unit of the RAM 308 by winning the first special symbol starting port 230. It may be performed as an effect of prefetching notice based on.

  Further, in FIG. 149 (c), the pre-reading notice effect based on the pre-reading of the starting information stored in the special figure 1 holding storage unit of the RAM 308 by winning the first special figure starting port 230 is a notice using a specific symbol. Although it is executed in a mode, it may be executed in a notice mode in which the effect movable body 224 is driven as shown in FIG. Also in this case, the forearm portion 224b that has been rotated covers the predetermined area 208x where the variation display of the regular symbol decorative symbol is performed, and the regular symbol variation effect changes due to the pre-reading notice effect.

  Also in the specific example in the second embodiment described above, the regular symbol variation effect changes here due to the establishment of a prize ball payout condition (predetermined condition) such as winning at the first special figure starting port 230. The player is more likely to notice that the payout is being made, the ball holding is likely to be good, and the impression of the gaming table may be improved. The same applies to the specific examples described below. In addition, since the change in the regular symbol variation effect is caused by the pre-reading notice effect, the player may generate a predetermined profit (here, payout of a prize ball) and the variable winning opening 234 may be in an advantageous state. Can be recognized at a time by a pre-reading notice effect (specific effect), which can enhance the player's interest in the game and improve the impression of the game stand compared to the case where each is recognized separately There is a case that can be made.

  FIG. 150 is a diagram showing a specific example of the normal symbol variation effect and the prefetching notice effect. Hereinafter, the description will focus on the differences from the specific example shown in FIG.

  Also in this specific example, when the game ball passes through the ordinary figure starting port 228, the ordinary symbol variation effect is started. In other words, in the predetermined area 208x of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable decorative symbol display is started, and the normal symbol changing sound is output from the speaker 120 (not shown).

  Subsequently, when a game ball enters the first special figure starting port 230, a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, a special symbol variation effect similar to the specific example shown in FIG. 149 is started, but pre-reading of the starting information stored in the special figure 1 holding storage unit of the RAM 308 by winning the first special figure starting port 230 is started. Based on the pre-reading notice effect based on it is also executed. The notice mode of the prefetch notice effect based on the prefetch here is a form using a background image, and at the same time as the symbol variation display is started in the special figure 1 display device 212, as shown in FIG. The entire front screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes dark for a moment, and the normal symbol variation effect executed in the decorative symbol display device 208 and the special symbol variation effect started by the decorative symbol display device 208 are temporarily invisible. . That is, the regular symbol variation effect changes depending on the prefetching notice effect.

  Here, the switching of the background image is executed as the pre-reading notice effect, but it may be executed as a special symbol variation effect. That is, the background image of the decorative design display device 208 is switched to a dark background image (blackout image) for a moment before starting the variable display of the special design, and then the normal background image is restored. You may perform the change display of a symbol. Even with rubbing, the regular symbol variation effect changes according to the special symbol variation effect. The blackout image can also be used as a scene switching image, and such background image switching can also be viewed as a special symbol variation effect that also serves as a scene switching effect.

  In FIG. 150 (c), the background image is switched to a dark image (blackout image). However, as shown in FIG. 150 (c ′), the background image is switched to a bright image (here, a whiteout image). Also good.

  Further, in FIG. 150 (c), the pre-reading notice effect based on the pre-reading of the starting information stored in the special figure 1 holding storage unit of the RAM 308 by winning the first special figure starting port 230 is the notice mode using the background image. However, it may also be executed in a notice mode in which the open shielding device 246 is closed as shown in FIG. Also in this case, the predetermined area 208x in which the variation display of the usual figure decorative symbol is performed is hidden by the left door 246a and the right door 246b of the shielding device 246, and the ordinary symbol variation effect is changed by the pre-reading notice effect. Note that switching to a white-out image and an effect effect that closes the left door 246a and the right door 246b can also be viewed as a scene switching effect.

  The background image may be a translucent image. Since it is translucent, it is possible to visually recognize the regular symbol variation effect and the special symbol variation effect, and thus it may be possible to prevent a decrease in the rendering effect.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, when the first sub control unit 400 receives the special figure hold increase command, the decorative symbol display device 208 executes a special figure hold increase effect.
FIG. 151 is a diagram showing a specific example of the regular symbol variation effect and the special figure hold increase effect.

  In FIG. 151 (a), the special symbol display device 212 performs symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as the symbol variation display), and the decorative symbol display device 208 performs variation display of the special symbol decoration symbol. Yes. Also, three special figure hold displays are displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 151 (a). Hereinafter, the special figure hold display representing the oldest special figure hold (hereinafter referred to as special figure hold 1) will be referred to as the first special figure hold display 296, and the second old special figure hold (hereinafter referred to as special figure hold 2). ) Is called a second special figure hold display 297, and a special figure hold display representing the newest special figure hold (hereinafter referred to as special figure hold 3) is called a third special figure hold display 298. Here, the number of reserved special figures is three. On the other hand, the general symbol display device 210 is stopped and a stop symbol of the general symbol decorative symbol is displayed in a predetermined area 208x of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  When the game ball passes through the general symbol start port 228 while the symbol variation display is being performed, the regular symbol variation effect is started. In other words, in the predetermined area 208x of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable decorative symbol display is started, and the normal symbol changing sound is output from the speaker 120 (not shown).

  Next, when a game ball enters the first special figure starting port 230, a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, special figure hold increases. Hereinafter, the increased special figure hold will be referred to as special figure hold 4, and the special figure hold display representing the special figure hold 4 will be referred to as a fourth special figure hold display 299. When a game ball enters the first special figure starting port 230, a special figure holding increase sound is output from the speaker 120 (not shown), and the fourth black circle, which is the default display mode, is displayed from the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208. A track symbol 2991 on which the special symbol hold display 299 symbol is placed appears, and this track symbol 2991 moves to the left in the effect display area 208d. As a result, as shown in FIG. 151 (c), the design 2991 of the track passes through the predetermined area 208x where the variation display of the general-purpose decorative design is performed, and the general-purpose decoration design performed in the predetermined area 208x. The change display of is not visible for a moment. In other words, the predetermined area 208x becomes smaller when the track pattern 2991 enters the predetermined area 208x. Also in this specific example, the regular symbol variation effect changes due to the special symbol hold increase effect.

  The symbol of the fourth special figure hold display 299 of the black circle, which is the default display mode placed on the truck, is transported to the right side of the third special figure hold display 298, and then is lowered from the truck, and the fourth special figure hold display 299 is displayed. The figure hold display 299 is displayed on the right side of the third special figure hold display 298. When the fourth special figure hold display 299 is displayed on the right side of the third special figure hold display 298, a prefetch notice effect using the hold display is performed. Here, as shown in FIG. 151 (d), a light aura effect image 2992 representing a state where light radiates radially from the black circle image is added to the black circle image which is the default display mode. The display mode has changed. This light aura effect image 2992 enters the predetermined area 208x where the variation display of the general-purpose decorative symbol is performed, and the predetermined area 208x is also reduced here. Therefore, the general symbol variation effect is also changed by the prefetching notice effect. The light aura effect image 2992 may be a translucent image. Since it is translucent, it is possible to visually recognize the regular symbol variation effect, so that it may be possible to prevent a decrease in the rendering effect of the regular symbol variation effect.

  The display form of the fourth special figure hold display 299 displayed on the right side of the third special figure hold display 298 may be changed to another display form. In FIG. 151 (d ′), the display form of the fourth special figure hold display 299 displayed on the right side of the third special figure hold display 298 is changed to a panda character image of a scary face. In addition, this character image is larger than the black circle image of the default display mode, and a part of the character image enters the predetermined area 208x, and here, the regular symbol variation effect is also changed by the pre-reading notice effect. The hold display that also serves as a pre-reading notice effect represents a hold that can be expected from a big hit if viewed from the player. By displaying the hold larger than the size of the default display mode, it becomes easy for the player to understand. In this way, the size of the hold display may be changed according to the expectation degree (reliability) of the prefetch notice. It should be noted that it may be displayed larger only for the first predetermined period of the hold display and thereafter displayed in the same size as the size of the default display mode.

  FIG. 152 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the general symbol variation effect itself changes. Hereinafter, the description will focus on the differences from the specific example shown in FIG.

  Also in this specific example, when the game ball passes through the ordinary figure starting port 228, the ordinary symbol variation effect is started. In other words, in the predetermined area 208x of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable decorative symbol display is started, and the normal symbol changing sound is output from the speaker 120 (not shown).

  Subsequently, when a game ball enters the first special figure starting port 230, a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls are also paid out as prize balls. Further, as shown in FIG. 152 (c), a special symbol variation effect similar to the specific example shown in FIG. 149 is started. Furthermore, based on the start of the special symbol variation display, the background screen of the predetermined area 208x where the variation of the regular symbol decoration symbol is displayed changes, and the regular symbol variation effect itself changes. Here, the background image with no pattern is changed to a background image with an oblique stripe pattern.

  Further, as a change of the general symbol variation effect itself based on the start of the special symbol variation display, as shown in FIG. 152 (d), instead of the variation display of the regular symbol decoration symbol performed in the predetermined area 208x. The countdown display may be performed to change the display to, for example, 5 → 4 → 3 → 2 → 1 → ◯.

  When the special figure hold increases, a pre-reading notice effect based on the pre-reading of the start information stored in the special figure hold storage unit of the RAM 308 by winning at the special figure start opening is displayed as a variation display of the general-purpose decorative symbol. It may be executed in the predetermined area 208x where is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 152 (e), instead of the variable display of the general-purpose decorative symbols, a specific character or symbol symbol (here, a scary face panda character symbol) is displayed in the predetermined area 208x. Is displayed.

  Further, in the above description, the variation display of the general symbol decoration symbol (general symbol variation effect) on the decorative symbol display device 208 is always performed. You may make it carry out by probability (for example, 10% or 0%). By doing so, the player's expectation for the regular symbol variation effect may be increased.

  Moreover, the sound production based on each production may include a silent production. This makes it easier for the player to notice that a profit (for example, a payout of a prize ball) has occurred. In addition, there is a case where it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the special figure is judged to be unacceptable without interfering with the special figure-related effect.

  In addition, you may be made not to perform a regular symbol change effect during electric support. If the electric support is in progress, the pair of blade members 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 is easy to open and a prize ball is likely to be generated, so that the player can concentrate on the effect based on the generation of the prize ball. There is a case.

  Although the example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine has been described here, the present invention can also be applied to a rotating game machine (slot machine).

  In the above description, “a game ball can enter in a game stand that gives a player a predetermined game value based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, entry of a game ball into a winning opening or a start port). Starting information (for example, a normal winning random number and a random number for determining a normal variation period) based on a first approach area (for example, the central general map start gate 251) and a game ball entering the first entrance area ) Generating start information generating means (for example, a random value storing register corresponding to the general start area of the random value generating circuit 318 shown in FIG. 120, a general variable changing period determining random number counter provided in the RAM 308, and Combined with a main control unit 300 for performing random number processing), and a determination unit for determining whether or not the vehicle is correct based on the start information generated by the start information generating unit (for example, a main system for executing a normal determination process) CPU 304 of unit 300), an effect means for effecting (for example, decorative symbol display device 208), and a predetermined effect (for example, a normal symbol variation effect on the effect means) based on the result of the success / failure determination of the success / failure determination means. ) And a second entry area (for example, a combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500) and the second entry area (for example, the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball) And a general general winning opening 226), and the effect control means gives the effect means the predetermined effect based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second entry area during the predetermined effect. A game stand characterized by causing a changed effect (for example, an effect in which a normal symbol variation effect is changed by a prize ball paying appearance). Is explained.

  Here, the first entry area may be an area (for example, a gate) through which a game ball passes. That is, the first entry area may be provided in a game area where a game ball rolls, and the game ball may roll further in the game area even if the game ball enters. The predetermined condition may not be satisfied even if a game ball enters the first entry area.

  Further, the second entry area may be provided in the game area, and the game ball may be guided to the back side of the game area when entering.

  In addition, the second approach area is easy to enter the game ball from the first state in which it is difficult to enter the game ball based on the result of the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination means being a specific result of the success / failure determination. A variable start port that changes state to the second state may be included.

  Furthermore, the predetermined effect may be an effect by image display, an effect by sound, or an effect by light.

  In addition, the effect obtained by changing the predetermined effect here may be an effect in which the predetermined effect itself is switched to another effect, or an effect in which a part of the predetermined effect is changed. Alternatively, it may be an effect in which some or all of the predetermined effects are covered with other effects.

  Also, giving a predetermined game value to a player is exemplified by paying out game media.

  Further, in the description so far, “the effect control means causes the effect means to perform a specific effect (for example, appearance of a prize ball payout) that affects the predetermined effect in order to change the predetermined effect. A game stand characterized by being. Is also explained.

  Further, in the description so far, “the effect means includes an image display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) for displaying an effect image, and the effect control means has a predetermined effect image (for example, a decoration for a normal figure). By displaying the graphic display) on the image display means, the predetermined effect is displayed on the image display means, and a part or all of the predetermined effect image is displayed as an effect obtained by changing the predetermined effect. An image (for example, see FIG. 136 (c)) covered with a part or all of another image (for example, a panda character image 2081 having a scary face) is displayed on the image display means. Amusement stand. Is also explained.

Here, the effect control means may cause the image display means to display an effect image that is wholly or partially translucent as the specific effect.
Further, the effect means includes sound output means for outputting a predetermined sound,

  The production control means causes the sound output means to output the predetermined sound to cause the sound output means to perform the specific production, and the specific output that is output in parallel with the predetermined sound. The sound may be output to the sound output means. By doing so, the player may be able to recognize the occurrence of profit by the sound based on the specific performance.

  Further, the sound output means includes a ball tray capable of storing a game ball, and the collision based on the game ball paid out from the game ball payout means colliding with the game ball stored in the ball dish or the ball tray A sound may be output as the specific sound. By doing so, the collision sound is directed to the player from a direction different from that of the speaker, so that the player may be able to recognize the generation of profit more.

  In addition, in the description so far, “the first entry area (for example, the central universal start gate 251) is provided in the game area (for example, the game area 124) where the game ball rolls, The game area is further rolled, and the second entry area (for example, the central general winning opening 226) is entered by a game ball after entering the first entry area of the game area. A game table characterized by being provided at a possible position. Is also explained.

  Further, in the description so far, “a winning device (for example, a variable winning port 234) that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that a predetermined second condition is satisfied (for example, winning a big win of a special figure). The effect control means causes the effect means to perform an effect that suggests that the predetermined second condition is highly likely to be satisfied as the specific effect (for example, an effect of a pre-reading notice). A game stand characterized by being. Is also explained.

  Hereinafter, the start information generated based on the entry of the game ball into the first entry area is referred to as first start information, and the determination of success / failure based on the first start information is set as the first success / failure determination. The correctness determination means for performing the first correctness determination is used as the first correctness determination means.

  Also, second start information (for example, a special figure) generated based on a game ball entering the second entry area (for example, the first special figure start port 230, the second special figure start port 232). Second starting information storage means (for example, RAM 308) for storing a winning random number value, a big hit special figure random value, a small hit special figure random value, a lose special figure random value, and a special figure variation time determination random value. 2 and the second start information stored in the second start information storage means, and whether or not it is determined based on the acquired second start information. The second success / failure determination means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) for making a determination and deriving a second success / failure determination result, and when the symbol variation display is performed and the symbol variation display is finished, the second success / failure determination is performed. The symbol variation display that stops and displays the symbol form representing the judgment result is performed. The second symbol display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214) and the second symbol display means stop display the symbol pattern representing the specific second determination result. Control state transition means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) that shifts the control state from the normal control state to the big hit control state and the second determination result based on predetermined second start information by the second determination unit. The second success / failure determination means provides a pre-reading notice effect for notifying that there is a possibility that the result will be the specific second success / failure determination result (for example, a big success / failure determination result). A pre-reading notice effecting means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) that executes at a predetermined execution probability based on the predetermined second starting information acquired before acquiring the starting information; Before The effect means includes the prefetch notice effect means, and the effect control means causes the prefetch notice effect means to perform the prefetch notice effect as the specific effect. Good.

  In addition, the variable symbol means (for example, variable prize opening 234) that is opened after the second symbol display means stops displaying the symbol form indicating the specific second success / failure determination result (for example, special figure big hit determination result). The aspect provided with this may be sufficient.

  The pre-reading notice effect unit executes a pre-reading notice effect for notifying that the result of the determination on the basis of predetermined start information by the determination unit may be the specific determination result. Alternatively, it may be one that executes a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the information based on the predetermined starting information acquired before the determination unit determines that the predetermined starting information is acquired.

  Further, the prefetching notice effect means may start the prefetching notice effect before the appropriateness determination means makes a determination as to whether or not based on the predetermined start information.

  In addition, there is provided a symbol display unit that performs symbol variation display for each starting information stored in the starting information storage unit from the start of symbol variation until the symbol mode corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed. If it is an aspect, the pre-reading notice effect control means may use the predetermined start information in at least one of the symbol variation display corresponding to the predetermined start information and the symbol variation display executed prior to the symbol variation display. A pre-reading notice effect may be executed for notifying that the result of the determination based on whether or not the result is the specific determination result.

  In addition, the pre-reading notice producing unit may determine whether or not the notice of whether or not the result of the determination based on the predetermined start information by the determination unit may be the specific determination result may be executed. A pre-reading notice effect that is determined before the determination of whether or not based on the predetermined start information may be executed.

  Further, the prefetching notice effect means may execute the prefetching notice effect based on the predetermined start information stored in the start information storage means, or the prefetch notice effect. The command may be executed based on receiving a command indicating that the predetermined start information is stored in the start information storage means.

  Also, a predetermined number of game balls are encapsulated as encapsulated balls, the encapsulated spheres are fired into a game area to play a game, and a predetermined game value is given to a player based on the fact that the encapsulated balls have won a predetermined entry area. It is also possible to use an enclosed ball type gaming machine that can be used by circulating the encapsulated ball that has won the predetermined entry area or the enclosed ball that has not won the prize to the game area. Further, the gaming value may be a predetermined number of game ball number data that can be launched into the game area, and the effect control means is based on the fact that the game ball number data is given to the player, You may make the said production | generation means perform the production | generation which changed this predetermined production (For example, the production which the regular symbol fluctuation production changed by a prize ball paying appearance). Further, the effect control means may display an image indicating the predetermined number of the predetermined number of game ball number data on the image display means as the specific effect.

Then, the pachinko machine of 3rd Embodiment of this invention is demonstrated. In the following description, matters that overlap with the items described so far may be omitted or redundantly described, but the components having the same names as the names of the components described so far are used. Will be described with the same reference numerals used so far.
FIG. 153 is a schematic front view of the gaming board 200 according to the third embodiment as viewed from the front.

  The game board 200 shown in FIG. 153 is a game board that makes a right turn during the electric support and the big hit game. In the game board 200, a general start port (gate) 228 is provided in each of the left region and the right region. The normal start port 228 corresponds to an example of an entry area, and the ball that has passed the normal start port 228 rolls in the game area 124 without being discharged to the game island side. The general start port 228 provided in the left region can be used to open the electric long during the non-electric support state (details will be described later), and the general start port 228 provided in the right region is It is possible to aim to open the electric Chu during the electric support state.

  Further, the first special figure starting port 230 and the second special figure starting port 232 are provided below the central portion of the game area 124. Both the first special figure start port 230 and the second special figure start port 232 are start areas into which game balls can enter, but the second area (the right side in the game area) rolls due to the arrangement of the game nails 238 and the like. The game ball is configured so that it is difficult or impossible to enter the first special figure starting port 232. On the other hand, even if the second special figure starting port (electrical chew) 232 is a game ball that rolls in the first area (left side in the game area), it rolls in the second area (right side in the game area). Even a game ball can be entered. The second special figure starting port 232 is provided directly below the first special figure starting port 230, and in the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, there is a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid. Is provided. The combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure start port 232 corresponds to variable start means (variable start region), hereinafter referred to as an electric Chu (electric tulip), and the pair of blade members 2321 open. Is referred to as electric chew release. When the pair of blade members 2321 is closed (first state), the game ball is difficult to enter, and when the pair of blade members 2321 is open (second state), the game ball is easy to enter. . The electric chew is a starting region in which the state can be changed at least between the difficult-to-enter state and the easy-to-enter state. It should be noted that the size of the reception hole for the game ball of the electric chew when the pair of blade members 2321 is open is less than the size of five game balls.

Further, the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 is provided below the electric chew, and the door member 2341 is moved to be in a state where a winning can be achieved. That is, the variable winning opening 234 is a winning area (winning means) whose state can be changed at least between a winning impossible state and a winning possible state. It should be noted that the size of the game ball receiving port of the attacker in the state where the door member 2341 is opened is the size of five or more game balls. In the game board 200 shown in FIG. 153, the game balls that roll in the first area (the left side in the game area) are difficult to enter the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 due to the arrangement of the game nails 238 or the like. It is configured to be impossible, and the player needs to make a right strike during the big hit game.
<Type of design>

  Next, using FIGS. 154 (a) to (d), the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special maps, common maps, and decorative symbols will be described.

  FIG. 154 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol mode (second symbol mode) of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed after the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214. FIG. In FIG. 154 (a), ten types of special drawings from "Special Figure A" to "Special Figure J" are shown. In FIG. 154 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  In the present embodiment, six types of jackpot symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure F") are prepared as the stop pattern modes of special figures. “Special Figure A” and “Special Figure B” are 15 round (R) special jackpot symbols, and “Special Figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol (suddenly probable). When these symbols (special illustrations A, B, E) are stopped and displayed, the control state thereafter becomes the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. "Special figure C" and "Special figure D" are 15R jackpot symbols (15R normal jackpot). When the special figure C or the special figure D is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R big hit symbol (hidden probability variation). When the special figure F is stopped and displayed, the control state thereafter becomes a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state.

  In this embodiment, during the big hit game, the special figure low probability state is entered, and when the special figure A, special figure B, special figure E, and special figure F are won, the big hit is next. Until then, the special figure high probability state is maintained. On the other hand, when the special figure C and the special figure D are won, the special figure low probability state remains even after the big hit game ends.

  Also, after the end of the 15R big hit game and after the big hit game due to sudden probability change, the state shifts to a state with electric support (electric support) (hereinafter referred to as an electric support state). Even in the present embodiment, in the electric support state (short-time state), the universal figure change, the universal figure change, the electric chew release period extension, and the electric chew release frequency increase are all performed. If any one is performed, a player's advantage will be in a high state and it may be in an electric support state (time-short state). Alternatively, if either one of the extension of the electric chew release period or the increase in the number of electric chew release is performed, the electric support state (short-time state) may be set. . In the non-electric support state, the game ball is less likely to enter the second special figure starting port 232 than in the electric support state. In this embodiment, when special figure A, special figure B, or special figure E is stopped and displayed, the electric support state (ordinary figure high probability) until the next big hit game is started after the subsequent big hit game is finished. State) is maintained, and when special figure C or special figure D is stopped and displayed, the electric support state is maintained while special figure variable game is performed 100 times after the end of the big hit game to be performed thereafter. Shifts to the non-electric support state (ordinary low probability state). On the other hand, when a big hit without special support (Special Figure F) is won, the game does not enter the electric support state after the big hit game ends. As will be described later, the special figure F is a symbol that is selected in the special figure 1 but not selected in the special figure 2.

  In this embodiment, in addition to the big hit symbol, two types of stop symbols are prepared as small hit symbols. The special figure G shown in FIG. 154 (a) is the small hit symbol 1 and the special figure H is the small hit symbol 2. Any of the small winning symbols is a stop symbol mode in which the profit amount given to the player is a relatively small profit amount. Note that, as will be described later, the small hit symbol is a symbol that is selected in the special figure 1 but is not selected in the special figure 2.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, two types of stop symbols are prepared as lost symbols. Special figure I is a losing symbol 1, and special figure J is a losing symbol 2.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the big hit control state of the second advantage with a high advantage of the player and the first advantage with a lower advantage than the second advantage. A non-hit control state is prepared, and the pachinko machine 100 takes one of the control states of the big hit control state (second control state) and the non-hit control state (first control state). The main control unit 300 also performs the transition of these control states, and the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a control state transition unit.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as the 15R special jackpot symbol, symbols other than the two types of symbols “Special Figure A” and “Special Figure B” are also prepared. Symbols other than the two types of symbols “Fig. C” and “Special D” are also prepared, and a plurality of types of symbols are also prepared for the jackpot symbol of sudden probability change and the jackpot symbol of hidden probability change.

  FIG. 154 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the decorative pattern of the special figure. There are ten types of decoration patterns of special drawings in the present embodiment, “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. When the reserved digest condition is satisfied, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208 a, 208 b, and 208 c of the decoration symbol display device 208. “Decoration display change” is performed to switch the display in the order of “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variably displays the special symbol decorative symbols separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. And the stop symbol aspect (2nd symbol aspect) which is a combination of a decoration symbol is stopped and displayed. The variation display and stop display of the decorative symbol of the special figure are synchronized with the variation display and stop display of the symbol on the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214.

  When a 15R special jackpot ("Special Figure A" or "Special Figure B") or a 15R special jackpot ("Special Figure C" or "Special Figure D") is notified, the same decorative design is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A combination of three decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1”, “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”, etc.) is stopped and displayed. The combination of these decorative symbols is a combination of decorative symbols with a jackpot fixed with probability change. Further, among these combinations of decorative symbols, combinations of decorative symbols in which three of the same odd number of decorative symbols are arranged (for example, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”). Is a combination of 15R special jackpot-decorated decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed only in the case of 15R special jackpot that is "Special Figure A" or "Special Figure B". Further, when notifying the hidden probability change ("Special Figure F") or the small hits ("Special Figure G", "Special Figure H") of the 2R big hits, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed with " A combination of decorative symbols such as “decoration 1 -decoration 2 -decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. Further, when a sudden probability change (“special drawing E”) in the 2R jackpot is notified, a combination of decorative symbols such as “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5” is stopped and displayed. A combination of decorative symbols such as “decoration 1 -decoration 2 -decoration 3” and a combination of ornamental symbols such as “decoration 1 -decoration 3 -decoration 5” may be referred to as chance eyes. In addition, when notifying the special symbol I or the special symbol J, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c may be combined with a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of the decorative symbols described above (for example, a variety of symbols). Eye) is stopped.

  Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of the “variable display of the decorative symbol of the special symbol” until the stop symbol mode (combination of decorative symbols) of the decorative symbol of the special symbol is stopped is displayed as the special symbol. It may be referred to as a variable display of decorative patterns for use. The variation display of the special-purpose decorative symbol is performed under the control of the first sub-control unit 400.

  As described above, the special symbols 1 and 2 shown in the stop symbol mode (see FIG. 121 (a)) and one special symbol displayed in each of the left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. The decorative pattern of the decorative pattern (see (c) of the figure) is larger in the decorative pattern of the special figure (see (c) of the figure).

  FIG. 154 (c) is a diagram showing an example of the stop symbol mode (first symbol mode) of the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed after the variable symbol display on the normal symbol display device 210. FIG. In the present embodiment, two types of winning symbols (“Typical A” and “Typical B”) and one type of off-set symbol (“Typical C”) are prepared as the stop symbols for the normal. . “Common map A” is the winning symbol 1 and “Utsu figure B” is the winning symbol 2. Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, detects that the sphere has passed through the general start port 228, the general display display device 210 illuminates all seven segments and the central one segment. Repeat the lighting and perform “variable display of ordinary figure” (ordinary figure fluctuation game). Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, the usual stop symbol mode shown in FIG. 154 (c) is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 154 (c), the white portions in the drawing indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  Hereinafter, the display from the start of the “variable display of the normal figure” to the stop display of the stop pattern of the normal figure may be referred to as a normal variable display. The universal symbol display device 210 corresponds to an example of an auxiliary symbol notification unit, a first symbol display unit, or a simple symbol display unit.

  In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 also displays a variation of the normal decorative symbol. FIG. 154 (d) is a diagram showing a stop symbol form of a usual decorative symbol. Although the decorative display of the normal symbol will be described in detail later, the stop symbol mode shown in FIG. 4D is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 after the variable symbol variable display of the general symbol is displayed. In other words, when the universal symbol display device 210 stops displaying the winning symbol 1 (“common symbol A”) shown in FIG. 10C, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “general symbol” shown in FIG. In the case where “decoration 1” is stopped and displayed, and the normal symbol display device 210 stops and displays the winning symbol 2 (“common symbol B”) shown in FIG. ) Is displayed in a stopped manner, and in both cases, the hit of the general map is notified. In addition, when the universal symbol display device 210 stops and displays the off symbol (“common symbol C”) shown in FIG. 10C, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the “general symbol decoration” shown in FIG. 3 ”is stopped and the usual deviation is notified. It should be noted that the normal symbol variation display in the general symbol display device 210 and the normal symbol variation display in the decorative symbol display device 208 may be synchronized or may not be synchronized.

  Next, the normal / no-go determination in the present embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, left-handed in the non-electric support state and right-handed in the electric support state. When left-handed in the non-electric support state, whether or not the normal game is successful is determined based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the general game start opening (gate) 228 provided in the left region. Further, when the player makes a right turn in the electric support state, whether or not the normal game is successful is determined based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the general game start opening (gate) 228 provided in the right region. Even when the game ball passes through the normal start port 228 provided in the right area even though it is in the non-electric support state, it is left even though it is in the electric support state. Even if the game ball passes through the general start port 228 provided in the left area, the determination of whether or not the normal map is made is performed. However, if the usual-pending digestion condition is not satisfied, whether or not the usual-plot is successful is not performed. The requirement to establish the “Usu” hold-up condition here is when there is a hold of the “Usu”, the electric chew is not operating, and the “Utsu” variable game is not being played, and the “Usu map” is not displayed. This is a requirement that holds true. In addition, when there is no holding of the usual figure, when the electric chew is not operated, and the usual figure variable game is not being performed and the usual figure confirmation display is not being performed, the figure is opened through the start opening (gate) 228. This is a requirement that holds even when the ball passes.

  The normal / unusual determination table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 in this embodiment.

  FIG. 155 (a) is a diagram showing a normal probability determination low probability table, and FIG. 155 (b) is a diagram showing a general probability determination high probability table.

  In the present embodiment, when a general-purpose random number acquisition condition is satisfied, one set of random values (starting information) is stored in a general-purpose holding storage unit provided in the RAM 308. The requirement for establishment of the common figure random number acquisition condition here is a requirement established based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the common figure start port (gate) 228. In other words, in a state where the number of ordinary holds is less than a predetermined upper limit, this is a requirement that is established when a game ball passes through the general opening 228, and in a state where the number of ordinary holds is a predetermined upper limit, This is a requirement that does not hold even if a game ball passes through the normal start port 228. In the present embodiment, a universal winning random number value and a universal determination random number value are stored as random number values (starting information) for one set in the universal figure storage unit.

  In the usual-time determination processing, the time reduction flag is referred to and the determination is made based on whether or not the current control state is the electric support state. If the time reduction flag is off (if it is in the non-electric support state), whether or not the normal time is determined using the low probability table shown in FIG. 155 (a), and if the time reduction flag is on (electric support) If it is in the state), the normal determination is made using the high probability table shown in FIG. The determination of whether or not a common figure is made is performed based on a random number value for a common figure winning in the starting information extracted from the general figure holding storage unit of the RAM 308 (a possible range is 0 to 65535). The hit probability of the usual figure is 65532/65536 in the low probability table shown in FIG. 155 (a), and 655341/65536 in the high probability table shown in FIG. 155 (b). Although it is almost equivalent to the determination of whether or not to win, the probability of winning per normal figure is higher in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state. Here, deriving “winning” or “losing” is equivalent to the normal-win / no-go determination (lottery), and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the normal-win / no-win determination processing here is the first win / fail determination means. This corresponds to an example of (auxiliary success / failure determination means). In addition, the usual “hit” hit determination result corresponds to an example of a specific hit determination result.

  When the determination of whether or not the usual figure is completed is completed, the stop symbol form of the ordinary figure is determined. In addition, it is good also considering the determination of a common figure and the determination of the stop symbol aspect of a common figure together as the determination of a normal figure's success / failure (first success / failure determination).

  FIG. 155 (c) is a diagram showing a low probability table for normal determination, and FIG. 155 (d) is a diagram showing a high probability table for normal determination.

  Also in the common map determination process, the time stamp flag is referred to, and the general map determination is performed based on whether or not the current control state is the electric support state. If the time reduction flag is turned off (if it is in the non-electric support state), the general decision is made using the low probability table shown in FIG. 155 (c), and if the time reduction flag is turned on (in the electric support state) If there is any), the general map is determined using the high probability table shown in FIG. In this common figure determination process, it is performed based on a common figure decision random number value (acquisable range is 0 to 99) in the start information extracted from the common figure holding storage unit of the RAM 308. In the low-probability state (non-electric support), 99% of the winning symbols are awarded to Symbol 1 (Normal Diagram A), and 1% of the probability is awarded to Symbol 2 (Normal Diagram B). . On the other hand, in the normal figure high probability state (electric support state), the symbol 2 per common figure (normal figure B) is won with a probability of 100%. Since there is only one type of lost symbol, the common symbol determination process based on the common symbol determination random number value may be omitted.

  The determination as to whether or not the usual figure is true may be derived from “winning” or “losing”. Alternatively, the determination as to whether or not a normal figure is acceptable may be derived up to a general symbol.

  The fluctuation time is written for reference in both the common figure determination table shown in FIG. 155 (c) and the common figure determination table shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the usual figure in the ordinary figure display device 210 is uniformly 1 second in the electric support state, and is uniformly 20 seconds in the non-electric support state. Therefore, the usual fluctuation time is a relatively short first fluctuation time in the electric support state, and a relatively long second fluctuation time in the electric support state. In addition, when the standard random number acquisition condition is established, the random number value for determining the standard variable period is acquired together with the standard random number value and the standard random number value, and the variable time of the standard figure is determined by lottery. Also good.

  Next, an opening / closing operation of the pair of blade members 2321 performed by the main control unit 300, that is, an opening / closing pattern of the electric chew will be described.

  FIG. 156 (a) is a diagram for explaining an open / close pattern of an electric chew in the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment.

  If the result of the usual figure determination is ordinary figure A, after the ordinary figure decoration 1 is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the electric Chu opens once for 0.3 seconds. Even in the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment, the launch interval of the game balls by the launcher 110 is 0.6 seconds, and in the case of the hit pattern of the general figure A, one opening time of the pair of blade members 2321 is a game It is shorter than the launch interval of the spheres, and even if it is elected per the usual figure of Fig. A, it is virtually impossible to enter the electric Chu, and it is almost impossible to acquire the exit ball. Hereinafter, the winning of the usual figure A and the opening of the pair of blade members 232a may be referred to as electric Chu short opening. This electric chew short open (corresponding to the first open pattern) stochastically becomes an electric chew open pattern in the non-electric support state.

  When the result of the universal figure determination is normal figure B, after the universal figure decoration 2 is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the electric Chu first opens for 0.3 seconds, After a 0.5 second closure time, a 5 second release is performed. That is, the electric Chu performs a specific operation (opening / closing operation of the pair of blade members 232a) for 5.8 seconds. Hereinafter, the winning of the normal figure B and the opening of the pair of blade members 232a may be referred to as electric tulong opening. With this electric-chu-long opening (corresponding to the second opening pattern), it is expected that the player will enter the electric chew, and it can be highly expected that he will get out. In the electric Chu long opening, the blade member 2321 may be opened at least longer than the firing interval or longer than the normal fluctuation time in the electric support state, and the first 0.3 second opening is omitted. Then, only the second long opening may be performed. This electric-chu-long opening stochastically becomes an electric-chu opening pattern in the electric support state.

  If there is a predetermined number of balls before the predetermined opening time elapses, the electric chew is closed at that time.

  In the case where the universal figure determination result is the universal figure C, after the universal figure decoration 3 is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the electric chew does not open and maintains the closed state.

  Next, a first effect (hereinafter referred to as a normal drawing effect) performed on the sub-control unit side (second sub-control unit 500) will be described. The ordinary drawing effect in this embodiment includes at least one effect of a changing effect, a finalizing effect, and an operating effect, or includes a predetermined area in the decorative symbol display device 208. It is sufficient that the effect is performed in the area. The changing effect is an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 during the normal symbol change display by the general symbol display device 210, and the finalizing effect determines the stop symbol pattern of the normal diagram by the general symbol display device 210. This is an effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during display, and the in-operation effect is an effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the operation of the electric chew. In addition, these effects are effects in which an effect related to the result of determination of whether or not a special figure (for example, a notice per universal figure) and an effect related to the result of whether or not a special figure is determined (for example, a special figure big hit notice) are added. There may be an effect related to the result of the determination of whether or not the special drawing is performed instead of the effect related to the result of the determination of whether or not the normal drawing is received. As will be described in detail later, the general drawing effect is executed in an area including a predetermined area provided between the area for displaying the hold icon of FIG. 1 and the area for displaying the hold icon of FIG. .

FIG. 156 (b) is a diagram for explaining several examples of the usual drawing effects in the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment.
(A)-(f) are the change display patterns in a non-electric support state.

  (A) is a variation display pattern (the above-mentioned variation effect) of the usual decorative pattern. In the effect shown in (a), high-speed fluctuations are repeated in the order of general decoration 1, general decoration 2, and general decoration 3, and after 3 seconds, the decorative pattern of the general graphic representing the result of determining the general graphic is stopped and displayed.

  (A) is also a variation display pattern (the above-mentioned variation effect) of a normal decoration symbol. In the effect shown in (a), high-speed fluctuation is repeated in the order of general decoration 2, general decoration 2, and general decoration 3, and the decorative pattern of the general graphic representing the general graphic determination result is stopped and displayed after 15 seconds. In this effect, many ordinary decorations 2 are displayed during high-speed fluctuations, so that the degree of expectation for opening the electric tulong is improved.

  (C) is also a variation display pattern (the above-mentioned variation effect) of the usual decorative pattern. In the effect shown in (c), high-speed fluctuation in which the general decoration 2 is continuously displayed is repeated and stopped after 10 seconds. In this effect, since only the ordinary figure decoration 2 is displayed continuously, the stop display also becomes the ordinary figure decoration 2. Therefore, when this effect is started, the electric tulong release is confirmed.

  (D) is also a variation display pattern (the above-described variation effect) of the usual decorative pattern. In the production shown in this (d), repeated high-speed fluctuations in the order of Ordinary decoration 1, Ordinary decoration 2, Ordinary decoration 3, and "Gekiatsu", which represents the special jackpot notice, repeated 10 seconds later, One of the decorative symbols stops. Therefore, there is a case where the decoration pattern of “Gekiatsu” is stopped and displayed. In this case, the expectation of opening the electric tulong does not increase, but the expectation of the big hit of the special figure increases and the interest of the game is improved. . In other words, there is a case where not only the electric chew opening but also a big hit can be expected.

  (E) is also a variation display pattern (the above-described variation effect) of the usual decorative symbol. In the production shown in (e), high-speed fluctuations were repeated in the order of Ordinary decoration 2 and “Gatsu Atsu”, which represents the special jackpot notice, and after 10 seconds, either the Ordinary decoration 2 or “Geki Atsu” One of the decorative symbols is stopped. In this effect, half of the special figure jackpot notice is displayed during high-speed fluctuations, so there are cases in which not only the electric chew release but also the special figure jackpots can be expected from the high-speed fluctuation.

  In the variation display pattern shown in (f), a “latent” decorative symbol representing a 2R jackpot notice that is a latent probability change of a special figure, a “surprise” decorative pattern representing a 2R jackpot notice that is a sudden probability of a special figure, High-speed fluctuation is repeated in the order of the “big hit” decorative symbol representing the special 15R jackpot notice, and any decorative symbol is stopped and displayed after 5 seconds. When this effect is started, the opening of the variable prize opening 234 is confirmed.

  The variation display pattern described above may be such that the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in accordance with the end timing of the regular symbol variation display by the universal symbol display device 210. In particular, in the case of a normal figure, since the electric chew is released thereafter, the timing of the end of the symbol variation display by the general diagram display device 210 is matched with the timing of the production end of (a) to (e), It is preferable to notify the player of the opening of the electric chew. On the other hand, in particular, in the case of a deviation from the usual figure, it is not always necessary to make the timings coincide with each other, and any timing during the 20-second symbol variation display by the universal figure display device 210 may be used. For example, the general symbol effect may be started before the start of the symbol variation display by the general symbol display device 210, or may be continued until after the symbol variation display by the general symbol display device 210 is completed. Furthermore, since the effect shown in (f) is an effect related to the result of determination of whether or not a special figure is appropriate, it may be performed during a period when the symbol variation display by the general figure display device 210 is not performed. In addition, the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed after the decorative symbol variation display may be a decorative symbol representing a fake general symbol determination result or a fake jackpot notice.

  (Ki) is an example of the effect during operation. In the effect during operation shown in (ki), after the symbol variation display by the universal symbol display device 210 in the non-electric support state, the decoration symbol in which the character of the frog is carrying a peace sign is displayed on the ornament symbol display device 208. The In the non-electric support state, in many cases, the winning of the electric chew short is won, but during the electric chew short opening, the operating effect shown in (ki) is suddenly executed for a moment. In addition, when electing to open the electric Chu long, the in-operation effects shown in (ki) are executed for 5.8 seconds during which the electric Chu opens and closes. The in-operation effects shown in (ki) may be executed only while the electric Chu is open for 5 seconds, or only while the electric Chu is initially open for 0.3 seconds ( An effect during operation shown in (g) may be executed. Hereinafter, an effect in which a decorative symbol in which the Tono-sama character is performing a peace sign is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be referred to as an electric chew release notification effect.

  The in-operation effects shown in (ki) may be executed immediately after the final display of the general map B by the general map display device 210 is completed (immediately before the electric chew operation).

  In addition, not only in the non-electric support state but also in the electric support state, even when the electric tulong release is won, the in-operation effects shown in (ki) may be executed. In this case, after the symbol variation display for 1 second is performed, in many cases, the electrified long open is won, and during the 5.8 seconds during which the electrified opens and closes, the in-motion effects shown in (ki) are executed. do it. In addition, when the winning of the electric chew short is won, it may be executed for a moment during the opening of the electric chew short for 0.3 seconds.

  In addition, the production time (first time) of the variable display pattern shown in FIGS. 156 (b) (i) to (e) is the production of the electric chew release notification production pattern shown in (ki) of FIG. 156 (b). Since it is a time longer than the time (second time) and the usual decorative symbol variation display effect is performed in a relatively long effect time, the expectation for the opening of the electric chew may be improved.

  (K) is an example of the effect of the jackpot notice of the special figure fluctuation. The effect shown in (K) is executed in an area including a predetermined area in the decorative symbol display device 208 regardless of the symbol variation display by the general symbol display device 210 or the electric chew operation. In other words, even when the symbol variation display by the general symbol display device 210 is not being performed or the electric chew is not being operated, it is executed during the symbol variation display by the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214. This is an effect of notifying that the jackpot symbol will be stopped and displayed in the variation display, and an effect of notifying that the jackpot symbol will be stopped and displayed even if the jackpot symbol is not stopped and displayed in the variation display ( So-called fake notice effects) are also included. Here, the “Hidden” decorative symbol that represents the 2R jackpot notice that is the special probability of the latent figure change, the “Random” decorative symbol that represents the 2R jackpot notice that is the sudden probability of the special figure, and the 15R jackpot notice of the special figure The high-speed variation is repeated in the order of the “big hit” decorative symbol and the “super hot” decorative symbol indicating the special symbol big hit notice, and one of the decorative symbols stops and displays after 8 seconds. Note that a decorative pattern of a picture may be used instead of the decorative pattern of a character.

  In addition, the electric chew release notification effect of (ki) shown in FIG. 156 (b) may be executed after the respective effects (a) to (f) and (ku) shown in FIG. 156 (b). That is, the electric chew release notification effect may be performed in combination with the variable display pattern. Furthermore, the electric chew release notification effect may not be executed when the electric chew short is opened, but may be executed when the electric chew long is opened. By doing so, only when the electric chew is open advantageous for the player, the electric chew release notification effect is performed, and it may be possible to increase the player's expectation. In addition, when the normal map A is stopped and displayed, the effects (decorative symbol variation display effects) shown in (a) to (f) and (ku) shown in FIG. In the case where the general effect B is stopped and displayed, the notification effects are not executed, and the respective effects (decorative symbol variation display effects) shown in FIG. 156 (b) are executed. Later, an electric chew release notification effect may also be executed. By doing so, the decorative symbol variation display effect can be performed only when the electric chew is advantageously opened, and it may be possible to increase the player's expectation.

  Further, the ordinary drawing effect may be an effect of displaying the ordinary figure decorative symbol shown in FIG. 154 (d) as the finalizing effect without performing the variation display of the ordinary symbol decorative effect (the above-described changing effect). In addition, the effect during the finalization may be performed, and in the case of the usual figure, the effect of performing the electric chew release notification effect may be used. In addition, even if it is per map, it may be an effect that performs an electric chew release notification effect only for the general map B where the electric chew long open is performed, or in the sense of performing a rare display in a very short time, It may be an effect of performing an electric chew release notification effect only for the usual figure A in which the electric chew short open is performed.

Subsequently, a general drawing effect determination process executed by the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing the flow of the ordinary drawing effect determination process.

  The first sub-control unit 400 is transmitted with a normal change start command from the main control unit 300. The general drawing effect determination process shown in FIG. 157 is started when the first sub-control unit 400 receives this general figure change start command. The usual figure change start command includes information indicating the current control state (whether or not the electric support state is set) and a usual figure determination result. The first sub-control unit 400 also receives a general-purpose hold increase command from the main control unit 300. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the general-purpose hold increase command, the general-purpose effect determination process is started. It may be.

  First, it is determined whether or not the non-electric support is in effect based on the information indicating the current control state included in the general figure change start command (step S601). The determination process ends. If it is in the non-electric support state, it is determined whether or not the ordinary drawing effect is executed (step S602). In the determination here, for example, if the usual figure determination result included in the ordinary figure change start command is the ordinary figure B, the ordinary figure effect is executed. Further, even if the ordinary map determination result is the ordinary map C, it may be executed as a fake ordinary drawing effect. Further, a dedicated random number may be acquired, and a lottery for whether or not to perform a normal drawing effect may be performed. In particular, when the normal map determination result is the normal map C, the execution of the fake general map effect may be determined by a lottery process. Alternatively, if the special symbol variation start command is received and the special symbol variation is being executed, the regular symbol effect may be performed. In this case, it is preferable to execute a general drawing effect including a special jackpot notice effect. In addition, when the symbol variation of the special figure is being executed and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed due to the symbol variation, the jackpot notice effect of the special symbol may be executed as a general drawing effect, Even if the jackpot symbol is not stopped and displayed, the jackpot notice effect of a fake special symbol may be executed. In addition, the execution of the special bonus jackpot notice here may be executed when an effective / not effective lottery is performed and the lottery is won.

  If the ordinary drawing effect is not executed, the ordinary drawing effect determining process is ended. If the ordinary drawing effect is executed, it is determined whether or not it is during a predetermined period (step S603). In the present embodiment, during the special figure jackpot game (when the attacker opens / closes), or during the production of the special figure with a high expectation level (for example, during the super reach in the variation display of the special figure decoration symbol) Refrain from performing each of the effects (a) to (e) and (c) shown in 156 (b). The predetermined period here is during a special hit game of a special figure and during a performance with a high expectation level of the special figure jackpot. If it is not during this predetermined period, an effect pattern is selected from all the effect patterns ((a) to (ku)) shown in FIG. 156 (b) (step S604), and the process proceeds to step S606. 156 (b) may be executed after the respective effects (a) to (e) shown in FIG. 156 (b), or may be executed as shown in FIG. 156 (b). Only the electric-chu release notification effect may be executed without executing any of the effects (a) to (e) shown in FIG. If it is not during the predetermined period, an effect pattern may be selected from effects other than the electric chew release notification effect ((a) to (e) and (ku) shown in FIG. 156 (b)).

  On the contrary, if it is during the predetermined period, an effect pattern of only the electric chew release notification effect shown in FIG. 156 (b) is selected (step S605), and the process proceeds to step S606. In this way, during the big hit game, the decorative symbol variation display effects of (a) to (e) and (ku) shown in FIG. There may be cases where it is only the presentation time of the notification effect and the player can be concentrated on the big hit game.

  In step S606, information representing the effect pattern selected in step S604 or step S605 is set in the ordinary drawing effect command and transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, and the ordinary drawing effect determining process ends. The second sub-control unit 500 that has received the ordinary drawing effect command controls the decorative symbol display device 208 based on information representing the effect pattern included in the ordinary drawing effect command, and sets a predetermined area in the decorative symbol display device 208. A general drawing effect is executed in the area that includes it.

  As described above, in this embodiment, if the current control state is the electric support state, the ordinary drawing effect is not executed by the determination in step S601. In addition, when the current control state is the electric support state, instead of not uniformly executing the ordinary drawing effect, perform a lottery to determine whether or not to execute the ordinary drawing effect with a predetermined probability. Also good. As described above, in this embodiment, the ordinary drawing effect is an effect that is more easily executed in the non-electric support state than in the electric support state. Since the non-electric support state is a state in which it is difficult for a game ball to win the electric chew, there is a case where it can be expected that the game ball wins the electric chew. On the other hand, since the electric support state is a state in which a game ball is likely to win the electric chew, there is a possibility that the player's expectation will not be improved so much even if the usual drawing effect is performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, during a predetermined period such as during a big hit game, the changing effect and the determined effect are not uniformly performed according to the determination in step S603, and only the electric chew release notification effect is performed. In addition, during the predetermined period, instead of uniformly executing the changing production and the finalizing production, perform a lottery to determine whether or not to execute the changing production and the finalizing production with a predetermined probability. Also good. Further, during the predetermined period, the changing effect or the determined effect may not be performed, and the normal drawing effect may not be performed uniformly. Or, even if it is performed, it is possible to perform a lottery to determine whether or not to execute, and to execute only the electric chew release notification effect with a predetermined probability. That is, the first effect may be an effect that is easier to execute in the non-hit control state than in the big hit control state. Winning of a normal chart is also a factor that improves the chances of a special chart's success determination (big win lottery), so the player can be expected by performing the general drawing performance in a non-hit game There is. Also, in general, there are more attacker balls than electric chews. When the electric chew is placed on the upper or upstream side of the attacker, the opening of the electric chew during the big hit game will win the attacker. May be disturbed. For this reason, it may be possible to reduce the dissatisfaction of the player by making it difficult to perform the usual drawing effect during the big hit game.
Here, the determination of whether or not a special figure is appropriate will also be described.

  In the present embodiment, when the special figure starting information acquisition condition is satisfied, one set of random value (starting information) is stored in the special figure 1 holding storage unit or the special figure 2 holding storage unit provided in the RAM 308. The requirement for establishment of the special figure random number acquisition condition here is a requirement that is established based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first special figure starting port 230 for the special figure 1. That is, in the state where the number of holdings in FIG. 1 is less than the predetermined upper limit number, it is a requirement that is satisfied when a game ball enters the first special figure starting port 230, and the number of holdings in FIG. In a certain state, it is a requirement that does not hold even if a game ball enters the first special figure starting port 230. The special figure 2 is a requirement established based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second special figure starting port 232 (electric Chu). That is, in the state where the number of holdings in the special figure 2 is less than the predetermined upper limit number, it is a requirement that is satisfied when a game ball enters the second special figure starting port 232, and the holding number in the special figure 2 is the predetermined upper limit number. In a certain state, it is a requirement that does not hold even if a game ball enters the second special figure starting port 232. In the present embodiment, the special figure 1 winning random number value, the special figure 1 decision random value, and the special figure 1 variation time decision random value are stored as one set of random value (starting information) in the special figure 1 holding storage unit. To do. Further, the special figure 2 winning random number value, the special figure 2 determined random value, and the special figure 2 variation time determining random value are stored as one set of random value (starting information) in the special figure 2 holding storage unit.

  FIG. 158 (a) is a diagram showing a high probability table for success / failure determination of special figure, and FIG. 158 (b) is a diagram showing a low probability table for success / failure determination of special figure. These tables are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  When the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 retrieves the start information from the holding storage unit of the RAM 308, the CPU 304 refers to the probability variation flag, and if the probability variation flag is on, the special diagram high probability state exists. 1 is based on which random number range in the winning probability determination high probability table shown in FIG. 158 (a) belongs to the winning random number value (both possible numerical range is 0 to 65535). Deriving "big hit" or "losing". On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is off, the special figure low-probability state is set, so that either the special figure 2 winning random number value or the special figure 1 winning random value is any random number in the high-probability determination table shown in FIG. 158 (b). Based on whether it belongs to the range, “big hit” or “losing” is derived as the special figure 2 win / fail judgment result.

  In this embodiment, the big hit probability is about 1/400 in the special figure low probability state, whereas it is about 1/40 in the special figure high probability state.

  In the present embodiment, the small hit is not in the special figure 2 but only in the special figure 1. Accordingly, if the result of the determination of success / failure using the special figure 1 winning random number value is a loss, a small hit determination is performed.

  FIG. 158 (c) is a diagram showing a table for determining small hits stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

In the small hit determination only in the special figure 1, the special figure 1 winning random number value is used again to perform the small hit determination.
In addition, like FIG. 1, you may provide a small hit in special figure 2. FIG.

In this way, “big hit”, “small hit”, or “lack” is derived as the special figure 1 determination result. Further, “big hit” or “losing” is derived as the special figure 2 determination result.
Next, the symbol of the special figure is determined based on the special figure determination result.

  FIG. 158 (d) is a diagram showing a special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. This special figure determination table includes a special symbol stop symbol pattern (see FIG. 154 (a) for each big hit (Special Figure A to Special Figure F), small hit (Special Figure G, H), and out (Special Figure I, J). ))) Is specified. Special figure 2 does not have a random number range corresponding to each of special figure F to special figure H. In special figure 2, the big hit is 15R special big hit (special figures A and B), 15R normal big hit. (Special figure C, D), suddenly a 2R big hit symbol (special figure E), which is a probable change, and no small hit.

  The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 is a special figure 1 random value or a special figure 2 random value out of one set of random values previously acquired from the special figure 1 reservation storage part or the special figure 2 reservation storage part of the RAM 308. A special figure is determined using a numerical value (a numerical range that can be taken together is 0 to 99).

  The winning probability of the 15R special jackpot (Special Figures A and B), which is the most advantageous for the game, is 70% in the case of Special Figure 2, whereas it is 30% in the case of Special Figure 1. 2 is a big hit which is more advantageous than that of FIG. Thus, in this embodiment, the special figure 2 is more likely to generate a big hit advantageous to the player than the special figure 1.

  The determination of whether or not the special figure is true may be derived from “big hit”, “small hit”, or “lack”, or may be derived from “big hit” or “lack”. Alternatively, whether or not a special figure is appropriate may be derived up to a special figure symbol.

  Next, specific examples of effects in the present embodiment will be described. First, a description will be given using FIGS. 159 to 163. FIG. 159 is a diagram showing a 1/5 portion of a specific example of the effect in this embodiment, FIG. 160 is a diagram showing 2/5 part of a specific example of the effect in this embodiment, and FIG. 161 is this embodiment. FIG. 162 is a diagram illustrating a 4/5 portion of a specific example of the effect in the present embodiment, and FIG. 163 is a specific example of the effect in the present embodiment. It is a figure showing 5/5 part, and FIGS. 159-163 is an example connected to one.

  A decorative symbol display device 208 is shown in each of the diagrams in FIGS. 159 to 163. Also, below the decorative symbol display device 208, a general-purpose display device 210, a first special figure display device 212, and a second special figure display device 214 are shown. The common figure display device 210 is a seven-segment display device shown on the rightmost side, the second special figure display device 214 is a seven-segment display device shown on the leftmost side, and the first special figure display device 212 is 7-segment display device shown in the center. In these 7-segment display devices, only the horizontal segment at the center in the vertical direction is lit while the symbol is changing. In addition, the location of the segment where the black part is lit is shown.

  Also, between FIGS. 159 (a) and (b), a state in which the game ball B is about to pass through the general start port 228 is shown. Furthermore, in FIGS. 159 (ki) and (ku), FIG. 160 (ke) and (ko), FIG. 161 (su) and (ta), FIG. 162 (d), FIG. 163 (no) and (e), An electric Chu (second special figure starting port 232 and a pair of blade members 232a) is shown.

  Further, a special figure 1 hold display area 281 is prepared on the left side of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a special figure 2 hold display area 282 is prepared on the right side thereof. Further, a special drawing effect area 283 corresponding to an example of the predetermined area described above is provided between the special figure 1 hold display area 281 and the special figure 2 hold display area 282. That is, the general drawing effect area 283 is provided in the center portion of the effect display area 208d.

Whether the special figure 1 hold display area 281 or the special figure 2 hold display area 282, the hold icon is displayed on the normal drawing effect area 283 side (center side) as the old hold icon. That is, in the special figure 1 hold, the first hold icon representing the first hold with the oldest winning timing is displayed on the left side of the ordinary drawing effect area 283, and in the special figure 2 hold, the first winning icon with the oldest winning timing is displayed. A second hold icon representing 2 hold is displayed on the right side of the ordinary drawing effect area 283. In the special figure 1 hold display area 281 shown in FIG. 159 (a), one special figure 1 hold icon (first special figure 1 hold icon) 2811 indicating that there is one special figure 1 hold is shown. Has been. The default mode of the special figure 1 hold icon is a black circle. The first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 is displayed on the left side of the general drawing effect area 283. In addition, in the special figure 2 hold display area 282 shown in FIG. 159 (ku), there is one special figure 2 hold icon (first special figure 2 hold icon) 2821 indicating that there is one hold of the special figure 2. It is shown. The default mode of the special figure 2 hold icon is a white circle different from the default mode of the special figure 1 hold icon so that it can be distinguished from the special figure 1 hold icon. The first special figure 2 hold icon 2821 is displayed on the right side of the general drawing effect area 283.
Furthermore, the pachinko machine of this embodiment is also a special figure 2 priority change machine.

  The state shown in FIG. 159 (a) is a non-electric support state, there is no special figure 2 hold, and one special figure hold is left, and the first special figure display device 212 displays a symbol variation display. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variable display shown in FIG. 1 is displayed. On the other hand, the symbol display device 210 does not perform symbol variation display, and the symbol of the usual symbol decoration 3 as the previous result is still displayed in the symbol effect area 283 of the ornament symbol display device 208. . When the general symbol display device 210 does not perform symbol variation display, no symbol may be displayed in the general symbol effect area 283.

  Here, since the player is in the non-electric support state, the player is left-handed, and eventually, one game ball B passes through the general game start port 228 provided in the left region, and the general game display device 210 Then, the symbol variation display is started.

  In the ordinary drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The usual decorative pattern variation display pattern here is the variation display pattern shown in FIG. Further, in this decorative symbol display device 208, a character C1 of a haniwa that imitates a cactus appears as an effect of a big hit notice of Special Figure 1. The character C1 is displayed larger than the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the foot portion hides a part of the normal drawing effect area 283 where the variable display is performed. As a result, it is difficult to visually recognize the fluctuation display of the usual decorative pattern, and the interest of the game is improved. However, the symbol variation display on the general-purpose display device 210 can be viewed well. In addition, you may hide all the usual drawing effect area | regions 283 by the character C1.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (c), the character C1 disappears, and the decorative display of the special symbol 1 is changed to a reach effect. By the disappearance of the character C1, the symbol variation display in the normal drawing effect area 283 can be visually recognized well.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (d), the decorative symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is developed into super reach, and the decorative symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is small in the left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. A housemaid character C2 appears as an effect of super reach. Super reach itself is a type of jackpot notice, and the super reach production also corresponds to the jackpot notice. The character C2 is also displayed larger than the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the foot portion hides a part of the normal drawing effect area 283 where the variable display is performed. As a result, it is difficult to visually recognize the fluctuation display of the usual decorative pattern, and the interest of the game is improved. However, the symbol variation display on the general-purpose display device 210 can be viewed well. Note that the general drawing effect area 283 may be entirely hidden by the character C2. Further, when the super reach is developed, the hold icon that has been displayed so far (here, the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811) disappears. Here, although part of the general drawing effect area 283 is hidden by the character C2, the variation display of the decorative pattern of the special figure 1 is not moved to the left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the A part may be hidden by the variable display of the decorative pattern of the special figure 1. The mode of hiding a part or all of the general drawing effect area 283 by the variation display of the special symbol decoration pattern is not limited to the super reach, and any timing may be used as long as the special diagram variation display is in progress.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (e), a disappointing effect is performed in which the decorative symbol that stops in the middle symbol display area 208b is the ornament 7 in the state where the maiden character C2 appears. In 159 (f), the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212 is finished, the stop symbol is displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is a combination of the decorative symbols that are out of place “decoration 6-decoration 7”. -Decoration 6 "is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, the symbol variation display in the general symbol display device 210 is also ended, and the non-electric support state is displayed, but the general symbol B is stopped and displayed in the general symbol effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208. The fluctuation display is ended, and the general decoration 2 corresponding to the general map B is stopped and displayed. As a result, the electric long opening is performed.

  In FIG. 159 (ki), the electric-chu-long opening is started, and in the ordinary drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the electric-chu opening notification effect (the character of Tono-sama is a piece) shown in (ki) of FIG. 156 (b). An effect in which a decorative design that is signed is displayed). In addition, the suspension of the remaining one special figure 1 is exhausted, the first special figure display device 212 starts the symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variation display of the special symbol 1.

  In FIG. 159 (ku), a game ball enters an electric chew that has been in an open state for 5 seconds, and the holding in FIG. 2 increases by one. Display of one special figure 2 hold icon 2821 (first special figure 2 hold icon 2821) indicating that there is one special figure 2 hold in the special figure 2 hold display area 282 of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is started. In addition, the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212 is ended, the stop symbol is displayed, and the decoration symbol display device 208 displays “decoration 5 -decoration 3 -decoration 4” which is a combination of the decorative symbols that are not included. Stopped display.

  Next, the first hold of the special figure 2 represented by the first special figure 2 hold icon 2821 shown in FIG. 159 (K) is digested, and the second special figure display device 214 starts the symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, the variation display of the decorative pattern of the special figure 2 is started. Moreover, in the electric Chu, the opening for 5 seconds is continued, two game balls enter the electric Chu, and the holding of the special figure 2 increases by two. In the special figure 2 hold display area 282 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 160 (K), the first special figure 2 hold icon 2821 and the second special figure 2 representing that there are two hold of the special figure 2. A hold icon 2822 is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a princess character C3 appears as an effect of the big hit notice of the special figure 2. The character C3 is also displayed larger than the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the foot portion hides a part of the general symbol effect area 283 where the electric chew release notification effect is performed. . As a result, it is difficult to visually recognize the electric chew release notification effect in the usual decorative design, and the interest of the game is improved. In other words, the normal drawing effect (in this case, the electric chew release notification effect) is difficult to visually recognize due to the predetermined effect (big hit notice effect) of the special figure 2 based on the entrance of the electric chew release. Players are more likely to perform during special symbol fluctuations (during special symbol decoration fluctuations) that occur when winning a prize while opening an electric chew (in this case, a jackpot announcement effect) In some cases, the entertainment of the game may be improved by giving priority to the effect that the player is interested in and making the other (here, the electric-chu release notification effect) difficult to see. In addition, as described with reference to FIG. 158 (d), in the special figure variation of FIG. 2 performed here, the 15R special jackpot advantageous to the player is more likely to occur than the special figure variation of FIG. Therefore, there are cases where the character C3 that gives notice of the occurrence of an advantageous jackpot can be conspicuous. Note that the general drawing effect area 283 may be entirely hidden by the character C3. On the other hand, in the general map display device 210, the general map B remains stopped and displayed, but the general map display device 210 can be seen well.

  In FIG. 160 (ko), the opening of the electric chew for 5 seconds is completed, and the electric chew returns to the closed state. In addition, the electric chew release notification effect in the normal drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 160 (K) is also ended, and here, no symbols are displayed in the normal effect effect area 283. Further, in the decorative design display device 208, the character C3 disappears, and the decorative design of FIG. Since the character C3 has disappeared, no symbols are displayed, but the normal drawing effect area 283 can be viewed well.

  In addition, between FIG. 159 (A) and FIG. 160 (C), the game ball has passed through the usual figure starting port 228, and the usual figure hold is accumulated.

  160 (sa) starts the symbol variation display, but no symbol is displayed in the ordinary drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 160 (sa). In addition, the usual display of decorative symbols is not executed. This is because, in the determination in step S602 shown in FIG. 157, it is decided not to perform the ordinary drawing effect because the ordinary figure determination result included in the ordinary figure change start command is the ordinary figure A. . Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the decorative symbol of the special figure 2 is developed into super reach, and a female character C2 appears as an effect of super reach. This character C2 is also displayed larger than the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the foot part hides a part of the general drawing effect area 283, making it difficult to see the normal drawing effect area 283. And the fun of gaming is improved. No symbol is displayed in the general drawing effect area 283, but it is difficult for the player to know whether or not the variation display of the decorative symbol of the general symbol is being performed, and the interest of the game is improved.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 160 (S), a big hit notification effect is performed in which the decorative symbol that stops in the middle symbol display area 208b is the ornament 7 in the state where the maiden character C2 appears. In FIG. 161 (s), the symbol variation display of the second special symbol display device 214 is finished, the special symbol A which is the 15R special jackpot symbol is displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the special symbol A. “Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the above, is stopped and displayed. Also, the symbol variation display on the diagram display device 210 is ended and the diagram A is stopped and displayed. However, in the diagram representation area 283, the variation display of the diagram decoration is not performed and the diagram display is not performed. No symbol is displayed even if the symbol variation display in the apparatus 210 is completed. As a result of the general map display 210 being stopped and displayed as a result of the general map display A, an electric chew short circuit is released. However, there is no single ball during one open period of 0.3 seconds. There is no change in the number of holds.

  Eventually, 15R big hit game is started and the player switches from left-handed to right-handed. FIG. 161 (C) shows the state of the 1R-decorated symbol display device 208. In the central area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a big hit effect where a panda character appears is performed. In addition, during the big hit game, the hold icons (the first special figure 2 hold icon 2821 and the second special figure 2 hold icon 2822 here) that have been displayed so far disappear, and a predetermined area including the normal drawing effect area 283 (here) In the normal drawing effect area 283 and the special map 1 holding display area 281), an effect different from the normal drawing effect (first effect) is performed. In this example, the character “Now in a single villa” is displayed in the special figure 1 holding display area 281 and the face of the character in the single villa is displayed in the normal drawing effect area 283. Has been done. By doing so, the ordinary drawing effect area 283 can be used effectively. Further, even during the big hit game, as long as there is a holding of the usual figure (as long as there is an entry to the ordinary figure starting port 228), the symbol variation display on the ordinary figure display device 210 is performed. However, in the ordinary drawing effect area 283, the notification of the number of consecutive resorts is performed, and the decorative display of the usual drawing is not displayed (see step S603 shown in FIG. 157). In the general diagram display device 210 shown in FIG. 161 (C), the symbol variation display is started. In addition, the effects different from the usual drawing effect performed in the lower area are the remaining round number notification effect, the current round (digestion round) number notification effect, the attacker winning ball number notification effect, the attacker open remaining time notification effect, and the attacker release elapsed time. It may be a notification effect, an effect of encouraging a winner in an attacker, or the like. Further, even during the big hit game, the hold icon may be displayed without erasing, and an effect different from the ordinary drawing effect (for example, the number of consecutive resort times notification effect) may be performed only in the ordinary drawing effect region 283. However, it may be performed only in the area adjacent to the normal drawing effect area 283 (for example, the hold display area). Further, even during a big hit game, when a win for the normal drawing effect execution lottery is won, etc., the normal drawing effect may be performed in the normal drawing effect area 283.

  FIG. 161 (G) shows a state of the 8R decoration symbol display device 208. Even in this decorative symbol display device 208, the effect during the big hit is continued and the notification of the number of consecutive resorts is also continued. In addition, in the common figure display device 210 shown in FIG. 161 (G), the symbol variation display performed so far is terminated, and the common figure B is stopped and displayed. As a result, the electric long opening is performed.

  In FIG. 161 (ta), the electric-chu-long opening is started, and in the ordinary drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the electric-chu opening notification effect (Mr. The effect of displaying the decorative design in which the character of the person is performing a peace sign is executed (see step S605 shown in FIG. 157). That is, in the ordinary drawing effect area 283, since the decorative display of the usual drawing has not been changed, the electric chew release notification effect is suddenly started. While the electric Chu long is released, four game balls enter the electric chew, and the holding of the special figure 2 increases by four. However, the hold icon is not displayed during the big hit game.

  161 (ta ′) is a diagram showing a modification of FIG. 161 (ta ′). In FIG. 161 (ta ′), the electric chew release notification effect is not performed in the normal diagram effect region 283, and the sound from the speaker 120 is displayed. An electric-chu opening notification effect is announced to notify that the electric-chu is open. In the ordinary drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 161 (Ta ′) where the electric chew release notification effect has not been performed, the number of consecutive resort times notification effect continues. Since there are more award balls in the attacker than in the electric chew, there may be a case where no positive electric chew release notification effect is required.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 162 (h), an end effect of the big hit game is performed, and it is notified that the jackpot game is promoted to the probable change state after the end of the big hit game. The symbol change display is also started in the universal symbol display device 210 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 162 (tsu) shows a state of the decorative symbol display device 208 immediately after the end of the big hit game. In the special figure 2 holding display area 282 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of holdings in the special figure 2 that has increased by entering the electric chew at the timing of FIG. First to fourth special figure 2 hold icons 2821 to 2824 are displayed.

  Above the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 162 (T), a character display “probably changing” indicating that the probability changing state is being displayed. In other words, an effect of informing game information is performed. Moreover, the electric support state continues until the next big hit. Further, in FIG. 162 (T), the symbol variation display by the second special symbol display device 214 is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has started the variation display of the decorative symbol of the special symbol 2. On the other hand, the universal figure display device 210 that has been displaying the symbol variation until now displays a stop display, and the universal figure display device 210 shown in FIG. Yes. The symbol change display of the usual figure stopped and displayed here is a symbol change display performed across the jackpot game, and is a symbol change display for notifying the result of the determination of whether or not the common figure is in the non-electric support state during the jackpot game. is there.

  Further, in the general drawing effect area 283, the normal drawing effect is not performed because it is in the electric support state (see step S601 shown in FIG. 157), and this normal drawing effect area 283 functions as a display area for the digestion suspension icon. Yes. In other words, the first special figure 2 hold icon 2821 representing the first hold of the special figure 2 started here is a special drawing effect area which is a separate area from the special figure 2 hold display area 282 together with the symbol variation display of the special figure. It moves to 283, and then disappears in the general drawing effect area 283 before the symbol variation ends. In addition, in the special figure 2 hold display area 282, the hold icon, which has been the second special figure 2 hold icon 2822 so far, is shifted to the first special figure 2 hold icon display position on the right side of the general drawing effect area 283. Similarly, the hold icons after the second special figure 80 hold icon 2823 are also shifted to the left by one. In addition, the time (second movement completion time) in which the digestion suspension icon, which has been the first special figure 2 suspension icon 2821 so far, moves to the normal drawing effect region 283 (second region) where the digestion suspension icon is displayed. ) Is an undigested pending icon (holding icon which has been the second to fourth special figure 2 holding icons 2822 to 2824 until now) left in the special figure 2 holding display area 282 (first area). This is different from the time required to move to another position in the hold display area 282 (first movement completion time). Also, in order to make the player hold a hold icon (digestion hold icon) corresponding to the change for a long time and to make a strong impression that one hold has been consumed, the second movement completion time is more suitable for the first movement completion time. Longer than one movement completion time is preferable. Further, the ordinary drawing effect area 283 is a common destination for the digestion suspension icon of FIG. 1 and the digestion suspension icon of FIG. 2. The destination of the icon and the destination of the digestion pending icon of FIG. 2 may be provided separately.

  In FIG. 162 (G), the symbol variation display of the second special symbol display device 214 is terminated, the stop symbol is displayed, and the decoration symbol display device 208 displays “decoration 4-decoration 5”, which is a combination of disparate ornament symbols. -Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, the general symbol display device 210 starts the normal symbol variation display. Note that the first special figure 2 hold icon 2821 (digestion hold icon) moved to the general drawing effect area 283 is disappeared, and in the electric support state, it is stochastically elected to open the electric long, so the normal figure display device Even if the symbol variation display is started in 210, the ordinary drawing effect is not performed (see step S601 shown in FIG. 157).

  Subsequently, the symbol variation display by the second special symbol display device 214 is started again, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable symbol variation display of the special symbol 2 again, and the decorative symbol shown in FIG. A princess character C3 appears on the display device 208 as an effect of the jackpot notice in FIG. The character C3 is also displayed larger than the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208, the foot portion hides a part of the general drawing effect region 283, and the head portion is “probably changing”. Part of the character display (game information notification effect) is hidden. In the ordinary drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 162 (na), the digestion hold icon 2820 is different from the default display mode, and the display mode of the jackpot notice (including the false jackpot notice) in this change (here, the face of the panda) However, it is difficult to visually recognize the character C3, and the interest of the game is improved. It should be noted that the digestion pending icon 2820 changes the display mode during or after the movement to the normal drawing effect area 283. Further, the game information notification effect is also difficult to visually recognize by the character C3, and the interest of the game is improved. Further, the universal map display device 210 shown in FIG.

  In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 162 (d), the character C3 disappears, and the display of the decorative design shown in FIG. Due to the disappearance of the character C3, the big hit notice by the digestion pending icon 2820 in the normal drawing effect area 283 can be visually recognized well. In FIG. 162 (d), the electric-chu-long opening has been started, but since the electric-chu-long opening is stochastically selected in the electric support state, there is no electric-chu opening notification effect (FIG. 162). Step S601 shown in 157). While this electric Chulong is released, a game ball enters the electric Chu, and the holding in FIG. 2 becomes full (four).

  In the general pattern display device 210 shown in FIG. 162 (nu), the symbol variation display is started, but no symbol is displayed in the universal diagram effect area 283, and the variation display of the decorative symbol of the regular diagram is not executed. is there. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the decorative symbol of the special figure 2 is developed into super reach, and a female character C2 appears as an effect of super reach. This character C2 is also displayed larger than the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the foot part hides a part of the general drawing effect area 283, making it difficult to see the normal drawing effect area 283. Yes. No symbol is displayed in the general drawing effect area 283, but it is difficult for the player to know whether or not the variation display of the decorative symbol of the general symbol is being performed, and the interest of the game is improved.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 162 (ne), a big hit announcement effect is performed in which the decorative symbol that stops in the middle symbol display area 208b is the ornament 6 in the state where the maiden character C2 appears. In FIG. 163 (No.), the symbol variation display of the second special symbol display device 214 is finished, the special symbol D which is the 15R normal jackpot symbol is displayed as a stop symbol, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the special symbol D. “Decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”, which is a combination of the ornamental patterns corresponding to, is stopped and displayed. 162 (ne), the symbol variation display is ended and the symbol B is stopped and displayed. In the symbol effect area 283, the variation of the ornamental symbol of the symbol is displayed. No symbol is displayed even when the symbol variation display on the general symbol display device 210 is completed. As a result of the stoppage display of the general map B on the general map display device 210, in FIG. 163 (no), the electric long opening is performed.

  Eventually, the 15R jackpot game is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (C), it is notified that the jackpot game end effect is performed, and the jackpot game is promoted to the electric support state (short-time state) after the jackpot game ends. ing. In the universal figure display device 210 shown in FIG. 163 (c), symbol variation display is performed.

  FIG. 163 (G) shows a state of the decorative symbol display device 208 immediately after the end of the big hit game. In addition, the general-purpose display device 210 that has been performing symbol variation display until now displays a stop display, and the general-purpose display device 210 shown in FIG. Yes. The symbol change display of the usual figure stopped here is also a symbol change display performed across the jackpot game, and a symbol change display that informs the result of the determination of whether or not the common figure is in the non-electric support state during the jackpot game. is there. The control state shown in FIG. 163 (h) is the electric support state, and the normal drawing effect is not performed even if the result of the normal / unusual determination result in the non-electric support state is notified. However, here it is also possible to perform a general drawing effect.

  On the upper side of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. In other words, an effect of informing game information is performed. Further, in FIG. 163 (f), the symbol variation display by the second special symbol display device 214 is started, and the decorative symbol variation display of the special symbol 2 is started by the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the symbol variation display is also started in the universal symbol display device 210 shown in FIG. In addition, when the 15R regular big hit is won, the electric support state is maintained until the special symbol change display is performed 100 times after the big hit game is finished. In the state shown in FIG. Since the variable display is started, the remaining number of times that the power support state is maintained is 99 times. In the general drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 163 (f), since the electronic support state is in effect, the normal drawing effect is not performed even if the normal symbol variation display by the general map display device 210 is started. The remaining number of states is displayed. In other words, in the general game effect area 283 shown in FIG. 163 (F), an effect of notifying game information is performed. Since the opening of the electric chew can occur normally during the electric support state or the like, the interest of the game may be improved by displaying the remaining number of times of the electric support state instead of the ordinary drawing effect.

  In FIG. 163 (f), the symbol variation display of the second special symbol display device 214 is finished, the stop symbol is displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is a combination of the decorative symbols that are out of place “decoration 4-decoration 5”. -Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. Also, in the general diagram display device 210, the normal symbol variation display is ended and the general diagram B with the electric-chu-long open is stopped and displayed, but in the general diagram effect area 283, the symbol variation display in the general diagram display device 210 is displayed. No symbol is displayed even if is finished. As a result of the stoppage display of the general map B on the general map display device 210, the electric tulong is released in FIG. 163 (e), and the hold of the special map 2 becomes full. Further, in FIG. 163 (e), the symbol variation display by the second special figure display device 214 is started again, and the remaining number of times that the electric support state is maintained becomes 98 times. In the ordinary drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 163 (e), 98 numerals are displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (ma), a princess character C3 appears as an effect of the jackpot notice in FIG. The character C3 is also displayed larger than the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208, the foot portion hides a part of the general drawing effect region 283, and the head portion is referred to as “short time”. Part of the character display (game information notification effect) is hidden. The game information notification effect (number of 98) displayed in the general game effect area 283 shown in FIG. 163 (ma) is also displayed in the game information notification effect (character display of “short time”) displayed above the decorative symbol display device 208. ) Is also difficult to visually recognize by the character C3, and the fun of the game is improved.

  Then, an example of the production | presentation which mixed the prefetch production | presentation in this embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 164 is a diagram showing an example of the effect in which the pre-read effect in the present embodiment is mixed in a stepwise manner.

  The state shown in FIG. 164 (a) is a non-electric support state, there is no special figure 2 hold, and there is one special figure 1 hold, and the first special figure display device 212 displays a symbol variation display. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays the variation of the decorative symbol of the special figure 1 and the special special figure 1 hold display area 281 shows the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 in the default display mode. Has been. In addition, the symbol display is performed on the general symbol display device 210, and in the general symbol effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable symbol display of the normal symbol is started.

  FIG. 164 (a) shows a state in which the game ball B has entered the first special figure starting port 230, and the special figure 1 hold display area 281 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 164 (a). The second special figure 1 hold icon 2812 is additionally displayed in a pre-read notice display mode different from the default display mode. That is, the display of the hold icon representing the second hold in FIG. 1 is started in the display mode of the old character. The pre-reading notice here is a notice that starts a notice regarding the result of the determination of whether or not the special graphic is received before the start of the symbol change for notifying the result of the determination of the appropriateness. In more detail, the start information is pre-read before the start of the symbol change of the special symbol, the result of the determination of whether or not the special symbol is determined in advance based on the start information, and the result of the determination on the success or failure based on the start information is notified. Before starting the symbol change, based on the previous determination result, it is foretold that the determination result based on the start information will be a big hit, or special figure A or special figure B, based on the start information Even if the determination result is out of place, or even if it becomes special figure I or special figure J, a notice (so-called fake) as if the determination result based on the start information becomes a big hit or special figure A or special figure B Including notice). In this case, the pre-reading notice is started from the start of displaying the hold icon (starting entrance timing), but the display is changed to the display form of the pre-reading notice after the display is once started in the default display form. Alternatively, the display mode may be changed to the display mode of the prefetching notice after the display is once started in a display mode different from the default display mode and the display mode of the prefetching notice. For example, the display state of the pre-reading notice may be changed at the timing at which the hold icon is shifted (the timing of the start of symbol change of the special symbol), or the display state of the pre-reading notice is changed when the chance button 136 is pressed. May be.

  In FIG. 164 (a), the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212 is finished, the stop symbol is displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “decoration 5- "Decoration 3-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. 164 (c), the symbol variation display by the first special symbol display device 212 that digests the first hold is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the ornament of the special symbol 1 The symbol variation display has started. On the other hand, in the general diagram display device 210 shown in FIG. 164 (c), the symbol variation display that has been performed so far is terminated, the general diagram B is stopped, and the general diagram effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is also displayed. The change display of the decorative pattern of the ordinary figure is finished, and the ordinary figure decoration 2 corresponding to the ordinary figure B is stopped and displayed. As a result, the electric long opening is performed.

  In FIG. 164 (D), the electric chew long opening is started, and in the general drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the electric chew release notification effect (the decorative symbol in which the Tono-sama character is performing a peace sign is displayed. Production) is being executed. In this electric chew release notification effect, Tono-sama's character is displayed larger than the ordinary drawing effect area 283, enters the special figure 1 hold display area 281 and displays the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 (in this case, a pre-reading notice display) A part of the mode hold icon) is hidden. As a result, the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 is difficult to visually recognize. In this way, when the player can be interested in the trend of the general drawing effect by intentionally hiding the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 whose display mode has been changed to the pre-reading notice mode with the normal drawing effect. There is. Further, the pre-reading notice is a future jackpot notice, and the player may be expected to open the electric chew by conspicuously presenting the current progressive drawing. Note that all of the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 may be hidden by the electric chew release notification effect. The Tono-sama character also enters the middle symbol display area 208b, and also hides a part of the decorative symbol of the special figure that is changing in the middle symbol display area 208b.

  FIG. 164 (A ′) is a diagram showing a modification of the prefetch notice. In FIG. 164 (a), the pre-reading notice effect is performed using the display mode of the hold icon, but in FIG. 164 (a ′), the display of the effect image in which the characters of 爺 are arranged in a large V-shape. The pre-reading notice effect is performed by the character display “Pre-reading notice”. This pre-reading notice effect also enters the ordinary drawing effect region 283, but is partially hidden by the variation display of the decorative symbol of the ordinary drawing. On the other hand, the variation display of the usual decorative pattern may be hidden by the pre-reading notice effect.

  FIG. 164 (c ′) is a diagram showing a modification of the mode of the general-purpose decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 164 (C '), the symbol of the stop-displayed general drawing decoration 2 is displayed larger than the general drawing effect area 283, enters the special figure 1 hold display area 281 and the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 ( Here, a part of the hold icon) in the display mode of the prefetch notice is hidden. As a result, the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 becomes difficult to visually recognize, and the interest of the game is improved. It should be noted that the first special figure 1 holding icon 2811 may be entirely hidden by the fluctuation display of the normal decoration pattern or the stop-displayed universal figure decoration symbol. In addition, the stop-displayed general symbol decoration 2 also enters the middle symbol display area 208b, and also hides a part of the special symbol decoration symbol that is changing in the middle symbol display area 208b.

  FIG. 164 (D ′) is a diagram showing a modification of the electric chew release notification effect. In the electric chew release notification effect in FIG. 164 (D '), the Tono-sama character is displayed larger than the ordinary drawing effect area 283 and enters the special figure 1 hold display area 281. A part of the Ton-like character is displayed. Is hidden by the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 (here, the hold icon of the display mode of the pre-reading notice). The character of Tono-sama also enters the middle symbol display area 208b. However, a part of the character of Tono-sama is hidden by the special decorative pattern that is changing in the middle symbol display area 208b. As a result, it is difficult to visually recognize the electric Chu opening notification effect.

  Note that the pre-reading notice with the hold icon is a kind of continuous notice that is continuously performed over a plurality of symbol variation displays. In the special figure 2 priority variation machine, the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 2 may interrupt during execution of the continuous notice for the special figure 1, but the continuous notice is continued even in the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 2 that has been interrupted. . That is, the special figure 1 hold icon is displayed in the display form of the pre-reading notice, and even if the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 2 interrupts before the special figure 1 hold icon is put on hold, the graphic fluctuation display of the interrupted special figure 2 is being displayed. In addition, the special figure 1 hold icon continues to be displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice. In the example shown in FIG. 164 (D '), the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 in the pre-reading notice display mode makes it difficult to visually recognize a part of the electric chew release notification effect. While maintaining the expectation, the look-ahead notice can be conspicuous and the expectation for the big hit may be able to be sustained.

  FIG. 165 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which a jackpot notice is mixed with the ordinary drawing effect in the present embodiment in stages.

  The state shown in FIG. 165 (a) is a non-electric support state, and “decoration 5—decoration 3—decoration 4”, which is a combination of outlying ornamental symbols, is stopped and displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. On the other hand, the general symbol display device 210 performs symbol variation display, but the symbol of the general symbol decoration 3 that is the previous result remains displayed in the general symbol effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208. , Fluctuating display of ordinary decorative patterns is not performed.

  In the first special symbol display device 212 shown in FIG. 165 (a), the symbol variation display is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the decorative symbol of the special symbol 1 is started. When the symbol variation display of the special figure is started, the variation display of the ordinary decoration pattern is also started in the ordinary drawing effect area 283. In other words, the general drawing effect (variable display of the decorative pattern of the ordinary figure) is started in accordance with the variation of the special figure (display of the decorative pattern of the special figure).

  In FIG. 165 (c), the variation display of the usual decorative pattern in the ordinary drawing effect area 283 is hidden by the character display effect “Katsuatsu” which is a kind of special jackpot notice effect. That is, the special bonus jackpot notice effect here is displayed over the lower area including the ordinary figure effect area 283, making it difficult to visually recognize the ordinary figure effect. The character display effect “Gekiatsu” here is a pre-reach notice, and may be an effect of notifying that the change display of the decorative pattern of the special drawing will be developed to reach. In this case, for example, the decorative display variation display pattern of the usual figure is a high-speed display of the character “Katsuatsu”, which is a kind of special figure jackpot notice effect, as shown in FIG. It is a variation display pattern included in the variation. In the variation display of the usual decorative pattern, the character display “Gekiatsu” is displayed in the ordinary drawing effect area 283.

  FIG. 166 is a diagram showing step by step an example in which the usual display effect of the variable display pattern shown in (f) of FIG. 156 (b) is performed.

  The state shown in FIG. 166 (a) is a non-electric support state, and “decoration 5—decoration 3—decoration 4”, which is a combination of extraordinary ornament symbols, is stopped on the ornamental symbol display device 208. Also, the symbol change display is not performed in the general symbol display device 210, and the symbol of the general symbol decoration 3 as the previous result is still displayed in the general symbol effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208. is there.

  In the first special symbol display device 212 shown in FIG. 166 (a), the symbol variation display is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the decorative symbol of the special symbol 1 is started. Also, the symbol variation display is started in the general symbol display device 210 shown in FIG. 166 (a), and the variable symbol variation display of the normal symbol is started in the general symbol effect region 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, the usual display effect of the variable display pattern shown in (f) of FIG. 156 (b) is performed.

  In the ordinary drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 166 (c), the character display of “latent” representing the 2R jackpot notice that is the probability change of the special figure is displayed beyond the ordinary drawing effect area 283.

  In the normal drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 166 (D), the character display of “surprise” representing the 2R jackpot notice, which is a sudden change in the special figure, is displayed beyond the normal drawing effect area 283.

  In the ordinary drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 166 (e), the character display of “big hit” representing the special figure 15R jackpot notice is made beyond the usual drawing effect area 283.

  In FIG. 166 (f), the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212 is finished, the second small hit symbol (special symbol H) is displayed as a stop symbol, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a special symbol. “Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 3” corresponding to H is stopped and displayed. In the general symbol display device 210, the symbol variation display is continued. However, in the universal symbol effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the regular symbol decorative symbol is displayed before the special symbol variation display is finished. In the normal drawing effect area 283, the characters “Hidden” are stopped and displayed.

  In this example, the ordinary drawing effect functions as a special jackpot notice, but the ordinary drawing effect in this example is also an effect executed in the ordinary drawing effect region 283.

  Here, the special drawing effect that functions as a special figure jackpot notice enters the special figure 1 hold display area 281 and the special figure 2 hold display area 282. Therefore, if the first special figure hold icon whose display mode is changed to the pre-reading notice mode is displayed in the special figure 1 hold display area 281 or the special figure 2 hold display area 282, the first special figure hold icon is Some or all of them are hidden by the usual drawing effects. The jackpot notice (especially the special chart variable game currently being executed) is a notice that can be expected to hit the jackpot ahead of the prefetching notice (future special chart variable game jackpot notice). Since it is possible to perform the ordinary drawing effect including the pre-reading notice more conspicuously, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

It should be noted that the character display displayed in the normal drawing effect area 283 may be in a form that fits within the normal drawing effect area 283. In addition, the start timing of the variation display of the ordinary design is changed so that the end timing of the variation display of the ordinary design coincides with or slightly before the end timing of the special symbol variation display. You may delay from the design variation display start timing of the display device 210.
FIG. 167 is a diagram illustrating an example of other effects.

  FIGS. 167 (a) and 167 (b) are examples in which the jackpot notice effect is performed by the effect using the effect movable body.

  The pachinko machine in this example is a pachinko machine having a production movable body 224 shown in FIG. In the general drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 167 (a), a normal drawing effect is performed. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts to display the special symbol decorative symbols in a variable manner. Then, after the start of the normal drawing effect, the big hit announcement effect for notifying that the change display is a big hit is performed by the effect movable body 224 provided beside the decorative symbol display device 208. The effect movable body 224 shown in FIG. 167 (a) includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b that imitate the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor (not shown) that rotates the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. And a forearm motor (not shown) for rotating the forearm 224b at the position of the elbow. The effect movable body 224 is an accessory that can move at least the front side (player side) of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor. In FIG. 167 (a), the forearm portion 224b rotated upwards covers the normal drawing effect region 283 where the normal drawing effect is performed, and the normal drawing effect region 283 is hidden by the forearm portion 224b. The visual effects are difficult to see. In addition, there are cases where the operation of the production movable body 224 can be emphasized, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, three special figure 2 hold icons 2821 to 2823 are displayed in the special figure 2 hold display area 282 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 167 (a). These special figure 2 hold icons 2821 are displayed. Part or all of ˜2823 is also hidden by the forearm portion 224b, and the special figure 2 holding icons 2821 to 2823 are difficult to visually recognize. In addition, a large hitting notice effect using the effect movable body 224 and the effect image can be performed using the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the entertainment of the game is improved by the large scale effect.

  FIG. 167 (a) is a diagram showing a state continued from FIG. 167 (a). From the front of the normal drawing effect area 283 where the forearm portion 224b is further rotated upward and the normal effect is performed. The forearm 224b disappears. However, instead, an effect image (here, three shooting stars images) related to the operation of the effect movable body 224 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the ordinary drawing effect region 283 is hidden by the effect image. Has become difficult to see. In addition, three special figure 2 hold icons 2821 to 2823 are also displayed in the special figure 2 hold display area 282 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 167 (a). These special figure 2 hold icons 2821 are also displayed. Part or all of ˜2823 is also hidden by the forearm 224b or the effect image, and the special figure 2 reservation icons 2821 to 2823 are difficult to view. The effect image may be an image displayed before, during, or after the effect movable body 224 operates. Further, the effect movable body 224 is not necessarily exposed in front of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In addition, after the big hit announcement is started by the production movable body 224, the normal drawing production is not executed until the big hit announcement is completed. That is, in this example, the predetermined period in step S603 shown in FIG. 157 corresponds to the execution of the big hit notification by the effect movable body 224. By doing so, it may be possible to draw attention by a big hit announcement by the effect movable body 224.

  Further, the effect movable body 224 may make it difficult to visually recognize the normal drawing effect only with the effect image without performing the operation to the front side (player side) of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  51 (a) is an example in which a jackpot notice effect is performed by an effect using a tutorial.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 167 (a), the tutorial display is performed so as to overlap a part of the general drawing effect area 283 where the normal drawing effect is performed. In this tutorial display, a predetermined display (here, the character C1 of the jackpot notice in FIG. 159 shown in FIG. 159, etc.) is described. The ordinary drawing effect area 283 is hidden by the tutorial display image, and the ordinary drawing effect is difficult to visually recognize.

  FIG. 167 (I) is an example in which a plurality of effects hides the ordinary drawing effects and the hold icon. In this example, the plurality of effects are two effects, but may be three or more effects.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 167 (I), the special symbol decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the normal symbol effect is displayed in the normal symbol effect region 283. The first special symbol 1 hold icon 2811 is displayed. It is displayed. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character C1 (first special effect) of the jackpot notice shown in FIG. 159 (A) and the like, and another new character C4 (second special effect) shown in FIG. Has been. The other new character C4 may be, for example, a notice display indicating the advancement of reach, a one-announce notice display of 15R special big hit, a display prompting the user to press the chance button 136, or the like. In the example shown in FIG. 167 (I), these characters C1 and C4 hide a part of each of the ordinary drawing effect area 283, the hold icon, and the variation display of the decorative pattern of the special drawing. In addition, it is difficult to visually recognize the display mode of the hold icon and the decorative display of the special design.
Hereinafter, the third embodiment will be supplemented.

  An example in which it is difficult to visually recognize the symbol variation display (second symbol variation display) on the display device (for example, the ornament symbol display device 208) controlled by the sub-control means, that is, the ornament symbol variation display (for example, the general symbol effect). Is not only hidden by other effect display (for example, jackpot notice display, game information display, etc.), but includes other methods. For example, light may be emitted intensely around the decorative symbol display (more pronounced if it is a similar color), making it relatively difficult to see, or the decorative symbol variation display and other effect displays may be similar colors. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize even when there is no overlap. Also, the device for displaying the decorative symbol variation display and other effects may be separate. For example, the main liquid crystal and the auxiliary liquid crystal may be used.

  Further, in addition to the case where the display of variation of the decorative symbol is difficult to visually recognize due to another effect display, the other effect display may be difficult to visually recognize due to the variation display of the decorative symbol. For example, a part of the pre-reading notice may be hidden by the variation display of the general-purpose decorative symbol, and other effects with low reliability may be made difficult to view by the variable display of the general-purpose decorative symbol. If the expectation of the big hit is low, the player may be more interested in directing the opening of electric Chu.

  Moreover, the structure which changes for every condition whether it makes it difficult to visually recognize another effect or makes it difficult to visually recognize the change display of a decoration symbol may be sufficient. A configuration that prioritizes an effect that a player can expect and makes it difficult to visually recognize the other, or a configuration that prioritizes an effect from which a result is derived first and makes the other difficult to view. .

  Other effects include a jackpot notice, look-ahead notice, reach effect (reach fluctuation), suggestion of game state such as hiding, etc., but at least a part may be a structure that makes it difficult to see the decorative symbol change display. . For example, the action of the accessory itself is not configured to make it difficult to visually recognize the decorative display of the decorative pattern due to the big hit notification by the action of the accessory, but it is difficult to visually recognize the variable display of the decorative pattern by the effect image that is generated at the same time. Also good.

  Moreover, the structure which becomes difficult to visually recognize at least one part of the electric-chu open | release alerting | reporting effect after the change display of a decoration symbol may be sufficient.

  Further, the decorative symbol variation display may be performed whenever the electric chew is long open in the non-electric support state, but may or may not be performed by performing a matter availability lottery.

Another effect may be a configuration in which the decorative symbol variation display and the hold display (hold icon) are difficult to visually recognize at the same time.
Moreover, the structure which performs the variable display of a decoration pattern at the time of electric Chu short open | release may be sufficient.

  Also, the decorative symbol variation display may not be performed during the electric support state, or the decorative symbol variation display may be performed during the electric support state.

  In addition, the decorative symbol change display is not only related to the result of the auxiliary success / failure determination (whether or not to determine the normal map), but also to other results such as the result of the determination of whether or not to assist (the determination of whether or not the special figure is accepted). It may be a variable display in which notices are mixed.

  In addition, the execution frequency of the decorative symbol variation display is compared with that in the electric support state and that in the non-electric support state, and the configuration is influenced by the launch strength (for example, right-handed and left-handed) due to game characteristics. May be.

  During the big hit game, it may be configured to display only the symbol variation display (first symbol variation display) on the display device (for example, the general symbol display device 210) controlled by the main control means. It is also possible to adopt a configuration that also displays the change of the above. Further, during the big hit game, the decorative symbols may not be displayed in a variable manner, and only the electric chew release notification effect may be performed.

  Further, while the big hit game and the electric support state, which are advantageous, are right-handed, the left-hand hit may be left during the big hit game, and the combination is arbitrary.

  In the past, the explanation was given for the special figure 2 priority fluctuation machine. However, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are alternately won in the winning order fluctuation machine or in the non-electric support state, and the electric chew is in the electric support state. It may be a game machine that is open and allows only special figure 2 winning. In particular, if it is in electric support, it will have the same effect as the priority change machine. Moreover, a simultaneous variable machine may be sufficient.

The so-called tutorial notice that performs the jackpot notice effect by the effect using the tutorial may make it difficult to visually recognize the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols, or vice versa. For example, highlight the tutorial notice that explains the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display (this makes it difficult to see the variable symbol display), and then stop the decorative symbol related to the description and It is also possible to explain.
In addition, the pre-reading notice may make it difficult to visually recognize the variation display of the decorative symbol.

Further, among the plurality of other effects described with reference to FIG. 167 (I), the first other effect may be configured to be hidden so that the player cannot see the decorative symbol variation display at all. Further, the first other effect may be configured to hide the first region of the decorative symbol variation display, and the second other effect may be configured to hide the second region. The decorative symbol variation display may display a plurality of characters, characters, etc. at the same time, and at least one of them may be hidden by other effects. Moreover, the structure which hides other effects may be sufficient.
Moreover, the structure which performs several fluctuation display of a decoration symbol simultaneously may be sufficient.

As described above, in the example described so far, when one effect conceals the other effect, even if not particularly refused, the other effect may conceal one effect. . Further, when one effect conceals a part of the other effect, even if not specifically refused, one effect may conceal all of the other effect.
Further, the difficulty of visual recognition includes inability to visually recognize.

  Further, the other effects such as the ordinary drawing effect and the jackpot effect may be a sound effect, a light effect, and effects as shown in FIGS. 167 (a) and (b). An effect by a movable body may be used. In the case of an effect by sound, sounds overlap and one effect conceals the other effect according to the volume and pitch, that is, it becomes difficult to view the other effect.

  In the above description, “a start region (for example, electric Chu) that can be changed at least between an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) and a difficult-to-enter state (for example, a closed state), For example, it is possible to execute at least a first success / failure determination unit (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of executing at least a normal / failure determination and a second determination / non-permission determination (for example, determination of whether or not a special figure is present). When the second success / failure determination means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) and the second success / failure determination result is the big success / failure determination result, the control state is changed from the non-hit control state to the big hit control state. Game control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) that can be transferred to at least, and effect display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) that can execute at least effect display. The start area is at least a state from the difficult entry state to the easy entry state when the result of the first success / failure determination is a specific success / failure determination result (for example, per ordinary figure). The first success / failure determination means is more likely to derive the specific success / failure determination result in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state. The first effect is an effect including at least an effect display relating to the result of the first success / failure determination (for example, a normal drawing effect), and the effect display means includes the It is possible to display at least a second effect related to the result of the second success / failure determination (for example, a jackpot notice effect), and the second effect is a part or all of the period during the execution of the first effect. , Little of the first production Both of these are effects that can make it difficult to visually recognize a part (for example, FIG. 159 (A), FIG. 160 (K), etc.), and the first effect is in the non-electric support state rather than the electric support state. Is a performance that is easy to be executed (for example, step S601 shown in FIG. 157). Was explained.

  Note that a winning means (or winning area) (for example, an attacker) capable of changing at least the state between an easy winning state and a difficult winning state is provided, and the winning means (or winning area) is configured to determine whether or not the second success / failure determination is made. When the result is a jackpot winning / failing determination result, the state may be changed at least from the difficult-to-win state to the easy-to-win state.

  The jackpot control state may be a state in which the winning area is at least changeable from the difficult winning state to the easy winning state.

  Moreover, the aspect provided with the approach area (For example, a 1st approach area, in other words, a fixed entrance area, for example, a normal gate etc.) which cannot change a state may be sufficient.

  Moreover, the aspect provided with the 1st symbol display means (for example, the general symbol display apparatus 210) which can perform the 1st symbol fluctuation | variation display at least may be sufficient. The first symbol display means may be capable of displaying at least a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the first success / failure determination after performing the first symbol variation display. The first symbol display means may be one in which operation is suspended when the first holding condition is established, and the requirement for establishment of the first holding condition is that a game ball is placed in the entry area. It may be a requirement including that the has entered. More specifically, the establishment requirement of the first holding condition may be a requirement including at least that a game ball has entered the entry area.

  Moreover, the aspect provided with the 2nd symbol display means (for example, 2nd special figure display apparatus 214) which can perform at least 2nd symbol fluctuation | variation display may be sufficient. The second symbol display means may be capable of displaying at least a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the second success / failure determination after performing the second symbol variation display. Further, the second symbol display means may be one in which the operation is suspended when the second holding condition is established, and the requirement for establishment of the second holding condition is the start region (for example, The requirement may include that a game ball has entered the second entry area, in other words, an electric tulip that is a variable entry area. More specifically, the establishment requirement of the second holding condition may be a requirement including at least that a game ball has entered the start area.

The aspect provided with the effect display means (for example, sub-control means 400,500) which can control the said effect display means at least may be sufficient.
The first effect may be an effect including at least a change effect and an opening effect,

  The variation effect is an effect executed during the period in which the first symbol variation display is performed,

  The opening effect is an effect that is executed after a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the first success / failure determination of a specific (for example, hit) is displayed, for example, a period in which the start area is in the easy entry state. It may be an effect that is executed during the included period.

Further, the first effect may include a stop display effect that is executed during a period in which a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the specific first determination of success / failure is displayed.
The second effect may be a jackpot notice effect or a prefetch notice effect.

  In addition, “the effect display means is an image display means, and the image display means is capable of displaying at least the first effect in a predetermined display area (for example, the general drawing effect area 283), The image display means can display at least a third effect in a period including at least a part of the non-execution period of the first effect, and the third effect is also the first effect. It is an effect different from the second effect (for example, a game information notification effect that displays the remaining number of times of the electric support state), and the second effect is a part or all of the period during the execution of the third effect. A game table characterized in that it is an effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the third effect (for example, FIG. 163 (ma)). ”Was also explained.

  Note that the third effect may be a hold icon, or a display of the number of time savings or the number of consecutive resorts.

  Further, “the third effect is an effect including at least one of a jackpot notice display (for example, an appearance effect of the characters C1 to C3) and a game information display (for example, a character display“ probably changing ”). A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  The jackpot notice display here may be a display for notifying that the winning area is changed to the easy winning state, and includes a false display. The jackpot notice display may be a jackpot notice display that is displayed after the second determination is made, that is, after the second symbol variation display is started. It may be a pre-reading notice display in which the display is started before the determination of whether or not is made, that is, before the second symbol variation display is started.

  In addition, the game information display here is a display indicating the number of time reductions (the number of remaining times of the second symbol variation display or the number of digested times in the electric support state) or a display indicating the number of consecutive games (the number of executions of the big hit game) It may be.

  Further, “the image display means is capable of executing at least the jackpot notice display during the non-execution period of the first effect in the non-electric support state (for example, FIG. 160 (support)). Etc.), and the image display means can execute at least the game information display during the non-execution period of the first effect in the electric support state (for example, FIG. ), A game table characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  “The first effect is an effect of one type of effect pattern selected from a plurality of types of effect patterns (for example, a plurality of patterns shown in FIG. 156 (b)), and the plurality of types of effects. One type of effect pattern of the patterns includes at least an image (for example, a general-purpose decorative pattern) related to the result of the first determination of success / failure, and an image of the jackpot notice display (for example, a decorative image called “Gekiatsu”). A game table characterized by a variation display effect pattern (for example, a variation display pattern shown in (e) of FIG. 156 (b)) that sequentially displays a plurality of images. ”Was also explained.

  Further, in the above description, “a start region (for example, electric Chu) that can change at least between an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) and a difficult-to-enter state (for example, a closed state); First determination unit (e.g., CPU 304 of main control unit 300) capable of executing at least determination (e.g., determination of success / failure of normal map) and at least execution of second determination (e.g., determination of success / failure of special figure). When the possible second success / failure determination means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) and the result of the second success / failure determination is the big success / failure determination result, the control state is changed from the non-big hit control state to the big hit Game control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of at least shifting to the control state, effect display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) capable of at least performing effect display, The starting area is configured to change from the difficult entry state to the easy entry state when the first success / failure determination result is a specific success / failure determination result (for example, per common figure). At least the state change is possible, the effect display means can display at least the first effect, and the first effect includes at least an effect display relating to the result of the first success / failure determination. (For example, ordinary drawing effect), and the effect display means can display at least a second effect (for example, a jackpot notice effect) related to the result of the second success / failure determination, and the second effect. Is an effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the first effect during a part or all of the period during which the first effect is being executed (for example, FIG. 159 (A) and FIG. 160). (K) etc.) Effect of the big hit are demonstrations likely to be performed toward the non-jackpot controlled state than the control state (e.g., step S603 shown in FIG. 157), the amusement machine, characterized in that. Was explained.

  “The first effect is an effect of one type of effect pattern selected from a plurality of types of effect patterns (a plurality of patterns shown in FIG. 156 (b)). The first effect pattern is an effect pattern that is more easily executed in the non-hit control state than the jackpot control state (for example, an effect pattern other than the electric chew release notification effect: a variable display effect) (see FIG. 157). Step S604, step S605), and a game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  In addition, “the first effect pattern is an effect pattern (for example, a variable display pattern shown in (b) of FIG. 156 (b)) performed over a first time, and among the plurality of types of effect patterns, The second effect pattern (for example, the electric chew release notification effect pattern shown in (ki) of FIG. 156 (b)) is an effect pattern performed over the second time, and the first time (for example, 15 (Second) is a time longer than the second time (for example, 5.8 seconds). ”Was also explained.

  Further, “the starting region is an electric tulip, and the electric tulip includes at least a first opening pattern (for example, an electric chew short opening pattern) and a second opening pattern (for example, an electric tulong opening pattern). The opening pattern is a single opening pattern, and the second opening pattern is an opening pattern that is more advantageous to the player than the first opening pattern. The game table is capable of displaying at least the first effect when the electric tulip opens in the second opening pattern. ”Was also explained.

  The open pattern advantageous to the player here is an open pattern in which a game ball can easily enter the electric tulip, in other words, an open pattern in which a large number of outgoing balls can be obtained. For example, the open time is long. When the number of times of opening is large or the number of times of opening is plural, the opening pattern is such that the total opening time is long or the opening time of one time is long.

  Further, “the effect display means is capable of displaying at least the first effect in the second effect pattern during the jackpot control state (step S605 shown in FIG. 157). Amusement stand. ”Was also explained.

  Further, in the above description, “a start region (for example, electric Chu) that can change at least between an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) and a difficult-to-enter state (for example, a closed state); First determination unit (e.g., CPU 304 of main control unit 300) capable of executing at least determination (e.g., determination of success / failure of normal map) and at least execution of second determination (e.g., determination of success / failure of special figure). When the possible second success / failure determination means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) and the result of the second success / failure determination is the big success / failure determination result, the control state is changed from the non-big hit control state to the big hit Game control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of at least shifting to the control state, effect display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) capable of at least performing effect display, The starting area is configured to change from the difficult entry state to the easy entry state when the first success / failure determination result is a specific success / failure determination result (for example, per common figure). At least the state change is possible, the effect display means can display at least the first effect, and the first effect includes at least an effect display relating to the result of the first success / failure determination. (For example, ordinary drawing effect), and the effect display means is capable of displaying at least a pre-reading notice effect relating to the result of the second success / failure determination, and the first effect is being executed in the prefetching notice effect. A game table characterized in that it is an effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the pre-reading notice effect during part or all of the period (for example, FIG. 164 (D)). Was explained.

“The first effect is an effect of one type of effect pattern selected from a plurality of types of effect patterns (a plurality of patterns shown in FIG. 156 (b)). One type of effect pattern includes a plurality of images including at least an image related to the result of the first success / failure determination (for example, a general-purpose decorative pattern) and a jackpot notice display image (for example, a decorative image called “Gekiatsu”). A game table characterized by a variation display effect pattern (for example, a variation display pattern shown in (e) of FIG. 156 (b)) for sequentially displaying images. ”Was also explained.
The one kind of effect pattern mentioned here may be the first effect pattern.

  Further, “a symbol display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 214) capable of displaying at least a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the second determination of success / failure after the symbol variation display is performed, and the symbol display means At least controllable symbol display control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300), and the symbol display control means holds the operation of the symbol display means when the holding condition is established. The effect display means is an image display means, and the image display means displays the first effect in a predetermined display area (for example, the normal drawing effect area 283). The image display means can display at least one hold icon (for example, the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811) for one hold. The image display means can display the hold icon at least in a hold display area (for example, special figure 1 hold display area 281), and the pre-reading notice effect is a display of the hold icon. It is an effect (for example, the example shown in FIG. 164) that displays the hold icon by changing the aspect, and the first effect is an effect of one type of effect pattern selected from a plurality of types of effect patterns. There is one kind of effect pattern of the plurality of kinds of effect patterns, wherein the effect image (for example, the effect image in which the character of Tono-sama is performing a peace sign) exceeds the predetermined display area and the hold display area A part or all of the on-hold icon displayed in the on-hold display area can be made difficult to see by part or all of the effect image. Pattern (e.g., FIG. 164 (pattern of electrically movable open notification effect shown in d)) is, the amusement machine, characterized in that. ”Was also explained.

  The one type of effect pattern mentioned here may be the second effect pattern or the first effect pattern.

  Further, here, the hold icon is limited, but the pre-reading notice effect may be an effect that does not use the hold icon. In this case, the image display means is configured to display the image in the second predetermined display area. The pre-reading notice effect may be displayed at least.

In addition, “at least a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the second determination of success / failure is displayed after a different start region different from the start region (for example, the first special figure start port 230) and the symbol variation display. Possible symbol display means, and as one of the symbol display means, a first symbol display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 212) and one of the symbol display means As two symbol display means, a second symbol display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 214) and a symbol display control means capable of controlling at least the first symbol display means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300). ), And the separate starting area is one in which the ease of entry of a game ball does not change, and the symbol display control means can at least control the second symbol display means, The symbol display The control means is capable of executing at least control of a first hold (for example, hold of special figure 1) for holding the operation of the first symbol display means when the first hold condition is established. And the symbol display control means controls the second holding (for example, holding of the special figure 2) for holding the operation of the second symbol display means when the second holding condition is established. Can be executed at least, and the establishment requirement of the first hold condition is a requirement including at least that the game ball has entered the separate starting area, and the establishment requirement of the second hold condition is a game A requirement that includes at least that the ball has entered the start-up area, and the symbol display control means starts the operation of the first symbol display means when the first holding digest condition is established. Is at least feasible and before The symbol display control means can execute at least control for starting the operation of the second symbol display means when the second reserved digest condition is established, The establishment requirement is a requirement at least including that the operation of the second symbol display means is suspended, and the establishment requirement of the first suspension digestion condition is that the operation of the second symbol display means is suspended. The requirement for establishing the first suspension digestion condition is a requirement that includes at least that the operation of the first symbol display means is suspended, and the effect display means includes: Image display means, and the image display means displays one first hold icon (for example, special figure 1 hold icon 2811) for a first hold display area (for example, a special hold display area (for example, special display area)). Figure 1 hold At least in the display area 281), and the image display means displays one second hold icon (for example, the special figure 2 hold icon 2821) for the second hold. Can be displayed at least in the hold display area (for example, special figure 2 hold display area 282), and the image display means can display the first display area in the predetermined display area (for example, general drawing effect area 283). An effect can be displayed at least, and the predetermined display area is an area located between the first reserved display area and the second reserved display area, and the first effect has a plurality of types. One type of production pattern selected from among the plurality of types of production patterns is a production image (for example, the character of Tono-sama Effect image) enters the reserved display area of at least one of the first reserved display area and the second reserved display area beyond the predetermined display area. It is an effect pattern (for example, an electric chew release notification effect pattern shown in FIG. 164 (D)) that makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the display area, and the pre-reading notice effect is the first hold It is an effect that changes the display mode of the icon to display the first hold icon (for example, the example shown in FIG. 164), and the prefetch notice effect changes the display mode of the second hold icon and This is an effect of displaying the second hold icon, and either the hold icon of the first hold icon or the second hold icon becomes difficult to visually recognize due to the effect image (for example, , The pattern of electrically movable open notification effect shown in FIG. 164 (d)), the amusement machine, characterized in that. ”Was also explained.
The game stand here is a so-called special figure 2 priority change machine.

  Further, the one kind of effect pattern referred to here may be the second effect pattern or the first effect pattern.

  Further, the predetermined display area referred to here may be an area sandwiched between the first hold display area and the second hold display area, or both hold display as viewed from the predetermined display area. The region may be a region provided at a position shifted from each other. The first reserved display area and the second reserved display area may be provided with an interval, and the predetermined display area may be provided at the interval.

  Further, “the effect display means is capable of displaying at least a third effect, and the third effect is an effect different from the first effect and the pre-reading notice effect (for example, for the change) The third effect is an effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the first effect during a part or all of the period during the execution of the first effect. A game table characterized by being (for example, FIG. 159 (A), FIG. 160 (K), etc.). ”Was also explained.

  The third effect here may be an effect related to the result of the second success / failure determination (for example, a jackpot notice effect), or an effect that represents game information (for example, the number of short hours, the number of consecutive resorts, etc.). There may be.

  Further, in the above description, “a start region (for example, electric Chu) that can change at least between an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) and a difficult-to-enter state (for example, a closed state); First determination unit (e.g., CPU 304 of main control unit 300) capable of executing at least determination (e.g., determination of success / failure of normal map) and at least execution of second determination (e.g., determination of success / failure of special figure). When the possible second success / failure determination means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) and the result of the second success / failure determination is the big success / failure determination result, the control state is changed from the non-big hit control state to the big hit Game control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of at least shifting to the control state, and effect means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect movable body 2) capable of executing at least effects. 4), wherein the starting area is at least in a state where the entry difficulty state is changed to the entry easy state when the first success / failure determination result is a specific success / failure determination result. The effect display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) of the effect means is capable of at least effect display, and the effect movable means (for example, the effect means, for example) The effect movable body 224) can execute at least the effect operation, the effect display means can display at least the first effect, and the first effect is determined by the first success / failure determination. An effect including at least an effect display related to the result (for example, a normal drawing effect), and the effect moving means performs an effect operation (for example, FIG. 167 (A And (a)) can be executed at least, and the effect display means is a related effect display related to the effect operation of the second effect in the effect moving means (for example, the effect shown in FIG. 167 (a)). Display of the image) is at least executable, and at least one of the effect operation of the second effect and the related effect display is part or all of the period during the execution of the first effect, A gaming machine characterized in that at least a part of the first performance can be made difficult to visually recognize (for example, FIGS. 167 (a) and (b)). Was explained.

That is, the effect means is a part or all of the first effect being executed by at least one of the effect operation of the second effect by the effect moving means and the related effect display by the effect display means. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the first effect during the period.
The related effect display may be an effect image display.

  In addition, “the effect unit starts the first effect by the effect display unit first, and during the execution of the first effect, the effect operation of the second effect by the effect moving unit and the It is possible to make at least a part of the first effect difficult to view by at least one of the related effect displays by the effect display means, and the effect means first the second effect. The game is characterized in that the first effect is not performed by the effect display means during the execution of the second effect (for example, FIGS. 167 (a) and (b)). Stand. ”Was also explained.

  That is, the first effect is started first, and during the execution of the first effect, at least one of the effect operation of the second effect and the related effect display is the first effect. It is possible to make at least part of the view difficult,

  The second effect is started first, and the first effect is not performed during execution of the second effect.

  Further, “a symbol display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 214) capable of displaying at least a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the second determination of success / failure after the symbol variation display is performed, and the symbol display means At least controllable symbol display control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300), and the symbol display control means holds the operation of the symbol display means when the holding condition is established. (For example, hold of special figure 2) can be executed at least, and the effect display means is image display means, and the image display means has one hold icon ( For example, the special figure 2 hold icon 2821) can be displayed at least, and the image display means displays the hold icon in a hold display area (for example, the special figure 2 hold display area 282). And at least one of the second effect production operation and the related production display can make at least a part of the reserved display area difficult to view ( For example, FIG. 167 (A) and (A)), a game table characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  Further, “a control state transition means (for example, that can shift the control state from a non-hit control state to a big hit control state when the result of the second success / failure determination is a specific second success / failure determination result (for example, CPU 304) of the main control unit 300, the jackpot control state is a state in which the winning area is at least changeable state from the difficult entry state to the easy entry state, the first effect is the jackpot control A gaming machine characterized in that the non-hit control state is more easily performed than the state (for example, step S603 shown in FIG. 157). ”Was also explained.

  Further, “the first success / failure determination means is that the electric support state is easier to derive the specific determination result than the non-electric support state, and the first effect is more than the electric support state. The game stand is characterized in that the non-electric support state is more easily performed (for example, step S601 shown in FIG. 157). ”Was also explained.

  That is, the electric support state may be a state in which a game ball easily enters the start area, and the non-electric support state may be a state in which the game ball does not easily enter the start area.

  Further, in the above description, “a start region (for example, electric Chu) that can change at least between an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) and a difficult-to-enter state (for example, a closed state); First determination unit (e.g., CPU 304 of main control unit 300) capable of executing at least determination (e.g., determination of success / failure of normal map) and at least execution of second determination (e.g., determination of success / failure of special figure). When the possible second success / failure determination means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) and the result of the second success / failure determination is the big success / failure determination result, the control state is changed from the non-big hit control state to the big hit After at least a game control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of shifting to the control state and a symbol variation display, at least a stop symbol corresponding to the second determination result is displayed. A game machine comprising possible symbol display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 214) and effect display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing at least effect display. The region is a region where at least a specific action can be performed when the result of the first success / failure determination is a specific success / failure determination result. An operation including an operation for changing the state to an easy state (for example, an opening / closing operation of a pair of blade members, more specifically, an electric-chu short opening operation or an electric-chu long opening operation), The first effect can be displayed at least, and the first effect is an effect that includes at least an effect that is performed while the start area is executing the specific operation (for example, ( The effect display means is capable of displaying at least a second effect, and the second effect is an effect display performed during execution of the symbol variation display. (For example, display of characters C1 to C3), and the second effect is a part or all of the period during execution of the first effect, and at least a part of the first effect. A game stand characterized by an effect that can be difficult to view (for example, FIG. 160 (K)). Was explained.

  Here, the specific operation may be an operation of alternately repeating the difficult entry state and the easy entry state one or more times. Therefore, the second effect may be an effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the first effect when the start area is in the easy-to-enter state. May be an effect capable of making it difficult to see at least a part of the first effect before the state is changed from the difficult-to-enter state to the easy-to-enter state, and the starting area is in the easy-to-enter state. It may be an effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the first effect after the state is changed to the entry difficult state.

  In addition, after performing the first symbol variation display (for example, the normal symbol variation display), the first symbol display means (for example, the regular symbol) capable of displaying at least the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the first success / failure determination. The display device 210) includes an effect executed during the first symbol variation display (for example, (a) to (f) of FIG. 156 (b)) as the first effect. The effect display means can display at least the effect (for example, confirmed) as the first effect during the display of the stopped symbol by the first symbol display means. Medium effect) can be displayed at least, and the effect display means displays, as the first effect, at least an effect (for example, an effect during operation) performed while the start area is executing the specific operation. Even if possible There.

  That is, the first effect may be an effect including at least one effect among the effect during change, the effect during determination, and the effect during operation.

  In addition, as another symbol display means (for example, a first special symbol start port 230) different from the start region and one of the symbol display means, a first symbol display means (for example, a first symbol display means) 1 special symbol display device 212), and as one of the symbol display means, second symbol display means (for example, second special symbol display device 214) and first symbol display means. At least controllable symbol display control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300), and the separate start area does not change the ease of entry of a game ball, and the symbol display control means includes: The second symbol display means is at least controllable, and the symbol display control means holds the operation of the first symbol display means when the first holding condition is established. At least one hold control The symbol display control means can execute at least a second holding control for holding the operation of the second symbol display means when the second holding condition is satisfied. The establishment requirement of the first holding condition is a requirement including at least that the game ball has entered the separate start area, and the establishment requirement of the second hold condition is that the game ball has the start area The second effect is an effect that is performed while the second symbol display means is executing the symbol variation display (for example, a jackpot notice effect for the variation). A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  The second effect mentioned here may be an effect of variable display of decorative symbols performed while the second symbol display means is executing the symbol variable display.

  In addition, “the first symbol display means is capable of displaying at least a first stop symbol (for example, special symbol F) corresponding to the result of the big hit determination after the symbol variation display. The second symbol display means is capable of displaying at least a second stop symbol (for example, the special symbol A) corresponding to the result of the jackpot success / failure determination after performing symbol variation display, It is more advantageous for the player as the jackpot control state when the second symbol display means displays the second stop symbol than when the first symbol display means displays the first stop symbol. A game table characterized by having a configuration (for example, FIG. 158 (d)) in which a large jackpot control state is easily started. ”Was also explained.

  Here, the game control means changes the control state from the non-big hit control state to the first big hit control state (for example, 2R big hit game when the first symbol display means displays the first stop symbol. The game control means can change the control state from the non-big hit control state to the second big hit when the second symbol display means displays the second stop symbol. It is possible to shift at least to a control state (for example, 15R special jackpot gaming state), and the second jackpot control state may be a control state that is more advantageous to the player than the first jackpot control state. .

  In addition, in the winning area (for example, attacker), the second symbol display means displays the second stop symbol more than after the first symbol display means displays the first stop symbol. The latter may be easier to perform a state change operation (for example, an opening / closing operation) that is advantageous to the player. For example, an operation with a large number of times of opening or an operation with a long opening time may be easily performed.

Further, “the symbol display control means is capable of executing at least a control for starting the operation of the first symbol display means when the first holding digest condition is established, and the symbol display control The means is capable of executing at least a control for starting the operation of the second symbol display means when the second reserved digestion condition is established, and the establishment requirement of the second reserved digestion condition is: , The requirement that at least the operation of the second symbol display means is suspended, and the requirement to establish the first suspended digestion condition is that the operation of the second symbol display means is not suspended The requirement for establishing the first suspended digestion condition is a requirement including at least that the operation of the first symbol display means is suspended, and the effect display means includes the second display Wrong or wrong At least a pre-reading notice effect (for example, an effect due to a change in the display mode of the hold icon) can be displayed, and the effect display means can execute at least a continuous notice effect as the pre-reading notice effect. The effect display means is capable of continuing at least the continuous notice effect during the interrupt symbol variation display, and the interrupt symbol variation display is performed when the second reserved digest condition is during the continuous notice effect. It is a symbol variation display that is started during the continuous notice effect by being established, and the prefetch notice effect (for example, the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 in the display mode of the prefetch notice) is being executed in the first effect. It is an effect that makes it difficult to view at least a part of the first effect (for example, the electric chew release notification effect) during part or all of the period (for example, FIG 164 (d ')), the amusement machine, characterized in that. ”Was also explained.
The game stand here is a so-called special figure 2 priority change machine.

The effect display means is capable of displaying at least the first effect during execution of the prefetch notice effect.
<Fourth embodiment>

  Then, the pachinko machine of 4th Embodiment of this invention is demonstrated. The pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment is common in common with the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, and is the same as the pachinko machine of the third embodiment unless otherwise specified. In the following description, components having the same names as those of the components described so far will be described using the same reference numerals as those used so far. Note that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 168 to 183 are used only in the description of the present embodiment in principle, and even in the case where the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the description of the present embodiment is not illustrated. The reference numerals 168 to 183 are prioritized. In addition, the number of the example of this embodiment is used only for the description of this embodiment in principle, but each example of this embodiment and each example of other embodiments are applied in combination with each other. Can do. In addition, when there are drawings showing the same timing in a plurality of drawings, overlapping description may be omitted.

  FIG. 168 (a) is a diagram showing the success / failure determination table of FIG. 1 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 168 (b) is a diagram showing the success / failure determination table of FIG. These tables are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

In the fourth embodiment, whether the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, the winning probability of the jackpot is about 1/320 in the special figure low probability state and about 1/32 in the special figure high probability state. Compared to the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment is a pachinko machine with specifications that make it easier to win a big hit.
Also in the fourth embodiment, the small hit is not in the special figure 2 but only in the special figure 1.

  The special figure determination table is the same as that of the third embodiment shown in FIG. 158 (d), and the table set selection table is the same as that of the second embodiment shown in FIG. The timer number table is also the same as that of the second embodiment shown in FIG.

  Therefore, also in the fourth embodiment, the special figure 2 is more likely to generate a big hit advantageous to the player than the special figure 1.

  Further, the determination of whether or not the special figure is true may be derived from “big hit”, “small hit”, or “lack”, or may be derived from “big hit” or “lack”. Alternatively, whether or not a special figure is appropriate may be derived up to a special figure symbol.

  The pre-reading notice is also executed in the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment. The pre-reading notice pre-reads the starting information before the start of the symbol variation of the special symbol, determines the result of the special symbol determination in advance based on the starting information, and notifies the result of the determination on the basis of the starting information Prior to the start, based on the determination result in advance, it is foretold that the determination result based on the start information will be a big hit or special figure A or special figure B, and the determination result based on the start information Even if it is off, or it becomes special figure I or special figure J, it is a notice (so-called fake notice) that the success / failure determination result based on the start information becomes a big hit or special figure A or special figure B ) Is also included.

  FIG. 169 (a) is a diagram showing a special figure 1 failure pre-judgment table used when pre-determining by pre-reading the start information of FIG. 1, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the table for special figure 2 this time prior determination used when pre-determining by pre-reading the starting information.

The special figure 1 success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 169 (a) is the same as the special figure 1 determination / no-failure determination table shown in FIG. 168 (a), and is shown in FIG. 169 (b). The use table is the same as the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 2 shown in FIG. Even if the preliminary determination is performed using the preliminary determination table shown in FIG. 169, the special determination related lottery process is performed again using the determination table shown in FIG. 168.
Moreover, in prior determination, it performs until prior determination of a special figure.
FIG. 169 (c) is a diagram showing a special figure prior determination table.

  The special figure preliminary determination table shown in FIG. 169 (c) is the same as the special figure determination table (see FIG. 158 (d)) used in the special figure related lottery process. The special figure determination process using the special figure determination table is performed.

  In advance determination, it is also possible to make a prior determination of the special figure based on the prior determination result of the fluctuation time by making a prior determination of the fluctuation time of the special figure without performing the preliminary determination of the special figure. Alternatively, instead of specifically predetermining the fluctuation time of the special figure, it is possible to predetermine trends of fluctuation times and groups of fluctuation times, and to make a pre-reading notice based on those prior judgment results. May be.

Further, whether or not to perform the pre-reading notice or in what form the pre-reading notice is performed is determined by the sub-control unit (400, 500), for example, by performing random lottery.
Next, the normal / bad determination in the fourth embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 170 (a) is a diagram showing a normal / unusual determination table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

Also in the normal-time success / failure determination process in the present embodiment, the time / shortness flag is referred to, and whether or not the current control state is the power support state is determined. The normal control state is a low probability state if the hourly flag is turned off (if it is a non-electric support state), and is a high probability state if the hourly flag is turned on (if it is an electric support state). . The determination of whether or not a common figure is made is performed based on a random number value for a common figure winning in the starting information extracted from the general figure holding storage unit of the RAM 308 (a possible range is 0 to 65535). The usual Atari probability in the fourth embodiment is about 10% in the non-electric support state (low probability state) and 100% in the electric support state (high probability state). In the electric support state, it may be possible to win only for winning.
FIG. 170 (b) is a diagram showing a general-purpose determination table.

  In determining the common map, the standard map is determined based on whether or not the current control state is the electric support state with reference to the time reduction flag. If it is a non-electric support state, a common figure will be determined based on the common figure decision random number value (the range which can be taken is 0-99) among the starting information taken out from the common figure storage part of RAM308. In the fourth embodiment, the normal figure A is determined with a probability of 90% and the normal figure B is determined with a probability of 10% in the non-electric support state. In the universal figure determination table shown in FIG. 170 (b), an open state of the electric chew corresponding to the universal figure determination result is shown. When the map A is stopped and displayed on the map display device 210, the electric chew is released for a maximum of 1.8 seconds (electric chow short is released). On the other hand, when the normal figure B is stopped and displayed on the normal figure display device 210, the electric chew is released for a maximum of 6 seconds (electric chow long open). If a predetermined number of balls (10 balls in this case) are entered before a predetermined opening time elapses, the electric Chu is closed at that time.

  Moreover, in 4th Embodiment, if it is an electric support state, it will be decided by the general map B by all means. Therefore, the lottery based on the usual decision random number is not performed. Even if the general map B is stopped and displayed on the general map display device 210 in the electric support state, the electric chew is released for a maximum of 6 seconds (electric chew long open). In this case, when the general map B is stopped and displayed on the general map display device 210 in the non-electric support state, the electric chew is opened for the first time (for example, 4 seconds) at the maximum, and the general display is displayed in the electric support state. When the map A is stopped and displayed on the apparatus 210, the electric chew may be opened for a second time (for example, 6 seconds) at the maximum.

  In addition, when the result of determining whether or not the usual figure is correct is out of date, the figure becomes the ordinary figure C, so that the lottery based on the usual figure determined random value is not performed.

Note that, in the fourth embodiment, only in the electric support state, the determination of whether or not a normal figure is won is almost won. However, even in a non-electric support state, it may be won almost (or always). In this case, in the non-electric support state, when the map A is stopped and displayed on the map display device 210, the power Chu is opened only for a maximum of 0.1 seconds.
FIG. 170 (c) is a diagram showing a regular timer table.

  As shown in the normal time timer table of FIG. 170 (c), in the fourth embodiment, the normal symbol change time is uniformly 20 seconds (normal time in the non-electric support state) regardless of the normal time symbol. The timer is a timer 1), and in the power support state, it is uniformly 1 second (ordinary timer 2). In this way, since the non-electric support state is longer in the non-electric support state than the electric support state, it is possible to perform a long effect during the normal symbol change display in the non-electric support state, and enhance the effect There are cases where it is possible.

  Note that it is also possible to prepare a plurality of types of normal symbol variation times in the non-electric support state and determine the normal symbol variation times in the non-electric support state by random number lottery. In addition, a plurality of types (two types or three or more types) of symbol change time of the normal figure in the electric support state are prepared, and a random number lottery is selected from among them. The symbol variation time in the figure may be determined. Alternatively, the symbol variation time may be prepared for each ordinary symbol, and the symbol B may be selected more easily for the ordinary symbol B than for the ordinary symbol A. By doing so, it becomes easy to produce a turn effect before the usual figure B is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, the symbol B may be selected more easily in the normal figure B than in the normal figure A. By doing so, the player can be made more advantageous.

  Further, in the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment, the normal determination in advance is also executed based on the fact that the normal start information acquisition condition is satisfied. The requirement for establishing the usual start information acquisition condition here is a requirement established based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the usual figure start port 228. In other words, in a state where the number of ordinary holds is less than a predetermined upper limit, this is a requirement that is established when a game ball passes through the general opening 228, and in a state where the number of ordinary holds is a predetermined upper limit, This is a requirement that does not hold even if a game ball passes through the normal start port 228. The pre-judgment of ordinary drawings is the same process as the special-judgment prior decision.

  FIG. 171 (a) is a diagram showing a normal / non-predictive table for use in determining whether or not to perform advance determination by pre-reading normal startup information.

171 (a) is the same as the general-purpose determination table shown in FIG. 170 (a). Even if the preliminary determination is performed using the preliminary determination table shown in FIG. 171 (a), in the common drawing related lottery process, the determination of success / failure using the universal drawing determination table shown in FIG. 170 (a) is performed again. Is called.
Moreover, in prior determination, it is performed until the prior determination of a usual figure.
FIG. 171 (b) is a diagram showing a general-purpose advance determination table.

  The general map determination table shown in FIG. 171 (b) is the same as the general map determination table shown in FIG. 170 (b). However, in the general drawing related lottery process, the general map determination table is used again. The usual figure determination process was performed.

  Subsequently, a general drawing effect determination process executed by the first sub-control unit 400 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 172 (a).

  FIG. 172 (a) is a flowchart showing the flow of the ordinary drawing effect determination process in the fourth embodiment.

  The general drawing effect determination process shown in FIG. 172 (a) is also started when the first sub-control unit 400 receives a general diagram change start command from the main control unit 300. The usual figure change start command includes information indicating the current control state (whether or not the electric support state is set) and a usual figure determination result.

  First, it is determined whether or not it is during the prohibition period of the usual drawing effect (step S611). The prohibition period here is a period during power support. Note that this prohibition period may include at least one execution period among the specific effects described later. If it is during the prohibition period (during electric support), this ordinary drawing effect determination process ends, and the ordinary drawing effect (first effect) is not performed. Since the electric support state is a state in which a game ball easily wins an electric chew, there is a possibility that the player's expectation will not be improved so much even if the usual drawing effect is performed. However, if the electric support is in progress, the general drawing effect will not be performed uniformly. Even if the electric support is in progress, if the lottery with a predetermined probability is won, the normal drawing effect will be executed. May be.

  On the other hand, if it is not during the prohibition period (if it is during non-electric support), it is determined whether or not the normal drawing execution condition is satisfied (step S612). The requirement for establishment of the general drawing execution condition is a requirement established by winning the general drawing B shown in FIG. 154 (c). In addition, when the normal map B is stopped and displayed on the general map display device 210, the electric tulong release is executed, and this general drawing effect execution condition corresponds to the execution condition of the true normal drawing effect. Moreover, it is also a requirement that is established by winning the drawing A shown in FIG. 154 (c) and winning the effect execution lottery with the first probability (for example, 1/10). When the map A is stopped and displayed on the map display device 210, the electric-chu short opening is executed, and this general drawing production execution condition is equivalent to the execution condition of the fake general drawing production for the electric-chu long opening. However, it corresponds to the execution condition of the true general drawing effect for the electric Chu release. Furthermore, it is also a requirement that is established by winning the drawing C of the second probability (for example, 1/100) and winning the drawing execution possibility determination lottery in the common figure C shown in FIG. 154 (c). Note that the first probability may be a probability equal to or higher than the second probability or higher than the second probability. When the general map C is stopped and displayed on the general map display device 210, the electric chew is not opened and remains closed, and this general drawing performance execution condition corresponds to a false general drawing performance execution condition. In addition, here, the general drawing production execution condition is always satisfied if the winning figure B is won, but it may be established by winning the drawing execution lottery with a third probability (for example, 1/2). Good. The third probability may be a probability that is equal to or higher than the first probability or a probability that is higher than the first probability. If the general drawing effect execution condition described above is not established, this general drawing effect determination process is terminated.

  On the contrary, if the ordinary drawing effect execution condition is satisfied, it is determined whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied (step S613). The requirement for satisfying the predetermined condition here is a requirement that is satisfied when the specific effect is executed. Specific effects include effects during a big hit game, effects with a high expectation level for jackpots when the special symbol changes (for example, super reach, notice effect), forced effects that occur every predetermined time, right strikes, and button presses For example, an effect that prompts the player to perform an operation, an effect that prompts each button to be pressed, and the like. The compulsory effect is an effect that is performed by moving the decorative symbol to the corner if the special symbol is changing, and is an effect that is performed in the middle of the demo effect if the demonstration is being performed. Further, the effect of prompting the user to press the button may be, for example, an effect that notifies the button pressing timing for each button, an effect that notifies the button pressing reception period, or the remaining button pressing reception. It may be an effect that informs the period. If the predetermined condition is not established, the first ordinary drawing effect command is set in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 (step S614), the ordinary drawing effect determining process is ended, and if the predetermined condition is established. Then, the second ordinary drawing effect command is set in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 (step S615), and the ordinary drawing effect determining process ends. The ordinary drawing effect command set in the RAM 408 is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the information transmission process (step S319) shown in FIG. 129 (a), and the second sub-control unit 500 transmits the received ordinary command. Based on the effect command, the decorative symbol display device 208 is controlled, and the normal symbol effect is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The ordinary drawing effect based on the first ordinary drawing effect command is an effect executed over a relatively long effect time, and the ordinary drawing effect based on the second ordinary figure effect command is executed over a relatively short effect time. Production. For example, the start time of the general drawing production based on the second general drawing production command is later than the start time of the general drawing production command based on the first general drawing production command, and the production time is shortened. In other words, when the usual drawing effect is started while the specific effect is being executed, the effect time is shorter than when the usual drawing effect is started while the specific effect is not being executed. By doing so, there are cases where the production can be varied and the interest of the game can be enhanced. In addition, when a specific effect (for example, a big hit notice) is being executed, it is possible to attract a player's attention to the specific effect by shortening the effect time of the general effect, and a general effect including a result display. In some cases, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the stop display of the regular symbols, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In addition, 0 seconds are also included in the short production time here, and in the case of 0 seconds, the usual drawing production is not executed. In the case of 0 seconds, the second ordinary drawing effect command may not be transmitted, or the second ordinary drawing effect command may be a cancel command. Further, even if the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the first general drawing production command is not set uniformly, but in step S614, a lottery is performed, and the second general display is performed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/20). You may make it set a figure production command.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment, it is easier to perform the normal drawing effect in the non-electric support state than in the electric support state. Since the non-electric support state is a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to win the electric chew, there is a case where it can be expected to win the game ball to the electric chew by executing the ordinary drawing effect.

  FIG. 172 (b) is a flowchart showing the flow of predetermined area notice effect determination processing in the fourth embodiment.

  The predetermined area here is a predetermined area in the decorative symbol display device 208, and corresponds to, for example, a special figure holding display area. Also in the fourth embodiment, the special figure hold display area is provided in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, which is the same as in the third embodiment described above. However, in the third embodiment, the general drawing effect area provided between the special figure 1 hold display area and the special figure 2 hold display area where the normal drawing effect is performed is referred to as a predetermined area. In the embodiment, the special figure 1 hold display area or the special figure 2 hold display area is referred to as a predetermined area. Note that the predetermined area in the fourth embodiment is not limited to the special figure hold display area, and may be an area that includes an area close to or adjacent to an area where a general drawing effect is performed.

  The predetermined area notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 172 (b) is also started when the first sub control unit 400 receives a special figure hold increase command from the main control unit 300. The notice effect here refers to a special bonus jackpot notice effect. The special figure jackpot notice effect here is a prefetch notice effect based on the prior determination result described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 starts even when it receives any of the commands described so far, such as a special symbol variation start command, a universal symbol hold increase command, a universal symbol variation start command, a jackpot presentation start command, etc. You may do it. In these cases, the notice effect is not limited to the look-ahead notice effect, but may be a notice effect regarding the stop symbol of the symbol change, or may be a notice effect for notifying the development to reach. Further, it may be a notice effect or the like for giving a notice of a transition to the probability change state or the electric support state after the big hit.

  In step S621, it is determined whether it is during the prohibition period. The prohibition period in step S621 is a period during the normal drawing effect. If it is during the prohibition period (during the ordinary drawing production), the process proceeds to step S624.

  On the other hand, if it is not during the prohibition period, it is determined whether or not the notice effect execution condition is satisfied (step S622). The requirement for fulfilling the notice effect execution condition is a requirement that is established by winning the notice execution possibility lottery. If this notice effect execution condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S624.

  On the contrary, if the notice effect execution condition is satisfied, a predetermined area notice effect command is set in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 (step S623), and the process proceeds to step S624. The predetermined area notice effect command set in the RAM 408 is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the information transmission process (step S319) shown in FIG. 129 (a), and the second sub control unit 500 transmits the predetermined predetermined command transmitted. The decorative symbol display device 208 is controlled based on the region notice effect command, and the notice effect is displayed in a predetermined area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In step S624, the other notice effect lottery process is executed, and the predetermined area notice effect determination process ends. Other notice effects are equivalent to notice effects (including pre-read notice) performed outside the predetermined area.

  Next, specific examples of effects in the fourth embodiment will be described. First, a description will be given with reference to FIGS. 173 and 174.

  FIG. 173 is a time chart showing an example of the effect in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 174 is a diagram showing a state of the decorative symbol display device and the like for each important point in the time chart shown in FIG. 173. In other words, the decorative symbol display devices shown in FIGS. 174A to 174 correspond to the periods A to KU shown in FIG. In the time chart shown in FIG. 173, time (t) elapses from the left to the right in the figure.

  Under the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 174, a universal display device 210, a first special view display device 212, and a second special view display device 214, all of which are driven and controlled by the main controller 300, are shown. Has been. In the figure used for description in the fourth embodiment, the positions of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are opposite to those used for the explanation in the third embodiment, and the first special figure is displayed. The display device 212 is shown on the leftmost side, and the second special figure display device 214 is shown on the right side. Further, the general map display device 210 is shown on the rightmost side. Furthermore, in the figure used for description in the fourth embodiment, a hold lamp that lights up as many as the number of hold is shown on each display device. That is, four first special figure holding lamps 218 are shown on the leftmost first special figure display device 212, and the second special figure display device 214 on the right (middle) thereof is on the second special figure display device 214. Four figure hold lamps 220 are shown, and four figure hold lamps 216 are shown on the rightmost map display device 210. These holding lamps are all controlled to be turned on by the main control unit 300. In the fourth embodiment, the maximum number of reservations in the usual figure is also the same as the maximum number of reservations in FIG. 1 and the maximum number of reservations in FIG. It should be noted that the maximum number of reservations may or may not be provided for both normal and special drawings. Even in the figure used for the description in the fourth embodiment, only the horizontal segment at the center in the vertical direction is lit and the black portion is lit during the symbol variation, as in the figure used for the description in the third embodiment. Indicates the location of the segment.

  On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 208 is driven and controlled by sub-control means (here, the second sub-control unit 500). A special figure 1 hold display area 281 is provided on the left side of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a special figure 2 hold display area 282 is provided on the right side thereof. Further, a special drawing effect area 283 corresponding to an example of the predetermined area described above is provided between the special figure 1 hold display area 281 and the special figure 2 hold display area 282. In each hold display area, the old hold icon is displayed on the universal drawing effect area 283 side (center side), which is the same as the decorative symbol display device 208 of the third embodiment shown in FIG. Further, the default display mode of the special figure 1 hold icon is a black circle, and when a pre-reading notice effect is performed, the default display mode is changed to a predetermined display mode. Here, the pre-reading notice effect is performed by displaying the hold icon in the display mode of the old character. Note that a second predetermined display mode (for example, a character different from the old one) may be prepared and used in accordance with the reliability of the prefetch notice. For example, a pre-reading notice effect may be performed by displaying a hold icon in a predetermined display mode when the reliability for winning a big hit is really low and in a second predetermined display mode when the reliability is high.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 174, the number display of each number of holdings and the fourth symbol are displayed in a vertical line on the left side of the left symbol display area 208a. That is, a numerical display 284 representing the number of reserved figures in FIG. 1 is provided at the top, and a fourth symbol 285 in FIG. 1 is displayed below the figure. Below that, there is provided a numerical display 286 indicating the number of reserved figures in FIG. 2, and below that, a fourth symbol 287 of special figure 2 is displayed. Further below that, a number display 288 representing the number of holds of the usual figure is provided, and below that, the fourth figure 289 of the usual figure is displayed. The 4th symbol displays that the symbol is changing. The first special symbol display device 212 at the left end shown in FIG. 174 (a) displays the special symbol variation, and the other display devices 214, 210 is stopped. The 4th symbol 285 of the special figure 1 is lit in gray, and the other 4th symbols 287 and 289 are unlit. Each of the fourth symbols 285, 287.289 lights up in a predetermined color when the display devices 212, 214, 210 stop displaying the big hit symbol or the hit symbol, and during the big hit game or during the electric chew opening / closing operation May continue to light in a predetermined color.

  The state shown in FIGS. 174 and 173 (a) is a non-electric support state, the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 3, and the number of holdings of special figure 2 and ordinary figure is zero. In the special figure 1 hold display area 281 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 174 (a), two hold icons are displayed, and the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 representing the first hold of the oldest winning prize. Is displayed in the display mode of old and new characters, and a pre-reading notice effect is executed on the left side of the normal drawing effect region 283. In addition, the default image 283a is displayed in the normal drawing effect area 283. The default image 283a is an image displayed in the general drawing effect area 283 when the normal drawing effect is not performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 173 (a), the electric chew is not operated, and the electric chew (the pair of blade members 232) is in a closed state. Note that, as described above, the first special symbol display device 212 shown in FIG. 174 (a) performs the special symbol variation display, and this symbol variation display continues beyond the timing of FIG. 174 (ku). To do.

  Here, since the player is in the non-electric support state, the player is left-handed, and eventually, three game balls B pass continuously through the general start port 228 provided in the left region, The number of holds increases to 3. As shown in FIG. 173 (a), the multi-purpose display device 210 starts the general-purpose symbol variation display and also starts the general-purpose effect. Here, the general drawing effect is a general drawing effect (hereinafter referred to as a first general drawing effect) based on the first general drawing effect command set in step S614 of FIG. 172 (a). The usual symbol variation display is performed for 20 seconds. In the ordinary drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 174 (a), the decorative display variation display (high-speed variation) of the ordinary drawing is started. Here, the variation display of the decorative pattern of the ordinary figure is performed for 20 seconds by the variation display pattern shown in (a) of FIG. 156 (b) (the repetition of the ordinary figure decoration 1 → the ordinary figure decoration 2 → the ordinary figure decoration 3). . In addition, the number display 288 of the usual number of reserved figures shown in FIG. 174 (a) is 3, and the fourth figure 289 of the usual figure is also lit in gray.

  Eventually, as shown in (c) of FIG. 173, the universal symbol display device 210 ends the symbol variation display of the ordinary symbol, and the confirmation display is performed. That is, the general-purpose display device 210 displays the stop symbol of the general-purpose figure C (see FIG. 154 (c)) for 0.6 seconds. The “symbol variation display period” may refer to a period from the start of the symbol variation display to the end of the fixed display. In the ordinary drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 174 (c), the ordinary figure decoration 3 which is the stop figure form of the ordinary figure decorative pattern (see FIG. 154 (d)) is set to 0 after the variation display of the ornamental pattern of the ordinary figure. Displayed for 6 seconds. That is, the usual result display effect is performed. Note that the first ordinary drawing effect here is a relative display in which the decoration illustration of the ordinary drawing is displayed in a variable manner by referring to the decision result of the ordinary drawing in step S612 in FIG. It is a production over a long first time (20.6 seconds). In addition, the 4th symbol 289 of the usual figure shown in FIG. 174 (c) is turned off when the decision display on the ordinary figure display device 210 is being performed.

  When the confirmation display on the general-purpose display device 210 is completed, as shown in FIG. 173 (d), the general-purpose display device 210 starts the normal symbol variation display again, but here, the general-purpose effect is not executed. . That is, in the determination in step S612 shown in FIG. 172, it is determined that the normal drawing effect execution condition is not satisfied, and therefore the normal drawing effect is not executed and the false normal drawing effect is not performed. A default image 283a is displayed in the ordinary drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. In addition, the number display 288 of the number of reserved figures in the usual figure shown in FIG. 174 (D) is 2, and the fourth figure 289 of the usual figure is also lit in gray.

  Eventually, as shown in (e) of FIG. 173, the general symbol display device 210 ends the normal symbol variation display, and a fixed display is performed for 0.6 seconds. A default image 283a is still displayed in the normal drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. That is, the usual result display effect is not performed. In addition, the 4th design 289 of the usual figure shown in FIG.

  When the confirmation display on the general-purpose display device 210 is completed, as shown in FIG. 173 (f), the general-purpose display device 210 starts the normal-pattern variation display again, and this time, the general-purpose effect is also started. . Here, the usual symbol variation display is also performed for 20 seconds. In the ordinary drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 174 (f), the variation display (high-speed variation) of the decorative symbol of the ordinary drawing is started. The general map production here is also the first general map production. In addition, the number display 288 of the number of reserved figures in the usual figure shown in FIG. 174 (a) is 1, and the fourth figure 289 of the usual figure is also lit in gray.

  When 20 seconds have elapsed from the start of the normal symbol variation display, as shown in FIG. 173 (ki), the universal symbol display device 210 ends the normal symbol variation display and confirms for 0.6 seconds. Display is performed. A stop symbol of the general map B (see FIG. 154 (c)) is displayed on the general map display device 210 shown in FIG. 174 (ki). Following this, the general-purpose decoration 2 (see FIG. 154 (d)) corresponding to the general-purpose figure B is displayed, and the usual-purpose result display effect is performed. In addition, an effect image (here, an effect image 283b) is also displayed so as to surround the ordinary drawing effect region 283 as a normal drawing effect. The effect image 283b enters the special figure 1 hold display area 281, and a part of the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 in the display form of the pre-reading notice which is the display form of the old character is hidden by the effect image 283b. ing. As a result, the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 is difficult to visually recognize. Note that the entire first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 may be hidden by the effect image 283b.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 173 (K), the electric chew long is released, and the electric chew is opened for 5 seconds. In the usual drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 174 (K), the electric chew release notification effect is executed following the usual result display effect with the effect image 283b. In the electric chew release notification effect here, a decorative design in which a character of Tono-sama with a balloon saying “electric chew is open” has a peace sign is displayed. With the balloon “opening electric chew”, the player knows that the game ball can enter the electric chew, and can grasp the launch timing of the game ball. In addition, the character's hand extends beyond the normal drawing effect area 283, enters the special figure 1 hold display area 281, and the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 (here, the pre-reading notice) Part of the hold icon) in the display mode is hidden. As a result, the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 is difficult to visually recognize. This electric chew release notification effect can also be regarded as one of the usual result display effects. Note that all of the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 may be hidden by the electric chew release notification effect. In addition, a balloon “During electric Chu open” also extends beyond the general drawing effect area 283, and this balloon enters the special figure 2 hold display area 282.

  As described above, the first special figure 1 holding icon 2811 whose display mode has been changed to the pre-reading notice mode is dared to be hidden by the normal drawing effect such as the effect image 283b or the electric-chu release notification effect. You may be interested in the trends. Further, the pre-reading notice is a future jackpot notice, and the player may be expected to open the electric chew by conspicuously presenting the current progressive drawing.

  The first ordinary drawing effect here refers to the result of determining the ordinary drawing in step S612 in FIG. 172, displays the variation of the decorative symbol of the ordinary drawing, and then displays the result of the ordinary drawing with the effect image 283b. And then the electric-chu release notification effect, which is an effect over a relatively long second time (25.6 seconds).

  Subsequently, although not shown in FIG. 174, as shown in FIG. 173 (K), when the electric chew long release is ended, the electric chew release notification effect is also ended, and the normal symbol variation display is started. However, the usual drawing effect is not executed.

  FIG. 175 is a time chart showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 173, and FIG. 176 is a diagram showing a state of the decorative symbol display device and the like for each important point in the time chart shown in FIG. That is, the decorative symbol display device shown in (sa) to (se) of FIG. 175 corresponds to the period (sa) to (se) shown in FIG. In the time chart shown in FIG. 175, time (t) elapses from the left to the right in the figure.

  After the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 performed in FIG. 174 is finished and the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the first special feature of the display mode of the pre-reading notice which is the display mode of the old character shown in FIG. The hold of the special figure 1 represented by the hold icon 2811 in FIG. 1 is consumed, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. In accordance with the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the decorative symbol display device 208 also starts the variation display of the decorative symbol of the special figure 1 and develops into super reach. The predetermined condition shown in FIG. 175 is the predetermined condition in step S613 of FIG. 172, and the predetermined condition is being established during the performance of the super reach with high expectation of the big hit. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 176 (s), a state of development to super reach is shown. Super reach itself is a type of jackpot notice, and the super reach production also corresponds to the jackpot notice. In the production of the super reach here, the background image of the decorative symbol display device 208 changes, the decorative symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 in the reach state moves to the left corner and is displayed small, and the female character C2 Appears. Note that the hold icon disappears when it evolves into super reach. Note that even when the hold icon display control is performed and only the player cannot see the hold icon, it is assumed to be “disappear” or “erase” in this specification. The same applies to “hidden” and “hidden”. However, the numerical displays 284, 286, and 286 at the left end are not erased (visible). Each fourth symbol 285, 287, 289 is also displayed.

  Again, since the player is in a non-electric support state, the player is left-handed, and three game balls B pass continuously through the normal start port 228 provided in the left area, and ( As shown in FIG. 5B, the general symbol display device 210 starts the normal symbol variation display, and the regular symbol variation display is performed for 20 seconds. On the other hand, since the predetermined condition is established (the super reach is being performed), the effect based on the second general effect command set in step S615 in FIG. Will be executed), but at the start of the general symbol variation display in the general diagram display device 210, the second general diagram effect is not yet started, and the general diagram effect shown in FIG. A default image 283 a is displayed in the figure effect area 283. It should be noted that the ordinary drawing effect area 283 may be erased with the background image which is one of the effects of super reach, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the default image 283a is not displayed until the ordinary drawing effect is started. Also good.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 176 (sa), the super-reach character C2 hides a part of the normal drawing effect area 283 where the normal part effect is not performed. As a result, the ordinary drawing effect region 283 is difficult to visually recognize.

  As shown in FIG. 175 (si), when the end of the normal symbol variation display on the general diagram display device 210 is approaching (here, from one second before), the second general diagram effect is displayed in the general diagram effect region 283. Is started. In the ordinary drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 176 (S), the variation display (high-speed variation) of the decorative symbol of the ordinary drawing is started. The variation display of the decorative pattern of the ordinary figure here is also the variation display pattern shown in (a) of FIG. 156 (b) (repetition of the ordinary figure decoration 1 → the ordinary figure decoration 2 → the ordinary figure decoration 3). Since the time is short, the number of repetitions is small.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 176 (S), when the normal drawing effect is started in the normal drawing effect region 283, this time, the normal drawing effect region 283 hides the foot portion of the super reach character C 2. . As a result, the character C2 is difficult to visually recognize. It should be noted that the leg portion of the super reach character C2 may still hide a part of the ordinary drawing effect area 283, or the ordinary drawing effect area 283 may obscure the foot portion of the super reach character C2. It may not be hidden.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 175 (su), the general symbol display device 210 ends the normal symbol variation display, and a fixed display is performed for 0.6 seconds. In the normal drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 176, the normal drawing decoration 2 is displayed for 0.6 seconds following the variation display of the normal decorative pattern, and the normal drawing result display effect is performed. . Also here, as the ordinary drawing effect, an effect image (here, the effect image 283b) is also displayed so as to surround the ordinary drawing effect region 283. The super reach character C2 is hidden by the effect image 283b up to the band portion. As a result, the super reach character C2 is more difficult to visually recognize. Note that all of the super reach character C2 may be hidden by the effect image 283b.

  It should be noted that the fluctuation display time of the decorative pattern of the ordinary figure in the second ordinary figure production (the period length of (f) in FIG. 175) is the fixed display time (the result display effect time of ordinary figure: the period of (f) in FIG. 175) Long), or shorter or longer than the fixed display time.

  Subsequently, as shown in (c) of FIG. 175, the electric chew long is released and the electric chew is opened for 5 seconds. In the ordinary drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 176 (se), the same effect as the electric chew release notification effect shown in FIG. 174 is executed following the usual result display effect with the effect image 283b. In the super reach character C2, the right body part is hidden by a balloon “During electric Chu release” in the electric Chu release notification effect. As a result, it is difficult to visually recognize the super-reach character C2. The electric chew release notification effect here can also be regarded as one of the usual result display effects. Note that all of the super reach character C2 may be hidden by the electric chew release notification effect.

  Note that the second general drawing production here refers to the result of determination of the normal drawing in step S612 in FIG. 172, and displays a short variation display of the decorative symbol of the normal drawing, and then displays the result of the normal drawing with the effect image 283b. The effect is performed over a relatively short third time (for example, 6.6 seconds) in which the effect is performed and then the electric chew release notification effect is performed.

  Subsequently, although not shown in FIG. 176, as shown in FIG. 175 (S), when the electric-chu-long opening is ended, the electric-chu opening notification effect is also ended, and the normal symbol variation display is started. However, the usual drawing effect is not executed.

  Note that the start time of the second general drawing effect may be changed according to the start time of the symbol variation display of the special symbol. For example, a predetermined period including the start time of the second general drawing effect (for example, the front and back 5 seconds) ) May be controlled so that the start time of the second general drawing effect is synchronized with (at the same time as) the start time of the symbol variation display of the special symbol. Alternatively, control may be performed so as to be delayed from the start time of the symbol variation display of the special symbol, or may be controlled so as to be advanced. In the period (c) in FIG. 175, the electric chew continues to be opened. However, the electric chew (the pair of blade members 232a) is opened and closed one or more times during the period (c). You may make it perform, and you may make at least one part of production | presentation display common at the time of opening or opening and closing and closing, or may make it different. For example, it may be a peace sign during opening or opening, a goo sign during closing or closing, or a blue kimono during opening or opening, even if the peace sign is continued. Yes, it may be red kimono when closed or during closing.

  FIG. 177 is a time chart showing a modification of the second ordinary drawing effect, and time (t) elapses from the left to the right in the figure.

  In the modified example shown in FIG. 177 (a), the second general drawing effect is not performed during the fluctuation display of the normal decoration pattern (period (C)), and the final display starts (the beginning of the period (T)). ), The second general drawing production is started, and the electric chew release notification effect (this is also the result of the general drawing) is displayed as part of the second general drawing production even during the opening of the electric Chu long (period). A kind of production). In other words, the second ordinary drawing effect in this modification is configured only by the result display effect of the ordinary drawing, and the effect time is a relatively short fourth time (here, 5.6 seconds). Note that in the case of an ordinary figure out of date (ordinary figure C), only the result display effect of the ordinary figure in the final display is displayed, but since it is a very short time of 0.6 seconds, the ordinary figure is out of date (normal figure). In the case of FIG. C), the second general drawing effect may not be executed.

  In the second ordinary drawing effect in the modification shown in FIG. 177 (b), the second decoration is displayed both during the variation display (period (d)) and during the fixed display (period (nu)) of the decorative pattern of the ordinary figure. If the ordinary drawing effect is not performed and the electric Chulong opening is started (the beginning of the period (ne)), the second ordinary drawing effect is started. The production time of the second ordinary drawing effect in this modification is a relatively short fifth time (here, 5 seconds). Note that this second general drawing effect is not executed when the normal figure is out of place (normal figure C).

  In step S615 in FIG. 172, any one of the second general drawing effect at the third time, the second general effect at the fourth time, and the second general effect at the fifth time is selected. It may be determined by lottery whether to execute the second general drawing effect of time. Moreover, you may prepare the thing of production time other than said 3rd time-said 5th time as a 2nd common figure production.

  Further, the third time to the fifth time are all shorter than the usual symbol variation time (20 seconds here) in the non-electric support state. By doing so, there are cases where the production can be varied and the interest of the game can be enhanced. In addition, while the symbol variation display that is not performing the normal drawing effect, it is possible to attract the player's attention to other effects, and the player can display the stop display of the general symbol by performing the general drawing effect including the result display. May become easier to recognize and may increase the interest of the game.

  FIG. 178 is a time chart showing an example when the predetermined condition is changed from the established state to the unestablished state, and time (t) elapses from the left to the right in the drawing.

  In the example shown in FIG. 178 (a), even if the state where the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, during super reach execution) is changed to the state where the predetermined condition is not satisfied (for example, super reach end), the normal symbol variation display starts. It is an example which performs the 2nd general drawing effect determined at the time. That is, the same second general drawing effect as that shown in FIG. 175 is executed (period (F) to (E)).

  The example shown in FIG. 178 (b) is an example in which the ordinary drawing effect is started from the point in time when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. In this example, since the predetermined condition was established at the time of starting the normal symbol variation display, the second general diagram effect (the second general diagram effect shown in FIG. 175) is started from the beginning of the period (l). The same). However, the predetermined condition is not satisfied during the display of the variation of the ordinary decorative pattern, and the variation display of the ordinary decorative symbol is started from the middle of the variation display of the ordinary decorative symbol (the beginning of the period of (le)). ), The display of the variation of the decorative pattern of the usual figure is continued even during the period of (L), and thereafter, the result display effect of the usual figure with the effect image 283b is performed (period (B)), and then the electric chew release notification effect is produced. Perform (period (wa)).

  In addition, you may add a variation display of the usual decorative pattern for the period of (Le), or start the display control of the variation display of the ordinary decorative pattern from the beginning of the period (Li), While the predetermined condition is satisfied, it may be hidden and displayed when the predetermined condition is not satisfied.

  FIG. 179 is a diagram illustrating an example of the general-purpose prefetching notice. This pre-reading advance notice effect may be executed when there is a common figure hold in the hold of the normal figure, or a special symbol hit pattern (for example, the general figure B of the electric tulong release) ) May be executed when there is a suspension of the usual figure, and it may be executed when a lottery with a predetermined probability is won (fake ordinary figure pre-reading notice effect). Moreover, even if there is a regular symbol per game in the hold of a normal figure, and even if there is a specific symbol hit in the hold of a normal diagram, it may be executed if a lottery with a predetermined probability is not won.

  In the common drawing pre-reading notice effect shown in FIG. 179, the decorative image display device 208 displays an effect image (here, the effect image 283b) so as to surround the universal drawing effect region 283. The effect image 283b shown in FIG. 179 also enters the special figure 1 hold display area 281, and a part of the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 is hidden by the effect image 283b. In addition, a part of the decorative pattern of the special figure that is changing in the middle symbol display area 208b is also hidden by the effect image 283b.

  In this general-purpose pre-reading notice effect, when there are multiple holdings of the general drawing and the last holding of the general drawing is successful, the warning display is performed over the multiple times of the symbol change display of the normal drawing. It becomes a notice.

  Note that the pre-reading notice announcement for the special map may start after receiving the command for increasing the special figure hold (immediately after the increase of the special figure hold), but the specific effect (for example, the special figure jackpot notice or the special figure super reach) Etc.) may be started at the time when the specific effect is completed, or when the specific effect is started from the middle, the general-purpose prefetching notice effect is hidden. May be.

  FIG. 180 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the special figure jackpot notice effect is performed in the general drawing effect region 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 180 (a), the special pattern 1, the special figure 2, and the usual figure are stopped. In addition, a default image 283a is displayed in the general drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208. The number of holds in special figure 1 is 3, while the number of holds in special figure 2 and ordinary figure is both 0. Note that the state shown in FIG. 180 is a non-electric support state.

  In FIG. 180 (b), the special symbol display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 212, and the decorative display of the special symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. Note that the general-purpose display device 210 remains stopped. In this example, when the first general drawing effect is executed in the general symbol effect region 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display pattern shown in FIG. Repeatedly displayed.

  If the number of holdings of the usual figure is 0 at the time when the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the special figure jackpot notice effect may be started in the common figure effect region 283. The special jackpot announcement effect in the special figure effect area 283 is displayed when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and the lottery with the first predetermined probability is won, Even if the symbol is stopped and displayed, it is executed when the lottery with the second predetermined probability is won (a fake jackpot notice effect). In addition, you may perform as a pre-reading notice effect of a special figure. When the special figure jackpot notice effect is started in the general drawing effect region 283, first, high-speed fluctuation is started in the general drawing effect region 283, and as shown in FIG. The decoration character design of “Gekiatsu” is stopped and displayed. The decorative character design of “Gekiatsu” shown in FIG. 180 (c) is displayed beyond the ordinary drawing effect area 283, and overlaps a part of the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811, and the first special figure 1 hold icon is displayed. 2811 is difficult to visually recognize. Note that the decorative character design “Gekiatsu” may be displayed in the general drawing effect area 283. In addition, in the case of a fake jackpot notice effect, a decorative character design of “sorry” may be stopped and displayed in place of the decorative character design of “gekiatsu”.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 180 (d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the special symbol decorative symbol develops into a reach effect. Even after the development of the reach production, the decoration character design “Gekiatsu” is stopped and displayed in the ordinary drawing production area 283. However, after the development of the reach production, the decoration character design of “Gekiatsu” may be erased. Alternatively, the default image 283a may be displayed in the normal drawing effect area 283.

  FIG. 181 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the advance notice effect to the specific effect of the special figure is performed in the general drawing effect region 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208. Descriptions will be made centering on differences from the example shown in FIG. 180, and matters not particularly noted are the same as those in the example shown in FIG.

  The specific effect referred to here is, for example, a super reach effect in the variable display of the decorative pattern of the special drawing. It should be noted that the advance notice advancement to the special effect of the special figure can be regarded as a big hit notice of the special figure.

  In the example shown in FIG. 181, similarly to the example shown in FIG. 180, when the number of holdings of the usual figure is 0 at the time when the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started, the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. Then, high-speed fluctuation is started in the ordinary drawing effect area 283 (see FIG. 181 (b)).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 181 (c), after the occurrence of normal reach, before the development of the super reach effect, the decorative character design “Gekiatsu” is stopped and displayed in the general drawing effect region 283. 181 (c) is also displayed over the ordinary drawing effect area 283, and the first special figure 1 hold icon is overlapped with a part of the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811. 2811 is difficult to visually recognize.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 180 (d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the special symbol decorative symbol develops into a super reach effect. After the development of the super reach production, the decorative character design of “Gekiatsu” disappears, and the default image 283a is displayed in the normal drawing production area 283. Further, a part of the base drawing effect area 283 is overlapped with a leg portion of the super reach character C2, and it is difficult to visually recognize the base drawing effect area 283.

  FIG. 180 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the special figure jackpot notice effect is performed in the general drawing effect region 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 180 (a), the special pattern 1, the special figure 2, and the usual figure are stopped. In addition, a default image 283a is displayed in the general drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208. The number of holds in special figure 1 is 3, while the number of holds in special figure 2 and ordinary figure is both 0. Note that the state shown in FIG. 180 is a non-electric support state.

  In FIG. 180 (b), the special symbol display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 212, and the decorative display of the special symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. Note that the general-purpose display device 210 remains stopped. In this example, when the first general drawing effect is executed in the general symbol effect region 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display pattern shown in FIG. Repeatedly displayed.

  If the number of holdings of the usual figure is 0 at the time when the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the special figure jackpot notice effect may be started in the common figure effect region 283. The special jackpot announcement effect in the special figure effect area 283 is displayed when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and the lottery with the first predetermined probability is won, Even if the symbol is stopped and displayed, it is executed when the lottery with the second predetermined probability is won (a fake jackpot notice effect). In addition, you may perform as a pre-reading notice effect of a special figure. When the special figure jackpot notice effect is started in the general drawing effect region 283, first, high-speed fluctuation is started in the general drawing effect region 283, and as shown in FIG. The decoration character design of “Gekiatsu” is stopped and displayed. The decorative character design of “Gekiatsu” shown in FIG. 180 (c) is displayed beyond the ordinary drawing effect area 283, and overlaps a part of the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811, and the first special figure 1 hold icon is displayed. 2811 is difficult to visually recognize. Note that the decorative character design “Gekiatsu” may be displayed in the general drawing effect area 283. In addition, in the case of a fake jackpot notice effect, a decorative character design of “sorry” may be stopped and displayed in place of the decorative character design of “gekiatsu”.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 180 (d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the special symbol decorative symbol develops into a reach effect. Even after the development of the reach production, the decoration character design “Gekiatsu” is stopped and displayed in the ordinary drawing production area 283. However, after the development of the reach production, the decoration character design of “Gekiatsu” may be erased. Alternatively, the default image 283a may be displayed in the normal drawing effect area 283.

  FIG. 182 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the normal drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208 functions as a display area for a reserved digest effect.

  In the general drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 182 (a), the electric chew release notification effect is performed, and the electric chew long open is performed. As a result, there are four balls in the electric Chu.

  In FIG. 182 (b), four special figure 2 hold icons 2821 to 2824 are displayed in the special figure 2 hold display area 282. A part of each of these four special figure 2 hold icons 2821 to 2824 is hidden by the electric chew release notification effect, making it difficult to view.

  In FIG. 182 (c), the symbol variation display of special figure 1 performed so far is terminated. In addition, the opening of the electric chew long is ended, the electric chew is closed, and the ordinary drawing effect is ended. However, a Tono-sama character is displayed in the general drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 182 (c). The pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment is also a special figure 2 priority change machine, and in this example, when there is a special figure 2 suspension, the Tono-like character continues to be displayed in the general drawing effect area 283. In other words, in the general drawing effect area 283, when all the suspension of the special figure 2 is consumed, the Tono-sama character disappears and the default image 283a shown in FIG. 181 (a) is displayed. Note that if the game ball passes through the general drawing start port 228 before the special figure 2 is deferred, the Tono-sama character disappears in the general drawing effect area 283, and the normal drawing effect is preferentially executed. You may do it.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 182 (d), the second special figure display device 214 starts the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure. The display style of the Tono-sama character displayed in the normal drawing effect area 283 may be changed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2. For example, if the default Tono-sama character has a display with a heel in both hands, but it is predicted that the jackpot symbol will be stopped on the digested suspended symbol variation display, the symbol variation display It changes into the display mode which lifted the bag which was held in both hands with the start. In addition, you may change from Tono to another character. In addition, the display in the general drawing effect area 283 may be changed every time the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started.

  In the above description, when one effect conceals the other effect, the other effect may conceal one effect even if it is not particularly refused. For example, in the state shown in FIG. 176 (C), the electric-chu release notification effect hides a part of the super-reach character C2, but conversely, the super-reach character C2 is one of the electric-chu release notification effects. The part may be concealed so that the electric chew release notification effect becomes difficult to visually recognize. Further, when one effect hides the other effect, it may be hidden over the entire effect period of the other effect, or may be hidden only during a part of the entire effect period. Further, when one effect conceals a part of the other effect, even if not specifically refused, one effect may conceal all of the other effect. Further, the difficulty of visual recognition includes inability to visually recognize.

  Furthermore, the other effects such as the ordinary drawing effect and the jackpot effect described above may be a sound effect or a light effect, and are shown in FIGS. 167 (a) and (b). An effect by such an effect movable body may be used. In the case of an effect by sound, sounds overlap and one effect conceals the other effect according to the volume and pitch, that is, it becomes difficult to view the other effect.

  In the above description, “a start region (for example, electric Chu) that can change at least between an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) and a difficult-to-enter state (for example, a closed state); A determination unit (e.g., the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of executing at least the determination of whether or not the figure is displayed and a symbol that can display at least a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the determination as to whether or not the symbol has been displayed. A game machine comprising display means (for example, a general-purpose display device 210) and effect means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing at least an effect, wherein the start area is the determination of whether or not it is successful When the result is a specific success / failure determination result (for example, per common map), at least a specific operation (for example, opening / closing operation) can be performed. It is an operation including an operation for changing the state from the difficult entry state to the easy entry state, and the production means is capable of executing at least a first production (for example, an ordinary drawing production), and the first production is The start area is an effect including at least an effect (for example, an electric chew release notification effect) performed during execution of the specific operation, and the first effect is a first effect time (for example, a third effect time) Is an effect performed over a time (for example, 6.6 seconds), a fourth time (5.6 seconds), and a fifth time (for example, 5 seconds). A game table characterized by having a time shorter than a variable display time (for example, 20 seconds). Was explained.

  Here, the first effect may be an effect by display, an effect by sound, an effect by light, or an effect by a movable object. Further, the effect means may be an effect display means, for example.

  The specific operation may be an operation in which the difficult-to-enter state and the easy-to-enter state are alternately repeated one or more times. Therefore, the second effect may be an effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the first effect when the start area is in the easy-to-enter state. May be an effect capable of making it difficult to see at least a part of the first effect before the state is changed from the difficult-to-enter state to the easy-to-enter state, and the starting area is in the easy-to-enter state. It may be an effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the first effect after the state is changed to the entry difficult state.

  In addition, “the success / failure determination means is that the electric support state is more likely to derive the specific determination result than the non-electric support state, and the first effect is the non-electric support state than the electric support state. A game table characterized in that the electric support state is an effect that is more easily executed (step S611 shown in FIG. 172). ”Was also explained.

  In addition, “the symbol display means often displays the variation of the symbol for a longer time in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (FIG. 170 (c)). A characteristic game stand. ”Was also explained.

  In addition, “the first effect is an approachable notification effect that notifies that a game ball can enter the start area when the result of the determination is a specific result (for example, FIG. 174 (ku) or the like, a game table characterized by at least an effect including a speech balloon “opening electric chew”. ”Was also explained.

  Further, “a second success / failure determination unit (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of executing at least a second success / failure determination (for example, whether or not a special figure is determined) and a result of the second success / failure determination are big hits Game control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of at least shifting the control state from the non-hit control state to the big hit control state, It is possible to execute at least a second effect relating to the result of the second success / failure determination (for example, a special figure jackpot notice effect (including a pre-reading notice)), and the second effect is the first effect. A game table characterized by being an effect capable of making it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the first effect during a part or all of the execution period. ”Was also explained.

  Furthermore, in the above description, “a starting region (for example, electric Chu) that can change at least between an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) and a difficult-to-enter state (for example, a closed state), , A determination unit (e.g., the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of executing at least normal pattern determination, and after displaying a variation of the symbol, at least a stop symbol corresponding to the determination result can be displayed. And a display device (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing at least an effect. When the determination result is a specific determination result (for example, per common figure), a specific operation (for example, opening / closing operation) can be performed at least, and the specific operation , An operation including an operation of changing the state from the difficult entry state to the easy entry state, wherein the rendering means is capable of executing at least a first rendering (for example, a normal rendering), The effect is an effect including at least one effect among the effect during change, the effect during determination, and the effect during operation, and the effect during change is an effect executed during the symbol change display (for example, in FIG. 173). The effect during determination is an effect executed during display of the stop symbol by the symbol display means (for example, an effect during the period (K) shown in FIG. 173). And the in-motion effect is an effect (for example, an effect in a period of (K) shown in FIG. 173) performed while the start area is executing the specific operation, and the effect means is the first effect Different from directing A second effect (for example, a special bonus jackpot notice effect (including a pre-reading notice)) is executable, and the effect means performs at least the first effect during the execution of the second effect. It is possible to start (for example, FIGS. 176 (C) to (C)), and the production means can at least start the first production even when the second production is not being executed. (For example, FIGS. 174 (a) to (c)), the production time of the first production started during the second production non-execution (for example, the first time (20.6 seconds)). The game stand characterized in that the first effect production time (third time (for example, 6.6 seconds)) started during execution of the second production tends to be shorter. Was explained.

  Here, the first effect and the second effect may be an effect by display, an effect by sound, an effect by light, or an effect by a movable object. It may be. Further, the effect means may be an effect display means, for example.

  The second effect may be an effect that starts every predetermined time, or may be an effect that starts during an extra game state. Further, it may be an effect that prompts the player to perform an operation such as right-handed or pressing a button. Further, it may be an effect that prompts each button to be pressed. For example, for each button, it may be an effect that notifies the button press timing, an effect that notifies the button press acceptance period, or an effect that notifies the button press acceptance remaining period. Good.

  Further, “a second success / failure determination unit (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of executing at least a second success / failure determination (for example, whether or not a special figure is determined) and a result of the second success / failure determination are big hits. Game control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of at least shifting the control state from the non-hit control state to the big hit control state in the case where the determination result is a success / failure determination result. Is an effect including at least an effect related to the result of the second success / failure determination (for example, a super reach effect shown in FIG. 176). In addition, “the second effect is that when the result of the second success / failure determination is a jackpot success / failure determination result, the second success / failure determination result is a jackpot success / failure determination result. The second effect is an effect including an effect to be notified in advance (for example, the super reach effect shown in FIG. 176). Even if the result of the second success / failure determination is not a jackpot success / failure determination result, the second effect A game stand characterized by an effect including an effect of giving a notice as if the result of the second success / failure determination is a result of the success / failure determination of jackpot (a so-called fake jackpot notice effect). ”Was also explained.

  In addition, as another symbol display means (for example, a first special symbol start port 230) different from the start region and one of the symbol display means, a first symbol display means (for example, a first symbol display means) 1 special symbol display device 212), and as one of the symbol display means, second symbol display means (for example, second special symbol display device 214) and first symbol display means. At least controllable symbol display control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300), and the separate start area does not change the ease of entry of a game ball, and the symbol display control means includes: The second symbol display means is at least controllable, and the symbol display control means holds the operation of the first symbol display means when the first holding condition is established. At least one hold control The symbol display control means can execute at least a second holding control for holding the operation of the second symbol display means when the second holding condition is satisfied. The establishment requirement of the first holding condition is a requirement including at least that the game ball has entered the separate start area, and the establishment requirement of the second hold condition is that the game ball has the start area The second effect is an effect that is performed while the second symbol display means is executing the symbol variation display (for example, a jackpot notice effect for the variation). A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  The second effect mentioned here may be a decorative display variation display effect (for example, a super reach effect) performed while the second symbol display means is executing the symbol variation display.

  In addition, “the first symbol display means is capable of displaying at least a first stop symbol (for example, special symbol F) corresponding to the result of the big hit determination after the symbol variation display. The second symbol display means is capable of displaying at least a second stop symbol (for example, the special symbol A) corresponding to the result of the jackpot success / failure determination after performing symbol variation display, It is more advantageous for the player as the jackpot control state when the second symbol display means displays the second stop symbol than when the first symbol display means displays the first stop symbol. A game table characterized by having a configuration (for example, FIG. 158 (d)) in which a large jackpot control state is easily started. ”Was also explained.

  Here, the game control means changes the control state from the non-big hit control state to the first big hit control state (for example, 2R big hit game when the first symbol display means displays the first stop symbol. The game control means can change the control state from the non-big hit control state to the second big hit when the second symbol display means displays the second stop symbol. It is possible to shift at least to a control state (for example, 15R special jackpot gaming state), and the second jackpot control state may be a control state that is more advantageous to the player than the first jackpot control state. .

  In addition, in the winning area (for example, attacker), the second symbol display means displays the second stop symbol more than after the first symbol display means displays the first stop symbol. The latter may be easier to perform a state change operation (for example, an opening / closing operation) that is advantageous to the player. For example, an operation with a large number of times of opening or an operation with a long opening time may be easily performed.

  Further, “the symbol display control means is capable of executing at least a control for starting the operation of the first symbol display means when the first holding digest condition is established, and the symbol display control The means is capable of executing at least a control for starting the operation of the second symbol display means when the second reserved digestion condition is established, and the establishment requirement of the second reserved digestion condition is: , The requirement that at least the operation of the second symbol display means is suspended, and the requirement to establish the first suspended digestion condition is that the operation of the second symbol display means is not suspended The requirement for establishing the first suspended digestion condition is a requirement including at least that the operation of the first symbol display means is suspended, and the effect display means includes the second display Wrong or wrong At least a pre-reading notice effect (for example, an effect due to a change in the display mode of the hold icon) can be displayed, and the effect display means can execute at least a continuous notice effect as the pre-reading notice effect. The effect display means is capable of continuing at least the continuous notice effect during the interrupt symbol variation display, and the interrupt symbol variation display is performed when the second reserved digest condition is during the continuous notice effect. It is a symbol variation display that is started during the continuous notice effect by being established, and the prefetch notice effect (for example, the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 in the display mode of the prefetch notice) is being executed in the first effect. It is an effect that makes it difficult to view at least a part of the first effect (for example, the electric chew release notification effect) during part or all of the period (for example, FIG 164 (d ')), the amusement machine, characterized in that. ”Was also explained.

  The game stand here is a so-called special figure 2 priority change machine. The effect display means is capable of displaying at least the first effect during execution of the prefetch notice effect.

  Further, “the second effect is an effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the first effect during a part or all of the period during the execution of the first effect. A characteristic game stand. ”Was also explained.

The present invention can also be applied to a sealed pachinko machine. FIG. 183 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied. In the enclosed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 183, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching means 901 to the game area 902 can be discharged from the game area 902 and supplied to the launching means 901 again. In addition, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (award balls, rental balls, total number of balls, etc.) and other information is disposed below the game area 902 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in 40 are not provided.
<Fifth Embodiment>

Hereinafter, a gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. The reference numerals shown in FIGS. 184 to 220 are used only in the description of the fifth embodiment in principle, and the description of the present embodiment is performed even when the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings. Then, priority is given to the code | symbol shown in FIGS. 184-220. On the other hand, in the following description, about the code | symbol which is not shown by FIGS. 184-220, the same code | symbol is used as the same component as 1st Embodiment-4th Embodiment. In addition, when there are drawings showing the same timing in a plurality of drawings, overlapping description may be omitted. In addition, the number of the example of this embodiment is used only for the description of this embodiment in principle, but each example of this embodiment and each example of other embodiments are applied in combination with each other. Can do.
<Type of design>

  First, referring to FIG. 184, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the fifth embodiment are stopped and displayed. The types of figures and ordinary drawings will be described.

  FIG. 4A shows an example of the stop symbol pattern of FIG. 1, and FIG. 4B shows an example of the stop symbol pattern of FIG. The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor has detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” by repeating all lighting of seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 displays “fluctuation display of special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Do. These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display according to the present invention.

  Then, when the variation time determined before the variation start of the special figure 1 (corresponding to the variation time referred to in the present invention) elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the special symbol form of the special figure 1. When the variation time determined before the start of variation 2 (this also corresponds to the variation time according to the present invention) has elapsed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special diagram 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display referred to in the present invention, hereinafter, after the “variable display of special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. The series of displays up to is referred to as symbol variation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. In FIG. 5A, five types of special figures from “Special figure A” to “Special figure E” are shown as the stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display of special figure 1. Indicates the location of the segment that is turned off, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment that is turned on. Also, FIG. (B) shows four types of special charts from “special chart a” to “special chart d” as stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display of special chart 2, The unplugged portion indicates the location of the segment that is turned off, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment that is turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, “Special Figure A” is a 15-round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as described above, whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not it is a special big hit is determined by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time-saving state. The state that shifts to the short time state is called a normal high probability state, and the state that does not shift to the short time state is called a normal low probability state. “Special figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that give a relatively large profit amount to the player.

  “Special figure C” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. “Special figure D” is a small hit symbol, and if the game state before winning the small hit is the special figure high-definition figure high-definition state (after winning the small hit), the special figure high-definition figure high If the game state is a certain state and the game state before winning the small hit is a special figure low-probability high figure state (after winning the small hit), it is a special figure low-probability high figure state. Further, the “special drawing E” is a loss symbol, and is a symbol in which the profit amount given to the player is relatively small.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, “Special Figure a” is a 16R special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure b” is an 8R special jackpot symbol, both of which are in a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. “Special figure c” is a 8R jackpot symbol, which is a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. Further, the “special drawing d” is an outlier symbol, which is a symbol in which the profit amount given to the player is relatively small.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, symbols other than “Special Illustration A” are prepared as 15R special jackpot symbols, and the same applies to other symbols such as 15R jackpot symbols.

  FIG. 184 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Displayed in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →... “Decoration display of decorative pattern” is performed.

  For example, when notifying 15R special big hit of "Special Figure A", 15R big hit of "Special Figure B", 8R special big hit of "Special Figure b", or 8R big hit of "Special Figure c" Stops the combination of three same decorative symbols (such as “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” or “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”) corresponding to 15R jackpot or 8R jackpot on 208a-208c indicate. When notifying the 15R special jackpot of "Special Figure A" or the 16R special jackpot of "Special Figure a", a combination of three symbols with the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3"). ”,“ Decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 ”, etc.) are stopped and displayed. Further, when notifying the small hit of “special drawing D” or the sudden probability change of “special drawing C”, symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations other than the above (for example, “decoration 1-decoration”) are displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. 2-decoration 3 ”,“ decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5 ”, etc.) are stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when notifying the special symbol E and the special symbol d, a symbol combination other than the symbol combination shown in FIG.

FIG. 184 (d) shows an example of the usual stop display symbol. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes for ordinary maps, “general diagram A” which is a winning symbol and “general symbol B” which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that a sphere has passed through the general-purpose start opening 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the usual figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in this figure (d), the white part in a figure shows the location of the segment which turns off, and the black painting part shows the location of the segment which lights up.
<Another example of display regarding operation of operation means by display means>

Next, another example in which the display unit (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) performs display related to the operation of the operation unit in accordance with the operation of the operation unit (for example, the chance button 136) will be described. In the following description, as an example, another example of the operation unit image display that performs display related to the operation of the operation unit by the same process as the operation unit image display process described in the first embodiment will be described.
<Example 20 of operation means image display>

  FIG. 185 is a diagram showing operation means image display of Example 20 in time series. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5A, for example, a special figure 1 4th symbol display area 208e and a special figure 2 4th symbol display area 208f are provided above the right end in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example. Provided. This special figure 1 4th symbol display area 208e displays the result of whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful, and the special figure 1 variable game (during special figure 1 fluctuation) is rounded as the 4th symbol 217 of the special figure 1 The figure of blinks. The special figure 2 4th symbol display area 208f is an area for displaying the result of the special figure 2 variable game, and during the special figure 2 variable game (during the fluctuation of the special figure 2) as the 4th symbol 218 of the special figure 2 Triangular figure blinks. In the fifth embodiment, a case where a special figure 1 variable game is performed as an example of a variable game will be described as an example. However, a special figure 2 variable game can be similarly implemented.

  A hold display area 700 is provided, for example, below the left end in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the right end of the hold display area 700 is secured as a variable icon display area 702. Here, hold icons PI1 and PI2 indicating that there are two holdes in FIG. 1 are displayed. In the following description, a case where one hold display area 700 is provided is shown as an example. However, as shown in FIG. 159, the special figure 1 hold display area 281 and the special figure 2 hold display area 282 may be provided separately. Good.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 5B, one special figure hold is consumed, the special figure 1 variable game hold is reduced from 2 to 1, and the first special figure display device 212 starts the symbol fluctuation display. Then, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol of the special symbol 1. In the change icon display area 702, the digested hold is displayed as the change icon CI, and in the hold display area 700, the hold icon PI1 indicating that there is one hold in FIG. 1 is displayed.

  In this embodiment, after the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212 (or the second special symbol display device 214) is started, the blinking display of the fourth symbol 217 and the decrease of the hold icons PI1 and PI2 are performed. It starts in the order of animation and decorative pattern variation display. The order of the start timing of the 4th symbol blink display, the hold icon reduction animation (display), and the decorative symbol variation display is not limited to the above, and the display may be started in any order, and a plurality of them may be simultaneously displayed. The display may be started, and the order of the display start timing is the same in the following embodiments.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 5C, during the decorative symbol variation display, a character display of a speech display 704 (for example, “Yoshimune is Yatsushiro Shogun.” Is displayed in the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. And an image corresponding to the notice effect for displaying the character image (princess). Here, the effect display 704 makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize a part of the decorative symbol variation display, but the player may be able to visually recognize a portion of the decorative symbol variation display.

  The timing shown in FIG. 4D shows a state in which the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has started, and the first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136 (this In the example, an image imitating a chance button) is displayed on the front side of the decorative design (front side of the layer (player side)) and on the rear side of the effect display 704.

  Also, a first time for notifying the elapsed time of the first operation acceptance period of the chance button 136 below the first operation means image BG1 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. The elapsed time notification image TG1 is displayed in the first color (blue in this example). The display position of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is also the front face of the decorative symbol and the rear face of the effect display 704. In addition, the character image (donor) is displayed on the front of the decorative pattern at almost the same timing as these displays.

  This timing is the start of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, and in fact, all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (from the left end to the right end) is filled with the first color. However, a part of the first operation means image BG1 and a part of the first operation means image BG1 are displayed by a part of the effect display 704 (here, a character display of a balloon “Yoshimune is Yatsushiro Shogun”) at the timing of FIG. Part of the elapsed time notification image TG1 (here, the portion including the right end portion) is hidden, making it difficult for the player to visually recognize (not visible).

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the first display (the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is preferentially overlapped (that is, earlier in time and The first display is hidden by the second display (displayed as a layer on the front) (part of the effect display 704) and is not hidden by the second display ((j) in the figure). ), The visibility of the first display is low. Here, the first display of the present embodiment refers to a display in which the display mode of the first display can be changed at least when the change condition is satisfied. The change condition is satisfied when, for example, the time from the start of the display of the first display has elapsed or the operation of a predetermined operation means (such as one or more operations or a long press). This is the case. Further, the change condition may be satisfied once during the display period of the first display, or may be plural. For example, when the change condition is the passage of time every second, for example, from the start of display of the first display and this is established a plurality of times, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is displayed every second. The aspect changes. Specifically, as will be described later, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is an image in which the filled portion of the first color decreases (or increases) with time (for example, every second). Is displayed. Note that the second display may not be displayed with priority over the first display.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 5E and 5F show a state in which time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds, which is the reception period) has elapsed since the start of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 (FIG. 4D). ing. Thus, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is a meter display, and the scale (filled portion) of the meter (also referred to as a gauge, hereinafter the same) is displayed in accordance with the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136. Display gradually decreasing images. The effect display 704 continues to be displayed even during a period in which the scale of the meter gradually decreases, making it difficult for the player to visually recognize a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1. That is, the first display (first elapsed time notification image TG1) is hidden by the second display (part of the effect display 704), and is not hidden by the second display ((j) in the figure). Change of the display mode of the first display (first elapsed time notification image TG1) (display in which the scale of the meter gradually decreases) even in a state where the visibility is low compared to ing. In this example, the display mode and display position of the effect display 704 do not change with time.

  The timings shown in (g) to (i) in the figure indicate a state in which a time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds, which is the reception period) has elapsed from (f) in the figure. At these timings, an image in which the scale (filled portion) of the meter gradually decreases is displayed (decrease display), but the scale of the meter is hidden behind the effect display 704, and the scale of the meter is reduced. The display mode of the display is difficult for the player to visually recognize (not visible). In other words, even while the meter scale is hidden by the effect display 704, the scale reduction display is continued.

  In this way, the second display (here, the effect display 704 which is a notice) is hidden by being overlapped (hidden by the effect display 704), and the first display (here) becomes invisible to the player. Then, when there is an image in which the scale of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 gradually decreases), the first display of the part that becomes invisible (that is, the image that is not displayed) is not actually drawn. You may control. By doing in this way, the control burden of drawing processing can be reduced. This is the same in all examples of the present specification. Note that the first display of the portion that is invisible to the player (hidden) may be drawn.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6J shows a state in which the effect display 704 is not displayed before (immediately before) the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 is ended. Thereby, before the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 ends, the entire player including the right end portion of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 can be visually recognized by the player.

  In the present embodiment, the second elapsed time display image TG1 (meter) is displayed by overlaying the second display (in this case, the effect display 704) on the area including the left end of the first elapsed time notification image TG1. ) And the display mode of the decrease display may be difficult for the player to visually recognize (the same applies to the following embodiments).

  As described above, FIGS. (D) to (j) show an example in which the button operation is not performed during the operation reception period of the chance button 136, but the button operation was performed during the operation reception period of the chance button 136. An example of the display is shown below.

  FIG. 10G-1 is a display example when the chance button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, based on the operation of the chance button 136, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, and then the effect display (first display) An image 730 (an image corresponding to the second notice effect, which is a character display of “chance!” In this example), which is different from the image 704 corresponding to the notice effect, is displayed as a decorative pattern. It is displayed in the display area of the display device 208. However, even in this state, the visibility of the part of the image 730 corresponding to the second notice effect is lowered for the player due to the overlap of the effect display 704 (image corresponding to the first notice effect). (It is considered difficult for players to see.)

In this example, the case where it is difficult to visually recognize a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 by the effect display 704 that is an image corresponding to the notice effect has been described. However, other effect images or other images are used. May make it difficult to visually recognize a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1, and the same applies to the following embodiments.
<Example 21 of operation means image display>
FIG. 186 is a diagram showing operation means image display of Example 21 in time series.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 7B to 7E are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 185B to 185E, but in this embodiment, the first operation means image BG1 is a chance button. 136 is an image corresponding to the first operation of 136, and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is an image displaying the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6F shows a state in which a time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds, which is the reception period) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, a second operation means image BG2 corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136 and a downward arrow are displayed on a part of the effect display 704 (here, in a balloon). On the other hand, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 that displays the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 is not displayed. In this example, while reducing the visibility of the image in which the scale of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 gradually decreases (making it difficult for the player to see), a part of the effect display 704 (second operation) The means image BG2 and the image of the downward arrow) provide an effect of prompting the second operation of the chance button 136.

  Note that the second elapsed time notification image TG2 may be displayed on a part of the effect display 704 (here, in a balloon). Further, the second operation means image BG2 and the image of the downward arrow are not displayed when the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 ends, and the timing thereof is the first time of the chance button 136. It may be set at the same timing as the end timing of the operation reception period (the timing at which the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are not displayed), or a timing earlier than that. Later timings are also acceptable. In the present embodiment, the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 is a period shorter than the first operation reception period of the chance button 136, but the time may be the same period. May be a long period.

  The timings shown in (g) to (j) are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 185 (g) to (j).

  FIGS. 186 (b) to 186 (j) show an example in which the button operation is not performed during the operation reception period of the chance button 136, but the case where the button operation is performed during the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is shown. A display example is shown below.

  FIG. 11G-1 is a display example when the second operation of the chance button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, based on the second operation of the chance button 136, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, and then the effect display ( An image 730 corresponding to the notice effect, which is different from the image 704 corresponding to the first notice effect) (an image corresponding to the second notice effect, in this example, a character display of “chance!”) Is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. However, even in this state, a part of the image 730 corresponding to the second notice effect is made difficult for the player to visually recognize by the effect display 704 (image corresponding to the first notice effect). In addition, a part of the effect display 704 is changed. Specifically, based on the second operation of the chance button 136 being performed, the second operation means image BG2 in the balloon is erased, and “Gekiatsu! "Is displayed.

  FIG. 11G-2 is another display example when the second operation of the chance button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, based on the second operation of the chance button 136, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, and then the effect display ( An image 730 corresponding to the notice effect, which is different from the image 704 corresponding to the first notice effect) (an image corresponding to the second notice effect, in this example, a character display of “chance!”) Is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. However, even in this state, a part of the image 730 corresponding to the second notice effect is made difficult for the player to visually recognize by the effect display (image corresponding to the first notice effect) 704. In this example, the display mode of the effect display 704 is not changed, and the display of the second operation means image BG2 and the downward arrow image is continued. In this case, the display of the second operation means image BG2 and the downward arrow image may prompt the third operation of the chance button 136, and the third operation of the chance button 136 is performed accordingly. In such a case, the display may change to an effect display 704 shown in FIG. In practice, the third operation of the chance button 136 may not be accepted (restricted).

  FIG. 6G-3 is another display example when the second operation of the chance button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, a part of the effect display 704 is changed based on the second operation of the chance button 136 being performed. Specifically, based on the second operation of the chance button 136 being performed, the second operation means image BG2 in the balloon is erased and the characters “Gekiatsu!” Are displayed. On the other hand, the display of the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, and a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is visually recognized by the player by a part of the effect display 704. It is difficult. In this case, actually, an image in which the first elapsed time notification image TG1 gradually decreases is displayed.

  The timing shown in (f-1) of the figure is another display example when the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed at the timing shown in (e) of the same figure. At this timing, based on the first operation of the chance button 136 being performed, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are deleted, and then the effect display ( An image 730 corresponding to the notice effect, which is different from the image 704 corresponding to the first notice effect) (an image corresponding to the second notice effect, in this example, a character display of “chance!”) Is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In (f-1), the second operation means image BG2 corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136 and a downward arrow are displayed on a part of the effect display 704 (in the balloon here). Yes.

In the present embodiment, when the chance button 136 is operated, an effect display (image corresponding to the first notice effect) 704 and an image 730 corresponding to the second notice effect are respectively displayed on the chance button 136. An image corresponding to the operation may be displayed, or one of the images may be displayed. Further, when the chance button 136 is operated, this is not accepted, and both the effect display (image corresponding to the first notice effect) 704 and the image 730 corresponding to the second notice effect are displayed. It is good also as what is not changed.
<Example 22 of operation means image display>

FIG. 187 is a diagram showing operation means image display according to the twenty-second embodiment in time series. In the present embodiment, the first operation means image BG1 is an image corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136, and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136. The second operation means image BG2 is an image corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136.
The timing shown in FIG. 5B is the same as the timing shown in FIG.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5C shows a state in which the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has started during the decorative symbol variation display, and is displayed at the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The effect display 704 (for example, the second operation means image BG2 corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136, the image of the character “Long press!”, And the character image (princess) are displayed in a balloon. The image corresponding to the notice effect) is being displayed. In this example, as a second operation of the chance button 136, a display prompting the long press of the chance button 136 is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 4D shows a state in which the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has started, and the first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136 (this In the example, an image imitating a chance button) is displayed on the front side of the decorative design and on the rear side of the effect display 704.

  Also, a first elapsed time notification for notifying the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 below the first operation device image BG1 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation device image BG1. The image TG1 is displayed in the first color (blue in this example). The display position of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is also the front face of the decorative symbol and the rear face of the effect display 704. In addition, the character image (donor) is displayed on the front of the decorative pattern at almost the same timing as these displays.

  At this timing, it is the start of the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136, and in fact, all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (from the left end to the right end) is filled with the first color. , A part of the first operation means image BG1 and a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (in this case, a balloon image displaying the second operation means image BG2). Here, the portion including the right end portion) is concealed, and the visibility of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is reduced (it is difficult for the player to see (not visible)).

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E is the second operation (long time) of the chance button 136 after a time (for example, a time shorter than the reception period of 6 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136. This shows a state in which the pressing operation is started. At this timing, an image in which the scale of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (meter) gradually decreases is displayed, and the effect display 704 continues to be displayed during the period, and the first elapsed time is displayed. A part of the notification image TG1 is difficult for the player to visually recognize. In this example, the effect display 704 is changed as the second operation (long press operation) of the chance button 136 is started. Specifically, the display position of the effect display 704 does not change, but the display mode of the effect display 704 (here, the fill color of the second operation means image BG2) is changed from the first color (for example, white) to the second. The color is changed to red (for example, red).

  The timing shown in FIG. 6F is a state in which the second operation (long press operation) is continued. Is shown. At this timing, an image in which the scale of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (meter) gradually decreases is displayed, and the effect display 704 continues to be displayed during the period, and the first elapsed time is displayed. A part of the notification image TG1 is difficult for the player to visually recognize. In addition, the effect display 704 is informed that the state after the change of the display mode (filling with the second color) is maintained and the second operation (long pressing operation) is continued. As described above, the display mode after the change of the effect display 704 is maintained while the second operation (long press operation) is continued, but the second operation (long press operation) is continued. Even if it is during the period, it may return to the original first color. In addition, the display mode after the change of the effect display 704 is maintained in the same display mode as before (or immediately before) when the player interrupts the second operation (long press operation). If the player interrupts the second operation (long press operation), the player may return to the original first color.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5G shows a state in which time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds, which is the reception period) has elapsed from FIG. At these timings, an image in which the scale of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (meter) gradually decreases is actually displayed, but the scale of the meter (filled portion) is hidden behind the effect display 704. The display mode of the reduced display of the meter is difficult for the player to visually recognize. In this case, it may be controlled not to actually draw an image whose scale gradually decreases. By doing in this way, the control burden of drawing processing can be reduced. In addition, the effect display 704 is informed that the state after the change of the display mode (filling with the second color) is maintained and the second operation (long pressing operation) is continued. In the above case, it may be controlled to draw an image in which the scale gradually decreases.

  The timing shown in (h) in the figure shows a state in which time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds, which is the reception period) has elapsed from (f) in the same figure. At this timing, the second operation means image BG2 is erased based on the result of the second operation (long press) of the chance button 136 (for example, the long press period (for example, about 3 seconds has elapsed), The text “Gekiatsu!” Is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6J shows a state in which the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136 has ended. In the present embodiment, the display of the effect display 704 is continued even at the end of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 (after the end), and the scale of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (meter) is displayed. Is considered difficult for the player to see.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 5 (k), the first operation means image BG1, the first elapsed time notification image TG1, and the character image (donor) are not displayed (erased), and the decorative symbol change display is displayed to the player. It is in a state where it is visible. However, also in this case, the display of the effect display 704 is continued, which makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize a part of the decorative symbol variation display.

  FIG. 11E-1 shows another display example at the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, as the second operation (long press operation) of the chance button 136 is started, the display mode (here, the fill color) of the effect display 704 is changed from the first color (for example, white). Although the color is changed to the second color (for example, red), the second operation of the chance button 136 is determined to be the first operation of the chance button 136 for control, and corresponds to the first operation of the chance button 136. The state where the notice effect is started is shown. That is, after deleting the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1, a notice effect image 730 (here, “chance” characters) corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136 is displayed. . Also in this case, a part of the notice effect image 730 corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136 is difficult for the player to visually recognize by the effect display 704.

  FIG. 11H-1 is another display example at the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the characters “Super hot!” Displayed based on the result of the second operation (long press) of the chance button 136 (for example, the long press period (for example, about 3 seconds has passed)). At substantially the same timing as the display, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, and the notice effect image 730 corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136 (here, the characters “chance”) ) Is displayed.

In addition, in the timing shown in (i) in the figure, when there is a further operation of the chance button 136 (third operation (long pressing, pressing for a period shorter than the long pressing, etc.), (e-1) in FIG. Alternatively, the display shown in (h-1) of the figure may be performed, and when the chance button 136 is further operated (third operation) at the timing shown in (j) of FIG. The display shown in FIG. (E-1) or (h-1) may be performed.
<Example 23 of operation means image display>

  FIG. 188 is a diagram showing operation means image display of Example 23 in time series. The timing shown in FIG. 5B is the same as the timing shown in FIG.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C shows a state in which the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 is started during the decorative symbol variation display, and the first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 is shown. (In this example, an image simulating a chance button), a first elapsed time notification image TG1, and a character image (dono) are displayed on the front of the decorative symbol. At this timing, all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (from the left end to the right end) is filled with the first color.

  The timing shown in FIG. 4D shows a state in which a pre-reading notice effect for changing the hold icon PI1 is started during the operation acceptance period of the chance button 136. As an example, the pre-reading notice effect of the present embodiment performs an effect display (animation display) 704 by animation. The animation display 704 is, for example, a display start animation in which a star connected to a balloon starts from above the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, descends toward the hold display area 700, and a star near the hold icon PI1. Is separated from the balloon, and the hold icon PI1 is changed, or without changing, only the balloon rises again, and the erase animation is deleted.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E shows a state in which time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds that is the reception period) has elapsed since the start of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136, and the first elapsed time notification image. An image in which the scale (filled portion) of the meter as TG1 gradually decreases is displayed. Also, the animation display 704 continues, displaying an image in which balloons and stars are descending.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5F shows a state in which time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds as the reception period) has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 5E, and the first elapsed time notification image TG1. The image where the scale (filled part) of the meter is gradually decreasing is displayed. Further, the animation display 704 continues, and the balloons and the stars are descending, and overlap the front surfaces of the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1. At this timing, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with a part (star) of the animation display 704, and the visibility of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is lowered (to the player). It is considered difficult to see). In addition, a part of the first operation means image BG1 is also covered with a part (balloon) of the animation display 704, making it difficult for the player to see.

  The timing shown in (g) of the figure shows a state in which a time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds as the reception period) has passed since the state of (f) in the figure, and the first elapsed time notification image TG1. The image where the scale (filled part) of the meter is gradually decreasing is displayed. Also, the animation display 704 continues, and the front of the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 while the stars and balloons move from right to left along the first elapsed time notification image TG1. Are overlapping. At this timing, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with a part (star) of the animation display 704, which is difficult for the player to visually recognize. In addition, a part of the first operation means image BG1 is also covered with a part (balloon) of the animation display 704, making it difficult for the player to see.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a part of the first display (here, the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is difficult to be visually recognized by the player due to the second display that moves (here, the animation display 704). ing. In addition, the position where the first display (here, the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is covered (the position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize) is elapsed by the second display (here, the animation display 704). Change with. The first elapsed time notification image TG1 displays an image that gradually decreases during a period in which the animation display 704 is partially covered and difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  The timings shown in (i) to (l) of FIG. 6 indicate a state in which the change display of the hold icon PI1 is successfully performed by the animation display 704. That is, when the change display of the hold icon is successful, the balloon and the star approach the hold display area 700 ((i) in the figure), the star leaves the balloon ((j) in the same figure), and the white circle hold icon PI1. A holding icon PI1 ′ whose display mode has been changed by combining stars and stars is displayed (change display is successful) and the balloon is raised ((k) in the figure), and the balloon is moved from the display area of the decorative symbol display area 208 to the balloon. Is deleted ((l) in the figure), the animation display 704 is executed.

  FIGS. (I-1) to (j-1) are states after the timing shown in FIG. (G) and indicate a state in which the change display of the hold icon has failed. That is, when the change display of the hold icon fails, the star does not leave the balloon even if the star and the balloon are close to the hold display area 700 ((i-1) in the figure), and moves to the left as it is, for example. Then, an animation display 704 that moves away from the hold icon PI is executed.

  In this embodiment, the animation display executed when the change display of the hold icon succeeds and the animation display executed when the change display fails are described as different animation displays. However, the same animation display is executed, and as a result The change display may be successful because only the icon display mode changes, or the change display may fail because only the display mode of the hold icon does not change. Also, the execution time of the animation display executed when the change display of the hold icon succeeds and the animation display executed when it fails may be the same period (length). The period may be different, for example, may be longer.

The timing shown in (f-1) in the figure is a state after the timing shown in (e) in the figure, and shows a state in which the chance button 136 is operated during the reception period of the chance button 136. At this timing, based on the operation of the chance button 136 being performed, after deleting the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image 730 corresponding to the notice effect (in this example, (Character display “Chance is!”) Is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Also in this case, the animation display 704 (second display) covers a part of the image 730 (first display) corresponding to the notice effect, making it difficult for the player to see.
<Example 24 of operation means image display>

  FIGS. 189 to 154 are diagrams showing the operation means image display of Example 24 in time series. In the twenty-fourth embodiment, an example of the operation unit image display in the case of performing the normal operation unit image display will be described as a premise of the description of the embodiment 25 to the twenty-eighth embodiment.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 189 (a), the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212 is finished, the stopped symbol is displayed, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 are out of decoration. A combination of symbols “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. In the hold display area 700, two hold icons PI1 and PI2 of FIG. 1 are shown here.

  Next, at the timing shown in FIG. 7B, one special figure 1 hold is consumed, and the special figure 1 variable game hold is reduced from 2 to 1, and the first special figure display device 212 displays the symbol fluctuation display. Is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. In the hold display area 700, the digested hold is displayed as the change icon CI in the change icon display area 702, and the hold icon PI1 indicating that there is one hold in FIG. 1 is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C shows a state in which the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 has started, and the first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136. (In this example, an image simulating a chance button) is displayed.

  In addition, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 is displayed at the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1 in the first color (this In the example, blue is displayed below the first operation means image BG1. This timing is the start of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, and all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (from the left end to the right end) is filled with the first color.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D shows a state in which time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds, which is the reception period) has elapsed since the start of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136, and the first elapsed time notification image. The TG 1 displays an image in which the scale of the meter gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the reception period for the operation of the chance button 136.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6E is before the time (for example, 6 seconds as the reception period) elapses (for example, 6 seconds as the reception period) from the start timing of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136. In the previous state (after the timing (d) in the figure), the chance button 136 is operated. At this timing, based on the operation of the chance button 136 being performed, after deleting the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image 730 corresponding to the notice effect (in this example, A character display “Chance!” And a character image (dono) are displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. This notice effect may be displayed when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation acceptance period without the operation of the chance button 136 being performed. Moreover, although this embodiment demonstrates the case where a notice effect is displayed as an example, another effect display may be sufficient.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 5F and 5G are in a state in which an effect corresponding to the result of the determination of success / failure, the variation time, and the winning notice effect is started when the chance button 136 is operated. FIGS. 5F and 5G show an example of reach display in the decorative display variation display.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6H is the start state of super reach production, the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to white (white background), and the variation display of the decorative symbol is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. The display area is displayed in a small size, for example, in the upper right corner (decreasing display of decorative symbols). Further, the hold display area 700, the hold icon PI1, and the variation icon CI are hidden (erased). Note that any one of the hold display area 700, the hold icon PI1, the change icon CI erasing timing, the white back timing, and the decorative symbol reduction display timing may be executed first, if any, They may be executed in order. Moreover, at least some may be performed simultaneously.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 6 (i) and (j) are states in which execution of a swordsman reach production that confronts a swordsman character with a sword, for example, is started as a super reach production. Here, as an example, a swordsman character and a character “VS swordsman” are displayed (FIG. (I)), and then a confrontation scene between the character (dono) and the swordsman character is displayed (FIG. (J)).

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (k) indicates that the confrontation scene between the character (dono) and the swordsman character is once deleted, and the second operation means image BG2 (in this example, the chance button 136) corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136. Is displayed). Further, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 is displayed at the same timing as the display of the second operation means image BG2, in the first color (this In the example, blue is displayed below the second operation means image BG2. This timing is immediately before the start of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136, and all of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 (from the left end to the right end) is filled with the first color. Yes. Note that the fill color of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 may be a second color (for example, white) different from the first color. Further, at this timing, for example, an image that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 (for example, a letter “press the button to stop the feeling meter!”) Is displayed above the second operation means image BG2. Furthermore, the first state notification image SG1 is displayed at the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example. The first state notification image SG1 is a meter display and refers to a display whose display mode can be changed at least when a change condition is established. Satisfaction of the change condition is, for example, when the time from the start of the display of the first display has elapsed, or when there is an operation of a predetermined operation means (one or more operations, long press, etc.) And so on. Further, the change condition may be satisfied once during the display period of the first display, or may be plural. For example, when the change condition is, for example, the passage of time every 1 second from the start of display of the first state notification image SG1, and this is established a plurality of times, the first state notification image SG1 is set every 1 second. The display mode changes. Specifically, as will be described later, the first state notification image SG1 displays an image in which the filled portion increases (or decreases) over time (for example, every second). Further, in the case where the first state notification image SG1 changes the display mode with time, the change of the display mode is stopped according to the operation of the operation means (chance button 136) during the display mode change period. (Or end). For example, in the first state notification image SG1 of the present embodiment, the scale (filled portion) of a plurality of levels (for example, 10 levels) increases step by step from the lowest level (the scale increases and displays) as time elapses. The meter reaches the upper stage, and is an image that terminates (or stops) the scale increase display when the chance button 136 is operated during the scale increase display. Here, with the passage of time, the first state notification image SG1 is not filled in the initial state at the timing illustrated in FIG. It is displayed with the whole area filled.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11 (l) is the same as that shown in FIG. 10 (k), but the time has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. Show.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (m) shows a state in which time has elapsed since the start of the reception period of the chance button 136, and the scale (filled portion) of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 gradually decreases. Display an image. In addition, at this timing, the scale (filled portion) of the first state notification image SG1 is sequentially filled with the second color different from the first color step by step from the bottom, and the filled portion gradually increases. Display the image. At this time, the fill color (second color) of the first state notification image SG1 changes stepwise, but it may be the same color.

  The timing shown in FIG. 9 (n) shows a state in which more time has elapsed since the start of the reception period of the chance button 136, and the scale (filled portion) of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 gradually decreases. Display the image. At this timing, the scale (filled portion) of the first state notification image SG1 gradually increases, and an image reaching the uppermost stage is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 10 (o) shows a state in which the chance button 138 is operated in a state where time has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. At this timing, an image in which the scale (filled portion) of the first state notification image SG1 has reached the uppermost level is displayed, and characters “feeling MAX” are displayed above the first state notification image SG1. Further, after the operation of the chance button 136 is performed, after the second operation means image BG2, the second elapsed time notification image TG2, and the characters “Press the button to stop the feeling meter!” Alternatively, in front of these images, an image corresponding to the notice effect (in this example, a character “Death Kill!” And a character image (dono)) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the present embodiment, the scale of the first state notification image SG1 (meter) decreases step by step with time after reaching the uppermost stage, and the scale increases during the acceptance period of the chance button 136. Repeat display and decrease display. Then, at the timing when the chance button 136 is operated, the change (increase / decrease) in the display mode of the scale is stopped, and different effects are executed depending on the position of the scale.

  That is, the timing shown in (o) in FIG. 5 is the timing at which the scale reaches the uppermost stage in anticipation of an increase in the scale of the first state notification image SG1 in which the display mode changes (the scale increases) with the passage of time. By operating the chance button 136, the scale of the first state notification image SG1 is stopped at the uppermost stage, and a notice effect ("hot" effect) advantageous to the player is being executed. .

  Note that the scale stop position of the first state notification image SG1 may be determined in advance by effect lottery regardless of the timing at which the chance button 136 is operated. In this case, the scale stops at a predetermined position when the chance button 136 is operated by the player.

  In addition, the upper limit of the scale stop position of the first state notification image SG1 may be determined in advance by effect lottery. That is, the scale increases or decreases with the passage of time, but the position determined in advance by the effect lottery (for example, the eighth stage) is the upper limit during the acceptance period of the chance button 136, and even if it does not reach the uppermost stage. Good. In this case, the upper limit of the scale stop position may be determined at the timing when the chance button 136 is operated by the player.

  FIG. 190 is a diagram showing the operation means image display after FIG. 189 (o) in time series. The timing shown in FIG. 190 (p) shows the second operation means image BG2, the second elapsed time notification image TG2, the first state display image SG1, and the notice effect image, and is shown in FIG. 189 (j). The confrontation scene between the character after the timing and the swordsman character is displayed.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 190 (q) and (r) display a scene in which the character (dono) wins over the swordsman character. In FIG. The fluctuation variation display of the combination (for example, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”) is performed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (s) changes the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to white, and the timing shown in FIG. 4 (t) hits the symbol display regions 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 ( After the symbol combination (for example, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”) is displayed in a swinging manner, the ornamental symbols are stopped and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 6 (w), the stop display of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c is erased, and the “probability big hit” character for notifying the start of the big hit is displayed.

  As described above, in FIGS. 189 to 190, the display examples when the chance button 136 is operated in the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 (after FIG. 189 (k)) have been described.

  FIG. 191 shows a display example when the operation of the chance button 136 is not performed in the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 (after FIG. 189 (k)).

  The timing shown in FIG. 191 (k) shows the same state as the timing shown in FIG. 189 (k).

  The timing shown in FIG. 191 (l) shows a state in which time has elapsed since the start of the reception period of the chance button 136, and the scale (filled portion) of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 gradually decreases. Display an image. At this timing, an image is displayed in which the scale (filled portion) of the first state notification image SG1 gradually increases from the lowest level.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (m) shows a state in which more time has elapsed since the start of the reception period of the chance button 136, and the scale (filled portion) of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 gradually decreases. Display the image. At this timing, the scale (filled portion) of the first state notification image SG1 gradually increases, and an image reaching the uppermost stage is displayed.

  The timings shown in (n) and (o) in the figure are images in which the scale (filled portion) of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 gradually decreases in a state in which time has elapsed from the state of (m) in the figure. Is displayed. Further, after the scale of the first state notification image SG1 (meter) reaches the uppermost stage, an image that decreases stepwise is displayed.

  Further, the timing shown in FIG. 10 (p) is a state in which time has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 10 (o), the scale (filled portion) of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 disappears, and the reception period of the chance button 136 is The elapsed state is shown. At this timing, an image in which the scale of the first state notification image SG1 (meter) increases again is displayed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 11 (q), since the operation is not performed during the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136, the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to white and the second operation means The image BG2, the second elapsed time notification image TG2, and the first state notification image SG1 are deleted.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7 (r) displays the confrontation scene between the lord and the swordsman character after the timing shown in FIG. 189 (j), as in FIG. 190 (p).

As described above, when the operation of the chance button 136 is not performed during the period from the start to the end of the operation reception period of the chance button 136 ((k) to (p) in the figure), the first state notification is performed. The scale of the image SG1 (meter) is repeatedly increased and decreased.
FIG. 192 shows another example of the notice effect displayed at the timing of FIG. 189 (o).

  FIG. 192 (o-1) shows a state in which the scale (filled portion) of the first state notification image SG1 is rising before reaching the uppermost stage (for example, the tenth stage) or in the middle of lowering after reaching the uppermost stage. This is an example of the notice effect when the chance button 136 is operated at the timing when the upper stage (for example, the eighth stage) is reached. In this case, an image 730 corresponding to the notice effect (in this example, a character display of “strongly slashing!” And a character image (dono)) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 192 (o-2) shows a notice effect when the chance button 136 is operated at the timing when the middle stage (for example, the fourth stage) is reached while the scale of the first state notification image SG1 is going up or down. It is an example. In this case, an image 730 corresponding to the notice effect (in this example, a character display of “Kiri!” And a character image (dono)) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 192 (o-3) shows a notice effect when the chance button 136 is operated at the timing when the scale reaches the lower stage (for example, the first stage) while the scale of the first state notification image SG1 is going up or down. It is an example. In this case, an image 730 corresponding to the notice effect (in this example, a character display “weakly cut!” And a character image (dono)) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thus, the notice effect may be varied according to the scale of the first state notification image SG1 at the timing when the chance button 136 is operated. In this example, when the scale of the first status notification image SG1 is large, a notice effect with a high degree of advantage for the player is displayed, and when the scale of the first status notification image SG1 is small, the player has the advantage. A notice effect with a low advantage is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the same effect may be performed regardless of the scale stop position of the first state notification image SG1 (meter).

  FIG. 193 is an example of displaying a shift in the super reach effect, and is a diagram showing the operation means image display after FIG. 189 (o) in time series.

  The timing shown in FIGS. 193 (p) and (q) displays a scene where the character (dono) loses to the swordsman character as a confrontation scene between the sword and the swordsman character after the timing shown in FIG. 189 (j). In FIG. 193 (q), in the reduced display of the decorative symbols, the fluctuation variation display of the shifted symbol combinations (eg, “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7”) is performed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7 (r) discolors the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to white, and the timing shown in FIG. 3 (s) is shifted to the symbol display regions 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which the symbol combination (for example, “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7”) is displayed in a swinging manner is shown in FIG. The hold icon PI1 indicating the remaining number of holds and the change icon CI of the change game are displayed again.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 9 (t), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. As a result, the variable game ends, and a round graphic is displayed in the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 208e in preparation for the start of the next special figure 1 variable game.

The period from (u) to (w) shows the state from (t) until the next special figure 1 variable game starts. During this period, an erasing animation for erasing the variation icon CI indicating the hold suspended by the special figure 1 variation game up to (t) in FIG. That is, in this example, after the decorative symbol stop display shown in (t) of FIG.
<Example 25 of operation means image display>

  FIG. 194 is a diagram showing operation means image display of Example 25 in time series. The timing shown in FIG. 9A is a timing corresponding to FIG. 189 (k), and the timing shown in FIG. 10D is a timing corresponding to FIG. 189 (l). That is, in this embodiment, the normal operation means image display described in the embodiment 24 before the start of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 (between FIG. 189 (k) and FIG. 189 (l)). This is a display example in the case where the effect display 704 is performed during (period).

  The timing shown in FIG. 5B shows a state in which the effect display 704 is performed before the start of the period for accepting the operation of the chance button 136. The effect display 704 is, for example, a display of a notice effect related to the change, and displays (cuts in) a band-shaped image of the character (donor) in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, at least a part of the first display (a part of the first state notification image SG1 (meter), a part of the first operation means image BG1 and the “button” are displayed by the second display (effect display 704). The part of the letters “Press to stop the feeling meter!” Is less visible than before the effect display 704 is displayed (FIG. 5A). In this way, in the present embodiment, by covering with the effect display 704, a part of the first state notification image SG1 (meter), a part of the second operation means image BG1, and “press the button to stop the feeling meter. Some of the characters "!" Are considered difficult for the player to see.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 6C, the effect display 704 displayed in FIG. 5B is hidden (erased), and the operation of the chance button 136 is performed as shown in FIG. The display indicating the start of the reception period is continued.

  Note that the display position of the effect display 704 in the present embodiment is not limited to that shown in FIG. 5B, and at least a part of the first state notification image SG1 (meter) is difficult to view (cover). If so, it may cover the vicinity of the uppermost stage of the first state notification image SG1, or may cover the vicinity of the lowermost stage. Further, it may cover the entire first state notification image SG1.

  FIGS. (B-1) to (B-4) are other display examples of the effect display 704 shown in FIG.

  As shown in (B-1) in the figure, the effect display 704 shows the first state notification image SG1 (meter) and a part of the characters “Press the button to stop the feeling meter!” To the player. Although it is difficult, the decorative symbol reduction display 708, the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display region 208e, and the special symbol 2 fourth symbol display region 208f may not be difficult to visually recognize. In other words, the effect display 704 is in front of the first state notification image SG1 and the letters “Press the button to stop the feeling meter!”, The reduced display 708 of the decorative symbol, the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display region 208e, and the special symbol. 2 is displayed on the rear side of the fourth symbol display area 208f.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5B-2, the effect display 704 makes it difficult to visually recognize the first state notification image SG1, the first operation means image BG1, and the first elapsed time notification image TG1. May be.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5B-3, the effect display 704 is an image that makes it difficult to visually recognize only a part of the first state notification image SG1 (here, a character having a placard of “Gekiatsu”). (Image of (Tono)) may be displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4B-4, the effect display 704 moves so that the entire (or substantially the entire) first state notification image SG1 becomes difficult to see or can be visually recognized as time passes. In this example, the effect display 704 is an image in which the characters “super hot” are displayed on a background image having substantially the same area as the entire first state notification image SG1. This is an animation that enters (cuts in) from the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display area 208 and slides left and right.
<Example 26 of operation means image display>

  FIG. 195 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of Example 26 in time series. In the present embodiment, the display example in the case where the effect display 704 is performed during the period for accepting the operation of the chance button 136 in the normal operation means image display described in the embodiment 24 (period after FIG. 189 (l)). is there.

  The timing shown in FIG. 9A is a timing corresponding to FIG. 189 (l), and the timing shown in FIG. 10B is a timing corresponding to FIG. 189 (m).

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C shows a state where the effect display 704 is performed at the timing corresponding to FIG. 189 (n). The effect display 704 is, for example, a display of a notice effect related to the change, and displays an image of the character (donor) in a band shape (cut-in) in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. With this effect display 704, a part of the first state notification image SG1 (meter), a part of the first operation means image BG1, and a part of the characters “Press the button to stop the feeling meter!” The visibility is lower than before the display 704 is displayed (FIGS. (A) and (B)). On the other hand, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 is not deteriorated in visibility (visible to the player), and the chance An image in which the scale (filled portion) of the meter gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the button 136 is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 4D shows a state in which more time has passed from the timing shown in FIG. 4C (the reception period has progressed), and the effect display 704 is continued. Further, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 displays an image in which the scale of the meter (filled portion) is further reduced from the state shown in FIG.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the effect display 704 causes a part of the first state notification image SG1, a part of the first operation means image BG1, and a part of the characters “Press the button to stop the feeling meter!”. The display of the change in the display mode of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (change in which the filled portion gradually decreases) is continued to be visible to the player while being difficult for the player to see.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 5E, the effect display 704 displayed in FIGS. 4C and 4D is hidden (erased). FIGS. (F) and (G) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 191 (p) and (q), respectively.

  In the present embodiment, the first state notification image SG1 is difficult to visually recognize in the effect display 704 during the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136. Therefore, depending on the display position of the effect display 704, the player operates the chance button 136. It becomes difficult to understand when to do. Since the player may refrain from the operation when the operation timing is difficult to understand, the player may be able to guide the operation timing of the chance button 136 by the effect display 704. For example, when the scale of the first status notification image SG1 (meter) is in the lower stage, even if the chance button 136 is operated, it is unlikely that an advantageous result is obtained for the player (the feeling meter does not accumulate sufficiently) By hiding the lower part of the first state notification image SG1 (meter) on the effect display 704, the player may have difficulty operating the chance button 136. By doing in this way, it may be possible to guide the operation at a timing that is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the scale of the first status notification image SG1 (meter) is in the upper stage, the player is trying to operate the chance button 136, but the optimal timing is difficult to understand, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced. There is a case.

Note that the display examples of the effect display 704 shown in FIGS. 194 (B-1) to (B-4) can also be applied to FIGS.
<Example 27 of operation means image display>

  FIG. 196 is a diagram showing operation means image display of Example 27 in time series. In the present embodiment, whether or not the normal map change display and the normal map change display are used as the effect display 704 during the super reach (period after FIG. 189 (j)) of the normal operation means image display described in the embodiment 24. It is configured to display a notice effect based on the determination.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 9A to 9C are timings corresponding to FIG. 189 (j), and are displayed in a variable manner during the super reach production (while displaying the confrontation scene between the character (dono) and the swordsman character). Is started, and the production accompanying the normal fluctuation display is started. Specifically, for example, the display display 704 at this timing includes, for example, a display start animation (character (Chibi princess), Chibi princess roulette display, and “ This is an effect in which an animation displaying a speech balloon “Opening an electric chew when stopped at” is executed (FIGS. (A) and (B)), and the usual decorative symbol variation display is started (FIG. (C)).

  FIGS. (D) to (G) show timings similar to those in FIGS. 189 (k) to (m), and the description of the operation means image display is omitted, but is displayed after FIG. (D). The effect display 704 (ordinary decorative pattern variation display) continues in front of the first state notification image SG1, and at least a part of the scale of the first state notification image SG1 (meter) is the effect display. 704 makes it difficult for the player to see.

  FIG. 9H shows the same timing as FIG. 189 (n), and description of the operation means image display is omitted, but an effect display 704 (ordinary figure) is displayed in front of the first state notification image SG1. The display of the decorative symbol ◎ (display per unit) is continued, and at least a part of the scale of the first state notification image SG1 (meter) is difficult for the player to visually recognize by the effect display 704. .

  FIGS. (I) and (J) show the same timings as in FIGS. 189 (o) and (p), and the description of the operation means image display is omitted, but the effect is produced in front of the first state notification image SG1. The display 704 (the display of the usual decoration symbol ◎ and the display of the balloon “opening electric Chu”) continues. In particular, in FIG. 11I, at least a part of the scale of the first state notification image SG1 (meter) is difficult for the player to visually recognize by the effect display 704.

  FIGS. (K) and (L) show the same timings as those in FIGS. 189 (p) and (q), and explanation of the operation means image display is omitted, but an effect display 704 (ordinary decorative pattern ◎ (Stop display) is continued (FIG. (K)), and by the end of the effect display 704, erasing animation of Chibihime roulette and character (Chibihime) is executed (FIG. (L)).

  FIG. 5M shows the same timing as FIG. 189 (q) when the effect display 704 is finished.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, at least during the period when the first state notification image SG1 (meter) is displayed (from the start of display of the first state notification image SG1 shown in FIGS. Until the end of the display), at least a part of the first state notification image SG1 has low visibility due to the effect display 704 (it is difficult for the player to see). On the other hand, even during the period in which the effect display 704 is being executed, the change in the display mode of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continuously visible to the player ((D) in the figure). ~ (H)).

  In this embodiment, the case where the effect display 704 is performed during the reach effect has been described as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any game form (such as during the decorative display variation display (before the reach effect) or during the big hit) ( For example, at the timing shown in FIG. 189 (c) or FIG. 189 (d), the second display (effect display 704) for reducing the visibility of the first display can be executed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11H-1 is a state in which the effect display 704 (ordinary decoration symbol x (stop display of normal illustration) stop display) is continued. Also, the timing shown in FIG. 11 (I-1) is the state after FIG. 11H-1 and when the effect display 704 ends, the animation of deleting Chibihime roulette and characters (Chibihime) is executed. The As described above, the execution period of the effect display 704 may be different depending on whether or not the determination of whether or not the normal fluctuation display is correct and whether or not the determination of whether or not the normal fluctuation display is correct. It should be noted that the execution period of the effect display 704 may be the same in the case where it is determined whether or not the normal fluctuation display is correct and in the case where the determination is normal or not.

The execution (including the execution time) of the effect display 704 based on the determination of whether or not the normal map change display is appropriate can be applied to the following embodiments.
<Example 28 of operation means image display>

  FIG. 197 is a diagram showing operation means image display of Example 28 in time series. In the present embodiment, two types of effect display 704 (first effect display 7041 and second effect display 704) are performed during super reach (period after FIG. 189 (j)) of the normal operation means image display described in the embodiment 24. The effect display 7042) is performed. For example, the first effect display 7041 is a display of a notice effect based on whether or not the normal map change display and the normal map change display of the twenty-seventh example are correct. It is a display of the notice effect about.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 9A to 9D are the same as those shown in FIGS. 196A to 196K. In this embodiment, the advance notice based on the normal map change display and the determination of whether or not the normal figure change display is appropriate An effect display (first effect display 7041) is executed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 4D, the first effect display 7041 (second display) is changed to the first state notification image SG1 (first display). ) Is displayed on the front side, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize at least a part of the scale of the first state notification image SG1 (meter).

  The timing shown in FIG. 9E shows a state after the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the first effect display 7041 continues, and in addition to this, the display of the notice effect regarding the change (second effect display 7042) has started. The first effect display 7041 and the second effect display 7042 make it difficult for the player to visually recognize at least part of the scale of the first state notification image SG1 (meter). Further, the first effect display 7041 and the second effect display 7042 are displayed at least partially overlapping (overlapping). On the other hand, even in this state, the change in the display mode of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continuously visible to the player. It should be noted that control may be performed so that only the meter is not drawn in the overlapping display area, control may be performed in which only the second effect display 7092 is not drawn, or control in which both are not drawn may be performed. Moreover, you may perform control which draws all.

  In this example, the first effect display 7041 is displayed with priority over the second effect display 7042 (in front), but the second effect display 7042 has priority over the first effect display 7041. It may be displayed (in front). In addition, the first effect display 7041 may be displayed with priority over the second effect display 7042 in time, or the second effect display 7042 may be displayed with priority over the first effect display 7041 in time. These may be displayed at the same time.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6F shows a state after the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the first effect display 7041 continues to reduce the visibility of a part of the first state notification image SG1, but the second effect display 7042 ends.

  The timing shown in FIG. 10G is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 189E, and shows a state in which the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has started.

  The timings shown in FIGS. (H) to (O) are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 189 (G) to (M), but at least during the period in which the first state notification image SG1 (meter) is displayed. In (timing of (H) to (K) in the figure), at least a part of the first state notification image SG1 has low visibility due to the first effect display 7041 displayed continuously ( It is considered difficult for the player to see.) On the other hand, even during the period in which the first effect display 7041 is being executed, the change in the display mode of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continuously visible to the player (the same figure). (H) to (J)).

In this embodiment, the case where the effect display 704 is performed during the reach effect has been described as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any game form (such as during the decorative display variation display (before the reach effect) or during the big hit) ( For example, at the timing shown in FIG. 189 (c) or FIG. 189 (d), the second display (effect display 704) for reducing the visibility of the first display can be executed.
<Example 29 of operation means image display>

  FIG. 198 is a diagram showing operation means image display of Example 29 in time series. In the twenty-ninth embodiment, as an assumption of the description of the thirty-third embodiment, an example of the operation unit image display when performing a normal operation unit image display will be described. The present embodiment has a configuration in which the scale of the first state notification image SG1 (meter) is accumulated in response to repeated hits of the chance button 136.

  The timing shown in FIG. 9A shows, for example, the state before the start of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136, similarly to the timing shown in FIG. 189 (k). In the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second operation means image BG2, the second elapsed time notification image TG2, and the first state notification image SG1 are displayed and above the second operation means image BG2. An image that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 (continuous hitting) (for example, “let the spirit meter collect by pressing the button repeatedly!”) Is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5B shows a state in which the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 is started. The second operation means image BG2, the second elapsed time notification image TG2, and the first The state notification image SG1 is displayed, and an image (for example, a letter “continuous hit!”) Prompting the operation (continuous hit) of the chance button 136 is displayed above the second operation means image BG2.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C shows a state in which time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds, which is the reception period) has elapsed (the reception period has progressed) since the start of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136. An image in which the scale (filled portion) of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 gradually decreases is displayed. In addition, at this timing, the chance button 136 is continuously hit, and the scale of the first state notification image SG1 (meter) is increased (the feeling meter is accumulated) in accordance with the number of consecutive hits. . That is, in this case, the change condition is one or more operations of the chance button 136, and this is established a plurality of times. Specifically, as the number of consecutive hits of the chance button 136 increases, the first state notification image SG1 displays an image in which the filled portion increases.

  The timing shown in FIG. 4D shows a state in which a time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds that is the reception period) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. 4C, and the second elapsed time notification image TG2. An image in which the graduation (filled portion) gradually decreases is displayed. Further, at this timing, the chance button 136 is continuously hit, and the scale of the first state notification image SG1 (meter) is increased from the timing of FIG. It shows the state of accumulation.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E shows a state in which the scale of the first state notification image SG1 (meter) is accumulated up to the maximum (uppermost stage) within the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136. . That is, an image in which the scale (filled portion) of the first state notification image SG1 reaches the uppermost stage is displayed, and a character of “feeling MAX” is displayed above the first state notification image SG1. It is notified that the scale of the state notification image SG1 (meter) has accumulated to the maximum (uppermost level). Further, after the first state notification image SG1 (meter) has accumulated to the maximum, the second operation means image BG2, the second elapsed time notification image TG2, and the characters “continuous hit” are deleted (or these) In front of the image, an image 730 corresponding to the notice effect (in this example, a character “Death Kill!” And a character image (dono)) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The timing shown in FIG. 10F is the same as the timing shown in FIG. Note that after (F) in the figure, the same “big hit” operation means image display as in FIG. 190 (r) and after is executed. In addition, in a present Example, it is good also as a structure by which the maximum position where a meter accumulate | stores by lottery is determined beforehand. That is, even if the chance button 136 is repeatedly hit repeatedly, the maximum value determined by lottery (for example, the eighth step) or more may not be increased. Even if the determination result is “out of”, an effect of increasing to the maximum value (for example, the 10th stage) may be provided. Even if the result of the determination is “big hit”, an effect that does not increase to the maximum value (for example, the 10th stage) (for example, increases only to the 8th stage) may be performed.

  FIGS. (D ′) to (G ′) are display examples in which “out of” operation means image display is executed in the present embodiment.

  When the result of the determination is “out of” and the “out of” production is selected in the production lottery, the second operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as shown in FIGS. (D ′) and (E ′). Even if the chance button 136 is repeatedly hit within the period (until the end of the reception period), the first state notification image SG1 (meter) does not accumulate to the maximum (the scale does not change after having accumulated halfway). indicate.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 5F, the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to white (white back), and at the timing shown in FIG. Is showing a scene that lost the swordsman character.

After this, the “out of” operation means image display similar to that of FIG. 193 (q) and after is executed.
<Example 30 of operation means image display>

  FIG. 199 is a diagram showing operation means image display of the embodiment 30 in time series. This figure shows a state corresponding to the timing shown in FIGS. That is, the present example is a display example in the case where the effect display 704 is performed during the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 in the normal operation means image display described in the example 29.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 9A to 9C are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 198A to 198C. FIG. 4D shows a state in which more time has elapsed from FIG. 2C, and the state in which the first state notification image SG1 further increases as the number of consecutive hits of the chance button 136 increases. Show. Further, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 gradually decreases.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E shows a state in which the effect display 704 is being performed during the reception period of the operation (continuous hit) of the chance button 136. The effect display 704 is, for example, a display of a notice effect related to the change, and displays (cuts in) a band-shaped image of the character (donor) in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. By this effect display 704, a part of the first state notification image SG1 (meter), a part of the second operation means image BG1 and a part of the characters “Press the button to stop the feeling meter!” The visibility is lower than before the display 704 is displayed ((A) in the same figure). As described above, the present embodiment is covered with the effect display 704, so that a part of the first state notification image SG1 (meter), a part of the second operation means image BG1, and the characters "continuous hit!" Part of the game is difficult for players to see. On the other hand, a change in the display mode of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 (a change in which the filled portion gradually decreases) continues to be visible to the player.

  The timing shown in FIG. 9F shows a state in which the effect display 704 is continuously performed during the operation period (continuous hitting) of the chance button 136. In this example, even when the effect display 704 is being executed (even during a period in which part of the first state notification image SG1 is difficult to visually recognize by the effect display 704), the chance button 136 is repeatedly hit. Then, an image in which the scale of the first state notification image SG1 increases (the meter accumulates) is displayed, and the change in the display mode of the meter (change in the increase display) is continued.

  In addition, the effect display 704 that makes it difficult to view (hide) the first state notification image SG <b> 1 may be determined based on the result of determination of success / failure or the like, or the operation of the chance button 136 ( For example, or may be displayed when the scale reaches the uppermost stage of the first state notification image SG1. The same applies to the following embodiments.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5G shows a state in which the effect display 704 has ended during the acceptance period of the operation (continuous hit) of the chance button 136. The effect display 704 is hidden (erased), and the second operation means image BG2, the second elapsed time notification image TG2, and the first state notification image SG1 are displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the same time, an image for prompting the operation (continuous hitting) of the chance button 136 (for example, characters “continuous hitting!”) Is continued above the second operation means image BG2.

Also in the present embodiment, each effect display 704 in FIGS. 194 (Embodiment 25) to 197 (Embodiment 26) can be applied.
<Example 31 of operation means image display>

  200 to 201 are diagrams showing the operation means image display of Example 31 in time series. In the present embodiment, the first state notification image SG1 is made difficult for the player to visually recognize at least one of the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 200 (a), the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212 is finished, the stop symbol is displayed, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 are out of decoration. A combination of symbols “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. In the hold display area 700, two hold icons PI1 and PI2 of FIG. 1 are shown here.

  Next, at the timing shown in FIG. 7B, one special figure 1 hold is consumed, and the special figure 1 variable game hold is reduced from 2 to 1, and the first special figure display device 212 displays the symbol fluctuation display. Is started, and the special figure 1 4th symbol display area 208e displays a circular figure blinking.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6C, a moving animation in which the hold icon PI1 corresponding to the digested hold is moved to the variable icon display area 702 in the hold display area 700 is started.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 4D, the decorative symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the hold display area 700, the moving animation is completed, the hold icon PI1 corresponding to the remaining hold is displayed, and the change icon CI corresponding to the change game is displayed in the change icon display area 702.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E indicates a state before the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is started, and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced and displayed 708 on the lower right side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example. Then, the state notification image SG (the first state notification image SG1, the second state notification image SG2, the third state) is formed so that the substantially entire surface of the display area is divided into a plurality (here, three) in the vertical direction. A notification image SG3) is displayed. The state notification image SG of this example is also a meter whose scale increases from the lower stage to the upper stage with the passage of time (or the operation state of the chance button 136), and the whole is filled with the same color (for example, white) here. It is. In addition, a character such as “Long press the button to determine the character!” Is displayed at the upper end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example. At this timing, for example, the third state notification image SG3 on the right side is displayed on the rear surface of the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display region 208e, the special symbol 2 fourth symbol display region 208f, and the decorative symbol reduction display 708. , The fourth symbol 217, 218 (circular figure (flashing), triangular figure) and the decorative symbol reduction display 708 (both are the second display), the third state notification image SG3 (first display) ) At least part of the visibility is low (it is difficult for the player to see).

  The timing shown in FIG. 5F shows a state in which a reception period for the operation of the chance button 136 (here, a long press operation) has started. For example, on the front of the second state notification image SG2 in the center, A notification display 706 that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is displayed. The notification display 706 that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 in the present embodiment is, for example, a display of the first operation means image BG1, the first elapsed time notification image TG1, and the characters “long press!”. In addition, since it is at the start of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is in a state of being entirely filled.

  That is, at this timing, the visibility of at least part of the second state notification image SG2 of the second state notification image SG2 (first display) is reduced by the notification display 706 (second display). (It is considered difficult for players to see.) In addition, the third state notification image SG3 (first display) is also continuously displayed by at least a part of the third state notification image SG3 by the reduced display (second display) of the fourth symbols 217 and 218 and the decorative symbols. Visibility is low (it is considered difficult for the player to see).

  The timings shown in (g) and (h) of FIG. 6 indicate a state in which time (acceptance period) has progressed from the start of the acceptance period of the chance button 136, and the first status notification image SG1 and the second status notification. In each of the image SG2 and the third state notification image SG3, for example, an image in which the scale is sequentially increased from the lower stage to the upper stage is displayed. In this example, the scale is a divided image of the character (爺), character (princess), and character (dono), that is, the character (爺) and the second state notification image SG2 in the first state notification image SG1. The character (princess) and the scale (divided image) of the character (donor) sequentially increase in the third state notification image SG3, and an image approaching the completed image is displayed. Further, in the first state notification image SG1, the second state notification image SG2, and the third state notification image SG3, the speeds at which the scales increase are different from each other, and the speeds at which the scales increase in the middle are switched (for example, the same) In the figure (g), the scale of the third state notification image SG3 increases rapidly, but in the figure (h), the scale of the first state notification image SG1 increases rapidly). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the state notification images SG may have a scale that increases at the same speed, or the speed may not change in the middle. Further, as the acceptance period of the chance button 136 progresses, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 displays an image in which the filled portion gradually decreases.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (i) shows a state in which the acceptance period of the chance button 136 has further progressed, and the first state notification image SG1, the second state notification image SG2, and the third state notification image SG3. In each of the images, the scale gradually increases. Here, the scale of the second state notification image SG2 (character (princess)) is preceded by the first state notification image SG1 (character (爺)) and the third state notification image SG3 (character (dono)). The upper stage is reached and the character (princess) is approaching the completed image. Further, as the acceptance period of the chance button 136 progresses, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 displays an image in which the filled portion gradually decreases.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (j) further shows the state at the end of the acceptance period of the chance button 136. Here, in the first state notification image SG1 and the third state notification image SG3, the scale does not reach the uppermost end, and the completed image of the character (爺) and character (dono) is not displayed, but the second state The notification image SG2 has a scale at the top, and a completed image of the character (princess) is displayed. In addition, with the end of the acceptance period of the chance button 136, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 displays an image in which the first color is not filled and the whole is filled with the second color (for example, white). Has been.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the second state notification image SG2 (first display) is difficult for the player to visually recognize by the notification display 706 (second display). The change in the display mode of the elapsed time notification image TG1 (change in which the filled portion is reduced) is visible to the player. Further, the third state notification image SG3 (first display) is also difficult for the player to visually recognize due to the reduced display (second display) of the fourth symbol and the decorative symbol. In this example, the first state notification image SG1 (part of the first display) is visible to the player without overlapping the second display at any timing. .

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (k) further shows the state after the end of the acceptance period of the chance button 136, and the notification display 706 (first operation means) displayed on the front surface of the second state notification image SG2. The image BG1, the first elapsed time notification image TG1, and the characters “Long press!” Are deleted, and the selection of the character (princess) is determined.

  The timings shown in (l) to (m) in the figure are in a state where an effect indicating that the selection of the character (princess) has been determined is being executed, and is shown in (n) to (o) in the figure. The timing is a state in which a super reach production by the determined character (princess) is being executed.

  FIGS. 201 (p) and (q) show a state where the result of the success / failure determination is out of order at the timing after FIG. 200 (o), and the symbols are not displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display area 208. The combination (for example, “decoration 6—decoration 5—decoration 6”) is displayed in a swinging manner ((p) in the figure), and the stop display of the decorative symbols is performed ((q) in the figure).

On the other hand, FIGS. 201 (p ′) and (q ′) show that the result of the success / failure determination is a big hit at the timing after FIG. 200 (o), and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display area 208 are displayed. The jackpot symbol combination (for example, “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”) is displayed in a swinging manner (FIG. (P ′)), and the ornamental symbol is stopped (q ′).
<Thirty-second embodiment of image display by operation means>

  FIG. 202 is a diagram showing operation means image display of the embodiment 32 in time series. In the present embodiment, like the embodiment 32, the meter scales of the first state notification image SG1, the second state notification image SG2, and the third state notification image SG3 are respectively increased. Yes.

  The timing shown in FIG. 10A is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 200E, and shows a state before the start of the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5B is a timing after the timing shown in FIG. 5A, and shows a state in which the effect display 704 is started before the start of the operation reception period of the chance button 136. The effect display 704 is displayed preferentially (in front) over the first state notification image SG1, the second state notification image SG2, and the third state notification image SG3. In this example, the effect display 704 displays a group notice effect (animation display) which is a kind of special figure jackpot notice effect in the variable game, and at the timing shown in FIG. (Hani) appears and executes a moving animation that moves from the right side to the left side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. A part of the third state notification image SG3 is difficult for the player to visually recognize due to the effect display 704 (character (Hani)), the fourth symbol, and the reduced symbol 708 of the decorative symbol.

  The timing shown in FIG. 10C is the same timing as the timing shown in FIG. 200F, and shows a state in which the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136 (here, a long press operation) has started. That is, a notification display 706 (first operation means image BG1, first elapsed time notification image TG1 and “long press!” Characters prompting the operation of the chance button 136 is displayed on the front surface of the second state notification image SG2 in the center. Display). Further, the effect display 704 (animation display of group notice) is also continued, and a moving animation in which a plurality of characters (Hani) appear is executed following the first character (Hani). In addition, since it is at the start of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is in a state of being entirely filled. A part of the second state notification image SG2 is difficult for the player to visually recognize by a notification display 706 and an effect display 704 (character (Hani)), and a part of the third state notification image SG3 is an effect display 704. (Character (Hani)), the 4th symbol, and the reduced display 708 of the decorative symbol make it difficult for the player to see.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 200G, and the notification display 706 is continued in front of the second state notification image SG2. Also, the effect display 704 is continued, and after the first character (Hani), a large number of characters (Hani) appear one after another, and a moving animation from the right side to the left side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is executed. To do. The effect display 704 is executed prior to the notification display 706 (in front). That is, a part of the second state notification image SG2 is difficult for the player to visually recognize by the notification display 706 displayed on the front thereof, and the notification display 706 is further displayed to the player by the effect display 704 displayed on the front thereof. It is considered difficult to see. Further, a part of the first state notification image SG3 is difficult for the player to visually recognize by the effect display 704 (character (Hani)), and a part of the third state notification image SG3 is displayed by the effect display 704 (character ( Hani)), the 4th symbol and the reduced display 708 of the decorative symbol make it difficult for the player to see.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 200H, and the notification display 706 continues in front of the second state notification image SG2. Further, although the effect display 704 is continued, the effect display 704 is ended in front of the third state notification image SG3 and the second state notification image SG2 because of the moving animation display. That is, a part of the third state notification image SG3 is difficult for the player to visually recognize by the reduced display 708 of the fourth symbol and the decorative symbol, and a part of the second state notification image SG2 is played by the notification display 706. Although it is difficult for the player to visually recognize, the notification display 706 is visible to the player because the animation that moves in front of the notification display 706 ends. Further, a part of the first state notification image SG3 is difficult for the player to visually recognize due to the effect display 704 (character (Hani)).

  The timing shown in FIG. 10F is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 200I, and shows a state in which the effect display 704 has ended.

In the present embodiment, the notification display 706 that reduces the visibility of the second state notification image SG2 (first display) is difficult for the player to visually recognize by the effect display 704 displayed on the front thereof. In addition, due to the effect display 704 (animation display), there is a period in which the change in the display mode of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (change in which the filled portion is reduced) is difficult for the player to visually recognize (D). ), And there is a period during which it is visible ((C), (E), (F) in the figure). In this case, the effect display 704 may also be an animation (image) that allows the player to visually recognize the change in the display mode of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 over the entire period during which the chance button 136 is accepted. Good.
<Example 33 of operation means image display>

  FIG. 203 is a diagram showing the operation unit image display of Example 33 in time series. In this embodiment, a tutorial display (tutorial notice) 710 is performed instead of the effect display 704 (group notice display) of the embodiment 32 (FIG. 202).

  The timings shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B are the same as the timing shown in FIG. 200E. However, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. At a later timing and before the start of the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136 (here, the long press operation), the tutorial display 710 (here, a balloon image and “a pattern in which a meter suddenly accumulates is also available.” Is displayed). The tutorial display 710 is displayed on the front surface of the first state notification image SG1 and the second state notification image SG2, and reduces the visibility thereof.

  The timing shown in FIG. 10C is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 200F, and the notification display 706 displayed on the front surface of the second state notification image SG2 is difficult for the player to visually recognize by the tutorial display 710. It is said that.

The timing shown in FIG. 4D is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 200G, and shows a state where the tutorial display 710 is erased. Note that the tutorial display 710 of this embodiment can also be referred to as an effect display 704 or a notification display 706. Here, the tutorial display may indicate a display for explaining an effect (notice, character, etc.) performed on the gaming machine.
<Example 34 of Operation Means Image Display>

  FIG. 204 is a diagram showing operation means image display of Example 34 in time series. In the present embodiment, the visibility of at least a part of the state notification image SG is reduced by the prefetch hold icon 712.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B are the same as the timing shown in FIG. 200E, but as an example, the movement animation of the prefetch hold icon 712 has started at the timing shown in FIG. Indicates the state.

  The timings shown in FIGS. (C) and (D) are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 200 (f) and (g), but the moving animation of the prefetch hold icon 712 continues, and the timings shown in FIGS. At the timing, the prefetch hold icon 712 is displayed in front of a part of the first state notification image SG1, and a part of the first state notification image SG1 is difficult for the player to see.

The timing shown in FIG. 5E is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 200H, but the standby animation of the prefetch hold icon 712 continues, and the first status notification image is displayed by the prefetch hold icon 712. Part of SG1 is difficult for the player to see. Further, in the same figure (D) and the same figure (E), since the prefetch hold icon 712 moves during standby, the area of the first state notification image SG1 whose visibility is reduced (hidden) by the prefetch hold icon 712 Has changed. Note that the prefetch hold icon 712 of the present embodiment can be said to be an effect display 704 or a notification display 706.
<Example 35 of operation means image display>

  FIG. 205 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of Example 35 in time series. In this embodiment, the visibility of at least a part of the state notification image SG is reduced by the error display 714.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 9A to 9D are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 200E to 200G and 200M, respectively. Here, as an example, the door opening error is detected and the error display 714 (for example, “Error: the door is open!”) Is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. . For example, the error display 714 is displayed over the first state notification image SG1, the second state notification image SG2, and the third state notification image SG3.

For example, as shown in FIG. 4D, the error display 714 is continuously displayed during a period in which the door opening error state is not canceled. Note that the error display 714 in this embodiment can also be regarded as an effect display 704 or a notification display 706.
<Example 36 of operation means image display>

  FIG. 206 is a diagram showing operation means image display of Example 36 in time series. In the present embodiment, at least a part of the visibility of the state notification image SG is reduced by the alert notification display 718.

  The timing shown in (a) of the figure is a state in which the big hit end screen is displayed. In the timing shown in (b), the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state before the first change game after the probable big hit ends. It shows the state that was done.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C shows a state in which a warning alert display 718 is performed on the front of the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed (here, the symbol combination of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”). Show. For example, the alert notification display 718 is configured to move and display a character string for alerting a belt-like background image.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 4D and 4E show a state in which one hold is consumed (the number of holds is reduced from 4 to 3) and the variable game of FIG. 1 is started. Further, the alert alert display 718 continues. At these timings, the warning alert display 718 is superimposed on the belt-like background image and the characters “Please be careful not to forget to pay your prepaid card” are displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5F is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 200E as the operation means image display although the number of holdings is different. Attention notification display 718 is displayed on the front surface of first state notification image SG1, second state notification image SG2, and third state notification image SG3, and first state notification image SG1 and second state notification image SG2 are displayed. In addition, a part of the third state notification image SG3 is difficult for the player to visually recognize. Further, due to the reduced display of the fourth symbol and the decorative symbol, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize a part of the third state notification image SG3.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5G is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 200F as the operation means image display, although the number of holds is different. A notification display 706 is displayed on the front surface of the second state notification image SG2, and a warning notification display 718 is further displayed on the front surface thereof. A part of the second state notification image SG2 (for example, “Long press!”) Is difficult for the player to visually recognize by the notification display 706, and a part of the notification display 706 is displayed by the alert notification display 718. It is difficult to see. The first state notification image SG <b> 1 and the third state notification image SG <b> 3 are difficult to view by the alerting notification display 718 and the like as in FIG.

  The timings shown in (i) and (j) of the figure show the same state as the timings shown in FIGS. 199 (i) and (j). A notification display 706 is displayed on the front surface of the second state notification image SG2, and a warning notification display 718 is further displayed on the front surface thereof. A part of the second state notification image SG2 (for example, “Long press!”) Is difficult for the player to visually recognize by the notification display 706, and a part of the notification display 706 is displayed by the alert notification display 718. It is difficult to see. The first state notification image SG <b> 1 and the third state notification image SG <b> 3 are difficult to view by the alerting notification display 718 and the like as in FIG.

  The timing shown in FIG. 10 (k) shows a state in which the alert notification display 718 is erased, and the notification display 706 displayed on the front surface of the second state notification image SG2 is visible to the player. Yes.

The alert notification display 718 of the present embodiment can be said to be an effect display 704 or a notification display 706. In addition, the alert notification display 718 of the present embodiment is repeatedly displayed for a predetermined number of times, such as “Please be careful not to forget to pay for the prepaid card” (for example, until the travel display is turned twice). However, it may be displayed for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds from the start of fluctuation). In addition, although the alerting notification display 718 of the present embodiment is performed before the start of fluctuation of the special figure, it may be performed after the start of fluctuation of the special figure. Note that the alert notification display 718 is displayed when the gaming state before the big hit starts is a special figure low-probability state and the gaming state after the big hit ends is shifted to a special figure high-probability normal figure high-probability state (probability change state). May be performed only when the transition from the special figure high-accuracy normal figure low-accuracy state (time-short state) to the special-figure low-accuracy general figure low-accuracy state (normal state) (that is, the first change after the time reduction ends). May be performed only. Further, it may be performed after the big hit ends regardless of the gaming state.
<Example 37 of operation means image display>

  FIG. 207 to FIG. 208 are diagrams showing the operation means image display of Example 37 in time series. In the thirty-seventh embodiment, as an assumption of the description of the thirty-eighth to thirty-fourth embodiments, an example of the operation unit image display when performing normal operation unit image display will be described. The present embodiment executes a reach effect that causes the player to operate the chance button 136 one or more times. For example, a state notification image (here, the first state notification is generated by a plurality of operations of the chance button 136). It has a configuration in which the scale of the meter of the image SG1 and the second state notification image SG2) is changed.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 189 (h) and (i), although the positions of the decorative symbols are different.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C is a first state notification image SG1 that displays a confrontation scene between the character (dono) and the swordsman character and suggests the degree of damage of the character (dono) and the swordsman character with a meter. And the state which is displaying 2nd state alerting | reporting image SG2 is shown. In addition, the characters “YOSHIMUNE” and “KENGOU” are displayed above the first state notification image SG1 and above the second state notification image SG2, respectively.

  The timing shown in FIG. 4D shows a state in which an operation notification display 720 for notifying the operation timing of the chance button 136 is displayed. Here, the operation notification display 720 displays the letters “Chance is three times!” On the belt-like background image in order to notify the number of operations of the chance button 136.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6E shows a state in which an operation notification display 720 for notifying that the first operation of the chance button 136 corresponds to the attack of the character (donor) is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5F shows the state before the start of the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136, and the first corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136 is displayed on the front of the operation notification display 720. And the first elapsed time notification image TG1 corresponding to the elapsed time of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 are displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5G shows a state after the start of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 (during the reception period), and the scale of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 gradually decreases. The image is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5H shows a state where the first operation (character (dono) attack) of the chance button 136 is performed. The operation notification display 720, the first operation means image BG1, and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are once erased, and the second state notification image SG2 displays an image with a reduced scale (filled portion). Notifies the decrease in character damage.

  The timings shown in FIGS. (I) to (L) are operation means image displays corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136. The second operation of the chance button 136 is the same as (E) to FIG. 10 except that the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2 are displayed and the operation corresponds to the counterattack of the swordsman character. The description is omitted because it is similar to FIG.

  Each timing shown in FIGS. 9M to 10O is a state in which the operation means image display corresponding to the third operation of the chance button 136 is being performed. In the third operation of the chance button 136, the third operation means image BG3 and the third elapsed time notification image TG3 are displayed ((O) in the figure).

Each timing shown in FIGS. 208 (P) to 208 (R) shows a state after the timing shown in FIG. 207 (O). There is a third operation during the acceptance period of the third operation of the chance button 136 (FIG. (P)), and by this, the character (Mr.) wins (FIG. (Q) (R)), and the reduced display The displayed decorative symbols stop and display a symbol combination (for example, “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7”) that is a big hit ((R) in the figure). In this embodiment, the operation notification display 720 can be said to be an effect display 704 or a notification display 706.
<Example 38 of operation means image display>

  FIG. 209 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of Example 38 in time series. In the present embodiment, at least a part of the first state notification image SG1 or the second state notification image SG2 of the normal operation means image display described in the embodiment 37 is difficult for the player to visually recognize by the effect display 704. It is a display example.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5C is the same as the timing shown in FIG.

  The timing shown in FIG. 4D shows a state in which the effect display 704 is displayed on the front surface of the first state notification image SG1 in FIG. In this example, the effect display 704 is a mission completion display, which makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize a part of the first state notification image SG1 (a meter that displays the damage of the character (donor)).

The timing shown in FIG. 5E shows the same timing as that shown in FIG. 207D, and the timing shown in FIG. 5F shows a state in which the effect display 704 is erased.
<Example 39 of operation means image display>

  FIG. 210 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of Example 39 in time series. In the present embodiment, at least a part of the first state notification image SG1 or the second state notification image SG2 of the normal operation means image display described in the embodiment 37 is difficult for the player to visually recognize by the effect display 704. This is a display example, and the effect display 704 here is a hitting notification display.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5C is the same as the timing shown in FIG.

  The timing shown in FIG. 4D shows a state in which the effect display (hitting notification display) 704 is displayed on the front surface of the first state notification image SG1 in FIG. Thereby, a part of the first state notification image SG1 (meter that displays the damage of the character (donor)) and a part of the second state notification image SG2 (a meter that displays the damage of the character (donor)) are games. It is considered difficult to see.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E shows the same timing as that shown in FIG. 207D, and the timing shown in FIG. 8R shows the same timing as that shown in FIG. 208R. Is. As described above, in this embodiment, even when the reach effect is finished, the effect display (hitting method display) 704 is continued. The effect display (hitting method notification display) 704 is a predetermined time from the last sensor detection (for example, detection of the passing of the game ball by the sensor of the normal start port 228) by the game ball launched into the area on the right side of the board. When elapses, the display ends (the display is erased).

The hitting notification display may be displayed when the player has operated (turned) the handle to a certain position (position where the game ball is launched into the right region). In that case, the display may be terminated when the player operates the handle to a certain position (position where the game ball is launched into the left area). In addition, the notification of how to hit may be performed simultaneously with the effect display as well as the effect display.
<Example 40 of operation means image display>

  FIG. 211 is a diagram illustrating operation means image display according to the fortieth embodiment in time series. In the present embodiment, at least a part of the first state notification image SG1 or the second state notification image SG2 of the normal operation means image display described in the embodiment 37 is reduced in visibility by the effect display 704 (game). This is an example of display). In addition, although the example 37 demonstrated the example of a display when operating the chance button 136 3 times, this example is a display example when operating the chance button 136 twice.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7G shows the same state as the timing shown in FIG.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11H shows a state in which the chance button 136 is operated during the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136, and thereby the effect display 704 is displayed. The effect display 704 is, for example, a notice effect, and here, a panda image is displayed (cut-in) so as to be inserted into the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereby, at least a part of the first state notification image SG1 and the second state notification image SG2 is difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  Also, the timing shown in FIG. 10I shows a state in which the effect display 704 is displayed on the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The effect display 704 is displayed on the rear surface of the special symbol 1 4th symbol display area 208e, the special symbol 2 4th symbol display region 208f, and the decorative symbol reduced display 708, whereby the first state notification image SG1 and the second symbol are displayed. All of the state notification images SG2 are difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6J shows a state in which the effect display 704 has been erased (finished). In this state, a character (panda) is added next to the character (dono), and the display (effect display) above the first state notification image SG1 is also changed from “YOSHIMUNE” (see FIG. 5G) to “YOSHIMUNE & PANDA”. Has changed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 10K indicates the state before the start (immediate) of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136, and corresponds to the second operation of the chance button 136 on the front of the operation notification display 720. The second operation means image BG2 to be displayed and the second elapsed time notification image TG2 corresponding to the elapsed time of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 are displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11L shows a state after the start of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 (during the reception period), and the scale of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 gradually decreases. The image is displayed.

The timings shown in FIGS. 8M to 8O show the state where the second operation of the chance button 136 is performed, and the operation means image display is shown in FIGS. 208Q to 208R. Since it is the same as the state of each timing, description is abbreviate | omitted.
<Example 41 of operation means image display>

  FIG. 212 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of Example 41 in time series. The present embodiment has a configuration for executing a rewind effect in addition to the normal operation means image display described in the embodiment 37, and the first state notification image is displayed by a part of the display of the rewind effect. It is an example of a display which makes visibility of at least one part of SG1 or 2nd state alerting | reporting image SG2 fall (a player makes it difficult to visually recognize).

  The timings shown in FIGS. (L) to (P) are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 207 (L) to 207 (P).

  The timing shown in FIG. 11P shows a state in which the execution of the rewind effect is started (the state at the start of execution) based on, for example, the third operation of the chance button 136. At this timing, a pause mark and “pause” characters are displayed as an effect display 704 above the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the same image is displayed for a predetermined time, and the image is stopped. It looks like Even in this case, the variation display of the decorative symbol and the blinking of the special symbol 1 and 4 symbol display area 208e are continued.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11 (Q) shows a state in which the rewind effect is being executed. At this timing, a rewind mark and “rewind” characters are displayed as an effect display 704 above the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and an image displayed at an earlier timing (image several frames before) Is displayed to show that rewinding display is being performed. Here, the image displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 5 (O) is displayed again, and the third elapsed time notification image TG3 also displays an image that is entirely filled.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7 (R) shows a state in which the rewind effect is being executed, and the image displayed at the timing shown in FIG. At the timing shown in FIG. 11 (L), a first state notification image SG1 and a second state notification image SG2 are displayed, and a rewind effect effect display 704 displays the entire first state notification image SG1. Part of the second state notification image SG2 is hidden, making it difficult for the player to see.

  At each timing shown in FIGS. (S) to (V), a rewind effect is continuously executed. As shown in FIGS. (S) and (T), the second operation means image BG2 and the second progress are shown. A state in which the time notification image TG2 is displayed is shown. In FIGS. 5 (S) and (T), the meter (scale) of the third elapsed time notification image TG3 is displayed as being rewound, but it is actually outside the reception period of the chance button 136. Also during the period of (S) to (V) in the figure, the entire first state notification image SG1 and a part of the second state notification image SG2 are hidden by the effect display 704 of the rewind effect. It is considered difficult to see.

  The timing shown in FIG. 10 (W) shows the state at the end of the rewind effect, and the image displayed at the timing of FIG. 207 (B) is displayed again, and the effect display 704 of the rewind display is displayed. It is displayed. The timing shown in FIG. 6 (X) shows a state after the end of the rewind effect. Thereafter, the operation means image display of FIG. 207 (B) and thereafter is executed again.

  In this embodiment, an example of redisplaying an image several frames before as a rewind effect has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a rewind movie (reverse playback movie) may be prepared and played back. The rewind effect may be performed by using a control movie that actually rewinds and plays back the movie used in the operation means image display. During the rewind effect, the operation means image and / or the elapsed time notification image may be hidden.

In the above embodiment, the effect display 704 may be changed to the notification display 706, or the notification display 706 may be changed to the effect display 704.
<Example 42 of operation means image display>

  With reference to FIGS. 213 to 220, an outline of the fifth embodiment and other modifications will be described as Example 42. FIG.

  FIG. 213 is a diagram for explaining the outline of the fifth embodiment. As shown in the drawing, the gaming table (for example, pachinko machine 100) of the fifth embodiment includes display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208), and the display means has a first display (for example, first display). Is a means capable of displaying at least the state notification image SG1). The first display is a display related to the operation of the operation means (for example, a display according to the operation timing or a display according to the number of consecutive hits), and the first display is an operation of the operation means. Accordingly, the display mode of the first display can be changed at least (for example, an increase display or a decrease display that increases the scale of the meter is possible), and the first display is a second state (for example, a player). (A state in which the hot notice effect display 704 is being executed) that is advantageous to the first state (for example, a state in which the hot notice effect display 704 is not executed) is at least more visible The display is lowered.

  FIG. 214 is a schematic diagram illustrating the first display in FIG. FIGS. 9A to 9H are diagrams showing the operation means image display of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. The first display is performed by operating the operation means during a period such as an operation reception period, as shown from display A-0 ′ in FIG. 10C to display AN in FIG. This is a display (effect display) in which the display mode changes. The display A-0 in FIG. 5B shows a state in which an image or the like that is the first display is displayed, but the operation reception period has not started, and the display A in FIG. -N 'indicates a state after the image, which is the first display, is displayed but the operation acceptance period has ended. That is, the time here is, for example, from the start of the reception period of the operating means (chance button 136) ((c) in the same figure) to the end of the reception period (except at the end) ((f) in the same figure). This is a period, and a display whose display mode changes by operating the operating means during this period is referred to as a first display.

  The operation of the operation means includes one operation, a plurality of operations, repeated hits, long presses, a non-contact operation for detecting a hand held by a proximity sensor, a flick operation for detecting by a touch sensor, or the like. . Further, the period during which the operating means is operated is the time from when the display A is displayed until it is erased (from the start of the reception period shown in FIG. 5B to the reception period shown in FIG. It is also possible to set the first display including the display before the start of the reception period shown in FIG. 5B and the display after the end of the reception period shown in FIG. Also good.

  FIG. 215 is a diagram for explaining the outline of the fifth embodiment from another viewpoint. As shown in the drawing, the gaming table (for example, pachinko machine 100) of the fifth embodiment includes display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208), and the display means has a first display (for example, first display). The elapsed time notification image TG1 and the first state notification image SG1) can be displayed at least. The first display is a display related to the operation of the operation means (for example, the chance button 136), and the first display is the establishment of the change condition (for example, the progress of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136). Or when the chance button 136 is repeatedly hit), the display mode of the first display can be changed at least (for example, the display can be reduced to reduce the scale of the meter). When it is in the second state (for example, a state in which the (attention) notice effect that is advantageous to the player is being executed) than in the first state (for example, in a state in which the attraction notice effect is not being executed). The first display is a display that at least continues the change in the display mode of the first display in the second state.

  FIG. 216 is a schematic diagram illustrating the first display in FIG. 215. FIGS. 9A to 9H are diagrams showing the operation means image display of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. The first display is a display (effect display) in which the display mode changes with the passage of time, as shown from display B-0 ′ in FIG. 10C to display BN in FIG. is there. The display b-0 in FIG. 5B shows a state in which an image or the like that is the first display is displayed, but the operation reception period has not started, and the display B in FIG. -N 'indicates a state after the image, which is the first display, is displayed but the operation acceptance period has ended. That is, the time here is, for example, from the start of the reception period of the operating means (chance button 136) ((c) in the same figure) to the end of the reception period (except at the end) ((f) in the same figure). A display that is a period and whose display mode changes with the passage of time during this period is referred to as a first display.

  The time is not limited to a period during which the operation means can be received, but is the total time during which the operation means is actually operated (for example, the operation time when the chance button 136 is operated a plurality of times (including repeated hits)). Or a time during which the operation means is continuously operated (for example, long press). Moreover, it is good also as time (it is before the end of the reception period shown in the figure (g) from the start of the reception period shown in the figure (b)) after the display B is displayed until it erases, That is, the display may be the first display including the display before the start of the reception period shown in FIG. 5B and the display after the end of the reception period shown in FIG.

  FIG. 217 is a diagram illustrating the second display. (A) to (h) of FIG. 8A are display examples of operation means image display at a plurality of timings of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. In the figure, the second display is represented as display C, and the first display is represented as display A (see FIG. 214) or display B (see FIG. 215). FIG. 5B is a diagram showing the display start timing of the second display (display C) over time.

  Further, the second display (display C) is, for example, an effect display 704 (animation display, hitting effect display, rewind effect display, tutorial display, prefetch hold icon, error display, jackpot confirmation display, probability change state and time reduction state. And the like), a notification display 706, a fourth symbol, a reduced display 708 of a decorative symbol, and the like.

  The display timing of the second display (display C) may be a period before the start of the first display (display A, display B) as shown in FIG. Further, as shown in FIG. 5B, it may be simultaneously with the start of display of the first display or after the start of display of the first display. After the display of the first display is started, immediately after the display of the first display is started or after the display of the first display is started, the maximum period is, for example, about 10 seconds. Further, as shown in FIG. 10C, it may be before the operation acceptance period of the operation means (FIG. 214B, FIG. 216B). Further, as shown in FIGS. 5D to 5F, it may be during the period for accepting the operation of the operating means (during the period when the display mode of the first display is changing). Further, as shown in (g) of the figure, it may be after the operation acceptance period of the operation means (FIG. 214 (g), FIG. 216 (g)). Alternatively, it may be after the first display is erased (or just after the erase) as shown in FIG. Further, the start timing of the second display is not always the same timing, and one or more timings (a) to (h) in the figure may be combined.

  On the other hand, the erase timing of the second display may be a period before the start of the first display (display A, display B), as shown in FIG. Further, as shown in FIG. 5B, it may be simultaneously with the start of display of the first display or after the start of display of the first display. After the display of the first display is started, immediately after the display of the first display is started or after the display of the first display is started, the maximum period is, for example, about 10 seconds. Further, as shown in FIG. 10C, it may be before the operation acceptance period of the operation means (FIG. 214B, FIG. 216B). Further, as shown in FIGS. 5D to 5F, it may be during the period for accepting the operation of the operating means (during the period when the display mode of the first display is changing). Further, as shown in (g) of the figure, it may be after the operation acceptance period of the operation means (FIG. 214 (g), FIG. 216 (g)). Alternatively, it may be after the first display is erased (or just after the erase) as shown in FIG. Further, the erase timing of the second display is not always the same timing, but may be a combination of one or more timings (a) to (h) in FIG.

  FIG. 218 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display form of the second display. In the second display, the display mode and the display position may not change during the display period, or at least one of the display mode and the display position may change.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, the second display (display C) hides the entire first display (display A or display B) (the first display is difficult for the player to see). It may be.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, the second display (display C) hides at least a part of the first display (display A or display B), and the size (area) of the second display. The area of the region that hides the first display may be changed (reduced) by changing (reducing).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5C, the second display (display C) hides at least a part of the first display (display A or display B), and the size (area) of the second display. The area of the region for hiding the first display may be changed (enlarged) by changing (enlarging).

  As shown in FIG. 4D, the display position of the second display (display C) moves while hiding at least part of the first display (display A or display B). Thus, the position of the area for hiding the first display may be changed (moved).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5E, the second display (display C) hides at least a part of the first display (display A or display B), while the display position (or display) of the second display. By moving the (direction), the area of the first display hidden area, the hidden area, or the hidden position may be changed (moved) depending on the shape of the second display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5F, the second display (display C) changes its shape, and at least part of the first display (display A or display B) is hidden, By changing the shape of the second display, the area of the area to be hidden, the area to be hidden, or the position to be hidden may be changed (moved).

  The second display may be composed of any one combination of (a) to (f) in the figure, and from one or all or all combinations of (a) to (f) in the figure. It may be configured. In addition, the combinations of two or more or all of the combinations (a) to (f) in the figure include, for example, the change in the figure (c) after the change in the figure (b) left figure → middle figure → right figure. Is also included, and there is also included a configuration that changes from the left diagram in FIG. 5B to the middle diagram in FIG. -Same for FIG.

  FIG. 219 is a diagram illustrating the first state and the second state according to the fifth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, in the second state, the second display (display C) overlaps the first display (display A or display B) (by being displayed on the front surface). The visibility of the first display is lower in the second state than in the state.

  That is, as shown to the left figure of the figure (a), a 1st state is a state where only the 1st display (display A or display B) is displayed, and the 2nd display (display C) is not displayed. In the second state, the second display (display C) is transmitted over the first display (display A or display B) as shown in the middle diagram of FIG. This is the state displayed at a rate of 0%. Alternatively, in the second state, the first display (display A or display B) is superimposed on the first display (display A or display B) as shown in the right figure of FIG. In this state, it is displayed with less than 100% (for example, transmittance of 50%).

  Further, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 5B, the first state is superimposed on (in front of) only the first display (display A or display B), and the second display (display C) is displayed. The second state is displayed in a small state (for example, smaller than the first display), and the second state is superimposed on the first display as shown in the middle or right diagram of FIG. The display is displayed larger than the left figure of FIG.

  In addition, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 8C, the first state is superimposed on the first display (display A or display B) (in front of it), and the second display (display C) is The second state is a state of being displayed with a large transmittance (for example, a transmittance of 80%). The second state is the first display (display A or display B) as shown in the middle or left of FIG. ) (In front of it), the second display (display C) is displayed with a small transmittance (for example, a transmittance of 30% or 50%).

  Moreover, as shown in the left figure of the same figure (d), a 1st state is a state with which the 1st display (display A or display B) and the 2nd display (display C) do not overlap. In the second state, the second display (display C) is displayed over the first display (display A or display B) (in front of it) as shown in the right figure of FIG. It is in a state. In this case, the transmittance of the second display in the second state is 0% or more (including a case where only the frame line is not filled) and less than 100%.

  Further, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 5E, the first state is a state in which only the first display (display A or display B) is displayed, and the second state is the same as FIG. e) As shown in the right figure, the second display (display C) is displayed on the rear surface of the first display (display A or display B), and the second display is the first display. This is the case for similar colors. Even when the second display is displayed on the rear surface of the first display, the visibility of the first display is low when these are similar colors.

  In addition, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 5F, the first state is a state in which the second display (display C) is displayed on the rear surface of the first display (display A or display B). The second display is not the same color as the first display, and the second state is the rear surface of the first display (display A or display B) as shown in the right figure (f). The second display (display C) is displayed, and the second display has a similar color to the first display.

  Note that only one of the display modes (changes) of the second display shown in FIGS. 218 (a) to 218 (f), or a plurality of combinations of FIGS. 218 (a) to (f), FIG. ) To (f), only one of the first state and the second state, or a plurality of combinations of FIGS. 219 (a) to (f) may be applied to each other.

  FIG. 220 illustrates the first state notification image SG1, the second state notification image SG2, the third state notification image SG3, the first elapsed time notification image TG1, which have been described as meters (gauges) in the above embodiment. It is a figure which shows other forms, such as 2nd elapsed time alerting | reporting image TG2 and 3rd elapsed time alerting | reporting image TG3.

  As shown in FIGS. 5A to 5A, the meter is not limited to an image composed of a single continuous area, and is composed of a plurality of images (scale M) spaced apart from each other. One meter may be configured. In that case, all the scales M may have the same shape as shown in FIG. 9A, or only a part of each scale M may have the same shape as shown in FIG. Each scale M may have a different shape as shown in FIG. In addition, the meter is configured such that the maximum number of scales is simultaneously displayed as the scale group MG, and the display mode (for example, the fill color) of each scale M is sequentially changed (filled) over time. There may be a configuration in which each scale M is sequentially displayed with the passage of time (the number of scales M increases).

  FIG. 4B shows an example of a meter in which the number of scales M increases. In this example, the scale M falls from above and accumulates in the meter as time passes. However, as shown in FIG. It is good also as composition which fills up.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 3C, the meter is not limited to a configuration in which the length and area are stacked and increased (having a shape as a so-called meter or gauge), but the meter increases from the inside to the outside, and the color and transmittance are increased. Any configuration that can be visually recognized so that the form of the entire meter expands and contracts due to the change is acceptable.

Although the case where the meter is increased is described as an example here, the present invention can be similarly applied to a configuration where the meter is decreased.
In conventional game machines, it has been desired to further enhance the interest of the game.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and is intended to provide a gaming table capable of improving the interest of the player. According to this, the interest of the player can be improved.

  That is, as described above, the game table (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the above embodiment includes display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) and operation means (for example, the chance button 136). The display means is means capable of displaying at least a first display (for example, a first state notification image SG1), and the first display relates to operation of the operation means. Display (for example, display according to the operation timing, display according to the number of consecutive hits, etc.), and the first display has at least a display mode of the first display according to the operation of the operation means. When the display is changeable (for example, a decrease display or an increase display of a meter scale), and the first display is in a second state (for example, an execution state of a “hot” production). ,first State (e.g., "HOT" non-execution state of the effect) visibility than is at least lower display, it is the amusement machine according to claim.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize a game machine having a display characteristic. Further, there are cases where the player can be prompted to operate the operation means (chance button 136) (operation at a timing that is advantageous to the player or continuous hitting). Further, since the visibility of the first display may be lowered, it may be possible to concentrate the player's line of sight on the display means. Further, the player's line of sight can be directed around the first display, and the player may be prompted to operate the operation means.
The “display relating to operation of the operation means” refers to the following display.
(A) “Display including display for prompting operation of operation means” may be used.

(B) “Display including a display indicating that an operation of the operation means is accepted” may be used.

(C) It may be “a display including a display indicating that an effect of operating the operation means is performed (or being performed)”.

(D) Only one of the above (a) to (c) or a combination of two or more (two or all) may be displayed.

(E) The display may not include display of one of the above ((a) to (c), or a combination of two or more (two or all)).

  Further, “at least the visibility is lowered” may indicate that “at least a part or all of the first display is at least difficult to see in the second state”. . Alternatively, it may indicate that “in the second state, at least a part or all of the first display is at least invisible”.

  In addition, “when the first display is in the second state, the visibility is at least lower than that in the first state” means that “at least part of the first display or all of the first display. It may indicate that the visibility is at least lowered. Alternatively, it may indicate that “the visibility of at least some or all of two or more of the plurality of displays is reduced”. The “two or more displays” may indicate “two or more displays including the first display”.

The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a second display (for example, an effect display 704), and the second state means that at least a part of the second display is the first display. It is good also as a thing which is the state which overlaps at least one part.
According to such a configuration, the second display may be conspicuous.

  The “state where at least a part of the second display overlaps at least a part of the first display” means the following state.

(A) It may indicate a state where “at least a part of the second display is preferentially displayed over at least a part of the first display”.

(B) “At least a part of the second display is displayed in front (front) of at least a part of the first display” (for example, “at the front side of the layer on which the first display is displayed) "A state displayed on a layer" or "a state displayed before the first display in the same layer"). Here, the “front side” may indicate the “player (closer) side”.

(C) It may indicate a state in which “at least a part of the second display is displayed overlapping (overlapping with) at least a part of the first display”.

(D) Only one of the above (a) to (c) or a combination of two or more (two or all) may be indicated.

(E) One of the above (a) to (c), or a combination of two or more (two or all) may not be displayed.

  The first state may be a state in which at least a part of the second display does not overlap with at least a part of the first display.

  According to such a configuration, there is a case where the second display does not overlap with at least a part of the first display, thereby giving the player a sense of discomfort and allowing the player to concentrate more on the game. is there.

The state where at least part of the second display does not overlap with at least part of the first display means that the second display is not displayed and the second display is displayed. However, it shall include any state where the first display is not hidden. That is, “a state in which at least a part of the second display does not overlap with at least a part of the first display” means the following state.
(A) "The state where the second display is not displayed on the display means" may be indicated.

(B) "The state where a part of the second display is displayed at a position where it does not overlap with a part or all of the first display" may be indicated.

(C) It may indicate “a state in which the entire second display is displayed at a position that does not overlap a part or all of the first state”.

(D) One or two or more (two or all) of the above (a) to (c) may not be shown.

  The first display is a display including at least a meter display (for example, a first state notification image SG1), and the meter display has at least a display mode of the meter display according to an operation of the operation means. The display may be changeable.

  According to such a configuration, by reducing the visibility of the meter display, it may be difficult for the player to understand the operating status of the operating means and to prompt the player to operate the operating means.

The gaming machine may be a pachinko machine or a slot machine, and the second display may be an effect display (for example, an effect display 704).
According to such a configuration, there is a case where the effect display can be made conspicuous.

  Further, at least a part of the first display overlapping the second display may be an image that is not displayed, and the display unit may not draw the image that is not displayed.

  With such a configuration, the drawing processing load may be reduced.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the above-described embodiment is a gaming table including a display unit (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) and an operation unit (for example, a chance button 136). The display unit is a unit capable of displaying at least a first display (for example, a first elapsed time notification image TG1, a first state notification image SG1), and the first display is the operation unit. Display related to the operation (for example, operation reception period, operation state display), the first display is the establishment of the change condition (for example, the start of the operation reception period, during the operation reception period) When there is an operation means operation, continuous hit or long press of the operation means, etc., the display mode of the first display is a display that can be changed at least (for example, a decrease display or an increase display of a meter scale), Previous When the first display is in the second state (for example, the execution state of the “hot” production), the first display is more visible than the first state (for example, the non-execution state of the “hot” production). A display that is at least low in performance, and the first display is a display that continues the change in the display mode of the first display in the second state. It is a stand.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize a game machine having a display characteristic. In addition, it may be possible to guide the line of sight to the hot notice so that the player does not overlook that the operation reception time of the operation means is short. Further, since the visibility of the first display may be lowered, it may be possible to concentrate the player's line of sight on the display means. Further, the player's line of sight can be directed around the first display, and the player may be prompted to operate the operation means.

The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a second display (for example, an effect display 704, a notification display 706, etc.), and the second state is at least a part of the second display. May be in a state of overlapping at least a part of the first display.
According to such a configuration, the second display may be conspicuous.

  The first state may be a state in which at least a part of the second display does not overlap with at least a part of the first display.

  According to such a configuration, there is a case where the second display does not overlap, so that the player can feel a sense of incongruity and can concentrate more on the game.

  The first display may be a display including at least a meter display (for example, a first elapsed time notification image TG1 and a first state notification image SG1).

  According to such a configuration, by reducing the visibility of the meter display, it may be difficult for the player to understand the change state of the meter display and prompt the operation means to operate.

The second display may be an effect display (for example, an effect display 704, a notification display 706, etc.).
According to such a configuration, there is a case where the effect display can be made conspicuous.

  The gaming machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine, and the display mode of the first display is a display mode that can be changed at least from the first mode to the second mode, and the requirement that the change condition is satisfied The above may be a requirement that includes at least that the first time has elapsed since the display of the first aspect.

  According to such a configuration, the visibility of the change in the change mode with the passage of time may be reduced, thereby making it difficult to understand the passage of the operation reception time and further prompting the operation of the operation means.

  Further, at least a part of the first display overlapping the second display may be an image that is not displayed, and the display unit may not draw the image that is not displayed.

  With such a configuration, the drawing processing load may be reduced.

  Moreover, the 1st area | region in a 1st display is good also as what is a visibility area | region lower than a 1st state, when it is a 2nd state.

The second area in the first display may be an area having higher visibility than the first area when in the second state.
The first region and the second region may be the following regions.

(A) The first region may be a region including a part (for example, a part of a meter display) or the whole of a region whose display mode changes according to the operation of the operation unit. Here, the meter (display) refers to a display (for example, the first state notification image SG1 or the first elapsed time notification image TG1) in which the scale increases or decreases with the passage of time or a change in state.

(B) The first region may be a region that does not include a part or all of the region whose display mode changes according to the operation of the operation unit.

(C) The first region may be a region including a part (for example, a part of a button image) or the whole of a region whose display mode does not change according to the operation of the operation unit. Here, the button image refers to an operation means (an image imitating the chance button 136 (for example, the first operation means image BG1).

(D) The first region may be a region that does not include a part or all of the region in which the display mode does not change according to the operation of the operation unit.

(E) The first region may have a configuration in which two or more of the above (a) to (d) are combined. For example, (a) and (c), (a) and (d), (b) and (c) can be combined.

(A ′) The second region may be a region including a part (for example, a part of a meter display) or all of a region whose display mode changes according to the operation of the operation unit.

(B ′) The second region may be a region that does not include a part or all of the region whose display mode changes according to the operation of the operation unit.

(C ′) The second region may be a region including a part (for example, part of the button image) or the whole of the region whose display mode does not change according to the operation of the operation unit.

(D ′) The second region may be a region that does not include a part or all of the region in which the display mode does not change according to the operation of the operation unit.

(E ′) The second region may have a configuration in which two or more (or all) of (a ′) to (d ′) are combined. For example, (a ′) and (c ′), (a ′) and (d ′), (b ′) and (c ′) can be combined.

  The second display may be a display related to a game. As an example of “game-related display”, error display, operation request notification, alert display, presentation display, notice display, original mode display (menu display, mission display, volume / brightness adjustment display), demo display, power-on Display (power-on, power-returning, etc.).

  The display means may not display at least a part of the first display (for example, a button image) when reception of the operation of the operation means is completed.

  The display unit may be a unit that does not display a part of the first display when the reception of the operation of the operation unit is completed. Here, the “part of the first display” may have the following configuration.

(A) It may be a display showing all or part of a button image (such as the first operation means image BG1).

(B) It may be a display showing all or part of a meter display (such as the first state notification image SG1 or the first elapsed time notification image TG1).

(C) It may be a display showing all or part of a display prompting an operation (for example, a character display).

(D) It may be a combination of two or more of the above (a) to (c) or all displays.
(E) Only one of the displays (a) to (c) may be displayed.

  The display unit may be a unit that does not display all of the first display when reception of the operation of the operation unit is completed. Here, “the whole of the first display” may have the following configuration.

(A) A display indicating a meter display (such as the first state notification image SG1 or the first elapsed time notification image TG1) may be used.

(B) A plurality of displays including a meter display (for example, a button image or a display prompting an operation (for example, a character display)) may be indicated.

  The display unit is a unit that does not display at least a part of the first display (for example, a button image) when the second time has elapsed since the reception of the operation of the operation unit started. May be.

  The display means may continuously display a part or all of the first display when the reception of the operation means is completed.

  Further, the display means may be means for continuously displaying the meter display when reception of the operation of the operation means is completed. The display means continuously displays the meter display when the acceptance of the operation means is completed, and the meter display is displayed when the condition for deleting the meter display is satisfied (for example, the end of the effect display). May be terminated.

  The display mode of the first display may be changeable from the first mode to the second mode. The first display mode can be changed from the first mode to the third mode, and can be changed from the third mode to the second mode. That is, it is not limited to one that changes from the first mode to the second mode, but may change from the first mode to the second mode via a plurality of other modes (third mode). .

  Further, the “effect display” in the above-described embodiment includes the following. For example, an effect display of a notice display system (prefetch (hold icon, notice effect, decoration pattern, etc.), an effect display of the change (hold icon, notice effect, decoration pattern, etc.), non-notice system (tutorial, demo, user mode, Hold display, 4th symbol, jackpot display, decoration symbol, etc. In addition, other notice effect display, jackpot effect display, user mode display, demo display, tutorial display, effect using decoration symbol It may be a display or an effect display using a hold icon.

  In addition, regarding the transmittance of the second display described with reference to FIG. 219, the transmittance of at least a part or all of the second display may not be 100%.

  Further, the transmittance of at least a part or all of the second display may not be 0% (may be transmitted).

  Further, the transmittance of at least a part or all of the second display may be 0% (not necessarily transmitted).

  The transmittance of at least a part of the second display may be a first value, and the “first value” may be a value exceeding 0% and less than 100%.

  Further, the transmittance of at least a part or all of the second display may change stepwise. The “step change” means that the transmittance is the first value, the second value, the third value, The first value, the second value, and the third value may be different from each other.

  Further, the transmittance of at least a part or all of the second display may be continuously changed. The “continuous change” means that the transmittance passes from the first value to the second value. The first value, the second value, and the third value may be different from each other.

  Further, the transmittance of at least a part or all of the second display may change only from one of the two values of the highest value and the lowest value to the other.

  In addition, regarding the transmittance of the first display described with reference to FIG. 219, the transmittance of at least a part or all of the first display may not be 100%.

  Further, the transmittance of at least a part or all of the first display may not be 0% (may be transmitted).

  Further, the transmittance of at least a part or all of the first display may be 0% (not necessarily transmitted).

  The transmittance of at least a part of the first display may be a first value, and the “first value” may be a value exceeding 0% and less than 100%.

  Further, the transmittance of at least a part or all of the first display may change stepwise. The “step change” means that the transmittance is the first value, the second value, the third value, The first value, the second value, and the third value may be different from each other.

  Further, the transmittance of at least a part or all of the first display may be continuously changed. The “continuous change” means that the transmittance passes from the first value to the second value. The first value, the second value, and the third value may be different from each other.

  Further, the transmittance of at least a part or all of the first display may change only from one of the two values of the highest value and the lowest value to the other.

  In the above embodiment, the first display (or the second display) may include at least a display imitating the operation means. Here, “at least including a display imitating the operation means” may indicate only a display imitating the operation means (for example, the first operation means image BG1). “At least including a display imitating the operation means” means a display (for example, the first display displayed in a period overlapping with a period in which the display imitating the operation means and the display imitating the operation means are displayed. It may indicate both a meter (or gauge) indicating an operation reception period such as the elapsed time notification image TG1, a character display such as “Press the button!”, An effect, and the like.

  The first display (or the second display) may include at least a notification that prompts the operation unit to operate. Here, “including at least a notification for prompting operation of the operation means” is only a notification for prompting the operation of the operation means (for example, a display such as “Press the button!” Or an image / animation for operating the button). May be shown. In addition, a period that overlaps a period in which a notification that prompts the operation of the operation unit (for example, a display of an image or animation that operates a character or a button such as “Press the button!”) Or the operation unit is displayed. It is also possible to show both the display (background image, effect, meter (gauge), etc.) displayed on the screen.

  Further, the first display (or the second display) may be displayable at least when display control is executed. Here, the “display control” may be executed at least when a condition including the operation of the operation means is satisfied. The “display control” may be displayed when a command is transmitted from the second control means (first sub control unit or second sub control unit).

  In the above embodiment, an example described as “display with high visibility” may be applied to “display with low visibility”, and an example described as “display with low visibility” is “ It may be applied to “a display with high visibility”.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, "at least one part" means that only one part may be sufficient and all (all) may be sufficient.

  In addition, the contents described in each of the above embodiments can be combined with other embodiments with respect to each configuration in each embodiment.

  In the fifth embodiment, the requirement that the change condition is satisfied is a requirement that includes at least the operation of the operation means. Here, the “operation of the operation means” may have the following configuration.

(A) It may indicate that “the operating means has been detected by the detecting means (sensor of the operating means)”.

(B) “The command has been transmitted to the first (second) sub-control unit by the detecting means” may be indicated.

(C) It may indicate that “the first (second) sub-control unit has received the command transmitted by the detecting means”.

(D) Any one or two or more (two or all) of the above (a) to (c) may be indicated.

  The change in the first display mode may be the following configuration. That is, it may be changed from the first mode to the second mode by one operation of the operating means. Moreover, it may change from a 1st aspect to a 2nd aspect by having operated the operation means in multiple times. Moreover, it may change from a 1st aspect to a 2nd aspect by the total of the time which the operation means is operated continuously (you may release | release a hand once from an operation means). Moreover, it may change from a 1st aspect to a 2nd aspect with the time (it will be complete | finished if it releases a hand once from an operation means) while operating the operation means continuously.

  Further, the first display may be configured such that the display mode of the first display can be changed at least in accordance with the operation of the operation means, and the first display is performed only when a change condition of the display mode is satisfied. The display mode of one display may be changed, and the display mode of the first display may not be changed when the display mode change condition is not satisfied.

  The first display may include a portion that does not change the display mode of the first display in accordance with the operation of the operation means.

  The first display and the second display are respectively a start display and end display of a privilege game (for example, AT), a remaining number display of a privilege game (for example, a remaining number display that is always displayed, A game in which a privilege game is performed by displaying one or a plurality of character displays such as 20G, for example, when the number of remaining games is reduced and the number of bonus games is displayed. It may be an effect indicating that the number has increased, or a push order notification for notifying the order of pressing the stop button. Here, AT indicates an AT (assist time) gaming state, and may be a period during which notification (for example, push order notification) for assisting the player's operation is executed.

  Further, the display means may be configured by a decorative symbol display device 208. The display means may execute the first display only when the first display condition is satisfied, and displays the second display only when the second display condition is satisfied. It may be executed, the first display may be displayed without fail, the second display may be displayed without fail, and the first display and the second display may be displayed without fail. . Further, the operation means may be configured with a chance button 136.

  A plurality of display means may be provided. In this case, the first display means of the plurality of display means may be a special symbol display device, and the second display means may be a decorative symbol display device.

  The first display means may be a first decorative symbol display device, and the second display means may be a second decorative symbol display device. In that case, the first decorative symbol display device or the second decorative symbol display device may correspond to the decorative symbol display device 208.

At least one or both of the first display means and the second display means may be provided on the movable means, or only one of them may be provided on the movable means.
The first display means may be provided in front of the second display means.

  The first display means displays a first display (for example, a first elapsed time notification image TG1), and the second display means displays a second display (for example, an effect display 704). This embodiment also applies to a case where the first display displayed on the first display means is overlapped by the second display displayed on the second display means and the visibility is lowered. Is applicable.

  In addition, the first display (first operation means image BG1 and / or the first display) overlaps with (in front of) a third display (for example, a background image or an effect display (including the second display)). 1), the first display is erased in response to the operation of the chance button 136 (non-display) when it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the third display. The third display may be visible to the player.

  Further, when the operation means is operated by the player while the operation means image and the elapsed time notification image are displayed (during the reception period of the operation means), the elapsed time notification image is the same image as the end of the reception period (remaining time (0 second) may be displayed and then deleted. Alternatively, the operation means image may be erased after the progress notification image is erased first.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the above-described embodiment is a gaming table provided with operation means (for example, chance button 136) and display means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208). The display means is capable of displaying at least a first display (for example, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 of FIGS. 71 and 72, the elapsed time notification image of FIG. 83, or the remaining time notification image). The display means is means capable of displaying at least a second display (for example, an effect accompanying the common map change display of FIG. 71 and a hold icon PI3 of FIG. 72), and the first display and Is a display related to the operation means, and the first display is a display capable of changing at least a display mode over time, and the change in the display mode in the first display is: In the second state, the change is at least lower in visibility than in the first state, and the second state is a state in which at least a part of the second display is at least one of the first display. It is the state which has overlapped with the part.

  The first state may be a state where at least the second display is not displayed on the display means.

  The first state may be a state in which at least a part of the second display is displayed at a position overlapping at least a part of the first display.

  By adopting such a configuration, the player may be able to focus on the first display and the second display that overlap each other and focus on the game. In some cases, the player can be further prompted to operate the operation means. Further, it may be possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the display relating to the operation means whose display mode changes with the passage of time, and to prompt the player to operate the game means. In addition, the player can watch the display means carefully and concentrate on the game, and can judge whether or not the operation is necessary, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  The first display is a display including at least a first image (for example, the first operation means image BG1 in FIG. 72), and the first display is a third image (for example, FIG. 72 is a display including at least the first elapsed time notification image TG1), and the second display is a display including at least a second image (for example, the hold icon PI3 in FIG. 72). The third image is a display whose display mode can be changed at least according to the passage of time, and the second state is a state in which the second image overlaps the third image. It is good also as a thing.

  By adopting such a configuration, there are cases where the player can be focused on the second image and the third image that overlap each other and can concentrate on the game. In some cases, the player can be further prompted to operate the operation means. Further, it may be possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the third image relating to the operation means whose display mode changes with the passage of time, and to prompt the player to operate the game means. In addition, the player can watch the display means carefully and concentrate on the game, and can judge whether or not the operation is necessary, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  The second image may be an image that overlaps at least a part of the third image in the second state.

  By adopting such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the third image relating to the operation means whose display mode changes with the passage of time, compared with the first image. There are cases where the operation of the means can be further urged. In addition, the player can watch the display means carefully from the difference in the visual aspect of the first image and the third image, and can concentrate on the game, and can judge whether or not the operation is necessary. There are cases where interest can be improved.

  The second display may be a display that overlaps only a part of the first display in the second state.

  In addition, at least a part of the first display may be a display that is at least difficult to visually recognize in the second state.

  By adopting such a configuration, the player can change the visual appearance of a part of the first display (overlapping area) and the other area (non-overlapping area), and the player can There are cases where the operation can be further encouraged. In addition, the player can watch the display means carefully because of the difference in the visual appearance of the first display, and can concentrate on the game, can judge whether or not the operation is necessary, and improve the interest of the game May be possible.

  The display unit may be a unit that does not display at least the first display when reception of the operation of the operation unit is completed.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the above-described embodiment is capable of executing at least a plurality of types of display and operation means (for example, chance button 136) provided at least at a position where the player can operate. And at least one of the plurality of types of display is a first type of display (for example, the first display in FIG. 69). And at least one of the plurality of types of display is a display of the second type (for example, the variation icon CI in FIG. 69), and the operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1). The display of the first type is a display related to the operation means, and the display of the first type is configured to be displayable at least when receiving an operation of the operation means. The first type of display is a display including at least a first display (for example, the first operation means image BG1 in FIG. 69), and the first type of display is a second display (for example, 69 is a display including at least the first elapsed time notification image TG1), and the second display is a display capable of changing the display mode from the start position to the end position in accordance with the passage of time. The second type display is a display including at least a third display (for example, the fluctuation icon CI in FIG. 69), the second type display is an effect display, and the third type display The display is displayed with priority over the first display, the third display is displayed with priority over the second display, and the second display is displayed. The start position of the third display is greater than the second display. By displaying preferentially, it becomes more difficult for the player to see than when the third display is not displayed, and the change in the display mode of the second display is more than that of the second display. Since the third display is preferentially displayed, it is more difficult for the player to see than the third display. The first type of display is the second type of display. The second type of display may be displayed at least on the display means prior to the first type of display.

  The display means may be capable of displaying at least one of the first type display and the second type display.

  Further, the first display may include a display simulating the operation means.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to further prompt the player to operate the operation means. When the second display (a part of the elapsed time notification image TG1) is used to notify the remaining time of the reception period of the operation means with a display that decreases from the start position, the start position of the second display is set to the second display. By displaying the third display (effect display) preferentially over the display of the player, it becomes more difficult for the player to see than when the third display is not displayed, and from the start position of the second display By changing the display mode toward the end position, the third display is displayed with priority over the second display, so that it is more difficult for the player to see than the third display. In some cases, it may be difficult for a player to visually recognize that the operation period of the operation means is being accepted, and the player may be further encouraged to operate the game means. In some cases, the player can focus more on the display mode hidden by the player and concentrate on the game. Further, in order to make it difficult to visually recognize the display mode at the start position of the second display (at the start of accepting the operation) and the change in the display mode from the start position to the end position of the second display. In some cases, the player can watch the display means carefully and concentrate on the game, can judge whether the operation is necessary, and can improve the interest of the game.

  Further, the effect display may include at least a jackpot notice.

  By adopting such a configuration, in the event of a big hit notice, the player can watch the display means carefully, concentrate on the game, can judge whether or not the operation is necessary, and improve the interest of the game May be possible.

  The display means may not display at least the first type of display when acceptance of the operation of the operation means is completed.

In the following, we will add that we have explained so far. Note that the following description can be appropriately applied to the game machine described in this specification including the above-described embodiment.
(Appendix 1)

A first entrance through which a game ball can enter, start information deriving means for deriving start information based on the game ball entering the first entrance, and start information acquired by the start information acquiring means And a second entrance where a predetermined profit is generated based on the entry of the game ball. The game means is characterized by changing the predetermined performance based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second entrance during the predetermined performance.
(Appendix 2)

The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising: a profit granting unit that grants a predetermined profit to the player based on a game ball entering the second entrance. A game table characterized in that a specific effect that affects the predetermined effect is performed based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second entrance during the effect.
(Appendix 3)

The gaming machine according to appendix 1 or 2, wherein the presentation means includes display means for performing a predetermined display, and the display means has entered a game ball into the second entrance during the predetermined presentation. On the basis of this, a game table characterized in that a part of the display effect based on the predetermined effect is covered with a part of the display effect based on the specific effect.
(Appendix 4)

4. The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 3, wherein the first entrance and the second entrance are such that a game ball that has entered the first entrance enters the second entrance. A game stand characterized by being placed at a position where it can enter the mouth.
(Appendix 5)

The gaming machine according to attachment 2, further comprising a winning device that is advantageous to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the specific performance is highly likely to satisfy the predetermined condition A game stand characterized by a directing effect.
(Appendix 6)

A game value giving means for giving a game value to a player when a game value giving condition is established; a first entry area where the game value giving condition is not met even if the game ball passes; and a game ball A second entry area in which the game value provision condition is satisfied based on the entry of the ball, a determination unit that can determine whether or not the determination is true, and a determination of success / failure by the determination unit The pattern mode corresponding to the result includes at least notification means capable of stopping display after performing the variable display of the pattern, and image display means capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and is configured separately from the notification means. In a gaming machine provided with production means and production control means capable of controlling the production means, the success / failure determination condition includes at least that a game ball has passed to the first entry area. Yes, the production The control means is capable of causing the image display means to display a symbol fluctuation display for performing a stop display of a symbol corresponding to the result of the success / failure judgment by the success / failure judgment means after starting the symbol fluctuation display. The second approach area is one in which at least a game ball can enter when the result of the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination means is a specific result of the success / failure determination. It is possible to cause the effect means to execute at least a jackpot notice for notifying whether or not, and the jackpot is generated based on at least one condition that a game ball has entered the second entry area. The effect control means may make it difficult for the player to visually recognize at least part of the symbol variation display during the display of the symbol variation display by the image display means. It is possible to cause the effect means to at least make the big hit announcement, and it is difficult for the player to visually recognize at least a part of the symbol fluctuation display by the image display means. A game stand that is easily visible to the player during the period.
(Appendix 7)

The gaming machine according to appendix 6, wherein the effect control means, during the stop display of the symbol by the image display means, the jackpot notice so that at least a part of the symbol is difficult to see from the player, It is possible for at least the effect means to perform the symbol stop display by the notifying means, even if at least a part of the symbol stop display by the image display means is difficult for the player to visually recognize. A game table characterized by being easily visible.
(Appendix 8)

The gaming machine according to appendix 6 or 7, wherein the effect control means is configured such that when a game ball enters the second entry area while the image display means is displaying the symbol variation display, An effect that does not make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the variable display can be performed at least by the effect means, and the jackpot notice does not make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the effect. Stand.
(Appendix 9)

The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 6 to 8, wherein the success / failure determination result includes a first success / failure determination result and a second success / failure determination result, and the notification means includes the success / failure determination result. Can be stopped and displayed when the result is the first determination result, and when the determination result is the second determination result, what is the first design aspect? A game table characterized by being capable of stopping and displaying different second symbol patterns.
(Appendix 10)

  The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 6 to 9, wherein the rendering means includes at least one of a first position that does not cover the symbol variation display by the image display unit from the front and the symbol variation display. A movable body that is movable to a plurality of positions including a second position that covers the part from the front, wherein the effect control means moves the movable body from the first position to the second position, thereby moving the movable body to the second position. A game table characterized in that it is possible to cause the movable body to make a big hit notice.

Note that the above description can be appropriately applied to the game tables described in other appendices and the game tables described in this specification.
(Appendix 11)

  A plurality of entry areas into which a game ball can enter and a determination of whether or not the game ball can be executed at least when a game ball enters a predetermined entry area including at least the first entry area among the plurality of entry areas. And means for determining whether or not the assisting ball can be determined when the game ball enters a second approaching area different from the predetermined approaching area among the plurality of approaching areas; After performing the display, after performing the symbol variation display, the first informing means capable of at least performing the first symbol variation display to stop display the symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the auxiliary success / failure determination, A second notifying unit capable of executing at least a second symbol variation display for stopping and displaying a symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the auxiliary success / failure determination, an effect unit including at least the second notifying unit, and at least the A game table comprising: production control means capable of controlling the exit means; and time reduction control means capable of controlling at least a time reduction state and a non-time reduction state in which a game ball is likely to enter at least the first entry area. In the first approach area, after the first symbol variation display is performed and the symbol mode corresponding to the result of the specific auxiliary success / failure determination among the results of the success / failure determination is stopped and displayed, the game ball The effect control means is capable of causing the effect means to at least execute a predetermined effect related to the result of the determination of success and the second symbol variation display, The effect control means executes at least the predetermined effect on the effect means so that at least a part of the second symbol change display is difficult to view during a predetermined period during execution of the second symbol change display. Let The first symbol variation display is easier to see even during the predetermined period, and the second symbol variation display is executed in the non-time reduction state than in the time reduction state. A game stand that is easy to be played.

The first entry area here is, for example, an electric Chu, and the predetermined entry areas are, for example, the second special figure start port 232 (electric Chu) and the first special figure start opening 230, and the second entry. The region is, for example, the general symbol start port 228, and the first symbol variation display is, for example, a common symbol variation display performed by the universal symbol display device 210 controlled by the main control unit 300, and the second symbol variation is displayed. The display is, for example, a normal decorative pattern variation display performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 controlled by the sub-control units 400 and 500.
(Appendix 12)

  The gaming machine according to appendix 11, wherein the second notification unit is an image display unit, and the predetermined effect can be executed at least by the image display unit, and the image display unit Has at least a predetermined display area in which the second symbol variation display can be executed, and the effect control means has at least a non-execution period of the second symbol variation display in the predetermined display region. A game table, wherein a display effect different from the second symbol variation display can be executed in a period including a part.

Here, the effect control means may be capable of causing the effect means to execute at least the predetermined effect so that at least a part of the different display effects is difficult to visually recognize.
(Appendix 13)

  The gaming machine according to attachment 12, wherein the different display effects that can be executed in the predetermined display area include at least one of a jackpot notice display and a game information display.

The jackpot notice display here includes a so-called prefetch notice. In addition, the game information display includes, for example, the number of time reductions, the number of consecutive games, the number of acquired game balls, the number of simulated consecutive times, and the like.
(Appendix 14)

The gaming machine according to attachment 13, wherein the presentation control means is capable of executing at least the jackpot notice during the non-execution period of the second symbol variation display in the non-time-saving state, The gaming table characterized in that at least the gaming information display can be executed during the non-execution period of the second symbol variation display in the time-shortening state.
(Appendix 15)

  The gaming machine according to appendix 14, wherein a specific second symbol variation display of the second symbol variation display includes a symbol relating to the result of the auxiliary success / failure determination and a symbol relating to the jackpot notice. A game table characterized by being capable of executing a second symbol variation display.

  The predetermined period in the gaming machine described in appendix 11 to appendix 15 may be a period including at least a part during execution of the second symbol variation display. The predetermined performance may include a jackpot notice that can at least tell whether or not a jackpot will occur. Further, the effect control means may not execute the second symbol variation display in the non-time-short state. In the predetermined display area, at least a notice regarding the symbol variation display of the special symbol 2 out of the second symbol variation display may be executed. Even if the special symbol 2 is interrupted during the execution of the second symbol variation display and the different symbol display is possible, the second symbol variation display can be performed with priority. Good. The notification during the electric chew operation can be executed, and the notification during the electric chew operation may be different depending on whether or not the second symbol variation display is executed. For example, the lamp control near the electric Chu may be different with and without the second symbol variation display. Specifically, the notification may be flashy with the second symbol variation display. The flashing notification here includes a long production period. The second symbol variation display may vary only the symbol related to the result of the auxiliary success / failure determination. Further, it may be a gaming machine that performs right-handed and left-handed, and the second symbol variation display may be more easily performed when left-handed. Further, the gaming machine may be left-handed in the non-electric support state and right-handed in the electric support state. The open pattern of the electric chew includes at least a first open pattern and a second open pattern, and the second open pattern is more advantageous than the first open pattern, and the second pattern The variable display may be executed at least when the second opening pattern is set.

Note that the above description can be appropriately applied to the game tables described in other appendices and the game tables described in this specification.
(Appendix 16)

It is equipped with electric Chu, winning / failing determining means (special figure), auxiliary winning / failing determining means (common figure), and jackpot game control means, and main common figure variation display (first symbol variation display) and sub-variable figure variation display. A game machine capable of performing (second symbol variation display), wherein the sub ordinary variation is difficult to see due to the second effect, and the main ordinary variation is the sub ordinary variation. A gaming table characterized in that even if it is difficult to visually recognize due to the second performance, it is easy to visually recognize, and the sub-normal variation is more likely to be performed outside of the big hit game than during the big hit game.
(Appendix 17)

The gaming machine according to appendix 16, wherein a specific sub-common figure change among the sub-normal figure fluctuations is more likely to be performed outside of the big hit game than in the big hit game. Amusement stand.
(Appendix 18)

The gaming machine according to appendix 17, wherein the sub-normal variation can be executed at least in a first variation time and a second variation time, and the second variation time is greater than the first variation time. The game table is characterized in that the variation time of is longer and the specific sub-normal variation is executable at a variation time including at least the second variation time.
(Appendix 19)

The gaming machine according to any one of appendix 16 to appendix 18, wherein the opening pattern of the electric chew includes at least a first opening pattern and a second opening pattern, and the first The second opening pattern is more advantageous for the player than the opening pattern (for example, a game ball is easy to enter), and at least the electric chew is released by the second opening pattern. A game stand, characterized in that it can be executed in some cases.
(Appendix 20)

  The gaming machine according to appendix 18 or 19, wherein the sub-common figure variation is executable during the jackpot game at a variation time including at least the first variation time. Stand.

  The specific sub ordinary change in the game machine described in Supplementary Note 16 to Supplementary Note 20 may not be performed in the first fluctuation time. In addition, the sub-normal change except the specific sub-normal change may not be performed in the second change time. In addition, the sub-normal map change performed in the first change time may be capable of performing an effect of notifying only the result of the auxiliary success / failure determination. In addition, the sub-usual change may not be performed during the jackpot game. Further, at least a part of the sub-normal variation may be a symbol variation display including a big hit notice. Furthermore, during the jackpot game, it may be possible to execute only the opening notification effect of electric Chu. Further, it may be a gaming machine that performs right-handed and left-handed, and a predetermined firing strength (for example, right-handed) may be easier to execute the sub-normal variation. Further, it may be a gaming table that can be played at the predetermined firing strength (right-handed) at least during a big hit game.

Note that the above description can be appropriately applied to the game tables described in other appendices and the game tables described in this specification.
(Appendix 21)

It includes a determination unit (special drawing), an auxiliary determination unit (general figure), a production unit capable of at least performing a pre-reading notice, and a production control unit capable of controlling at least the production unit. A gaming machine capable of performing a variable display (first symbol variation display) and a sub-normal symbol variation display (second symbol variation display), wherein the effect control means includes the pre-reading notice and the sub-normal diagram. It is possible to cause the effecting means to execute at least a change display, and when the sub-normal figure change is executed during execution of the pre-reading notice, the sub-normal figure change is at least one of the pre-reading notices. A game table characterized in that it is difficult to see the part.
(Appendix 22)

The gaming machine according to appendix 21, wherein at least a part of the sub-common figure variation is capable of executing a symbol variation display including a big hit notice.
(Appendix 23)

  The gaming machine according to appendix 21 or 22, wherein the rendering means includes at least an image display means, and at least the image display means is capable of executing the sub-normal variation and the prefetching notice, The display means has a predetermined display area in which the sub-normal variation can be executed, and the image display means has a pre-reading notice display area, and the predetermined sub-normal variation is included in the sub-normal variation. When a figure change is performed, the sub-normal figure change can be displayed beyond the predetermined display area, enters the prefetch notice display area, and makes at least a part of the prefetch notice difficult to view. A characteristic game stand.

The pre-reading notice is a holding change notice, and the image display means has a holding display area. When a predetermined sub-normal change is performed among the sub-normal changes, the sub-normal notice is displayed. The figure variation may be able to be displayed beyond the predetermined display area, enter the hold display area, and make at least a part of the hold prefetch notice difficult to view.
(Appendix 24)

The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 21 to 23, wherein the gaming machine is a special figure 2 priority change machine, and includes a reserved display area of special figure 1 and a reserved display area of special figure 2. And both reserved display areas are provided across a predetermined display area, and the sub-normal display variation can make it difficult to see at least a part of both reserved display areas. A gaming machine characterized in that only one of the pre-reading notice of FIG. 1 and the pre-reading notice of FIG.
(Appendix 25)

  The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 21 to 24, wherein the stage can be executed so that at least a part of the sub-normal variation is difficult to visually recognize. A game table.

  In the game tables described in appendix 21 to appendix 25, the sub-common figure variation is at least in a part of the on-hold display area among the plurality of on-hold display areas (for example, the first on-hold display area with the oldest winning timing). Some may make it difficult to view. Moreover, you may make the 1st reservation of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 reservation display area difficult to visually recognize. Further, it may be difficult to visually recognize other hold such as the second hold. Further, when the electric chew is released and the special figure 2 is interrupted during the non-electric support state, at least a part of the suspension of the special figure 2 may be difficult to visually recognize due to the electric chew release notification effect. Further, during the non-electric support state, it is possible to (at least) make it difficult to visually recognize the reserved pre-reading notice in FIG. It may be possible. In addition, a specific reserved display area that is difficult to view due to the change of the sub-normal figure can perform the reserved display of special figure 1 and the special figure 2 in a winning order changing game machine. The function may be switched for each special figure change (during the non-electric support state). In addition, when the pre-reading hold display and the sub-normal figure change are performed at the same time, when the production (for example, super reach) is started during the special symbol decoration display, the sub-normal change May be left, and the pre-read hold display may be hidden, the sub-transition fluctuation and the pre-read hold display may be both hidden, the pre-read hold display may be left, The variation may be in a non-display mode.

In addition, even if it is the structural requirement contained only in each description of each embodiment and additional remarks demonstrated above, you may apply the structural requirement to other embodiment and additional remarks.
(Appendix 26)

It is provided with a main design variation display (first symbol variation display) including a determination unit (special drawing), an auxiliary determination unit (general drawing), a production unit, and a production control unit capable of controlling at least the production unit. ) And sub-general variation display (second symbol variation display) can be performed so that at least a part of the sub-general variation is difficult to see. An image display means and an effect movable means, wherein the effect move means is operable at least as the effect, and the sub-normal variation is at least performed by the image display means. In the image display means, the effect can display at least an image related to the operation of the effect moving means, and at least one of the effect moving means and the image operated as the effect. Amusement machine wherein a sub Hiroshizu difficult viewing the variation, characterized in that the.
(Appendix 27)

The gaming machine according to appendix 26, wherein, when the sub-normal variation has been made first, the sub-normal variation has been made difficult to visually recognize in the production, and the production has been performed first. The game machine is characterized in that the sub-normal variation using the image display means is not executed.
(Appendix 28)

The gaming machine according to appendix 26 or 27, wherein the image display means has a holding display area, and the effect makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the holding display area. A characteristic game stand.
(Appendix 29)

The game machine according to any one of appendices 26 to 28, wherein the sub-common figure variation is more likely to be performed during non-big hit games than during big hit games. Stand.
(Appendix 30)

  30. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 26 to 29, wherein the sub-common figure change is more easily performed in a non-electric support state than in an electric support state.

  The effect in the game machine described in appendix 21 to appendix 25 may include at least a jackpot notice. Further, the effect moving means may be operable at least as a jackpot notice. Further, the effect moving means may be capable of at least an operation toward the front side (player side) of the image display means as the effect.

In addition, even if it is the structural requirement contained only in each description of each embodiment and additional remarks demonstrated above, you may apply the structural requirement to other embodiment and additional remarks.
(Appendix 31)

An electric Chu, a win / fail judgment means (special drawing), an auxiliary success / failure judgment means (common figure), an effect means, and an effect control means capable of controlling at least the effect means, and a main common map fluctuation display (first) And a sub-general variation display (second symbol variation display), wherein the effect control means provides the effect means with at least the effect and the sub-general fluctuation. It is possible to execute the effect so that it becomes difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the electric chew release notification effect after the sub-normal change, the electric chew release notification effect While running, it is allowed to enter the electric chew, and while the electric chew release notification effect is being performed with the effect in the special figure variation display based on entering the electric chew, it is difficult to see , Said Mei Hiroshizu variation is easy viewing, amusement machine, characterized in that.
(Appendix 32)

The gaming machine according to attachment 31, wherein the special figure 1 symbol fluctuation display means capable of executing at least the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 symbol fluctuation display capable of executing at least the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 2 A game stand characterized in that it makes it difficult to visually recognize a running electric-chu release notification effect by the effect during the symbol variation display of the special figure 2.
(Appendix 33)

The gaming machine according to appendix 31 or 32, wherein the special figure 2 is more likely to receive a big hit, which is more advantageous.
(Appendix 34)

  This game machine is a special figure 2 priority change machine, and includes at least a prefetch notice means capable of executing the prefetch notice of special figure 1 and executes at least the sub-normal figure change display during execution of the prefetch notice of special figure 1. It is possible, the electrification variation is won and the electric chew is released, and the prefetching notice is performed even if the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is interrupted, and the electric chew release notification effect is visually recognized by the effect display of the prefetching notice. A game stand characterized by difficulty.

  In the special figure 2 priority variation machine, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the electric chew release notification effect being executed with the effect in the symbol variation display of special figure 2 according to the entry into the electric chew. In addition, in the winning order variation machine, the electric chew release notification effect that is being executed in the state where the number of special symbols on hold is less than a predetermined number (less or zero) and the special symbol variation display is stopped is It may be difficult to view due to the effect in the symbol variation display of the special figure corresponding to the entry into the Chu. In addition, special figure 89 can be won almost alternately during non-electric support, and during the electric support state, it is running on a game machine that can continuously win special figure 2 by releasing electric Chu through normal fluctuations. The electric chew release notification effect may be difficult to visually recognize with the effect in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 corresponding to the winning. By doing so, it may be possible to notify that there is a possibility that the advantageous symbol variation display of FIG. Also, the attacker has a first big hit (unfavorable big hit) with a relatively short opening time, and a relatively long second big hit (advantageous big hit). The second jackpot may be more likely to appear than the second jackpot, or the first jackpot may not appear.

In addition, even if it is the structural requirement contained only in each description of each embodiment and additional remarks demonstrated above, you may apply the structural requirement to other embodiment and additional remarks.
(Appendix 35)

  A first entry area in which a game ball can enter; a second entry area in which a game ball can enter; When the second determination result is satisfied, the second determination unit that can execute the second determination, and the first determination unit after starting the symbol variation display. A game machine comprising: a notifying unit capable of executing a symbol variation display for performing a stop display of a symbol corresponding to the first determination result, and an effect unit including at least a display unit capable of executing the display. At least one of the requirements for establishment of the first condition includes at least the entry of a game ball into the first entry area, and the second entry area is the first success / failure determination result. If the result is a specific success / failure determination result, the time allowed for entry is limited. A game ball is allowed to enter, and at least one of the requirements for establishing the second condition includes at least that the game ball enters the second entry area, and the display The means is capable of displaying at least an effect display when the third condition is established, and the effect display includes at least a result display regarding the result of the first success / failure determination, The display means can display the effect display while the symbol variation display is being executed, and the display means can display the result display while the symbol stop display is being executed. The effect display is displayed over an effect time longer than the first effect time, and the first effect time is shorter than the display time of the symbol variation display. Features Gaming table.

Note that the first entry area is, for example, the ordinary map starting port 228, the second entry area is, for example, electric chew, and the first success / failure determination is, for example, the determination of whether or not the usual figure is present (normal drawing lottery), The second determination of success / failure is, for example, determination of success / failure of special figure (special drawing lottery).
(Appendix 36)

The gaming machine according to attachment 35, wherein the gaming state is configured to be able to shift to any one of a plurality of states, and the plurality of states include at least a first state, The second state includes at least a second state, and the second state has a higher probability that the first success / failure determination result becomes the specific success / failure determination result than the first state, and the display The means is characterized in that the effect display is easier to display during the period of the first state than the period of the second state.
(Appendix 37)

The gaming machine according to attachment 36, wherein the symbol variation display is performed over any one of a plurality of display times, and the plurality of display times includes at least a first display time. The plurality of display times include at least a second display time, the second display time is longer than the first display time, and the first state is The game table is characterized in that the display time is more likely to be the second display time than the second state.
(Appendix 38)

37. The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 35 to 37, wherein the result display indicates that the second entry area is when the first success / failure determination result is a specific success / failure determination result. The game table is characterized in that it includes at least an entry enable indication indicating that a game ball can enter.
(Appendix 39)

The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 35 to 38, wherein the directing means is capable of executing at least a jackpot notice for notifying whether or not a jackpot occurs, It is generated on the basis of at least one condition that a game ball has entered the second entry area, and the effect unit is configured to display at least a part of the effect display during the display of the effect display by the display unit. The jackpot notice can be executed at least so that it is difficult to see from the player, and the change display of the symbol by the notification means is difficult for the player to see at least part of the effect display by the display means. A game stand that is easily visible to the player during the period.
(Appendix 40)

  A first entry area in which a game ball can enter; a second entry area in which a game ball can enter; When the second determination result is satisfied, the second determination unit that can execute the second determination, and the first determination unit after starting the symbol variation display. A game machine comprising: a notifying unit capable of executing a symbol variation display for performing a stop display of a symbol corresponding to the first determination result, and an effect unit including at least a display unit capable of executing the display. At least one of the requirements for establishment of the first condition includes at least the entry of a game ball into the first entry area, and the second entry area is the first success / failure determination result. If the result is a specific success / failure determination result, the time allowed for entry is limited. A game ball is allowed to enter, and at least one of the requirements for establishing the second condition includes at least that the game ball enters the second entry area, and the display The means is capable of displaying at least an effect display when the third condition is established, and the effect display includes at least a result display regarding the result of the first success / failure determination, The directing means is capable of at least executing a jackpot notice for notifying whether or not a jackpot will occur, and the jackpot is generated based on at least one condition that a game ball has entered the second entry area. The effect display started when the jackpot notice is being executed is better than the effect display started when the jackpot notice is not executed. Serial in which production time tends to be shorter, the amusement machine, characterized in that.

In this case as well, the first entry area is, for example, the general map starting port 228, the second entry area is, for example, the electric chew, and the first success / failure determination is, for example, the determination of whether or not the normal figure is correct (normal map lottery). ), The second success / failure determination is, for example, determination of whether or not a special figure is present (special drawing lottery).
(Appendix 41)

  42. The gaming machine according to appendix 40, wherein the effect means displays at least the jackpot notice so that at least a part of the effect display is difficult for a player to visually recognize during display of the effect display by the display means. The symbol variation display by the notifying means is easy to see from the player even during a period when at least a part of the effect display by the display means is difficult to see from the player. A game table that features

  In addition, it may be a gaming machine according to the supplementary notes 35 to 41, and the non-electric support may be a gaming stand in which the electric chew can be selected with a shorter opening time than during the electric support. In other words, the possible entry time of the second approach area is any one of a plurality of times including at least a first time and a second time longer than the first time, The state may be such that the possible entry time is more likely to be the first time than the second state. By doing so, it may be possible to have an expectation that it will be a time other than the first time in the first state.

  In addition, the ordinary drawing effect may be performed more easily when the electric Chu long is opened than when the electric Chu short is opened. In other words, the display means is more likely to execute the effect display when the approachable time is the second time than when the accessible time is the first time. In this case, there may be a case where expectation can be given for the second time.

  Further, the time for the short normal drawing effect may be longer than the time for the short normal map change display. That is, the second state is such that the display time is likely to be the first display time than the first state, and the first effect time is longer than the first display time. There may be. Moreover, the said approach possible display may be displayed during the said approach possible time.

  Further, the display means has a display area capable of executing at least display, the display area includes at least a first display area, and the display means displays the effect display in the first display area. It may be possible to display in at least a part of the display area.

  Further, the display means may be capable of executing a notice display regarding the result of the second success / failure determination in at least a part of the first display area (example shown in FIG. 180). Further, at least a part of the effect display and at least a part of the notice display may be common. For example, the relationship between the fluctuation display pattern shown in FIG. 156 (b) (A) and the fluctuation display pattern shown in (D) can be mentioned.

  In addition, when performing a special drawing when the special figure is unchanged, the jackpot notice (for example, “Hatsuatsu”) may not be stopped, or even when the special drawing is not changed, A change display including a big hit notice (for example, “super hot”) may be displayed.

  Further, the ordinary drawing effect may be performed only during non-electric support, or may be performed only during a non-hit state.

  In addition, the effect display includes at least a first display (for example, variable display), and the effect display includes at least a second display (for example, a result display and an effect image display may be included). Yes, the effect display may include at least a third display (for example, an approachable display). Here, the third display may have a display area larger than the first display, may have a display area larger than the second display, The display area may be larger than the display.

In addition, even if it is the structural requirement contained only in each description of each embodiment and additional remarks demonstrated above, you may apply the structural requirement to other embodiment and additional remarks.
(Appendix 42)

  Symbol display means capable of performing at least symbol variation display, hold display means capable of displaying a hold icon, and first control means capable of at least performing display control of the symbol display means; And a second control means capable of at least controlling display of the hold icon by the hold display means, wherein the symbol variation display is performed after the symbol variation display is performed. The symbol pattern corresponding to the result of the determination of success / failure is stopped and displayed. The first symbol display means of the symbol display means is configured to display the symbol variation when the first symbol variation condition is satisfied. The second symbol display means of the symbol display means can perform at least the symbol variation display when the second symbol variation condition is satisfied. The first symbol variation condition includes at least that there is a ball in the first starting region of the starting region, and the second symbol variation condition is the starting It includes at least that there was a ball in the second starting area of the area, and the holding display means is a holding icon corresponding to the symbol fluctuation display in relation to the start of the symbol fluctuation display. It is possible to at least perform a first display relating to a certain digest pending icon, and the pending display means is a pending icon that does not correspond to the symbol variation display in association with the start of the symbol variation display. It is possible to perform at least a second display relating to the hold icon, and the hold display means is capable of displaying at least an undigested hold icon equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit number. The hold display means can display at least a plurality of undigested hold icons, and the first control means sends a command signal to the second control means in relation to the start of the symbol variation display. The second control means is capable of at least starting the first display in response to the reception of the command signal; and The control means is capable of at least starting the second display in response to the reception of the command signal, and the hold display means has at least a first display area. And the hold display means has at least a second display area, and the first display has a small amount of the digest hold icon from the first display area to the second display area. At least movement (hereinafter referred to as first movement). ), The digestion pending icon is erased in the second display area, and the second display displays the display position of the undigested suspension icon separately in the first display area. At least to the position (hereinafter referred to as second movement), and when the first hold increase condition is satisfied, the hold display means sets the first hold icon as the hold icon. The hold display means can display at least a second hold icon as the hold icon when the second hold increase condition is satisfied. The first hold increase condition includes at least that the first start area has been entered, and the second hold increase condition includes the second start area entry. There is a sphere If the first hold icon is the undigested hold icon, the first hold icon is displayed in the first symbol display means display area of the first display area. And when the second pending icon is the undigested pending icon, the second pending icon is displayed in the second symbol display means display area of the first display area, The display area for one symbol display means is a display area different from the display area for the second symbol display means, and the display area where the erasure is performed for the first hold icon is the second hold icon The first display is completed in a longer time than the second display, and the hold display means is an effect display by the undigested hold icon. The hold display means can also perform an effect display by the digestion hold icon, and at least all the undigested in the display area for the second symbol display means The hold icon completes the second movement at a second time, and at least the digestion hold icon in the display area for the second symbol display means has the first movement at the first time. The game table is characterized in that the first time is a time different from the second time. In addition, even if it is the structural requirement contained only in each description of each embodiment and additional remarks demonstrated above, you may apply the structural requirement to other embodiment and additional remarks.

The configuration of the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the structure of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment to the fifth embodiment. For example, the gaming machine according to the present invention is limited to the pachinko machine. For example, a plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols, a start lever for instructing the rotation of the reels, and each reel are provided, and the rotation of the reels is individually stopped. A lottery means for determining whether or not an internal winning of a plurality of types of winnings is won by lottery, a reel stop control means for performing stop control for stopping rotation of the reel based on a lottery result of the lottery means, and lottery Determining means for determining whether or not the symbol combination displayed by the reels stopped based on the lottery result of the means is a symbol combination determined in advance corresponding to the winning combination internally; If stop mode is a predetermined winning mode, it is also suitable, such as a slot machine and a dispensing control means for paying out game media payout processing game media corresponding to a predetermined winning mode.
<Other embodiments>

Hereinafter, a gaming table (for example, a ball game machine such as the pachinko machine 100 or a spinning machine such as a slot machine) according to another embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. In addition, in order to avoid redundant description, the same content as other embodiments other than this embodiment is attached | subjected with the same code | symbol in drawing, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. In addition, the reference numerals in the drawings referred to in the present embodiment are used only in the description of the present embodiment in principle, and even when the same reference numerals are used in the drawings referred to in other embodiments, In the description of this embodiment, the reference numerals used in FIGS. 221 to 248 are prioritized.
<Overall configuration>

  First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 (see FIG. 223). . The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so that the inner side of the front frame door 106 can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 (see FIG. 223) is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player 200 ball launch handles 134 for launching into 200 game areas 124, a chance button 700 for changing the performance mode of various performance devices 206 (see FIG. 223) by the player's operation, and a chance button 700 It provided an opportunity button lamp 138 to emit light, a. In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided. The chance button 700 is one of the features of the present invention, and will be described in detail in the following <chance button>.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod (not shown) that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching ball that hits the game ball at the tip of the launching rod (not shown). And a launcher. The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  222 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 221 viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. Note that the game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through the discharge port 152a and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is configured to play games. The ball is paid out to the person.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-board that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error release switch that constitutes a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and that releases an error by the operation of a game clerk Discharge board case 172 storing the payout board 170 having 168, launch base constituting the launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of the game ball A launch board case 176 that houses 174, a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines, and a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game store clerk and an RWM clear by being operated when the power is turned on A power board case 184 that houses a power board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs a signal to the main controller 300, and a CR interface 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided. ing.

  FIG. 223 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the ordinary device. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”. The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In this embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7 segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The multi-purpose hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general-purpose variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. In this embodiment, the general-purpose variable games are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are being held. In this embodiment, the special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general prize opening 226, a general start port 228, a first special view start port 230, a second special view start port 232, around the effect device 206. A variable winning opening 234 is provided.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detecting sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning is sometimes referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player is sometimes referred to as “rental ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is constituted by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball for the upper plate 126. The special figure changing game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric Chu). In the present embodiment, only one second special figure starting port 232 is disposed directly below the first special figure starting port 230. The second special figure starting port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the wing member 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a large winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is disposed below the center of the game board 200. This variable winning opening 234 includes a door member 234a that can be opened and closed. When the door member 234a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and the special figure display device stops the big hit symbol when the special figure variable game is won. When displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds) and at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

This pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches 146 Further, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 148 and driven into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc. (Outside the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.
<Directing device 206>

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball carried on by a nail of the game board 200, or the like, and the passed ball is a first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the golf course.

  In this embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b imitating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b at a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding means shields the inner end portions thereof so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208.

In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.
<Control unit>

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and the power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 are configured. Yes.
<Main control unit>

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing are mounted. . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 includes a random value generation circuit 318 for deriving a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes two random value generation circuits). And a predetermined ball detection sensor such as a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, front frame door opening sensor, inner frame opening sensor, lower plate full sensor, etc. A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a tongue sensor and outputting a comparison result with an amplification result or a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302; and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, The display control of the drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the common figure display device 210 is performed. Drive control 326 and various state display units 328 (for example, general map hold lamp 216, first special figure hold lamp 218, second special figure hold lamp 220, high accuracy medium lamp 222, etc.) are controlled. And a driving circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 for opening and closing a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232, a door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and the like. doing.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value used in the basic circuit 302. Random number generation in the random value generation circuit 318 can be broadly divided into two types of methods: counter mode and random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that is counted up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods in the random number mode. The first method in the random number mode performs an operation using a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) using a seed of random numbers, and derives the operation result as a random number. In the second method, a numerical value is read from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and the read numerical value is derived as a random number.

  The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value using white noise superimposed on a signal input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random value generation circuit 318 uses the acquired value as an initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, uses it as a seed of random numbers, or determines a read start position of the random number table. .

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. The random value generation circuit 318 that has received this signal latches the value at that timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230, and the latched value is incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318. It is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won the second special figure starting port 232, the timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 is also the same. Is latched, and the latched value is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.
<Sub control unit>

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock, and controls programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, various effect data, etc. Is connected to the ROM 406.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, a detection unit 710 for detecting a detection piece 704b4 provided on the movable portion 704 of the chance button 700, A sensor circuit 428 that outputs a detection signal from the shielding device sensor 430 and the detection unit 710 to the basic circuit 402, and image data stored in the ROM 406 is read based on a signal from the CPU 404, and the work area of the VRAM 436 is used. A VDP 43 that generates a display image and displays the image on the decorative symbol display device 208 Is connected to the (video display processor), the.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and frequency 512 is installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, and an image display A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for performing drive control of the effect movable body 224, a drive circuit 517 for performing drive control of the drive unit 708 of the chance button 700, and the current position of the effect movable body 224. Effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting the game, sensor circuit 518 for outputting a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424 to the basic circuit 502, and a game board lamp drive circuit for controlling the game board lamp 532 530, a gaming table frame lamp driving circuit 540 for controlling the gaming table frame lamp 542, and lighting control by serial communication between the gaming board lamp driving circuit 530 and the gaming table frame lamp driving circuit 540 Is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs the above.
<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.
<Type of design>

  Next, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed using FIGS. 225 (a) to (c). The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described. FIG. 225 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special figure.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor has detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” by repeating all lighting of seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 displays “fluctuation display of special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Do. These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display according to the present invention. Then, when the variation time determined before the variation start of the special figure 1 (corresponding to the variation time referred to in the present invention) elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the special symbol form of the special figure 1. When the variation time determined before the start of variation 2 (this also corresponds to the variation time according to the present invention) has elapsed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special diagram 2.

  Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display referred to in the present invention, hereinafter, after the “variable display of special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. The series of displays up to is referred to as symbol variation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. In FIG. 225 (a), ten types of special drawings from “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure J” are shown as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation stop display. In FIG. 225 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  “Special figure A” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, the determination as to whether or not the big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the decision as to whether or not it is a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time-saving state. Although the time reduction will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal high probability state, and the state that does not shift to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal low probability state. “Special figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that give a relatively large profit amount to the player.

  “Special figure C” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure C” is 2R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 15R. “Special figure D” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time reduction, and is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure D” is 2R compared to “Special Figure B” which is 15R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol suddenly called normal, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. These “special drawing E” and “special drawing F” are both 2R and are in a state in which they do not shift to the time-saving state.

  “Special figure G” is the first small hit symbol, and “Special figure H” is the second small hit symbol, both of which are in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit here corresponds to the same as the big hit with no short time at 2R. That is, “Special Figure G” and “Special Figure H” are in the same state as “Special Figure F”, but the effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 are different in both cases. By providing “G”, “Special Figure H”, and “Special Figure F”, the interest of the game is enhanced.

  In addition, “Special Figure I” is a first off symbol, and “Special Figure J” is a second off symbol, and the profit amount given to the player is a relatively small profit amount.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, symbols other than “Special Illustration A” are prepared as 15R special jackpot symbols, and the same applies to other symbols such as 15R jackpot symbols.

  FIG. 225 (b) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Displayed in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →... “Decoration display of decorative pattern” is performed. When the 15R jackpot of “special drawing B” is notified, a symbol combination (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration”) corresponding to the 15R jackpot corresponding to the 15R jackpot in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. 1 ”or“ decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2 ”). When notifying the 15R special jackpot of “special drawing A”, a combination of three symbols of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” or “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7”). Etc.) is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the 2R big hit called “hidden probability change” of “special drawing E”, the 2R big hit called “special drawing F” suddenly normal, or the first small hit of “special drawing G”, “special drawing H” When notifying the second small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in order to notify 2R jackpot called “sudden probability change” of “special drawing C” or 2R jackpot called “sudden time reduction of“ special drawing D ”,“ decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5 ”is set. Stop display.

  On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of “Special Figure I” and the second deviation of “Special Figure J”, the symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 223 (b) are stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

FIG. 225 (c) shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes for ordinary maps, “general diagram A” which is a winning symbol and “general symbol B” which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that a sphere has passed through the general-purpose start opening 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the usual figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 225 (c), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.
<Main control unit main processing>

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input resets by a reset interrupt and executes the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG. 226 in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value. In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 9v), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312 and a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not the state before the power interruption (before power interruption) is restored, and the state before the power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of an amusement store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicates that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. In addition, a transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the ordinary figure winning random number counter and the special figure random value counter, the ordinary figure timer random number value, and the special figure timer, respectively. Two random number counters for generating each random value are updated. For example, assuming that the range of values that can be taken as normal timer random number values is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal timer random value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. Note that the initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT is periodically updated (so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 224, winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal) is stored. In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. Is determined to have passed. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been awarded to the winning ports 226 and 234 and the starting ports 230, 232, and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, Two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the random number value of FIG. 1 and the counter for acquiring the random value of FIG. 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when winning holes 226, 234 and starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, the RAM 308 stores the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, and the variable winning port 234. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S203. If there is a winning at the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the random number value storage circuit 318 stores the random value corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. The value is acquired from the register for use, and the processed value (for example, the acquired value + the value of the R register + 1) is acquired as the special figure 1 winning random number value and the value is acquired from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random number value, The processed value (for example, acquired value + R register value + 1) is acquired as a special figure 1 random number value and stored in the corresponding random value storage area. When a winning is made to the second special figure starting port 232 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the random value counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 of the random number generation circuit 318 The value is acquired from the value storage register, and the processed value (for example, the acquired value + the value of the R register + 1) is acquired as the special figure 2 winning random value and the value is acquired from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random value. Then, the processed value (for example, acquired value + R register value + 1) is acquired as a special figure 2 random value and stored in the corresponding random value storage area.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in the off symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 confirms either the winning symbol (the common symbol A shown in FIG. 225 (c)) or the off symbol (the universal symbol B shown in FIG. 225 (c)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 232a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out, the usual figure out flag is turned on as will be described later. When the off-normal flag is on, the normal state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing at which the normal stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed in accordance with the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game).

In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 includes a 15R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first off flag, a second off flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a normal figure. A flag for each probability variation flag is prepared. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), the 15R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation When the flag is also on and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure A, 15R jackpot flag shown in FIG. 225 (a) is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on. When the special figure B, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and the general figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, When the probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and when the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure E, 2R jackpot flag is on, special chart The probability flag is off, Special figure F when figure probability fluctuation flag is off, special figure G when first small hit flag is on, special figure H when first small hit flag is on, special figure H, first off flag is on In this case, the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the special figure I is turned on when the special figure I is turned on and the second off-flag is turned on. In the setting area of the RAM 308, a setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress is made. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a sudden probability variation symbol (special symbol C), and a sudden short time symbol (special symbol). D), hidden probability variation (special E), suddenly normal (special F), first small hit (special G), second small hit (special H), first off symbol (special) Any one of the symbols I) and the first off symbol (special symbol J) is confirmed and displayed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not (details will be described later), the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state).

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Alternatively, the door member 234a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234 until a winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable prize opening 234. In addition to outputting a signal to be held at the same time, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and a closing period is stored in a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment) and finished, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) In other words, the effect standby period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Set the information indicating. Also, if the normal probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the time reduction number 100 is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the time reduction number is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned ON. The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is a normal high probability state. There is a higher probability of hitting a general-purpose variable game in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal figure variable game and the fluctuation time of the special figure variable game are shorter in the normal figure high probability state than in the normal figure low probability state. Further, in the normal high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special start port 232 tends to be longer than in the normal low probability state. In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a large number of games will be placed in the second special figure starting port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls are entered during the big win game. There is a problem that a ball enters and the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. This is to solve this problem.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of the way, the off flag is turned on as will be described later. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. Further, the notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the second special figure starting port 232 is notified. However, it is performed in preference to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the first special figure starting port 230.

  In step S233, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (In this embodiment, command types such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command are specified. Possible information), bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information such as the value of the 15R jackpot flag or 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, and the like. In the case of the symbol variation stop command, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, and the like are included. In the case of a jackpot round number designation command, the value of the special variation probability flag, the number of jackpot rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, winning of the variable winning port 234 Includes presence or absence.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the value of the 15R big hit flag or 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure 2 related are stored in the RAM 308 as command data. Information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag, the value of the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described large winning opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In the above-mentioned big winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a full tray error is monitored. When the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the normal symbol display device 210 and the first special symbol display via the display circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241.

  In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then main control unit main process shown in FIG. 226 is performed. Return to.

On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.
<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>

  Next, the process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in S301. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is substituted into the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading effect data corresponding to the command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when update of the effect data is necessary, effect data update processing is performed.

  In step S311, it is determined whether or not the chance button 700 has been pressed by detecting the detection signal output from the detection unit 710 via the sensor circuit 428. Although details will be described later, if the result of this determination is that a pressing operation of the chance button 700 is detected, processing for changing the effect data updated in step S309 to effect data corresponding to the pressing operation of the chance button 700, or a chance When the pressing operation of the button 700 is valid, processing for preparing effect data corresponding to an operation reception effect to be described later is performed. In the present embodiment, the first sub-control unit 400 detects the pressing operation of the chance button 700, while the second sub-control unit 500 controls the driving of the movable unit 704 of the chance button 700. The detection process and drive control related to the chance button 700 may be performed by one control unit (for example, the first sub control unit 400 (or the second sub control unit 500)).

  In step S313, if there is a command to VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to VDP 434 (details will be described later). In step S315, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416. In step S317, if there is a command to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S319, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 432. In step S321, when there is a control command (for example, a control command related to the effect movable body 224 or a control command related to the drive unit 708 of the chance button 700) to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S309. Is set to output this control command, and the process returns to step S303.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). Execute in the cycle.

  In step S501 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S503 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S319, an effect random number update process, and the like are performed.

  Next, the image control process in step S313 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605. If not, a transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S605, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets parameters according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

In step S609, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611. If not, the generation end interrupt signal is determined. Wait for input. In step S611, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.
<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>

  Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step S701 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, first, initialization processing is executed in S701. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S703, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S709, an effect control process is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S707, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 506, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. In step S <b> 711, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S713, after performing a movable body control process, it returns to step S703. Although details will be described later, in this movable body control process, when a control command related to the effect movable body 224 or a control command related to the drive unit 708 of the chance button 700 is received from the first sub-control section 400, the control command is Perform various corresponding processes.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and a timer interrupt process is performed in response to this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle.

In step S901 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 229 (a). Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S903 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process is performed.
<Movable body control processing>

  FIG. 230A is a flowchart showing the flow of the movable body control process (step S713) of the second sub-control unit main process, and FIG. 230B is a flowchart showing the flow of the movable body interruption process. is there.

  In step S1001 of the movable body control process shown in FIG. 5A, various received command processes are performed based on the command received from the first sub-control unit 400. The received command various processes include, for example, an effect movable body process performed when a command related to the effect movable body 224 is received, and a chance button movable body process performed when a command related to the drive unit 708 of the chance button 700 is received. Can be mentioned.

  More specifically, in the chance button movable body process, control information included in the control command is newly stored in the chance button driving storage area provided in the RAM 508, or the control stored in the chance button driving storage area is stored. Processes such as updating information to new information or discarding old information.

  Further, the second sub-control unit 500 executes the movable body interruption process shown in FIG. 5B at a predetermined cycle, triggered by the timer interruption described above. In step S1101 of this movable body interruption process, it is determined whether or not control information (excitation, torque, rotation direction, etc.) to be output to the drive unit 708 is stored in the above-described chance button drive storage area, If the corresponding control information is stored, the control information is output to the drive circuit 517. As a result, the movable portion 704 of the chance button 700 is driven (details will be described later).

  Further, it is determined whether or not control information (excitation, torque, rotation direction, etc.) to be output to the effect movable body 224 is stored, and when the corresponding control information is stored, the control information is driven. Output to the circuit 516. Thereby, the effect movable body 224 is driven.

  In step S1102, a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424 is input via the sensor circuit 518, and position information of the effect movable body 224 is detected based on the detection signal. In the present embodiment, the detection process of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 by the detection unit 710 is performed by the first sub control unit 400, but may be performed by this step S1102.

In step S1103, output information update processing is performed. In this output information update process, a process of updating the control information of the effect movable body 224 and the control information of the drive unit 708 of the chance button 700 is performed.
<Chance button>

  Next, the structure of the above-described chance button 700 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 231 and 232. FIG. 231 is a side sectional view for explaining the movement of the chance button 700. FIG. 231 (a) is a side sectional view of the entire chance button 700 at the initial position, and FIG. FIG. 3C is a side sectional view of the entire chance button 700 when the player presses the chance button 700 at the operation completion position. FIGS. 6D to 6F are views showing only the lower case 704b and the rotating member 708b extracted in each state of FIGS.

  Further, FIG. 232 (a) is an external perspective view of the periphery of the door 108 with the ball storage tray when the chance button 700 is in the initial position, and FIG. 232 (b) is a diagram in which the chance button 700 is moved from the initial position to the operation completion position. (C) is an external perspective view of the vicinity of the door 108 with a ball storage tray when the chance button 700 is in the operation completion position. is there.

  As shown in FIG. 231 (a), the chance button 700 has a fixed portion 702 (702a, 702b) fixed to the door 108 with a ball storage tray and a movable portion 704 (up and down movable relative to the fixed portion 702). 704a, 704b), a spring 706 that is contracted between the movable portion 704 and the door 108 with a ball storage tray and biases the movable portion 704 upward, and a drive that enables the movable portion 704 to move up and down. 708 (708a, 708b) and a detection unit 710 capable of detecting the position of the movable unit 704. Although not shown, the chance button lamp 138 described above is disposed at a predetermined position of the chance button 700.

  The fixed portion 702 is configured by two rod-shaped fixed shafts 702a erected on the door 108 with a ball storage tray, and a disk-shaped fixed plate 702b fixed at the ends of the two fixed shafts 702a. ing. As shown in FIG. 231 (d), the two fixed shafts 702a are members that are inserted into insertion holes 704b1 formed in a lower case 704b described later and play a role of guiding the lower case 704b in the vertical direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 231 (b), the fixing plate 702b is a member that plays a role of regulating the upward movement of the lower case 704b.

  The movable portion 704 has an opening on one side and the upper case 704a having a cylindrical shape, which is an operation surface 704a1 on which the player's finger or hand contacts, and an upper portion so as to close the opening of the upper case 704a. A disc-shaped lower case 704b fixed to the case 704a. As shown in FIGS. 231 (d) to 231 (f), the lower case 704b has two insertion holes 704b1 inserted through the fixed shafts 702a and a center through which a rotation member 708b of the drive unit 708 described later is inserted. An insertion hole 704b2, an engagement piece 704b3 protruding toward the center of the central insertion hole 704b2 with the inner edge of the central insertion hole 704b2 as a base end, and a detection protruding downward with the lower surface of the lower case 704b as a base end A piece 704b4 is formed.

  The drive unit 708 includes a drive source 708a configured by a motor, a solenoid, and the like, and a cylindrical rotating member 708b that is rotationally driven around the axis by the drive source 708a. A concave groove 708b1 is linearly formed from one side of the longitudinal direction to the other side of a part of the outer edge of the rotating member 708b, and the lower case 704b1 is engaged with the lower case 704b1 at the lower end side thereof. An engaging recess 708b2 that can engage with the piece 704b3 is formed.

  As shown in FIG. 231 (d), the rotating member 708 b is moved upward by the urging force of the spring 706 when the engaging recess 708 b 2 engages with the engaging piece 704 b 3 of the lower case 704 b. When the engagement between the engagement recess 708b2 and the engagement piece 704b3 of the lower case 704b is released as shown in FIG. 231 (e), the movable portion 704 is attached with the spring 706. It is possible to rotate between a permission position that allows movement upward by a force.

  The detection unit 710 includes an optical sensor having a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit, and is configured such that the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b can advance and retreat between the light projecting unit and the light receiving unit. Based on the detection result of the detection unit 710, the first sub control unit 400 is in a state where the movable unit 704 is not pressed downward (the chance button 700 is pressed) as shown in FIGS. 231 (a) and (b). (The state in which the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b has not entered between the light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of the detection unit 710) and the movable unit 704 is lower as shown in FIG. 231 (c). (The state in which the chance button 700 is pressed and the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b enters between the light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of the detection unit 710).

  In the initial position shown in FIGS. 231 (a) and 232 (a), the rotating member 708b is rotated from the permission position to the restricting position, and the upward movement of the movable portion 704 is restricted by the rotating member 708. It is possible to move only to In this initial position, when the upper case 704a is pressed downward by the player, the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b is detected by the detection unit 710 so that the pressing operation of the chance button 700 can be detected. is there.

  In the operation completion position shown in FIGS. 231 (b) and 232 (c), the rotating member 708b is rotated from the restricted position to the permitted position, and the movable portion 704 is released from the restriction of the upward movement and the spring 706 is moved. It moves upward by the urging force, abuts against the fixed plate 702b, is again restricted from moving upward, and can move only downward. Even in this operation completion position, as shown in FIG. 231 (c), when the upper case 704a is pressed downward by the player, the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b is detected by the detection unit 710. The pressing operation of the chance button 700 can be detected.

  The state shown in FIG. 231 (c) is a state when the button is pressed when the player presses the upper case 704a downward at the operation completion position shown in FIGS. 231 (b) and 232 (c). In this embodiment, when the movable portion 704 is pressed to near the lower limit and the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b is detected by the detection portion 710, the drive portion 708 is driven to move the rotating member 708b from the permitted position to the restricted position. The movable part 704 is configured to return to the initial position shown in FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the state during the operation shown in FIG. 232 (b), that is, the chance button 700 is changed from the initial position shown in FIGS. 231 (a) and 232 (a) to FIGS. 231 (b) and 232. In the state of moving to the operation completion position shown in (c), even if the upper case 704a is pressed downward by the player and the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b is detected by the detection unit 710, the detection result of the detection unit 710 Is ignored (the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is not determined to be valid).

  With such a configuration, when the player accidentally presses the chance button 700 during the operation of the chance button 700, the pressing operation of the chance button 700 becomes effective at an unintended timing by the player. It may be possible to prevent such a situation. In the present embodiment, the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is ignored during the operation of the chance button 700. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pressing operation during the operation of the chance button 700 is validated. May be.

In addition, when the chance button is pressed before the operation of the chance button (when the chance button is pressed before the detection is accepted), the operation of pressing the chance button may be ignored. The pressing operation may be validated. In addition, when the chance button pressing operation is valid, the chance button may be operated, or the chance button may not be operated. In these cases, the chance button can be accepted, or the chance button can be accepted.
<Operation reception production>

  Next, the operation reception effect of the chance button 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 233 and 234. FIG. 233 is a diagram illustrating an example of a correspondence relationship between the operation state of the chance button 700, whether or not the detection result of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is accepted, and whether or not the operation acceptance effect can be executed.

234 (a) is an external perspective view of the periphery of the door 108 with a ball storage tray when the chance button 700 is in the initial position, and FIG. 234 (b) is a ball when the chance button 700 is in the operation completion position. FIG. 6C is an external perspective view of the vicinity of the door 108 with a storage tray, and FIG. 10C shows the vicinity of the door 108 with a ball storage tray when the chance button 700 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position (for example, when it fails). It is an external perspective view. FIG. 4D is a diagram showing an example of an operation reception effect performed when the chance button 700 is in the initial position, and FIG. 4E is a case where the chance button 700 is in the operation completion position. It is a figure showing an example of operation reception effect to perform, and the figure (f) is an example of operation reception effect performed when chance button 700 stops between an initial position and an operation completion position (for example, when it fails). FIG.
<Operation reception effect / initial position>

  When the first sub-control unit 400 stops the chance button 700 at the initial position shown in FIG. 234 (a) (before the operation shown in FIG. 233), the detection unit 710 causes the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b to be moved. It becomes a detectable state (a state in which a detection result can be accepted). In addition, when a pressing operation of the chance button 700 is detected at this initial position, a chance button effect corresponding to the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is performed. Here, as the chance button effect, for example, an effect of changing an image or a character displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 according to the number of times or the speed of pressing the chance button 700, or the timing of pressing the chance button 700, for example. An effect such as changing an image or a character can be given depending on, but is not limited thereto. That is, it is only necessary to have an effect in which at least a part of the mode (display (eg, animation, image, character, etc.), sound, movement, color, etc.) changes according to the pressing operation of the chance button 7000.

  In addition, there may be a single aspect or a plurality of aspects. For example, in the case of a plurality of combinations, the combination with the same category (display, sound, movement, color, etc.) The color may change from red to blue, LED2 changes from white to blue, etc.), combinations with different categories (for example, display in liquid crystal (change from display A to display B), chance button It may be its own operation (change from no operation to rotation operation).

  When the chance button 700 is stopped at the initial position (before operation), the first sub-control unit 400 lights the chance button lamp 138 at a predetermined timing, as shown in FIG. 234 (a). Further, by causing the chance button 700 to emit light in a predetermined color (for example, blue), it is suggested to the player that the chance button 700 can be pressed, and as shown in FIG. Using the symbol display device 208, an operation reception effect that suggests to the player that the chance button 700 can be pressed (in this example, a character display “Press the chance button !!” and blue at the initial position) (An image display imitating the chance button 700 emitting light and an image display of a downward arrow).

In this way, if the chance button 700 is made to emit light or the operation reception effect is executed, the player can easily grasp that the pressing operation of the chance button is effective, and the player can be sure at the initial position. A pressing operation can be performed. Note that the operation reception effect is not limited to the effect using the decorative symbol display device 208. For example, the effect using various lamps 418, the effect using the speaker 120, and the movable body (for example, the shielding device 246, the effect). An effect using the movable body 224) or an effect combining these may be performed. That is, the operation reception effect may be an effect that suggests to the player that the chance button 700 can be pressed.
<Operation reception production / in operation>

  The first sub-control unit 400 detects when the chance button 700 is moved from the initial position shown in FIG. 234 (a) to the operation completion position shown in FIG. Even if the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b is detected by the unit 710, the detection result is ignored (so that the detection result cannot be accepted). Therefore, the first sub-control unit 400 does not execute the above-described chance button effect. In addition, after accepting the detection result of the chance button 700 (after the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is once validated), it is determined whether or not the chance button 700 is in operation. In some cases, the chance button effect may not be executed.

In addition, when the chance button 700 is moved from the initial position to the operation completion position (during operation), the first sub-control unit 400 does not light the chance button lamp 138 and does not perform the operation reception effect. It is configured as follows. As described above, if the chance button 700 is not lighted and the operation reception effect is not executed, the player can easily grasp that the pressing operation of the chance button is invalid, which is disadvantageous due to an erroneous operation. Will not suffer.
<Operation reception effect / operation completion position>

  When the first sub-control unit 400 stops the chance button 700 at the operation completion position shown in FIG. 234 (b) (after the operation shown in FIG. 233), the detection piece of the lower case 704b is detected by the detection unit 710. 704b4 can be detected (detection result can be received). In addition, when the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is detected at the operation completion position, the above-described chance button effect is performed.

  In addition, when the first sub control unit 400 stops the chance button 700 at the operation completion position (after the operation is completed), the first sub control unit 400 lights the chance button lamp 138 at a predetermined timing, as shown in FIG. 234 (b). As shown in FIG. 234 (e), the player indicates that the chance button 700 can be pressed by causing the chance button 700 to emit light in a predetermined color (for example, red). The operation reception effect that suggests to the player that the chance button 700 can be pressed using the decorative symbol display device 208 (in this example, the character display “Press the chance button !!” and the operation is completed. (An image display imitating the chance button 700 emitting red light at the position and an image display of a downward arrow).

As described above, if the chance button 700 is caused to emit light or the operation reception effect is executed, the player can easily grasp that the pressing operation of the chance button is effective, and the player can be sure at the operation completion position. The pressing operation can be performed.
<Operation reception effect / Stop between initial position and operation completion position>

  As shown in FIG. 234 (c), the first sub control unit 400 can detect the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b by the detection unit 710 even when the chance button 700 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position. (A state in which the detection result can be accepted). Here, the case where the chance button 700 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position is, for example, the case where the movable portion 704 of the chance button 700 is caught by the fixed portion 702 and the movable portion 704 cannot be raised to the operation completion position. An example is a case where the biasing force of the spring 706 of the chance button 700 is weakened and the movable part 704 cannot be raised to the operation completion position.

  Further, even when the chance button 700 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position, the first sub-control unit 400 performs the pressing operation of the chance button 700 at a predetermined timing as shown in FIG. 234 (f). An operation reception effect (in this example, the same effect as the operation reception effect (the effect shown in FIG. 234 (e)) performed after the operation is completed) that suggests to the player that it is possible is performed.

  As described above, even when the chance button 700 is located at a position other than the initial position and the operation completion position, if the operation of the chance button 700 is enabled, the operation of the chance button 700 is performed even when the chance button 700 breaks down. Therefore, the player's willingness to play is not reduced. Furthermore, by performing the operation reception effect, it is possible to clearly notify that the operation is possible even when the chance button 700 is in a position other than the initial position and the operation completion position, and prompt the player to operate. it can.

  In this example, when the chance button 700 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position, the chance button 700 does not emit light in a predetermined color. For example, a color different from the initial position or the operation completion position is used. (For example, green) may be emitted, or light may be emitted in the same color (for example, blue or red) as before or after the operation is completed.

  In this example, the chance button 700 emits light in a predetermined color. For example, the chance button 700 may blink in a predetermined color. In this case, the initial position, the operation completion position, the initial position, and the operation completion may be performed. The blinking pattern may be changed at each of the stops between positions. For example, blinking is repeated at a first cycle (for example, 1 second) at the initial position, and blinking is repeated at a second cycle (for example, 0.5 seconds) shorter than the first cycle at the operation completion position. When the movement is stopped between the operation completion positions, blinking is repeated in a third period (for example, 3 seconds) longer than the first period.

  With such a configuration, the player can grasp that the pressing operation is possible in each state, and can also grasp that each state is different, In some cases, a pressing operation suitable for the state can be performed.

  As described above, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment has the operating means (for example, the chance buttons 700 and 750, the first operation unit 756, the second operation) that can be operated by the player. Section 758, the bet button 132, and a pressing surface of these buttons and operation section), presentation means (for example, the first sub-control section 400) capable of executing at least presentation, and moved means (for example, upper case 704a) , A movement control means (for example, the second sub-control unit 500) capable of at least performing movement control for moving the base 754), wherein the operation means is the movement by the movement control means. When the control is performed, the first position (for example, the initial position shown in FIGS. 232 (a), 234 (a), 235 (a), and 245 (a)) to the second position (for example, , 232 (c), FIG. 234 (c), FIG. 235 (b), and FIG. 245 (c)), and the production means is controlled by the movement control. When the operation means moved to the second position is operated, a special effect can be executed at least, and the effect means is the operation means despite the movement control being performed. Even when the button does not move to the second position, at least the special effect (for example, the effect at the time of pressing the button shown in FIG. 248 (c)) according to the operation of the operation means. It is a game machine characterized by being executable.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment has operation means (for example, chance buttons 700 and 750, a first operation unit 756, a second operation unit 758, a bet, and the like that can be operated by the player. The buttons 132 and the pressing surfaces of these buttons and the operation unit), the production means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of executing at least the production, and the moved means (for example, the upper case 704a and the base 754). And a movement control means (for example, the second sub-control unit 500) capable of performing at least movement control for moving the game device, wherein the operation means is controlled by the movement control means. In this case, the first position (for example, the initial position shown in FIGS. 232 (a), 234 (a), 235 (a), and 245 (a)) to the second position (for example, FIG. 232 ( c) 234 (c), 235 (b), and 245 (c) are moved to the operation position), and when the special effect execution condition is satisfied (for example, bet When the button 132 is in a position other than the initial position and the operation completion position, a special effect (for example, an effect at the time of pressing the button shown in FIG. 248 (c)) is given to the case where the operation of the bet button 132 is accepted at that position. ) At least, and the special performance execution condition is satisfied when any of the plurality of conditions is satisfied, and the first condition among the plurality of conditions is satisfied. Is established when the operation means that has moved to the second position due to the movement control being operated is operated, and the second condition among the plurality of conditions is that the movement control is Done Nevertheless, even if the operation means does not move to the second position, the game stand is characterized in that it is established in response to the operation means being operated. .

  According to the gaming table according to the present embodiment, even when the operation means cannot move to the second position where it should originally move due to a failure of the operation means, the operation means is operated by the player. By enabling the production according to the situation, it is possible to give the player a sense of security by suggesting to the player that the operation has been accepted. For this reason, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player's willingness to play declines due to a failure of the operating means, and the interest of the game may be improved.

  Further, operation accepting means capable of accepting at least an operation by the player (for example, chance buttons 700 and 750, first operation unit 756, second operation unit 758, bet button 132, and these buttons and operations. And the operation means may be provided in the operation reception means.

  The special effect may not be performed even if the operation means is operated during the execution of the movement control.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from performing an operation during the operation of the operation means, and to prevent a situation in which the player suffers a disadvantage due to an erroneous operation. In some cases, erroneous detection of reception of the operation means due to vibration or the like can be prevented.

  In addition, the rendering means may be capable of at least rendering an effect in response to the operation means being operated by a player even when the moved means is located at the first position. .

  With such a configuration, by increasing the period during which the operation can be detected, there are cases where the player has more opportunities to operate the operation unit and can improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, a notification unit capable of performing at least notification for prompting the operation of the operation unit is provided, and the notification unit moves the operation unit to the second position in spite of the movement control being performed. Even if it is not, the notification may be performed.

  In addition, the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment is a gaming machine provided with operating means (for example, a chance button 700) that can be operated by the player. A touchable operation portion (for example, an upper case 704a) is provided, and the operation portion is moved from a first position (for example, an initial position shown in FIG. 232 (a)) to a second position (for example, FIG. 232 (for example). c) a drive means (for example, the drive unit 708) that can move at least to the operation completion position shown in c), a drive control means (for example, the second sub-control unit 500) that can control the drive of the drive means, and the drive When the operation means is moved by the player to the second position and then the operation means is operated by the player, the production means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of at least producing an effect; Comprising And means for controlling the movement of the operating unit from the first position to the second position after the driving unit has not been moved to the second position. Even when (for example, when it stops between the initial position and the operation completion position as shown in FIG. 234 (c)), at least an effect can be executed in response to the operation means being operated by the player. (For example, as shown in FIG. 234 (c), when the chance button 700 is pressed at the timing of stopping between the initial position and the operation completion position, the chance button corresponding to the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is performed. It is a game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming table according to the present embodiment, even when the operation unit cannot be moved to the second position where it should originally move due to a failure of the operation unit, the operation unit is operated by the player. By enabling the production according to the situation, it is possible to give the player a sense of security by suggesting to the player that the operation has been accepted. For this reason, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player's willingness to play declines due to a failure of the operating means, and the interest of the game may be improved.

  Further, when the driving means is in the middle of the control in which the driving means moves the operation unit from the first position toward the second position (for example, during the operation shown in FIG. 232 (b)). Alternatively, it may be configured so that the effect is not executed even when the operation means is operated by the player.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from performing an operation during the operation of the operation means, and to prevent a situation in which the player suffers a disadvantage due to an erroneous operation. In some cases, erroneous detection of reception of the operation means due to vibration or the like can be prevented.

  In addition, even when the operation unit is located at the first position, at least an effect may be executed in response to the operation means being operated by the player.

  With such a configuration, by increasing the period during which the operation can be detected, there are cases where the player has more opportunities to operate the operation unit and can improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, the information processing device includes notification means (for example, a chance button lamp 138 and a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of at least notification for prompting operation of the operation means, and the notification means is configured such that the operation unit has the second position. The notification (for example, the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 234 (f)) may be performed even when the user has not moved to the position.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the operation unit can be operated even if the operation unit does not move to the position where the operation unit is originally moved, so that the player misses the opportunity to operate the operation unit. There are cases where it can be prevented. Further, there are cases where the player can be operated with peace of mind by performing the same notification as when moving to the second position.

  On the other hand, if the notification means is configured to give a notification different from the case of moving to the second position, it can give the player a sense of incongruity, refrain from operating the operation means, or carefully operate the operation means. There are cases where it can be handled. Further, since the operation is accepted when the operation is performed, it may be possible to prevent the player's willingness to play from being reduced.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment has operation means (for example, chance buttons 700 and 750, a first operation unit 756, a second operation unit 758, a bet, and the like that can be operated by the player. The button 132, the pressing surface of these buttons and the operation unit), the production unit (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of executing at least production, and the notification unit (for example, chance button) capable of executing at least notification. Lamp 138, decorative symbol display device 208), and movement control means (for example, second sub-control unit 500) capable of at least executing movement control for moving the moved means (for example, upper case 704a, base 754). The operating device has a first position (for example, FIG. 232 (a), when the movement control by the movement control device is performed). 234 (a), FIG. 235 (a), and the initial position shown in FIG. 245 (a)) to the second position (for example, FIG. 232 (c), FIG. 234 (c), FIG. 235 (b), FIG. 245 ( c) is moved to the operation completion position shown in c), and the production means is special when the operation means moved to the second position due to the movement control being performed. It is possible to execute at least the effect (the effect at the time of pressing the button shown in FIG. 248 (c)), and the notifying unit is configured so that the operation unit is in the second position in spite of the movement control being performed. The player can operate the operation means even when the player has not moved to the position (for example, when stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position as shown in FIG. 234 (c)). Can be notified at least (for example, FIG. 234 (f)). It is possible to perform operation acceptance effect as shown), it is the amusement machine according to claim.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment has operation means (for example, chance buttons 700 and 750, a first operation unit 756, a second operation unit 758, a bet, and the like that can be operated by the player. The button 132, the pressing surface of these buttons and the operation unit), the production unit (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of executing at least production, and the notification unit (for example, chance button) capable of executing at least notification. Lamp 138, decorative symbol display device 208), and movement control means (for example, second sub-control unit 500) capable of at least executing movement control for moving the moved means (for example, upper case 704a, base 754). The operating device has a first position (for example, FIG. 232 (a), when the movement control by the movement control device is performed). 234 (a), FIG. 235 (a), and the initial position shown in FIG. 245 (a)) to the second position (for example, FIG. 232 (c), FIG. 234 (c), FIG. 235 (b), FIG. 245 ( The operation means moves to the operation completion position shown in c), and when the special production execution condition is satisfied, the production means produces a special production (production when the button shown in FIG. 248 (c) is pressed). Can be executed at least, and the special performance execution condition is established when any one of the plurality of conditions is satisfied, and one condition among the plurality of conditions is: This is established when the operation means that has moved to the second position is operated due to the movement control being performed, and the notification means is configured to perform the operation in spite of the movement control being performed. If the means did not move to the second position Even when (for example, when stopping between the initial position and the operation completion position as shown in FIG. 234 (c)), it is possible to at least notify that the player can operate the operation means. (For example, it is possible to perform an operation reception effect as shown in FIG. 234 (f)).

  According to the gaming table according to the present embodiment, even when the operation unit cannot move to the second position where the operation unit should originally move due to a failure of the operation unit, the game is performed by informing the user of the operation. In addition to being able to operate the operation unit with peace of mind, it may be possible to prevent the player from missing an opportunity for operation. For this reason, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player's willingness to play declines due to a failure of the operating means, and the interest of the game may be improved.

  Further, the notification means may be configured not to notify that the player can operate the operation means when the movement control is being executed.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from performing an operation during the operation of the operation means, and to prevent a situation in which the player suffers a disadvantage due to an erroneous operation. In some cases, erroneous detection of reception of the operation means due to vibration or the like can be prevented.

  In addition, the notification means indicates that the operation means has moved to the second position when the operation means has been moved to the second position due to the movement control being performed. (For example, the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 234 (e)) is executed at least, and the notification means has not moved to the second position even though the movement control has been performed. Even in such a case, it is configured to execute at least the same suggestion (for example, the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 234 (f)) as the notification that suggests that the operation means has moved to the second position. Also good.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the position that should have moved, and not to give a disadvantage to the player as compared to when moving to the position to move originally. There is a case. For example, when the operation means is driven to indicate that “this variation can be expected”, the operation means does not move to the original movement position, thereby informing the player that “this variation can be expected”. In some cases, it may be possible to prevent a situation where it is impossible to do so. Further, there are cases where the player can be operated with peace of mind by performing the same notification as when moving to the second position.

  The informing means is a plurality of informing means (for example, two buttons, a chance button lamp 138 and a decorative symbol display device 208). The informing means that the player can operate the operating means. Notification may be possible by at least one or more notification means.

  With such a configuration, there are cases where it is possible to further prevent the player from losing an operable opportunity by performing a plurality of notifications prompting the operation.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment can notify that the player can operate the operation means (for example, the chance button 700) that can be operated by the player and the operation means. And a notifying means (for example, a chance button lamp 138, a decorative symbol display device 208), and an operating portion (for example, an upper case 704a) that can be contacted by a player is provided in the operating means. The operation unit is capable of moving at least from the first position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 232 (a)) to the second position (for example, the operation completion position shown in FIG. 232 (c)). Means (for example, the drive unit 708), drive control means (for example, the second sub-control unit 500) capable of controlling the drive of the drive unit, and the operation unit is moved to the second position by the drive unit. After the operation means is operated by the player, the production means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that can at least execute the production, the notification means, the drive means is the operation After performing control to move the part from the first position toward the second position, the operation part has not been moved to the second position (for example, in FIG. 234 (c)). Even when it is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position as shown, it is possible to at least notify that the player can operate the operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 234 (f)). It is possible to perform an operation reception effect).

  According to the gaming table according to the present embodiment, even when the operation unit cannot move to the second position where the operation unit should originally move due to a failure of the operation means, the game is provided by informing the operation. In addition to being able to operate the operation unit with peace of mind, it may be possible to prevent the player from missing an opportunity for operation. For this reason, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player's willingness to play declines due to a failure of the operating means, and the interest of the game may be improved.

  In addition, the notification unit is in the middle of control in which the driving unit moves the operation unit from the first position toward the second position (for example, during the operation shown in FIG. 232 (b)). Alternatively, the operation means may be configured not to notify that the player can operate.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from performing an operation during the operation of the operation means, and to prevent a situation in which the player suffers a disadvantage due to an erroneous operation. In some cases, erroneous detection of reception of the operation means due to vibration or the like can be prevented.

  Further, the notification means is a plurality of notification means (for example, two buttons, a chance button lamp 138 and a decorative symbol display device 208), and among the plurality of notification means that the player can operate the operation means. The notification may be made by at least one notification means.

  With such a configuration, there are cases where it is possible to further prevent the player from losing an operable opportunity by performing a plurality of notifications prompting the operation.

  Further, the effect means is configured not to at least give an effect (for example, a chance button effect) according to the operation of the operation means when the operation unit has not been moved to the second position. May be.

  By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of incongruity by not producing the result of accepting the operation, and to refrain from operating the operating means or to handle the operating means carefully. There is a case. In addition, it may be possible to make the player feel uncomfortable and make it easy to notice a malfunction of the operation means.

  Further, when the operation unit is not moved to the second position, it may be configured not to accept the player's operation by the operation means (for example, the detection result of the chance button 700 is ignored) May be configured).

  By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of incongruity by not accepting the detection of the operation, and to refrain from operating the operation means or to handle the operation means carefully. In addition, it may be possible to make the player feel uncomfortable and make it easy to notice a malfunction of the operation means.

  In addition, when the operation unit is moved to the second position, the notification unit notifies the user that the operation unit has moved to the second position (for example, in FIG. 234 (e)). At least the operation reception effect shown), and the same suggestion as the notification that suggests that the operation unit has moved to the second position even when the operation unit has not been moved to the second position ( For example, you may comprise so that at least the operation reception effect shown in FIG.234 (f) may be performed.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the position that should have moved, and not to give a disadvantage to the player as compared to when moving to the position to move originally. There is a case. For example, when the operation means is driven to indicate that “this variation can be expected”, the operation means does not move to the original movement position, thereby informing the player that “this variation can be expected”. In some cases, it may be possible to prevent a situation where it is impossible to do so. Further, there are cases where the player can be operated with peace of mind by performing the same notification as when moving to the second position.

On the other hand, if the notification means is configured to give a notification different from the case of moving to the second position, it can give the player a sense of incongruity, refrain from operating the operation means, or carefully operate the operation means. There are cases where it can be handled. Further, since the operation is accepted when the operation is performed, it may be possible to prevent the player's willingness to play from being reduced.
<Modified example of chance button>

  Next, a modified example of the chance button will be described. FIG. 235 (a) is an external perspective view showing the periphery of the chance button 750 before the operation, and FIG. 235 (b) is an external perspective view showing the periphery of the chance button 750 after the operation is completed. FIG. 236 is a front view of the chance button 750 as viewed from the direction of the second operation unit 758.

  The chance button 750 includes a base 754 having a substantially triangular prism shape that is isosceles in a side view, a first operation unit 756 provided on the first surface of the base 754, and a first surface of the base 754. A second operating portion 758 provided on the second orthogonal surface, a first gear 754b fixed to the rotary shaft 754a on one side of the base 754, and a second gear meshing with the first gear 754b A gear 754c and a drive source 754d composed of a motor that rotationally drives the second gear 754c are included. The base 754 of the chance button 750 activates the drive source 754d, so that the rotation axis 754a is the center between the initial position shown in FIG. 235 (a) and the operation completion position shown in FIG. It is configured to be rotatable.

  The first operation unit 756 includes a detection unit (not shown) including a sensor, a sensor circuit, or the like that can detect a pressing operation of the first operation unit 756. When the base 754 is in the initial position shown in FIG. 235 (a), the detection unit validates the detection result of the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756, while the base 754 is shown in FIG. 235 (b). The detection result of the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756 is invalidated in the operation completion position shown in FIG. That is, the player can perform an operation using the first operation unit 756 only when the base 754 is in the initial position shown in FIG. 235 (a). Even when the base 754 is at the operation completion position, the detection result of the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756 may be validated.

  In addition, the second operation unit 758 includes a detection unit (not shown) including a sensor, a sensor circuit, and the like that can detect a pressing operation of the second operation unit 758. When the base 754 is in the operation completion position shown in FIG. 235 (b), the detection unit validates the detection result of the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758, while the base 754 is shown in FIG. ), The detection result of the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758 is invalidated. That is, the player can perform an operation by the second operation unit 758 only when the base 754 is at the operation completion position shown in FIG. 235 (b). Note that the detection result of the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758 may be validated even when the base 754 is in the initial position.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment can notify that the player can operate the operation means (for example, the chance button 700) that can be operated by the player and the operation means. And a notifying means (for example, a chance button lamp 138, a decorative symbol display device 208), and an operating portion (for example, an upper case 704a) that can be contacted by a player is provided in the operating means. The operation unit is capable of moving at least from the first position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 232 (a)) to the second position (for example, the operation completion position shown in FIG. 232 (c)). Means (for example, the drive unit 708), drive control means (for example, the second sub-control unit 500) capable of controlling the drive of the drive unit, and the operation unit is moved to the second position by the drive unit. After the operation means is operated by the player, the production means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that can at least execute the production, the notification means, the drive means is the operation After performing control to move the part from the first position toward the second position, the operation part has not been moved to the second position (for example, in FIG. 234 (c)). Even when it is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position as shown, it is possible to at least notify that the player can operate the operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 234 (f)). It is possible to perform an operation reception effect).

  According to the gaming table according to the present embodiment, even when the operation unit cannot move to the second position where the operation unit should originally move due to a failure of the operation means, the game is provided by informing the operation. In addition to being able to operate the operation unit with peace of mind, it may be possible to prevent the player from missing an opportunity for operation. For this reason, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player's willingness to play declines due to a failure of the operating means, and the interest of the game may be improved.

  In addition, the notification unit is in the middle of control in which the driving unit moves the operation unit from the first position toward the second position (for example, during the operation shown in FIG. 232 (b)). Alternatively, the operation means may be configured not to notify that the player can operate.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from performing an operation during the operation of the operation means, and to prevent a situation in which the player suffers a disadvantage due to an erroneous operation. In some cases, erroneous detection of reception of the operation means due to vibration or the like can be prevented.

  Further, the notification means is a plurality of notification means (for example, two buttons, a chance button lamp 138 and a decorative symbol display device 208), and among the plurality of notification means that the player can operate the operation means. The notification may be made by at least one notification means.

  With such a configuration, there is a case where it is possible to further prevent the player from losing an opportunity to operate by performing notification that prompts the operation. The plurality of notification means may at least notify that the player can operate the operation means, and the first notification means and the second notification means among the plurality of notification means play the operation means. It may be notified at least that the person can operate.

  Further, the effect means is configured not to at least give an effect (for example, a chance button effect) according to the operation of the operation means when the operation unit has not been moved to the second position. May be.

  By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of incongruity by not producing the result of accepting the operation, and to refrain from operating the operating means or to handle the operating means carefully. There is a case. In addition, it may be possible to make the player feel uncomfortable and make it easy to notice a malfunction of the operation means.

  Further, when the operation unit is not moved to the second position, it may be configured not to accept the player's operation by the operation means (for example, the detection result of the chance button 700 is ignored) May be configured).

  By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of incongruity by not accepting the detection of the operation, and to refrain from operating the operation means or to handle the operation means carefully. In addition, it may be possible to make the player feel uncomfortable and make it easy to notice a malfunction of the operation means.

  In addition, when the operation unit is moved to the second position, the notification unit notifies the user that the operation unit has moved to the second position (for example, in FIG. 234 (e)). At least the operation reception effect shown), and the same suggestion as the notification that suggests that the operation unit has moved to the second position even when the operation unit has not been moved to the second position ( For example, you may comprise so that at least the operation reception effect shown in FIG.234 (f) may be performed.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the position that should have moved, and not to give a disadvantage to the player as compared to when moving to the position to move originally. There is a case. For example, when the operation means is driven to indicate that “this variation can be expected”, the operation means does not move to the original movement position, thereby informing the player that “this variation can be expected”. In some cases, it may be possible to prevent a situation where it is impossible to do so. Further, there are cases where the player can be operated with peace of mind by performing the same notification as when moving to the second position.

On the other hand, if the notification means is configured to give a notification different from the case of moving to the second position, it can give the player a sense of incongruity, refrain from operating the operation means, or carefully operate the operation means. There are cases where it can be handled. Further, since the operation is accepted when the operation is performed, it may be possible to prevent the player's willingness to play from being reduced.
<Operation reception effect of chance button 750>

  Next, the operation reception effect of the chance button 750 will be described with reference to FIG. 2A is a side sectional view of the chance button 750 when the chance button 750 is at the initial position, and FIG. 2B is a side of the chance button 750 when the chance button 750 is at the operation completion position. The cross-sectional view (c) is a side cross-sectional view of the chance button 750 when the chance button 700 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position (for example, when it breaks down).

FIG. 6D is a diagram showing an example of an operation reception effect performed when the chance button 750 is at the initial position, and FIG. 5E is a diagram when the chance button 750 is at the operation completion position. It is a figure showing an example of operation reception effect to perform, and the figure (f) is an example of operation reception effect performed when chance button 750 stops between an initial position and an operation completion position (for example, when it fails). FIG.
<Operation reception effect / initial position>

  As described above, when the chance button 750 is stopped at the initial position shown in FIG. 237 (a), the pachinko machine according to the modified example validates the detection result of the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756. On the other hand, the detection result of the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758 is invalidated.

  When the chance button 750 is stopped at the initial position, the first operation unit of the chance button 750 is used at a predetermined timing using the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 237 (d). An operation reception effect that suggests to the player that the operation of pressing 756 is possible (in this example, a character display of “Press the chance button !!”, an image display imitating the first operation unit 756, and a downward direction. (Image display of arrow).

  Thus, if the operation acceptance effect is executed at a timing at which the operation of the first operation unit 756 can be performed, the player can easily grasp that the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756 is effective. The player can reliably perform the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756 at the initial position.

Instead of (or in addition to) such an operation reception effect, the first operation unit 756 can be pressed by causing the first operation unit 756 to emit light in a predetermined color (for example, blue). You may suggest it to the player. Further, the operation reception effect is not limited to the effect using the decorative symbol display device 208. For example, the effect using various lamps 418, the effect using the speaker 120, and the movable body (for example, the shielding device 246, the effect). An effect using the movable body 224) or an effect combining these may be performed.
<Operation reception production / in operation>

In the pachinko machine according to the modified example, when the chance button 750 is moved from the initial position shown in FIG. 237 (a) to the operation completion position shown in FIG. Both the detection result of the pressing operation of 756 and the detection result of the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758 are invalidated. When the chance button 750 is moved from the initial position to the operation completion position, the operation reception effect is not performed.
<Operation reception effect / operation completion position>

  When the chance button 750 is stopped at the operation completion position shown in FIG. 237 (b), the pachinko machine according to the modified example enables the detection result of the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758, while The detection result of the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756 is invalidated. In this way, by deactivating the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756 at the operation completion position, when the chance button 750 returns from the operation completion position to the initial position, an object is placed between the chance button 750 and the main body. And a situation where a player's hand is caught may be avoided, and safety may be improved.

  In addition, when the chance button 750 is stopped at the operation completion position, the second operation of the chance button 750 is performed at a predetermined timing using the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 237 (e). An operation reception effect that suggests to the player that the operation of pressing the part 758 is possible (in this example, “Please press the super chance button!”, A character display different from the case of the first operation part 756, (Image display imitating the second operation unit 758 and image display of a downward arrow). In this way, when there are a plurality of types of operation units, if the operation reception effects corresponding to the respective operation units are different, it is possible to avoid mistakes in pressing the operation unit, etc. In some cases, decline can be prevented. Instead of (or in addition to) such an operation reception effect, the second operation unit 758 can be pressed by causing the second operation unit 758 to emit light in a predetermined color (for example, red). You may suggest it to the player.

  Note that the content of the operation reception effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 237 (e). For example, the image display imitating the second operation unit 758 (operation unit) may not be performed, or a downward arrow may be displayed. It is not necessary to display an image. When the operation unit is caused to emit light, the luminance of the operation unit may be lower than the luminance of other parts (for example, the outer frame 102 or the game board 200), or higher than the luminance of other parts. May be. With such a configuration, the operation unit can be made more conspicuous than other parts, so that the player can easily recognize the position of the operation unit that can be operated, and the convenience of the player can be improved. is there.

  In addition, as the operation reception effect, a display (for example, a meter or a time display) indicating a period during which the operation can be received may be performed. In this case, the remaining time during which the operation of the operation unit can be received may be displayed. Good.

  Further, the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756 and the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758 may be simultaneously detected. In this case, as the operation reception effect, the first operation unit 756 and the second operation unit 758 are detected. The operation reception effect (for example, “Press the chance button or the super chance button !!”), the first operation unit 756 and the second operation It is preferable to perform image display imitating the portion 758 and image display of a downward arrow. With such a configuration, variations of operations by the player can be widened, and the player's willingness to play may be increased.

Further, the operation reception effect in this case is an effect that suggests that either one of the first operation unit and the second operation unit can be pressed (for example, “Press the chance button !!”). (Character notation). Moreover, when both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are operated, only one of the operation reception notifications may be performed.
<Operation reception effect / Stop between initial position and operation completion position>

  The pachinko machine according to the modified example is configured to validate the detection result of the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758 even when the chance button 750 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position. Here, when the chance button 750 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position, for example, the base 754 of the chance button 750 is hooked on the main body or the like to reach the operation completion position from the initial position (or from the operation completion position). An example of such a case is that it cannot be rotated (to the initial position).

  Further, even when the chance button 750 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position, the player is informed that the chance button 750 can be pressed at a predetermined timing as shown in FIG. 237 (f). The suggested operation reception effect (in this example, the operation reception effect performed after the operation is completed (the same effect as the effect shown in FIG. 237 (e)) is performed.

  As described above, even when the chance button 750 is in a position other than the initial position and the operation completion position, if the operation of the chance button 750 is enabled, the operation of the chance button 750 is performed even when the chance button 750 is broken. Therefore, the player's willingness to play is not reduced. Furthermore, by performing the operation reception effect, it is possible to clearly notify that the operation is possible even when the chance button 750 is at a position other than the initial position and the operation completion position, and prompt the player to operate. it can.

  It should be noted that an operation reception effect (for example, the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 237 (e)) performed when the user is at the operation completion position and an operation reception effect (for example, when the operation reception effect is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position). The operation reception effect shown in FIG. 237 (f) may be different. For example, the first type of notification means (for example, two types of liquid crystal display device and lamp) is used for the operation reception effect that is performed when the user is at the operation completion position. A second type of notification means (for example, three types of liquid crystal display device, lamp, and speaker) different from the first type may be used for the operation reception effect performed when the operation is stopped.

  In addition, the same type of notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a lamp, an operation reception effect performed when the operation reception effect is performed when the operation is completed, and an operation reception effect performed when the operation is completed between the initial position and the operation completion position) And a speaker), some of the notification means may be different. For example, in the operation reception effect that is performed at the operation completion position, the first display (for example, character display and image display) is performed by the liquid crystal display device, and the operation performed when the operation is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position. In the reception effect, a second display (for example, only character display) different from the first display may be performed by the liquid crystal display device, and the lamp and the speaker may perform the same effect.

With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify whether the chance button 750 is at a predetermined position or at a position other than the predetermined position, and an operation according to the state of the chance button 750 may be prompted.
<Example of slot machine>

  Next, an example of a slot machine will be described. A slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 238 includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front surface of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. Inside the center of the main body 101 (not shown), three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored and rotated inside the slot machine 100. It is configured to be able to. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

  In the present embodiment, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the belt-like member at equal intervals, and the reels 110 to 112 are configured by affixing the belt-like member to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member. When viewed from the player, the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are generally displayed three in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113 so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player varies. That is, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that displays a plurality of combinations of symbols in a variable manner. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display device. In this embodiment, three reels are provided in the center of the slot machine 100. However, the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

  A backlight (not shown) for illuminating the individual symbols displayed on the symbol display window 113 is disposed on the back of each of the reels 110 to 112. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 110 to 112. The light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of the optical sensor are provided. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the two. Based on the detection result of the sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

  The winning line display lamp 120 is a lamp indicating the winning line 114 that is valid. The effective pay line is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are five pay lines 114. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line is valid, and when two medals are betted, the upper horizontal win line and the lower horizontal pay line are added. If three are valid and three medals are bet, five lines including a right-down winning line and an upper-right winning line are valid as winning lines. The number of winning lines 114 is not limited to five. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, the right The down line and the upper right line may be set as valid pay lines, and the same number of pay lines may be set as valid pay lines regardless of the number of bets.

  The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been won internally in an internal lottery to be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert a game medal. The replay lamp 122 informs the player that the current game can be replayed (the medal need not be inserted) when winning a replay which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is an effect lamp.

  The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) stored electronically in the slot machine 100. In this embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, a maximum of 3 cards are inserted, 2 when the bet button 131 is pressed, and 3 when the bet button 132 is pressed. It has become so. In addition, the bet button 132 also functions as a chance button that changes the mode of effect by the player's operation. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as a MAX bet button 132. The game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a prescribed number of medals are inserted, the game start is informed that the game can be started. The lamp 121 is turned on.

  The medal slot 141 is an slot for a player to insert a medal when starting a game. That is, the medal can be inserted electronically by the bet buttons 130 to 132, or an actual medal can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141. is there. The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals stored electronically in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various types of internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) as numerical values. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. The stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are 7-segment (SEG) displays.

  The start lever 135 is a lever type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired medal number is inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or when the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 135 is referred to as a game start operation.

  The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with the reels 110 to 112. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 137 to 139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Note that a light emitter may be provided inside each stop button 137 to 139, and when the stop button 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter may be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove a medal when the inserted medal is jammed. The payment button 134 is a button for adjusting the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and the bet medals and discharging them from the medal payout exit 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted.

  Below the stop button unit 136 is provided a title panel 162 for displaying the model name and pasting various types of certificate. At the lower part of the title panel 162, a medal payout opening 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided.

  The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for exciting games. An effect device 160 is disposed above the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided above the effect device 160. The effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 including two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in a horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (effect image) disposed on the back side of the shutter 163. And a display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 appears on the front side (player side) of the slot machine 100 when the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 157. It has become.

  FIG. 239 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 opened. The main body 101 is a box that is surrounded by the upper surface plate 261, the left side plate 260, the right side plate 260, the lower surface plate 264, and the back plate 242, and that opens to the front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 that stores the main control board is disposed at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation port 249 provided on the upper portion of the back plate 242. Below the three reels 110 to 112 are arranged. On the side plate 260 on the left side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, a sub control board storage case 220 containing a sub control board is disposed. Further, an external concentrated terminal plate 248 that is connected to the main control board and outputs the information of the slot machine 100 to an external device is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side.

  The lower surface plate 264 is provided with a medal payout device 180 (device for paying out medals accumulated in a bucket), and has a power supply board above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reels 110 to 112. A power supply device 252 is provided, and a power switch 244 is provided on the front surface of the power supply device 252. The power supply device 252 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit and each device such as a main control unit 300 and sub-control units 400 and 500 described later. To do. Furthermore, a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power source is cut off is provided. Yes.

  A medal auxiliary storage 240 is arranged on the right side of the medal payout device 180, and an overflow terminal is arranged behind this (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connecting portion for connecting a power cord 264, and the power cord 264 connected thereto extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 provided in the back plate 242 of the main body 101. Yes.

  The front door 102 is hinged to the left side plate 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and an effect device 160 and an effect control board (which controls the effect device 160) are provided above the symbol display window 113. An upper speaker 272 is provided. Below the symbol display window 113, there are provided a medal selector 170 for selecting inserted medals, and a passage 266 through which medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops illegal medals etc. on the medal tray 161. Yes. Further, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 181.

The circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be broadly divided into main effects according to a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. And a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400.
<Main control unit>

  First, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in the internal lottery of a winning combination, and reel stop. ROM 306 for storing position, RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, and the like WDT (watchdog timer) 314 is mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 314 as a system clock. Further, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency division data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312. The counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data. An interrupt request is transmitted to the CPU 304 at every interrupt time. In response to this interrupt request, the CPU 304 monitors each sensor and transmits a drive pulse. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 314 is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256 × 47 ÷ 8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

  The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535, and a start signal output circuit that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input from the activation signal output circuit 338, the CPU 304 starts game control (starts main processing main processing described later).

  In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 is inserted from various sensors 318 (a bet button 130 sensor, a bet button 131 sensor, a bet button 132 sensor, and a medal slot 141 at every interruption time. Medal reception sensor, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, checkout button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from the medal payout device 180, index sensor for reel 110 , The index sensor of the reel 111, the index sensor of the reel 112, etc.).

  When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, a signal indicating this detection is output to the random number generation circuit 316. Receiving this signal, the random number generation circuit 316 latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random value used for the lottery.

  Two medal acceptance sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141 and detect whether or not a medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect a start operation by the player. The stop button 137 sensor, the stop button 138 sensor, and the stop button 139 are installed in each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

  The bet button 130 sensor and the bet button 131 sensor are installed in each of the bet button 130 and the bet button 131, and are inserted when a medal electronically stored in the RAM 308 is inserted as an inserted medal into the game. Detect operations. The bet button 132 sensor is installed on the bet button 132. When the bet button 132 functions as a medal insertion button, a medal electronically stored in the RAM 308 is inserted as an insertion medal into the game. When the betting button 132 is functioning as a chance button, a pressing operation of the chance button is detected.

  The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the medals stored electronically are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting a medal paid out by the medal payout device 180. Each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

  The index sensor of the reel 110, the index sensor of the reel 111, and the index sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting bases of the reels 110 to 112, and each time a light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes. Becomes L level. When detecting this signal, the CPU 304 determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

  The main control unit 300 is provided in a drive circuit 322 for driving a stepping motor provided in the reel devices 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving a solenoid provided in a medal selector 170 for selecting inserted medals, and a medal payout device 180. A driving circuit 326 for driving the motor, various lamps 338 (a winning line display lamp 120, a notification lamp 123, a game medal insertion possible lamp 124, a re-game lamp 122, a game medal insertion lamp 129, a game start possible lamp 121, and a stored number A drive circuit 328 for driving the display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127) is provided.

  Further, an information output circuit 334 (external concentration terminal board 248) is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, game state) of the slot machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 652 provided.

  The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power management unit (not shown) to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 is a voltage of the power source. When the value is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

In addition, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and enables communication with the first sub control unit 400. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub control unit 400. However, the first sub-control unit 400 is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300.
<Sub control unit>

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives a control command transmitted from the main control unit 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on the control command. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and frequency. It is installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a backlight lighting pattern, data for controlling various displays, and the like.

  The CPU 404 transmits the frequency division data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency dividing data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the interrupt request timing.

  The first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sound source IC 418, and the sound source IC 418 is provided with speakers 272 and 277 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifiers and speakers 272 and 277 in accordance with a command from the CPU 404. The sound source IC 418 is connected to an S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored. The audio data acquired from the ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

  The first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 422, and various kinds of lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, bet button lamp, etc.) are connected to the drive circuit 422 via an input / output interface. (A lamp for causing the bet button 132 to emit light) and the like.

  Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with a shutter 163 via an output interface. The drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404. A sensor circuit 426 is provided, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interruption time.

  The first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 425, and a drive unit 427 that drives the bet button 132 up and down is connected to the drive circuit 425. The operation of the bet button 132 will be described in detail in the following <Bet button 132>.

  In addition, the CPU 404 transmits and receives signals to the second sub control unit 500 via the output interface. Second sub-control unit 500 performs various controls of effect device 160 including display control of effect image display device 157. The second sub-control unit 500 is configured by a plurality of control units such as a control unit that controls display of the liquid crystal display device 157 and a control unit that controls various driving devices for effects. Also good.

  The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and frequency 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub control unit 500, data for image display, and the like.

  The CPU 504 transmits the frequency division data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the interrupt request timing.

The second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.
<Main control unit main processing>

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal is input executes a main control unit main process according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306 after resetting by a reset interrupt.

  When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are made in step S101. In this initial setting, setting of a stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of interrupt prohibition, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, operation permission to the WDT 314, and initial setting Set the value. In step S103, medal insertion / start operation acceptance processing is executed. Here, it is checked whether or not a medal has been inserted, and the winning line display lamp 120 is turned on in response to the insertion of the medal. Note that when a re-win is won in the previous game, a process of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so that it is not necessary for the player to insert medals. Further, it is checked whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated. If there is an operation of the start lever 135, the process proceeds to step S104.

  In step S105, the number of inserted medals is determined and an effective winning line is determined. In step S107, the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is acquired. In step S109, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current gaming state, and an internal lottery is performed using this and the random value acquired in step S107. As a result of the internal lottery, when any winning combination (including an operating combination) is won internally, the flag of the winning combination is turned ON. In step S111, reel stop data is selected based on the internal lottery result.

  In step S113, rotation of all reels 110 to 112 is started. In step S115, the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be received. When any one of the stop buttons is pressed, the reel stop control in which one of the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the pressed stop button is selected in step S111. Stop based on data. When all the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S117. In step S117, a winning determination is performed. Here, when a picture combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, it is determined that the winning combination is won. For example, if “bell-bell-bell” is aligned on the activated winning line, it is determined that the player has won the bell. In step S119, if any winning combination with payout is won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out according to the number of winning lines.

In step S121, game state control processing is performed. In the game state control process, a process related to transition of each game state of normal game, BB game, RB game, and internal winning game is performed, and the game state is shifted when those start conditions and end conditions are satisfied. Thus, one game is completed. Thereafter, returning to step S103 and repeating the above-described processing, the game proceeds.
<Main controller 300 timer interrupt processing>

  Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically changed to the initial value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) so that no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input ports of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and each of the various sensors 318 is partitioned in the RAM 308. Store in the provided signal state storage area. Further, when information indicating the presence of a detection signal is stored in the signal state storage area corresponding to the bet button 132, preparations for transmitting a bet button reception command to the first sub-control unit 400 are made.

  In step S207, various game processes are performed. Specifically, an interrupt status is acquired (various interrupt statuses are acquired based on signals from various sensors 318), and processing according to this status is performed (for example, the interrupt status of each acquired stop button 137 to 139). Based on the stop button reception process). In step S209, timer update processing is performed. Various timers are updated for each time unit.

  In step S211, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Note that the output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits in the present embodiment, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 11 -14 are command types (in this embodiment, basic command, start lever reception command, bet button reception command, production command accompanying production lottery processing, rotation start command accompanying the start of rotation of reels 110 to 112, stop button 137 through 139, a stop button acceptance command accompanying acceptance of the operation 139, a stop position information command accompanying the stop processing of the reels 110 to 112, a payout number command and a payout end command accompanying the medal payout processing, a command indicating a gaming state, etc.), bits 0 to 10 is composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type). To have.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined. In step S213, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to an information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334.

  In step S215, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence / absence of errors relating to medal insertion abnormality and medal payout abnormality is monitored. (Not shown) Error processing is executed. Further, according to the current gaming state, the medal selector 170 (medal blocker in which the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 operates), various lamps 338, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators are set.

  In step S217, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply shutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S221. When the low voltage signal is off (power supply shutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S219.

In step S219, various processes for ending the timer interrupt end process are performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register. Thereafter, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG. On the other hand, in step S221, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as a return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. Then, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.
<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is substituted into the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command is received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S307, processing corresponding to this command is performed. This process includes, for example, performing a process such as reading effect data from the ROM 406 and performing an effect data update process when the effect data needs to be updated.

  In step S311, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, if there is a command to the sound source IC 418 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 418. In step S313, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, if there is a command to the various lamps 420 in the effect data read out in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

  In step S315, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result in step S309. For example, if there is a command to the drive circuit 424 for the shutter 163 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 424. In step S316, a movable object control process is performed based on the process result of step S309. For example, if there is a command to the drive unit 427 of the bet button 132 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 425.

  In step S317, an information output process for performing setting to transmit a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the processing result of step S309 is performed. For example, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S309, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S303.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 243 (b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is performed by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle.

In step S501, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG. 243 (a), and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S502, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S315, an effect random number update process, and the like are performed.
<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>

  Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the image control process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step S601 in FIG. 6A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S601. In this initialization process, input / output port initialization, storage area initialization in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S605. In step S605, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S607, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command is received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S609, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S607, processing corresponding to this command is performed. This process includes, for example, performing a process such as reading effect data from the ROM 506 and performing an effect data update process when the effect data needs to be updated. In step S611, image control processing is performed based on the processing result in step S609. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S609, image control corresponding to this command is performed (details will be described later), and the process returns to step S603.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step S701 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle.

  In step S801, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S603 in the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 244 (a), and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S603, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S803, an effect random number update process is performed.

  Next, the image control process in step S611 in the main process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

  In step S901, an image data transfer instruction is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 536. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 536), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 534 based on the position information table, and then the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 536. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 534 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 536 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 534 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

  In step S903, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal is input from the VDP 534. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S905. If not, a transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S905, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 536 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 536 in step S901, the CPU 504 includes information on the image data constituting the display image (the coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 536). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to VDP 534. The VDP 534 performs parameter setting in accordance with the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S907, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 534 to start drawing an image. The VDP 534 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 504.

In step S909, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 534 is input based on the end of image drawing. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S911. Wait for input. In step S911, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.
<Bet button 132>

  245 (a) is an external perspective view of the periphery of the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is in the initial position, and FIG. 245 (b) is a state in which the bet button 132 has moved from the initial position to the operation completion position (operation). (B) is an external perspective view of the periphery of the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is in the operation completion position.

The bet button 132 has substantially the same structure as the chance button 700 provided in the pachinko machine 100, and the first sub-control unit 400 controls the drive unit 427, whereby the initial position shown in FIG. And an operation completion position shown in FIG. 245 (c) are configured to be movable up and down.
<Bet button 132 / initial position>

In the initial position shown in FIG. 25 (a), the movable part of the bet button 132 is in a state in which the upward movement is restricted by a rotating member (not shown) and can only move downward. In this initial position, when the bet button 132 is pressed downward by the player, a detection piece (not shown) of the bet button 132 is detected by the bet button 132 sensor. Can be detected.
<Bet button 132 / operation completion position>

In the operation completion position shown in FIG. 245 (c), the movable part of the bet button 132 is released from the restriction of the upward movement and is moved upward by the urging force of a spring (not shown), and the fixed plate (not shown) ), The movement in the upward direction is again restricted, and the movement is possible only in the downward direction. Even in this operation completion position, when the bet button 132 is pressed downward by the player, a detection piece (not shown) of the bet button 132 is detected by the bet button 132 sensor, whereby the bet button 132 is pressed. The operation can be detected.
<Bet button 132 / in operation>

  In the state shown in FIG. 245 (b), that is, during the operation in which the bet button 132 is moved from the initial position shown in FIG. 245 (a) to the operation completion position shown in FIG. 245 (c), the bet button 132 is played. So that the detection result of the bet button 132 sensor is ignored even if the detected piece of the bet button 132 is detected by the bet button 132 sensor (so as not to determine that the pressing operation of the bet button 132 is valid). It is composed.

With such a configuration, when the player accidentally presses the bet button 132 during the operation of the bet button 132, the press operation of the bet button 132 becomes effective at a timing unintended by the player. It may be possible to prevent such a situation. In the present embodiment, the operation of pressing the bet button 132 is ignored while the bet button 132 is operating. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation of pressing the bet button 132 is enabled. May be.
<When using the bet button 132 as a medal insertion button>

  FIG. 246 (a) is a diagram for explaining a state in which the bet button 132 can be used as a medal insertion button. The slot machine 100 is provided with the notification lamp 123, the re-game lamp 122, the game medal insertion enable lamp 124, the game start enable lamp 121, and the game medal insertion lamp 129 described above.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, the game medal insertion enabling lamp 124 is lit, and the number of lighting of the game medal insertion lamp 129 is less than the prescribed number of medals required for one game (3 in this example). The state is a state in which a player can start a game by inserting a specified number of medals, and a medal can be inserted electronically by pressing the bet button 132. That is, in this state, the bet button 132 can be used as a medal insertion button, and the first sub-control unit 400 turns on the bet button lamp (not shown) and sets the bet button 132 to a predetermined color (for example, yellow). ) To indicate to the player that the acceptance of the pressing operation of the bet button 132 is effective. When a prescribed number of medals are inserted by the player, as shown in FIG. 5B, the game start ready lamp 121 is turned on to notify that the game start operation is possible. The

The game medal insertion possible lamp 124 is turned off when the number of medals that can be electronically stored in the slot machine 100 reaches the maximum storage number (for example, 50), and it is notified that the medal cannot be inserted. . When medals are inserted while the game medal insertion possible lamp 124 is turned off (when medals exceeding the maximum number of stored medals are to be inserted), the medals are forcibly discharged from the medal outlet 155. It is composed.
<When the bet button 132 cannot be used>

  FIG. 246 (b) is a diagram for explaining a state in which the bet button 132 cannot be used as a medal insertion button. As shown in FIG. 5B, the game medal insertion enable lamp 124 and the game start enable lamp 121 are lit, and the number of the game medal insertion lamps 129 is the same as the prescribed number (3 in this example). In this state, the player can start the game, and can start the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 (start the game) by pressing the start lever 135.

  When the game start ready lamp 121 is lit, a predetermined number of medals have been inserted, so that no medals are inserted even if the bet button 132 is pressed (the detection result of pressing the medal insertion button is not accepted). , The bet button 132 cannot be used as a medal insertion button). In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to indicate to the player that the acceptance of the pressing operation of the bet button 132 is invalid by turning off the bet button lamp.

Even when the game start ready lamp is lit, the bet button 132 can be used as a chance button. For example, when the replay lamp 122 is lit, a medal cannot be inserted even if the bet button 132 is pressed. On the other hand, for example, an effect that prompts the user to press the bet button 132 as an effect between the game in which the re-game player wins and the start of the next game (until the start lever 135 is pressed and the reels 110 to 112 start rotating). May be performed. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to indicate to the player that acceptance of the pressing operation of the bet button 132 is valid by turning on the bet button lamp. The effect of prompting the user to press the bet button 132 may be performed during a period other than the illustrated period.
<When using the bet button 132 as a chance button>

  246 (c) is an external perspective view of the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is in the initial position, and FIG. 247 (a) is a case where the bet button 132 is moved from the initial position to the operation completion position (operation). The middle perspective view of the bet button 132, FIG. 247 (b) is an external perspective view of the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is in the operation completion position, and FIG. 247 (c) is the initial position of the bet button 132. It is an external appearance perspective view of the bet button 132 when it stops between the operation completion positions and (for example, when it breaks down).

FIG. 246 (d) is a diagram showing an example of an operation reception effect performed when the bet button 132 is in the initial position, and FIG. 247 (d) is a diagram showing an example of a normal effect. FIG. 247 (e) is a diagram showing an example of an operation reception effect performed when the bet button 132 is at the operation completion position, and FIG. 247 (g) is a diagram between the initial position and the operation completion position. It is the figure which showed an example of the operation reception effect performed when it stops at (for example, when it breaks down).
<Operation reception effect / initial position>

  When the first sub-control unit 400 stops the bet button 132 at the initial position shown in FIG. 246 (c), the first sub-control unit 400 has a predetermined timing (for example, timing to start receiving the detection result of the bet button press). The bet button lamp is lit and the bet button 132 emits light in a predetermined color (for example, blue) to indicate to the player that the pressing operation of the bet button 132 is effective, and the second sub-control unit 500 shows an operation reception effect (in this example, the character of the lord) that suggests to the player that the bet button 132 can be pressed using the effect image display device 157 as shown in FIG. Display an image showing a signboard on which a bet button 132 emitting blue light is drawn.

  In this example, in order to make the player easily determine whether the bet button 132 can be used as a medal insertion button or a chance button, the bet button 132 is lit in different colors. You may make it light-emit with a color. In this example, the bet button 132 is caused to emit light in a predetermined color. For example, the bet button 132 may be flashed in a predetermined color. In this case, the bet button 132 is used as a medal insertion button. The blinking pattern may be changed depending on when the bet button 132 is used as a chance button. For example, when used as a medal insertion button, blinking is repeated at a first period (for example, 1 second), and when used as a chance button, a second period (for example, 0. (5 seconds).

With such a configuration, the player can easily determine the function of the button, and can prevent a situation in which the player suffers a disadvantage due to a button operation error or the like. is there. When the detection result of the bet button press can be received, the bet button lamp does not have to be lit, the operation reception effect does not have to be performed, and the operation of the operation means (or operation unit) is prompted. There is no need to produce a performance.
<Operation reception production / in operation>

  The first sub-control unit 400 operates the bet button 132 as shown in FIG. 247 (a), that is, moves the bet button 132 from the initial position shown in FIG. 246 (c) to the operation completion position shown in FIG. 247 (b). In the case of moving to the position, the bet button lamp is not turned on, and the operation reception effect is not performed. In this example, the effect image display device 157 performs normal effects as shown in FIGS. 247 (d) and 248 (a). Here, as a normal effect, in the case of a pachinko machine, there are a fluctuating effect, a reach effect, a jackpot effect, and in the case of a slot machine, an effect during BB, an effect during reel rotation, There are directing.

Note that the bet button lamp may be turned on during operation, or the brightness of the bet button lamp may be gradually increased. Further, when the detection of the pressing operation is valid, the bet button lamp is lit in the first color (for example, red), and when the detection of the pressing operation is invalid, the bet button lamp is displayed in the second color (for example, white). It may be lit with. In addition, when the detection of the pressing operation is valid, the bet button lamp is lit at the first luminance, and when the detection of the pressing operation is invalid, the bet button lamp is lit at the second luminance lower than the first luminance. May be.
<Operation reception effect / operation completion position>

When the first sub-control unit 400 stops the bet button 132 at the operation completion position shown in FIG. 247 (b), the first sub-control unit 400 turns the bet button lamp at a predetermined timing as shown in FIG. 247 (b). Lights up and lights up the bet button 132 in a predetermined color (for example, red) to indicate to the player that the bet button 132 can be pressed, as shown in FIG. 247 (e). An operation display effect that suggests to the player that the bet button 132 can be pressed using the effect image display device 157 (in this example, an image display imitating the bet button 132 that emits red light at the operation completion position). And a downward arrow image display).
<Operation reception effect / Stop between initial position and operation completion position>

  Even when the bet button 132 as shown in FIG. 247 (c) stops between the initial position and the operation completion position, the first sub-control unit 400 can detect the pressing operation of the bet button 132 by the detection unit. Become. Here, when the bet button 132 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position, for example, when the movable part of the bet button 132 is caught by the fixed part and the movable part cannot be fully raised to the operation completion position, An example is the case where the urging force of the spring 132 is weakened and the movable part cannot be raised to the operation completion position.

  Further, even when the bet button 132 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position, the first sub-control unit 400 can be used as a medal insertion button and as a chance button, as shown in FIG. 247 (f). 247 (g) and 248 (b) at a predetermined timing, as shown in FIGS. 247 (g) and 248 (b), an operation reception effect that suggests to the player that the bet button 132 can be pressed (this example) Then, the operation reception effect (the same effect as the effect shown in FIG. 247 (e)) performed after the operation is completed is performed.

  Thus, even when the bet button 132 is in a position other than the initial position and the operation completion position, if the bet button 132 can be accepted, the bet button 132 can be operated even when the bet button 132 is broken. Therefore, the player's willingness to play is not reduced. Furthermore, by performing the operation reception effect, it is possible to clearly notify that the operation is possible even when the bet button 132 is in a position other than the initial position and the operation completion position, and prompt the player to operate. it can.

  FIG. 248 (c) shows an example of a special effect displayed when an operation on the bet button 132 is accepted. This effect is not only when the bet button 132 is in the operation completion position and the operation of the bet button 132 is accepted at that position, but also when the bet button 132 is in a position other than the initial position and the operation completion position. This is a special effect that is also displayed when an operation of the bet button 132 is received at the position. It should be noted that even if the button is not pressed, it may be displayed after a certain period of time (for example, after the end of the period during which the button can be accepted). (The operation pattern may be changed), light emitting means such as LEDs are lit (the light emission pattern may be changed), and sounds such as BGM and sound effects can be heard from sound output means such as speakers. Also good.

  In addition, the gaming table according to the first embodiment is provided with operation means (for example, chance buttons 700 and 750, a first operation unit 756, a second operation unit 758, and a bet button 132 provided at positions where the player can operate. , And a pressing surface of these buttons and operation unit), a display unit (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing at least display, and a state capable of executing at least state control for changing the state of the operation unit And a control unit (for example, a second sub-control unit 500), wherein the operation unit is in a first protruding state when the state control is performed by the state control unit. (For example, the initial position shown in FIGS. 232 (a), 234 (a), 235 (a), and 245 (a)) from the second protruding state (for example, FIGS. 232 (c) and 234 (c) ), FIG. 235 ( ), The operation completion position shown in FIG. 245 (c), and the operating means in the second protruding state protrudes more than the operating means in the first protruding state. And the display means is capable of executing a first display that prompts the player to operate the operation means in the first protruding state, and the display means is in the second protruding state. A second display prompting the player to operate the operation means can be executed, and the first display can at least indicate that the operation means is in the first protruding state. The second display is capable of at least indicating that the operation means is in the second protruding state, and the display means is configured to perform the operation in the second protruding state. If the instrument is operated, the third display Regardless of whether or not the operating means has changed to the second protruding state by execution of the state control, the first display is not related to the execution of the state control. The second display is configured to be displayed on the display unit, and the display unit changes the operation unit to the second projecting state even though the state control is executed. Even if it is not, it is possible to start at least the third display (for example, the effect at the time of pressing the button shown in FIG. 248 (c)) in response to the operation of the operation means. This is a game table characterized by that.

  According to the gaming table according to the present embodiment, even when the operation means does not change to the second protruding state that should be changed due to a failure of the operation means, the player is notified by prompting the operation. In addition to being able to operate the operation unit with peace of mind, it may be possible to prevent the player from missing an opportunity to operate. For this reason, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player's willingness to play declines due to a failure of the operating means, and the interest of the game may be improved. Further, when prompting the operation of the operating means in the normal state due to the failure of the operating means, etc., from the first protruding state to the second protruding state, the first protruding state to the second protruding state It may be possible to notify the player that there is a possibility of a machine failure by notifying the operation of the operating means in a special state due to the state control being performed. , There are cases where it can be suggested that the player is not overly expected.

Note that the display means changes to the first projecting state (the projecting means is not projecting more than the operation means in the second projecting state) even though the state control is executed. Even if it is not, it may be possible to start at least the third display in response to the operation means being operated.
<Other embodiments>

Next, a pachinko machine according to another embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 249 to 270. In addition, in order to avoid redundant description, the same content as other embodiments other than this embodiment is attached | subjected with the same code | symbol in drawing, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. In addition, the reference numerals in the drawings referred to in the present embodiment are used only in the description of the present embodiment in principle, and even when the same reference numerals are used in the drawings referred to in other embodiments, In the description of this embodiment, the reference numerals used in FIGS. 249 to 270 are given priority.
<High probability table for success / failure determination>

  FIG. 249 (a) is an example of a high / bad determination probability table used for determining whether or not the special figure 1 (or special figure 2) is true when the special figure probability is in the special figure high probability state.

  The high / bad determination high probability table is one of data tables stored in advance in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In this success / failure determination high probability table, a numerical range of random values from 0 to 65535 and a success / failure result of FIG. 1 (or FIG. 2) are associated with each other.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 refers to the high probability table for success / failure determination when the special figure probability is in the special figure high probability state, and based on the special figure winning random number value acquired at a predetermined timing. Whether or not the figure variation game is won (big hit), the special figure variable game is won (small hit), or the wrong choice (losing) is determined. Determination).

  For example, when the special figure probability is in the special figure high probability state and the acquired special figure winning random number value is in the range of 10001 to 11638, it is determined that the special figure variable game is won (big hit) and is provided in the RAM 308. Information indicating that the jackpot flag is stored is set in the jackpot flag storage area (hereinafter, setting the jackpot information in the jackpot flag storage area is referred to as “turning on the jackpot flag”). Further, when the special figure probability is in the special figure high probability state and the acquired special figure winning random number value is in a numerical range of 11639 to 11940, it is determined that the special figure variable game is won (small hit) and provided in the RAM 308. In addition, information indicating that a small hit is stored in the storage area for the small hit flag is set (hereinafter, setting the small hit information in the small hit flag storage area is referred to as “setting the small hit flag on”).

On the other hand, when the special figure probability is in the special figure high probability state, if the acquired special figure winning random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 10000, or 11941 to 65535, it is determined that the special figure variation game is lost, Information indicating that a loss occurs in the storage area for the big hit flag and the small hit flag described above (hereinafter, setting the information on the loss in the storage area for the big hit flag is referred to as “setting the big hit flag off”) Setting the loss information in the small hit flag storage area is referred to as “setting the small hit flag off”). Needless to say, the numerical value range of the random number is not limited to the numerical value range shown in this example (the same applies to other tables described below).
<Low probability table for success / failure determination>

  FIG. 249 (b) is an example of a low / probability determination table for use in determining whether or not special figure 1 (or special figure 2) is correct when the special figure probability is in a special figure low probability state.

  The failure determination low probability table is one of data tables stored in advance in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In this low / probability determination probability table, a numerical range of random values from 0 to 65535 is associated with a result of special figure 1 (or special figure 2).

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 refers to this success / failure determination low probability table when the special figure probability is in a special figure low probability state, and based on the special figure winning random number value acquired at a predetermined timing. Whether or not the figure variation game is won (big hit), the special figure variable game is won (small hit), or the wrong choice (losing) is determined. Determination).

For example, when the special figure probability is in the special figure low probability state and the acquired special figure winning random number value is in the range of 10001 to 10162, it is determined that the special figure variable game is won (big hit) and the big hit flag is turned on Set to. Further, when the special figure probability is in the special figure low probability state and the acquired special figure winning random number value is in a numerical range of 10163 to 10464, it is determined that the special figure variable game is won (small hit) and the small hit flag Set to on. On the other hand, when the special figure probability is in the special figure low probability state, if the acquired special figure winning random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 10000 or 10465 to 65535, it is determined that the special figure fluctuation game is lost, Set the big hit flag and the small hit flag off.
<Special figure determination table>

  FIG. 249 (c) is an example of a special figure determination table for determining the stop symbol of special figure 1 (or special figure 2).

  The special figure determination table is one of data tables stored in advance in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In the special figure determination table, the results of the big hit determination and the small hit determination of the above special figure (special figure determination result), the numerical range of random values from 0 to 99, and the above FIG. 225 (a). The type of stop symbol of the special figure 1 (or special figure 2) described above is associated.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table, the above jackpot determination result (the value of the big hit flag), the small hit determination result (the value of the small hit flag), and the acquired symbol random number value. Based on this, a “special symbol design lottery” for determining the type of the special symbol stop symbol is performed. When the big hit flag is on, the obtained big hit symbol random number value is used as the symbol random number value, and when the big hit flag is on, the small bonus symbol generated from the above special figure winning random number value is used. Use the random number value as a design random number value, and when the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off (when the big hit judgment result and the small hit judgment result are lost), use the acquired lost design random number value as the design random number value. To do.

  For example, when the big hit flag is on (when the determination result is a big hit), the special figure A is selected and acquired when the acquired symbol random value is 0 to 49 (that is, with a probability of 50/100). The special figure B is selected when the random number value is 50 to 69 (that is, with a probability of 20/100), and when the random number value that is acquired is 70 to 77 (that is, with a probability of 8/100). When the special symbol C is selected, the special symbol D is selected when the acquired symbol random value is 78 to 83 (that is, with a probability of 6/100), and when the acquired symbol random value is 84 to 91 (that is, The special figure E is selected (with a probability of 8/100), and the special figure F is selected when the acquired symbol random number value is 92 to 99 (that is, with a probability of 8/100).

In addition, when the small hit flag is on (when the determination result is a small hit), the special figure G is selected when the acquired symbol random number is 0 to 49 (that is, with a probability of 50/100). When the acquired symbol random number value is 50 to 99 (that is, with a probability of 50/100), the special symbol H is selected. In addition, when the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off (when the determination result is lost), when the acquired symbol random number is 0 to 49 (that is, with a probability of 50/100) Select and select the special figure J when the acquired symbol random number value is 50 to 99 (that is, with a probability of 50/100).
<Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Display Time Determination Table>

  FIG. 250 (a) is an example of the special figure 1 variable display time determination table used for determining the variable time of special figure 1 in the variable time lottery of special figure prefetching processing to be described later.

  The special figure 1 variable display time determination table is one of the data tables stored in advance in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. The special figure 1 fluctuation display time determination table includes the types of the stop symbols of the special figure 1 described above, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1, a numerical value range of random numbers from 0 to 65535, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 1. A mode of effect (hereinafter, also referred to as “variation pattern”) performed using the decorative symbol display device 208 is associated with a table number. In this example, since the variation time and the variation pattern have a one-to-one correspondence relationship, a special data table in which the variation time and the variation pattern are associated with each other is provided. Only one of the variation time and the variation pattern may be stored.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 uses the special figure 1 variable display time determination table and the random number value acquired at a predetermined timing to produce the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208. (Fluctuation pattern) and “Special Figure 1 Variation Time Lottery” for determining the table number.

  For example, when the stop symbol type of special figure 1 is special figure A or special figure B, the fluctuation time is 15000 ms when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 1000, regardless of the presence or absence of electric support. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the normal appearance per normal reach and the table number 1 are selected as table numbers. When the obtained random number value is in the numerical range of 1001 to 20000, the variation time is 45000 ms. Table 1 is selected as the table number for each reach A as the production mode, and when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 20001 to 65535, the variation time is 65000 ms, and the reach B as the production mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 Each table 1 is selected as the table number. Further, when the type of the stop symbol of special figure 1 is special figure C to special figure H, the variation mode is 12000 ms regardless of the presence or absence of the electric support and the acquired random number value, and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 As a result, all chance chances are extinguished, and table 2 is selected as the table number.

  In addition, when the type of the stop symbol of special figure 1 is special figure I or special figure J, there is no electric support, and the special figure 1 variable game hold number is 3, the obtained random number value is 0-65000. When the numerical range is selected, the variation time is 3000 ms, the shortened loss is selected as the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the table 3 is selected as the table number, and the obtained random number is within the numerical range of 65001 to 65400. 10000 ms as the time, normal reach loss as the production mode on the decorative symbol display device 208, and table 3 as the table number are selected. Reach A losing is selected as the production mode on the device 208, and Table 3 is selected as the table number. When the obtained random number is a number range of 65,501 to 65536, 60000ms as varying time, the decorative pattern display device 208 in the representation embodiment as Reach B loss, selects respectively the table 3 as the table number.

Also, if the type of the stop symbol of Special Figure 1 is Special Figure I or Special Figure J, there is no electric support and the number of suspensions of Special Figure 1 variable game is 0 to 2, or the stop symbol of Special Figure 1 If the type is special figure I or special figure J, with electric support, and the special figure 1 variable game hold number is 0-3, the fluctuation will occur when the obtained random number value is in the numerical range of 0-50000 8000 ms as the time, selection of loss as the rendering mode on the decorative symbol display device 208, and table 4 as the table number, and the obtained random number value within the numerical range of 50001 to 60000, the variable time is 10,000 ms, the decorative symbol display device Normal reach losing is selected as the production mode at 208, and Table 4 is selected as the table number. ms, reach A loss as an effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208, and table 4 as the table number, respectively. Reach B lose is selected as the production mode at 208, and Table 4 is selected as the table number.
<Special Figure 2 Variable Display Time Determination Table>

  FIG. 250 (b) is an example of a special figure 2 variable display time determination table used for determining the variable time of special figure 2 in the variable time lottery of special figure prefetching processing to be described later.

  The special figure 2 variable display time determination table is one of the data tables stored in advance in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In this special figure 2 fluctuation display time determination table, together with the types of stop symbols of special figure 2 described above, the fluctuation time of special figure 2, the numerical value range of random values from 0 to 65535, and the fluctuation display of special figure 2 A mode of effect (variation pattern) performed using the decorative symbol display device 208 is associated with a table number. In this example, since the variation time and the variation pattern have a one-to-one correspondence relationship, a special data table in which the variation time and the variation pattern are associated with each other is provided. Only one of the variation time and the variation pattern may be stored.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 uses the special figure 2 variable display time determination table and the random number value acquired at a predetermined timing to produce the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208. (Fluctuation pattern) and “Special figure 2 fluctuation time lottery” for determining the table number are performed.

  For example, when the stop symbol type of special figure 2 is special figure A or special figure B, the fluctuation time is 15000 ms when the obtained random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 1000, regardless of the presence or absence of electric support. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the normal appearance per normal reach and the table number 5 are selected as table numbers. When the obtained random number value is in the numerical range of 1001 to 20000, the variation time is 45000 ms. Table 5 is selected as the table number for each reach A as the production mode, and when the obtained random number value is in the numerical range of 20001 to 65535, the variation time is 65000 ms, and the reach B as the production mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 Each table 5 is selected as a table number. Further, when the type of the stop symbol of Special Figure 2 is Special Figure C to Special Figure H, the variation time is 12000 ms regardless of the presence or absence of the electric support and the acquired random value, and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 As a table number, and the table 6 is selected as the table number.

  In addition, when the special symbol I or special symbol J is a special symbol I or special symbol J, and there is an electric support, and the special figure 2 variable game hold number is 1 to 3, regardless of the obtained random number value. Then, 1500 ms is selected as the variation time, ultra-shortened lose is selected as the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208, and table 7 is selected as the table number. In addition, if the special symbol I or special symbol J is a special symbol I or special symbol J, and there is an electric support, and the special figure 2 variable game hold number is 0, it will change regardless of the acquired random number value. 8000 ms is selected as the time, loss is selected as the effect form on the decorative symbol display device 208, and table 8 is selected as the table number.

In addition, when the type of the stop symbol of special figure 2 is special figure I or special figure J, there is no electric support, and the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games is 0 to 3, the obtained random number value is 0 to 0. When the numerical value range is 50000, the variation time is 8000 ms, the display mode 208 is the display mode, the loss is selected, and the table number 9 is selected as the table number. When the obtained random number value is the numerical range of 50001 to 60000, When the variation time is 10000 ms, normal reach loss is selected as the production mode on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the table 9 is selected as the table number. When the acquired random number value is in the numerical value range of 60001 to 65000, the variation time is 40000 ms, Reach A losing is selected as the presentation mode on the display device 208, and Table 9 is selected as the table number When the obtained random number is a number range of from 65001 to 65536, 60000ms as varying time, the decorative pattern display device 208 in the representation embodiment as Reach B loss, selects respectively the table 9 as the table number.
<Pending change notice lottery table>

  FIG. 251 (a) is an example of a hold change notice lottery table used to determine the mode of hold change in “hold change lottery process” of the start side winning side sub-prefetch notice execution process described later. FIG. (B) is a diagram showing an example of a mode of change in hold.

  The pending change advance notice lottery table is one of the data tables stored in advance in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400. This pending change notice lottery table includes the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 (or special figure 2) determined in the special figure 1 fluctuation time lottery (or special figure 2 fluctuation time lottery) and the special figure 1 (or special figure). A mode of variation (variation pattern) performed using the decorative symbol display device 208 together with the variation display of FIG. 2, the numerical value range of random values from 0 to 99, and the variation mode of the hold are associated.

  The basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 uses the hold change notice lottery table and a predetermined timing (for example, in the case of FIG. 1, the timing at which the ball wins the first special figure starting port 230, the special figure. In the case of 2, a “holding change lottery process” is performed to determine the mode of the holding change based on the random value acquired at the timing when the ball wins the second special figure starting port 232).

  For example, the variation time of the special figure 1 (or special figure 2) determined in the special figure 1 variable time lottery (or special figure 2 variable time lottery) described above is 10,000 ms, and the effect on the decorative symbol display device 208 is normal reach. In the case of losing, select “no change” when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 89, and select “hold A (爺)” when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 90 to 99. select. In addition, the variation time of the special figure 1 (or special figure 2) determined in the special figure 1 fluctuation time lottery (or special figure 2 fluctuation time lottery) is 40000 ms, and the effect on the decorative symbol display device 208 is reach. In the case of A loss, when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 39, “no change” is selected, and when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 40 to 79, “hold A (爺)”. Is selected, and “Hold B” is selected when the obtained random number value is in the numerical range of 80 to 99.

  In addition, the variation time of the special figure 1 (or special figure 2) determined in the special figure 1 variable time lottery (or special figure 2 variable time lottery) described above is 60000 ms, and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is reach. In the case of B loss, select “No change” when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 29, and select “Reserved A” when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 30 to 79. When the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 80 to 95, “hold B” is selected, and when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 96 to 99, “movable body” is selected. In addition, when other variable time (in this embodiment, 15000 ms, 45000 ms, 65000 ms) is selected in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variable time lottery (or special figure 2 variable time lottery), the same table is used. A lottery is performed to determine the mode of pending change.

  In the pending change notice lottery table of this example, the “movable body” is selected in the pending change lottery process because the fluctuation time is 60000 ms (the fluctuation pattern is reach B loss) or the fluctuation time is 65000 ms (the fluctuation pattern is reach). Therefore, when the effect movable body 224 is actuated at the time of the on-hold change, it is determined that the variation pattern is reach B loss or reach B. In addition, “holding B” is selected in the lottery process for holding change because the fluctuation time is 40000 ms (the fluctuation pattern is reach A loss), the fluctuation time is 60000 ms (the fluctuation pattern is reach B loss), and the fluctuation time is 45000 ms (fluctuation). Since the pattern is only per reach A) or the fluctuation time is 65000 ms (the fluctuation pattern is per reach B), when the hold icon of hold B is displayed during the hold change, the change pattern is It is determined that there is a reach A miss, a reach B lose, a reach A, or a reach B.

  When “no change” is selected in the hold change lottery process, control is performed so as not to change the hold mode when the hold icon is moved, increased, or changed. For example, when moving the normal hold icon, the movement is performed in the normal hold mode, and when moving the hold A hold icon, the movement is performed in the hold A mode.

  When either “hold A” or “hold B” is selected, control for changing the hold mode is performed when the hold icon is moved, increased, or changed. For example, when “hold A” is selected when moving the normal hold icon, the control to move while changing the normal hold mode to the hold A mode or the normal hold mode has been completed. Immediately after performing control etc. to change the normal hold to the hold A mode, and selecting “hold B” when moving the normal hold icon, the normal hold mode is changed to the hold B mode. The control is performed such that the normal hold is changed to the hold B mode immediately after the movement in the normal hold mode is completed.

Further, when “movable body” is selected, control is performed to activate the effect movable body 224 when the hold icon is moved, increased, or changed. For example, when the “movable body” is selected when increasing the hold icon of the hold A, the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 244 is rotated upward in accordance with the increase of the hold icon of the hold A, When the “movable body” is selected when the hold icon of the hold B is moved, a control for rotating the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 244 downward in accordance with the movement of the hold icon of the hold B is performed.
<Leach A directing character lottery table>

  FIG. 252 (a) is an example of a reach A effect character lottery table used to determine a character image used for the effect in the effect character lottery of the effect lottery process 1 to be described later. It is the figure which showed an example of the character image.

  The reach character effect character lottery table is one of the data tables stored in advance in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400. In this reach A effect character lottery table, the variation time of the special figure 1 (or special figure 2) determined in the special figure 1 variable time lottery (or special figure 2 variable time lottery) described above and the decorative symbol display device A mode of effect (variation pattern) performed using 208, a numerical value range of random values from 0 to 99, and a character image type are associated with each other. The basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 performs “effect character lottery” for determining a character image based on this reach A effect character lottery table and a random value acquired at a predetermined timing.

  For example, the variation time of the special figure 1 (or special figure 2) determined in the above special figure 1 fluctuation time lottery (or special figure 2 fluctuation time lottery) is 40000 ms, and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is reach. In the case of A lose, “Character A” is selected when the acquired random number is in the numerical range of 0 to 79, and “Character B” is selected when the acquired random number is in the numerical range of 80 to 96. When the obtained random number value is in the range of 97 to 99, “Character C” is selected. Further, the variation time of the special figure 1 (or special figure 2) determined in the special figure 1 fluctuation time lottery (or special figure 2 fluctuation time lottery) is 45000 ms, and the effect on the decorative symbol display device 208 is reached. For A, select “Character A” when the acquired random number is in the numerical range of 0 to 29, and select “Character B” when the acquired random number is in the numerical range of 30 to 59. When the obtained random number value is in the numerical range of 60 to 99, “Character C” is selected.

  In the reach character drawing table at the time of reach A, the winning probability that character A wins in the case of reach A loss (in this example), rather than the winning probability that character A wins in the case of reach A (30/100 in this example) 80/100) is set high, and therefore, reach A loser is more likely to appear in the production than reach A. In other words, when character A appears in the production, the possibility of reach A loss is higher than per reach A. Also, the winning probability (40/100 in this example) that character C wins per reach A is set higher than the winning probability (3/100 in this example) that character C wins in the case of reach A loss. Therefore, it is more likely that the character C will appear in the direction of reach A than reach A lose. In other words, when the character C appears in the production, the possibility per reach A is higher than the reach A loss. Therefore, when the character C appears in the production, the player's expectation can be enhanced.

When “Character A” is selected in this effect character lottery, an effect is performed using Character A (in this example, a character image of a samurai) on the decorative symbol display device 208, and “Character B” is selected. Performs an effect using the character B (in this example, the character image of Sabohani) on the decorative design display device 208, and when “character C” is selected, the character C (in this example) is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. , An effect using a panda character image). Further, when the character A or the character B is selected in the effect character lottery, the state lottery described below is performed.
<Status lottery table>

  FIG. 252 (c) is an example of a state lottery table used to determine the state in the state lottery of the effect lottery process 1 described later.

  The state lottery table is one of data tables stored in advance in the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400. In this state lottery table, the type of the character (selected character) selected in the above-mentioned effect character lottery, the numerical range of random values from 0 to 99, and the state type of the chance button 700 are associated. . The basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 performs “state lottery” for determining the state of the chance button 700 based on the state lottery table and the random value acquired at a predetermined timing.

  For example, the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 determined by the above-described special figure 1 variable time lottery (or special figure 2 variable time lottery) is reach A lose, and the character image determined in the subsequent effect character lottery is In the case of character A, referring to the line of “character A (losing)”, when the acquired random number value is in the range of 0 to 2, the second state is selected as the state, and the acquired random value is When the numerical range is 3 to 99, the first state is selected as the state. Further, the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 determined by the above-described special figure 1 variable time lottery (or special figure 2 variable time lottery) is reach A lose, and the character image determined by the subsequent effect character lottery is In the case of character B, referring to the line of “character B (losing)”, when the acquired random number value is in the range of 0 to 1, the second state is selected as the state, and the acquired random value is When the numerical range is 2 to 99, the first state is selected as the state.

  Further, the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 determined in the above-described special figure 1 variable time lottery (or special figure 2 variable time lottery) is per reach A, and the character image determined in the subsequent effect character lottery is In the case of character A, referring to the line of “character A (per hit)”, when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 19, the second state is selected as the state, and the acquired random value is When the numerical range is 20 to 99, the first state is selected as the state. Further, the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 determined in the above-described special figure 1 variable time lottery (or special figure 2 variable time lottery) is per reach B, and the character image determined in the subsequent effect character lottery is In the case of character B, referring to the line of “character B (per hit)”, when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 49, the second state is selected as the state, and the acquired random value is When the numerical range is 50 to 99, the first state is selected as the state.

In the state lottery table of this example, the probability of selecting the first state when the selected character is character A (win) or character B (win) (in this example, character A (win) is 80/100, character B The probability of selecting the first state when the selected character is character A (losing) or character B (losing) (in this example, character A (losing) is 97/100, Character B (losing) is set higher than 98/100). That is, the chance button 700 is more likely to reach the first state when reach A is lost than per reach A.
<Normal design>

  FIG. 253 (a) shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. There are three kinds of stoppage display modes of the normal figure of the second embodiment: “normal figure A” which is a winning symbol 1, “common figure B” which is a winning symbol 2, and “normal figure C” which is a lost symbol. There is.

  When the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 detects that the sphere has passed through the general-purpose starting port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 is used to turn on all seven segments and one central one. Performs “variable display of usual map” that repeats lighting of the segment. In this example, the variable display time of the normal map is 20000 ms when the normal map has a low probability and 1000 ms when the normal map has a high probability.

Then, when notifying the winning of the normal figure variable game after the normal variable display time has elapsed, the “normal figure A (winning symbol 1)” or “normal figure B (winning symbol 2)” is stopped and displayed. In the case of notifying the loss of the figure variation game, “general figure C (lost symbol)” is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 253 (a), the white portions in the drawing indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.
<Ornamental design for normal design>

  FIG. 253 (b) shows an example of a decorative pattern for normal symbols. In the present embodiment, there are three types of “normal decoration 1” to “ordinary decoration 3” as decorative patterns for normal symbols, and these decorative symbols for normal symbols are “variable display of normal pattern decorative symbols” to be described later. Used in.

  When the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 detects that a sphere has passed through the universal drawing start port 228, the seven types of effect patterns P1 shown in FIG. One effect pattern is selected from -P7, and the "variable display of the usual decoration pattern" is performed to switch the display according to the selected effect pattern.

  Here, the production pattern P1 is displayed as a variation display of the general-purpose decorative pattern as follows: "General-purpose decoration 1-> General-purpose decoration 2-> General-purpose decoration 3-> General-purpose decoration 1-> General-purpose decoration 2-> General-purpose decoration 3-> ( Thereafter, the effect pattern is displayed in the order of “repeat”. The production pattern P2 is displayed as a variation display of the general-purpose decorative pattern as follows: "General-purpose decoration 2-> General-purpose decoration 2-> General-purpose decoration 2-> General-purpose decoration 2-> General-purpose decoration 2-> General-purpose decoration 3-> ) ”In the order of“) ”, which is a performance pattern in which the number of times of display of the ordinary figure decoration 2 per unit time is larger than that of the performance pattern P1, and the expectation of the long opening of the electric Chu described later is increased. . The effect pattern P3 is an effect pattern that is displayed in the order of “normal figure decoration 2 → normal figure decoration 2 → normal figure decoration 2 →... This is an effect pattern for notifying that the long opening of the electric chew has been confirmed by continuing to display the decoration 2.

  The effect pattern P4 is a variable display of the general-purpose decorative pattern: “General-purpose decoration 1 → General-purpose decoration 2 → General-purpose decoration 3 → Character display of“ heat ”(hereinafter sometimes referred to as P4 (heat)) → This is an effect pattern that displays in the order of figure decoration 1 → general decoration 2 → general decoration 3 → character display of “thermal” →... (Hereinafter repeated), and character display of “heat” is displayed on the effect pattern P1. In addition, it is an effect pattern in which the expectation degree of the long opening of the electric Chu is higher than the effect pattern P1. The effect pattern P5 is a character display of “general decoration 2 →“ A ”(hereinafter sometimes referred to as P5 (A)) → general decoration 2 → character display of“ B ”as a variation display of the general graphic decoration pattern. (Hereinafter, it may be referred to as P5 (B)) →... (Hereinafter, the character display portion is displayed in alphabetical order (C → D →...)) ”.

  The effect pattern P6 is an effect pattern that suddenly performs an electric type Chu release notification effect that suggests that the long release of the electric chew has been confirmed without displaying a normal decorative design. The effect pattern P7 is “character” of “chance” (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “P7 (chance)”) → display of an image simulating the appearance of the chance button 700 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “P7 (button)”) → general. The effect pattern is displayed in the order of “figure decoration 2”.

  The variation display of these decorative symbols for normal symbols is performed simultaneously with the general diagram variation display by the general diagram display device 210. However, in this embodiment, before the general diagram display device 210 stops displaying the general diagram at the low probability of the general diagram. It is configured to perform only for 5 seconds.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8C, when the winning of “general symbol A (winning symbol 1)” is notified after the change display of the normal symbol decorative symbol, the common symbol decoration shown in FIG. 1 is displayed in a stopped state, and when the winning of “general symbol B (winning symbol 2)” is notified after the variation display of the normal symbol decorative symbol, the general symbol ornament 2 shown in FIG. In the case of notifying the winning of “general symbol C (losing symbol)” after displaying the variation of the regular symbol decorative symbol, the general symbol ornament 3 shown in FIG. Then, when “Popular A (winning symbol 1)” is won, the electric Chu (second special drawing starting port 232) is opened once during a period of 300 ms. If the symbol 2) is selected, the electric Chu (second special figure starting port 232) is opened once during the 300 ms period, then closed during the 500 ms period, and opened once during the 5000 ms period. Control (long opening of electric Chu).
<Normal drawing system 1 execution availability lottery table>

  FIG. 254 (a) is a drawing of a lottery table for whether or not to execute the general drawing production system 1 used to determine whether or not to perform the advance notification of the general drawing production system 1 in the sub-announcement execution process at the time of starting the general fluctuation shown below. It is an example.

  The ordinary drawing system 1 execution availability lottery table is one of data tables stored in advance in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400. In this ordinary drawing effect system 1 execution availability lottery table, the types of ordinary drawings determined by the determination of whether or not to determine ordinary drawings, the numerical value range of random numbers from 0 to 99, and winning or not winning are associated. . The basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 uses the ordinary drawing production system 1 execution availability lottery table, the type of ordinary figure, and a predetermined timing (in this embodiment, the ordinary figure change start at the low probability of ordinary figure) (Occasionally) Based on the acquired random number value, the “normal drawing effect system 1 execution availability lottery” for determining whether or not to make a notice of the normal drawing effect system 1 is performed.

For example, in the case where the result of determining whether or not the normal figure is successful is the normal figure B (winning symbol 2), it is determined that the winning is made regardless of the acquired random number value. In addition, when the result of the normal figure determination is a normal figure C (losing symbol), when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 9, it is determined to be winning and the acquired random value is 10 to 99. If it is in the numerical range of, it is determined that it is not winning.
<Normal drawing production system 1 lottery table>

  FIG. 254 (b) is an example of the general drawing production system 1 lottery table used for determining the production pattern of the general drawing production system 1 in the sub-announcement execution process at the beginning of the normal figure change described later.

  The ordinary drawing system 1 lottery table is one of data tables stored in advance in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400. In this ordinary drawing production system 1 lottery table, the types of ordinary drawings determined by the determination of whether or not the ordinary drawing is made, the numerical value range of random numbers from 0 to 99, and the production patterns of the ordinary drawing production system 1 are associated. ing. The basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400, when winning the above-mentioned general drawing production system 1 execution availability lottery, at a predetermined timing (this book) In the embodiment, based on the acquired random number value at the time of the start of the normal map change at the time of the low normal map probability, the “normal map effect system 1 lottery” for determining the effect pattern of the general map effect system 1 is performed.

  For example, in the case where the result of the normal figure determination is normal figure B (winning symbol 2), when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 19, P1 is selected as the effect pattern, and the acquired random value Is a numerical value range of 20 to 39, P2 is selected as the effect pattern, and when the acquired random number value is in the numerical value range of 40 to 85, P3 is selected as the effect pattern and the acquired random value is 86 to 90. P4 is selected as the production pattern in the numerical value range, and P5 is selected as the production pattern when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 91 to 94, and the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 95 to 98. When P6 is selected as the effect pattern, P7 is selected as the effect pattern when the acquired random number value is in the numerical value range of 99.

In addition, when the result of determining whether or not the normal figure is correct is the normal figure C (losing symbol), when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 94, P1 is selected as the effect pattern, and the acquired random value is When the numerical value range is 95 to 98, P2 is selected as the effect pattern, and when the acquired random number is 99, P4 is selected as the effect pattern, while P3, P5, P6, and P7 are selected as the effect patterns. There is nothing to do. Accordingly, when any of P3, P5, P6, and P7 is selected as the production pattern, the result of the normal / unusual determination is not the normal figure C (losing symbol) but the normal figure B (winning symbol 2). It is confirmed that there is. For this reason, a player's expectation can be raised by performing the production | presentation by either of the production patterns P3, P5, P6, and P7.
<Normal drawing system 2 execution availability lottery table>

  FIG. 254 (c) is an example of a lottery table for whether or not to execute the ordinary drawing system 2 used to determine whether or not to perform the advance notice of the ordinary drawing system 2 in the effect lottery process 2 described later. In addition, in this embodiment, the general drawing effect system 2 is an effect that can be changed in the same manner as the effect including the contents relating to the opening of the electric chew, and as a result, the advance notice regarding the special figure changing game can be executed.

  The ordinary drawing system 2 execution availability lottery table is one of data tables stored in advance in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400. In the ordinary drawing production system 2 execution availability lottery table, the production mode (fluctuation pattern) on the decorative symbol display device 208 determined by the above special figure 1 fluctuation time lottery (or special figure 2 fluctuation time lottery) and , 0 to 99 are associated with a numerical range of random values and winning or not winning. The basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 starts the fluctuation of the ordinary drawing production system 2 execution availability lottery table, the fluctuation pattern, and a predetermined timing (in this embodiment, special figure 1 (or special figure 2). (Occasionally) Based on the acquired random number value, the “normal drawing effect system 2 execution availability lottery” for determining whether or not to make a notice of the normal drawing effect system 2 is performed.

  For example, when the variation pattern determined in the above special figure 1 fluctuation time lottery (or special figure 2 fluctuation time lottery) is reach A lose, when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 19, When it is determined that the winning is made and the acquired random number value is in a numerical range of 20 to 99, it is determined that the winning is not made. Further, when the variation pattern determined in the above special figure 1 fluctuation time lottery (or special figure 2 fluctuation time lottery) is reach B lose, when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 9, When it is determined that the winning is made and the obtained random number value is in a numerical range of 10 to 99, it is determined that the winning is not made.

  Further, when the variation pattern determined in the above special figure 1 fluctuation time lottery (or special figure 2 fluctuation time lottery) is per reach A, when the obtained random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 39, When it is determined to be winning and the obtained random number value is in a numerical range of 40 to 99, it is determined not to be winning. In addition, when the variation pattern determined in the above special figure 1 fluctuation time lottery (or special figure 2 fluctuation time lottery) is per reach B, when the obtained random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 49, It is determined that the winning is made, and when the acquired random number value is in a numerical range of 50 to 99, it is determined that the winning is not made.

In this example, the lottery table for whether or not to execute the normal drawing system 2 is the winning probability when the variation pattern is per reach A or reach B (in this example, 40/100 per reach A, 50/100 per reach B). Is set to be higher than the winning probability when the variation pattern is reach A lose or reach B lose (in this example, reach A lose is 20/100, reach B lose is 10/100). In other words, the ordinary drawing production system 2 is more likely to be executed per reach A or reach B than reach A loss or reach B loss. Therefore, the player's willingness to play can be enhanced by performing the ordinary drawing production system 2.
<Normal drawing production system 2 lottery table>

  FIG. 254 (d) is an example of the general drawing production system 2 lottery table used for determining the production pattern of the general drawing production system 2 in the production lottery processing 2 described later.

  The ordinary drawing system 2 lottery table is one of the data tables stored in advance in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400. In the ordinary drawing effect system 2 lottery table, “effect mode (variation pattern) on the decorative symbol display device 208” determined by the above-mentioned special figure 1 variable time lottery (or special figure 2 variable time lottery), A numerical range of random values from 0 to 99 and an effect pattern of the ordinary drawing effect system 2 are associated with each other. The basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400, when winning the above-mentioned general drawing production system 2 execution availability lottery, at a predetermined timing (this embodiment) Then, based on the random number value acquired at the time of starting the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (or special figure 2), the “normal drawing effect system 2 lottery” for determining the effect pattern of the normal figure effect system 2 is performed.

  For example, when the variation pattern determined in the above special figure 1 fluctuation time lottery (or special figure 2 fluctuation time lottery) is reach A lose, when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 19, When P4 (heat) is selected as the production pattern and the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 20 to 89, P5 (A) is selected as the production pattern and the acquired random value is in the numerical range of 90 to 99 Then, P7 (chance) is selected as the production pattern. Further, when the variation pattern determined in the above special figure 1 fluctuation time lottery (or special figure 2 fluctuation time lottery) is reach B lose, when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 9, When P4 (heat) is selected as the production pattern and the obtained random number value is in the numerical range of 10 to 59, P5 (B) is selected as the production pattern and the acquired random value is in the numerical range of 60 to 99 Then, P7 (button) is selected as an effect pattern.

  Further, when the variation pattern determined in the above special figure 1 fluctuation time lottery (or special figure 2 fluctuation time lottery) is per reach A, when the obtained random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 49, When P4 (heat) is selected as the production pattern and the acquired random value is in the numerical range of 50 to 89, P5 (A) is selected as the production pattern and the acquired random value is in the numerical range of 90 to 99 Then, P7 (chance) is selected as the production pattern. In addition, when the variation pattern determined in the above special figure 1 fluctuation time lottery (or special figure 2 fluctuation time lottery) is per reach B, when the obtained random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 49, When P4 (heat) is selected as the production pattern and the acquired random value is in the numerical range of 50 to 69, P5 (B) is selected as the production pattern and the acquired random value is in the numerical range of 70 to 99 Then, P7 (button) is selected as an effect pattern.

In the normal drawing production system 2 lottery table of this example, the probability of selecting P4 (heat) when the fluctuation pattern is per reach A or reach B (in this example, 50/100 per reach A, per reach B) 50/100) than the probability of selecting P4 (heat) when the variation pattern is reach A loss or reach B loss (in this example, reach A loss is 20/100, reach B loss is 10/100). It is set high. In other words, P4 (heat) of the ordinary drawing production system 2 is more likely to be executed per reach A or reach B than reach A loss or reach B loss. Further, P5 (B) and P7 (button) are not selected per reach A loss or reach A, and P5 (A) and P7 (chance) are selected per reach B loss or reach B. There is nothing.
<Special figure look-ahead processing>

  255 and 256 are flowcharts showing an example of the flow of special figure prefetching processing. The pachinko machine according to the second embodiment is configured to execute the special figure prefetch process immediately before the special figure 2 state update process (step S225) of the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. ing.

  In step S2001 of the special figure prefetching process, it is determined whether or not the electric support (ordinary high probability state) is in progress based on various flags in the RAM 308. If it is determined that the electric support is in progress, step S2002 is executed. If it is determined that the electric support is not being performed, the process proceeds to step S2009. In step S2002, the value in the winning ball number storage area in the RAM 308 is referred to determine whether or not there is a winning at the second special figure starting port 232. If there is a winning, the process proceeds to step S2003 and no winning is made. In the case of, the process ends.

  In step S2003, the special figure 2 starting information (a combination of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value) is increased when the number of special figure 2 variable games held is a predetermined number (for example, 4) or less. Prior to the success / failure determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), the special figure 2 random value storage area is prefetched.

  In step S2003, the pre-read special figure 2 starting information, the high / bad determination high probability table (or low probability table for determination) used for the big hit determination (or small hit determination), and the special symbol drawing lottery used. Using the figure determination table, the special figure 2 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is preliminarily determined before the success / failure determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229).

  As a result of the prior determination, if the special symbol 2 variable game stop symbol is a big hit, the process proceeds to step S2004 to determine the big hit symbol (saves the big hit symbol pre-determined result) and then proceeds to step S2008. Advances to step S2005. As a result of the prior determination in step S2005, if the special symbol 2 variable game stop symbol is a small hit, the process proceeds to step S2006 to determine the small hit symbol (save the preliminary determination result of the small hit symbol), and then to step S2008 If NO in step S2007, the flow advances to step S2007. In step S2007, after losing symbols are determined (preliminary determination results of losing symbols are stored), the process proceeds to step S2008.

  In step S2008, a special figure 2 variable time lottery is performed using the stop pattern of the special figure 2 determined in advance and the above-described special figure 2 variable display time determination table, and after the variable time of the special figure 2 is determined, the processing is performed. finish. In step S2008, the first sub-control unit 400 is prepared to transmit a pre-read notice execution command including information on the variation time in FIG. The command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in the command setting transmission process (step S233) described above.

  In step S2009, the value in the winning ball number storage area in the RAM 308 is referred to determine whether or not there is a winning at the first special figure starting port 230. If there is a winning, the process proceeds to step S2010 and there is no winning. In the case of, the process ends. In step S2010, the increased special figure 1 starting information (special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random value set) is processed before the success determination process in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231). FIG. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area.

  Further, in step S2010, when the number of special figure 1 variable games held is equal to or less than a predetermined number (for example, 4), the pre-read special figure 1 start information and the success / failure determination used for the big hit determination (or the small hit determination) are used. Using the high probability table (or the low probability table for success / failure determination) and the special figure determination table used for the special figure symbol lottery, the special figure 1 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is designated as the special figure 1 lottery. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S231).

  As a result of the prior determination, if the special symbol 1 variable game stop symbol is a big hit, the process proceeds to step S2011 to determine the big hit symbol (save the preliminary determination result of the big hit symbol), and then proceeds to step S2015. Advances to step S2012. As a result of the prior determination in step S2012, if the special symbol 1 variable game stop symbol is a small hit, the process proceeds to step S2013 to determine the small hit symbol (save the preliminary determination result of the small hit symbol), and then to step S2015. If NO in step S2014, the flow advances to step S2014. In step S2014, after losing symbols are determined (preliminary determination results of losing symbols are stored), the process proceeds to step S2015.

In step S2015, the pre-determined stop pattern of special figure 1 and the special figure 1 variable display time determination table described above are used to draw the variable time lottery of special figure 1, and after the variable time of special figure 1 is determined, Exit. In step S2015, the first sub-control unit 400 is prepared to transmit a prefetching notice execution command including information on the variation time in FIG. The command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in the command setting transmission process (step S233) described above.
<Sub-side pre-reading notice execution process at start-up prize>

  FIG. 257 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the flow of the sub-side pre-reading notice execution process at the time of starting winning a prize. In the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment, whether or not a prefetch notice execution command is received from the main control unit 300 in the first sub control unit main interrupt process shown in FIG. 228 is received, and the command is received. In this case, the start side winning side sub-side pre-reading notice execution process is executed.

  In step S2101 of the sub-side pre-reading notice execution process at the start winning prize, it is determined whether the pre-reading execution flag stored in the RAM 408 is on or off. If it is off (if no pre-reading notice is being executed), step S2102 is performed. If it is on (when pre-reading notice is being executed), the process proceeds to step S2107.

  In step S2102, referring to the fluctuation time information of special figure 1 (or special figure 2) included in the pre-reading notice execution command, the fluctuation time is a predetermined fluctuation time (in this embodiment, the above-mentioned FIG. 251 (a)). It is determined whether or not the change time included in the pending change notice lottery table is 10,000 ms, 40000 ms, 60000 ms, 15000 ms, 45000 ms, or 65000 ms. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S2103, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2107.

  In step S2103, a pending change lottery process using the above-described pending change notice lottery table is performed. In step S2104, it is determined whether or not the lottery has been won. If the lottery is won, the process proceeds to step S2105. If the lottery is not won, the process proceeds to step S2107.

In step S2105, a predetermined number is set as the number of pre-reading notices stored in the RAM 408. In the next step S2106, the pre-reading execution flag is set to ON, and the process proceeds to step S2107. In step S2107, the second sub control unit 500 is prepared to transmit a hold command, and then the process ends. The command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the information transmission process (step S321) described above.
<Execution processing for sub-side notice at start of change>

  FIG. 258 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a flow of execution processing such as a sub-side notice at the start of change. In the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment, whether or not a special figure variation start command is received from the main control unit 300 in the first sub-control unit main interrupt process shown in FIG. 228 is received and received. In this case, it is configured to execute the execution process such as the sub-side notice at the start of change.

  Here, the special figure change start command is a command transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 at the start of the special figure change. Information on the value, special figure stop symbol, variation time, variation pattern, and the like are included. In the change start sub-notice execution processing and the like, the information included in the received special figure change start command is stored in the RAM 408. Note that the information included in the special figure change start command is not limited to this example. For example, the change pattern is not transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 changes the information. The determination described later using the pattern may be performed using the variation time.

  In step S2201 of the execution process of the sub-side notice at the start of change, it is determined whether the pre-reading execution flag is on or off. If it is off, the process proceeds to step S2205. If it is on, the process proceeds to step S2202. In step S2202, the above-mentioned number of pre-reading notice executions is subtracted by 1, and in the next step S2203, it is determined whether the number of pre-reading notice executions after subtraction is zero. As a result of the determination, if the number of pre-read notice executions is 0, the process proceeds to step S2204; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S2205.

In step S2204, the pre-reading execution flag is set to OFF, and the process proceeds to step S2205. In step S2205, after the effect lottery process 1 (details will be described later) is executed, the process proceeds to step S2206.
<Direction lottery process 1>

  FIG. 259 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the effect lottery process 1 (step S2205) in the above-described change start sub-side notice execution process.

  In step S2301, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern stored in the RAM 408 is reach B (reach B lose or per reach B). If applicable, the process proceeds to step S2302, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2302. The process proceeds to step S2303. In step S2302, after preparing to transmit the button effect command to be in the second state to the second sub-control unit 500, the process ends. As described above, when reach B loss or reach B is selected as the variation pattern, the advance notice of the second state is always executed (details will be described later). For this reason, the notice of the second state functions as a notice suggesting that the reach B (reach B lose or per reach B) has been confirmed.

  In step S2303, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern is reach A (reach A lose or per reach A). If applicable, the process proceeds to step S2304, and if not, the process ends. In step S2304, an effect character lottery is performed using the above-described reach A effect character lottery table. In the next step S2305, it is determined whether or not the result of the effect character lottery is character C (panda).

  As a result of the determination, if character C (panda) is selected, the process proceeds to step S2306; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S2307. In step S2306, the second sub control unit 500 is prepared to transmit a button effect command that is in the second state, and then the process ends. As described above, when the character C (panda) is selected in the effect character lottery, the advance notice of the first stop mode is always executed (details will be described later).

In step S2307, the state lottery using the above-described state lottery table is performed, and in the next step S2308, it is determined whether or not the state lottery is not won. As a result of the determination, in the case of winning, the process proceeds to step S2306 described above, and after the preparation for transmitting the button effect command to be in the second state is made to the second sub-control unit 500, the process ends. On the other hand, in the case of non-winning, the process proceeds to step S2309, and after the preparation for transmitting the button effect command to be in the first state is made to the second sub-control unit 500, the process is ended.
<Direction lottery process 2>

  FIG. 260 (a) is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the effect lottery process 2 (step S2206) in the above-described change start time sub-side notice or the like execution process.

In step S2401, a general drawing production system 2 execution availability lottery table using the above-described normal drawing production system 2 execution availability lottery table is performed, and it is determined whether or not the lottery is won. As a result of the determination, if the lottery is won, the process proceeds to step S2402, and if the lottery is not won, the process is terminated. In step S2402, after performing the general drawing effect system 2 lottery using the above-mentioned general drawing effect system 2 lottery table, it progresses to step S2403. In step S2403, the process is ended after preparing to send the lottery result of the ordinary drawing effect system 2 lottery in step S2402 (the effect pattern of the ordinary drawing effect system 2) to the second sub-control unit 500.
<Sub-notice execution process at the start of normal map change>

  FIG. 260 (b) is a flowchart illustrating an example of the flow of the sub-side notice execution process at the start of normal fluctuation. In the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment, in the first sub-control unit main interrupt process shown in FIG. 228 described above, it is monitored whether or not the common variable start command is received from the main control unit 300, and the command is received. In this case, it is configured to execute the sub-side notice execution process at the start of the normal fluctuation.

  Here, the common figure change start command is a command transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 at the start of normal figure change, and the command includes information on a general figure stop symbol. It is. The usual change start sub-side notice execution process is configured to store the information included in the received normal change start command in the RAM 408.

In step S2501 of the sub-side notice execution process at the start of the normal map change, the general drawing effect system 1 execution availability lottery table using the above-described ordinary diagram effect system 1 execution availability lottery table is performed, and it is determined whether or not the lottery is won. To do. As a result of the determination, if the lottery is won, the process proceeds to step S2502, and if the lottery is not won, the process is terminated. In step S2502, after performing the general drawing production system 1 lottery using the above-mentioned general drawing production system 1 lottery table, the process proceeds to step S2503. In step S2503, after preparing to transmit the lottery result of the ordinary drawing effect system 1 lottery in step S2502 (the effect pattern of the ordinary drawing effect system 1) to the second sub-control unit 500, the process ends. Further, since the ordinary drawing production system 1 is mainly an announcement informing the long opening of the electric Chu, it is performed in the “sub-announcement execution process at the beginning of ordinary figure change”. On the other hand, since the ordinary drawing production system 2 is a notice regarding the special figure variable game, it is performed in the “execution process of the sub-side notice at the start of change”. It should be noted that any processing may be executed for the gusset effect (as a result, a pattern that does not open the electric chew or a pattern that is not expected to be announced).
<Operation reception production (reach A losing)>

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 261 and 262, an example of the operation reception effect when reach A loss is selected as the special pattern variation pattern will be described. In addition, the figure is a figure which showed the example of the effect when reach A loss is selected as a fluctuation pattern of a special figure in time series.

  In the following, for convenience of explanation, the special figure 1 variable game of the special figure variable game will be described, but a special figure 2 variable game may be applied instead of the special figure 1 variable game. Also, the special figure 1 variable game and the special figure 2 variable game may be executed simultaneously. In this case, the special figure 2 variable game may be given priority over the special figure 1 variable game.

  FIG. 261 (a) shows a state in which a special figure 1 variable game is being executed and one special figure 1 variable game is held. In this state, the main control unit 300 displays the variation of the special figure using the first special figure display device 212 (not shown), and lights one of the first special figure holding lamps 218 (not shown). Notify that the number of hold of one variable game is 1.

  In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 uses the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 in accordance with the variable symbol display. In addition, one circular image representing normal hold (usual hold icon) is displayed on a part of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, so that the number of hold of the special figure 1 variable game can be increased. 1 is informed. Further, the second sub-control unit 500 holds the chance button 700 at the initial position and accepts the pressing operation of the chance button 700 until it accepts the pressing operation of the chance button 700 in FIG. 261 (h) described later. Is prohibited.

  FIG. 261 (b) shows a state in which a ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 during execution of the special figure 1 variable game. In this state, the main control unit 300 continues to display the fluctuation of the special figure using the first special figure display device 212 (not shown), and lights two special figure reservation lamps 218 (not shown). FIG. 1 Notifies that the number of pending floating games has increased from 1 to 2.

  Further, when the main control unit 300 detects a winning (winning) of the first special figure starting port 230, the main control unit 300 receives a prize corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 in the above-described winning port counter updating process (step S215). In the steps S2010 to S2015 of the special figure prefetching process to be executed thereafter, the prefetching process of the special figure 1 is executed. Further, the main control unit 300 transmits a pre-reading notice execution command including information on the variation time in FIG. 1 to the first sub control unit 400. In this example, it is assumed that, as a result of the look-ahead process of Special Figure 1, the stop symbol of Special Figure 1 is “Special Figure I”, the fluctuation time is “40000 ms”, and the fluctuation pattern is “Reach A Loss”.

  The first sub-control unit 400 executes the above-mentioned start-side winning side sub-pre-reading notice execution process upon receiving the pre-reading notice execution command from the main control part 300. Is determined to be a predetermined variation time. In this example, since the fluctuation time of FIG. 1 is 40000 ms, the lottery process for the hold change in the subsequent step S2103 is performed. Here, “no change” is selected as the hold mode as a result of the lottery process for the hold change. Suppose that

  The first sub-control unit 400 continues to display the decorative symbols in a variable manner, and also displays a normal hold icon (hold corresponding to the first hold) displayed in a part of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. By displaying one new normal hold icon (hold icon corresponding to the second hold) on the right side of the icon), it is notified that the number of hold of the special figure 1 variable game is two.

  FIG. 261 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game which was being displayed in a variable manner at the timing of FIG. In this state, the main control unit 300 stops the variable display of the special figure using the first special figure display device 212 (not shown). In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 stops displaying the decorative symbols in synchronization with the special symbol stop display. In this example, however, the decorative symbol combination “decoration 7−” corresponding to the special symbol I (losing symbol) is displayed. Decoration 2-Decoration 3 "is stopped and displayed.

  Although not shown, in this example, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol that is variably displayed in the left symbol display region 208a → the decorative symbol that is variably displayed in the right symbol display region 208c → the middle symbol display The stop display is performed in the order of the decorative symbols that are variably displayed in the area 208b. Therefore, when the decorative symbol combination “decoration 7—decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed, the stop display is performed in the order of decoration 7 → decoration 3 → decoration 2.

  FIG. 261 (d) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the first hold. In this state, the main control unit 300 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 using the first special figure display device 212 (not shown), and then turns off one first special figure holding lamp 218 (not shown). Special figure 1 Fluctuation of one hold of the game is digested, and it is notified that the number of holds has decreased from 2 to 1. In addition, after turning off the first special figure hold lamp 218 (after displaying the decrease in hold), the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 may be started (the same applies to the following embodiments).

  In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 starts to display the decorative symbol in synchronization with the start of the special figure variable display, and then deletes one normal hold icon, thereby holding the special figure variable game on hold. 1 is digested, and it is notified that the number of reservations has decreased from 2 to 1. It should be noted that the decorative symbol variation display may be started after the normal hold icon is erased (the same applies to the following embodiments).

  FIG. 261 (e) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game based on the first suspension is completed. In this state, the main control unit 300 stops the variable display of the special figure 1 using the first special figure display device 212 (not shown). In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 stops the decorative symbol variation display in accordance with the stop display of the special figure 1, but in this example, the decorative symbol combination “decoration 4” corresponding to the special figure I (losing symbol) is displayed. “Decoration 5—Decoration 0” is stopped. When the decorative symbol combination “decoration 4—decoration 5—decoration 0” is stopped and displayed, the stop display is performed in the order of decoration 4 → decoration 0 → decoration 5.

  FIG. 261 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the second suspension. In this state, the main control unit 300 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 using the first special figure display device 212 (not shown) and turns off one first special figure holding lamp 218 (not shown). Special figure 1 Fluctuation of one pending game is digested, and it is notified that the number of holds has decreased from 1 to 0. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 starts displaying the decorative symbols in synchronization with the start of the variable display of the special figure 1 and deletes one of the normally held icons, thereby changing the special figure 1 variable game. One hold is digested, and it is notified that the number of holds has decreased from 1 to 0.

  FIG. 261 (g) shows a state where a reach effect is performed using the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 stops the decorative symbol that is variably displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the decorative symbol that is variably displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the example, as a part of the decorative symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” corresponding to the special symbol I (losing symbol), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then the right symbol is displayed. “Decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the area 208c. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the character “Leach” in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, thereby notifying that the combination of decorative symbols is in the reach state.

  FIG. 261 (h) shows a state where an operation reception effect is started using the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the “decoration 7” stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the “decoration 7” stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. By displaying side by side in the upper right corner of the display area 208, it is continuously notified that the combination of decorative symbols is in the reach state. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 prompts the player to press the chance button 700 by performing a character display such as “Select with a button” in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that the second sub-control unit 500 holds the chance button 700 at the initial position and permits the operation of pressing the chance button 700.

  FIGS. 261 (i) and (j) are states in which the operation reception effect is continued. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 displays an image (button image) simulating the appearance of the chance button 700 in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, thereby pressing the chance button 700. In addition to prompting the player, images of all characters (in this example, character A (爺), character B (sabohani), character C (panda)) that may be selected in the effect character lottery described later are displayed. . In addition, the second sub-control unit 500 holds the chance button 700 at the initial position and permits acceptance of the pressing operation of the chance button 700. Further, by turning on the chance button lamp 138 inside the chance button 700, the chance button 700 emits light in a predetermined color (for example, blue), thereby indicating that the acceptance of the pressing operation is permitted. Note that the chance button 700 need not be lighted.

  Further, the first sub-control unit 400 performs the effect character lottery using the reach A-time effect character lottery table in step S2304 of the effect lottery process 1 described above upon reception of the pressing operation of the chance button 700. However, in this example, it is assumed that character A (爺) is selected. In the effect character lottery of the present embodiment, as shown in the reach A effect character lottery table in FIG. 252 (a), when the variation pattern is reach A lose, the character A ( If the variation pattern is per reach A while selecting 爺), it is configured to select character A (爺) with a probability of 30/100, and reach A loser than per reach A Is easy to select character A (爺).

  FIG. 262 (k) shows a state in which the character selected by the effect character lottery in the operation reception effect is highlighted. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 provides an effect (in this example, the character A (爺) of the character A (爺)) for notifying the character type selected in the character effect (in this example, the character A (キ ャ ラ)). The effect that illuminates the surroundings).

  FIG. 262 (l) shows a state in which an operation reception effect after the effect character lottery is being performed. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 prompts the player to press the chance button 700 by performing a character display such as “Press with care!” In the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The character A (Ａ) selected in the production character lottery is displayed. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 performs state lottery using the above-described state lottery table and selects a state. In this example, the first sub-control unit 400 selects the first state (chance button 700 at the initial position). To do. In the state lottery of this embodiment, as shown in the state lottery table of FIG. 252 (c), when the selected character is character A (losing), the second state is selected with a probability of 3/100. The first state is selected with a probability of 97/100, and the first state is more easily selected than the second state.

  Moreover, the 1st sub-control part 400 transmits the button effect command which becomes a 1st state with respect to the 2nd sub-control part 500 with having selected the 1st state by the state lottery. The second sub-control unit 500 holds the chance button 700 in the initial position in a state where the chance button 700 emits light because the chance button 700 is already at a position where the operation in the first state can be performed (initial position).

  FIGS. 262 (m) and (n) are states in which the operation reception effect is continued. In this state, the second sub-control unit 500 holds the chance button 700 at the initial position and permits the pressing of the chance button 700. Further, by turning on the chance button lamp 138 inside the chance button 700, the chance button 700 emits light in a predetermined color (for example, blue), thereby indicating that the acceptance of the pressing operation is permitted. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 displays an image (button image) imitating the appearance of the chance button 700 in the first state in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, whereby the chance button 700 is displayed. , And the effect of gradually reducing the remaining amount of the meter in accordance with the remaining time of the effective period of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is performed. Note that the operation reception effect is not limited to this example. For example, an effect of gradually reducing the remaining amount of the meter may not be performed (the same applies to the following examples).

  FIG. 262 (o) shows an effect performed when the acceptance period (for example, 5 seconds) of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 has passed or when the chance button 700 has been pressed by a predetermined number of times (for example, once). It is an example. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 performs the stop display of the decorative symbol that has been variably displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, but in this example, the decorative symbol combination corresponding to the special symbol I (losing symbol) In accordance with “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7”, “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed at the center of the display area of the ornament symbol display device 208.

FIG. 262 (p) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game based on the second suspension is completed. In this state, the main control unit 300 stops the variable display of the special figure using the first special figure display device 212 (not shown). In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 stops the decorative symbol variation display in accordance with the special symbol stop display. In this example, however, the decorative symbol combination “decoration 7− Decoration 6-Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed.
<Operation reception production (per reach A)>

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 263 and 264, an example of an operation reception effect when the reach per reach A is selected as the variation pattern of the special figure will be described. In addition, the figure is a figure which showed the example of the production | presentation in the time series when per reach A is selected as a fluctuation pattern of a special figure. Hereinafter, only the configuration different from the above-described operation reception effect (reach A lose) will be described.

  FIG. 263 (b) shows a state in which a ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 during execution of the special figure 1 variable game. When the main control unit 300 detects a winning (winning) at the first special figure starting port 230, the number of winning balls corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 in the above-described winning port counter updating process (step S215). In the steps S2010 to S2015 of the special figure prefetching process to be executed after that, 1 is added to the storage area, and the prefetching process of the special figure 1 is executed. In this example, it is assumed that, as a result of the look-ahead process of special figure 1, the stop symbol of special figure 1 is “special figure A”, the fluctuation time is “45000 ms”, and the fluctuation pattern is “per reach A”.

  The first sub-control unit 400 executes the above-mentioned start-side winning side sub-pre-reading notice execution process upon receiving the pre-reading notice execution command from the main control part 300. Is determined to be a predetermined variation time. In this example, since the fluctuation time of FIG. 1 is 45000 ms, the subsequent change lottery process in step S2103 is performed. Here, “hold B (Mr.)” is selected as a result of the hold change lottery process. Suppose that

  The first sub-control unit 400 continues to display the decorative symbols in a variable manner, and also displays a normal hold icon (hold corresponding to the first hold) displayed in a part of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. By displaying one new hold icon (donor character image) of hold B to the right of the icon), the number of hold of the special figure 1 variable game is 2, and corresponds to the second hold Notify that the variation pattern of the special figure variation game is “per reach A”. The subsequent FIGS. 263 (c) to (f) are the same as those in FIGS. 261 (c) to (f).

  FIG. 263 (g) shows a state where a reach effect is performed using the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 stops the decorative symbol that is variably displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the decorative symbol that is variably displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the example, as a part of the decorative symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” corresponding to the special symbol A (big hit symbol), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then the right symbol is displayed. “Decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the area 208c. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the character “Leach” in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, thereby notifying that the combination of decorative symbols is in the reach state. The next FIG. 263 (h) is the same as FIG. 261 (h).

  FIGS. 263 (i) and (j) are states in which the operation reception effect is continued. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 receives the pressing operation of the chance button 700 as an opportunity, and in step S2304 of the above-described effect lottery process 1, the effect character lottery using the above-described reach A time effect character lottery table. In this example, it is assumed that character C (panda) is selected. In the effect character lottery of the present embodiment, as shown in the reach character effect table lottery table in FIG. 252 (a), when the variation pattern is per reach A, the character C ( When the variation pattern is reach A lose, the character C (panda) is selected with a probability of 3/100, and the reach per reach A is more than reach A lose. Is easy to select character C (panda).

  FIG. 264 (k) shows a state in which the character selected by the effect character lottery in the operation reception effect is highlighted. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 provides the effect (in this example, the character C (panda) of the character C (panda)) for notifying the character type selected in the character effect (character C (panda) in this example). The effect that shines the surroundings).

  FIG. 264 (l) shows a state where an operation acceptance effect after the effect character lottery is being performed. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 increases the player's expectation by displaying characters such as “Hot!” In the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the production character lottery. The selected character C (panda) is displayed. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 performs the state lottery using the above-described state lottery table and selects the state. In this example, when the character C is selected in the effect character lottery, the second sub-control unit 400 is always the second. (The chance button 700 at the operation completion position) is selected.

  Moreover, the 1st sub-control part 400 transmits the button effect command used as a 2nd state with respect to the 2nd sub-control part 500 with having selected the 2nd state by the state lottery. Since the chance button 700 is in the initial position, the second sub-control unit 500 moves the chance button 700 to a position where the operation according to the second state can be performed (operation completion position).

  FIGS. 264 (m) and (n) are states in which the operation reception effect is continued. In this state, the second sub-control unit 500 holds the chance button 700 at the operation completion position and permits acceptance of the pressing operation of the chance button 700. Further, by turning on the chance button lamp 138 inside the chance button 700, the chance button 700 emits light in a predetermined color (for example, blue), thereby indicating that the acceptance of the pressing operation is permitted. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 displays an image (button image) imitating the appearance of the chance button 700 in the second state in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, whereby the chance button 700 is displayed. , And the effect of gradually reducing the remaining amount of the meter in accordance with the remaining time of the effective period of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is performed.

  FIG. 264 (o) shows the effect performed when the acceptance period (for example, 5 seconds) of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 has passed or when the chance button 700 has been pressed by a predetermined number of times (for example, once). It is an example. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 performs the stop display of the decorative symbol that has been variably displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, but in this example, the decorative symbol combination corresponding to the special symbol A (big hit symbol) In accordance with “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed at the center of the display area of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and a display suggesting whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful (in this example, , Character display such as “congratulations”.

FIG. 264 (p) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game based on the second suspension is finished. In this state, the main control unit 300 stops the variable display of the special figure using the first special figure display device 212 (not shown). Further, the first sub-control unit 400 stops the decorative symbol change display in accordance with the special symbol stop display. In this example, however, the decorative symbol combination “decoration 7− corresponding to the special symbol A (big hit symbol)” is displayed. Decoration 7-Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed.
<Operation reception presentation (per reach A, chance button failure)>

  FIG. 265 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the drive mechanism of the chance button 700 fails during the effective period of the pressing operation of the chance button 700. At the timing shown in FIG. 265 (l), as in FIG. 264 (l), the chance button 700 is moved from the initial position to the operation completion position (position where the chance button 700 can be operated in the second state). Here, an example is shown in which the chance button 700 cannot be raised to the operation completion position due to a failure of the drive mechanism or the like.

  In the present embodiment, even when a failure occurs in the chance button 700, as shown in FIGS. 265 (m) to (n), the second sub-control unit 500 permits acceptance of the pressing operation of the chance button 700. By turning on the chance button lamp 138 inside the chance button 700, the chance button 700 emits light in a predetermined color (for example, blue), which indicates that the acceptance of the pressing operation is permitted. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 displays an image (button image) imitating the appearance of the chance button 700 in the second state in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, whereby the chance button 700 is displayed. , And the effect of gradually reducing the remaining amount of the meter in accordance with the remaining time of the effective period of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is performed.

In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 receives the pressing operation of the chance button 700 (for example, 5 seconds) or when the chance button 700 is pressed a predetermined number of times (for example, once). In addition, as shown in FIG. 265 (o), according to the decorative symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” corresponding to the special symbol A (big hit symbol), “ The decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed, and a display (in this example, a character display such as" congratulations ") suggesting the success / failure result of the special figure 1 variable game is performed.
<Operation reception production (per reach B)>

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 266 and 267, an example of the operation reception effect when the reach per reach B is selected as the variation pattern of the special figure will be described. In addition, the figure is a figure which showed the example of the effect when per reach B is selected as a fluctuation pattern of a special figure in time series. Hereinafter, only the configuration different from the above-described operation reception effect (reach A lose) will be described.

  FIG. 266 (b) shows a state in which a ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 during execution of the special figure 1 variable game. When the main control unit 300 detects a winning (winning) at the first special figure starting port 230, the number of winning balls corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 in the above-described winning port counter updating process (step S215). In the steps S2010 to S2015 of the special figure prefetching process to be executed after that, 1 is added to the storage area, and the prefetching process of the special figure 1 is executed. In this example, it is assumed that, as a result of the look-ahead process of special figure 1, the stop symbol of special figure 1 is “special figure A”, the fluctuation time is “65000 ms”, and the fluctuation pattern is “per reach B”.

  The first sub-control unit 400 executes the above-mentioned start-side winning side sub-pre-reading notice execution process upon receiving the pre-reading notice execution command from the main control part 300. Is determined to be a predetermined variation time. In this example, since the fluctuation time of FIG. 1 is 65000 ms, the lottery process for the hold change in the subsequent step S2103 is performed. Here, it is assumed that “movable body” is selected as a result of the lottery process for the hold change. . In this case, the first sub control unit 400 transmits a movable body operation command for operating the effect movable body 224 to the second sub control unit 500.

  In the pending change advance notice lottery table shown in FIG. 251 (a), the “movable body” is selected in the pending change lottery process because the fluctuation time is 60000 ms (the fluctuation pattern is reach B loss) or the fluctuation time. Is 65000 ms (the variation pattern is per reach B), and therefore, when the effect movable body 224 is activated during the change in hold, the variation pattern may be reach B loss or reach B. Determine.

  The first sub-control unit 400 continues to display the decorative symbols in a variable manner, and also displays a normal hold icon (hold corresponding to the first hold) displayed in a part of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. By displaying one new normal hold icon (hold icon corresponding to the second hold) on the right side of the icon), it is notified that the number of hold of the special figure 1 variable game is two.

  FIG. 266 (d) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the first hold. In this state, the second sub-control unit 500 rotates the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 up and down based on the movable body operation command received from the first sub-control unit 400, thereby reaching reach B (reach). A notice is made to indicate that the B loss or per reach B has been confirmed. Thereafter, the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 is rotated up and down even during the decorative symbol change display and the execution of the effect.

  FIG. 266 (g) shows a state in which the decorative display for normal symbols is displayed in a variable manner. In this state, the main control unit 300 displays a normal variation using the normal symbol display device 210 (not shown) and transmits a universal variation start command to the first sub-control unit 400.

  In addition, when the first sub control unit 400 receives the common figure change start command from the main control unit 300, the first sub control part 400 uses the general drawing effect system 1 execution availability lottery table in the above-described normal figure change start sub-side notice execution process. If the lottery drawing system 1 execution feasibility lottery is performed and the lottery is won, the drawing drawing system 1 lottery using the above-described drawing drawing system 1 lottery table is further performed.

  In this example, the stop symbol of the ordinary drawing is the ordinary drawing B (winning symbol 2), and the lottery for the execution of the ordinary drawing production system 1 is won, and the production pattern P7 ("P7 (chance)" Suppose that an effect pattern that is displayed in the order of “→ P7 (button) → general decoration 2” is selected. The first sub-control unit 400 performs display in the order of P7 (chance) → P7 (button) → general decoration 2 in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 according to the selected effect pattern 7. In the general drawing production system 1 lottery table shown in FIG. 254 (b) above, P7 is selected as the production pattern only when the result of determining whether or not the normal drawing is true is B (winning symbol 2). From the execution of the production pattern P7, it is determined that the result of determining whether or not the normal drawing is normal is B (winning symbol 2).

  In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 performs the general drawing production system 2 execution availability lottery using the general drawing production system 2 execution availability lottery table in the above-described production lottery processing 2, and if the lottery is won, The general drawing production system 2 lottery using the above-mentioned general drawing production system 2 lottery table is performed. In this example, it is assumed that the variation pattern is per reach B, and wins the ordinary drawing production system 2 execution availability lottery, and P7 (button) is selected as the production pattern by the ordinary drawing production system 2 lottery.

  The first sub-control unit 400 displays P7 (button) in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 according to the selected P7 (button). Thereafter, the display of P7 (button) is continued in the upper left corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 even during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display and the effect. In the ordinary drawing production system 2 lottery table shown in FIG. 254 (d), P7 (button) is selected as the production pattern only when the special figure variation pattern is reach B loss or reach B. From the execution of the production pattern P7 (button), it is determined that the special figure variation pattern is reach B loss or reach B.

  FIG. 266 (j) shows a state where a reach effect is performed using the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 stops the decorative symbol that is variably displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the decorative symbol that is variably displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the example, as a part of the decorative symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” corresponding to the special symbol A (big hit symbol), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then the right symbol is displayed. “Decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the area 208c. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the character “Leach” in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, thereby notifying that the combination of decorative symbols is in the reach state.

  267 (k) and (l) are states in which an operation reception effect is started using the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the “decoration 7” stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the “decoration 7” stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. By displaying side by side in the upper right corner of the display area 208, it is continuously notified that the combination of decorative symbols is in the reach state. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 displays characters such as “chance chance!” And “press the button to break clothes!” In the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, thereby pressing the chance button 700. Encourage the player to operate.

  The first sub-control unit 400 performs state lottery using the above-described state lottery table and selects a state. In this example, reach B (reach B lose, per reach B) is selected as the variation pattern. In such a case, the second state (the pressing operation of the chance button 700 at the operation completion position) is always selected. Moreover, the 1st sub-control part 400 transmits the button effect command used as a 2nd state with respect to the 2nd sub-control part 500 with having selected the 2nd state by the state lottery. Since the chance button 700 is in the initial position, the second sub-control unit 500 moves the chance button 700 to a position where the operation according to the second state can be performed (operation completion position).

  FIGS. 267 (m) and (n) are states in which the operation reception effect is continued. In this state, the second sub-control unit 500 holds the chance button 700 at the operation completion position and permits acceptance of the pressing operation of the chance button 700. Further, by turning on the chance button lamp 138 inside the chance button 700, the chance button 700 emits light in a predetermined color (for example, blue), thereby indicating that the acceptance of the pressing operation is permitted. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 displays an image (button image) imitating the appearance of the chance button 700 in the second state in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and visually recognizes the button image. So that the character image is superimposed on the button image and the character image such as “Press!” Is displayed above the character image. The user is prompted to press the chance button 700.

  FIG. 267 (o) shows the effect performed when the acceptance period (for example, 5 seconds) of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 has passed or when the chance button 700 has been pressed by a predetermined number of times (for example, once). It is an example. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 performs the stop display of the decorative symbol that has been variably displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, but in this example, the decorative symbol combination corresponding to the special symbol A (big hit symbol) In accordance with “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed at the center of the display area of the ornament symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 267 (p) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game based on the second suspension is completed. In this state, the main control unit 300 stops the variable display of the special figure using the first special figure display device 212 (not shown). Further, the first sub-control unit 400 stops the decorative symbol change display in accordance with the special symbol stop display. In this example, however, the decorative symbol combination “decoration 7− corresponding to the special symbol A (big hit symbol)” is displayed. Decoration 7-Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed.

According to this example, even if the operation means does not enter the second state due to a failure or the like, the first notice (FIGS. 266 (h) to (j) and FIGS. 267 (k) to 267 (m) ) Can notify the player in advance of the actual state, so that it may be possible to avoid a situation in which the player is disadvantaged due to a failure or the like. Further, the conventional operation means is configured to give the player expectation depending on the type of state only during the effective period of the operation. However, according to the present invention, before the effective period of the operation, according to the first notice. In some cases, the player can have a sense of expectation, and the player's willingness to play can be enhanced.
<Operation reception presentation (per reach B, chance button failure)>

  FIG. 268 is a diagram showing an example of an effect produced when the drive mechanism of the chance button 700 fails during the effective period of the pressing operation of the chance button 700. At the timing shown in FIG. 268 (l), as in FIG. 267 (l), the chance button 700 is moved from the initial position to the operation completion position (position where the chance button 700 can be operated in the second state). Here, an example is shown in which the chance button 700 cannot be raised to the operation completion position due to a failure of the drive mechanism or the like.

  In the present embodiment, even when a failure occurs in the chance button 700, as shown in FIGS. 268 (m) to (n), the second sub-control unit 500 permits acceptance of the pressing operation of the chance button 700. By turning on the chance button lamp 138 inside the chance button 700, the chance button 700 emits light in a predetermined color (for example, blue), which indicates that the acceptance of the pressing operation is permitted. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 displays an image (button image) imitating the chance button 700 in the second state at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and prevents the button image from being visually recognized. The chance button is displayed by overlaying the character image on the button image and displaying a character such as “Press!” Above the character image so that the button image is visible (at least part of the button image is visible). 700 is pressed.

In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 receives the pressing operation of the chance button 700 (for example, 5 seconds) or when the chance button 700 is pressed a predetermined number of times (for example, once). In addition, as shown in FIG. 268 (o), according to the decorative symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” corresponding to the special symbol A (big hit symbol), “ The decoration 7 ”is stopped and displayed.
<Modification of operation reception effect (per reach B)>

  Next, a modified example of the above-described operation reception effect (per reach B) will be described with reference to FIGS. 269 and 270. FIG. 269 and FIG. 270 are diagrams showing a modification of the operation reception effect (per reach B) in time series.

  In this example, a rectangular variation icon display area 208e is provided in a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The change icon display area 208e is a display area for displaying a hold icon corresponding to the special figure change game during change display (during digestion) for a predetermined period of time, and the hold after moving to the change icon display area 208e. The icon may be referred to as a variable icon.

  FIG. 269 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and one special figure 1 variable game is held. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the change icon CI corresponding to the special figure change game being executed (during digestion) in the change icon display area 208e and the hold icon corresponding to the first hold. (Normal hold) PI1 is displayed at the lower right of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 269 (b) shows a state where a ball has entered the first special figure starting port 230 during execution of the special figure 1 variable game. When the main control unit 300 detects a winning (winning) at the first special figure starting port 230, the number of winning balls corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 in the above-described winning port counter updating process (step S215). In the steps S2010 to S2015 of the special figure prefetching process to be executed after that, 1 is added to the storage area, and the prefetching process of the special figure 1 is executed. In this example, it is assumed that, as a result of the look-ahead process of special figure 1, the stop symbol of special figure 1 is “special figure A”, the fluctuation time is “65000 ms”, and the fluctuation pattern is “per reach B”.

  The first sub-control unit 400 executes the above-mentioned start-side winning side sub-pre-reading notice execution process upon receiving the pre-reading notice execution command from the main control part 300. Is determined to be a predetermined variation time. In this example, since the variation time of FIG. 1 is 65000 ms, the subsequent change lottery process in step S2103 is performed. Here, the hold icon suggesting the determination of reach B as a result of the hold change lottery process Assume that PI2 (an image with a letter “B”) is selected.

  Next, the first sub-control unit 400 continues to display the decorative symbols in a variable manner, and displays a new hold icon PI2 to the right of the hold icon PI1 corresponding to the first hold. It is notified that the number of suspensions of FIG. 1 variable game is 2, and the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variable game corresponding to the second suspension is “per reach B”.

  FIG. 269 (d) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the first hold. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 starts the decorative symbol variation display in accordance with the start of the special symbol variation display, and then moves the hold icon PI1 to the variation icon display area 208e to change to the variation icon CI. At the same time, by moving the hold icon PI2 to the left side, one hold of the special figure 1 variable game is consumed, and it is notified that the number of holds has decreased from 2 to 1.

  FIG. 269 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the second suspension. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 starts to display the decorative symbol in synchronization with the start of the special symbol variable display, and then moves the hold icon PI2 to the variable icon display region 208e to change to the variable icon CI. By doing so, one special figure 1 variable game hold is consumed, and it is notified that the number of hold has decreased from 1 to 0.

  FIGS. 269 (g) and (h) are states in which the first operation acceptance effect is being performed. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 prompts the player to press the chance button 700 by displaying characters such as “PUSH” in the middle symbol display area 208 b of the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that the second sub-control unit 500 holds the chance button 700 at the initial position and permits the operation of pressing the chance button 700.

  FIG. 269 (i) shows a state where the operation acceptance effect is continued. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 receives the pressing operation of the chance button 700 as an opportunity, and in step S2304 of the above-described effect lottery process 1, the effect character lottery using the above-described reach A time effect character lottery table. In this example, it is assumed that character A (爺) is selected. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 performs an effect using the character A (爺) in the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 269 (j) shows a state where a reach effect is performed using the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 stops the decorative symbol that is variably displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the decorative symbol that is variably displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the example, as a part of the decorative symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” corresponding to the special symbol A (big hit symbol), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then the right symbol is displayed. “Decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the area 208c. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the character “Leach” in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, thereby notifying that the combination of decorative symbols is in the reach state. Further, the first sub control unit 400 erases the variation icon CI displayed in the variation icon display area 208e.

  270 (k) to 270 (p) are diagrams showing an example of effects when the drive mechanism of the chance button 700 breaks down during the effective period of the pressing operation of the chance button 700. FIG. At the timing shown in FIG. 270 (m), similar to FIG. 267 (m), the chance button 700 is moved from the initial position to the operation completion position (position where the chance button 700 can be operated in the second state). However, here, an example is shown in which the chance button 700 cannot be raised to the operation completion position due to a failure of the drive mechanism or the like, and remains at the initial position.

  In the present embodiment, even when a failure occurs in the chance button 700, as shown in FIGS. 270 (m) to 270 (n), the second sub control unit 500 permits acceptance of the pressing operation of the chance button 700. By turning on the chance button lamp 138 inside the chance button 700, the chance button 700 emits light in a predetermined color (for example, blue), which indicates that the acceptance of the pressing operation is permitted. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 displays an image (button image) imitating the appearance of the chance button 700 in the second state in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and visually recognizes the button image. So that the character image is superimposed on the button image and the character image such as “Press!” Is displayed above the character image. The user is prompted to press the chance button 700.

  In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 receives the pressing operation of the chance button 700 (for example, 5 seconds) or when the chance button 700 is pressed a predetermined number of times (for example, once). In addition, as shown in FIG. 270 (o), according to the decoration symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” corresponding to the special symbol A (big hit symbol), The decoration 7 ”is stopped and displayed.

  As described above, in the gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the operation means (for example, the chance button 700) provided at least at a position where the player can operate, and the effect means capable of executing at least the first effect. (For example, the effect control performed by the first sub-control unit 400 and the decorative symbol display device 208) and the first notice (for example, the effect that the character C is selected in FIG. 264 (l), or the effect movable body in FIG. 266) A game machine including at least a notice means (for example, notice control performed by the first sub-control unit 400 and a decorative symbol display device 208) that can execute at least an effect that the 224 operates. At least one of the plurality of types of states is a first state (for example, a chance button 700 in an initial position). And at least one of the plurality of states is a second state (for example, a chance button 700 at an operation completion position that protrudes from an initial position), and the first state is The production means is at least different from the second state, and when the first condition is satisfied, the production means operates when the operation means is operated (for example, FIG. 267 (o ), Which can execute at least the effect of determining whether or not the special figure variation game is successful, and the establishment of the first condition is determined by the player for a second period (for example, FIG. 267 (m)). To (n), a condition that may be satisfied by operating the operation means during the chance button 700 operation reception period), and the operation means is in the second state during the second period. To be at least And the notice means performs the first notice (for example, the period shown in FIGS. 266 (h) to (j) and FIGS. 267 (k) to 267 (m)) in the first period (for example, Display of an image simulating the appearance of the chance button 700), and the first period is a period including at least a period preceding the second period. The advance notice is a gaming table characterized in that it can at least notify that the operation means can be in the second state.

  According to the gaming machine according to the second embodiment, there may be a case where a gaming machine having a feature in the notice means can be provided. Even if the operation means does not enter the second state due to a failure or the like, the player can be notified in advance of the actual state by the first notice. There are cases in which a situation in which a disadvantage is given to a person can be avoided. Further, the conventional operation means is configured to give the player expectation depending on the type of state only during the effective period of the operation. However, according to the present invention, before the effective period of the operation, according to the first notice. In some cases, the player can have a sense of expectation, and the player's willingness to play can be enhanced.

  The first notice only needs to be able to at least notify that the operation means can be in the second state, and the state of the operation means actually becomes the second state (change). In addition to the case where the operation means is in the second state when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a lottery is won), or the operation means is in the second state. The case where the second state cannot be obtained due to a failure or the like is also included. Further, even when the first notice is not executed, the state of the operation means may be the second state.

  Further, the notice means is capable of executing at least a second notice in the second period, and the second notice indicates that the state of the operating means can be at least the second state. It may be a notice that can be grasped (for example, an image imitating the appearance of the chance button 700 at the operation completion position shown in FIGS. 267 (m) to (n)).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player that the operation will be in the second state as the second notice in the second period, which is the operation effective period. In some cases, the player's willingness to play can be prevented from decreasing.

  The second notice may be a series of notices as an extension of the first notice. For example, the first notice and the second notice may be included in a series of effects constituted by a plurality of effects. An advance notice may be included.

  In addition, it includes a symbol display means (for example, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, and a right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing at least a first symbol variation display. The advance notice (for example, display of an image imitating the appearance of the chance button 700 at the operation completion position shown in FIGS. 266 (h) to (j) and FIGS. 267 (k) to 267 (m)) An image simulating the external appearance of the chance button 700 at the operation completion position shown in the second notice (for example, FIGS. 267 (m) to (n)). Display) can be executed at least during the execution of the first symbol variation display, and the notice means can continue at least the first notice until the second notice is executed. In It may be.

  With such a configuration, since the first notice is continued until the second notice is executed, the relationship between the first notice and the second state by the notice means may be easily understood.

  The first notice may be stopped immediately after the second notice is executed, or may be continued after the second notice is executed. Further, the timing of stopping the first notice includes after the first period, after the end of the first effect, after the stop of the first symbol variation display, after the end of the big hit game, etc. .

  In addition, when the operating means is operated during the third period (for example, the operation reception period shown in FIGS. 269 (g) to (h)), the effect means is the third effect (for example, FIG. i), which is capable of executing at least an effect using a character A (爺), and the third period is during execution of the first symbol variation display, and the third period is , The period before the first period (for example, the operation reception period shown in FIGS. 270 (m) to (n)), and the notice means is the third period (the third effect). And the first period (the first effect) is not executed for another effect that requires the operation of the operation means during the following "fourth period". The first notice may be continued at least until a period including at least a part of the four periods. It may be.

  With such a configuration, since the first notice can be continued until a period during which another effect is not performed, it may be possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner in which effect the second state is achieved.

  In addition, after continuing the first notice until a period including at least a part of the fourth period, another notice that can at least notify that the state of the operation means can be the second state is performed. May be.

  Also, a symbol display means (for example, the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing at least the first symbol variation display (for example, the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 266 (f) to 266 (p)). Medium symbol display area 208b, right symbol display area 208c), and the symbol display means displays at least a second symbol variation display (for example, a variation display of the decorative symbols shown in FIGS. 266 (d) to (e)). The second symbol variation display is a symbol variation display that can be performed at least before the first symbol variation display, and the first notice (for example, the effect movable body 224 is displayed). The effect of rotating the forearm part 224b up and down) can be started at least during the execution of the second symbol variation display, and the second notice (for example, FIGS. 267 (m) to (n)) Show operation complete The display of the image imitating the appearance of the chance button 700 at the position) can be executed at least during the execution of the first symbol variation display, and the notice means executes the second symbol variation display. The first notice started inside may be continued at least over the first symbol variation display.

  With such a configuration, the first notice is made to function as a look-ahead notice (a notice that indicates whether or not a special figure change game or a general figure change game is appropriate or not before the start of the change of the game). In addition, there are cases where the second notice can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

  The pre-reading notice may be continuously performed over a plurality of times of the symbol variation display, or may be intermittently performed during a plurality of times of the symbol variation display. Further, it may be temporarily displayed during one symbol variation display.

  Further, the effect means is capable of executing at least the first effect according to one effect pattern of a plurality of types of effect patterns, and at least one of the plurality of types of effect patterns is: It is a first production pattern, at least one of the plurality of types of production patterns is a second production pattern, and the operation means is configured to provide the production according to the first production pattern by the second means. At least including the second state during the period, and the notice means executes at least the first notice suggesting that the first effect pattern is to be obtained, so that the operation means It may be possible to at least give notice that the state can become the second state.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest the second state by the first effect, and thus the relation with the second state by the notice means may be easily understood.

  The production pattern includes a variation pattern determined by the main control unit 300 (for example, a variation pattern shown in FIGS. 250A and 250B), and the first sub-control unit 400 and the first pattern based on the variation pattern. An effect pattern (for example, an effect pattern shown in FIGS. 254 (b) and (d)) determined by the second sub-control unit 500 is included.

  In addition, the control unit includes at least a control unit (for example, the second double control unit 500) capable of controlling the state of the operation unit, and the control unit is capable of executing at least a first control. Includes at least control for setting the operating means to the second state, and the rendering means is configured so that the operating means is the second in spite of the control means performing the first control. Even in a case other than the state, the first effect may be at least executable.

With such a configuration, even if the operation means does not change to the second state that should be changed due to a failure of the operation means, etc., the first effect can be executed. Thus, a situation in which the player's willingness to play is reduced can be prevented, and the interest of the game can be improved.
<Other embodiments>

Next, a pachinko machine according to another embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 271 to 287. In addition, in order to avoid redundant description, the same content as other embodiments other than this embodiment is attached | subjected with the same code | symbol in drawing, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. In addition, the reference numerals in the drawings referred to in the present embodiment are used only in the description of the present embodiment in principle, and even when the same reference numerals are used in the drawings referred to in other embodiments, In the description of this embodiment, the reference numerals used in FIGS. 271 to 287 are given priority.
<Step-up notice lottery table>

  FIG. 271 (a) is an example of a step-up notice lottery table used for determining the notice effect mode in the step-up notice lottery of the notice lottery process (step-up) described later.

  The step-up notice lottery table is one of data tables stored in advance in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400. In this step-up notice lottery table, the effect mode (variation pattern) on the decorative symbol display device 208 determined in the above-described special figure 1 variable time lottery (or special figure 2 variable time lottery), and randomness of 0 to 99 are displayed. A numerical value range and a notice effect mode are associated with each other. The basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines a notice effect mode based on the step-up notice lottery table and a random value acquired at a predetermined timing (for example, when the step-up notice lottery is executed). “Step-up notice lottery”.

  For example, when the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach loss, the normal reach loss line is referred to, and “1-2” is selected as the notice effect mode regardless of the acquired random value. Further, when the variation pattern is reach A lose, refer to the reach A lose line, and when the obtained random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 59, select “1-2” as the notice effect mode, When the acquired random value is in the numerical range of 60 to 79, “1-2-3” is selected as the notice effect mode, and when the acquired random value is in the numerical range of 80 to 89, “ “1-2-3-4” is selected, and when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 90 to 99, “4” is selected as the notice effect mode. The other fluctuation patterns (reach B lose, per normal reach, per reach A, per reach B) are as shown in the figure.

  Here, the notice effect mode “1-2” has two stages (two steps) in the order of the notice effect in step 1 → the notice effect in step 2 before a predetermined notice (for example, a notice in the reach state). This is a notice production. Further, the notice effect mode “1-2-3” is performed in the order of the notice effect in step 1 → the notice effect in step 2 → the notice effect in step 3 before performing a predetermined notice (for example, a notice in the reach state). This is a three-step (three-step) notice effect.

In addition, the notice effect mode “1-2-3-4” indicates that the notice effect of step 1 → the notice effect of step 2 → the notice effect of step 3 before performing a predetermined notice (for example, notice of reach state) → The notice effect of four stages (4 steps) is performed in the order of the notice effect of step 4. On the other hand, the notice effect mode “4” is for performing the notice effect in step 4 suddenly without performing the notice effects in steps 1 to 3 before performing the predetermined notice (for example, the notice in the reach state).
<Status lottery table>

  FIG. 271 (b) is an example of a state lottery table used for determining the state in the state lottery of the notice lottery process (step-up) described later.

  The state lottery table is one of data tables stored in advance in the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400. In this state lottery table, the notice effect mode selected in the above step-up notice lottery, the numerical range of random values from 0 to 99, and the state type are associated with each other. The basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 performs “state lottery” for determining a state based on the state lottery table and a random value acquired at a predetermined timing (for example, when the state lottery is executed).

  For example, when the notice effect mode selected in the above step-up notice lottery is “4” (hereinafter, the notice effect mode “4” may be referred to as “first effect”), 4 ( Referring to the first effect) line, when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 89, vibration + rotation (second state) is selected as the state, and the acquired random value is 90 to 99. In the numerical value range, the normal mode "(first state) is selected as the state. That is, when the notice effect mode is “4 (first effect)”, vibration + rotation (second state) is more easily selected than the normal mode (first state).

  Further, the notice effect mode selected in the above step-up notice lottery is other than “4”, that is, any one of “1-2”, “1-2-3”, and “1-2-3-4”. (Hereinafter, the notice effect mode of “1-2”, “1-2-3”, and “1-2-3-4” may be referred to as “second effect”) , Refer to the row other than 4 (second effect), and when the acquired random number value is in the numerical value range of 0 to 19, the vibration + rotation (second state) is selected as the state and acquired. When the random value is in the numerical range of 20 to 99, the normal mode (first state) is selected as the state. That is, when the notice effect mode is “other than 4 (second effect)”, the normal mode (first state) is more easily selected than the vibration + rotation (second state).

  Here, the state selected by the state lottery will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4A is an exploded perspective view of the chance button unit 750, and FIG. 4B is a view showing an example of first to third states.

  The chance button unit 750 vibrates the button case 750a made of a transparent member that can be pressed by the player, the rotary decorative member 750b that is rotatably arranged inside the button case 750a, and the button case 750a. A chance button 760 having a possible vibrator 750c.

  The second sub control unit 500 refers to the notice command received from the first sub control unit 400 and controls the chance button 760 according to the state information included in the notice command. In the present embodiment, when the state information is “vibration + rotation (second state)”, as schematically shown in the upper part of FIG. And the button case 750a is vibrated by operating the vibrator 750c of the chance button 760. On the other hand, when the state information is “normal mode (first state)”, as schematically shown in the middle of FIG. 5B, the rotary decorative member 750b of the chance button 760 and the vibrator 750c. Both stop

Further, in this embodiment, when the “normal mode (first state)” is changed to “vibration + rotation (second state)”, the rotation decorative member 750b of the chance button 760 cannot rotate due to a failure or the like. Thus, as schematically shown in the lower part of FIG. 5B, the state in which only the vibration of the chance button 760 by the vibrator 750c is possible is called a state different from the first state and the second state. It may be referred to as a “third state” in meaning. The state in which the vibration of the chance button 760 by the vibrator 750c is disabled due to a failure or the like and only the rotation decoration member 750b of the chance button 760 can be rotated is different from the first state and the second state. It may be referred to as a “third state” in the sense of a state.
<Leach B big hit state lottery table>

  FIG. 271 (c) is an example of a reach lottery state lottery table used for determining a state in a state lottery of a notice lottery process (reach B sub) described later.

  The reach B big hit state lottery table is one of the data tables stored in advance in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400. In this reach B big hit state lottery table, a numerical range of random values from 0 to 99 and a state type are associated. The basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 uses the state lottery table and the random number value acquired at a predetermined timing (for example, when the state lottery is executed) when the above-described fluctuation pattern is a reach B big hit. , “Leach B big hit state lottery” to determine the state.

For example, when the above-described variation pattern is the reach B big hit, when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 89, vibration + rotation (second state) is selected as the state, and the acquired random value Is in the numerical range of 90 to 99, the normal mode (first state) is selected as the state. That is, in this example, when the variation pattern is the reach B big hit, vibration + rotation (second state) is more easily selected than in the normal mode (first state).
<Direction lottery table>

  FIG. 271 (d) is an example of the effect lottery table used for determining the effect mode in the effect lottery of the notice lottery process (reach B sub) described later.

  The effect lottery table is one of data tables stored in advance in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400. In the effect lottery table, the state selected in the above reach B big hit state lottery, the numerical range of random values from 0 to 99, and the type of effect are associated. The basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 performs “effect lottery” for determining the effect mode based on the effect lottery table and a random value acquired at a predetermined timing (for example, when the effect lottery is executed). .

  For example, when the second state is selected in the above-mentioned reach B big hit state lottery, direct hit (first effect) is selected as the effect mode when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 89 Then, when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 90 to 99, the post-loss recovery (second effect) is selected as the effect mode. That is, in this example, when the state is vibration + rotation (second state), the direct hit (first effect) is more easily selected than the post-loss recovery (second effect).

In addition, when the first state is selected in the above-mentioned reach B big hit state lottery, direct hit (first effect) is selected as the effect mode when the obtained random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 49 Then, when the obtained random number value is in the numerical value range of 50 to 99, the post-loss recovery (second effect) is selected as the effect mode. That is, in this example, when the state is the normal mode (first state), the direct hit (first effect) and the post-losing recovery (second effect) are selected with substantially the same probability.
<Notice lottery process (step-up)>

  FIG. 273 (a) is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of advance notice lottery processing (step-up). In the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment, whether or not a prefetch notice execution command is received from the main control unit 300 in the first sub-control unit main interrupt process shown in FIG. 228 is received, and the command is received. In this case, the notice lottery process (step-up) is executed.

  In step S3001, the information on the fluctuation pattern of special figure 1 (or special figure 2) included in the prefetching notice execution command is referred to, and the fluctuation pattern is a predetermined fluctuation pattern (in this embodiment, the step of FIG. 273 (a)). It is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern included in the up-notice lottery table is a normal reach lose, reach A lose, reach B lose, normal reach, reach A, or reach B). If applicable, the process proceeds to step S3002, and if not, the process ends.

In step S3002, a step-up preliminary lottery using the above-described step-up notice lottery table is performed, and in the next step S3003, a state lottery using the above-described state lottery table is performed. In step S3004, the second sub-control unit 500 is prepared to transmit a notice command including information on the state selected in step S3003. The command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the information transmission process (step S321) described above.
<Notice lottery processing (reach B sub)>

  FIG. 272 (b) is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the notice lottery process (reach B sub). In the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment, whether or not a prefetch notice execution command is received from the main control unit 300 in the first sub-control unit main interrupt process shown in FIG. 228 is received, and the command is received. In this case, the notice lottery process (reach B sub) is executed.

  In step S3101, the fluctuation pattern information of special figure 1 (or special figure 2) and the value of the big hit flag included in the pre-read notice execution command are referred to, the fluctuation pattern is per reach B, and the big hit flag is on. It is determined whether or not. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S3102; otherwise, the process ends.

In step S3102, the state lottery using the above-described reach B big hit state lottery table is performed, and in the next step S3103, the effect lottery using the above-described effect lottery table is performed. In step S3104, the second sub-control unit 500 is prepared to transmit a notice command including information on the state selected in step S3102. The command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the information transmission process (step S321) described above.
<Operation reception effect and step-up notice effect (normal reach loss)>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 274, an example of the operation reception effect and the step-up notice effect when the normal reach loss is selected as the fluctuation pattern of FIG. 1 will be described. In addition, the figure is a figure which showed the example of the effect when a normal reach lose is selected as a fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 in time series.

  FIGS. 274 (c) and (d) show a state where an operation reception effect is being performed during the variable display of FIG. 1 corresponding to the second hold. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 displays an image (button image) imitating a button to which the character “push” is applied at the center of the middle symbol display area 208 b of the decorative symbol display device 208. The player is prompted to press the chance button 760. In this example, the button image is configured to display an image different from the actual appearance of the chance button 760. However, an image imitating the actual appearance of the chance button 760 may be displayed. Good.

  The first sub-control unit 400 performs the step-up notice lottery (step S3002) using the step-up notice lottery table in the above-described notice lottery process (step-up), and selects the notice effect mode. Then, it is assumed that the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation game during variation display is normal reach loss and “1-2” is selected as the notice effect mode. In the step-up notice lottery table shown in FIG. 271 (a) above, “1-2” is selected as the notice effect mode with a probability of 100% when the variation pattern is normal reach lose.

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 performs state lottery (step S3003) using the above-described state lottery table and selects the state of the chance button 760. In this example, the notice effect mode is the second effect. “1-2” and “normal mode (first state)” is selected as the state. In the state lottery table shown in FIG. 271 (b) above, when the notice effect mode is “other than 4 (second effect)”, the normal mode (first state) rather than vibration + rotation (second state). Is easier to select.

  The first sub-control unit 400 transmits a notice command in the normal mode (first state) to the second sub-control unit 500 when the normal mode (first state) is selected by the state lottery. To do. Since the chance button 760 is already in the normal mode (first state), the second sub-control unit 500 maintains the state of the chance button 760 and permits the operation of pressing the chance button 760.

  FIGS. 274 (e) and (f) show a state in which a step-up notice effect is being performed during the variable display of FIG. 1 corresponding to the second hold. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 performs the pressing operation of the chance button 760 for a predetermined number of times (for example, once) when the acceptance period (for example, 5 seconds) of the pressing operation of the chance button 760 has passed. In the event of a failure, a step-up notice effect is started. In this example, since “1-2” is selected as the notice effect mode, the notice effect of Step 1 shown in FIG. 274 (e) (in this example, before the reach effect shown in FIG. 274 (g) 2) (2 steps) by displaying the notice effect of step 2 shown in FIG. 274 (f) (in this example, an image containing the number 2). The notice is performed.

  FIG. 274 (g) shows a state in which a reach effect is performed using the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 stops the decorative symbol that is variably displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the decorative symbol that is variably displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the example, “decoration 7” is stopped in the left symbol display area 208a as a part of the ornament symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 6—decoration 7” corresponding to the loss, and then “decoration 7” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. "Is stopped and displayed. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the character “Leach” in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, thereby notifying that the combination of decorative symbols is in the reach state.

FIG. 274 (h) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game corresponding to the second hold is completed. In this state, the main control unit 300 stops the variable display of the special figure using the first special figure display device 212 (not shown). In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 stops displaying the decorative symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” corresponding to the loss.
<Operation reception effect and step-up notice effect (per reach B)>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 275 and FIG. 276, an example of the operation reception effect and the step-up notice effect when the reach per reach B is selected as the variation pattern of FIG. 1 will be described. In addition, the figure is a figure which showed the example of the effect when per reach B is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 in time series.

  FIGS. 275 (j) to 275 (l) are states in which an operation reception effect is being performed during the variable display of FIG. 1 corresponding to the first hold. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 displays an image imitating the appearance of the chance button 760 in the center of the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208, thereby allowing the player to press down the chance button 760. Encourage people.

  The first sub-control unit 400 performs the step-up notice lottery (step S3002) using the step-up notice lottery table in the above-described notice lottery process (step-up), and selects the notice effect mode. Now, assume that the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation game during variation display is per reach B, the big hit flag is on (reach B big hit), and “4” is selected as the notice effect mode.

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 performs state lottery (step S3003) using the above-described state lottery table and selects the state of the chance button 760. In this example, the notice effect mode is the first effect. And “vibration + rotation (second state)” is selected as the state. In the state lottery table shown in FIG. 271 (b) above, when the notice effect mode is “4 (first effect)”, vibration + rotation (second state) is performed as compared with the normal mode (first state). State) is easier to select.

  In addition, the first sub control unit 400 becomes vibration + rotation (second state) with respect to the second sub control unit 500 when the vibration + rotation (second state) is selected by the state lottery. Send a notice command. Since the chance button 760 is in the normal mode (first state), the second sub-control unit 500 changes the chance button 760 to vibration + rotation (second state) and also performs the pressing operation of the chance button 760. Allow reception.

  FIGS. 275 (m) and (n) show a state in which a step-up notice effect is being performed during the variable display of FIG. 1 corresponding to the first hold. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 performs the pressing operation of the chance button 760 for a predetermined number of times (for example, once) when the acceptance period (for example, 5 seconds) of the pressing operation of the chance button 760 has passed. In the event of a failure, a step-up notice effect is started. In this example, since “4” is selected as the notice effect mode, before the reach effect shown in FIG. 275 (o), the notice effect in step 4 shown in FIGS. 275 (m) and (n) (this example) Then, by displaying the image including the number 4), the notice effect of step 4 is suddenly performed without performing the notice effect of steps 1-3.

  In this example, even after the chance button 760 is pressed at the timing of FIG. 275 (l), the chance button 760 is held in vibration + rotation (second state) until the step-up notice ends. Yes. In this example, since the one-step notice effect mode “4” having a smaller number of steps than the two-step notice effect form “1-2” is selected, the steps in FIGS. 275 (m) and (n) are performed. 4 is performed twice, so that the time until the reach effect in FIG. 275 (o) is made the same as in the case of the step-up notification of “1-2”.

  FIG. 275 (o) shows a state in which a reach effect is performed using the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 stops the decorative symbol that is variably displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the decorative symbol that is variably displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the example, “decoration 7” is stopped in the left symbol display area 208a as a part of the ornament symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” corresponding to the jackpot, then “decoration 7” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. "Is stopped and displayed. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the character “Leach” in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, thereby notifying that the combination of decorative symbols is in the reach state. Further, the second sub-control unit 500 changes the chance button 760 to the normal mode (first state).

  FIG. 275 (p) to FIG. 276 (s) are states in which the second operation acceptance effect is being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 276 (r), the first sub-control unit 400 displays an image imitating the appearance of the chance button 760 in the center of the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “press!” Is displayed to prompt the player to press the chance button 760.

  The first sub-control unit 400 performs state lottery (step S3102) using the reach B lottery state lottery table in the above-described notice lottery process (reach B sub), and selects the state. Assume that “vibration + rotation (second state)” is selected as the state. In the reach B big hit state table shown in FIG. 271 (c), when the fluctuation pattern is a reach B big hit, vibration + rotation (second state) is performed as compared with the normal mode (first state). Easy to choose.

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 performs an effect lottery (step S3103) using the above-described effect lottery table and selects an effect mode. In this example, the state selected in the state lottery is “vibration + Since “rotation (second state)”, it is assumed that a direct hit (first effect) having a winning probability higher than that after a loss (second effect) is selected. In the effect lottery table shown in FIG. 271, when the state is vibration + rotation (second state), the direct hit (first effect) is more than the post-loss recovery (second effect). Is easy to select.

  In this example, the winning probability of the direct hit (first effect) in the effect lottery is set higher than the winning probability of the revival after losing (second effect). The winning probability of the second effect) is set higher than the winning probability of the direct hit (first effect), and after the revival (second effect) is performed rather than the direct hit (first effect) You may comprise so that it may become easy.

  In addition, the first sub control unit 400 becomes vibration + rotation (second state) with respect to the second sub control unit 500 when the vibration + rotation (second state) is selected by the state lottery. Send a notice command. Since the chance button 760 is in the normal mode (first state), the second sub-control unit 500 changes the chance button 760 to vibration + rotation (second state) and also performs the pressing operation of the chance button 760. Allow reception.

  When the chance button 760 is to be changed from the normal mode (first state) to vibration + rotation (second state) at the timing shown in FIG. 276 (r), the rotation decorative member of the chance button 760 is displayed. Even when the 750b becomes unable to rotate due to a failure or the like and only the vibration of the chance button 760 by the vibrator 750c is enabled (third state), in this embodiment, the chance button 760 is vibrated and rotated. An operation reception effect similar to that in the case of changing to the (second state) is performed, and reception of the chance button 760 is permitted (see the dotted frame in FIG. 276).

  Further, when the chance button 760 is to be changed from the normal mode (first state) to the vibration + rotation (second state) at the timing shown in FIG. 276 (r), the rotation decorative member of the chance button 760 is displayed. Even in the case where both the 750b and the vibrator 750c cannot be rotated due to a failure or the like and remain in the normal state (first state), in this embodiment, the chance button 760 is vibrated + rotated (second The operation reception effect is the same as when the state is changed to (state), and the reception of the chance button 760 is permitted (see the dotted frame in FIG. 276).

  FIGS. 276 (t) and (u) show a state in which a direct hit (first effect) is performed before the final display shown in FIG. When the acceptance period (for example, 5 seconds) of the pressing operation of the chance button 760 has passed or when the chance button 700 has been pressed a predetermined number of times (for example, once), The production starts before the confirmation display of the special figure 1.

  In this example, since “direct hit (first effect)” is selected as the effect mode, before the confirmation display shown in FIG. 276 (v), the first shown in FIGS. 276 (t) and (u). (In this example, an effect (in this example, a character display such as “success” or “congratulations” or an image display of the decoration 7) suggesting that the success / failure determination of the special figure 1 variable game is successful) In this example, since the direct-acting (first effect) effect that has a shorter effect time than the effect for reviving after the loss (second effect) is selected, FIGS. 276 (t), (u) In FIG. 276, the direct hit effect is performed twice to adjust the time until the confirmation display in FIG. 276 (v).

  FIG. 276 (v) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game corresponding to the first suspension is completed. In this state, the main control unit 300 stops the variable display of the special figure using the first special figure display device 212 (not shown). In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 stops the decorative symbol variation display in accordance with the stop display of the special diagram 1, but in this example, the decorative symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” corresponding to the big hit is displayed. "Is stopped.

  FIG. 277 is a diagram corresponding to FIGS. 276 (s) to (v) described above, and shows a time series of examples of effects in the case where the post-losing resurrection (second effect) is selected by effect lottery. It is.

  As described above, the first sub-control unit 400 performs the state lottery (step S3102) using the reach B big hit state lottery table in the notice lottery process (reach B sub), and selects the state. Assume that “normal mode (first state)” is selected as the state. Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 performs an effect lottery (step S3103) using the above-described effect lottery table and selects an effect mode, but in this example, after the revival (second effect) Suppose that it is selected.

  FIGS. 277 (t) and (u) show a state in which the second effect is performed before the confirmation display of FIG. In this example, the first sub-control unit 400 selects “per revival after loss (second effect)” as the effect mode, so that before the confirmation display shown in FIG. t), the second effect shown in (u) (in this example, a fake effect (in this example, “That degree”) that falsely suggests that the determination of whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is lost. After the display and the image display of the decoration 6), a true presentation (in this example, “Nanchatte”) indicating that the determination of whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is true or not is a win or the decoration 7 Image display).

According to this example, it can be expected that the first effect (the effect suggesting whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful) will be performed in the second state (vibration + rotation). May increase motivation.
<Variation 1 of operation reception effect and step-up notice effect>

  FIG. 278 is a diagram showing a first modification of the operation reception effect and the step-up notice effect shown in FIGS. 274 to 276, and FIGS. 278 (a) to (h) are FIGS. 274 (a) to (h). It corresponds to.

  FIGS. 278 (c) and 278 (d) show a state in which an operation reception effect is being performed during the variable display of FIG. 1 corresponding to the second hold. In the present modification, the first sub-control unit 400 displays an image that imitates a button with a “push” character in the center of the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208. By pressing the button 760, the player is prompted to perform the pressing operation, and the chance button 760 is pressed by performing an effect of gradually reducing the remaining amount of the meter according to the remaining time of the effective period of the pressing operation of the chance button 760. The effective time of is notified.

  Also, FIGS. 278 (e) and (f) are states in which a step-up notice effect is being performed during the variable display of the special figure 1 corresponding to the second hold. In this modification, the first sub-control unit 400 has a reception period (for example, 5 seconds) for pressing the chance button 760 even when the chance button 760 has not been pressed a predetermined number of times (for example, once). When it has passed, a step-up notice effect is started. Further, in the present modification, “1-2” is selected as the notice effect mode, so that the notice effect of step 1 shown in FIG. 278 (e) (this is shown) before the reach effect shown in FIG. In the example, an image including the number 1) is displayed, and then the notice effect in step 2 shown in FIG. 278 (f) (in this example, an image including the number 2) is displayed in two stages ( (2 steps) notice effect.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 278 (e ′), instead of displaying the notice effect in step 1, a decorative symbol variation display may be performed. Further, the contents of this modification may be applied to the operation reception effect and the step-up notice effect (per reach B) shown in FIG.
<Modification 2 of the operation reception effect & step-up notice effect>

  FIG. 279 is a diagram showing a modification 2 of the operation reception effect and the step-up notice effect shown in FIGS. 274 to 276, and FIGS. 279 (o) to (v) are FIGS. 275 (o) to 276 ( v).

  279 (p)-(s) are the states which are performing the operation reception effect. In this modification, the first sub-control unit 400 displays an image imitating the appearance of the chance button 760 at the center of the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing shown in FIG. , By prompting the player to press the chance button 760, the remaining amount of the meter is gradually reduced according to the remaining time of the effective period of the pressing operation of the chance button 760. The effective time of the pressing operation of the chance button 760 is notified by performing the effect.

  Further, FIGS. 279 (t) and (u) are states in which a post-losing revival (second effect) is performed before the confirmation display in FIG. In this modification, the first sub-control unit 400 has a reception period (for example, 5 seconds) for pressing the chance button 760 even when the chance button 760 has not been pressed a predetermined number of times (for example, once). When it has passed, the second effect (in this example, a false effect that falsely suggests that the judgment of whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is wrong) After performing the decoration 6 image display), a true effect (in this example, “Nanchatte”) or a decoration 7 image display that suggests that the determination of whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is true is true. )I do.

  In the present modification, an example is shown in which when the effective period of the pressing operation of the chance button 760 has elapsed, the after-losing recovery (second effect) is forcibly performed. However, the effective pressing operation of the chance button 760 is shown. You may comprise so that a direct hit (1st effect) may be performed compulsorily when the period passes.

  As described above, the gaming table according to the third embodiment includes an operation means (for example, a chance button 760) provided at least at a position where the player can operate, and an effect means (at least a plurality of effects can be executed). For example, a gaming machine including presentation control performed by the first sub-control unit 400 and a decorative symbol display device 208), wherein the operation means can at least be in a plurality of types of states, At least one of the plurality of types of states is a first state (for example, a chance button 760 of a normal mode), and at least one of the plurality of types of states is a second state (for example, Vibration + rotation chance button 760), the first state is at least different from the second state, and at least one of the plurality of types of effects is a first state Output (for example, a first effect shown in FIG. 276 (t) (a true effect that suggests that the special figure variable game is a hit), and at least one of the multiple types of effects is The second effect (for example, the second effect shown in FIG. 277 (t) (a fake effect that falsely suggests that the determination of whether or not the special figure variable game is successful) is the first effect, , The production is at least different from the second production, and the production means can execute at least the first production when the first condition is satisfied, When the first condition is satisfied, the second presentation can be executed at least. The first condition is that the player operates the operation means during the first period. The first effect is a condition that may be satisfied. Wherein said operating means in a period when the a second state, said a second at least performed easily effect than demonstration, it is the amusement machine according to claim.

  In some cases, the gaming machine according to the third embodiment can provide a gaming machine characterized by the relationship between the rendering means and the operating means. Moreover, it can be made to expect that the 1st production will be performed by a 2nd state, and a player's willingness to play may be raised.

  In addition, operation means (for example, a chance button 760) provided at a position where the player can operate, and effect means (for example, effect control or decoration performed by the first sub-control unit 400) that can execute at least the first effect. A display device 208), wherein the operating means can execute at least a plurality of types of states, and at least one of the plurality of types of states is a first type. A state (for example, a chance button 760 of a normal mode), and at least one of the plurality of types of states is a second state (for example, a vibration + rotation chance button 760), and the first state Is at least different from the second state, and the first effect is an effect that can be executed at least when the operation means is operated in the first period (for example, in FIG. 276 (t)). The first effect (a true effect that suggests that the special figure variation game is a win / no-win decision), and the first effect is that the state of the operation means in the first period is the second effect. In the case of this state, it may be an effect that is easier to be executed than at least other effects.

  According to such a configuration, there may be a case where it is possible to provide a game machine having a feature in the relationship between the production means and the operation means. Moreover, it can be made to expect that the 1st production will be performed by a 2nd state, and a player's willingness to play may be raised.

  The first effect is an effect that may be executed even when the operation means is not operated in the first period, and the second effect is the first period. Even if the operation means is not operated, the effect may be executed.

  According to such a configuration, there may be a case where it is possible to provide a game machine having a feature in the relationship between the production means and the operation means. Moreover, it can be made to expect that the 1st production will be performed by a 2nd state, and a player's willingness to play may be raised.

  The operating means is at least capable of taking at least the second state in relation to the first effect, and the operating means is at least the second effect in relation to the second effect. It may be at least possible to take two states.

  The first effect includes at least an effect for deriving a first result (for example, a hit result of the special figure variation game), and the second effect is the first result. The first effect is at least recognizable to derive the first result in the second period, and the second effect is the third effect. It may be at least recognizable that the first result is derived in the period, and the second period may be started at least earlier than the third period.

  With such a configuration, the second state may be able to derive the first result earlier in relation to the player's operation, so that the player can actively operate the operation means. May be possible.

  The aspect of the first result (for example, display, sound, light, movement) by the first effect and the aspect of the second result by the second effect may be different or the same. It may be a thing. Further, the first effect and the second effect may be configured so that the player can recognize the first result at the same timing even if they are different effects. For example, if a value is added to the second effect (second state) than the first effect (first state), such as making the first effect a rare effect, In some cases, the operating means can be actively operated.

  In addition, the second effect can at least recognize that the second result (for example, the failure of the result of determination of whether or not the special figure variation game is successful) is derived in the fourth period. The fourth period is a period at least partially overlapping with the second period, and the third period is a period starting at least after the fourth period, The second performance is at least recognizable that the second result is changed to the first result in the third period, and the second result is the first result The result may be at least different from the result.

  With such a configuration, the player may be able to give a sense of security and expectation to the player because the first result, which is the final result, may be recognized early in the first state. There is.

  In addition, said 1st result and said 2nd result are not limited to what is alert | reported by the combination display of a decoration symbol, For example, you may alert | report by the presence or absence of operation | movement of a movable body, or by the victory or defeat of a battle effect. You may notify. In this case, even in the state where the symbol combination is not derived, the player may be able to easily recognize that there is a possibility that the player may have the first result or the second result due to the game characteristics or performance. In addition, the first result and the second result are not only related to whether or not the special figure variation game is successful, but also a notice for going to a hot fever reach, a result of a pre-read notice, a result of a general drawing effect, a mission achievement and a setting. It can be applied to various effects such as registration (changing effects depending on the level and giving a sense of superiority).

  In addition, a decorative symbol display means capable of executing at least a decorative symbol variation display is provided, wherein the first result is a stop mode in which the stop mode of the decorative symbol can recognize a big hit, and the second result is The stop pattern of the decorative symbol may be a stop pattern that allows the user to recognize the loss.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to quickly recognize that it is a big hit in accordance with the operation of the operation means, and there may be a close relationship between the operation of the operation means and the big hit. In some cases, the operation means can be prompted to operate.

  In addition, even if the operation means is operated and the first effect can be executed, the effect means becomes the first effect when the operation means is not operated. Instead, the second effect may be executed at least.

  With such a configuration, there is a case where the player who can operate the operation means can recognize the big hit quickly by the first effect, so that the operation means can be actively operated. The production means may continue to execute the first production when the operation means is not operated.

  In addition, the control unit includes at least a control unit (for example, the second double control unit 500) capable of controlling the state of the operation unit, and the control unit is capable of executing at least a first control. Includes at least control for changing the state to the second state, and the rendering means is configured so that the operation means is in the second state despite the control means performing the first control. Even in a case other than the above, it may be possible to execute at least the first effect.

  With such a configuration, even if the operation means does not change to the second state that should be changed due to a failure of the operation means, etc., the first effect can be executed. Thus, a situation in which the player's willingness to play is reduced can be prevented, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  The states other than the second state include the first state (for example, the normal mode shown in FIG. 272 (b)), the first state, and the second state (for example, FIG. 272). The third state (for example, vibration shown in FIG. 272 (b), only the rotation not shown, only the rotation shown in FIG. 272, the first state, and the second state are different from the vibration + rotation shown in FIG. There are multiple differences, and one of them is not working due to a failure).

  In addition, the operation means can at least be in the first state during the second period, and the rendering means can perform a second operation when the operation means is operated during the second period. An effect (for example, an effect suggesting a loss) can be executed at least, and the second effect may be an effect different from at least the first effect (for example, an effect suggesting a hit).

  With such a configuration, the relationship between the second notice and the first effect is maintained, so that the player is not mistaken for the effect or the like.

  The production means is capable of executing at least the first production and the second production when the operation means in the first state is operated, and the production device in the second state. When the operation means is operated, the first effect and the second effect may be at least executable.

  In addition, the first state may be a normal state (for example, an operation unit at an initial position). The second state may be a mode in which at least a first mode (for example, height, vibration, curing, rotation, wind, etc.) is added to the first state.

Further, the operating means may be easier to take in the first state than in the second state in the first effect, and the operating means may be in the first effect. The second state may be easier to take than the first state.
<Embodiment 4>

Next, a pachinko machine according to Embodiment 4 of the present invention will be described in detail. In addition, about the structure same as the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on the said Embodiment 1, while attaching | subjecting the same code | symbol in drawing, the description is abbreviate | omitted. Only the configuration different from the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment will be described below.
<Lottery table such as continuous rotation>

  FIG. 280 is an example of a lottery table such as the number of consecutive hits used to determine the state of the chance button 700 and the number of consecutive hits.

  The lottery table such as the number of repeated hits is one of data tables stored in advance in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400. In the lottery table such as the number of times of repeated hits, the effect mode (variation pattern) on the decorative symbol display device 208 determined in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variable time lottery (or special figure 2 variable time lottery), and randomness of 0 to 99 are displayed. The numerical value range is associated with the state of the chance button 700 and the number of repeated hits. The basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines the state of the chance button 700 and the number of consecutive hits based on the lottery table such as the number of consecutive hits and a random value acquired at a predetermined timing (for example, when executing the state lottery). The “state lottery” to be determined is performed.

  For example, when the variation pattern is reach C lose, refer to the reach C lose line, and when the obtained random number value is 0, select “second state (one operation)” as the state and the number of repeated hits. When the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 1 to 5, when “second state (3 times operation)” is selected as the state and the number of repeated hits, and the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 6 to 19 In addition, “second operation (1/10 lottery after 5 times)” is selected as the state and the number of consecutive hits, and when the obtained random number value is in a numerical range of 20 to 99, “Operation (5th and subsequent 1/10 lottery)” is selected.

  When the fluctuation pattern is per reach C, the row per reach C is referred to, and when the obtained random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 79, the state and the number of repeated hits are “second state (1 time Operation) ”is selected, and when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 80 to 89,“ second state (three times operation) ”is selected as the state and the number of repeated hits, and the acquired random value is 90 to 93. In the numerical range, “second operation (1/10 lottery after 5 times)” is selected as the state and the number of repeated hits. When the obtained random number value is 94, When "Status (one operation)" is selected and the obtained random number value is in the numerical range of 95 to 96, "First state (three times operation)" is selected as the state and the number of repeated hits, and the obtained random value Is in the numerical range of 97 to 99, the state and the number of repeated hits are “ Selecting one of the operation (5 times since 1/10 lottery) ".

  In the lottery table such as the number of consecutive hits of this embodiment, when the variation pattern is reach C lose, the winning probability in the second state is 20/100, and the winning probability in the first state is 80/100. When the variation pattern is per reach C, the winning probability in the second state is 94/100, and the winning probability in the first state is 6/100. That is, when the success / failure determination of the special figure variable game is a win, the second state is easier to win than the first state, while when the determination of the success / failure of the special figure variable game is lost, The first state is easier to win than the state.

In addition, when the determination of whether or not the special figure variable game is successful, the second state is more likely to be won than the first state. Probability is 80%). In addition, when the determination of whether or not the special figure variable game is successful is lost, the first state is easier to win than the second state, but the first state (one operation) or the first state (three operations) ) Will not be won, only "1/10 lottery after 5 times" will be won. In other words, when the success / failure determination of the special figure variable game is successful, the number of consecutive hits is smaller than when the determination of the success / failure determination of the special figure variable game is lost.
<Operation reception production (reach C losing)>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 281, an example of an operation reception effect when reach C loss is selected as the special pattern variation pattern will be described. In addition, the figure is a figure which showed the example of the effect when reach C loss is selected as a fluctuation pattern of a special figure in time series.

  FIG. 281 (c) shows a state where a reach effect is performed using the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 stops the decorative symbol that is variably displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the decorative symbol that is variably displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the example, “decoration 7” is stopped in the left symbol display area 208a as a part of the ornament symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 6—decoration 7” corresponding to the lost symbol, and then “decoration” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. 7 ”is stopped and displayed. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the character “Leach” in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, thereby notifying that the combination of decorative symbols is in the reach state.

  FIGS. 281 (d) to (h) show a state in which an operation reception effect suggesting that it is the reception period of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is being performed. The first sub-control unit 400 displays characters such as “break clothes with repeated hits!” At the timing shown in FIG. 6D, and then displays the decorative symbols at the timings shown in FIGS. By displaying an image imitating the appearance of the chance button 700 in the first state (initial position) and the character display “repetitive strike!” In the center of the middle symbol display area 208b of the display device 208, the first The player is urged to continuously press the chance button 700 in the state (initial position) (the first state (initial position) the chance button 700 is repeatedly hit). At the same time, the effective time of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is notified by performing an effect of gradually decreasing the remaining amount of the meter according to the remaining time of the effective period of the pressing operation of the chance button 700.

  The first sub-control unit 400 selects a state of the chance button 700 and the number of consecutive hits by performing a state lottery using the above-described lottery table such as the number of repeated hits at the start of the operation reception effect. It is assumed that “the first state (5th and subsequent 1/10 lottery)” is selected as the state of the button 700 and the number of consecutive hits. In the lottery table such as the number of consecutive hits shown in FIG. 280, the first state (1/10 lottery after 5 times) is most likely to be won when the variation pattern is reach C loss.

  Subsequently, the first sub control unit 400 selects the first state (from 1st to 5th 1/10 lottery) by the state lottery, and the second sub control unit 500 receives information on the first state. Send a notice command containing Since the chance button 700 is already in the initial position (first state), the second sub-control unit 500 holds the chance button 700 in the initial position (first state).

FIG. 281 (i) shows a state in which an effect is performed before the confirmation display of the special figure 1 performed at the timing shown in FIG. The first sub-control unit 400, when the acceptance period (for example, 5 seconds) of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 has passed during the period of the operation acceptance effect, or the chance button 700 is a predetermined number of times (in this example, the state When it is pressed down only 5 times selected in the lottery and the lottery with the winning probability of 1/10 is not won, the effect (in this example, that the determination of whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is lost) After performing the suggestion effect (in this example, a character display such as “That degree” or an image display of the decoration 6)), the decorative symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” corresponding to the loss is stopped and displayed. To do.
<Operation reception production (per reach C)>

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 282 to 283, an example of the operation reception effect when the reach C per region is selected as the special pattern variation pattern will be described. In addition, the figure is a figure which showed the example of the effect when per reach C is selected as a fluctuation pattern of a special figure in time series.

  FIG. 282 (c) shows a state where the variation display of the decorative symbols for normal symbols is performed in the same manner as in FIG. 266 (g). The first sub-control unit 400 performs P7 (chance) → P7 in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 according to the effect pattern 7 selected in the general drawing effect system 1 lottery using the normal drawing effect system 1 lottery table. (Button) → Displays in the order of general drawing decoration 2. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 uses the P7 (button) in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 according to P7 (button) selected in the general drawing effect system 2 lottery using the general drawing effect system 2 lottery table. ) Is displayed. Thereafter, the display of P7 (button) is continued in the upper left corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 even during the execution of the variation display of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 5E and the effect shown in FIG. However, in this example, the P7 (button) display is temporarily deleted during the reach effect shown in FIG.

  FIG. 282 (f) shows a state where a reach effect is performed using the decorative symbol display device 208. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 stops the decorative symbol that is variably displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the decorative symbol that is variably displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the example, “decoration 7” is stopped in the left symbol display area 208a as a part of the ornament symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” corresponding to the jackpot symbol, and then “decoration” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. 7 ”is stopped and displayed. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the character “Leach” in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, thereby notifying that the combination of decorative symbols is in the reach state.

  FIGS. 282 (g) to 282 (i) show a state in which an operation reception effect suggesting that it is a reception period of pressing operation of the chance button 700 is being performed. The first sub-control unit 400 displays characters such as “break clothes with repeated hits” at the timing shown in (g) of the figure, and then displays the decorative symbols at the timings shown in (h) to (i) of the figure. By displaying an image imitating the appearance of the chance button 700 in the second state (operation completion position) with the characters “continuous hit” in the center of the middle symbol display area 208b of the display device 208, The player is prompted to continuously press the chance button 700 in the second state (operation completion position) (to repeatedly hit the chance button 700 in the second state (operation completion position)). At the same time, the effective time of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is notified by performing an effect of gradually decreasing the remaining amount of the meter according to the remaining time of the effective period of the pressing operation of the chance button 700.

  The first sub-control unit 400 selects a state of the chance button 700 and the number of consecutive hits by performing a state lottery using the above-described lottery table such as the number of repeated hits at the start of the operation reception effect. It is assumed that “second state (one operation)” is selected as the state of the button 700 and the number of repeated hits. In the lottery table such as the number of consecutive hits shown in FIG. 280, when the variation pattern is per reach C, the second state (one operation) is most likely to be won.

  Subsequently, when the first sub control unit 400 selects the second state (one-time operation) by the state lottery, the first sub control unit 400 notifies the second sub control unit 500 of the second state information. Send. Since the chance button 700 is in the initial position (first state), the second sub-control unit 500 completes the operation of the chance button 700 from the initial position (first state) as shown in FIG. 282 (h). Move to position (second state).

FIGS. 283 (j) to 283 (l) show a state in which an effect is performed before the confirmation display of the special figure 1 performed at the timing shown in FIG. The first sub-control unit 400, when the acceptance period (for example, 5 seconds) of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 has passed during the period of the operation acceptance effect, or the chance button 700 is a predetermined number of times (in this example, the state When a press operation is performed only once (selected in the lottery), an effect (in this example, an effect that indicates that the special figure 1 variable game is successful is a win (in this example, a character display such as “winning”) Or the image display of the decoration 7), the decoration symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” corresponding to the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, and the second sub-control unit 500 displays the first sub-control unit. In accordance with the effect by 400, the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 is rotated up and down as shown in FIGS.
<Modification 1 of operation reception effect (per reach C)>

  FIG. 284 is a diagram showing a first modification of the operation reception effect (per reach C) shown in FIGS. 282 to 283, and FIGS. 284 (f) to (m) are FIGS. 282 (f) to 283 (). m).

  FIGS. 284 (h) and (i) are diagrams showing an example of an effect when the drive mechanism of the chance button 700 fails during the effective period of the pressing operation of the chance button 700. At the timing shown in FIG. 284 (h), as in FIG. 282 (h), the chance button 700 is moved from the initial position to the operation completion position (position where the chance button 700 can be operated in the second state). Here, an example is shown in which the chance button 700 cannot be raised to the operation completion position due to a failure of the drive mechanism or the like.

In the present embodiment, even when a failure occurs in the chance button 700, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing shown in FIGS. 284 (h) to (i). By displaying the image of the chance button 700 in the second state (operation completion position) in the center and the character of “continuous hit” in the center, the second state (operation completion position) is displayed. The player is prompted to continuously press the chance button 700 (to repeatedly hit the chance button 700 in the second state (operation completion position)). At the same time, the effective time of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is notified by performing an effect of gradually decreasing the remaining amount of the meter according to the remaining time of the effective period of the pressing operation of the chance button 700.
<Modification 2 of operation reception effect (per reach C)>

  FIG. 285 is a diagram showing a modified example 2 of the operation reception effect (per reach C) shown in FIGS. 282 to 283, and FIGS. 285 (f) to (m) are FIGS. 282 (f) to 283 (). m).

  FIGS. 285 (g) to (i ') are states in which an operation reception effect suggesting that it is a reception period for pressing the chance button 700 is being performed. The first sub-control unit 400 displays characters such as “break clothes with repeated strikes” at the timing shown in FIG. 5G, and then displays the decoration at the timings shown in FIGS. By displaying an image imitating the appearance of the chance button 700 in the first state (initial position) and the character display “repetitive strike !!” in the center of the middle symbol display area 208b of the symbol display device 208, The player is prompted to continuously press the chance button 700 in one state (initial position) (to repeatedly hit the chance button 700 in the first state (initial position)). At the same time, the effective time of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is notified by performing an effect of gradually decreasing the remaining amount of the meter according to the remaining time of the effective period of the pressing operation of the chance button 700.

  The first sub-control unit 400 selects a state of the chance button 700 and the number of consecutive hits by performing a state lottery using the above-described lottery table such as the number of repeated hits at the start of the operation reception effect. It is assumed that “the first state (5th and subsequent 1/10 lottery)” is selected as the state of the button 700 and the number of consecutive hits. The first sub-control unit 400 notifies the second sub-control unit 500 of the first state information when the first state (1/10 lottery after 5 times) is selected by the state lottery. Send a command. Since the chance button 700 is already in the initial position (first state), the second sub-control unit 500 holds the chance button 700 in the initial position (first state).

FIGS. 285 (j) to 285 (l) show a state in which an effect is being performed before the confirmation display in FIG. 1 performed at the timing shown in FIG. The first sub-control unit 400, when the acceptance period (for example, 5 seconds) of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 has passed during the period of the operation acceptance effect, or the chance button 700 is a predetermined number of times (in this example, the state When it is pressed down only 5 times selected in the lottery and does not win the lottery with a winning probability of 1/10, in this example, it is determined that the success / failure determination of the special figure 1 variable game is a win. After performing a suggestion effect (in this example, a character display such as “hit” or an image display of decoration 7)), the decorative symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” corresponding to the winning symbol is stopped and displayed. To do.
<Modification 3 of operation reception effect (per reach C)>

  286 is a diagram showing a third modification of the operation reception effect (per reach C) shown in FIGS. 282 to 283, and FIGS. 286 (f) to (m) are FIGS. 282 (f) to 283 (). m).

  FIGS. 285 (g) to (j ′) are states in which an operation reception effect is being performed that suggests that it is a reception period for pressing the chance button 700. The first sub-control unit 400 displays characters such as “break clothes with repeated hits!” At the timing shown in FIG. 5G, and then displays the decoration at the timings shown in FIGS. By displaying an image imitating the appearance of the chance button 700 in the first state (initial position) and the character display “repetitive strike !!” in the center of the middle symbol display area 208b of the symbol display device 208, The player is prompted to continuously press the chance button 700 in one state (initial position) (to repeatedly hit the chance button 700 in the first state (initial position)). At the same time, the effective time of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is notified by performing an effect of gradually decreasing the remaining amount of the meter according to the remaining time of the effective period of the pressing operation of the chance button 700.

  The first sub-control unit 400 selects a state of the chance button 700 and the number of consecutive hits by performing a state lottery using the above-described lottery table such as the number of repeated hits at the start of the operation reception effect. It is assumed that “the first state (5th and subsequent 1/10 lottery)” is selected as the state of the button 700 and the number of consecutive hits. The first sub-control unit 400 notifies the second sub-control unit 500 of the first state information when the first state (1/10 lottery after 5 times) is selected by the state lottery. Send a command. Since the chance button 700 is already in the initial position (first state), the second sub-control unit 500 holds the chance button 700 in the initial position (first state).

  FIGS. 285 (j) to 285 (l) show a state in which an effect is being performed before the confirmation display in FIG. 1 performed at the timing shown in FIG. In the present modification, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that when the acceptance period (for example, 5 seconds) of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 has passed during the operation acceptance effect period, or the chance button 700 has been pressed a predetermined number of times ( In this example, when the pressing operation is performed only 5 times selected in the state lottery and the lottery with the winning probability of 1/10 is not won, the effect (in this example, whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful) is determined. After performing a fake presentation that falsely suggests that it is a loss (in this example, a character display such as “That degree” or an image display of the decoration 6), it is true whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is true or false. After performing a real presentation (in this example, a character display such as “Nanchatte” or an image display of the decoration 7), the decoration symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” corresponding to the winning symbol is performed. "Is stopped and displayed.

According to this example, in the second state (one operation at the operation completion position), the first effect (see Fig. 1) is easier than in the first state (five operations at the initial position). There may be a case where it is easy to perform an effect that suggests whether or not the game is successful. In addition, there may be a case where the user does not feel bothered in deriving the result while fulfilling the function as a notice in the second state (expected degree of expectation, etc.).
<Modification 4 of operation reception effect (per reach C)>

  FIG. 287 is a diagram showing a modification 4 of the operation reception effect (per reach C) shown in FIGS. 282 to 283, and FIGS. 287 (f) to (m) are FIGS. 282 (f) to 283 (). m).

  At the timing shown in FIG. 287 (h), the chance button 700 is moved from the operation completion position to the initial position, but here, an example in which the chance button 700 could not be raised to the initial position due to a failure of the drive mechanism or the like. Show.

  In the present modification, even if a failure occurs in the chance button 700, the first sub-control unit 400 performs the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timings shown in FIGS. In the center of the screen, an image imitating the appearance of the chance button 700 in the first state (initial position) and the character display “continuous hit!” Are displayed, so that the chance button in the first state (initial position) is displayed. The player is urged to continuously press the button 700 (to hit the first state (initial position) chance button 700 repeatedly). At the same time, the effective time of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is notified by performing an effect of gradually decreasing the remaining amount of the meter according to the remaining time of the effective period of the pressing operation of the chance button 700.

  As described above, the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment includes an operating means (for example, the chance button 700) provided at least at a position where the player can operate, and an effecting means (at least capable of executing the first effect) ( For example, a gaming machine including presentation control performed by the first sub-control unit 400 and a decorative symbol display device 208), wherein the operation means can at least be in a plurality of types of states, At least one of the plurality of types of states is a first state (for example, the chance button 700 in an initial position), and at least one of the plurality of types of states is a second state (for example, , The chance button 700 in the operation completion position that protrudes from the initial position, and the first state is at least different from the second state, and the first performance is (For example, the effects shown in FIGS. 282 (j) to (l) indicating that the special figure variable game is a win / no-win decision) is true (for example, the chance button 700 is 1). It is an effect that can be executed at least when the button is pressed once, and suggests that the determination of whether or not the special figure variation game is successful is shown in the first effect (for example, FIGS. 285 (j) to (l)). Is an effect that can be executed at least when the second condition is satisfied (for example, when the chance button 700 is pressed five times and a lottery with a winning probability of 1/10 is not won). And the first condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the player operates the operating means in the second state, and the second condition is that the player By operating the operating means in a state. A condition that may be, the first condition, the a met is likely to occur than the second condition, it is the amusement machine characterized by.

  According to the gaming table according to the present embodiment, there may be a case where it is possible to provide a gaming table characterized by the operation means. In addition, the second state may be able to easily perform the first effect with an easier operation than the first state. In addition, there may be a case where the user does not feel bothered in deriving the result while fulfilling the function as a notice in the second state (expected degree of expectation, etc.).

  The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied by operating the operating means a first number of times (for example, once), and the second condition is that the operating means is set to the second condition. This is a condition that may be satisfied by operating the number of times (for example, 5 times), and the first number may be smaller than the second number.

  With such a configuration, the second state can give the player a sense of expectation, but may not be suitable for operations with a large number of times. By changing the number of times in the first state, The user may not feel troublesome operation.

  The first number may be zero and the second number may be one. For example, in the second state, the first effect is performed at a certain timing without the player performing a button operation. On the other hand, in the case of the first state, it may be possible to add value to the second state if the first effect is not performed unless the button is operated.

  Further, the operation means is at least capable of being in any one of the first state and the second state in one effect pattern capable of executing the first effect. There may be.

  With such a configuration, there is a case where expectation can be given to the first effect depending on the state of the operation means.

  In addition, the first effect is an effect that can at least suggest the result of the determination, and the first condition is satisfied at least by operating the operation means for the first number of times during a first period. The second condition is a condition that may be satisfied at least by operating the operation means for the second number of times in the first period, and the first effect is Even when the first condition is not satisfied (for example, when a chance button 700 pressing operation acceptance period (for example, 5 seconds) has passed without the chance button 700 being pressed for the first number of times). The production can be executed at least after the first period is over, and the first production is performed when the second condition is not satisfied (for example, the chance button 700 is pressed for the second number of times). Acceptance period of depressed chance buttons 700 without (e.g., 5 seconds) is the presentation of the may be capable of at least performed after the first period ends even if) past.

  With such a configuration, the result of the success / failure determination is an effect most noticed by the player, and the player can surely show the player regardless of operation of the operation means (whether or not the condition is met). it can.

  The first effect is an effect that can at least suggest the first result as the result of the success / failure determination, and the first result is a result that the result of the success / failure determination is a big hit, One effect can suggest the first result with a plurality of types of patterns, at least one of the plurality of types of patterns is a first pattern, and at least one of the plurality of types of patterns One is a second pattern, and the first pattern can execute only an effect that can suggest the first result when the first condition is satisfied. One pattern can execute only an effect that can suggest the first result when the second condition is satisfied, and the second pattern satisfies the first condition. If possible, suggest a second result The second pattern is an effect capable of suggesting the second result when the first condition is satisfied. The second result is a result in which the result of the success / failure determination is lost, and the effect means is the first When one condition is not satisfied, the second pattern may be easily selected as the execution of the first effect.

  Further, the operation means is easy to take the first state when the first effect is executed in the first pattern, and the operation means is configured such that the first effect is the first effect. When executed in the second pattern, the second state may be easily taken.

  In addition, the first performance is at least a notice, and the first condition is a condition that may be satisfied at least by operating the operation means for the first number of times in a second period, The second condition is a condition that may be satisfied at least by operating the operating means a second number of times during the second period, and the first effect is that the first condition is satisfied. If not, it is at least not executed, and the first effect may be at least not executed if the second condition is not satisfied.

  Unlike the effect that suggests the result of the determination, the advance notice does not necessarily have to be directed to the player. For this reason, there is a case where it is possible to effectively prompt the operation of the operation means by performing the advance notice only when the condition is established by the operation of the operation means.

  Further, the effect means can execute at least the second effect, the second effect is an effect that can be executed at least when the third condition is satisfied, and the second effect is The fourth condition is an effect that can be executed at least when the fourth condition is satisfied, and the third condition is a condition that may be satisfied at least when the player operates the operation means in the first state. The fourth condition is a condition that may be satisfied at least by the player operating the operating means in the second state, and the third condition is (the first condition Is the condition that may be satisfied at least by continuing the operation of the operation means over a third period, and the fourth condition is the operation means (in the second state) To continue the operation for the fourth period A condition that may least established by the third period may be the same as the fourth period.

  With such a configuration, since the operation period of the operation means is the same, and an effect that makes the condition establishment difficulty almost the same regardless of the state is provided separately, in the second effect, the difference in state is a notice. Only (difference in expectation) can be provided, and there are cases where variations in function due to differences in state can be achieved.

  The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied at least by continuing the operation of the operation means (in the first state) for a first period, and the second condition Is a condition that may be satisfied at least by continuing operation of the operating means (in the second state) over a second period, wherein the first period is the second period May be shorter.

  Moreover, the structure which determines a state after selecting either said 1st production or said 2nd production at the same timing may be sufficient. With such a configuration, there may be a case where a variation can be given to the effect using the operation means at the same timing.

  The configuration of the gaming table according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the gaming table according to the above-described embodiment. For example, in addition to the liquid crystal display device and the lamp, the presentation unit and the notification unit according to the present invention include a speaker, A movable body, operation means itself, etc. can be applied. Therefore, the presentation by the presentation means and the notification by the notification means are not limited to the display by the liquid crystal display device or the light emission by the lamp. But you can. Further, the operation means according to the present invention is not limited to the bet button, and any operation means that can be operated by the player may be used.

  Further, the notification means may notify that the operation means does not accept the operation, or may notify that the operation means is in an error state. Further, there is one notification means, and the same notification mode may be performed even when the operation means is not operating to the position where it originally moves. Further, there is one notification means, and a different notification mode may be performed when the operation means is not operating to the originally moving position. Here, the “different notification mode” may be any of the case where notification is not performed, the case where notification is performed, and the case where notification is not performed.

  Further, there are a plurality of notification means, and at least one or all of the plurality of notification means may perform notification that prompts an operation. Further, there are a plurality of notification means, and different notification modes may be performed when the operation means is not operating to the originally moving position. Here, the “different notification mode” may include a case where a predetermined notification unit among a plurality of notification units does not perform notification, or may include a case where all of the plurality of notification units do not perform notification. The operation means according to the present invention may be a BET, a stop button, a lever, or the like.

  In addition, when there are a plurality of effects as a result of accepting an operation by one notifying unit, at least one of the plurality of effects may not be performed when the operating unit is not operating up to the second position where it originally moves. Good. In addition, it is also possible to produce effects as a result of accepting operations by a plurality of notification means, and when the operation means is not operating to the second position where it originally moves, at least one notification means of the plurality of notification means It is possible not to perform the production. Moreover, the production | generation as a result of having received operation in one alerting | reporting means may be one. The plurality of notification means may include a device that does not produce an effect as a result of receiving an operation.

  Moreover, although the example which performs the detection based on the detection result of an operation means and the said detection result in a different control part was shown, you may perform the detection based on the detection result of an operation means and the said detection result in the same control part. Even when the operation unit is detected and the presentation based on the detection result is performed by different control units, the operation unit is operated when the operation unit is located at the first position or the second position. The operation detection result is transmitted to another control unit, and the other control unit is configured to receive the detection result. On the other hand, when the operation unit is operated while the operation unit is operating, the operation detection is performed. Although the result is transmitted to another control unit, the other control unit may be configured not to accept the detection result.

  Further, when the operation unit is operated when the operation unit is located at the first position or the second position, the operation detection result is transmitted to the first control unit or the second control unit, While the first control unit or the second control unit is configured to receive the detection result, when the operation unit is operated while the operation unit is operating, the operation detection result is transmitted to the first control unit. Alternatively, the data may be transmitted to the second control unit, but the first control unit or the second control unit may be configured not to accept the detection result. In addition, when the operation unit is operated when the operation unit is located at the first position, the operation detection result is transmitted to the first control unit, and the operation unit is located at the second position. Or when the operation means is operated during operation, the detection result may be transmitted to the second control unit.

  The transmission destination of the operation detection result before, during and after the operation of the operation means may be the first control unit. Further, even when the operation unit is operated during operation, the operation detection result may be received by another control unit. In addition, when the operation means before the operation is operated, the operation detection result is transmitted from the first control unit to the second control unit, and when the operation means is operated during and after the operation, from the second control unit. You may make it transmit the detection result of operation to a 1st control part. Further, before operation and during operation, the second control unit and after operation may be transmitted to the first control unit.

  In addition, if the operation means does not operate to the second position where it originally moves, the notifying means notifies the second position where it should have moved if the notification means performs notification that suggests the second position where it originally moved. The player may be notified, and there may be a case where a disadvantage is not given to the player as compared with the case of moving to the second position where the player originally moves. In addition, when the operating means is not operating to the second position where it originally moves, if the notifying means performs notification that does not suggest the second position where it originally moves, the player may be confused due to a mismatch between the operating state and the notification mode. May be able to prevent. In this case, the notification that does not suggest the second position to move originally may notify the position of the operating means before the operation, or the notification that does not suggest the second position to move originally may be A position different from that after the operation may be notified.

  In addition, the operation unit may include a plurality of operation units (for example, a first operation unit and a second operation unit). For example, before the operation of the operation unit, the operation detection result of the first operation unit is displayed. Before the operation of the operation means, the detection result of the operation of the second operation unit is not accepted, and when the operation means moves to the second position where it originally moves, at least the operation of the second operation unit You may comprise so that a detection result may be received.

  In addition, if the operation detection result of the second operation unit can be received when the operation means is not operating up to the second position where it originally moves, the operation detection result is not obtained even if the first operation unit is operated. If it is not accepted, the notification means may notify that the second operation unit can be operated. With such a configuration, the second operation unit that can be originally operated can be operated, so that the same operation as when the operation means is moved to the second position where the operation means originally moves can be performed. There are cases where it can be prevented from being disadvantaged. In this case, the notification means may not notify that the second operation unit can be operated.

  In addition, when the operation means is not operated up to the second position where it originally moves and the operation detection result of the second operation unit can be received, the operation detection result is received when the first operation unit is operated. In such a case, the notification means may notify that the second operation unit is operable, and may not notify that the first operation unit is operable. With such a configuration, it may be possible to prevent the player from losing the opportunity to operate because the first operation unit or the second operation unit may be operated. In this case, the notification means may not notify that the second operation unit can be operated, or the notification means may notify that the first operation unit is operable, You may alert | report only that the 2nd operation part can be operated by alerting | reporting means.

  In addition, when the operation means has not moved to the originally moved second position and the detection result of the second operation unit is not accepted, the operation detection result is accepted even if the first operation unit is operated. If not, the notification unit may notify that the second operation unit can be operated. With such a configuration, there is a case in which the operation unit can be prevented from operating when the operation unit is not moved to the second position where the operation unit originally moves, and the operation unit can be prevented from being broken. In this case, the notification means may not notify that the second operation unit can be operated.

  In addition, when the operation means is not operated to the second position where it originally moves and the detection result of the second operation unit is not received and the operation detection result is received by operating the first operation unit In addition, while notifying that the second operation unit is operable by the notification unit, it is not necessary to notify that the first operation unit is operable by the notification unit. With such a configuration, it may be possible to give the player a sense of incongruity by changing the operation section that can be operated when the operating means is not moved to the original moving position. In this case, the notification means may not notify that the second operation unit can be operated, or the notification means may notify that the first operation unit is operable, You may alert | report only that the 2nd operation part can be operated by alerting | reporting means.

  Further, the operated means according to the present invention may be an operating means. In addition, when the operation means is not moved to the second position in spite of the movement control being performed, the effect means is adapted to respond to the operation means being operated. You may make it not perform an effect at least.

  In addition, when the operation means moved to the second position due to the movement control is operated, (1) detection means (for example, the detection unit 710, the detection piece 704b4, the chance provided in the operation means) The button 750 detection unit and the bet button 132 detection unit) may detect that the pressing operation of the operation unit is detected. (2) After the time necessary for the movement control has elapsed, the operation unit is provided. The pressing operation of the operation means may be detected by the detection means (for example, the detection unit 710, the detection piece 704b4, the chance button 750 detection unit, the bet button 132 detection unit).

  Further, the time required for the movement control may be a time required for moving from the first position to the second position, and may be a driving means (for example, driving units 708 (708a, 708b) provided in the operating means. ), The drive source 754d, and the drive unit 427) may be operated to rotate the rotating member from the restricted position to the permitted position. When the movable unit is driven up and down, the movable unit May be the time until the movement to the movement completion position.

  In addition, the case where the operation means does not move to the second position even though the movement control is performed means that (1) the operation means is due to a physical factor such as failure of the drive means or pressing by the player. It may be a case where the means cannot move, or (2) even if a time required for the movement control elapses, a case where the constant drive by the drive means is not possible. Further, it may not be detected whether or not the operating means has moved to the second position by the movement control.

  Further, it may be detected by the movement control that the operation means has been moved to the second position. In this case, it can be seen that the operating means could not move to the second position because it was not detected, so that it is possible to produce an effect according to the detection result and increase the variation of the effect.

  Further, it may be detected that the operating means cannot be moved to the second position by the movement control. In this case, since the operation means has been moved to the second position because it has not been detected, it is possible to produce an effect according to the detection result and increase the variation of the effect. Further, the special effect may be configured to be performed when the operation means is operated even when the movement control is being executed.

  The movement control is performed over a first movement period, the first movement period is a period composed of a second period and a third period, and the special effect is the movement Even when the control is being executed, it may be configured to be performed when the operation means is operated during the third period. The special effect may be configured not to be performed when the movement control is being performed and the operation means is operated during the second period.

  For example, when the movement control starts and ends in 1 second (an example of the first period), no special effects are performed even if the operating means is operated for 0.5 seconds (an example of the second period) after the start. For 0.5 seconds (an example of the third period) from the elapse of 0.5 seconds to the end after the start, a special effect may be performed if the operation means is operated. Of course, when the movement control is started and ended in one second (an example of the movement control period), a special effect may be performed if the operation means is operated during this one second.

  Further, when the operation acceptance period ends with the operation means moved to the second position being not pressed, the operation means may be moved to the first position by movement control. In addition, when the operation acceptance period ends in a state where the operation means moved to the second position has not been pressed, the operation means may not be returned from the second position to the first position.

  Further, the operation means moved to the second position may be moved from the second position to the first position by movement control during the operation acceptance period. As for the means, the operation means may be moved from the second position to the first position during the operation reception period. Further, the operating means moved to the second position may be moved from the second position to the first position due to physical factors during the operation acceptance period.

  Further, when a plurality of operation means are provided (for example, the first operation means of the plurality of operation means can be moved to the second position by movement control, and the second operation of the plurality of operation means is performed. The means does not move, and when the notification means prompts the user to press the first operation means (in the case of (A) below), the first control is performed despite the movement control being performed. When the operating means has not moved to the second position, a pressing operation of the first operating means may be detected. Further, the pressing operation of the second operating means may be detected.

  In the case of (A), when the first operation means does not move to the second position in spite of the movement control, the pressing operation of the first operation means is detected. May be. Further, the pressing operation of the second operating means may not be detected. In the case of (A), when the first operation means does not move to the second position despite the movement control being performed, the pressing operation of the first operation means is not detected. May be. Further, the pressing operation of the second operating means may be detected.

  In the case of (A), when the first operation means does not move to the second position despite the movement control being performed, the pressing operation of the first operation means is not detected. May be. Further, the pressing operation of the second operating means may not be detected. In the case of (A), when the second operating means is moved to the second position by the movement control, a pressing operation of the first operating means may be detected. Further, the pressing operation of the second operating means may be detected.

  In the case of (A), when the second operating means is moved to the second position by the movement control, a pressing operation of the first operating means may be detected. Further, the pressing operation of the second operating means may not be detected. In the case of (A), when the second operation means is moved to the second position by the movement control, the pressing operation of the first operation means may not be detected. Further, the pressing operation of the second operating means may be detected. Further, when the second operation means is moved to the second position by the movement control, the pressing operation of the first operation means may not be detected. Further, the pressing operation of the second operating means may not be detected.

  Further, when a plurality of operation means are provided (for example, the third operation means and the fourth operation means among the plurality of operation means can be moved to the second position by movement control, and the notification means , When the notification for urging the operation of the third operation means is performed (hereinafter, in the case of (B)), the third operation means is moved to the second position despite the movement control being performed. If it does not move, the pressing operation of the first operating means may be detected. Further, the pressing operation of the fourth operating means may be detected.

  In the case of (B) above, when the third operation means does not move to the second position despite the movement control being performed, the pressing operation of the third operation means is detected. May be. Further, the pressing operation of the fourth operation means may not be detected. Further, in the case of (B), when the third operation means does not move to the second position in spite of the movement control, the pressing operation of the third operation means is not detected. May be. The pressing operation of the fourth operating means may be detected.

  Further, in the case of (B), when the third operation means does not move to the second position in spite of the movement control, the pressing operation of the third operation means is not detected. May be. Further, the pressing operation of the fourth operating means may not be detected. In the case of (B) above, when the third operating means is moved to the second position by the movement control, a pressing operation of the third operating means may be detected. Further, the pressing operation of the fourth operating means may be detected.

  In the case of (B) above, when the third operating means is moved to the second position by the movement control, a pressing operation of the third operating means may be detected. Further, the pressing operation of the fourth operation means may not be detected. In the case of (B) above, when the third operating means is moved to the second position by the movement control, the pressing operation of the third operating means may not be detected. The pressing operation of the fourth operating means may be detected.

  In the case of (B) above, when the third operating means is moved to the second position by the movement control, the pressing operation of the third operating means may not be detected. Further, the pressing operation of the fourth operating means may not be detected.

  Further, when a plurality of operation means are provided (for example, the fifth operation means and the sixth operation means among the plurality of operation means can be moved to the second position by movement control, and the notification means , A notification for prompting the operation of the fifth operation means and the sixth operation means is performed) (hereinafter, in the case of (C)), the pressing operation of the fifth operation means and the sixth operation means is detected. If the fifth operating means is detected earlier than the sixth operating means (same as in the case of sixth detection> fifth detection), the detection result of the sixth operating means is not accepted. Alternatively, the detection result of the sixth operation means may be accepted after the detection processing of the fifth operation means is completed, or may be accepted when the pressing operation of the sixth operation means is detected. Good.

  In the case of (C), when the detection of the fifth operation means and the detection of the sixth operation means are almost simultaneous, the detection may be accepted at the same time, or both may not be accepted. Alternatively, after receiving the detection of the fifth (sixth) operating means, the sixth (fifth) operating means may be detected, or the fifth (sixth) operating means may be detected. If the detection is accepted, the detection result of the sixth (fifth) operation means may not be performed. Note that, at approximately the same time, one may be preferentially received. For example, priority may be given to detection of operation means that produces an advantageous effect for the player among the pressed operation means, or priority may be given to detection of predetermined operation means.

  In the case of (C), when the pressing operation of the fifth operation means is detected, the sixth operation means may be moved to the first position by movement control. In this case, the pressing operation of the sixth operating means may not be detected, and the pressing operation of the sixth operating means may be detected. In the case of (C) above, when the pressing operation of the fifth operating means is detected, the sixth operating means may remain at the second position. In this case, the pressing operation of the sixth operating means may not be detected, and the pressing operation of the sixth operating means may be detected.

  In the case of (B) and (C) above, when the third (fifth) operating means and the fourth (sixth) operating means are in the second position after the operation acceptance period, the movement control is performed. The third (fifth) operating means and the fourth (sixth) operating means may be moved to the first position. In this case, the timing of the movement may be almost the same for the third (fifth) operating means and the fourth (sixth) operating means, either one of which moves first, during operation or when the operation ends. The other may be moved later.

  In addition, when the third (fifth) operating means and the fourth (sixth) operating means are in the second position after completion of the operation reception, the third (fifth) operating means and the fourth (sixth (sixth) ) May be stopped as it is at the second position. When the third (fifth) operating means and the fourth (sixth) operating means are in the second position after the operation acceptance period, the third (fifth) operating means and the Only one of the four (sixth) operation means may be moved to the first position.

  In addition, when the third (fifth) operating means and the fourth (sixth) operating means are in the second position during the operation reception period, the third (fifth) operating means and the Four (sixth) operation means may be moved to the first position. In this case, the timing of the movement may be almost the same for the third (fifth) operating means and the fourth (sixth) operating means, either one of which moves first, during operation or when the operation ends. The other may be moved later.

  In addition, when the third (fifth) operating means and the fourth (sixth) operating means are in the second position during the operation reception period, the third (fifth) operating means and the Only one of the four (sixth) operation means may be moved to the first position.

  The operation reception period indicates a period during which the result of detecting the pressing operation of the operation means is received. For example, when the operation reception period is 6 seconds, the detection result of the pressing operation of the operation means is received for 6 seconds after the operation reception is started, but the detection result of the operation means is not received after 6 seconds.

  Also, special effects can be executed when the operating means at the first position, the operating means moved to the second position by movement control, or the operating means moved to the third position by movement control is pressed. There may be. Note that the third position may be a position different from the first position and the second position.

  Further, the first notice and the second notice (including the pre-read notice) are not limited to the display of the image imitating the operation means. For example, the sound by the speaker, the light by the lamp, the movement by the movable body, the hold Includes icons, variable icons, character displays, and so on. Further, the second period is not limited to the period after reach, and may be a period before reach. For example, the reach notice may be executed in the second period.

  Further, when the operation means includes a light emitting means for emitting light, the first state is a state in which the light emitting means is not operated and no light is emitted, and the second state is: The light emitting means may be activated to emit light.

  In addition, the first effect and the second effect are not limited to effects by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect movable body 224, but may be performed together with sound effects by speakers, effects by lamps, and the like. One, plural or all of the above may be used.

The operation means is not limited to the chance buttons 700 and 760, and includes, for example, the bet buttons 130 to 132, the start lever 135, and the stop buttons 137 to 139 of the slot machine 100 described above.
<Other embodiments (pause valid time)>

  Hereinafter, a game table according to another embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 288 to 301. In order to avoid redundant description, the same contents as those of the other embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals in the drawings, and the description thereof is omitted. In addition, the reference numerals in the drawings referred to in the present embodiment are used only in the description of the present embodiment in principle, and even when the same reference numerals are used in the drawings referred to in other embodiments, In the description of this embodiment, the reference numerals used in FIGS. 288 to 301 are given priority.

Although the details will be described later, the gaming table according to the present embodiment is a gaming table including an operation unit and a display unit, and is a unit capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of display. At least one of them is a first display, and the first display is a display related to the operation means, and the display means can display at least the first display in a first period. The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display in a second period when a display condition is established, wherein the second period is the first period. It is a longer period, and the display condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the operation means is operated.
<Basic concept>

First, the basic concept of the game machine according to the present embodiment will be described. The gaming table according to the present embodiment includes an operation unit and a display unit. The operation means is a means that can be operated by at least a player. For example, the chance button 136, the setting operation unit 137, the ball launching handle 134, and the like described above are examples. The display means is means capable of executing at least display, and examples thereof include the above-described decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps, various LEDs, and the like.
<Basic concept / display>

  Next, display by the display unit according to the present embodiment will be described. The display according to the present embodiment includes display of an operation means image representing the operation means, display of an elapsed time notification image for notifying (declaring or suggesting) the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation means, and by the operation means Display of an effective time notification image for notifying (explicitly or suggesting) an effective time during which an operation can be accepted, display of a display mode change image whose display mode can be changed according to an operation of the operation unit, and an operation unit It includes at least an operation promotion image display for prompting an operation, an animation display corresponding to the operation by the operation means, and an animation display related to the operation means and irrelevant to the operation by the operation means. The display according to the present embodiment is configured by one, a plurality, or all of the plurality of displays, for example, the display of the operation means image and the display of the operation promotion image among the plurality of displays. The display expressed by one figure is also included.

  Moreover, in the game stand which can perform multiple types of effects, in the first effect among the multiple types of effects, one of the displays according to the present embodiment is displayed, and among the multiple types of effects In the second effect, a plurality of the displays according to the present embodiment may be displayed. Moreover, in the game machine which can perform multiple types of effects, in the first effect among the multiple types of effects, a plurality of the displays according to the present embodiment are displayed, and the first of the multiple types of effects is displayed. Even in the second effect, a plurality of the displays according to the present embodiment may be displayed.

Here, the operation means image is a character, number, figure, or the like representing the operation means. For example, the characters “chance button” representing the name of the operation means (for example, the chance button 136), An example is a figure simulating the appearance. The elapsed time notification image is a character, number, figure, or the like for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation means, for example, a character indicating the elapsed time (for example, “3 seconds elapsed”). Another example is a meter display that represents elapsed time as a scale. The effective time notification image is a character, number, figure, or the like for notifying the effective time that can be accepted by the operation means. For example, characters indicating the effective time (for example, “3 seconds remaining”) For example, a meter display that shows the effective time on a scale.
<Basic concept / Display mode>

  Next, a display mode of display according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 288 and 289. FIG. 288 and FIG. 289 are diagrams for explaining display modes according to another embodiment (effective time is temporarily stopped). In the figure, an image indicated by reference numeral BG is an operation means image, an image indicated by reference numeral TG is an effective time notification image, an image indicated by reference numeral CG is a display mode change image, and reference numeral PG indicates It is an operation promotion image.

  FIGS. 288 (a) to (b) show, in time series, an example in which the first display of the displays according to the present embodiment overlaps the second display due to the change in the display mode. For example, at the timing shown in FIG. 288 (a), the operation means image BG, the effective time notification image TG, the display mode change image CG, and the operation promotion image PG are set at predetermined intervals in this order from the top to the bottom. The display is controlled such that the display of the operation means image BG, the effective time notification image TG, the display mode change image CG, and the operation promotion image PG does not overlap each other by displaying them in a blank. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 288 (b) after the lapse of a predetermined time, a part of the display of the effective time notification image TG is obtained by moving the display of the display mode change image CG and the operation promotion image PG upward. Display control is performed so as to overlap a part of the display of the display mode change image CG.

  Note that the operation means image BG, the effective time notification image TG, the display mode change image CG, and the operation promotion image PG may be configured by different image data (still image data or moving image data), or one moving image. You may comprise with some image data contained in image data.

  With such display control, in this example, at least a part of the first display (in this example, display of the display mode change image CG) of the display according to the present embodiment is the second display (this example). Then, since it overlaps (is covered with) at least a part of the effective time notification image TG), a part of the second display (in this example, the display of the effective time notification image TG) is the first display ( In this example, the display mode change image CG) is not visible from the front (or is more difficult to see than when there is no first display). In this example, an example is shown in which a part of the display of the display mode change image CG overlaps a part of the display of the effective time notification image TG (a part of the display of the effective time notification image TG is covered). A part of the display of the image other than the display mode change image CG may be configured to overlap with a part of the display of the image other than the effective time notification image TG.

  On the other hand, at the timing shown in FIG. 288 (b), the display of the operation means image BG and the display mode change image CG, and the operation means image BG and the operation promotion image PG are controlled so as not to overlap each other. By such display control, at least a part of the first display (in this example, display of the display mode change image CG and the operation promotion image PG) of the display according to the present embodiment is set to the second display (book). In the example, since it does not overlap at least a part of the display of the operation means image BG, all of the second display (display of the operation means image BG in this example) is visible from the front. In this example, the operation unit image BG is not overlapped with the display of another image, but an image other than the operation unit BG is not overlapped with the display of one (or more) other images. You may comprise.

  Further, FIGS. 288 (c) to (e) show that at least a part of the first display of the display according to the present embodiment overlaps at least a part of the second display due to the change of the display mode. The example which does not overlap or overlaps is shown in time series. In this example, at the timing shown in FIG. 288 (c), the same display as the display shown in FIG. 288 (b) is performed. However, at the timing shown in FIG. By erasing the display of the change image CG, all the valid time notification images TG are visible from the front. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 288 (e) after the lapse of a predetermined time, the same display as that shown in FIG. 288 (c) is performed again. Thereafter, the display shown in FIG. 288 (d) and the display shown in FIG. Repeat the display shown in

  Thus, at least a part of the first display (in this example, display of the display mode change image CG) of the display according to the present embodiment is the second display (in this example, the effective time notification image TG). If the display is controlled so that it overlaps or does not overlap at least part of the display (for example, the second display is displayed or erased), the first display becomes the second display. At the timing when they do not overlap, the second display can be visually recognized from the front, and the effect can be enhanced.

  Further, in FIGS. 288 (f) to (h), after the first display among the displays according to the present embodiment is started at the first timing, the second display is started at the second timing. In this example, only the second display is deleted at the third timing. Specifically, the first display (in this example, display of the operation means image BG) is started at the timing shown in FIG. 288 (f), and at the timing shown in FIG. 288 (g) after a predetermined time has elapsed. , The second display (in this example, display of the effective time notification image TG) is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 288 (h) after the predetermined time has elapsed, the second display (in this example, effective Only the display of the time notification image TG) is deleted. If such display control is performed, the display times of the first display and the second display can be appropriately adjusted according to the display contents, and there are cases where a display that is easier to understand than before can be performed.

  Further, FIGS. 288 (i) to (m) are diagrams showing a specific example of display according to the present embodiment in time series. The figure imitating the appearance of the button in the same figure shows an example of the operation means image BG, and the characters “* (numbers are entered in *) defeat the body” show an example of the display mode change image CG. The letters “PUSH !!!!” and “continuous hits !!” and the downward-pointing arrows indicate examples of the operation-promoting image PG, such as meter shapes and “remaining * seconds (numbers are entered in *)”. The characters indicate an example of the valid time notification image TG.

  In this example, at the timing shown in FIG. 288 (i), the meter figure of the effective time notification image TG is displayed directly below the operation means image BG (substantially in the center of the display area), and after the predetermined time has elapsed. After the timing shown in 288 (j), the characters “remaining * seconds (numbers are entered in *)” of the effective time notification image TG are displayed on the upper right of the operation means image BG (upper right corner of the display area). Thus, the display mode of the effective time notification image TG is changed, and the display position of the effective time notification image TG is also changed. As described above, if the display mode and the display position of the display according to the present embodiment are changed, the player's attention can be attracted to the display in which the display mode and the display position are changed. May be able to increase.

  Also, FIGS. 289 (a) to (c) and FIGS. 289 (d) to (f) respectively perform the first display and the second display of the displays according to the present embodiment. In addition, after the display control is performed so that the third display overlaps the second display, the first display and the second display are erased in time series.

  Specifically, in the example shown in FIGS. 289 (a) to 289 (c), the first display (display of the operation means image BG) and the second display (valid time) at the timing shown in FIG. 289 (a). FIG. 289 after the elapse of the first time after the display control is performed so that the third display (display of the display mode change image CG) overlaps the second display. At the timing shown in (b), the first display (display of the operation means image BG) and the second display (display of the effective time notification image TG) are erased. Therefore, in this example, at the timing shown in FIGS. 289 (b) and (c), the first display (display of the operation means image BG) and the first display are performed by the third display (display of the display mode change image CG). The visibility of the second display (display of the effective time notification image TG) is not hindered.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIGS. 289 (d) to (f), the first display (display of the operation means image BG) and the second display (effective time notification image TG) are performed at the timing shown in FIG. 289 (d). After the display control is performed so that the third display (display of the display mode change image CG) overlaps the second display, the second time longer than the first time elapses. The first display (display of the operation means image BG) and the second display (display of the effective time notification image TG) are erased at the timing shown in FIG. 289 (f) later. Therefore, in the present example, at the timing shown in FIG. 289 (e), a part of the second display (effective time notification image TG) is visually recognized from the front by the third display (display of the display mode change image CG). Impossible (or difficult to see compared to the case where there is no third display).

  FIGS. 289 (g) and (h) and FIGS. 289 (i) and (j) show the first display and the second display, respectively, among the displays according to the present embodiment. An example of performing three displays is shown in time series. Specifically, in the example shown in FIGS. 289 (g) and (h), the first display (display of the operation means image BG) and the second display (effective time notification image) at the timing shown in FIG. 289 (g). After performing the display of TG, the first display (display of the operation means image BG) and the second display (display of the effective time notification image TG) at the timing shown in FIG. 289 (h) after the third time has elapsed. Is cleared. Therefore, at the same timing, the first display (display of the operation means image BG) and the second display (display of the effective time notification image TG) are visually recognized by the third display (display of the display mode change image CG). Sex is not inhibited.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIGS. 289 (i) and (j), the first display (display of the operation means image BG) and the second display (display of the effective time notification image TG) are performed at the timing shown in FIG. 289 (i). ), The first display (display of the operation means image BG) and the second display (valid time) also at the timing shown in FIG. 289 (j) after the elapse of a fourth time longer than the third time. Display of the notification image TG). For this reason, at the same timing, a part of the second display (display of the effective time notification image TG) is not visible from the front (or the third display) due to the third display (display of the display mode change image CG). It is difficult to see compared to the case where there is no.
<Display control in button production>

  Next, display control in the button effect according to the present embodiment will be described. Here, the “button effect” according to the present embodiment is, for example, as shown in FIG. 290 (b), in which a graphic imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 is displayed as the operation means image BG. As a display of the above-mentioned effective time notification image TG, a meter graphic indicating the remaining time of the effective time that can accept the operation of the chance button 136 is displayed as a scale, and as the above-described operation promotion image PG, This is an effect of displaying the letters “PUSH” and performing the first display as the above-described display mode change image CG. The button effect is not limited to this example, and may be constituted by one or a plurality of these displays.

  The gaming table according to the present embodiment includes the control unit shown in FIG. 174. Specifically, the main control unit 300 that performs overall game control processing, and the processing generated by the main control unit 300 A first sub-control unit 400 that performs control processing related to effects based on information, and a second sub-control unit 500 that performs control processing related to effects based on processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. Yes. In the following description, the first sub control unit 400 may be referred to as a “sub control unit”, and the control by the first sub control unit 400 may be referred to as a “sub control”. In addition, the second sub control unit 500 may be referred to as a “liquid crystal control unit”, and the control by the second sub control unit 500 may be referred to as “liquid crystal control”.

In addition, “operation” shown in the following drawings indicates whether or not the operation means (for example, the chance button 136) is operated, and a vertical thick line indicates that there is an operation. In addition, “valid time” shown in the drawing indicates the remaining time (seconds) of the valid time of the chance button 136 with a number. The “valid state” shown in the drawing indicates whether the operation of the chance button 136 is valid (a state in which the operation can be accepted) or invalid (a state in which the operation cannot be accepted), and the underline is invalid. State, the overline indicates a valid state. “Liquid crystal control” and “sub control” shown in the drawing are as described above, and arrows shown in the drawing indicate transmission or reception of various commands.
<Display control / no operation in button production>

  FIG. 290 (a) shows an example of button effects when the chance button 136 is not operated during the effective time of the chance button 136 in time series.

  At the timing indicated by T1 in FIG. 290 (a), the sub-control unit switches the operation of the chance button 136 from the invalid state to the valid state, and at the same time, the valid time of the chance button 136 (5 seconds in this example, and so on) Countdown (counting) has started. The sub control unit transmits a button effect start command for instructing the start of the button effect to the liquid crystal control unit, and the liquid crystal control unit that has received the button effect start command starts the button effect. The button effect start command includes time information indicating the effective time (5 seconds in this example) of the chance button 136 at the time of command transmission, and image data of the image displayed in the button effect (in this example, the operation means image BG). , Image data of the effective time notification image TG and the operation promotion image PG).

  Upon receiving this button effect start command, the liquid crystal control unit displays the operation means image BG (a figure imitating the appearance of the chance button 136) and the effective time notification image TG (the remaining effective time of the chance button 136) as the button effect. A display of time) is displayed, and an operation promotion image PG (display of characters “PUSH”) is displayed. In addition, after starting the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136, the liquid crystal control unit sets the scale of the effective time notification image TG (meter figure) every time the effective time decreases by a predetermined time (1 second in this example). The display is reduced.

  Further, the sub control unit continues to count down the effective time of the chance button 136, and at the timing indicated by T2 in FIG. A button effect end command is transmitted. Upon receiving this button effect end command, the liquid crystal control unit first deletes the display of the operation promotion image PG, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, deletes the display of the operation means image BG and the display of the effective time notification image TG. , Button production has ended.

When the chance button 136 is operated during the effective time of the chance button 136, the sub control unit transmits a button reception command notifying the liquid crystal control unit that the operation of the chance button 136 has been received. However, in this example, since there was no operation of the chance button 136 during the effective time of the chance button 136, the sub-control unit does not transmit the button reception command.
<Display control in button effect / Example of button operation in single operation>

  FIG. 290 (b) shows an example of button effects on a gaming machine that can accept the operation of the chance button 136 only once during the effective time of the chance button 136 in time series. In this example, the operation of the chance button 136 can be accepted only once during the effective time of the chance button 136, and the display mode change image CG is displayed when the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted. ing.

  The sub-control unit receives the operation of the chance button 136 at the timing indicated by T3 in FIG. 290 (b), and the number of operations of the chance button 136 has reached a predetermined number (one in this example). The valid time of the button 136 is initialized to 0, and a button reception command including time information of the valid time of 0 seconds is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit. The liquid crystal control unit that has received the button reception command including the time information of the valid time 0 seconds erases the display of the operation promotion image PG, the operation means image BG, and the valid time notification image TG, and displays the display mode change image CG. As the display, the first display is displayed, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the first display is erased, thereby finishing the effect.

  The sub-control unit is configured to transmit a button reception command to the liquid crystal control unit when the chance button 136 is operated during the effective time of the chance button 136. If there is, the button reception command is transmitted unconditionally (regardless of whether or not the chance button 136 is valid), and the liquid crystal control unit is within the chance button 136 valid time. It may be configured to determine whether or not there is, and to perform the corresponding display only during the valid period.

In the following, a gaming stand that can accept the operation of the chance button 136 a plurality of times during the effective time of the chance button 136 and can display the display mode change image CG every time the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted. explain. In the button effect, the case where the sub control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 and the case where the liquid crystal control unit mainly manages the effective time of the chance button 136 will be described separately.
<Display control in button effect / when sub-control unit manages effective time>

  When the sub-control unit manages the valid time, the count (subtraction, addition, etc.) of the valid time counter used for managing the valid time in the first sub-control unit main process (timer interrupt process with a period of about 33 ms) I do. The count of the valid time counter may be performed every time the first sub control unit main process is executed once, or may be performed every time the first sub control unit main process is executed a plurality of times. Further, the process of temporarily suspending the effective time of the operating means may be realized by not counting the effective time counter (by skipping the counting process), the counting of the effective time counter continues, and the effective time counter You may implement | achieve by not performing the determination process of whether it reached the predetermined number.

  In addition, when the effective time of the operating means is temporarily stopped, the count of the effective time cancellation counter used for canceling the temporary suspension of the effective time in the first sub-control unit main process (timer interrupt process of about 33 ms cycle) ( Subtraction, addition, etc.) may be performed.

  <Example of Button Effect when Display Control in Button Effect / Sub Control Unit Manages Valid Time>

  FIG. 290 (c) shows button effect example 1 in time series when the sub-control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136. In this example, the sub control unit accepts the operation of the chance button 136 at the timing indicated by T3. However, since the operation of the chance button 136 can be accepted a plurality of times during the effective time of the chance button 136, the chance button 136 The countdown of the valid time 136 is continued, and a button reception command including time information of the valid time of 3 seconds is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit.

  The liquid crystal control unit that has received the button reception command including the time information of the valid time of 3 seconds continues without deleting the display of the operation promotion image PG, the operation means image BG, and the valid time notification image TG. The display (display of the display mode change image CG) is displayed so as to overlap a part of the operation promotion image PG and a part of the operation means image BG, and the first display is erased after a predetermined time. Further, the liquid crystal control unit continues to count down the effective time of the chance button 136 even during the period during which the first display is displayed or erased, and the effective time every time the effective time decreases by a predetermined time (1 second). The display of reducing the scale of the notification image TG (meter figure) is continued.

  Further, the sub control unit transmits a button effect end command to the liquid crystal control unit at a timing indicated by T4 when the effective time of the chance button 136 becomes 0, and the liquid crystal control unit that has received the button effect end command receives the button effect end command. First, the display of the operation promotion image PG is erased, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the display of the operation means image BG and the display of the effective time notification image TG are erased, thereby ending the button effect.

  <Button production example 2 when display control / sub-control unit in button production manages effective time>

  FIG. 291 (a) shows button effect example 2 in time series when the sub-control unit manages the valid time of the chance button 136. FIG. In this example, every time the sub-control unit accepts an operation of the chance button 136, the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 is temporarily stopped to hold the current effective time, and the chance button A button reception command including the time information of the effective time 136 and the information of the suspension for temporarily stopping the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 is transmitted, and the button including the time information of the effective time and the information of the suspension The liquid crystal control unit that has received the acceptance command temporarily interrupts the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136.

  In addition, the sub-control unit restarts the count-down of the valid time of the chance button 136 and counts down the valid time when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and also informs the liquid crystal control unit of valid time after the count-down. The liquid crystal control unit that has received the button reception command including the suspension cancellation information for resuming the countdown of the effective time and that has received the button reception command including the information on the cancellation of the suspension time Restart the countdown.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 291 (a), the sub-control unit accepts the operation of the chance button 136 at the timing shown in T2, pauses the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136, and displays the current effective time (3 seconds). ) And a button reception command including time information of an effective time of 3 seconds and information of suspension for temporarily stopping the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit. .

  The liquid crystal control unit that has received the button reception command including the time information of the valid time of 3 seconds and the pause information continues without deleting the display of the operation promotion image PG, the operation means image BG, and the valid time notification image TG. The first display (display of the display mode change image CG) is displayed so as to overlap a part of the operation promotion image PG and a part of the operation means image BG, but the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 is temporarily performed. Therefore, the display of reducing the scale of the effective time notification image TG (meter figure) by one is not performed. As a result, the period in which the scale of the effective time notification image TG (meter figure) indicates 3 seconds is longer than the example shown in FIG. 290 (c).

  Subsequently, the sub-control unit restarts the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136 at the timing indicated by T3 and counts down the valid time (3 seconds → 2 seconds). A button reception command including information on the valid time (2 seconds) and information on releasing the suspension for resuming the countdown of the valid time is transmitted.

  The liquid crystal control unit that has received the button reception command including the time information of the valid time of 2 seconds restarts the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136, and every time the valid time decreases by a predetermined time (1 second), the valid time notification image The display to reduce the scale of TG (meter figure) by one is continued. Further, the sub control unit transmits a command for instructing the end of the button effect to the liquid crystal control unit at the timing indicated by T4 when the effective time of the chance button 136 becomes 0, and the liquid crystal control that has received this command. The unit first deletes the display of the operation promotion image PG, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, deletes the display of the operation means image BG and the display of the effective time notification image TG, thereby ending the button effect.

  <Example 3 of Button Effect when Display Control in Button Effect / Sub Control Unit Manages Valid Time>

  FIG. 291 (b) shows button effect example 3 in time series when the sub-control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136. In this example, the sub-control unit restarts the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136 at the timing shown in T5 later than T3 shown in FIG. 291 (a) and counts down the valid time (3 seconds → 2 seconds). At the same time, a button reception command including information on the valid time (2 seconds) after the countdown and information on canceling the suspension for resuming the countdown of the valid time is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit.

  The liquid crystal control unit that has received the command including the time information of the valid time 2 seconds restarts the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136, and every time the valid time decreases by a predetermined time (1 second), the valid time notification image TG ( The display continues to reduce the scale of the meter figure. Further, the sub control unit transmits a command instructing the end of the button effect to the liquid crystal control unit at the timing indicated by T6 when the effective time of the chance button 136 becomes 0, and the liquid crystal control that has received this command. The unit first deletes the display of the operation promotion image PG, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, deletes the display of the operation means image BG and the display of the effective time notification image TG, thereby ending the button effect.

  In this example, since the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 is resumed at the timing shown by T5 later than T3 shown in FIG. 291 (a), the scale of the effective time notification image TG (meter figure) is 3 The period indicating seconds is longer than the example shown in FIG. 291 (a).

  <Display Example in Button Effect / Button Effect Example when Sub Control Unit Manages Valid Time>

  FIG. 291 (c) shows a button effect example 4 in a time series when the sub-control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136. In this example, every time the sub control unit accepts an operation of the chance button 136, the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 is paused and then the countdown is temporarily stopped, and the effective time after the countdown is given to the liquid crystal control unit. The button reception command including the time information and the pause information for pausing the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136 is transmitted.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 291 (c), the sub-control unit accepts the operation of the chance button 136 at the timing shown in T2, counts down after counting down the effective time of the chance button 136 (3 seconds → 2 seconds). Button acceptance command including the time information of the valid time (2 seconds) after the countdown and the information of the pause for pausing the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136 to the liquid crystal control unit Send.

  The liquid crystal control unit that has received the button reception command including the time information of the valid time of 2 seconds and the pause information continues without deleting the display of the operation promotion image PG, the operation means image BG, and the valid time notification image TG. Since the first display (display of the display mode change image CG) is displayed so as to overlap a part of the operation promotion image PG and a part of the operation means image BG, the time information of the effective time 2 seconds is received. The display of the effective time notification image TG (meter figure) is reduced by one.

  Subsequently, the sub-control unit restarts the count-down of the valid time of the chance button 136 at the timing shown in T7, counts down the valid time, and sends the valid time (1 second) after the count-down to the liquid crystal control unit. The button reception command including the information and the information on releasing the suspension for resuming the countdown of the valid time is transmitted.

  In this example, the liquid crystal control unit pauses the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136 until it receives a button reception command from the sub control unit, and executes the countdown of the valid time before the pause, The period in which the scale of the effective time notification image TG (meter figure) indicates 2 seconds is longer than the example shown in FIG. 290 (c).

  <Display Example in Button Effect / Button Effect Example 5 when Sub Control Unit Manages Valid Time>

  FIG. 292 (a) shows, in chronological order, button effect example 5 in the case where the sub-control unit manages the effective time of chance button 136. In this example, the sub-control unit restarts the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136 at the timing shown in T3 earlier than T5 shown in FIG. 291 (b) and counts down the valid time (3 seconds → 2 seconds). At the same time, a button reception command including information on the valid time (2 seconds) after the countdown and information on canceling the suspension for resuming the countdown of the valid time is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit.

  Since the liquid crystal control unit that has received the command including the time information of the valid time 2 seconds is executing the button effect corresponding to the valid time 3 seconds, the button effect corresponding to the valid time 3 seconds is executed to the end. continuing. Then, after the button effect corresponding to the valid time of 3 seconds is completed to the end, the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136 is restarted, and every time the valid time decreases by a predetermined time (1 second), the valid time notification image TG (meter The display is reduced by one scale.

  In this example, the countdown timing of the effective time in the sub-control unit and the countdown timing of the valid time in the liquid crystal control unit are misaligned, so the liquid crystal control unit is executing a button effect corresponding to the effective time of 1 second. Even in such a case, the valid time in the sub-control unit becomes 0 seconds, and the operation of the chance button 136 may become invalid. For this reason, even if the chance button 136 is operated during the execution of the button effect corresponding to the effective time of 1 second, the display corresponding to the operation may not be performed.

  <Display Example in Button Effect / Button Effect Example 6 when Sub Control Unit Manages Valid Time>

  FIG. 292 (b) shows button effect example 6 in time series when the sub-control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136. FIG. In this example, when the sub control unit receives an operation of the chance button 136 at the timing indicated by T2, the sub control unit does not pause the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136, and the effective time ( In this example, a button reception command including information of 3 seconds) is transmitted.

  The liquid crystal control unit that has received the button acceptance command including the time information of the valid time of 3 seconds and the pause information continues without deleting the display of the operation promotion image PG, the operation means image BG, and the valid time notification image TG. The first display (display of the display mode change image CG) is displayed so as to overlap a part of the operation promotion image PG and a part of the operation means image BG, but the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 is temporarily performed. Therefore, the display of reducing the scale of the effective time notification image TG (meter figure) by one is not performed.

  In addition, the sub control unit transmits a button reception command including information on the valid time after the countdown (1 second in this example) to the liquid crystal control unit at the timing indicated by T4, and receives the command. The section adjusts the valid time of the chance button 136 based on the valid time information included in the command, and performs a button effect corresponding to the valid time of 1 second. Note that the sub-control unit does not transmit a button reception command including valid time information to the liquid crystal control unit at the same timing, and the liquid crystal control unit manages the valid time of the chance button 136 by itself. It may be configured.

  <Display Example in Button Effect / Button Effect Example 7 when Sub Control Unit Manages Valid Time>

  FIG. 293 (a) shows, in chronological order, a button effect example 7 in the case where the sub-control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136. In this example, every time the sub-control unit accepts the operation of the chance button 136, the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136 is temporarily stopped to hold the current valid time, and the acceptance of the chance button 136 is disabled. In addition, the button reception command including the time information of the effective time of the chance button 136 and the information of the suspension for temporarily stopping the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit. The liquid crystal control unit that has received the button reception command including the time information of the valid time and the pause information temporarily interrupts the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136.

  Further, the sub-control unit restarts the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136 when the predetermined condition is satisfied, counts down the valid time, makes the acceptance of the chance button 136 valid, and displays the liquid crystal The button reception command including the information on the valid time after the countdown and the information on the suspension cancellation for resuming the countdown of the validity time is transmitted to the control unit, and the button reception command including the information on the suspension cancellation is transmitted. The received liquid crystal control unit resumes counting down the effective time of the chance button 136.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 293 (a), the sub-control unit accepts the operation of the chance button 136 at the timing shown in T2, pauses the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136, and then displays the current effective time (3 seconds). ) And the reception of the chance button 136 is disabled, and the liquid crystal control unit temporarily stops the time information of the effective time of 3 seconds and the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136. A button reception command including information is transmitted.

  The liquid crystal control unit that has received the button reception command including the time information of the valid time of 3 seconds and the pause information continues without deleting the display of the operation promotion image PG, the operation means image BG, and the valid time notification image TG. The first display (display of the display mode change image CG) is displayed so as to overlap a part of the operation promotion image PG and a part of the operation means image BG, but the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 is temporarily performed. Therefore, the display of reducing the scale of the effective time notification image TG (meter figure) by one is not performed.

  It should be noted that if the operation of the chance button 136 is detected after the acceptance of the chance button 136 is disabled, the detection of the chance button 136 may be ignored, or the chance button 136 is detected. The button reception command may not be transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit. The sub-control unit detects the chance button 136 and transmits a button reception command to the liquid crystal control unit. However, the liquid crystal control unit may be configured not to execute processing corresponding to the button reception command. Good.

  Subsequently, the sub-control unit resumes counting down the valid time of the chance button 136 at the timing shown in T3 on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a predetermined time has elapsed after the chance button 136 is received). The valid time is counted down and the acceptance of the chance button 136 is made valid, and the information on the valid time after the countdown (2 seconds in this example) and the valid time are counted down to the liquid crystal control unit. The button reception command including the information on the suspension cancellation to be resumed is transmitted.

  The liquid crystal control unit that has received the command including the time information of the valid time 2 seconds restarts the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136, and every time the valid time decreases by a predetermined time (1 second), the valid time notification image TG ( Continue the display to reduce the scale (meter figure) by one.

  In this example, the acceptance of the chance button 136 is disabled during the period from T2 to T3, but the lighting of the chance button lamp 138 may be continued during the period, or over the period. The chance button lamp 138 may be turned off. Further, when the chance button 136 is turned off at the timing shown in T2, the display of the operation means image BG and the display of the effective time notification image TG in the button effect may be erased, or these displays may be continued. Good.

  <Display Example in Button Effect / Button Effect Example 8 when Sub Control Unit Manages Valid Time>

  FIG. 293 (b) shows, in time series, the button effect example 8 when the sub-control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136. In this example, even when the sub control unit accepts the operation of the chance button 136, the time of the effective time of the chance button 136 to the liquid crystal control unit without pausing the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136. A button reception command including information is transmitted.

  The sub-control unit accepts the operation of the chance button 136 at the timing indicated by T2, but continues the count-down of the effective time of the chance button 136 without pausing, and notifies the liquid crystal control unit of the effective time (3 seconds). ) Button reception command including time information is transmitted.

The liquid crystal control unit that has received the button reception command including the time information of the valid time of 3 seconds continues without deleting the display of the operation promotion image PG, the operation means image BG, and the valid time notification image TG, and displays the second display (Display mode change image CG) is displayed so as to overlap a part of the operation promotion image PG and a part of the operation means image BG, and the scale of the effective time notification image TG (meter figure) is reduced by one. Display is in progress.
<Display control in button effect / When the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time>

  Next, a case where the liquid crystal control unit manages the valid time will be described. When the liquid crystal control unit manages the valid time, the count (subtraction, addition, etc.) of the valid time counter used for managing the valid time in the second sub-control unit main process (timer interrupt process with a period of about 33 ms) I do. The count of the valid time counter may be performed every time the second sub control unit main process is executed once, or may be performed every time the second sub control unit main process is executed a plurality of times. Further, the process of temporarily suspending the effective time of the operating means may be realized by not counting the effective time counter (by skipping the counting process), the counting of the effective time counter continues, and the effective time counter You may implement | achieve by not performing the determination process of whether it reached the predetermined number.

  In addition, when the effective time of the operation means is temporarily stopped, the count of the effective time cancellation counter used for canceling the temporary suspension of the effective time in the second sub-control unit main process (timer interrupt process with a period of about 33 ms) ( Subtraction, addition, etc.) may be performed.

  <Display Control in Button Effect / Button Effect Example 1 When Liquid Crystal Control Unit Manages Valid Time>

  FIG. 294 (a) shows a button effect example 1 in a time series when the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136. FIG. At the timing indicated by T1 in FIG. 294 (a), the liquid crystal control unit starts the button effect and starts counting down the effective time of the chance button 136. Further, the liquid crystal control unit transmits a button valid command instructing the sub control unit to switch the operation of the chance button 136 from the invalid state to the valid state. Receiving this button valid command, the sub-control unit switches the operation of the chance button 136 from the invalid state to the valid state, and starts processing for lighting the chance button lamp 138 and the like. The button valid command includes at least time information indicating the valid time of the chance button 136 (information indicating 5 seconds in this example).

  In this example, the liquid crystal control unit displays, as a button effect, a display of the operation means image BG (a figure imitating the chance button 136) and a valid time notification image TG (a meter representing the remaining time of the valid time of the chance button 136 as a scale). ) And an operation promotion image PG (display of characters “PUSH”). Subsequently, the liquid crystal control unit starts counting down the effective time of the chance button 136 (5 seconds in this example), and then every time the effective time decreases by a predetermined time (1 second in this example), the effective time notification image TG ( The display is reduced by one scale.

  In addition, the liquid crystal control unit invalidates the operation of the chance button 136 from the valid state to the sub-control unit at the timing indicated by T2 in FIG. A button invalid command instructing switching to a state is transmitted, and the display of the operation promotion image PG is first erased, and the display of the operation means image BG and the display of the valid time notification image TG are erased after a predetermined time has elapsed. That is the end of the button production. The sub-control unit that has received the button invalid command switches the operation of the chance button 136 from the valid state to the invalid state.

  If the effective time of the operation means is managed by the liquid crystal control unit as in this example, the control burden on the sub control unit can be reduced, and stable game control may be realized.

  <Display Control in Button Effect / Button Effect Example 2 when Liquid Crystal Control Unit Manages Valid Time>

  FIG. 294 (b) shows a button effect example 2 in a time series when the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136. In this example, the operation of the chance button 136 can be accepted only once during the effective time of the chance button 136. When the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted, a display corresponding to the operation (display of the display mode change image CG) is performed. ).

  The sub control unit receives an operation of the chance button 136 at a timing indicated by T3 in FIG. 294 (b), and transmits a button reception command to the liquid crystal control unit. The liquid crystal control unit that has received the button acceptance command initializes the valid time of the chance button 136 to 0 because the number of operations of the chance button 136 has reached a predetermined number of times (in this example, 1 time). A command for notifying that the button reception command has been received is transmitted to the sub control unit. In addition, the liquid crystal control unit that has received the button reception command deletes the display of the operation promotion image PG, the operation means image BG, and the effective time notification image TG, and displays the first display as the display mode change image CG. The effect is finished by deleting the first display after a predetermined time has elapsed.

  <Display Control in Button Effect / Button Effect Example when Liquid Crystal Control Unit Manages Valid Time>

  FIG. 294 (c) shows button effect example 3 in time series when the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time of chance button 136. FIG. In this example, the sub-control unit receives an operation of the chance button 136 at a timing indicated by T3 in FIG. 294 (c), and transmits a button reception command to the liquid crystal control unit. The liquid crystal control unit that has received the button acceptance command can accept the operation of the chance button 136 a plurality of times during the validity time of the chance button 136, and therefore continues to count down the validity time of the chance button 136 and performs sub-control. A response command notifying that the button reception command has been received is transmitted to the unit.

  In addition, the liquid crystal control unit that has received the button reception command continues the display of the operation promotion image PG, the operation means image BG, and the effective time notification image TG without deleting the first display (the display mode change image CG). Display) is displayed so as to overlap a part of the operation promotion image PG and a part of the operation means image BG, and the first display is deleted after a predetermined time. In addition, the liquid crystal control unit continues to count down the effective time (5 seconds in this example) of the chance button 136 even during the period during which the first display is displayed or erased, and the effective time is a predetermined time (this example). In each case, the display of the effective time notification image TG (meter figure) is reduced by one each time.

  <Display control in button effect / Example 4 of button effect when the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time>

  FIG. 295 (a) shows a button effect example 4 in a time series when the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136. In the gaming machine according to the present example, every time the liquid crystal control unit receives a button reception command from the sub-control unit, the count-down of the effective time of the chance button 136 is paused to hold the current effective time, and the sub-control A pause command including the time information of the valid time of the chance button 136 and the information of the pause to pause the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136, and the time information of the valid time The sub-control unit that has received the pause command including the pause information temporarily interrupts the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136. Further, the sub-control unit may turn off the chance button lamp 138 on condition that the temporary stop command is received.

  In addition, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the liquid crystal control unit resumes the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136 to count down the valid time, and informs the sub-control unit of valid time after the countdown. And a suspension release command that includes the suspension release information for resuming the countdown of the effective time, and the sub-control unit that has received the suspension release command that includes the suspension release information receives the chance button 136 Resume valid time countdown. The sub-control unit may turn on the chance button lamp 138 when the chance button lamp 138 is turned off on condition that the temporary stop cancellation command is received.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 295 (a), the liquid crystal control unit pauses the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 on condition that the button reception command is received from the sub control unit at the timing shown in T2. While holding the current effective time (3 seconds), the sub-control unit temporarily includes time information of the effective time of 3 seconds and information of suspension for temporarily stopping the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 Send a stop command.

  The sub-control unit that has received the pause command including the time information of the valid time of 3 seconds and the pause information pauses the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136 and holds the current valid time (3 seconds). The chance button lamp 138 is turned off.

  The liquid crystal control unit continues the display of the operation promotion image PG, the operation means image BG, and the effective time notification image TG without deleting the first display (display of the display mode change image CG). Although a part of the image PG and a part of the operation means image BG are displayed so as to overlap each other, since the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 is temporarily interrupted, the scale of the effective time notification image TG (meter figure) is displayed. There is no display to reduce one.

  Subsequently, the liquid crystal control unit restarts the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136 at the timing indicated by T3 and counts down the valid time. At the same time, the liquid crystal control unit sends a valid time after countdown (2 in this example) to the sub-control unit. Second) and information on the suspension cancellation for resuming the countdown of the effective time. The sub-control unit that has received the temporary stop release command including the time information of the valid time of 2 seconds restarts the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136 and lights the chance button lamp 138.

  The liquid crystal control unit restarts counting down the effective time of the chance button 136, and every time the effective time decreases by a predetermined time (1 second in this example), the scale of the effective time notification image TG (meter figure) is increased by one. Continue to reduce display. In addition, the liquid crystal control unit first deletes the display of the operation promotion image PG at the timing indicated by T4 in FIG. 295 (a) when the effective time of the chance button 136 becomes 0, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, The button effect is ended by deleting the display of the means image BG and the display of the effective time notification image TG.

  <Display Control in Button Effect / Button Effect Example 5 when Liquid Crystal Control Unit Manages Valid Time>

  FIG. 295 (b) shows, in time series, button effect example 5 when the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time of chance button 136. In this example, the liquid crystal control unit restarts the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136 at the timing shown by T5 later than T3 shown in FIG. 295 (a), and counts down the valid time. On the other hand, a pause cancel command including information on the valid time after the countdown (2 seconds in this example) and information on canceling the pause for resuming the countdown of the valid time is transmitted. The sub-control unit that has received the temporary stop release command including the time information of the valid time of 2 seconds restarts the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136 and lights the chance button lamp 138.

  The liquid crystal control unit restarts counting down the effective time of the chance button 136, and every time the effective time decreases by a predetermined time (1 second in this example), the scale of the effective time notification image TG (meter figure) is increased by one. Continue to reduce display. Further, the liquid crystal control unit first deletes the display of the operation promotion image PG at the timing indicated by T6 in FIG. 295 (b) when the effective time of the chance button 136 becomes 0, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, The button effect is ended by deleting the display of the means image BG and the display of the effective time notification image TG.

  <Display control in button effect / Example 6 of button effect when the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time>

  FIG. 295 (c) shows a button effect example 6 in a time series when the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136. FIG. In the gaming machine according to the present example, every time the liquid crystal control unit receives a button reception command from the sub control unit, the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 is performed, and then the countdown is paused, and the liquid crystal control unit Thus, a pause command including the time information of the valid time after the countdown and the pause information for pausing the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136 is transmitted.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 295 (c), the liquid crystal control unit receives a button reception command from the sub-control unit at the timing shown in T2, and counts down the effective time of the chance button 136 (3 seconds in this example). After the countdown is suspended, the sub-control unit includes the time information of the valid time of 2 seconds after the countdown and the information of the pause that pauses the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136. Send a command.

  The sub-control unit that has received the pause command including the time information of the valid time of 2 seconds and the pause information pauses the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136 and holds the current valid time (3 seconds). The chance button lamp 138 is turned off.

  The liquid crystal control unit continues the display of the operation promotion image PG, the operation means image BG, and the effective time notification image TG without deleting the first display (display of the display mode change image CG). Display that overlaps a part of the image PG and a part of the operation means image BG and receives the time information of the effective time 2 seconds, so that the scale of the effective time notification image TG (meter figure) is reduced by one. It is carried out.

  Subsequently, the liquid crystal control unit restarts the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136 at the timing shown in T7 and counts down the valid time, and also gives the sub-control unit a valid time after the countdown (1 in this example). Second) and information on the suspension cancellation for resuming the countdown of the effective time. Since the liquid crystal control unit pauses the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136 until receiving this button reception command and executes the countdown of the valid time before the pause, the valid time notification image The period in which the scale of TG (meter figure) represents 2 seconds is longer than the example shown in FIGS. 295 (a) and (b). The subsequent display control is the same as the example shown in FIG. 295 (b).

  <Display control in button effect / Example 7 of button effect when the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time>

  FIG. 296 (a) shows a button effect example 7 in a time series when the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136. In this example, the liquid crystal control unit restarts the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136 at the timing shown in T3 earlier than T5 shown in FIG. 295 (b), and counts down the valid time. On the other hand, a pause command including information on the valid time after the countdown (2 seconds in this example) and information on releasing the pause for resuming the countdown of the valid time is transmitted.

  However, in this example, since the liquid crystal control unit is executing the button effect corresponding to the effective time of 3 seconds, after the button effect ends, the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 is restarted, and the effective time The display continues to reduce the scale of the effective time notification image TG (meter figure) by one every time the predetermined time (in this example, 1 second) decreases.

  In this example, the countdown timing of the effective time in the sub-control unit and the countdown timing of the valid time in the liquid crystal control unit are misaligned, so the liquid crystal control unit is executing a button effect corresponding to the effective time of 1 second. Even in such a case, the valid time in the sub-control unit becomes 0 seconds, and the operation of the chance button 136 may become invalid. For this reason, even if the chance button 136 is operated during the execution of the button effect corresponding to the effective time of 1 second, the display corresponding to the operation may not be performed.

  <Display control in button effect / Example 8 of button effect when the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time>

  FIG. 296 (b) shows, in time series, the button effect example 8 when the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136. In the gaming machine according to the present example, when the sub-control unit receives a pause command from the liquid crystal control unit, the count-down of the valid time of the chance button 136 is not paused. In addition, the liquid crystal control unit that has transmitted the pause command continues without deleting the display of the operation promotion image PG, the operation means image BG, and the effective time notification image TG, and displays the first display (display mode change image CG). Display) is displayed so as to overlap a part of the operation promotion image PG and a part of the operation means image BG. However, since the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 is temporarily interrupted, the effective time notification image TG ( There is no display to reduce the scale of the meter figure.

In addition, the liquid crystal control unit transmits a button reception command including information on the valid time (1 second in this example) to the sub control unit at the timing indicated by T4 in FIG. 296 (b), and receives the command. The sub-control unit adjusts the valid time of the chance button 136 based on the valid time information included in the command.
<Specific example 1 of button production>

  Next, a specific example of the button effect will be described. 297 (a-1) to (a-6) are diagrams showing a specific example 1 of the button effect in time series. Each display in the drawing is a part of the display of the button effect made up of moving images, and the time intervals of the displays do not necessarily match (the same applies to the following specific examples).

  In the specific example 1, at the timing shown in FIG. 297 (a-1), a graphic imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 is displayed as the operation means image BG, and the chance button 136 is displayed as the effective time notification image TG. The display of the meter that shows the remaining time of the valid time that can accept the operation is displayed on the scale, and the button effect is started by displaying the characters “PUSH !!” as the operation promotion image PG. ing.

  In the period shown in FIGS. 297 (a-1) to (a-5), the effective time of the chance button 136 is counted down, and the effective time of the chance button 136 is decreased by a predetermined time (1 second in this example). Each time, the button effect is continued by performing a display in which the scale of the effective time notification image TG (meter figure) is reduced by one.

In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 297 (a-6), since the effective time of the chance button 136 has become 0, the display of the operation means image BG (a figure imitating the appearance of the chance button 136), the effective time notification image The display of TG (meter graphic) and the display of the operation promotion image PG (characters “PUSH !!”) are all erased, and the button effect is ended.
<Specific examples 2 to 4 of button production>

  297 (b-1) to (b-6) are diagrams showing a specific example 2 of the button effect in time series, and FIGS. 297 (c-1) to (c-6) are specific examples of the button effect. It is the figure which showed Example 3 in the time series, and FIG. 298 (a-1)-(a-6) is the figure which showed the specific example 4 of the button effect in the time series. In addition, in order to avoid duplicate description, description is omitted about the same content as the specific example 1 (the following specific examples are also the same).

  In Specific Example 2 shown in FIGS. 297 (b-1) to (b-6), the button effect is started at the timing shown in FIG. -3) to (b-4), the cut-in display is performed. In this cut-in display, the operation means image BG (a graphic imitating the appearance of the chance button 136), the effective time notification image TG (meter graphic), and the operation promotion image PG ("PUSH !!") are displayed. ) Is displayed so as to cover all of the display of (), the player cannot visually recognize the button effect during the cut-in display period (in the middle of the button effect in this example). When the cut-in display is composed of a translucent image or the like, the display of the operation means image BG, the display of the effective time notification image TG, and the display of the operation promotion image PG can be visually recognized by the player. As compared with the case where it is not covered by the cut-in display, the visual recognition becomes difficult.

  Moreover, in the specific example 3 shown to FIG. 297 (c-1)-(c-3), although the button effect is started at the timing shown in the figure (c-1), with the start of this button effect, the same Cut-in display is performed during the period shown in the drawings (c-1) to (c-2). In this cut-in display, the operation means image BG (a graphic imitating the appearance of the chance button 136), the effective time notification image TG (meter graphic), and the operation promotion image PG ("PUSH !!") are displayed. ) Is displayed so as to cover all of the display of (), the player cannot visually recognize the button effect during the cut-in display period (in this example, the beginning of the button effect).

  In Specific Example 4 shown in FIGS. 298 (a-1) to (a-5), the button effect is started at the timing shown in FIG. Cut-in display is performed in a period shown in a-3) to (a-4) (a period longer than the period shown in FIGS. 297 (b-3) to (b-4) in specific example 2). In this cut-in display, the operation means image BG (a graphic imitating the appearance of the chance button 136), the effective time notification image TG (meter graphic), and the operation promotion image PG ("PUSH !!") are displayed. ) Is displayed so as to cover all of the display of (), so that the player is in the cut-in display period (in this example, in the middle of the button effect and longer than the specific example 2) Cannot see the button effect.

  The cut-in display is not limited to the examples shown in the specific examples 2 to 4. For example, as shown in FIG. 298 (b), a display of the operation means image BG (a figure imitating the appearance of the chance button 136). , And the operation promotion image PG (characters “PUSH !!”) are all covered, but a moving image that does not cover the display of the effective time notification image TG (meter figure) may be displayed. With such a configuration, the player can check the effective time of the operation means while enjoying the cut-in display.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIGS. 298 (c-1) to (c-2), the operation means image BG (a figure imitating the appearance of the chance button 136) is displayed in a display area that does not overlap with the cut-in display moving image. , Display of the effective time notification image TG (meter figure), and display of the operation promotion image PG (characters of “PUSH !!”) may be moved. With such a configuration, the player can grasp the information on the operation means by the button effect while enjoying the cut-in display.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 298 (d), the cut-in display may be performed using all the display areas of the decorative symbol display device 208, or as shown in FIG. 298 (e). As the notification image TG, a display mode in which the effective time is displayed in characters may be applied instead of the meter figure. Moreover, you may comprise so that an effective time may be displayed by a character in the display area which is not covered by cut-in display (it can be visually recognized by a player).
<Example 5 of button production>

  299 (a-1) to (a-6) are diagrams showing a specific example 5 of the button effect in time series. In the specific example 5, while performing a plurality of button effects corresponding to a plurality of operation means, the effective time is counted down in the button effects corresponding to the specific operation means, and the effective time notification image TG (meter figure) is displayed. During button display corresponding to other operation means during the period of displaying to reduce the scale, the countdown of the valid time is temporarily stopped and the scale of the valid time notification image TG (meter figure) is not reduced. Control.

  Specifically, at the timing shown in FIG. 299 (a), in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first button effect corresponding to the first operation means is started. The second button effect corresponding to the second operation means is started in the central display area, and the third button effect corresponding to the third operation means is started in the display area on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. doing.

  In each of the first to third button effects, a graphic imitating the appearance of each operation means is displayed as the display of the operation means images BG1 to BG3, and each of the effective time notification images TG1 to TG3 is displayed. A meter graphic representing the remaining effective time for accepting the operation of the operating means is displayed, and the characters “PUSH !!!!” are displayed as the operation promotion images PG1 to PG3.

  In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 299 (b), in the first to third button effects, the effective time is counted down (8 seconds → 6 seconds), and the effective time notification images TG1 to TG3 (meter figures) are scaled. In the first button effect, the effective time countdown (6 seconds → 0 seconds) continues during the period up to FIG. 299 (c), and the effective time notification image TG1 ( While the display of reducing the scale of the meter graphic) every second is continued, in the second and third button effects, the effective time countdown is paused and the effective time notification images TG2, TG3 (meter graphic) are displayed. The display is controlled so as not to reduce the scale of).

  In addition, during the period of FIG. 299 (d) to FIG. 299 (f), the countdown of the effective time in the second and third button effects is maintained and the timing shown in FIG. The first button effect is finished, and at the timing shown in FIG. 5E, cut-in display is performed with the scales of the effective time notification images TG2 and TG3 (meter figure) visible, and FIG. ), The cut-in display is ended, and the countdown of the effective time of each operation means is resumed in the second and third button effects.

  Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 299 (g), the effective time is counted down (6 seconds → 4 seconds) in the second and third button effects, and the effective time notification images TG2 and TG3 (meter figure) are scaled. In the second button effect, the effective time countdown (4 seconds → 0 seconds) is continued during the period up to FIG. 299 (h), and the effective time notification image TG1 ( In the third button effect, the effective time countdown is temporarily stopped and the effective time notification image TG3 (meter graphic) is reduced in scale while the display of reducing the scale of the meter graphic) every second is continued. Control the display so that there is no.

  In addition, during the period from FIG. 299 (i) to FIG. 299 (m), the countdown of the effective time in the third button effect is maintained and the timing shown in FIG. At the timing shown in FIG. 6J, cut-in display is performed in a state where the scale of the effective time notification image TG3 (meter figure) is visible, and at the timing shown in FIG. The cut-in display is ended, and the countdown of the effective time of the operation means is restarted in the third button effect, and the third button effect is ended at the timing shown in FIG. 299 (n).

  The display of the period during which the valid time countdown is paused is not limited to the example shown in the specific example 5, and for example, as shown in FIGS. 300 (a-1) to (a-2) Display mode of display of means image BG (figure imitating appearance of chance button 136), display of effective time notification image TG (figure of meter), and display of operation promotion image PG (characters of “PUSH !!”) Color, brightness, tone, etc.) may be changed. Further, even when the display mode is changed, the chance button 136 may be kept on, or the chance button 136 may be turned off in accordance with the change of the display mode. In addition, the lighting color of the chance button 136 may be changed in accordance with the change of the display mode, or the lighting mode of the chance button 136 may be changed, for example, by blinking by repeatedly turning on and off.

In accordance with the change in the display mode, the acceptance of the operation means may be changed from the valid state to the invalid state, or the valid state may be maintained. Also, as shown in FIGS. 300 (b-1) to 300 (b-5), the scale of the effective time notification image TG (meter figure) remains in a state where the countdown of the effective time is temporarily stopped in the button effect. The button effect may end.
<Specific example 6 of button production>

  FIG. 301 is a diagram showing a specific example 6 of the button effect in time series. In this specific example 6, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when winning a jackpot), a specific character (for example, a character appearing in an effect executed during the jackpot game) is selected from a plurality of characters. In a possible game machine, during the period when the animation for selecting the character is being executed, the effective time countdown of the operation means is temporarily stopped so as not to reduce the scale of the effective time notification image TG (meter figure). Control display.

  It should be noted that during the period when the animation for selecting a character is being executed, the countdown of the valid time of the operation means is not paused, but is configured to pause during the period when the animation is not being executed. Also good. In addition, the count-down of the valid time of the operation means may be temporarily stopped during at least a part of the period in which the animation for selecting the character is being executed.

  Specifically, at the timing shown in FIG. 301 (a), a character selection effect is started for allowing the player to select a character, and at the timing shown in FIG. 301 (c), a button effect is started during the character selection effect. doing. In the button effect of the present example, a graphic imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 is displayed as the operation means image BG, and the remaining effective time for accepting the operation of the chance button 136 as the effective time notification image TG is displayed. Is displayed as a scale, and “PUSH!” Is displayed as an operation promotion image PG and “Select a character by pressing a button!” Is displayed.

  Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 301 (d), in the button effect, the effective time is counted down (8 seconds → 6 seconds), and the effective time notification image TG (meter figure) is displayed with two scales reduced. During the period in which the animation is executed to switch the character that can be selected by the player from the character C1 to the spear character C2 based on accepting the operation of the chance button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. (During the period from (f) to (i) in the figure), in the button production, the operation of the chance button 136 is disabled and the countdown of the valid time is paused, and the valid time notification image TG (meter graphic) is displayed. The display is controlled so as not to reduce the scale of).

  In addition, during the period of (i) to (j) in the same figure, the animation for switching the character that can be selected by the player from the character C1 of the lord to the character C2 of the spider is finished, and the chance button The effective time is counted down (6 seconds → 4 seconds) by making the operation of 136 effective, and the scale of the effective time notification image TG (meter figure) is reduced by two. In this example, the effect of selecting a character has been described. For example, in an effect of selecting a song or sound effect to be output during a big hit game, the effective time may be paused. In the effect, the effective time may be paused only for the effect of selecting the character without pausing the effective time.

  As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes an operation unit (for example, a chance button 136, a setting operation unit 137, a ball launching handle 134, etc.) and a display unit (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps). A plurality of types of displays (for example, display of operation means images, display of elapsed time notification images, display of effective time notification images, display of display mode change images, and operations) A display of an accelerating image, an animation display according to an operation by the operation means, an animation display related to the operation means, and the like, and at least one of the plurality of types of display is a first display , Meter display which is one of the displays of the effective time notification image), and the first display is a display related to the operation means, Is means capable of displaying at least the first display in a first period (for example, a period for displaying a meter indicating that the effective time is 4 seconds in FIG. 291 (a)), and the display means When the display condition is satisfied, at least the first display is displayed in a second period (for example, a period for displaying a meter indicating that the effective time is 3 seconds in FIG. 291 (a)). The second period is a longer period than the first period, and the display condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the operation means is operated. This is a gaming table characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, there can be a variation in the display period of the first display, and it may be possible to provide a gaming machine having characteristics in the display means.

  The “display unit” according to the present embodiment may be “a unit that always displays the first display in the first period (or the second period) when the display condition is satisfied”. Alternatively, “a means for displaying at least the first display in the first period (or the second period) unconditionally” may be used. In addition, the “display condition” according to the present embodiment is a condition that may be satisfied when the second condition other than when the operation unit is operated (for example, when a predetermined time has elapsed). May be. In addition, the “first period” and the “second period” according to the present embodiment include all the periods in the predetermined period, a part of the predetermined period, and a plurality of periods included in the predetermined period. It is also possible to combine these periods.

  Further, the first display may be a display including at least a meter display. The first display may be a meter display. Further, the meter display may be a display whose display mode can be changed at least as time passes.

In addition, at least one of the plurality of types of display may be a second display, and the second display may be an effect display. The display means may be a means capable of starting display of at least the second display when the display condition is satisfied. The “display unit” according to the present embodiment may be “a unit that always displays the second display when the display condition is satisfied” or “unconditionally displays the second display”. It may be at least a means for displaying.
<Other embodiments (normal button and big button)>

  Hereinafter, a game table according to another embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 302 to 306. In order to avoid redundant description, the same contents as those of the other embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals in the drawings, and the description thereof is omitted. In addition, the reference numerals in the drawings referred to in the present embodiment are used only in the description of the present embodiment in principle, and even when the same reference numerals are used in the drawings referred to in other embodiments, In the description of this embodiment, the reference numerals used in FIGS. 302 to 306 are given priority.

As will be described in detail later, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is a gaming machine provided with an operation unit and a display unit, and the display unit displays at least a first display in a first display area. The display means can display at least a second display in the second display area, and the display means can display at least a third display in the third display area. The first display is a display relating to the operation means, the second display is a display relating to the operation means, and at least a part of the display area of the first display area (hereinafter, The “fourth display region” is a display region that overlaps at least a part of the third display region, and at least a part of the second display region (hereinafter referred to as “fifth display region”). Display area)) is the third display A display area that overlaps at least a part of the display area, the second display area is a display area larger than the first display area, and the fifth display area is the fourth display area. This is a gaming table characterized by having a display area larger than the area.
<Basic concept / Normal button and Deca button>

  First, the basic concept of the game machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 302 is a view for explaining the basic concept of a game machine according to another embodiment (normal button and big button).

  The gaming table according to the present embodiment has operation means and display means, and can display the same display as the gaming table, similar to the gaming table described with reference to FIGS. 288 to 301 above. It is. In addition, the gaming table according to the present embodiment displays the operation means image BGs having the first size as shown in FIG. 302 (a) as the display of the operation means image BG described above, and FIG. 302 (b). As shown in FIG. 302 (a), it is possible to display the operation means image BGb having a second size larger than the first size, as shown in FIG. It is possible to display the effective time notification image TGs of the third size and the effective time notification image TGb of the fourth size larger than the third size as shown in FIG. 302 (b). .

  In the present embodiment, a display including at least one of the display of the operation means image BGs having the first size and the display of the effective time notification image TGs having the third size, as shown in FIG. 302 (a). This may be referred to as a “normal button”, and includes at least one of the display of the second size operation means image BGb and the display of the fourth size effective time notification image TGb shown in FIG. 302 (b). The display may be referred to as a “deca button”.

  Further, the normal button may be a display including at least one of the display of the first size operation means image BGs and the display of the third size effective time notification image TGs, as shown in FIG. 302 (a). As shown, other display OGs (for example, decorative symbols, images of other effects, etc.) may be included. Similarly, the big button may be a display that includes at least one of the display of the second size operation means image BGb and the display of the fourth size effective time notification image TGb. ), Other display OGs (for example, decorative symbols, images of other effects, etc.) may be included.

  Further, the shortest distance L1 between the first-size operation means image BGs and the second-size effective time notification image TGs in the normal button, the third-size operation means image BGb and the fourth size in the decabutton. The shortest distance L2 to the effective time notification image TGb of the size is not particularly limited, but the display of the deca button is different from the display of the normal button by making the shortest distance L2 longer than the shortest distance L1. The display OG is easy to see, and the difference from the normal button can be clarified.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 302 (a) and 302 (b), the size of the first area Es of the other display OG covered by the normal button operation means image BGs and the effective time notification image TGs is This is different from the size of the second region Eb covered by the operation means image BGb and the effective time notification image TGb, and in this example, the first region Es is larger than the second region Eb.

  As shown in the upper part of FIG. 302 (c), the shortest distance between the third-size operation means image BGb and the fourth-size effective time notification image TGb on the decabutton is shown in FIG. 302 (b). The shortest distance L3 may be shorter than the shortest distance L2 shown, or as shown in the lower part of FIG. 302 (c), at least a part of the third-size operation means image BGb on the decabutton and the fourth size. At least a part of the valid time notification image TGb may be superimposed. The same can be said for the normal button as for the big button.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 302 (c), the size of the first area Es of the other display OG that is obscured by the normal button operation means image BGs and the effective time notification image TGs is determined as follows. The second area Eb is larger than the first area Es in this example, which is different from the size of the second area Eb covered by the effective time notification image TGb.
<Basic concept / Display mode>

  Next, the display mode of the display according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 302 (d) and 302 (e). 302D and 302E, the movable body indicated by the symbol AG is provided in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. For example, the effect movable body 224 described with reference to FIG. In addition to the shutter 1024 and the movable body 1026 described with reference to FIG. 170, those constituted by images, those constituted by panels, and the like are applicable.

  The movable body AG does not cover all of the normal buttons and the big buttons, so that the normal buttons and the big buttons can be visually recognized in the first position (the position shown in FIG. 302 (d)) and the normal buttons and the big buttons. A second position (shown in FIG. 302 (e)) that makes at least a part of the normal button or the big button invisible (or difficult to see compared with a case where it is not covered with a movable body) by covering at least a part. Position).

  As shown in the upper part of FIG. 302 (e), when the movable body AG moves from the first position to the second position, the operation means image BGs having the first size on the normal button and the second size are displayed. Since at least a part of the effective time notification image TGs is covered with the movable body AG, the operation means image BGs having the first size and a partial region of the effective time notification image TGs having the second size are not visible. (Or, it is difficult to see compared to the case where the movable body is not covered). In addition, as shown in the figure, you may comprise so that the operation means image BGs can be visually recognized by making translucent the part which covers the operation means image BGs in the movable body AG.

  In addition, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 302 (e), when the movable body AG moves from the first position to the second position, the third-size operation means image BGb and the fourth size on the deca button are displayed. Since at least a part of the effective time notification image TGb having the size is covered with the movable body AG, the operation means image BGb having the third size and a partial region of the effective time notification image TGb having the fourth size are visually recognized. It becomes impossible (or difficult to see compared to a state in which the movable body is not covered). In addition, as shown to the same figure, you may comprise the operation means image BGsb visual recognition by making the site | part which covers the operation means image BGb in the movable body AG translucent.

In addition, as described above, the first-size operation means image BGs and the second-size effective time notification image TGs on the normal button, the third-size operation means image BGb and the fourth-size display on the decabutton. The effective time notification image TGb is different in size from each other, and the shortest distance L1 between the first-size operation means image BGs and the second-size effective time notification image TGs on the normal button, and the deca button The shortest distance L2 between the third-size operation means image BGb and the fourth-size effective time notification image TGb is different from each other. For this reason, even when the normal button and the deca button are covered with the same movable body AG, the size and shape of the region that is not visible by this movable body AG (or is difficult to see compared to the state where it is not covered with the movable body) The normal button and the big button are different.
<Specific examples of normal button and big button>

  Next, specific examples of the normal button and the big button will be described. FIG. 303A is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a normal button, and FIG. 303B is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a decabutton.

  The normal button shown in FIG. 303 (a) is an operation means image BGs of the first size (in this example, an image imitating the appearance of the chance button 136, the letters “PUSH!”), And a downward arrow. (Combination of graphics) and a display of a third-size effective time notification image TGs (in this example, a meter graphic).

  On the other hand, the big button shown in FIG. 303 (b) has an operation means image BGb having a second size larger than the operation means image BGs of the normal button (in this example, an image imitating the appearance of the chance button 136, and “PUSH” "!" And a downward arrow graphic combination) and a fourth-size effective time notification image TGb larger than the normal button effective time notification image TGs (in this example, a meter graphic) It is composed of a combination of indications. Further, the shortest distance (gap) between the operation means image BGb and the effective time notification image TGb is longer than the shortest distance (gap) between the operation means image BGs and the effective time notification image TGs shown in FIG. Big).

  As is clear from FIGS. 5A and 5B, the size of the display area covered by the big button is larger than the size of the display area covered by the normal button. By changing to the display, the display that is not covered by the normal button can be covered by the deca button.

  The display mode of the big button is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 5B. For example, the big button is larger than the normal button operation means image BGs as shown in FIG. You may comprise by the combination of the display of the operation means image BGb of the 2nd magnitude | size, and the display of the effective time alerting | reporting image TGs of a normal button. Further, as shown in FIG. 6D, the display is composed of a combination of the display of the operation means image BGb having the second size larger than the operation means image BGs of the normal button and the display of the effective time notification image TGs of the normal button. In addition, at least a part of both displays may overlap.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5E, the deca button is configured only by displaying the operation means image BGb having the second size larger than the operation means image BGs of the normal button (no display of the effective time notification image TGb). May be. Further, as shown in FIG. 5F, the deca button is displayed larger than the normal button operation means image BGs and larger than the normal button effective time notification image TGs. You may comprise by the combination of the display of effective time alerting | reporting image TGb 'which is a 4th magnitude | size and the display mode differs from the effective time alerting | reporting image TGs of a normal button.

  As shown in FIG. 304 (a-1), the normal button displays at least part of the display of the operation means image BGs and at least part of the display of the effective time notification image TGs so as to overlap each other. As shown in a-2), with the big button, the display of the operation means image BGb and the display of the effective time notification image TGs may be displayed so as not to overlap. With such a configuration, when the display is switched from one of the normal button and the big button to the other, the normal button and the big button may be easily distinguished.

  When the maximum width of the chance button 136 is L3, as shown in FIG. 304 (b-1), the maximum width of the normal button operation means image BGs is shorter than the maximum width L3 of the chance button 136. As shown in FIG. 304 (b-2), the maximum width of the operation means image BGb of the deca button may be set to L4 (L4> L3) longer than the maximum width L3 of the chance button 136, as (L1 <L3). With such a configuration, when the display is switched from one of the normal button and the big button to the other, the normal button and the big button may be easily distinguished. As shown in FIG. 304 (c), when a plurality of normal buttons are displayed in the button effect, the maximum width of each normal button is set to the normal button operation means image shown in FIG. 304 (b-1). The maximum width L5 (L5 <L1) may be shorter than the maximum width L1 of BGs.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 305 (a), in addition to the deca button configured by displaying the operation means image BGb and the effective time notification image TGs, the maximum width substantially the same as the hold icon PI indicating the hold of the special figure variable game You may display the normal button comprised only by the operation means image BGs' which has L6. The overall size of the big button and the normal button is not particularly limited. For example, as shown in FIG. 305 (b), the big button may be displayed using the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device. 305 (c), a mini button smaller than the normal button shown in FIG. 305 (a) may be displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device.

  Further, another image may be added to the normal button or the big button. For example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the button is repeatedly hit), the effect image EG is displayed as shown in FIG. 305 (d). The added normal button may be displayed, or as shown in FIG. 305 (e), a deca button to which the effect image EG is added may be displayed.

  Further, when the normal button is covered with the above-described movable body AG, as shown in FIG. 306 (a-1), the whole normal button is covered, and when the same button is covered with the same movable body AG, the normal button is covered. As shown to (a-2), you may comprise so that a part of decabutton may be covered. Further, the display positions of the normal button and the big button are not particularly limited. For example, as shown in FIG. 306 (b), the display area of the whole big button and the whole normal button may be configured to overlap. The display area of the entire decabutton may be configured to include the entire display area of the entire normal button. Although not shown, the display area of the whole decabutton may not be overlapped with the display area of the whole normal button.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 306 (c-1) to (c-3), after the normal button is displayed, a cut-in display that covers the entire normal button is performed, and when the cut-in display is ended, the normal button is displayed. A big button may be displayed instead of the button. If such display control is performed, an unexpected display can be performed and the player's willingness to play may be sustained.

  Although not shown, a plurality of normal buttons can be displayed at a time, but only one deca button may be displayed at a time. There are many types, and display control may be performed so that the Deca button has fewer types of animation. Further, display control may be performed so that the deca button has a higher ratio (or non-hidden ratio) hidden by other images than the normal button.

  As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes an operation unit (for example, a chance button 136, a setting operation unit 137, a ball launching handle 134, etc.) and a display unit (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps). The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a first display (for example, a normal button) in the first display area, and the display means The second display area can display at least a second display (eg, a big button), and the display means can display a third display (eg, background display, effect display, decoration) in the third display area. A design (especially a central decorative design) can be displayed at least, the first display is a display related to the operation means, and the second display is a display related to the operation means. In other words, at least a part of the first display area (hereinafter referred to as “fourth display area”) is a display area that overlaps with at least a part of the third display area, At least part of the second display area (hereinafter referred to as “fifth display area”) is a display area that overlaps at least part of the display area of the third display area. The display area is a display area larger than the first display area, and the fifth display area is a display area larger than the fourth display area.

  According to the gaming table according to the present embodiment, the visibility of the display area in the display means can be varied depending on the first display, the second display, and the third display, and the gaming table characterized by the display means. May be able to provide.

  The “display unit” according to the present embodiment is configured so that “when the display condition is satisfied, the first display (or the second display region, the third display region) is displayed in the first display ( Alternatively, it may be a means for always displaying the second display and the third display), or “unconditionally in the first display area (or the second display area and the third display area). It may be a means for always displaying the first display (or the second display and the third display).

  In addition, a plurality of types of display (for example, display of an operation means image, display of an elapsed time notification image, display of an effective time notification image, display of a display change image, display of an operation promotion image, and animation display according to an operation by the operation means Animation display, background display, effect display, decorative design (especially, central decorative design), etc. at least for the operation means, and at least one of the plurality of types of display is the first display. And at least one of the plurality of types of display may be the second display, and at least one of the plurality of types of display may be the third display.

  The display means may be a means capable of starting display of at least the first display during the display of the third display, or the display of the first display during the display of the third display. It may be a means capable of starting display without fail, or a means capable of starting display of the first display unconditionally. The display means may be a means capable of starting display of at least the third display during the display of the first display, and the third display during the display of the first display. It may be a means capable of always starting display, or a means capable of unconditionally starting at least the third display.

  The display means may be a means capable of starting display of at least the second display during the display of the third display, or the display of the second display during the display of the third display. It may be a means capable of always starting display, or a means capable of unconditionally starting at least the second display. Further, the display means may be a means capable of starting display of at least the third display during the display of the second display, or the display of the third display during the display of the second display. It may be a means capable of always starting display, or a means capable of unconditionally starting at least the third display.

  Further, the third display may be a display whose visibility is at least lower than that in the first state when the third display is in the second state. Further, the second state may be a state in which at least a part of the first display overlaps at least a part of the third display. The first state may be a state in which at least a part of the first display does not overlap with at least a part of the third display.

Further, the third display may be a display whose visibility is at least lower than that in the third state in the fourth state. Further, the fourth state may be a state in which at least a part of the second display overlaps at least a part of the third display. The third state may be a state in which at least a part of the second display does not overlap with at least a part of the third display. Further, the third display may be a display whose visibility is at least lower than that in the second state when the third display is in the fourth state. Further, the first display may be a display including at least a meter display, and the first display may be a meter display.
<Other embodiments (effects of hiding various displays)>

  Hereinafter, a gaming machine according to another embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 307 to 309. In order to avoid redundant description, the same contents as those of the other embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals in the drawings, and the description thereof is omitted. In addition, the reference numerals in the drawings referred to in the present embodiment are used only in the description of the present embodiment in principle, and even when the same reference numerals are used in the drawings referred to in other embodiments, In the description of this embodiment, the reference numerals used in FIGS. 307 to 309 are given priority.

As will be described in detail later, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is a gaming machine provided with an operation unit and a display unit, and the display unit displays at least a first display in a first display area. The display means can display at least a second display in the second display area, and the display means can display at least a third display in the third display area. The first display is a display relating to the operation means, the second display is an effect display, the third display is a symbol display, and the second display area At least a part of the display area is a display area that overlaps at least a part of the display area of the first display area, and at least a part of the display area of the third display area is an area of the first display area. A display area that overlaps at least a part of the display area It is the amusement machine according to claim.
<Basic concept / Various displays on the decorative symbol display device 208>

  First, the basic concept of the game machine according to the present embodiment will be described. The gaming table according to the present embodiment has operation means and display means, and can display the same display as the gaming table, similar to the gaming table described with reference to FIGS. 288 to 301 above. It is.

In addition, the gaming table according to the present embodiment hides (covers) at least a part of various displays performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 with a button effect, so that at least a part of the various displays is not visible (or a button effect). Display control to make it difficult to view compared to the case of not being covered with. Here, the various types of display performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 include, for example, the above-described variable symbol display or stop display, hold icon display, variable icon display, fourth symbol display, and the like.
<Example 1 of button production that hides various displays>

  Next, specific examples of button effects for hiding various displays will be described. FIG. 307 is a diagram showing a specific example 1 of button effects for hiding various displays in time series.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 307 (a), three decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 307 (b), the left design display area 208a performs temporary stop display (swing fluctuation display) of the left decorative design, and at the timing shown in FIG. 307 (c), the right design is displayed. In the display area 208b, a temporary stop display (swing fluctuation display) of the decoration pattern on the right side is performed, thereby displaying a combination of decoration patterns corresponding to reach (decoration 3- (during variation) -decoration 3). In addition, in the display of fluctuation variation of the decorative symbol in this example, since the decorative symbol is moved slightly up and down, when the decorative symbol moves upward, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol according to the decorative symbol. When the fourth display area of the area becomes invisible and the decorative symbol moves downward, the fifth display area (fourth of the display areas of the decorative symbol display device 208) is displayed by the decorative symbol. A display area different from the display area) becomes invisible.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 307 (d), after the effect image with the characters “continue” displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, at the timing shown in FIGS. 307 (e) to (f), By hiding (covering) at least a part of the display of the effect image (first display area) with at least a part of the display of the button effect (second display area), at least a part of the display of the effect image ( Display control is performed to make the first display area invisible (or more difficult to see compared to the case where the first display area is not covered with button effects). In addition, you may perform the movement animation which moves the effect image to which the character of "Continuation" was given from the upper direction (or downward direction) of the middle symbol display area 208b to a stop display position.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 307 (g), the button effect is ended, and the character “× 2” is displayed in the upper right display area of the middle symbol display area 208b, so that the decorative symbol variation display is continued. At the timing shown in FIG. 307 (h), three decorative symbols are displayed on the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 in a variable manner. In addition, you may perform the movement animation which moves the character display of "x2" from the upper direction (or lower part) of the middle symbol display area 208b to a stop display position.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 307 (i), after the effect image with the characters “continue” is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, the effect image is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 307 (j). By hiding (covering) at least part of the display (first display area) with at least part of the button effect display (second display area), at least part of the display of the effect image (first display) Display control is performed to make the area) invisible (or more difficult to see than when not covered with button effects).

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 307 (k), after the temporary stop display (swing fluctuation display) of the central decorative design is performed in the middle symbol display area 208b, the timing shown in FIGS. 307 (l) to (m). Then, by hiding (covering) at least part of the display of the decorative design (third display area) with at least part of the display of the button effect (second display area), at least one of the display of the decorative design is displayed. Display control is performed to make the portion (third display region) invisible (or more difficult to see than when not covered with a button effect).

Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 307 (n), the button effect ends, and the effect image with the characters “continue” is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “×” is displayed in the upper right display area. By displaying the character “2”, it is suggested that the variation display of the decorative pattern is continued.
<Specific example 2 of button production to hide various displays>

  FIG. 308 is a diagram showing a specific example 2 of button effects for hiding various displays in time series. In addition, since the display of FIG. 308 (a)-the figure (h) is the same as the display of FIG. 307 (a)-the figure (h), the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 308 (i), a super reach (SP reach) effect is performed. At the next timing shown in FIG. 308 (j), a temporary stop display (shake) of the central decorative symbol is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. After performing (variable display), at the timing shown in FIGS. 308 (k) to (l), at least a part of the display of the decorative design is hidden (covered) with a button effect so that the display of the decorative design is displayed. Display control is performed to make at least a portion invisible (or more difficult to see compared with a case where the button effect is not covered).

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 307 (m), the button effect is ended, and a temporary stop display (swing fluctuation display) of a combination of decorative symbols (decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3) corresponding to the jackpot is performed. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 307 (n), a combination display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the big hit (decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3) is displayed.

In the timing shown in FIGS. 308 (k) to (l), an example is shown in which a meter graphic is displayed as the button effect. However, as shown in FIG. 308 (k ′), the meter is displayed as the button effect. The display may be controlled so as not to display the figure. In addition, at the timing shown in FIGS. 308 (k) to (l), a button effect constituted by the above-described deca buttons may be executed.
<Specific example 3 of button production to hide various displays>

  FIG. 309 is a diagram showing a specific example 3 of button effects for hiding various displays in time series. This example shows an example of a button effect in the case of performing an effect of displaying a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a jackpot after performing a false effect corresponding to a normal reach lose.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 309 (a), as a false effect corresponding to the normal reach loss, the decorative design (decoration A) with the letter A is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the middle symbol display area 208b. The decorative symbol (decoration B) with the letter B is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol (decoration C) with the letter C is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 309 (b), at least a part of the display of these decorative symbols A, B, and C is hidden (covered) with a button effect, thereby displaying the decorative symbols A, B, and C. Display control is started to make at least a part invisible (or more difficult to see compared with a case where the button effect is not covered).

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 309 (d), when the operation of the operating means corresponding to the button effect for hiding the decorative symbol A is received, the decorative symbol A hidden by the button effect is displayed as the character of the lord. After changing to the image, at the next timing shown in FIG. 309 (e), the button effect in the left symbol display area 208a is terminated, and the character image hidden by the button effect is displayed in the left symbol display area. In 208a, the state is visible.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 309 (f), when the operation of the operating means corresponding to the button effect for hiding the decorative symbol B is accepted, the decorative symbol B hidden by the button effect is displayed as the character of the lord. After changing to the image, at the timing shown in FIG. 309 (g), the button effect in the middle symbol display area 208b is terminated, and the character image hidden by the button effect is displayed in the middle symbol display area. In 208b, it is visible.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 309 (h), when the operation of the operating means corresponding to the button effect for hiding the decorative symbol C is received, the decorative symbol C hidden by the button effect is displayed as the character of the lord. After changing to the image, at the timing shown in FIG. 309 (i), the button effect in the right symbol display area 208c is terminated, and the character image hidden by the button effect is displayed in the right symbol display area. In 208c, it is visible.

  In this example, the upper half of the decorative symbols A, B, and C are hidden by a button effect, or the face of the lord is displayed as a character image of the lord, and the majority of the face is hidden by the button effect. However, as shown in FIGS. 309 (k) and (l), the whole body of the lord may be displayed as a character image of the lord, and the part excluding the face may be hidden with a button effect. With such a configuration, even when part of the character image is hidden by the button effect, it is possible to recognize whether or not the character image is a character image of the lord, so that special benefits can be obtained. In some cases, the player may have a sense of expectation that it may be. In addition, a part of the character image of the palace and a part of a number (for example, the number of holds and the number of rounds) indicating information related to the game may be hidden by a button effect.

  As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes an operation unit (for example, a chance button 136, a setting operation unit 137, a ball launching handle 134, etc.) and a display unit (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps). The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a first display in a first display area, and the display means is a second display area. The second display is a means capable of displaying at least a second display, the display means is a means capable of displaying at least a third display in a third display area, and the first display is a display related to the operation means. (For example, display of an operation means image, display of an elapsed time notification image, display of an effective time notification image, display of a display mode change image, display of an operation promotion image, and animation display according to an operation by the operation means The second display is an effect display, the third display is a symbol display (for example, a decorative symbol, etc.) and at least one of the second display areas. The display area of the part is a display area that overlaps at least a part of the display area of the first display area, and at least a part of the display area of the third display area is at least one of the first display area. It is a display area that overlaps the display area of the game unit.

  According to the gaming table according to the present embodiment, it is possible to vary the visibility of the display area on the display unit depending on the display relating to the operation unit, the effect display, and the symbol display, and to provide a gaming table having a feature in the display unit. May be possible.

  In addition, a plurality of types of display (for example, display of an operation means image, display of an elapsed time notification image, display of an effective time notification image, display of a display change image, display of an operation promotion image, and animation display according to an operation by the operation means Animation display, background display, effect display, decorative design (especially, central decorative design), etc. at least for the operation means, and at least one of the plurality of types of display is the first display. And at least one of the plurality of types of display may be the second display, and at least one of the plurality of types of display may be the third display.

  The display means may be a means capable of starting display of at least the first display during the display of the third display, or the display of the first display during the display of the third display. It may be a means capable of starting display without fail, or a means capable of starting display of the first display unconditionally. The display means may be a means capable of starting display of at least the third display during the display of the first display, and the third display during the display of the first display. It may be a means capable of always starting display, or a means capable of unconditionally starting at least the third display.

  The display means may be a means capable of starting display of at least the second display during the display of the third display, or the display of the second display during the display of the third display. It may be a means capable of always starting display, or a means capable of unconditionally starting at least the second display. Further, the display means may be a means capable of starting display of at least the third display during the display of the second display, or the display of the third display during the display of the second display. It may be a means capable of always starting display, or a means capable of unconditionally starting at least the third display.

  Further, the third display may be a display whose visibility is at least lower than that in the first state when the third display is in the second state. Further, the second state may be a state in which at least a part of the first display overlaps at least a part of the third display. The first state may be a state in which at least a part of the first display does not overlap with at least a part of the third display.

Further, the third display may be a display whose visibility is at least lower than that in the third state in the fourth state. Further, the fourth state may be a state in which at least a part of the second display overlaps at least a part of the third display. The third state may be a state in which at least a part of the second display does not overlap with at least a part of the third display. Further, the third display may be a display whose visibility is at least lower than that in the second state when the third display is in the fourth state. Further, the first display may be a display including at least a meter display, and the first display may be a meter display.
<Other embodiments (button production during auto button function setting)>

  Hereinafter, a game table according to another embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 310 to 316. In order to avoid redundant description, the same contents as those of the other embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals in the drawings, and the description thereof is omitted. In addition, the reference numerals in the drawings referred to in the present embodiment are used only in the description of the present embodiment in principle, and even when the same reference numerals are used in the drawings referred to in other embodiments, In the description of this embodiment, the reference numerals used in FIGS. 310 to 316 are given priority.

Although the details will be described later, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is a gaming machine provided with an operation unit and a display unit, and the display unit is a unit capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of displays. At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a first display, the first display is a display relating to the operation means, and the display means is the first display in the first mode. In the second mode, the display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display. In the first mode, the operation means is automatically operated. The game machine is characterized in that the second mode is a mode in which the operation means is automatically operated.
<Basic concept / Auto button function>

  First, the basic concept of the game machine according to the present embodiment will be described. The gaming table according to the present embodiment has operation means and display means, and can display the same display as the gaming table, similar to the gaming table described with reference to FIGS. 288 to 301 above. It is. In addition, the gaming table according to the present embodiment has an auto button function. Here, the auto button function is a function that performs the same processing as when the operation of the operation unit is received with a predetermined condition as a trigger even when the player does not operate the operation unit.

  FIG. 310 (a-1) is a time chart showing an example of the flow of effects when the operation means is operated while the auto button function is not activated (invalid). In this example, every time an operation by the operating means is accepted, the display of the effect is switched in the order of display A → display B → display C → display A → ... and the sound of the effect is changed from sound A → sound B → It is configured to switch in the order of voice C → voice A →. Here, AB1 to AB3 indicate animations executed when the display is switched from the display A to the display B, BC1 to BC3 indicate animations executed when the display is switched from the display B to the display C, and CA1 to CA3. Shows an animation executed when the display is switched from the display C to the display A. In addition, in this example, it is comprised so that a player may not feel uncomfortable at the time of the change of an effect by delaying the change timing of the sound of an effect rather than the change timing of the display of an effect.

  In this example, when the first operation by the operating means is received, the display of the effect is switched in the order of display A → animation AB1 → animation AB2 → animation AB3 → display B, and then the sound of the effect is changed to sound A. To voice B. In addition, when the second operation by the operating means is accepted, the display of the effect is switched in the order of display B → animation BC1 → animation BC2 → animation BC3 → display C, and then the sound of the effect is changed from sound B to sound. Switch to C. In addition, when the third operation by the operating means is accepted, after the display of the effect is switched in the order of display C → anime CA1 → anime CA2 → anime CA3 → display A, the audio of the effect is changed from sound C to sound. Switch to A.

  FIG. 310 (a-2) is a time chart showing an example of the flow of effects when the auto button function is activated (when enabled). In this example, even when there is no operation of the operating means by the player, every time a predetermined condition in the auto button function is satisfied, the display of the display is as follows: display A → display B → display C → display A →. In addition to switching in order, the production voice is switched in the order of voice A → voice B → voice C → voice A →. In this example, the auto button function is not activated (invalid) even when the auto button function is activated (when enabled) so that the player does not feel uncomfortable when switching the production. Similarly, it is configured so that the timing for switching the sound of the effect is delayed from the timing for switching the display of the effect.

  In this example, the display is switched when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the effect (when the effect time reaches a predetermined time), and the effect A (display A, sound A) is changed. When the production time reaches a predetermined time, the production display is switched in the order of display A → animation AB1 → animation AB2 → animation AB3 → display B, and then the production sound is changed from voice A to voice B. Switching. When the production time of production B (display B, voice B) reaches a predetermined time, the production display is switched in the order of display B → animation BC1 → animation BC2 → animation BC3 → display C. The production voice is switched from voice B to voice C. When the production time of production C (display C, voice C) reaches a predetermined time, the production display is switched in the order of display C → anime CA1 → anime CA2 → anime CAC3 → display A. The production voice is switched from voice C to voice A.

  In the example shown in FIG. 310 (a-1), the switching timing of the effect is determined by the operation timing of the operating means by the player. Therefore, for example, when the player A wants to select the character C when the player A wants to select the character C when the player A wants to select the character C when the player A wants to select the character C, the player operates the operating means. It is necessary to switch the production from the production A to the production C, and there is a possibility that it takes time to switch the production A to the production C.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 310 (b-1), the switching timing of the effect is determined by the control of the gaming table. Therefore, when the player wants to select the character C in the previous example, the player operates The effect can be switched from the effect A to the effect C without operating the means, and the effect A to the effect C can be smoothly switched compared to the state in which the auto button function is not activated.

  FIG. 310 (b-1) is a time chart showing an example of the flow of effects when the operation means is operated during the animation in the example shown in FIG. 310 (a-1). In this example, when the first operation by the operating means is received, the display of the effect is switched in the order of display A → animation AB1 → animation AB2, and then the second operation is accepted immediately after execution of animation AB2. Therefore, after execution of animation AB2, animation AB3 and display B are not executed (by skipping animation AB3 and display B), and the presentation display is switched in the order of animation BC1 → anime BC2 → anime BC → display C. ing.

FIG. 310 (b-2) is a time chart showing an example of the production flow when a predetermined condition in the auto button function is established during the animation in the example shown in FIG. 310 (a-2). It is. In this example, when the production time of production A (display A, voice A) reaches a predetermined time, the production display is switched in the order of display A → animation AB1 → animation AB2, and then animation AB2 Immediately after the execution, a predetermined condition in the auto button function is established, so that after the animation AB2 is executed, the animation AB3 and the display B are not executed (the animation AB3 and the display B are skipped), and the production is displayed by the animation BC1 → animation. Switching is made in the order of BC2 → anime BC → display C.
<Specific example of button production when auto button function is activated>

  Next, a specific example of the auto button function will be described. FIG. 311 (a-1) to FIG. 3 (a-6) are diagrams showing an example of button effects in a time series in a state where the auto button function is not activated. The period shown in FIGS. 311 (a-1) to (a-2) is a state before the start of the button effect, and the chance button 136 (its chance button lamp 138) is turned off.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 311 (a-3), the button effect is started when the special figure variable game is started in FIG. 3 (a-2), and at the same time, the chance button 136 (chance button lamp 138) is displayed. ) In the first color (red in this example). In the button effects executed in FIGS. 311 (a-3) to (a-4), the color of the operation means image BG is set to the same color as the first color (red) that is the lighting color of the chance button 136. doing.

  In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 311 (a-5), the opportunity button 136 is turned off and the button effect is triggered when the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 311 (a-4) immediately before. Has ended. Note that at this timing, while performing an effect suggesting that an operation with the chance button 136 has been performed, the chance button 136 is turned off. Instead of turning off the chance button 136, the chance button 136 may be lit in a color (for example, orange) different from the first color (red) described above. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 311 (a-6), a special effect is executed in response to the reception of an operation by the chance button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 311 (a-4).

  FIGS. 311 (b-1) to 3 (b-6) are diagrams showing a specific example 1 of the button effect in a state in which the auto button function is activated in time series. The period shown in FIGS. 311 (b-1) to (a-6) is a state in which the auto button function is activated, and the chance button 136 (its chance button lamp 138) is different from the first color. Lights in the second color (blue in this example).

  At the timing shown in FIG. 311 (b-3), the button effect is started when the special figure variable game is started in FIG. In the button effects executed in FIGS. 311 (b-3) to (b-4), the color of the operation means image BG is different from the second color (blue) that is the lighting color of the chance button 136. One color (red) is set.

In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 311 (b-5), a predetermined condition for the auto button function is established at the timing shown in FIG. 311 (b-4) immediately before (in this example, a predetermined time in the button effect is reached). The button production has ended with a special figure). In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 311 (b-6), a special effect is executed when a predetermined condition in the auto button function is established at the timing shown in FIG. 311 (b-4).
<Example 2 of button production when the auto button function is activated>

  FIG. 312 (a-1) to FIG. 3 (a-6) are diagrams showing a specific example 2 of button effects in a state in which the auto button function is activated in time series. The display shown in FIGS. 312 (a-1) to (a-3) is the same as the display shown in FIGS. 311 (b-1) to (b-3), and the description thereof will be omitted. .

In this example, the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 312 (a-4) when the auto button function is activated and the button effect is executed. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 312 (a-5), the button effect is provided when the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted during the operation of the auto button function at the timing shown in FIG. 312 (a-4). At the same time, the auto button function is switched from the operating state to the non-operating state, and the chance button 136 is turned off.
<Specific example 3 of button production when the auto button function is activated>

  FIG. 312 (b-1) to FIG. 3 (b-6) are diagrams showing a specific example 3 of the button effect in a time series in a state where the auto button function is activated. The display shown in FIGS. 312 (b-1) to (b-3) is the same as the display shown in FIGS. 311 (a-1) to (a-3), and the description thereof will be omitted. .

In this example, at the timing shown in FIG. 312 (b-5), the button effect is terminated when the operation by the chance button 136 is detected at the timing shown in FIG. When the operation by 136 is continued for a predetermined time (when the long press operation of the chance button 136 is performed), the auto button function is switched from the non-actuated state to the activated state, and the chance button 136 is changed to the second color. Lights up (blue).
<Example 4 of button production when the auto button function is activated>

  FIG. 313 (a-1) to FIG. 313 (a-7) are diagrams showing a specific example 4 of button effects in a state in which the auto button function is activated in time series. At the timing shown in FIG. 313 (a-1) of this example, triggered by the fact that a predetermined condition in the auto button function has been established (in this example, the number of holdings of the special figure variable game has increased from 3 to 4), Button production has started. In this button effect, after the operating means image BG is displayed above the increased hold icon PI4, the display mode of the hold icon PI4 is changed from the normal hold icon (in this example, a white circle image) to the hold. Is changed to a notice-holding icon (in this example, a character image of the lord) that suggests whether or not the special figure variable game is determined to be successful.

In this example, if the player activates the auto button function, the display mode of the hold icon can be changed without operating the operating means. In some cases, it is possible to grasp in advance the determination result of whether or not the special figure variation game is present, and to increase the player's willingness to play.
<Specific example 5 of button production when the auto button function is activated>

  FIGS. 313 (b-1) to (b-7) are diagrams showing a specific example 5 of button effects in a state in which the auto button function is activated in time series. At the timing shown in FIG. 313 (b-1) of this example, the button effect is triggered by the fact that a predetermined condition in the auto button function is satisfied (in this example, a special figure indicating that a predetermined time in the button effect has been reached). Since it is started but immediately before the stoppage of the special figure variable game, the display mode of the hold icon PI4 is not changed.

Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 313 (b-3), the hold is triggered by the fact that a predetermined condition in the auto button function is satisfied (in this example, the number of hold of the special figure variable game is reduced from 4 to 3). The display mode of the icon PI4 is changed from a normal hold icon (in this example, a white circle image) to a notice hold icon (in this example, a character image of the lord).
<Other examples of the auto button function>

  Next, another example of the auto button function will be described. FIG. 314 is a diagram for explaining another example of the auto button function.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 314 (a-1), in a game machine in which a left button 136 a and a right button 136 b are arranged on both sides of a chance button 136 corresponding to the auto button function, the chance button 136, the left button When the three buttons 136a and 136b are pressed at the same time (when pressed simultaneously), as shown in FIG. 314 (a-2), the auto button function is turned on (actuated), and FIG. As shown in (a-3), when the left button 136a (or right button 136b) other than the chance button 136 is operated, as shown in FIG. (Operation) may be set.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 314 (b), during the operation of the auto button function, a display indicating that the auto button function is in operation in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (in this example, “Auto (Indicating “button setting”). In addition, as shown in FIG. 314 (c), a button effect that prompts an operation by the operation means is performed or an operation that prompts an operation by the operation means (in this example, “Now,” “!” May be displayed.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 314 (d-1) to (d-3), when the auto button function is set to on (actuated), the button corresponding to the operating means during the operation of the auto button function. As shown in FIG. 314 (d-3), an effect that is executed when an operation of the operating means is received may be displayed without executing any effect. The start timing of the effect is not particularly limited. For example, the effect may be started when the effective time of the operation means is halved, or the effect is displayed when the effective time of the operation means is 0 seconds. You may start.

In addition, since the auto button function of this example is different from the above-described auto button function in that no button production is performed, the auto button function of this example is referred to as a second auto button function, and the second auto button function When the button is activated, the chance button 136 may be lit in a third color (for example, yellow) different from that when the above-described auto button function is activated.
<Character selection function>

  Next, the character selection function will be described. FIG. 315 and FIG. 316 are diagrams for explaining the character selection function.

  The game stand according to the present example can select a character to appear in the predetermined effect from a plurality of characters when a predetermined effect (for example, a big hit game effect or a bonus game effect) is started. It has a character selection function. However, in this character selection function, the character can be selected only when an operation by the operation means is accepted. Therefore, even when the above-described auto button function is in operation, the character selection is automatically performed (operation means It is configured not to be performed (without operation by).

  The state shown in FIG. 315 (a) is a state in which the character selection effect is started with the auto button function turned on (actuated). In this state, when the character selection effect is started, a display prompting an operation by the operating means (in this example, a character display of “Select a character by pressing a button!”) Is performed. Originally, when the auto button function is activated, the character is automatically selected even if there is no operation by the operating means. However, in this example, the character selection is automatically performed even when the auto button function is activated. It is configured not to be performed (without operation by the operation means). For this reason, the character (first character in this example) displayed first is not automatically selected by the auto button function (without operation by the operation means).

  FIG. 315 (b) shows a state in which an operation with the left button 136a is accepted. In this example, when the operation by the operating means is accepted during the character selection effect, the auto button function is changed to non-actuated. Therefore, at the timing shown in FIG. And the chance button 136 is turned off.

  In the following period shown in FIGS. 315 (c) to (f), characters that can be selected in the character selection effect are received based on the reception of the operation by the left button 136a at the timing shown in FIG. The animation which changes from the character of Tono to the character of Samurai is executed.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 316, the character selection function selects in the period shown in FIGS. 316 (b) to 316 (c) based on the reception of the operation by the left button 136a at the timing shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the animation which changes the possible character from the character of the lord to the character of the spider is executed and the operation by the left button 136a is accepted again at the timing shown in FIG. In a period shown in FIGS. 316 (d) to 316 (g), an animation is executed in which the character that can be selected by the character selection function is changed from a spear character to a princess character.

  That is, in this example, after starting the animation to change the character that can be selected in the character selection function from the first character to the second character on the basis of accepting the character selection operation, before the animation is completed When the character selection operation is accepted again, the animation for changing the selectable character from the first character to the second character is canceled (canceled), and the selectable character is changed to the third character. It is configured.

  In addition, in a gaming machine that performs a vibration effect that vibrates the operation means when an operation by the operation means is received, the vibration effect may not be executed when the auto button function is activated. With such a configuration, it may be possible to avoid a situation in which an uncomfortable feeling is given to the player by performing a vibration effect in a situation where the operation means does not require an operation.

  As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes an operation unit (for example, a chance button 136, a setting operation unit 137, a ball launching handle 134, etc.) and a display unit (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps). The display means includes a plurality of types of display (for example, display of an operation means image, display of an elapsed time notification image, display display mode change of an effective time notification image) Means capable of displaying at least image display, operation promotion image display, animation display according to operation by operation means, animation display related to operation means, background display, effect display, decorative design (particularly, central decorative design), etc. And at least one of the plurality of types of display is a first display, and the first display is a display related to the operation means. In the first mode, the display means performs at least the first display (for example, all or part of display of an operation means image, display of an effective time notification image, display of a display mode change image, display of an operation promotion image). The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display in the second mode, and the first mode does not mean that the operation means is automatically operated. The second mode is a mode in which the operation means is automatically operated (for example, the auto button function is on). It is a game stand characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, since the first display can be displayed even in the mode in which the operating unit is automatically operated, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a feature in the display unit. There is a case.

  The first display may be a display that includes at least a display that prompts the player to operate the operation means, and the first display is a display that prompts the player to operate the operation means. There may be. In addition, at least one of the plurality of types of display may be a second display, and the second display may be an effect display.

  Further, the display means may be means for starting display of at least the second display when a display condition is satisfied, or the display means is configured when the display condition is satisfied. It may be a means capable of starting display of at least the second display.

  Further, the display condition may be a condition that may be satisfied when the operation means is operated in the first mode. In addition, the display condition may be a condition that may be satisfied when the operation unit is not operated in the second mode. Further, the display condition may be a condition that may be satisfied when the operation means is operated in the second mode. Further, the operation means may be means provided at least at a position where the player can operate.

  Hereinafter, a gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so as to be inside thereof. Is a door member having an opening 116. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The front frame door 106 can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “balls”) in a portion below the opening 116 and guide the game balls to the launching device 110. The upper plate 126 is provided, the lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 by the player's operation are discharged to the lower plate 128. A ball release button 130, a ball discharge lever 132 for discharging game balls stored in the lower plate 128 by a player's operation to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box), and a player's operation to the launcher 110. The ball launching handle 134 for launching the guided game ball to the game area 124 of the game board 200, and the effect of changing the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (not shown in FIG. 317) by the player's operation. A card button (a CR unit), a chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light, a setting operation unit 137 that allows various settings and the like by operation of a setting person (for example, a player or a game shop clerk), and a card unit (CR unit). A ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending, a return operation button 142 for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance, and a ball lending display section for displaying the player's balance and card unit status ( (Not shown). In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. .

  The setting operation unit 137 is a push button type switch that can be pressed by the setter, and a confirm (OK) button, an upper button positioned above the confirm button, a lower button positioned below the confirm button, and confirm A right button positioned to the right of the button, a left button positioned to the left of the confirm button, and a cancel (C) button positioned further to the right of the right button. The setting operation unit 137 includes an operation unit sensor that detects the pressing of each button. The setting operation unit 137 of this example has a unit structure in which buttons and operation unit sensors are integrated. At least one of the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 functions as a chance button that changes the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 319) by the player's operation when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It may be.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 318 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 317 as viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 for guiding a ball that has passed through the communicating hole and dropped to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is provided.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either the high or low signal is passed, Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 320). The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the drawing, the main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and the production based on the processing information generated by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs the control process and the first sub-board 160 that houses the first sub-board 160 that includes the rotary volume control switch 161 that adjusts the volume output from the pachinko machine 100 by the operation of the game shop clerk. A second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500 that performs a control process related to the production based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400; An error release switch that constitutes a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls and that releases an error by the operation of a game store clerk 68, a payout board case 172 for storing a payout board 170, a launch board case 176 for housing a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control unit 630 for performing control processing relating to the launch of a game ball, and a power source for various electric gaming machines. And a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game clerk and an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs an RWM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when the power is turned on. A power board case 184 that houses the power board 182, a CR interface unit 186 that transmits and receives signals between the dispensing control unit 600 and the card unit, and a main board for outputting information of the pachinko machine 100 to an external hall computer or the like 156, the first sub-board 160, etc. and the hall computer, etc. It is provided with a relay substrate 188, the to relay.

  The main board 156, the first sub board 160, the second sub board 164 and the like are provided on the back surface of the game board 200 because they need to be changed for each model, and the payout board 170, the launch board 174, the power board 182 and the like are provided. Since it is used in common by a plurality of models, the outer frame 102 is provided.

  FIG. 319 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 at substantially the center. The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The game board 200 in this example is a game board for a so-called right-handed machine. In the right-handed machine, by changing the launch strength of the game ball by operating the ball launching handle 134, the falling path of the game ball is divided into a right path on the right side from the effect device 206 and a left path on the left side from the effect device 206. be able to. In this example, to a normal symbol starting port 228, a normal symbol starting port 229, a first special symbol starting port 230, a second special symbol starting port 232 (open state), variable winning ports 234, 235 (open state), etc., which will be described later. The ease of entering the ball differs between a game ball that falls on the right path and a game ball that falls on the left path.

  For each of the normal symbol start port 229, the second special symbol start port 232 and the variable winning port 235, the normal symbol start port 229, the second special symbol start port 232 and the variable winning port 235 are arranged on the right path. Therefore, it is relatively easy to enter a game ball falling on the right path, and it is relatively difficult or impossible to enter a game ball falling on the left path. On the other hand, for each of the normal symbol starting port 228, the first special symbol starting port 230, and the variable winning port 234, a game that falls on the left path due to the influence of the arrangement pattern of the game nails 238, the warp device 242, and the like. It is relatively easy to enter a ball, and it is relatively difficult to enter a game ball that falls on the right path. In the present embodiment, a right-handed machine is taken as an example, but a right-handed machine may be used.

  The decorative design display device 208 is a display device for displaying decorative images and various images (moving images or still images) used for production. In the present embodiment, the decorative design display device 208 is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four symbol display regions 208a, a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c, a fourth symbol display region 208e, and an effect display region 208d. The middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c display different decorative symbols, the fourth symbol display area 208e displays the fourth symbol, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d, and 208e can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 319, the display position of the fourth symbol display area 208e is fixed to the lower end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 319, one fourth symbol display area 208e corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is provided (two in total), but the first special symbol and the second special symbol Only one common fourth symbol display area 208e corresponding to both special symbols may be provided. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  Below the gaming area 124, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol hold lamp 218, and a second special symbol hold lamp 220 A normal symbol holding lamp 216 and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. In addition, hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, the special symbol as “special symbol”, the first special symbol as “special symbol 1”, and the second special symbol as “special symbol 2”.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 are display devices for displaying the special figure, and are configured by 7 segment LEDs in the present embodiment.

  The universal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of universal figure floating games (details will be described later) that are on hold. In the present embodiment, up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of universal figure floating games. It is possible to hold. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games that are held (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, the special figure variable games are predetermined. It is possible to hold up to a number (for example, 4). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a normal start port 228, 229, a special view 1 start port 230, and a special view 2 start port 232, are variable around the rendering device 206. Winning ports 234 and 235 are arranged.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are provided on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In the present embodiment, the game balls are paid out to the player as a consideration for winning (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “prize balls”) and balls lent to the player (hereinafter referred to as “rental balls”). May be included).

  The general map start port 228 and the general map start port 229 are configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed through a predetermined area of the game area 124. In the embodiment, one general-purpose start port 228 is disposed on the left path of the game board 200, and one general-purpose start port 229 is disposed on the right path. Unlike the ball that entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the ordinary drawing starting port 228 or the universal drawing starting port 229 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map start port 228 or the general map start port 229, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one special figure 1 starting port 230 is provided at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 1 starting port 230, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls as prize balls to the upper plate 126. Then, the special figure variable game (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “special figure 1 variable game”) by the special figure 1 display device 212 is started. Note that the ball that has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The special figure 2 starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electrical chew), and in this embodiment, only one is provided on the right path. The special figure 2 starting port 232 is provided with a pair of blade members 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the blade members 232a are closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 2 232, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. Then, a special figure variable game (hereinafter, also referred to as “special figure 2 variable game”) by the special figure 2 display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the special figure 2 starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The variable winning openings 234 and 235 are called a large winning opening or an attacker. In the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is provided below the center of the game board 200, and the variable winning opening 235 is on the right path. Only one is provided. The variable winning openings 234 and 235 are each provided with a door member that can be freely opened and closed, and a ball cannot be entered while the door member is closed. If the special figure display device stops and displays the jackpot symbol after winning the special figure variation game, for example, one door member of the variable prize opening 234, 235 is closed at a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time) It opens and closes at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) for a time of 1.5 seconds. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, 235, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as a winning ball. The balls that have entered the variable winning openings 234 and 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's ball launch handle 134, and The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are made to pass through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 by the 146 and the launcher 148 and are launched into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the direction of travel by the batting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning port (general winning port 226, variable winning ports 234, 235) or Wins at the starting port (Special Figure 1 starting port 230, Special Figure 2 starting port 232), or wins without winning any of the winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal starting ports 228, 229 Reach mouth 240.

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the stage device 206, a warp device 242 (242a, 242b) and a front stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is placed in the area where the game ball cannot roll. It is arranged. In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter may be referred to as a door or a shutter) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the front stage 244, and the effect movable body 224. The warp device 242 discharges the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the front stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The front stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball carried by a nail of the game board 200, and the passed ball is in the center of the front stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry to 230.

  The effect movable body 224 of this example includes a horizontally long flat panel on which the model name of the pachinko machine 100 and the like are displayed. The effect movable body 224 is movable by a stepping motor (not shown) so that the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 can be moved in the vertical direction within a plane substantially parallel to the display screen.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good. The shielding device 246 of this example is configured to expose the lower end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 even when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed. As a result, the fourth symbol display area 208e located at the lower end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is visible regardless of the open / closed state of the shielding device 246.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 performs the game ball launch control, and the power supply control unit 660 controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. .

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a time And a counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in the program processing. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 has a random value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (a counter circuit) 318 (used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit includes two counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, or opening the front frame door A sensor circuit for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, and a lower plate full sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302 322, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device such as the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 display device 214, and a predetermined figure A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the display device, for example, the general map display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, the general map hold lamp 216, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, the high Driving circuit 330 for performing display control of the center lamp 222 and the like, and various movable members such as a blade member 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 and door members of the variable winning ports 234 and 235 are opened and closed. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the solenoid 332 is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is lower than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the 1 sub control part 400 and the payout control part 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300. However, information communication between the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 may be performed by bidirectional communication.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based mainly on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and frequency. It is installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138). A driving circuit 432 for controlling the driving of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button sensor 426 for detecting the pressing of the chance button 136, and an output from the speaker 120. A volume adjustment switch 161 (not shown in FIG. 320) for adjusting the volume to be operated, an operation unit sensor (not shown) for detecting depression of each button of the setting operation unit 137, and detection signals from these sensors A sensor circuit 428 that outputs to the basic circuit 402 and a signal stored in the ROM 406 based on a signal from the CPU 404 Are connected to the VDP (Video Display Processor) 434 for displaying an image on the decorative pattern display unit 208 generates display image using a work area of VRAM436 reads image data or the like, the.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like. doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored.

  The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. Is output to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table frame lamp drive for controlling the game table frame lamp 542 The circuit 540 is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and wins or rents a ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to the unit 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 321 (a) to (d), the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the universal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of figures and ordinary drawings will be described. FIG. 321 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol pattern of FIG. 1, and FIG. 321 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol pattern of FIG. The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the special figure 2 start opening 232 indicates that the ball has entered 2 The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the start sensor is detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs “variable display of special figure 2” by repeating all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. . These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display in the present embodiment. When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation in FIG. 1 elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1 and the fluctuation time determined before the fluctuation starts in the special figure 2. After the elapse, the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol fluctuation stop display referred to in the present embodiment, the stop symbol mode of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed after the "fluctuation display of special figure 1 or 2" is started. A series of displays until this is done is referred to as symbol variation stop display. The symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 321 (a), seven types of special maps “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure G” are shown as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation stop display of Special Diagram 1. FIG. In FIG. 321 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on. "Special Figure A" is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, "Special Figure B" is a 7R special jackpot symbol, and "Special Figure C" is a 7R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not a special big hit is determined and the number of rounds are determined by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is a special figure variation game after the jackpot game ends, and the difference in probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot). Hereinafter, a state with a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “special figure certain change” or simply “probable change”), and a state with a low probability is specially designated. This is called a low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special jackpot game ends, after the 7R special jackpot game ends and after the 7R jackpot game ends, the state shifts to the time-saving state (electric support state). Although the short time will be described in detail later, the short time state is referred to as a normal high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “general probability change”), and the non-short time state is referred to as a general low probability state. “Special Figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure B”, which is a 7R special jackpot symbol, are symbols that become a special figure high probability common figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends, and are 7R jackpot symbols. “Special figure C” is a symbol that becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the end of the big hit game. These “special drawing A”, “special drawing B”, and “special drawing C” are symbols that have a relatively large advantage over the player.

  "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a symbol that becomes a special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends. That is, “Special Figure D” is 2R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 15R and “Special Figure B” which is 7R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called latent probability variation or hidden probability variation. As will be described later, when “Special Figure E” is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state (so-called “open” time 100 ms × 2R) ends. If the special figure E is stopped and displayed in a state other than the low probability state, the special figure high probability will be displayed after the big hit game (opening time 29000 ms × 2R). Transition to the high probability state (see FIGS. 327 (a) and (b)). In other words, the “special figure E” indicates that the action during the big hit game and the game state to be shifted thereafter are determined according to the game state when the stop display is made (in this example, whether or not the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). It is a different design.

  “Special figure F” is a small hit symbol, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. Further, the “special chart G” is an off-line symbol, and is a symbol that is relatively less advantageous to the player.

  FIG. 321 (b) shows four types of special figures “Special figure a” to “Special figure d” as stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display of Special figure 2. “Special figure a” is a 15R special jackpot symbol, “Special figure b” is a 7R special jackpot symbol, “Special figure c” is a 7R jackpot symbol, and “Special figure d” is a missed symbol. In the present embodiment, seven types of special maps (of which five types are big hits) are used as the special symbol 2 as the special symbols 1 to 7 as shown in FIG. As the stop symbol pattern, four types of special maps (three of which are big hits) are used. By configuring in this way, there is a case where it is possible to provide a difference between the advantages of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 without changing the probability of being a big hit and the probability of being probable among the big wins. In this example, the big hit of Special Figure 1 includes sudden probability changes and latent probability changes that hardly give out balls, whereas the big hit of Special Figure 2 does not include sudden probability changes and latent probability changes. The advantage of special figure 2 is higher than that of special figure 1.

  FIG. 321 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 9” and “Decoration 10” represent the numbers “1” to “9” and “0”, respectively. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the start port 232. In the symbol display area, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... → “decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. “Change design of symbols”.

  And then, "Special Figure A" 15R special jackpot, "Special Figure B" 7R special jackpot, "Special Figure C" 7R big jackpot, "Special Figure a" 15R special jackpot, "Special Figure b" 7R special jackpot When the 7R jackpot of “special drawing c” is notified, a combination of symbols in which three same decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, “decoration 1—decoration 1—decoration 1” or “decoration 2— Display “decoration 2—decoration 2”). When the 15R special jackpot of “Special Figure A” and the 15R special jackpot of “Special Figure a” are explicitly notified, a combination of three symbols with the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “Decoration 3-Decoration 3- “Decoration 3”, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”, etc.) are stopped and displayed.

  In addition, when notifying 2R big hit called “special drawing E” latent probability change (hidden probability change) or “special drawing F” small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. To do. When a 2R jackpot called “sudden change” of “special drawing D” is notified, “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5” is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, in the case of notifying of the difference between “special symbol G” and “special symbol d”, symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG.

  FIG. 321 (d) shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. In this embodiment, there are three types of stop-display modes for normal maps: “general map A” and “general map B” which are hit symbols, and “general map C” which is a misplaced symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the general map start port 228 and the general map start port 229, the general map display device 210 turns on all seven segments and displays one in the center. Repeatedly turn on the segment of “Usual change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” or “special figure B” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the deviation of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure C” is stopped and displayed. To do. Also in FIG. 321 (d), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal is input executes a main control unit main process according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306 after resetting by a reset interrupt.

  First, in step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Enable operation, set initial values, etc. In this embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted. In step S105 subsequent to step S103, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. When it is less than (9 V in this example), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, a second output port, etc.) 1) a process of outputting a clear signal from the output port 1), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

  In step S109 subsequent to step S107, it is determined whether or not the state before power interruption (before power interruption) is restored. If the state before power interruption is not restored (the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is changed). In the case of initializing), the process proceeds to initialization processing (step S113). Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when an RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 is operated by a store clerk or the like is on (indicating that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 is added to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0. Thus, the checksum is calculated, and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off. In the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later, the first sub control unit 400. Sent to.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, the command setting transmission process (in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300) ( In step S233), the data is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115 subsequent to step S113, the basic random number initial value updating process is performed after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this basic random number initial value update process, the initial values of the four random number counters for generating the normal winning random number, the normal random number, the special figure 1 random value, and the special figure 2 random value are generated. The four initial value generation random number counters and the two random number counters for generating each of the normal figure variation time determination random value and the special figure variation time determination random value are updated. For example, if the numerical value range that can be taken as the random number value for determining the normal time variation is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the random value for determining the normal time variation time provided in the RAM 308 and acquired. Then, 1 is added to the obtained value and stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in a basic random number initial value update process (step S207) described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

  Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this example, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt processing is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. At a predetermined cycle.

  First, in step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed. In step S203 following step S201, the WDT 314 is periodically updated so that the WDT 314 count value exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this example) and no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). Therefore (in this example, the restart is performed once in about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt).

  In step S205 subsequent to step S203, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed in step S205. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the sphere detection sensor, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal.

  In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal) is stored. In step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is pre-determined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal present, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning opening 226, the variable winning openings 234, 235, the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the special figure 2 starting opening 232, or the ordinary drawing starting opening 228. 229, it is determined that there was a passage. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been received at these winning ports 226, 234, 235 and the starting ports 230, 232, 228, 229. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before, no previous detection signal, no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 subsequent to step S205, a basic random number initial value update process is performed, and in the next step S209, a basic random number update process is performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the initial value generation random number counter updated in step S115 is updated, and then used in the main control unit 300. Four random number counters for generating the random value, the special figure 1 random value, and the special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made a round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired, and the random number counter storage area Set to.

  For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating a normal winning random value has made one round next, in addition to setting the random number counter for generating a winning random value Keep it. In addition to the above initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, the random number counter for generating the random number value for the normal value, generating the random number value for the special figure 1 The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for use and the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random number value have made one round each. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the special figure 1 random value and the counter for acquiring the special figure 2 random value are provided separately, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211 following step S209, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213 following step S211, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 and the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 are counted. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer, Special figure 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the special figure 2 display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined time Various timers including a timer for counting the closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215 subsequent to step S213, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when the winning holes 226, 234, 235 and the starting holes 230, 232, 228, 229 have been won, a prize ball provided in the RAM 308 for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value in the number storage area is read out, and 1 is added to set the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S217 following step S215, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a prize at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the special figure 2 starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting ports 228 and 229, and the variable winning ports 234 and 235. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

  When the special figure 1 starting port 230 is won and the corresponding special figure 1 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the special figure 1 starting port 230 of the random number generation circuit (hard random number circuit) 318 A special figure 1 winning random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on a value stored in a corresponding built-in counter value storage register is acquired, and a special figure is generated from a special figure 1 random number generation random number counter provided in the RAM 308. One random value is acquired and stored in the special figure 1 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. The special figure 1 winning random number values and the special figure 1 random number values in the special figure 1 random value storage area are stored in the same number as the special figure 1 reservation number stored in the special figure 1 reservation number storage area. In the special figure 1 random value storage area, each time the special figure 1 holding number decreases, the data of the combination of the special figure 1 winning random number and the special figure 1 random value having the highest holding order (first) is deleted. At the same time, processing is performed so that the data holding order of the remaining special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random value group is incremented by one. Also, each time the special figure 1 holding number increases, a new special figure 1 is added to the next holding order of the data of the combination of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random value having the lowest (last) holding order. The data of a set of winning random numbers and special figure 1 random values is written.

  When the special figure 2 starting port 232 is won and the corresponding special figure 2 reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a built-in counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232 of the random number generation circuit 318 The special figure 2 winning random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on the value stored in the value storage register is acquired, and the special figure 2 random number value is acquired from the special figure 2 random value generation random number counter provided in the RAM 308. Then, they are stored in the special figure 2 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. The special figure 2 winning random number values and the special figure 2 random number values in the special figure 2 random number storage area are stored in the same number as the special figure 2 reservation number stored in the special figure 2 reservation number storage area. In the special figure 2 random value storage area, each time the special figure 2 hold number decreases, the data of the combination of the special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 2 random value with the highest holding order is deleted, and the remainder The special ranking 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value set data are processed so that the holding order is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 hold number increases by one, a special special figure 2 winning random number value is added to the next holding rank of the data of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value group having the lowest holding order. And special figure 2 random value set data is written.

  Also, special figure 1 starting information (a combination of special figure 1 winning random value and special figure 1 random value) or special figure 2 starting information (a pair of special figure 2 winning random value and special figure 2 random value) has been newly acquired. In this case, the special figure prefetching process is executed using the start information. Details of the special figure prefetching process will be described later.

  If there is a winning at the general chart start port 228 or the general map start slot 229, and the corresponding general map hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is automatically displayed from the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal chart. Obtained as a winning random number value, obtains a regular random number value from a random number counter for generating a regular random number value provided in the RAM 308, and stores it in a regular random value storage area in the order of acquisition. The number of combinations of the random numbers and the common random numbers in the random number value storage area is stored in the same number as the number of reserved general numbers stored in the general number hold number storage area. In the standard random number storage area, each time the number of pending charts decreases by one, the data of the combination of the random number value and the random number value with the highest ranking (first) in the ranking is deleted and the remaining Is processed so that the holding order of the data of the pair of the common figure winning random number and the common figure random number is incremented by one. In addition, each time the number of pending orders increases by one, a new winning figure random number value and a new standing figure winning random number value in the next holding rank of the data of the combination of the random number value and the random number value with the lowest ranking (last) Data of a set of regular random numbers is written. When there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening 234. When a winning is made at the variable winning opening 235, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 235 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening 235.

  In step S219 following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221 following step S219, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the general diagram state update process in the middle of the normal map change display (the value of the above-mentioned general map display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the general map display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the general map display device 210 performs normal variable display (normal map variable game).

  Also, in the general state update process at the timing when the normal map change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general map display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), When the 7-segment LED constituting the general-purpose display device 210 is turned on / off to control the display mode, and the normal-map hit flag is off, the general-purpose display is displayed so that the display mode of the off symbol is displayed. The 7 segment LED constituting the device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the universal symbol display device 210 is either one of the winning symbols (ordinary symbol A or universal symbol B shown in FIG. 321 (d)) and the off symbol (common symbol C shown in FIG. 321 (d)). The final symbol is displayed. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), A normal operation is set in the setting area, and a predetermined open period (for example, 2 seconds), a solenoid for driving to open / close the blade member 232a of the special opening 2 232 (a part of various solenoids 332), A signal for holding 232a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening and closing driving, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out of place, the usual figure flag is turned off. In the case where the usual figure hit flag is off, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the special map 2 start port 232 is not performed (the state of the normal map is not in operation), and the number of the general map variable games that are on hold Is set to 1 or more as a start condition, and is executed using a pair of the first common winning random number value and the common random number value in the common random number value storage area.

  The main control unit 300 obtains the normal start information (a combination of the normal winning random number and the normal random number) from the earliest (most recently stored) holding position in the normal random number storage area. On the basis of the received normal figure winning random number value in the acquired normal figure start information and the value of the normal figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, etc., a determination table for determination of success / failure stored in the ROM 306 (FIGS. (Ref.) Is used to determine whether or not to win or not (determination of success / failure). Next, the main control unit 300, based on the general random number value in the acquired general map start information and the determined determination result, etc., the general map determination table stored in the ROM 306 (the hit shown in FIG. 325 (c)). The symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the normal variation display is determined using the hour action table). Next, the main control unit 300, for example, selects various tables (for example, timer number selection (not shown)) stored in the ROM 306 based on the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the acquired random number for determining the normal time change time, and the like. The normal fluctuation display time (timer number) is determined using a table, and the fluctuation display time is stored in the normal figure fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the normal figure fluctuation display time.

  The main control unit 300 extracts the earliest general chart start information from the normal random number value storage area, erases the earliest general chart start information from the normal random number value storage area, and Decrease the number of reserved maps in the area by 1. At this time, the general chart start information taken out from the standard random number storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-mentioned determination is made based on the general chart start information stored in the temporary area. Also good.

  The main control unit 300 sets the common figure flag provided in the RAM 308 to ON when the determination result is successful (winning), and sets the common figure flag to OFF when not successful.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. Repeatedly turn on / off drive control. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the special figure 2 variable display (special figure 2 variable game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R big hit flag, a 7R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal figure probability fluctuation flag. . These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the stop symbol determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), for example, when the 15R big hit flag is on When the special figure a, 7R jackpot flag shown in FIG. 321 (b) is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure b, 7R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off. When the special flag c and the off flag are turned on, the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the special figure d is displayed. 2 is set to indicate that the stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs fixed display of any one of the special figures a to d.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not, turn off the time flag. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Also, if the probability variation number stored in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the probability variation number, and if the subtraction result is 1 to 0, the special figure probability variation flag. Turn off.

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 is set. In order to set a special figure 2 in operation in the area and wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that a big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. In addition, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning holes 234, 235) solenoids for opening / closing the door members of the variable winning holes 234, 235 (part of various solenoids 332) In addition, a signal for holding the door member in the opened state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid for opening / closing the door member of the variable prize opening 234, 235 (a part of various solenoids 332), and a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is used. Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, the door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 15 rounds or 7 rounds in the case of Special Figure 2, 15 rounds, 7 rounds or 2 rounds in the case of Special Figure 1), and the control is finished. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period in which an image for notifying the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is ended is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the effect standby period is set in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Also, if the normal probability change flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the hour / hour number (for example, 100 times) is set in the hour / hour number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the short time flag. Note that if the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the number of time reductions is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

  The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit game to the start of the next big hit game. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, the normal figure high probability state (normal figure certain change) is established. There is a higher probability of hitting in the general-game variable game in the high-probability state than in the normal-game low-probability state. In addition, in the normal figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure variable game is shorter than in the normal figure low probability state (normal figure variable short). Furthermore, in the normal high probability state, compared to the normal low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer (electrical chew extension). In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. The state in which any one of these ordinary figure change, universal figure change, and electric Chu extension is set is referred to as an electric support (starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

  In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a predetermined number of variable winning holes 234 and 235 will be placed in the special figure 2 start opening 232 during the big hit game until a game ball enters. There is a problem that game balls enter and the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. This is to solve this problem.

  If the special figure probability variation flag is set to ON, the probability variation number (for example, 10,000 times) is set in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the big hit game.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out-of-game flag is turned on. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. However, in this example, since the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is different from the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2, the timing at which the special figure 1 variable display time has elapsed (the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer becomes 1 to 0) The special figure 1 state update process starting at the same time) is different from the special figure 2 state update process. In the special figure 1 state update process started at the above timing, for example, when the 15R big hit flag is on and the special figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure A shown in FIG. When the figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure B, the 7R big hit flag is on, when the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the special figure C, the 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, When the figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and when the common figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the special figure E, the small hit flag is on The special segment F is controlled to turn on / off the 7-segment LED constituting the special diagram 1 display device 212 so that the special flag F is turned on and the special flag G is turned on. Special map 1 stop To set indicating that it is being displayed. By performing this control in the special figure 1 state update process started at the above timing, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs a fixed display of any one of the special figures A to G. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). In the special drawing 2 related lottery process, the floating game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 is not performed, and the state of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 are both inactive and is held. The game is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random value storage area, starting from the fact that the number of variable games is 1 or more. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the state of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both inactive, and is suspended. The game is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random value storage area as a starting condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

  Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, when the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game hold are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the special symbol variable game success / failure determination by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the special symbol 2 starting port 232 is notified. Priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the present embodiment, a special figure variable game with a high advantage (in this example, special figure 2 variable game) is given priority over a low special figure variable game (in this example, special figure 1 variable game). . For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special) from the earliest (most previously stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. 2), and based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the obtained special figure 2 start information, the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, and the like. Is used as a big hit using the table for determining whether or not is stored (see FIGS. 326 (a) to (d) described later), or a small hit (in this example, the small hit can be selected only in FIG. 1). Or whether it is determined to be out of place (judgment determination). Next, the main control unit 300, based on the special figure 2 random number value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined success / failure determination result, etc., the special figure determination table (FIG. 327 (a), Using the symbol distribution table shown in FIG. 328 (a), the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display of the special symbol 2 is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 holding number at the time of the determination, the acquired special figure variation time determination random number value, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) in FIG. 2 is determined using various tables (for example, a timer number selection table not shown).

  The main control unit 300 extracts the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, erases the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, 2 is subtracted from the special figure 2 hold number in the hold number storage area. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-described determination is performed based on the special figure 2 start information stored in the temporary area. You may do it.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage is started in preference to the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage, and the special figure 2 hold is prioritized over the special figure 1 hold. Special figure 2 priority fluctuation is given as an example, but special figure 1 variable game with low advantage is started over special figure 2 variable game with high advantage, and special figure 1 suspension is The special figure 1 priority fluctuation | variation digested preferentially over hold may be sufficient. In addition, priority is not given to special figure 2 variable game and special figure 1 variable game, and the start opening prize is started in the order in which the special figure variable games related to the holding of each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are held at the start opening. It may be a forward variation. In the starting order winning order variation, the upper limit number of holds is 8 regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, and compared with the priority fluctuation in which the upper limit number of holds is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2 In some cases, the substantial upper limit of the number of holds can be increased.

  In the above description, it is assumed that the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of one special figure. The process and the special figure related lottery process may be performed independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, respectively, so that a plurality of special figures may be changed simultaneously. In addition, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time, a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure are provided on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided, and the lottery results may be displayed separately, or the lottery results of a plurality of special drawings may be displayed in one area. In addition, when fluctuations related to a plurality of special figures are performed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special figure that stopped the fluctuation may affect the lottery result of the special figure that stops the fluctuation later.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command Information that can specify the type of command, etc.), bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type). Further, in the present embodiment, a symbol variation start command and a symbol variation stop command related to a common symbol are also included as command types.

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. In addition, if the command type is a special symbol design change start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability fluctuation flags, and special drawing related lottery processing. In the case of the symbol variation stop (rotation stop) command, including information indicating the timer number selected in, including the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. In the case of a start command and an end production start command, information including the value of a special figure probability variation flag, etc., and in the case of a jackpot round number designation command, information indicating the value of a special figure probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds, etc. Is included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232, winning in the variable winning ports 234 and 235 Contains information indicating presence or absence. In the case of a prefetch result information command, information indicating the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the prefetch number stored in the prefetch number storage area described later, the stop symbol stored in the prefetch result storage unit, etc. Included.

  In addition, if the command type is a normal symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes values such as a universal symbol per unit flag, a general symbol deviation flag, a general symbol probability variation flag, etc. Information that includes information about the determined stop symbol and variation time, and in the case of a regular symbol variation stop (rotation stop) command, information indicating the value of the universal symbol per unit flag, the usual symbol deviation flag, the common symbol probability variation flag, etc. Is included.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the command data includes values such as various big hit flags, small hit flags, off-set flags, and special figure probability variation flags stored in the RAM 308, special figure 1 related lottery processes, and special figures. Information indicating the timer number selected in the FIG. 2 related lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, loss flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described special winning opening release setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates.

  In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235 following step S233, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a bottom pan full error is monitored. . When a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating whether there is a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable prize winning ports 234 and 235, and the general diagram display device 210 and the special figure 1 display via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is ON. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

  FIG. 324 (a) is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure prefetching process executed in the winning acceptance process (step S217). In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 prefetches the increased start information (newly acquired start information) in each of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and pre-stops the stop symbol before the success / failure determination process. The pre-determination result (special drawing prefetching result) is stored in the prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308 (see FIGS. 324 (b) to (d)).

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 prefetch result and the number of special figure 1 prefetch results stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit are specially displayed. A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area for storing as one pre-reading number is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 prefetching result with the highest rank (first) is erased and the remaining special figure 1 prefetching result Are processed so that the rank of the data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 1 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 1 prefetch result data of the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 prefetch result and the number of special figure 2 prefetch results stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit are stored in the special figure 2 prefetch. A special figure 2 pre-reading number storage area for storing numbers is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 prefetching result having the highest rank is deleted and the order of the remaining special figure 2 prefetching result data Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 2 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 2 prefetch data having the lowest rank.

  In the special figure prefetching process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased (step S301). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased is made, for example, by referring to the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. The comparison is made with the number of pre-reads in FIG. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 has increased when the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, and the special figure 2 hold number is equal to the special figure 2 prefetch number. It is determined that the starting information in Fig. 2 has not increased. When it is determined that the start information of FIG. 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and when it is determined that the start information of FIG. 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the increased special figure 2 starting information (a special figure 2 winning random value and a set of special figure 2 random values) is processed before the success / failure determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). FIG. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information and the determination table for special determination 2 and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 2 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S229). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S 305 subsequent to step S 303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetch result obtained in the pre-determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of FIG. 1 has increased. The determination as to whether or not the start information of FIG. 1 has increased is made, for example, in the same way as in FIG. 2, the special figure 1 hold number stored in the special figure 1 hold number storage area and the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area This is done by comparing the special figure 1 pre-reading number stored in. If it is determined that the start information of FIG. 1 has increased, the process proceeds to step S309. If it is determined that the start information of FIG. Return to the winning acceptance process (step S217).

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-electric support is in progress. If it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric support is not being performed (the electric support is being performed), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not non-electric support is being performed, but it may be determined in step S309 whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 prefetch notice is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-electric support.

  In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (a special figure 1 winning random value and a pair of special figure 1 random value) is processed before the success determination process in the special figure 1 lottery process (step S231). FIG. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information and the determination table for special determination and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 1 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected as the special figure 1 related lottery. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S231). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special figure prefetching process is terminated, and the process returns to the winning acceptance process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In step S315, the pre-read result for pre-Fig. 1 is stored in the RAM 308 in place of the stop symbol information, instead of pre-reading the start-up information without pre-reading the increased special Fig. 1 start information. Stored in the earliest free area of the copy. Thereafter, the special figure prefetching process is terminated, and the process returns to the winning acceptance process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined. However, all start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the starting information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-read result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 All the prefetching results in the section may be transmitted to the first sub-control section 400.

  In the present embodiment, pre-reading is always executed for the increased starting information of Special Figure 2, and pre-reading is always executed for the increased starting information of Special Figure 1 except during the electric support. Further, it may be determined by lottery whether to pre-read the starting information of the increased special figure 1 and special figure 2. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the prefetch result from the main control unit 300, for example, it may be determined by lottery whether to perform prefetch notification for each hold. Regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the start information increases, prefetching is always executed and the prefetching result is stored in the prefetching result storage unit. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may determine whether or not to execute the lottery and effect using the pre-read result.

  324 (b) to (d) exemplify a state in which the prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 324 (b) shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 324 (b), the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in this embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 1 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of Special Figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 324 (b), the storage area “hold 1” stores “special chart G” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage area “hold 2” stores “special chart G” as stop symbol information. "(Out of line)" is stored, "Special Figure F" (small hit) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 3", and "Special Figure A" is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 4". (15R special jackpot) is stored.

  FIG. 324 (c) shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 324 (c), the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 2 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 324 (c), the storage area “hold 1” stores “special drawing d” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4” have stop symbols. Information is not stored. In FIG. 324 (c), a state in which the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

  FIG. 324 (d) shows an example of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 during the electric support. As shown in FIG. 324 (d), “undecided” information is stored in the storage area “hold 1” instead of the stop symbol information. In the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”, neither stop symbol information nor “undecided” information is stored.

  In the above description, an example is given in which only stop symbols are determined in advance and only stop symbol information is stored in the prefetch result storage unit. Information may be stored in the prefetch result storage unit and transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 as prefetch result information.

  Next, various tables used in the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. Various tables shown in FIGS. 325 to 328 are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, for example.

  FIGS. 325 (a) and (b) show an example of a table for determining whether or not to be used when determining whether or not the lottery is associated with the common drawing related lottery process (step S223). The success / failure determination table shown in FIGS. 325 (a) and 325 (b) is composed of items of “ordinary probability”, “random number range”, and “correction result”. The item “normal figure probability” indicates the normal figure probability (ordinary figure low probability or common figure high probability) at the time of determination of success or failure. The item “Random number range” indicates a numerical range to be compared with the acquired normal winning random number value. Here, the possible range of the normal winning random number in this example is 0 to 99 (the range of the numerical range is 100).

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 325 (a) is a normal / failure determination table used when the normal probability at the time of determination is low. As shown in FIG. 325 (a), when this success / failure determination table is used, the probability of winning is 1/100 (that is, 1%), and the probability of loss is 99/100.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 325 (b) is a normal / failure determination table used when the normal probability at the time of determination is high. As shown in FIG. 325 (b), when this success / failure determination table is used, the winning probability is about 100/100 (that is, 100%), and the probability of loss is 0%. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 325 (a), the winning probability is 100 times. In this way, it is possible to design so that only the hit is selected in the usual high probability state (during short-time operation). Further, the probability of deviation may be higher than 0% at the time of short-time operation, but the probability of hit selection being higher at the time of short-time operation than at the time of short-time operation (ordinary low probability state).

  FIG. 325 (c) shows a table for symbol allocation and hit operation for ordinary use. The numerical value in the “distribution” column in the table is the random number range distribution rate for each symbol (that is, the symbol of each symbol, which is compared with the general random number value when the stop symbol is determined in the general symbol related lottery process (step S223)). Equal to selection probability). As shown in FIG. 325 (c), in the case where the result of determining whether or not the normal-game variable game is successful, the allocation ratio of each winning symbol is 50% for the normal diagram A and 50% for the normal diagram B. Normal maps A and B are symbols in which the electric chew release operation is executed after the normal variable game. It should be noted that when the determination result is out of order, only one out of the ordinary figure C is selected as the out of order symbol, so in the case of out of place, the ordinary figure C is selected with a probability of 100%. When the general figure C is selected, the electric chew release operation is not executed after the general figure variable game.

  As shown in FIG. 325 (c), after the general map A is stopped and displayed, the opening operation of the special figure 2 starting port (electrical chew) 232 is executed. When the game state at the time of the stop display of FIG. A is not operating for a short time, the blade member 232a of the electric Chu 232 is first opened for 100 ms, then closed for 5000 to 10000 ms, and then opened for 5400 ms. To do. When the game state at the time of the stop display in FIG. A is short-time operation, the blade member 232a of the electric Chu 232 is first opened for 1800 ms, then closed for about 2000 ms, then opened again for 1800 ms, It closes for about 2000 ms and opens again for 1800 ms.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 325 (c), after the general figure B is stopped and displayed, the opening operation of the special figure 2 starting port (electric chew) 232 is executed. When the game state at the time of the stop display in FIG. B is not operating for a short time, the blade member 232a of the electric Chu 232 is opened only once for 100 ms. When the game state at the time of the stop display in FIG. B is short-time operation, the blade member 232a of the electric Chu 232 is first opened for 2400 ms, then closed for about 2000 ms, then opened for about 1450 ms, and again It closes for about 2000 ms and opens again for 1450 ms.

  FIGS. 326 (a) to 326 (d) show examples of the determination table used when the determination is made in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) or the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231). Yes. The determination table shown in FIGS. 326 (a) to 326 (d) includes items of “special figure probability”, “random number range”, and “correction determination result”. The item “special figure probability” indicates a special figure probability (special figure low probability or special figure high probability) at the time of determination of success or failure. The item “random number range” indicates a numerical range to be compared with the acquired special figure 2 winning random value or the special figure 1 winning random value. Here, the possible range of the special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 1 winning random value of this example is 0 to 65535 (the range of the numerical value range is 65536).

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 326 (a) is a success / failure determination table for special figure 1 that is used when the special figure probability at the time of success / failure determination is low. As shown in FIG. 326 (a), when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/299 (= 219/65536), and the small hit probability is about 1/399 (= 165 / 65536).

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 326 (b) is the success / failure determination table for special figure 1 that is used when the special figure probability at the time of success / failure determination is high. As shown in FIG. 326 (b), when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/30 (= 2185/65536), and the small hit probability is about 1/399. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 326 (a), the probability of big hit is about 10 times and the probability of big hit is the same.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 326 (c) is a success / failure determination table for special figure 2 that is used when the special figure probability at the time of the validity determination is low. As shown in FIG. 326 (c), when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/299 and the small hit probability is zero.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 326 (d) is the success / failure determination table for special figure 2 that is used when the special figure probability at the time of the validity determination is high. As shown in FIG. 326 (d), when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/30 and the small hit probability is zero. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 326 (c), the probability of jackpot is about 10 times.

  FIG. 327 (a) shows a symbol distribution table for special figure 1. FIG. The numerical value in the “distribution” column in the table is a distribution ratio of random numbers for each symbol (that is, each symbol) compared with the special symbol 1 random value when determining the stop symbol in the special symbol 1 related lottery process (step S231). It is equal to the symbol selection probability). As shown in FIG. 327 (a), the special chart A (15R special jackpot) has a distribution rate of 30% in the case where the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit is 30% for the special chart A (15R special jackpot). (7R special big hit) is 25%, special figure C (7R big hit) is 25%, special figure D (sudden probability big hit) is 10%, special figure E (latent probability big hit) is 10% is there. Special drawings A, B, D, and E, excluding special drawing C, are symbols for which the probability change is activated after the big hit game ends. The ratio of probability variation jackpots (special drawings A, B, D, E) in the jackpot of the special figure 1 variable game, that is, the probability variation probability is 75%.

  Special illustrations A, B, and D are the gaming state (special figure high probability, special figure low probability, normal figure high probability (during short-time operation), normal figure low probability (due to short-time inactive) at the time of determination of success / failure (during symbol stop display) Regardless of the time)), the time is shortened (no time reduction is set) after the big hit game ends. The special figure C is a symbol in which the time is shortened (the number of time reductions is 100 times) after the big hit game is finished, regardless of the game state at the time of the determination of success or failure. The special figure E is a symbol in which the short time is activated after the big hit game is completed only when the gaming state at the time of the determination is a special figure high probability state or a normal figure high probability state. That is, when special figure E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the time reduction does not operate after the big hit game ends. For example, when special figure E is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol continuously several times from a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the time reduction does not operate after the first stop display (special figure high probability normal figure) However, after the second and subsequent stops, the short time is activated (the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state is entered). In the special figure 1 variable game jackpot, the probability of time reduction is 90% in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state and 100% in the other game states.

  In this example, there is only one kind of small hits symbol and off symbol in the special figure 1 variable game. Therefore, when the result of the special figure 1 variable game is determined to be a small hit, the special figure F is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 1 random value, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is determined. If it is out of place, the special figure G is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 1 random value. However, a plurality of types of small hit symbols and outlier symbols may be provided in the same manner as the big hit symbols, and may be determined by lottery using special figure 1 random numbers.

  FIG. 327 (b) shows an example of the big hit operation in each symbol of the special figure 1. FIG. As shown in FIG. 327 (b), in the jackpot game after the special figure A is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released for 15R at 29000 ms per 1R. Similarly, in the jackpot game after special figure B or special figure C is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released for 7R at 29000 ms per 1R, and in the jackpot game after special figure D is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released. Is performed 2R at 29000 ms per 1R.

  As for special figure E, the operation of the big hit game differs depending on the game state at the time of the symbol stop display. In the big hit game after the special figure E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the attacker is released 2R at 100 ms per 1R. In this big hit game, it is difficult to enter a game ball because the opening time is short. On the other hand, in the big hit game after the special figure E is stopped and displayed in a game state other than the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, 2R is played at 29000 ms per 1R. In this big hit game, it is easy to enter a game ball because the opening time is relatively long.

  In the small hit game after the special figure F is stopped and displayed, the 100 ms attacker release is performed twice in one release opportunity. That is, the attacker operates in the same manner in the big hit game after the special figure E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state and the small hit game after the special figure F is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 328 (a) shows a symbol distribution table for special figure 2. The numerical value in the “distribution” column in the table is the distribution ratio of the random number range for each symbol (that is, each symbol) that is compared with the special symbol 2 random value when determining the stop symbol in the special symbol 2 related lottery process (step S229). It is equal to the symbol selection probability). As shown in FIG. 328 (a), when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the distribution ratio of each big hit symbol is 70% for the special figure a (15R special big hit), and the special figure b (7R special big hit) is 5%, special figure c (7R big hit) is 25%. Special figures a and b are symbols for which the probability change is activated after the big hit game ends. The ratio of probability variation jackpots (special figures a and b) in the special figure 2 variable game jackpot, that is, the probability variation probability is 75%, which is the same as the probability variation probability of the special figure 1 variable game.

  Special illustrations a and b indicate the game state at the time of the success / failure determination (design stop display) (special figure high probability, special figure low probability, normal figure high probability (during short-time operation), normal figure low probability (during short-time inactive) Regardless of the), the time is shortened (no time reduction setting is set) after the big hit game ends. The special figure c is a symbol in which the time is shortened (the number of time reductions is 100 times) after the big hit game is finished, regardless of the game state at the time of determination of success / failure. The probability that the time is given in the big hit of the special figure 2 variable game is 100% regardless of the game state.

  In this example, there is only one type of outlier symbol in the special figure 2 variable game. Therefore, when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order, the special figure d is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 1 random value. However, a plurality of types of missing symbols may be provided in the same manner as the jackpot symbol, and may be determined by lottery using special figure 2 random values.

  FIG. 328 (b) shows an example of the big hit operation in each symbol of the special figure 2. As shown in FIG. 328 (b), in the jackpot game after the special figure a is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released for 15R at 29000 ms per 1R, and after the special figure b or the special figure c is stopped and displayed. In the big hit game, the attacker is released 7R at 29000ms per 1R.

  As shown in FIG. 327 and FIG. 328, the special figure 2 has a higher probability of being given a shorter time than the special figure 1, and the open time of the attacker is long (or the R number is large). Therefore, it can be considered that the special figure 2 is more advantageous than the special figure 1.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 329 and 330. FIG. 329 (a) is a flowchart showing a flow of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 in FIG. 329 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated. Among the various processes executed in the effect control process, the electric long open effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S411 following step S409, a chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, when the pressing of the chance button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the pressing of the chance button 136.

  In step S413 subsequent to step S411, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, when there is a command to the VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S415 following step S413, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S417 following step S415, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S419 following step S417, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S421 following step S419, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, a setting is made to output this control command. Thereafter, the process returns to step S403.

  FIG. 329 (b) is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 329 (c) is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this example, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Run in cycles. In step S601 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S603 following step S601, a control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S421) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other random number values for effects are updated. Etc.

  FIG. 329 (d) is a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process (step S413) of the first sub control unit main process. In step S701, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S705. Wait for the input signal to be input.

  In step S705, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S701, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S707 following step S705, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S709 following step S707, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S711. Waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S711, a scene display counter which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  FIG. 330 (a) shows the flow of the electric long open effect process executed in the effect control process of the main process in the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 330 (b) shows an example of an electric long open effect on the decorative symbol display device 208. The electric-chu-long opening effect is an effect that can be executed during a normal-game variable game, and the special-image 2 start opening (electric-chu) 232 is opened for a long time and / or multiple times (hereinafter referred to as a multi-game variable game). This may be referred to as long open). It should be noted that, even after the normal fluctuation stop, the electric-chu-long opening effect (for example, a notification effect such as “electric-chu-opening!”) May be continued based on the normal signal stop symbol.

  The electric long opening effect process shown in FIG. 330 (a) is a command process (step S407) of the main process of the first sub-control part 400 in FIG. This is executed when a (start rotation) command is received.

  First, sub-control unit 400 first determines whether or not the electric long opening effect execution restriction flag for restricting the execution of electric long opening effect is off (step S801). The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the value of the electric long open effect execution restriction flag stored in a predetermined area in the RAM 408 and determines whether or not the execution of the electric long open effect is restricted. For example, even when the electric tulong release effect is executed during display darkness in which the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is black, the player cannot visually recognize the effect and the effect of the electric chew long release effect cannot be obtained. . Therefore, in such a case, the electric long-long opening effect execution restriction flag is turned on based on the effect based on the determination result of the special figure fluctuation game during display darkening. In addition, when the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is not dark-displayed and the fluctuation time of the normal figure fluctuation game is long enough to execute the electric-chu-long opening effect, It is possible to perform an electric Chulong opening effect that can entertain the user. Therefore, in such a case, the electric long-long opening effect execution restriction flag is turned off based on the effect or demonstration effect based on the determination result of the special figure fluctuation game.

  If the electric-chu-long opening effect execution restriction flag is on in step S801, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the electric-chu-long opening effect is restricted, and controls the electric-chu-long opening effect. Other control processes are executed, this process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process effect control process (step S409).

  If the electric-chu-long opening effect execution restriction flag is off in step S801, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the electric-chu long opening effect can be executed, and proceeds to step S803 to start the usual symbol variation (start rotation). It is determined whether or not the result of determining whether or not the normal-game variable game is successful by referring to information about the normal-game hit flag and the normal-use flag from the command data of the command.

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S803 that the result of determining whether or not the normal figure variation game is successful, the process proceeds to step S805, where the first sub-control unit 400 determines the normal figure from the command data of the normal symbol change start (rotation start) command. With reference to the information regarding the stop symbol, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol of the normal figure variable game is the normal symbol A.

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S805 that the stop symbol of the usual figure variable game is the usual figure A, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S807, selects the effect whose effect type is “success pattern”, and opens the electric tulong. Set as production. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S809, executes other control processing for the electric long open effect based on the “success pattern”, ends this processing, and effects control of the main processing The process returns to the process (step S409).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S805 that the usual variable game is not the usual figure A, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S811, selects an effect whose effect type is “failure pattern A”, and releases the electric tulong. Set as production. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S809, executes other control processing for the electric-chu-long opening effect based on “failure pattern A”, ends this processing, and produces the main processing effect. The process returns to the control process (step S409).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S803 that the result of determining whether or not the normal game is a winning game is not successful, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S815 and executes an electric tulong opening false (gasse) effect execution lottery process. In the electric long open false effect execution lottery process, a random value is extracted from the random counter for electric long open false effect execution lottery provided in the RAM 408, and the electric long open false effect execution lottery table stored in the ROM 406 is stored. Is used to determine whether or not the random number value is a hit.

  The first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not to execute the electric long open false effect based on the result of the determination in step S815 (step S817).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S817 to execute the electric-chu-long opening false effect, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S817, selects an effect whose effect type is “failed pattern B”, and sets it as the electric-chu-long opening effect. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S809, executes other control processing for the electric-chu-long opening effect based on “failure pattern B”, ends this processing, and produces the main processing effect. The process returns to the control process (step S409).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S817 that the electric-chu-long opening false effect is not executed, the first sub-control unit 400 executes another control process for not executing the electric-chu-long opening effect, ends this processing, and performs the main processing. The process returns to the effect control process (step S409).

  In the processing of the electric-chu-long opening effect shown in FIG. 330, if the electric-chu-long opening effect execution restriction flag is off, the electric-chu-long opening effect is always performed if it is a win, The lottery may be performed in the same manner as when the game is off, and the presentation may be performed only when the lottery is won. Also, in this example, when the electric chew is open for a short time (short open) (general figure B), the production of “failure pattern A” is set, and when the electric chew is not released (general figure C), “failure pattern A” is set. The effect “B” is set, but the same effect may be performed with a deviation (common figure B) from the hit (normal figure B).

  FIG. 330 (b) shows an example of an electric tulong opening effect. FIG. 330B shows a display effect being executed in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The entire image display area becomes the effect display area 208d, and for example, a background effect named “Land Stage” is executed. In the front of the background effect, the decorative display of the decorative pattern in which “decoration 0” to “decoration 9” sequentially move from top to bottom in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure). Is running. A change icon display area a is arranged on the lower left side in the effect display area 208d, and a change icon of a pattern imitating a car is displayed. On the right side of the fluctuation icon display area a, a special figure hold display area c for displaying special figure hold is arranged, and a hold icon b having a pattern imitating an automobile is displayed. On the lower right side in the effect display area 208d, an electric long open effect area d is arranged. An ordinary figure display device 210 (not shown) starts the ordinary figure variation game, the execution of the electric-chu-long opening effect is not restricted, and the electric-chu-long opening effect area d is executed. As an electric Chu-long opening effect, an image of a samurai character operating the lottery machine is displayed along with a display of “help chance drawing”, and the special figure 2 start opening 232 is won by winning the ordinary figure variable game. There is a roaring effect that makes the player expect that it may be released long. As shown in FIG. 330 (b), a part of the right symbol display area 208c is hidden by the electric tulong opening effect. In addition, a part of the right side area of the special figure hold display area c is also hidden. As described above, when the electric-chu-long opening effect may make it difficult to confirm at least part of the decorative symbol variation display, or when the decorative symbol variation display makes it difficult to confirm at least part of the electric-chu long opening effect. There may be.

  Next, the process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 331 (a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S901 in FIG. 331 (a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S901. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S903 following step S901, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S905. . In step S905, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S907 following step S905, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command is received from the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S909 following step S907, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S907, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  In step S911 following step S909, lamp control processing is performed. For example, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S913 following step S911, a movable body control process is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516. Thereafter, the process returns to step S903.

  FIG. 331 (b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S1001 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub control unit 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 331 (c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this example, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Run in cycles. In step S1101 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S903 of the second sub-control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Therefore, in step S903, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1103 following step S1101, an effect random number update process or the like is performed.

  Next, the effects and the like of the special figure variable game on the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 332 to 344. FIG. 332 (a) shows the flow of the button effect control process executed in the effect control process of the main process in the first sub-control unit 400. In the button effect control process, the first sub-control unit 400 first determines whether or not the button effect flag execution flag is on (step S1201). The button effect flag is turned on within a period during which the player's operation of the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 is valid (operation valid period). The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the value of the button effect flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408. When the value of the button effect flag is “1”, the button effect flag is in the on state. The process proceeds to step S1203, and if the value of the button effect flag is “0”, it is determined that the button effect flag is in the off state, and the process proceeds to step S1211.

  In step S1203, the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not the button reception flag is on. The button acceptance flag is turned on when each button of the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137 is operated. The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the value of the button reception flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408, and when the value of the button reception flag is “1”, the button reception flag is on. The process proceeds to step S1205. If the value of the button reception flag is “0”, it is determined that the button reception flag is off and the process proceeds to step S1207.

  In step S1205, the first sub control unit 400 executes a button reception control process. In the button reception execution process, control for executing an effect executed based on the operation of the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 is performed.

  In step S1207 following step S1205, the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not a button effect end condition is satisfied. For example, when the chance button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times within the operation effective period, the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 are operated in a predetermined order, or the button effect end condition is satisfied when the operation effective period ends. To establish. If the first sub control unit 400 determines that the button effect end condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1209. If the first sub control unit 400 determines that the button effect end condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1215.

  In step S1209, the first sub-control unit 400 turns off the button effect execution flag. Since the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S1207 that the valid operation period has ended, it overwrites the button effect flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408 with “0” and sets the button effect flag execution flag. Turn off.

  On the other hand, in step S1211, when it is determined in step S1201 that the button effect execution flag is in the off state, it is determined whether or not the button effect execution condition is satisfied. The button effect execution condition is established when a predetermined lottery process is won for the execution of the effect as the operation valid period of the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137. If the first sub control unit 400 determines that the button effect execution condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1213. If the first sub control unit 400 determines that the button effect execution condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1215.

  In step S1213, the button effect execution flag is turned on. Since the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the button effect execution condition has been established by winning the execution of the effect as the operation valid period of the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137, the button effect is being executed. The button effect execution flag indicating this is turned on. The first sub-control unit 400 overwrites the button effect flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408 with “1”.

  In step S1215, the first sub control unit 400 executes an auto button mode setting process. The auto button mode setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  In step S1217 following step S1215, other button effect control processing is performed. For example, a lottery process or the like for determining whether or not an effect with an operation effective period is performed is performed. When completing the other button effect control processes, the first sub-control unit 400 ends the button effect control process and returns to the main process effect control process (step S409).

  FIG. 332 (b) shows the flow of the auto button mode setting process executed in step S1215 of the button effect control process. In the auto button mode setting process, the first sub-control unit 400 first determines whether or not the auto button mode setting flag is off (step S1301). The auto button mode is an effect mode in which each button of the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 is automatically operated. When the auto button mode is set, the auto button mode setting flag is turned on. The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the value of the auto button mode setting flag stored in a predetermined area in the RAM 408, and when the value of the auto button mode setting flag is “0”, the auto button mode It is determined that the setting flag is off, and the process proceeds to step S1303. If the value of the auto button mode setting flag is “1”, it is determined that the auto button mode setting flag is on. Then, the process proceeds to step S1309.

  In step S1303, the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not the auto button mode setting condition is satisfied. The auto button mode setting condition is satisfied when the auto button mode setting is called in a user mode (menu) that can be called by the player while the special figure variable game is not being executed. Further, the auto button mode setting condition may be satisfied when a predetermined lottery is won or when the number of jackpots since power-on reaches a predetermined number. Further, the auto button mode setting condition may be forcibly satisfied when the predetermined condition is satisfied, or the player may arbitrarily set the auto button mode itself as the auto button mode setting condition.

  In step S1305 following step S1303, auto button mode setting is performed. In the present embodiment, four types of auto button modes 1 to 4 can be set by the player's operation. Details of each mode of the auto button mode will be described later.

  In step S1307, the first sub-control unit 400 turns on the auto button mode setting flag. Since the auto button mode is set in step S1305, the first sub control unit 400 turns on the auto button mode setting flag indicating that the auto button mode is set. The first sub control unit 400 overwrites “1” in the auto button mode setting flag stored in a predetermined area in the RAM 408. When the first sub control unit 400 turns on the auto button mode setting flag, the first sub control unit 400 ends the auto button mode setting process, and proceeds to another button effect control process (step S1217) of the button effect control process.

  On the other hand, in the next step S1309 when it is determined in step S1301 that the button effect execution flag is in the OFF state, the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not the auto button mode setting cancellation condition is satisfied. The auto button mode setting release condition is satisfied when the player releases the auto button mode. When determining that the auto button mode setting cancellation condition is satisfied, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to the processing of step S1309. When determining that the auto button mode setting cancellation condition is not satisfied, the first sub control unit 400 ends the auto button mode setting process. Then, the process proceeds to another button effect control process (step S1217) of the button effect control process.

  In step S1311 following step S1309, the auto button mode setting flag is turned off. Since the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the auto button mode setting cancellation condition is satisfied, the first sub control unit 400 turns off the auto button mode setting flag indicating that the auto button mode is set. The first sub-control unit 400 overwrites “0” on the auto button mode setting flag stored in a predetermined area in the RAM 408. When the first sub control unit 400 turns off the auto button mode setting flag, the first sub control unit 400 ends the auto button mode setting process, and proceeds to another button effect control process (step S1217) of the button effect control process.

  FIG. 333 shows the flow of the chance button control process (S411) of the main process in the first sub-control unit 400. In the chance button control process, the first sub-control unit 400 first turns off the button acceptance flag (step S1401). Thus, the button acceptance flag is turned off once every time the chance button control process is executed. The first sub control unit 400 overwrites the button reception flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408 with “0” to turn off the button reception flag, and proceeds to the process of step S1403.

  In step S1403, the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not the button effect flag execution flag is on. The button effect flag is turned on within a period during which the player's operation of the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 is valid (operation valid period). The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the value of the button effect flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408. When the value of the button effect flag is “1”, the button effect flag is in the on state. The process proceeds to step S1405, and if the value of the button effect flag is “0”, it is determined that the button effect flag is off and the chance button control process ends.

  In step S1405, the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not the auto button mode setting flag is on. The auto button mode is an effect mode in which each button of the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 is automatically operated. When the auto button mode is set, the auto button mode setting flag is turned on. The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the value of the auto button mode setting flag stored in a predetermined area in the RAM 408, and when the value of the auto button mode setting flag is “1”, the auto button mode It is determined that the setting flag is on, and the process proceeds to step S1407. If the value of the auto button mode setting flag is “0”, it is determined that the auto button mode setting flag is off. Then, the process proceeds to step S1411.

  In step S1407, the first sub-control unit 400 performs auto button processing. When the auto button process is performed, each button of the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 is automatically operated.

  In step S1409 following step S1407, the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether to accept a button operation. If the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the button operation has been accepted, the process proceeds to step S1413. If the first sub-control unit 400 determines not to accept the button operation, the chance button control process ends.

  On the other hand, in step S1411 when it is determined in step S1405 that the auto button mode setting flag is off, it is determined whether the detection result of the chance button sensor 426 or the setting operation unit sensor is on. The first sub-control unit 400 determines that the chance button 136 is operated when the detection result of the chance button sensor 426 is on, and determines that the setting operation unit 137 is operated when the detection result of the setting operation unit sensor is on. to decide. If the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S1413. If the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 have not been operated, the chance button control process is performed. finish.

  In step S1413, the button acceptance flag is turned off. Since the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137 has been operated automatically or manually, the first sub-control unit 400 turns on the button reception flag indicating that the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137 has been operated. The first sub-control unit 400 overwrites “1” on the button reception flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408. The first sub-control unit 400 ends the chance button control process when the button acceptance flag is turned on.

  FIG. 334 shows various settings of the auto button mode. In the present embodiment, four types of auto button modes of mode 1 to mode 4 are provided. Mode 1 is for beginners, and no settable conditions are provided. For this reason, mode 1 can be set by any player. Mode 2 is for intermediate players, and a player who has reached level 50 with Daitomo (membership service) can be set. Mode 3 is for advanced players, and can be set by players who have reached level 100 with Daitomo (membership service). Mode 4 is for all players, but cannot be set unless a predetermined ban date arrives.

  In each mode, it is determined at which timing of the operation effective period the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 are automatically operated. As shown in the column of “sex” in the figure, “easy” is set in mode 1, and the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 are automatically operated at the end of the operation valid period. In mode 2, “Sekachi” is set, and the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 are automatically operated at the beginning of the operation valid period. In mode 3, “mood” is set, and the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 are automatically operated at random timing within the operation valid period. In mode 4, the player can arbitrarily set any one of “Leisurely”, “Imperial”, and “Money”.

  Further, the continuous hitting speed indicating the number of operations per unit time of the chance button 136 is set to “low speed” in mode 1, “medium speed” in mode 2, and “high speed” in mode 3. In mode 1 and mode 3, the player hits repeatedly without operating the chance button 136, but in mode 2, the player hits repeatedly only when the player keeps pressing the chance button 136. It has become. In mode 4, the player can arbitrarily set one of “low speed”, “medium speed”, and “high speed”.

  In addition, in the effect of matching the operation timing of the chance button 136 (for example, Princess Dance SP reach described later), the operation timing is set to “GOOD” in the allowable range in the mode 1, and the operation timing is slightly shifted in “GREAT” in the mode 2. And mode 3 is set to “PERFECT” that perfectly matches the operation timing. In mode 4, the player can arbitrarily set one of “GOOD”, “GREAT”, and “PERFECT”.

  In addition, the setting of the “back button” in which the operation promotion prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 within the operation effective period is not performed is that the chance button 136 is not automatically operated in the mode 1 during the operation effective period. In mode 2, the chance button 136 is automatically operated, and in mode 3, the chance button 136 is automatically operated. In mode 4, the player can arbitrarily set whether or not to perform automatic operation.

  In addition, when a hold icon indicating the number of hold of the special figure variable game is displayed with a pattern imitating the chance button 136 and “button hold” for promoting the operation of the chance button 136 is displayed, during the operation valid period In mode 1, the chance button 136 is automatically operated, in mode 2, the chance button 136 is not automatically operated, and in mode 3, the chance button 136 is not automatically operated. In mode 4, the player can arbitrarily set whether or not to perform automatic operation. When the chance button 136 is operated while “button hold” is displayed, the display mode of the “button hold” hold icon changes.

  In addition, a cross key (a cross key command input) for operating the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 in a predetermined order is set to be automatically operated in mode 1 and set to be automatically operated in mode 2. The mode 3 is set not to be automatically operated. In mode 4, the player can arbitrarily set whether or not to perform automatic operation.

  Also, in the selection effect that causes the player to draw a lottery, etc., Mode 1 is set to “Indecisive” where the choices are not decided immediately, Mode 2 is set to “Immediate Decision” where the choices are decided immediately, and Mode 3 Is set to “default” where the choice is determined to be the initial selection. In mode 4, the player can arbitrarily set one of “indecision”, “prompt decision”, or “default”.

  Further, the button operation of the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 by the player who is set in each mode is effectively accepted in the mode 1, is validly accepted in the mode 2, and is not validly accepted in the mode 3. It has become. In mode 4, the player can arbitrarily set whether to accept button operations of the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 by the player effectively.

  In addition, as described in the “Remarks” column in the figure, mode 1 is an auto button setting screen or special figure displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 when the special figure variable game is not being executed (during non-game). ON / OFF can be set by inputting a cross key command during a variable game (during game). In mode 2, when the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137 is actually operated by the player in the auto button mode on state, the auto button mode is switched to the off state. In the mode 3, the continuous hitting speed is such that it cannot be achieved when the chance button 136 is physically operated (directly by the player). Further, an effect that appears only when the operation timing is “PERFECT” is provided.

  FIG. 335 shows a setting method of mode 1 in the auto button mode in time series. Mode 1 is a mode that can be set even by a player who plays the pachinko machine 100 for the first time.

  FIG. 335 (a) shows the display contents of the decorative symbol display device 208 during the demonstration effect performed during the non-execution of the special figure variable game. In the symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, “decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 6”, which is the latest stop symbol, is displayed. In the effect display area 208d, “menu call by chance button” is displayed, and it is notified that the menu screen is called (displayed) by operating the chance button 136.

  FIG. 335 (b) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is operated during the demonstration effect and the menu screen is displayed when Daitomo is not logged in (when no password is entered). The player can operate the up and down buttons of the setting operation unit 137 to move the cursor e to select an item, and operate the chance button 136 to determine the selection item. In addition, this is reported by a tutorial display composed of the character of the eagle displayed in the effect display area 208d and a balloon message “Just select an item and make a decision”. The menu of this example is provided with “member registration”, “password entry”, “QR code (registered trademark) issuance”, “data clear”, “volume and light quantity adjustment”, and “auto button mode”. “QR code (registered trademark) issuance” and “data clear” are menus that can be selected only when logging in to Daitomo. In FIG. 335, since the user is not logged in to Daitomo, “QR code (registered trademark) issuance” and “data clear” are displayed darker than the other menus (indicated by right-upward hatching in the figure) and cannot be selected. It is shown that.

  FIG. 335 (c) shows a state where the “auto button mode” is selected on the menu screen. At the time indicated by 19 (c), the cursor e1 is positioned at "mode 1" and "mode 1" is selected. In the effect display area 208d, the selected mode is explained by a tutorial display composed of a princess character and a balloon message “Mode 1 is recommended for beginners”. In addition, mode 2 and mode 3 are modes that can be selected only while logging in to Daitomo, and the opening date of “mode 4” has not arrived. For this reason, “mode 2”, “mode 3”, and “mode 4” cannot be selected. When “return” is selected and determined, the menu screen shown in FIG. 335 (b) is returned.

  FIG. 335 (d) shows a state determined as mode 1. The item “mode 1” is displayed so as to be lit (indicated by a dotted frame in the figure), and the princess balloon message “determine mode 1!” Is displayed. Further, “mode 1” is displayed at the lower left of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the auto button mode being set is displayed.

  FIG. 335 (e) shows a state in which mode 1 is determined and the menu screen is returned. When the menu item “End” is selected, the character of the samurai and the balloon message “Do your best!” Are displayed, and the demonstration effect is resumed as shown in FIG. 335 (f). Further, as shown in FIG. 335 (e), the display of “mode 1” in the lower left may be hidden by a display different from the display related to the auto button mode (for example, “end” of the menu item), As shown in FIG. 335 (f), the display of “mode 1” in the lower left may be hidden from a display different from the display related to the auto button mode (for example, “menu call with chance button”).

  FIG. 336 shows the setting method of mode 4 in the auto button mode in time series. FIG. 336 (a) shows a state where “password input” is selected and determined on the menu screen shown in FIG. 335 (b). The player can log in to Daitomo by operating the setting operation unit 137 to input a 4-digit password.

  FIG. 336 (b) shows a state where the password has been successfully input. After “password input accepted” is displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d, the menu screen shown in FIG. 336 (c) is displayed. Since the user has logged in to Daitomo, the menu items “Issuing QR Code (registered trademark)” and “Data Clear” can be selected. In the effect display area 208d, a tutorial display composed of the character of a frog and a balloon message “Just select an item and make a decision” is displayed. In addition, “level: 250” is displayed on the upper right side of the effect display area 208d, and the Daitomo level of the logged-in player is shown. A title corresponding to each level is provided, and since the title of level 250 is a general, “title: general” is displayed below “level: 250”.

  In this state, when the player operates the up / down buttons of the setting operation unit 137 to select the “auto button” menu item and operates the chance button 136, the auto button mode setting is performed as shown in FIG. 336 (d). A screen is displayed. The cursor e1 is positioned in “mode 4”, and “mode 4” is selected. In the effect display area 208d, the selected mode is explained by a tutorial display including a princess character and a balloon message "Mode 4 can customize all functions". Also, since the user is logged in to Daitomo and the Daitomo level is 250, “mode 2” and “mode 3” can be selected. In addition, since the ban on “mode 4” has arrived, “mode 4” can also be selected.

  FIG. 336 (e) shows a state after mode 4 is selected and determined. The player can select a function to be set by operating the up and down buttons of the setting operation unit 137 and can set each function by operating the left and right buttons of the setting operation unit 137. The selection items of each function selected by the player are displayed brighter than the non-selected items (indicated by dot hatching in the figure). When “decision” shown below the effect display area 208d is selected and determined, the setting (customization) of mode 4 ends, and when “cancel” is selected and determined, the auto button mode screen shown in FIG. 336 (d) To come back.

  FIG. 336 (f) shows a state in which “OK” is selected and determined, and setting of mode 4 of the auto button is completed. "Mode 4" is displayed at the lower left of the effect display area 208d, and the mode being set is displayed. Further, instead of “mode 4”, the setting status of each function that can be individually set by the player may be notified individually.

Next, a specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.
Example 1

  FIG. 337 shows an example of effect display in Example 1 of the present embodiment in time series. In FIG. 337 and each figure to be described later, the fluctuation of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is represented by a downward white thick arrow. In FIG. 337 and each figure described later, the relative arrangement relationship between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, and the special figure 2 display device 214. Is shown differently from the illustration of FIG. In FIG. 337 and each figure to be described later, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 and the special figure 1 display device 212 are shown at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 and the special figure 2 display are shown on the right side thereof. Device 214 is shown. In addition, the extinguishing portions of the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are shown in white, and the lighting portions are shown in black. In addition, the state in which all segments are represented in white in the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 display device 214 indicates that the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is performed. Also, the illustration of the fourth pattern is omitted. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the like are shown on the left side of FIG. 337, and the chance button 136 viewed from the player is shown on the left side.

  FIG. 337 (a) shows a state in which the super reach effect is being executed during the execution of the special figure 1 variable game. “Decoration 7” is displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the reach is reached by the variation of the ornament symbol. In the super reach production of the present embodiment, an animation of a swordsman confrontation where Tono f1 and swordsman f2 confront each other is displayed. Further, at the time shown in FIG. 337 (a), since the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has not started, no operation promotion notification is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the chance button lamp 138 is not lit. .

  FIG. 337 (b) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. In the center of the effect display area 208d, an image simulating the chance button 136, three arrows above the image, and a character string “PUSH!” Are displayed, and an operation effective period is displayed below the image. A meter image showing is displayed. These displays are examples of the operation promotion notification. The meter image is initially displayed entirely in white, the white portion increases with the passage of time, and is displayed in white when the operation valid period ends. Further, the chance button lamp 138 emits light during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 (indicated by cross hatching in the drawing), and prompts the operation of the chance button 136.

  In this embodiment, the auto button mode is not set. For this reason, the chance button 136 is not automatically operated during the operation valid period. As shown in FIG. 337 (c), when the chance button 136 is operated by the player within the operation effective period, as shown in FIG. 337 (d), a cut-in effect in which the face of the lord f1 is displayed up. Is executed. When the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation effective period, the cut-in effect is not executed. When the chance button 136 is pressed, the chance button lamp 138 is turned off as shown in FIGS. 337 (c) and 337 (d).

As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment executes the cut-in effect as the first effect based on the operation of the chance button 136 by the player within the operation effective period. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game by executing various effects.
(Example 2)

  FIG. 338 shows an example of effect display in Example 2 of this embodiment in time series. FIG. 338 (a) shows a state in which the super reach effect is being executed during the execution of the special figure 1 variable game. “Decoration 7” is displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the reach is reached by the variation of the ornament symbol. In the super reach production of the present embodiment, an animation of a swordsman confrontation where Tono f1 and swordsman f2 confront each other is displayed. Further, at the time shown in FIG. 338 (a), since the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has not started, no operation promotion notification is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the chance button lamp 138 is not lit. .

  In this embodiment, mode 3 of the auto button mode is set. Therefore, “mode 3” is displayed at the lower left of the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 338 (b) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. In the center of the effect display area 208d, an image simulating the chance button 136, three arrows above the image, and a character string “PUSH!” Are displayed, and an operation effective period is displayed below the image. A meter image showing is displayed. These displays are examples of the operation promotion notification. The meter image is initially displayed entirely in white, the white portion increases with the passage of time, and is displayed in white when the operation valid period ends. Further, the chance button lamp 138 emits light during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 (indicated by cross hatching in the drawing), and prompts the operation of the chance button 136. Further, during the setting of the auto button mode, at least one of the image imitating the chance button 136, the three arrows, and the plurality of operation promotion notifications of the character string “PUSH!” May not be displayed.

  FIG. 338 (c) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode. As shown in FIG. 334, the “sex” in mode 3 is “mood”, and in this example, the chance button 136 is automatically operated at the end of the operation valid period as in the case of “carefree”. When the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode, the chance button lamp 138 is turned off. Note that the timing of automatic operation of the chance button 136 in mode 3 may be determined by lottery or the like, or may have regularity.

  FIG. 338 (d) shows a state in which the cut-in effect is executed based on the automatic operation of the chance button 136 in the auto button mode. As shown in FIG. 338 (d), a cut-in effect in which the face of the lord f1 is displayed up is executed. This cut-in effect is the same as the cut-in effect (see FIG. 337 (d)) when the chance button 136 is operated by the player within the operation effective period. Different cut-in effects may be executed depending on whether the chance button 136 is manually operated or automatically operated. When the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation effective period, the cut-in effect is not executed. The display content of the cut-in effect may be changed according to the setting state of the auto button mode. In particular, there may be an aspect that is not displayed unless the auto button mode is set, and vice versa.

As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment executes the cut-in effect as the second effect based on the operation of the chance button 136 in the auto button mode (not depending on the player) within the operation effective period. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game by executing various effects. In this embodiment, even when the auto button mode is set, the chance button 136 is lit during the operation effective period and the meter image indicating the operation effective period is displayed. Not limited to, when the auto button mode is not set, a meter image indicating the operation valid period is displayed while the chance button 136 is lit, and when the auto button mode is set, either one or You do not have to do both.
(Example 3)

  FIG. 339 shows an example of effect display in Example 3 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 339 (a) shows a state in which the super reach effect is being executed during the execution of the special figure 1 variable game. “Decoration 7” is displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the reach is reached by the variation of the ornament symbol. In the super reach production of the present embodiment, an animation of a swordsman confrontation where Tono f1 and swordsman f2 confront each other is displayed. Further, at the time shown in FIG. 339 (a), since the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has not started, no operation promotion notification is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the chance button lamp 138 is not lit. .

  In this embodiment, mode 3 of the auto button mode is set. Therefore, “mode 3” is displayed at the lower left of the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 339 (b) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. In the center of the effect display area 208d, an image simulating the chance button 136, three arrows above the image, and a character string “PUSH!” Are displayed, and an operation effective period is displayed below the image. A meter image showing is displayed. These displays are examples of the operation promotion notification. The meter image is initially displayed entirely in white, the white portion increases with the passage of time, and is displayed in white when the operation valid period ends. Further, the chance button lamp 138 emits light during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 (indicated by cross hatching in the drawing), and prompts the operation of the chance button 136. Further, during the setting of the auto button mode, at least one of the image imitating the chance button 136, the three arrows, and the plurality of operation promotion notifications of the character string “PUSH!” May not be displayed.

  FIG. 339 shows a state in which the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode. As shown in FIG. 334, the “sex” in mode 3 is “mood”, and in this example, the chance button 136 is automatically operated at the beginning of the operation effective period in the same manner as “Sekachi”. When the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode, the chance button lamp 138 is turned off. Note that the timing of automatic operation of the chance button 136 in mode 3 may be determined by lottery or the like, or may have regularity.

  FIG. 339 (d) shows a state where the cut-in effect is executed based on the automatic operation of the chance button 136 in the auto button mode. As shown in FIG. 339 (d), a cut-in effect in which the face of the lord f1 is displayed up is executed. This cut-in effect is the same as the cut-in effect (see FIG. 337 (d)) when the chance button 136 is operated by the player within the operation effective period. When the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation effective period, the cut-in effect is not executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment executes the cut-in effect as the second effect based on the operation of the chance button 136 in the auto button mode (not depending on the player) within the operation effective period. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game by executing various effects.
Example 4

  FIG. 340 shows a chance button 700 provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 4 of the present embodiment. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a chance button 700 instead of the chance button 136 or in addition to the chance button 136. The chance button 700 is provided at a position where the player can operate, and is configured to be pressed. The chance button 700 has the same shape and structure as the rotating lamp. In the chance button 700, a rotatable lamp 700a is arranged.

  340 (a) to 340 (d) show an example in which the chance button 700 is manually operated by the player. FIG. 340 (a) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 700 has not started and the chance button 700 is waiting. While the chance button 700 is on standby, the lamp 700a is turned off without rotating.

  FIG. 340 (b) shows a state in which the operation acceptance of the chance button 700 is started (operation valid period is started). As an operation promotion notification of the chance button 700, the lamp 700a is turned on without rotating.

  FIG. 340 (c) shows a state where the chance button 700 is operated by the player. When the chance button 700 is operated, as shown in FIGS. 340 (c) and 340 (d), the lamp 700a is turned on while rotating. As described above, when the chance button 700 is operated, an effect of lighting the lamp 700a while rotating is started. However, if the player keeps his / her hand on the chance button 700 even after operating the chance button 700, the rotation and lighting of the lamp 700a may be hidden by the hand.

  On the other hand, FIGS. 340 (e) to 340 (g) show an example in which the chance button 700 is automatically operated in the auto button mode. FIG. 340 (e) shows a state where the operation valid period of the chance button 700 has not started and the chance button 700 is waiting. While the chance button 700 is on standby, the lamp 700a is turned off without rotating.

  FIG. 340 (f) shows a state in which operation acceptance of the chance button 700 is started (operation valid period is started). As an operation promotion notification of the chance button 700, the lamp 700a is turned on without rotating.

  FIG. 340 (g) shows a state where the chance button 700 is operated in the auto button mode. When the chance button 700 is operated, the lamp 700a is turned on while rotating. As described above, when the auto button mode is set, the lamp 700a is turned on while rotating based on the automatic operation, even if the player does not actually operate the auto button. Since the player does not operate the chance button 700, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the lamp 700a from being lowered by the player's hand.

According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, depending on whether or not the auto button mode can be set, it is possible to move an accessory (for example, the lamp 700a) by operating the chance button 700 while sacrificing visibility, and the chance button. The player can select the case of ensuring the visibility of the accessory while sacrificing the operation of 700.
(Example 5)

  FIG. 341 shows an example of effects according to Example 5 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 341 (a) shows a state in which a super reach effect is being executed during execution of the special figure 1 variable game. “Decoration 7” is displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the reach is reached by the variation of the ornament symbol. In the super reach production of the present embodiment, shooting reach is performed in which Tono f1 knocks down Echigoya f3 with a beam.

  In the shooting reach of this embodiment, the operation of the chance button 136 is validated, and the beam is fired from the sword of the wing f1 by the number of times of operation of the chance button 136. In order to notify this, at the start of shooting reach, a character string “shooting reach-defeat Echigoya with repeated button hits” is displayed. In this embodiment, mode 1 of the auto button mode is set. “Mode 1” is displayed at the lower left of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 341 (b) shows a state in which shooting reach is started. The operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started with the start of the shooting reach, and an image imitating the chance button 136 in the center of the effect display area 208d, three arrows above the image, and “PUSH!” A character string is displayed, a meter image indicating the operation effective period is displayed below the image, and an operation promotion notification is executed.

  The continuous hitting speed in the auto button mode 1 is “low speed” as shown in FIG. For this reason, as shown in FIGS. 341 (b) and 341 (c), the chance button 136 is automatically operated at a low speed, so that the number of beams emitted from the sword f1 is small.

  FIG. 341 (d) shows a state in which the player has started hitting the chance button 136 continuously. In mode 1 of the auto button mode, the operation of the chance button 136 by the player is also valid. For this reason, more beams are fired from the sword of F1 than when the chance button 136 was automatically operated.

  FIG. 342 is a timing chart showing the states of the chance button sensor 426, the auto button process determination result (steps S1407 and S1409), and the button reception flag when the effect shown in FIG. 341 is executed. FIG. 342 shows, in order from the top, the on / off state of the chance button sensor 426, the on / off state of the auto button determination processing result (determination in step S1409 from step S1407), and the on / off state of the button reception flag. In addition, the horizontal axis of FIG. 342 indicates time. The chance button sensor 426 is turned on only when the player actually operates the chance button 136. The result of the auto button determination process is turned on only when the chance button 136 is operated in the auto button mode. The button acceptance flag is turned on both when the player actually operates the chance button 136 and when the chance button 136 is operated in the auto button mode.

  Time t1 in FIG. 342 is the time shown in FIG. 341 (b). When the auto button determination process is turned on at time t1 (Yes in step S1409 from step S1407), the button reception flag is turned on. Since the operation of the chance button 136 at the time t1 is an automatic operation in the auto button mode, the chance button sensor 426 remains off at the time t1.

  Time t2 in FIG. 342 is the time shown in FIG. 341 (c). When the auto button determination process is turned on at time t2 (Yes in step S1409 from step S1407), the button reception flag is turned on. Since the operation of the chance button 136 at the time t2 is an automatic operation in the auto button mode, the chance button sensor 426 remains off at the time t2. The operation of the chance button 136 at the times t3 to t4 is also an automatic operation in the auto button mode. Automatic operation of the chance button 136 in the auto button mode is performed at regular intervals. Note that the automatic operation of the chance button 136 in the auto button mode may be executed at random or in a pattern with a different cycle.

  The operation of the chance button 136 by the player is started from time t5. For this reason, at the times t5 and t6, the chance button sensor 426 is turned on, and the button reception flag is also turned on.

  At time t7, the player's operation of the chance button 136 and the automatic operation of the chance button 136 in the auto button mode overlap. In this case, only one of the operation of the chance button 136 by the player or the automatic operation of the chance button 136 by the auto button mode is valid, and the chance button 136 is operated only once. Although not illustrated, when the manual operation and the automatic operation of the chance button 136 overlap, both may be determined to be valid. Further, for example, even if the chance button 136 pressed down at the time t6 is maintained as it is, the auto button processing determination result at the time t7 and the time t10 may be turned on. If it is maintained in the ON state, the button acceptance flag may be turned OFF without turning ON even at the timing when the auto button process determination result is turned ON.

  At time t8, the chance button 136 is operated by the player. At time t9, the chance button 136 is operated by the player. Time t9 is the time shown in FIG. 341 (d).

  The chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode at time t10, but the button reception flag is not turned on at time t10. For this reason, the automatic operation of the chance button 136 at time t10 is invalidated. As described above, the automatic operation of the chance button 136 may be invalidated for a predetermined period from the operation of the chance button 136 by the player. Thereafter, the chance button 136 is operated by the player at time t11.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the operation of the chance button 136 by the player is valid even when the auto button mode is set. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, even when the auto button mode is set, by accepting an operation of the chance button 136 by the player, it is possible to deal with a player who suddenly wants to operate the chance button 136. . Further, by manually operating the chance button 136 in addition to the operation that is automatically performed, there are cases where it is possible to easily capture a continuous hitting effect (for example, shooting reach).

Here, it may be configured such that the result of the auto button process determination process is turned on with the start of the acceptance period of the chance button 136. When the player presses the chance button 136, it is difficult to operate the chance button 136 simultaneously with the start of the period even if the chance button 136 is waiting for the reception period to start. It takes time from the start of the reception period 136 to the execution of the effect based on the pressing of the chance button 136. On the other hand, when the auto button mode is set, an effect based on the pressing of the chance button 136 is executed almost simultaneously with the start of the reception period of the chance button 136, so that the effect can be seen more quickly. is there.
(Example 6)

  FIG. 343 shows an example of effect display in Example 6 of the present embodiment in time series. FIGS. 343 (a) to (d) show an example in which the auto button mode is activated. FIG. 343 (a) shows a state in which the super reach effect is being executed during the execution of the special figure 1 variable game. “Decoration 7” is displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the reach is reached by the variation of the ornament symbol. In the super reach production of the present embodiment, an animation of a swordsman confrontation where Tono f1 and swordsman f2 confront each other is displayed. In this embodiment, mode 3 of the auto button mode is set. Therefore, “mode 3” is displayed at the lower left of the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 343 (b) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. In the center of the effect display area 208d, an image simulating the chance button 136, three arrows above the image, and a character string “PUSH!” Are displayed, and an operation effective period is displayed below the image. A meter image showing is displayed. These displays are examples of the operation promotion notification. The meter image is initially displayed entirely in white, the white portion increases with the passage of time, and is displayed in white when the operation valid period ends.

  FIG. 343 (c) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode. As shown in FIG. 334, the “sex” in mode 3 is “mood”, and in this example, the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the middle of the operation valid period.

  FIG. 343 (d) shows a state in which a cut-in effect is executed based on the automatic operation of the chance button 136 in the auto button mode. As shown in FIG. 343 (d), a cut-in effect in which the face of the lord f1 is displayed up is executed. This cut-in effect is the same as the cut-in effect (see FIG. 337 (d)) when the chance button 136 is operated by the player within the operation effective period.

  FIGS. 343 (e) to (h) show an example in which the auto button mode is not activated. FIG. 343 (e) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, a decorative symbol variation display (indicated by a downward arrow in the diagram) is executed. In addition, since mode 3 of the auto button mode is set, “mode 3” is displayed at the upper left of the effect display area 208d. When the super reach effect is executed, the display position indicating that the auto button mode is being set is in the lower left, and when the super reach effect is not executed, the display position indicating that the auto button mode is being set is the upper left. It has become. As described above, the display position indicating that the auto button mode is being set may be changed for each state.

  Also, the lower left area of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variation icon display area a. In the variation icon display area a, one variation icon can be displayed, and whether or not the variation is appropriate can be notified in advance with a predetermined reliability according to the display mode of the variation icon (notification of the variation). In the fluctuation icon display area a, a fluctuation icon a1 is displayed in a white circular (default) display mode.

  Also, a horizontally long area below the effect display area 208d and adjacent to the right side of the variable icon display area a is a special figure hold display area (hold icon display area) c. In the special figure hold display area c, it is possible to display one or more hold icons. In the special figure hold display area c, it is possible to notify the number of hold of the special figure variable game according to the number of the hold icons, and to notify the success or failure of the hold with a predetermined reliability according to the display mode of each hold icon (pre-reading Notice). Further, in the special figure hold display area c of this example, hold icons indicating the hold of the hold ranks 1 to 4 are displayed in order from the variable icon display area a side. Since the number of currently reserved special figure 1 variable games is two, as shown in FIG. 343 (e), in the special figure hold display area c, two hold icons b1 and b2 are displayed as white circles (default). It is displayed in a manner.

  FIG. 343 (f) shows a state in which one game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230 during execution of the special figure 1 variable game, and the number of the special figure 1 variable game is increased by one. . In the special figure hold display area c, a hold icon b3 is newly displayed.

  The hold icon b <b> 3 is a button hold that is displayed in a pattern display mode that imitates the chance button 136. The button hold is displayed as a prefetch notice. During the button hold display, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is reached. When the chance button 136 is operated manually or automatically while the button hold is displayed, the display mode of the button hold is changed. In addition, when the auto button mode is activated when a plurality of button holds are displayed while the auto button mode (except mode 3) is set, only the display mode of the button hold previously displayed is displayed. May be changed, or conversely, only the display mode of the button hold displayed later may be changed. In that case, the display mode of both button hold may not be changed, and the display mode of both button hold may be changed simultaneously. Also, these controls may be different between the auto button mode setting and other states, or may be the same. In addition, the display mode after the change may be different or the same between the change of the display mode due to the operation of the auto button mode and the change of the display mode based on the fact that the chance button 136 is actually pressed. Good. Further, there may be an aspect that is displayed only when one of the conditions is satisfied.

  In this example, mode 3 of the auto button mode is set. However, in mode 3, as shown in FIG. 334, the automatic operation at the time of button hold display is not performed, and the operation by the player is not validated. For this reason, when mode 3 is set, the button hold display mode does not change.

  FIG. 343 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game that has been on hold with the hold icon b3 is started. The hold icon b3 with the button hold becomes the change icon a2 with the display mode as it is. The variation icon a2 gradually moves toward the variation icon display area a.

  FIG. 343 (h) shows a state where the fluctuation icon a2 has moved to the fluctuation icon display area a. The display mode of the change icon a2 changes after the movement to the change icon display area a is completed. The change icon a2 changes, for example, to a display form of a picture drawn as “Heat” in a red circle (indicated by cross hatching in the figure), and a notice display of the special figure 1 change game being executed ( This change is indicated in advance).

As shown in FIGS. 343 (a) to (d) of the present embodiment, the auto button mode may be activated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 so that the chance button 136 is automatically operated. However, as shown in FIGS. 343 (e) to (h), the auto button mode may not be operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136 may not be operated automatically. The auto button mode may be activated when the cut-in effect is executed when the chance button 136 is operated, and the auto button mode when the button hold changes when the chance button 136 is operated. May be activated. Further, when the cut-in effect is executed when the chance button 136 is operated, the auto button mode may not be activated, and when the button hold changes when the chance button 136 is operated, Auto button mode may not be activated.
(Example 7)

  FIG. 344 shows an example of effect display in Example 7 of the present embodiment in time series. The decorative symbol display device 208 and the like are shown on the left side of FIG. 344, and the chance button 136 viewed from the player is shown on the right side.

  FIG. 344 (a) shows a state in which the super reach effect is being executed during the execution of the special figure 1 variable game. “Decoration 7” is displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the reach is reached by the variation of the ornament symbol. In the super reach production of the present embodiment, the princess dance super reach where the princess dances is executed.

  In the princess dance super reach of the present embodiment, the operation of the chance button 136 is validated, and an effect of operating the chance button 136 in a timely manner is executed. In order to notify this, at the start of Princess Dance Super Reach, a character string “Princess Dance SP Reach-Push the Flowing Button in Time!” Is displayed. In this embodiment, mode 3 of the auto button mode is set. “Mode 3” is displayed at the lower left of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 344 (b) shows a state where the princess dance super reach has been started. The operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started with the start of the princess dance super reach. When the operation valid period starts, the chance button lamp 138 is turned on.

  In the effect display area 208d, a princess image, a chance button image g, and an aiming frame h are displayed. In the present embodiment, a plurality of chance button images g are displayed so as to flow from above toward the aiming frame h in accordance with the BGM being reproduced. When the chance button 136 is manually or automatically operated at the timing when the chance button image g overlaps the aiming frame h, evaluations of “PERFECT”, “GREAT”, and “GOOD” are obtained in order of good timing.

  FIG. 344 (c) shows a state where the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode. In this embodiment, the chance button 136 is movable by driving means such as a motor or a solenoid. In accordance with the timing when the chance button 136 is automatically operated, the chance button 136 is retracted as if it was pressed. When the chance button 136 is automatically operated, the chance button 136 may be protruded upward. Further, when the chance button 136 is operated, the chance button lamp 138 is turned off. Furthermore, when the chance button 136 is provided with driving means, the chance button 136 may not be physically pressed by operating the driving means in accordance with the setting of the auto button mode. For example, the chance button 136 may not be pressed by driving the driving means so that the player does not press the chance button 136 based on the auto button mode being set to ON. For example, the chance button 136 can be pressed by applying force from the inside to the outside so that the chance button 136 does not move or by retracting the chance button 136 and fixing the chance button 136 in the retracted state. It may be eliminated.

  Thus, when the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode, the chance button 136 is operated as if it was actually operated. This is not limited to the movement of the chance button 136 by the driving means, and the appearance may be the same when the chance button 136 is operated by the player and when the chance button 136 is automatically operated. For example, when the chance button lamp 138 is turned on during the operation valid period and the chance button lamp 138 is turned off when the chance button 136 is operated by the player, the chance button 136 is automatically activated by the operation of the auto button mode. By causing the chance button lamp 138 to turn off based on the operation, there is a case where the player can have an illusion as if the chance button 136 is actually operated.

  Also, in order to make the player have the illusion that the chance button 136 is actually operated, there is a case where the chance button 136 is actually operated and a case where the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode. The appearance of the chance buttons 136 may be the same. In this case, when the chance button 136 is actually operated and when the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode, the lighting state of the chance button lamp 138 (for example, the presence / absence of issuance, emission color, luminance) At least one of the plurality of elements such as the posture, the posture, and the situation of movement may be made common.

  FIG. 344 (d) shows a state after the chance button 136 is automatically operated. As shown in FIG. 334, in the mode 3 of the auto button mode, the chance button 136 is automatically operated at the timing of “PERFECT”. Therefore, after the chance button 136 is automatically operated, an effect image including a character string “PERFECT” is displayed so as to overlap the aiming frame h.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, a player who feels troublesome to operate the chance button 136 does not operate the chance button 136, and the same effect as when the chance button 136 is actually operated is played. May be able to show to the person.

Next, a characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 317 to 344 again.
(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment

  Operation means (for example, chance buttons 136, 700, setting operation unit 137) provided at a position where the player can operate, and a plurality of effects (for example, cut-in effects, button hold, shooting reach, princess dance SP) A game machine including at least one of the reach effects (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208), wherein at least one of the plurality of effects is One effect (for example, cut-in effect, button hold change), and at least one of the plurality of effects is a second effect (for example, cut-in effect, button hold), and the effect The means is capable of executing at least the first effect (for example, the cut-in effect (see FIG. 337)) when the first condition is satisfied. The production means can execute at least the second production (for example, change of button hold in mode 3) when the second condition is satisfied, The first effect is at least different from the second effect, and the first condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the operation means is not operated by a player, and the second condition is It is a condition that may be satisfied when the operating means is not operated by the player.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game by executing various effects.

  Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, a player who feels troublesome to operate the operation means can be presented with the same effect as when the operation means is operated without operating the operation means. There is a case. In addition, there may be a new way of enjoying a game in which an operation means is not operated by providing an effect that can be visually recognized by not operating the operation means.

(2) The pachinko machine 100 described above, which is a gaming machine provided with an effect mode control means capable of executing at least switching control of a plurality of effect modes, wherein at least one of the plurality of effect modes is One production mode (for example, auto button button mode is not set), at least one of the plurality of production modes is a second production mode (for example, auto button button mode), and the first The effect is an effect that is not executed when the effect mode is the first effect mode, and the second effect is an effect that is not executed when the effect mode is the first effect mode. The first effect mode is an effect mode in which the operation means is automatically operated and is not operated, and the second effect mode is the operation hand. There amusement machine which automatically, is that the effect mode in which it has been operated, characterized in that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having this configuration, a player who does not want to operate the operating means does not operate the operating means by providing an effect that is executed only in an effect mode in which the operating means is automatically operated. In some cases, there is no loss. Conversely, a player who does not want to operate the operating means may make a profit by not operating the operating means.

(3) In the pachinko machine 100, the effect means is capable of executing at least operation promotion notification (for example, an image imitating a chance button 136, a meter image), and the effect means is the effect mode. Can be executed at least when the operation mode is the first production mode, and the production means can provide the operation promotion notification when the production mode is the second production mode. It is at least executable, and the operation promotion notification is notification that prompts a player to operate the operation means.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the operation is automated by executing the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the operation unit even in the production mode in which the operation of the operation unit is automatically performed. It may be possible to rescue a player who feels angry. Moreover, it may be difficult to understand that another player has set the second effect mode (for example, the auto button mode). Moreover, since control can be made common in a plurality of performance modes, the control load can be reduced and the design work process can be reduced.

(4) In the pachinko machine 100, at least one of the plurality of effects is a third effect (for example, a cut-in effect), and the effect means satisfies the third condition. The third effect is at least the same effect as the first effect, and the third condition is determined by the operating means. It is a condition that may be satisfied when operated by a player.

(5) In the pachinko machine 100, the third effect is an effect executed when the effect mode is the first effect mode, and the first effect is the effect mode. Is an effect that is executed when the second effect mode.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, even in the effect mode in which operation of the operation means is performed automatically, a game that suddenly wants to operate the operation means by accepting the operation of the operation means by the player Can also deal with the elderly. Further, in some cases, it is possible to easily capture a continuous hitting effect or the like by manually operating the operation means in addition to the operation performed automatically.

(6) The above gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be made. For example, the above embodiment can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in a game machine. For example, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine that encloses a sphere and circulates the enclosed sphere in the pachinko machine, and this enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed sphere as a launch ball, The ball payout may be executed by electronic display.

  Note that the items described in the above detailed description, in particular, the items described in the examples and the modifications can be combined.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is used as an example of a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine 1000 as shown in FIG.

  The gaming table according to the present invention corresponds to each reel shown in FIG. 345, “a plurality of types of symbols 1002 and a plurality of reels 1002 which are rotationally driven, a start lever 1004 for instructing the rotation of the reels. A stop button 1006 for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, lottery means (lottery prize internal lottery) for determining whether or not internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is successful, and a lottery result of the lottery means The combination of symbols displayed by the reel stop control means (reel stop control processing) that performs stop control for stopping the rotation of the reels and the reels stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means corresponds to the winning combination. And determining means (winning determination process) for determining whether or not the symbol combination is predetermined, and when the symbol stop mode is a predetermined winning mode, In addition to payout control means (medal payout process 1008) for performing game medium payout processing for paying out game media to be played, the effect means 1010 for executing effects based on the lottery result of the lottery means, A launching device 1014 that launches a ball into the game area 1012, a winning opening 1016 configured to be able to enter a ball launched from the launching device, a detection means 1018 that detects a ball that has entered the winning opening 1016, A payout means 1020 for paying out a ball when the detection means 1018 detects a ball, a variable display device 1022 for variably displaying a predetermined symbol (identification information), and a shutter 1024 movable to a position for shielding the variable display device 1022 And a movable body 1026 that operates in a predetermined operation mode, and the variable display device 1022 is designed to receive a game ball in the winning opening. And the stopped displayed after varied is also suitable to the slot machine 1000 "is a representation section 1010, so as to produce a game.

  The game table according to the present invention is shown in FIG. 346 (a). “Insert a bill into the bill insertion slot 2002, execute a lottery based on the bet 2004 and start 2006 operation, and display the lottery result on the lottery result display device 2008. Then, at the time of winning, the number of bonus coins is added to the remaining credit number, and when cashout 2009 is selected, the casino machine 2000 issues a receipt from the receipt issuing machine 2010 with a code corresponding to the remaining credit number. It may be.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5B, the cellular phone 3000 having a storage unit for storing the electronic data for realizing the present invention, and the electronic data for realizing the present invention as shown in FIG. The present invention may be applied to a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing the video data and a home video game machine 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

  More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 in FIG. 5B includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game through a mobile phone line, and acquired data about the game (this book And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  The portable game machine 4000 in FIG. 6C includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired data related to the game (the present invention). And a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The home video game machine 5000 in FIG. 6D includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired data ( And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5E, the present invention may be applied to a data server 6000 that stores electronic data for realizing the present invention. In some cases, the electronic data for realizing the present invention is downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game machine 5000 shown in FIG.

  In addition, a game can be executed by applying the present invention to a game program that simulates the operation of a real machine such as a pachinko machine for a home game machine. In that case, a DVD-ROM, CD-ROM, FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used as a recording medium for recording the game program.

  Furthermore, the present invention has been described by taking a pachinko machine and a slot machine as examples of game machines, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be applied to an arrangement ball game machine, a ball ball game machine, a smart ball, and the like.

  In the conventional game stand, there is an effect that is not executed unless the player operates the operation means. Further, in the conventional game machine, there may be a case where the player performs the same effect as when the operation means is operated without operating the operation means, depending on conditions such as time-out of the operation effective period of the operation means. there were. For this reason, in the conventional game machine, the effect executed based on the operation of the operating means is likely to be monotonous, and the player is started because the predetermined effect is executed at a predetermined timing. There was a problem that it was easy to predict the contents of the production and it was easy to get bored of the production.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment diversifies the effects that are executed based on the operation of the operation means, and the effects that are started by the player by randomizing the timing of the effects. This makes it difficult to predict the content of and makes it possible to produce a timeless presentation.
The present invention according to the above embodiment can be summarized as follows.
(Appendix 1)

A gaming machine comprising: operating means provided at least at a position operable by a player; and at least one of a plurality of effects, an effecting means capable of executing at least one of the effects Is at least one of the first effects, at least one of the plurality of effects is a second effect, and when the first condition is satisfied, The first effect can be executed at least, and when the second condition is satisfied, the effect means can execute at least the second effect, and the first effect is The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the operation means is not operated by the player, and the second condition is The operation means is not operated by the player When the a condition which may be satisfied, amusement machine, characterized in that.
(Appendix 2)

The gaming machine according to appendix 1, wherein the gaming machine includes a production mode control unit capable of executing at least switching control of a plurality of production modes, wherein at least one of the plurality of production modes is a first game mode. One production mode, at least one of the plurality of production modes is a second production mode, and the first production is when the production mode is the first production mode, It is an effect that is not executed, and the second effect is an effect that is not executed when the effect mode is the first effect mode. A game table characterized in that it is an effect mode that is not operated, and the second effect mode is an effect mode in which the operation means is automatically operated.
(Appendix 3)

The gaming machine according to appendix 2, wherein the production means is capable of at least executing operation promotion notification, and the production means is configured to operate the operation when the production mode is the first production mode. When the presentation mode is the second presentation mode, the production means can execute at least the operation promotion notice, and the operation promotion notice is A game table characterized in that it is a notification that prompts the player to operate the operation means.
(Appendix 4)

The gaming machine according to appendix 2 or 3, wherein at least one of the plurality of effects is a third effect, and the effect means is provided when the third condition is satisfied. The third effect is at least executable, the third effect is at least the same effect as the first effect, and the third condition is that the operating means is operated by the player. A game table characterized by a condition that may be satisfied if
(Appendix 5)

The gaming machine according to appendix 4, wherein the third effect is an effect executed when the effect mode is the first effect mode, and the first effect is the effect mode. A game table, wherein the game table is an effect that is executed when the second effect mode.
(Appendix 6)

  The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 5, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine.

  <Other embodiments (embodiments in which at least a part of the elapsed time notification display is covered with a hold display)>

  Next, a game machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a spinning game such as a slot machine) according to another embodiment of the present invention (an embodiment in which at least part of the elapsed time notification display is covered with a holding icon) The table will be described in detail. It should be noted that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 347 to 352 are used only in the description of this embodiment in principle, and even in the case where overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the description of this embodiment does not illustrate them. Priority is given to the code | symbol shown to 347-FIG. On the other hand, in the following description, about the code | symbol which is not shown by FIGS. 347-352, the same code | symbol is used as the same component as said embodiment. In addition, when there are drawings showing the same timing in a plurality of drawings, overlapping description may be omitted. In addition, the number of the example of this embodiment is used only for the description of this embodiment in principle, but each example of this embodiment and each example of other embodiments are applied in combination with each other. Can do.

  In the present embodiment, another example will be described in which the display unit (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) performs display related to the operation of the operation unit in accordance with the operation of the operation unit (for example, the chance button 136). In the following description, as an example, another example of the operation unit image display that performs display related to the operation of the operation unit by the same process as the operation unit image display process described in the first embodiment will be described.

FIG. 347 is a diagram showing an overview of the operation means image display of the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, in the vicinity of the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 and the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 Is displayed, and a hold display is displayed at, for example, the lower end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold display is, for example, a hold icon PI. In addition, the hold icon PI in the present embodiment includes a default hold display (here, a normal hold icon PI_D (for example, a circular icon)) indicating a normal (default) hold, and a pre-read hold display (a pre-read notice effect). A pre-read hold icon PI_P (for example, an icon of the character “Hani”). The operation means image display of this embodiment covers at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 with at least a part of the hold icon PI, and this display example will be described in detail below.
<Example of Operation Means Image Display A-1>

  FIG. 348 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of Example A-1 in time series. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6A, a hold display area 700 is provided in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example, near the lower end of the center. In the hold display area 700, a hold icon PI is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 5A, normal hold icons PI_D1 and PI_D2 indicating that there are two hold of a special figure (for example, special figure 1), and the prefetch notice hold of the special figure (for example, special figure 1) are held. A prefetch hold icon PI_P indicating that there is one is displayed. In the following description, the case of displaying the number of holdings of special figure 1 will be described as an example, but the number of holdings of special figure 2 may be displayed, or the holding of special figures 1 and 2 will be displayed. Each of the numbers may be displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5A shows a state in which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 5B, one special symbol 1 hold is consumed and the variable game of FIG. 1 starts, and the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are decorated. The symbol shows the state where the variable display is started. At this timing, the hold icon movement animation is executed. As a result, the hold icon PI_D1 in which the hold icon PI_D2 in FIG. 9A has moved to the left adjacent position and the prefetch hold icon PI_P in which the position has been moved from the position shown in FIG. .

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C is the first operation means image corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136, triggered by the arrival timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136 while the decorative symbol is variably displayed. BG1 (in this example, an image simulating a chance button) is displayed near the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 (in front of the decorative symbol). Also, a first elapsed time notification image TG1 (in this example, the chance button 136 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. Is displayed below the first operation means image BG1 and behind the prefetch hold icon PI_P. That is, in this example, at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with at least a part of the prefetch hold icon PI_P moved by the hold icon movement animation (a part of the hold icon PI is the first icon). By overlapping the elapsed time notification image TG1), at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible or difficult for the player to see. In this example, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered only by the prefetch hold icon PI_P and is not covered by the normal hold icon PI_D1.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D shows a state in which the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is displayed in a reduced manner. In this example, the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is a display of an image in which the scale (filled portion) of the meter gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136. Say. Also in this case, at least part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (meter scale) is covered by at least a part (decrease display) of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 covered with the prefetch hold icon PI_P. Invisible or difficult to see.

  In this way, various effects can be made and it is possible to make the player pay attention to the first elapsed time notification image TG1.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E shows a state immediately before the acceptance period ends when the meter scale (filled portion) of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 disappears. Also in this case, at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the prefetch hold icon PI_P, so that at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible or difficult to view. Yes. At this timing, the meter scale (filled portion) of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 has disappeared, and the scale display of the meter (first elapsed time notification image TG1) is displayed by the prefetch hold icon PI_P. It will not be covered.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 5F, the operation of the chance button 136 is performed between the timing shown in FIG. 4D and the timing shown in FIG. 5E (during the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136). Shows the state.

  By the operation of the chance button 136, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed small, for example, in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (decorative display of the decorative symbol), and the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time are displayed. The notification image TG1 is erased, and the notice display corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 (in this example, a character display “Two rotations are hot!” And a character image (donor) are displayed on the decorative design display device 208. An effect to be displayed in the area) is executed.

  In the hold display area 700, the normal hold icon PI_D1 and the prefetch hold icon PI_P are continuously displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6G is the state after FIG. 8E or FIG. 8F, and the notice effect is finished, and again in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. The state (for example, the state which rushes into a special reach) in which the variation display of the decorative symbol is started is shown. In the hold display area 700, the normal hold icon PI_D1 and the prefetch hold icon PI_P are continuously displayed. Further, in FIGS. 10C to 10G, the prefetch hold icon PI_P executes a standby animation.

In this example, the case where the prefetch hold icon PI_P covers the vicinity of the left end of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (near the end point of the reception period of the operation means) has been described as an example. It covers the vicinity of the right end portion of the elapsed time notification image TG1 (near the start point of the reception period of the operation means) and the vicinity of the center of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (near the intermediate point of the reception period of the operation means). This also applies to the following examples.
<Example of Operation Means Image Display A-2>

  FIG. 349 is a diagram illustrating an operation unit image display according to Example A-2. In the examples of the present embodiment shown in FIG. 349 and the subsequent drawings up to FIG. 352, the decorative symbols are displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in front of the decorative symbols, A state in which the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are displayed is shown.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6A shows a state in which a plurality of hold icons PI are displayed in the hold display area 700, and any one of the hold icons PI covers the first elapsed time notification image TG1. More specifically, three normal hold icons PI_D1 to PI_D3 and one prefetch hold icon PI_P are displayed, and only the prefetch hold icon PI_P is a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (for example, an operation reception period). The first elapsed time notification image TG1 indicating the start time) is covered (only the prefetch hold icon PI_P overlaps a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1), and the first elapsed time notification image is displayed. A part of TG1 shows a state in which the player cannot see or is difficult to see.

  The timing shown in (a-1) in the figure shows that the meter scale (filled portion) of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 gradually decreases from the timing shown in (a) in FIG. A state in which the reduction display of the image TG1 is executed is shown. At this timing, three normal hold icons PI_D1 to PI_D3 and one prefetch hold icon PI_P are displayed, and only the prefetch hold icon PI_P is, for example, the right end portion of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (that is, reception of the operation means). The first display of the elapsed time notification image TG1 (meter scale (filled portion)) is not covered by the prefetch hold icon PI_P (and the normal hold icons PI_D1 to PI_D3). In this example, the fourth (right end) hold icon PI is the prefetch hold icon PI_P, but the first to third hold icons PI (hold icons at the positions of the normal hold icons PI_D1 to PI_D3) are shown. The prefetch hold icon PI_P may be used. When the hold icon at the position of the normal hold icon PI_D1 is the prefetch hold icon PI_P, the end point of the reception period of the operation means (the left end portion of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is covered by the prefetch hold icon PI_P, and the normal hold icon When the hold icon at the position of PI_D2 or PI_D3 is the prefetch hold icon PI_P, a point in the middle of the reception period of the operation means (middle portion of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is covered by the prefetch hold icon PI_P. During this period, the reduced display (meter scale (filled portion)) of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is not covered by the prefetch hold icon PI_P.

  That is, in this example, a part of the decrease display (meter scale (filled portion)) of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the prefetch hold icon PI_P, but with the passage of time (in other periods), The decrease display of one elapsed time notification image TG1 is not covered by the prefetch hold icon PI_P and can be visually recognized by the player.

  In this way, various effects can be achieved, and it is possible to make the player easily pay attention to the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (reduction display).

  Also, in the timing shown in FIG. 5B, the plurality of prefetch hold icons PI_P1, PI_P2, PI_P3, and PI_P4 cover a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1, that is, all the hold icons PI are in the first progress. The state which overlaps with time alert image TG1 is shown. In this example, the pre-read hold icons PI_P1, PI_P2, PI_P3, and PI_P4 indicate the right end portion (start point of the reception period of the operation means) and the middle portion (operation point) of the meter scale (filled portion) of the first elapsed time notification image TG1. Both of the means during the reception period of the means) and the left end portion (when the operation means reception period ends) are not visible or difficult for the player to see.

  The timing shown in (b-1) in the figure is such that the meter scale (filled portion) of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 gradually decreases from the timing shown in FIG. A state in which the decrease display of TG1 is executed is shown. In this case, the plurality of prefetch hold icons PI_P1, PI_P2, PI_P3, and PI_P4 all overlap with the first elapsed time notification image TG1, and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is displayed in a reduced manner. It overlaps with this. As a result, the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is repeated a plurality of times when it is covered or not covered by the plurality of hold icons PI, and the player is notified of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (of (Decrease display) can be easily noticed multiple times.

  Note that at least one of the plurality of prefetch hold icons PI_P1 to PI_P4 may not overlap with the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1).

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C shows a state in which the plurality of hold icons PI are the normal hold icons PI_D1 to PI_D4, and none (all the hold icons PI) cover the first elapsed time notification image TG1. ing. In this case, the right end of the meter scale (filled portion) of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (the start time of the reception period of the operation means), the middle part (the time during the reception period of the operation means), and the left end ( Any one of the operation means reception period) is visible to the player.

  The timing shown in (c-1) of the figure is such that the meter scale (filled portion) of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 gradually decreases from the timing shown in FIG. A state in which the decrease display of TG1 is executed is shown. Also in this case, since the plurality of hold icons PI do not cover the first elapsed time notification image TG1, the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is always visible to the player.

In this example, the case where the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is displayed at a position that overlaps only the prefetch hold icon PI_P has been described. However, depending on the gaming state (effect), only the prefetch hold icon PI_P of the present embodiment. Only one of the overlapping position, the position overlapping with the normal hold icon PI_D shown in Example A-3 to be described later, and the position not overlapping with any of the hold icons PI shown in Example A-4 to be described later. Or only two may be selected, or any two may be switched by the effect, or three may be switched by the effect.
<Example A-3 of operation means image display>

  FIG. 350 is a diagram illustrating an operation unit image display of Example A-3, in which the first elapsed time notification image TG1 overlaps both the hold icon PI (the normal hold icon PI_D and the prefetch hold icon PI_P). It is an example displayed at a position.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6A shows a state where all three normal hold icons PI_D1 to PI_D3 and one prefetch hold icon PI_P cover the first elapsed time notification image TG1. In this case, the right end of the meter scale (filled portion) of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (the start time of the reception period of the operation means), the middle part (the time during the reception period of the operation means), and the left end ( All of the operation means are not visible to the player or difficult to see.

  The timing shown in (a-1) of the figure is such that the meter scale (filled portion) of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 gradually decreases from the timing shown in FIG. A state in which the decrease display of TG1 is executed is shown. All the hold icons PI overlap with the first elapsed time notification image TG1, and also overlap with the decrease display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1. Thereby, the decrease display (filled portion) of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is repeated a plurality of times when it is covered by the plurality of held icons PI and when it is not covered, and the first elapsed time notification is given to the player. It is possible to make the image TG1 (decrease display thereof) easy to focus on a plurality of times.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5B shows a state in which a plurality of hold icons PI (in this case, four prefetch hold icons PI_P1, PI_P2, PI_P3, and PI_P4) cover a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1. ing. In this example, the pre-read hold icons PI_P1, PI_P2, PI_P3, and PI_P4 indicate the right end portion (start point of the reception period of the operation means) and the middle portion (operation point) of the meter scale (filled portion) of the first elapsed time notification image TG1. Both of the means during the reception period of the means) and the left end portion (when the operation means reception period ends) are not visible or difficult for the player to see. In addition to this, a part of the first operation means image BG1 is also covered with a part of the hold icon PI, which is not visible or difficult for the player to see.

  The timing shown in (b-1) in the figure is such that the meter scale (filled portion) of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 gradually decreases from the timing shown in FIG. A state in which the decrease display of TG1 is executed is shown. All the hold icons PI overlap with the first elapsed time notification image TG1, and also overlap with the decrease display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1. As a result, the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is repeated a plurality of times when it is covered or not covered by the plurality of hold icons PI, and the player is notified of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (of (Decrease display) can be easily noticed multiple times.

  Further, the timing shown in FIG. 5C shows a state in which a plurality of hold icons PI are normal hold icons PI_D1 to PI_D4, and all cover a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1. In this case, the right end of the meter scale (filled portion) of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (the start time of the reception period of the operation means), the middle part (the time during the reception period of the operation means), and the left end ( All of the operation means are not visible to the player or difficult to see.

The timing shown in (c-1) of the figure is such that the meter scale (filled portion) of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 gradually decreases from the timing shown in FIG. A state in which the decrease display of TG1 is executed is shown. Also in this case, the plurality of hold icons PI cover the first elapsed time notification image TG1, and the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered or not covered by the plurality of hold icons PI. Is repeated multiple times.
<Example A-4 of operation means image display>

  FIG. 351 is a diagram illustrating the operation unit image display of Example A-4, and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 does not overlap any of the hold icons PI (the normal hold icon PI_D and the prefetch hold icon PI_P). It is an example displayed at a position.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 5A, none of the three normal hold icons PI_D1 to PI_D3 and one prefetch hold icon PI_P cover the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (Displayed at a position that does not overlap with the hold icon PI). In this case, the right end of the meter scale (filled portion) of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (the start time of the reception period of the operation means), the middle part (the time during the reception period of the operation means), and the left end ( Any of the operation means reception period) is visible to the player.

  The timing shown in (a-1) of the figure is such that the meter scale (filled portion) of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 gradually decreases from the timing shown in FIG. A state in which the decrease display of TG1 is executed is shown. Since all the hold icons PI do not overlap with the first elapsed time notification image TG1, the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is always visible to the player.

  (B) and (b-1) in the figure are examples in the case where all the held icons PI are prefetched held icons PI_P (PI_P1 to PI_P4) in FIGS. (A) and (a-1). Yes, and the rest of the configuration is the same as FIG.

Also, FIGS. 10C and 10C show the case where all the hold icons PI are normal hold icons PI_D (PI_D1 to PI_D4) in FIGS. This is an example, and other than that is the same as FIG.
<Example A-5 of operation means image display>

  FIG. 352 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of Example A-5, in which the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is a kind of hold display and a variable display corresponding to the special figure variable game (this example) Then, the display example overlaps with the variation icon CI).

  In this case, for example, the left end portion of the hold display area 700 is secured as the fluctuation icon display area 702, and the fluctuation icon CI suggesting the fluctuation is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 702. The variation icon CI covers a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (here, the left end portion of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 indicating the end point of the reception period). Although illustration is omitted, in this example, in the area of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 that is not covered by the change icon CI, when the decrease display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is executed, the decrease is performed. The display (filled portion) is visible to the player.

  In the present embodiment, another hold icon PI (prefetch hold icon PI_P or normal hold icon PI_D) also shows a case where a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered, but only the change icon CI is the first. A part of the elapsed time notification image TG1 may be covered, and the prefetch hold icon PI_P or the normal hold icon PI_D may not cover a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1.

  <Other Embodiments (Embodiments in which at least a part of the elapsed time notification display is covered with a suspended display for animation)>

  Next, a game machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc.) according to another embodiment of the present invention (an embodiment in which at least a part of the elapsed time notification display is covered with a hold display that performs animation). The spinning machine) will be described in detail. Note that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 353 to 356 are used only in the description of the present embodiment in principle, and even in the case where overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the description of the present embodiment is not illustrated. Priority is given to the code | symbol shown to 353-356. On the other hand, in the following description, the same reference numerals that are not shown in FIGS. 353 to 356 are used as the same constituent elements as those in the above embodiment. In addition, when there are drawings showing the same timing in a plurality of drawings, overlapping description may be omitted. In addition, the number of the example of this embodiment is used only for the description of this embodiment in principle, but each example of this embodiment and each example of other embodiments are applied in combination with each other. Can do.

  In this embodiment, another example of the operation unit image display for performing display related to the operation of the operation unit will be described.

FIG. 353 is a diagram showing an overview of the operation means image display of the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, in the vicinity of the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 and the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 Is displayed, and the hold icon PI is displayed at, for example, the lower end in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The type of the hold icon PI is the same as in the embodiment just above. In the operation means image display of the present embodiment, at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with at least a part of the hold icon PI, and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the animation of the hold icon PI. This display example will be described in detail below.
<Example of Operation Means Image Display B-1>

  FIG. 354 is a diagram showing operation means image display of Example B-1 in time series. (A) in the figure is a display example of the decorative symbol display device 208, and (b) and (c) in the figure are examples of animation display of the hold icon PI.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5A, a hold display area 700 is provided in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example, near the lower end of the center. The hold display area 700 is an area in which the hold icon PI is displayed as in the embodiment just above, and the left end portion is secured as a variable icon display area 702.

  In this example, three normal hold icons PI_D 1, PI_D 2, and PI_D 3 and a prefetch hold icon PI_P are displayed in the hold display area 700, and a change icon CI is displayed in the change icon display area 702. The prefetch hold icon PI_P executes an animation (an increase animation of the hold icon) that is executed when the hold increases and a new hold icon is displayed.

  That is, the timing shown in the upper diagram of FIG. 6A shows a state in which the character “Hani” as the prefetch hold icon PI_P appears from the lower end of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the vicinity of the head is displayed. At this timing, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (meter scale (filled portion) of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is covered with the variation icon CI at the left end, but the region other than the left end Is not covered by any of the normal hold icons PI_D1, PI_D2, PI_D3, and the prefetch hold icon PI_P, and is visible to the player.

  The timing shown in the middle diagram of FIG. 9A shows a state in which the character “Hani” moves further upward and the vicinity of the upper body is displayed. At this timing, a part near the right end of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (meter scale (filled portion) of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is covered (overlapped) by the prefetch hold icon PI_P. ), Invisible to the player or difficult to see. In addition, the left end portion of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 continues to overlap with the change icon CI, and does not overlap with the normal hold icons PI_D1, PI_D2, and PI_D3 in the vicinity of the center portion.

  The timing shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 11A shows a state where the character “Hani” moves further upward and the whole body is displayed. At this timing, the area where the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered (overlapped) by the prefetch hold icon PI_P has changed from the case of the middle diagram in FIG. The area to be increased). In addition, the left end portion of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 continues to overlap with the change icon CI, and does not overlap with the normal hold icons PI_D1, PI_D2, and PI_D3 in the vicinity of the center portion.

  As described above, in this embodiment, a part of the scale (filled portion) of the meter of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the increase animation of the hold icon whose display mode changes with time (hold icon PI). Is partially overlapped with the first elapsed time notification image TG1), so that at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible or difficult for the player to see. In this way, various effects can be made and it is possible to make the player pay attention to the first elapsed time notification image TG1.

  In addition, in the same figure (a), although the case where all the 1st elapsed time alerting | reporting images TG1 (meter scale) are filled in is illustrated, the 1st elapsed time alerting | reporting image TG1 starts a decrease display. Then, the decrease display (filled portion) may be covered by the prefetch hold icon PI_P as time passes, or may be covered by the prefetch hold icon PI_P and become visible to the player. In addition, when the decrease display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the prefetch hold icon PI_P, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the first elapsed time is also displayed by executing the increase animation of the prefetch hold icon PI_P. The area covered with the reduced display of the notification image TG1 changes with time. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 11A, the lower figure of FIG. 11A shows the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the first elapsed time) than the middle figure of FIG. The area covered by the prefetch hold icon PI_P is increased. This is the same in each example of the present embodiment.

  By doing so, it is possible to make the player easily pay attention to the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (decrease display). In this example, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is shown to increase in the area covered by the prefetch hold icon PI_P. The area covered by PI_P may be increased or changed so as to be repeatedly decreased and increased.

  FIG. 7B is a diagram showing an example of an increase animation of the prefetch hold icon PI_P in FIG. In this example, the character “Hani”, which is the prefetch hold icon PI_P, appears from the lower side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and gradually moves upward to display the entire effect image. A case is shown in which an increase animation for deleting and displaying the entire prefetch hold icon PI_P is executed.

  FIG. 10C is a diagram showing an example of an increase animation of the normal hold icon PI_D (PI_D1, PI_D2, PI_D3). When the hold of the normal hold icon PI_D also increases, an increase animation of the hold icon whose display mode changes may be executed. In this example, a circular normal hold icon PI appears from below the decorative symbol display device 208, and after the whole is displayed, an effect image is displayed in the background, and an increase animation of the hold icon that returns to the original circular image is executed. ing. In addition, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the first elapsed time notification image) is displayed by a part of the normal hold icon PI_D during the increase animation of the normal hold icon PI_D (for example, at the timing of displaying the effect image). (Decrease display of TG1) may be covered, and in that case, the area of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the decrease display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) covered by the normal hold icon PI_D changes. It may be a thing.

Alternatively, when the variation icon CI is displayed, an increase animation of the variation icon CI may be executed, whereby the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the decrease display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) The area covered by the change icon CI may be changed.
<Example B-2 of operation means image display>

  FIG. 355 is a diagram showing operation means image display of Example B-2 in time series. (A) in the figure is a display example of the decorative symbol display device 208, and (b) and (c) in the figure are examples of animation display of the hold icon PI.

  In this embodiment, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or a decrease display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is covered by the standby animation of the prefetch hold icon PI_P, and prefetching is performed as time passes. The area of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) covered with the hold icon PI_P changes.

  That is, in FIG. 9A, the standby animation of the prefetch hold icon PI_P is executed in the upper, middle, and lower diagrams, and the prefetch hold icon PI_P and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 overlap each other. However, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or a decrease display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is covered with the prefetch hold icon PI_P displayed in a display mode that differs depending on each timing. At the same time, the covered area changes. The rest is the same as in Example B-1, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 7B is a diagram showing an example of a standby animation of the prefetch hold icon PI_P in FIG. In this example, the character “Hani”, which is the prefetch hold icon PI_P, rotates while walking and executes an animation that changes from a substantially front direction to a back direction (repeating this). In the example shown in FIG. 11A, the first to third display modes from the left of the character “Hani” in FIG. 10B are displayed, and the first elapsed time notification image is displayed according to the difference in the display mode. The area overlapping with TG1 is different.

  FIG. 10C is a diagram showing an example of an increase animation of the normal hold icon PI_D (PI_D1, PI_D2, PI_D3). Even in this embodiment, the normal hold icon PI_D may execute an increase animation of the hold icon when the hold increases. In this example, the circular normal hold icon PI is gradually deformed to become a vertically long ellipse, and again. Returning to the original circular image (repeating this) is performing an increase animation of the hold icon. Further, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the decrease display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) may be covered by a part of the normal hold icon PI_D during the increase animation of the normal hold icon PI_D. In this case, the area of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) covered with the normal hold icon PI_D may be changed.

Alternatively, when displaying the variation icon CI, a standby animation of the variation icon CI may be executed, whereby the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the first elapsed time notification image covered by the variation icon CI). The area of (decrease display of TG1) may be changed.
<Example B-3 of operation means image display>

  FIG. 356 is a diagram showing operation means image display of Example B-3 in time series. (A) in the figure is a display example of the decorative symbol display device 208, and (b) and (c) in the figure are examples of animation display of the hold icon PI.

  In the present embodiment, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is covered by the moving animation of the prefetch hold icon PI_P, and prefetching is performed as time passes. The area of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) covered with the hold icon PI_P changes.

  That is, the timing shown in the upper diagram of FIG. 6A is a state in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The variation icon CI of the variation, the three normal hold icons PI_D (PI_D1, PI_D2, PI_D3), and 1 Two prefetch hold icons PI_P are displayed.

  The timing shown in the middle diagram of FIG. 5A shows a state in which one hold is consumed and the next variable game (decorative display of decorative symbols) is started. At this timing, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are displayed in front of the decorative symbol variation display, and the variation icon CI displayed in the upper diagram of FIG. , A decreasing (erasing) animation moving downward in the fluctuation icon display area 702 is executed, and the digested first normal hold icon PI_D1 moves to the change icon display area 702 and the second normal hold icon PI_D2 A moving animation (digestion animation) in which the third normal hold icon PI_D3 and the prefetch hold icon PI_P move to the left by one is executed.

  The first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or a reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is partially covered by a moving animation of the prefetch hold icon PI_P.

  The timing shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 6A shows a state where the movement animation of the hold icon is completed. In the change icon display area 702, the change icon CI indicating the change is displayed, and in the hold display area 700, 2 is displayed. Two normal hold icons PI_D1 and PI_D2 and a prefetch hold icon PI_P are displayed (each performing a standby animation).

  A part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or a reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is covered with a prefetch hold icon PI_P having a display mode different from the middle diagram of FIG. The covered area has changed.

  FIG. 5B is a diagram showing an example of a moving animation of the prefetch hold icon PI_P in FIG. In this example, the character “Hani”, which is the prefetch hold icon PI_P, rotates while walking, and the case of executing an animation that changes from substantially front direction to substantially horizontal direction (repeating this) is shown.

  FIG. 6C is a diagram showing an example of a movement (digestion) animation of the normal hold icon PI_D. In this example, the normal hold icon PI_D changes (deletes) the normal hold icon corresponding to the digested hold to a variable icon when the hold is consumed, as shown in FIG. Executes a moving animation that moves the display position of other held icons. In this example, the circular normal hold icon PI is gradually deformed to become a vertically long ellipse, and a moving animation is performed in which the display position is moved while returning to the original circular image (repeating this).

  Note that the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the decrease display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) may be covered by a part of the normal hold icon PI_D during the increase animation of the normal hold icon PI_D. In this case, the area of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) covered with the normal hold icon PI_D may be changed.

  Alternatively, the standby animation of the variation icon CI may be executed at the timing shown in the upper diagram of FIG. 10A, and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the first elapsed time notification image covered by the standby animation). The area of (decrease display of TG1) may be changed.

  Alternatively, the area of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the decrease display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) covered by the decrease (erase) animation of the variation icon CI at the timing shown in the middle diagram of FIG. May change.

  <Other Embodiments (Embodiments in which at least a part of the elapsed time notification display is covered with a hold display, and the display position of the hold display changes with the number of holds)>

  Next, a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) according to another embodiment of the present invention (an embodiment in which at least a part of the elapsed time notification display is covered with a hold display, and the display position is changed by changing the number of holds in the hold display). A ball game machine such as a slot machine or a spinning game machine such as a slot machine will be described in detail. Note that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 357 to 359 are used only in the description of the present embodiment in principle, and even in the case where the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the description of the present embodiment is not illustrated. Priority is given to the code | symbol shown to 357-359. On the other hand, in the following description, about the code | symbol which is not shown by FIGS. 357-359, the same code | symbol is used as the same component as said embodiment. In addition, when there are drawings showing the same timing in a plurality of drawings, overlapping description may be omitted. In addition, the number of the example of this embodiment is used only for the description of this embodiment in principle, but each example of this embodiment and each example of other embodiments are applied in combination with each other. Can do.

  In this embodiment, another example of the operation unit image display for performing display related to the operation of the operation unit will be described.

FIG. 357 is a diagram showing an overview of the operation means image display of the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, in the vicinity of the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 and the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 Is displayed, and the hold icon PI is displayed at, for example, the lower end in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the operation means image display of the present embodiment, at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with at least a part of the hold icon PI, and the change in the display number of the hold icon PI (the display number of the hold icon PI). The area covered with the first elapsed time notification image TG1 changes according to the increase / decrease), and this display example will be described in detail below.
<Example C-1 of operation means image display>

  FIG. 358 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of Example C-1 in time series, and here, the case of the priority change machine of FIG. 2 is shown as an example.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6A, the three normal hold icons PI_D11, PI_D12, and PI_D13 of FIG. 1 and the prefetch hold icon PI_P are displayed in the hold display area 700, and the change icon CI is displayed in the change icon display area 702. Has been. Then, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (meter scale (filled portion) of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is covered with the variation icon CI at the left end, and the prefetch hold icon PI_P near the right end. It is covered so that it is difficult or impossible for the player to see. On the other hand, in the vicinity of the central portion, the normal hold icons PI_D11, PI_D12, and PI_D13 are not covered and are visible to the player.

  After the timing shown in FIG. 5A, when one game ball wins the second special figure starting port 232 (electricity Chu) as shown in FIG. To increase.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C shows a state in which the normal hold icon PI_D21 of the special figure 2 is displayed in the hold number display area 700 when the number of the hold of the special figure 2 is increased by one.

  This embodiment is a priority variation machine of special figure 2, and when special figure 2 (priority side) hold increases, the first hold to be digested next becomes the special figure 2 hold, The normal hold icon PI_D21 of FIG. 2 (priority side) is displayed at the left end of the hold display area 700 (next to the right of the variable icon display area 702). Along with this, a save animation that saves the normal hold icons PI_D11, PI_D12, PI_D13 and the prefetch hold icon PI_P in FIG. 1 (non-priority side) to the right in this example is executed.

  As a result, the prefetch hold icon PI_P moves to the right by one hold icon and overlaps the right end portion of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 as compared with the case of FIG. The area where one elapsed time notification image TG1 overlaps changes. That is, in FIG. 10A, the entire width of the prefetch hold icon PI_P overlaps the first elapsed time notification image TG1, but in FIG. 10C, approximately 1 of the entire width of the prefetch hold icon PI_P. The area of / 2 overlaps with the first elapsed time notification image TG1. As described above, in the present embodiment, the area where the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the hold icon PI (they overlap each other) is changed (the area is reduced here) due to the increase of the hold icon PI. .

  In addition, the right end portion of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is visible to the player in FIG. 5A, but is not visible or difficult for the player in FIG. .

  (D) to (f) in FIG. 6 show the same timing as the timings shown in (a) to (c) of FIG. It is a display example in the case of winning a prize. The timing shown in FIG. 4D is the same as the timing shown in FIG.

  After the timing shown in FIG. 4D, when two game balls are won in the second special figure starting port 232 (electrical chew) as shown in FIG. To increase.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6F shows a state in which the normal hold icons PI_D21 and PI_D22 in FIG. 2 are displayed.

  When the hold of the special figure 2 (priority side) increases and the normal hold icons PI_D21 and PI_D22 of the special figure 2 (priority side) are displayed at the left end of the hold display area 700 (next to the right of the variable icon display area 702), For the normal hold icons PI_D11, PI_D12, and PI_D13 and the prefetch hold icon PI_P in FIG. 1 (non-priority side), a save animation for saving to the right side is executed in this example.

  As a result, the prefetch hold icon PI_P moves to the right by two hold icons as compared with the case of FIG. 4D, and the area where the prefetch hold icon PI_P and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 overlap changes. . That is, in FIG. 6D, the entire width of the prefetch hold icon PI_P overlaps the first elapsed time notification image TG1, but in FIG. 5F, the prefetch hold icon PI_P has the first elapsed time. The notification image TG1 is not overlapped, and there is no region where both overlap (the area where both overlap) is reduced.

  Further, the vicinity of the right end portion of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is not visible or difficult to be seen by the player in FIG. 4D, but is visible to the player in FIG. Yes.

  In this way, various effects can be made and it is possible to make the player pay attention to the first elapsed time notification image TG1.

  In the figure, the case where the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (meter scale) is entirely filled is illustrated, but when the first elapsed time notification image TG1 starts to decrease, The decrease display (filled portion) may be covered with the prefetch hold icon PI_P as time passes, or may be covered by the prefetch hold icon PI_P and become visible to the player. In addition, even when the decrease display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the prefetch hold icon PI_P, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the first one) is increased or decreased depending on the increase or decrease in the display number (hold number) of the hold icon PI. The area covered with the elapsed time notification image TG1 is changed. This is the same in each example of the present embodiment.

Further, in this embodiment, the case where the hold icon of FIG. 1 and the hold icon of FIG. 2 are displayed in one hold display area 700 has been described as an example, but the hold icon of FIG. 1 and the hold of FIG. The icons may be displayed in different hold display areas.
<Example C-2 of operation means image display>

  FIG. 359 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of Example C-2 in time series, and here also shows the case of the priority change machine of FIG. 2 as an example.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6A, only the prefetch hold icon PI_P of FIG. 1 is displayed in the hold display area 700, and the change icon CI is displayed in the change icon display area 702. Then, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (meter scale (filled portion) of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is not covered by the change icon CI and the prefetch hold icon PI_P, and all of them are given to the player. Visible.

  After the timing shown in FIG. 6A, when one game ball wins the second special figure starting port 232 (electricity Chu) as shown in FIG. 5B, the special figure 2 (priority side) is put on hold. The number increases by one.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 5C, when the number of holds in FIG. 2 increases by one, the normal hold icon PI_D21 in FIG. 2 is displayed at the left end portion of the number-of-holds display area 700. The prefetch hold icon PI_P on the (priority side) indicates a state in which a save animation for saving on the right side is executed in this example.

  As a result, the prefetch hold icon PI_P moves to the right by one hold icon as compared with the case of FIG. 9A, and overlaps with the vicinity of the left end of the first elapsed time notification image TG1. That is, the area where the prefetch hold icon PI_P and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 overlap changes (in this case, increases).

  Further, the vicinity of the left end portion of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is visible to the player in FIG. 10A, but is not visible or difficult to view by the player in FIG. Yes.

  Thus, the area where the hold icon PI overlaps with the first elapsed time notification image TG1 may increase as the number of holds increases.

  FIG. 4D shows the timing after the timing shown in FIG. 2C. The change icon CI, the two normal hold icons PI_D11 and PI_D12 of FIG. 1, and the prefetch hold icon PI_P of FIG. It shows a state where and are displayed. In this state, the fluctuation icon CI and the two normal hold icons PI_D11 and PI_D12 do not overlap with the first elapsed time notification image TG1, but the prefetch hold icon PI_P overlaps with the first elapsed time notification image TG1. Yes.

  After the timing shown in FIG. 4D, when one game ball wins the second special figure starting port 232 (electrical chew) as shown in FIG. To increase.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6F shows a state in which the normal hold icon PI_D21 of FIG. 2 is displayed.

  When the special figure 2 (priority side) hold increases and the normal hold icon PI_D21 of the special figure 2 (priority side) is displayed at the left end of the hold display area 700 (next to the right of the variable icon display area 702). In this example, the 1 (non-priority side) normal hold icons PI_D11 and PI_D12 and the prefetch hold icon PI_P are subjected to a save animation for saving to the right side.

  As a result, the prefetch hold icon PI_P moves to the right by two hold icons as compared with the case of FIG. 4D, and the area where the prefetch hold icon PI_P and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 overlap changes. . That is, in FIG. 8D, the prefetch hold icon PI_P overlaps the first elapsed time notification image TG1, but in FIG. 10F, the prefetch hold icon PI_P is the first elapsed time notification image TG1. And there is no overlapping area (the area where they overlap each other is reduced).

  In this way, in the game that continues after the area where the hold icon PI overlaps with the first elapsed time notification image TG1 increases (FIGS. (A) to (c)) as the number of holds increases. As the number of holds increases further, the area where the hold icon PI overlaps with the first elapsed time notification image TG1 may be reduced ((d) to (f) in the figure).

  In addition, for example, when the hold in FIG. 1 is reduced by two from the state of FIG. 359 (d), the prefetch hold icon PI_P is displayed on the right side of the change icon CI as shown in FIG. 359 (a). Moreover, the area where the prefetch hold icon PI_P overlaps with the first elapsed time notification image TG1 may be reduced as the number of holds decreases. Further, the area where the prefetch hold icon PI_P overlaps with the first elapsed time notification image TG1 may increase as the number of holds decreases.

  As described above, the gaming table (for example, pachinko machine 100) of the present invention has display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, first sub-control unit 400) and operation means (for example, chance button 136, setting). An operation unit 137), wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying at least a first display (for example, a first elapsed time notification image TG1), and the display means includes: A means capable of displaying at least a second display (for example, a hold icon PI), wherein the first display is a display related to the operation means, and the second display is a display related to hold, When the first display is in the second state (for example, the second display overlaps the first display), the first display (for example, the second display Will overlap There is not a state) is a display visibility is at least lower than it is the amusement machine according to claim.

  According to such a configuration, there may be a case where it is possible to realize a gaming machine having a display characteristic. In addition, various effects can be made and the player can be focused on the first display in some cases.

  The second state may be a state where at least a part of the second display overlaps at least a part of the first display.

  According to such a configuration, various effects can be made, and the player may be focused on the first display.

  The first state may be a state in which the second display does not overlap the first display.

  According to such a configuration, various effects can be made and the visibility of the first display may be improved.

  The first display may be a display that can change the display mode from the start position to the end position as time elapses.

  According to such a configuration, various effects can be made and the player may be allowed to pay attention to the first display.

  The gaming machine may be a pachinko machine or a slot machine, and the display means may be a means capable of displaying at least a plurality of the second displays.

  According to such a configuration, various effects can be achieved, and the player's interest can be enhanced and the player can be focused on the first display.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, pachinko machine 100) of the present invention includes display means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first sub-control unit 400) and operation means (for example, chance button 136, setting operation unit 137). The display means is means capable of displaying at least a first display (for example, a first elapsed time notification image TG1), and the display means is a second display. (For example, the hold icon PI) can be displayed at least, the first display is a display related to the operation means, the second display is a display related to the hold, and the second display The display is a display that can be animated, and the first display is a second state (for example, a state where the second display overlaps the first display). A state (for example, , Visibility than state) in which the second display do not overlap the first display is at least lower display, it is the amusement machine according to claim.

  According to such a configuration, there may be a case where it is possible to realize a gaming machine having a display characteristic. In addition, various effects can be made and the player can be focused on the first display in some cases. In addition, the visibility of the first display may be changed by the animation of the second display, and the player may be focused on the first display.

  The second state may be a state where at least a part of the second display overlaps at least a part of the first display.

  According to such a configuration, various effects can be made, and the player may be focused on the first display.

  The first state may be a state in which the second display does not overlap the first display.

  According to such a configuration, various effects can be made and the visibility of the first display may be improved.

  The first display may be a display that can change the display mode from the start position to the end position as time elapses.

  According to such a configuration, various effects can be made and the player may be allowed to pay attention to the first display.

  Further, the display means may be one in which the game table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine and is a means capable of displaying at least a plurality of the second displays.

  According to such a configuration, various effects can be achieved, and the player's interest can be enhanced and the player can be focused on the first display.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, pachinko machine 100) of the present invention includes display means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first sub-control unit 400) and operation means (for example, chance button 136, setting operation unit 137). The display means is means capable of displaying at least a first display (for example, a first elapsed time notification image TG1), and the display means is a second display. (For example, the hold icon PI) can be displayed at least, the first display is a display related to the operation means, the second display is a display related to the hold, and the second display The display is a display that can move the display position when there is a change in the number of holds, and the first display is in the second state (for example, the second display in the first display). Are overlapping In this case, the gaming machine is characterized in that the display is at least lower in visibility than the first state (for example, the state where the second display does not overlap the first display). .

  According to such a configuration, there may be a case where it is possible to realize a gaming machine having a display characteristic. In addition, various effects can be made and the player can be focused on the first display in some cases. Further, there are cases where the visibility of the first display is changed by moving the display position of the second display, and the player can be noticed by the first display.

  The second state may be a state where at least a part of the second display overlaps at least a part of the first display.

  According to such a configuration, various effects can be made, and the player may be focused on the first display.

  The first state may be a state in which the second display does not overlap the first display.

  According to such a configuration, various effects can be made and the visibility of the first display may be improved.

  The first display may be a display that can change the display mode from the start position to the end position as time elapses.

  According to such a configuration, various effects can be made and the player may be allowed to pay attention to the first display.

  Further, the display means may be one in which the game table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine and is a means capable of displaying at least a plurality of the second displays.

  According to such a configuration, various effects can be achieved, and the player's interest can be enhanced and the player can be focused on the first display.

  As described above, each example of the above-described three embodiments can be combined with another example for each configuration in the example. In the three embodiments immediately above, the hold display includes a default hold display (for example, a normal hold icon) and a prefetch hold display (for example, a prefetch hold icon).

  In addition, the hold display includes a change display (for example, a change icon) corresponding to the special figure change game.

  Further, the “display having at least lower visibility than the first state” indicates “a display in which at least a part of the second display overlaps at least a part of the first display”. Is.

  Further, a part of the prefetch hold display is a display that overlaps a part of the first elapsed time notification image in the third case, and the default hold display is a first elapsed time in the third case. The display does not overlap the notification image, and the third case may be a case where the display unit can display the default hold display and the prefetch hold display at the same time.

  Further, as the first display, in addition to the first elapsed time notification image, a second, third,... Elapsed time notification image may be displayed. It may overlap.

  Further, the default hold display may be a display that does not overlap the first elapsed time notification image, or may be a display that overlaps.

  Further, the display position of the first elapsed time notification image may be any of two or more positions, and a part of the hold display is a part of the first elapsed time notification image in the fourth case. In the fifth case, the hold display is a display that does not overlap the first elapsed time notification image, and the fourth case is the display position of the first elapsed time notification image. Is the first position, and the fifth case may be a case where the display position of the first elapsed time notification image is the second position.

  Further, a part of the hold display may be a display that overlaps a part including the start position of the first elapsed time notification image.

  Further, a part of the hold display may be a display that overlaps a part including the end position of the first elapsed time notification image.

  Moreover, a part of the hold display may be a display that overlaps a part including a position between the start position and the end position of the first elapsed time notification image.

  Further, a part of the hold display may be a display that overlaps a part of the first operation means image.

  In addition, the display means can display the hold animation by the hold display, and the display means has a part of the hold display in the case of the first time of the hold animation than in the case of the second time of the hold animation. A region that overlaps a part of the first elapsed time notification image may be large.

  Further, at least one of the pending animations may be a standby animation. Further, at least one of the pending animations may be an increase animation. Further, at least one of the pending animations may be a reduction animation. Further, at least one of the pending animations may be a moving animation.

  Further, the second display may be a display that may not display an animation. The second display may be a display in which at least one of a standby animation, an increase animation, a decrease animation, and a movement animation is performed and at least one other than the one is not performed. Further, the second display may be a display that performs an increase animation without performing the standby animation.

  Further, in the period of the hold animation, the overlapping area may increase with time, or the overlapping area may decrease with time.

  In addition, any one or more of the standby animation, the increase animation, the decrease animation, and the movement animation may overlap, or any one or more may not overlap.

  Further, the display means has a size of a region where a part of the hold display overlaps a part of the first elapsed time notification image in the case of the first hold number than in the case of the second hold number. It may be large.

  Further, the first hold number may be smaller or larger than the second hold number.

  Further, the display means may be capable of executing display according to a change in the number of holds during the display period of the first elapsed time notification image.

  Further, the display means may be capable of executing display corresponding to the increase in the holding in FIG. 2 during the display period of the first elapsed time notification image.

  Moreover, the size of the overlapping area may be different between the case where the holding in FIG.

  Further, only a specific display in the hold animation (increase animation, standby animation, change animation, movement animation, decrease animation) may overlap.

  In addition, the hold animation (increasing animation, standby animation, change animation, moving animation, decreasing animation) is composed of two or more plural displays, and only at least one of the plural displays overlaps. Also good.

  In addition, only the beginning of the multiple displays (pending animation), only the end, only one or more than the first, only one or more other than the last, only one or more other than the first and last overlap You may do.

  Further, a button icon may be displayed as the hold icon. The button icon may display the first elapsed time notification image together.

  Further, another hold icon may overlap the first elapsed time notification image of the button icon.

  Further, the movement animation from the case where the hold is 1 to the case where the hold is 0 may or may not overlap the first elapsed time notification image.

  In addition, the movement animation from the case where the hold is 2 to the case where the hold is 1 may or may not overlap the first elapsed time notification image.

  Moreover, the movement animation from the case where the hold is 3 to the case where the hold is 2 may or may not overlap the first elapsed time notification image.

  In addition, the movement animation from the case where the hold is 4 to the case where the hold is 3 may or may not overlap the first elapsed time notification image.

  Moreover, the movement animation from the case where the hold is 5 to the case where the hold is 4 may or may not overlap the first elapsed time notification image.

  Further, the increase animation from the case where the hold is 1 to the case where the hold is 2 may or may not overlap the first elapsed time notification image.

  In addition, the movement animation from the case where the hold is 2 to the case where the hold is 3 may or may not overlap the first elapsed time notification image.

  Moreover, the movement animation from the case where the hold is 3 to the case where the hold is 4 may or may not overlap the first elapsed time notification image.

Moreover, the movement animation from the case where the hold is 4 to the case where the hold is 5 may or may not overlap the first elapsed time notification image.
The first elapsed time notification image may display two or more.

  In addition, the display means is not limited to the display of a decrease in the first elapsed time notification image (display of an image in which the meter (filled portion) gradually decreases (becomes smaller)), but an increase display of the first elapsed time notification image ( The display may be such that the meter (filled portion) gradually increases (becomes larger).

  Further, the hold icon may or may not overlap at least one of the first elapsed time notification image and the second elapsed time notification image.

  Further, the hold icon overlaps the first elapsed time notification image, and the hold icon does not need to overlap the second elapsed time notification image.

  In addition, the first hold icon may overlap the first elapsed time notification image, and the second hold icon may overlap the second elapsed time notification image.

  In addition, the plurality of hold icons can be displayed simultaneously with a movement animation, and there may be a hold icon that overlaps the first elapsed time notification image before and after the movement animation and a hold icon that does not overlap.

  Further, the hold icon may be displayed so as to overlap after the first elapsed time notification image is displayed, or the first elapsed time notification image may be overlapped after the hold icon is displayed. It may be displayed.

In addition, the hold animation may overlap at least one of the start position, the end position, and the intermediate position of the first elapsed time notification image, or may not overlap.
In addition, the hold animation may be performed simultaneously for two or more holds.

  In addition, when two or more game balls are won at the start opening substantially simultaneously, the hold increase animation may be displayed for a plurality of hold icons at the same time, or only the hold increase animation may be displayed for the game balls won later. Good.

  In addition, the second display may be a display that may not change the display position when there is a change in the number of holds. Further, when the number of holdings of the special figure 2 increases while the second display of the special figure 2 is being displayed, the display position of the second display of the special figure 2 being displayed may not be changed.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, pachinko machine 100) of the present invention has an operation means (for example, a chance button 136, a setting operation unit 137) provided at least at a position where the player can operate, and a plurality of types of displays. A game table including at least executable display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first sub-control unit 400), wherein at least one of the plurality of types of display is a first type And at least one of the plurality of types of display is a second type of display, the first type of display is a display relating to the operating means, and the first type of display The display is configured to be able to be displayed when an operation of the operation means is accepted, and the first type of display is the first display (for example, the first operation means image BG1, the second operation). Means image BG ), And the first type display is a display including at least a second display (for example, elapsed time notification images TG1, TG2, TG1-1.TG1-2), and the second display Is a display whose mode can be changed from the start position to the end position over time, and the second type of display is a third display (for example, as shown in FIG. 69). The second type of display is an effect display, and the third display is displayed preferentially over the first display. And the third display is displayed with priority over the second display, and the third display is prioritized over the second display. The starting position of the display is not displayed, One type of display is displayed at a position that partially overlaps the second type of display, and the second type of display is performed before the display of the first type. It is a game stand characterized by being capable of being displayed on the screen.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to further prompt the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where the display mode hidden by the player can be focused and concentrated on the game. In addition, it may be difficult to see the notification of the reception period, and the player may be further urged to operate the gaming means. In some cases, the player can focus more on the display mode hidden by the player and concentrate on the game. In addition, it may be possible to prevent a decrease in game motivation due to the player overlooking the previously displayed effect display (second type display (variable icon CI)). In addition, a third display (a variation icon) than the first display (a part of the first operation means image BG1 (an image imitating the chance button)) and the second display (a part of the elapsed time notification image TG1). By displaying preferentially (a part of CI), it is difficult for the player to visually recognize that it is the operation acceptance period of the operation means, and in particular, the second display start position (when operation acceptance is started) Since the player cannot visually recognize the display means, the player can watch the display means carefully, and can concentrate on the game, can judge whether or not the operation is necessary, and can improve the interest of the game. is there.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying at least one of the first type display and the second type display.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to further prompt the player to operate the operation means.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, pachinko machine 100) of the present invention has an operation means (for example, a chance button 136 and a setting operation unit 137) provided at least at a position where the player can operate, and a plurality of types of displays. A game table including at least executable display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first sub-control unit 400), wherein at least one of the plurality of types of display is a first type And at least one of the plurality of types of display is a second type of display, the first type of display is a display relating to the operating means, and the first type of display The display is configured so that it can be displayed at least when an operation of the operation means is accepted, and the first type of display is the first display (for example, the first operation means image BG1, the second display). Operation of The first type of display is a display including at least a second display (eg, elapsed time notification images TG1, TG2, TG1-1.TG1-2), The second display is a display that can change the display mode from the start position to the end position as time passes, and the second type of display is a third display (for example, 69, at least a part of the variation icon CI shown in FIG. 69, the second type of display is an effect display, and the third display is preferentially displayed over the first display. The third display is displayed with priority over the second display, and the start position of the second display is higher than the second display. The third display is displayed preferentially, so It is more difficult for the player to see the display than when the display is not displayed, and the change in the display mode of the second display causes the third display to be displayed with priority over the second display. Thus, it is more difficult for the player to see than the third display, and the first type of display is displayed at a position partially overlapping with the second type of display. The gaming machine is characterized in that the second type of display can be displayed at least on the display means prior to the first type of display.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to further prompt the player to operate the operation means. When the second display (a part of the elapsed time notification image TG1) is used to notify the remaining time of the reception period of the operation means with a display that decreases from the start position, the start position of the second display is set to the second display. By displaying the third display (effect display) preferentially over the display of the player, it becomes more difficult for the player to see than when the third display is not displayed, and from the start position of the second display By changing the display mode toward the end position, the third display is displayed with priority over the second display, so that it is more difficult for the player to see than the third display. In some cases, it may be difficult for a player to visually recognize that the operation period of the operation means is being accepted, and the player may be further encouraged to operate the game means. In some cases, the player can focus more on the display mode hidden by the player and concentrate on the game. Further, in order to make it difficult to visually recognize the display mode at the start position of the second display (at the start of accepting the operation) and the change in the display mode from the start position to the end position of the second display. In some cases, the player can watch the display means carefully and concentrate on the game, can judge whether the operation is necessary, and can improve the interest of the game.

  The display means may be capable of displaying at least one of the first type display and the second type display.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to further prompt the player to operate the operation means.

  Further, the first display may include a display simulating the operation means.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to further prompt the player to operate the operation means. In some cases, the player can focus more on the display mode hidden by the player and concentrate on the game.

  Further, the effect display may include at least a jackpot notice.

  With such a configuration, there are cases where various displays can be performed. Further, there are cases where the player can be made to pay more attention to the reception period of the operation means.

  In addition, the display unit may not display at least the first type display when the reception of the operation of the operation unit is completed.

By adopting such a configuration, when the acceptance period ends, the first display may be hidden to prevent confusion and misunderstanding of the player that the acceptance period continues. is there. In addition, if the first display is continued even after the end of the reception period (when the judgment of necessity of operation is continued), the player has no option of not operating the operation means, and the game is more interesting. Although there is a possibility of lowering, there are cases where the player's options in the game can be increased by hiding the first display.
[Sixth Embodiment]

  Hereinafter, a gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as pachinko machine 100, a spinning game machine such as a slot machine, or an enclosed game machine) according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. . The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has the same configuration as the pachinko machine 100 described with reference to FIGS. 40 to 55 in the first embodiment, for example. Omitted. Note that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 360 to 404 are used only for the description of the sixth embodiment in principle, and even if the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the present embodiment. In the explanation of Fig. 3, priority is given to the reference numerals shown in Figs.

  First, a configuration that is used in common among the configurations illustrated in the drawings used in the following embodiments will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 360 (a) and 360 (g). FIG. 360 (a) shows a decorative symbol display device 208, a special figure 1 display device 212, a special figure 2 display device 214, and a universal map display device that constitute a part of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 210, special figure 1 holding lamp 218, special figure 2 holding lamp 220, and general figure holding lamp 216 are schematically shown. The special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold lamp 216 are shown below the decorative symbol display device 208. The special figure 2 display device 214 is shown on the right side of the special figure 1 display device 212, and the universal figure display device 210 is shown on the right side of the special figure 2 display device 214. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is shown on the upper side of the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 is shown on the upper side of the special figure 2 display device 214, and the universal figure hold lamp 216 is shown on the universal map display device 210. Shown on the top. The special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the universal map display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold lamp 216 are shown in white. The illuminated portion is shown in black. In addition, since the maximum number of the usual figure hold in this embodiment can be accumulated, four LEDs of the usual figure hold lamp 216 are provided.

  In FIG. 360 (a), symbol display areas 208a to 208c for performing decorative display variation display and stop display are assigned to the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. When the predetermined display is executed by enlarging the effect display area 208d, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and displayed in an area other than the center of the image display area, for example, the lower right corner as necessary. In some cases.

  A fourth symbol display area is provided on the upper right side in the effect display area 208d. The upper side in the fourth symbol display area is the fourth symbol display area t3 for ordinary symbols, the middle side is the fourth symbol display area t1 for special symbols 1, and the lower side is the fourth symbol display region t2 for special symbols 2. It is. When the special figure 1 variable game is not in operation, an image representing “◯” as the special figure 1 fourth symbol is displayed in the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area t1. While the special figure 2 variable game is not in operation, an image representing “Δ” is displayed in the special symbol 2 fourth symbol display area t2 as the special symbol 2 fourth symbol. While the usual figure variable game is not in operation, an image representing “◇” is displayed in the fourth figure display area t3 for ordinary figures as the fourth figure of the ordinary figure. Further, during the execution of the special figure variable game or the normal figure variable game, a white background image is displayed as the fourth symbol in each of the fourth symbol display areas t1 to t3.

  A region surrounded by a square frame at the lower center of the effect display region 208d is a variation icon display region C in which variation icons can be displayed. The variation icon is an icon displayed in the variation icon display area C when the hold is consumed and the special figure variation game is started. By changing the display mode of the variation icon in the variation icon display area C, whether or not the special figure variation game is successful can be notified with a predetermined reliability (the variation notice). The frame image on the outer periphery of the variation icon display area C may be displayed only when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the variation icon is not displayed in the variation icon display area C). It may be displayed constantly or may not be displayed at all times.

  A horizontally long rectangular figure 1 holding icon display area A is provided adjacent to the change icon display area C on the lower left side in the effect display area 208d. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area A, a number of special figure 1 hold icons a1, a2, etc. corresponding to the number of holds are displayed. Further, according to the display mode of the special figure 1 hold icon, whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable game related to the hold is appropriate can be notified (pre-reading notice) with a predetermined reliability. In this example, a white circular hold icon is displayed as the display mode with the lowest reliability. In this embodiment, a maximum of four special figure 1 hold icons can be displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area A. A plurality of special figure 1 hold icons are arranged and displayed in order from right to left in the special figure 1 hold icon display area as the holding order decreases. In this example, only the special figure 1 hold icon display area is displayed, but the special figure 2 hold icon display area may be displayed together. In that case, for example, a vertically long rectangular special figure 2 reserved icon display area B is provided adjacent to the right side surface of the effect display area 208d. The special figure 2 hold icon display area B is not displayed when there is no special figure 2 hold, and is displayed only when the special figure 2 hold is accumulated, but may be always displayed. Good.

  In addition, the state in which all segments are represented in white in the special figure 1 display device 212 indicates that the special figure 1 variable display is being performed (see FIG. 360 (b)). The same applies to the special figure 2 display device 214 and the universal figure display device 210. In addition, the variation display of each decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c during execution of the special symbol variable game is represented by a downward arrow (see FIG. 360 (f)).

  FIG. 360 (g) shows a state where a button effect is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the display means. The display of the button effect includes a display related to the chance button 136 as the first type of display. Among the displays related to the chance button 136, there is a button display. In the button display, an operation request image having a display form imitating the chance button 136 (hereinafter may be referred to as “button image”) and a button operation acceptance valid period (hereinafter referred to as “operation valid period”). At least one of an effective period image indicating the remainder of (there is) and a display prompting other button operations is included. In addition, the display of the button effect can include an effect display such as a notice notice executed in conjunction with the button display as the second display. The display of the button effect is performed by any one of still image display and animation display or a combination of them.

The special figure variable game shown in each example of the present embodiment is executed by the same control operation as described in the first embodiment. In the embodiment of the present embodiment, the effects performed in the special figure variable game will be specifically described, and the control operation will be referred to only when the necessity arises.
Example 1

  A special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 360 to 364. First, an example of a flow of a series of effects when the result of the special figure variable game is a big hit will be described with reference to FIGS. 360 and 361. 360 (a) to 361 (h) show the special figure variable games in this order in this order. In the figure showing the special figure variation game in time series, the passage of time between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures.

  FIG. 360 (a) shows a state in which the variable games of FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 are not operating, and the normal game is not operating. The special figure 1 display device 212 stops displaying the special figure “Special figure F”. The special figure 2 display unit 214 stops and displays the special symbol “special figure d”. The general-purpose display device 210 stops and displays the symbol “General-purpose B”. Each of the fourth symbol display areas t1 to t3 in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the fourth symbol indicating that the game is inactive. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed as a combination of ornamental symbols, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the previous special-figure variable game is wrong has been missed. Yes.

  The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 reports that there are two special figure 1 holds. The special figure 2 hold lamp 220 notifies that there is no special figure 2 hold. A general hold lamp 216 informs that there is no general hold.

  In the special figure 1 hold icon display area A, two special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 are displayed in a white circular display mode.

  360 (b) to (f) show a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started. In this embodiment, the special figure 1 variable game is started in the same manner as the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and the special figure 1 display device 212 starts the variable display. The fourth symbol in the region t1 starts to display a variation (see FIG. 360 (b)), and then a special animation 1 holding icon reduction animation is displayed (see FIGS. 360 (c) to (e)). Then, the decorative symbol variation display is started (see FIG. 360 (f)). Note that the order of the start time of these operations may be changed.

  In the display of the reduced animation of the special figure 1 hold icon, the special figure 1 hold icons that are displayed start to move rightward all at once (see FIG. 360 (c)), and the special figure 1 with the highest hold order is displayed. The hold icon a1 goes over the special figure 1 hold icon display area A and enters the variable icon display area C, and the remaining hold icons move to the right one position from the original position to raise the hold rank by one respectively. (See FIGS. 360 (c) to (e)). An icon image that has entered the variation icon display area C is referred to as a variation icon.

  FIG. 360 (g) shows a state in which the display of the button effect is started in the effect display area 208d. A horizontally long button effect area is secured in the center of the effect display area 208d, a character image is displayed in the left quarter of the button effect area, and a button image is displayed in the remaining three quarters. And button display for displaying a valid period image. The validity period image is displayed at the bottom of the button image. The display priority of the button effect area is set higher than the display priority of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. For this reason, the symbol variation display of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c on the rear side of the button effect area is hidden by the image of the button effect area and cannot be visually recognized. By looking at the image shown in FIG. 360 (g), the player knows that the button effect has started. At this stage, the countdown of the operation valid period has not started, and the button operation cannot be accepted. Even if 136 is pressed, the pressing operation is not accepted.

  FIG. 360 (h) shows a button operation acceptance permission state after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the button display shown in FIG. 360 (g) was started. Although the display in the button effect area has not changed, since the countdown of the operation valid period has started at this stage, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the pressing operation is accepted.

  FIG. 360 (i) shows a state where the button operation acceptance effective period has slightly passed and the bar-shaped portion of the display of the effective period image is somewhat shortened in the right direction.

  FIG. 360 (j) illustrates a button effect display performed when the player presses the chance button 136 and the press is accepted. The button image and the effective period image are erased, and the image of the character string “Chance is!” Is displayed in the left quarter of the button effect area. The display of the character string image may be a notice of the result of the special figure variation game. Further, it may be a notice of the possibility of developing into SP (super) reach production. In this example, the display of the button effect ends with the display of the character string image.

  FIG. 360 (k) shows a state in which the button effect area has disappeared and the decorative symbol variation display in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c is visible.

  In FIG. 360 (l), “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped in a swinging fluctuation state in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and the decorative symbol fluctuation display is continued in the middle symbol display area 208b. The state where the reach production is started is shown.

  FIG. 360 (m) shows a state in which the image display of the reach effect gradually changes to the entire white display by the fade-out process. The symbol display areas 208a to 208c are moved to the lower right corner of the image display area, and the decorative symbol variation is reduced and displayed. The special figure 1 hold icon display area A, the special figure 1 hold icon, the fluctuation icon display area C, and the fluctuation icon are not displayed during the SP reach effect shown in FIGS. 360 (m) to 361 (h).

  FIG. 360 (n) to FIG. 361 (a) show a state where an SP reach effect with a scene where two samurai fight is executed. FIGS. 361 (b) to (d) are continuations of the SP reach production, in which an effect that one samurai has won has been made, and it is highly probable that the result of the determination of whether or not the change is correct will be a hit. doing. FIG. 361 (d) shows a state in which the combination of decorative symbols is temporarily stopped at “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c displayed in a reduced size.

  FIG. 361 (e) shows a state where the image display of the SP reach effect is gradually changed to a white display by the fade-out process. The fourth symbol display areas t1 to t3 are displayed, but the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are not displayed.

  In FIG. 361 (f), the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are enlarged to the original position in the center of the image display area, and “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed as a combination of the ornamental symbols. Indicates the state.

  FIG. 361 (g) shows a state in which “Special Figure A” of the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212. In the fourth symbol display area t1 for the special figure 1 in the image display area, the fourth graphic indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is not operating is stopped and displayed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” indicating a hit as a combination of ornamental symbols is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 361 (h) shows a state in which a character string image of “probability big hit” is displayed on almost the entire image display area and it is notified that the 15R special big hit has been won.

  361 (f ′) to (h ′) are the same as those in FIG. 360 (l), when the reach effect of “decoration 6” is started in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. In place of the effects of FIGS. 361 (f) to 361 (h), an effect in the case of winning 15R jackpot is illustrated. FIG. 361 (f ′) continues from FIG. 361 (e). In FIG. 361 (f ′), the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are enlarged to the original position in the center of the image display area, and “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6” is temporarily stopped as a combination of the ornamental symbols. It shows the state.

  FIG. 361 (g ′) shows a state in which the “Special Figure B” of the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212. In the image display area, the fourth symbol indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is not operating is stopped and displayed in the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area t1. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6” indicating a winning combination as a combination of ornamental symbols is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 361 (h ′) shows a state in which a “big hit” character string image is displayed on almost the entire image display area, and it is notified that the 15R big hit is won.

  FIGS. 362 (a) to 362 (b) illustrate the continuation of another SP reach production continued from FIG. 361 (a), where one samurai has lost the production, and whether or not the change is appropriate is determined. A notice is given that the result is likely to be out of sync. The special figure 1 hold icon display area A and the special figure 1 hold icon are not displayed during the SP reach production shown in FIGS. 362 (a) to (c). FIG. 362 (b) shows a state in which the combination of decorative symbols is temporarily stopped at “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c displayed in a reduced size.

  FIG. 362 (c) shows a state where the image display of the SP reach effect is gradually changed to a white display by the fade-out process. The fourth symbol display areas t1 to t3 are displayed, but the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are not displayed.

  In FIG. 362 (d), the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are enlarged to the original position in the center of the image display area, and “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is temporarily stopped as a combination of the ornamental symbols. Indicates the state. In this state, the display of the special figure 1 hold icon display area A, the special figure 1 hold icon, the variable icon display area C, and the variable icon is resumed and is displayed until the end of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 362 (h). The

  FIG. 362 (e) shows a state in which the special figure 1 display device 212 stops displaying the special symbol “Special figure F”. In the image display area, the fourth symbol indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is not operating is stopped and displayed in the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area t1. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” indicating a deviation as a combination of ornamental symbols is stopped and displayed.

  FIGS. 362 (f) to (h) show the display of the erasure animation of the variation icon. In this example, after the special figure variable game is finished, the display of the change icon deletion animation is executed while the decorative symbol is stopped. Note that the display of the animation for deleting the variation icon may be executed at another timing. FIG. 362 (f) shows a state in which the fluctuation icon starts to move downward from the fluctuation icon display area C, and the lower third of the circular outline of the fluctuation icon has disappeared outside the image display area. Yes. FIG. 362 (g) shows a state in which the variation icon has moved further downward, and the variation icon has disappeared outside the image display area to such an extent that the upper portion of the circular outline can be visually recognized. FIG. 362 (h) shows a state in which the fluctuation icon has completely disappeared from the fluctuation icon display area C and the display of the fluctuation icon erasing animation has been completed.

  Next, a series of button operation animations (hereinafter also referred to as “button operation animations”) displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 as a display means are displayed using FIGS. 363 and 364. An example of the flow of the button effect and the SP reach effect will be described. FIG. 363 (a) to FIG. 364 (e) show special figure variable games in this order in this order. Further, on the right side of each figure, a chance button 136 as an operation means is shown. The chance button 136 is housed in the circular opening and is urged upward. When the chance button 136 is pressed, the chance button 136 sinks downward, but when the pressing force stops working, it protrudes upward by the urging force and stops at a predetermined position. It has become. In the figure showing the special figure variation game in time series, the passage of time between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures.

  FIG. 363 (a) illustrates the continuation of the SP reach effect continued from FIG. 360 (n). In FIG. 363 (a), the same SP reach effect as in FIG. 360 (o) is executed. In FIG. 363 (b), the same SP reach effect as in FIG. 361 (a) is executed. In the image by the SP reach effect in FIG. 363 (b), the image display area is divided into upper and lower parts by a substantially horizontal boundary line, and the character image of one samurai is displayed in the upper display area, and in the lower display area. The character image of the other samurai is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 363 (b), the button is not displayed immediately before the start of the button operation animation, and the light emitting means (LED) provided in the chance button 136 is turned off.

  FIG. 363 (c) to FIG. 364 (d) show a flow of a series of button effects and SP reach effects by button operation animation displayed following the SP reach effects shown in FIG. 363 (b). FIG. 363 (c) shows a state in which the button image and the effective period image are simultaneously displayed in the fade-in process on the front surface using the image obtained by the SP reach effect as the background image. Note that the button image and the effective period image may not be displayed at the same time, and one image may be displayed before the other image. The chance button 136 may be in a light emitting state even outside the button operation acceptance valid period. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 may be the same as or different from the light emission mode during button operation and / or non-operation during the reception valid period.

  FIG. 363 (d) shows a button display in which a button image and an effective period image are displayed below the button image, and an image of a character string “long press” is displayed above the button image. The button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button is accommodated in the circular opening and protrudes upward by a predetermined distance. The effective period image of this example has a rectangular frame shape that is long horizontally, and initially, the entire period of the effective period is indicated by a bar shape of a predetermined color within the frame shape. For example, the display is gradually shortened to the right. More specifically, the effective period image is a gauge (meter) image, and the display of the gauge image is a display that can suggest the remaining period of the effective operation period by performing an animation in which the length of the gauge is reduced. . The display of the gauge image is a display capable of notifying that the operation valid period ends when the length of the gauge becomes 0 (zero). The button display images related to these button effects have a transmittance of 0 (zero), and are set to a display priority higher than the display priority of the background image that is executing the SP reach effect. For this reason, the image behind the button display image relating to the button effect is hidden and cannot be visually recognized. By looking at the image shown in FIG. 363 (d), the player knows that the button effect has been started. At this stage, since the countdown of the operation valid period has not started, the player cannot enter the button operation. Even if 136 is pressed, the pressing operation is not accepted. The chance button 136 is in a non-light emitting state (shown in white in the drawing).

  FIG. 363 (e) shows a button operation acceptance permission state after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the button effect display shown in FIG. 363 (d). As the first button mode, the chance button 136 has a light emitting state (shown in gray in the drawing) at the outer peripheral portion of the pressing surface. In the button display related to the button effect, the display mode is changed so that the portion corresponding to the periphery around the chance button pressing surface of the button image is in a light emitting state (shown in gray in the drawing). At this stage, since the countdown of the operation valid period has started, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the pressing operation is accepted. In this example, after the light emission mode of the chance button 136 is changed, the display mode of the button image display is changed. However, it may be simultaneous, or the change of the display mode of the button image is better. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 may change later.

  FIG. 363 (f) shows a state where the button operation acceptance effective period has slightly passed and the bar-shaped portion of the display of the effective period image is somewhat shortened in the right direction. The player places his hand so as to cover the pressing surface of the chance button 136 and presses the chance button 136, and the light emission mode of the chance button 136 is the second button mode, and only the outer peripheral portion of the pressing surface when not pressed. Has changed from the state of the first button mode in which light is emitted to the state in which the entire button emits light (shown in black in the drawing).

  When the chance button 136 is pressed, the button operation animation changes the display mode of the button image and performs display to change the display mode of the background image by the SP reach effect. However, immediately after the chance button 136 is pressed, the light emission mode of the chance button 136 only changes, and the display of the button operation animation does not change immediately. In FIG. 363 (f), the display mode is maintained in which only the portion corresponding to the periphery outside the chance button pressing surface of the button image is in the light emitting state. Further, the display mode of the background image by the SP reach effect has not changed. In this example, the display mode of the button image and the background image of the button operation animation is changed after the light emission mode of the chance button 136 is changed. The timing of the change in the light emission mode of the chance button 136 and the change in the display mode of the button image of the button operation animation and the background image may be the same. There may be a change in the light emission mode of the chance button 136 after the start.

  FIG. 363 (g) to FIG. 364 (d) show that the player keeps pressing the chance button 136 in accordance with the request for the “long press” operation (the operation of continuously pressing the chance button 136) in the button effect. The example of a button operation animation in a state is shown. The button image in FIG. 363 (g) is displayed in a display mode in which the entire button emits light from the display mode in which only the outer peripheral portion of the chance button pressing surface emits light, and the light emission luminance gradually increases. ing. Further, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button is pushed down somewhat in the circular opening. In addition, the button operation acceptance valid period has further passed, and the valid period image is displayed in a display mode in which the bar-like portion is further shortened in the right direction. The character string image of “long press” is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  In the background image produced by the SP reach effect in FIG. 363 (g), the horizontal boundary line gradually moves downward and the upper display area gradually expands downward, while the lower display area gradually decreases downward. The display mode is displayed.

  The button image by the button operation animation display in FIGS. 363 (h) to 364 (a) is displayed in a display mode in which the emission luminance of the entire button is the highest luminance (shown in black in the drawing). . The button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button is completely pushed into the circular opening. Further, as the button operation acceptance effective period elapses, the effective period image is displayed in a display mode in which the bar-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction. The character string image of “long press” is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  In the background image of the SP reach effect by displaying the button operation animation in FIGS. 363 (h) to 364 (a), the horizontal boundary line gradually moves downward, and the upper display area further expands downward. On the other hand, the lower display area is displayed in a display mode that decreases further downward. The chance button 136 maintains a state where the entire button emits light. In FIG. 364 (a), the state in which the upper display area of the SP reach effect is completely expanded downward and the lower display area disappears is displayed even though the button operation acceptance valid period remains. Yes.

  As described above, the button display as the first display in the button operation animation includes the button image of the display mode in which the button as the first image as shown in FIG. 363 (f) is not depressed, and FIG. 363 (g). The button image of the display mode in which the button as the second image is slightly depressed and the button color is changed, and the button as the third image as shown in FIG. A button image that is pressed down and the button color is further changed, and when the chance button 136 is pressed for a long time, the first image is changed to the third image through the second image. Displayed in display mode.

  In this example, the button image is changed in the button operation animation after the chance button 136 is pressed, and the background image of the SP reach effect is displayed. However, the button image and the background image are displayed at the same time as the chance button 136 is pressed. The change may start. Further, immediately after the chance button 136 is pressed, the change of the button image or the background image may be started.

  In FIG. 364 (b), when the chance button 136 is pressed and held for a predetermined time, the button operation animation shifts to the next effect even during the reception valid period. In this case, the button operation animation is displayed by deleting the bar-shaped portion of the effective period image and displaying the same as the end of the reception effective period to notify the transition to the next effect. The chance button 136 that the player keeps pressing is in a non-light emitting state.

  FIG. 364 (c) shows a state in which the button display related to the button effect is not displayed after the button operation acceptance valid period ends in the button operation animation. The button display related to the button effect may be hidden simultaneously with the end of the valid reception period. Further, the button image and the effective period image may be erased at the same time, and one image may be erased before the other image.

  In FIG. 364 (d), on the condition that a series of button images are displayed, the upper display area of the SP reach effect is completely below as the second display of the button effect at the end of the button operation animation display. Displays an image enlarged to. The second display functions as an advance notice of the change.

  FIG. 364 (e) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 361 (c). Thereafter, the display shown in FIG. 361 (e) is performed, and then FIG. 361 (f) to (h) or FIG. 361 (f ′) to FIG. An effect similar to that shown in (h ′) is executed.

  Thus, the button display as the first display regarding the chance button 136 according to the present embodiment is, for example, a button in a display mode in which the button is not pressed down when the chance button 136 is pressed (first case). A button image (third image) in which the button is completely depressed through a button image (second image) of a display mode in which the button is slightly depressed and the button color is changed from the image (first image). Display of the first change to the image). The chance button 136 is a second change button mode that changes from one light emission mode (first mode) to another light emission mode (second mode) when the chance button 136 is pressed, for example. Can be executed. According to the present embodiment, the display relating to the chance button 136 displays a button effect animation when the chance button 136 is pressed, so that the player can easily recognize that the chance button 136 is pressed. There are cases where it is possible. Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the mode (such as the light emission mode) of the chance button 136 is changed, so that the chance button 136 may be prompted to be pressed.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to display the button display related to the chance button 136 during the operation effective period (first period) in which pressing of the chance button 136 can be accepted. By doing so, since the button display is displayed during the pressing acceptance period of the chance button 136, it may be possible to prompt the user to press the chance button 136.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the button display is performed and the chance button 136 is not pressed (third case), it is possible to display a display including a button image in a display mode in which the button is not pressed down. is there. According to the present embodiment, when the chance button 136 is not pressed during the display of the button display, the button image of the display mode in which the button is not pressed down is displayed, and therefore it is possible to prompt the user to press the chance end 136. There is.

Further, in this embodiment, the effect display (second display) displayed after the chance button 136 is pressed, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the button is completely pressed down and the color of the button further changes. This button image (third image) is displayed after being displayed. By doing this, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the effect display that is displayed after the pressing can be displayed, so that the player may be able to easily recognize that the chance button 136 has been pressed.
(Example 2)

  A special figure variable game in pachinko machine 100 according to Example 2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 365 (a) to (d) show button operations when the player stops pressing the chance button 136 halfway, even though a “long press” operation is requested in the button effect. An example of animation display is shown. FIG. 365 (a) shows the same state as that shown in FIG. 363 (i). The player continues to press the chance button 136, and in the background image of the SP reach effect by displaying the button operation animation, the horizontal boundary line gradually moves downward, and the upper display area expands downward, On the other hand, the lower display area is displayed in a display mode that decreases downward.

  FIG. 365 (b) shows a state immediately after the player releases the chance button 136 and stops pressing the button. When the player releases his / her hand from the button, first, the light emission mode of the chance button 136 changes from a state where the entire button emits light to a state where only the outer peripheral portion of the pressing surface emits light. On the other hand, the button image of the button operation animation maintains the same state as when the button is pressed, the entire button is displayed with the highest luminance, and the chance button is displayed in a display mode in which it is completely pushed into the circular opening. . The background image of the SP reach effect by displaying the button operation animation remains stationary while maintaining the same display state as FIG.

  FIG. 365 (c) shows a state in which the chance button 136 maintains a light emission mode in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressing surface emits light. The button image of the button operation animation is displayed in a display mode in which the entire button emits light but the light emission luminance gradually decreases. Further, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button is pushed up somewhat from within the circular opening. In addition, the button operation acceptance valid period has further passed, and the valid period image is displayed in a display mode in which the bar-like portion is further shortened in the right direction. The character string image of “long press” is displayed in a stationary display mode. The background image of the SP reach effect by displaying the button operation animation remains stationary while maintaining the same display state as FIG.

  FIG. 365 (d) shows a state where the chance button 136 maintains a light emission mode in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressing surface emits light. In the button image of the button operation animation, the display mode changes so that only the portion corresponding to the periphery outside the chance button pressing surface emits light. The button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button is completely pushed up from within the circular opening. In addition, the button operation acceptance valid period has further passed, and the valid period image is displayed in a display mode in which the bar-like portion is further shortened in the right direction. The character string image of “long press” is displayed in a stationary display mode. The background image of the SP reach effect by displaying the button operation animation remains stationary while maintaining the same display state as FIG.

In this way, the background image is stopped in the button operation animation display when the player stops pressing the chance button 136 in the middle despite the request for the “long press” operation. The button display moves in the opposite direction to the movement shown in FIGS. 363 (f) to (h). That is, when the pressing of the chance button 136 stops, the button image is displayed in a display mode that changes from the third image to the first image through the second image. By doing so, it may be possible to prompt the player to resume the long press of the chance button 136. It should be noted that the button operation animation may execute an animation that performs an operation different from the operations shown in FIGS. 363 (f) to (h) when the chance button 136 is pressed halfway, and does not execute the animation. (In other words, the third image may be changed to the first image without passing through the second image).
(Example 3)

  An example of an animation when a button image used in the special figure variable game in pachinko machine 100 according to Example 3 of the present embodiment appears in the image display area will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 366 (a), a small effect image is first displayed in the image display area, the effect image is gradually enlarged, and then a button image is displayed in the center before the effect image, and the effective period is displayed below the button image. The state where the image is displayed is shown. Thereafter, the effect image disappears and the button effect of the button image and the effective period image is started. In this manner, an animation in which an image (for example, an effect image) different from the button image is first displayed and then the button image is displayed may be performed. Note that the effective period image may be displayed after the effect image disappears.

  FIG. 366 (b) is similar to the example of the first embodiment, and shows a state in which the button image and the effective period image are simultaneously displayed by the fade-in process.

  In FIG. 366 (c), first, the right side of the button image appears with a predetermined transmittance from the center of the left end of the image display area indicated by a broken long rectangle, and at the same time from the center of the right end of the image display area. The left side portion of the button image is shown with a predetermined transmittance. Next, the left button image moves to the right in the horizontal direction, the right button image moves to the left in the horizontal direction, they overlap at the approximate center of the screen, and finally match to form one button image. Stop. Next, the reduction rate of the button image becomes zero, and then the effective period image is displayed below the button image. The predetermined transmittance of the button image may be 0%, may be other than 0%, may be greater than 0% and smaller than 100%, or may be 100%. Note that the validity period images may be displayed below the left and right button images, respectively.

The animation for erasing these button images and effective period images may be a rewind effect obtained by reversing the animation at the time of appearance. Moreover, you may make it perform the deletion animation different from the animation at the time of appearance. Further, when the button is deleted, the button may be deleted without displaying an animation.
Example 4

  An example of button image animation used in the special figure variable game in pachinko machine 100 according to Example 4 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 367 shows an example of button display animation when the chance button 136 is pressed for a long time.

  FIG. 367 (a) shows an animation similar to that in the example of the first embodiment. First, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which only a portion corresponding to the periphery outside the chance button pressing surface is in a light emitting state. In addition, the button operation acceptance valid period has slightly elapsed, and the bar-shaped portion of the valid period image display is slightly shortened to the right.

  Next, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which the entire button emits light from the display mode in which only the outer peripheral portion of the chance button pressing surface emits light, and the light emission luminance gradually increases. The button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button is gradually pushed down into the circular opening. The button operation acceptance valid period has passed, and the valid period image is displayed in a display mode in which the bar-like portion is further shortened in the right direction.

  Next, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which the light emission luminance of the entire button becomes the highest luminance. The button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button is completely pushed into the circular opening. As the button operation acceptance valid period elapses, the valid period image is displayed in a display mode in which the bar-like portion is further shortened in the right direction.

  The animation shown in FIG. 367 (b) shows that the button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button is gradually pushed into the circular opening as the button operation acceptance valid period elapses. The same as shown in a). On the other hand, in the animation shown in FIG. 367 (b), even when the button operation acceptance valid period elapses, the display mode in which only the outer peripheral portion of the chance button pressing surface emits light is maintained. Further, the character image of “push” is displayed in the center of the push surface in a display mode in which the luminance is gradually increased.

  The animation shown in FIG. 367 (c) has the same display mode as that of the button image shown in FIG. 367 (a), and the size of the button image gradually decreases as the button operation acceptance valid period elapses. It has the feature in the display mode to go. The display of the button image becomes smaller as the bar-shaped portion of the effective period image becomes shorter, and disappears in a state where the length of the bar-shaped portion becomes zero and the operation effective period has expired. Thereafter, the effective period image also disappears. Note that the display of the effective period image may be reduced together with the decrease in the display of the button image.

  The animation shown in FIG. 367 (d) has the same display form as the button image shown in FIG. 367 (a), and the button image gradually increases in size as the button operation acceptance valid period elapses. It has the feature in the display mode to go. The display of the button image increases in size as the bar-shaped portion of the effective period image becomes shorter, and the display of the effective period image expands together with the increase in the display of the button image. The button image and the effective period image disappear when the operation effective period has expired. Note that only the button image may be enlarged and the effective period image may be displayed in a display mode that is not enlarged.

  FIG. 367 (d ′) shows a button display similar to that in FIG. 367 (d). In addition, when the button image is enlarged, the effective period image is enlarged together and protrudes from the image display area. It is characterized in that an effective period image is further displayed. The auxiliary effective period image is displayed in a display mode in which a remaining size of the operation effective period is notified while maintaining a certain size in the image display area. The auxiliary effective period image may be displayed even when the main effective period image is difficult to see (for example, reduction, operation of the movable unit, light emission by a decorative unit such as a light guide plate).

  FIG. 367 (d ″) exemplifies the character image (in this example, “2 seconds left”) indicating the remaining time of the button operation acceptance effective period as the auxiliary effective period image illustrated in FIG. 367 (d ′). ) Is displayed.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first to fourth embodiments described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 360 to 367 again.
(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment is
Operation means (for example, chance button 136);
Display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
A game machine equipped with
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a first type of display,

  The first type of display is a display related to the operation means (for example, a display related to the chance button 136),

  A first display (for example, a button display including a button image imitating the chance button 136) of the first type of display is a first image (for example, a button image of a display mode in which the button is not depressed). (For example, FIG. 363 (f))),

  The first display is a display including at least a second image (for example, a button image of a display mode in which the button is slightly depressed and the button color is changed (for example, FIG. 363 (g))). ,

The first display is a display including at least a third image (for example, a button image in which the button is completely depressed and the button color is further changed (for example, FIG. 363 (h)),
The first display is a display including at least a first change in the first case,

  The first change is a change from the first image to the third image through the second image,

The first case is a case where there is an operation of the operation means (for example, pressing of the chance button 136).
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the display relating to the operation means displays an animation when there is an operation, so that it is possible to realize a gaming machine with a characteristic display. In some cases, the player can easily recognize that the operating means is being operated.

  Note that the first display may be a display including only the first image, the second image, and the third image. Alternatively, the first display may be a display including a plurality of images including a first image, a second image, and a third image.

  In addition, “change from the first image to the third image through the second image” means an animation that changes continuously in the order of the first image, the second image, and the third image. May be shown. In addition, one (for example, the fourth image) or a plurality of images (for example, the fourth image, the fifth image, ...) may be included between the first image and the second image. It does not have to be. In addition, one (for example, a fourth image) or a plurality of images (for example, a fourth image, a fifth image, ...) may be included between the second image and the third image. It does not have to be.

Further, “when the operation means is operated” may be a case where the operation means is operated, or may be a case where the operation means is detected by the detection means. In addition, the operation of the operation unit may be detected by the detection unit, and the detected information may be transmitted as information (command) to the sub control unit (for example, the first sub control unit 400). This may be the case where the sub-control means receives information (command) that means has been operated. “The first display is a display that includes at least the first change in the first case” means “the first display is a display that can execute at least the first change in the first case. It may be.
(2) The pachinko machine 100,

  At least a part of the operation means is a means capable of executing at least a first aspect (for example, a light emitting button aspect (FIG. 363 (e)),

  At least a part of the operation means is a means capable of executing at least a second aspect (for example, a button aspect (FIG. 363 (f)) that emits light different from the first aspect,

  At least a part of the operating means is means capable of executing at least a second change in the first case,

The second change is to change at least from the first aspect to the second aspect.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, when the operation unit is operated, the mode of the operation unit (such as the light emission mode) is changed, and thus the operation of the operation unit may be prompted.

Here, the first aspect may be the first light emission aspect. The second aspect may be the second light emission aspect. The light emission mode may indicate a light emission pattern (for example, a change in the color of the light emission means or a change in the light emission means to be lit) of the light emission means (for example, LED) provided in the operation means. The first aspect may be the first display aspect. The second mode may be a second display mode. For example, in the display by the display means or the display by lighting the light emitting means, “PUSH” is displayed on the display means when the light emitting means is lit red, and “heat” is displayed on the display means when the light emitting means is blue. It may be done. The first aspect may be the first shape. The second aspect may be the second shape. For example, the operation means may be a “button that pops out” and a “normal button”.
(3) The pachinko machine 100,

The display means is means capable of displaying at least the first display in the second case,
The second case is when the first period is in progress,

The first period is a period during which at least the operation of the operation unit can be accepted (for example, an operation effective period).
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the first display is displayed at least during the reception period of the operation means, so that the operation of the operation means may be prompted.

Note that the first display may be displayed before (or immediately before) the first period starts. Further, the first display may be displayed after (or immediately after) the first period ends.
(4) The pachinko machine 100,

  In the third case, the display means is a means capable of displaying at least a display including the first image (for example, a button image in a display mode in which the button is not depressed (for example, FIG. 363 (f))). Yes,

The third case is a case where the first display is displayed on the display means.
The third case is a case where the operation means is not operated.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, when the operation unit is not operated during the display of the first display, the display including the first image is displayed, and thus the operation of the operation unit can be prompted. There is.

  The “display including the first image” may be a display including only the first image (for example, a still image), or one or a plurality of displays including the first image. It may be a display (animation) constituted by The third case may be “the case where the first display is displayed on the display unit and the operation unit is not operated”. In addition, “when the first display is displayed on the display unit” may mean “through the period during which the first display is displayed on the display unit”. It may be “when the first display is displayed on the display means”.

Further, “when there is no operation of the operation means” may be a case where the operation means is not operated, or a case where the operation of the operation means is not detected by the detection means. Alternatively, it may be a case where the operation of the operation means is detected by the detection means, and that the detection is not transmitted to the sub-control means as information (command). This may be the case where the sub-control means has not received information (command) that the operation has been performed. If the operation means is not operated, at least the second image may not be displayed. Note that when the operation means is not operated, at least the third image may not be displayed.
(5) The pachinko machine 100,

  The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a second display (for example, an effect display (FIG. 364 (d)) displayed after the chance button 136 is pressed) of the first type display,

  The display means is means capable of displaying at least the second display in the first case,

The second display is a display that is displayed after the third image is displayed.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having this configuration, the display means can display at least the second display when the operation means is operated, so that the player can easily recognize that the operation means has been operated. May be possible. Note that the second display may be a display different from the first display, and the second display may be a display included in the first display.

  Further, the first image and the third image may be images imitating the mode of the operation means. The first image is an image simulating the first aspect of the operation means. The third image is an image simulating the second aspect of the operation means. The first change is a change simulating the second change. By doing so, the player may be able to pay attention to the display means. In some cases, the operation means can be prompted to operate.

  Note that the first change may be an animation display including the first image, the second image, and the third image.

  Further, the operation means can execute at least the first mode when the operation means is not operated. Thereby, it may be easy to recognize that the player is not operating.

  The second display may be a display that is displayed after at least a part of the first display is erased. The second display may be a display corresponding to the operation of the operation means.

Further, the operation unit can execute the third mode when it is outside the reception period of the operation unit. The third aspect may be the third light emission aspect. The third light emitting mode may include those having different luminance and light emitting color, light emitting means being turned off, and the like. Further, the third aspect may be the third display aspect or the third shape.
(6) The pachinko machine 100,

The display means is a second type of display (for example, a display that does not use the operation means in the change or pre-reading notice display, a hold icon, a change icon, a fourth pattern, a decorative pattern, a hitting notification, an error display, a mission system, etc. Display, user mode customization display, game method display, option menu, etc.)
It is characterized by that.
(Example 5)

  An example of a flow of a series of button effects and SP reach effects by displaying a button operation animation performed in the special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 5 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 368 to 371. In FIG. 368 (a) to FIG. 369 (b) and FIG. 370 (a) to FIG. 371 (h), special figure variation games are shown in time series in this order. Further, on the right side of each figure, a chance button 136 as an operation means is shown. The chance button 136 is housed in the circular opening and is urged upward. When the chance button 136 is pressed, the chance button 136 sinks downward, but when the pressing force stops working, it protrudes upward by the urging force and stops at a predetermined position. It has become. In the figure showing the special figure variation game in time series, the passage of time between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures.

  FIG. 368 (a) illustrates the continuation of the SP reach effect continued from FIG. 360 (n). In FIG. 368 (a), the display that two samurai are fighting is performed as the same SP reach production as FIG. 360 (o).

  FIG. 368 (b) to FIG. 369 (a) show a flow of a series of button effects and SP reach effects by button operation animation displayed following the SP reach effects shown in FIG. 368 (a). In FIG. 368 (b), a button operation animation is started, and an image of a character string “Long press and collect power!” Is displayed as a button display for prompting button operation. In the SP reach production, a character image in which one samurai holds a sword is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 368 (b), since the button operation acceptance valid period has not yet started, the light emitting means (LED) provided in the chance button 136 is turned off.

  In FIG. 368 (c), as a button display for prompting a button operation, the character string image is switched from “Long press to save power!” To a character string image of “Good” and the button image is displayed. The effective period image is displayed at the bottom.

  In FIG. 368 (d), the character string image is switched from “Good” to “Long press” as a button display for prompting button operation. In addition, the display mode is changed so that a portion corresponding to the periphery outside the chance button pressing surface of the button image is in a light emitting state. By looking at the image shown in FIG. 368 (d), the player knows that the button production has started, but at this stage, the operation valid period countdown has not started yet, and the player is in a state where the button operation cannot be accepted. Even if the button 136 is pressed, the pressing operation is not accepted. The chance button 136 is in a non-light emitting state.

  FIG. 368 (e) shows a button operation acceptance permission state after a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) has elapsed since the display of the button effect shown in FIG. 368 (b) was started. The chance button 136 has a first button form in which the outer peripheral portion of the pressing surface is in a light emitting state. At this stage, since the countdown of the operation valid period has started, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the pressing operation is accepted. In this example, the light emission mode of the chance button 136 has changed since the display mode of the button image has changed, but these may be simultaneous, or the change in the light emission mode of the chance button 136 will be earlier. The change of the display mode of the button image may be later.

  In FIG. 368 (f), the player places the hand so as to cover the pressing surface of the chance button 136 and presses the chance button 136. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 is the second button mode. The state changes from the state of the first button mode in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressing surface emits light to the state in which the entire button emits light.

  FIGS. 368 (f) to 368 (j) show a state in which the player continues to press the chance button 136 in accordance with a request for a “long press” operation in the button effect. The button image of the button operation animation is displayed in a display mode in which the entire button is lit. Further, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button is pushed into the circular opening. As the button operation acceptance effective period elapses, the effective period image is displayed in a display mode in which the bar-like portion is gradually shortened in the right direction. The character string image of “long press” is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  In the SP reach production in FIGS. 368 (f) to (j), an image is displayed in which a small flame generated at both feet of the samurai gradually grows and becomes a large flame behind the samurai. In FIG. 368 (f), an image is displayed in a display mode in which a small flame is generated at both feet of the samurai. In FIG. 368 (g), the image is displayed in a display mode in which the flame generated at both feet of the samurai grows up to the back of the samurai and becomes larger. In FIGS. 368 (h) to (j), the image is displayed in a display mode in which the flame grows in such a size as to wrap the entire body of the samurai behind the samurai.

  FIG. 368 (i) shows a state immediately before the end of the button operation acceptance valid period. The display of the button operation animation notifies the end of the operation effective period by setting the length of the bar-shaped portion of the effective period image to 0 (zero).

  FIG. 368 (j) shows a state where the chance button 136 that the player keeps pressing is in a non-light emitting state.

  FIG. 369 (a) shows a state in which the display of the cut-in effect in the display mode in which the face of the samurai is greatly expanded is executed as the second display of the button effect at the end of the display of the button operation animation. The second display functions as an advance notice of the change.

  FIG. 369 (b) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 361 (a). Thereafter, the display shown in FIGS. 361 (b) to (e) is performed, and then FIG. 361 (f) to (h) or FIG. Effects similar to those shown in f ′) to (h ′) are executed.

  FIG. 370 (a) shows the same state as the state shown in FIG. 368 (e), and a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the button effect display shown in FIG. 368 (b). The elapsed button operation acceptance permission state is shown. The chance button 136 has a first button form in which the outer peripheral portion of the pressing surface is in a light emitting state. In the button display related to the button effect, the display mode is changed so that the portion corresponding to the periphery outside the chance button pressing surface of the button image is in a light emitting state. At this stage, since the countdown of the operation valid period has started, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the pressing operation is accepted.

  FIG. 370 (b) shows a state in which the player has started striking so that the player claps his hand and hits the pressing surface of the chance button 136. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 changes from the state of the first button mode in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressing surface emits light when not pressed to the state in which the entire button emits light as the second button mode. The button image of the button operation animation is displayed in a display mode in which the entire button is lit. Further, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button is pushed into the circular opening. As the button operation acceptance effective period elapses, the effective period image is displayed in a display mode in which the bar-like portion is gradually shortened in the right direction. The character string image of “long press” is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  The SP reach effect in FIG. 370 (b) is displayed in a display mode in which a small flame is generated at both feet of the samurai.

  FIG. 370 (c) shows a state immediately after the hand that has been squeezed for repeated hits is released from the pressing surface of the chance button 136. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 changes from the second button mode in which the entire button emits light to the state in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressing surface emits light when not pressed, as the first button mode. The button image of the button operation animation maintains the display in the display mode in which the entire button emits light and is pushed into the circular opening. As the button operation acceptance effective period elapses, the effective period image is displayed in a display mode in which the bar-like portion is gradually shortened in the right direction. The character string image of “long press” is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  The SP reach production in FIG. 370 (c) is displayed in a display mode in which the flame generated at the feet of the samurai is maintained.

  FIG. 370 (d) shows a state where the hand that has been clasped for repeated hitting is still away from the pressing surface of the chance button 136. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 is such that only the outer peripheral portion of the pressing surface emits light when not pressed. The button image of the button operation animation has its display mode changed so that the portion corresponding to the periphery around the chance button pressing surface is in a light emitting state. Further, the display mode is changed from the display mode in which the button is pushed into the circular opening to the display mode in which the button is pushed up from the circular opening. As the button operation acceptance effective period elapses, the effective period image is displayed in a display mode in which the bar-like portion is gradually shortened in the right direction. The character string image of “long press” is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  The SP reach effect in FIG. 370 (d) is displayed in a display mode in which the flame generated at both feet of the samurai is extinguished. The flame image may be erased after the player's hand is released from the chance button 136, that is, after the button operation is no longer detected by the detection means, and the flame image may be erased at the same time as it is no longer detected. May be.

  FIG. 370 (e) shows a state where the player has clasped his hand and hit the pressing surface of the chance button 136. FIG. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 changes from the state of the first button mode in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressing surface emits light when not pressed to the state in which the entire button emits light as the second button mode. The button image of the button operation animation is displayed in a display mode in which the entire button is lit. Further, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button is pushed into the circular opening. As the button operation acceptance effective period elapses, the effective period image is displayed in a display mode in which the bar-like portion is gradually shortened in the right direction. The character string image of “long press” is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  The SP reach effect in FIG. 370 (e) is the same effect as shown in FIG. 370 (b), and the display is performed in a display mode in which a small flame is generated at the feet of the samurai.

  FIG. 371 (a) shows a state immediately after the hand that has been squeezed for repeated hits is released from the pressing surface of the chance button 136. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 changes from the second button mode in which the entire button emits light to the state in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressing surface emits light when not pressed, as the first button mode. The button image of the button operation animation maintains the display in the display mode in which the entire button emits light and is pushed into the circular opening. As the button operation acceptance effective period elapses, the effective period image is displayed in a display mode in which the bar-like portion is gradually shortened in the right direction. The character string image of “long press” is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  The SP reach effect in FIG. 371 (a) is displayed in a display mode in which the flame generated at both feet of the samurai is maintained.

  FIG. 371 (b) shows a state in which the hand clasped for repeated hitting is still away from the pressing surface of the chance button 136. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 is such that only the outer peripheral portion of the pressing surface emits light when not pressed. The button image of the button operation animation has its display mode changed so that the portion corresponding to the periphery around the chance button pressing surface is in a light emitting state. Further, the display mode is changed from the display mode in which the button is pushed into the circular opening to the display mode in which the button is pushed up from the circular opening. As the button operation acceptance effective period elapses, the effective period image is displayed in a display mode in which the bar-like portion is gradually shortened in the right direction. The character string image of “long press” is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  The SP reach effect in FIG. 371 (b) is displayed in a display mode in which the flame generated at both feet of the samurai is extinguished.

  FIG. 371 (c) shows a state where the player has clasped his hand and hit the pressing surface of the chance button 136. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 changes from the state of the first button mode in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressing surface emits light when not pressed to the state in which the entire button emits light as the second button mode. The button image of the button operation animation is displayed in a display mode in which the entire button is lit. Further, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button is pushed into the circular opening. As the button operation acceptance effective period elapses, the effective period image is displayed in a display mode in which the bar-like portion is gradually shortened in the right direction. The character string image of “long press” is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  The SP reach effect in FIG. 371 (c) is the same effect as that shown in FIG. 370 (b), and the display is performed in a display mode in which a small flame is generated at both feet of the samurai.

  As the player continues to press the button repeatedly, the states shown in FIGS. 371 (a) to (c) are repeated. FIG. 371 (d) shows a state in which the player's hand hits the pressing surface of the chance button 136 when the remaining operation valid period has decreased.

  The SP reach effect in FIG. 371 (d) is the same effect as shown in FIG. 370 (b), and the display is performed in a display mode in which a small flame is generated at the feet of the samurai.

  FIG. 371 (e) shows a state immediately after the end of the button operation acceptance valid period. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 changes from the second button mode in which the entire button emits light to the state in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressing surface emits light when not pressed, as the first button mode. The display of the button operation animation notifies the end of the operation effective period by setting the length of the bar-shaped portion of the effective period image to 0 (zero). The display of the button image is maintained in a display mode in which the entire button emits light and is pushed into the circular opening. The character string image of “long press” is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  The SP reach effect in FIG. 371 (e) is displayed in a display mode in which the flame generated at both feet of the samurai is maintained.

  FIG. 371 (f) shows a state where the chance button 136 being hit by the player is changed to the non-light emitting state. The button operation animation valid period image maintains a display of notification that the operation valid period has ended. The display of the button image is maintained in a display mode in which the entire button emits light and is pushed into the circular opening. The character string image of “long press” is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  The SP reach effect in FIG. 371 (f) is displayed in a display mode in which the flame generated at both feet of the samurai is maintained.

  FIG. 371 (g) shows the same cut-in effect of the display mode in which the face of the samurai is greatly expanded as shown in FIG. 369 (a) as the second display of the button effect at the end of the display of the button operation animation. This shows the state where the display has been executed. The second display functions as an advance notice of the change.

  FIG. 371 (h) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 361 (a). Thereafter, the display shown in FIGS. 361 (b) to (e) is performed, and then FIG. 361 (f) to (h) or FIG. Effects similar to those shown in f ′) to (h ′) are executed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the chance button 136 can be long-pressed (first operation) and repeatedly (second operation), and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a button ( The first display) and the cut-in display (second display) can be displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a button display prompting long press and when the chance button 136 is long pressed. The cut-in display can be displayed, and the same cut-in display can be displayed even when a button display prompting a long press is displayed and the chance button 136 is repeatedly hit. According to the present embodiment, even when a continuous hit, which is an operation different from the long press, is performed in the same manner as the display of the result of the long press, it can be operated even for a player who is not familiar with the operation of the chance button 136. May be able to improve motivation.

  Further, in this embodiment, it is possible to display a button that prompts the user to press the chance button 136 for a long time during the effective operation period (third case) during which the pressing of the chance button 136 can be accepted. By doing so, the button display that prompts the long press is a display that is displayed at least during the valid reception period of the press of the chance button 136, so that the press of the chance button 136 may be prompted.

  Further, in this embodiment, it is possible to display a display (third display) regarding consecutive hits of the chance button 136. By doing so, it may be possible to prompt the user to press the chance button 136.

  Further, in this embodiment, when a button display (first display) prompting long press (first operation) of the chance button 136 is displayed and the chance button 136 is not pressed, a cut-in display (first display) is displayed. Is not displayed. In this way, when the chance button 136 is not pressed, the cut-in display is not displayed. Therefore, when the button is operated, the cut-in display is displayed so that the chance button 136 can be prompted to be pressed. There is.

  In the present embodiment, the long press (first operation) of the chance button 136 and the continuous hit (second operation) are different operations. Therefore, even if the hit is different from the long press, the result is the same as the result of the long press. Since the display is performed, it is possible to realize a game machine having a display characteristic. In addition, the display when the button is operated is the same regardless of whether a long press is performed or repeated hits, so that the player's willingness to operate can be improved even for players who are unfamiliar with the operation of the chance button 136. There is a case.

Note that if the pressing of the chance button 136 is not detected at the timing shown in FIG. 371 (e), the cut-in display may not be displayed. In addition, when it is within a predetermined time (for example, within a period during which the flame display mode is displayed) from the press of the chance button 136 at the timing of FIG. 371 (e), the cut-in display may be performed. If it is outside the predetermined period (for example, a period in which the flame display mode is not displayed), the cut-in display may not be performed.
(Example 6)

  An example of a flow of a series of button effects and SP reach effects by displaying a button operation animation performed in the special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 6 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 372 to 373. In FIG. 372 (a) to FIG. 373 (c), special figure variable games are shown in time series in this order. Further, on the right side of each figure, a chance button 136 as an operation means is shown. The chance button 136 is housed in the circular opening and is urged upward. When the chance button 136 is pressed, the chance button 136 sinks downward, but when the pressing force stops working, it protrudes upward by the urging force and stops at a predetermined position. It has become. In the figure showing the special figure variation game in time series, the passage of time between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures.

  FIG. 372 (a) shows the same state as that shown in FIG. 368 (e), and a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the button effect display shown in FIG. 368 (b). The elapsed button operation acceptance permission state is shown. The chance button 136 has a first button form in which the outer peripheral portion of the pressing surface is in a light emitting state. In the button display related to the button effect, the display mode is changed so that the portion corresponding to the periphery outside the chance button pressing surface of the button image is in a light emitting state. At this stage, since the countdown of the operation valid period has started, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the pressing operation is accepted.

  FIG. 372 (b) shows a state in which the player has started striking so that the player claps his hand and hits the pressing surface of the chance button 136. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 changes from the state of the first button mode in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressing surface emits light when not pressed to the state in which the entire button emits light as the second button mode. The button image of the button operation animation is displayed in a display mode in which the entire button is lit. Further, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button is pushed into the circular opening. As the button operation acceptance effective period elapses, the effective period image is displayed in a display mode in which the bar-like portion is gradually shortened in the right direction. The character string image of “long press” is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  The SP reach effect in FIG. 372 (b) is displayed in a display mode in which a small flame is generated at the feet of the samurai.

  FIG. 372 (c) shows a state immediately after the hand clamped for repeated hits is released from the pressing surface of the chance button 136. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 changes from the second button mode in which the entire button emits light to the state in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressing surface emits light when not pressed, as the first button mode. The button image of the button operation animation maintains the display in the display mode in which the entire button emits light and is pushed into the circular opening. As the button operation acceptance effective period elapses, the effective period image is displayed in a display mode in which the bar-like portion is gradually shortened in the right direction. The character string image of “long press” is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  The SP reach effect in FIG. 372 (c) is displayed in a display mode in which the flame generated at both feet of the samurai is maintained.

  FIG. 372 (d) shows a state in which the hand that has been clasped for repeated hitting is still away from the pressing surface of the chance button 136. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 is such that only the outer peripheral portion of the pressing surface emits light when not pressed. The button image of the button operation animation has its display mode changed so that the portion corresponding to the periphery around the chance button pressing surface is in a light emitting state. Further, the display mode is changed from the display mode in which the button is pushed into the circular opening to the display mode in which the button is pushed up from the circular opening. As the button operation acceptance effective period elapses, the effective period image is displayed in a display mode in which the bar-like portion is gradually shortened in the right direction. The character string image of “long press” is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  The SP reach effect in FIG. 372 (d) is displayed in a display mode in which the flame generated at both feet of the samurai is maintained. In this way, in this example, the flame image that grows in response to the button operation is maintained in a state before the player's hand leaves the chance button 136 and before it leaves.

  FIG. 372 (e) shows a state where the player has clasped his hand and hit the pressing surface of the chance button 136. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 changes from the state of the first button mode in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressing surface emits light when not pressed to the state in which the entire button emits light as the second button mode. The button image of the button operation animation is displayed in a display mode in which the entire button is lit. Further, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button is pushed into the circular opening. As the button operation acceptance effective period elapses, the effective period image is displayed in a display mode in which the bar-like portion is gradually shortened in the right direction. The character string image of “long press” is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  In the SP reach production in FIG. 372 (e), an image is displayed in a display mode in which the flame generated at both feet of the samurai grows up to the waist of the samurai and becomes large.

  FIG. 372 (f) shows a state immediately after the hand that has been squeezed for repeated strikes is released from the pressing surface of the chance button 136. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 changes from the second button mode in which the entire button emits light to the state in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressing surface emits light when not pressed, as the first button mode. The button image of the button operation animation maintains the display in the display mode in which the entire button emits light and is pushed into the circular opening. As the button operation acceptance effective period elapses, the effective period image is displayed in a display mode in which the bar-like portion is gradually shortened in the right direction. The character string image of “long press” is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  The SP reach production in FIG. 372 (f) is displayed in a display mode in which the flame that has grown to the waist of the samurai is maintained.

  FIG. 372 (g) shows a state in which the hand clasped for repeated hitting is still away from the pressing surface of the chance button 136. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 is such that only the outer peripheral portion of the pressing surface emits light when not pressed. The button image of the button operation animation has its display mode changed so that the portion corresponding to the periphery around the chance button pressing surface is in a light emitting state. Further, the display mode is changed from the display mode in which the button is pushed into the circular opening to the display mode in which the button is pushed up from the circular opening. As the button operation acceptance effective period elapses, the effective period image is displayed in a display mode in which the bar-like portion is gradually shortened in the right direction. The character string image of “long press” is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  The SP reach production in FIG. 372 (g) is displayed in a display mode in which the flame that has grown to the waist of the samurai is maintained.

  FIG. 372 (h) shows a state where the player has clasped his hand and hit the pressing surface of the chance button 136. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 changes from the state of the first button mode in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressing surface emits light when not pressed to the state in which the entire button emits light as the second button mode. The button image of the button operation animation is displayed in a display mode in which the entire button is lit. Further, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button is pushed into the circular opening. As the button operation acceptance effective period elapses, the effective period image is displayed in a display mode in which the bar-like portion is gradually shortened in the right direction. The character string image of “long press” is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  In the SP reach production in FIG. 372 (h), an image is displayed in a display mode in which the flame that has grown up to the waist of the samurai grows further to the chest of the samurai and becomes larger.

  As the player continues to hit the button repeatedly, the SP reach effect displays an image in a display mode in which the flame gradually grows behind the samurai. FIG. 372 (i) shows a state in which the player's hand hits the pressing surface of the chance button 136 at the time when the remaining operation valid period has decreased. In the SP reach production in FIG. 372 (i), an image is displayed in a display mode in which the flame grows up behind the samurai to a position higher than the head of the samurai. The flame display mode shown in FIG. 372 (i) is the maximum size of the flame image. The size of the flame image is maximized when either the long press time reaches 6 seconds or the number of repeated hits reaches 20 times.

  FIG. 372 (j) shows a state immediately after the end of the button operation acceptance valid period. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 changes from the second button mode in which the entire button emits light to the state in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressing surface emits light when not pressed, as the first button mode. The display of the button operation animation notifies the end of the operation effective period by setting the length of the bar-shaped portion of the effective period image to 0 (zero). The display of the button image is maintained in a display mode in which the entire button emits light and is pushed into the circular opening. The character string image of “long press” is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  In the SP reach effect in FIG. 372 (j), a flame image is displayed while maintaining a display form that has grown to a position higher than the head of the samurai behind the samurai.

  FIG. 373 (a) shows a state in which the chance button 136 being hit by the player is changed to a non-light emitting state. The button operation animation valid period image maintains a display of notification that the operation valid period has ended. The display of the button image is maintained in a display mode in which the entire button emits light and is pushed into the circular opening. The character string image of “long press” is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  In the SP reach production in FIG. 373 (a), a display image that has grown up to a position higher than the head of the samurai behind the samurai is maintained, and a flame image is displayed.

  FIG. 373 (b) shows the same cut-in effect of the display mode in which the face of the samurai is greatly expanded as shown in FIG. 369 (a) as the second display of the button effect at the end of the display of the button operation animation. This shows the state where the display has been executed. The second display functions as an advance notice of the change.

  FIG. 373 (c) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 361 (a). Thereafter, the display shown in FIGS. 361 (b) to (e) is performed, and then FIG. 361 (f) to (h) or FIG. Effects similar to those shown in f ′) to (h ′) are executed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the chance button 136 can be long-pressed (first operation) and repeatedly (second operation), and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a button ( The first display) and the cut-in display (second display) can be displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a button display prompting long press and when the chance button 136 is long pressed. The cut-in display can be displayed, and the same cut-in display can be displayed even when a button display prompting a long press is displayed and the chance button 136 is repeatedly hit. According to the present embodiment, even when a continuous hit, which is an operation different from the long press, is performed in the same manner as the display of the result of the long press, it can be operated even for a player who is not familiar with the operation of the chance button 136. May be able to improve motivation.

  It should be noted that the flame image may be changed in accordance with the long press time or the number of repeated hits. In addition, when the long-pressed time or the number of repeated hits is less than the predetermined time or the maximum number of times, a display mode (for example, the maximum size of the flame image) that is determined in advance by the effect lottery is displayed. It may not be done. Further, even when the long-pressed time or the number of repeated hits is less than the predetermined time or the maximum number of times, the display mode (for example, finally changed after the reception period of the operating means is determined in advance by the effect lottery (for example, The maximum size of the flame image may be displayed.

In addition, when pressing of the chance button 136 is not detected at the timing of FIG. 372 (j), the cut-in display may not be displayed or may be displayed.
(Example 7)

  An example of a flow of a series of button effects and SP reach effects by displaying a button operation animation performed in the special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 7 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In FIGS. 374 (a) to (e), special figure variable games are shown in time series in this order. Further, on the right side of each figure, a chance button 136 as an operation means is shown. The chance button 136 is housed in the circular opening and is urged upward. When the chance button 136 is pressed, the chance button 136 sinks downward, but when the pressing force stops working, it protrudes upward by the urging force and stops at a predetermined position. It has become. In the figure showing the special figure variation game in time series, the passage of time between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures.

  FIG. 374 (a) shows a state in which the player has started striking so that the player claps his hand and hits the pressing surface of the chance button 136. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 changes from the state of the first button mode in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressing surface emits light when not pressed to the state in which the entire button emits light as the second button mode. The button image of the button operation animation is displayed in a display mode in which the entire button is lit. Further, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button is pushed into the circular opening. As the button operation acceptance effective period elapses, the effective period image is displayed in a display mode in which the bar-like portion is gradually shortened in the right direction. The character string image of “long press” is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  The SP reach effect in FIG. 374 (a) is displayed in a display mode in which a small flame is generated at the feet of the samurai.

  FIG. 374 (b) shows a state in which the hand clasped for repeated hits is away from the pressing surface of the chance button 136. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 is such that only the outer peripheral portion of the pressing surface emits light when not pressed. The button image of the button operation animation has its display mode changed so that the portion corresponding to the periphery around the chance button pressing surface is in a light emitting state. Further, the display mode is changed from the display mode in which the button is pushed into the circular opening to the display mode in which the button is pushed up from the circular opening. As the button operation acceptance effective period elapses, the effective period image is displayed in a display mode in which the bar-like portion is gradually shortened in the right direction. The character string image of “long press” is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  The SP reach production in FIG. 374 (b) is displayed in a display mode in which the flame generated at both feet of the samurai is maintained. In this way, in this example, the flame image that grows in response to the button operation is maintained in a state before the player's hand leaves the chance button 136 and before it leaves.

  FIG. 374 (c) shows a state where the player has clasped his hand and hit the pressing surface of the chance button 136. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 changes from the state of the first button mode in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressing surface emits light when not pressed to the state in which the entire button emits light as the second button mode. The button image of the button operation animation is displayed in a display mode in which the entire button is lit. Further, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button is pushed into the circular opening. As the button operation acceptance effective period elapses, the effective period image is displayed in a display mode in which the bar-like portion is gradually shortened in the right direction. The character string image of “long press” is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  In the SP reach production in FIG. 374 (c), an image is displayed in a display mode in which the flame generated at both feet of the samurai grows up to the waist of the samurai and becomes large.

  FIG. 374 (d) shows a state immediately after the hand that has been squeezed for repeated hits is released from the pressing surface of the chance button 136. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 changes from the second button mode in which the entire button emits light to the state in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressing surface emits light when not pressed, as the first button mode. The button image of the button operation animation maintains the display in the display mode in which the entire button emits light and is pushed into the circular opening. As the button operation acceptance effective period elapses, the effective period image is displayed in a display mode in which the bar-like portion is gradually shortened in the right direction. The character string image of “long press” is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  The SP reach production in FIG. 374 (d) is displayed in a display mode in which the flame that has grown to the waist of the samurai is maintained.

  FIG. 374 (e) shows a state in which the hand clasped for repeated hitting is still away from the pressing surface of the chance button 136. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 is such that only the outer peripheral portion of the pressing surface emits light when not pressed. The button image of the button operation animation has its display mode changed so that the portion corresponding to the periphery around the chance button pressing surface is in a light emitting state. Further, the display mode is changed from the display mode in which the button is pushed into the circular opening to the display mode in which the button is pushed up from the circular opening. As the button operation acceptance effective period elapses, the effective period image is displayed in a display mode in which the bar-like portion is gradually shortened in the right direction. Instead of the “long press” character string image, a “continuous hit” character string image is displayed. In this embodiment, when the number of detected button operations reaches a specified number of times (for example, 5 times) within a certain period (for example, 2 seconds), the character string “long press” is displayed instead of “continuous hit”. In some cases, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by realizing a game that suits the player's preference. It should be noted that the display changed from the character string “long press” does not have to be “sequential hits”, and other displays including consecutive hits (for example, “press button!” !)) May be displayed.

The SP reach production in FIG. 374 (e) is displayed in a display mode in which the flame that has grown to the waist of the samurai is maintained.
(Example 8)

  A specific example of the flow of SP reach production by displaying the button operation animation performed in the special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 8 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 375 to 377.

  FIG. 375 (a) shows a timing chart (part 1) regarding the pressing of the chance button 136 and the display of the button operation animation. The upper row shows the state of the detection signal of the chance button sensor in time series. The level OFF of the detection signal of the chance button sensor indicates a state where the pressing of the chance button 136 is not detected, and the level ON indicates a state where the pressing of the chance button 136 is detected.

  The lower part shows the movement of the image in the SP reach production by displaying the button operation animation in time series. The level “still image” is a state in which the image is still, and the level “moving image” is a state in which the image changes with time. The period (i) is a period from when the chance button 136 is changed from the non-pressed state to the pressed state (single press) until a predetermined delay time elapses. The delay time is caused by, for example, a time lag from sensor detection to command reception. In the period (i), the button operation animation image is stationary. In the period (ii) following the period (i), after the chance button 136 is changed from the non-pressed state to the pressed state and a predetermined delay time elapses, the chance button 136 is again set to the non-pressed state and the predetermined time elapses. It is a period until. The period (iii) following the period (ii) is a period until a predetermined delay time elapses after the chance button 136 is changed from the non-pressed state to the pressed state. The period (iv) following the period (iii) is a period from when the chance button 136 is pressed again until a predetermined delay time elapses until the predetermined time elapses.

  FIG. 375 (b) shows the display of the button operation animation for each period of FIG. 375 (a). As shown in (i), the button operation animation of period (i) displays a still image of a samurai holding a sword. As shown in (ii), in the button operation animation for the period (ii), a flame is generated at the feet of the samurai, and a moving image is displayed in which the flame grows up to the waist of the samurai. As shown in (iii), the button operation animation for the period (iii) displays a still image of a samurai from which the flames from both feet have disappeared. In this example, the flame animation is not displayed when the chance button 136 is in a non-pressed state and a certain period of time elapses. As shown in (iv), in the button operation animation for the period (iv), a moving image is displayed in which the flame that has grown up to the waist of the samurai further increases to the head of the samurai. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed again, a moving image subsequent to the moving image executed in the period (ii) immediately before the period (iii) is displayed. As shown in (iv ′) as a modified example, the button operation animation for the period (iv) is a period (ii) in which a flame is generated at both feet of the samurai and the flame grows up to the waist of the samurai. You may make it display a moving image again.

  FIG. 376 (a) shows a timing chart (part 2) relating to the pressing of the chance button 136 and the display of the button operation animation. The upper row shows the state of the detection signal of the chance button sensor in time series. The level OFF of the detection signal of the chance button sensor indicates a state where the pressing of the chance button 136 is not detected, and the level ON indicates a state where the pressing of the chance button 136 is detected.

  The lower part shows the movement of the image in the SP reach production by displaying the button operation animation in time series. The level “still image” is a state in which the image is still, and the level “moving image” is a state in which the image changes with time. The period (1) is a period from when the chance button 136 changes from the non-pressed state to the pressed state (single press) until a predetermined delay time elapses. The delay time is caused by, for example, a time lag from sensor detection to command reception. In the period (1), the button operation animation image is in a stationary state. In the period (2) following the period (1), the chance button 136 changes from the non-pressed state to the pressed state again after a predetermined delay time has elapsed from the non-pressed state to the pressed state. This is the period until the delay time elapses. In the period (3) following the period (2), the chance button 136 is again depressed from the non-depressed state and the predetermined delay time elapses, and then the chance button 136 is depressed and the predetermined time elapses. It is a period until.

  FIG. 376 (b) shows the display of the button operation animation for each period of FIG. 376 (a). As shown in (1), the button operation animation of period (1) displays a still image of a samurai holding a sword. As shown in (2), in the button operation animation of period (2), a flame is generated at both feet of the samurai, and a moving image is displayed in which the flame grows to the waist of the samurai. As shown in (3), in the button operation animation in the period (3), a moving image is displayed in which the flame that has grown up to the waist of the samurai further increases to the head of the samurai. In this way, the same continuous display as when long-pressed may be performed.

  FIG. 377 (a) shows a timing chart (part 3) relating to the pressing of the chance button 136 and the display of the button operation animation. The upper row shows the state of the detection signal of the chance button sensor in time series. The level OFF of the detection signal of the chance button sensor indicates a state where the pressing of the chance button 136 is not detected, and the level ON indicates a state where the pressing of the chance button 136 is detected.

  The lower part shows the movement of the image in the SP reach production by displaying the button operation animation in time series. The level “still image” is a state in which the image is still, and the level “moving image” is a state in which the image changes with time. The period (i) is a period from when the chance button 136 is changed from the non-pressed state to the pressed state (single press) until a predetermined delay time elapses. The delay time is caused by, for example, a time lag from sensor detection to command reception. In the period (i), the button operation animation image is stationary. The period (ii) following the period (i) is a period from when the chance button 136 is changed from the non-pressed state to the pressed state until a predetermined delay time elapses until the chance button 136 is again set to the non-pressed state. The period (iii) following the period (ii) is a period from when the chance button 136 is again non-pressed to when the chance button 136 is again pressed until a predetermined delay time elapses. The period (iv) following the period (iii) is a period from when the chance button 136 is pressed again and a predetermined delay time elapses until a predetermined time elapses.

  FIG. 377 (b) shows the display of the button operation animation for each period of FIG. 377 (a).

As shown in (i), the button operation animation of period (i) displays a still image of a samurai holding a sword. As shown in (ii), in the button operation animation in the period (ii), a moving image in which a flame is generated at both feet of the samurai is displayed. As shown in (iii), the button operation animation for the period (iii) displays a still image of a samurai in a state where flames from both feet are generated. In this example, when a certain animation is executed, a still image state is maintained until the next button operation. As shown in (iv), the button operation animation for the period (iv) displays a moving image in which the flame generated at both feet of the samurai grows up to the waist of the samurai.

  Note that the level “still image” may be a state in which no button operation animation is executed. In addition, although the button operation animation is not executed, it may be a state where a standby animation (animation waiting for the button to be operated) is executed, and a still image is displayed. There may be.

  The level “moving image” may be a state in which button operation animation is being executed.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the fifth to eighth embodiments described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 368 to 377 again.
(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment is
Display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
Operation means (for example, chance button 136);
A game machine equipped with

  The operation means is a means capable of performing at least a first operation (for example, long pressing of the chance button 136),

The operation means is a means capable of performing at least a second operation (for example, continuous hitting of chance buttons 136),
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a first type of display,

  The first type of display is a display related to the operation means (for example, a display related to the chance button 136).

  A first display (for example, a button display for prompting a long press (FIG. 368 (e)) in the first type of display is a display related to the first operation.

  The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a second display (for example, a cut-in display (FIGS. 369 (a) and 371 (g))) of the first type display,

  The display means is means capable of displaying at least a part of the second display in the first case,

The display means is means capable of displaying at least a part of the second display in the second case,
The first case is a case where the first display is displayed.
The first case is a case where the first operation is performed,
The second case is a case where the first display is displayed,
The second case is a case where the second operation is performed.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, even when a second operation different from the first operation is performed, the same display as the result of the first operation is performed. realizable. In addition, the display when the operation is performed is the same regardless of whether the first operation is performed or the second operation is performed, so that the player's willingness to operate is also improved. There are cases where it is possible.

  The “at least part of the second display” may be the whole of the first display or only a part of the first display. Further, “when the first operation is performed” may be a case where the player performs the first operation with the operation means, or the first operation is detected by the detection means. It may be the case, the first operation is detected by the detection means, and the detection may be sent as information (command) to the sub-control means. This may be a case where the sub-control means receives information (command) that there has been an operation.

Further, “when the second operation is performed” may be a case where the player performs the second operation with the operation means, or the second operation is detected by the detection means. It may be a case where the second operation is detected by the detection means, and the detection is transmitted to the sub-control means as information (command). This may be a case where the sub-control means receives information (command) that there has been an operation. Note that “the first display is displayed” may mean “when the first display is displayed” and “through the period during which the first display is displayed”. Or “during the period during which the first display is displayed”. The “first case” may be “when the first display is displayed and the first operation is performed”. The “second case” may be “a case where the first display is displayed and a second operation is performed”.
(2) The pachinko machine 100,

  The display means is means capable of displaying at least the first display in the third case,

The third case is a case where it is a period during which at least an operation of the operation means can be accepted (for example, an operation valid period).
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the first display is a display that is displayed at least during a period in which the operation reception of the operation means is valid, and thus the operation of the operation means may be prompted.
(3) The pachinko machine 100,

The display means is means capable of displaying at least a third display of the first type of display;
The third display is a display related to the second operation.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, since the third display is a display related to the second operation, it may be possible to prompt the operation of the operation means.
(4) The pachinko machine 100,
The display means is means for not displaying the second display in the fourth case,
The fourth case is a case where the first display is displayed,
The fourth case is when the operation means is not operated.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the second display is not displayed when the operation means is not operated, so that the second display is displayed when the operation means is operated. It may be possible to prompt the operation. The “third case” may be “a case where the first display is displayed and the operation means is not operated”.
(5) The pachinko machine 100,
The first operation is an operation different from the second operation.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, even when a second operation different from the first operation is performed, the same display as the result of the first operation is performed. realizable. In addition, the display when the operation is performed is the same regardless of whether the first operation is performed or the second operation is performed, so that the player's willingness to operate is also improved. There are cases where it is possible.
(6) The pachinko machine 100,

The display means is a second type of display (for example, a display that does not use the operation means in the change or pre-reading notice display, a hold icon, a change icon, a fourth pattern, a decorative pattern, a hitting notification, an error display, a mission system, etc. Display, user mode customization display, game method display, option menu, etc.)
It is characterized by that.
Example 9

  The effects performed in the special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the ninth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 378 to 380. In FIG. 378 (a) to FIG. 379 (h), special figure variable games are shown in time series in this order. Further, on the right side of each figure, a chance button 136 as an operation means is shown. The chance button 136 is housed in the circular opening and is urged upward. When the chance button 136 is pressed, the chance button 136 sinks downward, but when the pressing force stops working, it protrudes upward by the urging force and stops at a predetermined position. It has become. In the figure showing the special figure variation game in time series, the passage of time between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures.

  FIG. 378 (a) illustrates the continuation of the SP reach effect continued from FIG. 360 (n). In FIG. 378 (a), a display in which two samurai are fighting is performed as the same SP reach effect as FIG. 360 (o).

  FIGS. 378 (b) to 379 (g) show a flow of a series of button effects and SP reach effects by button operation animation displayed following the SP reach effects shown in FIG. 360 (a). In FIG. 378 (b), a button operation animation is started, and an image of a character string “Long press to save power!” Is displayed as a button display prompting button operation. In the SP reach production, a character image in which one samurai holds a sword is displayed. The state shown in FIG. 378 (b) shows that the button operation acceptance valid period (button operation acceptance period, operation valid period) has not yet started, so that the light emitting means (LED) provided on the chance button 136 (for example, the chance The button lamp 138) is turned off.

  In FIG. 378 (c), as a button display for prompting a button operation, the character string image is switched from “Long press to save power!” To a character string image of “Good” and a button image is displayed. An effective period image is displayed at the bottom.

  In FIG. 378 (d), the character string image is switched from “good” to “long press” as a button display for prompting button operation. In addition, the display mode is changed so that a portion corresponding to the periphery outside the chance button pressing surface of the button image is in a light emitting state. The player knows that the button effect has been started by viewing the image shown in FIG. 378 (d), but at this stage, the operation valid period has not yet started to be counted out of the button operation reception period (button operation reception is not possible). Therefore, even if the chance button 136 is pressed, the pressing operation is not accepted. The chance button 136 is in a non-light emitting state.

  FIG. 378 (e) shows a button operation acceptance permission state in which a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the production shown in FIG. 378 (b) has started. The chance button 136 has a light emitting state on the outer periphery of the pressing surface. At this stage, since the countdown of the operation valid period has started, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the pressing operation is accepted. In this example, the light emission mode of the chance button 136 has changed since the display mode of the button image has changed. However, these changes may be simultaneous, or the light emission mode of the chance button 136 may be changed first. The button image display mode may be changed later.

  In FIG. 378 (f), the player places his hand so as to cover the pressing surface of the chance button 136 and presses the chance button 136. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 is the outer peripheral portion of the pressing surface when not pressed. The state is changed from the state in which only the light is emitted to the state in which the entire button emits light.

  Further, FIGS. 378 (f) and (g) show a state where the player keeps pressing the chance button 136 in accordance with the request for the “long press” operation in the button effect. The button image of the button operation animation is displayed in a display mode in which the entire button is lit. The button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button 136 is pushed into the circular opening. As the button operation acceptance effective period elapses, the effective period image is displayed in a display mode in which the bar-like portion is gradually shortened in the right direction. The character string image of “long press” is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  In the SP reach production between FIG. 378 (f) and FIG. 378 (g), an image is displayed in which a small flame generated at both feet of the samurai gradually grows and becomes a large flame behind the samurai. In FIG. 378 (f), the image is displayed in a display mode in which a small flame is generated at both feet of the samurai. In FIG. 378 (g), the image is displayed in a display mode in which the flame grows to a size that wraps the entire body of the samurai behind the samurai.

  FIG. 378 (g) shows a state immediately before the end of the button operation acceptance valid period. The display of the button operation animation notifies the end of the operation effective period by setting the length of the bar-shaped portion of the effective period image to 0 (zero).

  FIG. 378 (h) shows a state where the operation valid period has ended. Further, the chance button 136 is in a non-light emitting state (the chance button lamp 138 is in a non-light emitting state).

  In FIG. 378 (i), the display mode is changed so that the portion corresponding to the periphery outside the chance button pressing surface of the button image is turned off. Further, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button is pushed up somewhat from within the circular opening. In this example, the display mode of the button image changes after the chance button 136 changes to the off state. However, these may be simultaneously, or the change of the off state of the chance button 136 may occur first. The image display mode may be changed later.

  In FIG. 378 (j), the effect that the meter (gauge) of the effective period image is restored is executed. The bar-shaped part of the predetermined color of the effective period image is displayed so as to become gradually longer in the left direction, for example. Further, an image of a character string “Release power” is displayed above the button image in the effect display area 208d, which suggests that an effect of releasing the force accumulated by long press is started. Thus, the animation which the rod-shaped part of a meter becomes long is performed, and the effect which a meter recovers is performed. This may make it easier for the player to recognize that the button operation acceptance period starts again. It should be noted that the time point shown in FIG. 378 (j) is outside the button operation acceptance period.

  FIG. 379 (a) shows a state continued from FIG. 378 (j). In FIG. 379 (a), an effect of restoring the meter (gauge) of the effective period image is executed. Note that at the time shown in FIG. 379 (a), it is outside the button operation acceptance period.

  In FIG. 379 (b), the effect of restoring the meter of the effective period image has been completed. The bar-shaped part of the predetermined color of the effective period image has the same length as the rectangular frame. Note that at the time shown in FIG. 379 (b), it is outside the button operation acceptance period.

  In FIG. 379 (c), the character string image displayed in the effect display area 208 d is switched from “Release power” to “Blow”. Accordingly, it is suggested that an effect of releasing the accumulated force is executed by pressing the chance button 136 only once in the button operation reception period started thereafter. In addition, the display mode is changed so that the portion corresponding to the periphery outside the pressing surface of the chance button 136 of the button image is in a light emitting state. Further, at the time shown in FIG. 379 (c), since the operation valid period is not yet started to be counted out of the button operation reception period, even if the chance button 136 is pressed, the pressing operation is not accepted. The chance button 136 is in a non-light emitting state.

  In FIG. 379 (d) to FIG. 379 (f), the button operation acceptance period is started. The bar-shaped part of the predetermined color of the effective period image is displayed so as to be gradually shortened to the right, for example, and the remaining period of the operation effective period is notified. In addition, an image of a character string “stroke” is displayed above the button image in the effect display area 208d, and the chance button 136 is requested to be pressed once. In addition, the chance button 136 has a light emitting state on the outer periphery of the pressing surface. At this stage, since the countdown of the operation valid period has started, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the pressing operation is accepted. In this example, the light emission mode of the chance button 136 has changed since the display mode of the button image has changed. However, these changes may be simultaneous, or the light emission mode of the chance button 136 may be changed first. The button image display mode may be changed later.

  When the player presses the chance button 136 only once during the button operation acceptance period, an image of the face of a samurai who has accumulated power as shown in FIG. 379 (g) is displayed. If the chance button 136 is pressed only once in the button operation reception period in which the chance button 136 is requested to be pressed once, the button operation reception period ends regardless of the remaining period. For this reason, the button image and the effective period image displayed in the effect display area 208d are deleted. In addition, the chance button 136 is changed to the off state. The deletion of the button image and the effective period image and the change of the chance button 136 to the unlit state may be performed simultaneously, or one of them may be performed first.

  In FIG. 379 (h), an animation in which a samurai who has accumulated power wins is displayed in the effect display area 208d. As a result, it is notified that the probability of winning the jackpot in the special figure 1 variable game is high, or that the jackpot will be won.

  In this embodiment, the button operation reception period started from FIG. 378 (e) and the button operation reception period started from FIG. 379 (d) have the same length. The length of the button operation acceptance period may be different. In this case, the length of the operation effective period image may be changed during the meter recovery effect, or the rate of decrease of the meter (the rate of decrease of the bar-shaped portion of the predetermined color) may be varied. If pressing of the chance button 136 is not detected in the period of FIGS. 378 (e) to (g), the meter recovery effect of the effective period image performed in FIGS. 378 (j) to 379 (b) is performed. A different effect (for example, an effect after FIG. 361 (a)) may be performed without executing. In addition, even when the pressing of the chance button 136 is not detected in the period of FIGS. 378 (e) to (g), the same effect as when the button operation is detected may be performed.

  FIG. 380 shows a timing chart regarding the display related to the chance button operation acceptance period, chance button operation acceptance, and operation acceptance period in the button effects shown in FIGS. 378 and 379. The upper row shows the validity / invalidity of accepting the chance button operation in time series. The level “valid” indicates a button operation reception period, and the level “invalid” indicates a period outside the button operation reception period. The middle row shows the state of the detection signal of the chance button sensor (chance button detection sensor 426) in time series. The level OFF of the detection signal of the chance button sensor indicates a state where the pressing of the chance button 136 is not detected, and the level ON indicates a state where the pressing of the chance button 136 is detected. The lower row shows whether or not display related to the operation reception period is performed in time series. The level “display” is a state in which display relating to the operation reception period is being executed, and the level “non-display” is a state in which display relating to the operation reception period is not being executed.

  The period (1) corresponds to the period of FIGS. 378 (c) to 378 (f). In the period (1), first, execution of display related to the operation reception period is started. In the present embodiment, the display related to the operation reception period corresponds to the display of the effective period image and the button image shown in FIG. 378 (c). The display related to the operation effective period may be only the display of the effective period image or only the display of the button image. Further, within the period (1), the chance button operation acceptance period is started after the display related to the operation acceptance period is started. Thus, in the present embodiment, the display related to the operation reception period is started before the start of the operation reception period. In addition, after the operation reception period of period (1) starts, the player starts to press the chance button 136 for a long time.

  The period (2) following the period (1) corresponds to the period of FIGS. 378 (e) to 378 (h). Period (2) ends with the end of the chance button operation acceptance period. In the period (2), since the long press of the chance button 136 is continued, the detection signal of the chance button sensor is ON, and the display regarding the operation reception period is continuously displayed.

  The period (3) following the period (2) corresponds to the period of FIGS. 378 (i) to 379 (c). Period (3) is outside the button operation acceptance period. In period (3), the detection signal of the chance button sensor is level OFF after a predetermined delay time from the end of the button operation acceptance period. The delay time is caused by, for example, a time lag from sensor detection to command reception. In period (3), an effect that the meter of the effective period image is restored is executed. For this reason, the display regarding the reception period is continuously displayed.

  The period (4) following the period (3) corresponds to the period of FIGS. 379 (d) to 379 (g). Period (4) is started simultaneously with the start of the button operation acceptance period. In the second half of the period (4), the player presses the chance button 136 only once (FIG. 379 (g)). Thereby, the button operation acceptance period ends after a predetermined delay time, and the display relating to the operation acceptance period is erased. In FIG. 380, the setting length of the button operation reception period started in period (4) is indicated by a one-dot chain line.

Next, a characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the ninth embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 378 to 380 again.
(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment is
Display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
Operation means (for example, chance button 136);
A game machine equipped with
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a first type of display,

  The first type of display is a display related to the operation means (for example, a display related to the chance button 136, a display related to the operation reception period),

  In the first case, the display means may be a first display of the first type of display (for example, display of an effective period image (display in FIG. 378 (c)), a + button image, A button image only)

  Said 1st case is a case where it is a 1st period (For example, the period of FIG. 378 (c)-FIG. 379 (g), the period (1)-(4) of FIG. 380),

  The first period is a period including a second period (for example, period (3) in FIGS. 378 (i) to 379 (c) and 380),

  The second period is a period during which at least an operation of the operation means is not accepted (for example, a period other than the button operation acceptance period (a period outside the button operation acceptance period)),

The first period is a period including at least a period during which the operation of the operation unit can be accepted (for example, a button operation acceptance period).
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, since the display related to the operation is continuously displayed even during the period when the operation of the operation means is not accepted, it is possible to realize a gaming machine having a display characteristic. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to increase the variation of effects related to the operation means and increase the willingness to operate the operation means.

Note that “including the second period” may indicate that a part of the period included in the first period is the second period. Further, “at least the operation of the operation unit can be accepted” may be a period during which the operation of the operation unit is valid, and when it is detected that the operation unit is operated, the sub-control unit ( For example, it may indicate a period in which information (command) indicating that the operation is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400) is valid. Further, “at least not accepting operation of the operation means” may be a period during which the operation of the operation means becomes invalid, or when detecting that the operation means has been operated, to the sub-control means It may indicate a period during which the transmitted information (command) indicating that the operation has been performed is invalid.
(2) The pachinko machine 100,

The first display is a display related to a reception period of the operation means (for example, a display of an effective period image (gauge image, meter image, time display image)).
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, since the first display is a display related to the reception period, the player can visually recognize the display related to the reception period of the operation means, and the motivation to operate the operation means can be enhanced. There is a case. Examples of the first display include a meter image indicating a reception period, a time display (for example, display of an effective period image), and the like.
(3) The pachinko machine 100,

The display means is means capable of displaying at least a second display (for example, display of a button image) of the first type displays in the first case.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the second display can be displayed in the first case. Therefore, by displaying a plurality of displays relating to the operation means, the player is attracted attention and the willingness to operate the operation means is increased. There are cases where it is possible. In addition, there may be cases where the variation of effects related to the operation means can be increased. As the second display, for example, there is a display imitating the operation means. The first type of display may be three or more displays including the first display and / or the second display.
(4) The pachinko machine 100,
The first period is a period including at least a third period;
The first period is a period including at least a fourth period;

  The third period is a period before the second period is started (for example, the period from FIG. 378 (e) to FIG. 378 (h), the period (2) in FIG. 380),

  The fourth period is a period after the second period ends (for example, the period from FIG. 379 (d) to FIG. 379 (g), the period (4) in FIG. 380),

  The third period is a period during which at least the operation of the operation means can be accepted (for example, a button operation acceptance period),

The fourth period is a period during which at least the operation of the operation means can be received (for example, a button operation reception period).
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the first period includes a plurality of periods for accepting operations, so that the player may feel uncomfortable and focus on the first display.
(5) The pachinko machine 100,
The first period is a period including at least a fifth period;

The fifth period is a period during which at least an operation of the operation means is not accepted (for example, a period outside the button operation acceptance period, a period of FIG. 378 (c)).
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the first period includes a plurality of periods in which the operation is not accepted. Therefore, the player may feel uncomfortable and focus attention on the first display.

  The second period may be a period that is started simultaneously with the start of the first period. For example, the button image may be displayed before the operation reception period starts. Alternatively, the second period may be a period started during the period of the first period. For example, it may be a display of a reception period related to two consecutive different operations.

  The second period may be a period that ends during the period of the first period. Alternatively, the second period may be a period that ends at the same time as the end of the first period. For example, the button image may be displayed even after the operation reception period ends.

  Further, the first period may be a period including a third period. The third period may be a period during which at least the operation of the operation means can be accepted. The third period may be a period started during the period of the first period. The second period may be a period that starts after (or immediately after) the third period.

  Further, the first period may be a period including a fourth period. The fourth period may be a period during which at least the operation of the operation means can be received. The fourth period may be a period started during the period of the first period. The second period may be a period that ends before (or immediately before) the fourth period starts.

The display means may display a display related to the first operation when the third period is started. The display means may display a display related to the second operation when the fourth period is started. The first operation and the second operation may be different operations. For example, the required operation may be different, such as displaying the character string “Long press” during the first reception period and displaying the character string “One blow!” During the second reception period.
The first operation and the second operation may be the same operation.

Further, the first display may be an image imitating an operation unit. In addition, the second display may be an image relating to the reception period of the operation means. The first display may be started simultaneously with the second display. Further, the first display may be displayed before the second display. Further, the first display may be displayed after the second display. The first display may be erased simultaneously with the second display. The first display may be erased before the second display. Further, the first display may be erased after the second display.
(6) The pachinko machine 100,

The display means is a second type of display (for example, a display that does not use the operation means in the change or pre-reading notice display, a hold icon, a change icon, a fourth pattern, a decorative pattern, a hitting notification, an error display, a mission system, etc. Display, user mode customization display, game method display, option menu, etc.)
It is characterized by that.
(Example 10)

  Next, a pachinko machine 100 according to Example 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 381 to 388. FIG. 381 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment includes a touch panel-equipped display device m700 on the door 108 with a ball storage tray. The display device m700 with a touch panel is disposed on the right side of the chance button 136 in a state where the pachinko machine 100 is installed in the island facility. The display device m700 with a touch panel has a horizontally-long rectangular surface area. For example, a liquid crystal display device is used for the display device m700 with a touch panel. In the present embodiment, the display device m700 with a touch panel is controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. The display device m700 with a touch panel may be controlled by the second sub-control unit 500.

  On the display screen of the display device with a touch panel m700, a touch panel m700a having substantially the same size and shape as the display area is disposed. The touch panel m700a can be touched with a finger or a slide operation (drag) by the player.

  Next, an effect (part 1) performed in the special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 382 and 383. In FIG. 382 (a) to FIG. 383 (c), special figure variable games are shown in time series in this order. Further, on the right side of each figure, a display device m700 with a touch panel as an operation means is shown. In the figure showing the special figure variation game in time series, the passage of time between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures.

  FIG. 382 (a) illustrates the continuation of the SP reach effect continued from FIG. 360 (n). In FIG. 382 (a), a display in which two samurai are fighting is performed as the same SP reach effect as FIG. 360 (o). In addition, on the display device m700 with a touch panel, the model name of the pachinko machine 100 (in this example, “CR Yoshimune”) is displayed as a default display.

  FIGS. 382 (b) to (j) show a flow of a series of effects and a SP reach effect by display of a touch operation animation performed following the SP reach effect shown in FIG. 360 (a). In FIG. 382 (b), the touch operation animation that prompts the touch operation of the touch panel m700a is started, and the characters “slide your finger!” An image of the column is displayed. In the SP reach production, a character image in which one samurai holds a sword is displayed. The display device m700 with a touch panel displays a character string image “Slide with your finger!” And an arrow image indicating the sliding direction. Note that the touch panel m700a may not be operated as indicated by the arrow image.

  The display switching timing from FIG. 382 (a) to FIG. 382 (b) may be after the decorative symbol display device 208 and the display device with a touch panel m700 first, or the display device with a touch panel m700 first and the decorative symbol display device. 208 may be later or simultaneously. Note that in the state shown in FIG. 382 (b), the touch operation acceptance valid period (touch operation valid period) has not yet started.

  In FIG. 382 (c), the character string image is switched from “Slide your finger!” To the image of the character string “Good!” As a display prompting the touch operation, and the display device m700 with a touch panel is displayed in the effect display area 208d. Is displayed (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a “panel image”), and an effective period image is displayed below the image. The effective period image of the present embodiment is an image indicating a touch operation effective period.

  In FIG. 382 (d), the character string image is switched from “good” to a character string image “slide” as a display prompting the touch operation. In addition, on the display device with a touch panel m700, images of character strings “5 more seconds” and “slide” are displayed. The character string image of “5 more seconds” is an image that counts down the touch operation valid period. By viewing the image shown in FIG. 382 (d), the player knows that the production accompanying the operation of the touch panel m700a has started, but at this stage the touch operation valid period has not yet started to count down. Since it is outside (touch operation unacceptable state), even if the touch panel m700 is touched, the touch operation is not accepted.

  FIG. 382 (e) shows a state in which the touch operation reception valid period has started after a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the effect shown in FIG. 382 (b). When the touch operation acceptance period is started, as shown in FIGS. 382 (e) to (j), an image of an arrow indicating a sliding direction and an image simulating a hand are displayed from left to right in the effect display area 208d. An animation in which the panel image is slid is displayed, and the operation method of the touch panel m700a is notified. The animation, the character string image of “slide”, and the arrow image displayed on the display device with a touch panel m700 are operation request displays for the touch operation of the touch panel m700a.

  In this example, the touch operation effective period is displayed by the effective period image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the character string image of “5 more seconds” displayed on the display device m700 with a touch panel. The touch operation valid period may be displayed only on one of the decorative symbol display device 208 or the touch panel-equipped display device m700. The touch operation valid period may be displayed as an image other than a gauge or a number.

  In FIG. 382 (f), an animation in which an image imitating a hand in the effect display area 208d slides the panel image from left to right during the valid touch operation period is displayed. The touch operation valid period is four seconds.

  In FIGS. 382 (g) to (i), the player slides the touch panel m700a with the right index finger according to the operation request display. As a result, an image is displayed in which a small flame generated at the feet of the samurai gradually grows and becomes a large flame behind the samurai. In FIG. 382 (g), an image is displayed in a display mode in which a small flame is generated at both feet of the samurai. In FIG. 382 (h), the image is displayed in a display mode in which the flame has grown to about half the height of the samurai, and in FIG. 382 (i), the flame wraps the entire samurai body behind the samurai. An image is displayed in a display mode that grows in size. The animation in which the flame image grows greatly is an animation corresponding to the operation of the touch panel m700a.

  In FIG. 382 (j), the player has finished the slide operation of the touch panel m700. On the display device with a touch panel m700, an image of a character string “Good!” Is displayed as a display corresponding to the slide operation. The image of the character string “Good!” May be an image displayed as a notice of the special figure 1 variable game, or may be an image indicating that the touch panel m700 is operated as requested by the operation. . In FIG. 382 (j), the touch operation valid period has expired.

  FIG. 383 (a) shows a state continued from FIG. 382 (j). The panel image, the effective period image, the image imitating the hand, and the arrow image indicating the slide direction in the effect display area 208d are deleted. Moreover, the display mode which has grown up to a position higher than the head of the samurai behind the samurai is maintained, and a flame image is displayed.

  FIG. 383 (b) shows a state in which the display of the cut-in effect in the display mode in which the samurai's face is greatly expanded is executed. The display of the cut-in effect functions as a notice of the change. In addition, in the display device with a touch panel m700 after the end of the cut-in effect, the character string image of “Good!” Is switched to the display of the model name of the pachinko machine 100.

  FIG. 383 (c) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 361 (a). Thereafter, the display shown in FIGS. 361 (b) to (e) is performed, and then FIG. 361 (f) to (h) or FIG. Effects similar to those shown in f ′) to (h ′) are executed.

  Next, an effect (part 2) performed in the special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 384 and 385. In FIG. 384 (a) to FIG. 385 (b), special figure variable games are shown in time series in this order. Further, on the right side of each figure, a display device with a touch panel m700 as a first operation means and a chance button 136 as a second operation means are shown below. In the figure showing the special figure variation game in time series, the passage of time between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures.

  FIG. 384 (a) shows the same state as FIG. 382 (e). In FIG. 384 (a), the touch operation valid period is started. In addition, the button operation effective period is started together with the start of the touch operation effective period. In FIG. 384 (b), in the effect display area 208d, an image of an arrow indicating the slide direction and an animation in which an image imitating a hand slides the panel image from left to right are displayed, and the operation method of the touch panel m700a Is informed.

  In FIGS. 384 (c) to 384 (e), the player does not follow the operation request display of the touch operation, and the player presses down the chance button 136 with a long press. Since the touch operation is valid, but the button operation is valid, the pressing is accepted, and a small flame image is displayed at the foot of the samurai in the effect display area 208d. However, since the operation means (chance button 136) different from the operation means (touch panel m700a) indicated by the operation request display is operated, the flame image does not become large. In FIG. 384 (d), as in FIG. 382 (i), an image of a character string “Good!” Is displayed on the display device m700 with a touch panel. The display on the display device with a touch panel m700 may be different from the case where the touch panel m700a is operated according to the operation request display (as shown in FIG. 382 (j)) (for example, operation requests such as “Bad” and “Miss”). A display indicating that the touch panel m700a is not operated may be displayed. In FIG. 384 (d), the touch operation valid period has ended.

  FIG. 384 (e) shows a state after the touch operation valid period ends. The panel image, the effective period image, and the image imitating the hand in the effect display area 208d are deleted. Further, a flame image is displayed at the foot of the samurai, and a part of the effect when the touch panel m700a is operated (the effect including the flame image shown in FIG. 383 (a)) is executed.

  FIG. 385 (a) shows a state continued from FIG. 384 (e). The effect display area 208d shows a state in which the display of the cut-in effect in the display mode in which the samurai's face is greatly expanded is executed. The display of the cut-in effect functions as a notice of the change. In addition, in the display device with a touch panel m700 after the end of the cut-in effect, the character string image of “Good!” Is switched to the display of the model name of the pachinko machine 100. Note that when the touch panel m700a is not operated according to the operation request, the cut-in effect may not be displayed.

  FIG. 385 (b) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 361 (a). Thereafter, the display shown in FIGS. 361 (b) to (e) is performed, and then FIG. 361 (f) to (h) or FIG. Effects similar to those shown in f ′) to (h ′) are executed.

  Next, an effect (part 3) performed in the special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 386 and 387. FIG. In FIG. 386 (a) to FIG. 387 (i), special figure variable games are shown in time series in this order. Further, on the right side of each figure, a display device m700 with a touch panel as an operation means is shown. In the figure showing the special figure variation game in time series, the passage of time between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures.

  FIG. 386 (a) illustrates the continuation of the SP reach effect continued from FIG. 360 (n). In FIG. 386 (a), the display that two samurai are fighting is performed as the same SP reach production as FIG. 360 (o). In addition, on the display device m700 with a touch panel, the model name of the pachinko machine 100 (in this example, “CR Yoshimune”) is displayed as a default display.

  FIG. 386 (b) to FIG. 387 (f) show a series of effects by the display of touch operation animation performed following the SP reach effect shown in FIG. 360 (a) and the flow of the SP reach effect. In FIG. 386 (b), the touch operation animation that prompts the touch operation of the touch panel m700a is started, and “touch the touch panel for 6 seconds!” Is displayed as a display that prompts the operation of the touch panel m700a (hereinafter also referred to as “touch operation”). The image of the character string is displayed. In the SP reach production, a character image in which one samurai holds a sword is displayed. The display device m700 with a touch panel displays an image of a character string “Please touch with your finger for 6 seconds!” And an image of a zigzag arrow indicating the sliding direction. Note that the touch panel m700a may not be operated as indicated by the arrow image.

  Also, the display switching timing from FIG. 386 (a) to FIG. 386 (b) may be the decorative symbol display device 208 first and the touch panel display device m700 first, or the touch panel display device m700 first. The display device 208 may be after or at the same time. Note that in the state shown in FIG. 386 (b), the acceptance period of the touch operation (touch operation validity period) has not yet started.

  In FIG. 386 (c), the character string image is switched from “touch the touch panel for 6 seconds” to a character string image “good” as a display for prompting the touch operation, and a display device with a touch panel is displayed in the effect display area 208d. An image imitating m700 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “panel image”) is displayed, and an effective period image is displayed below the image. The effective period image of the present embodiment is an image indicating a touch operation effective period.

  In FIG. 386 (d), the character string image is switched from “Good” to “Touch!” As a display prompting the touch operation. Further, a character string image of “6 more seconds” is displayed on the display device m700 with a touch panel. The image of the character string is an image that counts down the touch operation effective period. Although the player knows that the effect accompanying the operation of the touch panel m700a has started by looking at the image shown in FIG. 386 (d), the touch operation acceptance period in which the countdown of the touch operation valid period has not yet started at this stage. Since it is outside (touch operation unacceptable state), even if the touch panel m700 is touched, the touch operation is not accepted.

  FIG. 386 (e) shows a state in which the touch operation reception valid period has started after a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) has elapsed since the production shown in FIG. 386 (b) has started. When the touch operation acceptance period starts, as shown in FIGS. 386 (e) to 387 (f), in the effect display area 208d, an image simulating a hand slides the panel image from left to right in a zigzag manner. The animation of the mode to perform is displayed, and the operation method of the touch panel m700a is notified. The animation, the character string image of “touch!”, And the arrow image displayed on the touch panel-equipped display device m700 are operation request displays for the touch operation of the touch panel m700a.

  In this example, the touch operation effective period is displayed with the effective period image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the character string image of “6 more seconds” displayed on the display device with a touch panel m700. The touch operation valid period may be displayed only on one of the decorative symbol display device 208 or the touch panel-equipped display device m700. The touch operation valid period may be displayed as an image other than a gauge or a number.

  FIG. 387 (a) shows a state continued from FIG. 386 (e). In FIGS. 387 (a) to (f), an image of an arrow indicating the slide operation direction and an image simulating a hand in the effect display area 208d during the touch operation effective period are zigzag from left to right in the effect display area 208d. An animation in which the panel image is slid is displayed. The touch operation valid period is another 5 seconds.

  In FIGS. 387 (b) to (f), the player slides the touch panel m700a in a zigzag manner with the right index finger according to the operation request display. As a result, an image is displayed in which a small flame generated at the feet of the samurai gradually grows and becomes a large flame behind the samurai. In FIG. 387 (b), an image is displayed in a display mode in which a small flame is generated at both feet of the samurai. As shown in FIGS. 387 (c) to (e), the image of the flame gradually increases, and in FIG. 387 (f), the display is such that the flame grows to a size that wraps the entire body of the samurai behind the samurai. An image is displayed in a manner. The animation in which the flame image grows greatly is an animation corresponding to the operation of the touch panel m700a.

  In FIG. 387 (f), the valid touch operation period has ended. FIG. 387 (g) shows a state after the touch operation valid period ends. The panel image, the effective period image, the image imitating the hand, and the arrow image indicating the slide operation direction in the effect display area 208d are deleted. Further, since the slide operation is performed on the display device with a touch panel m700, an image of a character string “GREAT!” Is displayed as a display corresponding to the operation. The image of the character string “GREAT!” May be an image displayed as a notice of the special figure 1 variable game, or may be an image indicating that the touch panel m700 is operated as requested by the operation. . Moreover, the display mode which has grown up to a position higher than the head of the samurai behind the samurai is maintained, and a flame image is displayed.

  FIG. 387 (h) shows a state in which the display of the cut-in effect in the display mode in which the samurai's face is greatly expanded is executed. The display of the cut-in effect functions as a notice of the change.

  FIG. 387 (i) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 361 (a). Thereafter, the display shown in FIGS. 361 (b) to (e) is performed, and then FIG. 361 (f) to (h) or FIG. Effects similar to those shown in f ′) to (h ′) are executed.

  Next, the effect (part 3) performed in the special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In FIGS. 388 (a) to (j), special figure variable games are shown in time series in this order. Further, on the right side of each figure, a display device with a touch panel m700 as a first operation means and a chance button 136 as a second operation means are shown below. In the figure showing the special figure variation game in time series, the passage of time between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures.

  FIG. 388 (a) shows a state in which the touch operation acceptance valid period is started. When the touch operation acceptance period is started, as shown in FIGS. 388 (a) to (i), in the effect display area 208d, an image imitating a hand slides the panel image zigzag from left to right. And an operation method of the touch panel m700a is notified. The animation, the character string image of “touch!”, And the arrow image displayed on the touch panel-equipped display device m700 are operation request displays for the touch operation of the touch panel m700a. Further, since the operation valid period of this example is 6 seconds, an image of a character string “6 more seconds” is displayed on the display device m700 with a touch panel. Also, the button operation effective period is started together with the touch operation effective period.

  In FIG. 388 (c), the player does not follow the operation request display of the touch operation, and the player presses the chance button 136 only once. Although it is during the touch operation effective period, it is also the button operation reception effective period, and the pressing is accepted, and a small flame image is displayed at the foot of the samurai in the effect display area 208d.

  In FIG. 388 (d), after the player stops pressing the chance button 136, in FIG. 388 (e), the player presses the chance button 136 once again. However, since the operation means (chance button 136) different from the operation means (touch panel m700a) indicated by the operation request display is operated, the flame image does not increase from the state shown in FIG. 388 (c). It should be noted that an animation in which the flame image is enlarged may be displayed based on pressing of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 388 (e).

  In FIG. 388 (f), after the player stops pressing the chance button 136, in FIGS. 388 (g) to (i), the player starts the slide operation of the touch panel m700a according to the operation request display. Since the correct operation according to the operation request has been executed, the animation in which the flame increases is resumed, and as shown in FIGS. 388 (g) to (i), the flame image gradually increases, and FIG. 388 (i) Then, the image is displayed in a display mode in which the flame has grown to a size that surrounds the entire body of the samurai behind the samurai. The animation in which the flame image grows greatly is an animation corresponding to the operation of the touch panel m700a.

  In FIG. 388 (i), the touch operation valid period has expired. FIG. 388 (j) shows a state after the touch operation valid period ends. The panel image, the effective period image, the image imitating the hand, and the arrow image indicating the slide operation direction in the effect display area 208d are deleted. Further, since the slide operation is performed on the display device with a touch panel m700, an image of a character string “GREAT!” Is displayed as a display corresponding to the operation. The image of the character string “GREAT!” May be an image displayed as a notice of the special figure 1 variable game, or may be an image indicating that the touch panel m700a is operated as requested by the operation. . In addition, the display mode that has grown to a position higher than the head of the samurai is maintained behind the samurai, and a flame image is displayed. Thereafter, the display mode in which the face of the samurai is greatly expanded as shown in FIG. 387 (h). Display of cut-in effect is executed.

  Thus, in this example, when an operation means (chance button 136) different from the operation means (touch panel m700a) whose operation request display prompts the operation is operated, the animation in which the flame image becomes large is stopped and the flame grows. (FIGS. 388 (c) to (e)), and then, when the operation means for prompting the operation is operated, the animation in which the flame image is enlarged is resumed (FIGS. 388 (g) to (g)). i)). It should be noted that the operation means (touch panel m700a) that prompts the operation is operated to display an animation in which the flame image is enlarged, and then the operation means (chance button 136) that is different from the operation means that prompts the operation is displayed. ) May be stopped so that the animation that enlarges the flame image is stopped and the growth of the flame stops.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 10 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 381 to 388 again.
(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment is

A plurality of operation means (for example, a touch button m700a of the chance button 136 and the display device m700 with a touch panel);
Display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
A game machine equipped with
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a first type of display,

  The first type of display is a display related to a first operation means (for example, the touch panel m700a) among the plurality of operation means.

In the first case, the display means is a means capable of displaying at least a first display of the first type of display (for example, display of a panel image simulating the touch panel m700a),
The first case is a case of the first period,

  The first period is a period during which at least an operation of the first operating means (for example, an operation of the touch panel m700a) can be received (for example, a touch operation effective period),

  The first period is a period (for example, a button operation reception period) during which at least an operation of a second operation unit (for example, the chance button 136) among the plurality of operation units can be received.

  In the second case, the display means displays the second display (for example, the display of the image of the flame behind the samurai (the flames shown in FIGS. 382 (g) to (j)). Display of images))) is a means capable of at least display,

In the third case, the display means displays the third display (for example, the display of the image of the flame behind the samurai (the flames shown in FIGS. 384 (c) and (d)). Display of images))) is a means capable of at least display,
The third display is a display including at least a part of the second display,

  The second case is a case where there is at least an operation of the first operation means in the first case,

The third case is a case where there is at least an operation of the second operation means in the first case.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, when an operation means different from the operation request is operated, at least a part of the second display is displayed, so that it is possible to realize a gaming machine having a display characteristic. Further, even if the second operating means is operated during the display of the first display, the player's willingness to operate may be improved by displaying the third display. In some cases, the player can select an operation means that the player wants to operate and improve the interest of the game. The first display may be a display imitating the operation means. The second display or the third display may be a display (operation result display) according to the operation of the operation means. The “display relating to the first operation means” may be a display (or image) imitating the first operation means, or a display (or image) of the name of the first operation means. It may be. The “first period” means “a period during which at least the operation of the first operation means can be received and a period during which at least the operation of the second operation means among the plurality of operation means can be received”. It may be.
(2) The pachinko machine 100,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a second type of display,

The second type of display is a display related to the second operation means (for example, a button image).
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 provided with the configuration, since the second type of display can be displayed, the willingness to operate may be improved.

The “display relating to the second operation means” may be a display (or image) imitating the second operation means, or a display (or image) of the name of the second operation means. It may be.
(3) The pachinko machine 100,

  The display means is means capable of displaying at least a fourth display (for example, display of an effective period image) of the first type display in the first case,

The fourth display is a display related to a period during which at least the operation of the first operation means can be received.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the reception period is displayed in the first case, the period when at least the operation of the first operation means can be received is displayed, and the first operation means is displayed to the player. It may be possible to prompt the operation of
(4) The pachinko machine 100,

  The display means is means for not displaying at least the second display in the fourth case,

The display means is means for not displaying at least the third display in the fifth case,
The fourth case is a case where there is no operation of the first operation means,
The fifth case is a case where there is no operation of the second operation means.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, since the second display and the third display are not displayed when there is no operation, the willingness to operate may be improved.

  Further, in the above description, “when the operation means is operated” may be a case where the operation means is operated, or a case where the operation means is detected by the detection means. Alternatively, the operation of the operation unit may be detected by the detection unit, and the detection may be transmitted as information (command) to the sub control unit (for example, the first sub control unit 400). This may be the case where the sub-control means receives information (command) that the operation means has been operated.

Further, in the above description, “when the operation means is not operated” may be a case where the operation means is not operated, or a case where the operation means is not detected by the detection means. It may be the case where the operation of the operation means is detected by the detection means, and the case where the detection is not transmitted to the sub-control means as information (command), This may be a case where the sub-control unit has not received information (command) that the operation unit has been operated. If the operation means is not operated, at least the second image may not be displayed. Note that when the operation means is not operated, at least the third image may not be displayed.
(5) The pachinko machine 100,

The first display is a display including at least a display imitating the first operation means (for example, a panel image).
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the first display includes a display imitating the first operation means, and thus there is a case where the operation of the first operation means can be prompted.

  The second display may be an animation display. The third display may be an animation display. Further, the third display may be an animation that is performed up to the middle of the animation display of the second display.

  Next, a general operation method of the touch panel will be described. The operation method described below is an operation method that can be operated on the touch panel m700a of the present embodiment.

  “Tap” means an operation of tapping the touch panel with a finger (corresponding to a click on the PC). In some cases, it is also used as an effect operation corresponding to a press operation of an effect button (for example, a chance button 136) in a pachinko machine or a slot machine.

  “Double tap” means that the touch panel is operated twice (equivalent to double-clicking on the PC). In a pachinko machine or a slot machine, a double tap may be operated once or a plurality of times to be used as an effect operation corresponding to an effect effect of an effect button.

  “Touch” means an operation of touching the touch panel. When touched for a longer time than the “tap” operation time, it is referred to as “touch”. Note that pachinko machines and slot machines may be used for long press operations. It may be regarded as an operation equivalent to “long tap”, “touch and hold”, and “long press” described later, and the same effect may be performed based on these operations.

“Drag” refers to an operation of moving a finger while pressing the touch panel (corresponding to dragging of a PC). In a pachinko machine or a slot machine, even a “flick” or “swipe” operation described later is regarded as an operation equivalent to “drag”, and the same effect may be performed based on these operations.
“Flick” means an operation of lightly touching the touch panel with a finger.
“Swipe” refers to an operation of sliding a finger while touching the touch panel.

  “Long tap”, “touch and hold”, and “long press” refer to operations that keep the touch panel pressed. In a pachinko machine or a slot machine, it may be used as an effect equivalent to a long press operation of an effect button.

  “Multi-tap” is a general term for operations with a plurality of fingers, and includes the following operation examples.

  “Rotation” means an operation of turning another finger with one finger as a fulcrum. In pachinko machines and slot machines (especially in pachinko machines), “rotation” while operating the handle may be less versatile due to the difficulty of operability. For example, high hit reliability is high. The configuration may be performed in association with the effect when there is a high possibility that the player stops the launch operation, such as during SP reach.

  “Pinch” is a general term for an operation of pinching with two fingers, and mainly includes the following two operations.

  “Pinch out” and “pinch open” refer to operations when the touch panel is pressed with two fingers and the space between them is expanded. In a pachinko machine or a slot machine, there is a case where an effect display is performed in an area hidden by an operation of “pinch out” for an area hidden by an effect display or the like.

  “Pinch-in” and “pinch-close” refer to operations when the image is contracted and contracted while being pressed with two fingers. In a pachinko machine or a slot machine, there may be an effect display that hides an area displayed by an effect display or the like by an operation of “pinch in”.

  “Pinch in with four or five fingers” is used when returning to the home screen on tablet devices, etc., but in pachinko machines and slot machines, for example, switching between multiple production modes is described above. In a configuration that can be switched in a predetermined order by any operation (for example, double tap), it can be used for effects such as “pinch-in with four or five fingers” to return to a predetermined effect mode. Good.

  “Swipe up / down or left / right with four or five fingers” is used to display a multitasking bar or switch apps on tablet devices, etc., but on a pachinko machine or slot machine, for example, a big hit history It may be configured to be used for switching display relating to the implementation of information display screens such as the earned balls, switching display relating to implementation of mode setting screens for individual settings such as Daitomo, and the like.

  The “tracing” may be configured to shift to, for example, a game explanation display or an effect explanation display when traced as displayed on the display means.

  “Shake” has a cancel function by shaking the device itself (vibration), but especially in pachinko machines, fraudulent behavior that changes the flow of game balls (the vibration sensor provided in the pachinko machine reacts) There is a risk of misidentification. However, for example, a game ball is not being fired, a demo display screen or an original mode setting screen is being displayed, etc. Also good. In this operation, the operability may be improved by combining with another operation. For example, a function of canceling only one by the above-described operation (for example, “pinch-in”) may be provided, and all may be canceled by “shake”.

  Note that the touch panel may be capable of sensing the force with which the touch panel screen is pressed, and the displayed image may be different depending on whether the touch panel is pressed strongly or weakly. In this case, when the chance button 136 is operated instead of the touch panel, for example, the same effect as when the touch panel is pressed weakly may be performed, or the same effect as when the touch button is pressed strongly may be performed. You may make it display.

When the first display is displayed on the display means, and the first operation means and the second operation means are operated simultaneously, it is determined that the first operation means is operated, The second display may be displayed, or it may be determined that the second operation means has been operated and the third display may be displayed. The first operation means and the second operation may be displayed. It may be determined that both of the means have been operated and the second display may be displayed, or it may be determined that both the first operating means and the second operating means have been operated and the third display is displayed. It is also possible to determine that both the first operation means and the second operation means have been operated, and display a fourth display different from both the second display and the third display. It may be determined that both the first operating means and the second operating means have been operated, and nothing is displayed. May be the odd, it is determined that no operation of both the first operating means and the second operating means, anything may not be displayed.
(Example 11)

  Next, a pachinko machine 100 according to Example 11 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 389 to 393.

  FIG. 389 shows a chance button 136 provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 389 (a) is an external perspective view of the chance button 136, and FIG. 389 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the chance button 136.

  As shown in FIG. 389 (a), the chance button 136 has a button cover m800 and a button m802. The button cover m800 is formed of a transparent resin material, for example, and has a hollow cylindrical shape.

  As shown in FIGS. 389 (a) and (b), the button m802 has a cylindrical shape, and is formed of, for example, a resin material. The button m802 is accommodated in the button cover m800 so that the bottom surface and the side surface of the button m802 face the bottom surface and the side surface of the button cover m800, respectively. Further, the button cover m800 and the button m802 protrude upward, and the player can operate the chance button 136 by pressing the button cover m800 to press the button m802.

  As shown in FIG. 389 (b), a plurality (for example, 3) of LEDs m804 are arranged in the button m802. The LED m804 is used as a light source for the chance button 138. A detection piece m806 is provided on the lower bottom surface of the button m802. A sensor m808 is arranged to face the detection piece m806. For example, a photosensor is used as the sensor m808. When the button cover m800 is pressed and the button m802 is pressed down, the detection piece m806 is detected by the sensor m808. As a result, the first sub-control unit 400 detects pressing of the chance button 136.

  In addition, a columnar protrusion extending vertically downward is formed at the center of the lower bottom surface of the button m802. A compression coil spring m810 is fitted into the protrusion. When the button cover m800 is pushed down and the button m802 is pushed down, the compression coil spring contracts. When the pressing of the button cover m800 is stopped, the contracted compression coil spring m802 returns to the original state, so that the button m802 and the button cover m800 protrude upward. The chance button 136 is housed in the circular opening and is urged upward. When the chance button 136 is pressed, the chance button 136 sinks downward, but when the pressing force stops working, it protrudes upward by the urging force and stops at a predetermined position. It has become. As a result, the button cover m800 and the button m802 are urged upward. When the button cover m800 and button m802 are pressed, the button cover m800 and the button m802 sink downward. ing.

  The chance button 136 has a motor m812. The button cover m800 is driven (rotated) by a motor m812 via a gear. As a result, the button cover m800 can rotate, for example, counterclockwise around the vertical direction as the rotation axis. The motor m812 is controlled by the first sub control unit 400, for example. When the button cover m800 is pressed, the motor m812 is also moved downward along with the pressing.

  Next, an effect performed in the special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In FIGS. 390 (a) to (j), special figure variable games are shown in time series in this order. Further, on the right side of each figure, a chance button 136 as an operation means is shown. In the figure showing the special figure variation game in time series, the passage of time between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures.

  FIG. 390 (a) illustrates the continuation of the SP reach effect continued from FIG. 360 (n). In FIG. 390 (a), the same SP reach effect as in FIG. 360 (o) is executed. In FIG. 390 (b), the same SP reach effect as in FIG. 361 (a) is executed. In the image by the SP reach effect in FIG. 390 (b), the image display area is divided into upper and lower parts by a substantially horizontal boundary line, and the character image of one samurai is displayed in the upper display area, and in the lower display area. The character image of the other samurai is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 390 (b), the button display is not performed immediately before the start of the button operation animation, and the light emitting means (LED) provided in the chance button 136 is in the off state.

  FIGS. 390 (c) to (j) show a flow of a series of button effects and SP reach effects by displaying a button operation animation performed following the SP reach effects shown in FIG. 390 (b). FIG. 390 (c) shows a state in which the button image and the effective period image are displayed on the front surface simultaneously by the fade-in process with the image by the SP reach effect as the background image. In the present embodiment, the button image has a display mode simulating the button m802. Note that the button image and the effective period image may not be displayed at the same time, and one image may be displayed before the other image. The chance button 136 may be in a light emitting state even outside the button operation acceptance valid period. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 may be the same as or different from the light emission mode during button operation and / or non-operation during the reception valid period.

  In FIG. 390 (d), in the button effect, a button image and an effective period image are displayed below the button image. By viewing the image shown in FIG. 390 (d), the player knows that the button production has started, but at this stage, the button operation acceptance period has not started, and the player cannot enter the button operation. Even if the button 136 is pressed, the pressing operation is not accepted. The chance button 136 is in a non-light emitting state (shown in white in the drawing).

  In FIG. 390 (e), an animation in which the button image rotates, for example, counterclockwise is displayed. In addition, a character string image “press” is displayed above the button image. Further, the chance button 136 has a light emitting state (shown in gray in the drawing) in the outer peripheral portion of the button m802. In the button display related to the button effect, the display mode is changed so that the portion corresponding to the periphery around the chance button pressing surface of the button image is in a light emitting state (shown in gray in the drawing). At this stage, since the button operation accepting period is not started, the button operation accepting state is disabled. Therefore, even if the chance button 136 is pressed, the pressing operation is not accepted. In this example, the chance button 136 emits light after the animation in which the button image rotates, but these may be simultaneously, or the chance button 136 changes to the light emitting state first, and the button image The rotation animation may start later. The rotation animation of the button image may be an animation that rotates faster than the rotation of the button cover m800.

  In FIG. 390 (f), the button cover m800 of the chance button 136 starts to rotate counterclockwise (in the drawing, the direction of rotation of the button cover m800 is indicated by an arrow). Note that the button m802 in the button cover m800 does not rotate. At this stage, the button operation acceptance period is started. In this example, the rotation of the button cover m800 is started after the animation of rotating the button image is started. However, the start of the button cover m800 may be simultaneous, or the rotation of the button cover m800 is started first. The rotation animation of the button image may be started later.

  FIG. 390 (g) shows a state in which the button operation acceptance period has slightly passed and the bar-shaped portion of the effective period image display is somewhat shortened in the right direction.

  In FIG. 390 (h), the button operation acceptance period has elapsed, and the player has pressed the chance button 136. Based on this pressing, the light emission mode of the chance button 136 is changed to a mode in which the entire button m802 emits light. On the other hand, the rotation animation of the button image is continued, and the rotation operation of the button cover m800 is continued.

  FIG. 390 (i) shows a state where the button operation acceptance period has ended. In FIG. 390 (i), the rotation operation of the button cover m800 is completed, and the chance button 136 is changed to the unlit state. Note that the rotation animation of the button image ends after a predetermined time elapses after the operation valid period ends.

  In FIG. 390 (j), after the operation effective period ends, the button image and the effective period image are erased, and the image of the face of one of the samurai is displayed. The image of the samurai's face up is displayed as a notice of the special figure 1 variable game.

  FIG. 391 is a table comparing the rotational speeds of the operating means and the rotating means of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The operation unit is, for example, a chance button 136, and the rotation unit is, for example, a rotation animation of a button image. In addition to the animation, the rotating means may be an operating means different from the chance button 136 or a rotating movable means.

  FIG. 391 shows the state of the operating means and the rotating means at times t0 to t8. The states of the operating means and rotating means at times t5 to t7 are omitted. The intervals between times t0 to t8 are equal. In FIG. 391, “time (s)” (seconds), “operation means”, “operation means (plan view)”, “rotation means”, and “rotation means (plan view)” are shown from the top. The “operating means” column shows a perspective view of the chance button 136, and the “operating means (plan view)” column shows a plan view of the chance button 136. At the chance button 136, the button cover m802 is rotating. The column of “rotating means” shows a perspective view of the rotating means, and the column of “rotating means (plan view)” shows a plan view of the rotating means.

  In FIG. 391, in order to compare the rotation speeds of the operating means and the rotating means, black spot markers are illustrated on the circumferences of the operating means and the rotating means. The marker position at time t0 is set to a rotation angle of 0 degree, and the rotation speeds of the operation means and the rotation means are compared.

  At time t1, the operating means is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise, and the rotating means is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise. At time t2, the operating means is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise, and the rotating means is rotated 180 degrees counterclockwise. At time t3, the operating means is rotated 135 degrees counterclockwise, and the rotating means is rotated 270 degrees counterclockwise. At time t4, the operating means is rotated 180 degrees counterclockwise, and the rotating means is rotated 360 degrees counterclockwise. In this way, the operating means makes a half turn at t4 seconds, and the rotating means makes a full turn at t4 seconds. At time t8. The operating means is rotated 360 degrees counterclockwise, and the rotating means is rotated 720 degrees counterclockwise. Between time t0 and time t8, the operating means is rotated once and the rotating means is rotated twice.

  In this example, the rotation speed of the rotation means is faster than the rotation speed of the operation means. Note that the rotation speeds of the operation means and the rotation means may be the same, and the rotation speed of the operation means may be faster than the rotation means of the rotation means.

  FIGS. 392 (a) to (c) are tables comparing the rotational speeds of the operating means and the rotating means of the pachinko machine 100 according to the modification of the present embodiment. In FIG. 392 (a), the operation means is, for example, a chance button 136, and the letter “PUSH” is attached to the button cover m800 of the chance button 136 of this example. The rotating means is, for example, a rotating animation of a button image imitating the button m802 with the letters “PUSH” or a movable means attached with “PUSH”.

  FIG. 392 (a) shows the state of the operating means and the rotating means at times t0 to t8. The intervals between times t0 to t8 are equal. The states of the operating means and rotating means at times t5 to t7 are omitted. FIG. 392 (a) shows “time (s)” (seconds), “operation means (plan view)”, and “rotation means (plan view)” from the top. A column of “chance button (plan view)” shows a plan view of the chance button 136. At the chance button 136, the button cover m800 is rotating. The “rotating means (plan view)” column shows a plan view of the rotating means.

  In FIG. 392 (a), in order to compare the rotational speeds of the operating means and the rotating means, a black dot marker is shown on the circumference of the operating means and the rotating means. The marker position at time t0 is set to a rotation angle of 0 degree, and the rotation speeds of the operation means and the rotation means are compared. In FIG. 392 (a), the rotation speed of the operation means is the same as the rotation speed of the operation means shown in FIG. In FIG. 392 (a), the rotation speed of the rotation means is the same as the rotation speed of the rotation means shown in FIG.

  In this example, the button cover m800 of the chance button 136 as the operation means is rotated, and the characters “PUSH” attached to the button cover m800 are also rotated. The character “PUSH” attached to the rotating means is also rotated.

  In FIG. 392 (b), the operation means is, for example, a chance button 136, and a letter “PUSH” is attached to the button m802 of the chance button 136 of this example. The rotating means is, for example, a rotating animation of a button image imitating the button m802 with the letters “PUSH” or a movable means attached with “PUSH”.

  FIG. 392 (b) shows the state of the operating means and the rotating means at times t0 to t8. The intervals between times t0 to t8 are equal. The states of the operating means and rotating means at times t5 to t7 are omitted. FIG. 392 (b) shows “time (s)” (seconds), “operation means (plan view)”, and “rotation means (plan view)” from the top. A column of “chance button (plan view)” shows a plan view of the chance button 136. At the chance button 136, the button cover m800 is rotating. The “rotating means (plan view)” column shows a plan view of the rotating means.

  In FIG. 392 (b), in order to compare the rotational speeds of the operating means and the rotating means, a black spot marker is shown on the circumference of the operating means and the rotating means. The marker position at time t0 is set to a rotation angle of 0 degree, and the rotation speeds of the operation means and the rotation means are compared. In FIG. 392 (b), the rotation speed of the operation means is the same as the rotation speed of the operation means shown in FIG. In FIG. 392 (b), the rotation speed of the rotation means is the same as the rotation speed of the rotation means shown in FIG.

  In this example, since the button cover m800 of the chance button 136 as the operation means is rotating, the character “PUSH” attached to the button m802 is not rotated. On the other hand, the character “PUSH” attached to the rotating means is rotated. As described above, the character “PUSH” of the operating means is not rotated, but the character “PUSH” of the rotating means is not rotated. The character “PUSH” of the operating means may be rotated and the character “PUSH” of the rotating means may not be rotated.

  In FIG. 392 (c), the operation means is, for example, the chance button 136, and the letter “PUSH” is attached to the button m802 of the chance button 136 of this example. The rotating means is, for example, a rotating animation of an image simulating a trefoil moth or a movable means with a trefoil love attached.

  FIG. 392 (c) shows the state of the operating means and the rotating means at times t0 to t8. The intervals between times t0 to t8 are equal. The states of the operating means and rotating means at times t5 to t7 are omitted. FIG. 392 (c) shows “time (s)” (seconds), “operation means (plan view)”, and “rotation means (plan view)” from the top. A column of “chance button (plan view)” shows a plan view of the chance button 136. At the chance button 136, the button cover m800 is rotating. The “rotating means (plan view)” column shows a plan view of the rotating means.

  In FIG. 392 (c), in order to compare the rotational speeds of the operating means and the rotating means, a black spot marker is illustrated on the circumference of the operating means and the rotating means. The marker position at time t0 is set to a rotation angle of 0 degree, and the rotation speeds of the operation means and the rotation means are compared. In FIG. 392 (b), the rotation speed of the operation means is the same as the rotation speed of the operation means shown in FIG. In FIG. 392 (b), the rotation speed of the rotation means is the same as the rotation speed of the rotation means shown in FIG.

  In this example, since the button cover m800 of the chance button 136 as the operation means is rotating, the character “PUSH” attached to the button m802 is not rotated. Further, the rotating means of this example is not an image or the like imitating the operating means. Thus, the operation means and the rotation means may not have a common form, shape, or aspect.

  FIG. 393 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the rotation speeds of the operation unit and the rotation unit change. The upper part of FIG. 393 (a) shows a state where the rotating means is rotating. The rotation means in FIG. 393 (a) is a button image rotation animation. In FIG. 393 (a), the display area of the display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) is indicated by a dotted line. An effective period image is displayed below the button image. The operation means in this example is a chance button 136.

  FIG. 393 (a) shows the passage of time from left to right. The left end of FIG. 393 (a) shows the rotating means and the rotating operation of the operating means at the start of the button operation acceptance period. The center and the right end of FIG. 393 (a) show a state in which the rotation speed of the rotation means and the operation means is increased during the button operation reception period. The rotational speed of the rotating means and the operating means increases with the passage of time. In this example, the rotation speeds of the rotating means and the operating means are always the same. When the rotational speed changes, the rotational speed of the operating means may change after the rotational speed of the rotating means changes, the rotational speed may change simultaneously, or the rotational speed of the operating means may be The rotation speed of the operating means may change after the change. Further, the rotation speeds of the rotating means and the operating means may be gradually changed or may be changed at a stroke. Further, the rotational speed may be increased or decreased.

  FIG. 393 (b) is a table comparing the rotation speeds when the rotation speeds of the operation means and the rotation means change. The operation unit is, for example, a chance button 136, and the rotation unit is, for example, a rotation animation of a button image. In addition to the animation, the rotating means may be an operating means different from the chance button 136 or a rotating movable means.

  FIG. 393 (b) shows the state of the operating means and the rotating means at times t0 to t5. The intervals between times t0 to t5 are equal. FIG. 393 (b) shows “time (s)” (seconds), “operation means”, “operation means (plan view)”, “rotation means”, and “rotation means (plan view)” from the top. The “operating means” column shows a perspective view of the chance button 136, and the “operating means (plan view)” column shows a plan view of the chance button 136. At the chance button 136, the button cover m800 is rotating. The column of “rotating means” shows a perspective view of the rotating means, and the column of “rotating means (plan view)” shows a plan view of the rotating means.

  In FIG. 393 (b), in order to compare the rotation speeds of the operating means and the rotating means, black spot markers are illustrated on the circumferences of the operating means and the rotating means. The marker position at time t0 is set to a rotation angle of 0 degree, and the rotation speeds of the operation means and the rotation means are compared.

  At time t1, the operating means is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise, and the rotating means is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise. At time t2, the operating means is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise, and the rotating means is rotated 180 degrees counterclockwise. At time t3, the rotation speed of the operating means and the rotating means is increased. At time t3, the operating means is rotated 180 degrees counterclockwise, and the rotating means is rotated 360 degrees counterclockwise. At time t4, the operating means is rotated 270 degrees counterclockwise, and the rotating means is rotated 540 degrees counterclockwise. At time t4, the operating means is rotated 360 degrees counterclockwise, and the rotating means is rotated 720 degrees counterclockwise.

  From time t0 to time t2, the rotation speed of the operation means is 45 degrees / t1, and the rotation speed of the rotation means is 90 degrees / t1. At time t3, the rotation speed increases. From time t3 to time t5, the rotation speed of the operating means is 90 degrees / t1, and the rotation speed of the rotation means is 180 degrees / t1. In this example, the rotation speeds of the operation means and the rotation means are doubled from t3.

  In this embodiment, the operating means and the rotating means rotate in one direction (left rotation), but may be configured to be able to rotate in the reverse direction (right rotation). Further, when the operation unit is controlled to rotate in the direction opposite to the specific direction while rotating in the specific direction, the rotation unit may also rotate in the reverse direction. In that case, the operation means may start reverse rotation before the rotation means, and the operation means and the rotation means may start reverse rotation at the same time. You may make it start reverse rotation previously.

  Further, when the operation unit performs the rotation in the direction opposite to the specific direction while rotating in the specific direction, the operation unit may temporarily stop or reduce the speed at the switching timing. In that case, the rotation means may perform the same operation as the operation means, or may perform the reverse rotation without performing the switching timing operation.

Next, a characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the eleventh embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 389 to 393 again.
(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment is
Operation means (for example, chance button 136);
Rotation means (for example, a button image displayed on the display means);
A game machine equipped with
The operation means is means capable of executing at least a first action,
The rotating means is means capable of executing at least a second operation,

  The first operation is an operation in which at least a part of the operation means rotates in a first mode,

The second operation is an operation in which at least a part of the rotating means rotates in the second mode.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, since the rotation speed of the operation means is different from the rotation speed of the rotation means, it is possible to realize a gaming machine having characteristics of the operation means. In addition, there are cases where the variation of the production can be increased and the interest of the game can be improved. Here, the rotation means includes an operation means different from the chance button 136, a rotating movable means, an image (including an image imitating the operation means), and the like. Note that “at least a part of the operating means rotates at the first speed” may indicate that only a part of the operating means rotates at the first speed, It may indicate that it rotates at a single speed. Further, “at least a part of the rotating means rotates at the second speed” may indicate that only a part of the rotating means rotates at the second speed, It may indicate that the motor rotates at a second speed. The “first aspect” may be the first speed. The “second aspect” may be a second speed.
(2) The pachinko machine 100,

  In the first case, the first part in the operation means is a part that makes a round in a first time (for example, t0 to t8 seconds shown in FIG. 391),

  In the second case, the second part of the rotating means is a part that makes a round in a second time (for example, t0 to t4 seconds shown in FIG. 391),

  The first case is a case where the operation means rotates in the first mode,

The second case is a case where the rotating means rotates in the second mode.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, since the time for making a round is different, there are cases where the variation of the production can be increased and the interest of the game can be improved.
(3) The pachinko machine 100,
Display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a first type of display,
The first type of display is a display related to the operation means,

  The display means is means capable of displaying a first display of the first type display in the third case,

The third case is a case where at least the first operation is executed by the operation means.
The rotating means is the first display.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, there is a display means, and since the rotation means is an image displayed on the display means, there is a case where attention can be paid to the operation means and the willingness to operate can be improved.
(4) The pachinko machine 100,

  The first display is a display displayed at least in an operation reception period (for example, a button operation reception period),

The operation reception period is a period during which at least operation of the operation means can be received.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the first display is a display that is displayed at least during the reception period of the operation means. Therefore, there is a case where attention can be paid to the operation means and the willingness to operate can be improved.
(5) The pachinko machine 100,
The operation means is a button (for example, a chance button 136),
The first display is a display including at least a button image;

The button image is an image imitating at least a part of the button (for example, button m802).
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, since the first display is an image imitating at least a part of the button, attention may be paid to the button, and the willingness to operate may be improved.

  As a comparison between the rotating means and the operating means, (1) Regarding the rotation start timing, the operating means may start rotating before the rotating means. Further, the operating means may start rotating simultaneously with the rotating means. Alternatively, the operation means may start rotating after the rotation means. When the rotation means is a display, the rotation start timing can be read as the display start timing.

  As a comparison between the rotating means and the operating means, (2) With regard to the rotation end timing, the operating means may end the rotation before the rotating means. Further, the operating means may end the rotation simultaneously with the rotating means. Alternatively, the operation means may end the rotation after the rotation means. When the rotation means is a display, the rotation end timing can be read as the timing at which the display is erased.

  (3) Regarding the rotational speed, the first speed may be faster than the second speed. The first speed may be the same speed as the second speed. Alternatively, the first speed may be slower than the second speed.

  Further, the rotating means may be a movable means. Further, the rotation unit may be a second operation unit. The operation means may be a first operation means.

  Further, regarding the operation means and the image, the operation means may be composed of a first means (cover) and a second means (operation unit). The cover may be configured to cover at least a part of the operation unit, where at least a part may be only a part and indicates that the entire surface that can be operated by the player is covered. May be. Further, only the first means (cover) may rotate. The first display may include a display that at least simulates the second means.

  The first display may be a display that does not include a display imitating the first means. Moreover, the display (for example, light emission mode, PUSH display, etc.) displayed on the second means may be included in the first display. In that case, the display imitating the display displayed on the second means may be rotated or may not be rotated. For example, if it is displayed in a rotated manner, it can be falsely displayed that it is not actually rotated but rotated in the image. If it is not rotated, only a part of it is not rotated, so the player May be uncomfortable.

  Further, regarding the display when the rotation speed of the operation means increases, the operation means may be a means that can rotate at a third speed. Further, the rotating means may be a means capable of rotating at the fourth speed. The operating means may change from the first speed to the third speed (hereinafter referred to as “first change”), and the rotating means may change from the second speed to the fourth speed (hereinafter referred to as “second speed”). Change).

  In addition, the first change may be a change performed before the second change. Further, the first change may be a change performed simultaneously with the second change. Further, the first change may be a change performed after the second change. The third speed / fourth speed may be faster than the first speed / second speed. The third speed / fourth speed may be slower than the first speed / second speed. The third speed / fourth speed may be the same speed as the first speed / second speed. The third speed / fourth speed may be in the same rotational direction as the first speed / second speed. Further, the third speed / fourth speed may be in a rotational direction (reverse rotation) different from the first speed / second speed. Further, the operating means may be a means that gradually changes from the first speed to the third speed. Further, the operation means may be a means that changes at a stroke from the first speed to the third speed. The rotating means may be a means that gradually changes from the second speed to the fourth speed. The rotating means may be a means that gradually changes from the second speed to the fourth speed.

  Further, regarding the big button display and the reduced button display, the display means may be a means capable of displaying the second display of the first type display in the third case. The second display may be a display obtained by enlarging or reducing the first display. In addition, the second display may be a rotation display at the fifth speed.

  Further, the fifth speed in the second display may be the same speed as the second speed in the first display. In addition, the fifth speed in the second display may be slower than the second speed in the first display, or may be a faster speed. Moreover, you may perform the display which rotation speed changes. Further, the timing at which the rotation speed changes may be the same for the first display and the second display, and one display may change before the other display. Further, the change amount of the rotation speed may be the same between the first display and the second display, or may be such a change amount that one display becomes faster / slower than the other display.

  It should be noted that when a condition for executing the first operation is satisfied (for example, transmission of a command from the second sub-control unit 500, reception of a command from the second sub-control unit 500), If the means does not rotate (due to a failure or the like), the rotating means may perform the second operation, may not execute the second operation, or an operation different from the second operation (For example, a vibration operation or the like) may be performed.

  It should be noted that when a condition for executing the first operation is satisfied (for example, transmission of a command from the second sub-control unit 500, reception of a command from the second sub-control unit 500), If the means does not rotate (due to a failure, etc.), the first display in which the second action is performed may be displayed, and the first display in which the second action is performed is displayed. The display may not be displayed, or a display different from the first display (for example, a display such as “The button is broken”) may be performed.

  The first display may be a display including a display that performs the second operation. Further, the first display may be a display capable of executing at least the second operation. Here, the “display for performing the second action” may be an animation for performing the second action.

The display imitating the first operation means may be a display including the second operation. Here, “display including the second motion” may be an animation that performs the second motion.
(Example 12)

  Next, the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 12 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of setting an original mode. In the original mode, the game machine is capable of setting the original mode, and history information on the result of playing the game with the original mode set is stored in the game machine. At the game stand, various privileges (for example, an effect with a low appearance rate and an effect indicating information related to the profit of the game) according to the history information are given. When the game in which the original mode is set is to be ended, individual setting information, which is individual player information, including history information stored in the game table is input to the server. Each time a game in which the original mode is set is finished, individual setting information including new history information reflecting the history of the game is issued from the gaming table. When the player inputs individual setting information including new history information to the server, the individual setting information stored on the server side is updated. When the individual setting information stored in the server is input to the game machine when the next game is played, a privilege according to the history information included in the input individual setting information is also provided at the next game. This individual setting information is included in an encrypted password having a predetermined number of digits, and is exchanged between the game console-player (external device apparatus) -server. The individual setting information also includes a model code that identifies the model of the gaming machine, and the gaming machine stores a corresponding model code. In specifications where history information can be used in common between different models, there are multiple corresponding model codes. In specifications where history information can be used only between the same models, there is only one corresponding model code. .

  FIG. 394 (a) is a screen transition diagram of the original mode displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 when the original mode is set. When the chance button 136 is operated after the demonstration screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the initial screen of the option menu is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Here, the demonstration screen is a customer waiting screen and is executed as one of demonstration effects. The demonstration effect is an effect that is executed when the next symbol variation display does not start until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the symbol variation display ends. More specifically, the demonstration effect is not only a simulation variation of the symbol variation display, but also, for example, a title display of a gaming table, a predetermined character, etc. are displayed to explain the characteristics of the gaming table. The effects to be performed, the lamp effects accompanying these effects, the sound effects, and the like are applicable. In the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400, a demonstration flag is prepared. When the demonstration flag is set to ON, the first sub-control unit 400 displays a demonstration screen (demo screen) on the decorative symbol display device 208. ) Is displayed, and the decoration symbol display device 208 displays a demo screen. The demonstration effect ends with a predetermined opportunity. For example, when the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232 receives a new prize, the process is terminated. As the demonstration performance ends, the demo flag is set off.

  On the initial screen of the option menu, a “user menu (display of game-related information for players)” and “actual machine customization” are prepared. Note that, on the initial screen of the option menu, model information display, jackpot history display, sound adjustment, and brightness adjustment may be prepared as selectable menus.

  As shown in the transition diagram of FIG. 394 (a), the “OK” button or the chance button 136 of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed while the “user menu” is selected (hereinafter, “decision operation”). And the user menu screen is displayed. Details of the user menu screen will be described later.

  When the “actual machine customization” is selected and a determination operation is performed by pressing the confirmation button or the chance button 136, the display shifts to the real machine customization screen.

  In the user menu or actual machine customization, when a determination operation is performed after a predetermined setting, the option menu is displayed again. When the cancel (C) button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed while the option menu is displayed, the screen returns to the demonstration screen.

  When the initial screen of the option menu, the user menu screen, the actual machine customization screen, etc. are displayed (including during the selection operation etc.), the game ball is placed in the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232. When a ball is entered and the symbol variation start condition is satisfied (when symbol variation display is started), these screen displays are canceled and the decorative symbol variation display is performed.

  FIG. 394 (b) is a screen transition diagram of the user menu displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 when the user mode is set. In the user menu, “member registration”, “password entry”, “two-dimensional code issue”, “personal data clear”, and “end” are provided as selectable menus.

  When the determination operation is performed while “member registration” is selected, the screen shifts to a “two-dimensional code display (for member registration)” screen. The screen displays a two-dimensional code that needs to be read when registering as a member. When a determination operation is performed while the screen is displayed, the screen shifts to a “password input screen”, and when the setting operation unit 137 or the chance button 136 is not operated for a predetermined time (for example, 120 seconds), the cancel button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed. If it is, the “option menu” is displayed. On the “password entry screen”, a password obtained by reading a two-dimensional code can be entered.

  In addition, when a determination operation is performed while “password input” in the user menu is selected, the screen shifts to a “password input screen”. When the password is entered and determined, an “authentication success message” is displayed if the password is correct, and an “authentication failure message” is displayed if the password is incorrect. When the “authentication failure message” is displayed, it is possible to select to enter the password again or exit the user menu. If you choose to enter the password again, you will be transferred to the “Password Input Screen”. Further, when the setting operation unit 137 or the chance button 136 is not operated for a predetermined time (for example, 120 seconds) while the “password input screen” is displayed, or when the cancel button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed, the “option menu” is displayed. ”.

  In addition, if a decision operation is made while selecting “Issue 2D Code” in the user menu, a “Issue Confirmation Message” will be displayed to confirm whether a 2D code may be issued when the player is logged in to the user mode. "Is displayed, and if the user mode is not logged in, a" password not entered message "is displayed. If a decision operation is performed while the “Issuance Confirmation Message” is displayed, a “two-dimensional code (for game end)” screen that displays a two-dimensional code is displayed. If a decision operation is further performed, a “confirmation message” is displayed. When “No” is selected, “two-dimensional code display (for game end)” is displayed again, and when “Yes” is selected, the “option menu” is displayed. Further, if a determination operation is performed while the “password not entered message” is displayed, the “option menu” is displayed.

  In addition, if a decision is made while selecting “Clear Personal Data” in the user menu, an “Erase Confirmation Message” will be displayed to confirm whether or not the personal data can be erased if the player is logged into the user mode. Is displayed, and if the user mode is not logged in, a “password not entered message” is displayed. When an “erase confirmation message” is displayed and a determination operation is performed with “Yes”, an “erase completion message” is displayed, and then the operation proceeds to an “option menu”. When the “Erase Confirmation Message” is displayed and the decision operation is “No”, the screen moves to the “User Menu”. Further, if a determination operation is performed while the “password not entered message” is displayed, the “option menu” is displayed.

  Further, when a determination operation is performed while the user menu “end” is selected, the screen shifts to an “option menu”.

  Next, the demonstration screen will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 395 shows screen transitions of the decorative symbol display device 208 in time series.

  FIG. 395 (a) shows a state after the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure F (offset symbol) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and "decoration 3-decoration 1-decoration 1" is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Also, the special figure d (out of symbol), which is the result of the most recent special figure 2 variable game, is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 214, and the result of the most recent general figure variable game is displayed on the general figure display device 210. Normal figure B (out-of-line symbol) is stopped and displayed. Also, since the special figure 1 hold is 0, all the special figure 1 hold lamps 218 are turned off, and since the special figure 2 hold number is 0, all the special figure 2 hold lamps 220 are turned off. Since the usual number of holds is 0, all of the usual figure hold lamps 216 are turned off. Further, the special figure 1 hold icon display area A does not display the special figure 1 hold icon, and the fluctuation icon display area C does not display the fluctuation icon.

  395 (b) to (d) show a state in which a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since FIG. 395 (a). If a game ball does not enter the special figure 1 start port 230 or the special figure 2 start port 232 for a predetermined time and the special figure variable game is not started, the display shifts to the demo screen and is displayed at the lower center of the effect display area 208d. A horizontally long display area is provided, and an image imitating the chance button 136 (button image) and an image of a character string “display menu” are displayed in the display area. As a result, when the chance button 136 is pressed, it is notified that the screen shifts to the initial screen of the option menu. Also, in FIG. 395 (d), when the second time (for example, 60 seconds) elapses without the symbol variation display being started after the special symbol or ordinary symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, FIG. ) To (c), the background image in the effect display area 208d (in this example, an image in which two characters are sitting facing each other) disappears, and only the display area remains. In FIG. 395 (b) and after, the special figure 1 hold icon display area A and the fluctuation icon display area C may not be displayed. Note that the background image in the effect display area 208d illustrated in FIGS. 395 (a) to 395 (c) may be a background image displayed during the symbol variation display.

  If the chance button 136 is not pressed for a predetermined time in the state shown in FIGS. 395 (b) to (d), the demonstration effect shown in FIGS. 395 (e) and (f) is started. When the demonstration effect starts, the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes the effect display area 208d, and an image of the logo mark of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 100 is displayed as shown in FIG. 395 (e). Next, as shown in FIG. 395 (f), a demonstration effect animation is displayed. Further, during the demonstration production, a horizontally long rectangular display area is provided at the lower center of the production display area 208d, and an image imitating the chance button 136 and an image of a character string “display menu” are displayed in the display area. Continue to be. When the chance button 136 is pressed during the demonstration production, the demonstration production is stopped and the screen shifts to the initial screen of the option menu.

  When the demonstration effect animation ends, the screen shifts to a screen shown in FIG. 395 (g). The state shown in FIG. 395 (g) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 395 (b). In this state, if the buttons on the setting operation unit 137 and the chance button 136 are not pressed for a predetermined time and the special figure variable game is not started, the demonstration effects shown in FIGS. 395 (e) and (f) are started again. Is done.

  Next, screen transition of the user menu will be described with reference to FIG. In FIGS. 396 (a) to 396 (g), screen transitions of the user menu are shown in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 396, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown.

  FIG. 396 (a) shows an initial screen of the option menu displayed in the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208. The option menu of this example is provided with user menu and actual machine customization. In the effect display area 208d, an image of a character string “MENU” is displayed at the upper center, an image of a character string “user MENU” is displayed in a horizontally long rectangular frame at the bottom, and a horizontally long rectangular shape at the bottom is displayed. An image of the character string “actual machine customization” is displayed in the frame. In addition, an image imitating the setting operation unit 137 is displayed in the lower left part of the effect display area 208d. In the image, a portion corresponding to the up / down / left / right buttons of the setting operation unit 137 is displayed in a predetermined color, and an image of a character string “select” is displayed on the right side. Each menu can be selected by pressing the up / down / left / right button of the setting operation unit 137. Further, on the right side of the image, an image simulating the setting operation unit 137 whose portion corresponding to the OK button is a predetermined color and an image simulating the chance button 136 are displayed side by side. By pressing the confirm button or the chance button 136, the selected menu is determined. In addition, an image imitating the cancel (C) button of the setting operation unit 137 and an image of a character string “Close” are displayed in the lower right portion of the effect display area 208d. If the cancel button is pressed while an image simulating the cancel button is displayed, the menu screen is closed and the screen shifts to the screen shown in FIG.

  When “User MENU” is selected on the initial screen of the option menu and the determination operation is performed, the initial screen of the user menu shown in FIG. 396 (b) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The user menu relates to game-related information for the player. In the initial screen shown in FIG. 396 (b), on the left side are "member registration", "password entry", "two-dimensional code issuance", "personal data clear" and A selection window m2081 on which “End” is displayed is prepared, and a message window m2082 is prepared on the right side. When this “user MENU” is selected and a determination operation is performed, the pachinko machine 100 shifts to the original mode.

  In FIG. 396 (b), “member registration” in the selection window m2081 on the left side is selected. The message window m2082 on the right side displays an image of a character string that recommends member registration (in this example, “If you are a first-time user, please register as a member”).

  When the confirmation button or the chance button 136 is pressed while “member registration” is selected, a display screen for member registration shown in FIG. 396 (c) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. On the member registration screen, a two-dimensional code mQ1 for member registration is displayed and guided to the password input screen. In addition, an image of a character string “Please read the two-dimensional code with a mobile phone and obtain a password from a mobile site” is displayed in a horizontally long rectangular frame below the effect display area 208d. It is notified that the two-dimensional code mQ1 can be read and the password can be acquired from the mobile site. Since the password can be selected on the initial screen of the user menu, the user menu may be returned to the initial screen.

  The member registration two-dimensional code mQ1 shown in FIG. 396 (c) includes the URL of the registration page for the initial registration on the server side. Individual registration information (ID) or the like to be described later is included. Information is not included and can be reissued. The member registration two-dimensional code mQ1 is used to obtain a password.

  To set the original mode, you must first register as a member. The player reads the member registration two-dimensional code mQ1 with a mobile phone terminal or smartphone having a camera function and a barcode reader function, and acquires the URL of the initial registration page. The player accesses the registration page of the acquired URL from the mobile phone terminal. The server acquires personal identification information (ID) that can identify a person who has accessed the initial registration page, and issues a password. The personal identification information (ID) may be information based on an individual identification number unique to a mobile phone terminal or a smartphone, or information input by an accessor. The password issued here includes initial values of personal identification information (ID) and history information. The history information is stored in the server in association with the personal identification information acquired here. When the password is issued from the server, the password is displayed on the display screen of the mobile phone terminal or smartphone.

  A player who has already registered as a member and wants to set the original mode must enter a password. The password can be acquired by accessing the password issue page of the server from a mobile phone terminal or a smartphone. When the server acquires the personal identification information of the person who has accessed, the server issues history information stored in association with the personal identification information and a password including the personal identification information (ID), and the mobile phone terminal or smartphone The password is displayed on the display screen.

  The password is encrypted with a predetermined number of digits, for example, “GI ¥ LS”. The amount of information that can be included in the password depends on the number of digits of the password × the number of input character types. The password may include only personal identification information for identifying the player, and the history information may be stored in association with the personal identification information on the game machine side. By storing the game, even if the game table is moved, the game can be performed in the original mode under the same conditions.

  FIG. 396 (d) shows a password input screen that is displayed when “password input” is selected and determined from the user menu displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. When the “enter password” in the selection window m2081 shown in FIG. 396 (b) is selected, when the enter button or chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a password entry screen. The

  On the password input screen, while viewing the display screen of the mobile phone terminal or smartphone to which the password has been transmitted, the up / down / left / right buttons of the setting operation unit 137 are operated to move to a desired character position, and the enter button or chance button 136 By pressing, the input character is determined. When the five-character password input is completed, the up / down / left / right buttons are operated, the cursor is moved to the “determine” position, and the enter button or the chance button 136 is pressed. It is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In the pachinko machine 100 to which the password has been input, the encrypted password is decrypted to obtain history information. Here, when history information cannot be acquired or the model code included in the history information is not supported, it is notified that the password has not been recognized, and the screen returns to the password input screen. If the player misses password input a plurality of times (for example, three times), the player may return to the option menu without displaying the password input screen. Furthermore, if a password is incorrectly entered a plurality of times, the password may not be entered for a predetermined period (for example, one game) or a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds).

  On the other hand, when the history information can be acquired, the fact that the password has been successfully recognized ("authentication success message" shown in FIG. 396 (e)) is notified, and the setting of the original mode has been completed. . In this embodiment, the original mode cannot be set unless a correct password is input. When the original mode is set, a history including a game result after setting and the like is temporarily stored in the pachinko machine 100. In addition, it is possible to enjoy a game reflecting the history information included in the password. For example, the continuation of the game represented by the history information included in the password can be enjoyed, or a privilege according to the history information is given. When the password is successfully recognized, the screen returns to the initial screen of the option menu shown in FIG. Thus, the message differs depending on whether the password authentication is successful or unsuccessful.

  FIG. 396 (f) shows a two-dimensional barcode issuance screen that is displayed when “issue two-dimensional code” is selected from the user menu displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. When the “OK” button in the selection window m2081 shown in FIG. 396 (b) is selected and the confirm button or chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the two-dimensional bar code. The code issue screen is displayed.

  The two-dimensional code issuance screen displays the two-dimensional code mQ2 generated by the pachinko machine 100 and an image of a character string that recommends access to the server (“Reading a two-dimensional code on a mobile phone Please save the record. ”) Is displayed. The issuance of the two-dimensional code mQ2 is prepared on the assumption that the player selects the game when the game with the original mode set is finished. Hereinafter, the two-dimensional code mQ2 shown in FIG. 396 (f) may be referred to as a two-dimensional code mQ2 for ending the game.

  The two-dimensional code here has a maximum capacity of 2053 bytes (about 2 KB), and the display size is changed in increments of 4 cells in the range of 21 × 21 [cells] to 177 × 177 [cells]. Can do. A QR code (registered trademark) is known as a typical two-dimensional code. The two-dimensional code is an image having a predetermined pattern that cannot be identified by the player. Instead of the two-dimensional code, a URL itself, a one-dimensional barcode, an encrypted character string, or a color code may be used. However, the two-dimensional code has an advantage that the amount of information that can be included is much larger than that of a simple character string. In the case of a character string, as the amount of information to be included increases, the number of character strings increases, which cannot be remembered by humans and cannot be completely written. Therefore, the burden can be reduced by notifying with a two-dimensional code.

  In the present embodiment, personal identification information (ID), the result of the current game, the mission achievement status, and a privilege to be given to the player (for example, the accumulated value of the original mode point) are added to the two-dimensional code mQ2 for ending the game. Contains information to represent. In addition, the number of winnings in the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, the total number of reel rotations, the bonus (big hit) number, the small number (small win) number, store identification information, Information unique to the game machine, movement status, number of errors, etc. may be included. Information representing the game result, mission achievement status, accumulated value of original mode points, number of winnings, etc. correspond to history information. Further, the two-dimensional code mQ2 for ending the game includes the URL of the update reception page prepared in the server.

  When the player photographs the issued two-dimensional code mQ2 for ending the game using the camera function of the mobile phone terminal or smartphone, the barcode reader function is activated. On the display screen of the mobile phone terminal, personal identification information (“http: //www.˜/jp” representing the address of the update reception page prepared in the server is included in the two-dimensional code mQ2 for ending the game ( ID) and URLs to which arguments representing history information are added are displayed. When the player accesses the URL converted by the barcode reader function from the read two-dimensional code mQ2 for ending the game, it has been stored in the server so far in association with the personal identification information included in the argument portion. The history information is updated to the history information included in the argument part.

  On the server side, a customization page for accepting customization such as production contents (for example, appearance characters) may be prepared.

  In the two-dimensional code issuance screen shown in FIG. 396 (f), the cursor mC is set to the end button. In this state, when the confirm button or the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Displays a confirmation message asking whether or not the display of the two-dimensional code mQ2 for ending the game is actually finished. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the two-dimensional code mQ2 for ending the game is issued, information such as the result of the current game included in the two-dimensional code mQ2 is deleted from the pachinko machine 100. In this confirmation message, an item “Yes” and an item “No” are prepared. When the confirmation button or chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor is positioned on the item “Yes”, FIG. 396 (a) is displayed. Return to the initial screen of the option menu shown. On the other hand, when the confirmation button or chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor is placed on the item “No”, the screen returns to the two-dimensional code issue screen shown in FIG.

  When the two-dimensional code issuance screen is ended (returning to the initial screen of the option menu), the two-dimensional code mQ2 for ending the game may not be reissued or may be reissued.

  FIG. 396 (g) is a diagram illustrating a state where deletion of personal data is selected from the user menu. During the display of the user menu shown in FIG. 396 (b), the cursor mC is operated by the up / down / left / right buttons, and “personal data clear” is selected in the selection window 2081 on the left side. The message window 2082 on the right side displays that the current game information (including personal information and history information) is deleted from the pachinko machine 100.

  When the confirm button or chance button 136 is pressed while “personal data clear” is selected, a personal data clear screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 396 (b) is a diagram showing a personal data clear screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. When the “Clear Personal Data” button in the selection window m 2081 shown in FIG. 396 (b) is selected, when the confirm button or the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a personal data clear screen. Is displayed.

  On the personal data clear screen, a confirmation message asking whether or not the current game information (including personal information, history information, etc.) can be deleted from the pachinko machine 100 (character string image of “Delete game information?”) Is displayed. This confirmation message is also displayed when a password is entered. On the other hand, if no password is entered, a message notifying that no password has been entered is displayed, and an initial screen of the user menu shown in FIG. 396 (a) is displayed.

  The confirmation message shown in FIG. 396 (b) also includes a “Yes” button and a “No” button. When the cursor is placed on the “Yes” button (the state shown in FIG. 396 (g)), When the chance button 136 is pressed, an erase completion message is displayed, and then the screen returns to the initial screen of the option menu shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the confirmation button or chance button 136 is pressed with the cursor positioned on the “No” button, the screen returns to the initial screen of the user menu shown in FIG. In this embodiment, when the two-dimensional code mQ2 for ending the game is issued, the game information is automatically deleted, but a player who has not registered as a member by preparing a personal data clear screen that can be forcibly deleted. In some cases, a player who has registered as a member can obtain accurate information.

  Note that a demo screen may be displayed when the confirm button or the chance button 136 is pressed while the user menu is displayed.

  Regardless of the option menu or user menu described above, if the symbol variation display is started during various screen displays or operations, the option menu and user menu (various screen displays and operations) are canceled. The symbol variation display is started. For example, the symbol change display is not performed, and after the last ball is fired in the game area 124, the option menu and the user menu are displayed, and the last ball starts the special figure 1 start port 230 or the special figure 2 start. There are cases where the game sphere that has been won in the mouth 232, or the game ball that has been clogged or caught by the game nail 238 starts to flow down at some point and wins the special figure start opening 230 or the special figure start opening 232, etc. Conceivable. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, if the symbol variation display is not performed for a certain period, the option menu and the user menu can be displayed. Therefore, the game can be started while the option menu and the user menu are displayed. Even if it is, the symbol variation display can be started.

  Next, setting for customization of the real machine will be described with reference to FIG. In each drawing of FIG. 397, the speaker 120 is schematically shown on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 397 (a) shows an initial screen of the option menu displayed in the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, the password is entered by entering the password in the user menu, and the login to the user mode is completed. A predetermined BGM is output from the speaker 120 (not shown).

  In FIG. 397 (b), the lower button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed from the state shown in FIG. 397 (a), the actual machine customization is selected, and the determination operation is performed by pressing the confirm button or the chance button 136. A decision sound is output from the speaker 120.

  FIG. 397 (c) shows an actual machine customization screen. In the effect display area 208d, character string images of “button operation sound”, “decoration symbol”, and “chance button” indicating customization items that can be customized are displayed in order from the top. In the actual machine customization of this example, the operation sound (button operation sound) at the time of operating the chance button 136, the display form of the decorative design, and the display mode (for example, the button image or the effective period image) regarding the chance button 136 can be set. It is like that. Other effects (for example, background display, BGM during symbol variation display, effect mode, etc.) may be configured to be customizable. In FIG. 397 (c), the button operation sound, the decorative symbol display mode, and the display mode related to the chance button 136 are all set to default. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, all customization items are set to defaults when the power is turned on or when the user mode is not logged in.

  In FIG. 397 (e), only the button operation sound can be set, and the decoration symbol display mode and the chance button operation mode cannot be set. Therefore, in the effect display area 208d, the “button operation sound” and the “default” character string image of the setting state of the button operation sound are displayed in black, and the “decorative symbol” and “chance button” character string images and The “default” character string image indicating these setting modes is displayed in gray. The customizable items increase when the game level indicating the game achievement level exceeds a predetermined value.

  In FIG. 397 (f), the right button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed once from FIG. 397 (e), and the button operation sound is selected as the cat's cry. From the speaker 120, a voice “Nya ~”, which is a button operation sound of a cat, is output. Thus, the button operation sound can be selected by pressing the left and right buttons of the setting operation unit 137.

  In FIG. 397 (g), the right button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed once from FIG. 397 (f), and the button operation sound is selected as the dog's cry. From the speaker 120, a voice “One” which is a dog button operation sound is output.

  In FIG. 397 (h), the right button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed only once from FIG. 397 (g), and the button operation sound is selected as the default. The speaker 120 outputs a sound “ton” which is a default button operation sound.

  In FIG. 397 (i), the right button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed only once from FIG. 397 (h), and the button operation sound is selected as the cat's cry. From the speaker 120, “Nya ~” which is a button operation sound of a cat is output.

  In FIG. 397 (j), the button operation sound is confirmed to be a cat's cry. When the confirmation button or chance button 136 is pressed while the “cat” button operation sound is selected, the “cat” button operation sound is determined. From the speaker 120. The sound of the cat's cry, “Nya ~”, which is the decision sound, is output.

  When the cancel button is pressed in the state shown in FIG. 397 (j), the initial screen of the original menu is displayed as shown in FIG. 397 (k). When the cancel button is pressed again, the original menu is closed. Then, the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. When the original mode is set, an image indicating the player's game level is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d. In this example, an image of a character string “Lv. 51” indicating a game level and a gauge image indicating an original mode point (experience value) up to the next level are displayed below the image.

  Next, an effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment when the original mode is not set (password not input (user mode not logged in)) is described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 398 (a) to FIG. 399 (i), special figure variable games are shown in time series in this order. Further, a speaker 120 is schematically shown on the right side of each figure. In the figure showing the special figure variation game in time series, the passage of time between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures.

  FIG. 398 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. The state shown in FIG. 398 (a) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 360 (f). Further, during the execution of the special figure variable game, the BGM for changing is output from the speaker 120. In FIGS. 398 to 400, schematic diagrams in which the changing BGM is output from the speaker 120 are omitted, and schematic diagrams in which button operation sounds are output from the speaker 120 are illustrated.

  FIG. 398 (b) shows a state where the display of the button effect is started in the effect display area 208d. A horizontally long button effect area is secured in the center of the effect display area 208d, a character image is displayed in the left quarter of the button effect area, and a button image is displayed in the remaining three quarters. And button display for displaying a valid period image. The validity period image is displayed at the bottom of the button image. The display priority of the button effect area is set higher than the display priority of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. For this reason, the symbol variation display of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c on the rear side of the button effect area is hidden by the image of the button effect area and cannot be visually recognized. By looking at the image shown in FIG. 398 (b), the player knows that the button effect has started. At this stage, the countdown of the operation valid period has not started. Even if 136 is pressed, the pressing operation is not accepted.

  FIG. 398 (c) shows a button operation acceptance permission state after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the button display shown in FIG. 398 (b) started. Although the display in the button effect area has not changed, since the countdown of the operation valid period has started at this stage, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the pressing operation is accepted.

  FIG. 398 (d) shows a state in which the button operation acceptance period has slightly passed and the bar-shaped portion of the display of the effective period image is somewhat shortened in the right direction.

  FIG. 398 (e) exemplifies a button effect display performed when the player presses the chance button 136 and the press is accepted. The button image and the effective period image are erased, and the image of the character string “Chance is!” Is displayed in the left quarter of the button effect area. The display of the character string image may be a notice of the result of the special figure variation game. Further, it may be a notice of the possibility of developing into SP (super) reach production. In this example, the display of the button effect ends with the display of the character string image. In addition, a sound “ton”, which is a default button operation sound, is output from the speaker 120.

  FIG. 398 (f) shows a state in which the button effect area has disappeared and the decorative symbol variation display in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c is visible.

  In FIG. 398 (g), “decoration 7” temporarily stops in a swinging fluctuation state in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and the decorative symbol fluctuation display is continued in the middle symbol display area 208b. The state where the reach production is started is shown.

  In FIG. 398 (h), a button image is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and an effective period image is displayed below the button image. In FIG. 398 (h), the button operation acceptance period is started. Thereby, the player can know that the button operation acceptance period has started.

  FIG. 398 (i) shows a state in which the button operation acceptance period has slightly passed and the bar-shaped portion of the effective period image display is somewhat shortened in the right direction.

  When the chance button 136 is pressed during the operation effective period, as shown in FIG. 398 (j), the button image and the effective period image are erased, and the character string “Gekiatsu!” Is displayed in front of the left middle right symbol. An image is displayed. This character string image is displayed as a notice of the change. Further, the speaker 120 outputs a sound “button” sound “Sharan”. The button operation sound of “Sharan” is a default button operation sound during reach production. Thus, the default button operation sound may differ depending on the effect being executed. In this example, the default button operation sound when the reach effect is not executed is “ton”, and the default button operation sound when the reach effect is executed is “Sharan”. Note that the default button operation sound may always be the same regardless of the effect being executed.

  FIG. 399 (a) shows a state continued from FIG. 398 (j). In FIG. 399 (a), the image display of the reach effect is gradually changed to the entire white display by the fade-out process. The symbol display areas 208a to 208c are moved to the lower right corner of the image display area, and the decorative symbol variation is reduced and displayed. The special figure 1 hold icon display area A, the special figure 1 hold icon, the fluctuation icon display area C, and the fluctuation icon are not displayed during the SP reach production shown in FIGS. 399 (a) to (j).

  FIGS. 399 (b) to (i) show a state in which an SP reach effect with a scene where two samurai fight is executed. In FIG. 399 (e), a button image is displayed at the center of the effect display area 208d, and an effective period image is displayed below the button image.

  FIG. 399 (g) shows a state in which the button operation reception period has slightly passed and the bar-shaped portion of the display of the effective period image is somewhat shortened in the right direction.

  When the chance button 136 is pressed during the button operation acceptance period, the button image and the effective period image are deleted, and a cut-in effect in which an image of one of the samurai's faces shown in FIG. Is executed. In addition, a sound “Kean” that is a button operation sound during the SP reach production is output from the speaker 120.

  FIG. 399 (i) is a continuation of the SP reach production, in which an announcement that one samurai has won has been made, and a notice is given that there is a high possibility that the result of the determination of whether or not the change is correct.

  Next, an effect in the original mode setting (password input (user mode login)) state of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In FIGS. 400A to 400H, special figure variation games are shown in time series in this order. Further, a speaker 120 is schematically shown on the right side of each figure. In the figure showing the special figure variation game in time series, the passage of time between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures.

  FIG. 400 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. The state shown in FIG. 400 (a) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 360 (f). Further, during the execution of the special figure variable game, the BGM for changing is output from the speaker 120. When the original mode is set, an image indicating the player's game level is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d. In this example, an image of a character string “Lv. 51” indicating a game level and a gauge image indicating an original mode point (experience value) up to the next level are displayed below the image.

  FIG. 400B shows a state in which the display of the button effect is started in the effect display area 208d. A horizontally long button effect area is secured in the center of the effect display area 208d, a character image is displayed in the left quarter of the button effect area, and a button image is displayed in the remaining three quarters. And button display for displaying a valid period image. The validity period image is displayed at the bottom of the button image. The display priority of the button effect area is set higher than the display priority of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. For this reason, the symbol variation display of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c on the rear side of the button effect area is hidden by the image of the button effect area and cannot be visually recognized. By looking at the image shown in FIG. 400 (b), the player knows that the button effect has started, but at this stage, the countdown of the operation valid period has not started, and the button operation cannot be accepted. Even if 136 is pressed, the pressing operation is not accepted.

  FIG. 400 (c) shows a button operation acceptance permission state after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the button display shown in FIG. 400 (b) started. Although the display in the button effect area has not changed, since the countdown of the operation valid period has started at this stage, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the pressing operation is accepted.

  FIG. 400D illustrates a button effect display that is performed when the player presses the chance button 136 and the press is accepted. The button image and the effective period image are erased, and the image of the character string “Chance is!” Is displayed in the left quarter of the button effect area. The display of the character string image may be a notice of the result of the special figure variation game. Further, it may be a notice of the possibility of developing into SP (super) reach production. In this example, the display of the button effect ends with the display of the character string image. In this example, in actual machine customization, the button operation sound is set to a cat cry. For this reason, the voice of “Nya ~”, which is a button operation sound of a cat cry, is output from the speaker 120.

  Thereafter, the same effects as the effects shown in FIGS. 398 (f) and (g) are executed. In FIG. 400 (e), a button image is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and an effective period image is displayed below the button image. It is displayed. In FIG. 400 (h), the button operation acceptance period is started. Thereby, the player can know that the button operation acceptance period has started.

  When the chance button 136 is pressed during the operation effective period, as shown in FIG. 400 (f), the button image and the effective period image are erased, and the character string “Gekiatsu!” Is displayed in front of the middle left and right symbols. An image is displayed. This character string image is displayed as a notice of the change. In addition, the speaker 120 outputs a voice “Nya ~” of a cat cry, which is a button operation sound being set.

  400 (g) and 400 (h) show a state in which an SP reach effect with a scene where two samurai fight is executed. In FIG. 400 (g), a button image is displayed at the center of the effect display area 208d, and an effective period image is displayed below the button image.

  When the chance button 136 is pressed during the button operation reception period, the button image and the effective period image are deleted, and a cut-in effect in which an image of one of the samurai's faces shown in FIG. Is executed. In addition, a sound “Kean” that is a button operation sound during the SP reach production is output from the speaker 120. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, even if the button operation sound is set to other than the default by customization of the actual machine, the button operation sound during execution of the SP reach effect is a sound “Kean”.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the button operation sound set in the actual machine customization (in this example, “Nya ~”) is output when the SP reach effect is not executed while the decorative symbol is being displayed, and during the SP reach effect. Outputs the default button operation sound for SP reach (in this example, “Kean”). On the contrary, the operation sound during the SP reach production may be selected by customization of the actual machine, and the default button operation sound may be output when the SP reach is not executed during the variation display of the decorative symbols. Further, during the big hit game, the button operation sound set in the actual machine customization may be output, and the default operation sound may be output. Also, depending on the gaming state (probability change, short time, normal state, during electric support, during non-electric support, during big hit game, during demonstration production, etc.) and when the button operation sound set in actual machine customization is output You may make it not be.

  The operation sound of the chance button 136 in the option menu may not be customized or may be customized.

  In the case where both the chance button 136 and other operation means (touch panel, confirm button, etc.) are enabled, if the operation means other than the chance button 136 is operated, the customized chance button 136 is displayed. The same operation sound as the operation sound may be output, the same operation sound as the operation sound of the default chance button 136 may be output, or the operation sound for other operation means is output. You may make it do. In this way, the operation sound of the chance button 136 and the operation sound of the other operation means may be the same regardless of the presence or absence of customization. It may be different.

  FIG. 401 shows a timing chart regarding detection of a chance button sensor (chance button detection sensor 426) and button operation sound output. The upper part of FIGS. 401A and 401B shows the state of the detection signal of the chance button sensor (chance button detection sensor 426) in time series. The level OFF of the detection signal of the chance button sensor indicates a state where the pressing of the chance button 136 is not detected, and the level ON indicates a state where the pressing of the chance button 136 is detected. The middle row shows whether the default button operation sound (ton) is output in chronological order. The level “output” is a state in which a “ton” button operation sound is output, and the level “non-output” is a state in which a “ton” button operation sound is output. The lower row shows the presence or absence of the output of the button operation sound (Nya ~) of the cat cry in time series. The level “output” is a state in which a button operation sound of “Nya ~” is being output, and the level “non-output” is a state in which a button operation sound of “Nya ~” is being output.

  As shown in FIG. 401 (a), a button operation sound is output after a predetermined delay time after the chance button sensor detection becomes ON level. If the button operation sound is not set or the default button operation sound is selected in actual customization, a “ton” button operation sound is output. Further, when the button operation sound of a cat cry is set in the customization of the actual machine, the button operation sound of “Nya ~” is output. Further, the button operation sound of “Ton” is shorter than the button operation sound of “Nya ~”.

  FIG. 401B shows a timing chart when the chance button 136 is repeatedly hit. In this example, the chance button 136 is hit six times. When the button operation sound is not set or the default button operation sound is selected in actual customization, if the chance button 136 is pressed before a part of the button operation sound is output, the “ON” is displayed. Is canceled, and the first “g” of the button operation sound is output based on the depression. In FIG. 401 (b), part of the button operation sound is canceled five times. The canceled “n” part is indicated by a double-headed arrow. As shown in FIG. 401 (b), when the chance button 136 is repeatedly hit, a button operation sound “TOTOTOTOTOTON” is output from the speaker 120.

  In addition, when the button operation sound of a cat cry is set in actual machine customization, if the chance button 136 is pressed before a part of the button operation sound “nya” is output, the corresponding “nya” is displayed. The sound is canceled and “ni” at the beginning of the button operation sound is output based on the pressing. Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed before the “ni” next to the “ni” is output, the “nya” is canceled and “ni” at the beginning of the button operation sound is output. Accordingly, the button operation sound “Nya ~” based on the second press of the chance button 136 that is output after canceling the “ya ~” button operation sound based on the first press of the chance button 136 is output the third time. Based on the pressing of the chance button 136, the part “nya” is canceled. Thus, in this example, the button operation sound that is canceled and output is further canceled. In FIG. 401 (b), part of the button operation sound “「 ”is canceled five times. The canceled “nya” part is indicated by a double-headed arrow. When the chance button 136 is repeatedly hit as shown in FIG. 401 (b), a button operation sound “Niani Ninya” is output from the speaker 120.

  Next, an effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment when the original mode is not set (password not input (user mode not logged in)) is described with reference to FIG. In FIGS. 402A to 402F, special figure variable games are shown in time series in this order. In the figure showing the special figure variation game in time series, the passage of time between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures.

  FIG. 402 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. The state shown in FIG. 402 (a) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 360 (f).

  FIG. 402 (b) shows a state in which the display of the button effect is started in the effect display area 208d. A horizontally long button effect area is secured in the center of the effect display area 208d, a character image is displayed in the left quarter of the button effect area, and a button image is displayed in the remaining three quarters. And button display for displaying a valid period image. The validity period image is displayed at the bottom of the button image. The display priority of the button effect area is set higher than the display priority of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. For this reason, the symbol variation display of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c on the rear side of the button effect area is hidden by the image of the button effect area and cannot be visually recognized. By looking at the image shown in FIG. 402 (b), the player knows that the button effect has started. At this stage, the countdown of the operation valid period has not started. Even if 136 is pressed, the pressing operation is not accepted.

  FIG. 402 (c) shows a button operation acceptance permission state after a predetermined time has elapsed since the button display shown in FIG. 402 (b) started. The button operation acceptance period has passed a little, and the bar-shaped portion of the display of the effective period image has been somewhat shortened in the right direction.

  FIG. 402 (d) illustrates a button effect display performed when the player presses the chance button 136 and the press is accepted. The button image and the effective period image are erased, and the image of the character string “Chance is!” Is displayed in the left quarter of the button effect area. The display of the character string image may be a notice of the result of the special figure variation game. Further, it may be a notice of the possibility of developing into SP (super) reach production. In this example, the display of the button effect ends with the display of the character string image.

  Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 398 (f) to 399 (c) are executed, and then the effects shown in FIGS. 402 (e) and 402 (f) are executed. The effects shown in FIGS. 402 (e) and (f) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 399 (e) and (f).

  In this example, the display mode related to the chance button 136 is not set in actual machine customization, and is the default mode. The button images and the effective period images shown in FIGS. 402 (b), (c), and (f) are in the default display mode.

  Next, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, an effect when the display mode related to the chance button 136 is set to “panda” in actual machine customization at the time of setting the original mode will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 403 (a) shows a display screen for actual machine customization. “Panda” is selected as the display mode related to the chance button.

  In FIGS. 403 (b) to (g), special figure variable games are shown in time series in this order. In the figure showing the special figure variation game in time series, the passage of time between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures.

  FIG. 403 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. The state shown in FIG. 403 (a) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 360 (f). When the original mode is set, an image indicating the player's game level is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d. In this example, an image of a character string “Lv. 51” indicating a game level and a gauge image indicating points up to the next level are displayed below it.

  FIG. 403 (b) shows a state where the display of the button effect is started in the effect display area 208d. A horizontally long button effect area is secured in the center of the effect display area 208d, a character image is displayed in the left quarter of the button effect area, and a chance button is displayed in the remaining three quarters. An image relating to 136 is displayed. When “Panda” is set, a panda character image having a Chang button 136 is displayed as an image related to the chance button 136. The number “6” is displayed on the stomach of the panda, and the remaining time of the button operation reception period is displayed. Thus, in the actual machine customization, the effect display can be customized.

  The display priority of the button effect area is set higher than the display priority of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. For this reason, the symbol variation display of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c on the rear side of the button effect area is hidden by the image of the button effect area and cannot be visually recognized. By seeing the image shown in FIG. 403 (c), the player knows that the button effect has started. At this stage, the countdown of the operation valid period has started, and since this is the button operation reception period, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the pressing operation is accepted.

  In FIG. 403 (d), the remaining time of the button operation acceptance period is 5 seconds, and the number “5” is displayed on the stomach of the panda.

  FIG. 403 (e) illustrates a button effect display performed when the player presses the chance button 136 and the press is accepted. The panda character image is erased, and the image of the character string “Chance is!” Is displayed in the left quarter of the button effect area. The display of the character string image may be a notice of the result of the special figure variation game. Further, it may be a notice of the possibility of developing into SP (super) reach production. In this example, the display of the button effect ends with the display of the character string image. When pressing of the chance button 136 is detected during the operation valid period, the panda character image is displayed after setting the number displayed on the stomach of the panda to “0”, and then “Chance!” It is possible to display the image of the character string of, or erase only the number displayed on the stomach of the panda, and then display the image of the character string of “Chance!”. It's a chance after erasing the numbers for each character image! ! May be displayed.

  Note that the count-down of the operation valid period may end with 0, and nothing may be displayed on the panda's stomach after the number “1”.

  Thereafter, the same effects as the effects shown in FIGS. 398 (f) to 399 (c) are executed. In FIG. 403 (f), the image display area is divided into upper and lower parts at a substantially horizontal horizontal boundary line, and the upper display is performed. The character image of one samurai is displayed in the area, and the character image of the other samurai is displayed in the lower display area.

  In FIG. 403 (g), a button image is displayed at the center of the effect display area 208d, and an effective period image is displayed below the button image. As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, even if the display mode related to the chance button 136 is other than the default (in this example, “panda”), the chance is displayed during the SP reach production. As a display related to the button 136, as shown in FIG. 83 (g), a button image and a valid period image in a default display mode are displayed.

Next, a characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 394 to 403 again.
(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment is
Production means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120);
Operation means (for example, chance button 136);
A game machine equipped with
The production means is a means capable of executing at least a first type of production,

  The first type of effect is an effect related to the operation means (for example, a display effect related to the chance button 136 or an effect of button operation sound),

The first type of effect is an effect including a plurality of selection effects (for example, customizable button operation sound, customizable chance button image),
The plurality of selection effects are effects that can be selected at least by the player,

  The effect means is one effect (hereinafter referred to as “first effect (for example, the button operation sound is“ ”) of the plurality of selection effects (for example, actual machine customization (see FIG. 397)) selected at least by the player. Nya ~ ”is a means that can at least execute a sound production, a display relating to the chance button 136 in the display mode of“ Panda ”(see FIG. 403 (c))),

  The effect means is one effect of the first type effects (hereinafter referred to as “second effect (for example, a sound effect in which the button operation sound is“ Kean ”(see FIG. 401)), a default button image. And an effective period image (refer to FIG. 403 (g)))),

  The production means is a means capable of executing at least the first production in the first case,

  The production means is means capable of executing at least the second production in the second case,

  Said 1st case is a case where it is the 1st period (for example, period when production other than SP reach is performed),

Said 2nd case is a case where it is a 2nd period (for example, period when SP reach production is performed),
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, when the operating means is operated, the first effect selected by the player is performed in the first period, and the second effect is performed in the second period. A game table with display characteristics can be realized. In addition, there are cases where the variation of production can be increased and the interest of the game can be improved.

The first type of effect may include an operation sound and a display related to the operation. Further, “at least the first effect can be executed” may indicate that only the first effect can be executed, or one or more effects including the first effect can be executed. May be shown. Further, “at least the second effect can be executed” may indicate that only the second effect can be executed, or that one or more effects including the second effect can be executed. May be shown. Note that “a plurality of selection effects” may indicate “a player has a plurality of effects that can be selected”, and “a player can select a plurality of selection effects (for example, customizable button operation sounds ( It may indicate that one production (for example, cat) is selectable from default, cat, dog)).
(2) The pachinko machine 100,

The production means is means for not executing at least the first production in the second case.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, since the first effect is not performed in the second period, there is a case where the effect is sharpened and the player is not bored.

Here, “do not execute at least the first effect” may indicate that only the first effect is not executed, or one or more effects including the first effect are not executed (for example, It may indicate that no sound is output or displayed.
(3) The pachinko machine 100,

  In the third case, the effect means is means for at least not executing the first effect,

  In the fourth case, the effect means is means for not executing at least the second effect,

  The third case is a case where there is no operation of the operation means in the first period,

The fourth case is a case where there is no operation of the operation means in the second period.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, when there is no operation of the operation means, the presentation is not executed, and thus the operation of the operation means may be prompted.
(4) The pachinko machine 100,
The first period is a period including at least a third period,
The second period is a period including at least a fourth period,

  The third period is a period during which at least the operation of the operation means can be received (for example, a button operation reception period),

The fourth period is a period during which at least the operation of the operation means can be received (for example, a button operation reception period).
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, since the first period and the second period are periods including the reception period, there may be cases where the variation of effects can be increased and the interest of the game can be improved.
(5) The pachinko machine 100,
A second rendering means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
The production means is first production means (for example, the speaker 120),
The second effect means is a means capable of executing at least a second type effect,

The second type of effect is an effect related to the operation means (for example, a display effect related to the chance button 136 (display effect of a button image or an effective period image)).
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, there are cases where the operation means can be further urged by providing the second effect means and performing effects related to the operation means with a plurality of effect means. In addition, there are cases where the variation of production can be increased and the interest of the game can be improved. The second effect means may be a means capable of executing only the second type effect. The second effect means may be a means capable of executing one or a plurality of types of effects including the second type of effects.

  The production means (first production means) is sound output means (for example, the speaker 120). The first type of effect is a sound that is output when the operating means is operated.

  The second effect means is display means. The second type of effect is a display relating to the operation means (for example, a display imitating the operation means, a display corresponding to the operation of the operation means, a display relating to the period during which the operation of the operation means can be accepted (display of an effective period image, The number of the panda's stomach (see FIG. 403 (c))).

In addition, regarding customization in the original mode, when a password is entered, if an experience value is obtained from information included in the password (game information, game level (for example, game time or appearance effect, etc.) and exceeds a certain value It is possible for the player to select an effect corresponding to the game level goes up), information on what has been done on the Internet, and the like.
(Example 13)

  A specific example of button display by button operation animation performed in the special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 13 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 404. 404 (a) to 404 (g) show the display of different effect images when, for example, a button image is displayed in the upper part of the image display area and an effective period image is displayed in the lower part as button display of the button operation animation. A state where at least a part of the display of the button image or the effective period image is hidden is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 404 (a), the display of the button image or the display of the effective period image may be hidden by displaying another effect image. Further, as shown in FIG. 404 (b), the display of the button image or the effective period image may be hidden by displaying another effect image before the start of the button operation acceptance effective period. Also, as shown in FIG. 404 (c), the display of the button image or the effective period image may be hidden by displaying another effect image at the start timing of the button operation reception effective period. Further, as shown in FIG. 404 (d), the display of the button image or the effective period image may be hidden by displaying another effect image during the button operation acceptance effective period. In addition, as shown in FIG. 404 (e), the display of the button image or the valid period image may be hidden by displaying another effect image during the button press animation (while the second image is being displayed). Also, as shown in FIG. 404 (f), the button image or the effective period image may be hidden by displaying another effect image during the button press animation (while the third image is being displayed). Also, as shown in FIG. 404 (g), the button image or the effective period image may be hidden by displaying another effect image after the end timing of the button operation reception effective period or after the end.

  FIGS. 404 (h) to 404 (i) show the panel image displayed as another effect image when the panel image and the animation for notifying the operation method and the effective period image are displayed as the touch operation request display on the touch panel. The animation which alert | reports the operating method and the state where a part of effective period image is hidden are shown. In this way, not only the button image or the like, but a display that prompts the player to operate the operation means that can be operated (for example, an operation request display on the touch panel) may be hidden by another effect image. Further, an animation in which a finger moves in another effect image (notification animation of a touch operation method) may be hidden.

FIGS. 404 (k) to 404 (m) show a state in which a part of the button image as the rotating means is hidden by another effect image. The effective period image displayed at the bottom of the button image is also hidden. In this way, a display indicating that the button is operating (rotation, vibration, etc.) may be hidden by another effect display. The rotation speed of the button image is shown in FIGS. 404 (k), (l), and (m).
It becomes larger in order.

  As shown in FIGS. 404 (n) to (p), the display of the button image and the display of the effective period image may be hidden by displaying another effect image. When the effective period image is a horizontally long rectangular frame shape and the bar-shaped portion is displayed so that it gradually shortens to the right, for example, as the period elapses, the start position of the left end of the bar-shaped portion of the effective period image is set to another effect image. It may be hidden at least in the display (see FIG. 404 (n)), and the middle part of the horizontally long rectangular frame shape of the valid period image (the middle part of the valid period, the part near the start position, the part near the end position) is separated. May be hidden by the display of the effect image (see FIG. 404 (o)), or the end position of the right end of the bar-shaped portion of the effective period image may be hidden by the display of another effect image (FIG. 404 (p)). reference). In addition, both the effective period image and the button image may be hidden by displaying another effect image, and only one of the effective period image and the button image is hidden by displaying another effect image. May be. Further, the animation display of the effective period image and the button image may be hidden by the display of another effect image. In the case of an effective period image, an animation that changes over time (such as an animation that the effective period image decreases) or an animation that changes in response to a button operation (when a button is operated, the length of the bar-shaped portion of the effective period image increases) Part or all of the animation) may be hidden by displaying another effect image. In the case of button images, animations that prompt button operations (such as animations that change from a non-lit LED state to a lit state), animations during button operations (such as animations that dent buttons), and when button images appear or disappear Part or all of the animation may be hidden by displaying another effect image.

  When no operation is detected by the operation means (chance button 136, touch panel m700a, confirmation button, etc.), an effect display corresponding to the operation (cut-in effect, image 730 corresponding to the notice effect, flame image, etc.) May not be displayed, and even if no operation is detected, it may be displayed after the expiration of the valid period.

  Even when the operation of the chance button 136 is detected, the button operation animation is not performed, and the button image before the operation (for example, the first image) and the button image after the operation according to the button operation are performed. (For example, the third image) may be switched.

  In this embodiment, the chance button 136 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to the chance button, but can be applied to other operation means (trigger type operation means, jog stick type operation means, touch panel type operation means, etc.). It is.

  Note that at least a part or all of the effect display (cut-in effect, image 730 corresponding to the notice effect, flame image, etc.) according to the operation of the operation means (for example, the chance button 136) is another effect display (for example, Notice display (pre-reading notice, notice of change), error notification (illegal notification such as ball removal notification or magnet detection error), icon (hold icon, change icon), hitting notification (right-handed notification, left-handed notification), etc. ) May be overlapped by at least a part or all of.

  The operation effective period of the operation means is not limited to a meter, and may be notified by a number or an image other than a number.

  The display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) is a second type of display (for example, a display that does not use the operation means in the change or pre-reading notice display, a hold icon, a change icon, a fourth pattern, and a decorative pattern. It is also possible to display at least a hitting notification, an error display, a mission display, a user mode customization display, a game method display, an option menu, and the like. Here, the second type of display may be a type of display different from the first type of effect.

Note that the game machine (eg, pachinko machine 100) has a third type of effect (eg, display that does not use the operating means in the change or pre-reading notice display, hold icon, change icon, fourth pattern, decorative pattern, striking Method notification, error display, mission display, display related to customization in user mode, display of game method, display system such as option menu, effect operation by effect moving means, effect by decoration means (for example, lamp), etc. ) May be executable. Here, the third type of effect may be an effect different from both the first type of effect and the second type of effect.
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be made.

  The embodiment described above relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), a spinning machine (slot machine), or an enclosed game machine. In the conventional game stand, various displays are performed by the display means. However, the conventional game stand has room for improvement in display. An object of the above-described embodiment is to provide a game machine having a display characteristic. According to the above embodiment, it is possible to realize a game machine having a display characteristic.

  Moreover, in the conventional game machine, there was a game machine equipped with an operation means. However, the conventional game stand has room for improvement with respect to the operation means. An object of the above-described embodiment is to provide a game machine having a feature in operation means. According to the above embodiment, it is possible to realize a game machine having a feature in the operation means.

  In addition, the embodiment described above and the embodiments described below can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in the game machine. The pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine that encloses a sphere and circulates the enclosed sphere in the pachinko machine, and this enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed sphere as a launching sphere. The payout may be executed by credit.

Note that the items described in the above and the following detailed description, in particular, the items described in the embodiments and the modifications can be combined.
The game table of the above embodiment is expressed as follows, for example.

(Appendix A1)
Operation means;
Display means;
A game machine equipped with
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a first type of display,
The first type of display is a display related to the operation means,
The first display of the first type of display is a display including at least a first image;
The first display is a display including at least a second image;
The first display is a display including at least a third image;
The first display is a display including at least a first change in the first case,
The first change is a change from the first image to the third image through the second image,
The first case is when the operation means is operated.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A2)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix A1,
At least a part of the operating means is means capable of executing at least the first aspect;
At least a part of the operating means is means capable of executing at least the second aspect,
At least a part of the operating means is means capable of executing at least a second change in the first case,
The second change is to change at least from the first aspect to the second aspect.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A3)
A gaming machine according to appendix A1 or A2,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least the first display in the second case,
The second case is when the first period is in progress,
The first period is a period during which at least the operation of the operation means can be accepted.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A4)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A1 to A3,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a display including the first image in the third case,
The third case is a case where the first display is displayed on the display means.
The third case is a case where the operation means is not operated.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A5)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A1 to A4,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a second display of the first type of display,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least the second display in the first case,
The second display is a display that is displayed after the third image is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A6)
A gaming table according to appendices A1 to A5,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a second type of display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix B1)
Directing means;
Operation means;
A game machine equipped with
The production means is a means capable of executing at least a first type of production,
The first type of effect is an effect related to the operation means,
The first type of effect is an effect including a plurality of selection effects,
The plurality of selection effects are effects that can be selected at least by the player,
The effect means is a means capable of executing at least one effect (hereinafter referred to as “first effect”) of the plurality of selection effects selected at least by the player,
The effect means is a means capable of executing one effect (hereinafter referred to as “second effect”) of the first type effects.
The production means is a means capable of executing at least the first production in the first case,
The production means is means capable of executing at least the second production in the second case,
The first case is a case of the first period,
The second case is a case of the second period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix B2)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix B1,
The production means is means for not executing at least the first production in the second case.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix B3)
A gaming table according to appendix B1 or B2,
In the third case, the effect means is means for at least not executing the first effect,
In the fourth case, the effect means is means for not executing at least the second effect,
The third case is a case where there is no operation of the operation means in the first period,
The fourth case is a case where there is no operation of the operation means in the second period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix B4)
The game stand according to any one of appendices B1 to B3,
The first period is a period including at least a third period,
The second period is a period including at least a fourth period,
The third period is a period during which at least the operation of the operation means can be received.
The fourth period is a period during which at least the operation of the operation means can be accepted.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix B5)
The game stand according to any one of appendices B1 to B4,
A second directing means,
The production means is a first production means,
The second effect means is a means capable of executing at least a second type effect,
The second type of effect is an effect related to the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix C1)
Display means;
Operation means;
A game machine equipped with
The operation means is a means capable of performing at least a first operation,
The operation means is means capable of performing at least a second operation,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a first type of display,
The first type of display is a display related to the operation means,
The first display of the first type of display is a display related to the first operation,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a second display of the first type of display,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a part of the second display in the first case,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a part of the second display in the second case,
The first case is a case where the first display is displayed.
The first case is a case where the first operation is performed,
The second case is a case where the first display is displayed,
The second case is a case where the second operation is performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix C2)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix C1,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least the first display in the third case,
The third case is a case where it is a period in which at least the operation of the operation means can be accepted.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix C3)
A gaming machine according to appendix C1 or C2,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a third display of the first type of display;
The third display is a display related to the second operation.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix C4)
The game stand according to any one of appendices C1 to C3,
The display means is means for not displaying the second display in the fourth case,
The fourth case is a case where the first display is displayed,
The fourth case is when the operation means is not operated.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix C5)
The game stand according to any one of appendices C1 to C4,
The first operation is an operation different from the second operation.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix C6)
A gaming table according to appendices C1 to C5,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a second type of display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix D1)
Display means;
Operation means;
A game machine equipped with
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a first type of display,
The first type of display is a display related to the operation means,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a first display of the first type of display in the first case,
The first case is a case of the first period,
The first period is a period including a second period,
The second period is a period during which at least operation of the operation means is not accepted,
The first period is a period including at least a period during which the operation of the operation unit can be received.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix D2)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix D1,
The first display is a display related to a reception period of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix D3)
A game machine according to appendix D1 or D2,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a second display of the first type of display in the first case.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix D4)
The game stand according to any one of appendices D1 to D3,
The first period is a period including at least a third period;
The first period is a period including at least a fourth period;
The third period is a period before the second period is started,
The fourth period is a period after the second period ends,
The third period is a period during which at least the operation of the operation means can be accepted,
The fourth period is a period during which at least an operation of the operation means can be received.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix D5)
The game stand according to any one of appendices D1 to D4,
The first period is a period including at least a fifth period;
The fifth period is a period during which at least operation of the operation means is not accepted.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix D6)
A gaming machine according to appendices D1 to D5,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a second type of display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix E1)
A plurality of operating means;
Display means;
A game machine equipped with
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a first type of display,
The display of the first type is a display related to a first operation means among the plurality of operation means,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a first display of the first type of display in the first case,
The first case is a case of the first period,
The first period is a period during which at least the operation of the first operation means can be received,
The first period is a period during which at least the operation of the second operation means among the plurality of operation means can be received,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a second display of the first type display in the second case,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a third display of the first type of display in the third case,
The third display is a display including at least a part of the second display,
The second case is a case where there is at least an operation of the first operation means in the first case,
The third case is a case where there is at least an operation of the second operation means in the first case.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix E2)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix E1,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a second type of display,
The second type of display is a display related to the second operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix E3)
A game machine according to appendix E1 or E2,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a fourth display of the first type display in the first case,
The fourth display is a display related to a period during which at least the operation of the first operation means can be received.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix E4)
The game stand according to any one of appendices E1 to E3,
The display means is means for not displaying at least the second display in the fourth case,
The display means is means for not displaying at least the third display in the fifth case,
The fourth case is a case where there is no operation of the first operation means,
The fifth case is a case where there is no operation of the second operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix E5)
The game stand according to any one of appendices E1 to E4,
The first display is a display including at least a display imitating the first operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix F1)
Operation means;
Rotation means;
A game machine equipped with
The operation means is means capable of executing at least a first action,
The rotating means is means capable of executing at least a second operation,
The first operation is an operation in which at least a part of the operation means rotates in a first mode,
The second operation is an operation in which at least a part of the rotating means rotates in the second mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix F2)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix F1,
In the first case, the first part in the operating means is a part that goes around in a first time,
In the second case, the second part of the rotating means is a part that goes around in a second time,
The first case is a case where the operation means rotates in the first mode,
The second case is a case where the rotating means rotates in the second mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix F3)
A gaming machine according to appendix F1 or F2,
A display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a first type of display,
The first type of display is a display related to the operation means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a first display of the first type display in the third case,
The third case is a case where at least the first operation is executed by the operation means.
The rotating means is the first display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix F4)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix F3,
The first display is a display displayed at least during an operation reception period,
The operation reception period is a period during which at least operation of the operation means can be received.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix F5)
A gaming machine according to appendix F3 or F4,
The operation means is a button,
The first display is a display including at least a button image;
The button image is an image imitating at least a part of the button.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix F6)
A gaming machine according to appendices 3 to 5,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a second type of display.
A game stand characterized by that.
[Seventh Embodiment]

  Hereinafter, a gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a spinning machine such as a slot machine) according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. It should be noted that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 405 to 449 are used only in the description of the seventh embodiment in principle, and this embodiment even when the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings. In the explanation of Fig. 4, priority is given to the reference numerals shown in Figs. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so that the inner side of the front frame door 106 can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening 116. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player 200 ball launching handles 134 for launching into the game area 124, chance buttons 136 for changing the effects of the various effects devices 206 by the player's operation, and the chance button 136 to emit light. Sub button lamp 138, ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and return operation button for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance 142, and a ball rental display unit 144 for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit. In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. .

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 406 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 405 as seen from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 for guiding a ball that has passed through the communicating hole and dropped to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is provided.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-board that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error release switch that constitutes a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and that releases an error by the operation of a game clerk Discharge board case 172 storing the payout board 170 having 168, launch base constituting the launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of the game ball A launch board case 176 that houses 174, a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines, and a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game store clerk and an RWM clear by being operated when the power is turned on A power board case 184 that houses a power board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs a signal to the main controller 300, and a CR interface 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided. ing.

  FIG. 407 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The outer rail 202 extends from the top of the effect device 206 to the right, and a game ball can fly to the game area 124 on the right side of the game board 200 through the space between the upper portion of the effect device 206 and the outer rail 202. ing. In other words, the game area 124 has a first flow path on the left side across the effect device 206 as a decoration member as a path for the fired game ball to flow down, and a decoration member as a path for the fired game ball to flow down. And a second flow path on the right side. Hereinafter, hitting a game ball on the first downstream path may be referred to as “left-handed”, and hitting a game ball on the second downstream path may be referred to as “right-handed”.

  The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 at substantially the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the normal symbol. A holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, and a second special symbol holding lamp 220 are provided. The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the panel lamp 224, and details will be described later. In addition, hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, the special symbol as “special symbol”, the first special symbol as “special symbol 1”, and the second special symbol as “special symbol 2”.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 are display devices for displaying the special figure, and are configured by 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The multi-purpose hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general-purpose variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. In this embodiment, the general-purpose variable games are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games that are held (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, a predetermined number of special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four).

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances such as a general prize opening 226, a general figure start opening 228, a special figure 1 start opening 230, a special figure 2 start opening 232, and a variable prize opening around the rendering device 206. 234 is provided.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (wins in the general winning holes 226). In this case, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In the present embodiment, a game ball is a ball that is paid out to a player as a consideration for winning (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “prize ball”), and a ball that is lent to a player (hereinafter referred to as “lending ball”). Is included).

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the right side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one special figure 1 starting port 230 is arranged at the lower center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 1 starting port 230, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variable game by the special figure 1 display device 212 is started. Note that the ball that has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The special figure 2 starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electrical chew), and in the present embodiment, only one is provided below the general starting port 228. It can also be said that the special figure 2 starting port 232 is disposed in the electric chew. The special figure 2 starting port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. While the wing member 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter a sphere. When the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 2 232, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. Then, the special figure variable game by the special figure 2 display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the special figure 2 starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. Since the normal start port 228 and the special view 2 start port 232 below the normal start port 228 are in the second downstream flow path on the right side with the effect device 206 in between, the first start flow path on the left side with the effect device 206 in between. The game ball does not pass through the normal start port 228 or enter the special view start port 232. In addition, since the special figure 1 starting port 230 is in the first flow path on the left side with the effect device 206 in between, the game ball that has advanced to the second flow path on the right side with the effect device 206 in between is shown in FIG. There is no entry into the starting port 230.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a big winning opening or an attacker. In this embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is disposed below the game board 200 between the special figure 1 starting opening 230 and the special figure 2 starting opening 232. . The variable winning opening 234 includes a door member 234a that can be freely opened and closed. When the door member 234a is closed, a ball cannot be entered. Is stopped and displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at predetermined time intervals (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds) and at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  In FIG. 1, a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in a substantially straight line at an interval narrower than the diameter of the game ball in the region from the starting port 230 to the left end of the variable winning port 234. For this reason, at the time of a big hit, a right hit (how to hit a game ball through the space between the upper portion of the production device 206 and the outer rail 202 to the game area 124 on the right side of the game board 200) and a game in the second downflow path If the ball does not fly, the configuration is such that the game ball does not win the variable winning opening 234.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with the strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, The outer rod 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 148 and are launched into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (Special Figure 1 Start Port 230, Special Figure 2 Start Port 232) Wins the Out Port 240 without winning any of the winning ports or start ports, or just passing through the normal start port 228 To do.

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the stage device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and four floral patterns are vertically moved in the area of the board lamp 224 where the game ball cannot roll. A board surface lamp 224b is arranged, and a board lamp 224a composed of a plurality of (10 in this example) circular lamps arranged along the outer rail 202 on which the game ball can roll is arranged on the right side of the board.

  The board lamp 224a is turned on or blinks in a predetermined right-handed-informing lighting pattern when making a right-to-right notification. When the lighting pattern for right-handed notification is used, for example, right-handed notification is performed by sequentially changing the light emission luminance of the ten circular lamps from the upper side to the lower side, or a group of two or three adjacent lamps. The light emission brightness of the lamp group is made different from the brightness of the remaining circular lamp group, and gradation control is performed so that the group of circular lamp groups sequentially move from the upper side to the lower side. It is possible to perform a right-handed notification that allows the user to visually recognize it as it flows down.

  In addition, the panel lamp 224a can be lit or blinked in a predetermined pre-reading notice notification lighting pattern when performing the pre-reading notice notification. For example, in the case of a normal performance, which is a lighting mode in which odd and even numbers of 10 circular lamps are alternately lit, in a pre-reading notice, a lighting mode in which all 10 circular lamps are lit is used. A lighting pattern different from the normal performance or the right-handed notification can be used.

  The board lamp 224b is turned on and blinks in a predetermined right-handed-informing lighting pattern when making a right-to-right notification. When using the lighting pattern for right-handed notification, for example, the right-handed notification is performed by sequentially changing the light emission luminance of the four petal lamps from the upper side to the lower side so that the petals flow down along the right-handed direction. It is possible to perform a right-handed notification to be visually recognized.

  In addition, the panel lamp 224b can be lit or blinked in a predetermined pre-reading notice notification lighting pattern when performing the pre-reading notice notification. For example, in the normal performance, when the odd number and even number of the four petal lamps are alternately lit, the pre-reading notice notifies that the number of the petal lamps is lit in order from the bottom. For the petal lamp corresponding to the hold related to the prefetch notification, a lighting pattern for lighting in a specific emission color can be used while performing notification.

  The panel lamp 224 is configured to be able to execute a predetermined normal lighting effect when not making a right-handed notification or a prefetch notice.

  In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter may be referred to as a door or a shutter) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the panel lamp 224. The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball that has been picked up by a nail of the game board 200, and the passed ball passes to the special opening 1 230 in the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding means shields the inner end portions thereof so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

  On the lower right side of the game board 200, a state notification lamp 222 is provided. The status notification lamp 222 includes four lamps (for example, LEDs) arranged in a straight line in the horizontal direction. Each lamp of the status notification lamp 222 functions in order from the left as a right-handed lamp, a big hit medium lamp, a non-electric support lamp, and an electric support lamp. The right-handed lamp is turned on when the player should make a right-handed light and turned off otherwise. The jackpot light is turned on during the jackpot game and is turned off otherwise. The non-electric support lamp is turned on during the non-electric support state, and is turned off otherwise. The electric support lamp is turned on during the electric support state and is turned off otherwise.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and the power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 are configured. Yes.

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and data temporarily. A RAM 308 for storing, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and the number of times, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing are mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 also includes a random value generation circuit 318 used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes 2 counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each starting port, winning port, variable winning port, front frame door opening sensor, and inner frame A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including an open sensor and a lower plate full sensor, and outputting a comparison result with an amplification result and a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302; Drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of the special symbol display device 212 or the special symbol 2 display device 214, a predetermined symbol display device, for example, A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the general-purpose display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, a general-purpose reservation lamp 216, a special figure 1 retention lamp 218, a special figure 2 reservation lamp 220, a state notification lamp 222, etc. ) For controlling display, and various solenoids 332 for opening and closing predetermined movable members, for example, the blade member 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232, the door member 234a of the variable winning port 234, and the like. The drive circuit 334 is connected.

  When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. 100 game information (for example, game state) is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 for monitoring the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 has a voltage value of the power source. When the voltage is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 starts from the start signal output circuit 340. When a signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300. The pachinko machine 100 is not limited to the one-way communication from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600, but between the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600. It may be configured such that signals such as commands can be transmitted in both directions.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and frequency are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138 and the panel lamp 224), and the like. A driving circuit 432 for controlling the driving of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button detection sensor 426 for detecting the pressing of the chance button 136, a shielding device sensor 430, A sensor circuit 428 for outputting a detection signal from the chance button detection sensor 426 to the basic circuit 402, a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effects data, image data stored in the ROM 406 based on signals from the CPU 404, etc. To read the work area of VRAM 436 And it generates a display image by use to display an image on the decorative pattern display apparatus 208 VDP434 and (Video Display Processor), is connected to. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time and frequency. It is equipped with. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 502 controls the ROM 506 storing the control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like, and the game board lamp 532. Between the game board lamp drive circuit 530, the game table frame lamp drive circuit 540 for controlling the game table frame lamp 542, and between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game table frame lamp drive circuit 540 And a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 409 (a) to 409 (c), the special figure display device 212, the special figure display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the universal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of figures and ordinary drawings will be described. FIG. 409 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special figure. The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the special figure 2 start opening 232 indicates that the ball has entered 2 The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the start sensor is detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs “variable display of special figure 2” by repeating all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. . These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display in the present embodiment. When the fluctuation time determined before the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 (corresponding to the fluctuation time in the present embodiment) elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, When the variation time determined before the start of the variation 2 (this also corresponds to the variation time in the present embodiment) has elapsed, the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special illustration 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation display in the present embodiment, hereinafter, after the “variable display of special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. The series of displays up to is referred to as symbol variation display. As will be described later, the symbol variation display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 409 (a), ten types of special drawings from “special drawing A” to “special drawing J” are shown as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation display. In FIG. 409 (a), a white portion in the drawing indicates a segment location where the light is extinguished, and a black portion indicates a location where the segment is illuminated. “Special figure A” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, the determination as to whether or not the big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the decision as to whether or not it is a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is a special figure variable game that is started after the jackpot game ends, and the difference in probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot). Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, the state shifts to an electric support state (sometimes referred to as a short time state). Although the electric support state will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the electric support state is referred to as a normal high probability state, and the state that does not shift to the electric support state is referred to as a normal low probability state. “Special figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that have a relatively high degree of advantage over the player.

  “Special figure C” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure C” is 2R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 15R. “Special figure D” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time reduction, and is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure D” is 2R compared to “Special Figure B” which is 15R. “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol suddenly called normal, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. These “special drawing E” and “special drawing F” are both 2R and are in a state in which they do not shift to the electric support state. These “special drawing E” and “special drawing F” are both 2R and are in a state in which they do not shift to the electric support state. When the special figure E or the special figure F is stopped and displayed in the special figure variable game in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, the electric support state is maintained. Further, when the special figure E or special figure F is stopped and displayed in the special figure variable game in the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, 100 electric support is given again.

  “Special figure G” is the first small hit symbol, and “Special figure H” is the second small hit symbol, both of which are in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit here is equivalent to the big hit without 2R electric support. That is, “Special Figure G” and “Special Figure H” are in the same state as “Special Figure F”, but the effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 are different in both cases. By providing “G”, “Special Figure H”, and “Special Figure F”, the interest of the game is enhanced.

  In addition, “Special Figure I” is a first off symbol, and “Special Figure J” is a second off symbol, which is a symbol that is relatively less advantageous to the player. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, symbols other than “Special Illustration A” are prepared as 15R special jackpot symbols, and the same applies to other symbols such as 15R jackpot symbols.

  Although details will be described later, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment determines whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss in the determination of success / failure, and then, based on the result of the determination of success / failure, It is configured to determine which of “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure J” is to be stopped and displayed on Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2 display devices 212 and 214 after the symbol variation display. For this reason, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment determines the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the symbol variation display, so that the number of rounds of the big hit game and the profit state after the big hit game (for example, the special figure certain change state) The presence / absence of the power and the presence / absence of the electric support state are automatically determined. However, the pachinko machine 100 is not limited to this. For example, apart from the determination of the stop symbol, the number of rounds of the big hit game and the profit state after the big hit game may be determined by lottery. The pachinko machine 100, for example, automatically determines the number of rounds of the jackpot game when the stop symbol is determined, whereas the pachinko machine 100 automatically determines the profit state after the jackpot game by lottery. The profit status may be appropriately associated.

  FIG. 409 (b) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the start port 232. In the symbol display area, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. “Change design of symbols”.

  When notifying 15R special jackpot of “Special Figure A” or 15R big jackpot of “Special Figure B”, a combination of symbols in which three same decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, “Decoration 1− (Decoration 1 -decoration 1 "," decoration 2 -decoration 2 -decoration 2 ", etc.) are stopped and displayed. When the 15R special jackpot of “special drawing A” is explicitly notified, a combination of three symbols of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” or “decoration 7—decoration 7”). -Decoration 7 "etc.) is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the 2R big hit called “hidden probability change” of “special drawing E”, the 2R big hit called “special drawing F” suddenly normal, or the first small hit of “special drawing G”, “special drawing H” When notifying the second small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in order to notify 2R jackpot called “sudden probability change” of “special drawing C” or 2R jackpot called “sudden time reduction of“ special drawing D ”,“ decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5 ”is set. Stop display.

  On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of “Special Figure I” and the second deviation of “Special Figure J”, the symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 409 (b) are stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

  FIG. 409 (c) shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes of “normal map A”, which is a winning symbol, and “general symbol B”, which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the general start port 228, the general map display device 210 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the deviation of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 409 (c), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input performs reset start by a reset interrupt, and executes main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 410 according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Enable operation, set initial values, etc. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted. In step S105 subsequent to step S103, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. It is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased when the voltage is less than (9 V in this embodiment). Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, a second output port, etc.) 1) a process of outputting a clear signal from the output port 1), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

  In step S109 subsequent to step S107, it is determined whether or not the state before power interruption (before power interruption) is restored. If the state before power interruption is not restored (the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is changed). In the case of initializing), the process proceeds to initialization processing (step S113). Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a game store clerk or the like operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicating that there has been an operation). It is determined whether or not RAM clear is necessary, and if the RAM clear signal is on (RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. In addition, a transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115 subsequent to step S113, the basic random number initial value updating process is performed after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this basic random number initial value update process, when it is determined whether or not it is a big hit or not, a random number value for determining a special figure for winning time used for a lottery to determine a stop symbol in special figure variable games is generated. The initial value generating random number counter for generating the initial value of the winning special figure determining random number counter (hereinafter referred to as “initial value generating random number counter corresponding to the winning special figure determining random number counter”). ). Also, an initial value generation random number counter for generating an initial value of a universal winning random number counter for generating a normal winning random number for use in determining whether or not a normal floating game is successful (hereinafter referred to as “corresponding to the normal winning random counter”). "Initial value generation random number counter"). For example, if the range of values that can be taken as the random number value for determining the special figure for hitting is 0 to 99, the value is stored from the initial value generating random number counter storage area corresponding to the random number counter for determining the special figure for winning hour provided in the RAM 308. Acquire, add 1 to the acquired value, and store in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the usual winning random number counter is updated in the same manner. Note that the initial value generating random number counters corresponding to the winning special figure determining random number counter and the common winning random number counter are also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

  Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed. In step S203 following step S201, the WDT is set so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial set value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and no WDT interrupt occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). It is restarted periodically (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms, which is the main controller timer interrupt period).

  In step S205 subsequent to step S203, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed in step S205. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 408, winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal) is stored. In step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). If there is a match with the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the special figure 2 starting opening 232, or the normal figure starting opening 228 is passed. Judge that there was. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been awarded to the winning ports 226 and 234 and the starting ports 230, 232, and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 following step S205 and in step S209 subsequent thereto, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process in step S207, the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to the winning special figure determining random number counter and the universal winning random number counter respectively performed in step S115 is updated. In the basic random number update process in step S209, the winning special figure determining random number counter and the regular winning random number counter used in the main control unit 300 are updated. For example, assuming that the range of values that can be taken as random numbers for determining a special figure for hitting is 0 to 99, a random number counter for determining a special figure for hitting provided in the RAM 308 to generate a random number for determining a special figure for winning at the time Is obtained, and 1 is added to the obtained value, which is then stored in the original random number counter for determining a hit special figure. At this time, if the result obtained by adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter for determining a hit time special figure. In addition, when it is determined as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value that the winning-time special figure determining random number counter makes a round, the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to the winning special figure determining random number counter Is set in the random counter for determining the special figure for winning hour. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for hitting special figure determination that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 99, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for determining the winning hour figure, and The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to set the figure-determining random number counter and to determine that the winning-time special figure determining random number counter has made one round next. In addition to the initial value storage area for determining that the winning special figure determining random number counter has made one round next, an initial value for determining that the common winning random number counter has made one round A storage area is provided in the RAM 308. The hit special figure determining random number counter may be provided with a counter for acquiring the random value for special figure 1 and a counter for acquiring the random value for special figure 2 or the same. The counter may be used.

  In step S211 following step S209, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated. Specifically, the special figure variation time determination random number counter for generating the special figure variation time determination random number value for determining the symbol variation time in the special figure variation game is updated. In addition, a random number counter for determining a normal figure change time for generating a random value for determining a normal figure change time for determining a symbol change time in the normal figure change game is updated.

  In step S213 following step S211, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 and the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 are counted. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer, Special figure 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the special figure 2 display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined time Various timers including a timer for counting the closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215 subsequent to step S213, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when winning holes 226, 234 and starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, the RAM 308 stores the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In step S217 following step S215, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the special figure 2 starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228 and the variable winning port 234. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

  If there is a winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the corresponding special figure 1 reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full (in this example, the full number is 4), the random number value generation circuit (Hard Random Number Circuit) A random number value for hit determination generated by performing predetermined processing on the value stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the starting port 230 of the special figure 1 of 318 is obtained and provided in the RAM 308. The hit special figure determining random value is obtained from the hit special figure determining random number counter and stored in the special figure 1 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. Special figure 1 random number value for determining hit and random number value for determining special figure for winning hour (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 1 random value group" or "special figure 1 start information") Are stored for the same number as the number of reserved special figure 1 stored in the special figure 1 reserved number storage area. In the special figure 1 random value storage area, each time the special figure 1 holding number decreases, the data of a set of special figure 1 random values having the highest holding order (the first and most recently stored) is stored. In addition to being erased, the remaining special figure 1 random value set data is processed so that the holding order is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 holding number increases by one, the new special figure 1 random value set data is added to the next holding order of the special figure 1 random value set data having the lowest (last) holding order. Written.

  When the special figure 2 starting port 232 is won and the corresponding special figure 2 reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full (in this example, the reserved number 4 is full), the random value generation circuit A random number value for hit determination generated by performing predetermined processing on the value stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the start port 232 of the special figure 2 of 318 is acquired, and the hit time special feature provided in the RAM 308 is acquired. The random number value for hit special figure determination is acquired from the random number counter for figure determination and is stored in the special figure 2 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. Special figure 2 random number value for determining hit and random number value for determining special figure for winning time (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 2 random value group" or "special figure 2 start information") Are stored for the same number as the number of reserved special figure 2 stored in the special figure 2 reserved number storage area. In the special figure 2 random value storage area, each time the special figure 2 holding number decreases, the data of the special figure 2 random value pair with the highest holding order is deleted, and the remaining special figure 2 random value Processing is performed so that the holding order of the set of data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 holding number increases by one, the new special figure 2 random value set data is written in the next holding order of the special figure 2 random value set data having the lowest holding order.

  If there is a winning at the general figure starting port 228 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is obtained from the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number value as the normal figure winning random number value. Stored in the random number storage area. When there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening.

  In step S219 following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221 following step S219, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the general diagram state update process in the middle of the normal map change display (the value of the above-mentioned general map display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the general map display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the general map display device 210 performs normal variable display (normal map variable game).

  Also, in the general state update process at the timing when the normal map change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general map display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), When the 7-segment LED constituting the general-purpose display device 210 is turned on / off to control the display mode, and the normal-map hit flag is off, the general-purpose display is displayed so that the display mode of the off symbol is displayed. The 7 segment LED constituting the device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the universal symbol display device 210 determines either the winning symbol (general symbol A shown in FIG. 409 (c)) or the off symbol (general symbol B shown in FIG. 409 (c)). Display. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, for 500 milliseconds (ms)). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), A normal operation is set in the setting area, and a predetermined open period (for example, 2 seconds), a solenoid for driving to open / close the blade member 232a of the special opening 2 232 (a part of various solenoids 332), A signal for holding 232a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Further, if the result of the usual figure variation game is out of place, the usual figure hit flag is turned off as will be described later. In the case where the usual figure hit flag is off, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the special map 2 start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is inactive), and the number of the general map variable games that are on hold When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether or not the result of the usual figure variation game is won or not by the random lottery based on the usual figure winning random number value stored in the above random number value storage area. When a winning determination is made and the winning combination is made, ON is set to the common winning flag provided in the RAM 308. In the case of unsuccessful election, the flag for the usual figure is set to OFF. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In step S224 following step S223, special figure prefetching processing is performed. In the special figure prefetching process, when there is a prize at the special figure 1 starting slot 230 or the special figure 2 starting slot 232, the start information related to the holding increased due to the winning is prefetched, and the result of the special figure variable game relating to the holding is determined. The stop symbol and the variation time based on are determined in advance prior to the determination of success / failure in the special drawing related lottery process. The flow of the special figure prefetching process will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 430 and 431.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following plural (in this example, nine) processes is performed according to the special figure 2 state.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing of the special figure 2 fluctuation start, a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value of the special figure 2 holding number stored in the special figure 2 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is shown in FIG. Re-store in the reserved number storage area. At the same time, the turning on / off of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 is controlled. For example, if the four LEDs of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 in FIG. 407 are LED numbers 1-4 in order from the left to the right in the figure, the LEDs corresponding to the special figure 2 holding number are red, for example, in order from the smallest LED number. Turn on and turn off the others.

  Also, for example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the special figure 2 variable display (special figure 2 variable game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 includes a 15R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first off flag, a second off flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a normal figure. A flag for each probability variation flag is prepared. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), the 15R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation When the flag is also on and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure A, 15R jackpot flag shown in FIG. 409 (a) is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on. When the special figure B, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and the general figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, When the probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and when the common figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the special figure E, 2R jackpot flag is on, special chart The probability flag is off, Special figure F when figure probability fluctuation flag is off, special figure G when first small hit flag is on, special figure H when first small hit flag is on, special figure H, first off flag is on In this case, the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the special figure I and the second off flag are turned on, respectively, in the special figure J. A setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress is made in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special figure A), a 15R big jackpot symbol (special figure B), a sudden probability variation symbol (special figure C), and a sudden short time symbol (special figure D). ), Hidden probability variation (special E), sudden normal (special F), first small hit (special G), second small hit (special H), first off symbol (special I) ) And the second off-set symbol (special symbol J). Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, for 500 ms). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. Also, if the electric support number stored in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, the subtraction result is changed from 1 to 0. In this case, if the special figure probability is not changing (details will be described later), the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable winning opening 234, the door is connected to a solenoid for opening / closing the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332). A signal for holding the member 234a in the opened state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to a solenoid for opening / closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332), and a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is used. Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 15 rounds or 2 rounds), and in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) In other words, the effect standby period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Set the information indicating. Also, if the ordinary probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, the power support number (for example, 100 times) is set in the power support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, and the RAM 308 Turns on the hourly flag provided in. If the usual probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the power support count storage unit does not set the power support count, and the time reduction flag is not turned ON. Here, the electric support state means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is in the normal figure high probability (normal figure certain change) state. There is a higher probability of hitting in the general-game variable game in the high-probability state than in the normal-game low-probability state. In addition, in the normal figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure variable game is shorter than in the normal figure low probability state (normal figure variable short). Furthermore, in the normal high probability state, compared to the normal low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer (electrical chew extension). In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. The game state due to the universal figure change, the universal figure change, and the electric chew extension is collectively referred to as an electric support (starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

  In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls will be placed in the special figure 2 starting port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls are entered during the big hit game. In order to solve this, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases and the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases, resulting in an increase in gambling. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of place, the out-of-game flag is turned on as will be described later. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, when the number of special figure 2 variable games held is larger than 0, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game hold are not performed. The notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the special figure 2 starting port 232 is notified. 1 is performed in preference to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the starting port 230.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), a special figure 2 random value pair is obtained from the first (most recently stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. Referring to the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 414 (a) or 414 (b) for the random number value for hit determination in the set of the special figure 2 random value, the big hit or the small hit is determined. Or whether it is off. Next, when the determination result is a big hit or a small hit, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure determination random number value in the special figure 2 random value storage area obtained as shown in FIG. 415 (b). With reference to the table for determination in FIG. 2, the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display of the special diagram 2 is determined. As will be described in detail later, when the result of the determination is wrong, a random symbol value for determining a missing symbol is separately obtained, and the random number value is stopped with reference to the special table 2 determination table shown in FIG. 415 (b). Determine the design.

  After the first special figure 2 random value set is extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the storage of the special figure 2 random value set in the special figure 2 random value storage area is cleared, and the special figure 2 Subtract 1 from the number of holds. At this time, the set of the special figure 2 random value extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area (an example of the second starting information storage means) provided in the RAM 308, You may make it perform the above-mentioned determination based on the group of the said special figure 2 random value memorize | stored in this temporary area | region.

  Since the special figure 1 lottery process (step S231) is the same as the special figure 2 lottery process (step S229) except that the special figure 1 determination table shown in FIG. Omitted.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, prefetch result information command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, etc. Information that can specify the type of command), bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes 15R jackpot flag and 2R jackpot flag values stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, special chart probability variation flag values, and special chart related items. Including the special figure variation time selected in the lottery process, and in the case of a symbol variation stop command, the value of the 15R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. In the case of a command, the value of a special figure probability variation flag is included, and in the case of a jackpot round number designation command, the value of a special figure probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the special figure 2 starting port 232, presence / absence of winning at the variable winning port 234, etc. including.

  The prefetch result information command includes prefetch result information (preliminarily determined stop symbol and variable time information) stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the command data, and the number of the prefetched stop symbols. Is included in the number-of-holds information indicating whether or not it corresponds. The prefetch result information and the hold number information in the prefetch result information command may include only an increment, or may include prefetch result information and hold number information for all holds.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the value of the 15R big hit flag or 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure 2 related are stored in the RAM 308 as command data. Information indicating the special figure variation time selected in the lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game, etc. that are on hold is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag, the value of the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described winning prize opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held, etc. Set the information indicating. In the above-described winning prize closing setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held, etc. Set the information indicating. In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increasing process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235 following step S233, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a full tray error is monitored. When the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening / closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the general diagram display device 210 and the special diagram 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326, 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is ON. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, the interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 410 is performed. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

  Next, processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6C is a flowchart of the timer variable update interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. This initialization process takes about 30 seconds, for example.

  In step S303 following step S301, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. . In step S305, 0 is substituted into the timer variable.

  In step S307 following step S305, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309 after step S307, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading effect data corresponding to the command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when update of the effect data is necessary, effect data update processing is performed.

  In step S311 following step S309, if pressing of the chance button is detected, processing for changing the effect data updated in step S309 to effect data corresponding to the pressing of the chance button is performed.

  In step S313 following step S311, if there is a command to the VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S315 subsequent to step S313, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S317 following step S315, if there is a command to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S319 following step S317, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S321 following step S319, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S303. .

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). Execute in the cycle. In step S501 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG. 412 (a). Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S503 subsequent to step S501, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S321 in the main process of the first sub-control unit 400, update processing of random numbers for other effects, and the like are performed.

  Next, the image control process in step S313 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603 following step S601, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605. Wait for the input signal to be input. In step S605, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets parameters according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607 following step S605, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S609 following step S607, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611. Waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input. In step S611, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  The process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step S701 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S701. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S703 subsequent to step S701, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. . In step S705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S707 following step S705, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S709 subsequent to step S707, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S707, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 506, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  In step S711 subsequent to step S709, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, the command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S713 following step S711, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step S703.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and a timer interrupt process is performed in response to this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle. In step S901 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second sub control unit main process shown in FIG. 413 (a). Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S903 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process is performed.

  Next, a special figure variation game or the like in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 414 to 447. First, the validity determination table used in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The data table shown in FIG. 414 is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, for example. FIG. 414 (a) and FIG. 414 (b) show the success / failure determination process of special figure 2 or special figure 1 in special figure 2 or special figure 1 related lottery process (steps S229, S231) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. An example of the use determination table used is shown. FIG. 414 (a) shows a table used during the special figure high probability, and FIG. 414 (b) shows a table used during the special figure low probability.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIGS. 414 (a) and 414 (b) has items of “special figure probability” in the first column from the left, “random number range” in the second column, and “result of success / failure” in the third column. It consists of The “high probability” in the “special figure probability” in the first column shown in FIG. 414 (a) indicates that the gaming state at the time of the determination is a special figure high probability state. The “random number range” in the second column indicates a numerical range (0 to 65535) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired hit determination random number value. The “random number range” is divided into four values: a numerical value 0 to 10,000, a numerical value 10001 to 11638, a numerical value 11639 to 11940, and a numerical value 11941 to 65535. In the third column, the “result of success / failure” is assigned “high probability”, “0” to 10000, “out” is assigned to the values 11941 to 65535, “hits” is assigned to the values 10001 to 11638, “Small hit” is assigned corresponding to the numerical values 11639 to 11940.

  The “low probability” in the “special figure probability” in the first column shown in FIG. 414 (b) indicates that the gaming state at the time of the determination is a special figure low probability state. The “random number range” in the second column indicates a numerical range (0 to 65535) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired hit determination random number value. The “random number range” is divided into four values of a numerical value 0 to 10000, a numerical value 10001 to 10162, a numerical value 10163 to 10464, and a numerical value 10465 to 65535. In the third column, the “result of success / failure” is assigned “low probability”, “0” to 10000, “loss” corresponding to the values 10465 to 65535, “hits” corresponding to the values 10001 to 10162, “Small hit” is assigned corresponding to the numerical values 10163 to 10464.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 uses the acquired winning judgment to determine whether the result of the floating game shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2 is a winning (winning) or a wrong winning (missing). Whether or not the random number is determined is determined by referring to the determination table. For example, if the gaming state at the time of winning / failing determination is a special figure high probability state, the basic circuit 302 reads the high / failure determination high probability table shown in FIG. 414 (a) from the ROM 306, and the gaming state at the time of winning / failing determination is special. In the case of the low-probability state, the validity determination low-probability table shown in FIG. 414 (b) is read from the ROM 306 and referred to.

  FIG. 415 shows a special figure determination table used for determining a symbol to be stopped and displayed after completion of symbol variation. FIG. 415 (a) shows a special figure 1 determination table, and FIG. 415 (b) shows a special figure 2 determination table. The special figure 1 determination table shown in FIG. 415 (a) and the special figure 2 determination table shown in FIG. 415 (b) are shown in the left column as “correction determination result”, “symbol random number range”, “stop symbol”. It consists of items. The “win / fail judgment result” in the left column is divided into “big hit”, “small hit”, and “out of line”. “Big hit” indicates a case where it is determined as “big hit” as a result of the success / failure determination using the special figure success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 414 (a) or FIG. 414 (b). As a result of the success / failure determination using the determination table, it shows a case where it is determined as “small hit”, and “out” indicates a case where it is determined as “out of” as a result of the success / failure determination using the special figure determination table Show.

  The item “symbol random number range” in the middle column of the table shown in FIG. 415 (a) indicates the numerical range of random numbers to be compared with the acquired special random number for determining figure 1 for hitting time or the random number value for determining outlier symbol. Yes. The “design random number range” corresponds to the item “big hit” in the left column “result determination result”, the numerical value 0-49, the numerical value 50-69, the numerical value 70-77, the numerical value 78-83, the numerical value 84-91 and It is divided into six values of 92 to 99, and is divided into two values of 0 to 49 and 50 to 99 corresponding to “small hit”, and values of 0 to 49 and values corresponding to “out” It is divided into two of 50-99.

  The item “stop symbol” in the right column of the table shown in FIG. 415 (a) represents a stop symbol in the special figure 1 variable game. The “stop symbol” corresponds to “special symbol A” corresponding to the value “0” to “49” and “special symbol B” corresponding to the numerical value 50 to 69, and “special symbol B” corresponding to the numerical value 70 to 77. "Special figure C", "Special figure D" corresponding to numerical values 78-83, "Special figure E" corresponding to numerical values 84-91, and "Special figure F" corresponding to numerical values 92-99 Each design aspect is assigned. In addition, the “stop symbol” has “stop symbol” and the symbol random number range is “Special Figure G” corresponding to the numerical value 0 to 49, and “Special Figure H” corresponding to the numerical value 50 to 99. Each is assigned. Furthermore, the “stop symbol” has “stop” and the stop symbol form of “special symbol I” corresponding to the numerical value 0 to 49 and “special symbol J” corresponding to the numerical value 50 to 99, respectively. Assigned.

  As described above, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 displays “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure” on the Special Figure 1 display device 212 when the determination result based on the ball entering the Special Figure 1 starting port 230 is a big hit. Which stop symbol mode of “F” is to be stopped and displayed is determined with reference to the special figure 1 determination table with respect to the acquired random number for special figure determination for winning hour.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 displays “special figure G” and “special figure H” on the special figure 1 display device 212 when the determination result based on entering the special figure 1 starting port 230 is a small hit. Which stop symbol form of “” is to be stopped and displayed is determined with reference to the special figure 1 determination table with respect to the acquired random number for special figure determination for winning hour.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 causes the special figure 1 display device 212 to stop any of the special figure I and special figure J when the result of the determination of winning / failing based on the winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230 is out of place. Whether the mode is to be stopped and displayed is determined with reference to the special figure 1 determination table with respect to the acquired random number value for determining the lost symbol. Note that the random symbol value for losing symbol determination is acquired from the random symbol counter for losing symbol determination provided in the RAM 308 when determining the symbol for stopping detachment.

  The item “symbol random number range” in the middle column of the table shown in FIG. 415 (b) indicates the numerical range of random numbers to be compared with the acquired special random number value for determining the hit time 2 or the random number value for determining the lost symbol. Yes. The “design random number range” is divided into two values of 0 to 65 and 66 to 99 corresponding to the item “big hit” in the left column “result of determination”, and corresponds to “small hit”. It is divided into two values, 0 to 49 and 50 to 99, and is divided into two values, 0 to 49 and 50 to 99, corresponding to “out”.

  The item “stop symbol” in the right column of the table shown in FIG. 415 (b) represents a stop symbol in the special figure 2 variable game. “Stop symbol” is assigned “stop symbol” of “special symbol A” corresponding to the value “0” to “65” and “special symbol B” corresponding to the value 66 to 99, respectively. ing. In addition, the “stop symbol” has “stop symbol” and the symbol random number range is “Special Figure G” corresponding to the numerical value 0 to 49, and “Special Figure H” corresponding to the numerical value 50 to 99. Each is assigned. Furthermore, the “stop symbol” has “stop” and the stop symbol form of “special symbol I” corresponding to the numerical value 0 to 49 and “special symbol J” corresponding to the numerical value 50 to 99, respectively. Assigned.

  In this way, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 displays “Special Figure A” and “Special Figure” on the Special Figure 2 display device 214 when the success / failure determination result based on the entrance to the Special Figure 2 starting port 232 is a big hit. Which stop symbol aspect of “B” is to be stopped and displayed is determined with reference to the special figure 2 determination table with respect to the acquired random number value for determining the special figure for winning hour. In addition, as shown in FIG. 415 (b), the random number value in the “design random number range” in the case where the “win / fail judgment result” is “big hit” is “stop figure” is “special figure A” or “special figure” “B” only. For this reason, in the special figure 2 variable game, the stop symbol in the case where the determination result is a big hit is determined as one of "Special Figure A" or "Special Figure B", and "Special Figure C" to "Special Figure" “F” is not selected. Therefore, the jackpot game of the special figure 2 variable game is set to be advantageous to the player as compared to the big hit game of the special figure 1 variable game.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 displays “special figure G” and “special figure H” on the special figure 2 display device 214 when the determination result based on the ball entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 is a small hit. Which stop symbol form of “” is to be stopped and displayed is determined with reference to the special figure 2 determination table with respect to the obtained random number value for determining the special figure for winning hour.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 causes the special figure 2 display device 214 to display either the special figure I or the special figure J stop symbol when the result of the determination based on the winning at the special figure 2 starting port 232 is out of place. Whether the mode is to be stopped and displayed is determined with reference to the special figure 2 special figure determination table with respect to the acquired random symbol value for determining the off symbol. Note that the random symbol value for losing symbol determination is acquired from the random symbol counter for losing symbol determination provided in the RAM 308 when determining the symbol for stopping detachment.

  FIG. 416 shows an example of the special figure 1 fluctuation display time determination table for determining the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display in the special figure 1 fluctuation game. The special figure 1 variable display time determination table is used in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) of the main control unit timer interruption process. The data table illustrated in FIG. 416 is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, for example. As shown in FIG. 416, the special figure 1 variable display time determination table includes “stop symbol”, “table”, “random number selection range”, “variable time” and “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device” from the left column. It consists of five items.

  The “stop symbol” in the left column is a stop symbol determined using the special figure 1 determination table of FIG. 415 (a), and “special symbol A / special symbol B (common with or without electric support)”, "Special Figure C-Special Figure H (Common with / without Electric Support)", "Special Figure I / Special Figure J (No Electric Support: Hold 3)", and "Special Figure I / Special Figure J (No Electric Support: Reserved) 0 to 2, or with electric support: reserved 0 to 3) ". When the “stop symbol” is “special chart A / special chart B”, whether or not the game state at the time of variable time determination is the electric support state (presence / absence of electric support) and the number of special figure 1 variable games held First, the table “1” is selected. When “stop symbol” is “special chart C to special chart H”, the table “2” is selected regardless of the presence / absence of the electric support at the time of determining the variation time and the number of suspension of the special diagram 1 variation game.

  When “Stop Symbol” is “Special Figure I / Special Figure J”, either “3” or “4” is selected according to the presence or absence of electronic support at the time of variable time determination and the number of special figure 1 variable games held. It has come to be. If the special symbol I or J is determined as the stop symbol, there is no electric support and the number of special figure 1 variable games held is 3, the table “3” is selected and there is no electric support and the hold When the number is 0 to 2 or when there is electric support and the number of reservations is 0 to 3, the table “4” is selected.

  “Random number selection range” on the right side of the “table” in the figure indicates a numerical range (0 to 65535) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time. The random number value for determining the special figure variation time is acquired, for example, at the same time as the acquisition of the start information of FIG. It has become. In the table “1”, the “random number selection range” is divided into three values of a numerical value 0 to 1000, a numerical value 1001 to 20000, and a numerical value 20001 to 65535. In the table “2”, the “random number selection range” is divided into one of all numerical values 0 to 65535. In the table “3”, the “random number selection range” is divided into four values of a numerical value 0 to 65000, a numerical value 65001 to 65400, a numerical value 65401 to 65500, and a numerical value 65501 to 65535. In the table “4”, the “random number selection range” is divided into four values of a numerical value 0 to 50000, a numerical value 50001 to 60000, a numerical value 60001 to 65000, and a numerical value 65001 to 65535.

  “Variation time” on the right side of the “Random number selection range” indicates the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable game. The “variable time” is “15000 ms” corresponding to the table “1” and the random number selection range corresponding to the numerical values 0 to 1000, “45000 ms” corresponding to the numerical values 1001 to 20000, and “65000 ms corresponding to the numerical values 20001 to 65535. "Is assigned to each. “Variation time” is assigned with “12000 ms” corresponding to the table “2” and the random number selection range corresponding to all the numerical values 0 to 65535. The “variation time” corresponds to the table “3”, the random number selection range corresponding to the numerical values 0 to 65000, “3000 ms”, the numerical values 65001 to 65400, “10000 ms”, and the numerical values 65401 to 65500. “60000 ms” and “60000 ms” are assigned to the numerical values 65501 to 65535, respectively. Further, the “variation time” corresponds to the table “4”, the random number selection range corresponding to the numerical values 0 to 50000, “8000 ms”, the numerical values 50001 to 60000 corresponding to “10000 ms”, and the numerical values 60001 to 65000. “60000 ms” and “60000 ms” are respectively assigned to the numerical values 65001 to 65535.

  The “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device” on the right side of the “variable time” diagram is the decorative symbol display device 208 in the special figure 1 variable game corresponding to the combination of the “stop symbol” and the selected “variable time”. The production | generation aspect performed by is shown. The “effect pattern on the decorative symbol display device” corresponds to “stop pattern” corresponding to “special chart A / special chart B”, “variable time“ 1500 ms ”,“ per normal reach ”, and variable time“ 45000 ms ”. “Per reach A” and “per reach B” corresponding to the fluctuation time “65000 ms”. In addition, in the “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device”, “stop symbol” is assigned “special drawing C to special diagram H” and “variable time“ 12000 ms ”is assigned“ all chance stop ”. In addition, the “effect pattern on the decorative symbol display device” is “stop symbol” corresponding to “special diagram I / special diagram J”, “variable shortening” corresponding to variable time “3000 ms”, and variable time “8000 ms”. Correspondingly, “out of”, “variable reach out” corresponding to fluctuation time “10000 ms”, “reach out of reach A” corresponding to fluctuation time “40000 ms”, “reach out of reach B” corresponding to fluctuation time “60000 ms” Are assigned to each.

  FIG. 417 shows an example of the special figure 2 fluctuation display time determination table for determining the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display in the special figure 2 fluctuation game. The special figure 2 variable display time determination table is used in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) of the main control unit timer interruption process. The data table shown in FIG. 417 is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, for example. As shown in FIG. 417, the special figure 2 variable display time determination table includes “stop symbol”, “table”, “random number selection range”, “variable time”, and “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device” from the left column. It consists of five items.

  The “stop symbol” in the left column is a stop symbol determined by using the special symbol 2 determination table of FIG. "Special figure G / Special figure H (common with and without electric support)", "Special figure I / Special figure J (with electric support: Hold 1-3)", "Special figure I / Special figure J (with electric support: "Hold 0)" and "Special Figure I / Special Figure J (No Electric Support: Hold 0-3)". Table “5” corresponds to “Special Figure A / Special Figure B” of “Stop Symbol”, and Table “6” corresponds to “Special Figure G / Special Figure H”. When the “stop symbol” is “special diagram A / special diagram B”, the table “5” is selected regardless of the presence / absence of the electric support at the time of determining the variation time and the number of suspensions of the special diagram 2 variable game. In addition, when “stop symbol” is “special diagram G / special diagram H”, table “6” is selected regardless of the presence / absence of electric support at the time of determining the variation time and the number of suspension of special diagram 2 variable game. .

  When “Stop Symbol” is “Special Figure I / Special Figure J”, one of the tables “7” to “9” depending on whether or not there is an electric support at the time of variable time determination and the number of special figure 2 variable games held Is to be selected. If the special symbol I or special symbol J is decided as the stop symbol, and there is electric support and the number of special figure 2 variable games is 1 to 3, the table “7” is selected and electric support is available. When the number of reservations is 0, the table “8” is selected, and when there is no electric support and the number of reservations is 0 to 3, the table “9” is selected.

  “Random number selection range” on the right side of the “table” in the figure indicates a numerical range (0 to 65535) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time. The random number value for determining the special figure variation time is acquired, for example, at the same time as the start information acquisition of the special figure 2 and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 308, and is read out from the predetermined storage area at the time of determining the special display variation time. It has become. In the table “5”, the “random number selection range” is divided into three values of a numerical value 0 to 1000, a numerical value 1001 to 20000, and a numerical value 20001 to 65535. In each of the tables “6” to “8”, the “random number selection range” is divided into one of all numerical values 0 to 65535. In the table “9”, the “random number selection range” is divided into four values of a numerical value 0 to 50000, a numerical value 50001 to 60000, a numerical value 60001 to 65000, and a numerical value 65001 to 65535.

  “Variation time” on the right side of the “Random number selection range” indicates the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable game. “Variation time” is “55000” corresponding to the table “5”, the random number selection range corresponding to the numerical values 0 to 1000, “45000 ms” corresponding to the numerical values 1001 to 20000, and “65000 ms corresponding to the numerical values 20001 to 65535. "Is assigned to each. In addition, “12000 ms” is assigned to the “variation time” corresponding to the table “6” and the random number selection range corresponding to all numerical values 0 to 65535. In addition, “1500 ms” is assigned to the “variation time” corresponding to the table “7” and the random number selection range corresponding to all numerical values 0 to 65535. “Variation time” is assigned “8000 ms” corresponding to the table “8” and the random number selection range corresponding to all numerical values 0 to 65535. Further, the “variation time” corresponds to the table “9”, the random number selection range corresponding to the numerical value 0 to 50000, “8000 ms”, the numerical value 50001 to 60000 corresponding to “10000 ms”, and the numerical value 60001 to 65000. “60000 ms” and “60000 ms” are respectively assigned to the numerical values 65001 to 65535.

  The “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device” to the right of the “variable time” diagram is the decorative symbol display device 208 in the special figure 2 variable game corresponding to the combination of the “stop symbol” and the selected “variable time” In FIG. The “appearance mode on the decorative symbol display device” is “reach A” / “special B” with “stop symbol”, “normal reach” corresponding to a fluctuation time of 15000 ms, and “reach A” corresponding to a fluctuation time of 45,000 ms. "Per hit" and "per reach B" are assigned to correspond to the fluctuation time of 65000 ms. In addition, in the “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device”, “stop symbol” is assigned as “special drawing G / special drawing H”, and “all chance stop” is assigned corresponding to a variation time of 12000 ms. In the special figure 2 variable game of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, since the stop symbols of “Special Figure C” to “Special Figure F” are not selected, the “Special Figure G” or “ Only in the case of one of the “special drawings H”, “all chance chance stop” is selected as the “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device”. For this reason, when the effect is executed in the effect mode of “stop all chances”, the small hit is determined. In addition, the “appearance mode on the decorative symbol display device” corresponds to “stop symbol” corresponding to “special diagram I / special diagram J”, corresponding to a fluctuation time of 1500 ms, “super shortening” and a fluctuation time of 8000 ms. “Release”, “reach out of normal reach” corresponding to a fluctuation time of 10,000 ms, “reach out of reach A” corresponding to a fluctuation time of 40000 ms, and “reach out of reach B” corresponding to a fluctuation time of 60000 ms are assigned.

  Next, when drawing lots whether or not to change the display mode of the hold display images (details will be described later) displayed in the special figure 1 and special figure 2 hold display areas 208d1 and 208d2 of the decorative symbol display device 208, reference is made. The pending change lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 418 shows a hold change lottery table (pre-reading notice: at start-up winning) referred to in the hold change lottery for drawing whether to change the display mode of the hold display image. The pending change lottery table is used in step S1205 in the first sub-control unit pre-reading notice execution process at the time of starting information acquisition described later. The pending change lottery table is stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400, for example.

  The hold change lottery table shown in FIG. 418 is divided into five from the left column: “change time”, “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device”, “no change”, “hold A”, and “hold B”. Yes. "Variation time" is "variation time" determined using the special figure 1 or special figure 2 fluctuation display time determination table shown in FIG. 416 or FIG. 417, and is the main control unit timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. In the command transmission setting process (step S233), the variable time transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 is shown. The “variation time” is divided into six “10000 ms”, “40000 ms”, “60000 ms”, “15000 ms”, “45000 ms”, and “65000 ms”.

  The “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device” on the right side of the “variable time” diagram indicates the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 in the special symbol variable game. The “effect mode in the decorative symbol display device” is the “variation time” in the special figure 1 or special symbol 2 variable display time determination table shown in FIG. 416 or 417 and the “effect mode in the decorative symbol display device”. It is associated with “variation time” so as to be the same as the association. “10000 ms” is “normal reach miss”, “40000 ms” is “reach A miss”, “60000 ms” is “reach B miss”, “15000 ms” is “per normal reach”, and “45000 ms” is “per reach A”. And “65,000 ms” is “per reach B”.

  “No change” on the right side of the “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device” is the default display without changing the display mode of the hold display image shown as “normal hold” in FIG. 419 (a) described later. This indicates that the special figure variable game hold is displayed (for example, a circular hold display filled in a predetermined color), and “hold A” on the right side is displayed in FIG. 419 (b) described later. This indicates that the pre-reading notice of the special figure variable game is executed in the display mode of the character image of “vulnerable merchant Echigoya” shown as “hold A”, and “hold B” on the right side of that is shown in FIG. 419 (c) described later. It shows that the pre-reading notice of the special figure variable game is executed in the display mode of the character image of “Yoshimune” shown as “hold B”. “No change”, “Pending A”, and “Pending B” are each divided by a numerical range (0 to 99) of random numbers to be compared with a random number for holding change lottery corresponding to “variation time”. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 acquires a random number value for holding change lottery from a random number counter for holding change lottery provided in the RAM 408.

  When “Fluctuation time” is “10000 ms”, numerical values 0 to 89 are assigned to “no change”, numerical values 90 to 99 are assigned to “holding A”, and numerical values are not assigned to “holding B”. . When “Variation time” is “40000 ms”, numerical values 0 to 39 are assigned to “no change”, numerical values 40 to 79 are assigned to “holding A”, and numerical values 80 to 99 are assigned to “holding B”. It has been. When “Variation time” is “60000 ms”, numerical values 0 to 29 are assigned to “no change”, numerical values 30 to 79 are assigned to “holding A”, and numerical values 80 to 99 are assigned to “holding B”. It has been. When “Variation time” is “15000 ms”, numerical values 0 to 69 are assigned to “no change”, numerical values 70 to 95 are assigned to “holding A”, and numerical values 96 to 99 are assigned to “holding B”. It has been. When “Variation time” is “45000 ms”, numerical values 0 to 29 are assigned to “no change”, numerical values 30 to 69 are assigned to “holding A”, and numerical values 70 to 99 are assigned to “holding B”. It has been. When “Variation time” is “65000 ms”, numerical values 0 to 19 are assigned to “no change”, numerical values 20 to 49 are assigned to “holding A”, and numerical values 50 to 99 are assigned to “holding B”. It has been. Note that in the tables shown in FIG. 418 and the subsequent figures, “-” is displayed in places where numerical values are not assigned.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is able to suggest a reliability that is high or low in the possibility of deriving a specific determination result (for example, a win) in the pre-reading notice effect due to the hold change. . Although detailed explanation is omitted, the reliability based on the pre-reading notice effect due to the hold change is the probability of winning or losing, the probability of selecting a predetermined reach effect, the probability of selecting a predetermined hold mode, etc. To be determined. In the present embodiment, “hold A” and “hold B” are compared with “no change” so that “hold A” and “hold B” have higher reliability than “no change”. When the random number distribution shown in FIG. 418 is the hit reach effect (“per normal reach”, “per reach A”, and “per reach B”), the reach effect (“normal reach miss”, “reach A miss” ”And“ Reach B out of position ”). Furthermore, “Reservation B” has a higher reach of reliability than “Reservation A” so that “Reservation B” is more reliable than “Reservation A”. ”,“ Per reach A ”, and“ per reach B ”), it is set so as to be less in the case of reach production of“ out of reach ”(“ out of normal reach ”,“ out of reach A ”and“ out of reach B ”). Yes.

  Since the reliability of “hold B” is set higher than the reliability of “hold A”, the pachinko machine 100 is more likely to execute “hold B” than to execute “hold A”. The player can be expected to win. “Hold A” and “Hold B” can also indicate the level of expectation, that is, the degree of expectation of winning a big hit.

  FIG. 419 shows an example of a display mode of the special display variable game hold display. The pachinko machine 100 has, for example, three display modes as a special display variable game hold display. FIG. 419 (a) shows the display mode of the hold display image when “no change” is selected in the hold change notice lottery (when the change is not won in the hold change lottery). As shown in FIG. 419 (a), the display mode of the hold display image with “no change” is, for example, a display mode that represents a circular pattern painted in a predetermined color. The display mode of the hold display image shown in FIG. 419 (a) is a display mode in the default display when the display mode of the special figure variable game hold display is not changed. For this reason, the hold display image when the hold change lottery is not executed is also the display mode shown in FIG. The “no change” hold display mode corresponds to a normal display mode. FIG. 419 (b) shows the display mode of the hold display image when “hold A” is won in the hold change notice lottery. As shown in FIG. 419 (b), the hold display image when “hold A” is won is a display mode that represents the character of “bad merchant Echigoya”. FIG. 419 (c) shows the display mode of the hold display image when “hold B” is won in the hold change notice lottery. As shown in FIG. 419 (c), the hold display image when “hold B” is won is a display mode representing the character “Yoshimune”. The display mode of “hold A” or “hold B” corresponds to a special display mode different from the normal display mode.

  Next, a panel lamp pre-read lottery table to be referred to when lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the pre-read notification effect by changing the lighting state of the panel lamps 224a and 224b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 420 shows a panel lamp pre-read lottery table (pre-reading notice: at start-up winning) referred to in the panel lamp pre-read lottery for drawing whether or not the lighting state of the panel lamp 224a is changed. The board lamp pre-reading lottery table is used in step S1207 in the first sub-control unit pre-reading notice execution process at the time of starting information acquisition described later. The panel lamp pre-read lottery table is stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400, for example.

  The table lamp pre-read lottery table shown in FIG. 420 includes “variation time”, “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device”, “no change”, “lighting (blue)”, “flashing (blue)” and “from the left column. It is divided into six "high-speed blinking (red)". "Variation time" is "variation time" determined using the special figure 1 or special figure 2 fluctuation display time determination table shown in FIG. 416 or FIG. 417, and is the main control unit timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. In the command transmission setting process (step S233), the variable time transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 is shown. The “variation time” is divided into six “10000 ms”, “40000 ms”, “60000 ms”, “15000 ms”, “45000 ms”, and “65000 ms”.

  The “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device” on the right side of the “variable time” diagram indicates the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 in the special symbol variable game. The “effect mode in the decorative symbol display device” is the “variation time” in the special figure 1 or special symbol 2 variable display time determination table shown in FIG. 416 or 417 and the “effect mode in the decorative symbol display device”. It is associated with “variation time” so as to be the same as the association. “10000 ms” is “normal reach miss”, “40000 ms” is “reach A miss”, “60000 ms” is “reach B miss”, “15000 ms” is “per normal reach”, and “45000 ms” is “per reach A”. And “65,000 ms” is “per reach B”.

  “No change” on the right side of the “effect mode on the decorative design display device” indicates that the panel lamp 224a is in the default lighting (predetermined predetermined lighting or flashing mode) in the normal performance, “Lighting (blue)” next to the right indicates that all of the 10 circular lamps of the panel lamp 224a are lighted in blue and the pre-reading notice effect is executed. Indicates that at least a part of the panel lamp 224a blinks in blue and the pre-reading notice effect is executed. The “high-speed blinking (red)” next to the right indicates that at least a part of the panel lamp 224a is red in high speed. This indicates that the pre-reading notice effect is executed by blinking. “No change”, “Lit (blue)”, “Flashing (blue)”, and “High-speed flashing (red)” correspond to “Variation time” and are random numbers to be compared with the random number for pre-drawing lottery Each is divided by a range (0 to 99). The first sub-control unit 400 is configured to acquire a panel lamp pre-read lottery random number value from a panel lamp pre-read lottery random number counter provided in the RAM 408, for example.

  When the pre-reading notice effect is executed when the lighting state of the panel lamp 224a is any one of “lit (blue)”, “flashing (blue)”, or “high-speed blinking (red)”, the panel lamp 224b is also synchronized with it. The pre-reading notice effect is executed. Four petal-patterned lamps are arranged on the panel lamp 224b, and the number of petal-patterned lamps is the same as the number of reserved lamps for Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2 related to the pre-reading notice. For example, the lamps are lit in order from the bottom, and the petal-patterned lamp corresponding to the hold related to the pre-read notice is lit in a different color from the other lamps.

  When “Variation time” is “10000 ms”, numerical values 0 to 99 are assigned to “no change”, and numerical values are assigned to “lighting (blue)”, “flashing (blue)”, and “fast flashing (red)”. Not assigned. When “Fluctuation time” is “40000 ms”, numerical values 0 to 39 are assigned to “no change”, numerical values 40 to 89 are assigned to “lighting (blue)”, and numerical values 90 to “flashing (blue)”. -98 are assigned, and the numerical value 99 is assigned to "rapid blinking (red)". When the “variation time” is “60000 ms”, a numerical value 0 to 29 is assigned to “no change”, a numerical value 30 to 95 is assigned to “lighting (blue)”, and a numerical value 96 is assigned to “flashing (blue)”. -98 are assigned, and the numerical value 99 is assigned to "rapid blinking (red)". When “Variation time” is “15000 ms”, a numerical value of 0 to 96 is assigned to “no change”, a numerical value of 97 is assigned to “lighting (blue)”, and a numerical value of 98 is assigned to “flashing (blue)”. The numerical value 99 is assigned to “rapid blinking (red)”. When the “variation time” is “45000 ms”, the numerical value 0 to 29 is assigned to “no change”, the numerical value 30 to 69 is assigned to “lighting (blue)”, and the numerical value 70 is assigned to “flashing (blue)”. -84 are assigned, and numerical values 85-99 are assigned to "rapid blinking (red)". When “Variation time” is “65000 ms”, numerical values 0 to 19 are assigned to “no change”, numerical values 20 to 49 are assigned to “lighting (blue)”, and numerical values 50 to “flashing (blue)”. -69 are assigned, and numerical values 70-99 are assigned to "rapid blinking (red)".

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can indicate the reliability that is high or low in the possibility of deriving a specific determination result (for example, hit) in the pre-reading notice effect by the panel lamps 224a and 224b. It has become. Although detailed explanation is omitted, the reliability based on the pre-reading notice effect by the panel lamps 224a and 224b is selected as the probability of winning or losing, the probability of selecting a predetermined reach effect, and a predetermined holding mode. It is determined based on the probability. In this embodiment, “lighting (blue)”, “flashing (blue)”, and “high-speed blinking (red)” are more reliable than “no change”. Compared with “no change”, “flashing (blue)” and “high-speed flashing (red)” show the reach of the random numbers shown in FIG. 420 (“per normal reach”, “per reach A” and “reach” In the case of “per B”, it is set so as to be less in the case of reach production of “out of reach” (“out of normal reach”, “out of reach A” and “out of reach B”). Furthermore, “fast flashing (red)” is more reliable than “flashing (blue)” so that “fast flashing (red)” is more reliable than “flashing (blue)”. The distribution is set so as to be less in the case of the hit reach effect and less in the case of the reach effect that is out of place. Also, “flashing (blue)” is more reliable than “lighting (blue)”, so “flashing (blue)” is more random than “lit (blue)”. In the case of the hit reach production, the number is set to be less in the case of the outreach production.

  The reliability of “flashing (blue)” is higher than the reliability of “lighting (blue)”, and the reliability of “fast flashing (red)” is higher than the reliability of “flashing (blue)” Since it is set high, the pachinko machine 100 performs “flashing (blue)” rather than performing “lighting (blue)” and “flashing faster” than executing “flashing (blue)”. (Red) "can make the player expect to win a big hit. “Lighting (blue)”, “flashing (blue)”, and “high-speed flashing (red)” can also indicate the level of expectation of winning a big hit, that is, the degree of expectation.

  FIG. 421 to FIG. 429 show an example of the normal notice lottery table used in step S1311 in the first sub-control unit prefetch notice execution process at the time of starting a special figure variable game described later. The “normal notice” of the normal notice lottery means a notice of the success / failure determination result of the special figure variable game starting from now. The normal notice lottery table is stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400, for example. The normal notice lottery table is used to determine whether or not to execute a normal notice effect for notifying the determination result of the special figure variable game starting from now on. Further, the normal notice effect based on the normal notice lottery table is executed before reach formation or after reach formation. The normal notice lottery table is used in common in FIG. 1 and FIG.

  A normal notice lottery table 1 shown in FIG. 421 is used for a pre-reach notice effect. From the left column, “variable time”, “effect form on a decorative symbol display device”, “buttonless system”, and “button-equipped system”. It is divided into four. "Variation time" is "variation time" determined using the special figure 1 or special figure 2 fluctuation display time determination table shown in FIG. 416 or FIG. 417, and is the main control unit timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. In the command transmission setting process (step S233), the variable time transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 is shown. The “variation time” is divided into six “10000 ms”, “40000 ms”, “60000 ms”, “15000 ms”, “45000 ms”, and “65000 ms”.

  The “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device” to the right of the “variable time” in the figure indicates the special mode variable game effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208. The “effect mode in the decorative symbol display device” is the “variation time” in the special figure 1 or special symbol 2 variable display time determination table shown in FIG. 416 or 417 and the “effect mode in the decorative symbol display device”. It is associated with “variation time” so as to be the same as the association. “10000 ms” is “normal reach miss”, “40000 ms” is “reach A miss”, “60000 ms” is “reach B miss”, “15000 ms” is “per normal reach”, and “45000 ms” is “per reach A”. And “65,000 ms” is “per reach B”.

  “No button system” on the right side of the “effect mode on the decorative design display device” in the figure indicates a notice without an effect using the chance button 136 or the like as an operation means. "System" indicates that a notice notification including an operation request image that prompts the user to press the chance button 136 or the like is executed. The “buttonless system” and “buttoned system” are each divided by the numerical value range (0 to 99) of the random number to be compared with the obtained first random number value for normal notice execution determination, and 6 corresponding to “variation time”. It is divided into two. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 obtains a first random number for normal notice execution determination from a first random number counter for normal notice execution determination provided in the RAM 408.

  When the “variable time” is “10000 ms”, the numerical values 0 to 99 are assigned to the “buttonless system” and the numerical values are assigned to the “button-equipped system” as the range of random numbers to be compared with the normal notice execution determination random number value. It is not done. When the “variation time” is “40000 ms”, the numerical value ranges from 0 to 89 are assigned to the “buttonless system”, and the numerical values 90 to 99 are assigned to the “buttoned system”. When the “variation time” is “60000 ms”, numerical values 0 to 94 are assigned to “buttonless system” and numerical values 95 to 99 are assigned to “buttoned system”. When the “variation time” is “15000 ms”, the numerical value ranges from 0 to 98 are assigned to the “buttonless system”, and the numerical value 99 is assigned to the “buttoned system”. When “Fluctuation time” is “45000 ms”, numerical values 0 to 49 are assigned to “system without buttons” and numerical values 50 to 99 are assigned to “system with buttons”. When “Fluctuation time” is “65000 ms”, numerical values 0 to 29 are assigned to “system without buttons”, and numerical values 30 to 99 are assigned to “system with buttons”.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a reliability that is high or low in the possibility of deriving a specific success / failure determination result (for example, hit) in the pre-reach notice effect by the “buttonless system” and “buttoned system”. It is possible to suggest. Although detailed explanation is omitted, the reliability based on the pre-reach notice effect by “buttonless system” and “button system” is the probability of winning or losing, the probability of selecting a predetermined reach effect, This is determined based on the probability that a predetermined button effect is selected. In the present embodiment, the “buttoned system” is more reliable than the “buttonless system” so that the “buttoned system” is more reliable than the “buttonless system”. Reach production ("Normal reach out", "Reach A out" and "Reach B out") when the distribution is a hit reach production ("per normal reach", "per reach A" and "per reach B") Is set to be less in the case of.

  Since the reliability of “system with buttons” is set higher than the reliability of “system without buttons”, the pachinko machine 100 executes “system with buttons” rather than executing “system without buttons”. The player can be expected to win the jackpot. “No button system” and “button system” can also indicate the level of expectation of winning a big hit, that is, the degree of expectation.

  The normal notice lottery table 2 shown in FIG. 422 is used when an effect buttonless system is selected based on the normal notice lottery table 1 shown in FIG. In the normal notice lottery table 2 shown in FIG. 422, from the left column, “variable time”, “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device”, “none”, “character A”, “character B”, and “character C (determined) ) ”. "Variation time" is "variation time" determined using the special figure 1 or special figure 2 fluctuation display time determination table shown in FIG. 416 or FIG. 417, and is the main control unit timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. In the command transmission setting process (step S233), the variable time transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 is shown. The “variation time” is divided into six “10000 ms”, “40000 ms”, “60000 ms”, “15000 ms”, “45000 ms”, and “65000 ms”.

  The “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device” to the right of the “variable time” in the figure indicates the special mode variable game effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208. The “effect mode in the decorative symbol display device” is the “variation time” in the special figure 1 or special symbol 2 variable display time determination table shown in FIG. 416 or 417 and the “effect mode in the decorative symbol display device”. It is associated with “variation time” so as to be the same as the association. “10000 ms” is “normal reach miss”, “40000 ms” is “reach A miss”, “60000 ms” is “reach B miss”, “15000 ms” is “per normal reach”, and “45000 ms” is “per reach A”. And “65,000 ms” is “per reach B”.

  “None” on the right side of the “effect mode on the decorative design display device” indicates that the normal notice effect is not executed, and “Character A” on the right side of the drawing is “ In the display mode of the character image of “Panda” indicated as “Character A”, it is shown that the normal notice effect of the special figure variable game is executed. “Character B” on the right side of the character image is “Character A” shown in FIG. In the display mode of the character image of “Sabohani” shown as “Character B”, it is shown that the normal notice effect of the special figure variation game is executed, and “Character C (right)” on the right side of FIG. ) Shows that the normal notice effect of the special figure variable game is executed in the display mode of the character image of “Princess” shown as “Character C”. “None”, “Character A”, “Character B”, and “Character C (accurate)” are numerical values of random numbers to be compared with the obtained second random number for normal notice execution determination corresponding to “variable time”. Each is divided into ranges (0 to 99), and is divided into six corresponding to “variation times”. The first sub-control unit 400 obtains the normal random number execution determination second random value from, for example, the normal random number execution determination second random value counter provided in the RAM 408.

  When the “variation time” is “10000 ms”, a numerical value range of 0 to 84 is assigned to “None” and a numerical value 85 to “Character A” is assigned as a numerical range of random numbers to be compared with the second random number value for normal notice execution determination. 96 is assigned, “Character B” is assigned a numerical value 97 to 99, and “Character C (correct)” is not assigned a numerical value. When the “variation time” is “40000 ms”, the numerical value is not assigned to “None”, the numerical value 0 to 89 is assigned to “Character A”, and the numerical value 90 to 99 is assigned to “Character B”. No. “Character C (Correct)” is not assigned a numerical value. When the “variation time” is “60000 ms”, the numerical value is not assigned to “None”, the numerical value 0 to 94 is assigned to “Character A”, and the numerical value 95 to 99 is assigned to “Character B”. No. “Character C (Correct)” is not assigned a numerical value. When the “variation time” is “15000 ms”, the numerical value ranges from 0 to 96 are assigned to “None”, the numerical value 97 is assigned to “Character A”, and the numerical value 98 is assigned to “Character B”. , “Character C (Correct)” is assigned a numerical value 99. When the “variation time” is “45000 ms”, the numerical value 0 is assigned to “None”, the numerical values 1 to 49 are assigned to “Character A”, and the numerical values 50 to 97 are assigned to “Character B”. A numerical value 98 to 99 is assigned to “Character C (Correct)”. When the “variation time” is “65000 ms”, numerical values 0 to 4 are assigned to “None”, numerical values 5 to 39 are assigned to “Character A”, and numerical values 40 to 40 are assigned to “Character B”. 94 is assigned, and numerical values 95 to 99 are assigned to “Character C (Certain)”.

  As shown in FIG. 422, when the “appearance style on the decorative symbol display device” is “out of normal reach”, “out of reach A”, or “out of reach B”, the display mode of “character C (definite)” Is not selected. For this reason, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, if the display mode of “Character C (Correct)” is displayed in the pre-reach notice effect, the success / failure determination result of the special figure variable game is determined to be hit.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is able to suggest a reliability that is high or low in the possibility of deriving a specific determination result (for example, a hit) in the “previous button announcement” pre-reach notice effect. It has become. Although detailed explanation is omitted, the reliability based on the pre-reach notice effect is based on the probability of winning or falling, the probability of selecting a predetermined reach effect, the probability of selecting a predetermined character image, etc. Determined. In this embodiment, “Character A”, “Character B”, and “Character B” and “Character C (correct)” have higher reliability than “None”. Compared with “None”, “Character C (Accurate)” is much different in the case of reach production (“per reach,“ per reach A ”and“ per reach B ”) shown in FIG. Are set to be less in the case of a reach production (“normal reach loss”, “reach A loss” and “reach B loss”). Furthermore, so that “Character B” is more reliable than “Character A”, “Character B” is more likely to be assigned to random numbers compared to “Character A”. It is set to decrease in the case of outlier reach production. Also, “Character C (Correct)” is more reliable than “Character B” so that “Character C (Correct)” is more reliable than “Character B”. In the case of reach production, it is set to be less in the case of outlier reach production.

  Since the reliability of “Character B” is set higher than the reliability of “Character A”, the pachinko machine 100 is more likely to execute “Character B” than to execute “Character A”. The player can be expected to win. Further, since the reliability of “Character C (accurate)” is set higher than the reliability of “Character B”, the pachinko machine 100 performs “Character C (accurate) rather than executing“ Character B ”. ) "Can make the player expect to win a big hit. “Character A”, “Character B”, or “Character C (winning)” can also indicate the level of expectation, that is, the degree of expectation of winning a big hit.

  The normal notice lottery table 3 shown in FIG. 423 is used when a system with an effect button is selected based on the normal notice lottery table 1 shown in FIG. In the normal notice lottery table 3 shown in FIG. 423, from the left column, “variation time”, “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device”, “none”, “character A”, “character B”, and “character C (determined) ) ”. "Variation time" is "variation time" determined using the special figure 1 or special figure 2 fluctuation display time determination table shown in FIG. 416 or FIG. 417, and is the main control unit timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. In the command transmission setting process (step S233), the variable time transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 is shown. The “variation time” is divided into six “10000 ms”, “40000 ms”, “60000 ms”, “15000 ms”, “45000 ms”, and “65000 ms”.

  The “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device” to the right of the “variable time” in the figure indicates the special mode variable game effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208. The “effect mode in the decorative symbol display device” is the “variation time” in the special figure 1 or special symbol 2 variable display time determination table shown in FIG. 416 or 417 and the “effect mode in the decorative symbol display device”. It is associated with “variation time” so as to be the same as the association. “10000 ms” is “normal reach miss”, “40000 ms” is “reach A miss”, “60000 ms” is “reach B miss”, “15000 ms” is “per normal reach”, and “45000 ms” is “per reach A”. And “65,000 ms” is “per reach B”.

  “None” on the right side of the “effect mode on the decorative design display device” indicates that the normal notice effect is not executed, and “Character A” on the right side of the drawing is “ In the display mode of the character image of “Panda” indicated as “Character A”, it is shown that the normal notice effect of the special figure variable game is executed. “Character B” on the right side of the character image is “Character A” shown in FIG. In the display mode of the character image of “Sabohani” shown as “Character B”, it is shown that the normal notice effect of the special figure variation game is executed, and “Character C (right)” on the right side of FIG. ) Shows that the normal notice effect of the special figure variable game is executed in the display mode of the character image of “Princess” shown as “Character C”. “None”, “Character A”, “Character B”, and “Character C (accurate)” are numerical values of random numbers to be compared with the obtained second random number for normal notice execution determination corresponding to “variable time”. Each is divided into ranges (0 to 99), and is divided into six corresponding to “variation times”. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 obtains the normal random number execution determination third random value from the normal preliminary determination execution third random value counter provided in the RAM 408, for example.

  When the “variation time” is “10000 ms”, a numerical value range of 0 to 89 is assigned to “None” and a numerical value of 90 to “Character A” is assigned as a numerical value range of random numbers to be compared with the third random number value for normal notice execution determination. 94 is assigned, “Character B” is assigned a numerical value of 95 to 99, and “Character C (correct)” is not assigned a numerical value. When the “variation time” is “40000 ms”, the numerical value is not assigned to “None”, the numerical values 0 to 69 are assigned to “Character A”, and the numerical values 70 to 99 are assigned to “Character B”. No. “Character C (Correct)” is not assigned a numerical value. When the “variation time” is “60000 ms”, the numerical value is not assigned to “None”, the numerical values 0 to 69 are assigned to “Character A”, and the numerical values 70 to 99 are assigned to “Character B”. No. “Character C (Correct)” is not assigned a numerical value. When “Variation time” is “15000 ms”, the numerical value range is not assigned “None”, “Character A” is assigned numerical values 0-49, and “Character B” is assigned numerical values 50-89. A numerical value 90 to 99 is assigned to “Character C (Correct)”. When the “variation time” is “45000 ms”, the numerical value 0 is assigned to “None”, the numerical values 1 to 39 are assigned to “Character A”, and the numerical values 40 to 89 are assigned to “Character B”. A numerical value 90 to 99 is assigned to “Character C (Correct)”. When the “variation time” is “65000 ms”, numerical values 0 to 4 are assigned to “None”, numerical values 5 to 39 are assigned to “Character A”, and numerical values 40 to 40 are assigned to “Character B”. 89 is assigned, and numerical values 90 to 99 are assigned to “Character C (Certain)”.

  As shown in FIG. 423, when the “appearance mode on the decorative symbol display device” is “out of normal reach”, “out of reach A”, or “out of reach B”, the display mode of “character C (probable)” Is not selected. For this reason, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, if the display mode of “Character C (Correct)” is displayed in the pre-reach notice effect, the success / failure determination result of the special figure variable game is determined to be hit.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is able to suggest a reliability that is high or low in the possibility of deriving a specific determination result (for example, a hit) in the “pre-reach notice effect of“ with button ””. It has become. Although detailed explanation is omitted, the reliability based on the pre-reach notice effect is based on the probability of winning or falling, the probability of selecting a predetermined reach effect, the probability of selecting a predetermined character image, etc. Determined. In this embodiment, “Character A”, “Character B”, and “Character B” and “Character C (correct)” have higher reliability than “None”. Compared to “None”, “Character C (Accurate)” is much different in the case of reach production (“per normal reach,“ per reach A ”and“ per reach B ”) shown in FIG. Are set to be less in the case of the reach production (“normal reach miss”, “reach A miss” and “reach B miss”). Furthermore, so that “Character B” is more reliable than “Character A”, “Character B” is more likely to be assigned to random numbers compared to “Character A”. It is set to decrease in the case of outlier reach production. Also, “Character C (Correct)” is more reliable than “Character B” so that “Character C (Correct)” is more reliable than “Character B”. In the case of reach production, it is set to be less in the case of outlier reach production.

  Since the reliability of “Character B” is set higher than the reliability of “Character A”, the pachinko machine 100 is more likely to execute “Character B” than to execute “Character A”. The player can be expected to win. Further, since the reliability of “Character C (accurate)” is set higher than the reliability of “Character B”, the pachinko machine 100 performs “Character C (accurate) rather than executing“ Character B ”. ) "Can make the player expect to win a big hit. “Character A”, “Character B”, or “Character C (winning)” can also indicate the level of expectation, that is, the degree of expectation of winning a big hit.

  FIG. 424 shows an example of a character image used in the normal notice effect before reach. FIG. 424 (a) shows a character image representing “panda” displayed at the time of the normal notice effect of “Character A”, and FIG. 424 (b) shows the character image at the time of the normal notice effect of “Character B”. A character image representing “Sabohani” (a character with a cactus and Minowa as a motif) is shown, and FIG. 424 (c) shows a character image representing “Princess” displayed at the time of the regular notice effect of “Character C”. It is shown. These character images are displayed, for example, in the effect display area 208d that overlaps any one of the decorative symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 when the normal notice effect is executed.

  In the normal notice lottery table 4 shown in FIG. 425, a system with an effect button is selected based on the normal notice lottery table 1 shown in FIG. 421, and “Character A,“ Character A ”is selected based on the normal notice lottery table 3 shown in FIG. Used when either “B” or “Character C (Correct)” is selected. The normal notice lottery table 4 shown in FIG. 425 is divided into four “display mode / button mode”, “character A”, “character B”, and “character C” from the left column. “Display mode / button mode” indicates a combination of the display mode and the button mode shown in FIGS. 426 and 427. Here, a display mode and a button mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 426 and 427.

  FIG. 426 shows a display mode of an image imitating the chance button 136 that can be displayed in the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 426 (a), a chance button image simulating a normal chance button 136 that has a display mode of “normal” and does not vibrate or rotate is arranged in the center, and the letters “PUSH” are displayed above it. An effective period image indicating an operation effective period for accepting pressing (operation) of the chance button 136 is arranged below the line. The effective period image in this example has a horizontally long frame shape. Initially, the entire period of the effective period is indicated by a bar shape of a predetermined color within the frame shape, and the bar portion of the predetermined color is displayed as the period passes. It is displayed so that it gradually becomes shorter. FIG. 426 (b) shows a display mode in which the display mode is “vibration” and the center chance button image is visually recognized as vibrating. Other display modes are the same as “normal”. FIG. 426 (c) is a display mode in which the display mode is “vibration + rotation” and the center chance button image is visually recognized as rotating while vibrating. Other display modes are the same as “normal”. In FIG. 426 (d), the display mode is “vibration + rotation”, and the chance button image and the effective period image are displayed larger than the image of FIG. 426 (c). Further, the character string “PUSH” and the effective period image may not be displayed. The display mode shown in FIG. 426 (d) is hereinafter also referred to as “decay button display”.

  FIG. 427 shows an operation mode (button mode) of the chance button 136. FIG. 427 (a) shows the chance button 136 in a normal state in which the button mode is “normal” and the vibration or rotation is not performed. FIG. 427 (b) shows a state where the button mode is “vibration” and the chance button 136 is oscillating. In FIG. 427 (c), the button mode is “vibration + rotation”, and the chance button 136 is rotated by rotating the chance button lamp 138 that emits light within the chance button 136 while the chance button 136 vibrates. Make it visible. It is an aspect.

  Now, returning to FIG. 425, “display mode / button mode” displays the display mode of the operation request image prompting the user to press the chance button 136 displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image. The combination of the actual chance button 136 and the button mode is shown. In “normal / normal”, an operation request image prompting the user to press the chance button 136 is displayed in the effect display area 208d in the “normal” display mode, and the button mode of the chance button 136 at that time is “normal”. . In “normal / vibration”, an operation request image prompting the user to press the chance button 136 is displayed in the effect display area 208d in the “normal” display mode, and the button mode of the chance button 136 at that time is “vibration”. . In “normal / vibration + rotation”, an operation request image prompting the user to press the chance button 136 is displayed in the effect display area 208d in the “normal” display mode, and the button mode of the chance button 136 at that time is “vibration + rotation”. It has become. In “vibration / normal”, an operation request image that prompts the user to press the chance button 136 is displayed in the effect display area 208d in the “vibration” display mode, and the button mode of the chance button 136 at that time is “normal”. . In “vibration / vibration”, an operation request image prompting the user to press the chance button 136 is displayed in the effect display area 208d in the “vibration” display mode, and the button mode of the chance button 136 at that time is “vibration”. . In “vibration + rotation / vibration”, an operation request image that prompts the user to press the chance button 136 is displayed in the effect display area 208d in a “vibration + rotation” display mode, and the button mode of the chance button 136 at that time is “vibration”. It has become. In “decay button display / vibration + rotation”, an operation request image that prompts the user to press the chance button 136 is displayed in the effect display area 208d in the “decay button display” display mode, and the button mode of the chance button 136 at that time is “vibration + "Rotation".

  “Character A” on the right side of the “display mode / button mode” is the display obtained when “Character A” is selected as a result of the lottery performed using the notice lottery table 3 shown in FIG. The numerical value range (0-99) of the random number compared with the random number value for mode / button mode determination is shown. The first sub-control unit 400 obtains a display mode / button mode determination random value from a display mode / button mode determination random value counter provided in the RAM 408, for example.

  In the case of “Character A”, a numerical value of 0 to 89 is assigned to “Normal / Normal” as a range of random numbers to be compared with the display mode / button mode determination random value, and “Normal / Vibration”, “Normal / Vibration” No numerical value is assigned to “+ rotation” and “vibration / normal”, and numerical values 90 to 99 are assigned to “vibration / vibration”, and “vibration + rotation / vibration” and “deca button display / vibration + rotation” are assigned. Is not assigned a numeric value.

  “Character B” on the right side of “Character A” in the figure is the display mode / button acquired when “Character B” is selected as a result of the lottery performed using the notice lottery table 3 shown in FIG. The numerical range (0 to 99) of the random number to be compared with the random number value for mode determination is shown.

  In the case of “Character B”, a numerical value range of 0 to 49 is assigned to “Normal / Normal” and a numerical value of 50 to 54 is assigned to “Normal / Vibration” as a numerical value range of random numbers to be compared with the display mode / button mode determination random value. , “Numeric / vibration + rotation” is assigned a numerical value 55-59, “Vibration / normal” is assigned a numerical value 60-64, “Vibration / vibration” is assigned a numerical value 65-89, “ Numerical values 90 to 94 are assigned to “vibration + rotation / vibration”, and numerical values 95 to 99 are assigned to “decay button display / vibration + rotation”.

  “Character C” on the right side of “Character B” is the display mode / button acquired when “Character C” is selected in the lottery result performed using the notice lottery table 3 shown in FIG. The numerical range (0 to 99) of the random number to be compared with the random number value for mode determination is shown.

  In the case of “Character C”, a numerical value range of random numbers to be compared with the display mode / button mode determination random number value is not assigned to “Normal / Normal”, and “Normal / Vibration” has a numerical value of 0-19. Is assigned, numerical values 20 to 39 are assigned to “normal / vibration + rotation”, numerical values 40 to 59 are assigned to “vibration / normal”, and numerical values are assigned to “vibration / vibration”. Numerical values 60 to 79 are assigned to “vibration + rotation / vibration”, and numerical values 80 to 99 are assigned to “decay button display / vibration + rotation”.

  As shown in FIG. 425, in the case of “Character A”, “display mode / button mode” other than “normal / normal” and “vibration / vibration” is not selected. On the other hand, in the case of “Character C”, only “display mode / button mode” other than “normal / normal” and “vibration / vibration” are selected. For this reason, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when an effect of “display mode / button mode” other than “normal / normal” and “vibration / vibration” is executed in the pre-reach notice effect, There is a high possibility that the game success / failure determination result is a hit.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is able to suggest a reliability that is high or low in the possibility of deriving a specific determination result (for example, a hit) in the “pre-reach notice effect of“ with button ””. It has become. Although detailed explanation is omitted, the reliability based on the pre-reach notice effect is based on the probability of winning or falling, the probability of selecting a predetermined reach effect, the probability of selecting a predetermined character image, etc. Determined. In this embodiment, “display mode / button mode” other than “normal / normal” and “vibration / vibration” is more reliable than “display mode / button mode” of “normal / normal” or “vibration / vibration”. In order to increase the degree, the “display mode / button mode” other than “normal / normal” and “vibration / vibration” is compared with “normal / normal” and “vibration / vibration” as shown in FIG. Is set to be large when “Character C” is assigned and less when “Character A”.

  The reliability of “display mode / button mode” other than “normal / normal” and “vibration / vibration” is higher than the reliability level of “display mode / button mode” of “normal / normal” and “vibration / vibration”. Since it is set high, the pachinko machine 100 performs “display mode / button mode” other than “normal / normal” and “vibration / vibration” rather than executing “normal / normal” or “vibration / vibration”. It is possible to make the player expect that the person who performs will win the jackpot.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the operation request image can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in the same display mode as the button mode of the chance button 136. Furthermore, the decorative symbol display device 208 can display a plurality of types of display effects as display effects related to the operation of the chance button 136, and one of the plurality of types of display effects is the first display effect. For example, “Character A” display with an effect button is displayed as a display effect, and one of a plurality of types of display effects is, for example, “Character C” display with an effect button as a second display effect. In the case where the display effect of “Character C” is executed rather than the display effect of “Character A”, the reliability of the big hit is higher, and the first operation is the same display mode as the button mode of the chance button 136. Second operation request images (for example, “normal / vibration”, “vibration / vibration”) having a display mode different from the button mode of the chance button 136 rather than the request image (for example, “normal / normal”, “vibration / vibration”). Through ", Those of" normal / vibration + rotation ", etc.), display effect of" character C "is so easy to be carried out.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, it may be possible to function as a notice of whether or not the second display effect with high reliability of the big hit is executed. As a result, the operation request image itself may function as a notice in some cases.

  The normal notice lottery table 5 shown in FIG. 428 is used for the after-reach notice lottery for the after-reach notice effect (cut-in notice) performed after the reach effect in the special figure variable game is started. In the normal notice lottery table 5 shown in FIG. 428, from the left column, “variable time”, “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device”, “none”, “character D”, “character E”, and “character F (determined) ) ”. "Variation time" is "variation time" determined using the special figure 1 or special figure 2 fluctuation display time determination table shown in FIG. 416 or FIG. 417, and is the main control unit timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. In the command transmission setting process (step S233), the variable time transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 is shown. The “variation time” is divided into six “10000 ms”, “40000 ms”, “60000 ms”, “15000 ms”, “45000 ms”, and “65000 ms”.

  The “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device” to the right of the “variable time” in the figure indicates the special mode variable game effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208. The “effect mode in the decorative symbol display device” is the “variation time” in the special figure 1 or special symbol 2 variable display time determination table shown in FIG. 416 or 417 and the “effect mode in the decorative symbol display device”. It is associated with “variation time” so as to be the same as the association. “10000 ms” is “normal reach miss”, “40000 ms” is “reach A miss”, “60000 ms” is “reach B miss”, “15000 ms” is “per normal reach”, and “45000 ms” is “per reach A”. And “65,000 ms” is “per reach B”.

  “None” on the right side of the “effect mode on the decorative design display device” indicates that the post-reach notice effect (which can be regarded as a part of the normal notice effect) is not executed. “Character D” indicates that the post-reach notice effect of the special figure variable game is executed in the display mode of the character image of “爺” shown as “Character D” in FIG. 429 (a) described later. “Character E” indicates that a post-reach notice effect of the special figure variation game is executed in the display mode of the character image of “Boxer” shown as “Character E” in FIG. 429 (b) described later. “Character F (Certain)” indicates that the post-reach notice effect of the special figure variable game is executed in the display mode of the character image of “bancho” shown as “Character F” in FIG. 429 (c) described later. ing. “None”, “Character D”, “Character E”, and “Character F (Certain)” are the numerical value ranges of random numbers to be compared with the acquired random number value for the advance notice determination after reach corresponding to “variable time” They are divided into (0 to 99), and are divided into six corresponding to “variation time”. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 is configured to acquire a post-reach advance execution determination random value from a post-reach advance execution determination random value counter provided in the RAM 408.

  When the “variation time” is “10000 ms”, “None”, “Character D”, “Character E”, “Character F (correct)” are used as the numerical value range of random numbers to be compared with the random number value for determining the notice execution after reaching. No numerical value is assigned to any of these. In other words, when the “variation time” is “10000 ms”, there is no time scale in which the cut-in notice can be inserted, and therefore the post-reach notice effect is not executed. When “Variation time” is “40000 ms”, the numerical value range is not assigned “None”, “Character D” is assigned numerical values 0-89, and “Character E” is assigned numerical values 90-99. No value is assigned to “Character F (Correct)”. When “Variation time” is “60000 ms”, the numerical value is not assigned to “None”, the numerical value 0 to 94 is assigned to “Character D”, and the numerical value 95 to 99 is assigned to “Character E”. No value is assigned to “Character F (Correct)”. When the “variation time” is “15000 ms”, “None”, “Character D”, “Character E”, “Character F (correct)” are used as the numerical value range of the random number to be compared with the random number value for the advance notice determination after reach. No numerical value is assigned to any of these. In other words, when the “variation time” is “15000 ms”, there is no time scale in which the cut-in notice can be inserted, and therefore the post-reach notice effect is not executed. When “Variation time” is “45000 ms”, the numerical value range is not assigned to “None”, “Character D” is assigned numerical values 0 to 39, and “Character E” is assigned numerical values 40 to 94. A numerical value of 95 to 99 is assigned to “Character F (Accurate)”. When the “variation time” is “60000 ms”, the numerical value is not assigned to “None”, the numerical value 0 to 29 is assigned to “Character D”, and the numerical value 30 to 94 is assigned to “Character E”. A numerical value of 95 to 99 is assigned to “Character F (Accurate)”.

  As shown in FIG. 428, when the “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device” is “out of normal reach”, “out of reach A”, or “out of reach B”, the display mode of “character F (correct)” Is not selected. For this reason, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, if the display form of “Character F (Certain)” is displayed in the post-reach notice effect, the determination result of the special figure variable game is per reach A or reach B It will be a hit.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is able to suggest a reliability that is high or low in the possibility of deriving a specific success / failure determination result (for example, hit) in the post-reach notice effect. Although detailed explanation is omitted, the reliability based on the post-reach notice effect is based on the probability of winning or losing, the probability of selecting a predetermined reach effect, the probability of selecting a predetermined character image, etc. Determined. In the present embodiment, “Character D”, “Character E”, and “Character E”, and “Character F (correct)” have higher reliability than “None”. Compared with “None”, “Character F (Accurate)” has a far reaching effect when the random number distribution shown in FIG. 428 is the winning reach effect (“per reach A” and “per reach B”) ( In the case of “reach A miss” and “reach B miss”), it is set to be small. Furthermore, “Character E” has a higher reach of reliability than “Character D” so that “Character E” is more reliable than “Character D”. In the case of “winning” and “performing reach B”), it is set so as to be less in the case of a far-reaching reach effect (“leaching A out of position” and “reach out of reach B”). In addition, “Character F (Correct)” is more reliable than “Character E” so that “Character F (Correct)” is more reliable than “Character E”. In the case of a reach effect (“per reach A” and “per reach B”), it is set to be less in the case of a reach effect (“reach A miss” and “reach B miss”).

  Since the reliability of “Character E” is set higher than the reliability of “Character D”, the pachinko machine 100 is more likely to execute “Character E” than to execute “Character D”. The player can be expected to win. In addition, since the reliability of “Character F (correct)” is set higher than the reliability of “Character E”, the pachinko machine 100 does not execute “Character E” but “Character F (correct). ) "Can make the player expect to win a big hit. “Character D”, “Character E”, or “Character F (winning)” can also indicate the level of expectation, that is, the degree of expectation of winning a big hit.

  FIG. 429 shows an example of a character image used in the normal notice effect after reach. FIG. 429 (a) shows a character image representing “爺” displayed at the time of the regular notice effect at the time of the “Character D” reach effect, and FIG. 429 (b) at the time of the “Character E” reach effect. FIG. 429 (c) shows a character image representing “bancho” displayed at the time of the normal notice effect during the reach effect of “Character F”. An image is shown. These character images are displayed, for example, in the effect display area 208d of the area overlapping with any of the decorative symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 when the post-reach notice effect is performed in the normal notice effect.

  Next, the special figure prefetching process will be described with reference to FIGS. 430 and 431. FIG. 430 and FIG. 431 are flowcharts showing the flow of special figure prefetching processing (step S224) in the main control unit timer interrupt processing shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 430, in the special figure prefetching process, first, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is in electric support (step S1000). In step S1000, for example, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the time reduction flag is in an on state. If it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S1101.

  As shown in FIG. 407, the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment makes a right turn so as to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 during electric support, and enters the special figure 1 starting port 230 during non-electric support. It is configured to be left-handed. For this reason, winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230 at the time of electric support and winning at the special figure 2 starting port 232 at the time of non-electric support are irregular. Excluded from processing.

  In step S1001 following step S1000, it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232. The determination as to whether or not there has been a prize is, for example, the special figure 2 reservation number stored in the special figure 2 reservation number storage area, and the special figure 2 prefetch number stored in the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area described later. To compare. For example, the main control unit 300 compares the special figure 2 hold number with the special figure 2 prefetch number, and if the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, the special figure 2 start port 232 has won a prize. The process proceeds to step S1003. On the other hand, when the special figure 2 hold number is equal to the special figure 2 look-ahead number, the main control unit 300 determines that the special figure 2 starting port 232 has not won a prize and performs the processing of steps S1003 to S1013 described later. The special figure prefetching process is terminated.

  In step S1003 following step S1001, the start information related to the hold increased due to winning is prefetched to determine in advance whether or not the special figure 2 variable game related to the hold is correct, and whether or not the result is a big hit is determined. . For example, the main control unit 300 proceeds to step S1005 when determining that the result of the preliminary determination is a big hit, and moves to step S1007 when determining that the result of the determination is not a big hit.

  In step S1005 subsequent to step S1003, a jackpot symbol is determined. For example, the main control unit 300 refers to the special figure 2 determination table shown in FIG. 415 (b) with respect to the pre-reading special figure determination random number value, and stops the display after the special figure 2 variable game ( Stop symbol) is determined in advance, and the process proceeds to step S1013.

  On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit, the process proceeds to step S1007, and it is determined whether or not the result is a small hit. For example, if the main control unit 300 determines that the determination result is a small hit, the process proceeds to step S1009. If the main control unit 300 determines that the determination result is not a small hit, the process proceeds to step S1011.

  If the result of prior determination is a small hit, a small hit symbol is determined in step S1009. For example, the main control unit 300 refers to the special figure 2 determination table shown in FIG. 415 (b) with respect to the pre-reading special figure determination random number value in advance, and displays the stop symbol after the special figure 2 variable game in advance. Determination is made, and the process proceeds to step S1013.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the result of the determination in advance in step S1007 is not a small hit but a loss, the process proceeds to step S1011 to determine a loss symbol. For example, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the random symbol value for determining the failure symbol stored in the RAM 308, and refers to the random number value with reference to the special figure 2 determination table shown in FIG. A stop symbol after the game is determined in advance, and the process proceeds to step S1013.

  In step S1013 following step S1005, S1009, or S1011, the variation time of the special figure 2 variable game is drawn based on the stop symbol determined in advance in these steps. For example, the main control unit 300 determines the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable game using the stop symbol, the random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time, and the special figure 2 fluctuation display time determination table shown in FIG. The special figure prefetch process is terminated.

  Further, in step S1013, for example, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure 2 variable game success / failure result related to the suspension in which the special figure 2 prefetch processing is executed and the special figure variation time determined in advance in step S1013 as the special figure 2 prefetch result. Are stored in a special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit (not shown) provided in the RAM 308. The main control unit 300 stores the pre-determined special figure 2 variable game stop symbol and special figure fluctuation time as a special figure 2 prefetch result in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. Yes. In the present embodiment, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit can store, for example, up to four special figure 2 prefetch results.

  The RAM 308 also has a special figure 2 prefetch number storage area for storing the number of special figure 2 prefetch results stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit as the special figure 2 prefetch number. Each time the special figure 2 prefetch number increases by one, the main control unit 300 writes new special figure 2 prefetch result information in the next rank after the special figure 2 prefetch result information of the lowest rank (last). In the present embodiment, the prefetch process is performed for the increment of the hold, but the special figure prefetch process may be performed for all the hold each time.

  In step S1000, for example, when the main control unit 300 determines that the time reduction flag is in the off state and is not in the power support state, the main control unit 300 proceeds to step S1101 shown in FIG. Each process performed in steps S1101 to S1113 shown in FIG. 431 is the same as the process in which “special diagram 2” in the contents of steps S1001 to S1013 described with reference to FIG. 430 is replaced with “special diagram 1”. Description is omitted. Further, the special figure prefetching process shown in FIGS. 430 and 431 is executed when the number of reserved memory of the special figure variable game to be executed is within the upper limit range.

  The special figure prefetching process in FIGS. 430 and 431 is executed by referring to the success / failure determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of the validity determination, but a special determination table may be used for the prefetching process.

  Next, the first sub-control unit pre-reading notice execution process when a game ball enters the special opening 1 or 2 start opening 230, 232 and the start information is acquired will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 432 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the flow of the first sub-control unit pre-reading notice execution process at the time of starting information acquisition executed in, for example, the effect control process (step S309) illustrated in FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the RAM 408 and the like by the CPU 404 to start the first sub-control unit pre-reading notice execution process at the time of starting information acquisition and a special figure variable game described later. The first sub-control unit pre-reading notice execution process is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 432, in the first sub-control unit pre-reading notice execution process at the time of starting winning (starting information acquisition), it is first determined whether or not a pre-reading notice notification effect is currently being executed (step S1201). . The first sub-control unit 400 reads the value of the pre-reading execution flag stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408, and if the value indicates an on state, the pre-reading notice notification effect is being executed. The process proceeds to step S1215. If the value indicates an off state, it is determined that the pre-reading notice notification effect is not being executed, and the process proceeds to step S1203.

  In step S1203, it is determined whether or not the variation time included in the prefetch result information command sent to the first sub-control unit 400 by the command setting transmission process (step S233) of the main control unit 300 is a predetermined variation time. to decide. In this embodiment, there are six predetermined fluctuation times: 10,000 ms, 15000 ms, 40000 ms, 45000 ms, 60000 ms, and 65000 ms. If the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the variation time included in the prefetch result information command is the predetermined variation time, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S1205, and if it is not the predetermined variation time, the first sub-control unit 400 performs steps S1205 to S1213 described later. Without execution, the process proceeds to step S1215.

  In step S1205, a pending change lottery process 1 is executed. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 obtains a random number for holding change lottery from a random number counter for holding change lottery provided in the RAM 408, and uses the holding change lottery table shown in FIG. A lottery result of “A” or “hold B” is obtained.

  More specifically, the first sub control unit 400 is provided in the RAM 408, the variation time included in the prefetch result information command transmitted from the main control unit 300, the hold change lottery table shown in FIG. The change change lottery process 1 is executed using the hold change lottery random value obtained from the hold change lottery random number counter. The first sub-control unit 400 stores the lottery result of the pending change lottery process 1 in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408.

  In step S1207 following step S1205, a lottery process 2 for holding changes is executed. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 obtains a panel lamp pre-read lottery random number value from a panel lamp pre-read lottery random number counter provided in the RAM 408, and uses the panel lamp pre-read lottery table shown in FIG. , "Lit (blue)", "blinking (blue)", "fast blinking (red)" lottery results are obtained.

  More specifically, the first sub-control unit 400 stores the fluctuation time included in the pre-read result information command transmitted from the main control unit 300, the panel lamp pre-read lottery table shown in FIG. 420 read from the ROM 406, and the RAM 408. Using the board surface ramp pre-read lottery random number obtained from the provided board ramp pre-read lottery random number counter, a lottery process 2 for holding changes is executed. The first sub-control unit 400 stores the lottery result of the pending change lottery process 2 in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408.

  In step S1209 subsequent to step S1207, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is other than “no change”, that is, whether or not the lottery result is one of the above-described lottery process 1 for holding change or lottery process 2 for holding change. The first sub-control unit 400 reads the lottery result of the pending change lottery process 1 stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408, and the lottery result is either “hold A” or “hold B”. It is determined that the lottery is won. The first sub-control unit 400 reads the lottery result of the pending change lottery process 2 stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408, and the lottery result is “lit (blue)” or “flashing (blue)”. "Or" fast flashing (red) ", it is determined that the lottery has been won. If the lottery result is a win in at least one of the holding change lottery process 1 or the holding change lottery process 2, the process proceeds to step S1211, and the lottery results of both the holding change lottery process 1 and the holding change lottery process 2 are determined. If “no change”, that is, if it is not won, the process proceeds to step S1215 without executing steps S1211 and S1213 described later.

  In step S1211 following step S1209, the number of executions of the prefetch notice is set. The number of executions of the prefetch notice is set based on the number of special figure hold. When the first sub-control unit 400 is won in the lottery process 1 or 2 for holding changes, the first sub-control unit 400 acquires the number-of-holds information included in the prefetch result information command sent from the main control unit 300 and provides it in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408. Stored in the pre-reading notice execution count storage unit. When the special figure type included in the prefetching result information command is special figure 2, the same number as the number of suspensions of special figure 2 included in the command is stored in the prefetching notice execution number storage unit and included in the prefetching result information command. When the special figure type to be displayed is special figure 1, the same number as the reserved figure of special figure 1 included in the command is stored in the prefetching notice execution number storage unit. For example, hold change lottery processes 1 and 2 (steps S1205 and S1207) are executed for the second hold of the special figure 1 (the special figure type of the prefetch result information command is “1” and the hold number information is “2”). In this case, the first sub-control unit 400 sets “2” as the number of prefetching notice executions in the prefetching notice number of times storage unit of the RAM 408. Further, the lottery process 1 and 2 (steps S1205 and S1207) for the hold change is executed for the third hold in the special figure 2 (the special figure type of the prefetch result information command is “2” and the hold number information is “3”). In this case, the first sub-control unit 400 sets “3” as the number of prefetching notice executions in the prefetching notice execution number storage unit of the RAM 408. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured to change the display mode of the hold display image of the same number as the number of pre-reading notice executions based on the winning contents of the hold change lottery.

  In step S1213 subsequent to step S1211, the first sub-control unit 400 sets the pre-reading execution flag stored in the RAM 408 to the on state in order to indicate that the pre-reading notice notification effect is being executed. The first sub-control unit 400 sets, for example, “1” as the value of the flag to a predetermined storage in the RAM 408 in order to set a pre-reading notice execution flag indicating whether or not the pre-reading notice is being executed. Store in the area. As a result, the prefetch notice is set during execution. If the first sub-control unit 400 does not execute the pre-reading notice, the first sub-control unit 400 stores “0” as the value of the flag in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 and turns off the pre-reading notice execution flag. Set to state. If the first sub-control unit 400 sets the pre-reading notice execution flag to the on state, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S1215.

  In step S1215 subsequent to step S1213, a hold command output process based on the lottery result of the hold change lottery process 1 is executed. If the lottery result of the pending change lottery process 1 is non-winning, the first sub-control unit 400 decorates the pending command including information that sets the held display image related to the winning start information as the default display of “no change” The information is output to the symbol display device 208, and the first sub-control unit pre-reading notice execution process at the time of starting information acquisition is terminated. Thereby, the hold display image by the display mode of the circular hold display filled with a predetermined color is displayed at a predetermined position of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 hold display areas 208d1 and d2 of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed.

  In addition, when the lottery result of the pending change lottery process 1 is a win, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the pending display image related to the winning start information based on the pending change lottery result, B ”is output to the decorative symbol display device 208 including information on the hold display mode corresponding to any of“ B ”and the hold number information, and the first sub-control unit pre-reading notice execution process at the time of starting information acquisition is terminated. . As a result, the hold display image according to the display mode of either “hold A” of “evil merchant Echigoya” or “hold B” of “Yoshimune” becomes the special map 1 and special map of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. 2 Displayed at predetermined locations in the hold display areas 208d1 and d2.

  In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 executes a hold command output process based on the lottery result of the hold change lottery process 2. If the lottery result of the hold change lottery process 2 is not won, a hold command including information for setting the lighting state of the panel lamps 224a and 224b to the default state of “no change” is output to the panel lamps 224a and 224b and started. The first sub-control unit prefetch notice execution process at the time of information acquisition is terminated. Thus, the panel lamps 224a and 224b emit light in the default display lighting mode.

  When the lottery result of the pending change lottery process 2 is a win, the first sub-control unit 400 sets the lighting state of the panel lamp 224a to “lit (blue)”, “flashing (blue)”, or “fast flashing”. (Red) ”including a hold command is output to the panel lamp 224a, and a predetermined lighting mode corresponding to the hold command of the panel lamp 224a is designated and output to the panel lamp 224b to obtain the starting information. The first sub-control unit prefetch notice execution process is terminated. Thereby, the panel lamp 224a is lit in the lighting mode of “lit (blue)”, “flashing (blue)”, or “fast flashing (red)”, and the panel lamp 224b emits light in a predetermined lighting mode in synchronization with the lighting mode. .

  According to the present embodiment, when the first sub-control unit 400 wins both the lottery process 1 for holding change (step S1205) and the lottery process 2 for holding change (step S1207), the special control in the main control unit 300 is selected. The information on the number of holds can be notified at three locations including either the 1 hold lamp 218 or the special figure 2 hold lamp 220. By doing so, it is possible to notify at least three locations for one piece of information relating to the game, so that the interest of the game may be improved. Moreover, expectation and a sense of superiority may be given to a player by performing a plurality of notifications for one game information.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery process 1 for the pending change in step S1205 and the lottery process 2 for the pending change in step S1207 are performed independently of each other. For example, the lottery process 1 in the pending change wins the lottery. You may make it perform the lottery process 2 of a holding | maintenance change only in the case. Alternatively, the lottery process 2 for holding change may be executed first, and the lottery process 1 for holding change may be executed only when the lottery process 2 wins the lottery.

  Next, the first sub-control unit pre-reading notice execution process at the start of the special figure variable game will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 433 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the first sub-control unit pre-reading notice execution process at the start of the special figure variable game executed in, for example, the effect control process (step S309) shown in FIG. This process is executed once for each special figure variable game.

  As shown in FIG. 433, in the first sub-control unit pre-reading notice execution process at the start of the special figure variable game, it is first determined whether or not the pre-reading notice execution flag is on (step S1301). For example, the first sub-control unit 400 reads the value of the prefetching notice execution flag stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408, and if the value is “1”, the prefetching notice execution flag is on. The process proceeds to step S1303, and if the value is “0”, it is determined that the pre-reading notice execution flag is in an off state, and steps S1303 to S1309 described later are not performed and step S1311 is not performed. Migrate to

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, “holding A” or “holding B” is won in the holding change lottery process 1 in step S1205, or “lit (blue)”, “ When “blinking (blue)” or “high-speed blinking (red)” is selected (Yes in step S1209), the pre-reading notice execution count is set (step S1211), and the pre-reading execution flag is set to the on state (step S1211). Step S1213).

  In step S1303, the first sub-control unit 400 reduces the number of pre-read notice executions by “1”. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 reads the value of the pre-reading notice execution number stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408, subtracts “1” from the read value, and proceeds to step S1305.

  In step S1305 following step S1303, it is determined whether or not the number of pre-reading notice executions obtained by subtracting “1” in step S1303 is “0”. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 stores the value after the subtraction of the prefetching notice execution count in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408, and proceeds to step S1307 when determining that the prefetching notice execution count after the subtraction is “0”. If it is determined that the pre-reading notice execution count after subtraction is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S1311.

  In step S1307 following step S1305, change command output processing corresponding to the type of notice is executed. The first sub-control unit 400 outputs a change command for setting the hold display mode to normal hold to the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 outputs a change command for setting the lighting state of the panel lamps 224a and 224b to the normal state to the drive circuit 420 of the panel lamps 224a and 224b. As a result, the panel lamps 224a and 224b perform lighting display in a normal display mode that is not “lighting (blue)”, “flashing (blue)”, or “fast flashing (red)”.

  In step S1309 following step S1307, the pre-reading notice execution flag is set to an off state. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 sets “0” as the value of the flag stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 in order to set the pre-reading notice execution flag to an off state and indicate that the pre-reading notice has ended. Is stored, and the process proceeds to step S1311. In step S1311, the lottery process for normal notice is executed, and the first sub-control unit prefetch notice execution process at the start of the special figure variable game is terminated.

  Next, the normal notice lottery process in step S1311 of the first sub-control unit prefetch notice execution process at the start of the special figure variable game shown in FIG. 433 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In step S1401, the first sub-control unit 400 has a predetermined variation time included in the prefetch result information command sent to the first sub-control unit 400 by the command setting transmission process (step S233) of the main control unit 300. It is determined whether it is a fluctuating time. In this embodiment, there are six predetermined fluctuation times: 10,000 ms, 15000 ms, 40000 ms, 45000 ms, 60000 ms, and 65000 ms. If the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the variation time included in the prefetch result information command is the predetermined variation time, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S1403. .

  In step S1403, notice lottery 1 is executed. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 acquires a random number for holding change lottery from a random number counter for holding change lottery provided in the RAM 408, and uses the notice lottery table 1 shown in FIG. Get one of the lottery results.

  More specifically, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided in the RAM 408, the variation time included in the prefetch result information command transmitted from the main control unit 300, the notice lottery table 1 shown in FIG. The notice lottery 1 process is executed using the first random number value for normal notice execution determination obtained from the first random number counter for normal notice execution determination. The first sub-control unit 400 stores the lottery result of the notice lottery 1 process in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408.

  In step S1405 subsequent to step S1403, the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not the lottery result of the notice lottery 1 process is “system with buttons”. If it is determined that the system is not “system with buttons”, the process proceeds to step S1407. If it is determined that the button is present, the process proceeds to step S1409.

  If it is determined that the button is not present and the process proceeds to step S1407, the notice lottery 2 is executed. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 acquires the second random value for normal notice execution determination from the second random value counter for normal notice execution determination provided in the RAM 408, and uses the notice lottery table 2 shown in FIG. A lottery result of “None”, “Character A”, “Character B”, or “Character C (Accurate)” is obtained.

  More specifically, the first sub control unit 400 is provided in the RAM 408, the variation time included in the prefetch result information command transmitted from the main control unit 300, the notice lottery table 2 shown in FIG. The notice lottery 2 process is executed using the second random number value for normal notice execution determination obtained from the second random number counter for normal notice execution determination. The first sub-control unit 400 stores the lottery result of the notice lottery 2 process in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408.

  If it is determined that the button is present and the process proceeds to step S1409, the notice lottery 3 is executed. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 acquires the third random value for normal notice execution determination from the third random value counter for normal notice execution determination provided in the RAM 408, and uses the notice lottery table 3 shown in FIG. A lottery result of “None”, “Character A”, “Character B”, or “Character C (Accurate)” is obtained.

  More specifically, the first sub control unit 400 is provided in the RAM 408, the variation time included in the prefetch result information command transmitted from the main control unit 300, the notice lottery table 3 shown in FIG. The notice lottery 3 process is performed using the third random number value for normal notice execution determination obtained from the obtained third random number value for normal notice execution determination. The first sub-control unit 400 stores the lottery result of the notice lottery 3 process in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408.

  In step S1411 subsequent to step S1409, notice lottery 4 is executed. The first sub-control unit 400 obtains the normal random number execution determination fourth random value from the normal preliminary determination execution determination fourth random number counter provided in the RAM 408, for example, and uses the preliminary determination lottery table 4 shown in FIG. “Normal / Normal”, “Normal / Vibration”, “Normal / Vibration + Rotation”, “Vibration / Normal”, “Vibration / Vibration”, “Vibration + Rotation / Vibration”, or “Deca Button Display / Vibration + Rotation” Get one of the lottery results.

  More specifically, the first sub-control unit 400 determines the result of the notice lottery 3, the notice lottery table 4 shown in FIG. 425 read from the ROM 406, and the fourth random number counter for normal notice execution determination provided in the RAM 408. The notice lottery 4 process is executed using the fourth random number value for normal notice execution determination obtained from the above. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 stores the lottery result of the notice lottery 4 process in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408.

  When the notice lottery 2 process in step S1407 or the notice lottery 4 process in step S1411 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1413. In step S1413, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the special figure variation game is equal to the variation time including the normal reach effect (in this example, “10000 ms” and “15000 ms”). This decision is based on the fact that the normal reach production has a shorter production execution time than the other reach productions, so the timing at which cut-in notice can be executed after the start of the reach production is not obtained. Process as follows. Therefore, if it is determined that the fluctuation time of the special figure variable game is a fluctuation time including the normal reach effect, the normal notice lottery process is terminated, and if it is determined that the fluctuation time of the special figure variable game is not the variable time including the normal reach effect, the notice lottery Then, the process proceeds to step S1415 where 5 processing is performed.

  In step S1415, notice lottery 5 is executed. The first sub-control unit 400 acquires the display mode / button mode determination random value from the display mode / button mode determination random value counter provided in the RAM 408, for example, and uses the notice lottery table 5 shown in FIG. , “Character D”, “Character E”, or “Character F (win)” is obtained.

  More specifically, the first sub control unit 400 is provided in the RAM 408, the variation time included in the prefetch result information command transmitted from the main control unit 300, the notice lottery table 5 shown in FIG. The notice lottery 5 process is executed by using the random number value for post-reach notice execution determination obtained from the post-reach notice execution decision random number counter. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 stores the lottery result of the notice lottery 5 process in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408. If the process in step S1415 is executed, the normal notice lottery process is terminated.

  Next, the game effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described more specifically with reference to FIGS. 435 to 447. Each figure of FIG. 435 thru | or 447 shows the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 which comprises a part of game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100, and the board surface lamp 224 (224a, 224b). FIG. 1 shows a display device 212, a special figure 2 display device 214, a special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and a special figure 2 hold lamp 220. First, a special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 435 (a) to FIG. 437 (c) show, in this order, the special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In the figure showing the special figure variation game in time series, the passage of time between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures.

  In FIG. 435 (a), the special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 both stop and display the special symbol "Special figure I". Also, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is lit with three LEDs, indicating that there are three special figure 1 holdings. The special figure 2 hold lamp 220 is all turned off, indicating that there is no special figure 2 hold. "Decoration 4-decoration 3-decoration 1" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c of the ornament symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the special figure variable game is out of place. Note that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 100 at this time is a non-electric support state that is not an electric support state, and is a special figure low probability state.

  A special figure 1 holding display area 208d1 is provided on the lower left side in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. The special figure 1 hold display area 208d1 notifies the player of the number of special figure 1 random value pairs stored in the special figure 1 random value storage area as the special figure 1 hold number (the special figure 1 start information hold number). It is possible. Since three special figure 1 variable games are held at the time shown in FIG. 435 (a), the hold display image corresponding to the first special figure 1 variable game held in the special figure 1 hold display area 208d1. a1 is displayed, a hold display image a2 corresponding to the special figure 1 variable game held on the second is displayed, and a hold display image a3 corresponding to the special figure 1 variable game held on the third is displayed. It is reported that three special figure 1 variable games are put on hold. The hold display images a1 to a3 are all in the normal hold display mode shown in FIG.

  Further, on the lower right side in the effect display area 208d, a special figure 2 hold display area 208d2 for displaying a hold related to the special figure 2 variable game is provided. Since the special figure hold display area 208d2 has the same function and function as the special figure 1 hold display area 208d1 except that the special figure 2 variable game hold is displayed, detailed description is omitted. In this example, since the special figure 2 variable game is not put on hold, the hold display image is not displayed in the special figure 2 hold display area 208d2.

  The board lamps 224a and 224b are in a normal lighting control according to a predetermined production procedure from the end of the special figure variable game as shown in FIG. 435 (a) until the next special figure variable game is started. Lighting or flashing is executed. In this example, the normal performance by the panel lamp 224a is executed in a lighting mode in which the odd-numbered and even-numbered ten lamps are alternately blinked. Further, the normal effect on the panel lamp 224b is executed in a lighting mode in which the upper two groups and the lower two groups of the four petal lamps alternately flash.

  As shown in FIG. 435 (a), it is shown in FIG. 435 (b) after a lapse of a predetermined time after “decoration 4-decoration 3-decoration 1” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. Thus, the next special figure 1 variable game is started. Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 435 (b), for example, the following processing is executed. First, the main control unit 300 acquires a special figure 1 random number pair stored at the earliest of the special figure 1 random value storage area and executes a success / failure determination relating to the special figure variable game to be started. The stored special figure 1 random value set is erased, the remaining special figure 1 random value group data is processed so that the holding rank is incremented by 1, and the special figure 1 reservation number is subtracted by one. In addition, when erasing the data of the first special figure 1 random value set in the special figure 1 random value storage area, the main controller 300 simultaneously reads the first special figure 1 prefetch in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage part. The information of the result is erased, and 1 is subtracted from the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area. Further, in the same process, the main control unit 300 acquires the random number value for determining the special figure variation time and determines the variation time of the special figure 1 variable game. In this example, for example, the result of the determination is wrong (for example, the stop symbol is “Special Figure I”), and the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable game is 8000 ms. The main control unit 300 starts the special figure 1 variable game on the special figure 1 display device 212, sets the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 to two LEDs, and further includes information on the determination result and the special figure fluctuation time. The command is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. In FIG. 435 (b) and subsequent figures, in the special figure 1 or special figure 2 display devices 212 and 214 in the special figure variable game, the side of the center of the 7 segments shown in the special figure 1 display device 212 of FIG. 435 (b). The bars are black and the others are white, indicating that the special symbols are changing.

  The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the command from the main control unit 300 executes the first sub-control unit side notice execution process at the start of the special figure variable game. The first sub-control unit 400 determines that the pre-reading execution flag is in an off state (No in step S1301), shifts to a normal notice lottery process (step S1311), and the variation time of the special figure 1 variable game is 8000 ms. Therefore, it is determined that the normal notice effect is not executed (step S1401), and the first sub-control unit prefetch notice execution process at the start of the special figure variable game is ended.

  When the above processing is completed, as shown in FIG. 435 (b), a decorative symbol is displayed in each of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 as indicated by a bold arrow pointing downward in the drawing. The special figure 1 variable game of the effect of moving (rotating) from top to bottom is started.

  In addition, since the first sub-control unit 400 has received a command including information in which the special figure 1 holding number is decreased by 1, as shown in FIG. 435 (b), the holding display image a3 is deleted and two pieces are displayed. These are the hold display images a1 and a2 in the normal hold hold display mode.

  As shown in FIG. 435 (c), for example, on the special figure 1 display device 212 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the special figure fluctuation game was started (for example, 8000 ms time has elapsed since the symbol fluctuation display was started). While “Special Figure I” is stopped and displayed, “Decoration 8-Decoration 5-Decoration 0” is stopped and displayed in the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and the special figure 1 variable game is off. Is notified.

  During the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIGS. 435 (b) to (c), the board lamps 224a and 224b are turned on or blinked by normal lighting control according to a predetermined production procedure.

  As shown in FIG. 435 (c), the display shown in FIG. 435 (d) is performed after a predetermined time has elapsed since “decoration 8-decoration 5-decoration 0” was stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. Thus, the next special figure 1 variable game is started. Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 435 (d), the same process as the process executed prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 435 (b) is executed.

  The main control unit 300 acquires the earliest special figure 1 random number pair and executes the determination of whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful. For example, the result of the determination is wrong (for example, the stop symbol is “special figure”). I "), and the variation time of the special figure 1 variable game is 8000 ms. The main control unit 300 starts the special figure 1 variable game on the special figure 1 display device 212, sets the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 to one LED, and further includes the determination result and the special figure fluctuation time information. The command is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

  The first sub control unit 400 that has received the command from the main control unit 300 executes the first sub control unit side notice execution process at the start of the special figure variable game. The first sub-control unit 400 determines that the pre-reading execution flag is in an off state (No in step S1301), shifts to a normal notice lottery process (step S1311), and the variation time of the special figure 1 variable game is 8000 ms. Therefore, it is determined that the normal notice effect is not executed (step S1401), and the first sub-control unit prefetch notice execution process at the start of the special figure variable game is ended.

  When the above processing is completed, as shown in FIG. 435 (d), decorative symbols are displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 as indicated by the bold arrows pointing downward in the drawing. The special figure 1 variable game of the effect of moving (rotating) from top to bottom is started.

  Further, since the first sub-control unit 400 has received a command including information in which the special figure 1 holding number is reduced by 1, as shown in FIG. 435 (d), the holding display image a2 is erased and one is displayed. Only the on-hold display image a1 in the normal on-hold display mode.

  If one game ball wins the special figure 1 starting slot 230 during the special figure 1 variable game, the following processing is executed during the execution of the special figure variable game. In the special figure 1 state update process of step S227 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 411, the main control unit 300 lights two of the four LEDs of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 to Indicates that there are two holds. Further, the main control unit 300 executes special figure prefetching processing shown in FIGS. 430 and 431 for the derived special figure 1 start information. First, the main control unit 300 determines that the current gaming state is not in electric support (No in step S1000), and then determines that the winning is for the special figure 1 starting port 230 (Yes in step S1101). Based on the special figure 1 starting information, it is determined that the pre-determination result is out of order by referring to the low / probability determination table shown in FIG. 414 (b) (No in step S1103, No in step S1107), and FIG. With reference to the special figure 1 determination table shown in (a), the stop symbol is determined as, for example, “Special Figure I” (step S1111), and the fluctuation time is referred to with reference to the special figure 1 variable display time determination table shown in FIG. Is determined to be 40000 ms, for example (step S1113), and the special figure prefetching process is terminated. A command (prefetch command) including information on these pre-determination results is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 by command setting transmission processing (step S233).

  The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the command including the information on the prior determination results executes the first sub-control unit pre-reading notice execution process at the time of starting information acquisition shown in FIG. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the pre-reading execution flag is in an off state (No in step S1201), and the variation time of the special figure 1 variable game is 40000 ms, and thus corresponds to a predetermined variation time. Judgment (step S1203), with reference to the hold change lottery table shown in FIG. 418, it is determined that “hold A” has been won by executing the hold change lottery process 1 (step S1205), the board lamp shown in FIG. With reference to the pre-read lottery table, it is determined that “no change” has been selected by executing the pending change lottery process 2 (step S1207), and since “hold A” has been won, It is determined that the winning is made (step S1209), “2” is set as the number of pre-reading notice executions (step S1211), and the pre-reading execution flag is set to the on state. (Step S1213), and outputs the read-ahead notice command including a display mode of the hold display image a2 decorative pattern display unit 208 (step S1215). As a result, as shown in FIG. 435 (e), the hold display image a2 is a hold display area 208d1 which is a character image representing “evil merchant Echigoya” in the display mode corresponding to “hold A” shown in FIG. 419 (b). Is displayed. In addition, since “no change” is selected in the lottery process 2 for the pending change, the panel lamps 224a and 224b are shown in FIGS. 435 (b) to (c) during the period from FIG. 435 (e) to FIG. 437 (c). In the same way as in the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 1), lighting, blinking, and the like are executed by normal lighting control according to a predetermined production procedure.

  As shown in FIG. 435 (f) after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the special figure 1 variable game, as shown in FIG. 435 (f), “Special figure I” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a. , 208b, 208c, “decoration 0-decoration 7-decoration 6” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the special figure 1 variable game is out of play.

  As shown in FIG. 435 (f), FIG. 436 (a) shows after a predetermined time has elapsed since “decoration 0-decoration 7-decoration 6” was stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. Thus, the next special figure 1 variable game is started. Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 436 (a), for example, the following processing is executed. First, the main control unit 300 acquires a special figure 1 random number pair stored at the earliest of the special figure 1 random value storage area and executes a success / failure determination relating to the special figure variable game to be started. The stored special figure 1 random value set is erased, the remaining special figure 1 random value group data is processed so that the holding rank is incremented by 1, and the special figure 1 reservation number is subtracted by one. In addition, when erasing the data of the first special figure 1 random value set in the special figure 1 random value storage area, the main controller 300 simultaneously reads the first special figure 1 prefetch in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage part. The information of the result is erased, and 1 is subtracted from the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area. Further, in the same process, the main control unit 300 acquires the random number value for determining the special figure variation time and determines the variation time of the special figure 1 variable game. In this example, for example, the result of the determination is wrong (for example, the stop symbol is “Special Figure I”), and the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable game is 10000 ms. The main control unit 300 starts the special figure 1 variable game on the special figure 1 display device 212 and transmits a command including information on the determination result and the special figure fluctuation time to the first sub control unit 400. Further, the main control unit 300 turns on one of the four LEDs of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 in the special figure 1 state update process in step S227 of the timer interruption process shown in FIG. 1 indicates that there is 1 hold.

  The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the command from the main control unit 300 executes the first sub-control unit side notice execution process at the start of the special figure variable game. The first sub-control unit 400 determines that the pre-reading execution flag is on (Yes in step S1301), subtracts 1 from the pre-reading notice execution count (= 2), and stores it in the prefetching notice execution count storage area of the RAM 408. 1 is stored (step S1303). Next, it is determined whether or not the current number of pre-reading notice executions (= 1) is 0, it is determined that the number of pre-reading notice executions is not 0 (No in step S1305), and the process proceeds to the normal notice lottery process (step S1311). In step S1401 of the normal advance notice lottery process, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that it corresponds to a predetermined change time since the change time of the special figure 1 variable game is 10000 ms, and executes the advance notice lottery 1 process (step S1401). S1403). In step S1403, the first sub-control unit 400 executes the notice lottery 1 process for selecting whether or not to use the effect button (for example, the chance button 136) with reference to the notice lottery table 1 shown in FIG. In this example, “buttonless system” is selected. In the case of a buttonless system (No in step S1405), the first sub-control unit 400 executes the notice lottery 2 process (step S1407). In step S1407, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the notice lottery table 2 shown in FIG. In this example, “None” is selected. Next, in step S1413, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the variation time of the special figure 1 variable game is 10000 ms, so that it is a normal reach variation time (No in step S1413), and the preliminary lottery in step S1415 5 The normal notice lottery process is terminated without executing the process.

  With the above processing, in the special figure 1 floating game, the reach effect of the normal reach is executed, and the pre-reach notice effect and the post-reach notice effect prior to the normal reach effect are not performed.

  When the above processing is completed, as shown in FIG. 436 (a), the decorative symbols are displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 as indicated by the downward bold arrows in the drawing. The special figure 1 variable game of the effect of moving (rotating) from top to bottom is started.

  In addition, since the first sub-control unit 400 has received a command including information in which the special figure 1 holding number has decreased by 1, as shown in FIG. 436 (a), the holding display image a2 is deleted and the holding A This is the hold display image a1 in the hold display mode.

  FIG. 436 (b) shows a state where the reach effect is being executed from the middle of the special figure 1 variable game. The reach type in this example is normal reach, “decoration 8” is stopped and displayed in each of the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the effect that the decoration symbol rotates in the middle symbol display area 208b is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 436 (c), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the special figure variation game (after 10000 ms has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation display), the special figure 1 display device 212 displays, for example, “Special “I” is stopped and “decoration 8-decoration 4-decoration 8” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. Informed.

  During the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIGS. 436 (a) to 436 (c), the board lamps 224a and 224b are turned on or blinked by normal lighting control according to a predetermined production procedure.

  As shown in FIG. 436 (c), it is shown in FIG. 436 (d) after a predetermined time has elapsed since “decoration 8-decoration 4-decoration 8” was stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. Thus, the next special figure 1 variable game is started. Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 436 (d), for example, the following processing is executed. First, the main control unit 300 acquires a special figure 1 random number pair stored at the earliest of the special figure 1 random value storage area and executes a success / failure determination relating to the special figure variable game to be started. The stored special figure 1 random value set is erased, the remaining special figure 1 random value group data is processed so that the holding rank is incremented by 1, and the special figure 1 reservation number is subtracted by one. In addition, when erasing the data of the first special figure 1 random value set in the special figure 1 random value storage area, the main controller 300 simultaneously reads the first special figure 1 prefetch in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage part. The information of the result is erased, and 1 is subtracted from the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area. Further, in the same process, the main control unit 300 acquires the random number value for determining the special figure variation time and determines the variation time of the special figure 1 variable game. In this example, for example, the determination result is out of place (for example, the stop symbol is “Special Figure I”), and the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable game is 40000 ms. The main control unit 300 starts the special figure 1 variable game on the special figure 1 display device 212, turns off all LEDs of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and further includes a determination result and information on the special figure fluctuation time. Is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the command from the main control unit 300 executes the first sub-control unit side notice execution process at the start of the special figure variable game. The first sub-control unit 400 determines that the pre-reading execution flag is on (Yes in step S1301), and subtracts 1 from the pre-reading notice execution count (= 1) in the prefetching notice execution count storage area of the RAM 408. 0 is stored (step S1303). Next, it is determined whether or not the current number of pre-reading notice executions (= 0) is 0, the number of pre-reading notice executions is determined to be 0 (Yes in step S1305), and change command output processing corresponding to the type of notice Execute. The first sub-control unit 400 outputs a change command for setting the hold display mode to normal hold to the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 outputs a change command for setting the lighting state of the panel lamps 224a and 224b to the normal state to the drive circuit 420 of the panel lamps 224a and 224b. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 sets the pre-reading notice execution flag to the off state (step S1309), and proceeds to the normal notice lottery process (step S1311). In step S1401 of the normal notice lottery process, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that it corresponds to a predetermined fluctuation time since the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable game is 40000 ms, and executes the notice lottery 1 process (step S1401). S1403). In step S1403, the first sub-control unit 400 executes the notice lottery 1 process for selecting whether or not to use the effect button (for example, the chance button 136) with reference to the notice lottery table 1 shown in FIG. In this example, “button system” is selected. The first sub-control unit 400 executes the notice lottery 3 process (step S1409) when the button is present (Yes in step S1405). In step S1409, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the notice lottery table 3 shown in FIG. In this example, “Character A” is selected. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the notice lottery table 4 shown in FIG. 425 and executes a lottery concerning the button form and display form of the chance button 136 in the pre-reach notice. In this example, “normal / normal” is selected as the “display mode / button mode”. Next, in step S1413, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the variation time of the special figure 1 variable game is 40000 ms, so that it is the variation time of reach A instead of normal reach (Yes in step S1413). The notice lottery 5 process of S1415 is executed. In step S1415, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the notice lottery table 5 shown in FIG. In this example, “Character D” is selected.

  With the above processing, in the special figure 1 variable game, the reach effect of reach A is executed, and the “pre-reach” button effect before reach is performed prior to the reach A effect. Here, the “button-equipped” effect is performed with respect to the chance button 136 such that the “display mode / button mode” is “normal / normal” and the “character A” effect is subsequently performed. Further, following the reach A effect, a post-reach notice effect by “Character D” is performed.

  When the above processing is completed, as shown in FIG. 436 (d), the decorative symbols are displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 as indicated by the bold arrows pointing downward in the drawing. The special figure 1 variable game of the effect of moving (rotating) from top to bottom is started.

  Further, since the first sub-control unit 400 has received a command including information in which the special figure 1 holding number is decreased by 1, as shown in FIG. 436 (d), the holding display image a1 is deleted and the special figure is displayed. No hold display image is displayed in the 1 hold display area 208d1.

  FIG. 436 (e) schematically shows a chance button 136 on the lower right side of the drawing in addition to the configuration shown in FIG. 436 (d). FIG. 436 (e) shows a state in which an operation request image prompting the user to press the chance button 136 is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 as a pre-reach notice effect. The button mode of the chance button 136 when the operation request image that prompts the user to press the chance button 136 is displayed is “normal” shown in FIG. 427 (a), and the display mode of the operation request image that prompts the user to press the chance button 136 is displayed. Is also “normal” shown in FIG.

  FIG. 436 (f) shows a state in which the player presses down the chance button 136 and “Character A” of the pre-reach notice effect is displayed in the effect display area 208 d. The pressing of the chance button 136 by the player schematically shows a state in which the player's finger is put on the chance button 136 in the figure.

  FIG. 437 (a) shows a state where the reach effect is being executed from the middle of the special figure 1 variable game. The reach type in this example is reach A, “decoration 8” is stopped and displayed in each of the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the effect that the decoration symbol rotates in the middle symbol display area 208b is performed.

  FIG. 437 (b) shows a state where “Character D” is displayed as a post-reach notice effect. Next, as shown in FIG. 437 (c), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the special figure 1 variable game (after 40,000 ms has elapsed since the start of the graphic fluctuation display), the special figure 1 display device 212 has “ “Special Figure I” is stopped and “Decoration 8—Decoration 7—Decoration 8” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. Is notified.

  During the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIGS. 437 (a) to 437 (c), the board lamps 224a and 224b are turned on or blinked by normal lighting control according to a predetermined production procedure.

  Next, a special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 438 to 439. FIG. 438 (a) to FIG. 439 (f) show, in this order, the special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 438 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being performed. Note that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 100 at this time is a non-electric support state that is not an electric support state, and is a special figure low probability state.

  In FIG. 438 (a), the special figure 1 display device 212 starts the variable display, and the special figure 2 display device 214 stops the special figure "Special figure I". In addition, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is lit with one LED, indicating that there is one special figure 1 holding. The special figure 2 hold lamp 220 is all turned off, indicating that there is no special figure 2 hold. Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game, a process similar to the process executed prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game described in the first embodiment is executed.

  The main control unit 300 acquires the earliest special figure 1 random value pair and executes a determination as to whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is relevant. For example, the determination result is out of place (for example, the stop symbol is “Special Figure I”), and the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable game is 8000 ms. The main control unit 300 starts the special figure 1 variable game on the special figure 1 display device 212 and transmits a command including information on the determination result and the special figure fluctuation time to the first sub control unit 400.

  The first sub control unit 400 that has received the command from the main control unit 300 executes the first sub control unit side notice execution process at the start of the special figure variable game. The first sub-control unit 400 determines that the pre-reading execution flag is in an off state (No in step S1301), shifts to a normal notice lottery process (step S1311), and the variation time of the special figure 1 variable game is 8000 ms. Therefore, it is determined that the normal notice effect is not executed (step S1401), and the first sub-control unit prefetch notice execution process at the start of the special figure variable game is ended.

  When the above processing is completed, as shown in FIG. 438 (a), a decorative symbol is displayed in each of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 as indicated by a bold arrow pointing downward in the drawing. The special figure 1 variable game of the effect of moving (rotating) from top to bottom is started.

  Further, since the first sub-control unit 400 has received a command including information on the number of special figure 1 holds, as shown in FIG. 438 (a), a hold display image of one normal hold display mode. a1 is displayed.

  If one game ball wins the special figure 1 starting slot 230 during the special figure 1 variable game, the following processing is executed during the execution of the special figure variable game. In the special figure 1 state update process of step S227 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 411, the main control unit 300 lights two of the four LEDs of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 to Indicates that there are two holds. Further, the main control unit 300 executes special figure prefetching processing shown in FIGS. 430 and 431 for the derived special figure 1 start information. First, the main control unit 300 determines that the current gaming state is not in electric support (No in step S1000), and then determines that the winning is for the special figure 1 starting port 230 (Yes in step S1101). Based on the special figure 1 start information, it is determined that the pre-determination result is a win by referring to the low probability table for determination of propriety shown in FIG. 414 (b) (No in step S1103, No in step S1107), and FIG. With reference to the special figure 1 determination table shown in (a), the stop symbol is determined as, for example, “Special Figure A” (step S1111), and the variable time is referred to with reference to the special figure 1 variable display time determination table shown in FIG. Is determined to be 45000 ms, for example (step S1113), and the special figure prefetching process is terminated. A command (prefetch command) including information on these pre-determination results is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 by command setting transmission processing (step S233).

  The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the command including the information on the prior determination results executes the first sub-control unit pre-reading notice execution process at the time of starting information acquisition shown in FIG. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the pre-reading execution flag is in an off state (No in step S1201), and the variation time of the special figure 1 variable game is 45000 ms, and thus corresponds to a predetermined variation time. Judgment (step S1203), with reference to the hold change lottery table shown in FIG. 418, it is determined that “hold B” has been won by executing the hold change lottery process 1 (step S1205), the board lamp shown in FIG. With reference to the pre-read lottery table, the lottery process 2 for holding change is executed and it is determined that “lighting (blue)” is selected (step S1207), and “holding B” and “lighting (blue)” are won. Therefore, it is determined that one of the lotteries has been won (step S1209), and “2” is set as the number of pre-read notice executions (step S1211). Flag the ON state (step S1213), the look-ahead warning command including a display mode of the display mode and the board lamp 224 of the hold display image a2 and outputs the decoration pattern display unit 208 (step S1215). As a result, as shown in FIG. 438 (b), the hold display image a2 is displayed in the hold display area 208d1 as a character image representing “Yoshimune” in the display mode corresponding to “hold B” shown in FIG. 419 (b). Is done. In addition, since “lit (blue)” is selected in the lottery process 2 for holding changes, the board surface lamp 224a is displayed between the two consecutive special figure variable games shown in FIGS. 438 (b) to 438 (e). The pre-reading notice effect is executed by lighting all 10 circular lamps corresponding to “lighting (blue)” in blue. Further, in synchronization with the pre-reading notice effect of the panel lamp 224a, the panel lamp 224b lights up the two petal-shaped lamps corresponding to the number of reservations in order from the bottom to notify the number of reservations, and corresponds to the reservation related to the pre-read notification. The second petal-shaped lamp is lit with a specific emission color to give the player a sense of expectation.

  As shown in FIG. 438 (c) after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the special figure 1 variable game, "Special Figure I" is stopped on the special figure 1 display device 212 and the left middle right symbol display area 208a is displayed. , 208b and 208c, “decoration 8—decoration 5—decoration 0” is stopped and displayed to notify that the special figure 1 variable game is out of play.

  As shown in FIG. 438 (c), FIG. 438 (d) shows a predetermined time after the “decoration 8-decoration 5-decoration 0” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. Thus, the next special figure 1 variable game is started. Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 438 (d), for example, the following processing is executed. First, the main control unit 300 acquires a special figure 1 random number pair stored at the earliest of the special figure 1 random value storage area and executes a success / failure determination relating to the special figure variable game to be started. The stored special figure 1 random value set is erased, the remaining special figure 1 random value group data is processed so that the holding rank is incremented by 1, and the special figure 1 reservation number is subtracted by one. In addition, when erasing the data of the first special figure 1 random value set in the special figure 1 random value storage area, the main controller 300 simultaneously reads the first special figure 1 prefetch in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage part. The information of the result is erased, and 1 is subtracted from the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area. Further, in the same process, the main control unit 300 acquires the random number value for determining the special figure variation time and determines the variation time of the special figure 1 variable game. In this example, for example, the result of the determination is wrong (for example, the stop symbol is “Special Figure I”), and the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable game is 8000 ms. The main control unit 300 starts the special figure 1 variable game on the special figure 1 display device 212, turns on the LED of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and further displays the determination result and the special figure fluctuation time information. The included command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the command from the main control unit 300 executes the first sub-control unit side notice execution process at the start of the special figure variable game. The first sub-control unit 400 determines that the pre-reading execution flag is on (Yes in step S1301), subtracts 1 from the pre-reading notice execution count (= 2), and stores it in the prefetching notice execution count storage area of the RAM 408. 1 is stored (step S1303). Next, it is determined whether or not the current number of pre-reading notice executions (= 1) is 0, it is determined that the number of pre-reading notice executions is not 0 (No in step S1305), and the process proceeds to the normal notice lottery process (step S1311). In step S1401 of the normal notice lottery process, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the variation time of the special figure 1 variable game is 8000 ms and does not correspond to the predetermined change time, and ends the normal notice lottery process.

  When the above processing is completed, as shown in FIG. 438 (d), the decorative symbols are displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 as indicated by the bold arrows pointing downward in the drawing. The special figure 1 variable game of the effect of moving (rotating) from top to bottom is started.

  In addition, since the first sub-control unit 400 has received a command including information in which the number of special figure 1 hold is reduced by 1, the hold display image a2 is deleted and the hold B is displayed as shown in FIG. 438 (d). This is the hold display image a1 in the hold display mode.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the special figure 1 variable game (after 8000 ms has elapsed since the start of the symbol fluctuation display), as shown in FIG. "Special Figure I" is stopped and "Decoration 0-Decoration 7-Decoration 6" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. Is notified.

  During the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIGS. 438 (b) to (e), the board lamp 224 a is subjected to pre-reading notice display by lighting control according to the “lighting (blue)” effect procedure. In synchronism with the lighting control of the panel lamp 224a, the panel lamp 224b lights up the number of petal-patterned lamps equal to the number of reservations shown in FIG. Light.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 are provided as notification means capable of informing the information on the number of holds as game information relating to the game, and the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit are provided. With the control of 400, the information on the number of holds is calculated according to the lighting mode of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the display mode in the special figure 1 holding display area 208d1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lighting mode of the panel lamp 224b. Notification of the number of holds can be executed at three locations. According to the present embodiment, it is possible to notify three or more locations with respect to one piece of information relating to a game, so that the interest of the game may be improved. Moreover, expectation and a sense of superiority may be given to a player by performing a plurality of notifications for one game information. Note that the notification means may be one effect means or a plurality of effect means.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, for example, a special figure 1 holding lamp 218, board lamps 224a and 224b, and a decorative symbol display device 208 are provided as a plurality of presentation means capable of executing at least an effect relating to a game. For example, using the combination of the decorative symbol display device 208, the panel lamp 224, and the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 as the production means, it is possible to execute notification regarding the information on the number of holds at three or more locations. Thus, there are cases where the notification can be made conspicuous by notifying using a plurality of effect means.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 as a main control means capable of executing at least a main control unit timer interrupt process, which is a control process related to a game, and, for example, a special figure change start sent from the main control unit 300 A first sub-control unit 400 as a sub-control unit capable of receiving at least a command and a pre-reading result information command and executing at least a first sub-control unit main process that is a control process related to a game; And the special figure 1 holding | maintenance lamp 218 as at least one production | presentation means is made to be controlled by the main control part 300 among several production | presentation means. As described above, according to the present embodiment, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 that is controlled by the main control unit 300 and has high reliability of the information on the number of holdings is used as one of the plurality of effects.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, the panel lamps 224a and 224b, and the decorative symbol display device 208 of the decorative symbol display device 208 among the notifications of the number of holdings executed in three places are retained. The notification of the number of reservations by at least two by lighting the display area 208d1 and the panel lamp 224b is performed including at least the same period such as a period from the increase in the number of reservations to a decrease in the number of reservations or a prefetch notification period. According to the present embodiment, there is a case where the interest of the game is improved by executing the effect by at least two notifications during the same period.

  In the present embodiment, one of the plurality of effect means is a decorative symbol display device 208 as an image display means, and the decorative symbol display device 208 can execute, for example, notification of the number of holds as at least one notification. According to the present embodiment, it may be possible to perform notification at a portion where the player's line of sight is most easily accessible.

  In the present embodiment, the game information is a start hold display indicating the number of times the symbol variation display is held. The plurality of rendering means include a special figure 1 hold lamp 218 as a hold display means indicating the number of hold times, and panel lamps 224a and 224b as lamp notification means. The notification by the start hold display is a hold display means, an image It can be executed at least in three places: display means and lamp notification means.

  According to the present embodiment, the symbol variation display is an important effect that informs whether or not a big hit that is advantageous to the player is given, and the player can easily and easily inform the player of the number of reserved important effects. There are cases where it is possible.

  Further, in this embodiment, at least one of the notifications by the start hold display can function as a pre-reading notice. According to the present embodiment, there is a case where reliable notification can be executed while increasing the expectation for the big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 438 (e), FIG. 438 (f) shows after a lapse of a predetermined time since “decoration 0-decoration 7-decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. Thus, the next special figure 1 variable game is started. Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 438 (f), for example, the following processing is executed. First, the main control unit 300 acquires a special figure 1 random number pair stored at the earliest of the special figure 1 random value storage area and executes a success / failure determination relating to the special figure variable game to be started. The stored special figure 1 random value set is erased, the remaining special figure 1 random value group data is processed so that the holding rank is incremented by 1, and the special figure 1 reservation number is subtracted by one. In addition, when erasing the data of the first special figure 1 random value set in the special figure 1 random value storage area, the main controller 300 simultaneously reads the first special figure 1 prefetch in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage part. The information of the result is erased, and 1 is subtracted from the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area. Further, in the same process, the main control unit 300 acquires the random number value for determining the special figure variation time and determines the variation time of the special figure 1 variable game. In this example, for example, the determination result is a hit (for example, the stop symbol is “special diagram A”), and the variation time of the special diagram 1 variable game is 45000 ms. The main control unit 300 starts the special figure 1 variable game on the special figure 1 display device 212, turns off all LEDs of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and further includes a determination result and information on the special figure fluctuation time. Is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the command from the main control unit 300 executes the first sub-control unit side notice execution process at the start of the special figure variable game. The first sub-control unit 400 determines that the pre-reading execution flag is on (Yes in step S1301), and subtracts 1 from the pre-reading notice execution count (= 1) in the prefetching notice execution count storage area of the RAM 408. 0 is stored (step S1303). Next, it is determined whether or not the current number of pre-reading notice executions (= 0) is 0, the number of pre-reading notice executions is determined to be 0 (Yes in step S1305), and change command output processing corresponding to the type of notice Execute. The first sub-control unit 400 outputs a change command for setting the hold display mode to normal hold to the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 outputs a change command for setting the lighting state of the panel lamps 224a and 224b to the normal state to the drive circuit 420 of the panel lamps 224a and 224b. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 sets the pre-reading notice execution flag to the off state (step S1309), and proceeds to the normal notice lottery process (step S1311). In step S1401 of the normal advance notice lottery process, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that it corresponds to a predetermined change time since the change time of the special figure 1 change game is 45000 ms, and executes the advance notice lottery 1 process (step S1401). S1403). In step S1403, the first sub-control unit 400 executes the notice lottery 1 process for selecting whether or not to use the effect button (for example, the chance button 136) with reference to the notice lottery table 1 shown in FIG. In this example, “button system” is selected. The first sub-control unit 400 executes the notice lottery 3 process (step S1409) when the button is present (Yes in step S1405). In step S1409, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the notice lottery table 3 shown in FIG. In this example, “Character B” is selected. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the notice lottery table 4 shown in FIG. 425 and executes a lottery concerning the button form and display form of the chance button 136 in the pre-reach notice. In this example, “vibration + rotation / vibration” is selected as the “display mode / button mode”. Next, in step S1413, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the variation time of the special figure 1 variable game is 45000 ms, so it is not the normal reach but the reach A variation time (Yes in step S1413). The notice lottery 5 process of S1415 is executed. In step S1415, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the notice lottery table 5 shown in FIG. In this example, “Character F” is selected.

  With the above processing, in the special figure 1 variable game, the reach effect of reach A is executed, and the “pre-reach” button effect before reach is performed prior to the reach A effect. Here, the “button-equipped” effect is performed on the chance button 136 such that the “display mode / button mode” is “vibration + rotation / vibration”, and then the “character B” effect is performed. Following the reach A effect, a post-reach notice effect by “Character F” is performed.

  When the above processing is completed, as shown in FIG. 438 (f), the decorative symbols are displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 as indicated by the bold arrows pointing downward in the drawing. The special figure 1 variable game of the effect of moving (rotating) from top to bottom is started.

  In addition, since the first sub-control unit 400 has received a command including information in which the special figure 1 holding number is decreased by 1, as shown in FIG. 438 (f), the holding display image a1 is deleted and the special figure is displayed. No hold display image is displayed in the 1 hold display area 208d1.

  FIG. 439 (a) schematically shows a chance button 136 on the lower right side of the drawing in addition to the configuration shown in FIG. 438 (f). FIG. 439 (a) shows a state in which an operation request image prompting the user to press the chance button 136 is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 as a pre-reach notice effect. The button mode of the chance button 136 when the operation request image that prompts the user to press the chance button 136 is displayed is “vibration” shown in FIG. 427 (b), and the display mode of the operation request image that prompts the user to press the chance button 136. Is “vibration + rotation” shown in FIG.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the first sub-control unit 400 including the chance button 136 as an operation unit, for example, as an effect unit capable of executing at least an effect relating to a game, and the image display unit as, for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect means includes an effect button (chance button 136) as an operation means that can be operated by the player, and the decorative symbol display device 208 requests an operation request image for pressing the chance button 136. An image of the chance button 136 can be displayed, and the operation request image includes an image of the shape of the chance button 136 so that the chance button 136 can be identified, and the operation request image is a display of the operation request image. The display mode (in this example, “vibration”) is different from the button mode (in this example, “vibration”) of the chance button 136. + Can be displayed in rotation ").

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, an operation request image that is different from the appearance is displayed on the rendering means, so that the interest of the game may be improved. In some cases, attention may be paid to the production means. In some cases, the operation request image can function as a notice or notification. Further, even when the image display is simplified, necessary information may be transmitted to the player.

  FIG. 439 (b) shows a state in which the display effect by “Character B” of the pre-reach notice effect is executed in the effect display area 208d in association with the player pressing the chance button 136.

  FIG. 439 (c) shows a state where the reach effect is being executed from the middle of the special figure 1 variable game. The reach type in this example is reach A, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in each of the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and an effect of rotating the decoration symbol is performed in the middle symbol display area 208b.

  FIG. 439 (d) shows a state in which “Character F” is displayed as a post-reach notice effect. Next, as shown in FIG. 439 (e), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the special figure 1 variable game (after 45000 ms has elapsed since the start of the graphic fluctuation display), the special figure 1 display device 212 has “ “Special Figure A” is stopped and “Decoration 7—Decoration 7—Decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. Is notified.

  During the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 438 (f) to FIG. 439 (e), the board lamps 224a and 224b are lit or blinked by normal lighting control according to a predetermined performance procedure. .

  FIG. 439 (f) shows a state in which an effect of notifying that a big hit has been won is being performed. A big hit effect is started in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a big hit effect in which all the lamps are lit at the maximum brightness is executed in the board lamp 224a and the board lamp 224b.

  Next, a jackpot game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 3 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 440 (a) to FIG. 440 (e) show the jackpot start effects in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in this order in time series. 440 (a) to 440 (e) schematically show the state notification lamp 222 in addition to the configuration shown in FIG. 435 and the like. FIG. 440 (a) to FIG. 440 (d) show an example of the jackpot start effect that is performed until 1R (first round) of the jackpot game is started after winning the jackpot as a result of the special figure variable game. . Although illustration is omitted, prior to the start of the big hit start effect, processing for right-handed instruction is executed.

  When the main control unit 300 determines that the result of the special figure variable game is a big hit, after the special figure variable game is finished, the main control unit 300 controls the drive circuit 330 to include the right-handed lamp and the big hit medium lamp among the state notification lamps 222. Is turned on, and the non-electric support lamp and the electric support lamp are turned off. Next, the information of the state notification lamp 222 is included in the jackpot start command and sent to the first sub-control unit 400.

  The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the command from the main control unit 300 is an image simulating the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 with respect to the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the first sub-control unit main process. To display an image showing a state where the player's hand is turning the ball launch handle 134 to the right, an arrow indicating that the game ball should fly rightward, and a character string “right-handed” The control process is performed.

  Further, in the first sub control unit main process, the first sub control unit 400 performs control to sequentially change the light emission luminance of the ten circular lamps of the panel lamp 224a from the upper side to the lower side. For example, the light emission brightness of the first and second circular lamps from the top is made higher than the brightness of the remaining circular lamps, and then the light emission brightness of the third to fifth circular lamps is made higher than the brightness of the remaining circular lamps. Then, the luminance of the sixth to eighth circular lamps is made higher than the luminance of the remaining circular lamps, and then the luminance of the ninth and tenth circular lamps is set to the luminance of the remaining circular lamps. Control is performed so as to be higher than the luminance. Further, in the first sub-control unit main process, the first sub-control unit 400 performs control to sequentially change the light emission luminance of the four petal lamps of the panel lamp 224b from the upper side to the lower side.

  When the above processing is completed, gradation control is performed so that a group of circular lamps sequentially move from the upper side to the lower side by the panel lamp 224a during the big hit start effect shown in FIGS. 440 (a) to (d). The right-handed notification is performed so that the light is visually recognized so as to flow down along the right-handed direction. In addition, the board lamp 224b provides a right-handed notification that allows the petal to be visually recognized so as to flow down along the right-handed direction. Further, a right-handed instruction is also notified in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. On the other hand, the right-handed lamp is lit and the right-handed notification is executed in the status display R 222 under the control of the main control unit 300.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 are provided as notification means capable of reporting right-handed information as game information relating to the game, and the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit are provided. With the control of 400, for the right-handed information, the lighting state of the state display lamp 222, the display mode in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lighting mode of the panel lamps 224a and 224b are totaled in four places. Right-handed notification can be executed. According to the present embodiment, it is possible to notify three or more locations with respect to one piece of information relating to a game, so that the interest of the game may be improved. Moreover, expectation and a sense of superiority may be given to a player by performing a plurality of notifications for one game information. Note that the notification means may be one effect means or a plurality of effect means.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, for example, the state display lamp 222, the panel lamps 224a and 224b, and the decorative symbol display device 208 are provided as a plurality of effect means capable of executing at least effects related to the game, and a plurality of effect means are provided. For example, it is possible to perform notification regarding right-handed information at three or more locations by using a combination of the decorative symbol display device 208, the board surface lamp 224, and the status display lamp 222. Thus, there are cases where the notification can be made conspicuous by notifying using a plurality of effect means.

  Further, in this embodiment, the main control unit 300 as a main control means capable of executing at least a main control unit timer interrupt process which is a control process related to a game, for example, a big hit start command sent from the main control unit 300, etc. And a first sub-control unit 400 as sub-control means capable of executing at least a first sub-control unit main process that is a control process related to a game. Then, the state display lamp 222 as at least one of the plurality of presentation means is controlled by the main control unit 300. As described above, according to the present embodiment, the state display lamp 222 controlled by the main control unit 300 and having high reliability of right-handed information is used as one of the plurality of effects.

  Further, in this embodiment, at least two of the right-handed notifications executed at three or more locations of the status display lamp 222, the panel lamps 224a and 224b, and the decorative symbol display device 208 are turned on by the panel lamps 224a and 224b. The right-hand notification by is performed for the same period. According to the present embodiment, there is a case where the interest of the game is improved by executing the effect by at least two notifications during the same period.

  In the present embodiment, one of the plurality of effect means is a decorative symbol display device 208 as an image display means, and the decorative symbol display device 208 can execute, for example, right-handed notification as at least one notification. According to the present embodiment, it may be possible to perform notification at a portion where the player's line of sight is most easily accessible.

  FIG. 440 (e) shows a state in which the first round of jackpot game has started. When the big hit game is started, three or more right-handed notifications by a plurality of production means are finished, and the first round big hit production is started. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example, a display of notifying that the round is 1R is performed together with an effect in which the face of a young man wearing a school cap is displayed. In addition, “right-handed” display of a right-handed instruction is also performed. The panel lamp 224 performs a lighting operation based on the big hit effect. In addition, a state where there is one hold on the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 after winning the special figure 2 starting port 232 by right-handed is shown.

  Next, a jackpot game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 4 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 441 (a) shows an effect example in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 when a ball, that is, an error occurs during the big hit game. If a ball, that is, an error occurs during the big hit game, the effect display area 208d displays “Ball, that is, call an error clerk” to notify the ball, that is, the error. Even in this case, the “right-handed” display of the right-handed instruction is continued in the effect display area 208d.

  As described above, in this embodiment, for example, in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 as an at least part of the plurality of effect means, error notification can be executed when a ball, that is, an error occurs. Even when error notification is performed, for example, a right-handed instruction can be continued as notification of at least one game information. According to the present embodiment, even if an error notification is made, there is a case where the right-handed instruction notification information remains, so that a player can be provided with a sense of security. The panel lamps 224a and 224b are lit in an error notification light emission mode corresponding to the error.

  FIG. 441 (b) to FIG. 441 (f) show, in this order, effects using the chance button 136 in the big hit game with the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In the present embodiment, a chance button 136 as an operation means that can be operated by the player and a decorative symbol display device 208 as an image display means capable of displaying an image are provided, and an effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is An operation request image that prompts the user to press the chance button 136 can be displayed. The effect display area 208d can display a plurality of operation request images for the chance button 136, and can execute an effect corresponding to the player's multiple operations on the chance button 136.

  FIG. 441 (b) illustrates an image in the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the start of the effect using the chance button 136. In the effect display area 208d, the number of rounds (= 8), a right-handed instruction image, and the face of the youth wearing a school cap are displayed, and a character string image of “It is probable if ○ is aligned” is displayed. ing.

  Next, FIG. 441 (c) shows a state in which an operation request image that prompts the user to press the chance button 136 is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 as a big hit effect. A chance button 136 is schematically shown in the lower right of the figure.

  Three operation request images are arranged in the horizontal direction. The display mode of the left and middle operation request images is “normal” shown in FIG. 426 (a), and the display mode of the right operation request image is “vibration + rotation” shown in FIG. 426 (c). Under each operation request image, an effective period image indicating an operation effective period for accepting pressing (operation) of the chance button 136 is displayed. Further, below each operation request image, an area for displaying a result of pressing the chance button 136 by the player is provided, and a downward arrow is displayed before the result is displayed.

  In the state shown in FIG. 441 (c), the button mode of the chance button 136 when the operation request image prompting the user to press the chance button 136 is displayed is “normal” shown in FIG. 427 (a).

  FIG. 441 (d) shows a state in which the player presses the chance button 136 once, the operation request image on the left side disappears, and a “◯” image is displayed below the operation request image. As described above, in this embodiment, every time the player presses the chance button 136, the operation request image disappears in order from the left. The validity period images of the middle and right operation request images both indicate that some time has passed.

  In the state shown in FIG. 441 (e), the button mode of the chance button 136 when the operation request image prompting the user to press the chance button 136 is displayed is “normal”. Further, the player further presses the chance button 136, the middle operation request image disappears, and a “◯” image is displayed below the middle operation request image. The effective period image of the operation request image on the right indicates that the operation effective period has further passed.

  In the state shown in FIG. 441 (f), the button mode of the chance button 136 when the operation request image prompting the user to press the chance button 136 is displayed is “vibration + rotation”. That is, the button mode changes according to the display mode of the operation request image. As described above, the chance button 136 can operate in a manner in which the operation request image is displayed. Since the chance button 136 can operate in the same manner as the mode indicated by the operation request image, the player may be notified of the operation of the chance button 136 in some cases. Further, the player further presses the chance button 136, the right operation request image disappears, and “◯” is displayed below it. Further, a character string “probability!” Is displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d.

  According to the present embodiment, since a plurality of image displays for prompting operation can be simultaneously executed with respect to one operation means, there are cases where the interest of the game can be improved. In some cases, the player can understand that it is necessary to perform an operation at least several times. Further, there are cases where the interest of the game is improved by allowing the player to perform a plurality of operations. In addition, the number of times to be pressed may be easy to understand.

  In the above embodiment, the operation period display image indicating one or a plurality of operation effective periods for the operation of the operation means by the player is such that the bar-shaped portion is gradually shortened to indicate the passage of time. Instead, for example, a countdown of numbers may be displayed.

  In the above embodiment, a valid period display image is provided for each of the plurality of operation request images. By doing so, the effective period for each operation may be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. On the other hand, in order to avoid complicated display, it is of course possible to display a smaller number (for example, one) of effective periods for a plurality of operation request images.

  In the above embodiment, the operation effective period is common to the operation of the chance button 136 a plurality of times, and one effective period display image can be displayed for a plurality of operation request images. By doing so, it may be possible to easily notify that the effective period is common for a plurality of operations of the chance button 136.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the display mode of the third operation request image on the right side among the plurality of operation request images is “vibration + rotation”, and the display mode of the operation request image on the other left side or the middle is “normal”. To be different. By doing so, the display mode of the operation request image may function as a predetermined notice. In this example, the display mode of the third operation request image on the right side functions as a notice of probability change.

  Further, in the above embodiment, one operation request image disappears in response to one operation of the chance button 136. By doing so, there are cases where the remaining number of operations to be operated by the player can be easily notified. Moreover, it may be easy to understand whether or not the operation of the operation means is effective.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the operation request image having a different display mode corresponds to the last operation among the plurality of operations of the chance button 136. In this way, a different display mode may function as a notice. And it may contribute to making a player perform operation of the required number of times positively by making operation corresponding to a different display mode last in a plurality of times.

  It should be noted that when the valid period of the operation request image expires, a predetermined effect may be automatically executed without pressing the chance button 136.

  Next, a jackpot game in the pachinko machine 100 according to a modification of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 442 (a) shows an example in which, when the big hit game is 7 consecutive villas or more, the game information is notified at 3 locations that the 7 consecutive villas or more.

  In FIG. 442 (a), a special piece of music for notifying that the speaker 120 is 7 consecutive villas or more is output from the speaker 120, and in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a notification is made with the character string “8 consecutive villas!”. Is displayed, and the surface lamp 224b is turned on in a special lighting mode for notifying that it is 7 consecutive villas or more, and it is notified that the current big hit game is 7 consecutive villas or more in a total of three locations. . According to the present embodiment, since it is possible to report at three or more locations for being 7 consecutive resorts or more which is one piece of information relating to the game, there are cases where the interest of the game can be improved. Moreover, expectation and a sense of superiority may be given to a player by performing a plurality of notifications for one game information. In the effect display area 208d, the current number of consecutive resorts is displayed as a number, but the speaker 120, the panel lamp 224, etc. execute the same effect regardless of the number of consecutive resorts in seven consecutive resorts or more.

  FIGS. 442 (b) to (d) show modified examples of effects using an operation request image that prompts the user to press the chance button 136 shown in FIGS. 441 (c) to (f). In the example shown in FIGS. 441 (c) to (f), every time the player presses the chance button 136, the operation request images disappear in the order of left side, middle side, and right side. However, after the chance button 136 is pressed three times, the three operation request images disappear at the same time.

  FIG. 442 (b) shows the same state as FIG. 441 (c). FIG. 442 (c) shows a state in which the player has pressed the chance button 136 three times, and images of “◯” are displayed below the operation request images on the left, middle and right sides, respectively. FIG. 442 (d) shows a state in which three operation request images have disappeared simultaneously after the player has pressed the chance button 136 three times.

  Also according to this modification, a plurality of image displays for prompting operation can be simultaneously executed for one operation means, so that the interest of the game may be improved. In some cases, the player can understand that it is necessary to perform an operation at least several times. Further, there are cases where the interest of the game is improved by allowing the player to perform a plurality of operations. In addition, the number of times to be pressed may be easy to understand.

  Next, a jackpot game in the pachinko machine 100 according to a modification of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 443 (a) shows a modification of the effect using the operation request image that prompts the user to press the chance button 136. Although the character string “Press 5 times or more!” Is displayed in the effect display area 208d, only two operation request images are displayed. Also, the validity period is not displayed. In this way, the number of times the chance button 136 is pressed and the number of operation request images do not have to match. As in this example, the player may be able to recognize that multiple operations are necessary.

  FIG. 443 (b) shows a case where the display mode of the operation request image is “vibration + rotation” and the button mode of the chance button 136 is “vibration”. Thus, the display mode of the operation request image may be more flashy than the button mode of the chance button 136. FIG. 443 (c) shows a case where the display mode of the operation request image is “normal” and the button mode of the chance button 136 is “vibration”. As described above, the display mode of the operation request image may be more plain than the button mode of the chance button 136.

  FIG. 443 (d) shows a case where the display mode of the operation request image is “decay button display (vibration + rotation)” and the button mode of the chance button 136 is “vibration + rotation”. In this “display mode / button mode”, the operation request image is also included in a display mode different from the button mode of the chance button 136 during display of the operation request image.

  Next, a jackpot game in the pachinko machine 100 according to a modification of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 444 (a) shows a state where one common effective period display image is used for a plurality of operation request images. By doing so, it may be possible to easily notify that the effective period is common for a plurality of operations of the chance button 136. Thus, the effective period display need not be the same as the number of operation requests. For example, two effective period display images may be displayed for three operation requests. By doing so, the number of effective period displays may be set in accordance with the display area of the image display means, which contributes to the enhancement of interest in the production.

  FIG. 444 (b) shows a case where a plurality of operation request images have the same display mode. Of course, such a production may be used. FIG. 444 (c) shows a case where the pachinko machine 100 has a sub liquid crystal display device 209 in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208. The sub liquid crystal display device 209 displays “2” indicating the number of reservations. In this way, the number of holdings may be notified at three locations: the special figure 1 holding lamp by the main control, the decorative symbol display device 208 by the sub control, and the sub liquid crystal display device 209.

  Next, an effect in the pachinko machine 100 according to a modification of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described embodiment, in the plurality of operation request images, the display mode of the last operation request image is different from that of the operation request image that disappears before that. Of course, as shown in a), the display mode of the operation request image other than the last operation request image may be different from the display mode of the other operation request images. In FIG. 445 (a), the second operation request image is displayed in a display mode different from other operation request images.

  FIGS. 445 (b) to 445 (d) show a special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to a modification of the present embodiment. FIGS. 436 (d) to (f) of the above embodiment show an example in which one operation request image is displayed and a press of the chance button 136 is requested in the symbol variation game, but FIG. 445 (c) shows an example. As shown, during the special figure variation game, a plurality of operation request images may be displayed to produce an effect requesting a plurality of presses of the chance button 136.

  For example, 10 seconds is set as the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the operation request image as at least a part of the operation valid period, for example, in the first 5 seconds. The operation request image includes, as an effective period image indicating information related to the operation effective period, for example, a display in which the bar-like portion is shortened with time, and the effective period images of the left and middle operation request images are As shown in FIG. 445 (c), for example, the bar-shaped part is displayed in blue as the first effective period image, and the effective period image of the left operation request image is, for example, the bar-shaped part as the second effective period image. It is displayed in red, and the first and second effective period images can be displayed when the same operation effective period is reached, the first operation request image includes the first effective period image, A second operation requested image may be to include a second validity period image. By doing so, the effective period image may be able to function as a notice in some cases.

  Next, a special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to a modification of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present modification includes a direction key 137 as an operation means in addition to the chance button 136. The direction key 137 is used when a desired option is selected in the selection effect displayed in the effect display area 208d. 446 (a) to 446 (c) according to the modification correspond to FIGS. 436 (d) to (f) of the above-described embodiment. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 446 (b), not only the chance button 136 but also the direction key 137 can be used as the operation means. In this example, a plurality of effect buttons are provided, and even when a direction key 137 different from the chance button 136 indicated by the operation request image is operated, the operation is effective, and the display effect is displayed as shown in FIG. 446 (c). Executed. In this case, the display effect of “Character A” is executed when the chance button 136 is pressed, and the display of “Character C” is displayed when the direction key 137 is operated, depending on the type of the operated effect button. The display effect may be changed, the lottery ratio may be changed, or the display effect itself may be different.

  As shown in FIG. 446 (d), when the direction key 137 is provided in addition to the chance button 136 as the operation means, an effect in which the chance button 136 and the direction key 137 are arranged in parallel is also used for the operation request image. May be.

  Next, an effect in the pachinko machine 100 according to a modification of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 447 (a) shows a right-handed instruction image displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. FIG. 447 (b) shows a simplified image of the right-handed instruction image shown in FIG. 446 (a). The horizontally long rectangular frame portion indicating the variable winning opening in the simplified image is displayed in a manner different from the display manner of the variable winning opening 234 shown in the right-handed instruction image of FIG. 447 (a).

Next, a characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 405 to 447 again.
(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment

  A game provided with notifying means (for example, a notifying control mechanism for notifying using one or a plurality of effect means) capable of notifying game information related to the game (for example, information on the number of holds, right-handed information). A stand,

  The notifying means notifies the game information of the same type at three or more locations (for example, when the game information is the number of reservations, in addition to the notification of the number of reservations by the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, The number of reservations is notified at a total of three locations: the symbol display device 208 and the panel lamps 224a and 224b, the notification of the number of reservations by the sub liquid crystal display device 209, and the three in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is possible to execute at least notification of the number of holdings at a location or a combination thereof, etc.).

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, it is possible to notify three or more locations with respect to one piece of information relating to a game, so that the interest of the game may be improved. Moreover, expectation and a sense of superiority may be given to a player by performing a plurality of notifications for one game information.

Note that the notification means may be one effect means or a plurality of effect means.
(2) The pachinko machine 100,

  A plurality of production means (for example, special figure 1 holding lamp 218, board lamps 224a and 224b, decorative design display device 208, sub liquid crystal display device 209) capable of at least producing an effect related to the game,

  The notification means can execute notification of the same type of game information at the three or more locations using the plurality of effect means (for example, a combination of a decorative symbol display device 208, a board lamp, and a special figure holding lamp). It is characterized by being.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, there are cases where the notification can be made conspicuous by notifying using a plurality of rendering means.
(3) The pachinko machine 100,

  Main control means (for example, main control unit 300) capable of executing at least control relating to the progress of the game (for example, main control unit timer interrupt processing);

  Sub-control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of executing at least control (for example, the first sub-control unit main process) relating to the effect of the game,

  At least one of the plurality of presentation means (for example, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218) is controlled by the main control means.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, there is a case where the information of the rendering means (notification means) controlled by the main control means is highly reliable.
(4) The pachinko machine 100,

  The notification means notifies the same type of game information executed at the three or more locations (for example, notification of the number of holds by the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the board surface lamp 224a, and the decorative symbol display device 208, or 1 is a notification of at least two of the hold lamp 218, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the sub liquid crystal display device 209, etc. (for example, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are on hold) Notification, the notification of the number of reservations by the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 and the panel lamp 224a, or the notification of the number of reservations at two places in the decorative symbol display device 208, etc., for the same period (for example, after the increase in the number of holdings) (A period until the number decreases, a prefetch notification period).

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the entertainment of the game may be improved by executing at least two notification effects during the same period.
(5) The pachinko machine 100,

  At least one effect means of the plurality of effect means is an image display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208).

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, it may be possible to perform notification at a portion where the player's eyes are most easily accessible.
(6) The pachinko machine 100,

  It is provided with a symbol display means capable of executing at least symbol variation display, and the game information of the same type is information on the number of suspensions relating to execution of the symbol variation display.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the symbol variation display is an important effect that informs whether or not a big hit that is advantageous to the player is given. In some cases, it can be reported to the person in a clear manner.
(7) The pachinko machine 100,

At least one notification among the notifications of the number of holding times can be notified as a pre-reading notice. According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, there is a case where reliable notification can be executed while increasing the expectation for the big hit.
(8) The pachinko machine 100,

  At least one effect means of the plurality of effect means is a first effect means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),

  At least one rendering means among the plurality of rendering means is a second rendering means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),

  The notification means is capable of at least executing the error notification using the first rendering means when an error (for example, a ball or an error) occurs,

  The notification means is capable of continuing notification of the same type of game information (for example, a right-handed instruction) using the second effect means even when the error occurs. And

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, even if an error notification is performed, the notification information remains, so that a player may be provided with a sense of security.
(9) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment
A gaming machine comprising a plurality of notification means capable of at least executing notification of game information,

  At least one notifying means among the plurality of notifying means is a first notifying means (for example, special figure 1 holding lamp 218),

  At least one notification means of the plurality of notification means is a second notification means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),

  At least one notification means of the plurality of notification means is a third notification means (for example, a panel lamp 224a),

  The game information is information including at least information related to the game (for example, information on the number of holds),

  The first notifying means can execute at least notification relating to first game information (for example, information on the number of holds) in a first period (for example, one operation effective period among a plurality of operation effective periods). Is,

  The second notification means is capable of executing at least notification regarding the first game information in a second period (for example, one operation effective period among a plurality of operation effective periods),

The third notification means is capable of executing at least notification regarding the first game information in a third period (for example, one operation effective period among a plurality of operation effective periods),
The first period and the second period are periods in which at least a part overlaps,
The first period and the third period are periods in which at least a part overlaps,
The second period and the third period are periods in which at least a part overlaps,
It is characterized by that.
(10) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is

An operation means (for example, a chance button 136) provided at least at a position where the player can operate; an image display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of displaying at least an image;
Production means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing at least production,
A game machine equipped with
The game machine is a pachinko machine,

  The image display means is capable of displaying at least a first image (for example, an operation request image),

  The first image is an image that can be displayed during at least a part of the operation effective period of the operation means;

The effect means is capable of executing at least the effect (for example, an effect of displaying a predetermined image (◯, character, etc.) for each operation) according to the number of times the operation means is operated.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, a plurality of image displays that prompt an operation can be simultaneously executed with respect to one operation means, so that the interest of the game may be improved. In some cases, the player can understand that it is necessary to perform an operation at least several times. Further, there are cases where the interest of the game is improved by allowing the player to perform a plurality of operations. In addition, the number of times to be pressed may be easy to understand.
(11) The pachinko machine 100,

  The image display means is capable of displaying at least a second image (for example, an effective period display image),

  The second image is an image including at least an image indicating an operation effective period of the operation means (for example, a display in which a bar is shortened, a countdown of numbers, etc.)

The image display means is capable of displaying at least one or a plurality of the second images when a plurality of the first images are displayed.
It is characterized by that.
(12) The pachinko machine 100,

The image display means is capable of displaying one second image with respect to one first image.
A game stand characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, it may be possible to easily notify the player of the effective period for each operation.
(13) The pachinko machine 100,

  The operation effective period is a period that can be set at least as a common effective period for a plurality of operations of the operation means,

  The image display means is capable of displaying one second image when a plurality of first images (for example, a display prompting a plurality of chance buttons to be pressed) are displayed. Features.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, it may be possible to easily notify that the effective period is common for a plurality of operations of the operation means.
(14) The pachinko machine 100,

The image display means is capable of displaying one first image in response to a single operation request from the operation means.
(15) The pachinko machine 100,

  The image display means can erase the first image in response to one operation of the operation means.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, there are cases where the remaining number of operations to be operated by the player can be easily notified. Moreover, it may be easy to understand whether or not the operation of the operation means is effective.
(16) The pachinko machine 100,

  The image display means displays at least one display mode (for example, the chance button vibrates) among the plurality of the first images (for example, a display that prompts the user to press the chance button a plurality of times). It is characterized in that it can be displayed at least in a display mode different from the display mode of the image (for example, the chance button does not vibrate).

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the display mode of the operation request image may function as a notice.
(17) The pachinko machine 100,

  The first image displayed in the different display mode is an image corresponding to the last operation among the operations of the operation means.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, a display mode different from others may function as a notice. And it may contribute to making a player perform operation of the required number of times positively by making operation corresponding to a different display mode last in a plurality of times.
(18) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment

  Operation means (for example, a chance button 136) provided at least at a position where the player can operate;

Image display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of displaying at least an image, and effect means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of executing an effect in response to the operation means being operated. ,
A game machine equipped with

  The operation means is at least capable of taking a first state (for example, a button mode in which the chance button 136 is neither vibrating nor rotating),

  The operation means is at least capable of taking a second state (for example, a display mode in which the chance button 136 vibrates and rotates),

  The first state and the second state are states in which at least a part of the state of the operation means is different,

  The image display means is capable of displaying at least a first image (for example, an operation request image requesting operation of the operation means),

  The first image is an image that can be displayed during at least a part of a period during which the operation means can be operated (for example, an operation request period);

  The first image is an image including at least an image capable of suggesting that the operation unit is in the first state (for example, the same display mode as the button mode in the first state),

  The image display means is capable of displaying at least a second image (for example, an operation request image for requesting an operation of the operation means),

  The second image is an image that can be displayed during at least a part of a period in which the operation means can be operated,

  The second image is an image including at least an image that can suggest that the operation means is in the second state (for example, the same display mode as the button mode in the second state),

  The image display means is when the first condition (for example, one lottery result in the notice lottery 4 in step S1141 of the normal notice lottery process shown in FIG. 434) is established in the first state with the operation means. Is capable of displaying at least the first image,

The image display means is when the second condition (for example, another lottery result in the notice lottery 4 in step S1141 of the normal notice lottery process shown in FIG. 434) is established in the first state with the operation means. Is capable of displaying at least the second image.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, an operation request image that is different from the appearance is displayed on the rendering means, so that the interest of the game may be improved. In some cases, attention may be paid to the production means. In some cases, the operation request image can function as a notice or notification. Further, even when the image display is simplified, necessary information may be transmitted to the player.
(19) The pachinko machine 100,

The image display means can display at least the operation request image (for example, an image of the chance button 136) in the same mode as the mode of the operating means (for example, a button mode in which the chance button 136 does not vibrate or rotate). It is characterized by being.
further,
The production means is capable of executing at least a plurality of types of production,

  At least one of the plurality of types of display effects is a first effect (for example, “character A” display with an effect button),

  At least one of the multiple types of effects is a second effect (for example, “Character C” display with an effect button),

  The case where the second effect is executed rather than the first effect is likely to lead to a big hit (for example, the reliability of the big win is high),

  When the production means executes the second production, the second condition is more easily established than the first condition.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, there may be a case where it can function as a notice as to whether or not the second performance with high reliability of the big hit is executed. As a result, the operation request image itself may function as a notice in some cases.

  In the first state, the button mode of the operation means may be relatively plain compared to the display mode (for example, the display mode is vibration or rotation and the button mode is not vibration or rotation). In this case, if the button mode is plain, the so-called law breaking may become hot. That is, the law breaks up more hotly when the button mode is plain and the display mode is flashy than when the button mode is plain and the display mode is plain.

Further, in the first state, the button mode of the operation means may be relatively flashy compared to the display mode (for example, the button mode has vibration and rotation, and the display mode has no vibration and rotation). In this case, if the button form is flashy, the so-called law breaking may become hot. That is, the law breaks up more hotly when the button mode is flashy and the display mode is plain than when the button mode is flashy and the display mode is flashy. Alternatively, when the button mode is flashy and the display mode is flashy, the state of breaking the law may be hotter when the button mode is flashy and the display mode is plain.
(20) The pachinko machine 100,

It further includes an operation means (for example, a direction key 137) different from the operation means (for example, the chance button 136),
The another operation means is at least operable by a player,

  The effect means is capable of executing the effect even when the other operation means is operated.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, there are cases where the effect buttons can be used properly according to the player's preference.
(21) The pachinko machine 100,

  The image display means is capable of displaying at least a third image indicating a period during which the operation means can be operated (for example, an effective period image indicating an operation effective period is a blue bar display),

  The image display means is capable of displaying at least a fourth image indicating a period during which the operation means can be operated (for example, an effective period image indicating an operation effective period is displayed in a red bar),

  The third image is an image that can be displayed at least in correspondence with the first image,

The fourth image is an image that can be displayed at least in correspondence with the second image,
The third image and the fourth image are different images.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the validity period image may sometimes function as a notice.
(22) The pachinko machine 100,

  The image display means is capable of displaying at least the first image when a period during which the operation means can be operated is the first period.

  The image display means can display at least the second image when a period during which the operation means can be operated is the first period.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, since the operation means can operate in a manner similar to the aspect indicated by the operation request image, the player may be informed of the operation of the rendering means. .

Note that the first condition and the second condition can be established when the operation effective period of the operation means is the same.
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be made.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the above embodiment is a game machine installed in an island facility, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the pachinko machine 100 is an enclosed game machine, the same effect as the pachinko machine 100 according to the above embodiment can be obtained.

  In the example of the above embodiment, all notifications executed at three or more locations are started at substantially the same timing, but notifications executed at three or more locations may be started at different timings. Further, any two notifications may be started at substantially the same timing, while the remaining notifications may be started at different timings.

  In the example of the above embodiment, all notifications executed at three or more locations are terminated at substantially the same timing, but all notifications performed at three or more locations may be terminated at different timings. Further, any two notifications may end at substantially the same timing, while the remaining notifications may end at different timings.

  In the example of the above embodiment, notification using a plurality of presentation means is described, but notification may be made at three or more locations in one presentation means. In addition, during normal times, notification may be performed at two locations for predetermined game information, and notification may be performed at three or more locations only when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  Further, the number of notifications may be reduced at a predetermined trigger of symbol variation display. The production means controlled by at least the main control means at the establishment of a predetermined opportunity may continue the notification. In addition, at least one effect unit (for example, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 or the special figure 2 holding lamp 220) may always notify. Further, any of the plurality of hold notifications controlled by the sub-control may be able to execute a prefetch notice.

  In addition, a modified example when the predetermined game information is on hold will be described below. As a combination of notifications executed at three or more locations when the game information is on hold, for example, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 or the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 by the main control, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the board lamp 224 are used. A combination of these may be used. Also, a special figure 1 holding lamp 218 or a special figure 2 holding lamp 220 and a combination of two places in the decorative symbol display device 208, or a special figure 1 holding lamp 218 or a special symbol 2 holding lamp 220 and a decorative symbol display device. 208 and the sub liquid crystal display device 209 can be combined.

  In addition, the pre-reading notice may be performed by holding display on various lamps, the decorative symbol display device 208, or the sub liquid crystal display device 209 including the panel lamp 224. For example, the lamp may perform an effect as a function different from the pre-reading notice in a predetermined period (for example, a symbol variation display for determining the special reach). It is also possible to have a hold display function when a predetermined condition is established while performing an effect as a decoration function at normal times.

  Further, one notification means may not correspond to notify one hold number. Three or more places may be displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a configuration in which the number of notifications is reduced during notification at three or more locations (for example, at the start of special reach) (only notification by main control is left and notification by sub-control is turned off) may be employed.

  Further, at least one notification means (for example, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 by the main control) indicates accurate number-of-holds information, and other effect means may be used for other effects (for example, pre-reading notice or pseudo hold). Good.

  Indirect notification is also included in the notification of this embodiment. For example, in the case where a notice effect or a decorative symbol variation display that appears only when the hold is 3 or higher is performed, it is included as a notification of “hold 3 or higher”.

  Further, a modified example in the case where the predetermined game information is a continuous big hit (so-called consecutive resort) will be described below. As a combination of notifications executed at three or more locations when the game information is consecutive resort information, for example, seven consecutive resort displays or special background displays on the decorative symbol display device 208 during big hits or during electric support, or 7 Combinations such as the board lamp 224 emitting rainbow light or a special musical piece or the like flowing from the speaker 120 are possible above the Renso.

  It is not always necessary that the notification of the retreat information is completely the same for all the production means. The notification at 7 consecutive villas and the notification at 7 consecutive villas or more may be the same. In some cases, it is possible to prevent the notification from becoming too much for the player. In addition, as an example of indirect notification, for example, when about 10000 display is performed with a specification that can acquire about 2000 game balls in one big hit, it is included as notification of 5 consecutive resorts. Also good.

  Further, a modified example in the case where the predetermined game information is a right-handed instruction will be described below. As a combination of notifications executed at three or more locations when the game information is a right-handed instruction, for example, the right-handed lamp of the state notification lamp 222 by the main control, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the light emission gradation control of the panel lamp 224 Combinations such as voice output of a right-handed instruction from the speaker 120 are possible.

  The notification once terminated may be executed again when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, in order to urge the player to make a right strike when the player makes a left turn while the right notification lamp of the state notification lamp 222 by the main control is turned on and notification is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 by the sub control. Also included are those that perform notification sound by the speaker 120, notification lighting by the panel lamp 224, and the like.

  In the above embodiment, notifications are mainly given at three locations, but notifications at four or more locations may be used.

  The content of the notification may be a configuration in which not only notification for only predetermined game information but also notification regarding predetermined game information is included and notification regarding other game information is performed. For example, the configuration may be such that game information such as probability variation is notified by the light emission color of the right-hand-notified board lamp 224. Further, as long as the symbol variation display is being performed, a configuration in which notification regarding predetermined game information functions as a pre-reading notice or a jackpot notice may be used. By doing so, there is a case where diversity can be provided as well as a function as a simple notification.

  The plurality of presentation means may all be controlled by the main control means, or all may be controlled by the sub-control means. Moreover, the structure controlled by several sub-control means may be sufficient. If controlled by the main control means, the certainty of notification is maintained, and if controlled by the sub-control means, there is an effect of reducing the burden on the main control means.

  The configuration may be such that at least one notification is executed in a different period from the other. The configuration may be such that at least one notification is executed based on conditions different from other notification execution conditions. Moreover, the structure provided with two or more notification execution conditions may be sufficient. By doing so, it may be possible to effectively notify the establishment of different conditions such as right-handed alerting.

  The start time and end time of the plurality of notifications may all be the same. Also, only the start times may be the same and the end times may be different, or the start times may be different and the end times may be the same. By doing so, there are cases where the notification can be varied depending on the combination of the start time and the end time of the notification.

  With respect to the notification of the number of start suspensions by the start suspension display, notifications by various combinations are possible. For example, it is possible to perform two notifications on the decorative symbol display device 208 and further combine notifications from the main control means. In the case where a plurality of hold displays are performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, there are cases where a variety of prefetch notices such as hold prefetch can be provided. Also, two or more notifications may be performed on the main control means side.

  Regarding the notification of the number of start holds by the start hold display, there is no need to perform one start hold display for every start hold. For example, the lamp device may be configured to perform one display for one start suspension, and directly notify the number of start suspensions by numbers in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. Diversity may increase by making notifications in different patterns. In some cases, it is possible to execute a combination of notifications that is easy for the player to understand based on the effects related to the game.

  As notification of the predetermined game information, notification related to usual hold may be used. For example, for those that can be opened for a relatively long period of time, or those that have special benefits due to the winning of the usual effects, the entertainment interest of the game may be improved by displaying three or more places on hold.

  In the above embodiment, the operation effective period in the operation of the plurality of operation means is common. In some cases, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that continuous operation of the operation means is necessary. In some cases, the risk of invalidating the operation of the operation means multiple times can be reduced.

  Further, the operation of the operating means may be settable during at least one symbol variation display. In the case of a configuration that is performed by a plurality of symbol variation displays, for example, by performing an operation related to the operation means in association with the pre-reading notice, the player may be expected to span a plurality of variations.

  A plurality of modes of operation means are provided, the operation mode and the operation request image are associated with each other, and the display mode (only) different from the other may display an operation request image different from the association. . The function as a notice may be emphasized.

  A plurality of modes of operation means may be provided, and the operation mode and the operation request image may be associated with each other. Then, one operation request image may be deleted by operating the operation means once or a plurality of times. Further, the operation mode of the operation means can be changed in accordance with the display mode of the operation request image corresponding to the next operation, and may be changed when different from the previous operation mode. By doing so, there are cases where the operation request image can function as an operation mode change notice.

  The operation effective period in the plurality of operation means may not be common, and the operation effective period may be set individually. By doing so, it may be possible to prevent the player from being fooled by prompting the player to operate the operation means a plurality of times while the effective period is set individually. Further, there are cases where the operation of the plurality of operation means can be equally assigned to the effect time (mainly the operation effective period) of the symbol variation display. Therefore, there are cases where the dissatisfaction of the player due to excessive operation effective period may be reduced.

  The above embodiment can also be applied to a game machine having a plurality of operation means. It is sufficient that at least one of the plurality of operation means includes the contents of the above-described embodiment. Moreover, the structure by which the operation request image according to several operation means and an effective period display image are displayed simultaneously may be sufficient.

  Further, the operation effective period may be configured to be performed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. In this way, it may function as a pre-reading notice.

  In the above embodiment, one effective period display image is erased by one operation of the operating means. However, one effective period display image is erased by performing a predetermined number of operations twice or more. It may be configured. Further, the display of all the valid period display images may be continued until the necessary number of operations for operating the operation means are performed. By doing so, for example, it may be possible to emphasize that the plurality of effective period displays prompts an operation by leaving all effective period displays even when the remaining effective period is small.

  The correspondence relationship between the operation mode of the operation means and the operation request image may be partially different. By doing so, breaking the so-called “law breaking (corresponding relationship (law))” may sometimes function as a jackpot confirmation notice or a notice to increase the jackpot expectation.

  Further, the condition as to whether the operation of the operation means is valid can be arbitrarily set. It may be effective when the number of operations is once or a plurality of times, and may be effective (the effect for the operation is executed) by performing lottery and winning every one or a plurality of times. By doing so, the number of operations may be adjusted according to the production time or the like.

  In addition, in the case of having a plurality of operation means, even if the operation request image is common (even if the image display prompts the operation of any operation means), the operation of other operation means is made effective. There may be. By doing so, there may be a case where less data is required due to the common operation request image.

  Further, the operation of the other operation means may be valid or invalid. There may be an effect equivalent to the above-mentioned “breaking law”.

  In the above embodiment, the operation means may be attached to the frame side of the pachinko machine 100. For example, it may be assumed that the design of the production means itself is changed due to a frame design change or the like in the process of developing a game machine. Even when the image display and the aspect of the effect means are different, there are cases where the purpose of notifying the player importantly (pressing the effect button, making a right turn, etc.) can be maintained.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the effect button is set with an operation effective period, and the image display means executes at least a display effect after the effective period ends when the operation means is not operated during the operation effective period. It may be possible. By doing so, a display effect may be performed even when no buttons are operated.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the effect button is set with an operation effective period, and the image display means does not execute the display effect when the operation means is not operated during the operation effective period. Also good.

  Moreover, in the said Example, since the reference | standard is set | placed on the 2nd display effect, when the 2nd display effect is performed, the 2nd operation request image is easy to appear. Further, the operation request image related to the effect button may be displayed during at least a part of the operation effective period of the effect button.

  In the above embodiment, as an example of the case where the operation request image is displayed in a mode different from the mode of the operation means during the display of the operation request image, the color difference of the effect button and the logo accessory, the operation request image is the first There is a display that suggests the position, and a production button and a logo accessory are in the second position.

  The rendering means is operable at least in the first aspect and the second aspect in which a new aspect is added to the first aspect, and the image display means displays the operation request image as the first aspect. When performing display corresponding to the aspect, the rendering means may be at least operable in the second aspect. In this way, when the production means (operation means) is more flashy, it may be possible to notice when the player operates the operation means.

  Alternatively, the rendering means is operable at least in the first aspect and a second aspect in which a new aspect is added to the first aspect, and the image display means displays the operation request image in the first aspect. In the case of performing display corresponding to the second aspect, the rendering means may be at least operable in the first aspect. In this way, if the operation request image is more flashy, the player can increase the expectation by looking at the operation request image first, and can give a sense of incongruity by operating the operation means. There are cases where it can be increased.

  The operation request image may have a pattern of the same mode as well as a mode different from the mode of the rendering means. By doing so, there is a case where it can function as a notification or a notice by properly using the same mode and a different mode. For example, there are cases where it can be used for a notice that a symbol variation display will be a big hit, a pre-read notice, a notice of the number of holds or a villa, etc.

  The operation request image may be performed only in a mode different from the mode of the rendering means, or may be performed only in the same mode, at one opportunity (for example, a button effect performed during symbol variation display). By doing so, the operation request image is associated with each opportunity, so that the player may easily recognize the opportunity.

  Regarding operation request images, at any of a plurality of triggers corresponding to one rendering means (for example, button effects performed before reach during symbol variation display and button effects performed after reach), operation requests in at least different modes Any configuration capable of displaying an image may be used.

  The operation means that can be operated by the player include not only an effect button and an operation button used in a service in which a game table and a mobile site are linked, but also a ball launching handle 134. As an example of this, there is a case where an image display for making a right-handed notification at the start of a big hit or at the start of electric support is performed. The present embodiment also includes such a content that a display in which the ball launch handle 134 is twisted to the right is displayed on the image display means. At this time, as an example of an aspect different from the aspect of the rendering means, there is an image display in which the display of the ball launch handle 134 itself is deformed. In this case, even when the design of the ball launching handle 134 is changed, there is a case where it is possible to reliably perform the most important notification in terms of the game, that is, right-handed notification.

  As an example of the production means, a winning means such as an attacker arranged on the game board may be used. By doing this, there is a case where there is an effect that can cope with a design change.

  In the above embodiment, when two effect buttons are used, the two effect buttons do not need to be effective for all operations of the effect buttons, and both effect buttons are effective only at a predetermined effect. Good. Further, when the first effect button is displayed as the operation request image, whether or not the operation of the second effect button is valid may be notified to the player or may not be notified. . By doing so, the number of effective production buttons may function as a notice. And as an effect when not notifying the player whether or not the second effect button is valid, the player can have an expectation when the display effect is performed by operating the second effect button. The player can select whether or not to operate the second effect button.

  The correspondence relationship between the operation request image and the effective period image is a relationship in which the first effective period image corresponds to the first operation request image and the second effective period image corresponds to the second operation request image. Not necessarily. For example, by changing a part of the combination, the player may feel uncomfortable and may function as a notice.

  Moreover, the structure which changes an operation request image and an effective period image (and its combination) according to conditions, such as a game state, may be sufficient. By doing so, there may be cases where variations in performance can be increased.

  In addition, regarding the button operation of the chance button 136 in each example of the above embodiment, even if the player does not operate the button during the button operation valid period, it is equivalent to the case where the button operation is performed. You may comprise so that an effect can be performed. Hereinafter, this is referred to as an “auto button” and will be described in detail below.

  First, the auto button setting method may be a configuration that can be arbitrarily set by the player, or a configuration that is set according to the gaming state or the like. As an example that a player can arbitrarily set, all players can set by operating other operation means such as a chance button 136 or a direction key 137 or other cross keys during a demonstration performance. Players can set up under certain conditions, such as an original mode that allows players to customize game tables and store game histories for each player on condition that the player enters unique information such as passwords. Possible configurations are listed. The configuration set according to the gaming state is, for example, the presence or absence of the electric support state and the same type of button effect when the same gaming state and effect mode continue for a predetermined period or a predetermined number of times. In some cases, it is possible to reduce the troublesomeness of the operation for continuous operation.

  The notification that the button is an auto button may be always notified by the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub liquid crystal display device 209, or the like, or may be notified only when the auto button is set. Moreover, even if it is the structure which alert | reports when the setting of an auto button is cancelled | released, the structure which does not alert | report at all may be sufficient.

  As for the display during the auto button, the button image and the effective period display may be performed as in the case of the non-auto button, or a part of the image may not be displayed. In some cases, not displaying a part of the image itself may be a notification that the auto button is being operated. In addition, as an example of a configuration in which some images are not displayed, if only the button display is displayed and the effective period display is not performed, it is not noticed that there is an inherent button effect, but an extremely troublesome display effect does not occur. There is a case. Moreover, the structure which does not display at all may be sufficient.

  The operation timing of the auto button may be any timing during the effective period. For example, at the beginning of the effective period, it is possible to perform the effect accompanying the button operation without giving the player anxiety that the effect of the auto button may not be performed. If it is in the middle of the effective period, there is a case where there is no extension before and after the effect due to the button operation and a balance can be achieved. At the end of the validity period, it may lead to improvement of interest by sneaking the player. However, when an effect accompanying button operation appears at the end of the effective period, there is a risk that the appearance will be combined with the case where the effect is forcibly produced due to the expiration of the effective period at the time of the non-auto button. In this case, for example, when applying an auto button, an application according to the reliability is applied, and when the validity period of the non-auto button expires, the effect with the lowest reliability is forced to appear regardless of whether or not the difference is made. It is also possible to put out.

  As an auto button game example, when the auto button is set as described above, all button effects may be set to auto, or some button effects may be set to auto. As an example of partial auto, for example, the pre-reach notice may be auto, non-auto after the reach, or non-auto (only for the player to operate) during the intense heat production. In addition, there are cases where a variety of effects can be given by combining auto and non-auto. For example, an effect in which a button effect is performed with a pre-read hold notice and the hold icon changes in accordance with the button operation may have an effective period set over a plurality of symbol variation displays. During this time, if the button effect is produced with the symbol variation display, the button effect may overlap, and the player may be confused. Therefore, there is a case where it is possible to give diversity to the production while solving the problem by setting one of the button productions to auto. Also, individual settings can be made for each device, for example, only the sub liquid crystal button effects are set to auto.

  As for the auto of button effects requiring a plurality of button operations, a predetermined number of times determined for each effect, the number of times set according to the number of player operations at the time of non-auto buttons, and the like are assumed. In general, the effective period of an effect that requires a plurality of button operations is secured a little longer. For this reason, the parameter display associated with the button effect has a limit (the parameter does not advance any more) when it is determined whether or not it is correct. In such a case, if the number of times of auto is increased, there is a risk of disappointing the player because the parameter display does not proceed even though the effective period remains. Therefore, it may be preferable to perform the automatic operation a predetermined number of times in consideration of the effective period. Further, only a part of the operations such as one of a plurality of operations may be set to auto. In some cases, an auto button function can be used as a configuration for prompting a button operation.

  In addition, when the auto button is set, a command may be sent from the first sub-control unit 400 to the control system of the decorative symbol display device 208, and then the display control on the decorative symbol display device 208 side may be used. The command may be sent at the same timing as the non-auto button.

  Moreover, when an accidental condition is satisfied, an auto button may be used. For example, in the case of an error such as a bottom plate full tank error during a big hit, there are cases where both hands are used by a game ball discharging operation and a game ball firing. In such a case, an automatic button may be automatically used. Even when the auto button is being operated, if the player operates the button before operating the (auto) button, an effect may be performed. In addition, the auto button may be released (non-auto) by a player operating the button during the auto button.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is used as an example of a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine 1000 as shown in FIG.

  The game machine according to the present invention corresponds to each reel shown in FIG. 448, “a plurality of types of symbols 1002 and a plurality of reels 1002 which are rotationally driven, a start lever 1004 for instructing the rotation of the reels. A stop button 1006 for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, lottery means (lottery prize internal lottery) for determining whether or not internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is successful, and a lottery result of the lottery means The combination of symbols displayed by the reel stop control means (reel stop control processing) that performs stop control for stopping the rotation of the reels and the reels stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means corresponds to the winning combination. And determining means (winning determination process) for determining whether or not the symbol combination is predetermined, and when the symbol stop mode is a predetermined winning mode, In addition to payout control means (medal payout process 1008) for performing game medium payout processing for paying out game media to be played, the effect means 1010 for executing effects based on the lottery result of the lottery means, A launching device 1014 that launches a ball into the game area 1012, a winning opening 1016 configured to be able to enter a ball launched from the launching device, a detection means 1018 that detects a ball that has entered the winning opening 1016, A payout means 1020 for paying out a ball when the detection means 1018 detects a ball, a variable display device 1022 for variably displaying a predetermined symbol (identification information), and a shutter 1024 movable to a position for shielding the variable display device 1022 And a movable body 1026 that operates in a predetermined operation mode, and the variable display device 1022 is designed to receive a game ball in the winning opening. And the stopped displayed after varied is also suitable to the slot machine 1000 "is a rendering device 1010, such as to produce a game.

  The game table according to the present invention is shown in FIG. 449 (a). “Insert bills into bill insertion slot 2002, execute lottery based on bet 2004 and start 2006 operation, and display lottery result on lottery result display device 2008. Then, at the time of winning, the number of bonus coins is added to the remaining credit number, and when cashout 2009 is selected, the casino machine 2000 issues a receipt from the receipt issuing machine 2010 with a code corresponding to the remaining credit number. It may be.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5B, the cellular phone 3000 having a storage unit for storing the electronic data for realizing the present invention, and the electronic data for realizing the present invention as shown in FIG. The present invention may be applied to a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing the video data and a home video game machine 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

  More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 in FIG. 5B includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game through a mobile phone line, and acquired data about the game (this book And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  The portable game machine 4000 in FIG. 6C includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired data related to the game (the present invention). And a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The home video game machine 5000 in FIG. 6D includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired data ( And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5E, the present invention may be applied to a data server 6000 that stores electronic data for realizing the present invention. In some cases, the electronic data for realizing the present invention is downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game machine 5000 shown in FIG.

  In addition, a game can be executed by applying the present invention to a game program that simulates the operation of a real machine such as a pachinko machine for a home game machine. In that case, a DVD-ROM, CD-ROM, FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used as a recording medium for recording the game program.

Furthermore, the present invention has been described by taking a pachinko machine and a slot machine as examples of game machines, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be applied to an arrangement ball game machine, a ball ball game machine, a smart ball, and the like.
The above embodiments can be combined with each other.
The game table of the above embodiment is expressed as follows, for example.

(Appendix A1)
A game machine provided with a notification means capable of at least executing notification of game information related to a game,
The informing means is capable of at least informing the game information at three or more locations for the same type of game information.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A2)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix A1,
Provided with a plurality of production means capable of executing at least production related to the game,
The notification means can execute notification of the same type of game information at the three or more locations using the plurality of presentation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A3)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix A2,
Main control means capable of executing at least control relating to the progress of the game;
Sub-control means capable of executing at least control related to the effect of the game,
At least one rendering means among the plurality of rendering means is controlled by the main control means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A4)
A game machine according to appendix A2 or A3,
The notification means is capable of executing at least two notifications of notifications of the same type of game information executed at the three or more locations, including at least the same period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A5)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A2 to A4,
At least one effect means of the plurality of effect means is an image display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A6)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A1 to A5,
A symbol display means capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
The game table according to claim 1, wherein the same type of game information is information on the number of suspensions related to execution of the symbol variation display.

(Appendix A7)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix A6,
Notification of at least one of the notifications of the number of holding times can be notified as a pre-reading notice,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A8)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A2 to A7,
At least one presentation means of the plurality of presentation means is a first presentation means,
At least one rendering means among the plurality of rendering means is a second rendering means,
The notification means is capable of at least executing the error notification using the first rendering means when an error occurs.
The notification means can continue to notify the same type of game information using the second effect means even when the error occurs.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A9)
A gaming machine comprising a plurality of notification means capable of at least executing notification of game information,
At least one notifying means among the plurality of notifying means is a first notifying means,
At least one notifying means among the plurality of notifying means is a second notifying means,
At least one notifying means of the plurality of notifying means is a third notifying means,
The game information is information including at least information related to the game,
The first notification means is capable of executing at least notification regarding the first game information in the first period,
The second notification means is capable of executing at least notification regarding the first game information in the second period,
The third notifying means is capable of executing at least a notification regarding the first game information in a third period,
The first period and the second period are periods in which at least a part overlaps,
The first period and the third period are periods in which at least a part overlaps,
The second period and the third period are periods in which at least a part overlaps,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A10)
Operation means provided at least in a position where the player can operate;
Image display means capable of displaying at least an image;
Production means capable of executing at least production,
A game machine equipped with
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
The image display means is capable of displaying at least a first image,
The image display means is capable of displaying a plurality of the first images,
The first image is an image that can be displayed during at least a part of the operation effective period of the operation means;
The effect means is capable of executing at least the effect according to the number of times the operation means is operated.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A11)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix A10,
The image display means is capable of displaying at least a second image,
The second image is an image including at least an image indicating an operation effective period of the operation means,
The image display means is capable of displaying at least one or a plurality of the second images when a plurality of the first images are displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A12)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix A11,
The image display means is capable of displaying one second image with respect to one first image.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A13)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix A11,
The operation effective period is a period that can be set at least as a common effective period for a plurality of operations of the operation means,
The image display means is capable of displaying one second image when a plurality of the first images are displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A14)
A game machine according to appendices A10 to A13,
The image display means is capable of displaying one first image in response to a single operation request from the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A15)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A10 to A14,
The image display means is capable of erasing the first image for one operation of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A16)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A10 to A15,
The image display means is capable of displaying at least one display mode of the plurality of first images in at least a display mode different from the display mode of the other first images.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A17)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix A16,
The first image displayed in the different display mode is an image corresponding to the last operation among the operations of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A18)
Operation means provided at least in a position where the player can operate;
Image display means capable of displaying at least an image;
Production means capable of executing at least production in response to the operation means being operated,
A game machine equipped with
The operating means is at least capable of taking a first state,
The operating means is at least capable of taking a second state,
The first state and the second state are states in which at least a part of the state of the operation means is different,
The image display means is capable of displaying at least a first image,
The first image is an image that can be displayed during at least a part of a period in which the operation means can be operated,
The first image is an image including at least an image capable of suggesting that the operation unit is in the first state,
The image display means is capable of displaying at least a second image,
The second image is an image that can be displayed during at least a part of a period in which the operation means can be operated,
The second image is an image including at least an image capable of suggesting that the operation means is in the second state,
The image display means can display at least the first image when the operation means is in the first state and the first condition is satisfied,
The image display means is capable of displaying at least the second image when the second condition is established in the first state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A19)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix A18,
The production means is capable of executing at least a plurality of types of production,
At least one of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
At least one of the multiple types of effects is a second effect,
The case where the second effect is executed rather than the first effect is more likely to lead to a big hit,
When the production means performs the second production, the second condition is more easily established than the first condition.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A20)
A gaming table according to appendix A18 or A19,
It further comprises an operation means different from the operation means,
The another operation means is at least operable by a player,
The effect means is capable of executing the effect even when the other operation means is operated.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A21)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A18 to A20,
The image display means is capable of displaying at least a third image indicating a period during which the operation means can be operated,
The image display means is capable of displaying at least a fourth image indicating a period during which the operation means can be operated,
The third image is an image that can be displayed at least in correspondence with the first image,
The fourth image is an image that can be displayed at least in correspondence with the second image,
The third image and the fourth image are different images.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A22)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A18 to A21,
The image display means is capable of displaying at least the first image when a period during which the operation means can be operated is the first period.
The image display means is capable of displaying at least the second image when the period during which the operation means can be operated is the first period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A23)
Operation means provided at least in a position where the player can operate;
Image display means capable of displaying at least an image;
Production means capable of executing at least production,
A game machine equipped with
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
The image display means is capable of displaying at least a first image,
The image display means is capable of displaying a plurality of the first images,
The first image is an image that can be displayed during at least a part of the operation effective period of the operation means;
The effect means is capable of executing at least the effect according to the number of times the operation means is operated.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A24)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix A23,
The image display means is capable of displaying at least a second image,
The second image is an image including at least an image indicating an operation effective period of the operation means,
The image display means is capable of displaying at least one or a plurality of the second images when a plurality of the first images are displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A25)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix A24,
The image display means is capable of displaying one second image with respect to one first image.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A26)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix A24,
The operation effective period is a period that can be set at least as a common effective period for a plurality of operations of the operation means,
The image display means is capable of displaying one second image when a plurality of the first images are displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A27)
A gaming table according to appendices A23 to A26,
The image display means is capable of displaying one first image in response to a single operation request from the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A28)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A23 to A27,
The image display means is capable of erasing the first image for one operation of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A29)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A23 to A28,
The image display means is capable of displaying at least one display mode of the plurality of first images in at least a display mode different from the display mode of the other first images.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A30)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix A29,
The first image displayed in the different display mode is an image corresponding to the last operation among the operations of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A31)
Operation means provided at least in a position where the player can operate;
Image display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of images;
Production means capable of executing at least the first production;
A game machine equipped with
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
At least one of the plurality of types of images is a first image,
At least one of the plurality of types of images is a second image,
The first image includes at least an image suggesting the operation means,
The second image includes at least an image suggesting a period during which the operation of the operation means is effective (hereinafter referred to as “third period”).
The first image can be displayed at least during the first period,
The second image can be displayed at least during the second period,
The first period is a period including at least a part of the third period;
The second period is a period including at least a part of the third period,
The image display means is capable of displaying at least the first image of the first number,
The first number is two or more;
The first effect is an effect that can be executed at least when the number of operations of the operation means in the third period becomes the first number.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A32)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix A31,
The image display means is capable of displaying at least the second image of the second number,
The second number is the same number as the first number.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A33)
A game machine according to appendix A31 or A32,
The image display means is capable of erasing one first image in response to one operation of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A34)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A31 to A33,
The production means is capable of executing at least a second production,
The second effect is an effect that can be executed for each operation of the operation means,
The first number is three;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A35)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A31 to A34,
There is a notice means that can execute the notice,
The first image can be displayed at least in a plurality of modes.
At least one of the plurality of aspects is a first aspect,
At least one of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect,
The second aspect is an aspect different from the first aspect,
The notice means is capable of executing the notice by causing the image display means to display the first image according to the second aspect.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A36)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix A35,
The first image according to the second aspect is an image corresponding to the last operation among the operations of the operation means which is the first number.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A37)
A gaming table according to appendix A35 or A36,
The operating means is at least capable of being in a plurality of states,
At least one of the plurality of states is a first state;
At least one of the plurality of states is a second state;
The first aspect is an aspect that can at least suggest that the operating means is in the first state,
Said 2nd aspect is an aspect which can at least suggest that said operation means will be in said 2nd state,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A38)
Operation means provided at least in a position where the player can operate;
Image display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of images;
Production means capable of executing at least production,
A game machine equipped with
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
At least one of the plurality of types of images is a first image,
At least one of the plurality of types of images is a second image,
The first image includes at least an image suggesting the operation means,
The second image includes at least an image suggesting a period during which the operation by the operation means is effective (hereinafter referred to as “third period”),
The first image can be displayed at least during the first period,
The second image can be displayed at least during the second period,
The first period is a period including at least a part of the third period;
The second period is a period including at least a part of the third period,
The image display means is capable of displaying at least the first image of the first number,
The first number is two or more;
The image display means is capable of displaying at least the second image of the second number,
The second number is one;
The effect is an effect that can be executed at least when the number of operations of the operation means in the third period becomes the first number.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A39)
Operation means provided at least in a position where the player can operate;
Image display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of images;
Production means capable of executing at least multiple types of production,
A game machine equipped with
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
At least one of the plurality of types of images is a first image,
At least one of the plurality of types of images is a second image,
The first image is an image including at least an image suggesting the operation means,
The second image is an image including at least an image suggesting a period (hereinafter referred to as “third period”) in which the reception of the operation of the operation unit is valid
The first image is an image that can be displayed at least during the first period,
The second image is an image that can be displayed at least during the second period,
The first period is a period including at least a part of the third period;
The second period is a period including at least a part of the third period,
The image display means is means capable of displaying at least the first number of the first images,
At least one of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
At least one of the multiple types of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect that can be executed at least when the number of operations accepted by the operation means in the third period becomes the first number,
The second effect is an effect that is executed every time an operation of the operation means is received,
The first number is three;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A40)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix A39,
The image display means is a means capable of displaying at least the second image of the second number,
The second number is three;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A41)
A gaming table according to appendix A39 or A40,
The image display means is means capable of erasing one of the first images in response to a single acceptance of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A42)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A39 to A41,
The image display means is means capable of starting to display at least one of the first images in a fourth period,
The fourth period is a period different from the third period as a period during which the acceptance of the operation of the operation means is valid.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A43)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A39 to A42,
The first image is a button image.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A44)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A39 to A43,
The second image is a gauge image;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A45)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A39 to A44,
The effect means is means including at least the image display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
[Eighth Embodiment]

  Next, a game effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 450 to 474. Note that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 450 to 474 are used only in the description of the eighth embodiment in principle, and even if the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, this embodiment mode is used. In the explanation of FIG. 4, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. First, the configuration shown in each of FIGS. 450 to 474 (excluding FIGS. 469 and 470) will be described.

  In each figure, as shown in FIG. 450 (a), a decorative symbol display device 208, a special figure 1 display device 212, and a special figure 2 display that constitute a part of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. The device 214, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are schematically shown. The special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown below the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special figure 2 display device 214 is shown in FIG. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is shown on the upper side of the special figure 1 display device 212, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 is shown on the upper side of the special figure 2 display device 214. In addition, the extinguished portions of the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are shown in white, and the lighting portions are shown in black. While the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 display device 214 is fluctuating, it is displayed in white in this embodiment, but in reality, the special figure is fluctuating by repeating blinking in a predetermined order. Can be recognized.

  In the present embodiment, a fourth symbol display area is provided on the upper right side in the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208. The left side in the fourth symbol display area is the fourth symbol display area t1 for special figure 1, and the right side is the fourth symbol display area t2 for special figure 2. When the result of the special figure variation game is out of place, an image representing “x” is displayed as the fourth symbol, and when winning, an image representing “A” is displayed. Further, during the execution of the special figure variable game, an image representing “-” is displayed as the fourth symbol.

  On the lower left side in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a special figure 1 hold icon display area is provided. The number of special figure 1 hold icons corresponding to the number of holds is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area. Further, according to the display mode of the special figure 1 hold icon, whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable game related to the hold is appropriate can be notified (pre-reading notice) with a predetermined reliability. In this embodiment, up to four special figure 1 hold icons can be displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area. A plurality of special figure 1 hold icons are arranged in order from left to right in the special figure 1 hold icon display area as the hold order decreases. In this example, only the special figure 1 hold icon display area is displayed, but the special figure 2 hold icon display area may be displayed together.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 450 (b), in the special figure 1 display device 212, the state in which all segments are represented in white indicates that the special figure 1 variable display is being performed. The same applies to the special figure 2 display device 214.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 450 (c), the variation display of each decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c during the execution of the special diagram variable game is represented by a downward arrow.

Note that the special figure variable game shown in each example of the present embodiment is executed by the same control operation as described in the seventh embodiment. In the embodiment of the present embodiment, the effects performed in the special figure variable game will be specifically described, and the control operation will be referred to only when the necessity arises.
Example 1

  First, the special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 450 and 451. FIG. 450 (a) to FIG. 451 (e) show, in this order, the special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In the figure showing the special figure variation game in time series, the passage of time between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures.

  FIG. 450 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game has ended. The special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 both stop and display the first special symbol “Special figure I”. In the fourth symbol display area t1 for special figure 1, an “x” image indicating that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place is displayed, and in the fourth symbol display area t2 for special figure 2, the fluctuation of special figure 2 is displayed. An “x” image indicating that the game result is out of place is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 6” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the special-figure variable game is out of play.

  In addition, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is lit with two LEDs on the left side to notify that there are two special figure 1 holds. All the special figure 2 hold lamps 220 are turned off, and it is informed that there is no special figure 2 hold. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, a special figure 1 hold icon a1 corresponding to the hold with the first hold order is displayed, and on the right side, a special figure 1 hold icon a2 corresponding to the hold with the second hold order is displayed. It is displayed. The special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 are both normal hold display modes shown in FIG. 419 (a).

  450 (b) to (g) show from the start to the end of the special figure 1 variable game. FIG. 450 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started. The special figure variation display is started on the special figure 1 display device 212, and a "-" image indicating that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed is displayed in the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area t1. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. At the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol, for example, the variation display is first started in the left symbol display region 208a, then the variation display is started in the middle symbol display region 208b, and then the variation display is started in the right symbol display region 208c. . Of course, the variable display may be started simultaneously in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c.

  In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, one hold having the first holding order is consumed, and only the leftmost LED is lit on the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 1 hold is held. It is reported that there is one. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, the special figure 1 hold icon on the left side disappears in correspondence with the digestion of the hold, and the special figure 1 hold icon on the right side moves to the left as a special figure 1 hold icon a1. Is displayed.

  450 (c) to (f) show a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. FIG. 450 (d) shows a state in which symbols are changing in the middle right symbol display areas 208b and 208c, and “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a. FIG. 450 (e) shows that the symbol is changing in the middle right symbol display area 208b, and “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, and “decoration 8” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. Is shown. In FIG. 450 (f), “decoration 3” temporarily stops in the left symbol display area 208a, “decoration 2” temporarily stops in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “decoration 8” temporarily stops in the right symbol display area 208c. Shows the state. The decorative pattern in the temporary stop is not in a stationary state, but is in a swinging fluctuation state that slightly vibrates in the vertical direction, for example.

  FIG. 450 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the first special symbol "Special figure I" is stopped and displayed. In the fourth symbol display area t1 for special figure 1, an “x” image indicating that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place is displayed. "Decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 8" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the special figure 1 variable game is out of play. . The special figure 1 variable game shown in FIGS. 450 (a) to 450 (g) is a basic pattern in a normal variable state. In the following description, a detailed description of the order of operation is omitted for the special variation game in the normal variation state.

  FIG. 450 (h) shows a state in which the next special figure 1 variable game is started and the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. It is informed that the special figure variation display is being executed on the special figure 1 display device 212 and that the special figure 1 variable game is being executed in the fourth symbol display area t1 for special figure 1. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is being executed.

  Further, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold is digested, and the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is informed that all LEDs are extinguished and there is no hold of the special figure 1. The special figure 1 hold icon is not displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area.

  FIG. 450 (i) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a during execution of the special figure 1 variable game.

  FIG. 450 (j) shows that “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c during the execution of the special figure 1 variable game, and the character “Leach” is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, thereby achieving the reach effect. Indicates the started state.

  FIG. 450 (k) to FIG. 451 (c) show a state where the button effect of the present embodiment is performed during the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game. In the button effects of the present embodiment, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a predetermined lottery process for button effects prior to the start of the special figure variable game, and various effects that prompt the user to press the chance button 136 according to the lottery result. I do. In this embodiment, the case where the button effect is executed after the start of the reach effect is shown.

  FIG. 450 (k) shows a state in which the button effect is started during the reach effect. In the button effect of this example, first, an explanation display (tutorial display) of the button effect is performed. The left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and displayed from the center of the original display area to the upper left corner of the display area, and the effect display area 208d is enlarged to the center of the display area. In the explanation display of the button effect, three images simulating the chance button 136 are displayed in a line in the horizontal direction in the approximate center of the effect display area 208d. In the upper part of the image simulating the three chance buttons 136, a character string “3 sets of SP reach development!” Is displayed, and a character string “Ready” is displayed above it. In the following description, “the state where the button effect is started” indicates a state where the reception of the button operation is not yet valid, and “the state where the button effect is started” This indicates that the operation reception is enabled. The execution of the button effect indicates that the button operation is being accepted.

  FIG. 450 (l) shows a state in which the button effect is started. In the button effect in the present embodiment, three operation request images (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “button images”) having a display form simulating the chance button 136 are arranged in a horizontal line in the approximate center of the effect display area 208d. Is displayed. A character string “PUSH!” Is displayed at the top of the three button images, and a character string “Go” is displayed at the top. One effective period image common to the three button images is displayed below the three button images. The effective period image of this example has a rectangular frame shape that is long horizontally, and initially, the entire period of the effective period is indicated by a bar shape of a predetermined color within the frame shape. It is displayed so that it gradually shortens to the left. More specifically, the effective period image is a gauge image, and the display of the gauge image is a display that can suggest the remaining period of the effective operation period by performing an animation in which the length of the gauge is reduced. The display of the gauge image is a display capable of notifying that the operation valid period ends when the gauge length becomes zero.

  FIG. 450 (m) shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136 during execution of the button effect. The pressing of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure. The effective period image reports a state in which the rod-shaped portion is somewhat shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is slightly shortened.

  FIG. 450 (n) shows a state in which a button image erasing animation (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as “button erasing animation”) is being executed during the execution of the button effect. When the first press of the chance button 136 is received, the button image on the left side is deleted by the button deletion animation. In the middle of the erase animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 450 (o) shows an effect executed next to the button-erasing animation during execution of the button effect (the effect may be referred to as a “second effect” with respect to the “first effect” described later). Is shown. As a second effect, a panda image (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “panda image”) is displayed at the position where the left button image was displayed. In the second effect, a part of the center button image and a part of the effective period image are hidden by the panda image. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 450 (p) shows a state in which the second effect in the button effect is being executed. In the second effect, the panda image is reduced and displayed, and the central button image and the effective period image are all visible by the reduced display of the panda image. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 450 (q) shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136 for the second time during execution of the button effect. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 450 (r) shows a state in which the button erase animation is being executed during the execution of the button effect. When the chance button 136 is pressed for the second time, the central button image is deleted by the button deletion animation. In the middle of the erase animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 451 (a) shows a state in which the second effect is executed after the button erase animation following FIG. 450 (r). As a second effect, a character image of “unscrupulous merchant Echigoya” (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “Echigoya image”) is displayed at the position where the central button image was displayed. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 451 (b) shows the execution state of the second effect in the button effect. Since the Echigoya image different from the panda image corresponding to the left button image is displayed at the position of the center button image, it is displayed in the button effect explanation display regardless of whether or not the player presses the chance button 136 for the third time. The condition of “Three sets of SP reach development!” Is no longer met. For this reason, the second effect in which the right button image is deleted and the Echigoya image is displayed instead of waiting for the player to press the chance button 136 even if the operation valid period remains is executed.

  FIG. 451 (c) shows the first effect executed after the second effect while the button effect is being executed. The first effect notifies the result of the button operation. In this example, as a first effect, an Echigoya image is displayed largely on the center left side of the effect display area 208d, and a character string “Sorry!” Is displayed on the center right side. As a result, the player is notified that the reach effect has not been developed into SP (super) reach. As described above, the first effect may be executed with the number of times of pressing (twice in this example) smaller than the number of button images displayed (three in this example). In the first effect, the button image, the effective period image, and the image displayed in the second effect are not displayed. The effect mode of the first effect is determined by the combination (how to align) of the panda image and the Echigoya image displayed in place of the button image in the second effect.

  "Decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b among the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c displayed in the upper left corner of the image display area of the decoration symbol display device 208, and the left middle right symbol display. In the areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 3” is temporarily displayed.

  FIG. 451 (b ′) shows a modification of the execution state of the second effect in the button effect. In FIG. 451 (b ′), an Echigoya image with a different pattern from the panda image for the left button image is displayed at the position of the center button image, and the condition that the three images are aligned is not satisfied. This shows a state in which the operation valid period has expired without the player pressing the chance button 136 for the third time. In this case, the second effect for the right button image is not performed.

  FIG. 451 (c ′) subsequent to FIG. 451 (b ′) shows a state in which the first effect is not executed after the end of the second effect, and a valid period expired notification animation is executed instead. As described above, when the operation effective period has expired in a state where the chance button 136 has not been pressed a predetermined number of times, the first effect or the second effect may not be performed. "Decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b among the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c displayed in the upper left corner of the image display area of the decoration symbol display device 208, and the left middle right symbol display. In the areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 3” is temporarily displayed.

  In FIG. 451 (d) following FIG. 451 (c) or FIG. 451 (c ′), the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are enlarged from the reduced display to the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The normal display state is shown. “Decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, “Decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “Decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 451 (e) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the first special symbol "Special figure I" is stopped and displayed. In the fourth symbol display area t1 for special figure 1, an “x” image indicating that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place is displayed. "Decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the special figure 1 variable game is out of play. .

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment described above has a chance button 136 as an operation means provided at a position where the player can operate, an effect display area 208d as a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, And a decorative symbol display device 208 as a rendering means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects. One of the plural types of displays is a display of a button image as a first display, and the display of the button image is a display including a display indicating the chance button 136. One of the plurality of types of display is a display of an effective period image as a second display, and the effective period image is an operation effective period as a third period in which reception regarding the pressing of the chance button 136 is effective. Is displayed. The display of the button image is a display that can be started in the first period, and the first period is a period including a part of the operation effective period. The display of the effective period image is a display that can be started in the second period, and the second period is a period including a part of the operation effective period. The decorative symbol display device 208 can display, for example, three button images as the first number (2 or more). One of the multiple types of effects is an effect executed next to the button erase animation as the second effect, for example, an effect of causing a predetermined image to appear at the position where the erased button image was displayed. It is. In addition, one of the multiple types of effects is an effect that notifies the result of the button operation executed after the second effect as the first effect. The first effect can be executed when the number of times the chance button 136 is operated in the operation effective period is, for example, twice as the second number (2 or more). The second effect is an effect that may be executed while hiding a part of the three button images.

  The second effect is an effect that is executed each time an operation of the chance button 136 is accepted. Since the second effect is an effect performed for each button operation, there are cases where the first effect can be expected by executing the second effect before the first effect is performed.

In addition, the second effect is an effect that is executed for each operation of the chance button 136, but the display of the button image and the display of the gauge image is hidden in all of the second effects that are performed for each operation. Alternatively, the display of the button image or the gauge image may be hidden only in the second effect started by a part of the operation.
(Example 2)

  Next, a special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 452 and 453. In the present embodiment, the effect up to the button effect is the same as that in FIG. 450 (j) of the first embodiment, and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 452 (a) continues from FIG. 450 (j). 452 (a) to 452 (p) show a state in which the button effect of the present embodiment is performed during the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game. In the button effects of the present embodiment, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a predetermined lottery process for button effects prior to the start of the special figure variable game, and various effects that prompt the user to press the chance button 136 according to the lottery result. I do. In this embodiment, the case where the button effect is executed after the start of the reach effect is shown.

  FIG. 452 (a) shows a state in which the button effect is started during the reach effect. In the button effect of this example, first, an explanation display (tutorial display) of the button effect is performed. The left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and displayed from the center of the original display area to the upper left corner of the display area, and the effect display area 208d is enlarged to the center of the display area. In the explanation display of the button effect, three images simulating the chance button 136 are displayed in a line in the horizontal direction in the approximate center of the effect display area 208d. In the upper part of the image simulating the three chance buttons 136, a character string “3 sets of SP reach development!” Is displayed, and a character string “Ready” is displayed above it.

  FIG. 452 (b) shows a state where the button effect is started. In the button effect in the present embodiment, three operation request images (button images) in a display form simulating the chance button 136 are displayed in a line in the horizontal direction at substantially the center of the effect display area 208d. A character string “PUSH!” Is displayed at the top of the three button images, and a character string “Go” is displayed at the top. One effective period image common to the three button images is displayed below the three button images. The effective period image of this example has a rectangular frame shape that is long horizontally, and initially, the entire period of the effective period is indicated by a bar shape of a predetermined color within the frame shape. It is displayed to gradually shorten to the right. More specifically, the effective period image is a gauge image, and the display of the gauge image is a display that can suggest the remaining period of the effective operation period by performing an animation in which the length of the gauge is reduced. The display of the gauge image is a display capable of notifying that the operation valid period ends when the gauge length becomes zero.

  FIG. 452 (c) shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136 during the execution of the button effect. The pressing of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is somewhat shortened in the right direction and the operation effective period is slightly shortened.

  FIG. 452 (d) shows a state in which a button image deletion animation (button deletion animation) is being executed during the execution of the button effect. When the first press of the chance button 136 is received, the button image on the left side is deleted by the button deletion animation. In the middle of the erase animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 452 (e) shows a second effect executed next to the button erase animation while the button effect is being executed. As a second effect, a panda image is displayed at the position where the left button image was displayed. In the second effect, a part of the center button image and a part of the effective period image are hidden by the panda image. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 452 (f) shows a state in which the second effect in the button effect is being executed. In the second effect, the panda image is reduced and displayed, and the central button image and the effective period image are all visible by the reduced display of the panda image. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 452 (g) shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136 for the second time during execution of the button effect. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 452 (h) shows a state in which the button erasure animation is being executed while the button effect is being executed. When the chance button 136 is pressed for the second time, the central button image is deleted by the button deletion animation. In the middle of the erase animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 452 (i) shows a state in which the second effect is executed after the button erase animation. As a second effect, a panda image is displayed at the position where the center button image was displayed. The panda image is displayed in such a size as to hide a part of the panda image on the left side and a part of the effective period image. In this way, another second effect may be hidden in the second effect. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction and the operation effective period is further shortened. Thus, in this embodiment, the direction in which the gauge of the effective period image decreases and the direction in which the button images are deleted are the same.

  FIG. 452 (j) shows a state in which the second effect in the button effect is being executed. In the second effect, the panda image at the center is reduced and displayed, and the panda image on the left side and the effective period image are all visible by the reduced display of the panda image. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  In FIG. 452 (k), the display mode of the button image on the right side in the effect display area 208d changes from “normal” to “vibration + rotation” to notify the result of the change. Thus, the display mode of the button image may change during the operation effective period. Further, the button mode may be changed corresponding to the change in the display mode of the button image.

  FIG. 452 (l) shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136 for the third time during the execution of the button effect. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 452 (m) shows a state in which the button erasing animation is being executed while the button effect is being executed. When the chance button 136 is pressed for the third time, the right button image is erased by the button erase animation. In the middle of the button erase animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. For the gauge display, an effective period image erasing animation is executed. The gauge display is an erasable display when the player presses the chance button 136 a predetermined number of times even when the operation valid period remains. In the effective period image erasing animation, a third frame is displayed as an empty frame image having no gauge portion indicating that the remaining period of the gauge display is zero. After the empty frame image is displayed for a predetermined time, the gauge display is deleted. By displaying the animation of 0 in the gauge length display, it may be possible to easily notify that the button operation corresponding to the gauge display to be deleted or the button display has been accepted.

  In addition, in the button erase animation shown in FIG. 452 (m), since the button image whose display mode is “vibration + rotation” is displayed, it is displayed as the button erase animation for deleting the button image whose display mode is “normal”. A larger effect image is displayed. As described above, in the button effect of the present embodiment, the button image can be displayed in a plurality of animation modes, and a button image whose display mode is “vibration + rotation” is used as the first animation mode, or the first animation is displayed. As a second animation mode different from the mode, a button image whose display mode is “normal” can be used. By doing so, there is a case where button display or button deletion animation display can function as a notice due to a difference in the button display animation mode.

  FIG. 452 (n) shows a state in which the second effect is executed after the button erase animation. As a second effect, a panda image is displayed at the position where the right button image was displayed. The panda image is displayed in such a size as to hide a part of the central panda image. In this way, another second effect may be hidden in the second effect. When the button image is erased by the last button operation and there is no button image in the display area, the effect of hiding the button image is not performed. Since the operation valid period has passed, no valid period image is displayed.

  FIG. 452 (o) shows a state in which the second effect in the button effect is being executed. In the second effect, the right panda image is displayed in a reduced size, and three panda images of the same size are aligned in a horizontal row to notify that the condition of “Triple development and SP reach development!” Is satisfied. Has been.

  FIG. 452 (p) shows the first effect executed after the second effect while the button effect is being executed. The first effect notifies the result of the button operation. In this example, as the first effect, the same panda image as the character A shown in FIG. 424 (a) is displayed large on the center left side of the effect display area 208d, and the characters “SP development” are displayed on the center right side. Thereby, the player is notified that the reach production will develop into SP (super) reach.

  452 (q) to 453 (e) show the SP reach effect. FIG. 452 (q) shows a state in which the SP reach effect is started, and “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c which are reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d. . A character string “subjugation reach” is displayed at the top of the effect display area 208d. An image in which two samurai are facing each other is displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d. FIG. 453 (a) following FIG. 452 (q) shows a state in which the deca button is displayed during the SP reach effect and the chance button 136 is prompted to be pressed. In this button effect, there is one button image, and no effective period image is displayed. The deca button display is different from the normal button display, and has a function as a notice that the player expects. Therefore, there is a case where it is possible to promptly prompt the player to operate the button by making an effect that does not display the effective period. In addition, it can be said that the display of the deca button itself is an effect that prompts the player to press the button more strongly. In FIG. 453 (b), the chance button 136 is pressed, the SP reach production proceeds to the next scene, and an image of the warrior shouting “It's a game!” Is displayed. FIG. 453 (c) shows a state in which the samurai has won the battle. “Decoration 3” is displayed in the center of the screen, and the figure of the samurai who wins to the right and the figure of the samurai who loses to the left are displayed. The character string “Win” is displayed at the top of the screen.

  FIG. 453 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are enlarged and displayed normally from the reduced display to the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. “Decoration 3” temporarily stops in the left symbol display area 208a, “decoration 3” temporarily stops in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “decoration 3” temporarily stops in the right symbol display area 208c.

FIG. 453 (e) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. On the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure “Special figure A” is stopped and displayed. In the fourth symbol display area t1 for special figure 1, an “A” image indicating that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is winning is displayed. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. .
(Example 2-3)

  Next, a special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 3 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the effect up to the button effect is the same as that in FIG. 450 (k) of the first embodiment, and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 454 (a) continues from FIG. 450 (k). FIG. 454 (a) shows a state where the button effect is started. In the button effect in the present embodiment, three operation request images (button images) in a display form simulating the chance button 136 are displayed in a line in the horizontal direction at substantially the center of the effect display area 208d. A character string “PUSH!” Is displayed at the top of the three button images, and a character string “Go” is displayed at the top. One effective period image common to the three button images is displayed below the three button images. The effective period image of this example is a gauge image, and the display of the gauge image is a display that can suggest the remaining period of the operation effective period by performing an animation in which the length of the gauge is reduced. The display of the gauge image is a display capable of notifying that the operation valid period ends when the gauge length becomes zero.

  FIG. 454 (b) shows a state where the player first presses the chance button 136 during execution of the button effect. The pressing of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is somewhat shortened in the right direction and the operation effective period is slightly shortened.

  FIG. 454 (c) shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136 for the second time during the execution of the button effect. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is somewhat shortened in the right direction and the operation effective period is slightly shortened.

  FIG. 454 (d) shows a state in which a button image deletion animation (button deletion animation) is being executed during execution of the button effect. When the second press of the chance button 136 is accepted, the left button image is deleted by the button deletion animation. In the middle of the erase animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 454 (e) shows a second effect executed after the button erase animation while the button effect is being executed. As a second effect, a panda image is displayed at the position where the left button image was displayed. In the second effect, a part of the center button image and a part of the effective period image are hidden by the panda image. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  In the button effects shown in FIGS. 454 (a) to (e), one button image is erased by a plurality of button operations (twice in this example), and the second effect is started. In this way, the button image is erased by changing the number of button operations, or the button image is erased for each button operation, thereby making the player more entertaining the button effect. There are cases where it is possible.

  FIG. 454 (a ′) continues from FIG. 450 (k). Since FIG. 454 (a ′) shows the start of the button effect similar to FIG. 454 (a), the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 454 (b ′) shows a state in which the player first presses the chance button 136 during execution of the button effect. The pressing of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure.

  FIG. 454 (c ′) shows a state in which a button image deletion animation (button deletion animation) is being executed during execution of the button effect. When the first press of the chance button 136 is received, the button image on the left side as well as the button image on the left side are deleted by the button deletion animation. In the middle of the erase animation, the effect images are displayed at the respective display positions instead of the left and center button images.

  FIG. 454 (d ′) shows a second effect executed after the button erase animation while the button effect is being executed. As a second effect, a panda image is displayed at the position where the left button image is displayed and at the position where the center button image is displayed.

  In the button effects shown in FIGS. 454 (a ′) to (d ′), a plurality of (two in this example) button images are erased by a single button operation, and each second effect is started. Thus, there are cases where the player can more enjoy the button effect by changing the number of button images to be erased by one button operation and executing the button image erase animation.

  FIG. 454 (a ″) continues from FIG. 450 (k). In FIG. 454 (a ″), the button image on the left is an image of a display mode simulating the light emission state of the chance button 136 with respect to the button effects shown in FIG. 454 (a) and FIG. 454 (a ′). It has a feature in that. Since other points are the same, the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 454 (b ″) shows a state where the player first presses the chance button 136 during the execution of the button effect. The button image on the left is displayed with a higher brightness than the other button images. The pressing of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure.

  FIG. 454 (c ″) shows a state in which a button image deletion animation (button deletion animation) is being executed during execution of the button effect. When the first press of the chance button 136 is accepted, the button image on the left side imitating the light emission state of the button is deleted by the button deletion animation. In the middle of the erase animation, the effect images are displayed at the respective display positions instead of the left and center button images.

  FIG. 454 (d ″) shows the second effect executed after the button erase animation while the button effect is being executed. As a second effect, a panda image is displayed at the position where the left button image was displayed.

In the button effects shown in FIGS. 454 (a ″) to (d ″), as an example in which the display modes of the three button images arranged in a horizontal row are different, only the portion that simulates light emission is different. , And different display modes. In this example, an effect portion corresponding to the first button operation is suggested by making the light emission mode different from other button images.
Example 4

  Next, a special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 4 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 455 (a) shows that “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c during the execution of the special figure 1 variable game, and the character “Leach” is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b to achieve the reach effect. Indicates the started state.

  FIG. 455 (b) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced from the original display area center to the upper left corner of the display area, and the effect display area 208d is enlarged to the display area center. ing.

  FIGS. 455 (c) to 455 (e) show effects immediately after the start of the animation related to the button image. FIG. 455 (c) shows a state in which a relatively small button image is displayed at the center of the effect display area 208d. FIG. 455 (d) shows a state in which an animation in which the button image is gradually enlarged is being executed. FIG. 455 (e) shows a state in which three button images are displayed in a horizontal row, and the size of the center button image is larger than the size of the left and right button images. In this example, the button display is performed by animation, and the case where a large button display and a normal button image display are mixed is shown. Also in this example, the display mode of the button image of the central decabutton display is different from the display mode of the normal left and right button images.

  FIGS. 455 (a ′) to (d ′) show effects immediately after the start of the animation related to the button image. In this example, the effect movable body imitating the arm is arranged on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The effect movable body is driven and moved to the front of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 to partially hide the image displayed in the image display area. FIG. 455 (a ′) shows a state where most of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is an effect display area 208d. Three button images are displayed in a horizontal row at the center of the effect display area 208d. An effective period image is displayed occupying an area about 1/3 below the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 455 (b ′) shows a state where the player first presses the chance button 136 during the execution of the button effect. The effective period image reports a state in which the gauge effective portion is shortened to the right and the operation effective period is shortened.

  FIG. 455 (c ′) shows a state in which a button image deletion animation (button deletion animation) is being executed during execution of the button effect. When the first press of the chance button 136 is received, the button image on the left side is deleted by the button deletion animation. In the middle of the erase animation, the effect images are displayed at the respective display positions instead of the left and center button images.

  FIG. 455 (d ′) shows the second effect executed after the button erase animation while the button effect is being executed. As a second effect, the arm of the effect movable body extends to the front of the image display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 to hide part of the right button image and the effective period image.

In the button effects shown in FIGS. 455 (a ′) to (d ′), the gauge image is an image larger than usual (deca gauge image), and the second effect is an effect due to the operation of the effect movable body. The button images and gauge images are partially hidden. The big image may be configured to function as a notice on its own. For example, there may be a case where a player can expect a big hit or the like by displaying a deca gauge image at the timing when a normal gauge image appears. In this case, it is desirable that the effective period is the same as that of a normal gauge image even if it is a deca gauge image, but the time is adjusted by, for example, shaking fluctuation (temporary stop) or the like (special figure fluctuation time and decoration symbol fluctuation time) It is also possible to adjust the period of time to be different from each other. Note that the first effect may also be performed by the effect movable body.
(Example 5)

  Next, a special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 5 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, a case where a reach effect similar to that of the second embodiment (see FIGS. 452 and 453) is executed (the variation time is the same) but a button effect is not performed is described.

  Since the special figure variation game shown in FIGS. 456 (a) to (d) is the same as that shown in FIGS. 450 (g) to (j), the description thereof will be omitted. Also, the special figure variation games (including SP reach production) shown in FIGS. 456 (i) to (n) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 452 (q) to 453 (e), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  FIGS. 456 (e) to (h) show the production from the start of the reach production to the development of the SP reach production. The second effect is an effect that is not related to the operation of the operation means (for example, a notice such as a step-up notice, a look-ahead notice, a cut-in notice, an ordinary figure effect, etc. It may be information related to games such as time saving and latent mode). This example demonstrates the case where the cut-in effect (step-up) after reach is implemented as a 2nd effect. FIG. 456 (e) shows the cut-in effect executed during the reach effect. The face image of the “bancho” character image is displayed as a cut-in effect in the middle symbol display area 208b. Next, in FIG. 456 (f), the whole body image of the “bancho” character image is displayed as a cut-in effect in the middle symbol display area 208b and displayed as a step-up notice. Next, in FIG. 456 (g), the character F image shown in FIG. 429 (c) is displayed as a cut-in effect in the middle symbol display area 208b and displayed as a step-up notice.

  FIG. 456 (i) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced from the center of the original display area to the upper left corner of the display area, and the effect display area 208d is enlarged to the center of the display area. ing.

As described above, even if the button effect is not performed when the reach effect is performed, the second effect is, for example, a notice such as a step-up notice, a pre-read notice, a cut-in notice, or a general drawing effect. In addition, it can be performed in relation to game information such as the number of winning balls, number of consecutive games, probability change, time saving, and latent mode.
(Example 6)

  Next, a special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 6 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the effect up to the button effect is the same as that in FIG. 450 (j) of the first embodiment, and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 457 (a) continues from FIG. 450 (j). FIG. 457 (a) to FIG. 457 (l) show a state in which the button effect of the present embodiment is performed during the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game. In the button effects of the present embodiment, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a predetermined lottery process for button effects prior to the start of the special figure variable game, and various effects that prompt the user to press the chance button 136 according to the lottery result. I do. In this embodiment, the case where the button effect is executed after the start of the reach effect is shown.

  FIG. 457 (a) shows a state in which the button effect is started during the reach effect. In the button production of this example, a button production tutorial display is first performed. The left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and displayed from the center of the original display area to the upper left corner of the display area, and the effect display area 208d is enlarged to the center of the display area. In the explanation display of the button effect, one image simulating the chance button 136 is displayed at the center in the approximate center of the effect display area 208d. The image imitating the chance button 136 has the same display mode as the button image whose display mode is “vibration + rotation”. In the upper part of the image simulating the chance button 136, a character string “Development of SP reach in three sets! Press three times” is displayed, and a character string “Ready” is displayed in the upper part.

  FIG. 457 (b) shows a state in which the button effect is started. In the button effect in the present embodiment, one operation request image (button image) having a display mode imitating the chance button 136 is displayed in the approximate center of the effect display area 208d. The display mode of the button image is “vibration + rotation”. In the upper part of the button image, a character string of “3 sets of SP reach development! One effective period image is displayed below the button image. The effective period image of this example has a relatively long and narrow rectangular frame shape (long gauge). Initially, the entire effective period in the frame shape is indicated by a rod of a predetermined color. A bar-shaped part of a predetermined color is displayed so as to gradually shorten in the right direction as time passes. More specifically, the display of the effective period image is a long gauge display, and the long gauge display is an indication that can indicate the remaining period of the operation effective period by performing an animation in which the length of the long gauge decreases. . The display of the long gauge image is a display capable of notifying that the operation valid period ends when the length of the long gauge becomes zero. The long gauge can also function as a notice like the deca gauge image. In order to make the effective period of the button and the normal gauge image the same, the speed at which the gauge in the long gauge decreases may be faster than the speed at which the gauge in the normal gauge image decreases. In this way, by using a plurality of display modes having different numbers of button displays and gauge display modes, it may be possible to use for the advance notice of the change.

  FIG. 457 (c) shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136 during execution of the button effect. The pressing of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is somewhat shortened in the right direction and the operation effective period is slightly shortened.

  FIG. 457 (d) shows a second effect executed during the execution of the button effect. As a second effect, a panda image is displayed at a position to the right of the center button image display. In this embodiment, when the chance button 136 is first pressed, the button image deletion animation for deleting the button image is not executed. When the first press of the chance button 136 is received, the second effect is started thereafter. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 457 (e) shows a state in which the second effect in the button effect is being executed. Above the display of the center button image and the second production panda image, a character string of “two more times” is displayed on the right side of the character string of “Three sets of SP reach development!” On the other hand, it is informed that the remaining number of operations is two. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 457 (f) shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136 for the second time during execution of the button effect. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 457 (g) shows a second effect executed during the execution of the button effect. As a second effect, another panda image is displayed on the right side of the panda image on the right side of the center button image. In this embodiment, when the chance button 136 is pressed for the second time, the button deletion animation for deleting the button image is not executed. When the second press of the chance button 136 is received, the second effect is started. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 457 (h) shows a state where the second effect in the button effect is being executed. Above the display of the center button image and the two panda images of the second effect, a character string of “Last” is displayed on the right side of the character string “Development of SP Reach! On the other hand, it is informed that the remaining number of operations is one. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 457 (f) shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136 for the third time during the execution of the button effect. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 457 (j) shows a state in which the button erasing animation is being executed while the button effect is being executed. When the chance button 136 is pressed for the third time, the central button image is deleted by the button deletion animation. In the middle of the button erase animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In this embodiment, the button display deletion animation is performed only for the last button operation.

  FIG. 457 (k) illustrates a case where the effective period image deletion animation is not executed for the gauge display. The gauge display is an erasable display when the player presses the chance button 136 a predetermined number of times even when the operation valid period remains. In this example, an empty frame image having no gauge portion indicating that the remaining period of the gauge display is 0 as shown in FIG. 452 (m) is not displayed. In addition, on the right side of the effect display area 208d, three panda images arranged at the positions of the vertices of the inverted triangle are displayed as second effects, respectively, and the condition of “spreading SP reach! Informing you that you have met.

  FIG. 457 (l) shows the first effect executed after the second effect while the button effect is being executed. The first effect notifies the result of the button operation. In this example, as a first effect, three panda images having the same shape and the same size are displayed in a horizontal row in the center of the effect display area 208d, and characters “SP reach confirmation” are displayed below the image. Thereby, the player is notified that the reach production will develop into SP (super) reach. After the state shown in FIG. 457 (l), the SP reach effect shown in FIGS. 452 (q) to 453 (e) is executed.

According to the present embodiment, in the case of performing a button effect whether or not to develop to SP reach during the reach effect, by preparing a plurality of effect patterns with different numbers of button displays and gauge display modes, It is also possible to give a notice of notice with a button effect, which may improve the interest of the game.
(Example 7)

  Next, a special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 7 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the effect up to the button effect is the same as that in FIG. 450 (k) of the first embodiment, and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 458 (a) continues from FIG. 450 (k). FIG. 458 (a) to FIG. 458 (l) show a state in which the button effect of the present embodiment is performed during the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game. In the button effects of the present embodiment, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a predetermined lottery process for button effects prior to the start of the special figure variable game, and various effects that prompt the user to press the chance button 136 according to the lottery result. I do. In this embodiment, the case where the button effect is executed after the start of the reach effect is shown.

  FIG. 458 (a) shows a state in which the button effect is started. In the button effect in the present embodiment, three operation request images (button images) in a display form simulating the chance button 136 are displayed in a line in the horizontal direction at substantially the center of the effect display area 208d. A character string “PUSH!” Is displayed at the top of the three button images, and a character string “Go” is displayed at the top. One effective period image common to the three button images is displayed below the three button images. The effective period image of this example has a rectangular frame shape that is long horizontally, and initially, the entire period of the effective period is indicated by a bar shape of a predetermined color within the frame shape. It is displayed to gradually shorten to the right. More specifically, the effective period image is a gauge image, and the display of the gauge image is a display that can suggest the remaining period of the effective operation period by performing an animation in which the length of the gauge is reduced. The display of the gauge image is a display capable of notifying that the operation valid period ends when the gauge length becomes zero.

  FIG. 458 (b) shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136 during execution of the button effect. The pressing of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is somewhat shortened in the right direction and the operation effective period is slightly shortened.

  FIG. 458 (c) shows a state in which a button image deletion animation (button deletion animation) is being executed during the execution of the button effect. When the first press of the chance button 136 is received, the button image on the left side is deleted by the button deletion animation. In the middle of the erase animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 458 (d) shows a second effect executed after the button erase animation while the button effect is being executed. As a second effect, an image of the head of the youth is displayed at the position where the left button image was displayed. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 458 (e) shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136 for the second time during execution of the button effect. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 458 (f) shows a state in which the button erasing animation is being executed while the button effect is being executed. When the chance button 136 is pressed for the second time, the central button image is deleted by the button deletion animation. In the middle of the erase animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In parallel with the button erase animation, an effect change animation (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “effect change animation”) in which the image of the head of the young man on the left is erased and a larger effect image is displayed is executed. Has been. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 458 (g) shows a state in which the second effect is executed after the button erase animation and the effect change animation. As a second effect, a standing image of a youth is displayed near the position where the left and center button images were displayed. The standing image is displayed in such a size as to hide a part of the effective period image. As described above, in this embodiment, the same type (young man) character image is changed and displayed for each button operation. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction and the operation effective period is further shortened. In the present embodiment, the direction in which the gauge of the effective period image decreases and the direction in which the button images are deleted are the same.

  FIG. 458 (h) shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136 for the third time during execution of the button effect. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 458 (i) shows a state in which the button erasing animation is being executed while the button effect is being executed. When the chance button 136 is pressed for the third time, the right button image is erased by the button erase animation. In the middle of the erase animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In parallel with the button erasing animation, a production change animation is executed in which the standing image of the youth is erased and a larger effect image is displayed. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 458 (j) shows a state in which the second effect is executed after the button erase animation and the effect change animation. As a second effect, a standing image of a youth similar to the character F in FIG. 429 (c) is displayed near the position where the left and center button images were displayed. The standing image is displayed in such a size as to hide a part of the effective period image. As described above, in this embodiment, the same type (young man) character image is changed and displayed for each button operation. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 458 (k) shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136 for the fourth time during the execution of the button effect. This button operation is a condition for generating the first effect. In this example, there are three button displays, and the button operation is performed for each button display, so three button operations are required, and a fourth button operation is required to generate the first effect. It has become. In other words, the configuration requires four button operations (presses) to generate the first effect. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

FIG. 458 (l) shows the first effect executed after the second effect while the button effect is being executed. The first effect notifies the result of the button operation. In this example, as a first effect, a character image of the youth is displayed large on the right side of the center of the effect display area 208d, and a character string “Gekiatsu SP Reach!” Is displayed on the left side. Thereby, the player is notified that the reach production will develop into SP (super) reach. After the state shown in FIG. 458 (l), the SP reach effect shown in FIGS. 452 (q) to 453 (e) is executed.
(Example 8)

  Next, a special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 8 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 459 (a) to 459 (q) show the special figure variation games in this order in this order. In the figure showing the special figure variation game in time series, the passage of time between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures.

  FIG. 459 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is finished. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the first special symbol "Special figure I" is stopped and displayed. In the fourth symbol display areas t1 and t2 for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, an “x” image indicating that the result of the special figure variable game is out of place is displayed. "Decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 8" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the special figure variable game is off.

  In addition, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is lit with two LEDs on the left side to notify that there are two special figure 1 holds. All the special figure 2 hold lamps 220 are turned off, and it is informed that there is no special figure 2 hold. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, a special figure 1 hold icon a1 corresponding to the hold with the first hold order is displayed, and on the right side, a special figure 1 hold icon a2 corresponding to the hold with the second hold order is displayed. It is displayed. The special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 are both normal hold display modes shown in FIG. 419 (a).

  FIG. 459 (b) shows a state in which the next special figure 1 variable game is started and the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. It is informed that the special figure variation display is being executed on the special figure 1 display device 212 and that the special figure 1 variable game is being executed in the fourth symbol display area t1 for special figure 1. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is being executed.

  In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, one hold having the first holding order is consumed, and only the leftmost LED is lit on the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 1 hold is held. It is reported that there is one. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, the special figure 1 hold icon on the left side disappears in correspondence with the digestion of the hold, and the special figure 1 hold icon on the right side moves to the left as a special figure 1 hold icon a1. Is displayed.

  FIG. 459 (c) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a during execution of the special figure 1 variable game.

  FIG. 459 (d) shows that “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c during the execution of the special figure 1 variable game, and the character “Leach” is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, thereby achieving the reach effect. Indicates the started state.

  FIG. 459 (e) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced from the center of the original display area to the upper left corner of the display area, and the effect display area 208d is enlarged to the center of the display area. ing.

  FIG. 459 (f) to FIG. 459 (k) show a state where the button effect of the present embodiment is performed during the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game. In the button effects of the present embodiment, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a predetermined lottery process for button effects prior to the start of the special figure variable game, and various effects that prompt the user to press the chance button 136 according to the lottery result. I do. In the present embodiment, a case where a continuous effect animation is executed as a button effect after the start of the reach effect is shown.

  FIG. 459 (f) shows a state in which the continuous hit effect animation is started during the reach effect. In the button effect of this example, an operation request image (hereinafter referred to as a circular display mode) in which a character “push” is displayed as an image suggesting a chance button 136 as an operation means slightly to the right of the effect display area 208d. , Sometimes referred to as a “push” button image). On the upper left of the “push” button image, a character string “repeated” is displayed. One effective period image is displayed below the “push” button image. The effective period image of this example has a rectangular frame shape that is long horizontally, and initially, the entire period of the effective period is indicated by a bar shape of a predetermined color within the frame shape. It is displayed to gradually shorten to the right. More specifically, the effective period image is a gauge display, and the gauge display is a display that can suggest the remaining period of the operation effective period by performing an animation in which the length of the gauge is reduced. The gauge display is a display capable of notifying that the operation valid period ends when the gauge length becomes zero.

  FIG. 459 (g) shows a state in which the continuous hit effect animation is being executed. The display of “push” button images increases as the operation valid period elapses. At least one of the display of a plurality of “push” button images hides a part of the gauge display. Further, only one gauge image is displayed for the display of a plurality of “push” button images. By displaying a single gauge display while displaying multiple “push” button images for multiple button operations, it is possible to inform the player that the common operation valid period is clear. May be possible. A plurality of gauge displays may be provided. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is somewhat shortened in the right direction and the operation effective period is slightly shortened.

  FIG. 459 (h) shows a state in which the continuous hit effect animation is being executed. In the effect display area 208d, one “push” button image of a decabutton display is displayed as a first animation mode among a plurality of “push” button images. The first animation mode of the big button display is an image larger than the second animation mode which is a button display mode other than the big button display. The button display modes other than the deca button display are displayed with a black “push” character on a white background, while the button display modes of the deca button display are displayed with a black “push” character on a green background. In some cases, the button display itself can function as a notice of the change or the like due to the difference in the animation mode of the button display. Further, among the button display modes other than the big button display, there is a button display mode in which, for example, a red “push” character is displayed on a white background in addition to a black “push” character display on a white background. May be. The button display itself may function as a notice of the change or the like depending on the difference in the button display mode. In addition, part of the hold icon and part of the gauge display are hidden by the “push” button image.

  FIG. 459 (h) shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136 during the execution of the button effect. The pressing of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is somewhat shortened in the right direction and the operation effective period is slightly shortened.

  FIG. 459 (h) shows a state in which the button erasing animation is being executed while the button effect is being executed. Each time the chance button 136 is pressed, the button image is deleted by the button deletion animation. In the middle of the erase animation, the effect image as the third display is displayed instead of the button image as the first display. The effect image is a button erase image and is included in the button erase animation. The display of the button image is a display that can be deleted in association with the operation of the chance button 136, and the display of the button deletion image is a display that can be executed when the display of the button image is deleted. The display of the button erased image is a display that can be started in association with the chance button 136 being pressed (operated). Thus, since the button deletion animation display can be performed in association with the button operation, the player may be prompted to perform the button operation. It should be noted that the button erased image may be displayed without being related to the operation of the operating means. By executing the button display erasing animation, it may be possible to notify that the player has received a press of the chance button.

  Furthermore, as a second effect after the disappearance of the effect image, the button image is an image of “excellent” (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “excellent” image) or an image of “good” (hereinafter referred to as “good” image). An effect that changes to “is sometimes executed. The effect that changes to an “excellent” image or a “good” image is an effect that can be started in connection with the press of the chance button 136. The effect that the button image changes to the “excellent” image or the “good” image is an effect that can be started after the button deletion animation is performed. Since the second effect is an effect that can be started after the button display erasure animation, the second effect may be conspicuous. In addition, the second effect may be an effect that can be started during the execution of the button deletion animation or before the button deletion animation is started. Note that it is not always necessary to execute the button erasing animation every time the chance button 136 is pressed, and it may be executed for some or all of the button images.

  FIG. 459 (i) shows a state where the player is hitting the chance button 136 repeatedly during execution of the continuous hit effect animation. As the player repeatedly hits the chance button 136, an effect of changing a plurality of “push” button images from effect display to “excellent” image or “good” image button display by button erasure animation is executed. Notice that the “Push” button image of the Deca button display is also likely to develop into SP reach by changing to an image of “T” (hereinafter also referred to as “T” image) through the effect display. doing. In addition, a picture imitating a speaker and a character string “Kean” are shown below FIG. 459 (i), and a definite sound that there is a high possibility of SP reach from the speaker 120 is used as a sound effect for an image preview effect. Running in sync. The effective period image notifies the state that the bar-shaped portion has been shortened to the right and the operation effective period has decreased.

  FIG. 459 (j) shows a state in which the operation effective period disappears while the player repeatedly hits the chance button 136 and the continuous hitting effect animation ends. When the operation valid period expires, the valid period image deletion animation is started. In the effective period image erasing animation, the effect image as the third display is displayed instead of the effective period image as the second display. The effect image is a valid period image erased image and is included in the valid period image erased animation.

  FIG. 459 (k) shows the first effect executed after the second effect while the button effect is being executed. The first effect notifies the result of the button stroke operation. In this example, as the first effect, the image of the character F shown in FIG. 429 (c) is displayed large on the left side of the center of the effect display area 208d, and the character “NO” is displayed on the right side of the center. Thereby, the player is notified that the reach production will develop into SP (super) reach.

  FIGS. 459 (l) to (o) show SP reach effects. FIG. 459 (l) shows a state in which the SP reach effect is started, and “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c which are reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d. . A character string “subjugation reach” is displayed at the top of the effect display area 208d. An image in which two samurai are facing each other is displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d. FIG. 459 (m) shows a state in which the deca button is displayed during the SP reach production and the pressing of the chance button 136 is prompted. In FIG. 459 (n), the chance button 136 is pressed, the SP reach production advances to the next scene, and an image of the samurai yelling “It's a game!” Is displayed. FIG. 459 (o) shows a state in which the samurai has won the battle. “Decoration 3” is displayed in the center of the screen, and the figure of the samurai who wins to the right and the figure of the samurai who loses to the left are displayed. The character string “Win” is displayed at the top of the screen.

  FIG. 459 (p) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are enlarged and displayed from the reduced display to the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. “Decoration 3” temporarily stops in the left symbol display area 208a, “decoration 3” temporarily stops in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “decoration 3” temporarily stops in the right symbol display area 208c.

FIG. 459 (q) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. On the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure “Special figure A” is stopped and displayed. In the fourth symbol display area t1 for special figure 1, an “A” image indicating that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is winning is displayed. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. .
Example 9

  Next, a special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 9 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 460 and 461. FIG. 460 (a) to FIG. 461 (c) show special figure variation games in this order in time series. In the figure showing the special figure variation game in time series, the passage of time between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures.

  FIG. 460 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is finished. On the special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214, the special symbol "Special figure I" is stopped and displayed. In the fourth symbol display areas t1 and t2 for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, an “x” image indicating that the result of the special figure variable game is out of place is displayed. "Decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 8" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the special figure variable game is off.

  In addition, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is lit with two LEDs on the left side to notify that there are two special figure 1 holds. All the special figure 2 hold lamps 220 are turned off, and it is informed that there is no special figure 2 hold. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, a special figure 1 hold icon a1 corresponding to the hold with the first hold order is displayed, and on the right side, a special figure 1 hold icon a2 corresponding to the hold with the second hold order is displayed. It is displayed. The special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 are both normal hold display modes shown in FIG. 419 (a).

  FIG. 460 (b) shows a state in which the next special figure 1 variable game is started and the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. It is informed that the special figure variation display is being executed on the special figure 1 display device 212 and that the special figure 1 variable game is being executed in the fourth symbol display area t1 for special figure 1. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is being executed.

  In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, one hold having the first holding order is consumed, and only the leftmost LED is lit on the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 1 hold is held. It is reported that there is one. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, the special figure 1 hold icon on the left side disappears in correspondence with the digestion of the hold, and the special figure 1 hold icon on the right side moves to the left as a special figure 1 hold icon a1. Is displayed.

  FIG. 460 (c) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced from the original display area center to the upper left corner of the display area, and the effect display area 208d is enlarged to the display area center. ing.

  FIG. 460 (d) shows a state in which the button effect is started. In this example, the button effect is started before the reach effect is started. In the button effect of this example, first, an explanation display (tutorial display) of the button effect is performed. In the explanation display of the button effect, two images simulating the chance button 136 are arranged in the horizontal direction at the approximate center of the effect display area 208d, and the direction key 137 is displayed side by side on the right side. A character string “PUSH” is displayed at the top of each image imitating two chance buttons 136 and one direction key 137 aligned in a row, and the characters “Stop the design by button operation” are displayed above them. A column is displayed, and a character string “Ready” is displayed at the top thereof.

  FIG. 460 (e) shows a state in which the button effect is started. In the button effect in the present embodiment, two operation request images (button images) in a display form simulating the chance button 136 are displayed in a line in the horizontal direction at approximately the center of the effect display area 208d. An operation request image in a display form simulating the direction key 137 (hereinafter, may be referred to as “direction key image” or “button image”) is displayed. A character string “PUSH” is displayed at the top of each of the two button images and one directional key image, and one valid period common to the two button images and one directional key image is displayed above them. An image is displayed. The effective period image of this example has a rectangular frame shape that is long horizontally, and initially, the entire period of the effective period is indicated by a bar shape of a predetermined color within the frame shape. It is displayed so that it gradually shortens to the left. More specifically, the effective period image is a gauge image, and the display of the gauge image is a display that can suggest the remaining period of the effective operation period by performing an animation in which the length of the gauge is reduced. The display of the gauge image is a display capable of notifying that the operation valid period ends when the gauge length becomes zero. A character string “Go” is displayed at the top of the gauge image.

  FIG. 460 (f) shows a state where the player presses the direction key 137 first instead of the chance button 136 during execution of the button effect. The pressing of the direction key 137 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the direction key 137 in the figure. The effective period image reports a state in which the rod-shaped portion is somewhat shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is slightly shortened.

  FIG. 460 (g) shows a state in which a button image deletion animation (button deletion animation) is being executed during the execution of the button effect. When the direction key 137 is first pressed and received, the right button image (direction key image) is deleted by the button deletion animation. In the middle of the button erase animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. Also, the character string “PUSH” at the top of the button image to be erased changes to an effect image in the middle of the button erase animation, and then disappears. Thereby, it is informed in an easy-to-understand manner that the number of necessary operations has decreased by one. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 460 (h) shows a second effect executed after the button erase animation while the button effect is being executed. In the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed in a reduced scale, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c when the direction key 137 is pressed. In the second effect, an image imitating “decoration 3” is displayed in the area where the direction key image on the right side of the effect display area 208d was displayed. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 460 (i) shows a state in which the player presses the chance button 136 as the second button operation during execution of the button effect. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 460 (j) shows a state in which the button erasing animation is being executed while the button effect is being executed. When the chance button 136 is pressed, the button image on the left side is erased by the button erase animation. In the middle of the erase animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. Also, the character string “PUSH” at the top of the button image to be erased changes to an effect image in the middle of the button erase animation, and then disappears. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 460 (k) shows a second effect executed after the button erase animation while the button effect is being executed. In the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed in a reduced size, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a when the chance button 136 is pressed. In the second effect, an image imitating “decoration 3” is displayed in the area where the button image on the left side of the effect display area 208d is displayed. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 460 (l) shows a special effect performed during the execution of the second effect during the operation effective period. In the effect, the display mode of the button image displayed in the center of the effect display area 208b is changed from “normal” to “vibration + rotation”. Further, as a display mode of the gauge display, for example, the gauge color of “blue” is changed to “yellow”. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is further shortened. As described above, there is a case where the change can be notified by changing the display mode of the button image or the gauge image.

  FIG. 460 (m) shows a state in which the player presses the chance button 136 as the third button operation during execution of the button effect. The button mode of the chance button 136 is the same as the display mode of the button image displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 460 (n) shows a state in which the button erasing animation is being executed while the button effect is being executed. When the chance button 136 is pressed for the third time, the central button image is deleted by the button deletion animation. In the middle of the erase animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. Also, the character string “PUSH” at the top of the button image to be erased changes to an effect image in the middle of the button erase animation, and then disappears. In parallel with the button erase animation, a gauge image erase animation is executed in which the effect image disappears after the effect image is displayed instead of the gauge display.

  FIG. 460 (o) shows the first effect executed after the second effect while the button effect is being executed. The first effect notifies the result of the button operation. In this example, as the first effect, the character string “SP” is displayed large between the two “decorations 3” displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d. Thereby, the player is notified that the reach production will develop into SP (super) reach.

  FIG. 460 (p) to FIG. 461 (a) show the SP reach effect. FIG. 460 (p) shows a state in which the SP reach effect is started, and “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c displayed in a reduced size in the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d. . A character string “subjugation reach” is displayed at the top of the effect display area 208d. An image in which two samurai are facing each other is displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d. FIG. 460 (q) shows a state in which the deca button is displayed during the SP reach production and the pressing of the chance button 136 is urged. In FIG. 460 (r), the chance button 136 is pressed, the SP reach production proceeds to the next scene, and an image of the warrior shouting “It's a game!” Is displayed. In this example, the display mode of the button image is “signal + rotation”, while the button mode of the chance button 136 is “normal”. Thus, the display mode of the button image and the button mode of the chance button 136 may be different. FIG. 461 (a) following FIG. 460 (r) shows a state where the samurai has won the battle. “Decoration 3” is displayed in the center of the screen, and the figure of the samurai who wins to the right and the figure of the samurai who loses to the left are displayed. The character string “Win” is displayed at the top of the screen.

  FIG. 461 (b) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c are enlarged and displayed from the reduced display to the central portion of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. “Decoration 3” temporarily stops in the left symbol display area 208a, “decoration 3” temporarily stops in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “decoration 3” temporarily stops in the right symbol display area 208c.

FIG. 461 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. On the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure “Special figure A” is stopped and displayed. In the fourth symbol display area t1 for special figure 1, an “A” image indicating that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is winning is displayed. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. .
(Example 10)

  Next, a special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, a characteristic effect performed from the start of the button effect to the start of the first second effect will be described. FIG. 462 (a) shows a state where the button effect is started. In the button effect in the present embodiment, three operation request images (button images) in a display form simulating the chance button 136 are displayed in a line in the horizontal direction at substantially the center of the effect display area 208d. A character string “PUSH!” Is displayed at the top of the three button images, and a character string “Go” is displayed at the top. One effective period image common to the three button images is displayed below the three button images. The effective period image of this example has a rectangular frame shape that is long horizontally, and initially, the entire period of the effective period is indicated by a bar shape of a predetermined color within the frame shape. It is displayed to gradually shorten to the right. More specifically, the effective period image is a gauge image, and the display of the gauge image is a display that can suggest the remaining period of the effective operation period by performing an animation in which the length of the gauge is reduced. The display of the gauge image is a display capable of notifying that the operation valid period ends when the gauge length becomes zero.

  FIG. 462 (b) shows a state where the player presses the direction key 137 instead of the chance button 136 during execution of the button effect. The pressing of the direction key 137 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the direction key 137 in the figure. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is somewhat shortened in the right direction and the operation effective period is slightly shortened.

  FIG. 462 (c) shows a state in which button erasure animation is being executed during execution of the button effect. If the direction button 137 is pressed instead of the chance button 136, the left button image is erased by the button erase animation. In the middle of the erase animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 462 (d) shows the second effect executed after the button erase animation while the button effect is being executed. As a second effect, an image of the head of the youth is displayed at the position where the left button image was displayed. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the image imitating the chance button 136 is displayed as the button image, the second effect is executed even when the direction key 137 other than the chance button 136 is pressed. It has become.
(Example 11)

  Next, the special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 11 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 463 (a) to FIG. 463 (r) show special figure variation games in this order in time series. In the figure showing the special figure variation game in time series, the passage of time between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures.

  FIG. 463 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is finished. On the special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214, the first off symbol “special figure I” is stopped and displayed. In the fourth symbol display areas t1 and t2 for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, an “x” image indicating that the result of the special figure variable game is out of place is displayed. "Decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 8" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the special figure variable game is off.

  In addition, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is lit with two LEDs on the left side to notify that there are two special figure 1 holds. All the special figure 2 hold lamps 220 are turned off, and it is informed that there is no special figure 2 hold. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, a special figure 1 hold icon a1 corresponding to the hold with the first hold order is displayed, and on the right side, a special figure 1 hold icon a2 corresponding to the hold with the second hold order is displayed. It is displayed. The special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 are both normal hold display modes shown in FIG. 419 (a).

  FIG. 463 (b) shows a state in which the next special figure 1 variable game is started and the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. It is informed that the special figure variation display is being executed on the special figure 1 display device 212 and that the special figure 1 variable game is being executed in the fourth symbol display area t1 for special figure 1. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is being executed.

  In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, one hold having the first holding order is consumed, and only the leftmost LED is lit on the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 1 hold is held. It is reported that there is one. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, the special figure 1 hold icon on the left side disappears in correspondence with the digestion of the hold, and the special figure 1 hold icon on the right side moves to the left as a special figure 1 hold icon a1. Is displayed.

  FIG. 463 (c) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced from the original display area center to the upper left corner of the display area, and the effect display area 208d is enlarged to the display area center. ing.

  FIG. 463 (d) shows a state in which the button effect is started. In this example, the button effect is started before the reach effect is started. In the button effect of this example, first, an explanation display (tutorial display) of the button effect is performed. In the explanation display of the button effect, two images simulating the chance button 136 are arranged in the horizontal direction at the approximate center of the effect display area 208d, and the direction key 137 is displayed side by side on the right side. A character string “PUSH” is displayed at the top of each image imitating two chance buttons 136 and one direction key 137 aligned in a row, and the characters “Stop the design by button operation” are displayed above them. A column is displayed, and a character string “Ready” is displayed at the top thereof.

  FIG. 463 (e) shows a state where the button effect is started. In the button effect in the present embodiment, two operation request images (button images) in a display form simulating the chance button 136 are displayed in a line in the horizontal direction at approximately the center of the effect display area 208d. An operation request image in a display form simulating the direction key 137 (hereinafter, may be referred to as “direction key image” or “button image”) is displayed. A character string “PUSH” is displayed at the top of each of the two button images and one directional key image, and one valid period common to the two button images and one directional key image is displayed above them. An image is displayed. The effective period image of this example has a rectangular frame shape that is long horizontally, and initially, the entire period of the effective period is indicated by a bar shape of a predetermined color within the frame shape. It is displayed so that it gradually shortens to the left. More specifically, the effective period image is a gauge image, and the display of the gauge image is a display that can suggest the remaining period of the effective operation period by performing an animation in which the length of the gauge is reduced. The display of the gauge image is a display capable of notifying that the operation valid period ends when the gauge length becomes zero. A character string “Go” is displayed at the top of the gauge image.

  FIG. 463 (f) shows a state where the player first presses the chance button 136 instead of the direction key 137 during execution of the button effect. The pressing of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure. The effective period image reports a state in which the rod-shaped portion is somewhat shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is slightly shortened.

  FIG. 463 (g) shows a state in which a button image deletion animation (button deletion animation) is being executed during the execution of the button effect. When the chance button 136 is pressed for the first time and there is a reception, the button image on the left side is deleted by the button deletion animation. In the middle of the button erase animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. Also, the character string “PUSH” at the top of the button image to be erased changes to an effect image in the middle of the button erase animation, and then disappears. Thereby, it is informed in an easy-to-understand manner that the number of necessary operations has decreased by one. Further, the hold icon a1 is partially hidden by the effect image instead of the button image. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 463 (h) shows a second effect executed after the button erase animation while the button effect is being executed. In the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed in a reduced size, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a when the chance button 136 is pressed. In the second effect, an image imitating “decoration 3” is displayed in the area where the button image on the left side of the effect display area 208d is displayed. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 463 (i) shows a state in which the bar-like portion of the effective period image is further shortened in the left direction to notify that the operation effective period during execution of the button effect has decreased to about half. ing.

  FIG. 463 (j) shows a state where an empty frame image having no gauge portion is displayed indicating that the operation effective period has expired and the remaining period of the gauge display is zero.

  In FIG. 463 (k), the button erase animation starts when the next button operation is not performed within the operation effective period after the first chance button 136 is pressed and the operation effective period expires. It shows the state that was done. In the button deletion animation, the button image displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d and the direction key image displayed on the right side thereof are deleted. In the middle of the button erase animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. Also, the character string “PUSH” at the top of the button image to be erased changes to an effect image in the middle of the button erase animation, and then disappears. In this way, the display mode of the button erase animation may be changed depending on whether or not the button is operated during the operation valid period.

  FIG. 463 (l) shows a third effect (for example, corresponding to the first effect in Example 2-1) executed after the second effect while the button effect is being executed. In the third effect of this example, the decorative symbols are forcibly displayed. As a third effect, “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c among the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c displayed in the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d. Since “decoration 3” has already been temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, the reach effect is started from this point. An image imitating “decoration 3” is displayed in the area where the button image on the left side of the effect display area 208d is displayed, and an image imitating “decoration 3” in the area where the right direction key image is displayed. In the area where the center button image is displayed, an image simulating the decorative symbol variation display is displayed as an animation. In this example, when the number of button operations within the operation effective period is less than the number of button images displayed in the effect display area 208d, the decorative display variable display is simulated as the third effect in the effect display area 208d. The displayed image is displayed. Thereby, the player is notified that the reach production will develop into SP (super) reach.

  FIG. 463 (m) to FIG. 463 (p) show the SP reach effect. FIG. 463 (m) shows a state in which the SP reach effect is started, and “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c displayed in a reduced size in the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d. . A character string “subjugation reach” is displayed at the top of the effect display area 208d. An image in which two samurai are facing each other is displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d. FIG. 463 (n) shows a state in which the deca button is displayed during the SP reach production and the pressing of the chance button 136 is prompted. In FIG. 463 (o), the chance button 136 is pressed, the SP reach production advances to the next scene, and an image of the samurai yelling “It's a game!” Is displayed. FIG. 463 (p) shows a state in which the samurai has won the battle. “Decoration 3” is displayed in the center of the screen, and the figure of the samurai who wins to the right and the figure of the samurai who loses to the left are displayed. The character string “Win” is displayed at the top of the screen.

  FIG. 463 (q) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are enlarged and displayed from the reduced display to the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. “Decoration 3” temporarily stops in the left symbol display area 208a, “decoration 3” temporarily stops in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “decoration 3” temporarily stops in the right symbol display area 208c.

FIG. 463 (r) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. On the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure “Special figure A” is stopped and displayed. In the fourth symbol display area t1 for special figure 1, an “A” image indicating that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is winning is displayed. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. .
(Example 12)

  Next, the special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 12 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 464 (a) to FIG. 464 (n) show special figure variable games in this order in time series. In the figure showing the special figure variation game in time series, the passage of time between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures.

  FIG. 464 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is finished. On the special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214, the first off symbol “special figure I” is stopped and displayed. In the fourth symbol display areas t1 and t2 for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, an “x” image indicating that the result of the special figure variable game is out of place is displayed. "Decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 8" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the special figure variable game is off.

  In addition, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is lit with two LEDs on the left side to notify that there are two special figure 1 holds. All the special figure 2 hold lamps 220 are turned off, and it is informed that there is no special figure 2 hold. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, a special figure 1 hold icon a1 corresponding to the hold with the first hold order is displayed, and on the right side, a special figure 1 hold icon a2 corresponding to the hold with the second hold order is displayed. It is displayed. The special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 are both normal hold display modes shown in FIG. 419 (a).

  FIG. 464 (b) shows a state in which the next special figure 1 variable game is started and the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. It is informed that the special figure variation display is being executed on the special figure 1 display device 212 and that the special figure 1 variable game is being executed in the fourth symbol display area t1 for special figure 1. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is being executed.

  In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, one hold having the first holding order is consumed, and only the leftmost LED is lit on the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 1 hold is held. It is reported that there is one. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, the special figure 1 hold icon on the left side disappears in correspondence with the digestion of the hold, and the special figure 1 hold icon on the right side moves to the left as a special figure 1 hold icon a1. Is displayed.

  FIG. 464 (c) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced from the center of the original display area to the upper left corner of the display area, and the effect display area 208d is enlarged to the center of the display area. ing.

  FIG. 464 (d) shows a state in which the button effect is started. In this example, the button effect is started before the reach effect is started. In the button effect of this example, first, an explanation display (tutorial display) of the button effect is performed. In the explanation display of the button effect, two images simulating the chance button 136 are arranged in the horizontal direction at the approximate center of the effect display area 208d, and the direction key 137 is displayed side by side on the right side. A character string “PUSH” is displayed at the top of each image imitating two chance buttons 136 and one direction key 137 aligned in a row, and the characters “Stop the design by button operation” are displayed above them. A column is displayed, and a character string “Ready” is displayed at the top thereof.

  FIG. 464 (e) shows a state where the button effect is started. In the button effect in the present embodiment, two operation request images (button images) in a display form simulating the chance button 136 are displayed in a line in the horizontal direction at approximately the center of the effect display area 208d. An operation request image in a display form simulating the direction key 137 (hereinafter, may be referred to as “direction key image” or “button image”) is displayed. A character string “PUSH” is displayed at the top of each of the two button images and one directional key image, and one valid period common to the two button images and one directional key image is displayed above them. An image is displayed. The effective period image of this example has a rectangular frame shape that is long horizontally, and initially, the entire period of the effective period is indicated by a bar shape of a predetermined color within the frame shape. It is displayed so that it gradually shortens to the left. More specifically, the effective period image is a gauge image, and the display of the gauge image is a display that can suggest the remaining period of the effective operation period by performing an animation in which the length of the gauge is reduced. The display of the gauge image is a display capable of notifying that the operation valid period ends when the gauge length becomes zero. A character string “Go” is displayed at the top of the gauge image.

  FIG. 464 (f) shows a state in which the player first presses the chance button 136 instead of the direction key 137 during execution of the button effect. The pressing of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure. The effective period image reports a state in which the rod-shaped portion is somewhat shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is slightly shortened.

  FIG. 464 (g) shows a state in which a button image deletion animation (button deletion animation) is being executed during execution of the button effect. When the chance button 136 is pressed for the first time and there is a reception, the button image on the left side is deleted by the button deletion animation. In the middle of the button erase animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. Also, the character string “PUSH” at the top of the button image to be erased changes to an effect image in the middle of the button erase animation, and then disappears. Thereby, it is informed in an easy-to-understand manner that the number of necessary operations has decreased by one. Further, the hold icon a1 is partially hidden by the effect image instead of the button image. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 464 (h) shows a second effect executed after the button erase animation while the button effect is being executed. In the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed in a reduced size, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a when the chance button 136 is pressed. In the second effect, an image imitating “decoration 3” is displayed in the area where the button image on the left side of the effect display area 208d is displayed. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 464 (i) shows a state in which the bar-like portion of the effective period image is further shortened in the left direction to notify that the operation effective period during execution of the button effect has decreased to about half. ing.

  FIG. 464 (j) shows a state in which button erasure animation is being executed during execution of the button effect. In this example, when the button operation is not performed for a predetermined time within the operation effective period, the button erasure animation is executed as an effect based on the button operation when the predetermined time elapses. As a result, the right button image (direction key image) is erased by the button erase animation. In the middle of the button erase animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. Also, the character string “PUSH” at the top of the button image to be erased changes to an effect image in the middle of the button erase animation, and then disappears. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 464 (k) shows a second effect that is forcibly executed after the button erase animation while the button effect is being executed. In the second effect of this example, the symbols are forcibly displayed. As a second effect, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c among the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c displayed in the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d. Since “decoration 3” has already been temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, the reach effect is started from this point. An image imitating “decoration 3” is displayed in the area where the button image on the right side of the effect display area 208d was displayed. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 464 (l) shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136 for the second time during the execution of the button effect. As shown in FIG. 464 (j), the button erase animation is executed once without performing the button operation, and then the second effect is executed. However, when the operation valid period remains, the remaining buttons are displayed. A new button operation for image display may be performed to advance to the next button erase animation. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 464 (m) shows a state in which button erasure animation is being executed during execution of the button effect. When the chance button 136 is pressed, the central button image is deleted by the button deletion animation. In the middle of the erase animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. Also, the character string “PUSH” at the top of the button image to be erased changes to an effect image in the middle of the button erase animation, and then disappears. In parallel with the button erase animation, a gauge image erase animation is executed in which the effect image disappears after the effect image is displayed instead of the gauge display.

FIG. 464 (n) shows the first effect executed after the second effect while the button effect is being executed. The first effect notifies the result of the button operation. In this example, as the first effect, the character string “SP” is displayed large between the two “decorations 3” displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d. Thereby, the player is notified that the reach production will develop into SP (super) reach.
The above-described Examples 9 to 12 are summarized as follows.

  The pachinko machine 100 has, for example, a chance button 136 and a direction key 137 as a plurality of operation means provided at least at positions where the player can operate. At least one of the plurality of operation means is, for example, a chance button 136 as the first operation means, and at least one of the plurality of operation means is, for example, a direction key 137 as the second operation means. is there. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 includes, for example, an effect display area 208d as display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of displays. At least one of the plurality of types of display is, for example, a chance button image display as the first display, and at least one of the plurality of types of display is, for example, a direction key image display as the second display. It is. The first display is a button image display including at least a display suggesting the chance button 136, and the second display is a display including at least a direction key image display indicating the direction key 137. The first display is a display that can be started at least during the execution period of the button effect as the first period, for example, and the second display is also a display that can be started at least during the first period.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 includes, for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 as an effect unit capable of executing at least a plurality of types of effects. At least one of the multiple types of effects is, for example, an effect of deleting the button image and displaying another image as the first effect, and at least one of the multiple types of effects is the second effect As an effect, for example, the direction key image is deleted and another image is displayed. The first effect is an effect that can be started at least in connection with the pressing of the chance button 136, for example, and the second effect can be started at least in connection with the pressing of the direction key 137, for example. Production.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having this configuration, there are a plurality of operation means, the operation means and the production are in a corresponding relationship, and the production order is determined by the operation order of the plurality of operation means. Can provide a gaming table with In addition, there are cases where an effect can be selected corresponding to the operation means.

  The chance button 136 has a second period, for example, that at least the reception regarding the operation of the chance button 136 is valid during the operation effective period, and the direction key 137 is that the reception regarding the operation of the direction key 137 is at least effective during the operation effective period. Become. The execution period of the button effect is a period including at least a part of the operation effective period. When the chance button 136 is operated during the operation effective period, the decorative symbol display device 208 can start at least the effect of deleting the button image and displaying another image, and the direction key 137 is operated during the operation effective period. If it has been done, it is possible to start at least an effect of deleting the direction key image and displaying another image.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, since the operation effective periods of the plurality of operation means are the same, the interest of the game may be improved by operating the plurality of operation means in one operation effective period.

  In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 deletes the direction key image when the chance button 136 is operated before the operation of the direction key 137 during the operation effective period as a first condition. It is possible to start the effect of erasing the button image and displaying another image before the effect of displaying the image of the image, and as a second condition, the direction before the chance button 136 is operated during the operation valid period When the key 137 is operated, it is possible to start the effect of deleting the direction key image and displaying another image rather than the effect of deleting the button image and displaying another image.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, an effect corresponding to the previously operated operation means is performed first, so that the player may be able to select the appearance order of the first effect and the second effect. is there.

  If only the chance button 136 is operated before the direction key 137 is operated during the operation valid period, the decorative symbol display device 208 executes only the effect of deleting the button image and displaying another image. If only the direction key 137 is operated before the chance button 136 is operated during the operation valid period, only the effect of deleting the direction key image and displaying another image is executed. Is possible.

  The effect display area 208d can at least display a chance button image that is, for example, 2 as the first number, and can at least display a direction key image that is, for example, 1 as the second number. In addition, at least one of the multiple types of effects is, for example, an effect of forcibly displaying decorative symbols (see FIG. 463) as the third effect, and an effect of forcibly displaying decorative symbols is the third condition. This is an effect that can be executed at least when the chance button 136 is operated twice, which is the first number, and the direction key 137 is operated once, which is the second number.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, since there is a third effect as an effect that appears by a plurality of operations, and there are a plurality of operation means, the first operation means and the second operation means are necessary. In some cases, an easy-to-understand notification can be made by matching the number of operations and the number of displays.

  The third condition may be satisfied when the operation valid period ends. A third effect may occur due to the expiration of the operation valid period. The third effect may be a configuration that is not performed when the third condition is not satisfied at the end of the operation effective period.

  The chance button 136 can take at least a plurality of states, for example, a plurality of button modes (“normal”, “vibration”, “vibration + rotation”, “light emission”, etc.), and the like. At least one of the first states is, for example, the button mode is “normal”, and at least one of the plurality of states is the second state, for example, the button mode is “vibration”. The second state is different from the first state. The chance button image can be displayed in at least one of a plurality of display modes, such as “normal”, “vibration”, “vibration + rotation”, “deca button display”, and the like. One is, for example, “normal” as the first display mode, and at least one of the plurality of display modes is, for example, “vibration” as the second display mode, and the second display mode is This is a display mode different from the first display mode. The first display mode is a display mode corresponding to at least the first state, and the second display mode is a display mode corresponding to at least the second state.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, there are cases where variations can be increased in the state of the button and the display mode according to the display mode that matches the state of the first operation means.

  The first operation means may be a chance button 136 that can rotate, vibrate, and emit light, and the second operation means may be a direction key 137 or a combination of other operation means. The operation means can be arbitrarily combined, and both the first operation means and the second operation means may be configured to take a plurality of states.

  Moreover, the structure corresponding to a 2nd state may be sufficient as a 1st display aspect, and the structure corresponding to a 1st state may be sufficient as a 2nd display aspect.

  At least one of the plurality of types of display is, for example, a display of an effective period image as the third display, and the display of the effective period image can at least suggest an operation effective period,

  The effect display game 208d can at least display an effective period image that is, for example, 1 as the third number.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the player can know that the operation is valid for a common operation by using one gauge display for a plurality of button displays (requests for multiple button operations). There are cases where it is possible to easily notify. The third display may be plural.
(Example 13)

  Next, the special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 13 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 465 (a) to FIG. 468 (c) show, in this order, the special figure variable game and subsequent jackpot game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In the diagram showing the special figure variable game and the subsequent jackpot game in time series, the time course between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures.

  FIG. 465 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game has ended. The special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 both stop and display the first special symbol “Special figure I”. In the fourth symbol display area t1 for special figure 1, an “x” image indicating that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place is displayed, and in the fourth symbol display area t2 for special figure 2, the fluctuation of special figure 2 is displayed. An “x” image indicating that the game result is out of place is displayed. “Decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 8” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c of the ornament symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the special symbol variable game is out of play.

  In addition, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is lit with two LEDs on the left side to notify that there are two special figure 1 holds. All the special figure 2 hold lamps 220 are turned off, and it is informed that there is no special figure 2 hold. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, a special figure 1 hold icon a1 corresponding to the hold with the first hold order is displayed, and on the right side, a special figure 1 hold icon a2 corresponding to the hold with the second hold order is displayed. It is displayed. The special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 are both normal hold display modes shown in FIG. 419 (a).

  FIGS. 465 (b) to (f) show from the start to the end of the special figure 1 variable game. FIG. 465 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started. The special figure variation display is started on the special figure 1 display device 212, and a "-" image indicating that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed is displayed in the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area t1. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, one hold having the first holding order is consumed, and only the leftmost LED is lit on the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 1 hold is held. It is reported that there is one. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, the special figure 1 hold icon on the left side disappears in correspondence with the digestion of the hold, and the special figure 1 hold icon on the right side moves to the left as a special figure 1 hold icon a1. Is displayed.

  FIG. 465 (c) shows a state in which a game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 during execution of the special figure 1 variable game, and the holding of the special figure 1 is increased by one. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is lit with two LEDs from the left to inform that there are two holds in the special figure 1. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, the special figure 1 hold icon a2 is displayed on the right side of the left special figure 1 hold icon a1 corresponding to the increase in the hold. The special figure 1 hold icon a2 related to the hold of the second special figure 1 is not displayed as a normal display, but is displayed as an image imitating the chance button 136 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a “button hold icon”). The pre-reading notice that suggests the jackpot of the special figure 1 variable game related to the suspension is given at a predetermined reliability. The button hold icon is also an image display that prompts the player to press the chance button 136, and when the image appears, an effect by the button hold icon is started. In the effect by the button hold icon, the operation valid period using the gauge display or the like is not displayed. The operation effective period in the effect by the button holding icon is ended when the special figure variable game related to the button holding icon is started unless the chance button 136 is pressed.

  FIG. 465 (d) shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136 during the execution of the special figure 1 variable game. The pressing of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure. At the time of pressing the chance button 136, no other button effect is started, so that the reception of the press is used for the effect by the button hold icon.

  FIG. 465 (e) shows a state in which the display mode of the special figure 1 hold icon a2 is changed from the button hold icon image to the normal display image when the chance button 136 is pressed. The effect by the button hold icon here is an effect that the button hold icon image is changed to the normal display image and the prefetch notice notification is found to be a false notification.

  FIG. 465 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game has ended. The special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 both stop and display the first special symbol “Special figure I”. In the fourth symbol display area t1 for special figure 1, an “x” image indicating that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 8-decoration 2-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the special-figure variable game is off.

  FIG. 465 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started. The special figure variation display is started on the special figure 1 display device 212, and a "-" image indicating that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed is displayed in the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area t1. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, one hold having the first holding order is consumed, and only the leftmost LED is lit on the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 1 hold is held. It is reported that there is one. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, the special figure 1 hold icon on the left side disappears in correspondence with the digestion of the hold, and the special figure 1 hold icon on the right side moves to the left as a special figure 1 hold icon a1. Is displayed.

  FIG. 465 (h) shows a state in which a game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 during execution of the special figure 1 variable game, and the holding of the special figure 1 has increased by one. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is lit with two LEDs from the left to inform that there are two holds in the special figure 1. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, the special figure 1 hold icon a2 is displayed on the right side of the left special figure 1 hold icon a1 corresponding to the increase in the hold. The special figure 1 hold icon a2 related to the hold of the second special figure 1 is displayed as a button hold icon instead of the normal display, and the special figure 1 variable game related to the hold with a predetermined reliability is displayed. A pre-reading notice that suggests a big hit is given. In addition, the production by the button hold icon is started before the button production. The effective period image is not displayed in the effect by the button hold icon. The operation effective period of the effect by the button hold icon ends, for example, before the special figure variable game related to the hold is started.

  FIG. 465 (i) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, and the decorative symbol variation display continues in the middle right symbol display areas 208b and 208c.

  FIG. 465 (j) shows that “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c, and the ornament symbol is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. Fluctuation display continues, and the character string “reach” is displayed in the center, and the reach effect is started.

  FIG. 465 (k) to FIG. 466 (c) show a state where the button effect of the present embodiment is performed during the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game. In the button effects of the present embodiment, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a predetermined lottery process for button effects prior to the start of the special figure variable game, and various effects that prompt the user to press the chance button 136 according to the lottery result. I do. In this embodiment, the case where the button effect is executed after the start of the reach effect is shown.

  FIG. 465 (k) shows a state in which the button effect is started during the reach effect. In the button effect of this example, first, an explanation display (tutorial display) of the button effect is performed. The left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and displayed from the center of the original display area to the upper left corner of the display area, and the effect display area 208d is enlarged to the center of the display area. In the explanation display of the button effect, three images simulating the chance button 136 are displayed in a line in the horizontal direction in the approximate center of the effect display area 208d. In the upper part of the image simulating the three chance buttons 136, a character string “3 sets of SP reach development!” Is displayed, and a character string “Ready” is displayed above it.

  FIG. 465 (l) shows a state where the button effect is started. In the button effect in the present embodiment, three operation request images (button images) in a display form simulating the chance button 136 are displayed in a line in the horizontal direction at substantially the center of the effect display area 208d. A character string “PUSH!” Is displayed at the top of the three button images, and a character string “Go” is displayed at the top. One effective period image common to the three button images is displayed below the three button images. The effective period image of this example has a rectangular frame shape that is long horizontally, and initially, the entire period of the effective period is indicated by a bar shape of a predetermined color within the frame shape. It is displayed so that it gradually shortens to the left. More specifically, the effective period image is a gauge image, and the display of the gauge image is a display that can suggest the remaining period of the effective operation period by performing an animation in which the length of the gauge is reduced. The display of the gauge image is a display capable of notifying that the operation valid period ends when the gauge length becomes zero. From the state shown in FIG. 465 (l) to the state shown in FIG. 466 (c), the effect by the button hold icon and the button effect are overlapped.

  FIG. 465 (m) shows a state where the player presses the chance button 136 in a state where the effect by the button hold icon and the button effect are executed in an overlapping manner. The pressing of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure. The effective period image reports a state in which the rod-shaped portion is somewhat shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is slightly shortened.

  FIG. 465 (n) shows a state in which the button erasing animation is being executed while the button effect is being executed. When the first press of the chance button 136 is received, the button image on the left side is deleted by the button deletion animation. In the middle of the erase animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In this example, when the effect by the button hold icon and the button effect are executed in an overlapping manner and the chance button 136 is pressed, the button effect is preferentially processed. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 465 (o) shows a second effect executed next to the button erase animation during the execution of the effect by the button holding icon and the button effect. As a second effect, a panda image is displayed at the position where the left button image was displayed. In the second effect, a part of the center button image and a part of the effective period image are hidden by the panda image. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 465 (p) shows a state in which the second effect in the button effect is being executed. In the second effect, the panda image is reduced and displayed, and the central button image and the effective period image are all visible by the reduced display of the panda image. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 465 (q) shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136 for the second time during the execution of the effect by the button hold icon and the button effect. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 465 (r) shows a state in which the button erase animation is being executed during the execution of the button hold icon effect and the button effect. When the chance button 136 is pressed for the second time, the central button image is deleted by the button deletion animation. In the middle of the erase animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 466 (a) shows a state in which the second effect is executed after the button erase animation following FIG. 465 (r). As a second effect, the Echigoya image is displayed at the position where the central button image was displayed. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 466 (b) shows the execution state of the second effect in the button effect. Since the Echigoya image different from the panda image for the left button image is displayed at the position of the center button image, the “three” displayed in the button effect explanation display regardless of whether or not the player presses the chance button 136 for the third time. The SP Reach Development! "Condition is no longer met. For this reason, the second effect in which the right button image is deleted and the Echigoya image is displayed instead of waiting for the player to press the chance button 136 even if the operation valid period remains is executed.

  FIG. 466 (c) shows the first effect executed after the second effect while the button effect is being executed. The first effect notifies the result of the button operation. In this example, as a first effect, an Echigoya image is displayed largely on the center left side of the effect display area 208d, and a character string “Sorry!” Is displayed on the center right side. As a result, the player is notified that the reach effect has not been developed into SP (super) reach. "Decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b among the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c displayed in the upper left corner of the image display area of the decoration symbol display device 208, and the left middle right symbol display. In the areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 3” is temporarily displayed.

  FIG. 466 (d) following FIG. 466 (c) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c are enlarged from the reduced display to the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and are normally displayed. ing. “Decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, “Decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “Decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 466 (e) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the first special symbol "Special figure I" is stopped and displayed. In the fourth symbol display area t1 for special figure 1, an “x” image indicating that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place is displayed. "Decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the special figure 1 variable game is out of play. .

  FIGS. 466 (f) to (j) show from the start to the end of the special figure 1 variable game. FIG. 466 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started. The special figure variation display is started on the special figure 1 display device 212, and a "-" image indicating that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed is displayed in the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area t1. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, one hold having the first holding order is consumed, and only the leftmost LED is lit on the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 1 hold is held. It is reported that there is one. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, the special figure 1 hold icon on the left side disappears in correspondence with the digestion of the hold, and the button hold icon image adjacent to the right moves to the left and is displayed as the special figure 1 hold icon a1. Is done. Production with the button hold icon is ongoing.

  FIG. 466 (g) shows a state in which a game ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230 during execution of the special figure 1 variable game, and the holding of the special figure 1 is increased by one. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is lit with two LEDs from the left to inform that there are two holds in the special figure 1. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, the special figure 1 hold icon a2 is displayed on the right side of the left special figure 1 hold icon a1 corresponding to the increase in the hold. In this example, the second special figure 1 hold icon a2 is regulated because the button hold icon is already displayed in the first hold even if the button hold icon is scheduled to appear in the pre-reading notice lottery. The display mode is the normal display mode.

  FIG. 466 (h) shows a state where the player presses the chance button 136 during the execution of the special figure 1 variable game. The pressing of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure. At the time of pressing the chance button 136, no other button effect is started, so that the reception of the press is used for the effect by the button hold icon.

  FIG. 466 (i) shows a state in which the display mode of the special figure 1 hold icon a1 is changed from the button hold icon image to an image imitating the head of a young man when the chance button 136 is pressed. The effect by the button hold icon in this example is changed from the button hold icon image to an image imitating the head of a young man, and a predetermined prefetch notice is performed.

  FIG. 466 (j) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. The special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 both stop and display the first special symbol “Special figure I”. In the fourth symbol display areas t1 and t2 for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, an “x” image indicating that the result of the special figure variable game is out of place is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 8-decoration 2-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the special-figure variable game is off.

  FIG. 466 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started. The special figure variation display is started on the special figure 1 display device 212, and a "-" image indicating that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed is displayed in the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area t1. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, one hold having the first holding order is consumed, and only the leftmost LED is lit on the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 1 hold is held. It is reported that there is one. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, the special figure 1 hold icon on the left side disappears in correspondence with the digestion of the hold, and the special figure 1 hold icon on the right side moves to the left as a special figure 1 hold icon a1. Is displayed.

  FIG. 466 (l) shows a state in which a game ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230 during execution of the special figure 1 variable game, and the holding of the special figure 1 is increased by one. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is lit with two LEDs from the left to inform that there are two holds in the special figure 1. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, the special figure 1 hold icon a2 is displayed on the right side of the left special figure 1 hold icon a1 corresponding to the increase in the hold. The special figure 1 hold icon a2 related to the hold of the second special figure 1 is displayed as a button hold icon instead of the normal display, and the special figure 1 variable game related to the hold with a predetermined reliability is displayed. A pre-reading notice that suggests a big hit is given. In addition, the production by the button hold icon is started.

  FIG. 466 (m) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a and the decorative symbol variation display continues in the middle right symbol display areas 208b and 208c.

  FIG. 466 (n) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c, and a decoration symbol is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. Fluctuation display continues, and the character string “reach” is displayed in the center, and the reach effect is started.

  FIG. 466 (o) to FIG. 467 (n) show a state where the button effect of the present embodiment is performed during the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game. In the button effects of the present embodiment, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a predetermined lottery process for button effects prior to the start of the special figure variable game, and various effects that prompt the user to press the chance button 136 according to the lottery result. I do. In this embodiment, the case where the button effect is executed after the start of the reach effect is shown.

  FIG. 466 (o) shows a state in which the button effect is started during the reach effect. In the button effect of this example, first, an explanation display (tutorial display) of the button effect is performed. The left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and displayed from the center of the original display area to the upper left corner of the display area, and the effect display area 208d is enlarged to the center of the display area. In the explanation display of the button effect, three images simulating the chance button 136 are displayed in a line in the horizontal direction in the approximate center of the effect display area 208d. In the upper part of the image simulating the three chance buttons 136, a character string “3 sets of SP reach development!” Is displayed, and a character string “Ready” is displayed above it.

  FIG. 466 (p) shows a state in which the button effect is started. In the button effect in the present embodiment, three operation request images (button images) in a display form simulating the chance button 136 are displayed in a line in the horizontal direction at substantially the center of the effect display area 208d. A character string “PUSH!” Is displayed at the top of the three button images, and a character string “Go” is displayed at the top. One effective period image common to the three button images is displayed below the three button images. The effective period image of this example has a rectangular frame shape that is long horizontally, and initially, the entire period of the effective period is indicated by a bar shape of a predetermined color within the frame shape. It is displayed so that it gradually shortens to the left. More specifically, the effective period image is a gauge image, and the display of the gauge image is a display that can suggest the remaining period of the effective operation period by performing an animation in which the length of the gauge is reduced. The display of the gauge image is a display capable of notifying that the operation valid period ends when the gauge length becomes zero. From the state shown in FIG. 466 (p) to the state shown in FIG. 467 (r), the effect by the button hold icon and the button effect are overlapped.

  FIG. 466 (q) shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136 in a state where the effect by the button holding icon and the button effect are executed in an overlapping manner. The pressing of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure. The effective period image reports a state in which the rod-shaped portion is somewhat shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is slightly shortened.

  FIG. 466 (r) shows a state in which the button erasing animation is being executed while the button effect is being executed. The display state of the special figure 1 hold icon a2 is changed from the button hold icon image to an image imitating the head of a young man with the first press of the chance button 136 as an opportunity. The effect by the button hold icon in this example is changed from the button hold icon image to an image imitating the head of a young man, and a predetermined prefetch notice is performed. In this example, if the chance button 136 is pressed when the effect by the button hold icon and the button effect are executed in duplicate, the effect by the button hold icon is processed with priority. Yes. The effective period image of the button effect notifies the state that the bar-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 467 (a) shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136 during execution of the button effect. The pressing of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 467 (b) shows a state in which a button image erasing animation (button erasing animation) is being executed during the execution of the button effect. When the first press of the chance button 136 is received, the button image on the left side is deleted by the button deletion animation. In the middle of the erase animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 467 (c) shows a second effect executed next to the button erase animation while the button effect is being executed. As a second effect, a panda image is displayed at the position where the left button image was displayed. In the second effect, a part of the center button image and a part of the effective period image are hidden by the panda image. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 467 (d) shows a state in which the second effect in the button effect is being executed. In the second effect, the panda image is reduced and displayed, and the central button image and the effective period image are all visible by the reduced display of the panda image. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 467 (e) shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136 for the second time during execution of the button effect. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 467 (f) shows a state in which button erasure animation is being executed during execution of the button effect. When the chance button 136 is pressed for the second time, the central button image is deleted by the button deletion animation. In the middle of the erase animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 467 (g) shows a state in which the second effect is executed after the button erase animation. As a second effect, a panda image is displayed at the position where the center button image was displayed. The panda image is displayed in such a size as to hide a part of the panda image on the left side and a part of the effective period image. In this way, another second effect may be hidden in the second effect. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 467 (h) shows a state in which the second effect in the button effect is being executed. In the second effect, the panda image at the center is reduced and displayed, and the panda image on the left side and the effective period image are all visible by the reduced display of the panda image. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 467 (i) shows a state where the display mode of the right button image in the effect display area 208d has changed from “normal” to “vibration + rotation”. Thus, the display mode of the button image may change during the operation effective period. Further, the button mode may be changed corresponding to the change in the display mode of the button image. As a result, it may be possible to give notice of the change.

  FIG. 467 (j) shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136 for the third time during execution of the button effect. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 467 (k) shows a state in which the button erasing animation is being executed while the button effect is being executed. When the chance button 136 is pressed for the third time, the right button image is erased by the button erase animation. In the middle of the button erase animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  In the button deletion animation shown in FIG. 467 (k), since the button image whose display mode is “vibration + rotation” is displayed, the button deletion animation for deleting the button image whose display mode is “normal” is displayed. A larger effect image is displayed. As described above, in the button effect of the present embodiment, the button image can be displayed in a plurality of animation modes, and a button image whose display mode is “vibration + rotation” is used as the first animation mode, or the first animation is displayed. As a second animation mode different from the mode, a button image whose display mode is “normal” can be used. By doing so, the button display itself may function as a notice due to the difference in the animation mode of the button display.

  FIG. 467 (l) shows a state in which the second effect is executed after the button erase animation. As a second effect, a panda image is displayed at the position where the right button image was displayed. The panda image is displayed in such a size as to hide a part of the central panda image. In this way, another second effect may be hidden in the second effect. Since the operation valid period has passed, no valid period image is displayed.

  FIG. 467 (m) shows a state where the second effect in the button effect is being executed. In the second effect, the right panda image is displayed in a reduced size, and three panda images of the same size are aligned in a horizontal row to notify that the condition of “Triple development and SP reach development!” Is satisfied. Has been.

  FIG. 467 (n) shows the first effect executed after the second effect while the button effect is being executed. The first effect notifies the result of the button operation. In this example, as the first effect, the same panda image as the character A shown in FIG. 424 (a) is displayed large on the center left side of the effect display area 208d, and the characters “SP development” are displayed on the center right side. Thereby, the player is notified that the reach production will develop into SP (super) reach. Further, in this example, the image of the hold icon is erased and not displayed until the SP reach effect shown in FIGS. 467 (o) to 467 (r) is finished from the first effect.

  FIG. 467 (o) to FIG. 467 (r) show the SP reach effect. FIG. 467 (o) shows a state in which the SP reach effect is started, and “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c which are reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d. . A character string “subjugation reach” is displayed at the top of the effect display area 208d. An image in which two samurai are facing each other is displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d. FIG. 467 (p) shows a state in which the deca button is displayed during the SP reach production and the pressing of the chance button 136 is urged. In FIG. 467 (q), the chance button 136 is pressed, the SP reach production advances to the next scene, and an image of the warrior shouting “It's a game!” Is displayed. FIG. 467 (r) shows a state where the samurai has won the battle. “Decoration 3” is displayed in the center of the screen, and the figure of the samurai who wins to the right and the figure of the samurai who loses to the left are displayed. The character string “Win” is displayed at the top of the screen.

  FIG. 468 (a) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are enlarged from the reduced display to the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and are normally displayed. “Decoration 3” temporarily stops in the left symbol display area 208a, “decoration 3” temporarily stops in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “decoration 3” temporarily stops in the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 468 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. On the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure “Special figure A” is stopped and displayed. In the fourth symbol display area t1 for special figure 1, an “A” image indicating that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a win is displayed. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. . Thereafter, the 15R special big hit game is started.

FIG. 468 (c) shows the jackpot game end effect in which the 15R special jackpot game has ended. After the big hit game, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c of the ornament symbol display device 208, and the character string “probability change: right-handed” is displayed on the upper part. It is displayed. With regard to the hold in FIG. 1, since the big hit game has passed, the display mode of all the hold icons is the default normal display.
The above-described Example 13 is summarized as follows.

  The pachinko machine 100 includes, for example, a chance button 136 as operation means provided at least at a position where the player can operate, and an effect display area 208d as display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of display, For example, a decorative symbol display device 208 is provided as an effect means capable of executing at least the types of effects. At least one of the multiple types of display is, for example, a chance button image display as the first display, and at least one of the multiple types of display is, for example, a button hold as the second display Icon display. The display of the chance button image is a display including at least a display indicating the chance button 136, and the display of the button hold icon is also a display including at least a display indicating the chance button 136.

  The effect display area 208d can display at least the display of chance button images of the first number (for example, three). The display of the chance button image can be started at least during the period of the special figure variable game as the first period, and the display of the button hold icon can be displayed as the second period, for example, during the period of the special figure variable game. At least it can be started. The chance button 136 is controlled so that the reception regarding the operation is effective in a plurality of periods, and at least one of the plurality of periods is an operation effective period in a button effect as a first effective period, for example. In addition, at least one of the plurality of periods is an operation effective period in the effect by the button hold icon, for example, as the second effective period. The first period is a period including at least a part of the operation effective period in the button effect, and the second period is a period including at least a part of the operation effective period in the effect by the button holding icon.

  At least one of the multiple types of effects is, for example, an effect that notifies the result of the button operation as the first effect, and at least one of the multiple types of effects is, for example, the second effect. This is a pre-reading notice effect using a hold icon. The effect of notifying the result of the button operation is an effect performed at least in association with the display of the chance button image, and the prefetching notice effect by the hold icon is an effect performed at least in connection with the display of the button hold icon. The effect that informs the result of the button operation is an effect that can be executed at least when the number of times the chance button 136 is operated in the operation effective period of the button effect becomes the second number (for example, 3). The first number is two or more, the second number is two or more, and the second period is a period that may overlap the first period.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, a button display relating to another second effect appears in addition to a plurality of button displays corresponding to the first effect. Can be provided. In addition, variations in button effects may be increased.

  In addition, the effect display area 208d can display at least an effective period image as a third display that can suggest the operation effective period in the button effect, for example, and the effect display means 208d can display the effect with the button hold icon. Do not display the operation valid period. Since the effective period display is performed in the button effect and the effective period display is not performed in the effect based on the button hold icon, there is a case where the interest of the game can be improved.

  Moreover, the operation effective period in the effect by the button hold icon is a period longer than the operation effective period in the button effect. The operation effective period in the production with the button hold icon without the effective period display is longer than the operation effective period in the button production with the effective period display, so the button operation for the effect informing the button operation result by displaying the effective period is performed. May be able to encourage.

  In addition, for example, for example, a first sub-control unit 400 as a notice means capable of executing at least the success / failure notice for the special figure variable game, and for example, a notice of success / failure for the special figure variable game related to the hold as a pre-read notice. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided as at least an executable pre-reading notice unit, and the notice unit performs an effect of notifying the result of the button operation in the effect display area 208d, thereby responding to the special figure variable game. The pre-failure notice can be executed at least, and the prefetch notice means can at least execute the prefetch notice by causing the effect display area 208d to perform a prefetch notice effect using the hold icon.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the button effect includes a notice of the notice of the change, and the effect of the button holding icon includes a notice of the pre-read notice, so that depending on the combination of the button display type and the notice type There are cases where variations in production can be increased.

  Further, for example, there is an effect display area 208d defining a special figure 1 hold display area as a hold display means capable of displaying at least special figure 1 hold icons a1, a2) as a plurality of types of hold icons, and an effect display area. 208d can notify at least the number of suspensions related to the execution of the symbol variation display by the number of suspension icons to be displayed. At least one of the plurality of types of hold icons is, for example, a button hold icon as the first hold icon, and at least one of the plurality of types of hold icons is, for example, the second hold icon, It is a hold icon of an image imitating the head of a youth. The display of the button hold icon is a button hold icon. The pre-reading notice effect by the hold icon includes at least an effect of changing the button hold icon to the hold icon of the image imitating the head of the youth in association with the operation of the chance button 136.

  Since the presentation by the button hold icon includes a pre-reading notice of the hold icon, the hold icon is a display that is erased in association with the start of the symbol variation display, and it is not necessary to display the validity period for the second validity period. In some cases, the player can be recognized.

  In addition, the effect display area 208d does not display a new button hold icon during a period in which the button hold icon is displayed. Since a plurality of button hold icons are not displayed, it may be possible to prevent the button effect from becoming too complicated.

  Further, the pre-reading notice effect by the hold icon is an effect that can be executed at least when the number of times the chance button 136 is operated becomes the third number in the operation effective period of the effect by the button hold icon. The number is a number smaller than the second number. The number of button operations for performing the second effect is less than the number of button operations for performing the first effect.

  In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the pre-reading notice effect by the hold icon rather than the effect of notifying the result of the button operation when the operation effective period by the button effect and the operation effective period by the button hold icon overlap. It can be executed first. In the button operation when the validity period overlaps, the prefetching notice effect with the hold icon is given priority, so the prefetching notice effect with the hold icon that does not suggest the validity period is executed first, so that the operation with the button effect is valid There may be a case where the player can be prompted to perform a button operation so that both the pre-reading notice effect by the hold icon and the effect of notifying the result of the button operation are performed during the period.

  In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 provides an effect of notifying the result of the button operation rather than the pre-reading notice effect using the hold icon when the operation effective period using the button effect overlaps with the operation effective period using the button hold icon. It can be executed first.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, in the button operation when the effective periods overlap, the effect of informing the result of the button operation is given priority, so the operation effective period in the button effect and the effect by the button hold icon Even in the case where the operation effective periods overlap, it may be possible to continue the button operation until the other effect is performed by giving priority to one effect.

  The effect display area 208d can display at least the display of the effective period image that is the fourth number, and the fourth number is one. A single gauge display for a plurality of button displays (requests for a plurality of button operations) may be able to inform the player that the common operation valid period is easy to understand. The second display may be plural.

The second number may be the same number as the first number. By doing this, since the number of button operations for button display and execution of the first effect is the same, it may be possible to inform the player of the number of button operations required to execute the first effect in an easy-to-understand manner.
(Example 14)

Next, a specific example of a button image according to Example 14 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 426 of the seventh embodiment shows a display mode of a plurality of button images. As shown in FIG. 4A, the button image of the display mode when the chance button 136 is viewed obliquely from above. It may be. In the button image shown in FIG. 5A, the word “push” is displayed in the area indicating the pressed surface. The button image shown in FIG. 5B has the same outline as the button image shown in FIG. 5A, but the display color is different. In addition, a character string “PUSH” is displayed in the area indicating the pressed surface. In this way, it is possible to notify the advance notice of whether or not the change is made by changing the display of the color and the pressed surface with the same outline. FIG. 6C shows a button image in a display mode in a state where the vertically long chance button 136 is viewed obliquely from above, and character images are added to the button side surface and the pressing surface. It is possible to recognize that the button is included if at least a notification that prompts the button operation is included, and the button image may include a character image or the like.
(Example 15)

Next, a specific example of a gauge image (effective period image) according to Example 15 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 470 shows a specific example of a gauge image that can be displayed instead of the gauge image shown in FIG. 467 (a), for example. In the gauge image shown in FIG. 470 (a), a character image is displayed in the gauge. A gauge with a pattern or a pattern outside the character image may be used. In the gauge image shown in FIG. 470 (b), the button image is integrally displayed on the gauge image. In this example, three button images are displayed in a horizontal row, but one or more button images may be provided. The gauge image shown in FIG. 470 (c) includes an image suggesting the timing of button operation within the operation effective period. In this example, the display mode is such that three button images are respectively arranged at the time positions where the buttons in the gauge should be operated. FIG. 10C-1 notifies that the operation effective period has slightly passed, the bar-shaped portion of the gauge image is somewhat shortened in the right direction, and the operation effective period is slightly shortened. FIG. 2C-2 shows a state in which the bar-like portion of the gauge image is shortened in the right direction after the operation effective period further elapses, and the tip of the bar overlaps the left button image. This display indicates the timing when the chance button 136 is first pressed. FIG. 4C-3 shows a state in which the bar-like portion of the gauge image is shortened to the right as the operation effective period further elapses, and the tip of the bar overlaps the second button image from the left. . This display indicates that it is time to press the chance button 136 for the second time.
(Example 16)

  Next, a special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 16 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 471 to 473. FIGS. 471 (a) to (f), FIGS. 471 (a ′) to (f ′), and FIGS. 471 (a ″) to (f ″) are the characteristics of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in this order. The figure variation game is shown in time series. FIGS. 472 (a) to (f), FIGS. 472 (a ′) to (f ′), and FIGS. 472 (a ″) to (f ″) are respectively the characteristics of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment. The figure variation game is shown in time series. FIG. 472 (a) is continued from FIG. 471 (f), FIG. 472 (a ′) is continued from FIG. 471 (f ′), and FIG. 472 (a ″) is FIG. f ''). FIGS. 473 (a) to (f), FIGS. 473 (a ′) to (f ′), and FIGS. 473 (a ″) to (f ″) are the characteristics of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in this order. The figure variation game is shown in time series. FIG. 473 (a) is continued from FIG. 472 (f), FIG. 473 (a ′) is continued from FIG. 472 (f ′), and FIG. 473 (a ″) is FIG. f ''). Further, FIGS. 473 (d) to (i) show, in this order, time-series special figure fluctuation games in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 473 (d) continues from FIG. 473 (c), FIG. 473 (c ′), and FIG. 473 (c ″). In the diagram showing the special figure variable game and the subsequent jackpot game in time series, the time course between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures.

  FIGS. 471 (a) to 473 (c) show the special figure variable game in the non-auto button mode in time series. FIG. 471 (a ′) to FIG. 473 (c ′) show the special figure variable game in the first auto button mode in time series. FIG. 471 (a ″) to FIG. 473 (c ″) show the special figure variable game in the second auto button mode in time series.

  Each of FIGS. 471 (a), (a ′), and (a ″) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is finished. On the special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214, the special symbol "Special figure I" is stopped and displayed. In the fourth symbol display areas t1 and t2 for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, an “x” image indicating that the result of the special figure variable game is out of place is displayed. "Decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 8" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the special figure variable game is off.

  In addition, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is lit with two LEDs on the left side to notify that there are two special figure 1 holds. All the special figure 2 hold lamps 220 are turned off, and it is informed that there is no special figure 2 hold. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, a special figure 1 hold icon a1 corresponding to the hold with the first hold order is displayed, and on the right side, a special figure 1 hold icon a2 corresponding to the hold with the second hold order is displayed. It is displayed. The special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 are both normal hold display modes shown in FIG. 419 (a).

  FIG. 471 (a) shows a state in the non-auto button mode. FIG. 471 (a ′) shows a state in the first auto button mode. The first auto button mode is displayed in the same display mode as the non-auto button mode, and it is difficult for the player to know that the present is the auto button mode. FIG. 471 (a ″) shows a state in the second auto button mode. In the second auto button mode, a character string of “automatic” is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d to notify the player that the current mode is the auto button mode.

  Each of FIGS. 471 (b), (b ′), and (b ″) shows a state in which the next special figure 1 variable game is started and the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. It is informed that the special figure variation display is being executed on the special figure 1 display device 212 and that the special figure 1 variable game is being executed in the fourth symbol display area t1 for special figure 1. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is being executed. In the second auto button mode of FIG. 471 (b ″), a character string “automatic” is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d.

  In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, one hold having the first holding order is consumed, and only the leftmost LED is lit on the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 1 hold is held. It is reported that there is one. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, the special figure 1 hold icon on the left side disappears in correspondence with the digestion of the hold, and the special figure 1 hold icon on the right side moves to the left as a special figure 1 hold icon a1. Is displayed.

  The first auto button mode shown in FIG. 471 (b ′) is displayed in the same display mode as the non-auto button mode shown in FIG. 471 (b), and the player knows that the present is in the auto button mode. It is in a difficult state. In the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 471 (b ″), the character string “in auto” is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d, and the player is notified that the current mode is the auto button mode. Has been.

  In each of FIGS. 471 (c), (c ′), and (c ″), the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and displayed from the center of the initial display area to the upper left corner of the display area. A state 208d is enlarged in the center of the display area.

  The first auto button mode shown in FIG. 471 (c ′) is displayed in the same display mode as the non-auto button mode shown in FIG. 471 (c), and the player knows that the current auto button mode is in effect. It is in a difficult state. In the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 471 (c ″), the character string “in auto” is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d, and the player is notified that the current mode is the auto button mode. Has been.

  FIG. 471 (d) shows a state in which the button effect is started. In this example, the button effect is started before the reach effect is started. In the button production, first, an explanation display (tutorial display) of the button production is performed. In the explanation display of the button effect, two images simulating the chance button 136 are arranged in the horizontal direction at the approximate center of the effect display area 208d, and the direction key 137 is displayed side by side on the right side. A character string “PUSH” is displayed at the top of each image imitating two chance buttons 136 and one direction key 137 aligned in a row, and the characters “Stop the design by button operation” are displayed above them. A column is displayed, and a character string “Ready” is displayed at the top thereof.

  In the first auto button mode shown in FIG. 471 (d ′), the explanation of the button effect is displayed, but the button operation during the button effect is automatically performed, so the display mode of the non-auto button mode shown in FIG. 471 (d). Are displayed in a display mode in which the character string “PUSH” is deleted. In the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 471 (d ″), the button effect is not executed. For this reason, the explanation display of the button effect is not executed. In the second auto button mode, a character string “automatic” is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 471 (e) shows a state in which the button effect is started. In the button effect, two operation request images (button images) in a display form simulating the chance button 136 are displayed in a line in the horizontal direction at approximately the center of the effect display area 208d, and the direction key 137 is imitated on the right side. The operation request image of the display mode (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “direction key image” or “button image”) is displayed. A character string “PUSH” is displayed at the top of each of the two button images and one directional key image, and one valid period common to the two button images and one directional key image is displayed above them. An image is displayed. The effective period image of this example has a rectangular frame shape that is long horizontally, and initially, the entire period of the effective period is indicated by a bar shape of a predetermined color within the frame shape. It is displayed so that it gradually shortens to the left. More specifically, the effective period image is a gauge image, and the display of the gauge image is a display that can suggest the remaining period of the effective operation period by performing an animation in which the length of the gauge is reduced. The display of the gauge image is a display capable of notifying that the operation valid period ends when the gauge length becomes zero. A character string “Go” is displayed at the top of the gauge image.

  An effective period image indicating an operation effective period in which the character string of “PUSH” illustrated in FIG. 471 (e) is also erased in the display mode of the start of the button effect in the first auto button mode illustrated in FIG. 471 (e ′). Is displayed. In the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 471 (e ″), the button effect is not started only by displaying the character string “in-auto” in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d. Therefore, neither button display nor gauge display is performed.

  FIG. 471 (f) shows a state where the player presses the direction key 137 first instead of the chance button 136 during the execution of the button effect. The pressing of the direction key 137 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the direction key 137 in the figure. The effective period image reports a state in which the rod-shaped portion is somewhat shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is slightly shortened.

  In the first auto button mode shown in FIG. 471 (f ′), the button effect is executed in a display mode in which the character string “PUSH” shown in FIG. 471 (f) is deleted. In addition, an effective period image indicating the operation effective period of the button effect is displayed. In the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 471 (f ″), another effect different from the button effect is executed. In the second auto button mode, a character string “automatic” is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 472 (a) shows a state in which a button image deletion animation (button deletion animation) is being executed during execution of the button effect. When the direction key 137 is first pressed and received, the right button image (direction key image) is deleted by the button deletion animation. In the middle of the button erase animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. Also, the character string “PUSH” at the top of the button image to be erased changes to an effect image in the middle of the button erase animation, and then disappears. Thereby, it is informed in an easy-to-understand manner that the number of necessary operations has decreased by one. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  In the first auto button mode shown in FIG. 472 (a ′), the button image on the left side is automatically deleted without any button operation. In the first auto button mode, the character string “PUSH” is not displayed. Further, the button erase animation shown in FIG. 472 (a) is not executed in the first auto button mode. In the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 472 (a ″), another effect is executed. In the second auto button mode, a character string “automatic” is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 472 (b) shows a second effect executed next to the button erase animation while the button effect is being executed. In the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed in a reduced scale, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c when the direction key 137 is pressed. In the second effect, an image imitating “decoration 3” is displayed in the area where the direction key image on the right side of the effect display area 208d was displayed. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  Even in the first auto button mode shown in FIG. 472 (b ′), the second effect executed next to the button erasure during the button effect is shown. In the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed in a reduced scale, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a in response to an automatic button operation. In the second effect, an image imitating “decoration 3” is displayed in the area where the button image on the left side of the effect display area 208d is displayed. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is further shortened. In the first auto button mode, the character string “PUSH” is not displayed. In the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 472 (b ″), another effect is executed. In another effect, a character string “3 on the left” is displayed, and it is notified that “decoration 3” has been temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a. In the second auto button mode, a character string “automatic” is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 472 (c) shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136 as the second button operation during the execution of the button effect. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  In the first auto button mode shown in FIG. 472 (c ′), the button operation is automatically performed. In the first auto button mode, the character string “PUSH” is not displayed. In the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 472 (c ″), another effect is executed. In another effect, an image imitating “decoration 3” is displayed on the left side. In the second auto button mode, a character string “automatic” is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 472 (d) shows a state in which a button erasing animation is being executed during execution of the button effect. When the chance button 136 is pressed, the button image on the left side is erased by the button erase animation. In the middle of the erase animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. Also, the character string “PUSH” at the top of the button image to be erased changes to an effect image in the middle of the button erase animation, and then disappears. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  In the first auto button mode shown in FIG. 472 (d ′), the right button image is automatically deleted without any button operation. In the first auto button mode, the character string “PUSH” is not displayed. In the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 472 (d ″), another effect is executed. In the second auto button mode, a character string “automatic” is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 472 (e) shows a second effect executed after the button erase animation while the button effect is being executed. In the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed in a reduced size, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a when the chance button 136 is pressed. In the second effect, an image imitating “decoration 3” is displayed in the area where the button image on the left side of the effect display area 208d is displayed. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  Even in the first auto button mode shown in FIG. 472 (e ′), in the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed in a reduced size, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a in response to an automatic button operation. Yes. In the second effect, an image imitating “decoration 3” is displayed in the area where the button image on the right side of the effect display area 208d is displayed. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is further shortened. In the first auto button mode, the character string “PUSH” is not displayed. In the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 472 (e ″), another effect is executed. In another effect, the character string “3 on the right” is displayed, and it is notified that “decoration 3” has been temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. In the second auto button mode, a character string “automatic” is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 472 (f) shows a special effect performed during the execution of the second effect during the operation effective period. In the effect, the button image displayed in the center of the effect display area 208b is changed from “normal” to “vibration + rotation” to notify the change. Further, as a display mode of the gauge display, for example, the gauge color of “blue” is changed to “yellow” to notify the change. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  In the first auto button mode shown in FIG. 472 (f ′), the display mode of the button image displayed in the center of the effect display area 208b is changed from “normal” to “vibration + rotation”. The change is foretold. In the first auto button mode, it is possible to notify the player of a notice of the change with a button display without changing the button mode of the chance button 136. Note that the notification may be performed by changing the button mode. Further, as a display mode of the gauge display, for example, the gauge color of “blue” is changed to “yellow” to notify the change. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is further shortened. In the first auto button mode, the character string “PUSH” is not displayed. In the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 472 (f ″), another effect is executed. In another effect, an image imitating “decoration 3” is displayed on the right side. In the second auto button mode, a character string “automatic” is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 473 (a) shows a state in which the player presses the chance button 136 as the third button operation during execution of the button effect. The button mode of the chance button 136 is the same as the display mode of the button image displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  In the first auto button mode shown in FIG. 473 (a ′), the button operation is automatically performed. In the first auto button mode, the character string “PUSH” is not displayed. In the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 472 (c ″), another effect is executed. In the second auto button mode, the “automatic” character string in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d is deleted.

  FIG. 473 (b) shows a state in which button erasure animation is being executed during execution of the button effect. When the chance button 136 is pressed for the third time, the central button image is deleted by the button deletion animation. In the middle of the erase animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. Also, the character string “PUSH” at the top of the button image to be erased changes to an effect image in the middle of the button erase animation, and then disappears. In parallel with the button erase animation, a gauge image erase animation is executed in which the effect image disappears after the effect image is displayed instead of the gauge display.

  Even in the first auto button mode shown in FIG. 473 (b ′), the button erasing animation is executed in the same display manner as in the non-auto button mode shown in FIG. 473 (b). In this way, the button deletion animation may be executed in the first auto button mode, or the button deletion animation may or may not be performed for each button operation. In the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 473 (b ″), another effect is executed.

  FIG. 473 (c) shows the first effect executed after the second effect while the button effect is being executed. The first effect notifies the result of the button operation. In this example, as the first effect, the character string “SP” is displayed large between the two “decorations 3” displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d. Thereby, the player is notified that the reach production will develop into SP (super) reach.

  In the first auto button mode shown in FIG. 473 (c ′), the same first effect as that shown in FIG. 473 (c) is executed. Thereby, the player is notified that the reach production will develop into SP (super) reach. In the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 473 (c ″), as another effect, the same image as the character F shown in FIG. 429 (c) between two “decoration 3” displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d. Is displayed, and the character string “SP reach” is displayed above it. Thereby, the player is notified that the reach production will develop into SP (super) reach.

  FIG. 473 (d) to FIG. 473 (i) show the SP reach effect. FIG. 473 (d) shows a state in which the SP reach effect is started, and “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c which are reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d. . A character string “subjugation reach” is displayed at the top of the effect display area 208d. An image in which two samurai are facing each other is displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d. FIG. 473 (e) shows a state in which the deca button is displayed during the SP reach production and the pressing of the chance button 136 is urged. In FIG. 473 (f), the chance button 136 is pressed, the SP reach production proceeds to the next scene, and an image of the warrior shouting “It's a game!” Is displayed. FIG. 473 (g) shows a state in which the samurai has won the battle. “Decoration 3” is displayed in the center of the screen, and the figure of the samurai who wins to the right and the figure of the samurai who loses to the left are displayed. The character string “Win” is displayed at the top of the screen.

  FIG. 473 (h) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are enlarged and displayed from the reduced display to the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. “Decoration 3” temporarily stops in the left symbol display area 208a, “decoration 3” temporarily stops in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “decoration 3” temporarily stops in the right symbol display area 208c.

FIG. 473 (i) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. On the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure “Special figure A” is stopped and displayed. In the fourth symbol display area t1 for special figure 1, an “A” image indicating that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is winning is displayed. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. .
(Example 17)

  Next, a special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 17 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 474 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is finished. On the special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214, the special symbol "Special figure I" is stopped and displayed. In the fourth symbol display areas t1 and t2 for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, an “x” image indicating that the result of the special figure variable game is out of place is displayed. "Decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 8" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the special figure variable game is off.

  In addition, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is lit with two LEDs on the left side to notify that there are two special figure 1 holds. All the special figure 2 hold lamps 220 are turned off, and it is informed that there is no special figure 2 hold. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, a special figure 1 hold icon a1 corresponding to the hold with the first hold order is displayed, and on the right side, a special figure 1 hold icon a2 corresponding to the hold with the second hold order is displayed. It is displayed. The special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 are both normal hold display modes shown in FIG. 419 (a).

  FIG. 474 (a) shows a state in the third auto button mode. In the third auto button mode, a character string of “automatic” is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d to notify the player that the current mode is the auto button mode.

  FIG. 474 (b) shows a state in which the next special figure 1 variable game is started and the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. It is informed that the special figure variation display is being executed on the special figure 1 display device 212 and that the special figure 1 variable game is being executed in the fourth symbol display area t1 for special figure 1. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is being executed. In the third auto button mode, a character string “automatic” is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d.

  In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, one hold having the first holding order is consumed, and only the leftmost LED is lit on the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 1 hold is held. It is reported that there is one. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, the special figure 1 hold icon on the left side disappears in correspondence with the digestion of the hold, and the special figure 1 hold icon on the right side moves to the left as a special figure 1 hold icon a1. Is displayed.

  FIG. 474 (c) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced from the center of the initial display area to the upper left corner of the display area, and the effect display area 208d is enlarged to the center of the display area. ing. In the third auto button mode, a character string “automatic” is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 474 (d) shows a state in which button effects in the third auto button mode are started. In this example, the button effect is started before the reach effect is started. In the button production, first, an explanation display (tutorial display) of the button production is performed. In the explanation display of the button effect, two images simulating the chance button 136 are arranged in the horizontal direction at the approximate center of the effect display area 208d, and the direction key 137 is displayed side by side on the right side. A character string “PUSH” is displayed at the top of each image imitating two chance buttons 136 and one direction key 137 aligned in a row, and the characters “Stop the design by button operation” are displayed above them. A column is displayed, and a character string “Ready” is displayed at the top thereof. In the third auto button mode, a character string “automatic” is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 474 (e) shows a state where the button effect in the third auto button mode is started. In the button effect, two operation request images (button images) in a display form simulating the chance button 136 are displayed in a line in the horizontal direction at approximately the center of the effect display area 208d, and the direction key 137 is imitated on the right side. The operation request image of the display mode (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “direction key image” or “button image”) is displayed. A character string “PUSH” is displayed at the top of each of the two button images and one directional key image, and one valid period common to the two button images and one directional key image is displayed above them. An image is displayed. The effective period image of this example has a rectangular frame shape that is long horizontally, and initially, the entire period of the effective period is indicated by a bar shape of a predetermined color within the frame shape. It is displayed so that it gradually shortens to the left. More specifically, the effective period image is a gauge image, and the display of the gauge image is a display that can suggest the remaining period of the effective operation period by performing an animation in which the length of the gauge is reduced. The display of the gauge image is a display capable of notifying that the operation valid period ends when the gauge length becomes zero. A character string “Go” is displayed at the top of the gauge image. In the third auto button mode, a character string “in-auto” is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 474 (f) shows a state where the player presses the direction key 137 first instead of the chance button 136 during execution of the button effect in the third auto button mode. The pressing of the direction key 137 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the direction key 137 in the figure. The effective period image reports a state in which the rod-shaped portion is somewhat shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is slightly shortened. In the third auto button mode, a character string “automatic” is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 474 (g) shows a state in which the button operation performed by the player during execution of the button effect is also effective in the third auto button mode, and the button image deletion animation (button deletion animation) is being executed. When the direction key 137 is first pressed and a button is received, the right button image (direction key image) is deleted by the button deletion animation. In the middle of the button erase animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. Also, the character string “PUSH” at the top of the button image to be erased changes to an effect image in the middle of the button erase animation, and then disappears. Thereby, it is informed in an easy-to-understand manner that the number of necessary operations has decreased by one. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 474 (h) shows a second effect executed next to the button erase animation while the button effect is being executed in the third auto button mode. In the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed in a reduced scale, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c when the direction key 137 is pressed. In the second effect, an image imitating “decoration 3” is displayed in the area where the direction key image on the right side of the effect display area 208d was displayed. The effective period image notifies that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 474 (e ′) shows a modification of the effect shown in FIG. 474 (e). This modification shows that the number of button images may be smaller than the number of button images in the production with a non-auto button. Since the button operation is automatically performed in the auto button state, it is sufficient if the player can recognize that it is a button effect, so only one button display may be displayed.

As described above, the button effect in the auto button mode can be performed in the same display mode as the button effect in the non-auto button mode. Further, in the auto button mode of this example, a button operation by the player is also accepted effectively and a predetermined effect is performed.
The examples (2-16 to 17) described above are summarized as follows.

  The pachinko machine 100 includes, for example, a chance button 136 as an operation means provided at least at a position where the player can operate, an effect display area 208d as a display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of display, As an effect, for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 as an effect means capable of executing at least an effect informing the result of a button operation, and as a mode control means capable of executing at least switching control of a plurality of modes. For example, a first sub-control unit 400 is provided. At least one of the multiple types of modes is, for example, a non-auto button mode as the first mode, and at least one of the multiple types of modes is, for example, the auto button mode as the second mode. It is. The non-auto button mode is a mode in which the chance button 136 is not automatically operated, and the auto button mode is a mode in which the chance button 136 is automatically operated.

  At least one of the plurality of types of display is a display of a button image including, for example, a character string “PUSH” as the first display, and at least one of the plurality of types of display is the second display. For example, the button image that does not include the characters “PUSH” is displayed, or the button image is not displayed. The display of the button image including the character string “PUSH” is a display corresponding at least to the non-auto button mode, and the display of the button image not including the character “PUSH” is a display corresponding to at least the auto button mode. . The display of the button image including the character string “PUSH” can be started at least during the execution period of the special figure variable game as the first period, and the display of the button image not including the character “PUSH” It can be started at least during the execution period of the special figure variable game. The display of the button image including the character string “PUSH” is a display including at least a display suggesting the chance button 136. The execution period of the special figure variable game is a period including, for example, at least a part of the operation effective period as a third period during which the reception regarding the operation of the chance button 136 is effective.

  The effect display area 208d can display at least a display of a button image including a character string “PUSH” which is the first number (for example, 3). The effect of notifying the result of the button operation can be executed at least when the number of times the chance button 136 is operated in the operation effective period becomes a second number (for example, 2). The first number is two or more and the second number is two or more. The display of the button image that does not include the characters “PUSH” is at least partially different from the display of the button image that includes the character strings “PUSH”.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the display of the button effect differs between the auto button mode and the non-auto button mode, so that it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a feature in the display means. In some cases, the mode can be easily recognized by the difference between the first display and the second display.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 includes, for example, an effect display area 208d as a decorative symbol display unit that can execute at least decorative symbol variation display. The effect display area 208d can execute at least the decorative display variation display in the left middle right symbol display regions 208a to 208c, for example, as the first decorative design variation display. The display of the button image including the character string “PUSH” can be started at least during the execution period of the special symbol variable game of the variable symbol display in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the non-auto button mode. The display of the button image that does not include the characters “PUSH” can be started at least during the execution period of the special figure variable game of the variable display of decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the auto button mode.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, it may be easy to recognize whether or not the operation of the button is necessary by clarifying a portion of the same type of decorative symbol variation display that is different in display depending on the mode. .

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 includes, for example, a first sub-control unit 400 as a notice means capable of executing at least a notice of whether or not to advance to the special figure variable game and a notice of whether or not to develop into SP reach. ing. The display of the button image including the character string “PUSH” is a display that is at least part of the success / failure notice for the special figure variation game, and the display of the button image not including the character “PUSH” is the variation of the special figure. It is a display that is at least a part of the success / failure notice for the game. The display of the button image including the character string “PUSH” may not start during the execution period of the special figure variable game in the variable display of the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The display of the button image not including the symbol may not be started during the execution period of the special symbol variable game in the decorative symbol variable display in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  In addition, the effect display area 208d can at least execute a variation display of another decoration symbol in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c as the second decoration symbol variation display, for example. The display of the button image including the character string “PUSH” is performed in the execution period of another special figure variable game, for example, as the execution period of another special figure variable game of the variable display of another decorative pattern in the non-auto button mode. The display of the button image that can be started at least and does not include the character string “PUSH” can be started at least during the execution period of another special figure variable game of the variable display of another decorative symbol in the auto button mode. By doing so, the button effect can be executed even with another decorative symbol variation display.

  In addition, the display of the button image including the character string “PUSH” is, for example, a display including at least the display of the operation period image as a display capable of suggesting the operation effective period, and does not include the character string “PUSH”. The display of the image is a display that does not include at least a display that can suggest the operation effective period.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having this configuration, the effective period display is not performed in the auto button mode. In the auto button mode, the button operation is automatically performed, so there is no need to display the effective period, and the risk that the player misidentifies (misconception that button operation is necessary) may be reduced. .

  The display of the button image that does not include the characters “PUSH” is a display that includes at least a display that suggests the chance button 136, and the effect display area 208 d has the characters “PUSH” that is the third number (for example, 0). Can display at least a button image that does not include the third number, and the third number is smaller than the first number. According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the number of buttons displayed in the auto button mode is smaller than the number displayed in the non-auto button mode.

  If the third number is 1, the button display in the auto button mode is one, so the player recognizes that the button was displayed in the non-auto button mode while reducing the number of button displays. There is a case that can be made. Further, the number of buttons displayed in the auto button mode may be larger than the first number or may be the same. Further, the button display need not be performed in the auto button mode. In this case, if manual button operation is enabled, it may function as a hidden button effect.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 can execute at least an effect of replacing the display of the button image with the display of another image, for example, as the second effect. The effect of replacing the display of the button image with the display of another image can be performed at least every time the chance button 136 is operated in the non-auto button mode, and the effect of replacing the display of the button image with the display of another image is It is an effect that can be executed at least during the operation effective period in the auto button mode.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the second effect is an effect that is performed every time the operation means is operated (in the auto button mode, an effect that is performed during the operation valid period). There is a case where an effect that can be executed for each operation can be executed at a timing that does not cause any trouble in the auto button mode.

  When the chance button 136 is operated during the operation effective period in the auto button mode, the decorative design display device 208 replaces the display of the button image with the display of another image in association with the operation of the chance button 136. Is at least feasible. According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, since the second effect can be executed even by a button operation in the auto button mode, a player may be given a sense of achievement by the button operation.

Next, a characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 405 to 474 again.
(1-1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is

  Operation means (for example, a chance button 136) provided at least at a position where the player can operate;

  Display means (for example, an effect display area 208d) capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of displays;

Production means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing at least a plurality of types of production;
A game machine equipped with

  At least one of the plurality of types of display is a first display (for example, display of a button image),

At least one of the plurality of types of display is a second display (for example, display of an effective period image),
The first display is a display including at least a display suggesting the operation means,

The second display is displayed at least in a period (hereinafter referred to as “third period (for example, operation effective period)”) in which reception regarding the operation of the operation means (for example, pressing of the chance button 136) is effective. And
The first display is a display that can be started at least in the first period;
The second display is a display that can be started at least in the second period,
The first period is a period including at least a part of the third period;
The second period is a period including at least a part of the third period,

  The display means is means capable of displaying at least the first display having a first number (for example, 3),

  At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect (for example, an effect informing a result of a button operation (see FIG. 451 (c))),

  At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect (for example, an effect in which a panda image appears at the position of the erased button image (see FIG. 450 (o))).

The first effect is an effect that can be executed at least when the number of times the operation means is operated in the third period becomes a second number (for example, 2),
The first number is two or more;
The second number is two or more;

  The second effect may be executed while hiding at least a part of the first display that is the first number (for example, an effect of hiding a part of three button images). It is characterized by being.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, at least a part of the plurality of button displays is hidden by the second effect, so that it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a characteristic display means. In addition, the entertainment of the game may be improved by the appearance of the second effect even during the button operation period. Further, there are cases where the second effect can be made more conspicuous than the button display.

  In addition, the above-mentioned “the second effect may be executed while hiding at least a part of the first display of the first number” is “the second effect is An effect that may hide at least a part of the first display of the first display of the first number may be used, or the “second effect is the first number of the first display. It may be an “effect that may hide at least a part of each of the plurality of first displays in one display”.

In addition, “the second effect may be an effect that is executed by always hiding at least a part of the first display corresponding to the first number”, or “the second effect is the first effect. An effect that always hides at least a part of the first display of the first display that is the number of the first display, or the second effect is that of the first display that is the first number An effect that necessarily hides at least a part of each of the plurality of first displays may be used.
(1-2) The pachinko machine 100,

  The second effect is an effect that can be executed at least every time an operation of the operation means is accepted.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the second effect is an effect performed every time the button is operated. Therefore, by executing the second effect before the first effect is performed, the first effect is performed. There are cases where it can be expected to produce.

  The second effect is an effect executed for each operation of the operation means, but the first display may be hidden by all of the second effects performed for each operation. The configuration may be such that the first display is hidden only in the second effect started by the operation.

  The second effect is an effect that is not related to the operation of the operation means (for example, a notice such as a step-up notice, a look-ahead notice, a cut-in notice, an ordinary figure effect, etc. It may be information related to games such as time saving and latent mode).

Even when the second effect is executed, there may be an effect (such as the fourth symbol) that is not necessarily hidden.
The pachinko machine 100,

  The second effect is characterized in that the first display can be started after the display is started.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, since the second effect is an effect that starts after the display of the button display is started, even if the button display is hidden by the second effect, the button display is displayed. Since the second effect is started after the start, it may be possible to prevent the player from overlooking the button display. The second effect may be an effect that can be started before the display of the first display is started.
(1-3) The pachinko machine 100,

  The display means can at least erase one of the first displays (for example, display of the left button image) in response to one operation of the operation means (for example, first press of the chance button 136). Means,

The second effect is an effect that may be executed while hiding at least a part of the other first display (for example, display of the central button image) that has been continuously displayed.
It is special.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, it is possible to hide a part of the button display that is still displayed after the button display is erased. In some cases, the area where the button display is deleted can be effectively used as the execution area of the second effect.

  Note that the second effect may be a configuration in which a plurality of button displays are erased by receiving a single operation means operation, or a button display is erased by receiving a plurality of operations. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of button displays are deleted upon reception of a plurality of operations.

Even if there is a first display in which the display is continued even after the first display is erased, the second presentation may not hide the first display. For example, the second effect is an effect that causes one of a plurality of types of notices to appear, the first notice can be hidden in the first notice, and the first display in the second notice The structure which does not hide may be sufficient. Moreover, even if it is the same kind of second effect (for example, the third notice), for example, when it is hidden or not due to a difference in the number of button operations (first operation and second operation), etc. There may be.
The pachinko machine 100,

  The second effect is to conceal the first display when there is no first display that has been displayed after the first display is erased (in response to acceptance of the operating means). It is characterized by that there is no production.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, when there is no button display after erasing the button display, the button display may be prevented from being hidden.
(1-4) The pachinko machine 100,

The display means is means capable of displaying at least the second display which is a third number, and the third number is one.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the player can know that the operation is valid for a common operation by using one gauge display for a plurality of button displays (requests for multiple button operations). There are cases where it is possible to easily notify. The second display may be plural.
(1-5) The pachinko machine 100,

  The second effect is an effect in which at least a part of the second display may be hidden.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the second effect may hide the gauge display, and thus the second effect may be more conspicuous.

The second presentation may be configured to hide at least part of the second display, may be configured to hide only the first display, or may be configured to hide only the second display. There may be. When a plurality of second displays are displayed, one of them may be hidden or a plurality may be hidden. Further, the second effect may not hide the second display.
(1-6) The pachinko machine 100,
The first display is a button display;
The second display is a gauge display,
The third number is one;

  The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a plurality of button displays arranged in a first direction,

The gauge display is a display that can at least suggest the remaining period of the third period by reducing the length of the gauge,
The gauge display is a display in which the length of the gauge decreases in a second direction,
The second direction is the same direction as the first direction.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the direction in which the button display is erased and the direction in which the gauge is reduced are the same direction. Therefore, even if the second display is hidden by the second effect, May be informed to the player in a manner that is easy to understand. The first direction and the second direction may be different directions.
(1-7) The pachinko machine 100,
The second number is the same number as the first number.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, since the button display and the number of button operations for executing the first effect are the same, the number of button operations required to execute the first effect is given to the player. There are cases in which it is easy to understand.

The second number may be a number different from the first number. When the second number is larger than the first number, it may be possible to notify that a plurality of button operations are required by displaying a plurality of buttons, and the second number is smaller than the first number Since the first effect is executed before the player performs the button operation by the number of button displays, the first effect may be surely executed.
Also, the pachinko machine 100,
The first number is three;
It is characterized by that.
(1-8) The pachinko machine 100,

  The display means is means capable of displaying at least the first display in a plurality of modes, and at least one of the plurality of modes is a first mode (for example, a button display mode is “normal”). And

At least one of the plurality of modes is a second mode (for example, the button display mode is “vibration”),
The second aspect is an aspect different from the first aspect.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the button display itself may function as a notice due to the difference in the mode of button display.

In addition, when the button display functions as a notice, it is not necessary for all button effects to have different modes. Moreover, you may provide the 3rd aspect.
(1-9) The pachinko machine 100,
The rendering means is means including at least the display means.
It is characterized by that.

The effect means may be configured not to include the display means. For example, the effect means may be a movable body that can move at least to the front side of the display means.
(1-10) The pachinko machine 100,
The second effect is an effect not related at least to the operation of the operation means,
The second performance is a notice,
It is characterized by that.

The notice includes not only a notice about the variable game but also a look-ahead notice (an effect including at least an effect related to the hold icon and the look-ahead notice).
(1-11) The pachinko machine 100,
The first display is an animation display;
The second display is an animation display.
It is characterized by that.
The pachinko machine 100,
Movable means operable at least in front of the display means;

The second effect is an effect that may be executed while hiding at least a part of the first display by the operation of the movable means.
It is characterized by that.
(2-1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is

  Operation means (for example, a chance button 136) provided at least at a position where the player can operate;

  Display means (for example, an effect display area 208d) capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of displays;

Production means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing at least a first production (for example, an effect for notifying the result of button operation);
A game machine equipped with

  At least one of the plurality of types of display is a first display (for example, display of a button image),

At least one of the plurality of types of display is a second display (for example, display of an effective period image),
The first display is a display including at least a display suggesting the operation means,

  The second display is displayed at least in a period (hereinafter referred to as a “third period” (for example, an operation effective period)) in which reception regarding the operation of the operation means (for example, pressing of the chance button 136) is effective. And

  The first display is at least an animation display (for example, button animation),

The second display is at least an animation display (for example, an effective period end animation),
The first display is a display that can be started at least in the first period;
The second display is a display that can be started at least in the second period,
The first period is a period including at least a part of the third period;
The second period is a period including at least a part of the third period,

  The display means is means capable of displaying at least the first display having a first number (for example, 3),

The first effect is an effect that can be executed at least when the number of times the operation means is operated in the third period becomes a second number (for example, 2),
The first number is two or more;
The second number is two or more.
It is special.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having this configuration, an animation display related to the first display can be executed, and an animation display can be performed with respect to a plurality of button displays. Can provide. Further, there are cases where the button operation can be further urged by the animation display as compared with the still image display.
(2-2) The pachinko machine 100,

  At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a third display (for example, a button erased image),

  The third display is an animation display (for example, a button deletion animation or a valid period image deletion animation),

The third display is a display that can be started at least in association with the operation of the operation means.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, animation display can be performed in association with the button operation, and thus the button operation may be prompted.

Further, the third display may be a display executed without being related to the operation of the operation means.
(2-3) The pachinko machine 100,

  The first display is a display at least erasable in association with the operation means being operated,

The third display is an erase animation that can be executed when the first display is erased (hereinafter referred to as “first erase animation (for example, button erase animation)”).
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, it may be possible to notify that the player has received a press of the chance button by executing a button display erasing animation.
(2-4) The pachinko machine 100,

  The effect means is means capable of executing at least a second effect (for example, an effect in which a button image changes to display of an “excellent” image or display of a “good” image (see FIG. 459 (h)),

  The second effect is an effect that can be started at least in connection with the operation means being operated,

The second effect is an effect that can be started at least after the first erasure animation is performed.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, since the second effect is an effect that can be started after the button display erase animation, the second effect may be conspicuous.

The second effect may be an effect that can be started during execution of the first erasure animation or before the start of the first erasure animation.
(2-5) The pachinko machine 100,

  The second display is a display that is at least erasable in association with the operation means being operated,

The third display is an erase animation that can be executed when the second display is erased (hereinafter, referred to as “second erase animation (for example, an effective period image erase animation)”).
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, it is possible to execute a gauge display erasing animation.
(2-6) The pachinko machine 100,
The second display is a gauge display (for example, an image of a rectangular frame shape that is long horizontally),

  The gauge display is an indication that can suggest at least the remaining period of the third period by performing an animation in which the length of the gauge decreases,

  The gauge display is a display capable of at least notifying that the third period ends when the length of the gauge becomes zero,

The second erasing animation is an animation in which the gauge length becomes 0 even when the gauge length remains in relation to the operation means being operated in the third period. Is an animation containing at least
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, by displaying an animation of 0 in the gauge length display, it is easy to understand that the button operation corresponding to the gauge display to be deleted or the button display has been accepted. There are cases where it is possible.
(2-7) The pachinko machine 100,

  The display means is means capable of displaying at least the first display in a plurality of animation modes,

  At least one of the plurality of animation modes is a first animation mode (for example, a big button display),

  At least one of the plurality of animation modes is a second animation mode (for example, a button display mode other than the big button display),

The second animation mode is an animation mode different from the first animation mode.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the button display itself may function as a notice due to the difference in the animation mode of the button display.
(2-8) The pachinko machine 100,

The display means is means capable of displaying at least the second display which is a third number, and the third number is one.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the player can know that the operation is valid for a common operation by using one gauge display for a plurality of button displays (requests for multiple button operations). There are cases where it is possible to easily notify. The second display may be plural.
(2-9) The pachinko machine 100,
The second number is the same number as the first number.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having this configuration, since the button display and the number of button operations for executing the first effect are the same, the player knows the number of button operations necessary to execute the first effect. There are cases where it can be easily reported.

The second number may be a number different from the first number. When the second number is larger than the first number, it may be possible to notify that a plurality of button operations are required by displaying a plurality of buttons, and the second number is smaller than the first number Since the first effect is executed before the player performs the button operation by the number of button displays, the first effect may be surely executed.
Also, the pachinko machine 100,
The first number is three;
It is characterized by that.
(2-10) The pachinko machine 100,
The rendering means is means including at least the display means.
It is characterized by that.

The effect means may be configured not to include the display means. For example, the effect means may be a movable body that can move at least to the front side of the display means.
(3-1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is

  A plurality of operation means (for example, a chance button 136 and a direction key 137) provided at least at a position where the player can operate;

  Display means (for example, an effect display area 208d) capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of displays;

Production means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing at least a plurality of types of production;
A game machine equipped with

  At least one of the plurality of operation means is a first operation means (for example, a chance button 136),

  At least one of the plurality of operation means is a second operation means (for example, a direction key 137),

  At least one of the plurality of types of display is a first display (for example, display of a chance button image),

  At least one of the plurality of types of display is a second display (for example, display of a direction key image),

The first display is a display including at least a display suggesting the first operation means, and the second display is a display including at least a display suggesting the second operation means, One display is a display that can be started at least in the first period (for example, the execution period of the button effect),
The second display is a display that can be started at least during the first period;

  At least one of the multiple types of effects is a first effect (for example, an effect of deleting a button image and displaying another image),

  At least one of the multiple types of effects is a second effect (for example, an effect of deleting another direction key image and displaying another image),

  The first effect is an effect that can be started at least in connection with the operation of the first operation means (for example, the chance button 136 is pressed),

The second effect is an effect that can be started at least in connection with the operation of the second operation means (for example, pressing the direction key 137).
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having this configuration, there are a plurality of operation means, the operation means and the production are in a corresponding relationship, and the production order is determined by the operation order of the plurality of operation means. Can provide a gaming table with In addition, there are cases where an effect can be selected corresponding to the operation means.

The correspondence relationship between the first display and the first operation means, and the second display and the second operation means may not be unambiguous. For example, the first display may correspond to the second operation means, and any operation means is valid regardless of the type of the first display or the second display. May be.
(3-2) The pachinko machine 100,

  The first operation means is a means that at least accepts an operation related to the operation of the first operation means in a second period (for example, an operation effective period),

The second operation means is a means that at least accepts the operation of the second operation means during the second period,
The first period is a period including at least a part of the second period,

  The production means is means capable of at least starting the first production when the first operation means is operated in the second period;

The production means is means capable of at least starting the second production when the second operation means is operated in the second period.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, since the operation effective periods of the plurality of operation means are the same, the interest of the game may be improved by operating the plurality of operation means in one operation effective period.
(3-3) The pachinko machine 100,

  The production means is a means capable of starting the first production before the second production when the first condition is satisfied,

  When the second condition is satisfied, the effect means is a means capable of starting the second effect earlier than the first effect,

  The first condition is a condition that is satisfied when the first operation means is operated before the second operation means is operated in the second period,

The second condition is a condition that is satisfied when the second operation means is operated before the first operation means is operated in the second period.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, an effect corresponding to the previously operated operation means is performed first, so that the player may be able to select the appearance order of the first effect and the second effect. is there.
The pachinko machine 100,

  The production means is a means capable of executing only the first production when only the first condition is established in the second period;

The effect means is a means capable of executing only the second effect when only the second condition is satisfied in the second period.
It is characterized by that.

Here, “only the first effect” or “only the second effect” may be only one of the first effect and the second effect. Further, “only the first effect” or “only the second effect” may be only one of the first effect, the second effect, and the following third effect.
(3-4) The pachinko machine 100,

  The display means is means capable of executing at least the first display of a first number (for example, 2),

  The display means is means capable of executing at least the second display having a second number (for example, 1),

  At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a third effect (for example, an effect of forcibly displaying decorative symbols (see FIG. 463)),

The third effect is an effect that can be executed at least when the third condition is satisfied, and the third condition is operated the number of times that the first operation means becomes the first number, and , A condition that is satisfied at least when the second operating means is operated the number of times equal to the second number.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, since there is a third effect as an effect that appears by a plurality of operations, and there are a plurality of operation means, the first operation means and the second operation means are necessary. In some cases, an easy-to-understand notification can be made by matching the number of operations and the number of displays.
The pachinko machine 100,

  The third condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the second period ends.

A third effect may occur due to the expiration of the operation valid period. The third effect may be a configuration that is not performed when the third condition is not satisfied at the end of the operation effective period.
(3-5) The pachinko machine 100,

  The first operation means is a means capable of at least taking a plurality of states (for example, a plurality of button modes (“normal”, “vibration”, “vibration + rotation”, “light emission”, etc.))

  At least one of the plurality of states is a first state (for example, the button mode is “normal”),

At least one of the plurality of states is a second state (for example, the button mode is “vibration”),
The second state is a state different from the first state,

  The first display can be displayed at least in a plurality of display modes (for example, “normal”, “vibration”, “vibration + rotation”, “deca button display”, etc.)

  At least one of the plurality of display modes is a first display mode (for example, “normal”),

At least one of the plurality of display modes is a second display mode (for example, “vibration”),
The second display mode is a display mode different from the first display mode,
The first display mode is a display mode corresponding to at least the first state,
The second display mode is a display mode corresponding to at least the second state.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, there are cases where variations can be increased in the state of the button and the display mode according to the display mode that matches the state of the first operation means.

  The first operation means may be a chance button 136 that can rotate, vibrate, and emit light, and the second operation means may be a direction key 137 or a combination of other operation means. The operation means can be arbitrarily combined, and both the first operation means and the second operation means may be configured to take a plurality of states.

Moreover, the structure corresponding to a 2nd state may be sufficient as a 1st display aspect, and the structure corresponding to a 1st state may be sufficient as a 2nd display aspect.
(3-6) The pachinko machine 100,

At least one of the plurality of types of display is a third display (for example, display of an effective period image),
The third display is a display that can at least suggest the second period,

The display means is a means capable of executing at least the third display as a third number, and the third number is one.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the player can know that the operation is valid for a common operation by using one gauge display for a plurality of button displays (requests for multiple button operations). There are cases where it is possible to easily notify. The third display may be plural.
Also, the pachinko machine 100,
The sum of the first number and the second number is three.
It is characterized by that.
(3-7) The pachinko machine 100,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
The rendering means is means including at least the display means.
It is characterized by that.

The effect means may be configured not to include the display means. For example, the effect means may be a movable body that can move at least to the front side of the display means.
(4-1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is

  Operation means (for example, a chance button 136) provided at least at a position where the player can operate;

  Display means (for example, an effect display area 208d) capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of displays;

Production means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing at least a plurality of types of production;
A game machine equipped with

  Reception regarding the operation of the operation means is at least effective in a first effective period (for example, an operation effective period in a button effect),

  Reception regarding the operation of the operation means is at least effective in the second effective period (for example, the operation effective period in the production by the button hold icon),

  The second effective period is an effective period at least partially different from the first effective period,

  At least one of the plurality of types of display is a first display (for example, display of a chance button image),

At least one of the plurality of types of display is a second display (for example, a button hold icon display),
The first display is a display including at least a display suggesting the operation means,
The second display is a display including at least a display suggesting the operation means,

  The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display having a first number (for example, three),

  The first display is a display that can be started at least during a first period (for example, during a special figure variable game),

The second display is a display that can be started at least during a second period (for example, during a special figure variable game),
The first period is a period including at least a part of the first effective period,
The second period is a period including at least a part of the second effective period,

  At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect (for example, an effect informing the result of button operation),

At least one of the multiple types of effects is a second effect (for example, a pre-reading notice effect with a hold icon),
The first effect is an effect performed at least in association with the first display,
The second effect is an effect performed at least in association with the second display,

The first effect is an effect that can be executed at least when the number of times the operation means is operated in the first effective period becomes a second number (for example, three),
The first number is two or more;
The second number is two or more;
The second period is a period that may overlap the first period.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, a button display relating to another second effect appears in addition to a plurality of button displays corresponding to the first effect. Can be provided. In addition, variations in button effects may be increased. In addition, the second period may not overlap with the first period. For example, if the second effect is an effect with a button hold icon, the display timing of the button hold icon (due to the winning timing of the game ball at the start winning opening) is irregular, so the two periods overlap. In this case, any configuration that satisfies the above-mentioned contents at least is acceptable. In addition, you may further provide the 3rd display which suggests an operation means.
(4-2) The pachinko machine 100,

The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a display capable of suggesting the first effective period (hereinafter referred to as “third display (for example, display of effective period image)”),
The display means is means for not performing display that can suggest the second effective period.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the effective period display is performed in the button effect, and the effective period display is not performed in the effect based on the button holding icon.
The pachinko machine 100,
The second effective period is a period longer than the first effective period,
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, since the second effective period without the effective period display is longer than the first effective period with the effective period display, the button operation for the first effect is performed by displaying the effective period. In some cases.

The display means may perform a display that can suggest the second effective period, or there is one display that can indicate the period in both the first effective period and the second effective period. May be. Further, the second effective period may be an effective period shorter than the first effective period. For example, in the example of the button hold icon, when the display of the button hold icon is hold 1 (erased in relation to the start of the next symbol variation display), the operation valid period corresponding to the button hold is the first It may be shorter than the valid period of.
(4-3) The pachinko machine 100,

  A notice means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of executing at least a notice (for example, a notice of success or failure for the special figure variable game);

  A pre-reading notice unit (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of executing at least a pre-reading notice (for example, a notice of success or failure with respect to the special figure variable game related to the hold),

  The notice means is means capable of executing at least the notice by causing the effect means to perform the first effect,

The prefetch notice means is a means capable of executing at least the prefetch notice by causing the effect means to perform the second effect.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the button effect includes a notice of the notice of the change, and the effect of the button holding icon includes a notice of the pre-read notice, so that depending on the combination of the button display type and the notice type There are cases where variations in production can be increased.

Further, the first effect may be a pre-reading notice and the second effect may be a notice, or both effects may be a notice and both effects may be a pre-reading notice.
(4-4) The pachinko machine 100,

  A holding display means (for example, an effect display area 208d defining a special figure 1 holding display area) capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of holding icons (for example, special figure 1 holding icons a1 and a2),

  The hold display means is a means capable of informing at least the number of holds regarding the execution of the symbol variation display by the number of the hold icons to be displayed,

  At least one of the plurality of types of hold icons is a first hold icon (for example, a button hold icon),

At least one of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon (for example, a hold icon of a display mode that suggests a predetermined jackpot reliability),
The second display is the first hold icon,
The first hold icon is a button hold icon,

The second effect is an effect including at least an effect of changing the button hold icon to the second hold icon in association with the operation means being operated.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the effect by the button hold icon includes a prefetch notice of the hold icon, so the hold icon is a display that is deleted in association with the start of the symbol variation display, In some cases, the player can be recognized without displaying the effective period regarding the effective period.
(4-5) The pachinko machine 100,

The hold display means is means for not displaying a new button hold icon during a period in which the button hold icon is displayed.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, since a plurality of button hold icons are not displayed, it may be possible to prevent the button effect from becoming too complicated.

Moreover, the structure which displays a new 1st pending | holding icon may be sufficient even if it is the period when the 1st pending | holding icon is displayed.
(4-6) The pachinko machine 100,

The second effect is an effect that can be executed at least when the number of times the operation means is operated in the second effective period becomes a third number,
The third number is a number smaller than the second number.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having this configuration, the number of button operations for performing the second effect is less than the number of button operations for performing the first effect.

Further, the third number may be one or two or more. In another effect, the third number may be larger than the second number.
(4-7) The pachinko machine 100,

In the case where the first effective period and the second effective period overlap, the effect means is a means capable of executing the second effect earlier than the first effect.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the button production in the case where the valid periods are overlapped gives priority to the second presentation, so the second presentation that does not suggest the valid period is executed first. Thus, there is a case where a button operation can be prompted to perform both the second effect and the first effect within the first effective period.
(4-8) The pachinko machine 100,

In the case where the first effective period and the second effective period overlap, the effect means is a means capable of executing the first effect earlier than the second effect.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the button operation when the effective period overlaps gives priority to the first effect, and therefore, even when the first effective period and the second effective period overlap, By giving priority to the effect, there is a case where the button operation can be continued until the other effect is performed.

In addition to the operation means, it may be configured to select whether the first effect is executed first or the second effect is executed first by operating the second operation means (for example, the direction key 137). Good. Moreover, the structure which performs the effect corresponding to the button effect which generate | occur | produced previously may be sufficient.
(4-9) The pachinko machine 100,

The display means is means capable of displaying at least the third display which is a fourth number, and the fourth number is one.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the player can know that the operation is valid for a common operation by using one gauge display for a plurality of button displays (requests for multiple button operations). There are cases where it is possible to easily notify. The second display may be plural.
(4-10) The pachinko machine 100,
The second number is the same number as the first number.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having this configuration, since the button display and the number of button operations for executing the first effect are the same, the player knows the number of button operations necessary to execute the first effect. There are cases where it can be easily reported.

The second number may be a number different from the first number. When the second number is larger than the first number, it may be possible to notify that a plurality of button operations are required by displaying a plurality of buttons, and the second number is smaller than the first number Since the first effect is executed before the player performs the button operation by the number of button displays, the first effect may be surely executed.
The pachinko machine 100,
The first number is three;
It is characterized by that.
(4-11) The pachinko machine 100,
The rendering means is means including at least the display means.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the rendering means may be configured not to include the display means. For example, the effect means may be a movable body that can move at least to the front side of the display means.
(4-12) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment

  A plurality of operation means (for example, a chance button 136 and a direction key 137) provided at least at a position where the player can operate;

  Display means (for example, an effect display area 208d) capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of displays;

Production means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing at least a plurality of types of production;
A game machine equipped with
The game machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine,

  At least one of the plurality of types of display is a first display (for example, display of a chance button image),

  At least one of the plurality of types of display is a second display (for example, a button hold icon display),

  The first display is a display including at least a display suggesting a first operation means (for example, a chance button 136);

  The second display is a display including at least a display indicating a second operation means (for example, a direction key 137),

  The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display having a first number (for example, three),

  The first display is a display that can be started at least during a first period (for example, during a special figure variable game),

  The second display is a display that can be started at least during a second period (for example, during a special figure variable game),

  The first period is a period including at least a part of a period during which the reception related to the operation of the first operation means is valid (for example, an operation effective period in a button effect),

  The second period is a period including at least a part of a period during which the reception related to the operation of the second operation unit is valid (for example, an operation effective period in the effect by the button holding icon),

  At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect (for example, an effect informing the result of button operation),

At least one of the multiple types of effects is a second effect (for example, a pre-reading notice effect with a hold icon),
The first effect is an effect performed at least in association with the first display,
The second effect is an effect performed at least in association with the second display,

The first effect is an effect that can be executed at least when the number of times the first operation means is operated in the first period becomes a second number (for example, three),
The first number is two or more;
The second number is two or more;
The second period is a period that may overlap the first period.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, a button display relating to another second effect appears in addition to a plurality of button displays corresponding to the first effect. Can be provided. In addition, variations in button effects may be increased.
(5-1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is

  Operation means (for example, a chance button 136) provided at least at a position where the player can operate;

Display means (for example, an effect display area 208d) capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of displays;
Production means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
A game machine equipped with

  The effect means is a means capable of executing at least a first effect (for example, an effect for notifying a result of a button operation),

  At least one of the plurality of types of display is a first display (for example, display of a button image including a character string “PUSH”),

  At least one of the plurality of types of display is a second display (for example, display of a button image that does not include the characters “PUSH” or non-display of a button image),

  The first display is a display corresponding to at least a first mode (for example, non-auto button mode),

  The second display is a display corresponding to at least a second mode (for example, an auto button mode),

  The first mode is a mode in which the operation means is not automatically operated,

  The second mode is a mode in which the operation means is automatically operated,

The first display is a display that can be started at least in a first period (for example, a special figure variable game execution period),
The second display is a display that can be started at least during the first period;
The first display is a display including at least a display suggesting the operation means,

  The first period is a period including at least a part of a period during which reception regarding the operation of the operation means is valid (hereinafter referred to as “third period (for example, an operation effective period)”),

  The display means is means capable of displaying at least the first display having a first number (for example, 3),

The first effect is an effect that can be executed at least when the number of times the operation means is operated in the third period becomes a second number (for example, 2),
The first number is two or more;
The second number is two or more;
The second display is a display that is at least partially different from the first display.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the display of the button effect differs between the auto button mode and the non-auto button mode, so that it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a feature in the display means. In some cases, the mode can be easily recognized by the difference between the first display and the second display.

Moreover, you may provide the alerting | reporting means which alert | reports whether it is a 1st mode or a 2nd mode. Further, the second display may not be provided (no display may be the second display).
(5-2) The pachinko machine 100,

  Decorative symbol display means (for example, an effect display area 208d) capable of at least performing decorative symbol variation display is provided,

  The decorative symbol display means is a means capable of executing at least a first decorative symbol variation display (e.g., a decorative symbol variation display in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c),

  The first display is a display that can be started at least during the first period of the first decorative symbol variation display in the first mode;

The second display is a display that can be started at least in the first period of the first decorative symbol variation display in the second mode.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, it may be easy to recognize whether or not the operation of the button is necessary by clarifying a portion of the same type of decorative symbol variation display that is different in display depending on the mode. .
The pachinko machine 100,

Provided with a notice means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of executing at least a notice (for example, a notice of success or failure of the special figure variable game, a notice of whether or not to develop into SP reach),
The first display is a display that becomes at least a part of the advance notice,
The second display is a display that is at least a part of the advance notice,

  The first display is a display that may not start in the first period in the first decorative symbol variation display,

The second display is a display that may not be started in the first period in the first decorative symbol variation display.
It is characterized by that.
The pachinko machine 100,

  The decorative symbol display means is a means capable of executing at least a second decorative symbol variation display (e.g., another decorative symbol variation display in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c),

  The first display is a display that can be started at least during the second period of the second decorative symbol variation display in the first mode (for example, the execution period of another special symbol variation game),

The second display is a display that can be started at least during the second period of the second decorative symbol variation display in the second mode.
It is characterized by that.
By doing so, it is possible to execute a button effect even with another decorative symbol variation display.
(5-3) The pachinko machine 100,

  The first display is a display including at least a display that can suggest the third period (for example, display of an operation period image),

The second display is a display that does not include at least a display that can suggest the third period.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having this configuration, the effective period display is not performed in the auto button mode. In the auto button mode, the button operation is automatically performed, so there is no need to display the effective period, and the risk that the player misidentifies (misconception that button operation is necessary) may be reduced. .
(5-4) The pachinko machine 100,
The second display is a display including at least a display suggesting the operation means,

The display means is means capable of displaying at least the second display which is a third number (for example, 0),
The third number is a number smaller than the first number.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the number of buttons displayed in the auto button mode is smaller than the number of displays in the non-auto button mode.
The pachinko machine 100,
The third number is one;
It is characterized by that.

  Since there is only one button display in the auto button mode, the player may be able to recognize that it was a button effect in the non-auto button mode while thinning out the number of button displays.

Further, the number of buttons displayed in the auto button mode may be larger than the first number or may be the same. Further, the button display need not be performed in the auto button mode. In this case, if manual button operation is enabled, it may function as a hidden button effect.
(5-5) The pachinko machine 100,

  The effect means is a means capable of executing at least a second effect (for example, an effect of replacing the display of a button image with another image),

  The second effect is an effect that can be executed at least every time the operation means is operated in the first mode,

The second effect is an effect that can be executed at least in the third period in the second mode.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the second effect is an effect that is performed every time the operation means is operated (in the auto button mode, an effect that is performed during the operation valid period). There are cases where an effect that can be executed for each operation can also be executed at a timing that does not hinder the auto button mode.
(5-6) The pachinko machine 100,

When the operation means is operated during the third period in the second mode, the effect means can execute at least the second effect in relation to the operation means being operated. Is,
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, since the second effect can be executed even by a button operation during the auto button mode, it may be possible to give a player a sense of achievement by the button operation.
(5-7) The pachinko machine 100,
The rendering means is means including at least the display means.
It is characterized by that.

  The effect means may be configured not to include the display means. For example, the effect means may be a movable body that can move at least to the front side of the display means.

The auto button mode can be set by operating the direction key 137, the chance button 136, etc. during the demonstration screen display in the non-game state. Also, the release of the auto button mode can be canceled in the same manner as the above setting, or can be canceled by a button operation during the auto button mode. In the latter case, it may be canceled only during the production, or after that, the non-auto button mode may be continued.
The pachinko machine 100,
The first number is three;
It is characterized by that.
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be made.

  For example, in the first embodiment, the second effect is executed after the button operation is accepted, and the next second effect is executed after the next button operation is accepted. The next button operation may be performed when the second effect occurs.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, an aspect in which no effect or display is performed when there is a case where an effect or display may be performed is interpreted as an effect or display of “no effect” or “no display” being executed. To do.

  In addition, the effective period of the button operation in the above embodiment is an example, and when a button effect appears at another opportunity, naturally, an individual effective operation period is set. As a button effect, it is not always necessary to display a plurality of buttons. In another opportunity, a single button operation may be performed. A button display and a single gauge display may be executed. Moreover, even if it is the button production performed at the same timing and opportunity, you may make it perform by these combination. In this way, the number of button displays and gauge displays can sometimes function as a notice.

  Even when a plurality of button displays are displayed at the same time, at least some of the operation effective periods may be different from each other. As an example, at least one of the displayed button displays may be configured to start display during a period other than the operation effective period. For example, it may be possible to notify in advance that it is necessary to perform a plurality of button operations by displaying a button display before the operation valid period.

  The button display is the same with respect to the point that one of the button displays is different from the other, but for example, one (button display related to the most recent button operation) is turned on by an effect, and the other button display is dimmed. An aspect such as a display (display that is relatively dark) is also included in one of a plurality of button displays different from the other.

  The contents described in relation to the button display may be applied to the gauge display as long as there is no problem, and the contents described in relation to the gauge display are appropriately displayed in the button unless there is a problem. You may apply. The various effects are configured to be started in connection with the button operation, but may be configured to be started based on other conditions. For example, the start time of the production may be determined in advance by time, and the button may not be operated during that time, or may be performed by operation of an operation means different from the button.

  The operation means is not limited to a button, and a touch sensor type operation means, a liquid crystal touch panel, a lever type operation means, an operation means using a proximity sensor, or the like can be used as appropriate.

  For example, in Example 1, the second effect is an effect performed every time the button is operated. However, when the number of button operations for which the first effect is performed is reached, the second effect and the first effect are performed. The structure which performs both of this production may be sufficient, and the structure which performs only the 1st production may be sufficient.

  Moreover, the structure which comprises a some operation means and performs a button effect using this some operation means may be sufficient. For example, a configuration may be used in which one is selected from a plurality of options using a touch panel and an operation for confirming the selection using the effect button is performed.

  The configuration may be such that the presentation according to the button operation is executed at another opportunity when the button operation is not performed (for example, a completely different opportunity different from the timing at which the operation is automatically expired).

  A configuration in which the first effect that appears by a plurality of button operations may appear before the plurality of operations are performed. In this case, before multiple operations are performed, for example, when the number of button operations is less than the specified number of operations, or when the valid period ends before the specified number of button operations is performed, etc. To do.

  The second effect performed for each button operation may be an effect in which one display changes for each button operation. For example, the configuration may be such that the character A appears by the first button operation, and the character A becomes larger or the color changes by the second and subsequent button operations, or is trusted by the second and subsequent operations. It may be configured to change to another character B or character C having a higher degree.

  There may be a configuration in which the combination of the results of the second effects performed for each button operation and the results of the first effects performed thereafter are related. For example, it may be configured to perform SP reach development, jackpot notification, or the like by combining the second performance results.

In addition, the embodiment described above and the embodiments described below can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in the game machine. Note that the items described in the above and the following detailed description, in particular, the items described in the embodiments and the modifications can be combined.
The game table of the above embodiment is expressed as follows, for example.

(Appendix B1)
Operation means provided at least in a position where the player can operate;
Display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of display;
Production means capable of executing at least multiple types of production,
A game machine equipped with
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a first display,
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a second display,
The first display is a display including at least a display suggesting the operation means,
The second display is displayed at least in a period (hereinafter referred to as “third period”) in which the reception regarding the operation of the operation means is valid.
The first display is a display that can be started at least in the first period;
The second display is a display that can be started at least in the second period,
The first period is a period including at least a part of the third period;
The second period is a period including at least a part of the third period,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least the first number of the first display, and at least one of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect,
At least one of the multiple types of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect that can be executed at least when the number of times the operation means is operated in the third period becomes a second number,
The first number is two or more;
The second number is two or more;
The second effect is an effect that may be executed while hiding at least a part of the first display that is the first number.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix B2)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix B1,
The game table characterized in that the second effect is an effect that can be executed at least every time an operation of the operation means is accepted.

(Appendix B3)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix B1 or 2,
The display means is means capable of erasing at least one of the first displays in response to a single operation of the operation means.
The second effect is an effect that may be executed while hiding at least a part of the other first display in which the display is continued.
A game stand that specializes in that.

(Appendix B4)
The game stand according to any one of appendices B1 to B3,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least the second display which is a third number, and the third number is one.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix B5)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix B4,
The game table characterized in that the second effect is an effect that may hide at least part of the second display.

(Appendix B6)
A gaming table according to appendix B4 or B5,
The first display is a button display;
The second display is a gauge display,
The third number is one;
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a plurality of button displays arranged in a first direction,
The gauge display is a display that can at least suggest the remaining period of the third period by reducing the length of the gauge,
The gauge display is a display in which the length of the gauge decreases in a second direction,
The second direction is the same direction as the first direction.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix B7)
The game stand according to any one of appendices B1 to B6,
The second number is the same number as the first number.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix B8)
The game stand according to any one of appendices B1 to B7,
The first number is three;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix B9)
The game stand according to any one of appendices B1 to B8,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display in a plurality of modes, and at least one of the plurality of modes is a first mode,
At least one of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect,
The second aspect is an aspect different from the first aspect.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix B10)
The game stand according to any one of appendices B1 to B9,
The rendering means is means including at least the display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix B11)
The game stand according to any one of appendices B1 to B10,
The second effect is an effect not related at least to the operation of the operation means,
The second performance is a notice,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix B12)
The game stand according to any one of appendices B1 to B11,
The first display is an animation display;
The second display is an animation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix B13)
The game stand according to any one of appendices B1 to B12,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix B14)
The game stand according to any one of appendices B1 to B12,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix C1)
Operation means provided at least in a position where the player can operate;
Display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of display;
Production means capable of executing at least the first production;
A game machine equipped with
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a first display,
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a second display,
The first display is a display including at least a display suggesting the operation means,
The second display is displayed at least in a period (hereinafter referred to as “third period”) in which the reception regarding the operation of the operation means is valid.
The first display is at least an animation display;
The second display is at least an animation display,
The first display is a display that can be started at least in the first period;
The second display is a display that can be started at least in the second period,
The first period is a period including at least a part of the third period;
The second period is a period including at least a part of the third period,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least the first display having the first number, and the first effect is that the number of times the operation means is operated in the third period is the second number. If it becomes a number, it is a production that can be performed at least,
The first number is two or more;
The second number is two or more.
A game stand that specializes in that.

(Appendix C2)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix C1,
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a third display,
The third display is an animation display,
The third display is a display that can be started at least in association with the operation of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix C3)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix C2,
The first display is a display at least erasable in association with the operation means being operated,
The third display is an erase animation that can be executed when the first display is erased (hereinafter referred to as “first erase animation”).
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix C4)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix C3,
The effect means is means capable of executing at least a second effect,
The second effect is an effect that can be started at least in connection with the operation means being operated,
The second effect is an effect that can be started at least after the first erasure animation is performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix C5)
The game stand according to any one of appendices C2 to C4,
The second display is a display that is at least erasable in association with the operation means being operated,
The third display is an erase animation that can be executed when the second display is erased (hereinafter referred to as “second erase animation”).
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix C6)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix C5,
The second display is a gauge display,
The gauge display is an indication that can suggest at least the remaining period of the third period by performing an animation in which the length of the gauge decreases,
The gauge display is a display capable of at least notifying that the third period ends when the length of the gauge becomes zero,
The second erasing animation is an animation in which the gauge length becomes 0 even when the gauge length remains in relation to the operation means being operated in the third period. Is an animation containing at least
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix C7)
The game stand according to any one of appendices C1 to C6,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least the first display in a plurality of animation modes,
At least one of the plurality of animation modes is a first animation mode,
At least one of the plurality of animation modes is a second animation mode,
The second animation mode is an animation mode different from the first animation mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix C8)
The game stand according to any one of appendices C1 to C7,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least the second display which is a third number, and the third number is one.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix C9)
The game stand according to any one of appendices C1 to C8,
The second number is the same number as the first number.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix C10)
The game stand according to any one of appendices C1 to C9,
The first number is three;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix C11)
The game stand according to any one of appendices C1 to C10,
The rendering means is means including at least the display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix C12)
The game stand according to any one of appendices C1 to C11,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix C13)
The game stand according to any one of appendices C1 to C11,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix D1)
A plurality of operating means provided at least at positions operable by the player;
Display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of display;
Production means capable of executing at least multiple types of production,
A game machine equipped with
At least one of the plurality of operation means is a first operation means,
At least one of the plurality of operation means is a second operation means,
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a first display,
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a second display,
The first display is a display including at least a display suggesting the first operation means, and the second display is a display including at least a display suggesting the second operation means, One display is a display that can be started at least in the first period;
The second display is a display that can be started at least during the first period;
At least one of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
At least one of the multiple types of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect that can be started at least in connection with the operation of the first operation means,
The second effect is an effect that can be started at least in connection with the operation of the second operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix D2)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix D1,
The first operation means is a means that at least accepts the operation of the first operation means during the second period,
The second operation means is a means that at least accepts the operation of the second operation means during the second period,
The first period is a period including at least a part of the second period,
The production means is means capable of at least starting the first production when the first operation means is operated in the second period;
The production means is means capable of at least starting the second production when the second operation means is operated in the second period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix D3)
A game machine according to appendix D2,
The production means is a means capable of starting the first production earlier than the second production when the first condition is satisfied,
When the second condition is satisfied, the effect means is a means capable of starting the second effect earlier than the first effect,
The first condition is a condition that is satisfied when the first operation means is operated before the second operation means is operated in the second period,
The second condition is a condition that is satisfied when the second operation means is operated before the first operation means is operated in the second period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix D4)
A gaming machine according to appendix D2 or D3,
The display means is a means capable of executing at least the first display corresponding to a first number, and the display means is a means capable of executing at least the second display corresponding to a second number, At least one of the multiple types of effects is a third effect,
The third effect is an effect that can be executed at least when the third condition is satisfied, and the third condition is operated the number of times that the first operation means becomes the first number, and , A condition that is satisfied at least when the second operating means is operated the number of times equal to the second number.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix D5)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix D4,
The first operating means is means capable of at least taking a plurality of states,
At least one of the plurality of states is a first state;
At least one of the plurality of states is a second state;
The second state is a state different from the first state,
The first display can be displayed at least in a plurality of display modes,
At least one of the plurality of display modes is a first display mode,
At least one of the plurality of display modes is a second display mode,
The second display mode is a display mode different from the first display mode,
The first display mode is a display mode corresponding to at least the first state,
The second display mode is a display mode corresponding to at least the second state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix D6)
A game machine according to appendix D4 or D5,
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a third display,
The third display is a display that can at least suggest the second period,
The display means is a means capable of executing at least the third display as a third number, and the third number is one.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix D7)
The game stand according to any one of appendices D4 to D6,
The sum of the first number and the second number is three.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix D8)
The game stand according to any one of appendices D1 to D7,
The rendering means is means including at least the display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix D9)
The game stand according to any one of appendices D1 to D8,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix D10)
The game stand according to any one of appendices D1 to D8,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix E1)
Operation means provided at least in a position where the player can operate;
Display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of display;
Production means capable of executing at least multiple types of production,
A game machine equipped with
The reception related to the operation of the operation means is at least valid in the first effective period, the reception related to the operation of the operation means is at least effective in the second effective period, and the second effective period is the first effective period A validity period that differs at least in part from one validity period;
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a first display,
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a second display,
The first display is a display including at least a display suggesting the operation means,
The second display is a display including at least a display suggesting the operation means,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least the first display of a first number, and the first display is display capable of starting at least in a first period,
The second display is a display that can be started at least in the second period,
The first period is a period including at least a part of the first effective period,
The second period is a period including at least a part of the second effective period,
At least one of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
At least one of the multiple types of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect performed at least in association with the first display,
The second effect is an effect performed at least in association with the second display,
The first effect is an effect that can be executed at least when the number of times the operation means is operated in the first effective period becomes a second number,
The first number is two or more;
The second number is two or more;
The second period is a period that may overlap the first period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix E2)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix E1,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a display capable of suggesting the first effective period (hereinafter referred to as “third display”),
The display means is means for not performing display that can suggest the second effective period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix E3)
A game machine according to appendix E1 or E2,
A notice means capable of executing at least a notice;
A prefetch notice means capable of executing at least a prefetch notice,
The notice means is means capable of executing at least the notice by causing the effect means to perform the first effect,
The prefetch notice means is a means capable of executing at least the prefetch notice by causing the effect means to perform the second effect.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix E4)
The game stand according to any one of appendices E1 to E3,
A hold display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of hold icons is provided.
The hold display means is a means capable of informing at least the number of holds regarding the execution of the symbol variation display by the number of the hold icons to be displayed,
At least one of the plurality of types of hold icons is a first hold icon, at least one of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon, and the second display is , The first hold icon,
The first hold icon is a button hold icon,
The second effect is an effect including at least an effect of changing the button hold icon to the second hold icon in association with the operation means being operated.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix E5)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix E4,
The hold display means is means for not displaying a new button hold icon during a period in which the button hold icon is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix E6)
The game stand according to any one of appendices E1 to E5,
The second effect is an effect that can be executed at least when the number of times the operation means is operated in the second effective period becomes a third number,
The third number is a number smaller than the second number.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix E7)
The game stand according to any one of appendices E1 to E6,
In the case where the first effective period and the second effective period overlap, the effect means is a means capable of executing the second effect earlier than the first effect.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix E8)
The game stand according to any one of appendices E1 to E7,
In the case where the first effective period and the second effective period overlap, the effect means is a means capable of executing the first effect earlier than the second effect.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix E9)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix E2,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least the third display which is a fourth number, and the fourth number is one.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix E10)
The game stand according to any one of appendices E1 to E9,
The second number is the same number as the first number.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix E11)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E10,
The first number is three;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix E12)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E11,
The rendering means is means including at least the display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix E13)
The game stand according to any one of appendices E1 to E12,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix E14)
The game stand according to any one of appendices E1 to E12,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix E15)
A plurality of operating means provided at least at positions operable by the player;
Display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of display;
Production means capable of executing at least multiple types of production,
A game machine equipped with
The game machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine,
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a first display,
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a second display,
The first display is a display including at least a display suggesting a first operation means,
The second display is a display including at least a display suggesting a second operation means,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least the first display of a first number, and the first display is display capable of starting at least in a first period,
The second display is a display that can be started at least in the second period,
The first period is a period including at least a part of a period during which the reception related to the operation of the first operation means is valid,
The second period is a period including at least a part of a period in which the reception related to the operation of the second operation unit is valid,
At least one of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
At least one of the multiple types of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect performed at least in association with the first display,
The second effect is an effect performed at least in association with the second display,
The first effect is an effect that can be executed at least when the number of times the first operation means is operated in the first period becomes a second number,
The first number is two or more;
The second number is two or more;
The second period is a period that may overlap the first period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix F1)
Operation means provided at least in a position where the player can operate;
Display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of display;
Directing means;
A game machine equipped with
The effect means is means capable of executing at least a first effect,
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a first display,
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a second display,
The first display is a display corresponding to at least the first mode;
The second display is a display corresponding to at least the second mode,
The first mode is a mode in which the operation means is not automatically operated,
The second mode is a mode in which the operation means is automatically operated,
The first display is a display that can be started at least in the first period;
The second display is a display that can be started at least during the first period;
The first display is a display including at least a display suggesting the operation means,
The first period is a period including at least a part of a period (hereinafter referred to as “third period”) in which the reception related to the operation of the operation unit is valid,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least the first display having the first number, and the first effect is that the number of times the operation means is operated in the third period is the second number. If it becomes a number, it is a production that can be performed at least,
The first number is two or more;
The second number is two or more;
The second display is a display that is at least partially different from the first display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix F2)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix F1,
Decorative symbol display means capable of executing at least decorative symbol variation display is provided,
The decorative symbol display means is a means capable of executing at least a first decorative symbol variation display,
The first display is a display that can be started at least during the first period of the first decorative symbol variation display in the first mode;
The second display is a display that can be started at least in the first period of the first decorative symbol variation display in the second mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix F3)
The gaming machine according to appendix F1 or F2, wherein the first display is a display including at least a display capable of suggesting the third period, and the second display suggests the third period A display that does not contain at least a possible display,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix F4)
The game stand according to any one of appendices F1 to F3,
The second display is a display including at least a display suggesting the operation means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the second display as a third number, and the third number is a number smaller than the first number.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix F5)
The game stand according to any one of appendices F1 to F4,
The effect means is means capable of executing at least a second effect,
The second effect is an effect that can be executed at least every time the operation means is operated in the first mode,
The second effect is an effect that can be executed at least in the third period in the second mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix F6)
A gaming machine according to appendix F5,
When the operation means is operated during the third period in the second mode, the effect means can execute at least the second effect in relation to the operation means being operated. Is,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix F7)
The game stand according to any one of appendices F1 to F6,
The rendering means is means including at least the display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix F8)
The game stand according to any one of appendices F1 to F7,
The first number is three;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix F9)
The game stand according to any one of appendices F1 to F8,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix F10)
The game stand according to any one of appendices F1 to F8,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.
[Ninth Embodiment]

  Hereinafter, a game machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a spinning machine such as a slot machine) according to a ninth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. It should be noted that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 475 to 504 are used only in the description of the ninth embodiment in principle, and even if the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the present embodiment. In the explanation of Fig. 4, priority is given to the reference numerals shown in Figs.

  First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so as to be inside thereof. Is a door member having an opening 116. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The front frame door 106 can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “balls”) in a portion below the opening 116 and guide the game balls to the launching device 110. The upper plate 126 is provided, the lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 by the player's operation are discharged to the lower plate 128. A ball release button 130, a ball discharge lever 132 for discharging game balls stored in the lower plate 128 by a player's operation to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box), and a player's operation to the launcher 110. The ball launching handle 134 for launching the guided game ball to the game area 124 of the game board 200, and the effect of changing the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (not shown in FIG. 475) by the player's operation. A card button (a CR unit), a chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light, a setting operation unit 137 that allows various settings and the like by operation of a setting person (for example, a player or a game shop clerk), and a card unit (CR unit). A ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending, a return operation button 142 for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance, and a ball lending display section for displaying the player's balance and card unit status ( (Not shown). In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. .

  The setting operation unit 137 is a push button type switch that can be pressed by the setter, and a confirm (OK) button, an upper button positioned above the confirm button, a lower button positioned below the confirm button, and confirm A right button positioned to the right of the button, a left button positioned to the left of the confirm button, and a cancel (C) button positioned further to the right of the right button. The setting operation unit 137 includes an operation unit sensor that detects the pressing of each button. The setting operation unit 137 of this example has a unit structure in which buttons and operation unit sensors are integrated. At least one of the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 functions as a chance button that changes the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 477) by the player's operation when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It may be.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 476 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 475 as viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 for guiding a ball that has passed through the communicating hole and dropped to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is provided.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is displayed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 478). The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the drawing, the main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and the production based on the processing information generated by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs the control process and the first sub-board 160 that houses the first sub-board 160 that includes the rotary volume control switch 161 that adjusts the volume output from the pachinko machine 100 by the operation of the game shop clerk. A second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500 that performs a control process related to the production based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400; An error release switch that constitutes a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls and that releases an error by the operation of a game store clerk 68, a payout board case 172 for storing a payout board 170, a launch board case 176 for housing a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control unit 630 for performing control processing relating to the launch of a game ball, and a power source for various electric gaming machines. And a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game clerk and an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs an RWM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when the power is turned on. A power board case 184 that houses the power board 182, a CR interface unit 186 that transmits and receives signals between the dispensing control unit 600 and the card unit, and a main board for outputting information of the pachinko machine 100 to an external hall computer or the like 156, the first sub-board 160, etc. and the hall computer, etc. It is provided with a relay substrate 188, the to relay.

  The main board 156, the first sub board 160, the second sub board 164 and the like are provided on the back surface of the game board 200 because they need to be changed for each model, and the payout board 170, the launch board 174, the power board 182 and the like are provided. Since it is used in common by a plurality of models, the outer frame 102 is provided.

  FIG. 477 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 at substantially the center. The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The game board 200 in this example is a game board for a so-called right-handed machine. In the right-handed machine, by changing the launch strength of the game ball by operating the ball launching handle 134, the falling path of the game ball is divided into a right path on the right side from the effect device 206 and a left path on the left side from the effect device 206. be able to. In this example, to a normal symbol starting port 228, a normal symbol starting port 229, a first special symbol starting port 230, a second special symbol starting port 232 (open state), variable winning ports 234, 235 (open state), etc., which will be described later. The ease of entering the ball differs between a game ball that falls on the right path and a game ball that falls on the left path.

  For each of the normal symbol start port 229, the second special symbol start port 232 and the variable winning port 235, the normal symbol start port 229, the second special symbol start port 232 and the variable winning port 235 are arranged on the right path. Therefore, it is relatively easy to enter a game ball falling on the right path, and it is relatively difficult or impossible to enter a game ball falling on the left path. On the other hand, for each of the normal symbol starting port 228, the first special symbol starting port 230, and the variable winning port 234, a game that falls on the left path due to the influence of the arrangement pattern of the game nails 238, the warp device 242, and the like. It is relatively easy to enter a ball, and it is relatively difficult to enter a game ball that falls on the right path. In the present embodiment, a right-handed machine is taken as an example, but a right-handed machine may be used.

  The decorative design display device 208 is a display device for displaying decorative images and various images (moving images or still images) used for production. In the present embodiment, the decorative design display device 208 is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four symbol display regions 208a, a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c, a fourth symbol display region 208e, and an effect display region 208d. The middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c display different decorative symbols, the fourth symbol display area 208e displays the fourth symbol, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d, and 208e can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 477, the display position of the fourth symbol display area 208e is fixed to the lower end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 477, one fourth symbol display area 208e corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is provided (two in total). Only one common fourth symbol display area 208e corresponding to both special symbols may be provided. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  Below the gaming area 124, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol hold lamp 218, and a second special symbol hold lamp 220 A normal symbol holding lamp 216 and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. In addition, hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, the special symbol as “special symbol”, the first special symbol as “special symbol 1”, and the second special symbol as “special symbol 2”.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 are display devices for displaying the special figure, and are configured by 7 segment LEDs in the present embodiment.

  The universal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of universal figure floating games (details will be described later) that are on hold. In the present embodiment, up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of universal figure floating games. It is possible to hold. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games that are held (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, the special figure variable games are predetermined. It is possible to hold up to a number (for example, 4). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a normal start port 228, 229, a special view 1 start port 230, and a special view 2 start port 232, are variable around the rendering device 206. Winning ports 234 and 235 are arranged.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are provided on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In the present embodiment, the game balls are paid out to the player as a consideration for winning (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “prize balls”) and balls lent to the player (hereinafter referred to as “rental balls”). May be included).

  The general map start port 228 and the general map start port 229 are configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed through a predetermined area of the game area 124. In the embodiment, one general-purpose start port 228 is disposed on the left path of the game board 200, and one general-purpose start port 229 is disposed on the right path. Unlike the ball that entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the ordinary drawing starting port 228 or the universal drawing starting port 229 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map start port 228 or the general map start port 229, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one special figure 1 starting port 230 is provided at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 1 starting port 230, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls as prize balls to the upper plate 126. Then, the special figure variable game (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “special figure 1 variable game”) by the special figure 1 display device 212 is started. Note that the ball that has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The special figure 2 starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electrical chew), and in this embodiment, only one is provided on the right path. The special figure 2 starting port 232 is provided with a pair of blade members 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the blade members 232a are closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 2 232, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. Then, a special figure variable game (hereinafter, also referred to as “special figure 2 variable game”) by the special figure 2 display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the special figure 2 starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The variable winning openings 234 and 235 are called a large winning opening or an attacker. In the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is provided below the center of the game board 200, and the variable winning opening 235 is on the right path. Only one is provided. The variable winning openings 234 and 235 are each provided with a door member that can be freely opened and closed, and a ball cannot be entered while the door member is closed. If the special figure display device stops and displays the jackpot symbol after winning the special figure variation game, for example, one door member of the variable prize opening 234, 235 is closed at a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time) It opens and closes at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) for a time of 1.5 seconds. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, 235, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as a winning ball. The balls that have entered the variable winning openings 234 and 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's ball launch handle 134, and The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are made to pass through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 by the 146 and the launcher 148 and are launched into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the direction of travel by the batting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning port (general winning port 226, variable winning ports 234, 235) or Wins at the starting port (Special Figure 1 starting port 230, Special Figure 2 starting port 232), or wins without winning any of the winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal starting ports 228, 229 Reach mouth 240.

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the stage device 206, a warp device 242 (242a, 242b) and a front stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is placed in the area where the game ball cannot roll. It is arranged. In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter may be referred to as a door or a shutter) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the front stage 244, and the effect movable body 224. The warp device 242 discharges the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the front stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The front stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball carried by a nail of the game board 200, and the passed ball is in the center of the front stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry to 230.

  The effect movable body 224 of this example includes a horizontally long flat panel on which the model name of the pachinko machine 100 and the like are displayed. The effect movable body 224 is movable by a stepping motor (not shown) so that the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 can be moved in the vertical direction within a plane substantially parallel to the display screen.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good. The shielding device 246 of this example is configured to expose the lower end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 even when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed. As a result, the fourth symbol display area 208e located at the lower end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is visible regardless of the open / closed state of the shielding device 246.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 performs the game ball launch control, and the power supply control unit 660 controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. .

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a time And a counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in the program processing. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 has a random value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (a counter circuit) 318 (used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit includes two counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, or opening the front frame door A sensor circuit for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, and a lower plate full sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302 322, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device such as the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 display device 214, and a predetermined figure A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the display device, for example, the general map display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, the general map hold lamp 216, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, the high Driving circuit 330 for performing display control of the center lamp 222 and the like, and various movable members such as a blade member 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 and door members of the variable winning ports 234 and 235 are opened and closed. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the solenoid 332 is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is lower than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the 1 sub control part 400 and the payout control part 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300. However, information communication between the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 may be performed by bidirectional communication.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based mainly on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and frequency. It is installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138). A driving circuit 432 for controlling the driving of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button sensor 426 for detecting the pressing of the chance button 136, and an output from the speaker 120. Volume adjustment switch 161 (not shown in FIG. 478) for adjusting the volume to be operated, operation unit sensors (not shown) for detecting depression of each button of the setting operation unit 137, and detection signals from these sensors. A sensor circuit 428 that outputs to the basic circuit 402 and a signal stored in the ROM 406 based on a signal from the CPU 404 Are connected to the VDP (Video Display Processor) 434 for displaying an image on the decorative pattern display unit 208 generates display image using a work area of VRAM436 reads image data or the like, the.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like. doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored.

  The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. Is output to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table frame lamp drive for controlling the game table frame lamp 542 The circuit 540 is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and wins or rents a ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to the unit 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

  Next, using FIG. 479 (a) to (d), the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the universal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of figures and ordinary drawings will be described. FIG. 479 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol pattern of FIG. 1, and FIG. 479 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol pattern of FIG. The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the special figure 2 start opening 232 indicates that the ball has entered 2 The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the start sensor is detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs “variable display of special figure 2” by repeating all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. . These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display in the present embodiment. When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation in FIG. 1 elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1 and the fluctuation time determined before the fluctuation starts in the special figure 2. After the elapse, the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol fluctuation stop display referred to in the present embodiment, the stop symbol mode of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed after the "fluctuation display of special figure 1 or 2" is started. A series of displays until this is done is referred to as symbol variation stop display. The symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  FIG. 479 (a) shows seven types of special charts “special chart A” to “special chart G” as stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display of special diagram 1. In FIG. 479 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on. "Special Figure A" is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, "Special Figure B" is a 7R special jackpot symbol, and "Special Figure C" is a 7R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not a special big hit is determined and the number of rounds are determined by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is a special figure variation game after the jackpot game ends, and the difference in probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot). Hereinafter, a state with a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “special figure certain change” or simply “probable change”), and a state with a low probability is specially designated. This is called a low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special jackpot game ends, after the 7R special jackpot game ends and after the 7R jackpot game ends, the state shifts to the time-saving state (electric support state). Although the short time will be described in detail later, the short time state is referred to as a normal high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “general probability change”), and the non-short time state is referred to as a general low probability state. “Special Figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure B”, which is a 7R special jackpot symbol, are symbols that become a special figure high probability common figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends, and are 7R jackpot symbols. “Special figure C” is a symbol that becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the end of the big hit game. These “special drawing A”, “special drawing B”, and “special drawing C” are symbols that have a relatively large advantage over the player.

  "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a symbol that becomes a special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends. That is, “Special Figure D” is 2R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 15R and “Special Figure B” which is 7R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called latent probability variation or hidden probability variation. As will be described later, when “Special Figure E” is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state (so-called “open” time 100 ms × 2R) ends. If the special figure E is stopped and displayed in a state other than the low probability state, the special figure high probability will be displayed after the big hit game (opening time 29000 ms × 2R). The state shifts to a high probability state (see FIGS. 485 (a) and (b)). In other words, the “special figure E” indicates that the action during the big hit game and the game state to be shifted thereafter are determined according to the game state when the stop display is made (in this example, whether or not the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). It is a different design.

  “Special figure F” is a small hit symbol, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. Further, the “special chart G” is an off-line symbol, and is a symbol that is relatively less advantageous to the player.

  In FIG. 479 (b), four types of special figures “Special figure a” to “Special figure d” are shown as the stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display of Special figure 2. “Special figure a” is a 15R special jackpot symbol, “Special figure b” is a 7R special jackpot symbol, “Special figure c” is a 7R jackpot symbol, and “Special figure d” is a missed symbol. In the present embodiment, seven types of special maps (of which five types are big hits) are used as the special symbol 2 as the special symbols 1 to 7 as shown in FIG. As the stop symbol pattern, four types of special maps (three of which are big hits) are used. By configuring in this way, there is a case where it is possible to provide a difference between the advantages of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 without changing the probability of being a big hit and the probability of being probable among the big wins. In this example, the big hit of Special Figure 1 includes sudden probability changes and latent probability changes that hardly give out balls, whereas the big hit of Special Figure 2 does not include sudden probability changes and latent probability changes. The advantage of special figure 2 is higher than that of special figure 1.

  FIG. 479 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 9” and “Decoration 10” represent the numbers “1” to “9” and “0”, respectively. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the start port 232. In the symbol display area, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... → “decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. “Change design of symbols”.

  And then, "Special Figure A" 15R special jackpot, "Special Figure B" 7R special jackpot, "Special Figure C" 7R big jackpot, "Special Figure a" 15R special jackpot, "Special Figure b" 7R special jackpot When the 7R jackpot of “special drawing c” is notified, a combination of symbols in which three same decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, “decoration 1—decoration 1—decoration 1” or “decoration 2— Display “decoration 2—decoration 2”). When the 15R special jackpot of “Special Figure A” and the 15R special jackpot of “Special Figure a” are explicitly notified, a combination of three symbols with the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “Decoration 3-Decoration 3- “Decoration 3”, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”, etc.) are stopped and displayed.

  In addition, when notifying 2R big hit called “special drawing E” latent probability change (hidden probability change) or “special drawing F” small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. To do. When a 2R jackpot called “sudden change” of “special drawing D” is notified, “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5” is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when notifying of the difference between “special symbol G” and “special symbol d”, symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 479 (c) are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 479 (d) shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. In this embodiment, there are three types of stop-display modes for normal maps: “general map A” and “general map B” which are hit symbols, and “general map C” which is a misplaced symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the general map start port 228 and the general map start port 229, the general map display device 210 turns on all seven segments and displays one in the center. Repeatedly turn on the segment of “Usual change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” or “special figure B” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the deviation of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure C” is stopped and displayed. To do. Also in FIG. 479 (d), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal is input executes a main control unit main process according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306 after resetting by a reset interrupt.

  First, in step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Enable operation, set initial values, etc. In this embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted. In step S105 subsequent to step S103, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. When it is less than (9 V in this example), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, a second output port, etc.) 1) a process of outputting a clear signal from the output port 1), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

  In step S109 subsequent to step S107, it is determined whether or not the state before power interruption (before power interruption) is restored. If the state before power interruption is not restored (the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is changed). In the case of initializing), the process proceeds to initialization processing (step S113). Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when an RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 is operated by a store clerk or the like is on (indicating that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 is added to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0. Thus, the checksum is calculated, and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off. In the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later, the first sub control unit 400. Sent to.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, the command setting transmission process (in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300) ( In step S233), the data is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115 subsequent to step S113, the basic random number initial value updating process is performed after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this basic random number initial value update process, the initial values of the four random number counters for generating the normal winning random number, the normal random number, the special figure 1 random value, and the special figure 2 random value are generated. The four initial value generation random number counters and the two random number counters for generating each of the normal figure variation time determination random value and the special figure variation time determination random value are updated. For example, if the numerical value range that can be taken as the random number value for determining the normal time variation is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the random value for determining the normal time variation time provided in the RAM 308 and acquired. Then, 1 is added to the obtained value and stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in a basic random number initial value update process (step S207) described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

  Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this example, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt processing is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. At a predetermined cycle.

  First, in step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed. In step S203 following step S201, the WDT 314 is periodically updated so that the WDT 314 count value exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this example) and no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). Therefore (in this example, the restart is performed once in about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt).

  In step S205 subsequent to step S203, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed in step S205. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the sphere detection sensor, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal.

  In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal) is stored. In step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is pre-determined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal present, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning opening 226, the variable winning openings 234, 235, the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the special figure 2 starting opening 232, or the ordinary drawing starting opening 228. 229, it is determined that there was a passage. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been received at these winning ports 226, 234, 235 and the starting ports 230, 232, 228, 229. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before, no previous detection signal, no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 subsequent to step S205, a basic random number initial value update process is performed, and in the next step S209, a basic random number update process is performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the initial value generation random number counter updated in step S115 is updated, and then used in the main control unit 300. Four random number counters for generating the random value, the special figure 1 random value, and the special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made a round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired, and the random number counter storage area Set to.

  For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating a normal winning random value has made one round next, in addition to setting the random number counter for generating a winning random value Keep it. In addition to the above initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, the random number counter for generating the random number value for the normal value, generating the random number value for the special figure 1 The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for use and the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random number value have made one round each. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the special figure 1 random value and the counter for acquiring the special figure 2 random value are provided separately, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211 following step S209, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213 following step S211, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 and the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 are counted. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer, Special figure 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the special figure 2 display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined time Various timers including a timer for counting the closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215 subsequent to step S213, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when the winning holes 226, 234, 235 and the starting holes 230, 232, 228, 229 have been won, a prize ball provided in the RAM 308 for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value in the number storage area is read out, and 1 is added to set the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S217 following step S215, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a prize at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the special figure 2 starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting ports 228 and 229, and the variable winning ports 234 and 235. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

  When the special figure 1 starting port 230 is won and the corresponding special figure 1 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the special figure 1 starting port 230 of the random number generation circuit (hard random number circuit) 318 A special figure 1 winning random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on a value stored in a corresponding built-in counter value storage register is acquired, and a special figure is generated from a special figure 1 random number generation random number counter provided in the RAM 308. One random value is acquired and stored in the special figure 1 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. The special figure 1 winning random number values and the special figure 1 random number values in the special figure 1 random value storage area are stored in the same number as the special figure 1 reservation number stored in the special figure 1 reservation number storage area. In the special figure 1 random value storage area, each time the special figure 1 holding number decreases, the data of the combination of the special figure 1 winning random number and the special figure 1 random value having the highest holding order (first) is deleted. At the same time, processing is performed so that the data holding order of the remaining special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random value group is incremented by one. Also, each time the special figure 1 holding number increases, a new special figure 1 is added to the next holding order of the data of the combination of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random value having the lowest (last) holding order. The data of a set of winning random numbers and special figure 1 random values is written.

  When the special figure 2 starting port 232 is won and the corresponding special figure 2 reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a built-in counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232 of the random number generation circuit 318 The special figure 2 winning random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on the value stored in the value storage register is acquired, and the special figure 2 random number value is acquired from the special figure 2 random value generation random number counter provided in the RAM 308. Then, they are stored in the special figure 2 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. The special figure 2 winning random number values and the special figure 2 random number values in the special figure 2 random number storage area are stored in the same number as the special figure 2 reservation number stored in the special figure 2 reservation number storage area. In the special figure 2 random value storage area, each time the special figure 2 hold number decreases, the data of the combination of the special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 2 random value with the highest holding order is deleted, and the remainder The special ranking 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value set data are processed so that the holding order is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 hold number increases by one, a special special figure 2 winning random number value is added to the next holding rank of the data of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value group having the lowest holding order. And special figure 2 random value set data is written.

  Also, special figure 1 starting information (a combination of special figure 1 winning random value and special figure 1 random value) or special figure 2 starting information (a pair of special figure 2 winning random value and special figure 2 random value) has been newly acquired. In this case, the special figure prefetching process is executed using the start information. Details of the special figure prefetching process will be described later.

  If there is a winning at the general chart start port 228 or the general map start slot 229, and the corresponding general map hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is automatically displayed from the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal chart. Obtained as a winning random number value, obtains a regular random number value from a random number counter for generating a regular random number value provided in the RAM 308, and stores it in a regular random value storage area in the order of acquisition. The number of combinations of the random numbers and the common random numbers in the random number value storage area is stored in the same number as the number of reserved general numbers stored in the general number hold number storage area. In the standard random number storage area, each time the number of pending charts decreases by one, the data of the combination of the random number value and the random number value with the highest ranking (first) in the ranking is deleted and the remaining Is processed so that the holding order of the data of the pair of the common figure winning random number and the common figure random number is incremented by one. In addition, each time the number of pending orders increases by one, a new winning figure random number value and a new standing figure winning random number value in the next holding rank of the data of the combination of the random number value and the random number value with the lowest ranking (last) Data of a set of regular random numbers is written. When there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening 234. When a winning is made at the variable winning opening 235, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 235 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening 235.

  In step S219 following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221 following step S219, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the general diagram state update process in the middle of the normal map change display (the value of the above-mentioned general map display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the general map display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the general map display device 210 performs normal variable display (normal map variable game).

  Also, in the general state update process at the timing when the normal map change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general map display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), When the 7-segment LED constituting the general-purpose display device 210 is turned on / off to control the display mode, and the normal-map hit flag is off, the general-purpose display is displayed so that the display mode of the off symbol is displayed. The 7 segment LED constituting the device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the universal symbol display device 210 is either one of the winning symbols (the universal symbol A or the universal symbol B shown in FIG. 479 (d)) and the off symbol (the universal symbol C shown in FIG. 479 (d)). The final symbol is displayed. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), A normal operation is set in the setting area, and a predetermined open period (for example, 2 seconds), a solenoid for driving to open / close the blade member 232a of the special opening 2 232 (a part of various solenoids 332), A signal for holding 232a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening and closing driving, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out of place, the usual figure flag is turned off. In the case where the usual figure hit flag is off, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the special map 2 start port 232 is not performed (the state of the normal map is not in operation), and the number of the general map variable games that are on hold Is set to 1 or more as a start condition, and is executed using a pair of the first common winning random number value and the common random number value in the common random number value storage area.

  The main control unit 300 obtains the normal start information (a combination of the normal winning random number and the normal random number) from the earliest (most recently stored) holding position in the normal random number storage area. On the basis of the obtained normal figure winning random number value in the usual figure start information and the value of the usual figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, etc., the determination table for the success / failure stored in the ROM 306 (FIGS. 483 (a) and (b) described later) (Ref.) Is used to determine whether or not to win or not (determination of success / failure). Next, the main control unit 300, based on the general random number value in the acquired general map start information and the determined success / failure determination result, etc., the general map determination table stored in the ROM 306 (the hit shown in FIG. 483 (c)). The symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the normal variation display is determined using the hour action table). Next, the main control unit 300, for example, selects various tables (for example, timer number selection (not shown)) stored in the ROM 306 based on the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the acquired random number for determining the normal time change time, and the like. The normal fluctuation display time (timer number) is determined using a table, and the fluctuation display time is stored in the normal figure fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the normal figure fluctuation display time.

  The main control unit 300 extracts the earliest general chart start information from the normal random number value storage area, erases the earliest general chart start information from the normal random number value storage area, and Decrease the number of reserved maps in the area by 1. At this time, the general chart start information taken out from the standard random number storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-mentioned determination is made based on the general chart start information stored in the temporary area. Also good.

  The main control unit 300 sets the common figure flag provided in the RAM 308 to ON when the determination result is successful (winning), and sets the common figure flag to OFF when not successful.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. Repeatedly turn on / off drive control. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the special figure 2 variable display (special figure 2 variable game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R big hit flag, a 7R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal figure probability fluctuation flag. . These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the stop symbol determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), for example, when the 15R big hit flag is on When the special figure a, 7R jackpot flag shown in FIG. 479 (b) is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure b, 7R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off. When the special flag c and the off flag are turned on, the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the special figure d is displayed. 2 is set to indicate that the stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs fixed display of any one of the special figures a to d.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not, turn off the time flag. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Also, if the probability variation number stored in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the probability variation number, and if the subtraction result is 1 to 0, the special figure probability variation flag. Turn off.

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 is set. In order to set a special figure 2 in operation in the area and wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that a big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. In addition, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning holes 234, 235) solenoids for opening / closing the door members of the variable winning holes 234, 235 (part of various solenoids 332) In addition, a signal for holding the door member in the opened state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid for opening / closing the door member of the variable prize opening 234, 235 (a part of various solenoids 332), and a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is used. Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, the door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 15 rounds or 7 rounds in the case of Special Figure 2, 15 rounds, 7 rounds or 2 rounds in the case of Special Figure 1), and the control is finished. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period in which an image for notifying the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is ended is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the effect standby period is set in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Also, if the normal probability change flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the hour / hour number (for example, 100 times) is set in the hour / hour number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the short time flag. Note that if the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the number of time reductions is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

  The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit game to the start of the next big hit game. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, the normal figure high probability state (normal figure certain change) is established. There is a higher probability of hitting in the general-game variable game in the high-probability state than in the normal-game low-probability state. In addition, in the normal figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure variable game is shorter than in the normal figure low probability state (normal figure variable short). Furthermore, in the normal high probability state, compared to the normal low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer (electrical chew extension). In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. The state in which any one of these ordinary figure change, universal figure change, and electric Chu extension is set is referred to as an electric support (starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

  In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a predetermined number of variable winning holes 234 and 235 will be placed in the special figure 2 start opening 232 during the big hit game until a game ball enters. There is a problem that game balls enter and the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. This is to solve this problem.

  If the special figure probability variation flag is set to ON, the probability variation number (for example, 10,000 times) is set in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the big hit game.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out-of-game flag is turned on. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. However, in this example, since the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is different from the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2, the timing at which the special figure 1 variable display time has elapsed (the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer becomes 1 to 0) The special figure 1 state update process starting at the same time) is different from the special figure 2 state update process. In the special figure 1 state update process started at the above timing, for example, when the 15R big hit flag is on and the special figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure A shown in FIG. When the figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure B, the 7R big hit flag is on, when the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the special figure C, the 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, When the figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and when the common figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the special figure E, the small hit flag is on The special segment F is controlled to turn on / off the 7-segment LED constituting the special diagram 1 display device 212 so that the special flag F is turned on and the special flag G is turned on. Special map 1 stop To set indicating that it is being displayed. By performing this control in the special figure 1 state update process started at the above timing, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs a fixed display of any one of the special figures A to G. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). In the special drawing 2 related lottery process, the floating game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 is not performed, and the state of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 are both inactive and is held. The game is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random value storage area, starting from the fact that the number of variable games is 1 or more. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the state of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both inactive, and is suspended. The game is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random value storage area as a starting condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

  Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, when the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game hold are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the special symbol variable game success / failure determination by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the special symbol 2 starting port 232 is notified. Priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the present embodiment, a special figure variable game with a high advantage (in this example, special figure 2 variable game) is given priority over a low special figure variable game (in this example, special figure 1 variable game). . For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special) from the first (most recently stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. 2), and based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the obtained special figure 2 start information, the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, and the like. Is used as a big hit using the table for determining whether or not is stored (see FIGS. 484 (a) to (d) described later) or a small hit (in this example, the small hit can be selected only in FIG. 1). Or whether it is determined to be out of place (judgment determination). Next, the main control unit 300 determines the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 (FIG. 485 (a), Using the symbol distribution table shown in FIG. 486 (a), the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display of the special symbol 2 is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 holding number at the time of the determination, the acquired special figure variation time determination random number value, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) in FIG. 2 is determined using various tables (for example, a timer number selection table not shown).

  The main control unit 300 extracts the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, erases the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, 2 is subtracted from the special figure 2 hold number in the hold number storage area. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-described determination is performed based on the special figure 2 start information stored in the temporary area. You may do it.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage is started in preference to the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage, and the special figure 2 hold is prioritized over the special figure 1 hold. Special figure 2 priority fluctuation is given as an example, but special figure 1 variable game with low advantage is started over special figure 2 variable game with high advantage, and special figure 1 suspension is The special figure 1 priority fluctuation | variation digested preferentially over hold may be sufficient. In addition, priority is not given to special figure 2 variable game and special figure 1 variable game, and the start opening prize is started in the order in which the special figure variable games related to the holding of each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are held at the start opening. It may be a forward variation. In the starting order winning order variation, the upper limit number of holds is 8 regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, and compared with the priority fluctuation in which the upper limit number of holds is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2 In some cases, the substantial upper limit of the number of holds can be increased.

  In the above description, it is assumed that the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of one special figure. The process and the special figure related lottery process may be performed independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, respectively, so that a plurality of special figures may be changed simultaneously. In addition, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time, a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure are provided on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided, and the lottery results may be displayed separately, or the lottery results of a plurality of special drawings may be displayed in one area. In addition, when fluctuations related to a plurality of special figures are performed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special figure that stopped the fluctuation may affect the lottery result of the special figure that stops the fluctuation later.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command Information that can specify the type of command, etc.), bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type). Further, in the present embodiment, a symbol variation start command and a symbol variation stop command related to a common symbol are also included as command types.

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. In addition, if the command type is a special symbol design change start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability fluctuation flags, and special drawing related lottery processing. In the case of the symbol variation stop (rotation stop) command, including information indicating the timer number selected in, including the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. In the case of a start command and an end production start command, information including the value of a special figure probability variation flag, etc., and in the case of a jackpot round number designation command, information indicating the value of a special figure probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds, etc. Is included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232, winning in the variable winning ports 234 and 235 Contains information indicating presence or absence. In the case of a prefetch result information command, information indicating the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the prefetch number stored in the prefetch number storage area described later, the stop symbol stored in the prefetch result storage unit, etc. Included.

  In addition, if the command type is a normal symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes values such as a universal symbol per unit flag, a general symbol deviation flag, a general symbol probability variation flag, etc. Information that includes information about the determined stop symbol and variation time, and in the case of a regular symbol variation stop (rotation stop) command, information indicating the value of the universal symbol per unit flag, the usual symbol deviation flag, the common symbol probability variation flag, etc. Is included.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the command data includes values such as various big hit flags, small hit flags, off-set flags, and special figure probability variation flags stored in the RAM 308, special figure 1 related lottery processes, and special figures. Information indicating the timer number selected in the FIG. 2 related lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, loss flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described special winning opening release setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates.

  In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235 following step S233, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a bottom pan full error is monitored. . When a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating whether there is a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable prize winning ports 234 and 235, and the general diagram display device 210 and the special figure 1 display via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is ON. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

  FIG. 482 (a) is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure prefetching process executed in the winning acceptance process (step S217). In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 prefetches the increased start information (newly acquired start information) in each of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and pre-stops the stop symbol before the success / failure determination process. The predetermination result (special drawing prefetching result) is stored in the prefetching result storage unit (see FIGS. 482 (b) to (d)) in the RAM 308.

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 prefetch result and the number of special figure 1 prefetch results stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit are specially displayed. A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area for storing as one pre-reading number is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 prefetching result with the highest rank (first) is erased and the remaining special figure 1 prefetching result Are processed so that the rank of the data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 1 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 1 prefetch result data of the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 prefetch result and the number of special figure 2 prefetch results stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit are stored in the special figure 2 prefetch. A special figure 2 pre-reading number storage area for storing numbers is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 prefetching result having the highest rank is deleted and the order of the remaining special figure 2 prefetching result data Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 2 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 2 prefetch data having the lowest rank.

  In the special figure prefetching process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased (step S301). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased is made, for example, by referring to the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. The comparison is made with the number of pre-reads in FIG. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 has increased when the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, and the special figure 2 hold number is equal to the special figure 2 prefetch number. It is determined that the starting information in Fig. 2 has not increased. When it is determined that the start information of FIG. 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and when it is determined that the start information of FIG. 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the increased special figure 2 starting information (a special figure 2 winning random value and a set of special figure 2 random values) is processed before the success / failure determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). FIG. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information and the determination table for special determination 2 and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 2 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S229). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S 305 subsequent to step S 303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetch result obtained in the pre-determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of FIG. 1 has increased. The determination as to whether or not the start information of FIG. 1 has increased is made, for example, in the same way as in FIG. 2, the special figure 1 hold number stored in the special figure 1 hold number storage area and the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area This is done by comparing the special figure 1 pre-reading number stored in. If it is determined that the start information of FIG. 1 has increased, the process proceeds to step S309. If it is determined that the start information of FIG. Return to the winning acceptance process (step S217).

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-electric support is in progress. If it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric support is not being performed (the electric support is being performed), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not non-electric support is being performed, but it may be determined in step S309 whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 prefetch notice is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-electric support.

  In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (a special figure 1 winning random value and a pair of special figure 1 random value) is processed before the success determination process in the special figure 1 lottery process (step S231). FIG. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information and the determination table for special determination and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 1 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected as the special figure 1 related lottery. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S231). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special figure prefetching process is terminated, and the process returns to the winning acceptance process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In step S315, the pre-read result for pre-Fig. 1 is stored in the RAM 308 in place of the stop symbol information, instead of pre-reading the start-up information without pre-reading the increased special Fig. 1 start information. Stored in the earliest free area of the copy. Thereafter, the special figure prefetching process is terminated, and the process returns to the winning acceptance process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined. However, all start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the starting information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-read result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 All the prefetching results in the section may be transmitted to the first sub-control section 400.

  In the present embodiment, pre-reading is always executed for the increased starting information of Special Figure 2, and pre-reading is always executed for the increased starting information of Special Figure 1 except during the electric support. Further, it may be determined by lottery whether to pre-read the starting information of the increased special figure 1 and special figure 2. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the prefetch result from the main control unit 300, for example, it may be determined by lottery whether to perform prefetch notification for each hold. Regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the start information increases, prefetching is always executed and the prefetching result is stored in the prefetching result storage unit. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may determine whether or not to execute the lottery and effect using the pre-read result.

  482 (b) to (d) exemplify a state in which prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 482 (b) shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 482 (b), the pre-reading result storage unit for special figure 1 has, for example, the same number (four in this embodiment) of storage areas as that of the special figure 1 variable game that can be held. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of Special Figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 482 (b), “Special Figure G” (out of line) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area “hold 1”, and “Special Figure G” is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area “hold 2”. "(Out of line)" is stored, "Special Figure F" (small hit) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 3", and "Special Figure A" is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 4". (15R special jackpot) is stored.

  FIG. 482 (c) shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 482 (c), the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 2 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 482 (c), “Special Figure d” (out of line) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area “hold 1”, and stop symbols are stored in the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”. Information is not stored. In FIG. 482 (c), the state where the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

  FIG. 482 (d) shows an example of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 during the electric support. As shown in FIG. 482 (d), “undecided” information is stored in the storage area “hold 1” instead of the stopped symbol information. In the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”, neither stop symbol information nor “undecided” information is stored.

  In the above description, an example is given in which only stop symbols are determined in advance and only stop symbol information is stored in the prefetch result storage unit. Information may be stored in the prefetch result storage unit and transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 as prefetch result information.

  Next, various tables used in the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. Various tables illustrated in FIGS. 483 to 486 are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, for example.

  FIGS. 483 (a) and 4 (b) show an example of the success / failure determination table used when the success / failure determination is performed in the common figure related lottery process (step S223). The success / failure determination table shown in FIGS. 483 (a) and 4 (b) is composed of items of “ordinary probability”, “random number range”, and “correction result”. The item “normal figure probability” indicates the normal figure probability (ordinary figure low probability or common figure high probability) at the time of determination of success or failure. The item “Random number range” indicates a numerical range to be compared with the acquired normal winning random number value. Here, the possible range of the normal winning random number in this example is 0 to 99 (the range of the numerical range is 100).

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 483 (a) is a normal / failure determination table used when the normal probability at the time of determination is low. As shown in FIG. 483 (a), when this success / failure determination table is used, the probability of winning is 1/100 (that is, 1%), and the probability of loss is 99/100.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 483 (b) is a normal / failure determination table used when the normal probability at the time of determination is high. As shown in FIG. 483 (b), when this success / failure determination table is used, the probability of winning is about 100/100 (that is, 100%), and the probability of loss is 0%. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the correct / failure determination table shown in FIG. 483 (a), the winning probability is 100 times. In this way, it is possible to design so that only the hit is selected in the usual high probability state (during short-time operation). Further, the probability of deviation may be higher than 0% at the time of short-time operation, but the probability of hit selection being higher at the time of short-time operation than at the time of short-time operation (ordinary low probability state).

  FIG. 483 (c) shows a table for symbol allocation and hit operation for ordinary use. The numerical value in the “distribution” column in the table is the random number range distribution rate for each symbol (that is, the symbol of each symbol, which is compared with the general random number value when the stop symbol is determined in the general symbol related lottery process (step S223)). Equal to selection probability). As shown in FIG. 483 (c), in the case where the success / failure determination result of the common figure variation game is a win, the distribution ratio of each winning symbol is 50% for the common figure A and 50% for the common figure B. Normal maps A and B are symbols in which the electric chew release operation is executed after the normal variable game. It should be noted that when the determination result is out of order, only one out of the ordinary figure C is selected as the out of order symbol, so in the case of out of place, the ordinary figure C is selected with a probability of 100%. When the general figure C is selected, the electric chew release operation is not executed after the general figure variable game.

  As shown in FIG. 483 (c), after the general figure A is stopped and displayed, the opening operation of the special figure 2 starting port (electrical chew) 232 is performed. When the game state at the time of the stop display of FIG. A is not operating for a short time, the blade member 232a of the electric Chu 232 is first opened for 100 ms, then closed for 5000 to 10000 ms, and then opened for 5400 ms. To do. When the game state at the time of the stop display in FIG. A is short-time operation, the blade member 232a of the electric Chu 232 is first opened for 1800 ms, then closed for about 2000 ms, then opened again for 1800 ms, It closes for about 2000 ms and opens again for 1800 ms.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 483 (c), after the general figure B is stopped and displayed, the opening operation of the special figure 2 starting port (electrical chew) 232 is executed. When the game state at the time of the stop display in FIG. B is not operating for a short time, the blade member 232a of the electric Chu 232 is opened only once for 100 ms. When the game state at the time of the stop display in FIG. B is short-time operation, the blade member 232a of the electric Chu 232 is first opened for 2400 ms, then closed for about 2000 ms, then opened for about 1450 ms, and again It closes for about 2000 ms and opens again for 1450 ms.

  FIGS. 484 (a) to (d) show examples of the go / no-go determination table used when the go / no-go determination is made in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S 229) or the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S 231). Yes. The determination table shown in FIGS. 484 (a) to 484 (d) includes items of “special drawing probability”, “random number range”, and “correction determination result”. The item “special figure probability” indicates a special figure probability (special figure low probability or special figure high probability) at the time of determination of success or failure. The item “random number range” indicates a numerical range to be compared with the acquired special figure 2 winning random value or the special figure 1 winning random value. Here, the possible range of the special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 1 winning random value of this example is 0 to 65535 (the range of the numerical value range is 65536).

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 484 (a) is a success / failure determination table for special figure 1 that is used when the special figure probability at the time of success / failure determination is low. As shown in FIG. 484 (a), when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/299 (= 219/65536), and the small hit probability is about 1/399 (= 165 / 65536).

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 484 (b) is a success / failure determination table for special figure 1 that is used when the special figure probability at the time of success / failure determination is high. As shown in FIG. 484 (b), when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/30 (= 2185/65536), and the small hit probability is about 1/399. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 484 (a), the big hit probability is about 10 times, and the small hit probability is the same.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 484 (c) is the success / failure determination table for special figure 2 that is used when the special figure probability at the time of success / failure determination is low. As shown in FIG. 484 (c), when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/299 and the small hit probability is zero.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 484 (d) is a success / failure determination table for special figure 2 that is used when the special figure probability at the time of the validity determination is high. As shown in FIG. 484 (d), when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/30 and the small hit probability is zero. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 484 (c), the probability of jackpot is about 10 times.

  FIG. 485 (a) shows a symbol distribution table for special figure 1. The numerical value in the “distribution” column in the table is a distribution ratio of random numbers for each symbol (that is, each symbol) compared with the special symbol 1 random value when determining the stop symbol in the special symbol 1 related lottery process (step S231). It is equal to the symbol selection probability). As shown in FIG. 485 (a), when the determination result of special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, the distribution ratio of each big hit symbol is 30% for special figure A (15R special big hit), and special figure B (7R special big hit) is 25%, special figure C (7R big hit) is 25%, special figure D (sudden probability big hit) is 10%, special figure E (latent probability big hit) is 10% is there. Special drawings A, B, D, and E, excluding special drawing C, are symbols for which the probability change is activated after the big hit game ends. The ratio of probability variation jackpots (special drawings A, B, D, E) in the jackpot of the special figure 1 variable game, that is, the probability variation probability is 75%.

  Special illustrations A, B, and D are the gaming state (special figure high probability, special figure low probability, normal figure high probability (during short-time operation), normal figure low probability (due to short-time inactive) at the time of determination of success / failure (during symbol stop display) Regardless of the time)), the time is shortened (no time reduction is set) after the big hit game ends. The special figure C is a symbol in which the time is shortened (the number of time reductions is 100 times) after the big hit game is finished, regardless of the game state at the time of the determination of success or failure. The special figure E is a symbol in which the short time is activated after the big hit game is completed only when the gaming state at the time of the determination is a special figure high probability state or a normal figure high probability state. That is, when special figure E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the time reduction does not operate after the big hit game ends. For example, when special figure E is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol continuously several times from a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the time reduction does not operate after the first stop display (special figure high probability normal figure) However, after the second and subsequent stops, the short time is activated (the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state is entered). In the special figure 1 variable game jackpot, the probability of time reduction is 90% in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state and 100% in the other game states.

  In this example, there is only one kind of small hits symbol and off symbol in the special figure 1 variable game. Therefore, when the result of the special figure 1 variable game is determined to be a small hit, the special figure F is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 1 random value, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is determined. If it is out of place, the special figure G is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 1 random value. However, a plurality of types of small hit symbols and outlier symbols may be provided in the same manner as the big hit symbols, and may be determined by lottery using special figure 1 random numbers.

  FIG. 485 (b) shows an example of a big hit operation in each symbol of the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 485 (b), in the jackpot game after the special figure A is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released for 15R at 29000 ms per 1R. Similarly, in the jackpot game after special figure B or special figure C is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released for 7R at 29000 ms per 1R, and in the jackpot game after special figure D is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released. Is performed 2R at 29000 ms per 1R.

  As for special figure E, the operation of the big hit game differs depending on the game state at the time of the symbol stop display. In the big hit game after the special figure E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the attacker is released 2R at 100 ms per 1R. In this big hit game, it is difficult to enter a game ball because the opening time is short. On the other hand, in the big hit game after the special figure E is stopped and displayed in a game state other than the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, 2R is played at 29000 ms per 1R. In this big hit game, it is easy to enter a game ball because the opening time is relatively long.

  In the small hit game after the special figure F is stopped and displayed, the 100 ms attacker release is performed twice in one release opportunity. That is, the attacker operates in the same manner in the big hit game after the special figure E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state and the small hit game after the special figure F is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 486 (a) shows a symbol distribution table for special figure 2. The numerical value in the “distribution” column in the table is the distribution ratio of the random number range for each symbol (that is, each symbol) that is compared with the special symbol 2 random value when determining the stop symbol in the special symbol 2 related lottery process (step S229). It is equal to the symbol selection probability). As shown in FIG. 486 (a), when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is successful is a big hit, the distribution ratio of each big hit symbol is 70% for the special figure a (15R special big hit), and the special figure b. (7R special big hit) is 5%, special figure c (7R big hit) is 25%. Special figures a and b are symbols for which the probability change is activated after the big hit game ends. The ratio of probability variation jackpots (special figures a and b) in the special figure 2 variable game jackpot, that is, the probability variation probability is 75%, which is the same as the probability variation probability of the special figure 1 variable game.

  Special illustrations a and b indicate the game state at the time of the success / failure determination (design stop display) (special figure high probability, special figure low probability, normal figure high probability (during short-time operation), normal figure low probability (during short-time inactive) Regardless of the), the time is shortened (no time reduction setting is set) after the big hit game ends. The special figure c is a symbol in which the time is shortened (the number of time reductions is 100 times) after the big hit game is finished, regardless of the game state at the time of determination of success / failure. The probability that the time is given in the big hit of the special figure 2 variable game is 100% regardless of the game state.

  In this example, there is only one type of outlier symbol in the special figure 2 variable game. Therefore, when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order, the special figure d is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 1 random value. However, a plurality of types of missing symbols may be provided in the same manner as the jackpot symbol, and may be determined by lottery using special figure 2 random values.

  FIG. 486 (b) shows an example of the big hit operation in each symbol of the special figure 2. FIG. As shown in FIG. 486 (b), in the jackpot game after the special figure a is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released for 15R at 29000 ms per 1R, and after the special figure b or the special figure c is stopped and displayed. In the big hit game, the attacker is released 7R at 29000ms per 1R.

  As shown in FIG. 485 and FIG. 486, the special figure 2 has a higher probability of being given a shorter time than the special figure 1, and the open time of the attacker is long (or the R number is large). Therefore, it can be considered that the special figure 2 is more advantageous than the special figure 1.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 487 and 488. FIG. 487 (a) is a flowchart showing a flow of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 in FIG. 487 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated. Of the various processes executed in the effect control process, the electric long open effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S411 following step S409, a chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, when the pressing of the chance button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the pressing of the chance button 136.

  In step S413 subsequent to step S411, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, when there is a command to the VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S415 following step S413, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S417 following step S415, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S419 following step S417, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S421 following step S419, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, a setting is made to output this control command. Thereafter, the process returns to step S403.

  FIG. 487 (b) is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 487 (c) is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this example, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Run in cycles. In step S601 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S603 following step S601, a control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S421) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other random number values for effects are updated. Etc.

  FIG. 487 (d) is a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process (step S413) of the first sub-control unit main process. In step S701, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S705. Wait for the input signal to be input.

  In step S705, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S701, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S707 following step S705, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S709 following step S707, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S711. Waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S711, a scene display counter which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  FIG. 488 (a) shows the flow of the electric long opening effect process executed in the effect control process of the main process in the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 488 (b) shows an example of the electric long-open effect on the decorative symbol display device 208. The electric-chu-long opening effect is an effect that can be executed during a normal-game variable game, and the special-image 2 start opening (electric-chu) 232 is opened for a long time and / or multiple times (hereinafter referred to as a multi-game variable game). This may be referred to as long open). It should be noted that, even after the normal fluctuation stop, the electric-chu-long opening effect (for example, a notification effect such as “electric-chu-opening!”) May be continued based on the normal signal stop symbol.

  488 (a) is an electric-chu-long opening effect process. In the command process (step S407) of the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 in FIG. 487 (a), the main control unit 300 starts normal symbol variation start. This is executed when a (start rotation) command is received.

  First, sub-control unit 400 first determines whether or not the electric long opening effect execution restriction flag for restricting the execution of electric long opening effect is off (step S801). The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the value of the electric long open effect execution restriction flag stored in a predetermined area in the RAM 408 and determines whether or not the execution of the electric long open effect is restricted. For example, even when the electric tulong release effect is executed during display darkness in which the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is black, the player cannot visually recognize the effect and the effect of the electric chew long release effect cannot be obtained. . Therefore, in such a case, the electric long-long opening effect execution restriction flag is turned on based on the effect based on the determination result of the special figure fluctuation game during display darkening. In addition, when the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is not dark-displayed and the fluctuation time of the normal figure fluctuation game is long enough to execute the electric-chu-long opening effect, It is possible to perform an electric Chulong opening effect that can entertain the user. Therefore, in such a case, the electric long-long opening effect execution restriction flag is turned off based on the effect or demonstration effect based on the determination result of the special figure fluctuation game.

  If the electric-chu-long opening effect execution restriction flag is on in step S801, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the electric-chu-long opening effect is restricted, and controls the electric-chu-long opening effect. Other control processes are executed, this process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process effect control process (step S409).

  If the electric-chu-long opening effect execution restriction flag is off in step S801, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the electric-chu long opening effect can be executed, and proceeds to step S803 to start the usual symbol variation (start rotation). It is determined whether or not the result of determining whether or not the normal-game variable game is successful by referring to information about the normal-game hit flag and the normal-use flag from the command data of the command.

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S803 that the result of determining whether or not the normal figure variation game is successful, the process proceeds to step S805, where the first sub-control unit 400 determines the normal figure from the command data of the normal symbol change start (rotation start) command. With reference to the information regarding the stop symbol, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol of the normal figure variable game is the normal symbol A.

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S805 that the stop symbol of the usual figure variable game is the usual figure A, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S807, selects the effect whose effect type is “success pattern”, and opens the electric tulong. Set as production. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S809, executes other control processing for the electric long open effect based on the “success pattern”, ends this processing, and effects control of the main processing The process returns to the process (step S409).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S805 that the usual variable game is not the usual figure A, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S811, selects an effect whose effect type is “failure pattern A”, and releases the electric tulong. Set as production. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S809, executes other control processing for the electric-chu-long opening effect based on “failure pattern A”, ends this processing, and produces the main processing effect. The process returns to the control process (step S409).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S803 that the result of determining whether or not the normal game is a winning game is not successful, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S815 and executes an electric tulong opening false (gasse) effect execution lottery process. In the electric long open false effect execution lottery process, a random value is extracted from the random counter for electric long open false effect execution lottery provided in the RAM 408, and the electric long open false effect execution lottery table stored in the ROM 406 is stored. Is used to determine whether or not the random number value is a hit.

  The first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not to execute the electric long open false effect based on the result of the determination in step S815 (step S817).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S817 to execute the electric-chu-long opening false effect, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S817, selects an effect whose effect type is “failed pattern B”, and sets it as the electric-chu-long opening effect. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S809, executes other control processing for the electric-chu-long opening effect based on “failure pattern B”, ends this processing, and produces the main processing effect. The process returns to the control process (step S409).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S817 that the electric-chu-long opening false effect is not executed, the first sub-control unit 400 executes another control process for not executing the electric-chu-long opening effect, ends this processing, and performs the main processing. The process returns to the effect control process (step S409).

  In the process of the electric-chu-long opening effect shown in FIG. 488, if the electric-chu-long opening effect execution restriction flag is off, the electric-chu-long opening effect is always performed if it is a win. The lottery may be performed in the same manner as when the game is off, and the presentation may be performed only when the lottery is won. Also, in this example, when the electric chew is open for a short time (short open) (general figure B), the production of “failure pattern A” is set, and when the electric chew is not released (general figure C), “failure pattern A” is set. The effect “B” is set, but the same effect may be performed with a deviation (common figure B) from the hit (normal figure B).

  FIG. 488 (b) shows an example of the electric tulong opening effect. FIG. 488 (b) shows the display effect being executed in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The entire image display area becomes the effect display area 208d, and for example, a background effect named “Land Stage” is executed. In the front of the background effect, the decorative display of the decorative pattern in which “decoration 0” to “decoration 9” sequentially move from top to bottom in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure). Is running. A change icon display area a is arranged on the lower left side in the effect display area 208d, and a change icon of a pattern imitating a car is displayed. On the right side of the fluctuation icon display area a, a special figure hold display area c for displaying special figure hold is arranged, and a hold icon b having a pattern imitating an automobile is displayed. On the lower right side in the effect display area 208d, an electric long open effect area d is arranged. An ordinary figure display device 210 (not shown) starts the ordinary figure variation game, the execution of the electric-chu-long opening effect is not restricted, and the electric-chu-long opening effect area d is executed. As an electric Chu-long opening effect, an image of a samurai character operating the lottery machine is displayed along with a display of “help chance drawing”, and the special figure 2 start opening 232 is won by winning the ordinary figure variable game. There is a roaring effect that makes the player expect that it may be released long. As shown in FIG. 488 (b), a part of the right symbol display area 208c is hidden by the electric tulong opening effect. In addition, a part of the right side area of the special figure hold display area c is also hidden. As described above, when the electric-chu-long opening effect may make it difficult to confirm at least part of the decorative symbol variation display, or when the decorative symbol variation display makes it difficult to confirm at least part of the electric-chu long opening effect. There may be.

  Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 489. FIG. 489 (a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S901 in FIG. 489 (a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S901. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S903 following step S901, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S905. . In step S905, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S907 following step S905, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command is received from the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S909 following step S907, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S907, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  In step S911 following step S909, lamp control processing is performed. For example, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S913 following step S911, a movable body control process is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516. Thereafter, the process returns to step S903.

  FIG. 489 (b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S1001 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub control unit 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 489 (c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this example, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Run in cycles. In step S1101 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S903 of the second sub-control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Therefore, in step S903, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1103 following step S1101, an effect random number update process or the like is performed.

  Next, the effects and the like of the special figure variable game on the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 490 to 502. FIG. 490 (a) shows the flow of the button effect control process executed in the effect control process of the main process in the first sub-control unit 400. In the button effect control process, the first sub-control unit 400 first determines whether or not the button effect flag execution flag is on (step S1201). The button effect flag is turned on within a period during which the player's operation of the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 is valid (operation valid period). The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the value of the button effect flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408. When the value of the button effect flag is “1”, the button effect flag is in the on state. The process proceeds to step S1203, and if the value of the button effect flag is “0”, it is determined that the button effect flag is in the off state, and the process proceeds to step S1211.

  In step S1203, the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not the button reception flag is on. The button acceptance flag is turned on when each button of the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137 is operated. The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the value of the button reception flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408, and when the value of the button reception flag is “1”, the button reception flag is on. The process proceeds to step S1205. If the value of the button reception flag is “0”, it is determined that the button reception flag is off and the process proceeds to step S1207.

  In step S1205, the first sub control unit 400 executes a button reception control process. In the button reception execution process, control for executing an effect executed based on the operation of the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 is performed.

  In step S1207 following step S1205, the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not a button effect end condition is satisfied. For example, when the chance button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times within the operation effective period, the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 are operated in a predetermined order, or the button effect end condition is satisfied when the operation effective period ends. To establish. If the first sub control unit 400 determines that the button effect end condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1209. If the first sub control unit 400 determines that the button effect end condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1215.

  In step S1209, the first sub-control unit 400 turns off the button effect execution flag. Since the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S1207 that the valid operation period has ended, it overwrites the button effect flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408 with “0” and sets the button effect flag execution flag. Turn off.

  On the other hand, in step S1211, when it is determined in step S1201 that the button effect execution flag is in the off state, it is determined whether or not the button effect execution condition is satisfied. The button effect execution condition is established when a predetermined lottery process is won for the execution of the effect as the operation valid period of the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137. If the first sub control unit 400 determines that the button effect execution condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1213. If the first sub control unit 400 determines that the button effect execution condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1215.

  In step S1213, the button effect execution flag is turned on. Since the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the button effect execution condition has been established by winning the execution of the effect as the operation valid period of the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137, the button effect is being executed. The button effect execution flag indicating this is turned on. The first sub-control unit 400 overwrites the button effect flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408 with “1”.

  In step S1215, the first sub control unit 400 executes an auto button mode setting process. The auto button mode setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 490 (b).

  In step S1217 following step S1215, other button effect control processing is performed. For example, a lottery process or the like for determining whether or not an effect with an operation effective period is performed is performed. When completing the other button effect control processes, the first sub-control unit 400 ends the button effect control process and returns to the main process effect control process (step S409).

  FIG. 490 (b) shows the flow of the auto button mode setting process executed in step S1215 of the button effect control process. In the auto button mode setting process, the first sub-control unit 400 first determines whether or not the auto button mode setting flag is off (step S1301). The auto button mode is an effect mode in which each button of the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 is automatically operated. When the auto button mode is set, the auto button mode setting flag is turned on. The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the value of the auto button mode setting flag stored in a predetermined area in the RAM 408, and when the value of the auto button mode setting flag is “0”, the auto button mode It is determined that the setting flag is off, and the process proceeds to step S1303. If the value of the auto button mode setting flag is “1”, it is determined that the auto button mode setting flag is on. Then, the process proceeds to step S1309.

  In step S1303, the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not the auto button mode setting condition is satisfied. The auto button mode setting condition is satisfied when the auto button mode setting is called in a user mode (menu) that can be called by the player while the special figure variable game is not being executed. Further, the auto button mode setting condition may be satisfied when a predetermined lottery is won or when the number of jackpots since power-on reaches a predetermined number. Further, the auto button mode setting condition may be forcibly satisfied when the predetermined condition is satisfied, or the player may arbitrarily set the auto button mode itself as the auto button mode setting condition.

  In step S1305 following step S1303, auto button mode setting is performed. In the present embodiment, four types of auto button modes 1 to 4 can be set by the player's operation. Details of each mode of the auto button mode will be described later.

  In step S1307, the first sub-control unit 400 turns on the auto button mode setting flag. Since the auto button mode is set in step S1305, the first sub control unit 400 turns on the auto button mode setting flag indicating that the auto button mode is set. The first sub control unit 400 overwrites “1” in the auto button mode setting flag stored in a predetermined area in the RAM 408. When the first sub control unit 400 turns on the auto button mode setting flag, the first sub control unit 400 ends the auto button mode setting process, and proceeds to another button effect control process (step S1217) of the button effect control process.

  On the other hand, in the next step S1309 when it is determined in step S1301 that the button effect execution flag is in the OFF state, the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not the auto button mode setting cancellation condition is satisfied. The auto button mode setting release condition is satisfied when the player releases the auto button mode. When determining that the auto button mode setting cancellation condition is satisfied, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to the processing of step S1309. When determining that the auto button mode setting cancellation condition is not satisfied, the first sub control unit 400 ends the auto button mode setting process. Then, the process proceeds to another button effect control process (step S1217) of the button effect control process.

  In step S1311 following step S1309, the auto button mode setting flag is turned off. Since the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the auto button mode setting cancellation condition is satisfied, the first sub control unit 400 turns off the auto button mode setting flag indicating that the auto button mode is set. The first sub-control unit 400 overwrites “0” on the auto button mode setting flag stored in a predetermined area in the RAM 408. When the first sub control unit 400 turns off the auto button mode setting flag, the first sub control unit 400 ends the auto button mode setting process, and proceeds to another button effect control process (step S1217) of the button effect control process.

  FIG. 491 shows the process flow of the chance button control process (S411) of the main process in the first sub-control unit 400. In the chance button control process, the first sub-control unit 400 first turns off the button acceptance flag (step S1401). Thus, the button acceptance flag is turned off once every time the chance button control process is executed. The first sub control unit 400 overwrites the button reception flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408 with “0” to turn off the button reception flag, and proceeds to the process of step S1403.

  In step S1403, the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not the button effect flag execution flag is on. The button effect flag is turned on within a period during which the player's operation of the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 is valid (operation valid period). The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the value of the button effect flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408. When the value of the button effect flag is “1”, the button effect flag is in the on state. The process proceeds to step S1405, and if the value of the button effect flag is “0”, it is determined that the button effect flag is off and the chance button control process ends.

  In step S1405, the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not the auto button mode setting flag is on. The auto button mode is an effect mode in which each button of the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 is automatically operated. When the auto button mode is set, the auto button mode setting flag is turned on. The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the value of the auto button mode setting flag stored in a predetermined area in the RAM 408, and when the value of the auto button mode setting flag is “1”, the auto button mode It is determined that the setting flag is on, and the process proceeds to step S1407. If the value of the auto button mode setting flag is “0”, it is determined that the auto button mode setting flag is off. Then, the process proceeds to step S1411.

  In step S1407, the first sub-control unit 400 performs auto button processing. When the auto button process is performed, each button of the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 is automatically operated.

  In step S1409 following step S1407, the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether to accept a button operation. If the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the button operation has been accepted, the process proceeds to step S1413. If the first sub-control unit 400 determines not to accept the button operation, the chance button control process ends.

  On the other hand, in step S1411 when it is determined in step S1405 that the auto button mode setting flag is off, it is determined whether the detection result of the chance button sensor 426 or the setting operation unit sensor is on. The first sub-control unit 400 determines that the chance button 136 is operated when the detection result of the chance button sensor 426 is on, and determines that the setting operation unit 137 is operated when the detection result of the setting operation unit sensor is on. to decide. If the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S1413. If the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 have not been operated, the chance button control process is performed. finish.

  In step S1413, the button acceptance flag is turned off. Since the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137 has been operated automatically or manually, the first sub-control unit 400 turns on the button reception flag indicating that the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137 has been operated. The first sub-control unit 400 overwrites “1” on the button reception flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408. The first sub-control unit 400 ends the chance button control process when the button acceptance flag is turned on.

  FIG. 492 shows various settings of the auto button mode. In the present embodiment, four types of auto button modes of mode 1 to mode 4 are provided. Mode 1 is for beginners, and no settable conditions are provided. For this reason, mode 1 can be set by any player. Mode 2 is for intermediate players, and a player who has reached level 50 with Daitomo (membership service) can be set. Mode 3 is for advanced players, and can be set by players who have reached level 100 with Daitomo (membership service). Mode 4 is for all players, but cannot be set unless a predetermined ban date arrives.

  In each mode, it is determined at which timing of the operation effective period the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 are automatically operated. As shown in the column of “sex” in the figure, “easy” is set in mode 1, and the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 are automatically operated at the end of the operation valid period. In mode 2, “Sekachi” is set, and the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 are automatically operated at the beginning of the operation valid period. In mode 3, “mood” is set, and the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 are automatically operated at random timing within the operation valid period. In mode 4, the player can arbitrarily set any one of “Leisurely”, “Imperial”, and “Money”.

  Further, the continuous hitting speed indicating the number of operations per unit time of the chance button 136 is set to “low speed” in mode 1, “medium speed” in mode 2, and “high speed” in mode 3. In mode 1 and mode 3, the player hits repeatedly without operating the chance button 136, but in mode 2, the player hits repeatedly only when the player keeps pressing the chance button 136. It has become. In mode 4, the player can arbitrarily set one of “low speed”, “medium speed”, and “high speed”.

  In addition, in the effect of matching the operation timing of the chance button 136 (for example, Princess Dance SP reach described later), the operation timing is set to “GOOD” in the allowable range in the mode 1, and the operation timing is slightly shifted in “GREAT” in the mode 2. And mode 3 is set to “PERFECT” that perfectly matches the operation timing. In mode 4, the player can arbitrarily set one of “GOOD”, “GREAT”, and “PERFECT”.

  In addition, the setting of the “back button” in which the operation promotion prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 within the operation effective period is not performed is that the chance button 136 is not automatically operated in the mode 1 during the operation effective period. In mode 2, the chance button 136 is automatically operated, and in mode 3, the chance button 136 is automatically operated. In mode 4, the player can arbitrarily set whether or not to perform automatic operation.

  In addition, when a hold icon indicating the number of hold of the special figure variable game is displayed with a pattern imitating the chance button 136 and “button hold” for promoting the operation of the chance button 136 is displayed, during the operation valid period In mode 1, the chance button 136 is automatically operated, in mode 2, the chance button 136 is not automatically operated, and in mode 3, the chance button 136 is not automatically operated. In mode 4, the player can arbitrarily set whether or not to perform automatic operation. When the chance button 136 is operated while “button hold” is displayed, the display mode of the “button hold” hold icon changes.

  In addition, a cross key (a cross key command input) for operating the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 in a predetermined order is set to be automatically operated in mode 1 and set to be automatically operated in mode 2. The mode 3 is set not to be automatically operated. In mode 4, the player can arbitrarily set whether or not to perform automatic operation.

  Also, in the selection effect that causes the player to draw a lottery, etc., Mode 1 is set to “Indecisive” where the choices are not decided immediately, Mode 2 is set to “Immediate Decision” where the choices are decided immediately, and Mode 3 Is set to “default” where the choice is determined to be the initial selection. In mode 4, the player can arbitrarily set one of “indecision”, “prompt decision”, or “default”.

  Further, the button operation of the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 by the player who is set in each mode is effectively accepted in the mode 1, is validly accepted in the mode 2, and is not validly accepted in the mode 3. It has become. In mode 4, the player can arbitrarily set whether to accept button operations of the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 by the player effectively.

  In addition, as described in the “Remarks” column in the figure, mode 1 is an auto button setting screen or special figure displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 when the special figure variable game is not being executed (during non-game). ON / OFF can be set by inputting a cross key command during a variable game (during game). In mode 2, when the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137 is actually operated by the player in the auto button mode on state, the auto button mode is switched to the off state. In the mode 3, the continuous hitting speed is such that it cannot be achieved when the chance button 136 is physically operated (directly by the player). Further, an effect that appears only when the operation timing is “PERFECT” is provided.

  FIG. 493 shows a setting method of mode 1 in the auto button mode in time series. Mode 1 is a mode that can be set even by a player who plays the pachinko machine 100 for the first time.

  FIG. 493 (a) shows the display contents of the decorative symbol display device 208 during the demonstration effect performed during the non-execution of the special figure variable game. In the symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, “decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 6”, which is the latest stop symbol, is displayed. In the effect display area 208d, “menu call by chance button” is displayed, and it is notified that the menu screen is called (displayed) by operating the chance button 136.

  FIG. 493 (b) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is operated during the demonstration effect and the menu screen is displayed when Daitomo is not logged in (when no password is entered). The player can operate the up and down buttons of the setting operation unit 137 to move the cursor e to select an item, and operate the chance button 136 to determine the selection item. In addition, this is reported by a tutorial display composed of the character of the eagle displayed in the effect display area 208d and a balloon message “Just select an item and make a decision”. The menu of this example is provided with “member registration”, “password entry”, “QR code (registered trademark) issuance”, “data clear”, “volume and light amount adjustment”, and “auto button mode”. “QR code (registered trademark) issuance” and “data clear” are menus that can be selected only when logging in to Daitomo. In FIG. 493, since the user is not logged in to Daitomo, “QR code (registered trademark) issuance” and “data clear” are displayed darker than other menus (indicated by right-upward hatching in the figure) and cannot be selected. It is shown that.

  FIG. 493 (c) shows a state where the “auto button mode” is selected on the menu screen. At the time indicated by 19 (c), the cursor e1 is positioned at "mode 1" and "mode 1" is selected. In the effect display area 208d, the selected mode is explained by a tutorial display composed of a princess character and a balloon message “Mode 1 is recommended for beginners”. In addition, mode 2 and mode 3 are modes that can be selected only while logging in to Daitomo, and the opening date of “mode 4” has not arrived. For this reason, “mode 2”, “mode 3”, and “mode 4” cannot be selected. When “return” is selected and determined, the menu screen shown in FIG. 493 (b) is displayed.

  FIG. 493 (d) shows a state determined in mode 1. The item “mode 1” is displayed so as to be lit (indicated by a dotted frame in the figure), and the princess balloon message “determine mode 1!” Is displayed. Further, “mode 1” is displayed at the lower left of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the auto button mode being set is displayed.

  FIG. 493 (e) shows a state in which mode 1 has been determined and the menu screen has been returned. When the menu item “end” is selected, the character of the samurai and the balloon message “I will do my best!” Are displayed, and the demonstration effect is resumed as shown in FIG. 493 (f). Further, as shown in FIG. 493 (e), the display of “mode 1” at the lower left may be hidden by a display different from the display related to the auto button mode (for example, “end” of the menu item), As shown in FIG. 493 (f), the display of “mode 1” in the lower left may be hidden from a display different from the display related to the auto button mode (for example, a frame of “menu call by chance button”).

  FIG. 494 shows a setting method of mode 4 in the auto button mode in time series. FIG. 494 (a) shows a state in which “password entry” has been selected and determined on the menu screen shown in FIG. 493 (b). The player can log in to Daitomo by operating the setting operation unit 137 to input a 4-digit password.

  FIG. 494 (b) shows a state where the password has been successfully input. After “Password input accepted” is displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d, the menu screen shown in FIG. 494 (c) is displayed. Since the user has logged in to Daitomo, the menu items “Issuing QR Code (registered trademark)” and “Data Clear” can be selected. In the effect display area 208d, a tutorial display composed of the character of a frog and a balloon message “Just select an item and make a decision” is displayed. In addition, “level: 250” is displayed on the upper right side of the effect display area 208d, and the Daitomo level of the logged-in player is shown. A title corresponding to each level is provided, and since the title of level 250 is a general, “title: general” is displayed below “level: 250”.

  In this state, when the player operates the up / down buttons of the setting operation unit 137 to select the menu item “auto button” and operates the chance button 136, the auto button mode setting is performed as shown in FIG. 494 (d). A screen is displayed. The cursor e1 is positioned in “mode 4”, and “mode 4” is selected. In the effect display area 208d, the selected mode is explained by a tutorial display including a princess character and a balloon message "Mode 4 can customize all functions". Also, since the user is logged in to Daitomo and the Daitomo level is 250, “mode 2” and “mode 3” can be selected. In addition, since the ban on “mode 4” has arrived, “mode 4” can also be selected.

  FIG. 494 (e) shows a state after mode 4 is selected and determined. The player can select a function to be set by operating the up and down buttons of the setting operation unit 137 and can set each function by operating the left and right buttons of the setting operation unit 137. The selection items of each function selected by the player are displayed brighter than the non-selected items (indicated by dot hatching in the figure). When “decision” shown below the effect display area 208d is selected and determined, setting (customization) of mode 4 ends, and when “cancel” is selected and determined, the auto button mode screen shown in FIG. 494 (d) To come back.

  FIG. 494 (f) shows a state in which “OK” is selected and determined, and setting of mode 4 of the auto button is completed. "Mode 4" is displayed at the lower left of the effect display area 208d, and the mode being set is displayed. Further, instead of “mode 4”, the setting status of each function that can be individually set by the player may be notified individually.

Next, a specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.
Example 1

  FIG. 495 shows an example of effect display in Example 1 of this embodiment in time series. In FIG. 495 and each figure to be described later, the variation of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is indicated by a downward bold white arrow. 495 and each figure to be described later, the relative arrangement relationship between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, and the special figure 2 display device 214. Is shown differently from the illustration of FIG. In FIG. 495 and each figure described later, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 and the special figure 1 display device 212 are shown at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 and the special figure 2 display are shown on the right side thereof. Device 214 is shown. In addition, the extinguishing portions of the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are shown in white, and the lighting portions are shown in black. In addition, the state in which all segments are represented in white in the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 display device 214 indicates that the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is performed. Also, the illustration of the fourth pattern is omitted. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the like are shown on the left side of FIG. 495, and the chance button 136 viewed from the player is shown on the left side.

  FIG. 495 (a) shows a state in which the super reach effect is being executed during the execution of the special figure 1 variable game. “Decoration 7” is displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the reach is reached by the variation of the ornament symbol. In the super reach production of the present embodiment, an animation of a swordsman confrontation where Tono f1 and swordsman f2 confront each other is displayed. Further, at the time shown in FIG. 495 (a), since the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has not started, no operation promotion notification is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the chance button lamp 138 is not lit. .

  FIG. 495 (b) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. In the center of the effect display area 208d, an image simulating the chance button 136, three arrows above the image, and a character string “PUSH!” Are displayed, and an operation effective period is displayed below the image. A meter image showing is displayed. These displays are examples of the operation promotion notification. The meter image is initially displayed entirely in white, the white portion increases with the passage of time, and is displayed in white when the operation valid period ends. Further, the chance button lamp 138 emits light during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 (indicated by cross hatching in the drawing), and prompts the operation of the chance button 136.

  In this embodiment, the auto button mode is not set. For this reason, the chance button 136 is not automatically operated during the operation valid period. As shown in FIG. 495 (c), when the chance button 136 is operated by the player within the operation effective period, as shown in FIG. 495 (d), a cut-in effect in which the face of the lord f1 is displayed up. Is executed. When the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation effective period, the cut-in effect is not executed. When the chance button 136 is pressed, the chance button lamp 138 is turned off as shown in FIGS. 495 (c) and (d).

As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment executes the cut-in effect as the first effect based on the operation of the chance button 136 by the player within the operation effective period. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game by executing various effects.
(Example 2)

  FIG. 496 shows an example of effect display in Example 2 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 496 (a) shows a state in which the super reach effect is being executed during the execution of the special figure 1 variable game. “Decoration 7” is displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the reach is reached by the variation of the ornament symbol. In the super reach production of the present embodiment, an animation of a swordsman confrontation where Tono f1 and swordsman f2 confront each other is displayed. Further, at the time shown in FIG. 496 (a), since the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has not started, no operation promotion notification is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the chance button lamp 138 is not lit. .

  In this embodiment, mode 3 of the auto button mode is set. Therefore, “mode 3” is displayed at the lower left of the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 496 (b) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. In the center of the effect display area 208d, an image simulating the chance button 136, three arrows above the image, and a character string “PUSH!” Are displayed, and an operation effective period is displayed below the image. A meter image showing is displayed. These displays are examples of the operation promotion notification. The meter image is initially displayed entirely in white, the white portion increases with the passage of time, and is displayed in white when the operation valid period ends. Further, the chance button lamp 138 emits light during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 (indicated by cross hatching in the drawing), and prompts the operation of the chance button 136. Further, during the setting of the auto button mode, at least one of the image imitating the chance button 136, the three arrows, and the plurality of operation promotion notifications of the character string “PUSH!” May not be displayed.

  FIG. 496 (c) shows a state where the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode. As shown in FIG. 492, the “sex” in mode 3 is “mood”, and in this example, the chance button 136 is automatically operated at the end of the operation valid period as in the case of “carefree”. When the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode, the chance button lamp 138 is turned off. Note that the timing of automatic operation of the chance button 136 in mode 3 may be determined by lottery or the like, or may have regularity.

  FIG. 496 (d) shows a state in which the cut-in effect is executed based on the automatic operation of the chance button 136 in the auto button mode. As shown in FIG. 496 (d), a cut-in effect in which the face of the lord f1 is displayed up is executed. This cut-in effect is the same as the cut-in effect when the chance button 136 is operated by the player within the operation effective period (see FIG. 495 (d)). Different cut-in effects may be executed depending on whether the chance button 136 is manually operated or automatically operated. When the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation effective period, the cut-in effect is not executed. The display content of the cut-in effect may be changed according to the setting state of the auto button mode. In particular, there may be an aspect that is not displayed unless the auto button mode is set, and vice versa.

As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment executes the cut-in effect as the second effect based on the operation of the chance button 136 in the auto button mode (not depending on the player) within the operation effective period. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game by executing various effects. In this embodiment, even when the auto button mode is set, the chance button 136 is lit during the operation effective period and the meter image indicating the operation effective period is displayed. Not limited to, when the auto button mode is not set, a meter image indicating the operation valid period is displayed while the chance button 136 is lit, and when the auto button mode is set, either one or You do not have to do both.
(Example 3)

  FIG. 497 shows an example of effect display in Example 3 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 497 (a) shows a state in which the super reach effect is being executed during the execution of the special figure 1 variable game. “Decoration 7” is displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the reach is reached by the variation of the ornament symbol. In the super reach production of the present embodiment, an animation of a swordsman confrontation where Tono f1 and swordsman f2 confront each other is displayed. Further, at the time shown in FIG. 497 (a), since the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has not started, no operation promotion notification is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the chance button lamp 138 is not lit. .

  In this embodiment, mode 3 of the auto button mode is set. Therefore, “mode 3” is displayed at the lower left of the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 497 (b) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. In the center of the effect display area 208d, an image simulating the chance button 136, three arrows above the image, and a character string “PUSH!” Are displayed, and an operation effective period is displayed below the image. A meter image showing is displayed. These displays are examples of the operation promotion notification. The meter image is initially displayed entirely in white, the white portion increases with the passage of time, and is displayed in white when the operation valid period ends. Further, the chance button lamp 138 emits light during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 (indicated by cross hatching in the drawing), and prompts the operation of the chance button 136. Further, during the setting of the auto button mode, at least one of the image imitating the chance button 136, the three arrows, and the plurality of operation promotion notifications of the character string “PUSH!” May not be displayed.

  FIG. 497 (c) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode. As shown in FIG. 492, the “sex” in mode 3 is “mood”, and in this example, the chance button 136 is automatically operated at the beginning of the operation effective period in the same manner as “Sekachi”. When the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode, the chance button lamp 138 is turned off. Note that the timing of automatic operation of the chance button 136 in mode 3 may be determined by lottery or the like, or may have regularity.

  FIG. 497 (d) shows a state in which the cut-in effect is executed based on the automatic operation of the chance button 136 in the auto button mode. As shown in FIG. 497 (d), a cut-in effect in which the face of the lord f1 is displayed up is executed. This cut-in effect is the same as the cut-in effect when the chance button 136 is operated by the player within the operation effective period (see FIG. 495 (d)). When the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation effective period, the cut-in effect is not executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment executes the cut-in effect as the second effect based on the operation of the chance button 136 in the auto button mode (not depending on the player) within the operation effective period. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game by executing various effects.
Example 4

  FIG. 498 shows a chance button 700 provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 4 of the present embodiment. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a chance button 700 instead of the chance button 136 or in addition to the chance button 136. The chance button 700 is provided at a position where the player can operate, and is configured to be pressed. The chance button 700 has the same shape and structure as the rotating lamp. In the chance button 700, a rotatable lamp 700a is arranged.

  498 (a) to (d) show an example in which the chance button 700 is manually operated by the player. FIG. 498 (a) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 700 has not started and the chance button 700 is waiting. While the chance button 700 is on standby, the lamp 700a is turned off without rotating.

  FIG. 498 (b) shows a state in which operation acceptance of the chance button 700 is started (operation valid period is started). As an operation promotion notification of the chance button 700, the lamp 700a is turned on without rotating.

  FIG. 498 (c) shows a state where the chance button 700 has been operated by the player. When the chance button 700 is operated, as shown in FIGS. 498 (c) and (d), the lamp 700a is turned on while rotating. As described above, when the chance button 700 is operated, an effect of lighting the lamp 700a while rotating is started. However, if the player keeps his / her hand on the chance button 700 even after operating the chance button 700, the rotation and lighting of the lamp 700a may be hidden by the hand.

  On the other hand, FIGS. 498 (e) to (g) show an example in which the chance button 700 is automatically operated in the auto button mode. FIG. 498 (e) shows a state where the operation valid period of the chance button 700 has not started and the chance button 700 is waiting. While the chance button 700 is on standby, the lamp 700a is turned off without rotating.

  FIG. 498 (f) shows a state in which the operation acceptance of the chance button 700 is started (operation valid period is started). As an operation promotion notification of the chance button 700, the lamp 700a is turned on without rotating.

  FIG. 498 (g) shows a state where the chance button 700 is operated in the auto button mode. When the chance button 700 is operated, the lamp 700a is turned on while rotating. As described above, when the auto button mode is set, the lamp 700a is turned on while rotating based on the automatic operation, even if the player does not actually operate the auto button. Since the player does not operate the chance button 700, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the lamp 700a from being lowered by the player's hand.

According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, depending on whether or not the auto button mode can be set, it is possible to move an accessory (for example, the lamp 700a) by operating the chance button 700 while sacrificing visibility, and the chance button. The player can select the case of ensuring the visibility of the accessory while sacrificing the operation of 700.
(Example 5)

  FIG. 499 shows an example of effects according to Example 5 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 499 (a) shows a state in which the super reach effect is being executed during the execution of the special figure 1 variable game. “Decoration 7” is displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the reach is reached by the variation of the ornament symbol. In the super reach production of the present embodiment, shooting reach is performed in which Tono f1 knocks down Echigoya f3 with a beam.

  In the shooting reach of this embodiment, the operation of the chance button 136 is validated, and the beam is fired from the sword of the wing f1 by the number of times of operation of the chance button 136. In order to notify this, at the start of shooting reach, a character string “shooting reach-defeat Echigoya with repeated button hits” is displayed. In this embodiment, mode 1 of the auto button mode is set. “Mode 1” is displayed at the lower left of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 499 (b) shows a state in which shooting reach is started. The operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started with the start of the shooting reach, and an image imitating the chance button 136 in the center of the effect display area 208d, three arrows above the image, and “PUSH!” A character string is displayed, a meter image indicating the operation effective period is displayed below the image, and an operation promotion notification is executed.

  The continuous hitting speed in the auto button mode 1 is “low speed” as shown in FIG. For this reason, as shown in FIGS. 499 (b) and (c), the chance button 136 is automatically operated at a low speed, so that the number of beams emitted from the sword of the lord f1 is reduced.

  FIG. 499 (d) shows a state in which the player has started hitting the chance button 136 continuously. In mode 1 of the auto button mode, the operation of the chance button 136 by the player is also valid. For this reason, more beams are fired from the sword of F1 than when the chance button 136 was automatically operated.

  FIG. 500 is a timing chart showing the states of the chance button sensor 426, the auto button process determination result (steps S1407 and S1409), and the button reception flag when the effect shown in FIG. 499 is executed. FIG. 500 shows, in order from the top, the on / off state of the chance button sensor 426, the on / off state of the auto button determination processing result (determination in step S1409 from step S1407), and the on / off state of the button reception flag. In addition, the horizontal axis of FIG. 500 indicates time. The chance button sensor 426 is turned on only when the player actually operates the chance button 136. The result of the auto button determination process is turned on only when the chance button 136 is operated in the auto button mode. The button acceptance flag is turned on both when the player actually operates the chance button 136 and when the chance button 136 is operated in the auto button mode.

  Time t1 in FIG. 500 is the time shown in FIG. 499 (b). When the auto button determination process is turned on at time t1 (Yes in step S1409 from step S1407), the button reception flag is turned on. Since the operation of the chance button 136 at the time t1 is an automatic operation in the auto button mode, the chance button sensor 426 remains off at the time t1.

  Time t2 in FIG. 500 is the time shown in FIG. 499 (c). When the auto button determination process is turned on at time t2 (Yes in step S1409 from step S1407), the button reception flag is turned on. Since the operation of the chance button 136 at the time t2 is an automatic operation in the auto button mode, the chance button sensor 426 remains off at the time t2. The operation of the chance button 136 at the times t3 to t4 is also an automatic operation in the auto button mode. Automatic operation of the chance button 136 in the auto button mode is performed at regular intervals. Note that the automatic operation of the chance button 136 in the auto button mode may be executed at random or in a pattern with a different cycle.

  The operation of the chance button 136 by the player is started from time t5. For this reason, at the times t5 and t6, the chance button sensor 426 is turned on, and the button reception flag is also turned on.

  At time t7, the player's operation of the chance button 136 and the automatic operation of the chance button 136 in the auto button mode overlap. In this case, only one of the operation of the chance button 136 by the player or the automatic operation of the chance button 136 by the auto button mode is valid, and the chance button 136 is operated only once. Although not illustrated, when the manual operation and the automatic operation of the chance button 136 overlap, both may be determined to be valid. Further, for example, even if the chance button 136 pressed down at the time t6 is maintained as it is, the auto button processing determination result at the time t7 and the time t10 may be turned on. If it is maintained in the ON state, the button acceptance flag may be turned OFF without turning ON even at the timing when the auto button process determination result is turned ON.

  At time t8, the chance button 136 is operated by the player. At time t9, the chance button 136 is operated by the player. Time t9 is the time shown in FIG. 499 (d).

  The chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode at time t10, but the button reception flag is not turned on at time t10. For this reason, the automatic operation of the chance button 136 at time t10 is invalidated. As described above, the automatic operation of the chance button 136 may be invalidated for a predetermined period from the operation of the chance button 136 by the player. Thereafter, the chance button 136 is operated by the player at time t11.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the operation of the chance button 136 by the player is valid even when the auto button mode is set. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, even when the auto button mode is set, by accepting an operation of the chance button 136 by the player, it is possible to deal with a player who suddenly wants to operate the chance button 136. . Further, by manually operating the chance button 136 in addition to the operation that is automatically performed, there are cases where it is possible to easily capture a continuous hitting effect (for example, shooting reach).

Here, it may be configured such that the result of the auto button process determination process is turned on with the start of the acceptance period of the chance button 136. When the player presses the chance button 136, it is difficult to operate the chance button 136 simultaneously with the start of the period even if the chance button 136 is waiting for the reception period to start. It takes time from the start of the reception period 136 to the execution of the effect based on the pressing of the chance button 136. On the other hand, when the auto button mode is set, an effect based on the pressing of the chance button 136 is executed almost simultaneously with the start of the reception period of the chance button 136, so that the effect can be seen more quickly. is there.
(Example 6)

  FIG. 501 shows an example of effect display in Example 6 of the present embodiment in time series. 501 (a) to (d) show an example in which the auto button mode is activated. FIG. 501 (a) shows a state in which a super reach effect is being executed during execution of the special figure 1 variable game. “Decoration 7” is displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the reach is reached by the variation of the ornament symbol. In the super reach production of the present embodiment, an animation of a swordsman confrontation where Tono f1 and swordsman f2 confront each other is displayed. In this embodiment, mode 3 of the auto button mode is set. Therefore, “mode 3” is displayed at the lower left of the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 501 (b) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. In the center of the effect display area 208d, an image simulating the chance button 136, three arrows above the image, and a character string “PUSH!” Are displayed, and an operation effective period is displayed below the image. A meter image showing is displayed. These displays are examples of the operation promotion notification. The meter image is initially displayed entirely in white, the white portion increases with the passage of time, and is displayed in white when the operation valid period ends.

  FIG. 501 (c) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode. As shown in FIG. 492, the “sex” in mode 3 is “mood”, and in this example, the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the middle of the operation valid period.

  FIG. 501 (d) shows a state in which the cut-in effect is executed based on the automatic operation of the chance button 136 in the auto button mode. As shown in FIG. 501 (d), a cut-in effect in which the face of the lord f1 is displayed up is executed. This cut-in effect is the same as the cut-in effect when the chance button 136 is operated by the player within the operation effective period (see FIG. 495 (d)).

  501 (e) to (h) show an example in which the auto button mode is not activated. FIG. 501 (e) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, a decorative symbol variation display (indicated by a downward arrow in the diagram) is executed. In addition, since mode 3 of the auto button mode is set, “mode 3” is displayed at the upper left of the effect display area 208d. When the super reach effect is executed, the display position indicating that the auto button mode is being set is in the lower left, and when the super reach effect is not executed, the display position indicating that the auto button mode is being set is the upper left. It has become. As described above, the display position indicating that the auto button mode is being set may be changed for each state.

  Also, the lower left area of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variation icon display area a. In the variation icon display area a, one variation icon can be displayed, and whether or not the variation is appropriate can be notified in advance with a predetermined reliability according to the display mode of the variation icon (notification of the variation). In the fluctuation icon display area a, a fluctuation icon a1 is displayed in a white circular (default) display mode.

  Also, a horizontally long area below the effect display area 208d and adjacent to the right side of the variable icon display area a is a special figure hold display area (hold icon display area) c. In the special figure hold display area c, it is possible to display one or more hold icons. In the special figure hold display area c, it is possible to notify the number of hold of the special figure variable game according to the number of the hold icons, and to notify the success or failure of the hold with a predetermined reliability according to the display mode of each hold icon (pre-reading Notice). Further, in the special figure hold display area c of this example, hold icons indicating the hold of the hold ranks 1 to 4 are displayed in order from the variable icon display area a side. Since the current number of hold of the special figure 1 variable game is two, as shown in FIG. 501 (e), two hold icons b1 and b2 are displayed in a white circle (default) in the special figure hold display area c. It is displayed in a manner.

  FIG. 501 (f) shows a state in which one game ball is won in the special figure 1 starting port 230 during execution of the special figure 1 variable game, and the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games is increased by one. . In the special figure hold display area c, a hold icon b3 is newly displayed.

  The hold icon b <b> 3 is a button hold that is displayed in a pattern display mode that imitates the chance button 136. The button hold is displayed as a prefetch notice. During the button hold display, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is reached. When the chance button 136 is operated manually or automatically while the button hold is displayed, the display mode of the button hold is changed. In addition, when the auto button mode is activated when a plurality of button holds are displayed while the auto button mode (except mode 3) is set, only the display mode of the button hold previously displayed is displayed. May be changed, or conversely, only the display mode of the button hold displayed later may be changed. In that case, the display mode of both button hold may not be changed, and the display mode of both button hold may be changed simultaneously. Also, these controls may be different between the auto button mode setting and other states, or may be the same. In addition, the display mode after the change may be different or the same between the change of the display mode due to the operation of the auto button mode and the change of the display mode based on the fact that the chance button 136 is actually pressed. Good. Further, there may be an aspect that is displayed only when one of the conditions is satisfied.

  In this example, mode 3 of the auto button mode is set. However, in mode 3, as shown in FIG. 492, the automatic operation at the time of button hold display is not performed, and the operation by the player is not validated. For this reason, when mode 3 is set, the button hold display mode does not change.

  FIG. 501 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game that has been on hold with the hold icon b3 is started. The hold icon b3 with the button hold becomes the change icon a2 with the display mode as it is. The variation icon a2 gradually moves toward the variation icon display area a.

  FIG. 501 (h) shows a state where the fluctuation icon a2 has moved to the fluctuation icon display area a. The display mode of the change icon a2 changes after the movement to the change icon display area a is completed. The change icon a2 changes, for example, to a display form of a picture drawn as “Heat” in a red circle (indicated by cross hatching in the figure), and a notice display of the special figure 1 change game being executed ( This change is indicated in advance).

As shown in FIGS. 501 (a) to 501 (d) of the present embodiment, the auto button mode may be activated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 so that the chance button 136 is automatically operated. Then, as shown in FIGS. 501 (e) to (h), the auto button mode may not be operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136 may not be operated automatically. The auto button mode may be activated when the cut-in effect is executed when the chance button 136 is operated, and the auto button mode when the button hold changes when the chance button 136 is operated. May be activated. Further, when the cut-in effect is executed when the chance button 136 is operated, the auto button mode may not be activated, and when the button hold changes when the chance button 136 is operated, Auto button mode may not be activated.
(Example 7)

  FIG. 502 shows an example of effect display in Example 7 of this embodiment in time series. A decorative symbol display device 208 and the like are shown on the left side of FIG. 502, and a chance button 136 viewed from the player is shown on the right side.

  FIG. 502 (a) shows a state in which the super reach effect is being executed during the execution of the special figure 1 variable game. “Decoration 7” is displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the reach is reached by the variation of the ornament symbol. In the super reach production of the present embodiment, the princess dance super reach where the princess dances is executed.

  In the princess dance super reach of the present embodiment, the operation of the chance button 136 is validated, and an effect of operating the chance button 136 in a timely manner is executed. In order to notify this, at the start of Princess Dance Super Reach, a character string “Princess Dance SP Reach-Push the Flowing Button in Time!” Is displayed. In this embodiment, mode 3 of the auto button mode is set. “Mode 3” is displayed at the lower left of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 502 (b) shows a state where the princess dance super reach is started. The operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started with the start of the princess dance super reach. When the operation valid period starts, the chance button lamp 138 is turned on.

  In the effect display area 208d, a princess image, a chance button image g, and an aiming frame h are displayed. In the present embodiment, a plurality of chance button images g are displayed so as to flow from above toward the aiming frame h in accordance with the BGM being reproduced. When the chance button 136 is manually or automatically operated at the timing when the chance button image g overlaps the aiming frame h, evaluations of “PERFECT”, “GREAT”, and “GOOD” are obtained in order of good timing.

  FIG. 502 (c) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode. In this embodiment, the chance button 136 is movable by driving means such as a motor or a solenoid. In accordance with the timing when the chance button 136 is automatically operated, the chance button 136 is retracted as if it was pressed. When the chance button 136 is automatically operated, the chance button 136 may be protruded upward. Further, when the chance button 136 is operated, the chance button lamp 138 is turned off. Furthermore, when the chance button 136 is provided with driving means, the chance button 136 may not be physically pressed by operating the driving means in accordance with the setting of the auto button mode. For example, the chance button 136 may not be pressed by driving the driving means so that the player does not press the chance button 136 based on the auto button mode being set to ON. For example, the chance button 136 can be pressed by applying force from the inside to the outside so that the chance button 136 does not move or by retracting the chance button 136 and fixing the chance button 136 in the retracted state. It may be eliminated.

  Thus, when the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode, the chance button 136 is operated as if it was actually operated. This is not limited to the movement of the chance button 136 by the driving means, and the appearance may be the same when the chance button 136 is operated by the player and when the chance button 136 is automatically operated. For example, when the chance button lamp 138 is turned on during the operation valid period and the chance button lamp 138 is turned off when the chance button 136 is operated by the player, the chance button 136 is automatically activated by the operation of the auto button mode. By causing the chance button lamp 138 to turn off based on the operation, there is a case where the player can have an illusion as if the chance button 136 is actually operated.

  Also, in order to make the player have the illusion that the chance button 136 is actually operated, there is a case where the chance button 136 is actually operated and a case where the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode. The appearance of the chance buttons 136 may be the same. In this case, when the chance button 136 is actually operated and when the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode, the lighting state of the chance button lamp 138 (for example, the presence / absence of issuance, emission color, luminance) At least one of the plurality of elements such as the posture, the posture, and the situation of movement may be made common.

  FIG. 502 (d) shows a state after the chance button 136 is automatically operated. As shown in FIG. 492, in the mode 3 of the auto button mode, the chance button 136 is automatically operated at the timing of “PERFECT”. Therefore, after the chance button 136 is automatically operated, an effect image including a character string “PERFECT” is displayed so as to overlap the aiming frame h.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, a player who feels troublesome to operate the chance button 136 does not operate the chance button 136, and the same effect as when the chance button 136 is actually operated is played. May be able to show to the person.

Next, a characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the ninth embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 475 to 502 again.
(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment

  Operation means (for example, chance buttons 136 and 700, setting operation unit 137) provided at least at positions where the player can operate;

At least one of a plurality of effects (for example, cut-in effects, button hold, shooting reach, princess dance SP reach effects) and at least an effect means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
A game machine equipped with

  At least one of the plurality of effects is a first effect (for example, a cut-in effect, a change in button hold),

  At least one of the plurality of effects is a second effect (for example, cut-in effect, button hold),

  The production means can execute at least the first production (for example, a cut-in production (see FIG. 495)) when the first condition is satisfied,

The production means is capable of executing at least the second production (for example, a change in button hold in mode 3) when the second condition is satisfied,
The first performance is at least different from the second performance,

  The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the operation means is not operated by a player,

The second condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the operation means is not operated by a player.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game by executing various effects.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, a player who feels troublesome to operate the operation means can be presented with the same effect as when the operation means is operated without operating the operation means. There is a case. In addition, there may be a new way of enjoying a game in which an operation means is not operated by providing an effect that can be visually recognized by not operating the operation means.
(2) The pachinko machine 100,

  A game machine having a production mode control means capable of executing at least switching control of a plurality of production modes,

  At least one of the plurality of effect modes is a first effect mode (for example, non-setting of the auto button button mode),

  At least one of the plurality of effect modes is a second effect mode (for example, an auto button button mode),

  The first effect is an effect that is not executed when the effect mode is the first effect mode,

  The second effect is an effect that is not executed when the effect mode is the first effect mode,

  The first production mode is a production mode in which the operation means is not automatically operated,

The second effect mode is an effect mode in which the operation means is automatically operated.
A game stand characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having this configuration, a player who does not want to operate the operating means does not operate the operating means by providing an effect that is executed only in an effect mode in which the operating means is automatically operated. In some cases, there is no loss. Conversely, a player who does not want to operate the operating means may make a profit by not operating the operating means.
(3) The pachinko machine 100,

  The production means can execute at least an operation promotion notification (for example, an image imitating a chance button 136, a meter image),

  When the production mode is the first production mode, the production means is capable of at least executing the operation promotion notification,

When the production mode is the second production mode, the production means can execute at least the operation promotion notification,
The operation promotion notification is notification that prompts the player to operate the operation means.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the operation is automated by executing the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the operation unit even in the production mode in which the operation of the operation unit is automatically performed. It may be possible to rescue a player who feels angry. In addition, it may be difficult to understand that another player has set the second effect mode (for example, the auto button mode). Moreover, since control can be made common in a plurality of performance modes, the control load can be reduced and the design work process can be reduced.
(4) The pachinko machine 100,

  At least one of the plurality of effects is a third effect (for example, a cut-in effect),

The production means can execute at least the third production when the third condition is satisfied,
The third effect is at least the same effect as the first effect,

The third condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the operation means is operated by a player.
It is characterized by that.
(5) The pachinko machine 100,

  The third effect is an effect that is executed when the effect mode is the first effect mode,

The first effect is an effect that is executed when the effect mode is the second effect mode.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, even in the effect mode in which operation of the operation means is performed automatically, a game that suddenly wants to operate the operation means by accepting the operation of the operation means by the player Can also deal with the elderly. Further, in some cases, it is possible to easily capture a continuous hitting effect or the like by manually operating the operation means in addition to the operation performed automatically.
(6) The above game table,
The game table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine,
It is characterized by that.
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be made.

  For example, the above embodiment can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in a game machine. For example, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine that encloses a sphere and circulates the enclosed sphere in the pachinko machine, and this enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed sphere as a launch ball, The ball payout may be executed by electronic display.

  Note that the items described in the above detailed description, in particular, the items described in the examples and the modifications can be combined.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is used as an example of a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine 1000 as shown in FIG.

  The gaming table according to the present invention corresponds to each reel shown in FIG. 503, “a plurality of reels 1002 provided with a plurality of kinds of symbols and driven to rotate, a start lever 1004 for instructing the rotation of the reels”. A stop button 1006 for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, lottery means (lottery prize internal lottery) for determining whether or not internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is successful, and a lottery result of the lottery means The combination of symbols displayed by the reel stop control means (reel stop control processing) that performs stop control for stopping the rotation of the reels and the reels stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means corresponds to the winning combination. And determining means (winning determination process) for determining whether or not the symbol combination is predetermined, and when the symbol stop mode is a predetermined winning mode, In addition to payout control means (medal payout process 1008) for performing game medium payout processing for paying out game media to be played, the effect means 1010 for executing effects based on the lottery result of the lottery means, A launching device 1014 that launches a ball into the game area 1012, a winning opening 1016 configured to be able to enter a ball launched from the launching device, a detection means 1018 that detects a ball that has entered the winning opening 1016, A payout means 1020 for paying out a ball when the detection means 1018 detects a ball, a variable display device 1022 for variably displaying a predetermined symbol (identification information), and a shutter 1024 movable to a position for shielding the variable display device 1022 And a movable body 1026 that operates in a predetermined operation mode, and the variable display device 1022 is designed to receive a game ball in the winning opening. And the stopped displayed after varied is also suitable to the slot machine 1000 "is a representation section 1010, so as to produce a game.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention is shown in FIG. 504 (a). “Insert a bill into the bill insertion slot 2002, execute a lottery based on the bet 2004 and start 2006 operation, and display the lottery result on the lottery result display device 2008. Then, at the time of winning, the number of bonus coins is added to the remaining credit number, and when cashout 2009 is selected, the casino machine 2000 issues a receipt from the receipt issuing machine 2010 with a code corresponding to the remaining credit number. It may be.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5B, the cellular phone 3000 having a storage unit for storing the electronic data for realizing the present invention, and the electronic data for realizing the present invention as shown in FIG. The present invention may be applied to a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing the video data and a home video game machine 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

  More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 in FIG. 5B includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game through a mobile phone line, and acquired data about the game (this book And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  The portable game machine 4000 in FIG. 6C includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired data related to the game (the present invention). And a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The home video game machine 5000 in FIG. 6D includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired data ( And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5E, the present invention may be applied to a data server 6000 that stores electronic data for realizing the present invention. In some cases, the electronic data for realizing the present invention is downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game machine 5000 shown in FIG.

  In addition, a game can be executed by applying the present invention to a game program that simulates the operation of a real machine such as a pachinko machine for a home game machine. In that case, a DVD-ROM, CD-ROM, FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used as a recording medium for recording the game program.

  Furthermore, the present invention has been described by taking a pachinko machine and a slot machine as examples of game machines, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be applied to an arrangement ball game machine, a ball ball game machine, a smart ball, and the like.

  In the conventional game stand, there is an effect that is not executed unless the player operates the operation means. Further, in the conventional game machine, there may be a case where the player performs the same effect as when the operation means is operated without operating the operation means, depending on conditions such as time-out of the operation effective period of the operation means. there were. For this reason, in the conventional game machine, the effect executed based on the operation of the operating means is likely to be monotonous, and the player is started because the predetermined effect is executed at a predetermined timing. There was a problem that it was easy to predict the contents of the production and it was easy to get bored of the production.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment diversifies the effects that are executed based on the operation of the operation means, and the effects that are started by the player by randomizing the timing of the effects. This makes it difficult to predict the content of and makes it possible to produce a timeless presentation.
The present invention according to the above embodiment can be summarized as follows.

(Appendix G1)
Operation means provided at least in a position where the player can operate;
At least one of a plurality of effects, a direction means capable of executing,
A game machine equipped with
At least one of the plurality of effects is a first effect,
At least one of the plurality of effects is a second effect,
The production means is capable of executing at least the first production when the first condition is satisfied,
The production means can execute at least the second production when the second condition is satisfied,
The first performance is at least different from the second performance,
The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the operation means is not operated by a player,
The second condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the operation means is not operated by a player.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix G2)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix G1,
A game machine having a production mode control means capable of executing at least switching control of a plurality of production modes,
At least one of the plurality of effect modes is a first effect mode,
At least one of the plurality of effect modes is a second effect mode,
The first effect is an effect that is not executed when the effect mode is the first effect mode,
The second effect is an effect that is not executed when the effect mode is the first effect mode,
The first production mode is a production mode in which the operation means is not automatically operated,
The second effect mode is an effect mode in which the operation means is automatically operated.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix G3)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix G2,
The production means is capable of executing at least an operation promotion notification,
When the production mode is the first production mode, the production means is capable of at least executing the operation promotion notification,
When the production mode is the second production mode, the production means can execute at least the operation promotion notification,
The operation promotion notification is notification that prompts the player to operate the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix G4)
A gaming table according to appendix G2 or G3,
At least one of the plurality of effects is a third effect,
The production means can execute at least the third production when the third condition is satisfied,
The third effect is at least the same effect as the first effect,
The third condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the operation means is operated by a player.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix G5)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix G4,
The third effect is an effect that is executed when the effect mode is the first effect mode,
The first effect is an effect that is executed when the effect mode is the second effect mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix G6)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices G1 to G5,
The game table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.
[Tenth embodiment]

  Next, a pachinko machine 100 according to an example of the tenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 505 to 508. FIG. 505 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative portion 810, the light guide plate 812, and the decorative portion 814 included in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Thereafter, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed in, for example, an island facility, a surface closer to the player facing the pachinko machine 100 is referred to as “front surface”, and a surface farther from the player than the “front surface” is referred to as “rear surface”. Is written.

  As shown in FIG. 505, a decorative symbol display device 208, a decorative portion 810, a light guide plate 812 (second display means), and a decorative portion 814 are arranged in this order from the rear side to the front side. The decorative portion 814 is disposed on the rear side of the front stage 244. In FIG. 505, the decorative portions 810 and 814 are illustrated as a horizontally long flat plate shape. On the front surfaces of the decorative portions 810 and 814, for example, decorative members, lamps, and the like molded in a predetermined shape with a resin or the like are installed. Further, the decorative portion 810 has an opening 810a having a horizontally long rectangular shape. The decoration unit 810 is arranged so that the opening 810 a overlaps the screen of the decoration symbol display device 208. The area of the opening 810a is smaller than the area of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. For this reason, a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the decoration unit 810. Of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part that is visually recognized through the opening 810a (a part surrounded by a dotted line in the figure) is an area that is visible to the player. Further, the frame area 805 surrounding the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is not visually recognized by the player.

  The light guide plate 812 is made of, for example, acrylic resin. A plurality of LED lamps (not shown) are arranged on the side surface of the light guide plate 812. A lens cut having a predetermined pattern is formed on the rear surface of the light guide plate 812. As a result, the light beam incident on the side surface of the light guide plate 812 from the LED lamp is reflected to the player side by the lens cut formed on the rear surface of the light guide plate 812 and is emitted from the light guide plate 812. Light is emitted from the light guide plate 812 in a predetermined color (for example, red, green, blue) to a predetermined pattern (for example, a pattern 705 on the face of the lord (hereinafter referred to as the face of the lord 705) as shown in FIG. 505). As seen by the player. As a result, a predetermined pattern is displayed on the light guide plate 812. In this example, the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 812 is one type of Tonosama's face 705, but a plurality of patterns may be displayed on the light guide plate 812. Further, the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 812 may be varied depending on the pattern of the LED lamp to be lit. Further, the pattern (light emission pattern) displayed on the light guide plate 812 may be varied depending on the lens cut pattern formed on the light guide plate 812. Further, in this example, when the LED lamp is not lit, the player can visually recognize what is arranged behind the light guide plate 812 such as the decorative portion 810 and the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 812 may be visible to the player even when the LED lamp is not lit, may be easily visible, or may be difficult to visually recognize. , It may be invisible.

  A decorative portion 814 is disposed on the front side of the light guide plate 812. The decorative portion 814 has a horizontally long rectangular opening 814a. The decorative portion 814 is disposed so that the opening 814a and the front surface of the light guide plate 812 overlap. The area of the opening 814a is smaller than the surface area of the light guide plate 812. For this reason, a part of the light guide plate 812 is hidden by the decorative portion 814. A portion of the surface of the light guide plate 812 that is visually recognized through the opening 814a (a portion surrounded by a dotted line in the figure) is a display region that is visible to the player. For this reason, the outer peripheral part 812a (outside the dotted line in the figure) surrounding the display area of the light guide plate 812 is not visible to the player. Further, in this example, the area other than the pattern in the portion of the surface of the light guide plate 812 that is visually recognized through the opening 814a is not limited to light when the LED lamp emits light. Those arranged on the rear side of the light guide plate 812, such as 208, are visible or easily visible to the player.

  The decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative portion 810, the light guide plate 812, and the decorative portion 814 are installed in the rendering device 206. Between the decoration unit 810 and the light guide plate 812, a plurality of effect movable bodies such as the effect movable bodies 224 and 800 may be arranged. In addition, a plurality of effect movable bodies may be arranged between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light guide plate 812. In addition, a transparent plate formed of a transparent resin or the like may be disposed between the light guide plate 812 and the decorative portion 814. One or more effect movable bodies (for example, the effect movable body 806) may be disposed between the light guide plate 812 and the decorative portion 814. In addition, a transparent plate formed of a transparent resin or the like may be disposed on the front side of the effect movable body.

  Next, a display example displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light guide plate 812 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 506 is a schematic view of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative portion 810, the light guide plate 812, and the decorative portion 814 as viewed from the player side.

  As shown in FIG. 506 (a), the face 705 displayed on the light guide plate 812 is visually recognized through the opening 814a of the decorative portion 814. In addition, a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is visually recognized through the opening 810a of the decorative portion 810.

  FIG. 506 (b) shows a state in which an effect is actually executed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 506 (c) is a diagram in which the decorative portions 810 and 814 and the light guide plate 812 are removed from FIG. 506 (b). A region surrounded by a dotted line in FIG. 506 (c) indicates a display region of the decorative symbol display device 208 that can be actually visually recognized by the player through the opening 810a.

  As shown in FIG. 506 (c), “decoration 4-decoration 6-decoration 7” is stopped in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208. Further, fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2 are provided above the right short side (vertical side) of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, below the fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2, hold number display areas 712a and 712b are provided, respectively. In the hold icon display area 710, hold icons a1, a2, and a3 are displayed, respectively. When the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing an effect as shown in FIG. 506 (c), if the Tono-like face 705 is displayed on the light guide plate 812, the player is informed as shown in FIG. 506 (b). Is visible. Since the Tono-like face 705 is displayed on the transparent light guide plate 812 with light emission in a predetermined color, it is displayed so that the rear side is transmitted (the rear side is visible). For this reason, in the image or design displayed on the decorative design display device 208, the visibility of the portion that overlaps the lord's face 705 is relatively low, and the visibility of the portion that does not overlap the lord's face 705 is low. It is relatively high.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 506 (b), the entire fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2 and the reserved number display area 712a and almost the entire reserved number display area 712b (the part where the reserved number is displayed in numbers). Is displayed so as not to overlap with Tonosama's face 705. For this reason, even when the Tono-like face 705 is displayed on the light guide plate 812, the player can reduce the visibility of the fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2 and the reserved number display areas 712a and 712b. In some cases, it is possible to easily recognize whether or not a special figure variable game is executed and the number of special figure holds.

  Positions where the whole or part of the hold number display area 712a (displays the hold number of the special figure 1) and the whole or part of the hold number display area 712b (displays the hold number of the special figure 2) do not overlap with the face 705 May be displayed.

  At least one of the hold icon and the number-of-holds display areas 712 a and 712 b may be displayed at a position where it overlaps with the face 705 of the lord, and the other may be displayed at a position where it does not overlap with the face 705 of the lord. In addition, both the hold icon and the hold number display areas 712a and 712b may be displayed at a position overlapping the Tonosama face 705, or may be arranged at a position where both do not overlap.

  Next, specific effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 507 and 508. FIGS. 507 (a) to 507 (g) show specific effects in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in this order in time series.

  In FIGS. 507 to 508, the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the decorative portions 810 and 814 and the light guide plate 812 are not shown. In addition, when the LED lamp disposed on the side surface of the light guide plate 812 emits light and the noble face 705 is displayed on the light guide plate 812, the noble face 705 is shown on the decorative symbol display device 208. .

  FIG. 507 (a) shows that the decorative pattern “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the center of the rectangular display area of the ornamental symbol display device 208 after the special figure 2 variable game is finished. Is displayed in a stopped state, and it is notified that the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is a special jackpot. Since the special figure 2 variable game is finished and the special figure variable games of both special figure 1 and special figure 2 are not executed, both of the four fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2 are filled with a predetermined color. .

  The gaming state at the time point shown in FIG. 507 (a) is a special figure high probability common figure high probability state (a probability variation state with electric support). For this reason, “probably changing” is displayed at the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that it is in a special figure high probability state (probability changing state).

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment displays only the hold icon indicating the hold of the special figure 2 in the normal figure high probability state (during electric support). For this reason, in the hold icon display area 710, hold icons a11, a12, a13, and a14 indicating the number of holds in FIG. 2 are displayed in this order from the left. The hold icons a11, a12, a13, and a14 correspond to the first to fourth hold orders in this order. That is, the hold icon a11 indicates the first hold (the first hold), the hold icon a12 indicates the second hold, the hold icon a13 indicates the third hold, The hold icon a14 indicates the fourth hold in the hold order. The display mode of the hold icons a11 to a14 is a white circle. In addition, since the number of holds in the special figure 1 at the present time is four, “4” is displayed in the hold number display area 712a, and the number of hold in the special figure 2 is four, so the number in the hold number display area 712b. Is displayed as “4”. Note that the pachinko machine 100 may display a hold icon indicating hold in FIG. 1 in the hold icon display area 710 even during power support.

  FIG. 507 (b) continuing from FIG. 507 (a) shows a state in which it is informed that the special jackpot has been won in the special figure 2 variable game ended in FIG. 507 (a). In the special jackpot (the jackpot of the special figure A), the game state shifts to a probable change state (special chart high probability state) after the big jackpot game. The symbol display areas 208a to 208c disappear from the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol is not stopped. The hold icon display area 710 also disappears, and the hold icon is not displayed. Instead, the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes an effect display area 208d, and a special big win winning notification effect is executed by the character string “probability big hit”.

  FIG. 507 (c) continuing from FIG. 507 (b) shows a state where the big hit game is started. When the big hit game is started, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c disappear from the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbols are not stopped and displayed. Further, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment displays the hold icon in the hold icon display area 710 even during the big hit game.

  In the state shown in FIG. 507 (c), the first round (1R) of 15R big hit game is executed. In the effect display area 208d that extends over the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a background image of the beach is displayed. The upper right of the effect display area 208d is a round number display area 717 for displaying the number of rounds in which the big hit game is being executed. Here, “1R” is displayed and the first round of the big hit game is being executed. It is reported that there is. The top left of the effect display area 208d is a big hit type display area 718 for displaying the big hit type. Here, “decoration 7” is displayed to notify that the big hit is a 15R special big hit.

  FIG. 507 (d) continuing from FIG. 507 (c) shows a state where the big hit game has entered the sixth round (6R). In the round number display area 717, “6R” is displayed to notify that the sixth round of the big hit game is being executed.

  FIG. 507 (e) following FIG. 507 (d) shows a state in which the Tono-like face 705 (second display) not displayed in FIGS. 507 (a) to 507 (d) is displayed on the light guide plate 812. Is shown. By displaying the Tono-sama's face 705 on the light guide plate 812, the visibility of the display by the decorative symbol display device 208 (for example, part of the background image, hold icon, round number display, jackpot type display) is reduced. Since the time shown in FIG. 507 (e) is the sixth round in the big hit game, “6R” is displayed in the round number display area 717.

  In the present embodiment, the Tono-like face 705 displayed on the light guide plate 812 is determined as a result of the special figure prefetching processing that the prefetching result for the special figure variable game that is currently held has a big hit (so-called Only when it is determined that there is a reserved villa. In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 prefetches the increased start information (newly acquired start information) in each of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and pre-stops the stop symbol before the success / failure determination process. The pre-determination result (special drawing prefetch result) is stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. The special figure prefetching process is executed in the winning acceptance process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. For example, in the special chart prefetching process executed up to the time point shown in FIG. 507 (a), if there is a big hit in the hold, the Tono-sama's face 705 is displayed to indicate that there is a reserved game in the big hit game. To inform. In the present embodiment, the Tono-sama's face 705 is used as a premier effect (effect of confirming a big hit) for notifying that there is a big hit in the hold.

  In FIG. 507 (f) continuing from FIG. 507 (e), the winning ball based on the winning of the game ball to the variable winning port 234 during the big hit game is paid out to the lower plate 128, the lower plate 128 becomes full, It shows the state where the bottom pan full tank error has occurred. When a lower pan full tank error occurs, a lower pan full tank error display (ball removal notification) 704 (first display) is displayed to the left of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. The lower plate full tank error display 704 includes a rectangular frame and a character string “please remove the sphere” displayed in the frame. The lower pan full tank error display 704 is displayed by the control of the first sub control unit 400 based on the reception of a command including information on the lower pan full tank error from the main control unit 300. The lower plate full tank error display 704 corresponds to an operation request notification for requesting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132. The lower pan full tank error display 704 has a relatively low visibility when the Tono-like face 705 is displayed on the light guide plate 812 disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The lower plate full tank error display 704 is displayed until the game ball (prize ball) stored in the lower plate 128 is discharged to, for example, a dollar box by operating the ball discharge lever 132 and the lower plate full tank error is canceled. Continue to be.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 507 (f), the display color of the hold icon a13 is changed from white (indicated by a right-upward hatching in the figure). The pachinko machine 100 changes the display color of the hold icon a <b> 13 to notify that the prefetching result related to the special figure 2 variable game with the hold order of 3 is a big hit. The hold icon a13 whose display color has changed during the big hit game is used as a premier effect (a big hit determination effect) for notifying that there is a big hit in the hold. Since the time point shown in FIG. 507 (f) is the sixth round in the big hit game, “6R” is displayed in the round number display area 717.

  FIG. 507 (g) following FIG. 507 (f) shows a state in which the display color of the hold icon a13 is further changed from the time shown in FIG. 507 (f) (indicated by cross-hatching in the figure). As described above, in the premier effect executed using the hold icon during the big hit game, the display color of the hold icon used for the premier effect is changed as needed. The change in the display color of the hold icon may be, for example, continuously changing from blue to green or red, or may be changed so that the hold icon is lit. There may be. Since the time shown in FIG. 507 (g) is the sixth round in the big hit game, “6R” is displayed in the round number display area 717.

  FIG. 508 shows a specific performance of the pachinko machine 100 according to the example of the present embodiment. FIGS. 508 (a) to (c) are effects executed subsequent to FIG. 507 (g), and are arranged in time series in this order.

  FIG. 508 (a) shows a state where the change in the display color of the hold icon a13 has been completed. The hold icon a13 is then displayed in the color when the display color change is completed until the corresponding hold is digested and erased. Note that the display mode of the hold icon during a special game (for example, during a big hit game) is different from the display mode of the hold icon during a normal game (for example, during probability change, short time, special figure low-precision normal figure low-probability state, etc.). You may make it let. Since the time shown in FIG. 507 (g) is the sixth round in the big hit game, “6R” is displayed in the round number display area 717.

  FIG. 508 (b) following FIG. 508 (a) shows a state in which the LED lamp arranged on the side surface of the light guide plate 812 is turned off and the Tono-like face 705 displayed on the light guide plate 812 is erased. Yes. In this example, the Tonosama's face 705 is erased after the change in the display color of the hold icon used for the premier effect is completed. It should be noted that the erasure timing of Tonosama's face 705 may be earlier than the change completion timing of the hold icon, may be at the same time, or may be later. In addition, since the Tono-sama's face 705 is deleted, the visibility of the lower pan full tank error display 704, a part of the background image, the hold icon, the round number display, and the big hit type display is improved. Note that the Tonosama face 705 may be displayed across a plurality of rounds.

  Further, the character string “please remove the ball” included in the lower tray full tank error display 704 is displayed in black, for example. The sea portion of the background image displayed on the back of the character string is displayed in dark blue, for example. Since the black character string “please remove the sphere” is displayed so as to overlap the dark blue color, it is difficult to see the character string that is a part of the lower pan full error display 704. Thus, depending on the color of the background image, it may be difficult to see part of the lower pan full error display 704.

  FIG. 508 (c) continuing from FIG. 508 (b) shows a state in which the sixth round of the big hit game has been completed and has entered the interval between rounds. The interval between rounds means a period from the closing of the variable winning opening 234 in one round to the opening of the variable winning opening 234 in the next round of the round in the big hit game. In the interval between rounds, the round number display area 717 is erased and the round number is not displayed. In addition, the lower pan full tank error display 704 continues to be displayed even during the interval between rounds. In addition, Tonosama's face 705 may be continuously displayed in the interval between rounds, may not be displayed in the interval between rounds, and may be displayed again after moving to the next round. In addition, the round number display (for example, 6R) of the round which ended during the interval between rounds may be continuously displayed, and the round number display of the round which starts at the same time as or after the variable winning opening 234 is opened ( For example, 7R) may be displayed. In addition, a round number display (for example, 7R) to be started next may be displayed at the same time as or after closing the variable prize opening 234 (for example, the closing of the variable prize opening 234 in the sixth round).

  FIG. 508 (d) continuing from FIG. 508 (c) shows a state in which the seventh round of jackpot game is started. Since the interval between rounds is over and the seventh round is started, a round number display area 717 is provided and “7R” is displayed.

  FIG. 508 (e) continuing from FIG. 508 (d) shows a state in which the lower pan full tank error is released. For example, the player operates the ball discharge lever 132 to discharge the prize ball (game ball) stored in the lower plate 128 to the dollar box, so that the lower plate full tank error is canceled. As a result, the lower pan full error display 704 is erased.

  FIG. 508 (f) continuing from FIG. 508 (e) shows a state immediately before the 15th round, which is the final round of the jackpot game, is finished. “15R” is displayed in the number-of-rounds display area 717 to notify that the 15th round of the big hit game is being executed.

  FIG. 508 (g) continuing from FIG. 508 (f) shows a state where the big hit game is finished. As a result of determining whether or not the latest special figure 2 variable game is successful is a special big hit (special figure A big hit), the gaming state becomes a special figure high probability state (probability changing state) after the big hit game is over. Also, the gaming state at the end of the last special figure 2 variable game is also a special figure high probability state. For this reason, the effect display area 208d expanded over the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “Continue change probability!” To notify that the gaming state shifts to the special figure high probability state. At the end of the big hit game, the hold icon display area 710 disappears and the hold icon is not displayed. Note that the hold icon may be continuously displayed even when the big hit game ends.

  It should be noted that the lower plate full tank error display 704 may be hidden during the round interval. In addition, when a lower pan full tank error occurs, an error notification by voice may be performed together with the lower pan full tank error display 704.

  Further, the Tonosama face 705 may be displayed so as to be repeatedly turned on and off (by repeatedly turning on and off a plurality of LED lamps provided on the side surfaces of the light guide plate 812). Also, Tonosama's face 705 may be displayed so as to blink (flashing a plurality of LED lamps). In addition, Tonosama's face 705 may continue to be displayed with a predetermined luminance (a plurality of LED lamps continue to be lit with a predetermined luminance).

  In addition, Tonosama's face 705 may be displayed in a single color, may be displayed so that the color continuously changes over time, or may be displayed in gradation.

Further, when a serious error (for example, an error that needs to be canceled by a game shop clerk) occurs, the face 705 of Tonosama may be deleted.
Even if a serious error occurs, the face 705 of Tonosama may be continuously displayed.

  When a serious error occurs, the round number display on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be changed to another display.

  Further, when a serious error occurs, all the displays including the round number display may be hidden, and only a display for notifying that a serious error has occurred may be displayed. Further, even when a serious error occurs, the round number display may be continued.

  In addition, if a power interruption / recovery occurs during a game (during a big hit or during a symbol change) (for example, when an electrical system abnormality such as a power supply voltage drop due to a lightning strike occurs, and then the power is restored), the specified timing The effect display may be hidden until the next round starts during the big hit round, and the next fluctuation starts when the symbols are changing, and a power return display such as “power is being restored” may be displayed. In addition, a message such as “Please launch a ball” may be displayed. In this case, if an error has occurred, it may be displayed that an error has occurred. Further, only serious errors may be displayed. In addition, error display is not performed, and another display means (for example, LED lamp, sub display device 808, etc.) or sound output means (for example, speaker 120) may be notified that an error has occurred. Good.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a decorative symbol display device 208 as a first display means, and a light guide plate 812 as a second display means.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is capable of displaying at least a lower pan full tank error display (ball removal notification) 704 as a first display.

  The sub display device 808 can display at least the Tonosama face 705 as the second display.

  At least a part of the lower plate full tank error display (ball removal notification) 704 has at least low visibility when the light guide plate 812 is in the first state.

  The first state is a state where at least the Tono-like face 705 is displayed by the light guide plate 812.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the visibility of the lower pan full tank error display 704 displayed on the decorative design display device 208 may be lowered, so that the decorative design display in which an invisible error display is made. In some cases, the player can be focused on the device 208 and focused on the game. Further, the visibility of the lower plate full tank error display 704 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be lowered, so that the player's line of sight is more easily visible than the lower plate full tank error display 703. There are cases where it can be directed.

  Note that in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays, as a first display, a later-described alerting notification effect 722, a right-handed notification effect 724, an attention alert notification effect 750, and an attention alert notification effect. 772 and the first display 790 may be displayed. Further, the sub display device 808 displays, as second displays, pre-read notice notification effects 730 and 740 described later, an electric long long opening effect, an electric long long false effect 760, a user level notification effect 775, and a second display 792. It may be displayable.

  In addition, the lower plate full tank error display 704 can be replaced with an operation request display (button image, effective period image meter, touch operation animation, etc.).

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 505 to 508 again.
(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment
First display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
Second display means (for example, the sub display device 808 and the light guide plate 812);
A game machine equipped with

  The first display means includes a first display (for example, lower pan full error display (ball removal notification) 703, 704, a warning notification effect 722, a right-hand notification notification 724, a warning notification effect 750, a warning notification. Production 772, first display 790) can be displayed at least,

  The second display means is a second display (for example, production display, Tono-sama c1, villager c5, Tono-sama's face 705, pre-reading notice notification effects 730, 740, electric-chu-long opening effect, electric-chu-long opening false effect 760. , The user level notification effect 775, the second display 792) can be displayed at least,

  At least a part of the first display has at least low visibility when the second display means is in the first state,

The first state is a state where at least the second display is displayed on the second display means.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, since the visibility of the first display displayed on the first display means may be low, the player tries to recognize the notification content by the first display. It may be possible to focus on the means and concentrate the player on the game. Further, since the visibility of the first display displayed on the first display means may be lowered, the player's line of sight can be directed to the second display that is easier to see than the first display. There are cases where it is possible.

  The first display means may be capable of displaying one or a plurality of displays different from the first display.

The second display means may be capable of displaying one or a plurality of displays different from the second display.
The second display means may be capable of displaying only the second display.

  All or part of the first display may be at least low in visibility when the second display means is in the first state.

  The first state may be a state in which only the second display is displayed by the second display unit.

  The first state may be a state in which one or a plurality of displays including the second display are displayed by the second display unit.

  At least a part of the first display may have at least low visibility when the second display means is in the first state.

  At least a part of the first display may be in a state where visibility is at least low when the second display means is in the first state.

The first state may be a state where at least the second display is displayed by the second display means.
(2) The pachinko machine 100,

  The first display is a display relating to the game (for example, lower tray full tank error display (ball removal notification) 703, 704),

The second display is an effect display (for example, an effect display, Tonosama c1, Villager c5, Tonosama's face 705).
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, since the display related to the game displayed on the first display means becomes difficult to see due to the effect display displayed on the second display means, the effect display displayed on the second display means May be noticed by the player.
(3) The pachinko machine 100,

  At least a part of the first display has at least higher visibility than the first state when the second display means is in the second state,

The second state is a state in which the second display is not displayed at least on the second display means.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, since the visibility of the first display is higher in the second state than in the first state, the first display is displayed in the first state. It may be possible to make it easier for the player to guess that the player is present.

  Part or all of the first display may be higher in visibility than the first state when the second display means is in the second state.

  Part or all of the first display may be higher in visibility than one or more states including the first state when the second display means is in the second state. .

  Part or all of the first display is more visible than the first state when the second display means is in the second state, and more than one or more states different from the first state. Also, the visibility may be low.

  The second state may be a state where one or more displays including the second display are not displayed on the second display means.

The second state may be a state in which only the second display is not displayed on the second display means.
(4) The pachinko machine 100,

  The first region is provided at least in a position overlapping at least with the second region in the first state,

  The first area is at least a part of the first display means (for example, an area for displaying a game display, an image display area, a frame area 805),

The second area is at least a part of the second display means (for example, a display area for displaying an effect display, an image display area, a frame portion 807, and an outer peripheral portion 812a).
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, the visibility of the first display displayed on the first display unit may be lowered, so that the player can focus on the first display unit and concentrate on the game. There are cases where it is possible. Further, since the visibility of the first display displayed on the first display means may be lowered, the player's line of sight can be directed to the second display that is easier to see than the first display. There are cases where it is possible.

  The first area may be only a partial area or the entire area of the first display means.

  The second area may be only a part or all of the second display means.

  The first region may be provided at a position overlapping only with the second region in the first state.

In the first state, the first region may be one that overlaps with one or more regions including the second region.
(5) The pachinko machine 100,

The first display is an error display (for example, lower pan full error display 703, 704).
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, in the first state, by reducing the visibility of the error display, an effort can be made to make the player recognize the error display so that the player can watch the error display carefully. There are cases where it is possible. Moreover, it may be possible to prevent the second display (effect display) from being missed due to the error display being displayed.
(6) The pachinko machine 100,

  The second display means is provided at least on the front side of the first display means,

  The second display is displayed at least in front of the first display.

According to this configuration, in the first state, the second display may be displayed on the front side of the first display, so that the player can easily focus the second display on the player. . In the first state, the first display may be displayed on the rear side of the second display so that the player can carefully watch the first display.
The second display means may be provided in front of the first display means.

  The second display means includes one or a plurality of parts including the first display means (for example, display means, rendering means, movable means, winning means (variable winning means, starting winning means, etc.), front frame door, transparent plate It may be provided in front of the member.

The second display means is provided in front of the first display means and is different from the first display means (for example, display means different from the first and second display means, rendering means, movable means, winning a prize) It may be provided behind the means (variable winning means, starting winning means, etc.), front frame door, transparent plate member, etc.
The second display may be displayed in front of the first display.

  The second display may be displayed on the front side of the first display, and may be displayed on the rear side of one or more displays different from the first and second displays.

The second display may be displayed in front of one or more displays including the first display.
(7) The pachinko machine 100,

  The first display means is provided with at least a first display area (for example, an image display area, an area for displaying a display relating to a game),

The second display means is provided with at least a second display area (for example, an image display area, a display area for displaying an effect display).
The first display area can display at least the first display,
The second display area can display at least the second display,

The third display area is provided at least in a position overlapping the fourth display area in the first state,
The third display area is at least a part of the first display area,
The fourth display area is at least a part of the second display area.
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, in the first state, the third display area and the fourth display area are provided at the overlapping position, so that the player can display the first display displayed in the first display area. Can be made to look carefully. In some cases, the player can be focused on the second display displayed in the second display area.
The first display means may be provided with only the first display area.

The first display means may be provided with one or a plurality of display areas including the first display area.
The second display means may be provided with only the second display area.

  The second display means may be provided with one or a plurality of display areas including the second display area.

The first display area may be capable of displaying one or more displays including the first display.
The first display area may be capable of displaying only the first display.

The second display area may be capable of displaying one or more displays including the second display.
The second display area may be capable of displaying only the second display.
The third display area may be a part or all of the first display area.
The fourth display area may be a part or all of the second display area.

A part or all of the third display area may be provided at least at a position overlapping with part or all of the fourth display area in the first state.
(8) The pachinko machine 100,

The first display is information more important to the player than the second display (for example, information requesting operation of a store clerk or player of a game store (ball removal notification, error notification, chance button press) Request notification etc.)
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, a part of the display (first display) including information having high importance for the player has a lower visibility due to a part of the effect display (second display). In some cases, the player's line of sight can be easily directed to the display means.

  The first display may be a display including only information that is more important to the player than the second display.

  The first display may be a display including only a plurality of pieces of information that are more important to the player than the second display.

  The first display includes one or more pieces of information that are more important to the player than the second display and one or more pieces of information that are less important than the second display (for example, a character image or background) ) May be included.

The first display includes one or more information items that are more important to the player than the second display and one or more information items that are less important than one or more displays different from the second display (e.g., Display including a character image and background).
(9) The pachinko machine 100,

  An operation means (for example, a ball discharge lever 132) provided at least at a position where the player can operate;

The first display includes at least a notification that prompts the player to operate the operation means.
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, there is a case where it is possible to concentrate and entertain the player on the effect display by reducing the visibility of at least a part of the notification prompting the operation of the operation means by the effect display.
The operation means may be provided only at a position where the player can operate.

  The first display may include only a notification that prompts the player to operate the operation means.

  The first display may include one or a plurality of notifications including a notification prompting the player to operate the operation means.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is provided with production means (for example, production movable body 806). The production means is at least movable (for example, moved, rotated, vibrated). The production means may be one that performs one or more of movement, rotation, and vibration, or may be capable of performing all of movement, rotation, and vibration. Further, the effect means may be provided with second display means (for example, sub display device 808, light guide plate 812 (PM plate)).

  The first display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) does not move. The first display means is fixed.

  At least a part of the display area of the second display means is at least transmissive. A transmissive liquid crystal display device may be used as the second display means. The transmissive liquid crystal display device can switch between transmission and non-transmission of the display area. In a state where the display area of the transmissive liquid crystal display device is transmitting, the player can visually recognize the back surface (rear side) of the display area.

At least a part of the second display means is at least transparent. For the second display means, a transparent plate or a glass plate formed of a transparent resin (for example, acrylic) may be used. A lens cut of a predetermined pattern is formed on the plate surface of the transparent plate or the glass plate, and when the LED lamp emits light arranged in the vicinity, the transparent plate or the glass plate has a predetermined pattern based on the lens cut pattern. Lights on the pattern.
Note that the transmittance of at least a part of the second display means may not be 0%.
The entire second display means may be transparent.
Note that the transmittance of at least part of the second display means may be 100%.

  Note that at least a part of the first display unit may be at least visible through at least a part of the second display unit.

  It should be noted that at least a part of the game area may be at least visible through at least a part of the second display means.

  Note that the transmittance of at least part of the second display means is a first value, and the first value may be greater than 0% and less than 100%.

  Note that the transmittance of at least a part or the whole of the second display means may be changed stepwise. This gradual change means that the transmittance changes in order of the first value, the second value, and the third value, and the first value, the second value, and the third value are respectively It may be a different value.

  Note that the transmittance of at least a part or the whole of the second display means may be changed only from one of the two values of the highest value and the lowest value to the other.

  Note that the transmittance may be changed from the high state to the low state after the second display means is changed from the low state to the high state. Here, the transmittance changed from the high state to the low state may be the same transmittance as the low state before the change of the transmittance, or may be a different transmittance.

  The second display means may be a movable (movable, rotatable, vibrable) liquid crystal display device.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may include third display means, and at least one of the second display means and the third display means may be transmissive.

  Note that both the second display means and the third display means may be at least transmissive.

Only one of the second display means and the third display means may be at least transmissive.
The third display unit may be the same as the second display unit.

Note that the third display means may be installed in a rendering means that is movable (movable, rotatable, vibrated).
The third display unit may execute an effect that can be executed by the second display unit.

  The technical matter applied to the second display means can also be applied to the third display means.

  Note that the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be provided with further display means (for example, display means constituted by a liquid crystal display device or a light guide plate).

  Note that the transmittance of part or all of the second display may not be 100%.

  Note that the transmittance of a part or all of the second display may not be 0% (the second display may be transmitted).

Note that the transmittance of part or all of the second display may be 0%. (The second display may not be transparent).
Note that the entire second display may be transparent.
Only part of the second display may have a transmittance of 100%.

  Note that part or all of the first display may be visible through a part of the second display.

  A part of one or a plurality of displays including the first display may be visible through a part of the second display.

  Note that one or a plurality of displays including the first display may be visible through part of the second display.

  A part of one or more displays other than the first display may be visible through a part of the second display.

  Note that one or more displays other than the first display may be visible through a part of the second display.

  Note that the transmittance of a part or all of the second display is a first value, and the first value may be greater than 0% and less than 100%.

  Note that the transmittance of a part or the whole of the second display may change stepwise. This gradual change means that the transmittance changes in order of the first value, the second value, and the third value, and the first value, the second value, and the third value are respectively It may be a different value.

  Note that the transmittance of a part or the whole of the second display may change only from one of the two values of the highest value and the lowest value to the other.

  Note that the transmittance may be changed from the high state to the low state after the second display has the low transmittance from the low state to the high state. Here, the transmittance changed from the high state to the low state may be the same transmittance as the low state before the change of the transmittance, or may be a different transmittance.

  Thereby, the second display can be easily seen, and it may be difficult for the player to miss the second display.

  Note that the transmittance of part or all of the first display may not be 100%.

  Note that the transmittance of part or all of the first display may not be 0% (the second display may be transparent).

Note that part or all of the transmittance of the first display may be 0%. (The second display may not be transparent).
Only part of the first display may have a transmittance of 100%.

  Note that part or all of the second display may be visible through a part of the first display.

  A part of one or a plurality of displays other than the second display may be visible through a part of the first display.

  Note that one or a plurality of displays other than the second display may be visible through a part of the first display.

  Note that the transmittance of part or all of the first display is the first value, and the first value may be greater than 0% and less than 100%.

  Note that the transmittance of a part or the whole of the first display may change stepwise. This gradual change means that the transmittance changes in order of the first value, the second value, and the third value, and the first value, the second value, and the third value are respectively It may be a different value.

  Note that the transmittance of a part or the whole of the first display may change only from one of the two values of the highest value and the lowest value to the other.

  Note that the transmittance may be changed from the high state to the low state after changing from the low state of the first display to the high state. Here, the transmittance changed from the high state to the low state may be the same transmittance as the low state before the change of the transmittance, or may be a different transmittance.

  The phrase “at least a part of the first display has at least low visibility” may indicate that at least a part of the first display is at least difficult to see from the player.

  The phrase “at least a part of the first display has at least low visibility” may indicate that at least a part of the first display is at least invisible from the player.

  The first area may be an area including at least a part of the first display area.

  The second area may be an area including at least a part of the second display area.

  The first area may be an area including at least a part of the second display area.

  The second area may be an area including at least a part of the first display area.

  The first area may not include the first display area. Here, the first region corresponds to a part of a so-called center accessory.

  The second area may not include the second display area. Here, the second region corresponds to a decorative portion of the sub display device 808 and the like.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be provided with error notification means capable of at least reporting an error.

  The error notification means includes a decorative lamp (notification by light emission), a speaker (notification by sound), a light guide plate (transparent plate) (characters and patterns appear by light emission), a liquid crystal (display by image and characters), and the like.

There is a first error in which an error is displayed on a display means such as a first display means or a second display means.
There is a second error that does not display an error on the display means.
The error display is the first error.

  The first error may be an error that is not easily noticed by the player if no error is displayed (no error notification is given). For example, the first error is a door opening error, a lower pan full error, or the like.

  The first error may be an error for warning the player of fraud. The pachinko machine 100 performs error notification to warn the player of fraud when a predetermined sensor detects an external radio wave, magnetism, vibration, or the like.

  The first error may be an error for notifying an amusement shop clerk of an abnormality of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 performs an error notification for notifying the abnormality of the pachinko machine 100 when a predetermined sensor detects external radio waves, magnetism, vibration, and the like.

  Note that the second error may be an error that is less likely to be resolved immediately. This second error is, for example, a door opening error or a lower pan full error.

  The second error is an error that is easily noticed by a player without displaying an error (for example, a game ball cannot be fired, an image is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, a prize ball is not paid out, or an effect movable body 224. Etc.) may be an error).

  Errors that may occur in the pachinko machine 100 include, for example, an error related to an abnormality in the number of game balls to be paid out, a lower pan full tank error (ball removal notification) that is notified when the lower pan is full, an open condition for an attacker or electric chew An abnormal winning error that is notified when a winning of a game ball to an attacker or electric chew is detected when is not established. When fraud is detected by a sensor (for example, magnetism or radio wave), a fraud error is reported as a fraudulent act (radio wave sensor error, magnetic sensor error, etc.), or vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 100 from the outside. Vibration detection error (vibration detection error may be left on the display means such as the decorative symbol display device 208 only when the variable winning opening 234 can be opened, such as during a big hit game, (A game state may be left on the display means), a gaming machine failure error for notifying a failure of the pachinko machine 100, a door opening error, a payout means error relating to an abnormality of the payout means, an error relating to a poor connection of the board, and a production movable body 224 There are errors related to abnormal stop positions.

  Any of the above errors may be the first error. Any of the above errors may be a second error.

  The above error may be left on the display means such as the decorative symbol display device 208 only when the variable winning opening 234 can be opened, such as during a big hit game, or left on the display means in any game state. May be.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a storage tray (for example, a lower tray 128) that can store at least a game ball.

  When operated, the operation means is capable of discharging at least the game balls stored in the storage tray.

  The first display includes at least a notification that prompts the player to discharge the game ball from the storage tray.

  According to this configuration, at least a part of the notification that prompts the player to discharge the game ball from the storage tray is hidden by the effect display, thereby reducing the visibility of the notification, thereby concentrating the player on the effect display. You may be able to entertain.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes first operating means (for example, a ball discharge lever 132).

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes second operation means (for example, a chance button 136).

The operation means may be at least one of the first operation means and the second operation means.
Note that the operation means may be a chance button.

  Note that the operation means may be a return button (for example, the return operation button 142).

  The operation means may be a lending button (for example, a ball lending operation button 140).

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may include a plurality of movable display devices that are movable (for example, movable, rotatable, and capable of vibrating). For example, a liquid crystal display device is used as the movable display device.

  The visibility of a part of the first display may be lowered when one of the plurality of movable display devices moves.

  When one of the plurality of movable display devices moves, the overall visibility of the first display may be lowered.

  The visibility of a part or the whole of the first display may be lowered by moving the plurality of movable display devices.

By moving only one of the plurality of movable display devices, the visibility of a part or the whole of the first display may be lowered.
One of the plurality of effect movable bodies may be a movable display device.

  At least a part of the display area of the movable display device is at least transmissive. A transmissive liquid crystal display device may be used as the movable display device. The transmissive liquid crystal display device can switch between transmission and non-transmission of the display area. In a state where the display area of the transmissive liquid crystal display device is transmitting, the player can visually recognize the back surface (rear side) of the display area.

Further, at least a part of the movable display device is at least transparent. For the movable display device, a transparent plate or a glass plate formed of a transparent resin (for example, acrylic) may be used. A lens cut of a predetermined pattern is formed on the plate surface of the transparent plate or the glass plate, and when the LED lamp emits light arranged in the vicinity, the transparent plate or the glass plate has a predetermined pattern based on the lens cut pattern. Lights on the pattern.
Note that the transmittance of at least a part of the movable display device may not be 0%.
Note that the entire movable display device may be transparent.
Note that the transmittance of at least a part of the movable display device may be 100%.

  Note that at least a part of the first display means may be at least visible through at least a part of the movable display device.

  Note that at least a part of the game area may be at least visible through at least a part of the movable display device.

  Note that the transmittance of at least a part of the movable display device is a first value, and the first value may be greater than 0% and less than 100%.

  Note that the transmittance of at least a part or the whole of the movable display device may be changed in a stepwise manner. This stepwise change means that the transmittance is a first value, a second value, and a third value. The first value, the second value, and the third value may be different from each other.

  Note that the transmittance of at least a part or the whole of the movable display device may change only from one of the two values of the highest value and the lowest value to the other.

  Note that the transmittance of the movable display device may be changed from a low state to a high state, and then the transmittance may be changed from the high state to the low state. Here, the transmittance changed from the high state to the low state may be the same transmittance as the low state before the change of the transmittance, or may be a different transmittance.

  When the first display and the second display are respectively displayed, the visibility of the first display may be relatively high and the visibility of the second display may be relatively low. .

  The display related to the game includes, for example, error display, operation request notification, alert display, presentation display, notice display, user mode display (menu display, mission display, volume / brightness adjustment display), demonstration display, power-on display (power supply display) Or during power recovery).

  An operation means (launch strength changing operation means) capable of changing at least the launch intensity of the game ball during the 134 operation of the ball launch handle by the player may be provided. The launch intensity of the game ball may be changed so as to increase only when the launch intensity changing operation means is operated. The launch intensity of the game ball may be changed to become stronger based on the operation of the launch intensity changing operation unit once. In this case, when the firing strength changing operation means is further operated once, the launching strength of the game ball may be restored.

  As an example of the first display, a display capable of notifying that the firing intensity changing operation means is operated, a display prompting the operation of the firing intensity changing operation means, and prompting the release of the operation of the firing intensity changing operation means (for example, pressing Display that prompts you to release your hand from the launch intensity changing operation means, and a display that reminds you of the operation of the launch intensity changing operation means (for example, an image that reminds you of the launch intensity changing operation means in the roulette effect of the electric tulong opening effect (for example, In the case of playing a big hit game by right-handed, the notice display of the big hit decision of the special figure variable game being executed is stopped).

  The display relating to the firing strength changing operation means may have different display modes according to a plurality of gaming states (for example, during electric support and during non-electric support). In this case, for example, at least a part of the display relating to the firing intensity changing operation means in the display mode of one gaming state (during electric support) may be hidden by the second display, and the other gaming state (non-electrical state) The display relating to the firing intensity changing operation means in the display mode of “supporting” may not be hidden by the second display. Further, for example, at least a part of the display regarding the firing intensity changing operation means in the display mode of one game state (during electric support) may not be hidden by the second display, and the other game state (non-display) The display relating to the firing intensity changing operation means in the display mode of “electric support” may be hidden by the second display.

  The display related to the firing intensity changing operation means may be a display mode different from a right-handed notification (for example, a right-handed notification effect 724 described later), may be a display mode included in the right-handed notification, The display mode may be the same as that for the hit notification.

In addition, the display regarding a right-handed alert | report and a firing intensity change operation means may partially overlap the displayed period. For example, the period of notification that “Please return the handle to the left” at the end of the electric support is the period from the end of the electric support to the end of the 4th special figure variation game. For example, the period in which “Please let go” is informed from the end of the electric support to the end of the first special figure variation game.
[Eleventh embodiment]

  Next, a game machine according to an eleventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. An example in which the visibility of display on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes will be described with reference to FIG. First, an example in which the visibility of the first display 790 and the second display 792 changes will be described with reference to FIGS. 509 (a) to 509 (f).

  As shown on the left side of FIG. 509 (a), the first display 790 and the second display 792 are displayed at a predetermined interval. In this state, for example, when the chance button 136 is pressed, a second display 792 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the first display 790, as shown on the right side of FIG. 509 (a). Thus, by displaying the second display 792 on the front surface of the first display 790, the visibility of the first display 790 and the second display 792 is changed, and the first display 790 is changed to the second display 792. It may be less visible than the display 792 and the second display 792 may be easier to see than the first display 790. In addition, when the display is switched from the state shown on the left side of FIG. 509 (a) to the state shown on the right side, the display may be switched step by step. For example, the first display 790 may move toward the second display 792 at the start of display switching. Accordingly, when the first display 790 is moving without overlapping the second display 792, the first display 790 is stopped while the first display 790 is stopped. It may be easier to see than the second display 792.

  Further, the display of the first display 790 and the second display 792 may be switched from the state shown on the right side of FIG. 509 (a) to the state shown on the left side. Thereby, the visibility of the first display 790 and the second display 792 can be changed. Further, when the display is switched from the state shown on the right side of FIG. 509 (a) to the state shown on the left side, the display may be switched step by step. For example, the first display 790 may gradually move away from the second display 792 at the start of display switching. Accordingly, when the first display 790 is moved so as to overlap the second display 792, the first display 790 that is moving is less visible than the second display 792 that is stopped. When the display 790 is moving without overlapping the second display 792, the moving first display 790 may be easier to see than the stopped second display 792.

  Further, as shown on the left side of FIG. 509 (b), the first display 790 is displayed on the front surface of the second display 792, and the first display 790 and the second display 792 are displayed in an overlapping manner. In this case, for example, based on the pressing of the chance button 136, the display color of the second display 792 may be changed to be darker as shown on the right side of FIG. 509 (b). Thereby, when the display color of the second display 792 is changing, the second display 792 whose display color is changing is easier to see than the first display 790 where nothing is changing, After the change of the display color is completed, the second display 792 displayed on the back side of the first display 790 may be less visible than the first display 790.

  Further, the display of the first display 790 and the second display 792 may be switched from the state shown on the right side of FIG. 509 (b) to the state shown on the left side. Thus, when the display color of the second display 792 is changed so as to be thin while the first display 790 and the second display 792 are overlapped with each other, the second display 792 is superimposed on the front surface. In some cases, the first display 790 can be made easier to see and the second display 792 can be made harder to see.

  Further, as shown on the left side of FIG. 509 (c), the first display 790 and the second display 792 are displayed with a predetermined interval D1. In this state, for example, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the interval between the first display 790 and the second display 792 becomes D2 (D1> D2) as shown on the right side of FIG. 509 (c). Become. Thereby, the visibility of the first display 790 and the second display 792 may be changed to make it difficult to distinguish the first display 790 and the second display 792.

  Further, the display of the first display 790 and the second display 792 may be switched from the state shown on the right side of FIG. 509 (c) to the state shown on the left side. Thereby, the visibility of the first display 790 and the second display 792 may be changed to make it easy to distinguish the first display 790 and the second display 792.

  Also, when switching from the state shown on the left in FIG. 509 to the state shown on the right, or from the state shown on the right to the state shown on the left, the attention is paid to the moving display. Of the first display 790 and the second display 792, the display that is moved may be easier to see than the display that is not moved.

  Further, as shown on the left side of FIG. 509 (d), the first display 790 is displayed in front of the second display 792, and the first display 790 and the second display 792 are overlapped and displayed. For example, when the chance button 136 is pressed, as shown on the right side of FIG. 509 (d), the front-rear relationship between the first display 790 and the second display 792 is reversed. The second display 792 may be displayed in front of the first display 790. In this way, the second display 792 displayed on the back surface of the first display 790 is displayed on the front surface of the first display 790 so that the second display 792 is easier to see than the first display 790. The first display 790 may be less visible than the second display 792.

  Further, the display of the first display 790 and the second display 792 may be switched from the state shown on the right side of FIG. 509 (d) to the state shown on the left side. By displaying the first display 790 displayed on the back surface of the second display 792 on the front surface of the second display 792, the first display 790 is made easier to see than the second display 792, and the second display 792 is displayed. The display 792 may be less visible than the first display 790.

  Further, as shown on the left side of FIG. 509 (e), the first display 790 is displayed in front of the second display 792, and the first display 790 and the second display 792 are overlapped. When the first display 790 is displayed brighter than the second display 792, the first display 790 is displayed on the right side of FIG. 509 (e) based on, for example, pressing the chance button 136. The display color of the second display 792 may be changed. In this case, the first display 790 is displayed brighter than the second display 792 even after the display color is changed, so that the state in which the first display 790 is easier to see than the second display 792 can be maintained. There is a case.

  Further, the display of the first display 790 and the second display 792 may be switched from the state shown on the right side of FIG. 509 (e) to the state shown on the left side. As described above, the first display 790 is displayed brighter than the second display 792 even after the display color is changed to make both the first display 790 and the second display 792 bright. In some cases, it is possible to maintain a state that is easier to see than the second display 792.

  The first display 790 and the second display 792 include a decorative design, a hold icon, a variation icon, a presentation display such as a character image or a background image, an error display, an operation request notification display, a tutorial display, and the like. The first display 790 and the second display 792 may be a combination of different types of display (for example, error display and decorative symbol display), or the same type of display (for example, three decorative symbols). Or two of the hold icons). In addition, the visibility of the first display 790 and the second display 792 may be changed to change the visibility of at least a part or only a part of the first display 790 and the second display 792. . Thereby, one of the first display 790 and the second display 792 may be less visible (easy to see) than the other.

  As shown on the left side of FIG. 509 (f), when the background is white, the first display 790 displayed in light ink is less visible than the second display 792 displayed in dark gray. It has become. As described above, when the background is white, the first display 790 displayed in light ink color close to white is relatively difficult to see, and the second display 792 displayed in gray close to black. Becomes relatively easy to see.

  On the other hand, as shown on the right side of FIG. 509 (f), the display colors of the first display 790 and the second display 792 do not change from the state shown on the left side of FIG. When the color changes from white to black, the first display 790 displayed in a light ink color close to white is relatively easy to see, and the second display 792 displayed in a gray close to black is relatively It becomes difficult to see. As described above, even when the first display 790 and the second display 792 themselves do not change, the visibility of the first display 790 and the second display 792 may change due to the change of the background color. is there.

  FIGS. 509 (a) to 509 (f) show examples in which the visibility of the two displays of the first display 790 and the second display 792 changes. However, the display is not related to the change in visibility (for example, , A third indication) may be present. For example, when display A, display B, and display C are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, display A corresponds to the first display 790 and display B corresponds to the second display 792. May be. In this case, the visibility of the display C may be maintained while changing the visibility of the display A and the display B. Further, the display B may correspond to the first display 790, and the display C may correspond to the second display 792. In this case, the visibility of display A may be maintained while the visibility of display B and display C is changed. Further, the display C may correspond to the first display 790, and the display A may correspond to the second display 792. In this case, the visibility of display B may be maintained while changing the visibility of display C and display A.

  FIGS. 509 (a) to 509 (f) show an example in which the visibility of the two displays of the first display 790 and the second display 792 is changed. There may be more than one. For example, display A and display B may correspond to the first display 790, and display C may correspond to the second display 792. In addition, the display B and the display C may correspond to the first display 790, and the display A may correspond to the second display 792. In addition, the display C and the display A may correspond to the first display 790, and the display B may correspond to the second display 792. In addition, the display A may correspond to the first display 790, and the display B and the display C may correspond to the second display 792. Further, the display B may correspond to the first display 790, and the displays A and C may correspond to the second display 792. Further, the display C may correspond to the first display 790, and the displays A and B may correspond to the second display 792. Thereby, the visibility of the three displays may be changed to allow the player to focus on the three displays.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 509 (g), the background color of the hold icon display area 794 displaying the hold icons a1 to a4 is different from other background colors, and the hold icon display area 794 clearly distinguishes. When the display shown in FIGS. 509 (a) to 509 (e) is switched in the hold icon display area 794, the visibility of the effect display changes in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In some cases, it is possible to keep the area to be held only within the hold icon display area 794.

  Next, an example in which the visibility of two displays changes depending on the brightness difference (contrast) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 510 shows a color chart when the gradation levels of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) are changed by 40 gradation levels between 0 gradation value and 255 gradation values. . In this example, an example will be described in which the gradation levels of a circular image and a square image displayed overlapping the circular image are changed. The circular image and the square image are displayed so that the center of the circle and the intersection of the diagonal lines of the square coincide with each other. Further, the diameter of the circle of the circular image is shorter than the length of one side of the square image. In addition, the circular image is displayed on a layer in front of the square image. Further, the transmittance of the circular image and the square image is 0%.

  In the color chart of FIG. 510, the R value, G value, and B value of a circular image are shown in the vertical direction, and the R value, G value, and B value of a square image are shown in the horizontal direction. In this example, the R value, G value, and B value of the circular image are made the same, and the gradation values of each color are changed to 0, 40, 80, 120, 160, 200, 240, and 255. Similarly, the R value, G value, and B value of the square image are made the same, and the gradation values of the respective colors are changed to 0, 40, 80, 120, 160, 200, 240, and 255.

  For example, as shown in the first row and first column of FIG. 510, the R value, G value, and B value of the circular image are 0 (RGB (0, 0, 0)), and the R value, G value of the square image When the B value is 0 (RGB (0, 0, 0)), since the circular image and the square image are displayed in black, they cannot be recognized separately. Further, as shown in the eighth row and the eighth column in FIG. 510, the R value, G value, and B value of the circular image are 255 (RGB (255, 255, 255)), and the R value, G value of the square image When the B value is 255 (RGB (255, 255, 255)), the circular image and the square image are displayed in white, so that they cannot be distinguished and recognized. Thus, when the brightness difference between the circular image and the square image is small, the visibility of the circular image displayed in the square image is relatively low.

  On the other hand, as shown in the eighth row and first column of FIG. 510, the R value, G value, and B value of the circular image are 255 (RGB (255, 255, 255)), and the R value, G value of the square image When the B value is 0 (RGB (0, 0, 0)), the circular image is displayed in white, and the square image is displayed in black. Also, as shown in the first row and the eighth column in FIG. 510, the R value, G value, and B value of the circular image are 0 (RGB (0, 0, 0)), and the R value, G value of the square image When the B value is 255 (RGB (255, 255, 255)), the circular image is displayed in black, and the square image is displayed in white. Thus, when the brightness difference between the circular image and the square image is large, the visibility of the circular image displayed in the square image is relatively high.

  In this way, when two images are displayed in an overlapping manner, if the difference in brightness between the two images is the same or small, it becomes difficult to identify the two images and the visibility of the two images is also reduced. be able to. Further, if the brightness difference between the two images is increased, the two images can be easily identified and the visibility of the two images can be improved.

  In order to improve the visibility of the image by the player, the brightness difference (contrast difference) between the image displayed in the back layer and the image displayed in the front layer of the two images displayed in a superimposed manner It is effective to put on. Further, in order to improve the visibility of the player's display, a hue difference or a saturation difference may be given to the image displayed in the back layer and the image displayed in the front layer. However, even if the image displayed in the back layer and the image displayed in the previous layer are different in hue, the visibility of the two images decreases if the lightness and saturation are substantially the same. . For this reason, in order to improve the visibility of the two images, it is most effective to make a difference in brightness between the two images.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 509 to 510 again.
(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment
A game machine provided with a display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),

  The display means includes a first display (for example, lower pan full error display (ball removal notification) 704, attention alert notification effect 722, right-handed notification effect 724, attention alert notification effect 750, attention alert notification effect 772, first Display 790) at least.

  The display means includes a second display (for example, an effect display, a tutorial display 709, a pre-reading notice notification effect 730, 740, an electric tulong open effect, an electric tulong open false effect 760, a user level notification effect 775, a second Display 792) can be displayed at least,

  The display means displays a third display (for example, a ball shortage error display 706, a fourth symbol displayed in the fourth symbol display area 208e, and the number of special figures held in the special symbol hold number display area 208f). At least displayable,

  At least a part of the first display has at least low visibility when the display means is in the first state,

  The first state is a state where at least the second display is displayed on the display means,

At least a part of the third display has at least higher visibility than the first display when the display means is in the first state.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, the visibility of the first display may be lowered, so that the player is focused on the display means in an attempt to recognize the notification content of the first display, and the player is concentrated on the game. May be possible. In addition, since the visibility of the first display displayed on the display means may be lowered, the player's line of sight may be able to be directed to the second display. Further, since the third display is easy to confirm even in the first state, it may be easy for the player to confirm the third display while viewing the second display.

  The first display may be displayed at the first display position on the display means.

  The second display may be displayed at the second display position on the display means.

  The third display may be displayed at a third display position on the display means.

  The third display position may be a position with higher visibility than the first display position when the display means is in the first state.

  The first display position may be a position having lower visibility than the third display position when the display means is in the first state.

  The first display position may be a position having lower visibility than the second display position when the display means is in the first state.

-A part or all of the third display may be at least higher in visibility than the first display when the display means is in the first state.
(2) The pachinko machine 100,
The first display is a display related to a game,
The second display is an effect display.
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, since the display related to the game is difficult to see due to the effect display, the player may be able to pay attention to the effect display. Even if the effect display is displayed, the player can easily confirm the third display, and thus it may be easier to confirm the third display while viewing the effect display.
(3) The pachinko machine 100,

  At least a part of the first display has at least higher visibility than the first state when the display means is in the second state,

The second state is a state in which the second display is not displayed at least on the display means.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, in the second state, the visibility of the first display is higher than that in the first state, so that the first display is displayed in the first state. It may be easier for the player to guess that.

  Part or all of the first display may be higher in visibility than the first state when the display means is in the second state.

  Part or all of the first display may be more visible than one or more states including the first state when the display means is in the second state.

  When the display means is in the second state, part or all of the first display has higher visibility than the first state and is different from the first state and the second state. The visibility may be lower than the state.

  The second state may be a state where one or more displays including the second display are not displayed on the display means.

The second state may be a state in which only the second display is not displayed on the display means.
(4) The pachinko machine 100,

The second display is displayed at least in front of the first display.
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, since the second display is displayed on the front side of the first display in the first state, it may be possible to make the second display easy to attract the player. . In the first state, since the first display is displayed behind the second display, the player may be able to carefully watch the first display.
The second display may be displayed in front of the first display.

  The second display may be displayed in front of one or more displays including the first display.

The second display may be displayed on the front side of the first display and may be displayed on the rear side of one or more displays other than the first display.
(5) The pachinko machine 100,
The first display is an error display.
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, in the first state, by reducing the visibility of the error display, the player is encouraged to recognize the notification content of the error display, and the error display is carefully viewed by the player. There is a case that can be made. Moreover, since the visibility of the second display is higher than the error display, it may be possible to prevent the player from overlooking the second display. Also, it may be possible to make it easier to confirm the third display even when an error is displayed.
(6) The pachinko machine 100,

  The first display includes at least information more important to the player than the second display,

The third display includes at least information that is more important to the player than the second display.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, the visibility of a part of the first display including information that is highly important for the player is hidden and reduced by a part of the effect display, so that the line of sight of the game is directed to the display means. There are cases where it is possible. In addition, since the third display having high importance for the player can be easily confirmed even in the first state, the player may be able to play the game with peace of mind.

  The first display may be a display including only information that is more important to the player than the second display.

  The first display may be a display including only a plurality of pieces of information that are more important to the player than the second display.

  The first display includes one or more pieces of information that are more important to the player than the second display and one or more pieces of information that are less important than the second display (for example, a character image or background) ) May be included.

  The first display includes one or more information items that are more important to the player than the second display and one or more information items that are less important than one or more displays different from the second display (e.g., Display including a character image and background).

  The third display may be a display that includes only information that is more important to the player than the second display.

  The third display may be a display that includes only a plurality of pieces of information that are more important to the player than the second display.

  The third display includes one or more pieces of information that are more important to the player than the second display and one or more pieces of information that are less important than the second display (for example, a character image or background) ) May be included.

The third display includes one or more information items that are more important to the player than the second display and one or more information items that are less important than one or more displays different from the second display (e.g., Display including a character image and background).
(7) The pachinko machine 100,

  Operating means (for example, ball discharge lever 132, chance button 136) provided at least at a position where the player can operate,

The first display includes at least a notification that prompts the player to operate the operation means.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, at least a part of the notification that prompts the operation of the operation means is hidden by the effect display, and the visibility of at least a part of the notification is reduced, so that the player can concentrate on the effect display and play the game. You may be able to entertain. In addition, it may be possible to make it easier to confirm the third display while concentrating the player on the effect display.

  The above-mentioned “position having at least higher visibility than the first display” means a position where the player can always confirm at least the third display when the second display is displayed. Thus, even if the first display is hidden by the second display and the visibility of the second display is low, the third display can always be confirmed by the player. May be difficult to miss.

  The above “information highly important for a player” may include at least information related to payout of a game ball (for example, an error related to ball removal notification or payout means). Thereby, it may be possible to prevent the player from missing information related to the profit of the game.

  In addition, the above-mentioned “information that is highly important to the player” is information related to the progress of the game (for example, the fourth symbol (indicating that it is changing), the decorative symbol change display, the hold icon, the hitting notification. (Right-handed notification, notification of “turn steering wheel to the left”, etc.) may be included.

  Further, the “information that is highly important for the player” may include at least information related to an abnormality of the pachinko machine 100 (such as an abnormality in the connection of the board and an abnormality in the position detection of the effect movable body).

  In addition, the above-mentioned “information highly important for the player” may include at least information related to fraud (radio wave sensor error, magnetic sensor error, etc.).

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may include first display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208).

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may include second display means (for example, a sub display device 808).

  The “display unit” may be a display unit of at least one of the first display unit and the second display unit.

In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be provided with two types of hit symbols. For example, if one winning symbol is won, even if it is non-electric support, the wing member 232a opens so that four game balls can enter the special figure 2 starting port 232, and if the other winning symbol is won, the non-electric support The blade member 232a may be opened to the extent that a game ball cannot enter the special figure 2 starting port 232. In the case where the other winning symbol is won during non-electric support, the same effect as in the case of shifting in the usual figure variable game may be executed in the electric Chu long opening effect.
<Other Embodiment (Embodiment 1 of Character Select Effect)>

Next, with reference to FIG. 511 to FIG. 532, a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine or the like) according to another embodiment of the present invention (an embodiment in which button operation is enabled even when button operation display is not performed). The ball and ball game machine and the spinning machine game machine such as a slot machine will be described in detail. Note that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 511 to 532 are used only in the description of the present embodiment in principle, and even in the case where the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the description of the present embodiment is not illustrated. Priority is given to the code | symbol shown to 511-FIG. On the other hand, in the following description, about the code | symbol which is not shown by FIG. 511-FIG. In addition, when there are drawings showing the same timing in a plurality of drawings, overlapping description may be omitted. In addition, the number of the example of this embodiment is used only for the description of this embodiment in principle, but each example of this embodiment and each example of other embodiments are applied in combination with each other. Can do.
<Overall configuration>

  First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so that the inner side of the front frame door 106 can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player 200 ball launching handles 134 for launching into the game area 124, chance buttons 136 for changing the effects of the various effects devices 206 by the player's operation, and the chance button 136 to emit light. Sub button lamp 138, ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and return operation button for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance 142, and a ball rental display unit 144 for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. .

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  512 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 511 as viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-board that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error release switch that constitutes a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and that releases an error by the operation of a game clerk Discharge board case 172 storing the payout board 170 having 168, launch base constituting the launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of the game ball A launch board case 176 that houses 174, a power management unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines, and a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game store clerk and an RWM clear by being operated when the power is turned on A power board case 184 that houses a power board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs a signal to the main controller 300, and a CR interface 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided. ing.

  FIG. 513 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the ordinary device. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In this embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7 segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The multi-purpose hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general-purpose variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. In this embodiment, the general-purpose variable games are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are being held. In this embodiment, the special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, a general prize opening 226, a general figure starting opening 228, a first special figure starting opening 230, a second special figure starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are provided around the effect device 206. ing.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detecting sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning is sometimes referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player is sometimes referred to as “rental ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is constituted by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball for the upper plate 126. And the special figure changing game by the first special figure display device is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric Chu). In the present embodiment, only one second special figure starting port 232 is disposed directly below the first special figure starting port 230. The second special figure starting port 232 has a wing that can be opened and closed to the left and right, and the sphere cannot be entered while the wing is closed. When stopped, the blades open and close at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variable game by the second special figure display device is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a large winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is disposed below the center of the game board 200. This variable winning opening 234 has a door member that can be freely opened and closed, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the door member is closed, and the special figure display device stops and displays the jackpot symbol when the special figure variable game is won. In this case, the door member opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds) and at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

This pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches 146 Further, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 148 and driven into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc. (Outside the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.
<Directing device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball carried on by a nail of the game board 200, or the like, and the passed ball is a first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the golf course.

  In this embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b imitating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b at a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.
<Control unit>

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 A payout control unit 600 that mainly performs control related to payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and a power management unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. Yes.
<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing are mounted. . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a counter circuit 318 used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes two circuits). And a signal output from various sensors 320 including a ball detection sensor provided inside each start opening, winning opening and variable winning opening, and receiving an amplification result and a reference voltage. A sensor circuit 322 for outputting the comparison result to the counter circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the figure display device 210 and various status display units 328 (for example, a general map hold lamp 216, a first special figure hold run) 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the high-accuracy medium lamp 222, etc.), and a drive circuit 330 for performing display control, and various solenoids 332 for opening and closing the second special figure starting port 232, the variable prize opening 234, and the like. A drive circuit 334 for controlling is connected.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 126, the sensor circuit 320 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the counter circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the counter circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 126 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the first special figure starting port 126. Store in the register. Similarly, when the counter circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won the second special figure starting port 128, the counter circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 128. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 128.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power management unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. Game control is started when an activation signal is input.

The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.
<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effects data, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and for measuring time, frequency, etc. The counter timer 412 is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418, and a drive for performing drive control of the effect movable body 224. Detection from the circuit 422, the effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, the chance button detection sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136, and the effect movable body sensor 424 and the chance button detection sensor 426 A sensor circuit 428 that outputs a signal to the basic circuit 402 is connected to a second sub-control unit 500 for controlling the decorative symbol display device (liquid crystal display device) 208 and the shielding device 246.
<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply management unit>

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power management unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power management unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power management unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power management unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.
<Type of design>

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 515 (a) to 515 (c), the special symbols displayed by the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped (Special Fig. 1, Special Fig. 2). The decorative symbols that the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays, and the types of ordinary symbols that the normal symbol display device 210 stops and displays will be described.

  FIG. 515 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special figure (special figure 1, special figure 2). The first special figure variable game is started on the condition that the ball detection sensor detects that a ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and that the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232 The second special figure variation game is started on condition that the ball detection sensor detects it. When the first special figure variable game is started, the first special figure display device 212 performs “fluctuation display of special figure 1” by repeating all lighting of seven segments and lighting of one central segment. . In addition, when the second special figure variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 2”. I do. These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display according to the present invention. When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 (corresponding to the fluctuation time in the present invention) elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, Further, when the variation time determined before the start of the variation display of the special figure 2 (this also corresponds to the variation time referred to in the present invention) elapses, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. To do. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display referred to in the present invention, hereinafter, after the “variable display of special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. The series of displays up to is referred to as “symbol fluctuation stop display”. As will be described later, the symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 515 (a), three types of special figures from “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure C” are shown as the stop symbol forms in the symbol variation stop display. In the figure, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  “Special figure A” is 15 rounds (15R) special jackpot symbol (big hit symbol 1), “Special figure B” is 15 rounds (15R) big jackpot symbol (big jackpot symbol 2), and a predetermined number of times after the jackpot game ends ( In the present embodiment, a transition is made to the electric support state of 100 times. The electric support state refers to a state in which the blade 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 (electrical chew) is opened and closed at a predetermined time and a predetermined time interval (for example, opened for 2 seconds, closed for 0.5 seconds). .

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not it is a special big hit is determined by lottery of software random numbers. . The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. Moreover, the state which transfers to the above-mentioned electric support state is called a normal high probability state, and the state which does not transfer to an electric support state is called a normal low probability state. That is, the above jackpot symbol 1 is in the special figure high probability ordinary figure low probability state, and the jackpot symbol 2 is in the special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. These jackpot symbol 1 and jackpot symbol 2 are symbols in which the amount of profit given to the player is relatively large. Further, the “special chart C” is an off-line symbol, and is a symbol in which the profit amount given to the player is a relatively small profit amount.

  FIG. 515 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the decorative symbol. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. Decorative symbol display on the condition that the ball detection sensor detects that a ball has entered the first special figure starting port 230 or the first special figure starting port 232 (subject to the start of the first special figure variable game) “Decoration 1” → “Decoration 2” → “Decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “Decoration” in the left symbol display area, middle symbol display area, and right symbol display area of the device 208. “Decoration pattern change display” is performed to switch the display in the order of “10” → “decoration 1” →. For example, when the 15R jackpot of “Special Figure B” is notified, a combination of symbols (for example, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” or “decoration”) corresponding to the 15R jackpot is arranged. 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 ") is stopped and displayed in the three symbol display areas. Further, when notifying 15R special jackpot of “special drawing A”, a combination of three symbols having the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” or “decoration 7—decoration 7— Decoration 7 "etc.) is stopped and displayed in the three symbol display areas. Further, when notifying the “special symbol C” deviation, symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG.

FIG. 515 (c) shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes for ordinary maps: “general diagram A” which is a winning symbol and “general symbol B” which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that a sphere has passed through the general-purpose start opening 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the usual figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in the figure, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.
<Main control unit main processing>

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input executes a main control unit main process shown in FIG. 5A in accordance with a control program that is reset and started by a reset interrupt and stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  First, in step S101, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. Also, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312; Processing to output a clear signal from the output port to the unit 400, setting to allow writing to the RAM 308, setting to disable interrupts, setting the stack initial value to the stack pointer (this setting), all storage areas of the RAM 308 Initializes etc.

  In step S103, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the ordinary figure winning random number counter and the special figure random value counter, the ordinary figure timer random number value, and the special figure timer, respectively. Two random number counters for generating random number values (timer number determining random number values) are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as normal timer random numbers is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal timer random value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. Further, after this basic random number initial value update process is completed, an interrupt permission is set, and the process proceeds to step S105.

In step S105, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated. In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a first special figure notice lottery random number counter for generating a first special figure notice lottery random number value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 127, and a value in the range of 0 to 127 are also taken. A second special figure notice lottery random number counter for generating a second special figure notice lottery random number value to be obtained is provided. In step S105, the values of these counters are updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the processes of step S103 and step S105 except during the timer interrupt process starting at predetermined intervals.
<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, detection of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors via the input port of the I / O 310. A signal is input to monitor the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each sensor 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  In step S201, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S201 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 514 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). In this step S201, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. Is determined to have passed. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been awarded to the winning ports 226 and 234 and the starting ports 230, 232, and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S203 and step S205, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value update process and the basic random number update process of the present embodiment, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S103 is updated and then used in the main control unit 300. Two random number counters for generating a numerical value (random number for jackpot determination) and a special figure 2 random value (random number for jackpot determination) are updated. For example, if the numerical value range that can be taken as the special figure 1 random value is 0 to 100, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area for generating the special figure 1 random value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a special figure 1 random number value that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), a value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random number value. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the random number value of Fig. 1 has made one round next. Keep it.

  In step S207, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S209, a winning determination process is performed. In this winning determination process, when there is a winning at the winning openings 226, 234 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228, the value of the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning opening or each starting opening is stored in the RAM 308. Read and add 1 and set to the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S211, a general map related process is performed. In the common figure related process, one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the common figure is performed. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the win symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in the off symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a fixed display of either the winning symbol or the off symbol. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member is held open by the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). In addition, a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out, the usual figure out flag is turned on as will be described later. When the off-normal flag is on, the normal state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing at which the normal stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S213.

  Further, in the common map-related process in step S211, a general map-related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In step S213, a special figure state update process (a special figure 2 state update process and a special figure 1 state update process) and a special figure related lottery process (a special figure 2 related lottery process and a special figure 1 related lottery process) are performed. First, in the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure related process in the middle of the special figure change display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns on / off drive control. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game).

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a big hit flag, a first miss flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and the like. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), the second special symbol display device 214 is configured. 7 segment LED lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs a definite display such as a big hit symbol or a lost symbol. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player.

  In addition, in order to execute the general command rotation stop setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S215), 4H is additionally stored as transmission information (general information) in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the variable display is stopped. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that is special figure 2 is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  Further, when the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 Is set in the setting area of, and waiting for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period in which an image is displayed to notify the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. In order to do this, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, 5H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command winning effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S215).

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Alternatively, the door member is held in the open state by the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member of the variable winning port 234 until the winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning port 234. A signal indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, 7H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command big prize opening release setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S215).

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member of the variable prize opening 234, and a closing period is indicated in a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information. Further, 8H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command big prize opening closing setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S215).

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts and closes the opening / closing control of the door member a predetermined number of times (15 rounds in this embodiment) and ends, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a decorative pattern Information indicating the effect standby period in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player that the big hit by the display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Set. Further, 6H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command end effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S215).

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of the range, the first out flag is turned on. When the first deviation flag is on, the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0). However, the special region 2 inactive is set in the setting area of the RAM 308.

  In step S213, a special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is subsequently performed. In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, the special figure related lottery process (special figure 2 related lottery process) for the special figure 2 is performed first, and then the special figure related lottery process (special figure 1 related lottery process) for the special figure 1 is performed. Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. Further, the notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the second special figure starting port 232 is notified. However, it is performed in preference to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the first special figure starting port 230.

  In step S215, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Note that the output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits in the present embodiment, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 11 -14 are command types (in this embodiment, commands such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, etc. Information that can specify the type), bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command setting transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating the value of the big hit flag, the value of the special symbol probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special symbol related lottery process, etc. In the case of a stop command, the value of the jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. are included. In the case of a round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds, etc. are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, winning of the variable winning port 234 Includes presence or absence.

  In the general command rotation start setting transmission process described above, the command data stored in the RAM 308 holds the value of the jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related process, and holds. Information indicating the number of first special figure variable games or second special figure variable games is set. In the general command rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above-mentioned general command winning effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation Information indicating the value of the flag, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, etc. is set. In the above-described general command end effect setting transmission process, command control data stored in the RAM 308, effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, special figure probability variation Information indicating the value of the flag, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, etc. is set. In the general command big prize opening release transmission process described above, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation held. Information indicating the number of games is set. In the above-mentioned general command big prize opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation held Information indicating the number of games is set. In step S215, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  Furthermore, in this command setting transmission process, output schedule information and payout request information are output to the payout control unit 600. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information are composed of 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when turned on) in bit 7, and power-on information (when turned on, indicating that data is set). Indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 indicate the number of payout requests after encryption processing. I am doing so.

  In step S217, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

In step S219, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal statuses of various sensors stored in the signal status storage area in the input port status update process of step S201 are read, and the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or a lower pan full error is monitored. Device information indicating whether there is a front frame door opening error or a lower plate full error is set in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 when a front frame door opening error or a lower plate full error is detected. To do. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the normal symbol display device 210 and the first special symbol display via the display circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. In addition, the output schedule information set in the command setting transmission process in step S215 is output to the first sub control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).
<Data table of main control unit>

Next, a data table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.
<Attack prefetch table>

  The success / failure look-ahead table shown in FIG. 517 (a) associates the type of special figure lottery state (special figure probability) stored in the game state storage area provided in the RAM 308, lottery data, and the result of success / failure prefetching. It is an example of the data table memorize | stored.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the lottery result of the special figure variable game is a win (big hit) based on the success / failure look-ahead table and the special figure lottery status information (special figure probability). A special figure look-ahead lottery is made to determine in advance whether or not to be off.

  The special drawing lottery state information includes information indicating a low probability state in which the special figure variable game is determined to be a win with a predetermined low probability (in this example, approximately 1/300 (= 218/65536)), and low probability. Higher information (in this example, about 1/60 (= 1090/65536)) and information indicating a high probability state for determining that the special figure variable game is won, etc. Or may be referred to as high probability (or with certainty).

  The lottery data in the success / failure prefetch table is lottery data used to determine the success / failure prefetch result of the special figure variable game. For example, when the special figure probability is low and the acquired jackpot determination random number value is 1000 to 1217, it is determined as a big hit as the success / failure look-ahead result. On the other hand, if the special drawing lottery state is in a low probability state and the acquired jackpot determination random number value is a numerical value other than 1000-1217, it is determined that the result of the pre-fetching preemption result is out of place.

In the present embodiment, the numerical value range that can be taken by the jackpot determination random number value is 0 to 65535 (the numerical value range is 65536), and the numerical value range of the big hit lottery data at a low probability is 1000 to 1217 (large numerical value range). Therefore, the probability of determining a big hit at a low probability is about 1/300 (= 218/65536). On the other hand, since the numerical range of the big hit lottery data at a high probability is 1000 to 2089 (the size of the numerical range is 1090), the probability of determining a big hit at the high probability is about 1/60 (= 1090 / 65536).
<Special Figure Failure / Prefetch Results Table>

  The special figure success / failure look-ahead result table shown in FIG. 517 (b) is an example of a data table in which the above-mentioned special figure variation game success / failure prefetch result, lottery data, and special figure prefetch result are stored in association with each other. .

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 determines the special figure prefetching table, the special figure variable game success / failure prefetch result, and the big hit special figure when the above-mentioned special figure variable game success / failure prefetch result is a big hit. A jackpot type prefetch lottery is performed in which the jackpot type (special figure prefetching result) is determined in advance based on the random number value.

For example, if the success / failure look-ahead result of special figure variation game is a big hit and the special figure determining random number for big hit is a value from 0 to 49, the big hit symbol 1 is selected as the special figure prefetch result and the big hit When the special figure determining random number is a numerical value of 50 to 99, the jackpot symbol 2 is selected as the special figure prefetching result. In the present embodiment, the possible numerical range of the special value for determining special figure for big hit time is 0 to 99 (the size of the numerical range is 100). In addition, when the result of the pre-fetching of the special figure variable game is out of order, the special figure C (out of symbol) is selected as the special figure pre-reading result without using the special figure pre-reading table.
<Win / fail judgment table>

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 518 (a) associates the type of special figure lottery state (special figure probability) stored in the game state storage area provided in the RAM 308, lottery data, and the determination result. It is an example of the data table memorize | stored.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the lottery result of the special figure variable game is won (big hit) based on the winning / failing determination table and the special figure lottery status information (special figure probability). A special figure winning / not-seeing lottery is performed to determine whether or not.

  The lottery data in the success / failure determination table is lottery data used to determine the determination result of the special figure variation game. For example, when the special figure probability is low and the acquired big hit determination random number value is 1000 to 1217, it is determined that the special figure variable game is won (big hit), and the big hit flag is set to ON. On the other hand, when the special figure lottery state is in a low probability state and the acquired random number for jackpot determination is a numerical value other than 1000-1217, it is determined that the special figure variable game is lost and the jackpot flag is set to OFF. To do.

In the present embodiment, the numerical value range that can be taken by the jackpot determination random number value is 0 to 65535 (the numerical value range is 65536), and the numerical value range of the big hit lottery data at a low probability is 1000 to 1217 (large numerical value range). Is 218), the winning probability of jackpot of the low probability special figure variable game is about 1/300 (= 218/65536). On the other hand, since the numerical range of the big hit lottery data at a high probability is 1000-2089 (the size of the numerical range is 1090), the winning probability per jackpot of the high probability special figure variable game is about 1/60. (= 1090/65536), and the winning probability of the jackpot of the special figure variable game is set such that the higher probability is higher than the lower probability.
<Special figure determination table>

  The special figure determination table shown in FIG. 518 (b) is an example of a data table in which the above-described special figure variable game success / failure determination result, lottery data, and special figure determination result are stored in association with each other.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 determines the special figure determination table, the special figure variable game success / failure determination result, and the big hit special figure determination when the determination result of the special figure variable game is a big hit. A jackpot type lottery that determines the jackpot type (special figure determination result) is performed based on the random number value.

For example, if the result of determining whether or not the special figure variation game is successful is a big hit and the random number for determining the special figure for big hit is 0 to 49, select the big hit symbol 1 as the special figure determining result and When the special figure determining random number is a numerical value of 50 to 99, the jackpot symbol 2 is selected as the special figure determining result. In the present embodiment, the possible numerical range of the special value for determining special figure for big hit time is 0 to 99 (the size of the numerical range is 100). Also, if the result of determining whether or not the special figure variation game is correct is out of place, the special figure C (out of symbol) is selected as the special figure determination result without using the special figure determination table.
<Table set selection table>

  FIG. 518 (c) shows an example of the table set selection table. This table set selection table is a data table in which the above-mentioned special figure determination result, the special figure fluctuation frequency, and the timer selection table are stored in association with each other.

  When the above-mentioned special figure determination result is selected, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300, based on this table set selection table, the selected special figure determination result, the number of special figure fluctuations, and the timer selection table A table set selection lottery is performed.

For example, when the selected special figure determination result is the jackpot symbol 1 (special figure A), the variation count is 90 times, the timer selection table is a combination of the table 2, the variation count is 10 times, and the timer selection table is a table. The combination of 3 and the combination of the number of fluctuations of 0 and the timer selection table of table 2 are selected.
<Special figure timer number selection table>

  FIG. 519 is a diagram showing an example of the special figure timer number selection table. This special figure timer number selection table is a special figure determination result based on the above-mentioned special figure determination table, the above-mentioned timer selection table, and the special figure variable game hold stored in the above-mentioned special figure hold number storage area. It is a data table in which lottery data classified by number and timer number determination results are stored in association with each other.

The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 includes the special figure timer number selection table, the special figure determination result based on the above special figure determination table, the timer selection table selected in the above table set selection lottery, and the above special figure. A special-purpose timer number lottery for determining the timer number is performed based on the number of holds and the random number value for determining the timer number. For example, the above-mentioned special figure determination result is special figure C (missing symbol), the above-mentioned timer selection table is table 1, the special figure holding number is 0 to 2, and the obtained timer number determination random number value is 0 to 89. If it is within the range, timer 3 (variation time 10 seconds) is selected as the timer number. Also, for example, the above-mentioned special figure determination result is acquired with the jackpot symbol 1 (special symbol A) or jackpot symbol 2 (special symbol B), the above-described timer selection table is the table 1, and the special symbol hold number is 3. When the timer number determination random number value is in the range of 0 to 1, timer 4 (variation time 12 seconds) is selected as the timer number. In the present embodiment, the possible numerical range of the timer number determination random number is 0 to 99 (the numerical range is 100).
<Variation time table>

  FIG. 520 is a diagram illustrating an example of the variation time table. This variation time table is a data table in which the above-described timer number determination result and the variation time are stored in association with each other.

The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 selects the variation time based on the variation time table and the above timer number determination result. For example, when the timer number determination result is timer 1, 2 seconds is selected as the variation time, and when the timer number determination result is timer 7, 20 seconds is selected as the variation time.
<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305.

  In step S305, 0 is substituted into the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300. In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in S307, processing such as reading effect data corresponding to the command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when update of the effect data is necessary, effect data update processing is performed.

  In step S311, a chance button control process is performed. In this chance button control process, when pressing of the chance button 136 is detected, processing of changing the effect data updated in step S309 to effect data corresponding to the pressing of the chance button 136 is performed.

  In step S313, an image control process (details will be described later) shown in FIG. In step S315, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416. In step S317, if there is a command to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420. In step S319, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420. In step S321, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S303.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). Execute in the cycle.

  In step S501 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S503 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S321, an effect random number update process, and the like are performed.

  Next, the image control process in step S313 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605. If not, a transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S605, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets parameters according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

In step S609, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611. If not, the generation end interrupt signal is determined. Wait for input. In step S611, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.
<Character selection production>

  Next, the character selection effect executed by the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail. FIG. 522 is a diagram showing an example of the character select effect, and FIG. 523 is a time chart of the character select effect.

  When a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a big win is won in the big hit determination), the main control unit 300 causes the first sub control unit 400 to execute the character selection effect in the command setting transmission process of step S215. Transmits a character select effect start command for instructing. Subsequently, the main control unit 300 detects a winning of a predetermined number of gaming balls (for example, 10 balls) in the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds or the variable winning opening 234) in the special figure related processing in step S213. Up to a predetermined closing period (for example, 1 second) at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends after a signal for holding the door member in an open state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening / closing driving of the door member of the variable prize opening 234. ), A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening and closing the door member of the variable winning opening 234. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the door member opening / closing control (big hit game) a predetermined number of times (for example, 15R (round)). Note that the effect shown in FIG. 522 is an example of a character select effect that is executed on the 10R (round) of the big hit game.

The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the above-described character select effect start command starts the character select effect when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a start condition for each round in the jackpot game is satisfied). . Character selection effects according to the present embodiment are the character introduction effects shown in FIGS. 522 (a) to (c), and the character selection effects shown in FIGS. 5 (d), (f), (h), and (j). It consists of various types of production.
<Character introduction production>

  First, the character introduction effect will be described. In the effect control process of step S309, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 has the first character (in this example, the lord) as shown in FIG. 522 (a) at the front center of the display area, An image in which the second character (爺 in this example) is located on the left rear and the third character (princess in this example) is located on the right rear (hereinafter referred to as “introduction image of the first character (dono)”) Image data of an image including the characters “Please select your favorite character!” And an image indicating the current number of rounds (in this example, an image including the characters 10R). Processing such as reading image data from the ROM 406 is performed. Subsequently, after the first sub-control unit 400 sets an instruction to transfer the plurality of image data from the ROM 406 to the drawing area of the VRAM 436 in the attribute register of the VDP 434 in the image transfer instruction in step S601. In the next step S601, the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436 is swapped. As a result, the introduction image of the first character (donor) as shown in FIG. 10A is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the second character (爺) is located at the first character (donor) as shown in FIG. In the center of the front, the first character (dono) was located at the right rear where the third character (princess) was located, and the third character (princess) was located at the second character (爺) For example, image data of a moving image (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “introduction image of the second character (爺)”) that moves to the left rear is read out from the ROM 406. Subsequently, in the image transfer instruction in step S601, the first sub-control unit 400 sets an instruction to transfer (overwrite) the above-described image data from the ROM 406 to the drawing area of the VRAM 436 in the attribute register of the VDP 434. After that, in the next step S601, the designation of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 436 is swapped. As a result, the introduction image of the second character (爺) as shown in FIG. 5B is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the third character (princess) is positioned as the second character (爺) as shown in FIG. In the center of the front, the second character (爺) was located at the right rear where the first character (dono) was located, and the first character (dono) was located at the third character (princess). For example, image data of a moving image (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “introduction image of a third character (princess)”) that moves to the left rear is read out from the ROM 406. Subsequently, in step S601, the first sub-control unit 400 sets an instruction for transferring (overwriting) the above-described image data from the ROM 406 to the drawing area of the VRAM 436 in the attribute register of the VDP 434, and next time. In step S601, the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436 is swapped. As a result, the introduction image of the third character (princess) as shown in FIG. 5C is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

Further, during the execution of the character introduction effect, the first sub-control unit 400 performs the effect data updated in the above step S309 (this even if the chance button 136 is detected to be pressed in the chance button control process in the above step S311). In the example, it is configured not to perform the process of changing the character introduction effect data) to effect data in response to pressing of the chance button 136. That is, the execution period of the character introduction effects shown in FIGS. 523 to 523d is set to a button non-acceptance period in which the chance button 136 is not accepted (the operation of pressing the chance button 136 is ignored). .
<Character selection effect>

  Next, the character selection effect will be described. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 executes the character selection effect after executing the above-described character introduction effect for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). In this character selection effect, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400, in the effect control process of step S309, the first character (donor) as shown in FIG. The second character (爺) is located at the left rear and the third character (princess) is located at the right rear, and the first character (dono) in the center of the front is conspicuously displayed brightly (hereinafter, “ Image data of an image indicating the current number of rounds, image data of an image imitating the chance button 136, Processing such as reading out image data of the image including the characters “Press to select a character!” From the ROM 406 is performed. Subsequently, in step S601, the first sub control unit 400 sets an instruction to transfer the plurality of image data from the ROM 406 to the drawing area of the VRAM 436 in the attribute register of the VDP 434, and then the next step. In S601, the designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 436 is swapped. As a result, a temporarily selected image of the first character (donor) as shown in FIG. 4D is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, when this display is performed, the first sub-control unit 400 stores character identification information (for example, a numerical value of 1) indicating that the temporary selection image of the first character (donor) is being displayed in the RAM 408. Is stored in the character identification information storage area provided in FIG.

  Further, when the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the chance button 136 is pressed during the chance button control process in step S311 during execution of the character selection effect, the effect data updated in step S309 (this In the example, it is configured to perform a process of changing (effect data for character selection effect) to effect data in response to pressing of the chance button 136. That is, the execution period of the character selection effect shown in (d) to (k) of FIG. 523 is set as the button reception period for accepting the chance button 136.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 522 (e), when the first sub-control unit 400 detects pressing of the chance button 136 in the chance button control process of step S311, the first sub-control unit 400 updates in step S309. In the previous effect data, the second character (爺) is located in the center of the front where the first character (dono) was located, and the first character (dono) is located in the third character (princess). A video in which the third character (princess) has moved to the left rear where the second character (爺) was located, and the second character (爺) moved to the front center is brightened. A process of changing to image data of an image (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “second character (爺) temporarily selected moving image”) is performed. As a result, the temporarily selected moving image of the second character (爺) as shown in FIG. 8F is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, when displaying the moving image, the first sub-control unit 400 displays character identification information (for example, the numerical value 2) indicating that the temporarily selected moving image of the second character (爺) is displayed. ) Is overwritten and stored in the character identification information storage area.

  FIG. 524 is a diagram showing in detail an example of the temporarily selected moving image (character movement display) of the second character (爺) described above. In addition, the same figure (a), (b), (f) is a figure corresponded to said FIG. 522 (d), (e), (f), The same figure (c)-(e) It is the figure which showed the mode of the change of the moving image between FIG. 522 (d)-(f).

  When the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the chance button 136 is pressed during the display of the temporarily selected image of the first character (donor) shown in FIG. As shown in (2), the second character (明 る く) is displayed brightly, and the second character (移動) is displayed so as to gradually move from the left rear to the front center. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a moving display that moves the third character (princess) from the right rear to the left rear in synchronization with the movement display of the second character (キ ャ ラ ク タ). Further, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the first character (donor) darkly in synchronization with the movement display of the second character (爺) and the third character (princess), and the front center To move to the right rear. As a result, the final image of the temporarily selected moving image of the second character (爺) as shown in FIG. 5F and FIG. 522F is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Returning to FIG. 522, when the first sub-control unit 400 detects the pressing of the chance button 136 in the chance button control process of step S <b> 311, as shown in FIG. The previous effect data updated in S309 is the same as the third character (princess) in the center of the front where the second character (爺) is located, and the second character (爺) is the first character (donor). The third character (princess) moves to the left rear where the first character (dono) was located, and to the left rear where the third character (princess) was located. A process of changing to image data of a brightened moving image (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “a temporarily selected moving image of a third character (princess)”) is performed. As a result, the temporarily selected moving image of the third character (princess) as shown in FIG. 9H is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, when performing the moving image display, the first sub-control unit 400 displays character identification information (for example, numerical value 3) indicating that the temporarily selected moving image of the third character (princess) is being displayed. Is overwritten and stored in the above-described character identification information storage area.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 5I, the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the chance button 136 has been pressed in the chance button control process in step S311 and updates the previous time updated in step S309. In the effect data, the first character (dono) is in the center of the front where the third character (princess) is located, and the third character (princess) is in the right rear where the second character (第) is located. In addition, the third character (princess) moves to the left rear where the first character (dono) is located, and the first character (dono) moving to the center of the front is brightened. A process of changing to image data of one character (temporarily selected moving image) is performed. As a result, the temporarily selected moving image of the first character (donor) as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, each time the first sub-control unit 400 detects pressing of the chance button 136, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the temporarily selected moving image of the first character (donor) shown in FIG. Character identification information (1 in this example) indicating that the second character (爺) is temporarily displayed as shown in (f) of the figure, and character identification indicating that the display is being performed. Storage of information (2 in this example) → Display of the temporarily selected moving image of the third character (princess) shown in (h) of the figure, and character identification information (3 in this example) indicating that the display is being performed ) In the order of storage →..., The process of switching the display of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the process of overwriting and storing the character identification information for specifying the temporarily selected character in the character identification information storage area Carried out.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 522 (k), the main control unit 300, when the big hit game end condition is satisfied in the special figure related processing in step S213 described above (for example, a predetermined time (for example, after the round is started) 30 seconds) or when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) have won a prize in the variable prize opening 234 during one round) for opening / closing driving of the door member of the variable prize opening 234 A signal for holding the door member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 and the general command big prize opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process in step S 215, and the first sub-control unit 400 receives the character A character select effect end command for ending execution of the select effect is transmitted.

  The first sub-control unit 400 that has received this character select effect end command is configured to automatically select one character from a plurality of characters according to a predetermined condition at the time when the command is received. In this embodiment, the character identification information stored in the above-described character identification information storage area (in this example, the numerical value 1 indicating the first character (donor)) is used as character confirmation information in the character provided in the RAM 408. Store (copy) in the confirmed information storage area.

  Further, the first sub-control unit 400 indicates that the character (donor) has been automatically selected based on the above-described character determination information (in this example, the numerical value 1 indicating the first character (donor)). An image including image data of an image to be represented (hereinafter may be referred to as a “character determination image”) and a character (in this example, a character “determined to!”) Suggesting an automatically selected character (dono) The image data of the next round image and the image data of the image indicating the next round number (in this example, the image including the character 11R) are read out from the ROM 406.

Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 sets an instruction to transfer the above-described image data from the ROM 406 to the drawing area of the VRAM 436 in the attribute register of the VDP 434 in the image transfer instruction in step S601, and then In step S601, the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436 is swapped. As a result, a character determination image as shown in FIG. 10L is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 determines the period of time indicated by (k) to (l) in FIG. 523, that is, the period from the end of the character selection effect until the start of the next round (11R in this example). The acceptance period is set so that the chance button 136 is not accepted (the press of the chance button 136 is ignored).
<Button operation during character movement display>

  Next, a change mode of the movement display when the chance button 136 is pressed during the above-described character movement display will be described.

  FIG. 525 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the character movement display is interrupted when the chance button 136 is pressed during the character movement display.

  When the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the chance button 136 is pressed while the temporarily selected image of the first character (donor) shown in FIG. As shown in d), the movement display of the second character (爺) is started. When the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the chance button 136 is pressed during the movement display of the second character (爺) ((e) in the same figure), Instead of the character (爺), the third character (princess) is moved and displayed as shown in FIGS.

  More specifically, when the first sub-control unit 400 detects the pressing of the chance button 136 during the movement display of the second character (爺) ((e) in the same figure), the second character (爺) is displayed darkly after being moved from the position shown in FIG. 4 (d) to the center of the front and slightly to the right shown in FIG. ) And moved to the position shown in FIG. Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 moves the third character (princess) from the left rear to the front center as shown in (g) to (i) of FIG. The moving display is performed. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a movement display for moving the first character (dono) from the right rear side to the left rear side in synchronization with the movement display of the third character (princess). Further, the first sub-control unit 400 moves the second character (爺) from the front center to the right rear in synchronization with the movement display of the third character (princess) and the first character (dono). The moving display is performed. As a result, the final image of the temporarily selected moving image of the third character (princess) as shown in (i) of the figure is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, when performing the moving image display, the first sub-control unit 400 displays character identification information (for example, numerical value 3) indicating that the temporarily selected moving image of the third character (princess) is being displayed. Is overwritten and stored in the above-described character identification information storage area.

  FIG. 526 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the character movement display is not interrupted when the chance button 136 is pressed during the character movement display.

When the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the chance button 136 is pressed while the temporarily selected image of the first character (donor) shown in FIG. As shown in d), the movement display of the second character (爺) is started. Even when the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the chance button 136 is pressed during the movement display of the second character (爺) (FIG. (E)), (f) to (g) in FIG. As shown in (h) to (k), the second character (爺) continues to be moved and displayed in accordance with the above-described character movement display process. A moving display is performed to move the character (princess) from the left rear to the front center. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a movement display for moving the first character (dono) from the right rear side to the left rear side in synchronization with the movement display of the third character (princess). Further, the first sub-control unit 400 moves the second character (爺) from the front center to the right rear in synchronization with the movement display of the third character (princess) and the first character (dono). The moving display is performed. As a result, the final image of the temporarily selected moving image of the third character (princess) as shown in FIG. 10 (k) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, when performing the moving image display, the first sub-control unit 400 displays character identification information (for example, numerical value 3) indicating that the temporarily selected moving image of the third character (princess) is being displayed. Is overwritten and stored in the above-described character identification information storage area.
<Second example of character selection production>

  Next, a second example of character selection effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 527 and 528. FIG. 527 is a diagram showing a second example of the character select effect, and FIG. 528 is a time chart of the second example of the character select effect.

  In the character selection effects shown in FIG. 522 and FIG. 523 above, an example where the big hit game end condition is satisfied after the player presses the chance button 136 in the character selection effect (button reception period) after the character introduction effect ends. Although shown, in this second example, during the character introduction effect shown in FIGS. 527 (a) to (c) (during the button non-acceptance period effect), the big hit game end condition (in this example, during one round) This is an example in which a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls are awarded) in the variable winning opening 234, that is, an example in which the big hit game end condition is established without the player pressing the chance button 136 once.

  In the character selection effects shown in FIG. 522 and FIG. 523, the first sub-control unit 400 stores the character selection effect end command in the character identification information storage area when receiving the character select effect end command based on the establishment of the big hit game end condition. The stored information is stored (copied) in the character determination information storage area as character determination information (based on the player's chance button 136 operation). In this second example, the character selection effect ends. When the command is received, the character identification information (in this example, the numerical value indicating the second character (爺)) determined under a predetermined condition (for example, a lottery for determining one numerical value from 1 to 3) 2) as the character confirmation information (not based on the player's operation of the chance button 136) It is stored in the determination information storage area.

  Note that the “predetermined condition” is not limited to lottery, and for example, the character identification information may be determined based on a gaming state (the number of rounds in a big hit game, the number of special figure variable games held, etc.). The character identification information may be determined in advance, may be determined as the character identification information automatically selected last time, or may be determined as the character identification information previously selected by the player.

  Further, the first sub-control unit 400 confirms that the character (爺) has been automatically selected based on the character determination information (in this example, the numerical value 2 indicating the second character (爺)). An image including image data of an image to be represented (hereinafter may be referred to as a “character determination image”) and a character (in this example, a character “determined as ！!”) suggesting an automatically selected character (爺) The image data of the current round number and the image data indicating the current round number (in this example, the image including the character 10R) are read out from the ROM 406.

Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 sets an instruction to transfer the above-described image data from the ROM 406 to the drawing area of the VRAM 436 in the attribute register of the VDP 434 in the image transfer instruction in step S601, and then In step S601, the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436 is swapped. As a result, a character determination image as shown in FIG. 527 (e) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 determines the period of time indicated by (a) to (e) in FIG. 528, that is, the period from the start of the character introduction effect to the start of the next round (11R in this example). The acceptance period is set so that the chance button 136 is not accepted (the press of the chance button 136 is ignored).
<Third example of character selection production>

  Next, a third example of character selection effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 529 and 530. FIG. 529 is a diagram showing a third example of the character select effect, and FIG. 530 is a time chart of the third example of the character select effect.

  In the character selection effects shown in FIGS. 522 and 523 described above, an example where the big hit game end condition is satisfied after the player presses the chance button 136 in the character selection effect (button reception period) after the character introduction effect ends. Although shown, in the third example, after the character introduction effect (button non-acceptance period) shown in FIGS. 529 (a) to (c) ends, the character selection effect (button reception period) shown in FIG. 529 (d). In this example, the big hit game end condition is established without the player pressing the chance button 136 even once.

  In the character selection effects shown in FIG. 522 and FIG. 523, the first sub-control unit 400 stores the character selection effect end command in the character identification information storage area when receiving the character select effect end command based on the establishment of the big hit game end condition. In the third example, the stored information is stored (copied) in the above-described character determination information storage area as character determination information (based on the player's chance button 136 operation). In the third example, When the character selection effect end command is received, the character identification information (in this example, the third character (princess) is determined under a predetermined condition (for example, a lottery that determines one value from 1 to 3). ) As the character confirmation information (not based on the player's operation of the chance button 136). Stored in the character confirmation information storage area.

  Further, the first sub-control unit 400 confirms that the character (princess) has been automatically selected based on the character determination information (in this example, the numerical value 3 indicating the third character (princess)). An image including image data of an image to be represented (hereinafter may be referred to as a “character determination image”) and characters (in this example, a character “determined as a princess!”) Suggesting an automatically selected character (princess) The image data of the next round image and the image data of the image indicating the next round number (in this example, the image including the character 11R) are read out from the ROM 406.

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 sets an instruction to transfer the above-described image data from the ROM 406 to the drawing area of the VRAM 436 in the attribute register of the VDP 434 in the image transfer instruction in step S601, and then In step S601, the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436 is swapped. As a result, a character determination image as shown in FIG. 529 (f) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Also, the first sub-control unit 400 determines the period of time indicated by (e) to (f) in FIG. 530, that is, the period from the end of the character selection effect until the start of the next round (in this example, 11R). The acceptance period is set so that the chance button 136 is not accepted (the press of the chance button 136 is ignored).

In the above embodiment, the example in which the character selection effect is ended at the timing when the variable winning opening 234 is changed from the open state to the closed state is shown. However, as shown in FIG. 531, the variable winning opening 234 is closed from the open state. After changing to the state, the character selection effect may be ended after holding the closed state for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second).
<Other examples of character selection effects>

  Next, another example of the character selection effect will be described with reference to FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 11A, the first sub-control unit 400 surrounds the first character (donor) located at the front center of the display area with an elliptical cursor as shown on the left side of the figure. In addition, a process of displaying an image in which the second character (爺) is located at the left rear and the third character (princess) is located at the right rear in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. Subsequently, when the first sub-control unit 400 detects pressing of the chance button 136 in the character selection effect (button reception period) described above, the first character (donor) as shown on the right side of FIG. Is the right rear where the third character (princess) was located, the third character (princess) is located behind the left where the second character (爺) was located, and the second character (爺) is the second The second character (殿) at the center of the front is moved to the center of the front where the first character (dono) was located, and the second character (爺) at the center of the front is displayed in the display area of the image decoration symbol display device 208 surrounded by the oval cursor. Processing to be displayed is performed. As in this example, one of a plurality of characters may be specified using a figure such as a cursor instead of the brightness of the character.

  In the example shown in FIG. 5B, the first sub-control unit 400 uses an ellipse cursor as the first character (donor) located at the front center of the display area as shown on the left side of the figure. A process of displaying an image surrounded by the second character (キ ャ ラ ク タ) on the left rear and a third character (princess) on the right rear in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. Subsequently, when the first sub-control unit 400 detects pressing of the chance button 136 in the character selection effect (button reception period) described above, as shown on the right side of FIG. Without moving the cursor, the cursor located at the location of the first character (dono) is moved to the third character (princess) on the right rear side. As in this example, one of a plurality of characters may be specified by moving a figure such as a cursor without changing the character display position.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 10C, the first sub-control unit 400, as shown on the left side of the drawing, is a region located in the center of the display region (in this example, a plurality of rectangular regions). The background color of the area including the characters “M3: Sense or Reality”) is set to a color different from the background color of other images. Subsequently, when the first sub-control unit 400 detects pressing of the chance button 136 in the character selection effect (button reception period) described above, as shown on the right side of FIG. By rotating in order from the bottom to the top, the background color of the region located in the center of the display region (in this example, the region including the characters “M2: Distance”) is different from the background color of other images. Set to. As in this example, the color of a specific area may be configured to specify one of a plurality of pieces of information by making the colors of other areas different.

  In the example shown in FIG. 4D, the character to be selected based on the predetermined condition described with reference to FIG. 529 is surrounded by a cursor, and the automatically selected character is notified in advance. With such a configuration, since the automatically selected character can be grasped in advance, the player who wants to select the character can concentrate on the current game without worrying about the character selection. A player who wants to select another character can change it to a favorite character in advance.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a predetermined symbol display device (for example, a special symbol 1 display device, When a specific symbol form is stopped and displayed on the special symbol 2 display device or the decorative symbol display device), it is predetermined from a predetermined time (for example, after the symbol variation stop display in which the specific symbol aspect is stopped and displayed as a result). In the first control state (for example, when the door member of the variable prize opening 234 is closed, predetermined). The second advantage that is higher than the first advantage from the control state in which the symbol variation stop display is performed in the symbol display device, the control state with probability change, the control state with electric support, and the like. The second control state ( For example, control state transition means (for example, special figure state update processing in special figure-related processing) that shifts the control state to a big hit game state in which the door member of the variable prize opening 234 is opened and closed a predetermined number of times, and the game is produced Effect image (for example, a character selection effect image, a plurality of cases when a specific symbol form is stopped and displayed as a result of the symbol variation stop display during a period during which symbol variation stop display is performed on a predetermined symbol display device. The effect display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol display device) for displaying a predetermined competition image (for example, a competition) in which a specific character image of the character images of the character wins another character. A separate image display device) and a plurality of images (for example, first to third images) during a predetermined image selection effect period (for example, character select effect) Storage means (for example, a character identification information storage area provided in the RAM 408) for storing specific image information (for example, character identification information) that can identify an image selected by the player from among the character images), Effect control means (for example, the first sub-control part 400 and the second sub-control part 500) for causing the effect display means to display an image specified by the specific image information stored in the storage means, and by the player A game machine including an operation receiving unit (for example, a chance button 136) for receiving a selection operation, wherein the image selection effect period is a predetermined first period (for example, a character introduction effect execution period). Including a predetermined second period (for example, an execution period of the character selection effect) that starts after the start of the first period, and the effect control means includes: Based on the selection operation by the player received at the operation receiving unit during the second period, the specific image information for specifying the image to be displayed on the effect display means is stored in the storage means, When the predetermined condition for ending the image selection effect period is satisfied before the start condition for the predetermined second period is satisfied (for example, the character introduction effect that is the button non-acceptance period ends) (for example, One or both of a case where a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the start of a round and a case where a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) have won a prize in the variable winning opening 234 during one round In the case of establishment or other predetermined conditions are established), a predetermined character (for example, a central character in FIGS. 527 (e) and 529 (f)) is selected from the plurality of images on behalf of the player. An image, a predetermined character image determined in advance (for example, a character image indicating a shrine, a character image selected by the player in the previous character selection effect), and the predetermined image are displayed on the effect display means. This is a gaming table characterized by this.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, an image selection effect (character select effect) is canceled by advancing the game quickly for a player who wants to enjoy the game more than the effect. In this case, the control means changes to a player and selects an image, so that it is not necessary to force image selection to all players. For this reason, there are cases where it is possible to make progress in games that match the individuality of various players.

  Further, the effect control means is configured to ignore the selection operation by the player accepted by the operation accepting unit during the first period (for example, the character introduction effect execution period (button non-acceptance period)). Also good.

  With such a configuration, by setting the effect period of a specific effect to be surely executed as the first period, the specific effect can be reliably executed regardless of the player's selection operation. There is.

  Further, a variable winning in which the open / close state can be changed from one of a predetermined closed state (for example, a closed state) and a predetermined open state (for example, an open state) in which a game ball can be won more easily than the closed state. The second control state includes a round operation for changing the open / close state of the variable prize opening a predetermined number of times from the closed state to the open state a predetermined number of times (for example, a variable prize opening 234). 15 times), the first control state is a control state in which the round operation is not performed, and the end condition of the image selection effect period is a specific round in the second control state. It may be configured to be established when the number of game balls won in the variable prize opening after starting the operation becomes a specific number or more.

  With such a configuration, image selection effects are performed during small hits, during variable prize opening operations, during variable prize opening opening, or during big hits, etc. In some cases, it may be possible to entertain more games. In addition, for players who enjoy the game more than the production side, that is, for the player who quickly enters the game ball into the variable prize opening, the control means selects the image instead of forcing the image selection. It may be possible to progress through the game.

  In addition, a launching device (e.g., launching device 110) that launches a game ball at every elapse of a predetermined launch period based on the player's operation, and a game ball launched by the launching device flow down and the variable prize opening is A game area (for example, a game area 124) provided, and the first period is shorter than a period (for example, 6 seconds) required for firing a specific number of the game balls. There may be.

  With such a configuration, game balls are accumulated to some extent just above the variable prize opening during non-operation (for example, before the start of a specific round), and game balls are being operated during variable prize opening (for example, start of a round). By setting a difficult time if there is no gaming skill, such as entering a large number of variable prize openings, if the player who wants to select an image is careful, it will not lose the opportunity of image selection. In some cases, it is possible to allow the game progress according to the player.

  Also, a plurality of the variable prize opening, a game nail (for example, a game nail 238) that changes the direction in which the game ball falls, and an entry area for the game ball fired by the launch device to enter, The plurality of variable prize openings provided in the game area include a first variable prize opening (for example, a variable prize opening arranged on the left side of the pachinko machine 100) and a second variable prize opening (for example, a pachinko machine). The game nail is likely to come into contact with the game ball that has entered from the entry area before reaching the second variable prize opening. Is arranged so that the number of game nails that the game ball entering from the entry area may come into contact with before reaching the first variable winning opening, the specific round motion is During the second control state Close state of Oite the first variable winning hole may be a round operation for a predetermined number of times change.

  With such a configuration, a certain amount of game balls are stored immediately above the variable prize opening during non-operation (for example, before the start of a specific round), and the game balls are collected when the variable prize opening is activated (eg, round start). Since a large number of variable winning awards are entered, if a player who wants to select an image pays attention, it may not be possible to lose the opportunity to select an image, and it may be possible to proceed with the game according to the player.

  In the above embodiment, an example in which a character selection effect is performed using an image (a still image or a moving image) has been described. However, a sound effect by the speaker 120, an effect by the operation of the effect movable body 224, and various lamps 418. It is also possible to perform a production by Moreover, although the 1st sub control part 400 showed the example which performs the production | presentation control of a character selection production | presentation based on the command from the main control part 300, it is not limited to this.

  Further, the game table according to the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. For example, in addition to the pachinko machine 100 (1 type), it can be applied to a pachinko machine (2 types, 3 types), a sealed pachinko machine, a pachinko machine, and the like. It can also be applied to smart balls and the like.

  Further, for example, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine using medals (coins) as a game medium. Here, as a slot machine to which the present invention is applied, a plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols, a start switch for starting rotation of the plurality of reels, and each of the plurality of reels are provided. Provided by a stop switch that individually stops the rotation of the reels, lottery means for determining whether or not an internal winning of a plurality of predetermined winning combinations is made by lottery, and the plurality of reels when stopped An example includes a determination unit that determines whether or not the winning combination is determined based on whether or not the combination of symbols is a winning combination that has been won internally by the lottery means.

  Further, for example, a game can be executed by applying the present invention to a game program that simulates the operation of a real machine such as a pachinko machine for a home game machine.

Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely a list of the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to things.
<Other Embodiment (Embodiment 2 of Character Select Effect)>

Next, referring to FIG. 533 to FIG. 554, a game machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc.) according to another embodiment of the present invention (second embodiment of character selection effect). The trunk game machine) will be described in detail. Note that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 533 to 554 are used only in the description of the present embodiment in principle, and even in the case where the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the description of the present embodiment is not illustrated. The reference numerals 533 to 554 are prioritized. On the other hand, in the following description, the same reference numerals that are not shown in FIGS. 533 to 554 are used as the same constituent elements as those in the above embodiment. In addition, when there are drawings showing the same timing in a plurality of drawings, overlapping description may be omitted. In addition, the number of the example of this embodiment is used only for the description of this embodiment in principle, but each example of this embodiment and each example of other embodiments are applied in combination with each other. Can do.
<Overall configuration>

  First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so that the inner side of the front frame door 106 can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player 200 ball launching handles 134 for launching into the game area 124, chance buttons 136 for changing the effects of the various effects devices 206 by the player's operation, and the chance button 136 to emit light. Sub button lamp 138, ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and return operation button for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance 142, and a ball rental display unit 144 for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. .

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 534 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 533 as viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-board that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error release switch that constitutes a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and that releases an error by the operation of a game clerk Discharge board case 172 storing the payout board 170 having 168, launch base constituting the launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of the game ball A launch board case 176 that houses 174, a power management unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines, and a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game store clerk and an RWM clear by being operated when the power is turned on A power board case 184 that houses a power board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs a signal to the main controller 300, and a CR interface 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided. ing.

  FIG. 535 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the ordinary device. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In this embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7 segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The multi-purpose hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general-purpose variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. In this embodiment, the general-purpose variable games are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are being held. In this embodiment, the special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, a general prize opening 226, a general figure starting opening 228, a first special figure starting opening 230, a second special figure starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are provided around the effect device 206. ing.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detecting sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning is sometimes referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player is sometimes referred to as “rental ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is constituted by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball for the upper plate 126. And the special figure changing game by the first special figure display device is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric Chu). In the present embodiment, only one second special figure starting port 232 is disposed directly below the first special figure starting port 230. The second special figure starting port 232 has a wing that can be opened and closed to the left and right, and the sphere cannot be entered while the wing is closed. When stopped, the blades open and close at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variable game by the second special figure display device is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a large winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is disposed below the center of the game board 200. This variable winning opening 234 has a door member that can be freely opened and closed, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the door member is closed, and the special figure display device stops and displays the jackpot symbol when the special figure variable game is won. In this case, the door member opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds) and at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

This pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches 146 Further, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 148 and driven into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc. (Outside the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.
<Directing device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball carried on by a nail of the game board 200, or the like, and the passed ball is a first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the golf course.

  In this embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b imitating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b at a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.
<Control unit>

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 A payout control unit 600 that mainly performs control related to payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and a power management unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. Yes.
<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing are mounted. . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a counter circuit 318 used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes two circuits). And a signal output from various sensors 320 including a ball detection sensor provided inside each start opening, winning opening and variable winning opening, and receiving an amplification result and a reference voltage. A sensor circuit 322 for outputting the comparison result to the counter circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the figure display device 210 and various status display units 328 (for example, a general map hold lamp 216, a first special figure hold run) 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the high-accuracy medium lamp 222, etc.), and a drive circuit 330 for performing display control, and various solenoids 332 for opening and closing the second special figure starting port 232, the variable prize opening 234, and the like. A drive circuit 334 for controlling is connected.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 126, the sensor circuit 320 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the counter circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the counter circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 126 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the first special figure starting port 126. Store in the register. Similarly, when the counter circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won the second special figure starting port 128, the counter circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 128. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 128.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power management unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. Game control is started when an activation signal is input.

The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.
<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effects data, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and for measuring time, frequency, etc. The counter timer 412 is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418, and a drive for performing drive control of the effect movable body 224. Detection from the circuit 422, the effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, the chance button detection sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136, and the effect movable body sensor 424 and the chance button detection sensor 426 A sensor circuit 428 that outputs a signal to the basic circuit 402 is connected to a second sub-control unit 500 for controlling the decorative symbol display device (liquid crystal display device) 208 and the shielding device 246.
<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply management unit>

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power management unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power management unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power management unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power management unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.
<Type of design>

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 537 (a) to 537 (c), the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped (Special Fig. 1, Special Fig. 2). The decorative symbols that the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays, and the types of ordinary symbols that the normal symbol display device 210 stops and displays will be described.

  FIG. 537 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special figure (special figure 1, special figure 2). The first special figure variable game is started on the condition that the ball detection sensor detects that a ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and that the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232 The second special figure variation game is started on condition that the ball detection sensor detects it. When the first special figure variable game is started, the first special figure display device 212 performs “fluctuation display of special figure 1” by repeating all lighting of seven segments and lighting of one central segment. . In addition, when the second special figure variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 2”. I do. These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display according to the present invention. When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 (corresponding to the fluctuation time in the present invention) elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, Further, when the variation time determined before the start of the variation display of the special figure 2 (this also corresponds to the variation time referred to in the present invention) elapses, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. To do. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display referred to in the present invention, hereinafter, after the “variable display of special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. The series of displays up to is referred to as “symbol fluctuation stop display”. As will be described later, the symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 537 (a), three types of special figures from “Special figure A” to “Special figure C” are shown as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation stop display. In the figure, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  “Special figure A” is 15 rounds (15R) special jackpot symbol (big hit symbol 1), “Special figure B” is 15 rounds (15R) big jackpot symbol (big jackpot symbol 2), and a predetermined number of times after the jackpot game ends ( In the present embodiment, a transition is made to the electric support state of 100 times. The electric support state refers to a state in which the blade 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 (electrical chew) is opened and closed at a predetermined time and a predetermined time interval (for example, opened for 2 seconds, closed for 0.5 seconds). .

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not it is a special big hit is determined by lottery of software random numbers. . The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. Moreover, the state which transfers to the above-mentioned electric support state is called a normal high probability state, and the state which does not transfer to an electric support state is called a normal low probability state. That is, the above jackpot symbol 1 is in the special figure high probability ordinary figure low probability state, and the jackpot symbol 2 is in the special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. These jackpot symbol 1 and jackpot symbol 2 are symbols in which the amount of profit given to the player is relatively large. Further, the “special chart C” is an off-line symbol, and is a symbol in which the profit amount given to the player is a relatively small profit amount.

  FIG. 537 (b) shows an example of a stop symbol form of a decorative symbol. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. Decorative symbol display on the condition that the ball detection sensor detects that a ball has entered the first special figure starting port 230 or the first special figure starting port 232 (subject to the start of the first special figure variable game) “Decoration 1” → “Decoration 2” → “Decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “Decoration” in the left symbol display area, middle symbol display area, and right symbol display area of the device 208. “Decoration pattern change display” is performed to switch the display in the order of “10” → “decoration 1” →. For example, when the 15R jackpot of “Special Figure B” is notified, a combination of symbols (for example, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” or “decoration”) corresponding to the 15R jackpot is arranged. 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 ") is stopped and displayed in the three symbol display areas. Further, when notifying 15R special jackpot of “special drawing A”, a combination of three symbols having the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” or “decoration 7—decoration 7— Decoration 7 "etc.) is stopped and displayed in the three symbol display areas. Further, when notifying the “special symbol C” deviation, symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG.

FIG. 537 (c) shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes for ordinary maps: “general diagram A” which is a winning symbol and “general symbol B” which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that a sphere has passed through the general-purpose start opening 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the usual figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in the figure, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.
<Main control unit main processing>

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input executes a main control unit main process shown in FIG. 5A in accordance with a control program that is reset and started by a reset interrupt and stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  First, in step S101, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. Also, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312; Processing to output a clear signal from the output port to the unit 400, setting to allow writing to the RAM 308, setting to disable interrupts, setting the stack initial value to the stack pointer (this setting), all storage areas of the RAM 308 Initializes etc.

  In step S103, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the ordinary figure winning random number counter and the special figure random value counter, the ordinary figure timer random number value, and the special figure timer, respectively. Two random number counters for generating random number values (timer number determining random number values) are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as normal timer random numbers is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal timer random value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. Further, after this basic random number initial value update process is completed, an interrupt permission is set, and the process proceeds to step S105.

In step S105, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated. In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a first special figure notice lottery random number counter for generating a first special figure notice lottery random number value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 127, and a value in the range of 0 to 127 are also taken. A second special figure notice lottery random number counter for generating a second special figure notice lottery random number value to be obtained is provided. In step S105, the values of these counters are updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the processes of step S103 and step S105 except during the timer interrupt process starting at predetermined intervals.
<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 538 (b). This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, detection of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors via the input port of the I / O 310. A signal is input to monitor the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each sensor 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  In step S201, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S201 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 536 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). In this step S201, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. Is determined to have passed. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been awarded to the winning ports 226 and 234 and the starting ports 230, 232, and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S203 and step S205, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value update process and the basic random number update process of the present embodiment, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S103 is updated and then used in the main control unit 300. Two random number counters for generating a numerical value (random number for jackpot determination) and a special figure 2 random value (random number for jackpot determination) are updated. For example, if the numerical value range that can be taken as the special figure 1 random value is 0 to 100, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area for generating the special figure 1 random value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a special figure 1 random number value that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), a value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random number value. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the random number value of Fig. 1 has made one round next. Keep it.

  In step S207, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S209, a winning determination process is performed. In this winning determination process, when there is a winning at the winning openings 226, 234 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228, the value of the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning opening or each starting opening is stored in the RAM 308. Read and add 1 and set to the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S211, a general map related process is performed. In the common figure related process, one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the common figure is performed. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the win symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in the off symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a fixed display of either the winning symbol or the off symbol. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member is held open by the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). In addition, a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out, the usual figure out flag is turned on as will be described later. When the off-normal flag is on, the normal state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing at which the normal stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S213.

  Further, in the common map-related process in step S211, a general map-related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In step S213, a special figure state update process (a special figure 2 state update process and a special figure 1 state update process) and a special figure related lottery process (a special figure 2 related lottery process and a special figure 1 related lottery process) are performed. First, in the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure related process in the middle of the special figure change display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns on / off drive control. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game).

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a big hit flag, a first miss flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and the like. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), the second special symbol display device 214 is configured. 7 segment LED lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs a definite display such as a big hit symbol or a lost symbol. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player.

  In addition, in order to execute the general command rotation stop setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S215), 4H is additionally stored as transmission information (general information) in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the variable display is stopped. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that is special figure 2 is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  Further, when the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 Is set in the setting area of, and waiting for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period in which an image is displayed to notify the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. In order to do this, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, 5H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command winning effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S215).

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Alternatively, the door member is held in the open state by the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member of the variable winning port 234 until the winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning port 234. A signal indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, 7H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command big prize opening release setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S215).

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member of the variable prize opening 234, and a closing period is indicated in a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information. Further, 8H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command big prize opening closing setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S215).

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts and closes the opening / closing control of the door member a predetermined number of times (15 rounds in this embodiment) and ends, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a decorative pattern Information indicating the effect standby period in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player that the big hit by the display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Set. Further, 6H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command end effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S215).

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of the range, the first out flag is turned on. When the first deviation flag is on, the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0). However, the special region 2 inactive is set in the setting area of the RAM 308.

  In step S213, a special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is subsequently performed. In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, the special figure related lottery process (special figure 2 related lottery process) for the special figure 2 is performed first, and then the special figure related lottery process (special figure 1 related lottery process) for the special figure 1 is performed. Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. Further, the notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the second special figure starting port 232 is notified. However, it is performed in preference to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the first special figure starting port 230.

  In step S215, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Note that the output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits in the present embodiment, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 11 -14 are command types (in this embodiment, commands such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, etc. Information that can specify the type), bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command setting transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating the value of the big hit flag, the value of the special symbol probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special symbol related lottery process, etc. In the case of a stop command, the value of the jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. are included. In the case of a round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds, etc. are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, winning of the variable winning port 234 Includes presence or absence.

  In the general command rotation start setting transmission process described above, the command data stored in the RAM 308 holds the value of the jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related process, and holds. Information indicating the number of first special figure variable games or second special figure variable games is set. In the general command rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above-mentioned general command winning effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation Information indicating the value of the flag, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, etc. is set. In the above-described general command end effect setting transmission process, command control data stored in the RAM 308, effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, special figure probability variation Information indicating the value of the flag, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, etc. is set. In the general command big prize opening release transmission process described above, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation held. Information indicating the number of games is set. In the above-mentioned general command big prize opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation held Information indicating the number of games is set. In step S215, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  Furthermore, in this command setting transmission process, output schedule information and payout request information are output to the payout control unit 600. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information are composed of 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when turned on) in bit 7, and power-on information (when turned on, indicating that data is set). Indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 indicate the number of payout requests after encryption processing. I am doing so.

  In step S217, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

In step S219, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal statuses of various sensors stored in the signal status storage area in the input port status update process of step S201 are read, and the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or a lower pan full error is monitored. Device information indicating whether there is a front frame door opening error or a lower plate full error is set in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 when a front frame door opening error or a lower plate full error is detected. To do. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the normal symbol display device 210 and the first special symbol display via the display circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. In addition, the output schedule information set in the command setting transmission process in step S215 is output to the first sub control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).
<Data table of main control unit>

Next, a data table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.
<Attack prefetch table>

  The success / failure look-ahead table shown in FIG. 539 (a) associates the type of special figure lottery state (special figure probability) stored in the game state storage area provided in the RAM 308, the lottery data, and the success / failure prefetch result. It is an example of the data table memorize | stored.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the lottery result of the special figure variable game is a win (big hit) based on the success / failure look-ahead table and the special figure lottery status information (special figure probability). A special figure look-ahead lottery is made to determine in advance whether or not to be off.

  The special drawing lottery state information includes information indicating a low probability state in which the special figure variable game is determined to be a win with a predetermined low probability (in this example, approximately 1/300 (= 218/65536)), and low probability. Higher information (in this example, about 1/60 (= 1090/65536)) and information indicating a high probability state for determining that the special figure variable game is won, etc. Or may be referred to as high probability (or with certainty).

  The lottery data in the success / failure prefetch table is lottery data used to determine the success / failure prefetch result of the special figure variable game. For example, when the special figure probability is low and the acquired jackpot determination random number value is 1000 to 1217, it is determined as a big hit as the success / failure look-ahead result. On the other hand, if the special drawing lottery state is in a low probability state and the acquired jackpot determination random number value is a numerical value other than 1000-1217, it is determined that the result of the pre-fetching preemption result is out of place.

In the present embodiment, the numerical value range that can be taken by the jackpot determination random number value is 0 to 65535 (the numerical value range is 65536), and the numerical value range of the big hit lottery data at a low probability is 1000 to 1217 (large numerical value range). Therefore, the probability of determining a big hit at a low probability is about 1/300 (= 218/65536). On the other hand, since the numerical range of the big hit lottery data at a high probability is 1000 to 2089 (the size of the numerical range is 1090), the probability of determining a big hit at the high probability is about 1/60 (= 1090 / 65536).
<Special Figure Failure / Prefetch Results Table>

  The special figure success / failure look-ahead result table shown in FIG. 539 (b) is an example of a data table in which the above-mentioned special figure variation game success / failure prefetch result, lottery data, and special figure prefetch result are associated and stored. .

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 determines the special figure prefetching table, the special figure variable game success / failure prefetch result, and the big hit special figure when the above-mentioned special figure variable game success / failure prefetch result is a big hit. A jackpot type prefetch lottery is performed in which the jackpot type (special figure prefetching result) is determined in advance based on the random number value.

For example, if the success / failure look-ahead result of special figure variation game is a big hit and the special figure determining random number for big hit is a value from 0 to 49, the big hit symbol 1 is selected as the special figure prefetch result and the big hit When the special figure determining random number is a numerical value of 50 to 99, the jackpot symbol 2 is selected as the special figure prefetching result. In the present embodiment, the possible numerical range of the special value for determining special figure for big hit time is 0 to 99 (the size of the numerical range is 100). In addition, when the result of the pre-fetching of the special figure variable game is out of order, the special figure C (out of symbol) is selected as the special figure pre-reading result without using the special figure pre-reading table.
<Win / fail judgment table>

  540 (a) associates the type of special drawing lottery state (special drawing probability) stored in the game state storage area provided in the RAM 308, lottery data, and the determination result. It is an example of the data table memorize | stored.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the lottery result of the special figure variable game is won (big hit) based on the winning / failing determination table and the special figure lottery status information (special figure probability). A special figure winning / not-seeing lottery is performed to determine whether or not.

  The lottery data in the success / failure determination table is lottery data used to determine the determination result of the special figure variation game. For example, when the special figure probability is low and the acquired big hit determination random number value is 1000 to 1217, it is determined that the special figure variable game is won (big hit), and the big hit flag is set to ON. On the other hand, when the special figure lottery state is in a low probability state and the acquired random number for jackpot determination is a numerical value other than 1000-1217, it is determined that the special figure variable game is lost and the jackpot flag is set to OFF. To do.

In the present embodiment, the numerical value range that can be taken by the jackpot determination random number value is 0 to 65535 (the numerical value range is 65536), and the numerical value range of the big hit lottery data at a low probability is 1000 to 1217 (large numerical value range). Is 218), the winning probability of jackpot of the low probability special figure variable game is about 1/300 (= 218/65536). On the other hand, since the numerical range of the big hit lottery data at a high probability is 1000-2089 (the size of the numerical range is 1090), the winning probability per jackpot of the high probability special figure variable game is about 1/60. (= 1090/65536), and the winning probability of the jackpot of the special figure variable game is set such that the higher probability is higher than the lower probability.
<Special figure determination table>

  The special figure determination table shown in FIG. 540 (b) is an example of a data table in which the above-described special figure variable game success / failure determination result, lottery data, and special figure determination result are stored in association with each other.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 determines the special figure determination table, the special figure variable game success / failure determination result, and the big hit special figure determination when the determination result of the special figure variable game is a big hit. A jackpot type lottery that determines the jackpot type (special figure determination result) is performed based on the random number value.

For example, if the result of determining whether or not the special figure variation game is successful is a big hit and the random number for determining the special figure for big hit is 0 to 49, select the big hit symbol 1 as the special figure determining result and When the special figure determining random number is a numerical value of 50 to 99, the jackpot symbol 2 is selected as the special figure determining result. In the present embodiment, the possible numerical range of the special value for determining special figure for big hit time is 0 to 99 (the size of the numerical range is 100). Also, if the result of determining whether or not the special figure variation game is correct is out of place, the special figure C (out of symbol) is selected as the special figure determination result without using the special figure determination table.
<Table set selection table>

  FIG. 540 (c) shows an example of the table set selection table. This table set selection table is a data table in which the above-mentioned special figure determination result, the special figure fluctuation frequency, and the timer selection table are stored in association with each other.

  When the above-mentioned special figure determination result is selected, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300, based on this table set selection table, the selected special figure determination result, the number of special figure fluctuations, and the timer selection table A table set selection lottery is performed.

For example, when the selected special figure determination result is the jackpot symbol 1 (special figure A), the variation count is 90 times, the timer selection table is a combination of the table 2, the variation count is 10 times, and the timer selection table is a table. The combination of 3 and the combination of the number of fluctuations of 0 and the timer selection table of table 2 are selected.
<Special figure timer number selection table>

  FIG. 541 shows an example of the special figure timer number selection table. This special figure timer number selection table is a special figure determination result based on the above-mentioned special figure determination table, the above-mentioned timer selection table, and the special figure variable game hold stored in the above-mentioned special figure hold number storage area. It is a data table in which lottery data classified by number and timer number determination results are stored in association with each other.

The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 includes the special figure timer number selection table, the special figure determination result based on the above special figure determination table, the timer selection table selected in the above table set selection lottery, and the above special figure. A special-purpose timer number lottery for determining the timer number is performed based on the number of holds and the random number value for determining the timer number. For example, the above-mentioned special figure determination result is special figure C (missing symbol), the above-mentioned timer selection table is table 1, the special figure holding number is 0 to 2, and the obtained timer number determination random number value is 0 to 89. If it is within the range, timer 3 (variation time 10 seconds) is selected as the timer number. Also, for example, the above-mentioned special figure determination result is acquired with the jackpot symbol 1 (special symbol A) or jackpot symbol 2 (special symbol B), the above-described timer selection table is the table 1, and the special symbol hold number is 3. When the timer number determination random number value is in the range of 0 to 1, timer 4 (variation time 12 seconds) is selected as the timer number. In the present embodiment, the possible numerical range of the timer number determination random number is 0 to 99 (the numerical range is 100).
<Variation time table>

  FIG. 542 is a diagram showing an example of the variation time table. This variation time table is a data table in which the above-described timer number determination result and the variation time are stored in association with each other.

The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 selects the variation time based on the variation time table and the above timer number determination result. For example, when the timer number determination result is timer 1, 2 seconds is selected as the variation time, and when the timer number determination result is timer 7, 20 seconds is selected as the variation time.
<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>

  Next, the process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305.

  In step S305, 0 is substituted into the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300. In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in S307, processing such as reading effect data corresponding to the command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when update of the effect data is necessary, effect data update processing is performed.

  In step S311, a chance button control process is performed. In this chance button control process, when pressing of the chance button 136 is detected, processing of changing the effect data updated in step S309 to effect data corresponding to the pressing of the chance button 136 is performed.

  In step S313, an image control process (details will be described later) shown in FIG. In step S315, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416. In step S317, if there is a command to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420. In step S319, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420. In step S321, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S303.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). Execute in the cycle.

  In step S501 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S503 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S321, an effect random number update process, and the like are performed.

  Next, the image control process in step S313 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605. If not, a transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S605, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets parameters according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

In step S609, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611. If not, the generation end interrupt signal is determined. Wait for input. In step S611, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.
<Character selection production>

  Next, the character selection effect executed by the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail. FIG. 544 is a diagram showing an example of the character select effect, and FIG. 545 is a time chart of the character select effect.

  When a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a big win is won in the big hit determination), the main control unit 300 causes the first sub control unit 400 to execute the character selection effect in the command setting transmission process of step S215. Transmits a character select effect start command for instructing. Subsequently, the main control unit 300 detects a winning of a predetermined number of gaming balls (for example, 10 balls) in the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds or the variable winning opening 234) in the special figure related processing in step S213. Up to a predetermined closing period (for example, 1 second) at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends after a signal for holding the door member in an open state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening / closing driving of the door member of the variable prize opening 234. ), A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening and closing the door member of the variable winning opening 234. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the door member opening / closing control (big hit game) a predetermined number of times (for example, 15R (round)). Note that the effect shown in FIG. 544 is an example of a character select effect that is executed on the 10R (round) of the big hit game.

The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the above-described character select effect start command starts the character select effect when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a start condition for each round in the jackpot game is satisfied). . Character selection effects according to the present embodiment are two of the character introduction effects shown in FIGS. 544 (a) to (c) and the character selection effects shown in FIGS. 5 (d), (f), (h), and (j). It consists of various types of production.
<Character introduction production>

  First, the character introduction effect will be described. In the effect control process of step S309, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 has the first character (in this example, the lord) as shown in FIG. An image in which the second character (爺 in this example) is located on the left rear and the third character (princess in this example) is located on the right rear (hereinafter referred to as “introduction image of the first character (dono)”) Image data of an image including the characters “Please select your favorite character!” And an image indicating the current number of rounds (in this example, an image including the characters 10R). Processing such as reading image data from the ROM 406 is performed. Subsequently, after the first sub-control unit 400 sets an instruction to transfer the plurality of image data from the ROM 406 to the drawing area of the VRAM 436 in the attribute register of the VDP 434 in the image transfer instruction in step S601. In the next step S601, the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436 is swapped. As a result, the introduction image of the first character (donor) as shown in FIG. 10A is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the second character (爺) is located at the first character (donor) as shown in FIG. In the center of the front, the first character (dono) was located at the right rear where the third character (princess) was located, and the third character (princess) was located at the second character (爺) For example, image data of a moving image (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “introduction image of the second character (爺)”) that moves to the left rear is read out from the ROM 406. Subsequently, in the image transfer instruction in step S601, the first sub-control unit 400 sets an instruction to transfer (overwrite) the above-described image data from the ROM 406 to the drawing area of the VRAM 436 in the attribute register of the VDP 434. After that, in the next step S601, the designation of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 436 is swapped. As a result, the introduction image of the second character (爺) as shown in FIG. 5B is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the third character (princess) is positioned as the second character (爺) as shown in FIG. In the center of the front, the second character (爺) was located at the right rear where the first character (dono) was located, and the first character (dono) was located at the third character (princess). For example, image data of a moving image (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “introduction image of a third character (princess)”) that moves to the left rear is read out from the ROM 406. Subsequently, in step S601, the first sub-control unit 400 sets an instruction for transferring (overwriting) the above-described image data from the ROM 406 to the drawing area of the VRAM 436 in the attribute register of the VDP 434, and next time. In step S601, the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436 is swapped. As a result, the introduction image of the third character (princess) as shown in FIG. 5C is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

Further, during the execution of the character introduction effect, the first sub-control unit 400 performs the effect data updated in the above step S309 (this even if the chance button 136 is detected to be pressed in the chance button control process in the above step S311). In the example, it is configured not to perform the process of changing the character introduction effect data) to effect data in response to pressing of the chance button 136. That is, the execution period of the character introduction effect shown in FIGS. 545 (a) to (d) is set to a button non-reception period in which the chance button 136 is not accepted (the operation of pressing the chance button 136 is ignored). .
<Character selection effect>

  Next, the character selection effect will be described. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 executes the character selection effect after executing the above-described character introduction effect for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). In this character selection effect, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 causes the first character (donor) to be displayed in the center of the front of the display area, as shown in FIG. The second character (爺) is located at the left rear and the third character (princess) is located at the right rear, and the first character (dono) in the center of the front is conspicuously displayed brightly (hereinafter, “ Image data of an image indicating the current number of rounds, image data of an image imitating the chance button 136, Processing such as reading out image data of the image including the characters “Press to select a character!” From the ROM 406 is performed. Subsequently, in step S601, the first sub control unit 400 sets an instruction to transfer the plurality of image data from the ROM 406 to the drawing area of the VRAM 436 in the attribute register of the VDP 434, and then the next step. In S601, the designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 436 is swapped. As a result, a temporarily selected image of the first character (donor) as shown in FIG. 4D is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, when this display is performed, the first sub-control unit 400 stores character identification information (for example, a numerical value of 1) indicating that the temporary selection image of the first character (donor) is being displayed in the RAM 408. Is stored in the character identification information storage area provided in FIG.

  Further, when the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the chance button 136 is pressed during the chance button control process in step S311 during execution of the character selection effect, the effect data updated in step S309 (this In the example, it is configured to perform a process of changing (effect data for character selection effect) to effect data in response to pressing of the chance button 136. That is, the execution period of the character selection effect shown in (d) to (k) of FIG. 545 is set as the button reception period for accepting the chance button 136.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 544 (e), when the first sub-control unit 400 detects pressing of the chance button 136 in the chance button control process of step S311, the first sub-control unit 400 updates in step S309. In the previous effect data, the second character (爺) is located in the center of the front where the first character (dono) was located, and the first character (dono) is located in the third character (princess). A video in which the third character (princess) has moved to the left rear where the second character (爺) was located, and the second character (爺) moved to the front center is brightened. A process of changing to image data of an image (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “second character (爺) temporarily selected moving image”) is performed. As a result, the temporarily selected moving image of the second character (爺) as shown in FIG. 8F is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, when displaying the moving image, the first sub-control unit 400 displays character identification information (for example, the numerical value 2) indicating that the temporarily selected moving image of the second character (爺) is displayed. ) Is overwritten and stored in the character identification information storage area.

  FIG. 546 is a diagram showing in detail an example of the temporarily selected moving image (character movement display) of the second character (爺) described above. In addition, the same figure (a), (b), (f) is a figure equivalent to the said FIG. 544 (d), (e), (f), The same figure (c)-(e) It is the figure which showed the mode of the change of the moving image between FIG. 544 (d)-(f).

  When the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the chance button 136 is pressed during the display of the temporarily selected image of the first character (donor) shown in FIG. As shown in (2), the second character (明 る く) is displayed brightly, and the second character (移動) is displayed so as to gradually move from the left rear to the front center. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a moving display that moves the third character (princess) from the right rear to the left rear in synchronization with the movement display of the second character (キ ャ ラ ク タ). Further, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the first character (donor) darkly in synchronization with the movement display of the second character (爺) and the third character (princess), and the front center To move to the right rear. As a result, the final image of the temporarily selected moving image of the second character (爺) as shown in FIG. 5F and FIG. 544F is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Returning to FIG. 544, when the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the chance button 136 is pressed in the chance button control process of step S <b> 311, as shown in FIG. The previous effect data updated in S309 is the same as the third character (princess) in the center of the front where the second character (爺) is located, and the second character (爺) is the first character (donor). The third character (princess) moves to the left rear where the first character (dono) was located, and to the left rear where the third character (princess) was located. A process of changing to image data of a brightened moving image (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “a temporarily selected moving image of a third character (princess)”) is performed. As a result, the temporarily selected moving image of the third character (princess) as shown in FIG. 9H is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, when performing the moving image display, the first sub-control unit 400 displays character identification information (for example, numerical value 3) indicating that the temporarily selected moving image of the third character (princess) is being displayed. Is overwritten and stored in the above-described character identification information storage area.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 5I, the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the chance button 136 has been pressed in the chance button control process in step S311 and updates the previous time updated in step S309. In the effect data, the first character (dono) is in the center of the front where the third character (princess) is located, and the third character (princess) is in the right rear where the second character (第) is located. In addition, the third character (princess) moves to the left rear where the first character (dono) is located, and the first character (dono) moving to the center of the front is brightened. A process of changing to image data of one character (temporarily selected moving image) is performed. As a result, the temporarily selected moving image of the first character (donor) as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, each time the first sub-control unit 400 detects pressing of the chance button 136, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the temporarily selected moving image of the first character (donor) shown in FIG. Character identification information (1 in this example) indicating that the second character (爺) is temporarily displayed as shown in (f) of the figure, and character identification indicating that the display is being performed. Storage of information (2 in this example) → Display of the temporarily selected moving image of the third character (princess) shown in (h) of the figure, and character identification information (3 in this example) indicating that the display is being performed ) In the order of storage →..., The process of switching the display of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the process of overwriting and storing the character identification information for specifying the temporarily selected character in the character identification information storage area Carried out.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 544 (k), the main control unit 300, when the big hit game end condition is satisfied in the special figure related processing in step S213 described above (for example, a predetermined time (for example, after the round is started) 30 seconds) or when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) have won a prize in the variable prize opening 234 during one round) for opening / closing driving of the door member of the variable prize opening 234 A signal for holding the door member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 and the general command big prize opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process in step S 215, and the first sub-control unit 400 receives the character A character select effect end command for ending execution of the select effect is transmitted.

  The first sub-control unit 400 that has received this character select effect end command is configured to automatically select one character from a plurality of characters according to a predetermined condition at the time when the command is received. In this embodiment, the character identification information stored in the above-described character identification information storage area (in this example, the numerical value 1 indicating the first character (donor)) is used as character confirmation information in the character provided in the RAM 408. Store (copy) in the confirmed information storage area.

  Further, the first sub-control unit 400 indicates that the character (donor) has been automatically selected based on the above-described character determination information (in this example, the numerical value 1 indicating the first character (donor)). An image including image data of an image to be represented (hereinafter may be referred to as a “character determination image”) and a character (in this example, a character “determined to!”) Suggesting an automatically selected character (dono) The image data of the next round image and the image data of the image indicating the next round number (in this example, the image including the character 11R) are read out from the ROM 406.

Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 sets an instruction to transfer the above-described image data from the ROM 406 to the drawing area of the VRAM 436 in the attribute register of the VDP 434 in the image transfer instruction in step S601, and then In step S601, the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436 is swapped. As a result, a character determination image as shown in FIG. 10L is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 determines the period of time indicated by (k) to (l) in FIG. 545, that is, the period from the end of the character selection effect until the start of the next round (11R in this example). The acceptance period is set so that the chance button 136 is not accepted (the press of the chance button 136 is ignored).
<Button operation during character movement display>

  Next, a change mode of the movement display when the chance button 136 is pressed during the above-described character movement display will be described.

  FIG. 547 is a diagram showing an example in which the character movement display is interrupted when the chance button 136 is pressed during the character movement display.

  When the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the chance button 136 is pressed while the temporarily selected image of the first character (donor) shown in FIG. As shown in d), the movement display of the second character (爺) is started. When the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the chance button 136 is pressed during the movement display of the second character (爺) ((e) in the same figure), Instead of the character (爺), the third character (princess) is moved and displayed as shown in FIGS.

  More specifically, when the first sub-control unit 400 detects the pressing of the chance button 136 during the movement display of the second character (爺) ((e) in the same figure), the second character (爺) is displayed darkly after being moved from the position shown in FIG. 4 (d) to the center of the front and slightly to the right shown in FIG. ) And moved to the position shown in FIG. Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 moves the third character (princess) from the left rear to the front center as shown in (g) to (i) of FIG. The moving display is performed. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a movement display for moving the first character (dono) from the right rear side to the left rear side in synchronization with the movement display of the third character (princess). Further, the first sub-control unit 400 moves the second character (爺) from the front center to the right rear in synchronization with the movement display of the third character (princess) and the first character (dono). The moving display is performed. As a result, the final image of the temporarily selected moving image of the third character (princess) as shown in (i) of the figure is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, when performing the moving image display, the first sub-control unit 400 displays character identification information (for example, numerical value 3) indicating that the temporarily selected moving image of the third character (princess) is being displayed. Is overwritten and stored in the above-described character identification information storage area.

  FIG. 548 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the character movement display is not interrupted when the chance button 136 is pressed during the character movement display.

When the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the chance button 136 is pressed while the temporarily selected image of the first character (donor) shown in FIG. As shown in d), the movement display of the second character (爺) is started. Even when the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the chance button 136 is pressed during the movement display of the second character (爺) (FIG. (E)), (f) to (g) in FIG. As shown in (h) to (k), the second character (爺) continues to be moved and displayed in accordance with the above-described character movement display process. A moving display is performed to move the character (princess) from the left rear to the front center. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a movement display for moving the first character (dono) from the right rear side to the left rear side in synchronization with the movement display of the third character (princess). Further, the first sub-control unit 400 moves the second character (爺) from the front center to the right rear in synchronization with the movement display of the third character (princess) and the first character (dono). The moving display is performed. As a result, the final image of the temporarily selected moving image of the third character (princess) as shown in FIG. 10 (k) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, when performing the moving image display, the first sub-control unit 400 displays character identification information (for example, numerical value 3) indicating that the temporarily selected moving image of the third character (princess) is being displayed. Is overwritten and stored in the above-described character identification information storage area.
<Second example of character selection production>

  Next, a second example of character selection effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 549 and 550. 549 is a diagram showing a second example of the character select effect, and FIG. 550 is a time chart of the second example of the character select effect.

  In the character selection effects shown in FIGS. 544 and 545 described above, an example in which the big hit game end condition is satisfied after the player presses the chance button 136 in the character selection effect (button reception period) after the character introduction effect ends. As shown, this second example is a big hit game ending condition (in this example, during one round) during the character introduction effect shown in FIGS. 549 (a) to (c) (during the button non-acceptance period effect). This is an example in which a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls are awarded) in the variable winning opening 234, that is, an example in which the big hit game end condition is established without the player pressing the chance button 136 once.

  In the character selection effects shown in FIG. 544 and FIG. 545, the first sub-control unit 400 stores the character selection effect end command in the character identification information storage area when receiving the character select effect end command based on the establishment of the big hit game end condition. The stored information is stored (copied) in the character determination information storage area as character determination information (based on the player's chance button 136 operation). In this second example, the character selection effect ends. When the command is received, the character identification information (in this example, the numerical value indicating the second character (爺)) determined under a predetermined condition (for example, a lottery for determining one numerical value from 1 to 3) 2) as the character confirmation information (not based on the player's operation of the chance button 136) It is stored in the determination information storage area.

  Note that the “predetermined condition” is not limited to lottery, and for example, the character identification information may be determined based on a gaming state (the number of rounds in a big hit game, the number of special figure variable games held, etc.). The character identification information may be determined in advance, may be determined as the character identification information automatically selected last time, or may be determined as the character identification information previously selected by the player.

  Further, the first sub-control unit 400 confirms that the character (爺) has been automatically selected based on the character determination information (in this example, the numerical value 2 indicating the second character (爺)). An image including image data of an image to be represented (hereinafter may be referred to as a “character determination image”) and a character (in this example, a character “determined as ！!”) suggesting an automatically selected character (爺) The image data of the current round number and the image data indicating the current round number (in this example, the image including the character 10R) are read out from the ROM 406.

Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 sets an instruction to transfer the above-described image data from the ROM 406 to the drawing area of the VRAM 436 in the attribute register of the VDP 434 in the image transfer instruction in step S601, and then In step S601, the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436 is swapped. As a result, a character determination image as shown in FIG. 549 (e) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 determines the period of time indicated by (a) to (e) in FIG. 550, that is, the period from the start of the character introduction effect to the start of the next round (11R in this example). The acceptance period is set so that the chance button 136 is not accepted (the press of the chance button 136 is ignored).
<Third example of character selection production>

  Next, a third example of character selection effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 551 and 552. FIG. 551 is a diagram illustrating a third example of the character select effect, and FIG. 552 is a time chart of the third example of the character select effect.

  In the character selection effects shown in FIGS. 544 and 545 described above, an example in which the big hit game end condition is satisfied after the player presses the chance button 136 in the character selection effect (button reception period) after the character introduction effect ends. Although shown, in this third example, after the character introduction effect (button non-acceptance period) shown in FIGS. 551 (a) to (c) ends, the character selection effect (button reception period) shown in FIG. 551 (d). In this example, the big hit game end condition is established without the player pressing the chance button 136 even once.

  In the character selection effects shown in FIG. 544 and FIG. 545, the first sub-control unit 400 stores the character selection effect end command in the character identification information storage area when receiving the character select effect end command based on the establishment of the big hit game end condition. In the third example, the stored information is stored (copied) in the above-described character determination information storage area as character determination information (based on the player's chance button 136 operation). In the third example, When the character selection effect end command is received, the character identification information (in this example, the third character (princess) is determined under a predetermined condition (for example, a lottery that determines one value from 1 to 3). ) As the character confirmation information (not based on the player's operation of the chance button 136). Stored in the character confirmation information storage area.

  Further, the first sub-control unit 400 confirms that the character (princess) has been automatically selected based on the character determination information (in this example, the numerical value 3 indicating the third character (princess)). An image including image data of an image to be represented (hereinafter may be referred to as a “character determination image”) and characters (in this example, a character “determined as a princess!”) Suggesting an automatically selected character (princess) The image data of the next round image and the image data of the image indicating the next round number (in this example, the image including the character 11R) are read out from the ROM 406.

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 sets an instruction to transfer the above-described image data from the ROM 406 to the drawing area of the VRAM 436 in the attribute register of the VDP 434 in the image transfer instruction in step S601, and then In step S601, the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436 is swapped. Thereby, a character determination image as shown in FIG. 551 (f) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 determines the period of time indicated by (e) to (f) in FIG. 552, that is, the period from the end of the character selection effect until the start of the next round (11R in this example). The acceptance period is set so that the chance button 136 is not accepted (the press of the chance button 136 is ignored).

In the above embodiment, the example in which the character selection effect is ended at the timing when the variable winning opening 234 is changed from the open state to the closed state is shown. However, as shown in FIG. 553, the variable winning opening 234 is closed from the open state. After changing to the state, the character selection effect may be ended after holding the closed state for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second).
<Other examples of character selection effects>

  Next, another example of the character selection effect will be described with reference to FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 11A, the first sub-control unit 400 surrounds the first character (donor) located at the front center of the display area with an elliptical cursor as shown on the left side of the figure. In addition, a process of displaying an image in which the second character (爺) is located at the left rear and the third character (princess) is located at the right rear in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. Subsequently, when the first sub-control unit 400 detects pressing of the chance button 136 in the character selection effect (button reception period) described above, the first character (donor) as shown on the right side of FIG. Is the right rear where the third character (princess) was located, the third character (princess) is located behind the left where the second character (爺) was located, and the second character (爺) is the second The second character (殿) at the center of the front is moved to the center of the front where the first character (dono) was located, and the second character (爺) at the center of the front is displayed in the display area of the image decoration symbol display device 208 surrounded by the oval cursor. Processing to be displayed is performed. As in this example, one of a plurality of characters may be specified using a figure such as a cursor instead of the brightness of the character.

  In the example shown in FIG. 5B, the first sub-control unit 400 uses an ellipse cursor as the first character (donor) located at the front center of the display area as shown on the left side of the figure. A process of displaying an image surrounded by the second character (キ ャ ラ ク タ) on the left rear and a third character (princess) on the right rear in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. Subsequently, when the first sub-control unit 400 detects pressing of the chance button 136 in the character selection effect (button reception period) described above, as shown on the right side of FIG. Without moving the cursor, the cursor located at the location of the first character (dono) is moved to the third character (princess) on the right rear side. As in this example, one of a plurality of characters may be specified by moving a figure such as a cursor without changing the character display position.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 10C, the first sub-control unit 400, as shown on the left side of the drawing, is a region located in the center of the display region (in this example, a plurality of rectangular regions). The background color of the area including the characters “M3: Sense or Reality”) is set to a color different from the background color of other images. Subsequently, when the first sub-control unit 400 detects pressing of the chance button 136 in the character selection effect (button reception period) described above, as shown on the right side of FIG. By rotating in order from the bottom to the top, the background color of the region located in the center of the display region (in this example, the region including the characters “M2: Distance”) is different from the background color of other images. Set to. As in this example, the color of a specific area may be configured to specify one of a plurality of pieces of information by making the colors of other areas different.

  In the example shown in FIG. 5D, the character to be selected based on the predetermined condition described with reference to FIG. 551 is surrounded by a cursor, and the automatically selected character is notified in advance. With such a configuration, since the automatically selected character can be grasped in advance, the player who wants to select the character can concentrate on the current game without worrying about the character selection. A player who wants to select another character can change it to a favorite character in advance.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a predetermined symbol display device (for example, a special symbol 1 display device, The first control state in which the advantage for the player is the first advantage (for example, the state in which the door member of the variable winning opening 234 is closed, the predetermined symbol display on the special figure 2 display device, the decorative symbol display device) The second advantage that is higher than the first advantage from the control state in which the symbol variation stop display is performed on the device, the control state with probability change, the control state with electric support, and the like. Control state transition means (for example, special figure state update processing in special figure-related processing) that shifts the control state to a control state (for example, a big hit gaming state in which the door member of the variable prize opening 234 is opened and closed a predetermined number of times); Produce a game Effect image (for example, a character selection effect image, a plurality of cases when a specific symbol form is stopped and displayed as a result of the symbol variation stop display during a period during which symbol variation stop display is performed on a predetermined symbol display device. The effect display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol display device) for displaying a predetermined competition image (for example, a competition) in which a specific character image of the character images of the character wins another character. A separate image display device) and a predetermined image selection effect period (for example, during character selection effect) by a player from among a plurality of images (for example, images of first to third characters). Storage means (for example, character identification information provided in the RAM 408) that stores specific image information (for example, character identification information) that can identify the selected image. Effect control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500) that causes the effect display means to display an image specified by the specific image information stored in the storage means. ) And an operation reception unit (for example, a chance button 136) for receiving a selection operation by the player, during the image selection effect period (for example, during execution of the character selection effect) , A selected state image (for example, second images shown in FIGS. 548 (c) to (g)) indicating that a predetermined image (for example, the image of the second character (爺)) among the plurality of images is in a selected state. Is displayed on the effect display means, and when the selected state image indicates that the predetermined image is in the selected state, the operation accepting unit performs the selection operation by the player. When the composition is accepted, a predetermined selection change animation (for example, a temporarily selected moving image of the third character (princess) as shown in FIGS. 548 (h) to (k)) is displayed on the effect display means, and then As shown in FIG. 547 (k), for example, the selected state image (for example, the image of the third character (princess)) among the plurality of images is selected. The final image of the third character (princess) temporarily selected moving image) is displayed on the effect display means, and when a predetermined confirmation condition is satisfied (for example, a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the start of the round). When one or both of the cases where a predetermined number of game balls have won (for example, 10 balls) in the variable winning opening 234 during one round or when other predetermined conditions are met, ) Selected image The specific image information (for example, character identification information) that can be specified is configured to be stored in the storage unit, and after the selection change animation, based on the fact that the operation reception unit has received a selection operation by a player. When the selection display image indicating that a specific image is in the selection state is displayed on the effect display means, if the operation receiving unit receives a selection operation by the player during the selection change animation, the selection change animation The selected state image indicating that an image (for example, an image of a third character (princess)) different from a specific image (for example, an image of a second character (爺)) is in a selected state later It is a gaming machine characterized by displaying on a display means.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, by making it easier to reflect the player's intention in the production, there is a case where it is possible to increase the consciousness of participation in the game, it is possible to enhance the production effect and improve the interest of the game There is a case.

  Further, based on the fact that the operation reception unit has received a selection operation by a player when the selection state image indicating that a predetermined pre-change image is in a selection state is displayed on the effect display means, It is comprised so that the said selection state image which shows that the predetermined | prescribed change image is a selection state after displaying a selection change animation on the said effect display means, The said change image ( For example, the second character (爺) shown in FIG. 547 (d) is included, and the selection is performed when the operation receiving unit receives a selection operation by the player during the selection change animation. The post-change image in the change animation is an image (for example, shown in FIG. 547 (f)) that is indicated as being selected by the selection state image after the animation. It may be configured to replace the third character image (princess)).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to immediately notify that the selection operation by the player has been accepted, and there are cases where the interest can be improved by concentrating on the game without giving the player anxiety.

  Further, a variable winning in which the open / close state can be changed from one of a predetermined closed state (for example, a closed state) and a predetermined open state (for example, an open state) in which a game ball can be won more easily than the closed state. The second control state includes a round operation for changing the open / close state of the variable prize opening a predetermined number of times from the closed state to the open state a predetermined number of times (for example, a variable prize opening 234). 15 times), the first control state is a control state in which the round operation is not performed, and the end condition of the image selection effect period is a specific round in the second control state. It may be configured to be established when the number of game balls won in the variable prize opening after starting the operation becomes a specific number or more.

  With such a configuration, image selection effects are performed during small hits, during variable prize opening operations, during variable prize opening opening, or during big hits, etc. In some cases, it may be possible to entertain more games. In addition, for players who enjoy the game more than the production side, that is, for the player who quickly enters the game ball into the variable prize opening, the control means selects the image instead of forcing the image selection. It may be possible to progress through the game.

  In addition, a launching device (e.g., launching device 110) that launches a game ball at every elapse of a predetermined launch period based on the player's operation, and a game ball launched by the launching device flow down and the variable prize opening is A game area (for example, game area 124) provided, and the playback time of the selection change animation may be longer than the firing period (for example, 6 seconds).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to visually display that the selection has been accepted by animation so that even a beginner can easily understand it, and the production effect may be enhanced. On the other hand, especially at the end of the selection period, it may seem that the animation reproduction period is troublesome for a player who rushes the selection. When it is possible to increase the player's participation consciousness by accepting the player's selection so that the selection period does not end by winning one game ball at the variable prize opening during the animation There is.

  In addition, the image selection effect period includes a first period and a second period starting after the first period, and during the first period (for example, FIGS. 548 (c) to (g) ) During the reproduction of the temporarily selected moving image of the second character (爺) and the button non-acceptance period), the selection operation during the selection change animation is ignored (the temporary character of the second character (爺)). During the second period (for example, during the reproduction of the temporarily selected moving image of the third character (princess) shown in FIGS. 548 (h) to (k)) , During the button reception period), based on the selection operation during the selection change animation, the image (for example, the image of the third character (princess)) indicated as being selected by the selection state image is changed. You may comprise as follows.

  With such a configuration, at the end of the selection period, there are many scenes where the selection can be made for various reasons, such as wanting to make a selection quickly due to a selection error, etc. May increase the awareness of participation.

  In the above embodiment, an example in which a character selection effect is performed using an image (a still image or a moving image) has been described. However, a sound effect by the speaker 120, an effect by the operation of the effect movable body 224, and various lamps 418. It is also possible to perform a production by Moreover, although the 1st sub control part 400 showed the example which performs the production | presentation control of a character selection production | presentation based on the command from the main control part 300, it is not limited to this.

  Further, the game table according to the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. For example, in addition to the pachinko machine 100 (1 type), it can be applied to a pachinko machine (2 types, 3 types), a sealed pachinko machine, a pachinko machine, and the like. It can also be applied to smart balls and the like.

  Further, for example, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine using medals (coins) as a game medium. Here, as a slot machine to which the present invention is applied, a plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols, a start switch for starting rotation of the plurality of reels, and each of the plurality of reels are provided. Provided by a stop switch that individually stops the rotation of the reels, lottery means for determining whether or not an internal winning of a plurality of predetermined winning combinations is made by lottery, and the plurality of reels when stopped An example includes a determination unit that determines whether or not the winning combination is determined based on whether or not the combination of symbols is a winning combination that has been won internally by the lottery means.

  Further, for example, a game can be executed by applying the present invention to a game program that simulates the operation of a real machine such as a pachinko machine for a home game machine.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely a list of the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to things.

  <Other Embodiments (Embodiments in which Button Operation is Valid Even if Button Operation Display is Not Displayed)>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 555 to FIG. 572, a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine or the like) according to another embodiment of the present invention (an embodiment in which button operation is enabled even when button operation display is not performed). The ball and ball game machine and the spinning machine game machine such as a slot machine will be described in detail. Note that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 555 to 572 are used only in the description of the present embodiment in principle, and even in the case where the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the description of the present embodiment 555 to 572 are given priority. On the other hand, in the following description, about the code | symbol which is not shown by FIGS. 555-572, the same code | symbol is used as the same component as said embodiment. In addition, when there are drawings showing the same timing in a plurality of drawings, overlapping description may be omitted. In addition, the number of the example of this embodiment is used only for the description of this embodiment in principle, but each example of this embodiment and each example of other embodiments are applied in combination with each other. Can do.

  FIG. 555 is a diagram for explaining the outline of the present embodiment, and shows an example of the operation of the operation means (for example, the chance button 136) and the effect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  As shown in FIGS. 9A and 9D, an operation means image BG (in this example, a chance button 136) that suggests the operation of the operation means (here, the chance button 138) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Image) and an elapsed time notification image TG for notifying the reception period of the operation means (in this example, the scale of the meter (filled portion) gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136. When the operation means operation display (hereinafter referred to as button operation display) is displayed by an image (decrease display of scale) and the effect during the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is being executed, the operation of the chance button 136 is performed. (B), (e)), the operation is accepted. As shown in (c), (f), the player accepts the operation by changing the production mode. To inform that was.

  Here, as an example, the production mode is changed such that the scale display of the elapsed time notification image TG is temporarily stopped and another production display is executed. That is, in this case, when a display prompting the operation of the operation means (chance button 136) (hereinafter referred to as a button operation display 800) is executed, it corresponds to the button operation display 800 (indicated by the button operation display 800). ) Operation of the chance button 136 (operation reception) is valid. In the following description, the button operation display 800 will be described by taking an example of a display including an operation means image BG simulating the chance button 136 and an elapsed time notification image TG that notifies the elapsed state of the reception period. However, the button operation display 800 is not limited to this example as long as it is an effect display that prompts the player to operate a specific operation means (notifies that the operation means is being accepted). The button operation display 800 may not include the elapsed time notification image TG.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 5G, there are a plurality of operation buttons (here, a chance button 136 and other operation buttons 810) that can be operated by the player, and the chance button 136 is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The button operation display 800 suggesting the operation of the other operation button 810 is displayed, but the button operation display suggesting the operation of the other operation buttons 810 is not displayed. In this case, even if the chance button 136 corresponding to the button operation display 800 (indicated by the button operation display 800) is operated, the operation becomes invalid, and the operation of the other operation buttons 810 becomes valid.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, even when the operation means operation display (button operation display) of the first operation means (other operation buttons 810) is not executed, the first operation means (other operation buttons 810) The acceptance of the operation of the operation button 810) is validated.

In addition, in a game machine having a first operation means (another operation button 810) and a second operation button (chance button 136), an operation operation means operation display (button operation display 800) relating to the second operation button is executed. The first operation means (other operation buttons) in which the button operation display is not performed while invalidating the operation of the second operation means (chance button 136) suggested in the button operation display 800. 810) is made effective. Thereby, a variety of button operation effects may be provided to increase the interest of the player. Hereinafter, the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
<Circuit configuration of control unit>

The circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game, and various devices according to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as “commands”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. In response to the first sub-control unit 400 to be controlled, the second sub-control unit 500 mainly controlling the production based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and the power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. Yes.
<Main control unit>

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing are mounted. . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 also includes a counter circuit (random value generation circuit) 318 (a random number generation circuit) that is used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit includes two counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, or opening the front frame door A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, and a lower pan full sensor, and outputting a comparison result with an amplification result and a reference voltage to the counter circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302; A driving circuit 324 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214; A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the pattern display device, for example, the general map display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, the general map hold lamp 216, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp) 220, a high-accuracy medium lamp 222, etc.) and a drive circuit 330 for performing display control and a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232, a door member 234a of the variable winning port 234, etc. A drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 to be driven is connected.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the counter circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the counter circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the counter circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the second special figure starting port 232 has won a ball, the counter circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.
<Sub control unit>

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effects data, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and for measuring time, frequency, etc. The counter timer 412 is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier) and a drive for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138 and the game table frame lamp 122). A circuit 420, a drive circuit 432 for performing drive control of the movable parts of the chance button 136 and the button unit 190, a button detection sensor 426 and various sensors 430 for detecting pressing of the chance button 136 and pressing of the button unit 190, A sensor circuit 428 that outputs detection signals from the various sensors 430 and the button detection sensor 426 to the basic circuit 402 is connected.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and frequency 512 is installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, and an image display A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

Further, the basic circuit 502 includes the current stage of the effect movable body 224, the shielding device 246, the drive circuit 516 for performing drive control of the movable part of the movable display device 288, the effect movable body 224, and the shielding device 246. An effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting the position, a sensor circuit 518 for outputting a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424 to the basic circuit 502, and a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532 And a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the basic circuit 502 and the game board lamp drive circuit 530.
<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the dispensing device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.
<LCD control unit>

  Next, the liquid crystal control unit 700 will be described. The liquid crystal control unit 700 receives the control command transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface, and temporarily stores data with the CPU 704 that controls the entire liquid crystal control unit 700 based on the control command. A RAM 708, a control program and data for controlling the entire liquid crystal control unit 700, a ROM 506 storing image display data, and the like, and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 710. The CPU 704 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 714A as a system clock.

The VDP 710 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 714B as a system clock, reads out image data and the like stored in the CGROM 716 based on a signal from the CPU 404, and uses the work area of the VRAM 718. A display image is generated and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the movable display device 288.
<Data Transmission / Reception Between First Sub-Control Unit 400 and Liquid Crystal Control Unit 700>

  Next, as a premise of the present embodiment, a general data transmission / reception relationship between the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 557 to 560.

  First, FIG. 557 (a) shows an example of data held in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400, and FIG. 5 (b) shows an example of a liquid crystal command. FIG. 6C is a timing chart showing the data transmission / reception relationship between the first sub-control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700.

  The first sub-control unit 400 displays the box data (for example, box data A1) shown in FIG. 5A at the timing of each effect execution, such as when the change starts, when the hold increases, when the big hit starts, or when the button operation effect occurs. Is set in the box data setting area of the RAM 408. The box data includes a liquid crystal command (here, liquid crystal command 05), a position (here, as an example, position 00, position 01), and the like. Thereby, the storage position (position) of each part is set in the box data. Here, position 00 (first address) is set as the storage position of part 01 in the box data, and position 01 (first address) is set as the storage position of part A2. The box data is set when the first sub control unit 400 sets a liquid crystal command to be transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 700.

  The positions are arranged in a predetermined area of the RAM 408, and parts corresponding to a plurality of positions (here, positions 00 to 9F) are stored. For example, in the example shown in the figure, part 01 is stored at position 00, part 01 is stored at position 01, and part A1 is stored at position 04. Note that parts need not be stored in all of the plurality of positions.

  The parts data list is arranged in a predetermined area of the RAM 408, and stores part data corresponding to a plurality of parts (here, parts 00, 01, A1, and A2. The part data corresponds to each effect. Output sound (sound) from the speaker 120 to be executed, the light emission mode of the lamp L (various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), the game board lamp 532, etc.), movable objects (effect movable bodies 246, 224, movable This is information on the movable state of the display device 288).

  Each part data includes a sound layer having sound device data, a run player having lamp device data, an accessory action layer having shutter device data, sub liquid crystal movable part device data, and the like. The sound device data, the shutter device data, the sub liquid crystal movable unit device data, and the like here have one or a plurality of device data. For example, when there are a plurality of lamp device data, the first lamp device data is information on the light emission mode of the lamp at the time of BGM output, and the second lamp device data is information on the light emission mode of the lamp at the time of one notification. is there. Further, for example, the number of each layer is one or more, and when there are a plurality of layers, the priorities are different from each other.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, the liquid crystal commands (here, the liquid crystal command 05 of the box data A1) correspond to the start of fluctuation, the increase of hold, the start of jackpot, the occurrence of button operation effects, etc., respectively. A command (for example, liquid crystal display 0D) for displaying the effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and return commands 00 and 01 are included.

  The first sub-control unit 400 sets the box data (liquid crystal command) described above at each production execution timing (for each production), transmits the liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700, and sets each part at the position. To do. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives a return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the corresponding position in the RAM 408, and when part data is stored, the sound of the sound layer of the part data is stored. The light emitting mode of the run player and the movable mode of the accessory action layer are set as transmission commands and transmitted to each device, and an effect corresponding to the effect display is performed.

  Note that fixed data is not stored in the position, but the data is switched at the timing of execution of each effect (for each effect).

  As shown in FIG. 10C, the first sub-control unit 400 performs the effect lottery process in the effect control process of the first sub-control unit main process, and performs the various effects according to the result. A control command is transmitted to 700, speaker 120, lamp, movable object, and the like. Here, in this embodiment, a button operation effect (effect related to reception of an operation of the chance button 136) will be described as an example of the effect. As effects related to the acceptance of the operation of the chance button 136, the button operation display 800 (in the figure, (liquid crystal) effect display) by the decorative symbol display device 208, the light emission effect of the chance button lamp 138 (in the figure, (sub) button LED), There are other sound and light emission effects (in the figure, effects such as (sub) sound lamps), and the timing charts in FIGS. 557 to 563 mainly show these effects.

For example, when performing the effect of starting symbol variation, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a plurality of box data A1 (ie, liquid crystal commands) to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (A). A plurality of liquid crystal commands are prepared according to the type of effect. For example, in this case, the liquid crystal command includes, for example, information such as data returned after the chance button 136 is pressed, and the decorative symbol display device 208. A command for instructing the start of the decorative symbol display is included.

  Although not shown, the liquid crystal control unit 700 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 to perform control such as a decorative symbol change display and a notice effect, and transmits a return command to the first sub-control unit 400 (B). The return command also includes position information, and the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the return command corresponds to the part data when there is a position (part data) setting corresponding to the box data. Configure command transmission settings. For example, when position information is included in the return command, various parts data (sound, light emission mode, etc.) corresponding to the parts stored in the position of the RAM 408 are set in the transmission command, and the speaker 120 is set. , Respectively, to the chance button lamp 138. Thereby, the 1st sub control part 400 performs various productions. Note that a position that can be said to be a single command may be transmitted as a return command, but a plurality of positions may be transmitted such as box data.

  Next, the liquid crystal control unit 700 performs the button operation effect (the button operation display 800 and the accompanying effect) at the timing (timing (C) for enabling the reception of the operation of the chance button 136 (starting the reception)). Then, an effect display (button operation display 800) prompting the user to press the button is executed on the decorative symbol display device 208 (D).

  Further, the liquid crystal control unit 700 transmits a return command to the first sub control unit 400 at the timing of performing this button operation effect (C). The return command includes position information as data for performing the button operation effect, and the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the information validates the operation reception of the chance button 136 (E), and the RAM 408 Data of various parts corresponding to the parts stored in the position (light emission mode of the chance button lamp 138) is set in the transmission command and transmitted to the chance button lamp 138. Further, a drive command for the chance button lamp 138 is transmitted. Thereby, the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined light emission mode (F).

  When the chance button 136 is operated during the operation reception valid period of the chance button 136 (G), the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (G). The liquid crystal control unit 700 that has received the liquid crystal command ends the operation acceptance valid period of the chance button 136 (makes the operation acceptance invalid), and returns to the first sub control unit 400 to transmit the command (H). Further, the button operation display 800 on the decorative symbol display device 208 is ended (I).

The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the return command ends the operation acceptance valid period (makes the operation acceptance invalid (J)), and various parts data (chance button lamps) corresponding to the parts stored in the RAM 408 position. 138 (emission mode, sound, etc.) is set in the transmission command and transmitted to the chance button lamp 138 and the speaker 120. These drive commands are transmitted. Further, the chance button lamp 138 and the speaker 120 are controlled. Thereby, the light emission of the chance button lamp 138 is finished (K), and effects such as sound and other lamps L are executed for a predetermined period ((K) to (L)). Thereafter, the symbol variation ends (M).
<Example 1 of timing chart>

  FIG. 558 is a timing chart showing an example of general data transmission / reception between the first sub-control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700, and shows a command (liquid crystal command) transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 ) Is an example in which a button operation effect is executed. FIG. 4A shows a case where the operation of the chance button 136 is not performed during the validity period of the operation reception of the chance button 136, and FIG. , The case where the chance button 136 is operated is shown. In the timing chart described below with reference to the drawings, only main timing is extracted, but as described above, transmission and reception of liquid crystal commands and return commands are performed as appropriate. The timing chart below also shows the internal state of the first sub-control unit 400 (the operation state of the chance button 136, that is, input (operation), waiting for input (operation), no input (operation)). Yes.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, the first sub-control unit 400 activates the acceptance of the operation of the chance button 136 in the first sub-control unit 400 (starts reception) at the timing (A). A liquid crystal command is transmitted to 700. Thereafter, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits the part data to the chance button lamp 138 and causes the chance button lamp 138 to emit light (B).

  Upon receiving the liquid crystal command from the first sub-control unit 400, the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts an operation reception valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700 (C), and starts executing a button operation effect on the decorative symbol display device 208 (D ).

  The first sub-control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 at a timing when the operation reception valid period in the first sub-control unit 400 ends (operation reception becomes invalid) (E). Thereafter, the first sub-control unit 400 ends the emission of the chance button lamp 138 (F).

  The liquid crystal control unit 700 that has received the liquid crystal command from the first sub-control unit 400 ends the operation acceptance valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700 (invalidation of the operation acceptance) (G), and performs the button operation effect on the decorative symbol display device 208. Is finished (H).

  In this example, since the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation reception valid period, the internal state of the first sub-control unit 400 is maintained waiting for input (waiting for the operation of the chance button 136).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5B, the first sub-control unit 400 causes the first sub-control unit 400 to display the liquid crystal at the timing (A) at which reception of the operation of the chance button 136 is enabled (starts reception). A liquid crystal command is transmitted to the control unit 700. Thereafter, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits the part data to the chance button lamp 138 and causes the chance button lamp 138 to emit light (B).

  Upon receiving the liquid crystal command from the first sub-control unit 400, the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts an operation reception valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700 (C), and starts executing a button operation effect on the decorative symbol display device 208 (D ).

  When the chance button 136 is operated during the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub-control unit 400 (E), the internal state of the first sub-control unit 400 becomes a state with input. The first sub-control unit 400 ends the operation acceptance valid period (makes the operation acceptance invalid), and transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (E). Thereafter, the first sub-control unit 400 ends the emission of the chance button lamp 138 (F). In this example, the first sub-control unit 400 drives the speaker 120 and the like at this timing to start execution of effects such as sound (F).

  The liquid crystal control unit 700 that has received the liquid crystal command from the first sub-control unit 400 ends the operation acceptance valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700 (invalidation of the operation acceptance) (G), and performs the button operation effect on the decorative symbol display device 208. Is finished (H). Although illustration is omitted, when the operation of the chance button 136 is effectively received, another effect (for example, display of a cut-in image) corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 is performed after the button operation effect is completed. (The same applies to the following embodiments).

As described above, in the case of FIG. 558, the operation acceptance valid period of the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts based on the command (liquid crystal command) from the first sub control unit 400. As shown in FIG. 5B, in this example, the liquid crystal control unit 700 receives a command (for example, a liquid crystal command corresponding to a button operation) from the first sub control unit 400 at an unintended timing (I). But I try to ignore this.
<Example 2 of timing chart>

  559 and 560 are timing charts showing other examples of general data transmission / reception between the first sub-control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700. This is an example when a button operation effect is executed based on a command. FIGS. 559 (a) and 560 (a) show a case where the operation of the chance button 136 is not performed during the validity period of the operation reception of the chance button 136. FIGS. 559 (b) and 560 (b) The case where the operation of the chance button 136 is performed during the validity period of the operation reception of the chance button 136 is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 559 (a), the liquid crystal control unit 700 causes the first sub control unit 400 to enable the reception of the operation of the chance button 136 (start reception) in the liquid crystal control unit 700. Send a return command. Thereafter, the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts executing a button operation effect on the decorative symbol display device 208 (B).

  The first sub control unit 400 that has received the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts an operation reception valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (C). Thereafter, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits the part data to the chance button lamp 138 and causes the chance button lamp 138 to emit light (D).

  At the timing when the operation acceptance valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends (operation acceptance becomes invalid), the liquid crystal control unit 700 returns a command to the first sub control unit 400 (E), and then displays a decorative symbol display. Execution of the button operation effect is ended with the device 208 (F). The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends the operation reception valid period in the first sub-control unit 400 (makes the operation reception invalid) (G), and causes the chance button lamp 138 to emit light. End (H).

  In this example, since the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation reception valid period, the internal state of the first sub-control unit 400 is maintained waiting for input (waiting for the operation of the chance button 136).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 5B, the liquid crystal control unit 700 activates the acceptance of the operation of the chance button 136 in the liquid crystal control unit 700 (starts acceptance) at the timing (A). Return to 400 to send the command. Thereafter, the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts executing a button operation effect on the decorative symbol display device 208 (B).

  The first sub control unit 400 that has received the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts an operation reception valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (C). Thereafter, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits the part data to the chance button lamp 138 and causes the chance button lamp 138 to emit light (D).

  When the chance button 136 is operated during the operation reception valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (E), the first sub control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (E). The liquid crystal control unit 700 that has received the liquid crystal command ends the operation acceptance valid period (makes the operation acceptance invalid), and returns a command to the first sub control unit 400 (F). Thereafter, the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends the button operation effect on the decorative symbol display device 208 (G).

  The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub-control unit 400 (H), and then ends the emission of the chance button lamp 138 (I). . In this example, the first sub-control unit 400 starts the execution of effects such as sound by driving the speaker 120 and the like at this timing (I).

  In this example, the internal state of the first sub-control unit 400 is updated at the timing (H) when the operation reception valid period in the first sub-control unit 400 ends, and is in a state with input.

  FIG. 559 (a) is an example of a timing chart of a configuration for effectively receiving an operation of the chance button 136 immediately before the end of the operation reception valid period in the first sub-control unit 400.

  The liquid crystal control unit 700 transmits a return command to the first sub-control unit 400 at timing (A) when the liquid crystal control unit 700 validates the acceptance of the operation of the chance button 136 (starts accepting). Thereafter, the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts executing a button operation effect on the decorative symbol display device 208 (B).

  The first sub control unit 400 that has received the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts an operation reception valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (C). Thereafter, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits the part data to the chance button lamp 138 and causes the chance button lamp 138 to emit light (D).

  At the timing when the operation acceptance valid period in the liquid crystal controller 700 ends (operation acceptance becomes invalid), the liquid crystal controller 700 returns a command to the first sub controller 400 (E). The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the return command ends the operation acceptance valid period. If the operation of the chance button 136 is executed immediately before that, the liquid crystal command (broken line) is displayed. (G), the first sub-control unit 400 ends the operation reception valid period in the first sub-control unit 400 (operation reception is disabled (G)), and the chance button lamp 138 emits light. End (H).

  In this example, in order to effectively accept the operation of the chance button 136 pressed immediately before the end of the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub-control unit 400, the operation acceptance valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700 is as shown in FIG. It is longer than the case. Specifically, the operation acceptance valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700 is after the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub-control unit 400 ends (operation acceptance is invalidated (G)) (for example, the chance button lamp 138 The process ends at the timing (H) when the light emission ends. Thereafter, the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends the execution of the button operation effect on the decorative symbol display device 208 (I).

  As described above, when there is an operation of the chance button 136 immediately before the end of the operation reception valid period in the first sub-control unit 400, the liquid crystal control unit 700 receives the operation effectively, and after the button operation effect ends, the chance button Although the production (not shown) based on the operation 136 is started, the first sub-control unit 400 may not accept the operation effectively (the production is not started).

  When the chance button 136 is operated, the liquid crystal control unit 700 does not accept the operation effectively and does not start the effect based on the operation of the chance button 136. However, the button operation effect is not displayed until the time when the effect is scheduled to start. May execute. Further, at the timing (H) of the end of the button display effect, the internal state of the first sub-control unit 400 has not received the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700, and the input waiting state is maintained.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 560 (b), the liquid crystal control unit 700 makes the first sub control unit at timing (A) when the liquid crystal control unit 700 validates the operation of the chance button 136 (starts the reception). Return to 400 to send the command. Thereafter, the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts executing a button operation effect on the decorative symbol display device 208 (B).

  The first sub control unit 400 that has received the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts an operation reception valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (C). Thereafter, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits the part data to the chance button lamp 138 and causes the chance button lamp 138 to emit light (D).

  When the chance button 136 is operated during the operation reception valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (E), the first sub control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (E). Upon receiving the liquid crystal command, the liquid crystal control unit 700 returns to the first sub control unit 400 and transmits the command (F). The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the return command ends the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub-control unit 400 (G), and thereafter ends the emission of the chance button lamp 138 (H). In this example, the first sub-control unit 400 starts the execution of effects such as sound by driving the speaker 120 and the like at this timing (H).

At this timing, the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends the operation acceptance valid period (H), and then the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends the execution of the button operation effect on the decorative symbol display device 208 (J).

  In this example, the internal state of the first sub-control unit 400 is updated at the timing (G) when the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub-control unit 400 ends, and is in a state with input.

  Thus, each timing chart shown in FIGS. 559 to 560 shows an example in which the operation reception valid period of the first sub control unit 400 starts based on the command (return command) from the liquid crystal control unit 700. As shown in FIGS. 559 (b) and 560 (b), in this example, a command (for example, button operation) from the liquid crystal control unit 700 is performed at a timing (J) that the first sub control unit 400 does not intend. If a return command is received, it is ignored.

FIGS. 561 to 563 are timing charts showing the data transmission / reception relationship between the first sub-control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700 according to this embodiment.
<Example 3 of timing chart>

  FIG. 561 shows an example in which the operation reception of the chance button 136 is enabled based on the command (liquid crystal command) transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 561 shows the operation reception of the chance button 136. FIG. 5B shows a case where the operation of the chance button 136 is performed during the effective period of the operation reception of the chance button 136. FIG. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the liquid crystal at the timing (A)) when the first sub-control unit 400 validates the operation of the chance button 136 (starts the reception). A liquid crystal command is transmitted to unit 700. On the other hand, the first sub-control unit 400 does not transmit the part data to the chance button lamp 138 and does not cause the chance button lamp 138 to emit light.

  The liquid crystal control unit 700 that has received the liquid crystal command from the first sub control unit 400 starts an operation reception valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700 (B), but does not start executing the button operation effect on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The first sub-control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 at the timing when the operation reception valid period in the first sub-control unit 400 ends (operation reception becomes invalid) (C). The liquid crystal control unit 700 that has received the liquid crystal command from the first sub control unit 400 ends the operation reception valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700 (invalidates operation reception) (D).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 5B, the first sub-control unit 400 makes the reception of the operation of the chance button 136 effective (starts reception) in the first sub-control unit 400 (A)). A liquid crystal command is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 700. On the other hand, the first sub-control unit 400 does not transmit the part data to the chance button lamp 138 and does not cause the chance button lamp 138 to emit light.

  The liquid crystal control unit 700 that has received the liquid crystal command from the first sub-control unit 400 starts an operation reception valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700 (B), but the decorative symbol display device 208 does not execute the button operation effect.

  When the chance button 136 is operated during the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub-control unit 400 (C), the internal state of the first sub-control unit 400 becomes a state with input. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 ends the operation reception valid period (makes the operation reception invalid), and transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700. Thereafter, in this example, the first sub-control unit 400 drives the speaker 120 and the like to start execution of effects such as sound (D).

  The liquid crystal control unit 700 that has received the liquid crystal command from the first sub control unit 400 ends the operation reception valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700 (invalidates operation reception) (E).

As described above, in the present embodiment, even when the button operation effect (the button operation display 800 regarding the chance button 136 and the light emission of the chance button lamp 138) is not executed, the first sub control unit 400 (and the liquid crystal control unit). 700), the operation reception of the chance button 136 is valid. As shown in FIG. 5B, in this example, the liquid crystal control unit 700 receives a command (for example, a liquid crystal command corresponding to a button operation) from the first sub control unit 400 at an unintended timing (F). But I try to ignore this.
<Example 4 of timing chart>

  FIGS. 562 and 563 are examples of cases where the operation acceptance of the chance button 136 is enabled based on a command (return command) transmitted from the liquid crystal control unit 700, and FIGS. 562 (a) and 563 (a). Shows a case where the operation of the chance button 136 is not performed during the valid period of the operation reception of the chance button 136, and FIGS. 562 (b) and 563 (b) show during the effective period of the operation reception of the chance button 136. , The case where the chance button 136 is operated is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 562 (a), the liquid crystal control unit 700 causes the first sub-control unit 400 to activate the reception of the operation of the chance button 136 (start reception) at the liquid crystal control unit 700. Send a return command. On the other hand, the liquid crystal control unit 700 does not execute the button operation effect in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The first sub control unit 400 that has received the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts an operation reception valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (B). On the other hand, the first sub-control unit 400 does not transmit the part data to the chance button lamp 138 and does not cause the chance button lamp 138 to emit light.

  At the timing when the operation acceptance valid period in the liquid crystal controller 700 ends (operation acceptance becomes invalid), the liquid crystal controller 700 returns a command to the first sub controller 400 (C). The first sub control unit 400 that has received the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends the operation reception valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (invalidate operation reception (D)).

  In this example, since the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation reception valid period, the internal state of the first sub-control unit 400 is maintained waiting for input (waiting for the operation of the chance button 136).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 5B, the liquid crystal control unit 700 performs the first sub-control at the timing (A) when the liquid crystal control unit 700 validates the operation of the chance button 136 (starts the reception). Return to unit 400 to send the command. On the other hand, the liquid crystal control unit 700 does not execute a button operation effect in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The first sub control unit 400 that has received the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts an operation reception valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (B). On the other hand, the first sub-control unit 400 does not transmit the part data to the chance button lamp 138 and does not cause the chance button lamp 138 to emit light.

  When the chance button 136 is operated during the operation reception valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (C), the first sub control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (C). The liquid crystal control unit 700 that has received the liquid crystal command ends the operation acceptance valid period (makes the operation acceptance invalid), and returns a command to the first sub control unit 400 (D).

  The first sub control unit 400 that has received the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (E). In this example, the first sub-control unit 400 thereafter drives the speaker 120 and the like at this timing to start execution of effects such as sound (F).

  In this example, the internal state of the first sub-control unit 400 is updated at the timing (E) when the operation reception valid period in the first sub-control unit 400 ends, and is in a state with input.

  As shown in FIG. 563 (a), the liquid crystal control unit 700 causes the first sub-control unit 400 to activate the reception of the operation of the chance button 136 (start reception) at the liquid crystal control unit 700. Send a return command. On the other hand, the liquid crystal control unit 700 does not execute the button operation effect in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The first sub control unit 400 that has received the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts an operation reception valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (B). Further, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits the part data to the chance button lamp 138 and causes the chance button lamp 138 to emit light (B ′).

  At the timing when the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400 ends (operation acceptance becomes invalid), the first sub control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (C). Upon receiving the liquid crystal command, the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends the operation reception valid period. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 turns off the chance button lamp 138 (D).

  The chance button lamp 138 is lit when it is always lit during the operation acceptance valid period, when it blinks within the operation acceptance valid period, or only during a part of the period including the start time of the operation acceptance valid period (for a moment). The same applies to other examples.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 563 (b), the liquid crystal control unit 700 makes the first sub control unit at timing (A) when the liquid crystal control unit 700 validates the reception of the operation of the chance button 136 (starts the reception). Return to 400 to send the command. On the other hand, the liquid crystal control unit 700 does not execute the button operation effect on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The first sub control unit 400 that has received the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts an operation reception valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (B). Further, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits the part data to the chance button lamp 138 and causes the chance button lamp 138 to emit light (B ′).

When the chance button 136 is operated during the operation reception valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (C), the first sub control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (C). Upon receiving the liquid crystal command, the liquid crystal control unit 700 returns to the first sub control unit 400 and transmits the command (E). The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the return command ends the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub-control unit 400 (F). Thereafter, the first sub-control unit 400 drives the speaker 120 and the like to start execution of effects such as sound (G). At this timing, the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends the operation acceptance valid period and turns off the chance button lamp 138 (G).

  In this example, the internal state of the first sub-control unit 400 is updated at the timing (F) when the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub-control unit 400 ends, and is in a state with input.

  As described above, in this embodiment, even when the button operation effect (the button operation display 800 regarding the chance button 136 and the light emission of the chance button lamp 138) is not executed, the first sub-control unit 400 (and the liquid crystal control). Section 700), the operation acceptance of the chance button 136 is valid. As shown in FIG. 5B, in this example, the first sub control unit 400 receives a command (for example, a return command corresponding to a button operation) from the liquid crystal control unit 700 at an unintended timing (H). But I try to ignore this.

With reference to FIGS. 564 to 572, an example of the button operation acceptance state and effects will be described.
<Example 1 of Button Operation Acceptance State and Production>

  FIG. 564 is a diagram showing, in time series, an example of the button operation acceptance state and the button operation effect corresponding to Example 1 of the timing chart shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, a fourth symbol display area 208e is provided in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example, on the upper right side. In the fourth symbol display area 208e, for example, “O” is filled and displayed in blue, for example, during execution of the variable game of the special figure (Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2), and is displayed in white while the variable game is stopped. . Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 can perform variable display of decorative symbols in a part of the display area, for example, as indicated by a downward arrow at the upper left of FIG.

  Further, a special figure 1 display device 212 and a special figure 2 display device 214 are provided below the decorative symbol display device 208, and a special figure change display and a stop display are executed. Further, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 notify the number of variable games being held by turning on and off the LEDs.

  Here, in the display examples shown in FIGS. 564 to 572, there is no particular distinction between the fluctuation display on the special figure display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 and the fluctuation display of the decoration symbol on the decoration symbol display device 208. Although described, the variable display on the special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 is executed by the main control unit 300, and the decorative symbol change display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400. Executed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6A shows a state where the special game of the special game has ended. In the fourth symbol display area 208e, the variable game of the special figure (for example, special figure 2) is being stopped. In the special figure 2 display device 214, the stop symbol mode is stopped and displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, the button operation display 800 that suggests the operation of the chance button 136 is not displayed. Further, the chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light is also turned off. That is, the button operation effect is not executed. In this embodiment (FIGS. 564 to 572), as shown in FIG. 5A, when nothing is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, at least the button operation display 800 (only) is not displayed. This means that other indications may be displayed.

  This timing is a period other than the operation reception valid period in the first sub-control unit 400, that is, the operation reception state of the chance button 136 of the first sub-control unit 400 is invalid. Similarly, in the liquid crystal control unit 700, it is a period other than the operation reception valid period, that is, the operation reception state of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is invalid.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5B shows the state where the special game of the special game has started, and the special game (for example, special game 2) is being executed in the fourth symbol display area 208e. Is displayed on the special figure 2 display device 214, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols.

  On the other hand, at this timing, the button operation effect is not started, the button operation display 800 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light is also turned off.

  In addition, the operation reception states of the chance buttons 136 of the first sub-control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700 are both invalid.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C is, for example, the timing (A) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 558 (b). In this state, while the special figure is in a variable game and the button operation effect has not started yet, the first sub-control unit 400 has started the operation reception valid period, that is, the first sub-control unit 400. The operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 is valid. On the other hand, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is invalid.

  The timing shown in (d) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (B) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 558 (b). In this state, it is during a special figure variable game, and the button operation display 800 in the decorative symbol display device 208 is not displayed, but the chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136 is lit. Further, the operation reception state of the chance button 136 of the first sub-control unit 400 is valid, but the operation reception state of the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is invalid.

  The timing shown in (e) of the figure is, for example, the timing (C) of the timing chart shown in FIG. 558 (b). In this state, the button operation display 800 on the decorative symbol display device 208 is not displayed, but the chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light is lit. In addition, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub-control unit 400 is valid, and the operation acceptance valid period has started in the liquid crystal control unit 700, that is, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is also included. It is valid.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5F is, for example, the timing (D) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 558 (b). In this state, the button operation display 800 starts displaying on the decorative symbol display device 208. Specifically, the operation means image BG (for example, an image imitating the chance button 136 and a character “PUSH !!!” indicating that the button is pressed and a down arrow at the approximate center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ) And an elapsed time notification image TG for notifying the elapsed time of the operation reception period of the chance button 136 (in this example, the scale of the meter is filled in accordance with the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136) Is displayed).

  Further, the chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light continues to be lit. The operation reception state of the chance button 136 of the first sub-control unit 400 is valid, and the operation reception state of the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is also valid.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5G is, for example, the timing (E) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 558 (b). That is, here, the button operation display 800 is continued in the decorative symbol display device 208, a decrease display is performed in which the filling of the meter scale of the elapsed time notification image TG is gradually reduced, and the chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light. Continues to be lit and indicates that the chance button 136 is operated (pressed) while the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 is valid in both the first sub-control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700. Show.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11H is, for example, the timing (F) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 558 (b) and shows a state immediately after FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the button operation display 800 is continued, the scale display of the elapsed time notification image TG is reduced, and the chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light continues to be lit. In the first sub-control unit 400, the operation reception valid period ends when the chance button 136 is pressed, and the operation reception state of the chance button 136 is invalid. On the other hand, in the liquid crystal control unit 700, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 is valid.

  The timing shown in (i) of the figure is, for example, the timing (G) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 558 (b). In the decorative symbol display device 208, the button operation display 800 is continued and the meter scale of the elapsed time notification image TG is being reduced, but the chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light is turned off. Although the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub-control unit 400 is invalid, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 is valid in the liquid crystal control unit 700.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6J is, for example, the timing between (G) and (H) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 558 (b). In the decorative symbol display device 208, the button operation display 800 is continued and the meter scale display of the elapsed time notification image TG is being reduced, but the chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light is turned off, and the first sub-display is displayed. The operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the control unit 400 is invalid. At this timing, the operation reception valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends, and the operation reception state of the chance button 136 is invalid in the liquid crystal control unit 700 as well.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6K is, for example, the timing immediately before (H) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 558B, and an image immediately before the end of the display of the button operation display 800 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. doing. That is, in the operation means image BG, the chance button 136 is filled in with white, the characters “PUSH !!” are not displayed, and the display of the reduced scale on the meter of the elapsed time notification image TG is finished. The chance button lamp 138 is turned off, and the operation reception status of the chance button 136 of the first sub-control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700 is invalid.

The timing shown in FIG. 11L is, for example, the timing after (H) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 558 (b). In the decorative symbol display device 208, the button operation display 800 is not displayed, and another effect display (for example, display of the cut-in image 806 of the character (donor)) is executed. The chance button lamp 138 is turned off, and the operation reception status of the chance button 136 of the first sub-control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700 is invalid.
<Example 2 of Button Operation Acceptance State and Production>

  FIG. 565 is a diagram showing, in time series, an example of a button operation acceptance state and a button operation effect corresponding to Example 2 of the timing chart shown in FIG. 559.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6A shows a state where the special game of the special game has ended. In the fourth symbol display area 208e, the variable game of the special figure (for example, special figure 2) is being stopped. In the special figure 2 display device 214, the stop symbol mode is stopped and displayed.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button operation display 800 is not displayed, the chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light is also turned off, and the button operation effect is not executed.

  At this timing, the operation reception state of the chance button 136 of the first sub-control unit 400 is invalid, and the operation reception state of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is also invalid.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5B shows the state where the special game of the special game has started, and the special game (for example, special game 2) is being executed in the fourth symbol display area 208e. Is displayed on the special figure 2 display device 214, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols.

  On the other hand, at this timing, the button operation effect is not started, the button operation display 800 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light is also turned off.

  In addition, the operation reception states of the chance buttons 136 of the first sub-control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700 are both invalid.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5C is, for example, the timing (A) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 559 (b). In this state, it is during the special figure variable game and the button operation effect has not been started yet, but the operation reception state of the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is valid. On the other hand, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub-control unit 400 is invalid.

  The timing shown in (d) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (B) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 559 (b). In this state, the button operation display 800 on the decorative symbol display device 208 starts displaying, while the chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light is turned off. Further, the operation reception state of the chance button 136 of the first sub-control unit 400 is invalid, but the operation reception state of the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is valid.

  The timing shown in (e) of the figure is, for example, the timing (C) of the timing chart shown in FIG. 559 (b). In this state, the button operation display 800 in the decorative symbol display device 208 is continued and the meter scale of the elapsed time notification image TG is reduced, but the chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light is turned off. ing. Further, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub-control unit 400 is valid, and the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is also valid.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5F is, for example, the timing (D) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 559 (b). In this state, the button operation display 800 is continuously displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light is lit. The operation reception state of the chance button 136 of the first sub-control unit 400 is valid, and the operation reception state of the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is also valid.

  The timing shown in (g) of the figure is, for example, the timing (E) of the timing chart shown in FIG. 559 (b). That is, here, the button operation display 800 is continued in the decorative symbol display device 208, a decrease display is performed in which the filling of the meter scale of the elapsed time notification image TG is gradually reduced, and the chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light. Continues to be lit and indicates that the chance button 136 is operated (pressed) while the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 is valid in both the first sub-control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700. Show.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11H is, for example, the timing (F) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 559 (b). In the decorative symbol display device 208, the button operation display 800 is continued, the meter scale of the elapsed time notification image TG is reduced, and the chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light continues to be lit. In the control unit 700, the operation reception valid period ends when the chance button 136 is pressed, and the operation reception state of the chance button 136 is invalid. On the other hand, in the first sub-control unit 400, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 is valid.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6I is the timing immediately before (G) of the timing chart shown in FIG. 559 (b), for example, and displays the image immediately before the end of the display of the button operation display 800 on the decorative symbol display device 208. (Decrease display of the meter scale of the elapsed time notification image TG has been completed). The chance button lamp 138 is lit, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub-control unit 400 is invalid, and the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is valid.

  The timing shown in (l) of the figure is, for example, the timing (H) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 559 (b). In the decorative symbol display device 208, the button operation display 800 is not displayed, and the chance button lamp 138 is lit, but the operation acceptance states of the chance button 136 of the first sub-control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700 are both invalid. It has become.

  The timing shown in (k) in the figure is, for example, the timing (I) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 559 (b). In the decorative symbol display device 208, the button operation display 800 is not displayed, the chance button lamp 138 is turned off, and the operation reception states of the chance buttons 136 of the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700 are both invalid. .

The timing shown in FIG. 10L is, for example, the timing after (I) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 559 (b). In the decorative symbol display device 208, the button operation display 800 is not displayed, and another effect display (for example, display of the cut-in image 806 of the character (donor)) is executed. The chance button lamp 138 is turned off, and the operation reception status of the chance button 136 of the first sub-control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700 is invalid.
<Example 3 of Button Operation Acceptance State and Production>

  FIG. 566 is a diagram showing an example of a button operation acceptance state and a button operation effect corresponding to Example 3 of the timing chart shown in FIG. 561 in time series.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6A shows a state in which the special game of the special game is finished. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the button operation display 800 is not displayed, the chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light is also turned off, and the button operation effect is not executed.

  At this timing, the operation reception state of the chance button 136 of the first sub-control unit 400 is invalid, and the operation reception state of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is also invalid.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5B shows a state in which a special game of variable game has started. The button operation effect is not started, the button operation display 800 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light is also turned off. In addition, the operation reception states of the chance buttons 136 of the first sub-control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700 are both invalid.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5C is, for example, the timing (A) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 561 (b). In this state, it is during a special figure variable game and the button operation effect is not started, but the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub-control unit 400 is valid, and the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is valid. The operation acceptance status of is invalid. That is, the button operation display 800 is not displayed, but the operation reception state of the chance button 136 is valid in the first sub-control unit 400.

  The timing shown in (d) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (B) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 561 (b). In this state, the button operation display 800 in the decorative symbol display device 208 is not displayed, and the chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light is also turned off. On the other hand, in both the first sub-control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 is valid.

  The timing shown in (e) of the figure is, for example, the timing (C) of the timing chart shown in FIG. 561 (b). In this state, the button operation effect (the button operation display 800 and the chance button lamp 138 is lit) is not executed, and the chance button 136 is operated (pressed).

  The timing shown in FIG. 5F is, for example, the timing after (C) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 561 (b). Although the button operation effect is not executed, in the first sub-control unit 400, the operation reception valid period ends when the chance button 136 is pressed, and the operation reception state of the chance button 136 is invalid. On the other hand, in the liquid crystal control unit 700, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 is valid.

  The timing shown in (g) of the figure is, for example, the timing (E) of the timing chart shown in FIG. 561 (b). The button operation effect is not executed, and the operation reception states of the chance buttons 136 of the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700 are both invalid.

As described above, in this embodiment, the button operation effect is not executed (the button operation display 800 is not displayed), but in the first sub-control unit 400 (and the liquid crystal control unit 700), the operation reception state of the chance button 136 is It becomes effective.
<Example 4 of Button Operation Acceptance State and Production>

  FIG. 567 is a diagram showing an example of the button operation acceptance state and the button operation effect in time series.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6A shows a state in which a special game of variable game is being executed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the button operation display 800 is not displayed, but a first image 804 other than the button operation display 800 is displayed. Further, the chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light is also turned off.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5B shows the state after the chance button 136 is operated at the timing following the timing shown in FIG. Although the button operation display 800 is not displayed, when the chance button 136 is operated (pressed), a second image (for example, a cut-in image of a character (donor)) 806 is displayed, and FIG. It overlaps at least a part of the first image 804 displayed in a). Thereby, at least a part of the first image 804 is covered with at least a part of the second image 806, and the visibility for the player is low (not visible or difficult to see).

Further, the first image (hidden image) 804 may be at least one of the elapsed time notification image TG, the state notification image SG, the hold display, the pre-reading notice display, the other display, or a combination thereof. . The state notification image SG is a meter display and refers to a display whose display mode can be changed at least when a change condition is established. Satisfaction of the change condition is, for example, when a time has elapsed since the start of display of a predetermined image (status notification image SG), or operation of a predetermined operation means (one or more operations, long press, etc.) ). Specifically, it refers to an image in which the filled portion of the meter increases (or decreases) depending on the number of consecutive hits of the operating means (for example, the chance button 136) or the time of long press. Further, the second image 806 (hidden image) may be at least one of the elapsed time notification image TG, the hold display, the state notification image SG, the pre-reading notice display, the other display, or a combination thereof. Further, when the first image is a meter display such as the elapsed time notification image TG or the state notification image SG, either the start end (start time) or the end end (end time) is represented by the second image 806. The intermediate portion (intermediate time between the start time and the end time) may be hidden by the second image 806.
<Example 5 of Button Operation Acceptance State and Production>

  FIG. 568 is a diagram showing, in time series, an example of a button operation acceptance state and a button operation effect corresponding to Example 4 of the timing chart shown in FIG. 562.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6A shows a state in which the special game of the special game is finished. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the button operation display 800 is not displayed, the chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light is also turned off, and the button operation effect is not executed. At this timing, the operation reception state of the chance button 136 of the first sub-control unit 400 is invalid, and the operation reception state of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is also invalid.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5B shows a state in which a special game of variable game has started. The button operation effect is not started, the button operation display 800 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light is also turned off. In addition, the operation reception states of the chance buttons 136 of the first sub-control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700 are both invalid.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5C is, for example, the timing (A) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 562 (b). In this state, a special figure variable game is in progress and the button operation effect is not started, but the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is valid, and the chance button 136 of the first sub-control unit 400 is valid. The operation acceptance status of is invalid. That is, although the button operation display 800 is not displayed, the operation reception state of the chance button 136 is valid in the liquid crystal control unit 700.

  The timing shown in (d) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (B) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 562 (b). In this state, the button operation display 800 in the decorative symbol display device 208 is not displayed, and the chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light is also turned off. On the other hand, in both the first sub-control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 is valid.

  The timing shown in (e) of the figure is, for example, the timing (C) of the timing chart shown in FIG. 562 (b). In this state, the button operation effect (the button operation display 800 and the chance button lamp 138 is lit) is not executed, and the chance button 136 is operated (pressed).

  The timing shown in FIG. 6F is, for example, the timing (D) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 562 (b). Although the button operation effect is not executed, in the liquid crystal control unit 700, the operation reception valid period ends when the chance button 136 is pressed, and the operation reception state of the chance button 136 is invalid. On the other hand, in the first sub-control unit 400, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 is valid.

  The timing shown in (g) of the figure is, for example, the timing (E) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 562 (b). The button operation effect is not executed, and the operation reception states of the chance buttons 136 of the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700 are both invalid.

  The timing shown in FIG. 10L is the timing following FIG. The button operation effect is not executed, and another effect display (for example, a cut-in image 806 of the character (donor)) is displayed. Both the operation reception states of the chance buttons 136 of the first sub-control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700 are invalid.

As described above, in this embodiment, the button operation effect is not executed (the button operation display 800 is not displayed), but in the first sub-control unit 400 (and the liquid crystal control unit 700), the operation reception state of the chance button 136 is It becomes effective.
<Example 6 of Button Operation Acceptance State and Production>

  FIG. 569 is a diagram showing an example of the button operation acceptance state and the button operation effect in time series. In this embodiment, the game table includes a plurality of operation means that can be operated by the player, and specifically includes at least other operation buttons 810 in addition to the chance button 136.

  Another operation button 810 is an operation button different from the chance button 136 indicated by the button operation display 800. The other operation button 810 is an effect that is produced by the operation of the other operation button 810 even when there is no button operation display suggesting the operation of the other operation button 810. In the present embodiment, such another operation button 810 will be described as a back button.

The timings shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B show a state in which a special game of variable game has started and a button operation display 800 suggesting the operation of the chance button 136 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. ing.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5C shows a state where the chance button 136 is pressed. In this example, the chance button lamp 138 is turned off even when the button operation display 800 of the chance button 136 is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D shows a state after the chance button 136 is pressed. In the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, there is no change such as a new effect being executed, and only a reduced display of the elapsed time notification image TG is executed. That is, even if the chance button 136 is pressed during the period when the button operation display 800 of the chance button 136 is displayed, the operation is invalidated.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E shows a state where the back button 810 is operated (pressed), which is not suggested by the button operation display 800.

FIG. 5F shows a state after the back button 810 is pressed. When the back button 810 is pressed, a new effect (for example, a display effect of a cut-in image of a character (donor)) is executed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. As described above, in this embodiment, the operation of the back button 810 in which the button operation display indicating the button operation is not performed (the button is not turned on) is validated. Alternatively, the operation of the back button 810 different from the button (chance button 136) suggested by the button operation display 810 is validated.
<Example 7 of Button Operation Acceptance State and Production>

  FIG. 570 is a diagram showing an example of the button operation acceptance state and the button operation effect in time series. This embodiment is also configured to include a chance button 136 and a back button 810.

The timings shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B show a state in which a special game of variable game has started and a button operation display 800 suggesting the operation of the chance button 136 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. ing.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5C shows a state where the chance button 136 indicated by the operation on the button operation display 800 is pressed. In this example, the chance button lamp 138 is turned off even when the button operation display 800 of the chance button 136 is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D shows a state after the chance button 136 is pressed. In the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, there is no change such as a new effect being executed, and only a reduced display of the elapsed time notification image TG is executed. That is, even if the chance button 136 is pressed during the period in which the button operation display 800 of the chance button 136 is displayed ((c) in the same figure), the operation is invalidated.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E shows a state where the back button 810 is lit by the back button lamp 812, which is not suggested by the button operation display 800. For example, the back button lamp 812 is turned on after a predetermined time has elapsed since the button operation display 800 of the chance button 136 was started. Alternatively, the back button lamp 812 may be turned on at the timing when the operation acceptance valid period of the back button 810 starts.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5F shows a state in which the back button 810 is operated (pressed) while the back button lamp 812 is lit.

  FIG. 5G shows a state after the back button 810 is pressed. When the back button 810 is pressed, a new effect (for example, a display effect of a cut-in image of a character (donor)) is executed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. As described above, in this embodiment, the operation of the back button 810 in which the button operation display indicating the button operation is not performed (the button is not turned on) is validated. Alternatively, the operation of the back button 810 different from the button (chance button 136) suggested by the button operation display 810 is validated. Further, the back button lamp 812 is turned on when the lighting condition of the back button lamp 812 is established. The lighting condition of the back button lamp 812 can be, for example, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the button operation display 800 of the chance button 136 or after the operation acceptance valid period of the back button 810 has started.

In the present embodiment, although the operation of the chance button 136 is invalidated in FIGS. 3C and 3D, it may be valid.
<Example 8 of Button Operation Acceptance State and Production>

  FIG. 571 is a diagram showing an example of the button operation acceptance state and the button operation effect in time series. This embodiment is also configured to include a chance button 136 and a back button 810.

The timing shown in FIG. 6A shows a state in which a special game of variable game is started and a button operation display 800 suggesting an operation of the chance button 136 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5B shows a state in which the chance button lamp 138 of the chance button 136 whose operation is suggested in the button operation display 800 is lit. On the other hand, the button operation display of the back button 810 is not performed, and the back button lamp 812 is also turned off.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C shows a state where the back button 810 is operated (pressed) which is not suggested by the button operation display 800.

  FIG. 4D shows a state after the back button 810 is pressed. When the back button 810 is pressed, a new effect (for example, a display effect of a cut-in image of a character (donor)) is executed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. As described above, in this embodiment, the operation of the back button 810 in which the button operation display indicating the button operation is not performed (the button is not turned on) is validated. Alternatively, the operation of the back button 810 different from the button (chance button 136) suggested by the button operation display 810 is validated. That is, even when there is a button operation effect (the button operation display 800 and the chance button lamp 138 are turned on) suggesting the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIGS. The operation of a button (back button 810) different from the button suggested by (chance button 136) is validated.

Also in this example, the operation of the chance button 136 may be validated, or the back button lamp 812 may be turned on when the lighting condition of the back button lamp 812 is satisfied.
<Example 9 of Button Operation Acceptance State and Production>

  FIG. 572 is a diagram showing an example of the button operation acceptance state and the button operation effect in time series. In this embodiment, only the chance button 136 is provided.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5A shows a state where the special game is stopped. At this timing, the button operation display 800 of the chance button 136 is not displayed, and the chance button lamp 138 is also turned off. In addition, the acceptance state of the operation of the chance button 136 of the first sub-control unit 400 and / or the liquid crystal control unit 700 is invalid.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5B shows a state in which a special game of variable game has started. At this timing, the button operation display 800 of the chance button 136 is not displayed, and the chance button lamp 138 is also turned off. In addition, the acceptance state of the operation of the chance button 136 of the first sub-control unit 400 and / or the liquid crystal control unit 700 is invalid.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C shows a state in which the button operation display 800 of the chance button 136 starts displaying and the chance button lamp 138 is turned on during the special game. At this timing, the acceptance state of the operation of the chance button 136 of the first sub-control unit 400 and / or the liquid crystal control unit 700 becomes valid.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D shows a state in which the button operation display 800 starts displaying and a predetermined time has elapsed. The button operation display 800 is continued, and the chance button lamp 138 is continuously lit. In addition, the acceptance state of the operation of the chance button 136 of the first sub-control unit 400 and / or the liquid crystal control unit 700 is valid.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 5E and 5F show a state in which the button operation display 800 is not displayed because the erasure condition for the button operation display 800 is satisfied. The erasing condition of the button operation display 800 can be an operation of the chance button 136 (or another button), elapse of a predetermined time, or the like. Even at this timing, the acceptance state of the operation of the chance button 136 of the first sub-control unit 400 and / or the liquid crystal control unit 700 is valid. At these timings, the chance button lamp 138 may continue to be lit even after the button operation display 800 is not displayed.

  As described above, the gaming table (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment includes the first operation means (for example, the chance button 136) and the display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208). , Control means (for example, in the first sub-control unit 400), wherein the display means is means capable of executing at least a plurality of types of display, and the control means includes a plurality of types At least one of the plurality of types of display is a first display (for example, a display displayed when a normal button operation effect is performed), and the plurality of types At least one of the displays is a second display (for example, a display that is displayed when a normal button operation effect is not executed, a display at the time of a back button effect, and the like). At least one is a third display (for example, a display at the time of a button operation effect (including a button operation display 800)), and at least one of the plurality of types of displays is a fourth display (for example, , An effect that does not include the button operation display 800 such as a display at the time of the back button operation effect, and at least one of the plurality of states is a first state (for example, a normal button operation effect can be executed) At least one of the plurality of types of states is a second state (for example, a state in which a normal button operation effect is not executed), and the first state is the first state When the operation means is operated, the first control (for example, control for executing a normal button operation effect) can be executed at least, and the second state is the first state. There is operation of the operation means In this case, at least a second control (for example, a control in which a normal button operation effect is not executed) can be executed, and the first control executes the first display on the display means. The second control is a control including at least a control for causing the display means to execute the second display, and the third display is in the first state. The fourth display is a display that may be displayed in the second state, and the third display is the first image ( For example, the display includes at least a button operation display 800, and the fourth display is a display that does not include at least the first image, and the first image (for example, the first operation unit (for example, , Chance button 136) The first operating means is means including at least light emitting means (for example, a chance button lamp 138), and the light emitting means is means that emits light in the first state. And the light-emitting means is means that does not emit light in the second state.

  According to such a configuration, there is a case where the button operation effect can be varied to enhance the interest of the player.

  The chance button lamp 138 may emit light in the first state and may not emit light in the second state. The chance button lamp 138 is controlled to emit light by the first sub-control unit 400, but may be controlled by other control means.

  In addition, second operation means (back button 810, other chance buttons, buttons used when changing the volume, etc.) are provided, and at least one of the plural types of displays is a fifth display (for example, , A display corresponding to the operation of the back button 810)), and at least one of the plurality of states is a third state, and the first state is an operation of the second operation means. Is the state where at least the first control is not executed, and the third state is the third control (for example, the back button 810) when the second operation means is operated. The third state is a state in which at least the third control is not performed when the first operation means is operated. And the third control is the above table. Including at least control a control to execute display the fifth to the means may be a thing.

  According to such a configuration, there is a case where the button operation effect can be varied to enhance the interest of the player.

  In addition, the control unit at least shifts to the second state (for example, a state in which a normal button operation effect is not executed) after receiving the first command from another control unit (for example, the liquid crystal control unit 700). It is good also as a means to do.

  Further, the second state (for example, a state in which a normal button operation effect is not executed) is different from the first state (for example, a state in which a normal button operation effect is executed). Also good.

  The second operation means (for example, the back button 810) may be different from the first operation means (for example, the chance button 136).

  Further, at least one of the plurality of types of displays may be a sixth display (for example, an effect display displayed after the back button 810 is operated).

  Further, the sixth display (for example, an effect display displayed after the back button 810 is operated) may be a display including at least a second image (for example, an image including information advantageous to the player). Good.

  Further, at least one of the plurality of types of states may be a fourth state (for example, a demo image display state or a variable game state).

  Further, the gaming table may be a pachinko machine, and the gaming table may be a slot machine.

  It should be noted that there are cases where the button operation is effectively accepted even in cases other than the button operation effect, and even when the button reception information is not referred to in a certain control process, the button operation may be effectively accepted. Further, when the button reception information is not referred to in a certain control process, the button operation may not be effectively received.

  The pachinko machine 100 may be provided with a second operation means (back button 810). In this case, the back button 810 is used for other chance buttons, selection buttons, volume changes, and the like. It may be a button or the like. The back button 810 may or may not have a lamp (back button lamp 812) that causes the back button 810 to emit light. Further, even if the back button 810 is operated in a state where there is no button operation display indicating the operation of the back button 810, an operation corresponding to the back button 810 (for example, volume change when the back button 810 is a volume change button, etc.) ) May be performed, or the operation may not be performed.

  When the back button 810 is another chance button, even if the back button 810 is operated in the first state (a state in which a normal button operation effect can be executed), an effect corresponding to the back button 810 is executed. It may be that which does not execute the effect. Further, when the back button 810 is provided, there may be a back button operation effect corresponding to the back button 810, or there may be no back button operation effect.

  Further, the first sub control unit 400 may shift to the second state (back button state) when a command (for example, a return command) is received from the liquid crystal control unit 700.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the chance button 136 is operated, the first state in which the normal button operation effect can be executed, and the second state in which the normal button operation effect is not executed. It is possible to shift at least between these states. In the first state, the first display that is displayed when the normal button operation effect is performed can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the second state, the decorative symbol display device 208 can be displayed normally. The second display displayed when the button operation effect is not executed can be displayed. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 can display a third display that is a display at the time of a button operation effect (including the button operation display 800), and the third display is displayed in the first state. The display may be displayed. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a display different from the display at the time of the normal button operation effect (a display that does not include the button operation display 800 or a button operation different from a button that is actually enabled). A fourth display that is a suggestive display or the like can be displayed, and the fourth display is a display that may be displayed in the second state.

  The second state is a back button state in which the button operation display 800 is not displayed, but the operation of the chance button 136 is effectively accepted. Alternatively, the button operation display 800 suggesting the operation of the chance button 136 is displayed, but an operation of another button (physical back button 810) different from this is effectively accepted. That is, the button operation display 800 that indicates a different operation of the chance button 136 when the operation of the back button 810 is effectively accepted, which is a gaming machine including the physical back button 810, is referred to here. It can be said to be the second display.

  Further, even when the button operation display 800 is not performed, the button operation reception may be validated (button reception state).

  Further, when the button operation display 800 is performed, the button operation reception may be validated (button reception state), and the button lamp may be turned on.

  Further, when enabling the acceptance of the operation of the back button 810, the back button lamp 812 may or may not be lit. Further, when the acceptance of the operation of the back button 810 is made valid, the back button lamp 812 is turned on for a moment and then turned off. However, the operation of the back button 810 may be made valid even during the turn-off. .

  In the above description, if there is a first operation button and a second operation button, even if there is no button operation display indicating the operation of the first operation button, the operation of the first operation button The product that produces the performance is called the “back button”, but there is no button operation display that suggests the operation of the first operation button, and the lamp that emits the first operation button is turned off. Even if it is in a state, it is good also considering what a production | presentation is performed by operation of a 1st operation button as a "back button."

  In addition, when the first image 804 is displayed and the button operation display is not performed, when the operation button is pressed, another effect display (display of the second image 806) is executed, and the other effect display is displayed. It may overlap with another display and hide it.

  In addition, when the first image 804 is displayed and the back button 810 that is not displayed with the button operation is operated, another effect display (display of the second image 806) is executed, and the other effect display is performed. It may overlap with another display and hide it. For example, the first image 804 (hidden image) is a button operation display 800 of the chance button 136 (an operation means image (an image imitating the chance button 136) BG and an elapsed time notification image (meter) TG). When a button operation display 800 of the button 136 (an operation means image (an image imitating the chance button 136) BG and an elapsed time notification image (meter) TG is displayed, another effect display ( Display of the second image 806) is performed, and the other effect display 806 overlaps a part of the meter (the start time, end time, intermediate time, etc. of the button operation reception period), and a part of the meter In this case, the first image 804 may be only the elapsed time notification image (meter) TG). . The first image (hidden image) 804 may be at least one of the state notification image SG, the hold display, the prefetch effect display, or a combination effect thereof. Further, the second image 806 (hidden image) may be at least one of a hold display, a state notification image SG, a prefetch display effect, or a combination effect thereof.

  In addition, a plurality of types of back buttons 810 may be provided, in which case the first hidden effect is executed by the first back button and the second hidden effect is executed by the second back button. Also good.

  In addition, even after the display of the elapsed time notification image (meter) indicating the operation reception period is terminated and the button operation display 800 is erased based on the button operation, the operation button whose operation is suggested by the button operation display 800 (Or the back button) operation may be accepted (during the actual operation acceptance period), and the operation button (or back button) may be lit or unlit. Also good.

  Further, when there is a first operation button (back button 810) and a second operation button (chance button 136), the operation of the second operation button does not transmit a command to the liquid crystal control unit 700, and the first operation button The command may be transmitted only during the operation reception valid period of the operation button (during the operation reception valid period of the first sub-control unit 400). In this case, the operation reception valid period of the first operation button (back button 810) A button operation effect (light emission, sound, etc.) of the back button 810 may be executed inside.

  In addition, regardless of which of the first operation button and the second operation button is operated, a command is transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (hereinafter referred to as the first sub control). Or the command may be transmitted from the liquid crystal control unit 700 to the first sub-control unit 400 (hereinafter referred to as control led by the liquid crystal control unit 700), or the command may be transmitted. Even so, information on whether or not the operation command is in the operation acceptance valid period may be added.

  In the control led by the first sub-control unit 400, the liquid crystal control unit 700 may receive a command only during the operation reception valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700. Also, the liquid crystal control unit 700 always receives a command, and shifts to a process of analyzing the received command only during an operation reception valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700, or branches based on information included in the command It is good. In addition, the liquid crystal control unit 700 always receives a command, shifts to a process of analyzing the received command only during an operation reception valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700, and branches based on information included in the command. Also good.

  In addition, the button operation immediately before the button is lit may not be accepted by the liquid crystal control unit 700 or may be accepted.

  Further, the button operation immediately after the button is turned on may not be accepted by the liquid crystal control unit 700, or may be accepted.

  Further, the button operation immediately before the button is turned off may not be accepted by the liquid crystal control unit 700, or may be accepted.

  Further, the button operation immediately after the button is turned off may not be accepted by the liquid crystal control unit 700, or may be accepted.

  In addition, the button operation immediately before the button is lit may not be accepted by the first sub-control unit 400 or may be accepted.

  In addition, the button operation immediately after the button is lit may not be accepted by the first sub-control unit 400 or may be accepted.

  The button operation immediately before the button is turned off may not be accepted by the first sub-control unit 400, or may be accepted.

  In addition, the button operation immediately after the button is turned off may not be accepted by the first sub-control unit 400, or may be accepted.

  Further, even when the button is operated within the button operation reception valid period, the command may be transmitted from the liquid crystal control unit 700 at the end of the operation reception valid period, or the command may be sent to the liquid crystal control unit side. May be transmitted, or similar processing may be performed at the end of the fluctuation. Thereby, when a command is missed, the effect can be reset (safety control).

  In addition, the button lights up at a predetermined timing within the button operation reception valid period, and the special effect may be executed when the button is operated at that timing, and the special effect is not executed even when the button is operated at the timing ( There is no change in the production).

  In the configuration including the back button 810, the operation reception valid period of the first sub-control unit 400 may be started even when the auto button is being set. For example, the back button lamp 812 may be turned on during the operation acceptance valid period of the back button 810 even during auto button setting.

  Further, when the button operation display 800 of the second operation button (chance button 136) is displayed, both the second operation button and the first operation button (back button 810) enable the operation reception. Good.

  Further, when the button operation display 800 of the second operation button (chance button 136) is displayed, the operation reception of the second operation button is invalid, and only the operation reception of the first operation button (back button 810). It may be enabled.

  In the configuration in which the liquid crystal control unit 700 performs the control, the first sub control unit 400 is based on the command transmitted from the liquid crystal control unit 700 even though the button operation display 800 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The button operation acceptance valid period may be started. In this way, for example, in the case other than the effect of the back button, after the effect (other than the button operation display 800) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the first sub-control unit 400 performs an effect such as sound output. In some cases, when the processing of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is lowered, it may be possible to prevent the occurrence of an early strike due to sound output (the display cannot be enjoyed if a losing sound is first heard during the display of a stuttering effect). .

  In the above description, the configuration described for the control led by the first sub-control unit 400 can also be applied to the control led by the liquid crystal control unit 700.

In the following, we will add that we have explained so far. Note that the following description can be appropriately applied to the game machine described in this specification including the above-described embodiment.
(Appendix)

  A game machine (for example, pachinko machine 100) includes a control unit (for example, first sub-control unit 400 and / or liquid crystal control unit 700), a display unit (for example, decorative symbol display device 208), and an operation unit (for example, A chance button 138), wherein the display means is means capable of displaying at least a first display, and the first display is at least a display related to the operation means (for example, a button The display does not include an operation display 800), and the control means is a means that validates at least the reception of the operation of the operation means in the first period, and the display means has the display in the first period. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is a period during which at least one display can be displayed.

  That is, in this embodiment, even when the operation is not suggested by the button operation display 800, the operation (acceptance) of the operation button (chance button 136) is validated.

  The operation means includes first operation means (back button 810), the operation means includes second operation means (chance button), and the first display includes at least the first operation. The display relating to the means (for example, the button operation display of the back button 810) is not included, and the first display is the display relating to at least the second operation means (for example, the button operation display 800 of the chance button 136). The game machine is characterized in that the control means is means for validating at least the operation of the first operation means in the first period.

  In other words, in a gaming machine having a first operation button (back button 810) and a second operation button (chance button 136), the first operation button is different from the second operation button indicated by the button operation display 800. The operation (acceptance) of the operation button (that is, the first operation button whose operation is not suggested by the button operation display 800) is validated.

  According to such a configuration, there is a case where the button operation effect can be varied to enhance the interest of the player. In this embodiment, a button whose operation is accepted even though the operation is suggested by the button operation display 800 is referred to as a back button. However, the back button includes a physical back button and a control back button. Includes any of the buttons. That is, even when the operation is not suggested by the button operation display 800, when the operation (acceptance) of the operation button (chance button 136) is validated, the physical chance button 136 is controlled. It is also configured to function as a back button. On the other hand, in a gaming machine having a first operation button (back button 810) and a second operation button (chance button 136), the operation of the first operation button that is not suggested by the button operation display 800 is accepted. The operation button 810 different from the chance button is configured as a physical back button.

  In addition, the control means (for example, the first sub control unit 400 and / or the liquid crystal control unit 700) is a means for invalidating the reception of the operation of the second operation means in the first period. Also good.

  According to such a configuration, there is a case where the button operation effect can be varied to enhance the interest of the player.

  In addition, the first light emitting means (for example, the back button lamp 812) is provided, and the first light emitting means has a second period (for example, after the operation reception period of the back button 810 elapses until a predetermined time elapses). In which the first operation means can emit light, and the control means is a means for validating at least the operation of the first operation means in the second period. It is good. Further, the control unit may be a unit that invalidates at least the operation of the second operation unit during the second period.

  According to such a configuration, there is a case where the button operation effect can be varied to enhance the interest of the player. In addition, since the button (back button) for which the current operation is effective can be suggested in stages, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the game motivation due to the operation not being effective.

  The second light emitting means (for example, the chance button lamp 138) is a means that enables the first operating means to emit light in the third period, and the third light emitting means The period may be a period that starts after at least the first period starts. The game machine may be a pachinko machine or a slot machine.

  According to such a configuration, a button with invalid operation is made to emit light as if it is valid, and the player recognizes it, thereby making the button operation effect more diverse and enhancing the player's interest. May be possible.

  <Other embodiments (embodiments in which a plurality of times from the button press to the execution of effects such as sound output exist)>

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 573 to 580, a game machine (for example, a pachinko machine or the like) according to another embodiment of the present invention (an embodiment in which a plurality of times from the button press to the execution of effects such as sound output exist). The ball and ball game machine and the spinning machine game machine such as a slot machine will be described in detail. Note that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 573 to 580 are used only in the description of the present embodiment in principle, and even if the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the description of the present embodiment The reference numerals 573 to 580 are prioritized. On the other hand, in the following description, about the code | symbol which is not shown by FIGS. 573-580, the same code | symbol is used as the same component as said embodiment. In addition, when there are drawings showing the same timing in a plurality of drawings, overlapping description may be omitted. In addition, the number of the example of this embodiment is used only for the description of this embodiment in principle, but each example of this embodiment and each example of other embodiments are applied in combination with each other. Can do.

  FIG. 573 is a diagram for explaining the outline of this embodiment, and shows an example of an effect (button operation effect) related to the operation of the operation means (for example, the chance button 136) and the operation reception of the operation means. Here, the button operation effect in the present embodiment is an effect related to the operation reception of the button (chance button 136), the button operation display 800 by the decorative symbol display device 208, and the sound (effect sound) output based on the button operation. Etc.

  FIG. 6A is a diagram showing an example of a normal button operation effect. The normal button operation effect is, for example, an effect that enables one button operation to be accepted during the button operation valid reception period.

  On the decorative symbol display device 208, a display (button operation display 800) for prompting the operation of the operation means (chance button 136) is executed, and it is notified that the operation reception valid period of the chance button 136 is in effect.

  When the player presses the chance button 136 (once) during the operation reception valid period of the chance button 136, the first sub-control unit 400 receives the button operation, and the liquid crystal command based on the button operation is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 700. The Upon receiving the liquid crystal command, the liquid crystal control unit 700 deletes the button operation display 800 and executes a first effect display 820 (in this case, an effect of displaying a cut-in image of the character (donor)) based on the button operation. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 drives the speaker 120 in accordance with the execution timing of the first effect, and outputs the effect sound.

  Thus, in the normal button operation effect, the effect of the effect sound output by the first sub-control unit 400 and the timing of the first effect display 820 by the liquid crystal control unit 700 are effected.

  On the other hand, FIG. 5B is a diagram showing an example of the button repeated operation effect. The button repeated operation effect is, for example, an effect that enables reception of a plurality of consecutive button operations (button repeated operation) during the button operation valid reception period.

  On the decorative symbol display device 208, a display (button operation display 800A) that prompts the operation means (chance button 136) to perform a continuous hitting operation is executed, and it is notified that the chance button 136 is in a continuous hitting operation acceptance valid period.

  If the player repeatedly hits the chance button 136 during the operation reception valid period of the chance button 136, the first sub-control unit 400 receives the button operation, and a liquid crystal command based on the button operation is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 700. Then, after the first sub-control unit 400 drives the speaker 120 and outputs the production sound, the liquid crystal control unit 700 that has received the liquid crystal command performs the second production based on the button operation (the button is repeatedly operated) A display 822) that suggests (notifies) the fact is displayed.

  Thus, in the button repeated operation effect, the effect of the effect sound output by the first sub-control unit 400 and the timing of the second effect display 822 by the liquid crystal control unit 700 do not match. For example, the effect sound output is the second effect sound output. This is executed prior to the effect display 822.

  FIG. 574 is a diagram for explaining the outline of the present embodiment. FIGS. 5A and 5B are timing charts showing the relationship between button operation and effect sound output. FIG. It is an example in the case of an operation effect, and the same figure (b) is an example in the case of a button hitting operation effect. FIG. 10C is an example of an effect data management table.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, in the first button operation (normal operation of the chance button 136), the button operation (A) starts the execution of the button operation effect (production sound output according to the button operation). The period until B) is the first period t1.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 5B, in the second button operation (chance button 136 continuous hitting operation), the execution of the button operation effect (production sound output in accordance with the operation) is started from the first button operation (A). The period until B) is the second period t2, and the second period t2 is shorter than the first period t1.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 4A and 4B, the first period t1 and the second period t2 are determined according to the transmission / reception timing of commands between the first sub-control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700. However, the first sub-control unit 400 holds the data table and sets the first period t1 and the second period t2 based on the data table as shown in FIG. It may be a thing. For example, in FIG. 6C, the number of interruptions from the detection of the button operation to the output of the effect sound is held as a table. The first sub-control unit 400 can output the effect sound at a predetermined timing with reference to the table when the effect is executed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the period from the button operation to the start of output of the effect sound is different between the normal button operation effect and the button repeated operation effect, and the button operation effect is more normal than the button operation effect. Is shorter. In the normal button operation effect, the effect display and the output of the effect sound are executed at substantially the same timing, but in the button repeated operation effect, the output of the effect sound is executed before the effect display. Thereby, the dynamic feeling of the button repeated operation effect can be emphasized, and the player's interest can be enhanced.

Hereinafter, this will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. Note that the circuit configuration of the control unit of the present embodiment is the same as the configuration shown in FIG.
<Example 1 of timing chart of button operation and button operation effect>

  With reference to FIG. 575, a timing chart of button operation and button operation effect of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 4A is a timing chart in the case of button hitting operation, and FIG. 4B is a timing chart in the case of normal button operation.

  The first sub-control unit 400 performs the effect lottery process in the effect control process of the first sub-control unit main process, and the liquid crystal control unit 700, the speaker 120, the lamp L, and the movable object so as to perform various effects according to the result. A control command is transmitted to M. Here, a button operation effect (an effect related to reception of an operation of the chance button 136) will be described as an example of the effect. As effects related to the reception of the operation of the chance button 136, the button operation display 800 (displayed by (liquid crystal) button in the figure) by the decorative symbol display device 208, the light emission effect of the chance button lamp 138 (in the figure (sub) button LED), There are production sound output (and other light emission) productions (in the figure, productions such as (sub) sound), and the timing chart of FIG. 575 shows only these productions. FIG. 575 is an example of a case where a button operation effect is executed based on a command (return command) transmitted from the liquid crystal control unit 700 (control led by the liquid crystal control unit 700).

As shown in FIG. 5A, the liquid crystal control unit 700 causes the first sub control unit 400 to enable the acceptance of the operation of the chance button 136 in the liquid crystal control unit 700 (start reception). Send a return command. Thereafter, the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts displaying the button operation display 800 on the decorative symbol display device 208 (B). The button operation display 800 in this case is a display that suggests the button continuous operation of the chance button 136. In addition, the presentation state of the first sub-control unit 400 changes according to the state of the button repeated operation, and the display mode (display state) of the button operation display 800 suggesting the button repeated operation changes accordingly. There may be. In this example, the production state of the first sub-control unit 400 changes in three stages (states (a) to (c) shown in the (sub) production state) in FIG. The button operation display 800 has three display modes (display states) in accordance with the change in the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 (in FIG. To change. The button operation display 800 displayed at the timing (B) is a display of status a.

  The first sub control unit 400 that has received the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts an operation reception valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (C). Thereafter, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits the part data to the chance button lamp 138 and causes the chance button lamp 138 to emit light (D).

  When continuous hitting of the chance button 136 is started during the operation reception valid period in the first sub-control unit 400 (when the first operation is performed among the continuous hit operations) (E1), the first sub-control unit 400 A liquid crystal command is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (E1). Further, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits the part data to the speaker 120 and outputs a production sound from the speaker 120 (F1).

  Similarly, every time the chance button 136 is repeatedly hit (E2 to E6), the first sub control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (E2 to E6), and the first sub control unit 400 is connected to the speaker. The part data is transmitted to 120, and the production sound is output from the speaker 120 (F2 to F6).

  In this example, the first sub-control unit 400 is in the state A from the first to second consecutive hit operations, but at the third timing (E3) of the consecutive hit operations, the first sub-control unit The effect state of 400 changes from state a to state a. At the timing after the output of the effect sound (F3) based on the third continuous hitting operation, the button operation display 800 changes to the display of the state (G).

  In addition, at the timing after the production sound output (F6) based on the sixth continuous hitting operation, the button operation display 800 changes to the display of the state C, and at the same time, the operation reception valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700 is changed. End (operation reception is invalidated) (H). The liquid crystal controller 700 transmits a return command to the first sub controller 400 (H). Thereafter, the liquid crystal controller 700 ends (erases) the button operation display 800 of the decorative symbol display device 208 (I).

  Thereafter, the first sub-control unit 400 ends the operation reception valid period (operation reception is invalidated), and the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 changes from state i to state c (J). Thereafter, the chance button lamp 138 is turned off (K).

Also, as shown in FIG. 5B, in a normal button operation effect, the liquid crystal control unit 700 activates acceptance of the operation of the chance button 136 (starts acceptance) in the liquid crystal control unit 700 (A). The return command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Thereafter, the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts displaying the button operation display 800 on the decorative symbol display device 208 (B). The button operation display 800 in this case is a display that suggests a normal operation (for example, one press) of the chance button 136. Therefore, in this case, the presentation state of the first sub-control unit 400 does not change according to the state of the button operation, and the display mode (display state) of the button operation display 800 suggesting the button operation changes. I don't have to.

  The first sub control unit 400 that has received the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts an operation reception valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (C). Thereafter, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits the part data to the chance button lamp 138 and causes the chance button lamp 138 to emit light (D).

  When the chance button 136 is operated during the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub-control unit 400 (E), the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (E). Upon receiving the liquid crystal command, the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends the operation acceptance valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700, and returns a command to the first sub control unit 400 (F). Thereafter, the liquid crystal controller 700 ends (erases) the button operation display 800 (G).

  The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the return command ends the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub-control unit 400 (H), and turns off the chance button lamp 138 (I).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the case of the button repeated operation effect, from the button operation (timing (E1) in FIG. 5A) to the output of the effect sound (timing (F1) in FIG. The period (t2) is shorter than the period (t1) from the button operation of the normal button operation effect (timing (E) in FIG. 5B) to the output of the effect sound (I).

  That is, in the case of the button repeated operation effect, the first sub control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 when there is a button operation, but without waiting for the return command for the liquid crystal command, Control unit 400 drives speaker 120 to output a production sound.

On the other hand, in a normal button operation effect, when there is a button operation, a liquid crystal command is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the liquid crystal control unit 700, and the liquid crystal control unit 700 sends a return command for the liquid crystal command to the first sub-control. After transmission to the unit 400, the effect sound is output.
<Example 2 of timing chart of button operation and button operation effect>

  With reference to FIG. 576, another example of the timing chart of the button operation and the button operation effect will be described. In this embodiment, a plurality of button operations can be performed within the button operation reception valid period, and an effect is executed (the state of the effect changes) every time the button operation is performed. That is, the presentation state of the first sub-control unit 400 changes from the initial state to the state “a” to “e” every time the button is operated, and accordingly, the button operation display 800 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode (display state) changes from the initial state to states a to c.

As shown in the figure, the liquid crystal control unit 700 returns a command to the first sub control unit 400 at a timing (A) when the liquid crystal control unit 700 validates the operation of the chance button 136 (starts the reception). Send. Thereafter, the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts displaying the button operation display 800 on the decorative symbol display device 208 (B). The button operation display 800 in this case is an initial state display, for example, a display suggesting the first button operation of the chance button 136.

  The first sub control unit 400 that has received the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts an operation reception valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (C). Thereafter, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits the part data to the chance button lamp 138 and causes the chance button lamp 138 to emit light (D).

  When the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed during the operation reception valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (E), the first sub control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (E ). Upon receiving the liquid crystal command, the liquid crystal control unit 700 transmits a return command to the first sub control unit 400 (F). In addition, the liquid crystal control unit 700 changes the state of the button operation display 800 from the initial state to the state (G). The display of the status “a” is, for example, a display suggesting the second button operation of the chance button 136.

  Upon receiving the timing (F) return command, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits the part data to the speaker 120, outputs the effect sound from the speaker 120, and sets the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 to the initial state. Is changed from state to state (H).

  When the second operation of the chance button 136 is performed during the operation reception valid period in the first sub-control unit 400 (I), the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (I ). Upon receiving the liquid crystal command, the liquid crystal control unit 700 transmits a return command to the first sub control unit 400 (J). In addition, the liquid crystal control unit 700 changes the state of the button operation display 800 from state A to state A (K). The display of the state A is, for example, a display suggesting the third button operation of the chance button 136.

  The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the timing (J) return command transmits part data to the speaker 120, outputs a production sound from the speaker 120, and changes the production state of the first sub-control unit 400 to the status indicator. (M).

  If the third operation of the chance button 136 is performed during the operation reception valid period in the first sub-control unit 400 (N), the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (N ). Upon receiving the liquid crystal command, the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends the operation acceptance valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700, and transmits a return command to the first sub control unit 400 (O). Further, the liquid crystal control unit 700 changes the state of the button operation display 800 from state A to state C (P). The display of status c is a display that suggests that the operation acceptance valid period of the chance button 136 has ended, for example.

  Receiving the timing (O) return command, the first sub-control unit 400 ends the operation reception valid period in the first sub-control unit 400, transmits the part data to the speaker 120, and outputs the effect sound from the speaker 120. In addition, the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 is changed from state A to state C (Q). Thereafter, the first sub-control unit 400 turns off the chance button lamp 138.

In this embodiment, the button operation can be performed a plurality of times within the operation reception valid period, and the state of the effect changes for each button operation, while the period from the button operation to the effect sound based on the button operation It will be slower than in the case of operation effects. That is, in this embodiment, as in the case of normal button operation effects, when a button operation is performed, a liquid crystal command is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the liquid crystal control unit 700, and a return command for the liquid crystal command is displayed. After the liquid crystal control unit 700 transmits to the first sub control unit 400, the effect sound is output.
<Example 1 of Button Operation and Button Operation Effect>

  FIG. 577 is a diagram showing, in time series, an example of the button hitting operation and the button hitting operation effect corresponding to Example 1 of the timing chart shown in FIG. 575 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 6A, a fourth symbol display area 208e is provided in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example, on the upper right side. Below the decorative symbol display device 208, a special figure 1 display device 212, a special figure 2 display device 214, a special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and a special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are provided. Since these configurations are the same as those shown in FIG. 565, description thereof will be omitted.

  This timing is, for example, the timing of (B) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 575 (a), and shows a state in which a special game of variable games has started. The special symbol 2) indicates that the variable game is being executed, the special symbol 2 display device 214 displays the stop symbol mode in a stopped state, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol in the upper left of the display area. Fluctuation display has started. In addition, the button operation display 800 is displayed in the approximate center of the display area. This button operation display 800 is a display that suggests a button hitting operation. For example, the operation means image BG (for example, an image imitating the chance button 136 and the characters “continue hitting !!” suggesting that the button is repeatedly hit. And an elapsed time notification image TG for notification of the elapsed time of the operation reception period of the chance button 136 (in this example, the meter is adjusted to the elapsed time of the operation reception period of the chance button 136). Image with scales filled in). In this example, a state notification image SG indicating the state of continuous hitting is also displayed. The state notification image SG is a meter display and refers to a display whose display mode can be changed at least when a change condition is established. Satisfaction of the change condition refers to, for example, a case where a time has elapsed since the start of display of a predetermined image (status notification image SG) or a case where the number of repeated button operations has increased. At this timing, the speaker 120 does not output the production sound.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5B is, for example, the timing (E1) in the timing chart shown in FIG.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C is, for example, the timing (F1) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 575A. FIG. 6B shows a state in which a production sound is being output from the speaker 120 after a period t2 has elapsed since the button operation shown in FIG.

The timing shown in FIG. 6D shows the state from the timing (F1) to the timing (E2) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 575 (a), for example. Indicates a state that is not.
<Example 2 of Button Operation and Button Operation Effect>

  FIG. 578 is a diagram showing, in time series, an example of button operation and button operation effect corresponding to Example 1 of the timing chart shown in FIG. 575 (b).

  The timing shown in FIG. 5A is, for example, the timing of (B) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 575 (b), and the effect state is displayed in the character display of “Let's hit repeatedly!” Instead, since it is the same as FIG. 577 (a) except that the characters “PUSH !!” suggesting one button operation are displayed, the description thereof will be omitted.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5B is, for example, the timing (E1) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 575B, and is a state where a button operation (one operation) is performed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C shows the state from the timing (E) to the timing (G) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 575 (b), for example, and the button operation display 800 is continued. However, the speaker 120 does not output the effect sound corresponding to the button operation.

The timing shown in FIG. 4D is, for example, the timing (I) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 575B. FIG. 5B shows a state in which a production sound is being output from the speaker 120 after a period t1 has elapsed since the button operation shown in FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the button operation display 800 is not displayed, and a first effect display 820 displayed based on the button operation is executed. As described above, in this embodiment, the first effect display 820 displayed based on the button operation and the output of the operation sound corresponding to the button operation have almost the same timing.
<Example 3 of Button Operation and Button Operation Production>

  FIG. 579 is a diagram showing another example of button operations and button operation effects in time series, and is an example of effects using a combination (movable body).

The timing shown in FIG. 5 (a) indicates the appearance of a feature by displaying the characters “Super hot when the feature falls!” In addition to the effect display of FIG. 578 (a). Other than that is the same as in FIG.
The timing shown in FIG. 5B is a state where a button operation is performed.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 5C, the button operation display 800 is not displayed, and another display (for example, an effect image or the like) other than the button operation display 800 is displayed based on the button operation. A display 816) is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D shows a state in which a production sound is output from the speaker 120 after a predetermined period (eg, period t1) has elapsed since the button operation shown in FIG. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button operation display 800 is not displayed, and the first effect display 820 (for example, other than the button operation display 800) is displayed based on the button operation so as to be superimposed on the third effect display (for example, , An image of an accessory) is displayed. As described above, in this embodiment, the first effect display 820 other than the button operation display 800 displayed based on the button operation and the output of the operation sound corresponding to the button operation have almost the same timing.

Moreover, in this effect example, even if the button operation shown in FIG. 5B is a normal button operation or a button continuous hitting operation, the period until the output of the effect sound corresponding to the button operation is, for example, , Which is equivalent to the period t1 shown in FIG. 575 (b). Thus, in the case of an effect using an accessory, a period from the button operation to the output of the effect sound corresponding to the button operation may be a fixed period regardless of the state of the button operation.
<Example 4 of Button Operation and Button Operation Effect>

  FIG. 580 is a diagram showing, in time series, an example of button operations and button operation effects corresponding to Example 2 of the timing chart shown in FIG.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5A is, for example, the timing shown in FIG. 576 (B), and the effect state is the same as that shown in FIG. Further, the button operation display 800 in FIG.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5B is, for example, the timing (E) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 576 and is a state in which the first button operation is executed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C shows a state from after the timing (F) to before the timing (G) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 576, for example. The button operation display 800 from FIG. 5A is continued, but the effect sound corresponding to the button operation is not output from the speaker 120.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D shows the state of the period (G) to (H) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 576, for example. Although the button operation display 800 is continued, a first display 824 is displayed in addition thereto, and the state of the button operation display 800 is changed from the initial state to the state A (timing (G) in FIG. 576). The first display 824 is, for example, a display of “During normal reach” in a face image of a character (dono) and a balloon. Thereafter, an effect sound corresponding to the first button operation shown in FIG. 5B is output from the speaker 120 (timing (H) in FIG. 576).

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E is, for example, the timing (I) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 576, and is a state in which the second button operation is executed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5F shows the state of the period from the timing (I) to the timing (H) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 576, for example. The button operation display 800 and the first display 824 are continued, and no effect sound is output from the speaker 120.

  The timing shown in (g) of the figure shows the state in the period (K) to (L) of the timing chart shown in FIG. 576, for example. Although the button operation display 800 is continued, a second display 826 is displayed in addition thereto, and the state of the button operation display 800 changes from state A to state A (timing (K) in FIG. 576). The second display 826 is, for example, a display of “when Chibi princess appears” and a face image of the character (dono). Thereafter, an effect sound corresponding to the second button operation shown in FIG. 5E is output from the speaker 120 (timing (L) in FIG. 576).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, as an example of the button operation effect, the case where the effect sound corresponding to the button operation is output has been described as an example, but another effect may be used. That is, the light emission effect of the lamp L corresponding to the button operation (including the chance button lamp 138), the operation effect of the movable body, or the effect display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the same. The same effect can be obtained.

  As described above, the gaming table (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the embodiment of the present invention has an operation unit (for example, chance button 136), a production unit (for example, speaker 120), and a control unit (for example, for example). , First sub-control unit 400), wherein the production means is a means capable of executing at least a plurality of kinds of effects, and the control means can at least transition to a plurality of kinds of states. And at least one of the plurality of states is a first state, at least one of the plurality of states is a second state, and the plurality of types of effects. At least one of the first effects (for example, an effect including at least a sound effect at the time of button operation in the button hitting effect), and at least one of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect (For example, an effect including at least a sound effect at the time of button operation in a normal button effect), and the first state is a first control (for example, a button when the operation means is operated). The second state is a state where at least the second control (for example, normal button effect control) is executed when the operation means is operated. The first control is a control including at least a control for causing the effecting means to execute the first effect (for example, a button continuous striking effect), and the second control includes: The control includes at least control for causing the effect means to execute the second effect (for example, normal button effect), and the first control is executed after a first time has elapsed since the operation of the operation means. The second control is a control that is started after a second time has elapsed since the operation of the operation means, and the second time is greater than the first time. It is a gaming machine characterized by a long time.

  With such a configuration, various button operation effects can be made according to the button operation, and the player's interest may be enhanced.

  In addition, the first state is a state in which transition is made in the case of a button striking effect, and the first effect includes at least an effect for outputting sound (hereinafter referred to as “first sound output effect”). The second effect may be an effect including at least an effect of outputting sound (hereinafter referred to as “second sound output effect”).

  By adopting such a configuration, there is a case where the player's interest can be enhanced by emphasizing the dynamic feeling of the effect in the button repeated operation effect in the case of the button repeated operation.

  In the case of the first state (button repeated operation effect), the first sound output effect is executed after the first time has elapsed from the operation of the chance button 136 by the first control. In the case of the state (normal button operation effect), the second control executes the second sound output effect after the second time has elapsed since the operation of the chance button 136, and the second time It is longer than one time.

  The button repeated operation effect here is a first effect including at least a sound effect (effect sound) at the time of button operation in the button repeated operation effect. The normal button operation effect is a button operation in a normal button operation effect. This is the second effect including at least the sound effect of time. The first control is a control that is started after the first time has elapsed from the operation of the chance button 136, and the second control is the second control after the second time has elapsed from the operation of the chance button 136. In the control to be executed, the second time may be shorter than the first time or may be approximately the same time.

  Further, the second effect includes sound effects other than sound effects at the time of button operation. Further, the second effect includes the operation of the movable body and sound effects accompanying the operation of the movable body. Further, there may be a case where another sound effect is not output before the second effect is started after the chance button 136 is operated (prior to the second effect).

  In the case of the first state (button repeated operation effect), the first sound output effect is executed after the first time has elapsed from the operation of the chance button 136, and the second state (normal button operation). In the case of production), the second sound output production is executed after the second time has elapsed since the operation of the chance button 136, and the second time is longer than the first time.

  The second sound output effect may be an effect different from the first sound output effect.

  The second sound output effect may be the same effect as the first sound output effect.

  Further, at least one of the plurality of types of states may be a third state (for example, a demo state or a variable game state).

  Further, at least one of the plurality of types of effects may be a third effect (for example, a demonstration screen display or a variable display).

  Further, the gaming table may be a pachinko machine, and the gaming table may be a slot machine.

  With such a configuration, the player's interest may be enhanced in accordance with button operations. That is, in the button repeated operation effect in the case of the button repeated operation, there is a case where the player's interest can be enhanced by enhancing the dynamic feeling of the effect as compared with the button operation effect by the normal button operation. The first display and the second display may be the same display.

  In the first state, the time from the first button operation (normal button operation) to the start of the production execution corresponding to the button operation production (production start period) is the first time. The time from the second button operation (button repeated operation) to the start of production execution is the second time, and the first time may be shorter than the second time, or the first time and the second time The time may be the same (same) time.

  In addition, the effect start period may be different between the normal button operation effect and the button repeated operation effect.

  In the case of a button operation effect in which an effect is executed each time a button is operated within the button operation reception valid time, the effect start period may be the same for each button operation. In this case, the effect start period for each button operation may be the same as the effect start period of the normal button operation, may be longer, or may be shorter.

  Further, only when the last button operation in the button continuous operation effect is performed, the effect start period may be as long as the effect start period of the normal button operation effect.

  In addition, when the button is repeatedly operated, the first sub control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 every time the button is operated. The liquid crystal control unit 700 transmits a return command to the first sub control unit 400 each time. The return command may be transmitted according to the content of the command from the first sub-control unit 400. The following is an example of a case where a return command is transmitted according to the content of the command from the first sub-control unit 400.

(1) This is a case where the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 is changed by the button stroke operation.

(2) This is a case where a predetermined command is transmitted when it is desired to change the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 by a button stroke operation, and the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 is changed by a return command in response thereto. Thus, the effect state in the liquid crystal control unit 700 and the effect state in the first sub-control unit 400 can be matched.

(3) In the case where the return command is sent at the final stage of the effect (at the end of the operation reception valid time), the first sub control unit 400 side can acquire the final information on the liquid crystal control unit 700 side. That is, by branching the subsequent processing based on the final information on the liquid crystal control unit 700 side, it is possible to produce effects in accordance with the final information on the liquid crystal control unit 700 side.

  In this way, when the button is repeatedly operated, the return command is not received each time, so that the first sub-control unit 400 can allocate the time required for receiving the return command to the time for executing other processing. In other cases, other effects (for example, lighting of lamps and output of other effect sounds) can be made more elaborate effects.

  In addition, the button start operation time is shorter than the normal button operation time, and after the button operation, the sound is output immediately (immediately). There may be a more powerful production by overlapping the production sounds.

  In addition, when the button is repeatedly operated, the sound is output in a short period of time (immediately) after the button operation except for the last time of the button operation. Since the effect sound is output by the return command, the effect start period is lengthened only for the final button operation, and as a result, it may be possible to prevent a monotonous effect.

  Further, when the effect start period becomes longer (in the case of a normal button operation effect, etc.), for example, the player can be made to recognize that the time during which other effect sounds output before the button operation can be heard becomes longer. There are cases where it is possible. Alternatively, the player may be able to recognize the other production sound output before the button operation during the long production start period so that it cannot be heard.

  Moreover, in the button repeated operation effect, a plurality of effect sounds that are continuously output in a short period corresponding to the button operation may be overlapped or may not be overlapped.

  In addition, the table of the effect start period held by the first sub control unit 400 is not limited to the configuration in which the length of the effect start period is controlled by transmitting and receiving commands between the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700. It may be managed to control the length of the effect start period (see FIG. 574 (c)).

In the following, we will add that we have explained so far. Note that the following description can be appropriately applied to the game machine described in this specification including the above-described embodiment.
(Appendix)

  A game table (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment is a game table including operation means (for example, chance button 136) and effect means (for example, speaker 120) for performing effects. The operation means is a means capable of receiving a first operation (for example, a normal operation), and the operation means is a means capable of receiving a second operation (for example, a button stroke operation), The effect means is means capable of executing a first effect (for example, output of effect sound) in the first state, and the effect means is a second effect (for example, output of effect sound) in the second state. ), And the first state is a state after a first time has elapsed after the operation unit has received the first operation, and the second state is After the operating means accepts the second operation, A state after the second time has elapsed, the first time and the second time is gaming table characterized by a different time, that.

  With such a configuration, various button operation effects can be made according to the button operation, and the player's interest may be enhanced.

  The first time may be longer than the second time. In addition, the first operation is an operation operated at a first number during the reception period of the operation means, and the second operation is performed at a second number during the reception period of the operation means. The operation may be operated, and the first number of times may be less than the second number of times. Further, the second operation may be a continuous operation of the operation means.

That is, when there are a plurality of button operation modes (there are a first button operation mode and a second button operation mode), the button operation from the button operation according to the first button operation mode (for example, normal button operation) is performed. The period (hereinafter referred to as the production start period) until the production (for example, the production of the production sound) corresponding to is the first period, and the button operation by the second button operation mode (for example, the button stroke operation) The production start period from the production to the production corresponding to the button operation (for example, output of production sound) may be the second period, and the first period may be longer than the second period.

  By adopting such a configuration, there is a case where the player's interest can be enhanced by emphasizing the dynamic feeling of the effect in the button repeated operation effect in the case of the button repeated operation.

  The display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) includes a first display (first effect based on the button operation) corresponding to the first operation (for example, a normal button operation). Display 820), and the display means displays a second display (for example, a second effect display 822 based on the continuous stroke operation) corresponding to the second operation (for example, the button stroke operation). The display means is a means for displaying, and the effect means (for example, the speaker 120) is a means for starting execution of the first effect (for example, output of effect sound) in accordance with the start of the first display, The effect means may be means for starting execution of the second effect (for example, output of effect sound) before the start of the second display.

  In other words, in a normal button operation effect, the effect start display period is extended, and the effect sound output timing corresponding to the button operation and the effect display that is displayed according to the normal button operation (the first display based on the normal button operation) Control to synchronize with the timing of one production display). On the other hand, in the button stroke operation effect, by shortening the effect start period, the effect sound output timing corresponding to the button operation (button repeated operation) and the effect display displayed according to the button operation (button repeated operation) ( Control that does not match the timing (second timing display) based on the continuous hitting operation) is performed.

  With such a configuration, the player's interest may be enhanced in accordance with button operations. That is, in the button repeated operation effect in the case of the button repeated operation, there is a case where the player's interest can be enhanced by enhancing the dynamic feeling of the effect as compared with the button operation effect by the normal button operation. The first display and the second display may be the same display.

  <Other embodiments (embodiments in which the character change effect is canceled when a predetermined interruption occurs during the character change effect (character determination effect)>

  Next, a game machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a slot machine) according to another embodiment of the present invention (an embodiment in which the effect is canceled when a predetermined interruption occurs during the character change effect). Etc.) will be described in detail. Note that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 581 to 589 are used only in the description of the present embodiment in principle, and even in the case where the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the description of the present embodiment is not limited to the drawings. The reference numerals 581 to 589 are prioritized. On the other hand, in the following description, about the code | symbol which is not shown by FIGS. 581-589, the same code | symbol is used as the same component as said embodiment. In addition, when there are drawings showing the same timing in a plurality of drawings, overlapping description may be omitted. In addition, the number of the example of this embodiment is used only for the description of this embodiment in principle, but each example of this embodiment and each example of other embodiments are applied in combination with each other. Can do.

  FIG. 581 is a diagram for explaining the outline of the present embodiment, and is a diagram illustrating an example of a character change effect.

  For example, when the symbol variation start condition is satisfied, the gaming machine of the present embodiment executes effects such as symbol variation display. Then, when a predetermined effect (for example, a big hit game effect or a bonus game effect) is started, a character change effect that can select and determine a character to appear in the predetermined effect from a plurality of characters. It is feasible. This character change effect is composed of effects including a character introduction effect and a character selection effect. Character introduction effects show the characters that can be selected by the player while the characters are displayed (sequentially) and introduced (including when the player moves between characters using the selection button). This refers to an effect of displaying an image (temporary selection image) that is in a state of being selected but not yet determined (temporary selection state). The character selection effect is selected after selecting a specific character from a plurality of characters ( This refers to an effect that is executed after the selection button is selected.

  The main control unit 300 is a character change effect start command for instructing the first sub control unit 400 to execute a character change effect when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a big win is won in the big hit determination). Send. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the character change effect start command starts the character change effect when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a start condition for each round in the jackpot game is satisfied).

  The character introduction effect is, for example, that a plurality of selectable characters are sequentially centered on the basis of accepting an operation of the selection button (left button) 136a or the selection button (right button) 136b during the execution of the character introduction effect. It is an effect that makes it move and stand out. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5A, the first character (donor) is the front center of the display area, the second character (rooster) is the left rear, and the third character (princess) is An image (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a “temporarily selected image of the first character (donor)”) that displays the first character (donor) in the center of the front in a conspicuous and bright manner is displayed. At the same time, for example, when the operation of the selection button (left button) 136a is accepted during execution of the character introduction effect, the second character (character (donor)) displayed from the currently displayed (temporarily selected) character is displayed. This is an effect of executing an animation to be changed to a character (爺)).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 5B, the character selection effect is a character that is temporarily selected (here, character (爺)) based on accepting an operation of the determination button 136 during the execution of the character introduction effect. ) Is selected and determined as the character after the change, and for example, a character string of a speech balloon “Let's leave it to a niece” is displayed, and an effect sound “Let's leave it to a niece” is output from the speaker 120.

  In the normal character change effect, the character is changed to the character determined in the character selection effect. However, in the present embodiment, during the character selection effect (state of FIG. 5B), FIG. As shown in FIG. 4, when a game ball wins a start opening (for example, the first special figure start opening 230 and / or the second special figure start opening 232, etc.), and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. The process for canceling the character selection effect is performed.

Thus, by making it impossible to change the character until the decorative symbol variation display is completed, a sufficient game interval can be secured when changing the character, and the player's gambling can be suppressed. Hereinafter, this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
<Example 1 of timing chart of character change effect>

  FIG. 582 is an example of the timing chart of the character change effect in the present embodiment, and the process is executed based on a command from the first sub control unit 400 (control driven by the first sub control unit 400). It is an example. FIG. 6A shows a case of a normal character change effect, and FIG. 5B shows a timing chart when a predetermined interruption occurs during the execution of the character change effect. In the same figure, an outline of effects in the decorative symbol display device 208 is also shown. In addition, “production” in the figure represents a character selection production, and “operation” represents an operation of the decision button 136.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, in the normal performance, the character introduction effect is being executed in the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing (1). In this state, since the character is not determined, the internal selection state of the first sub-control unit 400 is maintained as the character (here, character A) determined in the previous character change effect. In this example, the character A is temporarily selected in the decorative symbol display device 208, but the temporarily selected character can be moved between the characters A and B by operating the selection button. During this time, the internal selection state does not change.

  When the determination button 136 is operated in a state where the character B is temporarily selected by the operation of the selection buttons 136a and 136b (2), the character selection (determination) effect of the character B is started. When the predetermined execution period of the character selection effect ends (3), the internal selection state of the first sub-control unit 400 is updated to the character B, and other effects (for example, a demo screen) are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Is executed (4). Thereafter, the determined character B appears and the game proceeds (5).

In FIG. 6B, as in FIG. 5A, the determination button 136 is operated in a state where the character B is temporarily selected by the operation of the selection buttons 136a and 136b (2), and the character B is selected (determined). ) Start production. If an interruption occurs before the predetermined execution period of the character selection effect ends, the character selection effect is canceled halfway (3). Since the character selection effect is canceled, the determination of the character B is also canceled, and the previously selected character A is also maintained as the internal selection state of the first sub-control unit 400. Then, character A appears and the game proceeds (4).
<Example 2 of timing chart of character change effect>

  FIG. 583 is an example of a more detailed timing chart of FIG. FIG. 6A is an example of a normal character change effect, and FIG. 5B is an example of a timing chart when a predetermined interruption occurs during the execution of the character change effect. Further, “cursor position” in the figure indicates a position temporarily selected by the selection buttons 136a and 136b (any one of the temporarily selected characters A to C).

  When the selection buttons 136a and 136b are operated during the character introduction effect and the cursor position (temporarily selected character) moves from the character A to the character B (1), as shown in FIG. 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700, and the liquid crystal control unit 700 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 to change the temporarily selected character A to the character B (not shown here).

  Similarly, when the selection buttons 136a and 136b are operated during the character introduction effect and the cursor position (temporarily selected character) moves from the character B to the character C (2), the first sub-control unit 400 controls the liquid crystal control unit 700. The liquid crystal command is transmitted, and the liquid crystal control unit 700 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 to change the temporarily selected character B to the character C (not shown here).

  When the determination button 136 is operated in the temporary selection state of the character C, the first sub control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (3), and the character selection of the character C in the first sub control unit 400 is performed. The production (“C production” shown in the figure) starts to be executed. The C effect is, for example, an effect of outputting an effect sound such as “determined as character C” from the speaker 120 (4). Upon receiving the liquid crystal command from the first sub-control unit 400, the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts executing the character selection effect (“C effect” shown) of the character C on the decorative symbol display device 208 (5). When the character selection effect of the first sub-control unit 400 ends (6) and the character selection effect of the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends (7), the first sub-control unit 400 changes the internal selection state from the previous character A. The character C determined this time is updated and a liquid crystal command is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (8). Receiving the liquid crystal command, the liquid crystal control unit 700 updates the internal selection state of the liquid crystal control unit 700 from the previous character A to the character C determined this time (9).

  As shown in FIG. 4B, when the selection buttons 136a and 136b are operated during the character introduction effect and the cursor position (temporarily selected character) moves from the character A to the character B (1), the first sub-control unit. 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700, and the liquid crystal control unit 700 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 to change the temporarily selected character A to the character B (not shown here).

  Similarly, when the selection buttons 136a and 136b are operated during the character introduction effect and the cursor position (temporarily selected character) moves from the character B to the character C (2), the first sub-control unit 400 controls the liquid crystal control unit 700. The liquid crystal command is transmitted, and the liquid crystal control unit 700 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 to change the temporarily selected character B to the character C (not shown here).

  When the determination button 136 is operated in the temporary selection state of the character C, the first sub control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (3), and the character selection of the character C in the first sub control unit 400 is performed. The production (“C production” shown in the figure) starts to be executed. The C effect is, for example, an effect of outputting an effect sound such as “determined as character C” from the speaker 120 (4). Upon receiving the liquid crystal command from the first sub-control unit 400, the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts executing the character selection effect (“C effect” shown) of the character C on the decorative symbol display device 208 (5).

When an interrupt (cancellation factor) occurs during the execution of the character selection effect of the first sub-control unit 400 (6), the first sub-control unit 400 stops (cancels) the character selection effect of the first sub-control unit 400. Then, a liquid crystal command is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (6). Receiving the liquid crystal command, the liquid crystal control unit 700 stops (cancels) the character selection effect of the decorative symbol display device 208 (7). Since the character selection effect in the first sub-control unit 400 is stopped, the internal selection state of the first sub-control unit 400 is not updated to the determined character C, and the information of the character A determined last time is not updated. Retained. Similarly, the character A information is also held in the internal selection state of the liquid crystal control unit 700.
<Third embodiment of timing chart for character change effect>

  FIG. 584 is another example of the timing chart of the character change effect, and is an example in the case where control is executed based on a command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 (control led by the liquid crystal control unit 700). FIG. 6A shows a case of a normal character change effect, and FIG. 5B shows a timing chart when a predetermined interruption occurs during the execution of the character change effect. Also, FIGS. 3C and 3D are examples of specific effects.

  When the selection buttons 136a and 136b are operated during the character introduction effect and the cursor position (temporarily selected character) moves from the character A to the character B (1), as shown in FIG. 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700, and the liquid crystal control unit 700 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 to change the temporarily selected character A to the character B (not shown).

  Similarly, when the selection buttons 136a and 136b are operated during the character introduction effect and the cursor position (temporarily selected character) moves from the character B to the character C (2), the first sub-control unit 400 controls the liquid crystal control unit 700. The liquid crystal command is transmitted, and the liquid crystal control unit 700 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 to change the temporarily selected character B to the character C (not shown).

  When the determination button 136 is operated in the temporarily selected state of the character C, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (3), and the liquid crystal control unit 700 that has received the command transmits the return command. Is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 (4). Thereafter, the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts executing the character selection effect of the character C on the decorative symbol display device 208 (5). The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the return command executes a character selection effect of the character C in the first sub-control unit 400 (for example, an effect of outputting an effect sound such as “determined as character C” from the speaker 120). Start (6). When the character selection effect of the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends (7), the liquid crystal control unit 700 updates the internal selection state of the liquid crystal control unit 700 from the previous character A to the character C determined this time, and the first sub-control. The command is returned to the unit 400 (8). When the predetermined execution time ends, the first sub control unit 400 ends the character selection effect of the first sub control unit 400 (8). When receiving the return command, the first sub-control unit 400 updates the internal selection state from the previous character A to the character C determined this time (9).

  In FIG. 6B, the timings (1) to (6) are the same as those in FIG. 5A, and thus the description thereof is omitted. The character selection effects of the first sub-control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700 are executed. When an interrupt (cancellation factor) occurs (7), the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700. Upon receiving the liquid crystal command, the liquid crystal control unit 700 transmits a command back to the first sub control unit 400 (8) to cancel (cancel) the character selection effect of the decorative symbol display device 208 (9). The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the return command stops (cancels) the character selection effect of the first sub-control unit 400 (10). Since the character selection effect in the first sub-control unit 400 is stopped, the internal selection state of the first sub-control unit 400 is not updated to the determined character C, and the information of the character A determined last time is not updated. Retained. Similarly, the character A information is also held in the internal selection state of the liquid crystal control unit 700.

  FIG. 6C is a diagram showing an example of the structure of the effect sound as the character selection effect in the first sub-control unit 400.

  As shown in the figure, the effect sound is composed of an introductory playback unit 850 and a loop playback unit 852. In one character selection effect, the introductory playback unit 850 is first played once, and then the loop playback unit 852 is repeated a predetermined number of times. To finish.

  As shown in FIG. 5B, in the case where the character selection effect is canceled (canceled) in the middle, for example, when an interruption occurs during the reproduction of the introduction reproduction unit 850, the introduction reproduction unit 850 is canceled (hereinafter referred to as “reproduction”). However, if an interrupt occurs during playback of the loop playback unit 852, playback of the loop playback unit 852 may be continued. Further, when an interruption occurs during the reproduction of the introduction reproduction unit 850, the introduction reproduction unit 850 may cancel the subsequent loop reproduction unit 852 without canceling. Thus, when the production sound is composed of a plurality of parts, there may be a case where the part is not canceled or a case where the part is canceled.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 4D, when the playback time is set for each effect (sounds A to C), an interruption (between the start of the output of the effect sound and the set time elapses) When a canceling factor) occurs, the subsequent output may be canceled. Note that the reproduction time is an example and may be shorter.

Moreover, although the production sound has been described as an example in FIGS. 3C and 3D, the present invention can be similarly implemented even with an animation.
<Example 4 of timing chart of character change effect>

  FIG. 585 is another example of the timing chart of the character change effect, and is an example in the case where control is executed based on a command from the first sub control unit 400 (control led by the first sub control unit 400). is there. FIG. 6A shows a case of a normal character change effect, and FIG. 5B shows a timing chart when a predetermined interruption occurs during the execution of the character change effect.

  When the selection buttons 136a and 136b are operated during the character introduction effect and the cursor position (temporarily selected character) moves from the character A to the character B (1), as shown in FIG. 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700, and the liquid crystal control unit 700 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 to change the temporarily selected character A to the character B (not shown).

  Similarly, when the selection buttons 136a and 136b are operated during the character introduction effect and the cursor position (temporarily selected character) moves from the character B to the character C (2), the first sub-control unit 400 controls the liquid crystal control unit 700. The liquid crystal command is transmitted, and the liquid crystal control unit 700 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 to change the temporarily selected character B to the character C (not shown).

  When the determination button 136 is operated in the temporarily selected state of the character C, the first sub-control unit 400 updates the internal selection state from the previous character A to the character C determined this time, and the liquid crystal control unit 700 displays the liquid crystal. A command is transmitted (3). Upon receiving the liquid crystal command, the liquid crystal control unit 700 updates the internal selection state from the previous character A to the character C determined this time (4). At this timing, the first sub-control unit 400 starts executing the character selection effect (4). Thereafter, the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts executing the character selection effect of the character C on the decorative symbol display device 208 (5). When the predetermined execution time ends, the first sub control unit 400 ends the character selection effect of the first sub control unit 400 (7), and the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends when the predetermined execution time ends. Then, the character selection effect of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is ended (7).

  In FIG. 5B, the timings (1) to (5) are the same as those in FIG. 5A, and thus the description thereof is omitted. The character selection effects of the first sub-control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700 are executed. When an interruption (cancellation factor) occurs, the first sub-control unit 400 stops (cancels) the character selection effect and transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (6). Upon receiving the liquid crystal command, the liquid crystal control unit 700 stops the character selection effect (7).

In this embodiment, the internal selection state of the first sub-control unit 400 is updated at the start of the character selection effect (timing (3)). The liquid crystal control unit 700 updates the internal selection state based on the update of the internal selection state of the first sub-control unit 400 (timing (4)). Therefore, even when an interrupt occurs during the execution of the character selection effect and the character selection effect is canceled, the internal selection state of the first sub control unit 400 (and the liquid crystal control unit 700) is newly determined. The update of the character (here, character C) is maintained. Such a configuration of character selection effects may be included.
<Example 1 of character change effect>

  FIG. 586 is a diagram showing an example of a character change effect in time series corresponding to the second embodiment of the timing chart shown in FIG. 583 (a).

  The timing shown in FIG. 11A shows a state during a variable game, the timing shown in FIG. 10B shows a state during a variable stop, and FIG. 10C shows a notification for displaying a menu screen during the variable stop. An image 880 (here, an image simulating the decision button 136 and an image made up of characters such as “menu screen display”) is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D shows a state in which the enter button 136 is operated, and a menu screen for setting sound volume adjustment, member registration, and character (character) change is displayed.

The timing shown in FIG. 5E is a state in which the character change is selected and the character introduction effect is executed, and shows the state before the timing (1) in FIG. 583 (a). Here, for example, the currently selected (previously determined) character (dono) is displayed brightly on the front, the character (princess) is displayed on the right rear, and the character (dono) is displayed dark on the left rear.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5F is a state in which the selection button 136a is operated, and shows the timing of (1) in FIG. 583 (a).

  The timing shown in FIG. 5G is a state in which the character (爺) is selected (temporarily selected) by operating the selection button 136a during the character introduction effect, and the timing shown in FIG. 583 (a) (2). Show. The temporarily selected character (爺) is displayed brightly on the front, the character (donor) is displayed on the right rear, and the character (princess) is displayed dark on the left rear.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11H is a state in which the enter button 136 is operated, and shows the timing of (3) in FIG. 583 (a). As a result, the character (選 択) is selected and determined.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6I is a state in which the character selection effect is being executed by the selection decision of the character (爺), and shows the timing of (5) in FIG. 583 (a). The liquid crystal control unit 700 displays a character (爺) brightly on the front in the decorative symbol display device 208 and executes a character selection effect for displaying a balloon character “Let's put it on a bag!”. The unit 400 outputs the effect sound “Let's leave it to the trap!” From the speaker 120 to execute the character selection effect.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6J is a state immediately before the predetermined execution time of the character selection effect ends, and shows the timing from (6) to (7) in FIG. 583 (a).

The timing shown in FIG. 6J shows a state in which the predetermined execution time of the character selection effect ends and the menu screen shown in FIG. 4D is displayed again.

The timings shown in (l) and (m) of the figure are the start ports (for example, the first special figure start port 230 and / or the second special figure start port 232 etc.) during the display of the menu screen shown in FIG. ) Shows a state where the game ball has won ((l) in the figure) and the next variable game has started ((m) in the figure).
<Example 2 of character change effect>

  FIG. 587 is a diagram showing an example of a character change effect in time series corresponding to Example 2 of the timing chart shown in FIG. 583 (b).

  Since the timings shown in FIGS. 5A to 5H are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 586A to H, description thereof will be omitted.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5I is a state in which the character selection effect is being executed by the selection decision of the character (爺), and shows the timing of (5) in FIG. 583 (b). The liquid crystal control unit 700 displays a character (爺) brightly on the front in the decorative symbol display device 208 and executes a character selection effect for displaying a balloon character “Let's put it on a bag!”. The unit 400 outputs the effect sound “Let's leave it to the trap!” From the speaker 120 to execute the character selection effect.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (j) is a state in which a game ball is won at the starting port before the predetermined execution time of the character selection effect ends, and the timing shown in FIG. 583 (b) (6). Show.

The timing shown in FIG. 10 (k) shows the timing after (7) in FIG. 583 (b). That is, it shows a state in which the character selection effect is canceled in the middle of the game, and the variable game accompanying the winning of the start opening is started.

Thus, in this embodiment, when a predetermined interruption occurs during the execution of the character selection effect, the character selection effect is stopped. In this example, the detection of a game ball winning at the start opening or the start of a variable game based thereon is an interrupt factor. In the character selection effect, the effect display by the liquid crystal control unit 700 is also stopped, and the effect sound by the first sub-control unit 400 is also stopped ((i) in the figure).
<Third embodiment of character change effect>

  FIG. 588 is a diagram showing, in time series, another example of the character change effect corresponding to Example 2 of the timing chart shown in FIG. 583 (b).

  Since the timings shown in FIGS. 5A to 5H are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 586A to H, description thereof will be omitted.

  The timings shown in (i) and (j) of the same figure are the state in which the character selection effect is being executed by the selection decision of the character (爺), and shows the timing of (5) in FIG. 583 (b). . The liquid crystal control unit 700 displays a character (爺) brightly on the front in the decorative symbol display device 208 and executes a character selection effect for displaying a balloon character “Let's put it on a bag!”. The unit 400 outputs the effect sound “Let's leave it to the trap!” From the speaker 120 to execute the character selection effect.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (k) is a state in which a game ball is won at the start opening before the predetermined execution time of the character selection effect ends, and the timing shown in FIG. 583 (b) (6). Show.

  The timing shown in (l) of the figure shows the timing after (7) of FIG. 583 (b). That is, it shows a state in which the character selection effect is canceled in the middle of the game, and the variable game accompanying the winning of the start opening is started.

  As shown in (i) and (j) of the figure, the character selection effect may be canceled during the effect (see FIG. 584 (c)) where the effect sound is repeatedly reproduced.

  FIG. 589 is an example of various setting screens. Instead of the demonstration screen shown in FIG. 582 (a), the same diagram setting screen may be displayed.

  (A) to (c) are a display example in which menu screen display is suggested after the change is stopped (FIG. (A)), a menu screen display example (FIG. (B)) based thereon, and a menu screen. A display example of the selected setting screen ((c) in the figure). Further, the setting screens shown in (d) to (g) of the figure may be displayed as selection items on the menu screen (setting screen corresponding to (c) of the figure). In addition, as shown in FIGS. 6H and 6I, setting screens such as setting screens (i) to (k) are displayed without using the menu screen (FIG. 5B). Also good.

  As described above, the gaming table (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment includes an operation unit (for example, the determination button 136), an effect unit (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208), and a control unit (for example, , First sub-control unit 400), wherein the effect means is means capable of executing at least a plurality of kinds of effects, and the control means can be changed to at least a plurality of kinds of states. At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect (for example, an effect related to the selected one), and at least one of the plurality of types of states is the first effect A selection state (for example, a state in which a character selection effect is being executed (a state in which the character A is selected in a temporary selection state, a state in which no character is selected, etc.)) At least one of the plurality of types of states is a second selection state (for example, a state in which a character selection effect is being executed), and when the first condition is satisfied, Means for starting execution of at least the first effect, wherein the first condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the operation means is operated, and the control means is provided in the first case. , First control (control to change from the first selection state to the second selection state, control to change the internal selection state of the first sub-control unit 400 (for example, change from the non-selection state to the character B) Or control for changing from character A to character B), execution control of character selection effects, etc.), and the control means does not execute at least the first control in the second case. The first control is control including at least control for changing from the first selection state to the second selection state. In the first case, the last first condition is satisfied. In the second case, the second condition is satisfied (symbol change start, jackpot) before the first time elapses after the first condition is satisfied. In the case of the next R start, the end of the R, the end of the big hit / small hit, the game ball passing through the gate for the continuous action device operation), the first effect is as follows: The gaming machine is an effect that is executed before the first time elapses from the establishment of the first condition.

  In addition, the gate for an accessory continuous operation device operation is a mechanism that triggers opening of an attacker after the big hit symbol stops. After the jackpot symbol is stopped, the condition device is activated, and when the game ball passes the gate for the continuous actuating device actuating, the continuous actuating device for the actuating device activates processing such as opening the attacker. .

  By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make it impossible to change the character until the effect due to the interruption factor is finished, and when changing the character, the game interval is increased to suppress the gambling feeling of the player. May be possible. Further, the player is terminated by the passage of the production period in which the character selection production is scheduled by displaying another demonstration screen or setting screen, and the character is changed (update of the internal selection state of the first sub-control unit 400). Can be recognized. In other words, when the character selection effect is stopped (without displaying another demonstration screen or setting screen) and the symbol variation display or the like is started, the player changes the character (updates the internal selection state of the first sub-control unit 400). Therefore, it may be possible to reduce the occurrence of a situation in which a character change (update of the internal selection state of the first sub-control unit 400) is performed without the player noticing.

  The first effect is an effect related to the second selection state (for example, a character selection effect that is started before the internal selection state of the first sub-control unit 400 is changed (updated)). Also included are dialogues and sound effects specific to the selected character (character B), which are executed at the time of presentation. The effects related to the second selection state include dialogues and sound effects peculiar to (character B) when the cursor is moved from character A to character B (temporary selection state).

  In addition, the first effect may be an effect including at least an effect of outputting sound. The first effect may be an effect including at least an effect of displaying an image.

  By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make it impossible to change the character until the effect due to the interruption factor is finished, and when changing the character, the game interval is increased to suppress the gambling feeling of the player. May be possible.

  Further, the control means may be means that does not change at least to the second selected state in the second case.

  By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make it impossible to change the character until the effect due to the interruption factor is finished, and when changing the character, the game interval is increased to suppress the gambling feeling of the player. May be possible. Further, the player is terminated by the passage of the production period in which the character selection production is scheduled by displaying another demonstration screen or setting screen, and the character is changed (update of the internal selection state of the first sub-control unit 400). Can be recognized. In other words, when the character selection effect is stopped (without displaying another demonstration screen or setting screen) and the symbol variation display or the like is started, the player changes the character (updates the internal selection state of the first sub-control unit 400). Therefore, it may be possible to reduce the occurrence of a situation in which a character change (update of the internal selection state of the first sub-control unit 400) is performed without the player noticing.

  The second condition may be a condition that may be satisfied when the symbol variation display is executed. Here, the symbol variation display includes the start of rotation of the reel of the slot machine.

  In addition, at least one of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect (for example, an effect of symbol variation display), and the effect means has the second condition (for example, a symbol variation start condition). When it is established, it may be a means capable of starting execution of at least the second effect.

  With this configuration, the player can change the character (first sub-control unit) when the character selection effect is stopped (without displaying another demonstration screen or setting screen) and the symbol variation display is started. Since it is possible to recognize that the update of the internal selection state of 400 has not been performed, the occurrence of a situation in which a character change (update of the internal selection state of the first sub-control unit 400) is performed before the player notices it. May be reduced.

  Further, the gaming table may be a pachinko machine, and the gaming table may be a slot machine.

  When the predetermined interruption occurs during the effect (character change effect) executed when changing the character, the gaming table of the present embodiment cancels the effect, and in particular during the character change effect. When a predetermined interruption occurs during the character selection effect that is executed after the character is selected and determined, the selection is canceled. In addition, when a predetermined interruption occurs during the character introduction effect that causes the player to recognize a selectable character during the character change effect, the effect may be canceled.

  The predetermined interruption is, for example, the start of symbol variation (special symbol variation), and when the symbol variation starts during the character change effect (particularly the character selection effect after selecting and determining the character), the character change is canceled. . By making it impossible to change the character until the symbol change is completed, there is a case where the game interval can be increased when the character is changed and the gambling can be suppressed.

  Note that “predetermined interrupt” which is a canceling factor for the character selection effect is, for example, a prize for a special figure starting port (for example, the first special figure starting port 230 and / or the second special figure starting port 232), or a random number. Acquisition, command transmission to the first sub control unit 400, command reception of the first sub control unit 400, command analysis of the first sub control unit 400, execution processing of the command (for example, command transmission to the liquid crystal control unit 700) In this case, command reception of the liquid crystal control unit 700, command analysis of the liquid crystal control unit 700, execution processing of the command, and the like are performed (detected).

  Further, as the cause of canceling the character selection effect in the decorative symbol display device 208, predetermined processing in the liquid crystal control unit 700 such as command execution processing in the liquid crystal control unit 700 is included in the predetermined interrupt.

  Further, the internal information update (update of internal selection information) of the first sub control unit 400 is caused by a predetermined process in the first sub control unit 400 such as a command execution process in the first sub control unit 400 described above. Included in interrupt.

  Further, the internal selection state of the first sub-control unit 400 and / or the liquid crystal control unit 700 may change immediately after the character selection determination operation by the determination button 136. For example, if a character change effect is started in a round (for example, 5R) during the jackpot game, and the character is selected and determined (changed from character A to character B) and the character selection effect is being executed, In the 1 sub-control unit 400, the internal selection state is updated to the changed character (character B). Even if an interruption such as a change start occurs during the character selection effect and the character selection effect is canceled, the next round (for example, the sixth round) (because the internal selection state has been updated). Then, the character change may be completed (character B is selected).

  In addition, the character selection effect has a plurality of effect units (an upstream effect unit and a subsequent effect unit), and is canceled by a predetermined interruption during the effect execution of the preceding effect unit, but the effect of the latter effect unit is executed. The predetermined interrupt in the middle may not be canceled. In addition, it may be canceled by a predetermined interrupt during the execution of the production stage of the subsequent stage, not canceled by the predetermined interruption during the execution of the production stage of the preceding stage, Even a predetermined interrupt may be canceled. For example, when the production is the production sound output from the speaker 120, the front stage production unit is an introduction unit, and the rear stage production unit is a loop unit.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the character selection effect is canceled when a predetermined interruption occurs during the character selection effect (during a predetermined effect execution time). A configuration is also included in which the character selection effect (update of the internal selection state) is canceled even when a predetermined interrupt (cancellation factor) occurs just before the end. That is, considering the time required for command transmission / reception between the control units (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700), the character selection effect is generated when a cancel factor occurs during the actual effect execution time + α. This includes cancellations.

  Further, in a configuration in which processing is executed based on a return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 (the control led by the liquid crystal control unit 700 is performed), the first sub-control unit 400 detects the operation of the decision button 136 and the liquid crystal control unit When the liquid crystal command is transmitted to 700 and before the first sub-control unit 400 receives the corresponding return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700, the main control unit 300 starts to change (when a predetermined interrupt occurs) ) May cancel the character selection effect.

  Specific examples when the character selection effect is canceled are listed below. For example, the character (donor) is selected and determined in the previous character change effect, the current character change effect is started from the character (donor), and the player operation (select button 136a, 136b operation) in the current character introduction effect is performed. (爺) is selected, and the character (princess) is selected by the player operation (selection button 136a, 136b operation) in this character introduction effect, and the character (princess) is selected by the player operation (decision button 136). If the production is determined and the production is canceled during execution of the character selection production, the character selection state includes the following states.

(1) The character (princess) selected and determined before the end condition is satisfied (before the canceling factor occurs) becomes the changed selected character.

(2) The character (donor), which is the previous character determined at the start of the character change effect, becomes the changed selected character.

(3) The character (donor), which is the previous character, becomes the changed selected character.

(4) The character (donor) as the default character when there is no player operation is the changed selected character.
(5) No character has been selected.

In the following, we will add that we have explained so far. Note that the following description can be appropriately applied to the game machine described in this specification including the above-described embodiment.
(Appendix)

  The gaming table (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment includes rendering means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) and operation means (for example, a determination button 136) that can accept a selection operation by the player. The stage is a means capable of executing a selection state effect (for example, a character introduction effect) during a selection effect period (for example, a character change effect). The effect means can execute a selection decision effect (for example, a character selection effect) when the selection operation is executed during the execution of the selection state effect. The selection determination effect is an effect indicating one image selected from the plurality of images (hereinafter referred to as “selected image”). If an interrupt condition during the selection decision demonstration execution is met (for example, if the symbol variable display has started) to a means to cancel the selection decision effect, it is the amusement machine according to claim.

  By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make it impossible to change the character until the effect due to the interruption factor is finished, and when changing the character, the game interval is increased to suppress the gambling feeling of the player. May be possible.

  In addition, a storage unit (for example, the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400) capable of storing information on the selected image determined by the selection operation is provided, and the storage unit stores the information in the first case. The storage means is means for not storing the information in the second case, and the first case is a case where a predetermined effect execution time of the selection determination effect has passed, The second case may be a case where the interrupt condition is satisfied while the selection determination effect is being executed. Further, the effect means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) is a means capable of displaying the first display in the first case, and the first display suggests the end of the selection decision effect. It may be a display (for example, a demo screen or a setting screen).

  That is, the first sub-control unit 400 displays another demonstration screen or setting screen when a predetermined period (effect execution time) of the character selection effect has elapsed, and then the first sub-control unit 400. The internal selection state of the first sub-control unit 400 is not updated by canceling the character selection effect when a predetermined interruption occurs during the execution of the character selection effect. And

  By adopting such a configuration, the player is terminated by the passage of an effect period in which the character selection effect is scheduled by displaying another demonstration screen or setting screen, and the character change (first sub-control unit 400). It is possible to recognize that the update of the internal selection state of (1) has been completed. In other words, when the character selection effect is stopped (without displaying another demonstration screen or setting screen) and the symbol variation display or the like is started, the player changes the character (updates the internal selection state of the first sub-control unit 400). Therefore, it may be possible to reduce the occurrence of a situation in which a character change (update of the internal selection state of the first sub-control unit 400) is performed without the player noticing.

  Also, at least one winning opening (for example, the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, etc.) is provided, and the interrupt condition is a condition based on a game ball winning in the winning opening. It is good also as a thing. The game machine may be a pachinko machine or a slot machine.

  By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the character change impossible until the effect of the symbol variation display is finished, and when changing the character, the game interval is increased to suppress the player's joyfulness. May be possible.

  In the following, we will add that we have explained so far. Note that the following description can be appropriately applied to the game machine described in this specification including the above-described embodiment.

(Appendix 1)
Display means;
Operation means;
A game machine equipped with
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a first display,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a second display,
The first display is a display related to the operation means,
The second display is a display related to the hold,
When the first display is in the second state, the visibility is at least lower than that in the first state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 2)
The game machine according to appendix 1,
The second state is a state in which at least a part of the second display overlaps at least a part of the first display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 3)
A game machine according to appendix 1 or 2,
The first state is a state in which the second display does not overlap the first display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 4)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 3,
The first display is a display capable of changing the display mode from the start position to the end position according to the passage of time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 5)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 4,
The game table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a plurality of the second displays.
A game stand characterized by that.

  In the following, we will add that we have explained so far. Note that the following description can be appropriately applied to the game machine described in this specification including the above-described embodiment.

(Appendix 1)
Display means;
Operation means;
A game machine equipped with
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a first display,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a second display,
The first display is a display related to the operation means,
The second display is a display related to the hold,
The second display is a display capable of animation display,
When the first display is in the second state, the visibility is at least lower than that in the first state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 2)
The game machine according to appendix 1,
The second state is a state in which at least a part of the second display overlaps at least a part of the first display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 3)
A game machine according to appendix 1 or 2,
The first state is a state in which the second display does not overlap the first display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 4)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 3,
The first display is a display capable of changing the display mode from the start position to the end position according to the passage of time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 5)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 4,
The game table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a plurality of the second displays.
A game stand characterized by that.

  In the following, we will add that we have explained so far. Note that the following description can be appropriately applied to the game machine described in this specification including the above-described embodiment.

(Appendix 1)
Display means;
Operation means;
A game machine equipped with
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a first display,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a second display,
The first display is a display related to the operation means,
The second display is a display related to the hold,
The second display is a display that can move the display position when there is a change in the number of holds,
When the first display is in the second state, the visibility is at least lower than that in the first state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 2)
The game machine according to appendix 1,
The second state is a state in which at least a part of the second display overlaps at least a part of the first display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 3)
A game machine according to appendix 1 or 2,
The first state is a state in which the second display does not overlap the first display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 4)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 3,
The first display is a display capable of changing the display mode from the start position to the end position according to the passage of time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 5)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 4,
The game table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a plurality of the second displays.
A game stand characterized by that.

  In the following, we will add that we have explained so far. Note that the following description can be appropriately applied to the game machine described in this specification including the above-described embodiment.

(Appendix 1)
Operation means;
Display means;
A game machine equipped with
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of display,
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a first display,
The first display is a display related to the operation means,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least the first display in a first period,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display in a second period when a display condition is established,
The second period is a period longer than the first period,
The display condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the operation means is operated.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 2)
The game machine according to appendix 1,
The first display is a display including at least a meter display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 3)
The game stand according to appendix 2,
The meter display is a display whose display mode can be changed at least according to the passage of time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 4)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 3,
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a second display,
The second display is an effect display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 5)
A game machine as set forth in appendix 4,
The display means is means capable of starting display of at least the second display when the display condition is satisfied.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 5,
The operation means is a means provided at least at a position where the player can operate.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 7)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 6,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 8)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 6,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

  In the following, we will add that we have explained so far. Note that the following description can be appropriately applied to the game machine described in this specification including the above-described embodiment.

(Appendix 1)
Operation means;
Display means;
A game machine equipped with
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a first display in a first display area,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a second display in a second display area,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a third display in a third display area,
The first display is a display related to the operation means,
The second display is a display related to the operation means,
At least a part of the display area of the first display area (hereinafter referred to as “fourth display area”) is a display area that overlaps at least a part of the display area of the third display area,
At least a part of the second display area (hereinafter referred to as “fifth display area”) is a display area that overlaps at least a part of the third display area,
The second display area is a display area larger than the first display area,
The fifth display area is a display area larger than the fourth display area.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 2)
The game machine according to appendix 1,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of display,
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display,
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is the second display,
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is the third display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 3)
A game machine according to appendix 1 or 2,
The display means is means capable of starting display of at least the first display during display of the third display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 4)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 3,
The display means is means capable of starting display of at least the third display during display of the first display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 5)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 4,
The display means is means capable of starting display of at least the second display during display of the third display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 5,
The display means is means capable of starting display of at least the third display during display of the second display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 7)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 6,
When the third display is in the second state, the visibility is at least lower than that in the first state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 8)
The game stand according to appendix 7,
The second state is a state in which at least a part of the first display overlaps at least a part of the third display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 9)
A gaming machine according to appendix 7 or 8, wherein
The first state is a state in which at least a part of the first display does not overlap with at least a part of the third display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 10)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 9,
When the third display is the fourth state, the visibility is at least lower than that of the third state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 11)
The gaming machine according to appendix 10, wherein
The fourth state is a state in which at least a part of the second display overlaps at least a part of the third display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 12)
The game table according to appendix 10 or 11,
The third state is a state in which at least a part of the second display does not overlap with at least a part of the third display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 13)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 10 to 12,
When the third display is the fourth state, the visibility is at least lower than that of the second state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 14)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 13,
The first display is a display including at least a meter display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 15)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 14,
The game table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

  In the following, we will add that we have explained so far. Note that the following description can be appropriately applied to the game machine described in this specification including the above-described embodiment.

(Appendix 1)
Operation means;
Display means;
A game machine equipped with
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a first display in a first display area,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a second display in a second display area,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a third display in a third display area,
The first display is a display related to the operation means,
The second display is an effect display,
The third display is a symbol display,
At least a part of the display area of the second display area is a display area overlapping with at least a part of the display area of the first display area;
At least a part of the display area of the third display area is a display area that overlaps at least a part of the display area of the first display area.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 2)
The game machine according to appendix 1,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of display,
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display,
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is the second display,
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is the third display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 3)
A game machine according to appendix 1 or 2,
The display means is means capable of starting display of at least the second display during display of the first display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 4)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 3,
The display means is means capable of starting display of at least the first display during display of the second display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 5)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 4,
The display means is means capable of starting display of at least the first display during display of the third display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 5,
The display means is means capable of starting display of at least the third display during display of the first display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 7)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 6,
When the first display is in the second state, the visibility is at least lower than that in the first state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 8)
The game stand according to appendix 7,
The second state is a state in which at least a part of the second display overlaps at least a part of the first display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 9)
A gaming machine according to appendix 7 or 8, wherein
The first state is a state in which at least a part of the second display does not overlap with at least a part of the first display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 10)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 9,
When the third display is the fourth state, the visibility is at least lower than that of the third state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 11)
The gaming machine according to appendix 10, wherein
The fourth state is a state in which at least a part of the first display overlaps at least a part of the third display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 12)
The game table according to appendix 10 or 11,
The third state is a state in which at least a part of the first display does not overlap with at least a part of the third display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 13)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 12,
The first display is a display including at least a meter display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 14)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 13,
The game table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

  In the following, we will add that we have explained so far. Note that the following description can be appropriately applied to the game machine described in this specification including the above-described embodiment.

(Appendix 1)
Operation means;
Display means;
A game machine equipped with
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of display,
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a first display,
The first display is a display related to the operation means,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least the first display in the first mode,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least the first display in the second mode,
The first mode is a mode in which the operation means is not automatically operated,
The second mode is a mode in which the operation means is automatically operated.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 2)
The game machine according to appendix 1,
The first display is a display including at least a display prompting the player to operate the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 3)
A game machine according to appendix 1 or 2,
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a second display,
The second display is an effect display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 4)
A game machine as set forth in appendix 3,
The display means is means for starting display of at least the second display when a display condition is satisfied.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 5)
A game machine as set forth in appendix 4,
The display condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the operation means is operated in the first mode,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 6)
A gaming machine according to appendix 4 or 5, wherein
The display condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the operation means is not operated in the second mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 7)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 4 to 6,
The display condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the operation means is operated in the second mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 8)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 7,
The operation means is a means provided at least at a position where the player can operate.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 9)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 8,
The game table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

  In the following, we will add that we have explained so far. Note that the following description can be appropriately applied to the game machine described in this specification including the above-described embodiment.

(Appendix 1)
When the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the second advantage that is higher than the first advantage from the first control state where the advantage to the player is the first advantage. Control state transition means for shifting the control state to the control state;
Effect display means for displaying an effect image for producing a game;
Storage means for storing specific image information capable of specifying an image selected by a player from a plurality of images during a predetermined image selection effect period;
Effect control means for causing the effect display means to display an image specified by the specific image information stored in the storage means;
An operation receiving unit for receiving a selection operation by a player,
The image selection effect period includes a predetermined first period and a predetermined second period started after the start of the first period,
The production control means includes
Based on the selection operation by the player received by the operation reception unit during the second period, the specific image information for specifying the image to be displayed on the effect display means is stored in the storage means,
If the predetermined condition for ending the image selection effect period is satisfied before the predetermined condition for starting the second period is satisfied, the predetermined image is selected from the plurality of images on behalf of the player. The image is selected and the predetermined image is displayed on the effect display means.
Amusement stand.

(Appendix 2)
The production control means includes
The selection operation by the player accepted by the operation accepting unit during the first period is ignored,
The game table according to appendix 1.

(Appendix 3)
A variable winning opening that can change the open / closed state from one of a predetermined closed state and a predetermined open state in which a game ball is easier to win than the closed state;
The second control state is:
A control state in which a round operation for changing the open / close state of the variable prize opening a predetermined number of times from the closed state to the open state is performed a predetermined number of times;
The first control state is:
The control state in which the round operation is not performed,
The end condition of the image selection production period is
It is established when the number of game balls won in the variable winning opening after starting a specific round operation in the second control state is equal to or more than a specific number,
The game table according to appendix 1 or 2.

(Appendix 4)
A launcher that launches a game ball at every elapse of a predetermined launch period based on the player's operation;
A game area in which the game ball launched by the launching device is caused to flow down and the variable winning opening is provided, and
The first period is:
The period is shorter than a period necessary for firing a specific number of the game balls,
The game table as set forth in Appendix 3.

(Appendix 5)
A plurality of the variable prize openings;
A game nail that changes the direction of the fall of the game ball,
An entry area for the game ball launched by the launch device to enter, and the game area,
The plurality of variable prize winning openings are:
Including a first variable winning opening and a second variable winning opening;
The game nail is
Due to the number of game nails that the game balls that have entered from the entry area may contact before reaching the second variable prize opening, the game balls that have entered from the entry area enter the first variable prize opening. It is arranged so that the number of game nails that can come into contact before reaching it is increased,
The specific round action is
In the second control state, it is a round operation that changes the open / closed state of the first variable prize opening a predetermined number of times,
The game table according to appendix 3 or 4.

  In the following, we will add that we have explained so far. Note that the following description can be appropriately applied to the game machine described in this specification including the above-described embodiment.

(Appendix 1)
Display means capable of at least displaying images;
Control means capable of at least executing control of the display means;
Storage means capable of storing information;
Operation means that can be operated by the player;
A game machine equipped with
The display means is capable of executing at least a selection effect,
The display means is capable of displaying a first selection state image during the selection effect,
The display means is capable of displaying a second selection state image during the selection effect,
The display means is capable of displaying a third selection state image during the selection effect,
The display means is capable of displaying a first selection change animation during the selection effect,
The display means is capable of displaying a second selection change animation during the selection effect,
The first selection state image at least indicates that the selection image is a first image;
The second selection state image at least indicates that the selection image is a second image,
The third selection state image at least indicates that the selection image is a third image;
The first selection change animation indicates at least a mode in which the selected image is changed from the first image to the second image;
The second selection change animation shows at least a mode in which the selected image is changed from the second image to the third image,
The selected image is an image in a selected state;
The control means is capable of at least performing control for accepting a selection operation,
The selection operation indicates an operation performed by the player using the operation means,
The control means is capable of executing at least a first control when receiving the selection operation during a first period;
The display means is capable of displaying the first selection state image during the first period,
The first control is a control for displaying the second selection state image on the display means after the first selection change animation.
The control means is capable of executing at least a second control when the selection operation is received during a second period;
The display means is capable of displaying the first selection change animation during the second period,
The second control is a control for stopping the display of the first selection change animation and causing the display means to display the third selection state image after the second selection change animation.
The storage means is capable of storing first information when the selection operation is accepted by the control means during the selection effect,
The storage means is capable of storing second information when the selection operation is not accepted by the control means during the selection effect,
The first information is information corresponding to the selected image,
The second information is information corresponding to any one of a plurality of images that can be selected by the player during the selection effect.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 2)
The game machine according to appendix 1,
The second control stops the display of the first selection change animation, does not display the second selection state image, and displays the third selection state image after the second selection change animation. Control for displaying on the display means;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 3)
A game machine according to appendix 1 or 2,
When the transition condition is satisfied, the control state transition means capable of shifting the control state to any one of a plurality of control states including at least the first control state and the second control state,
In the first control state, the player's advantage is the first advantage,
In the second control state, the advantage for the player is the second advantage,
The second advantage is higher than the first advantage;
A variable winning opening that can change the state from one of the first state and the second state to the other,
The second state is a game ball winning easier than the first state,
The second control state is a control state capable of executing at least a round operation in which the variable prize opening is at least the second state,
The first control state is a control state in which the round operation is not executed,
Satisfaction of the termination condition of the selection effect period includes at least a case where a specific number of game balls have been won in the variable winning opening after starting a specific round operation in the second control state,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 4)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 3,
The second information is information corresponding to the selected image.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 5)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 3,
The second information is information stored in the storage means in the previous selection effect,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 6)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 5,
The number of selection state images that can be displayed during the selection effect is 4 or more.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 7)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 6,
The number of selection change animations that can be displayed during the selection effect is 3 or more.
A game stand characterized by that.

  In the following, we will add that we have explained so far. Note that the following description can be appropriately applied to the game machine described in this specification including the above-described embodiment.

(Appendix 1)
When the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the second advantage that is higher than the first advantage from the first control state where the advantage to the player is the first advantage. Control state transition means for shifting the control state to the control state;
Effect display means for displaying an effect image for producing a game;
Storage means for storing specific image information capable of specifying an image selected by a player from a plurality of images during a predetermined image selection effect period;
Effect control means for causing the effect display means to display an image specified by the specific image information stored in the storage means;
An operation receiving unit for receiving a selection operation by a player,
During the image selection effect period, a selection state image indicating that a predetermined image among the plurality of images is in a selected state is displayed on the effect display means,
When the operation accepting unit accepts a selection operation by a player when the selected state image indicates that the predetermined image is in a selected state, a predetermined selection change animation is displayed on the effect display unit, and then Displaying the selected state image indicating that an image different from the predetermined image among the plurality of images is in a selected state on the effect display unit;
It is configured to store the specific image information capable of specifying an image in a selected state when a predetermined confirmation condition is satisfied, in the storage unit,
When the selection display image indicating that a specific image is in a selection state after the selection change animation is displayed on the effect display unit based on the selection operation by the player being received by the operation reception unit, When the operation accepting unit accepts a selection operation by the player during the selection change animation, the selection display image indicating that an image different from the specific image is in the selection state after the selection change animation is displayed on the effect display means. It is characterized by displaying,
Amusement stand.

(Appendix 2)
The selection change based on the fact that the operation reception unit has received a selection operation by a player when the selection state image indicating that the predetermined pre-change image is in the selection state is displayed on the effect display means. It is configured to display the selected state image indicating that the image after the predetermined change is in the selected state after displaying the animation on the effect display means,
The selection change animation includes the changed image,
When the operation receiving unit receives a selection operation by a player during the selection change animation, the image after the change in the selection change animation is shown as being selected by the selection state image after the animation. It is characterized by being replaced with
The game table according to appendix 1.

(Appendix 3)
A variable winning opening that can change the open / closed state from one of a predetermined closed state and a predetermined open state in which a game ball is easier to win than the closed state;
The second control state is:
A control state in which a round operation for changing the open / close state of the variable prize opening a predetermined number of times from the closed state to the open state is performed a predetermined number of times;
The first control state is:
The control state in which the round operation is not performed,
The end condition of the image selection production period is
It is established when the number of game balls won in the variable winning opening after starting a specific round operation in the second control state is equal to or more than a specific number,
The game table according to appendix 1 or 2.

(Appendix 4)
A launcher that launches a game ball at every elapse of a predetermined launch period based on the player's operation;
A game area in which the game ball launched by the launching device is caused to flow down and the variable winning opening is provided, and
The playback time of the selection change animation is:
It is a period longer than the firing period,
The game table as set forth in Appendix 3.

(Appendix 5)
The image selection effect period is
Including a first period and a second period starting after the first period;
During the first period, the selection operation during the selection change animation is ignored,
During the second period, based on the selection operation during the selection change animation, an image that is indicated as being in a selection state by the selection state image is changed,
The game table according to any one of appendices 1 to 4.

  In the following, we will add that we have explained so far. Note that the following description can be appropriately applied to the game machine described in this specification including the above-described embodiment.

(Appendix 1)
Display means capable of at least displaying images;
Control means capable of at least executing control of the display means;
Storage means capable of storing information;
Operation means that can be operated by the player;
A game machine equipped with
The storage means is capable of storing information that can identify an image in a selected state when a definite condition is established,
The display means is capable of executing at least a selection effect,
The display means is capable of displaying at least a first selection state image indicating that the first image is in a selection state,
The display means can display at least a second selection state image indicating that the second image is in a selection state,
The display means is capable of displaying at least a third selection state image indicating that the third image is in a selection state,
The display means is capable of displaying at least a first selection change animation for changing a selection state from the first image to the second image,
The display means can display at least a second selection change animation for changing a selection state from the second image to the third image,
The display means is capable of displaying the first selection state image during execution of the selection effect,
The display means displays the second selection state image after displaying the first selection change animation when the operation means accepts a selection operation by a player while displaying the first selection state image. Can be displayed,
The display means stops the display of the first selection change animation and displays the second selection change when the operation means accepts a selection operation by a player while the first selection change animation is being displayed. The third selection state image can be displayed after displaying the animation.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 2)
The game machine according to appendix 1,
The display means stops the display of the first selection change animation when the operation means accepts a selection operation by a player while the first selection change animation is being displayed, and the second selection state. The third selection state image can be displayed after displaying the second selection change animation without displaying an image.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 3)
A game machine according to appendix 1 or 2,
When the transition condition is satisfied, the first control state in which the advantage to the player is the first advantage and the second advantage that is higher than the first advantage Control state transition means capable of shifting the control state to any one of a plurality of control states including the control state;
A variable winning opening that can change the state from one of the first state and the second state in which a game ball is easier to win than the first state,
The second control state is a control state capable of executing at least a round operation in which the variable prize opening is at least the second state,
The first control state is a control state in which the round operation is not executed,
Satisfaction of the termination condition of the selection effect period includes at least a case where a specific number of game balls have been won in the variable winning opening after starting a specific round operation in the second control state,
A game stand characterized by that.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a pachinko machine. For example, a plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols, a start lever for instructing rotation of the reels, and each reel. , A stop button for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, lottery means for determining whether or not an internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is won by lottery, and reel rotation based on the lottery result of the lottery means Whether the symbol combination displayed by the reel stop control means for performing stop control related to the stop of the reel and the reels stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means is a symbol combination determined in advance corresponding to the winning combination internally A determination means for determining whether or not the symbol stop mode is a predetermined winning mode, and a payout control unit that performs a game medium payout process for paying out a game medium corresponding to the predetermined winning mode; It is also suitable, such as a slot machine equipped.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention can be applied to an enclosed gaming machine. Here, the “enclosed game machine” is one that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in the game machine. In addition, the main control unit, the first sub control unit, and the second sub control unit may be configured as a single chip, or the main control unit and the first sub control unit may be configured to allow bidirectional communication. Good. Moreover, while enabling bidirectional communication between the main control unit and the first sub control unit, communication from the first sub control unit to the second sub control unit may be one-way communication.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention only list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. In addition, in some cases, the content described in one configuration among a plurality of configurations described in the embodiments may be applied to other configurations to further widen the game.

  The game machine according to the present invention can be applied to a game machine represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), a revolving game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine.

Claims (7)

Directing means;
Production control means capable of controlling the production means;
A gaming table with a,
The effect means is means having a first structure,
The effect means is means having a second structure,
The effect means is means having a third structure,
The effect means is means having a fourth structure,
The fourth structure is a structure having a light emitting means,
The fourth structure is a structure that is movable in the vertical direction by driving the effect control means,
The first structure is a structure that can be rotated from the first position to the fourth position with the fourth structure as a fulcrum by driving the production control means ,
Said 1st position is a position where said 1st structure is located ahead rather than said 2nd structure,
The fourth position is a position where the first structure is located behind the second structure,
The second structure is a structure that can move from a second position to a fifth position by rotation of the first structure ,
The second position is a position where the second structure is located behind the first structure,
The fifth position is a position where the second structure is positioned forward of the first structure,
The third structure is a structure that is movable from a third position to a sixth position by rotation of the first structure ,
The third position is a position where the third structure is located behind the first structure,
The sixth position is a position where the third structure is located forward of the first structure,
The sixth position is a position where the third structure covers a part of the light emitting means from the front,
The effect means is means that can move in the vertical direction without changing the relative position of the second structure with respect to the first structure.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1,
The effect means is means capable of changing the number of the light emitting means covered by the third structure.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1 or 2,
It said first position, said first structure is at least partially covers the front of the front Stories second structure,
The fifth position, the second structure is a position covering from the front at least part of the pre-Symbol first structure,
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 3 , Comprising:
A display means,
The effect means is means capable of moving to a position covering at least a part of the display means from the front.
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to claim 4 ,
The first structure is a structure that is rotatable about an axis parallel to the display means.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claim 1 thru | or 5 , Comprising:
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claim 1 thru | or 5 , Comprising:
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.